1 在这里,先看概说部分:“在耳专注中的慧,就是闻所成智。”这里“sota”这个词有多种不同的含义。正如这样——巴利
1. Tattha uddese tāva sotāvadhāne paññā sutamaye ñāṇanti ettha sotasaddo anekatthappabhedo. Tathā hesa –
在肉、识、智中可见,在渴爱等法中也可见;
在水流、圣道以及心相续中。巴利
Maṃsaviññāṇañāṇesu, taṇhādīsu ca dissati; Dhārāyaṃ ariyamagge, cittasantatiyampi ca.
在“耳处、耳界、耳根”等表述中,这里的“耳”一词指的是肉耳。在“以耳闻声”等表述中,指的是耳识。在“以天耳界”等表述中,指的是智耳。在“世间有哪些流——即我所宣说、开示、阐明、教导、建立、开显、分别、令彰显、令明彻的那些流,就是:渴爱流、邪见流、烦恼流、恶行流、无明流”等表述中,指的是渴爱等五种法。在“世尊看见一根大木块被恒河的水流冲走”等表述中,指的是水流。在“贤友,这八支圣道就叫做流”等表述中,指的是圣道。在“他了知人的识流,在此世与他世都不断绝,既安立于此世,又安立于他世”等表述中,指的是心相续。
但在这里,应当理解为肉耳。以这肉耳为因,或以它为工具,使所闻被注意、被确立、被获得,所以叫“耳专注”。那是什么?就是“所闻”。而“所闻”,正如“多闻、持法者、闻法积集”等表述中那样,是指通过耳门随闻而了知、把握的法类,这里就把它称为“耳专注”。在名为耳专注的所闻上生起的慧,就是“耳专注的慧”。所谓慧,是以令各种义理显现这种“令知”之义为慧,也是以各种无常等行相来了知诸法,所以叫慧。巴利
‘‘Sotāyatanaṃ sotadhātu sotindriya’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 157) hi ayaṃ sotasaddo maṃsasote dissati. ‘‘Sotena saddaṃ sutvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.295) sotaviññāṇe. ‘‘Dibbāya sotadhātuyā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.356) ñāṇasote. ‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasminti yāni etāni sotāni mayā kittitāni pakittitāni ācikkhitāni desitāni paññapitāni paṭṭhapitāni vivaritāni vibhattāni uttānīkatāni pakāsitāni. Seyyathidaṃ – taṇhāsoto diṭṭhisoto kilesasoto duccaritasoto avijjāsoto’’tiādīsu (cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 4) taṇhādīsu pañcasu dhammesu. ‘‘Addasā kho bhagavā mahantaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ gaṅgāya nadiyā sotena vuyhamāna’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.241) udakadhārāyaṃ. ‘‘Ariyassetaṃ, āvuso, aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa adhivacanaṃ, yadidaṃ soto’’tiādīsu ariyamagge. ‘‘Purisassa ca viññāṇasotaṃ pajānāti ubhayato abbocchinnaṃ idha loke patiṭṭhitañca paraloke patiṭṭhitañcā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.149) cittasantatiyaṃ . Idha panāyaṃ maṃsasote daṭṭhabbo. Tena sotena hetubhūtena, karaṇabhūtena vā avadhīyati avatthāpīyati appīyatīti sotāvadhānaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Sutaṃ. Sutañca nāma ‘‘bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.339) viya sotadvārānusārena viññātaṃ avadhāritaṃ dhammajātaṃ, taṃ idha sotāvadhānanti vuttaṃ. Tasmiṃ sotāvadhānasaṅkhāte sute pavattā paññā sotāvadhāne paññā. Paññāti ca tassa tassa atthassa pākaṭakaraṇasaṅkhātena paññāpanaṭṭhena paññā, tena tena vā aniccādinā pakārena dhamme jānātītipi paññā.
在“闻所成智”这个说法里,“suta”(闻)这个词,既可以带前缀,也可以不带前缀。巴利
Sutamayeñāṇanti ettha sutasaddo tāva saupasaggo anupasaggo ca –
在“行走”“闻名”“湿润”“努力”“积聚”这些意思上,也都能见到它。
在“声音”和“经由耳门所了知”这两种意义上,也能看到这个词。巴利
Gamane vissute tintenuyogopacitepi ca; Sadde ca sotadvārānusārañāte ca dissati.
同样地,在“senāya pasuto”(专注于军队)这类说法里,意思是“前往”。在“sutadhammassa passato”(闻法而见者)这类说法里(《优陀那》11;《大品》5),意思是“广闻之法”。在“avassutā avassutassa purisapuggalassa”(漏泄者对漏泄之人)这类说法里(《波逸提》657),意思是“被浸湿者对被浸湿者”。在“ye jhānapasutā dhīrā”(专注禅那的智者)这类说法里(《法句经》181),意思是“投入于”。在“tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappakaṃ”(你们所积的福德不少)这类说法里(《小诵》7.12;《饿鬼事》25),意思是“积累”。在“diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ”(所见、所闻、所觉、所识)这类说法里(《中部》1.241),意思是“声音”。在“bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo”(他多闻、持闻、积集闻)这类说法里(《中部》1.339),意思是“经由耳门随从而了知并持守”。但在这里,它的意思是“经由耳门随从而了知、并加以把握”。所谓“闻所成智”,是指那最初以及随后一再生起的慧,它以这所闻、所知、所把握的正法为所缘而生起,这就叫作“闻所成智”,意思是“由闻而成的智”。“sutamaye”这个词是主格(第一格)用法,就像“na hevaṃ vattabbe”(不该这样说)中的用法,又如“vanappagumbe yathā phussitagge”(如林中开花之树梢)中的用法。在“natthi attakāre natthi parakāre natthi purisakāre”(没有自作、没有他作、没有士夫作)这类说法里(《长部》1.168),也是主格用法,这里也应同样理解。因此说:“意思是闻所成智。”巴利
Tathā hissa ‘‘senāya pasuto’’tiādīsu gacchantoti attho. ‘‘Sutadhammassa passato’’tiādīsu (udā. 11; mahāva. 5) vissutadhammassāti attho. ‘‘Avassutā avassutassa purisapuggalassā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 657) tintā tintassāti attho. ‘‘Ye jhānapasutā dhīrā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 181) anuyuttāti attho. ‘‘Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappaka’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 7.12; pe. va. 25) upacitanti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññāta’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.241) saddoti attho. ‘‘Bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.339) sotadvārānusāraviññātadharoti attho. Idha panassa sotadvārānusārena viññātaṃ upadhāritanti attho. Sutamaye ñāṇanti yā esā etaṃ sutaṃ viññātaṃ avadhāritaṃ saddhammaṃ ārabbha ārammaṇaṃ katvā sabbapaṭhamañca aparāparañca pavattā paññā, taṃ ‘‘sutamaye ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ hoti, sutamayaṃ ñāṇanti attho. Sutamayeti ca paccattavacanametaṃ, yathā ‘‘na hevaṃ vattabbe’’ (kathā. 1, 15-18). ‘‘Vanappagumbe yathā phussitagge’’ (khu. pā. 6.13; su. ni. 236). ‘‘Natthi attakāre natthi parakāre natthi purisakāre’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.168) paccattavacanaṃ, evamidhāpi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sutamayaṃ ñāṇanti attho’’ti.
或者,由听闻而积累起来的、以触等为首的法聚就是“闻所成”;在那个闻所成的法聚中运作、与它相应的智,就是“闻所成智”。因为它是依自相或共相来了知诸法,所以叫“智”。应当知道:这同一个智,先用同义词不加限定地说成“慧”,是为了通过近似的说法表明它的意趣;之后才限定为本来要说的“智”。这个智以通达自性为特相,或者以无偏差地通达为特相,就像善射者的箭迅速无碍地射中目标一样;它以照亮所缘为作用,就像灯一样;它以不迷乱为现起,就像在森林中带路的向导一样。依据“入定的比丘能如实了知”这句话,它的近因是定。关于特相等,应当知道:自性或共相叫特相,作用或成就叫味,现起的方式或果叫现起,直接的原因叫足处。巴利
Atha vā sutena pakato phassādiko dhammapuñjo sutamayo, tasmiṃ sutamaye dhammapuñje pavattaṃ taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ sutamaye ñāṇaṃ. Sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇavasena dhamme jānātīti ñāṇaṃ. Taṃyeva ñāṇaṃ pariyāyavacanena adhippāyapakāsanatthaṃ aniyamena ‘‘paññā’’ti vatvā pacchā adhippetaṃ ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti niyametvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ñāṇañca nāma sabhāvapaṭivedhalakkhaṇaṃ, akkhalitapaṭivedhalakkhaṇaṃ vā kusalissāsakhittausupaṭivedho viya, visayobhāsanarasaṃ padīpo viya, asammohapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ araññagatasudesako viya. ‘‘Samāhito, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1071) vacanato samādhipadaṭṭhānaṃ. Lakkhaṇādīsu hi sabhāvo vā sāmaññaṃ vā lakkhaṇaṃ nāma, kiccaṃ vā sampatti vā raso nāma, upaṭṭhānākāro vā phalaṃ vā paccupaṭṭhānaṃ nāma, āsannakāraṇaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ.
2 听闻之后,在防护中产生的慧——巴利
2. Sutvāna saṃvare paññāti –
波罗提木叉具足正念,智慧具足忍耐,同样也是如此;
精进等这五种法,被宣说为防护。巴利
Pātimokkho satī ceva, ñāṇaṃ khanti tatheva ca; Vīriyaṃ pañcime dhammā, saṃvarāti pakāsitā.
“他具备、完全具备、达到、完全达到、拥有、圆满、具足这样的巴帝摩卡防护”(《分别论》511),即巴帝摩卡防护。又如“以眼观色之后,不执取整体相,不执取细节相;如果因为不守护眼根而住,贪忧和恶不善法就会不断侵袭,为了防护它们而修行,守护眼根,在眼根上做到防护”(《长部》1.213等),按照这种方式所说的,即念的防护。巴利
‘‘Iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto upāgato samupāgato upapanno sampanno samannāgato’’ti (vibha. 511) āgato pātimokkhasaṃvaro. ‘‘Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutaṃ viharantaṃ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṃ, tassa saṃvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.213; ma. ni. 1.295; saṃ. ni. 4.239; a. ni. 3.16) nayena āgato satisaṃvaro.
在世间,那些流——阿耆多啊!世尊说——
正念就是它们的防护。
我说,对诸流要守护;这些流要靠智慧来关闭。巴利
‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasmiṃ (ajitāti bhagavā), Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ; Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti . (cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 60; su. ni. 1041) –
智防护已经到来。这里说的“智防护”,也包括依“诸比丘,哪些漏应当通过受用来断除?在这里,诸比丘,比丘经过如理思择后受用袈裟……”(《中部》1.23;《增支部》6.58)这种方式说到的资具受用防护,而它同样归在智防护里。“他能忍受寒冷、炎热、饥饿、口渴,能忍受蚊虻、风吹、日晒、爬虫的接触,能忍受难听的话、恶言恶语;对于已经生起的、身体上的苦受——猛烈、粗重、尖锐、难忍、不可意、不悦意、甚至夺命的——他都具备堪忍的能力”(《中部》1.24;《增支部》4.114;6.58),这样说到的就是堪忍防护。“对于已经生起的欲寻,他不忍受,而是舍断、驱除、消灭它,使它不复存在”(《中部》1.26;《增支部》4.114;6.58),这样说到的是精进防护。“在这里,圣弟子舍离邪命,以正命维持生活”(《相应部》5.8),这样说到的是活命清净防护,而它同样归在精进防护里。在这七种防护中,此处特别提到四种:别解脱防护、根防护、活命清净防护、资具受用防护;其中特别是指别解脱防护。而且,这一切防护,都是因为各自防护应当防护的身恶行等,所以称为防护。在闻所成智中,听闻所说的法之后,进行防护、作防护时,在该防护中生起的、与它相应的慧,就称为“闻已防护之慧”。或者,由于“闻”这个词可以表示原因,所以也可以理解为以闻为因的防护之慧。巴利
Āgato ñāṇasaṃvaro. ‘‘Katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā paṭisevanā pahātabbā? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvaraṃ paṭisevatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58) nayena āgato paccayapaṭisevanāsaṃvaro, sopi ñāṇasaṃvareneva saṅgahito. ‘‘Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassa jighacchāya pipāsāya ḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarisapasamphassānaṃ duruttānaṃ durāgatānaṃ vacanapathānaṃ uppannānaṃ sārīrikānaṃ vedanānaṃ dukkhānaṃ tibbānaṃ kharānaṃ kaṭukānaṃ asātānaṃ amanāpānaṃ pāṇaharānaṃ adhivāsakajātiko hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.24; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) āgato khantisaṃvaro. ‘‘Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti byantīkaroti anabhāvaṃ gametī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) nayena āgato vīriyasaṃvaro. ‘‘Idha ariyasāvako micchāājīvaṃ pahāya sammāājīvena jīvikaṃ kappetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.8) āgato ājīvapārisuddhisaṃvaro, sopi vīriyasaṃvareneva saṅgahito. Tesu sattasu saṃvaresu pātimokkhasaṃvaraindriyasaṃvaraājīvapārisuddhipaccayapaṭisevanasaṅkhātā cattāro saṃvarā idhādhippetā, tesu ca visesena pātimokkhasaṃvaro. Sabbopi cāyaṃ saṃvaro yathāsakaṃ saṃvaritabbānaṃ kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇato saṃvaroti vuccati. Sutamayañāṇe vuttaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā saṃvarantassa saṃvaraṃ karontassa tasmiṃ saṃvare pavattā taṃsampayuttā paññā ‘‘sutvāna saṃvare paññā’’ti vuttā. Atha vā hetuatthe sutvāti vacanassa sambhavato sutahetunā saṃvare paññātipi attho.
在“戒所成智”这一说法里,“戒”是以“戒行”的意义而称为戒。什么是戒行呢?就是摄持,也就是以身业等由善戒而不散乱,这是它的意思。或者是持守,也就是作为诸善法的依止和支撑,这是它的意思。精通字相的人确实认可这里有两层含义。另一些论师则解释说:“因为增上受持的意义、行持的意义、常行此的意义、头的意义、清凉的意义、安稳的意义,所以称为戒。”巴利
Sīlamaye ñāṇanti ettha sīlanti sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Kimidaṃ sīlanaṃ nāma? Samādhānaṃ vā, kāyakammādīnaṃ susīlyavasena avippakiṇṇatāti attho. Upadhāraṇaṃ vā, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ patiṭṭhāvasena ādhārabhāvoti attho. Etadeva hi ettha atthadvayaṃ saddalakkhaṇavidū anujānanti. Aññe pana ‘‘adhisevanaṭṭhena ācāraṭṭhena tassīlaṭṭhena siraṭṭhena sītalaṭṭhena sivaṭṭhena sīla’’nti vaṇṇayanti.
戒行是它的特征,即使它被分成许多种。
正如色的可见性,被分成许多种。巴利
Sīlanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ tassa, bhinnassāpi anekadhā; Sanidassanattaṃ rūpassa, yathā bhinnassa nekadhā.
就像色处虽然按青、黄等类别分成许多种,但因为都没有超出可见性,所以可见性就是它的特相;同样,戒虽然按思等类别分成许多种,但这里所说的“戒行”——也就是以身业等的摄持和善法的安立来说的——正是它的特相,因为即使按思等类别区分,也都没有超出摄持与安立的状态。对于具有这样特相的它——巴利
Yathā hi nīlapītādibhedena anekadhā bhinnassāpi rūpāyatanassa sanidassanattaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ nīlādibhedena bhinnassāpi sanidassanabhāvānatikkamanato, tathā sīlassa cetanādibhedena anekadhā bhinnassāpi yadetaṃ kāyakammādīnaṃ samādhānavasena kusalānañca dhammānaṃ patiṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ sīlanaṃ, tadeva lakkhaṇaṃ cetanādibhedena bhinnassāpi samādhānapatiṭṭhānabhāvānatikkamanato. Evaṃlakkhaṇassa panassa –
能摧毁恶戒,同样也具有无过失的功德;
以作用的成就为义,就叫做“味”。巴利
‘‘Dussīlyaviddhaṃsanatā, anavajjaguṇo tathā; Kiccasampatti atthena, raso nāma pavuccati’’.
因此,这个名为“戒”的东西,从作用的角度说,它的味是摧毁破戒;从成就的角度说,它的味是无过失。应当这样理解。巴利
Tasmā idaṃ sīlaṃ nāma kiccaṭṭhena rasena dussīlyaviddhaṃsanarasaṃ, sampattiatthena rasena anavajjarasanti veditabbaṃ.
以清净为表现,这一点被智者所了知。
惭和愧这两者,被称赞为近因。巴利
Soceyyapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, tayidaṃ tassa viññuhi; Ottappañca hirī ceva, padaṭṭhānanti vaṇṇitaṃ. –
这个戒以“身清净、语清净、意清净”(《如是语》66)所说的清净为表现方式,它以清净的状态呈现出来,并被这样把握。而惭与愧,被智者说成是它的近因,意思是直接的缘由。因为只要有惭有愧,戒就会生起并持续存在;没有惭与愧,戒就既不会生起也不会持续。与这样的戒俱行、与它相应的智,就是戒所成智。或者说,戒本身已经造作,就是戒所成;在那个戒所成当中与它相应的智,就是戒所成智。对不防护的过患的审察、对防护的功德的审察、对防护清净的审察、以及对防护的杂染与清净的审察,也都包括在戒所成智里面。巴利
Tayidaṃ sīlaṃ ‘‘kāyasoceyyaṃ vacīsoceyyaṃ manosoceyya’’nti (itivu. 66) evaṃ vuttasoceyyapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, sucibhāvena paccupaṭṭhāti gahaṇabhāvaṃ gacchati. Hirottappañca pana tassa viññūhi padaṭṭhānanti vaṇṇitaṃ, āsannakāraṇanti attho. Hirottappe hi sati sīlaṃ uppajjati ceva tiṭṭhati ca, asati neva uppajjati na tiṭṭhatīti evaṃvidhena sīlena sahagataṃ taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ sīlamaye ñāṇaṃ. Atha vā sīlameva pakataṃ sīlamayaṃ, tasmiṃ sīlamaye taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Asaṃvare ādīnavapaccavekkhaṇā ca, saṃvare ānisaṃsapaccavekkhaṇā ca, saṃvarapārisuddhipaccavekkhaṇā ca, saṃvarasaṃkilesavodānapaccavekkhaṇā ca sīlamayañāṇeneva saṅgahitā.
3 第三,关于“防护之后,在令心等持之中的慧”:这是指依照戒所成智里所说的戒防护而防护、做成防护之后,立足于戒,令心等持的人,以近行定和安止定使心达到一境性;在那种令心等持的状态中现起的、与它相应的慧,就是这里所说的慧。而“平等、正确地安放和确立”,就叫作令心等持,这也是“定”的同义说法。巴利
3.Saṃvaritvā samādahane paññāti sīlamayañāṇe vuttasīlasaṃvarena saṃvaritvā saṃvaraṃ katvā sīle patiṭṭhāya samādahantassa upacārappanāvasena cittekaggataṃ karontassa tasmiṃ samādahane pavattā taṃsampayuttā paññā. Samaṃ sammā ca ādahanaṃ ṭhapananti ca samādahanaṃ, samādhissevetaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ.
“定修所成智”中的“定”,指的是善心的一境性。为什么叫“定”呢?因为它是等持的意思。什么是等持呢?就是心与心所在同一个所缘上平等、正确地安放、稳固安住,这就叫做等持。因此,依靠某种法的力量,心与心所在同一个所缘上平等、正确地不散乱、不分散而安住,这就应当理解为等持。而对于这种定——巴利
Samādhibhāvanāmaye ñāṇanti ettha kusalacittekaggatā samādhi. Kenaṭṭhena samādhi? Samādhānaṭṭhena samādhi. Kimidaṃ samādhānaṃ nāma? Ekārammaṇe cittacetasikānaṃ samaṃ sammā ca ādhānaṃ, ṭhapananti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā yassa dhammassānubhāvena ekārammaṇe cittacetasikā samaṃ sammā ca avikkhipamānā avippakiṇṇā ca hutvā tiṭṭhanti, idaṃ samādhānanti veditabbaṃ. Tassa kho pana samādhissa –
它的特相是不散乱,作用是摧毁散乱。
现起为不动摇,而近因则是乐。巴利
Lakkhaṇaṃ tu avikkhepo, vikkhepaviddhaṃsanaṃ raso; Akampanamupaṭṭhānaṃ, padaṭṭhānaṃ sukhaṃ pana.
“修习”的意思是让它增长、培育。定本身就是修习,所以叫“定修习”;或者,对定的修习、增长,叫“定修习”。用“定修习”这个说法,是为了排除其他的修习。就像前面那样,依近行和安止,而有定修习所成的智。巴利
Bhāvīyati vaḍḍhīyatīti bhāvanā, samādhi eva bhāvanā samādhibhāvanā, samādhissa vā bhāvanā vaḍḍhanā samādhibhāvanā. Samādhibhāvanāvacanena aññaṃ bhāvanaṃ paṭikkhipati. Pubbe viya upacārappanāvasena samādhibhāvanāmaye ñāṇaṃ.
4 在这里,“缘摄受慧”中,“缘”是指依它而果生起。“依”的意思是不离开它、不脱离它。“生起”的意思是既产生又持续。另外,有帮助的作用就是缘的作用。由于这种缘有多种多样,所以在把握和确定诸缘时的慧,就是“缘摄受慧”。巴利
4.Paccayapariggahepaññāti ettha paṭicca phalametīti paccayo. Paṭiccāti na vinā tena, apaccakkhitvāti attho. Etīti uppajjati ceva pavattati cāti attho. Apica upakārakattho paccayattho, tassa paccayassa bahuvidhattā paccayānaṃ pariggahe vavatthāpane ca paññā paccayapariggahe paññā.
在“法住智”这个说法里,“法”这个词首先出现在自性、慧、福、施设、犯戒、教理、无有情、变异、功德、缘、缘所生等含义中。比如在“善法、不善法、无记法”这类表述里,它就是出现在自性的含义上。巴利
Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti ettha dhammasaddo tāva sabhāvapaññāpuññapaññattiāpattipariyattinissattatāvikāraguṇapaccayapaccayuppannādīsu dissati. Ayañhi ‘‘kusalā dhammā akusalā dhammā abyākatā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. tikamātikā 1) sabhāve dissati.
这些四种法属于在家具信者,
真实、法、坚定、布施,这样的人死后确实不会忧愁。巴利
‘‘Yassete caturo dhammā, saddhassa gharamesino; Saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, sa ve pecca na socatī’’ti. (su. ni. 190) –
在上述等之中,是慧。巴利
Ādīsu paññāyaṃ.
法与非正法,这两者的异熟并不相同。
非法把人带向地狱,法让人到达善趣。巴利
‘‘Na hi dhammo adhammo ca, ubho samavipākino; Adhammo nirayaṃ neti, dhammo pāpeti suggati’’nti. (theragā. 304) –
在“福”等语境中,法指福。在“施设法、言辞法、增语法”等中,法指施设。在“波罗夷法、僧残法”等中,法指犯戒。在“这里,比丘知道法:契经、应颂、记说”等中,法指教理。在“那时,有诸法。于诸法中随观法而住”等中,法指无有情。在“生法、老法、死法”等中,法指变异。在“六种佛法”等中,法指功德。在“于因中有智,是法无碍解”等中,法指缘。在“此界住立,是法住性、是法决定性”等中,法指缘所生。这里也应视为缘所生。从意义来说,或者因为保持自性,或者因为被诸缘保持,或者因为保持自己的果,或者因为保持自身的圆满而不堕恶趣,或者因为保持各自的特相,或者因为被心确定,随相应情况而称为“法”。但在这里,“因为被自己的诸缘保持,所以是法”;缘所生法依此而住立、生起并且持续,所以是“法住”,这是缘法的同义词。对那个法住的智,就是法住智。也就是说,在定修所成智中,以所说的定使心得等持之后,为了如实知见而着手修行,对已确定的名色,以摄取彼等名色之缘的方式生起法住智。为什么不说“名色确定智”,而说“法住智”呢?因为通过缘摄受,就已经成就了对缘所生的摄受。如果还没有摄受缘所生,就不可能作缘摄受。因此应当知道:由法住智的把握,就已经说了作为其基础的、先前已成就的名色确定智。为什么不像第二、第三智那样说“等持后于缘摄受之慧”呢?因为止与观双运。巴利
Ādīsu puññe. ‘‘Paññattidhammā niruttidhammā adhivacanadhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. dukamātikā 106-108) paññattiyaṃ. ‘‘Pārājikā dhammā saṅghādisesā dhammā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 233-234) āpattiyaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ jānāti suttaṃ geyyaṃ veyyākaraṇa’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) pariyattiyaṃ. ‘‘Tasmiṃ kho pana samaye dhammā honti (dha. sa. 121). Dhammesu dhammānupassī viharatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.373; ma. ni. 1.115) nissattatāyaṃ. ‘‘Jātidhammā jarādhammā maraṇadhammā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 10.107) vikāre. ‘‘Channaṃ buddhadhammāna’’ntiādīsu (mahāni. 50) guṇe. ‘‘Hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 720) paccaye. ‘‘Ṭhitāva sā dhātu dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.20; a. ni. 3.137) paccayuppanne. Svāyamidhāpi paccayuppanne daṭṭhabbo. Atthato pana attano sabhāvaṃ dhārentīti vā, paccayehi dhārīyantīti vā, attano phalaṃ dhārentīti vā, attano paripūrakaṃ apāyesu apatamānaṃ dhārentīti vā, sakasakalakkhaṇe dhārentīti vā, cittena avadhārīyantīti vā yathāyogaṃ dhammāti vuccanti. Idha pana attano paccayehi dhārīyantīti dhammā, paccayasamuppannā dhammā tiṭṭhanti uppajjanti ceva pavattanti ca etāyāti dhammaṭṭhiti, paccayadhammānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ . Tassaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiyaṃ ñāṇaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ. Idañhi samādhibhāvanāmayañāṇe vuttasamādhinā samāhitena cittena yathābhūtañāṇadassanatthāya yogamārabhitvā vavatthāpitanāmarūpassa tesaṃ nāmarūpānaṃ paccayapariggahapariyāyaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Nāmarūpavavatthāne ñāṇa’’nti avatvā eva kasmā ‘‘dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti vuttanti ce? Paccayapariggaheneva paccayasamuppannapariggahassa siddhattā. Paccayasamuppanne hi apariggahite paccayapariggaho na sakkā hoti kātuṃ. Tasmā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇagahaṇeneva tassa hetubhūtaṃ pubbe siddhaṃ nāmarūpavavatthānañāṇaṃ vuttameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Kasmā dutiyatatiyañāṇaṃ viya ‘‘samādahitvā paccayapariggahe paññā’’ti na vuttanti ce? Samathavipassanānaṃ yuganaddhattā.
如果以这样的方式让心定下来,他就这样去观照;如果正在观照,他就这样让心定下来。
那时,观和止变得均等,两者相应,双双结合运转。巴利
‘‘Samādahitvā yathā ce vipassati, vipassamāno tathā ce samādahe; Vipassanā ca samatho tadā ahu, samānabhāgā yuganaddhā vattare’’ti. –
确实有这样的说法。因此,为了让人明白“不舍弃定,把定和智结合在一起,直到圣道生起为止,都应当努力精勤”,才说“在把握诸缘时生起的慧,就是法住智”。应当这样理解。巴利
Hi vuttaṃ. Tasmā samādhiṃ avissajjetvā samādhiñca ñāṇañca yuganaddhaṃ katvā yāva ariyamaggo, tāva ussukkāpetabbanti ñāpanatthaṃ ‘‘paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’micceva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
5 对于过去、未来、现在的诸法,加以归纳而确定时,有慧。这里,已经达到自己的自性,或者已经到达生起等刹那,已经过去、已经超越的,是过去;这两者都还没有到来、还没有达到的,是未来;依靠这样那样的原因,以生起等为先行而显现、已经进行、已经转起的,是现在。在长时现在、相续现在、刹那现在当中,这里指的是相续现在。对于这些过去、未来、现在的五蕴法,就每一蕴的相状加以归纳,按聚合成堆的方式集合为一类,而确定、决断、安立的,是慧。巴利
5. Atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ saṅkhipitvā vavatthāne paññāti ettha attano sabhāvaṃ, uppādādikkhaṇaṃ vā patvā ati itā atikkantāti atītā, tadubhayampi na āgatā na sampattāti anāgatā, taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca uppādādiuddhaṃ pannā gatā pavattāti paccuppannā. Addhā santatikhaṇapaccuppannesu santatipaccuppannaṃ idhādhippetaṃ. Tesaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ pañcakkhandhadhammānaṃ ekekakkhandhalakkhaṇe saṅkhipitvā kalāpavasena rāsiṃ katvā vavatthāne nicchayane sanniṭṭhāpane paññā.
「等观智」的意思是:正确地接触、随顺、观察的智,也就是「聚等观智」。因为在名色确定智之后,安住于把握名色之缘的法住智的人,按照这样的方式——「凡是任何色,无论过去、未来、现在,无论内、外,粗、细,劣、胜,远、近,一切色都确定是无常,这是一种等观;确定是苦,这是一种等观;确定是无我,这是一种等观」等等——对之前已确定的每一个蕴都安立三相,观照无常、苦、无我,这样的人就生起聚等观智。巴利
Sammasaneñāṇanti sammā āmasane anumajjane pekkhaṇe ñāṇaṃ, kalāpasammasanañāṇanti attho. Idañhi nāmarūpavavatthānañāṇānantaraṃ nāmarūpapaccayapariggahe dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇe ṭhitassa ‘‘yaṃkiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṃ vā sukhumaṃ vā hīnaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā yaṃ dūre santike vā, sabbaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ aniccato vavatthapeti, ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, dukkhato vavatthapeti, ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, anattato vavatthapeti, ekaṃ sammasana’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.48) nayena vuttasammasanavasena pubbe vavatthāpite ekekasmiṃ khandhe tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassantassa kalāpasammasanañāṇaṃ uppajjati.
6 对于现在诸法,随观变异的慧:这是依相续而说为现在,是对内的五蕴诸法见到变异、见到坏灭的慧。因为“这些法生起之后就会坏灭”,即使把握了生起,心也还是只安住在坏灭上,所以虽然没有说到“生起”,也应该知道生起已经被说到了。或者,由于见到现在的诸法,见生起就已经成立,所以生起已经被说到了。因为如果没有生起,诸法的“已生”就不能成立,因此虽然没有说“对于现在诸法,随观生起与变异的慧”,也应该知道已经说了。又因为“生灭随观智”是确定的说示,所以见生起必定已经成立。在完成了前面所说的等观智之后,把握那在观照中已经明显呈现的生与灭,为了对诸行作出界定而开始修习生灭随观的人,便生起生灭随观智。因为这种智是随观生与灭的,所以称为生灭随观。巴利
6.Paccuppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ vipariṇāmānupassane paññāti santativasena paccuppannānaṃ ajjhattaṃ pañcakkhandhadhammānaṃ vipariṇāmadassane bhaṅgadassane paññā. Yasmā ‘‘ime dhammā uppajjitvā bhijjantī’’ti udayaṃ gahetvāpi bhedeyeva cittaṃ ṭhapeti, tasmā avuttopi udayo vuttoyeva hotīti veditabbo. Paccuppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ dassanena vā udayadassanassa siddhattā udayo vuttoyeva hoti. Na hi udayaṃ vinā dhammānaṃ uppannattaṃ sijjhati, tasmā ‘‘paccuppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādavipariṇāmānupassane paññā’’ti avuttepi vuttameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Udayabbayānupassane ñāṇa’’nti niyamitattā ca udayadassanaṃ siddhameva hotīti anantaraṃ vuttassa sammasanañāṇassa pāraṃ gantvā taṃsammasaneyeva pākaṭībhūte udayabbaye pariggaṇhitvā saṅkhārānaṃ paricchedakaraṇatthaṃ udayabbayānupassanaṃ ārabhantassa uppajjati udayabbayānupassanāñāṇaṃ. Tañhi udayabbaye anupassanato udayabbayānupassanāti vuccati.
7 对“所缘”进行审察:就是对色蕴等所缘,从坏灭的角度去审察、了知、照见。在随观坏灭时生起的慧,就是“观智”——也就是说,对那个所缘从坏灭的角度审察之后所生起的智,在随观坏灭当中的慧,被称为“观智”。所谓“观”,就是种种观察。也有读作“所缘审察”的。它的意思是:对所缘的审察、了知、照见——按照前面所说的方式,对“所缘审察”就可以说为“在随观坏灭当中的慧,就是观智”。然而,因为只有在随观坏灭时,观才达到顶点,所以特别把这一阶段单独称为“观智”。又因为安住在生灭随观的人,会生起道非道智见,所以当生灭随观成就时,那个智见也就自然成就了;因此这里不另说道非道智,而只说明在随观坏灭中达到观之顶点的智,应当这样理解。在生灭随观中已经透彻见到诸行生灭的人,当诸行极其迅速地现前、智慧变得锐利而持续运转时,他会放下对“生”的观察,念只安住在“坏灭”上。当他这样观察——“诸行是这样生起的,又是这样坏灭的”——在这个阶段,坏灭随观智就生起了。巴利
7.Ārammaṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhāti rūpakkhandhādiārammaṇaṃ bhaṅgato paṭisaṅkhāya jānitvā passitvā. Bhaṅgānupassane paññā vipassane ñāṇanti tassa ārammaṇaṃ bhaṅgato paṭisaṅkhāya uppannassa ñāṇassa bhaṅgaṃ anupassane yā paññā, taṃ ‘‘vipassane ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ hoti. Vipassanāti ca vividhā passanā vipassanā. Ārammaṇapaṭisaṅkhātipi pāṭho. Tassattho – ārammaṇassa paṭisaṅkhā jānanā passanāti vuttanayeneva ārammaṇapaṭisaṅkhā ‘‘bhaṅgānupassane paññā vipassane ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmā pana bhaṅgānupassanāya eva vipassanā sikhaṃ pāpuṇāti, tasmā visesetvā idameva ‘‘vipassane ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Yasmā udayabbayānupassanāya ṭhitassa maggāmaggañāṇadassanaṃ uppajjati, tasmā tassā siddhāya taṃ siddhameva hotīti taṃ avatvāva bhaṅgānupassanāya eva vipassanāsikhaṃ ñāṇaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Udayabbayānupassanāya suparidiṭṭhaudayabbayassa suparicchinnesu saṅkhāresu lahuṃ lahuṃ upaṭṭhahantesu ñāṇe tikkhe vahante udayaṃ pahāya bhaṅge eva sati santiṭṭhati, tassa ‘‘evaṃ uppajjitvā evaṃ nāma saṅkhārā bhijjantī’’ti passato etasmiṃ ṭhāne bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ uppajjati.
8 对于生起、转起、相、造作和结生这些现象,当它们以怖畏的方式现起时,因为是以逼迫为性而被整体执取为有怖畏,此时生起的慧,就是这里的意思。它以怖畏的方式现前,所以叫“怖畏现起”,也就是所缘;在那个怖畏现起中。或者也可以说,慧本身以怖畏的方式现起,所以叫“怖畏现起”——这时的慧就被称为“怖畏现起”。巴利
8.Bhayatupaṭṭhāne paññāti uppādapavattanimittaāyūhanāpaṭisandhīnaṃ bhayato upaṭṭhāne pīḷāyogato sappaṭibhayavasena gahaṇūpagamane paññāti attho. Bhayato upaṭṭhātīti bhayatupaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ , tasmiṃ bhayatupaṭṭhāne. Atha vā bhayato upatiṭṭhatīti bhayatupaṭṭhānaṃ, paññā, taṃ ‘‘bhayatupaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ hoti.
“过患智”这个说法,本身就是依处格的表达。因为《无碍解道》里说:“在怖畏现起时的慧、对过患的智,以及厌离,这些法义理相同,只是名称不同。”所以,虽然看起来像是一回事,但按照修行阶段的不同,就像“想要解脱”等心态一样,实际上分为三种。因此,当怖畏现起随观和过患随观修成时,厌离随观也就修成了;所以,即使经文没有单独提到厌离随观,也应当知道它其实已经被说到了。巴利
Ādīnave ñāṇanti bhummavacanameva. ‘‘Yā ca bhayatupaṭṭhāne paññā, yañca ādīnave ñāṇaṃ, yā ca nibbidā, ime dhammā ekaṭṭhā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.227) vuttattā ekamiva vuccamānampi avatthābhedena muñcitukamyatādi viya tividhameva hoti. Tasmā bhayatupaṭṭhānaādīnavānupassanāsu siddhāsu nibbidānupassanā siddhā hotīti katvā avuttāpi vuttāva hotīti veditabbā.
对于以一切诸行的坏灭为所缘,反复修习、培育、多修坏灭随观的人,在三有、四生、五趣、七识住、九有情居中,种种不同的诸行都会以极大的恐怖显现出来,就像一个想安稳活命却胆小怕事的人,遇到狮子、老虎、豹子、熊、鬣狗、夜叉、罗刹、凶暴的公牛、凶恶的狗、发狂的疯象、可怕的毒蛇、雷电、战场、坟地、燃烧的炭火坑等一样。当他这样观察:过去的诸行已经灭了,现在的诸行正在灭,未来的诸行也同样会灭,此时在这一阶段,生起了怖畏现起智。他反复修习、培育、多修这种怖畏现起智之后,在一切有、生、趣、识住、有情居当中,找不到任何庇护、任何藏身之处、任何去处、任何依靠。对于一切有、生、趣、识住、有情居所摄的诸行,他对哪怕一个行也不会生起希求或执取。三有就像装满无焰火炭的炭坑,四大种就像剧毒的毒蛇,五蕴就像举刀要杀人的刽子手,六内处就像空无一人的村庄,六外处就像劫掠村庄的盗贼,七识住和九有情居就像被十一种火燃烧、炽烈、大放火光一样,一切诸行就像疮、病、刺、祸、疾一样,毫无滋味、毫无乐趣,成为巨大过患的堆积而显现出来。对于一个想安稳活命却胆小怕事的人来说,即使是外表悦意的森林密丛,也像藏着猛兽一样;洞窟像藏着豹子一样;水像藏着吃人的罗刹一样;敌人像高举利剑一样;食物像有毒一样;道路像有盗贼一样;房屋像着了火一样;战场像列阵的军队一样。就像那个人来到这些藏着猛兽的密林等处时,心生恐惧、惊慌、毛骨悚然,到处只见到过患;同样,这位瑜伽行者以坏灭随观之力,在一切诸行以怖畏显现时,也到处只见到无味、无乐、纯粹的过患。他这样观察时,过患随观智就生起了。巴利
Sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ bhaṅgārammaṇaṃ bhaṅgānupassanaṃ āsevantassa bhāventassa bahulīkarontassa tibhavacatuyonipañcagatisattaviññāṇaṭṭhitinavasattāvāsesu pabhedakā saṅkhārā sukhena jīvitukāmassa bhīrukapurisassa sīhabyagghadīpiacchataracchayakkharakkhasacaṇḍagoṇacaṇḍakukkurapabhinna- madacaṇḍahatthighoraāsivisaasanivicakkasusānaraṇabhūmijalitaaṅgārakāsuādayo viya mahābhayaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, tassa ‘‘atītā saṅkhārā niruddhā, paccuppannā nirujjhanti, anāgatāpi evameva nirujjhissantī’’ti passato etasmiṃ ṭhāne bhayatupaṭṭhānaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Tassa taṃ bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ āsevantassa bhāventassa bahulīkarontassa sabbabhavayonigatiṭhitisattāvāsesu neva tāṇaṃ na leṇaṃ na gati na paṭisaraṇaṃ paññāyati, sabbabhavayonigatiṭhitinivāsagatesu saṅkhāresu ekasaṅkhārepi patthanā vā parāmāso vā na hoti, tayo bhavā vītaccitaṅgārapuṇṇā aṅgārakāsuyo viya, cattāro mahābhūtā ghoravisā āsivisā viya, pañcakkhandhā ukkhittāsikā vadhakā viya, cha ajjhattikāyatanāni suññagāmo viya, cha bāhirāyatanāni gāmaghātakacorā viya, sattaviññāṇaṭṭhitiyo nava ca sattāvāsā ekādasahi aggīhi ādittā sampajjalitā sajotibhūtā viya ca, sabbe saṅkhārā gaṇḍabhūtā rogabhūtā sallabhūtā aghabhūtā ābādhabhūtā viya ca nirassādā nirasā mahāādīnavarāsibhūtā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, sukhena jīvitukāmassa bhīrukapurisassa ramaṇīyākārasaṇṭhitampi savāḷakamiva vanagahanaṃ, sasaddūlā viya guhā, sagāharakkhasaṃ viya udakaṃ, samussitakhaggā viya paccatthikā, savisaṃ viya bhojanaṃ, sacoro viya maggo, ādittamiva agāraṃ, uyyuttasenā viya raṇabhūmi. Yathā hi so puriso etāni savāḷakavanagahanādīni āgamma bhīto saṃviggo lomahaṭṭhajāto samantato ādīnavameva passati, evameva so yogāvacaro bhaṅgānupassanāvasena sabbasaṅkhāresu bhayato upaṭṭhitesu samantato nirasaṃ nirassādaṃ ādīnavameva passati. Tassevaṃ passato ādīnavānupassanāñāṇaṃ uppajjati.
他这样以过患的角度观见一切诸行之后,对于三有、四生、五趣、七识住、九有情居中所有各类的行,就感到厌离、不满、不再乐著。就像一只喜好心峰山脚的黄金王天鹅,对不净的旃陀罗村村口的水坑毫不喜欢,只在七大湖中才快乐;同样,这位瑜伽行者中的王天鹅,对完全照见过患的各类行不再乐著,但因为具备修习之乐和修习之喜,只对七种随观感到快乐。又像被放进金笼里的狮子——兽王,也不会快乐,只在宽三千由旬的雪山中才快乐;同样,这位瑜伽行者中的狮子,对三种善趣的存在也不快乐,只对三种随观感到快乐。又像通体纯白、七处立地、有神通、能行虚空的六牙龙王,对城市中心不快乐,只在雪山中的六牙池才快乐;同样,这位瑜伽行者中的殊胜象王,对一切行都不快乐,只对以“无生才是安稳”等方式所开示的寂静境界感到快乐,内心倾向、俯向、朝向那里。到这一步,他的厌离随观智就生起了。巴利
So evaṃ sabbasaṅkhāre ādīnavato sampassanto sabbabhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsagate sabhedake saṅkhāragate nibbindati ukkaṇṭhati nābhiramati. Seyyathāpi nāma cittakūṭapabbatapādābhirato suvaṇṇarājahaṃso asucimhi caṇḍālagāmadvāraāvāṭe nābhiramati, sattasu mahāsaresuyeva abhiramati, evameva ayaṃ yogīrājahaṃso suparidiṭṭhādīnave sabhedake saṅkhāragate nābhiramati, bhāvanārāmatāya pana bhāvanāratiyā samannāgatattā sattasu anupassanāsuyeva abhiramati. Yathā ca suvaṇṇapañjarepi pakkhitto sīho migarājā nābhiramati, tiyojanasahassavitthate pana himavanteyeva ramati, evamayampi yogīsīho tividhe sugatibhavepi nābhiramati, tīsu anupassanāsuyeva ramati. Yathā ca sabbaseto sattappatiṭṭho iddhimā vehāsaṅgamo chaddanto nāgarājā nagaramajjhe nābhiramati, himavati chaddantarahadeyeva ramati, evamayaṃ yogīvaravāraṇo sabbasmimpi saṅkhāragate nābhiramati, ‘‘anuppādo khema’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.53) nayena niddiṭṭhe santipadeyeva ramati, tanninnatappoṇatappabbhāramānaso hoti. Ettāvatā tassa nibbidānupassanāñāṇaṃ uppannaṃ hotīti.
9 想要解脱、再加以审察、然后安住下来的慧,就是关于诸行舍的智。所谓“想要解脱”,就是想要脱离、想要舍弃,也就是渴望、希求,所以叫“欲解脱者”;欲解脱者的状态,就是“欲解脱性”。所谓“审察”,就是仔细地观察、探究,所以叫“审察”;审察的行为也叫“审察”。所谓“住立”,就是安住、保持旁观,所以叫“住立”;住立的行为也叫“住立”。这欲解脱性、这审察、这住立,合起来就叫“欲解脱、审察、住立”。也就是说,在前面的阶段,由厌离智而厌离的人,想要舍弃诸行的生起等,这就是“欲解脱”。在中间阶段,为了找到解脱的方法而作审察,这就是“审察”。解脱之后,到了最后阶段,保持旁观,这就是“住立”。这样,按阶段的不同,就有三种慧,即关于诸行舍的智。不过,为了随应这些欲解脱、审察、住立的阶段差别而归入“行舍”,虽然依文句用了“慧”的复数与“诸行舍中”的复数,但应当知道,虽然按阶段差别而区分,因为体性同一,所以用单数的“智”。正如经中所说:“这欲解脱性、这审察随观、这行舍,这些法同一义,只是文辞有异。”(《无碍解道》1.227)也有人这样说:“‘诸行舍中’用复数,是因为依止、观而有多种行舍。”而应当知道,“诸行舍中”是依作用而说的。又,按阶段差别,那个人由厌离智而厌离、感到不适意时,对于三有、四生、五趣、七识住、九有情居中所有分类的诸行,心不执著、不粘附、不系缚,对一切行境都想要解脱、想要舍弃。巴利
9.Muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇanti muñcituṃ cajituṃ kāmeti icchatīti muñcitukāmo, muñcitukāmassa bhāvo muñcitukamyatā. Paṭisaṅkhāti upaparikkhatīti paṭisaṅkhā, paṭisaṅkhānaṃ vā paṭisaṅkhā. Santiṭṭhati ajjhupekkhatīti santiṭṭhanā, santiṭṭhanaṃ vā santiṭṭhanā. Muñcitukamyatā ca sā paṭisaṅkhā ca santiṭṭhanā cāti muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanā. Iti pubbabhāge nibbidāñāṇena nibbinnassa uppādādīni pariccajitukāmatā muñcitukamyatā. Muñcanassa upāyakaraṇatthaṃ majjhe paṭisaṅkhānaṃ paṭisaṅkhā. Muñcitvā avasāne ajjhupekkhanaṃ santiṭṭhanā. Evaṃ avatthābhedena tippakārā paññā saṅkhārānaṃ ajjhupekkhanāsu ñāṇaṃ, muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanāsaṅkhātānaṃ avatthābhedena bhinnānaṃ tissannampi paññānaṃ saṅkhārupekkhataṃ icchantena pana ‘‘paññā’’ti ca ‘‘saṅkhārupekkhāsū’’ti ca bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ, avatthābhedena bhinnassāpi ekattā ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti ekavacanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Vuttañca – ‘‘yā ca muñcitukamyatā yā ca paṭisaṅkhānupassanā yā ca saṅkhārupekkhā, ime dhammā ekaṭṭhā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.227). Keci pana ‘‘saṅkhārupekkhāsūti bahuvacanaṃ samathavipassanāvasena saṅkhārupekkhānaṃ bahuttā’’tipi vadanti. Saṅkhārupekkhāsūti ca kiriyāpekkhanti veditabbaṃ. Avatthābhedena pana tena nibbidāñāṇena nibbindantassa ukkaṇṭhantassa sabbabhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsagatesu sabhedakesu saṅkhāresu cittaṃ na sajjati na laggati na bajjhati, sabbasaṅkhāragataṃ muñcitukāmaṃ chaḍḍetukāmaṃ hoti.
或者,就像落进网里的鱼、进了蛇口的青蛙、被关进笼子的野鸡、陷在坚固罗网里的鹿、落在捕蛇人手里的蛇、陷进大沼泽的象、进了金翅鸟口的龙王、进了罗睺口的月亮、被敌人包围的人,这些都想从各自所处的困境中挣脱出来、逃离出去;同样,这位瑜伽行者的心,对一切行也都想挣脱、想逃离。这样说来,“想解脱者的想解脱性”这个读法就讲得通了。但要是这样,那么在“于生起想解脱”等语句里,就该改成“从生起想解脱”等等,所以还是前面的意思更好。于是,他对一切行已无贪著,一心想解脱,这时生起“想解脱智”。他这样对一切有、生、趣、识住、有情居中所摄的种种行都想解脱,为了成就解脱的方法,又用审察随观智,把三法印加在这些行上作观。这样观的时候,他依无常而生起取相的审察智,依苦而生起取转起的审察智,依无我而生起取相与转起的审察智。他用审察随观智看到“一切行皆空”,把三法印加上去,把握诸行,舍弃怖畏和欢喜,就像一个人看到妻子的过失后抛弃了妻子,对妻子的诸行漠不关心、保持中立,不执取为“我”或“我的”。他这样知、这样见的时候,心在三有中退缩、排斥、回转,不向外伸展。就像水滴在稍微倾斜的莲叶上,会退缩、排斥、回转,不向外伸展;又像鸡毛或筋腱扔进火里,会退缩、排斥、回转,不向外伸展;同样,他的心在三有中退缩、排斥、回转,不向外伸展,舍受现前。这样,他的行舍智就生起了。应当知道,与这行舍智一起、能成就上面种姓智的随顺智,虽然前后诸智中没有说到,也应当视为已经说了。因为世尊这样说过——巴利
Atha vā yathā jālabbhantaragato maccho, sappamukhagato maṇḍūko, pañjarapakkhitto vanakukkuṭo, daḷhapāsavasaṃgato migo, ahituṇḍikahatthagato sappo, mahāpaṅkapakkhando kuñjaro, supaṇṇamukhagato nāgarājā, rāhumukhapaviṭṭho cando, sapattaparikkhitto purisotievamādayo tato tato muccitukāmā nissaritukāmāva honti, evaṃ tassa yogino cittaṃ sabbasmā saṅkhāragatā muccitukāmaṃ nissaritukāmaṃ hoti. Evañhi vuccamāne ‘‘muccitukāmassa muccitukamyatā’’ti pāṭho yujjati. Evañca sati ‘‘uppādaṃ muñcitukamyatā’’tiādīsu ‘‘uppādā muccitukamyatā’’tiādi vattabbaṃ hoti, tasmā purimo eva attho sundarataro. Athassa sabbasaṅkhāresu vigatālayassa sabbasaṅkhāragataṃ muñcitukāmassa muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṃ uppajjati. So evaṃ sabbabhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsagate sabhedake saṅkhāre muñcitukāmo muñcanassa upāyasampādanatthaṃ puna te eva saṅkhāre paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassati. Evañhi vipassato cassa aniccavasena nimittaṃ paṭisaṅkhāñāṇaṃ uppajjati, dukkhavasena pavattaṃ paṭisaṅkhāñāṇaṃ uppajjati, anattavasena nimittañca pavattañca paṭisaṅkhāñāṇaṃ uppajjati. So paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇena ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā suññā’’ti disvā tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā saṅkhāre pariggaṇhanto bhayañca nandiñca vippahāya bhariyāya dosaṃ disvā vissaṭṭhabhariyo viya puriso tassā bhariyāya saṅkhāresu udāsīno hoti majjhatto, ‘‘aha’’nti vā ‘‘mama’’nti vā na gaṇhāti. Tassa evaṃ jānato evaṃ passato tīsu bhavesu cittaṃ patilīyati paṭikuṭati paṭivattati na sampasāriyati. Seyyathāpi nāma padumapalāse īsakaṃ poṇe udakaphusitāni patilīyanti paṭikuṭanti paṭivattanti na sampasāriyanti. Seyyathāpi vā pana kukkuṭapattaṃ vā nhārudaddulaṃ vā aggimhi pakkhittaṃ patilīyati paṭikuṭati paṭivattati na sampasāriyati, evaṃ tassa tīsu bhavesu cittaṃ patilīyati paṭikuṭati paṭivattati na sampasāriyati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Evamassa saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ uppannaṃ hoti. Iminā saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇena saddhiṃ upari gotrabhuñāṇassa sādhakaṃ anulomañāṇaṃ pubbāparañāṇehi avuttampi vuttameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhi bhagavatā –
比丘们,如果一位比丘把任何造作之法看成是恒常的,却还能具备随顺忍,这是不可能的;不具备随顺忍,却还能进入正性决定,这是不可能的;不进入正性决定,却还能证得入流果、一来果、不还果或阿拉汉果,这是不可能的。巴利
‘‘So vata, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato samanupassanto anulomikāya khantiyā samannāgato bhavissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati, anulomikāya khantiyā asamannāgato sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati, sammattaniyāmaṃ anokkamamāno sotāpattiphalaṃ vā sakadāgāmiphalaṃ vā anāgāmiphalaṃ vā arahattaphalaṃ vā sacchikarissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 6.98; paṭi. ma. 3.36).
法将舍利弗也这样说过:巴利
Vuttañca dhammasenāpatinā –
以几种行相获得随顺忍?以几种行相进入正性决定?以四十种行相获得随顺忍,以四十种行相进入正性决定。巴利
‘‘Katihākārehi anulomikaṃ khantiṃ paṭilabhati? Katihākārehi sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamati? Cattālīsāya ākārehi anulomikaṃ khantiṃ paṭilabhati, cattālīsāya ākārehi sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamatī’’tiādi (paṭi. ma. 3.37).
世尊在《发趣论》中也这样说过:巴利
Paṭṭhāne cetaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavatā –
随顺以无间缘作为种姓智的缘。随顺以无间缘作为清净智的缘。巴利
‘‘Anulomaṃ gotrabhussa anantarapaccayena paccayo. Anulomaṃ vodānassa anantarapaccayena paccayo’’tiādi (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417).
他反复练习、培育、多修行舍智时,胜解信变得更强有力,精进被善加提起,念善住,心善得定,行舍智也转起得更锐利。他这时想:“现在圣道就要生起了。”于是以行舍智观察诸行是无常、或苦、或无我之后,就沉入有分。紧接着有分之后,意门转向心生起,它依行舍智同样的方式,以诸行为所缘,把它们看作无常、或苦、或无我。紧接着,又以同样的方式以诸行为所缘,生起两、三或四个速行心。与这些速行心相应的智,就是随顺智。因为它既随顺先前八种观智那样的作用,也随顺此后应当证得的三十七菩提分法。就像一位如法的国王坐在审判席上,听完八位法官大臣的判决后,舍弃偏私,保持中立,认可说“就这样吧”,于是既随顺了他们的判决,也随顺了自古以来的王法。在这里,国王好比随顺智,八位法官大臣好比八种观智,自古以来的王法好比三十七菩提分法。正如国王以“就这样吧”的认可,既随顺法官们的判决,也随顺王法;同样,这个智以无常等观察诸行而生起时,既随顺先前八种观智那样的作用,也随顺此后应当证得的三十七菩提分法。因此,它被称为随顺智。巴利
Tassa hi taṃ saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ āsevantassa bhāventassa bahulīkarontassa adhimokkhasaddhā balavatarā hoti, vīriyaṃ supaggahitaṃ, sati sūpaṭṭhitā, cittaṃ susamāhitaṃ, saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ tikkhataraṃ pavattati. Tassa idāni maggo uppajjissatīti saṅkhārupekkhāya saṅkhāre ‘‘aniccā’’ti vā ‘‘dukkhā’’ti vā ‘‘anattā’’ti vā sammasitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Bhavaṅgānantaraṃ saṅkhārupekkhāya katanayeneva saṅkhāre ‘‘aniccā’’ti vā ‘‘dukkhā’’ti vā ‘‘anattā’’ti vā ārammaṇaṃ kurumānaṃ uppajjati manodvārāvajjanaṃ. Tadanantaraṃ tatheva saṅkhāre ārammaṇaṃ katvā dve tīṇi cattāri vā javanacittāni uppajjanti. Taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ anulomañāṇaṃ. Tañhi purimānañca aṭṭhannaṃ vipassanāñāṇānaṃ tathakiccatāya anulometi, upari ca pattabbānaṃ sattatiṃsāya bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ anulometi. Yathā hi dhammiko rājā vinicchayaṭṭhāne nisinno aṭṭhannaṃ vohārikamahāmattānaṃ vinicchayaṃ sutvā agatigamanaṃ pahāya majjhatto hutvā ‘‘evaṃ hotū’’ti anumodamāno tesañca vinicchayassa anulometi, porāṇassa ca rājadhammassa. Tattha rājā viya anulomañāṇaṃ, aṭṭha vohārikamahāmattā viya aṭṭha vipassanāñāṇāni, porāṇarājadhammo viya sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā, yathā rājā ‘‘evaṃ hotū’’ti anumodamāno vohārikānañca vinicchayassa rājadhammassa ca anulometi, evamidaṃ aniccādivasena saṅkhāre ārabbha uppajjamānānaṃ aṭṭhannañca vipassanāñāṇānaṃ tathakiccatāya anulometi, upari ca pattabbānaṃ sattatiṃsāya bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ. Tasmā anulomañāṇanti vuccati.
10 在外出起与离转之中,慧就是种姓智。这里,“在外”指的是诸行相。因为那是依着内在心相续中的不善蕴,才说为“在外”。所以,从在外的诸行相中出起,就是离开它之后向上安住,这叫作“出起”;背离、反转、不再朝向它,叫作“离转”。既是出起又是离转,所以叫“出起离转”。因此这样说:巴利
10.Bahiddhāvuṭṭhānavivaṭṭane paññā gotrabhuñāṇanti ettha bahiddhāti saṅkhāranimittaṃ. Tañhi ajjhattacittasantāne akusalakkhandhe upādāya bahiddhāti vuttaṃ. Tasmā bahiddhā saṅkhāranimittamhā vuṭṭhāti vigataṃ hutvā uddhaṃ tiṭṭhatīti vuṭṭhānaṃ, vivaṭṭati parāvaṭṭati parammukhaṃ hotīti vivaṭṭanaṃ, vuṭṭhānañca taṃ vivaṭṭanañcāti vuṭṭhānavivaṭṭanaṃ. Tenevāha –
种姓智不是以断除集的方式从转起中升起,而是以涅槃为所缘,从相中升起,所以是单方面的升起。巴利
‘‘Gotrabhuñāṇaṃ samudayassa asamucchindanato pavattā na vuṭṭhāti, nibbānārammaṇato pana nimittā vuṭṭhātīti ekato vuṭṭhānaṃ hotī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.827).
种姓智因为能制伏凡夫种姓、生起圣者种姓,所以叫“种姓”。当随顺智反复修习到终点时,心就像荷叶上的水珠一样,从一切行法中退缩出来;这时它取无相涅槃为所缘,超越凡夫种姓、凡夫之名、凡夫地,进入圣者种姓、圣者之名、圣地。它以涅槃为所缘,是第一次转向、第一次作意、第一次现起,并以无间、等无间、修习、亲依止、非有、离去这六种方式成就道缘。它是观达到顶点时的顶峰,是不再退转的,就这样生起。巴利
Puthujjanagottābhibhavanato ariyagottabhāvanato gotrabhu. Idañhi anulomañāṇehi padumapalāsato udakamiva sabbasaṅkhārato patilīyamānacittassa anulomañāṇassa āsevanante animittaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ kurumānaṃ puthujjanagottaṃ puthujjanasaṅkhaṃ puthujjanabhūmiṃ atikkamamānaṃ ariyagottaṃ ariyasaṅkhaṃ ariyabhūmiṃ okkamamānaṃ nibbānārammaṇe paṭhamāvattanapaṭhamābhogapaṭhamasamannāhārabhūtaṃ maggassa anantarasamanantarāsevanaupanissayanatthivigatavasena chahi ākārehi paccayabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ sikhāppattaṃ vipassanāya muddhabhūtaṃ apunarāvattakaṃ uppajjati.
11 在“从两方面出起与离转的慧是道中之智”这一句里,“从两方面”就是“从两边”,或者说“从两个角度”。它能断除烦恼,也能从那些随烦恼转起的诸蕴中出离;因为它以涅槃为所缘,所以能从外在一切行相中出离、离转,因此称为“从两方面出起与离转的慧”。正因如此,才说:巴利
11.Dubhato vuṭṭhānavivaṭṭane paññā magge ñāṇanti ettha dubhatoti ubhato, dvayatoti vā vuttaṃ hoti. Kilesānaṃ samucchindanato kilesehi ca tadanuvattakakkhandhehi ca nibbānārammaṇakaraṇato bahiddhā sabbasaṅkhāranimittehi ca vuṭṭhāti vivaṭṭatīti dubhato vuṭṭhānavivaṭṭane paññā. Tenevāha –
四种道智都以无相为所缘,所以从相中出离;又因为断除了集,所以从转起中出离,因此成为从两方面出离。巴利
‘‘Cattāripi maggañāṇāni animittārammaṇattā nimittato vuṭṭhahanti, samudayassa samucchindanato pavattā vuṭṭhahantīti dubhato vuṭṭhānāni hontī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.827).
称为“道中之智”的,就是:它寻求、观察涅槃;或者被想求涅槃的人所寻求、所追寻;或者它在灭除烦恼时行进、运转,所以叫“道”,也就是在那条道上的智。这里因为用了“类名统称”,所以用单数来表达。那种道智紧接在种姓智之后生起,以涅槃为所缘,彻底无余地断除自己应当断除的烦恼,枯竭无始轮回流转的苦海,关闭一切恶趣之门,让七种圣财显现于前,舍弃八支邪道,止息一切怨敌与怖畏,使人成为正等正觉者的亲生儿子,并获得其他数百种功德。这样的道智就生起了。巴利
Magge ñāṇanti nibbānaṃ maggati pekkhati, nibbānatthikehi vā maggīyati anvesīyati, kilese vā mārento gacchati pavattatīti maggo, tasmiṃ magge ñāṇaṃ. Jātiggahaṇena ekavacanaṃ kataṃ. Tañhi gotrabhuñāṇassa anantaraṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ kurumānaṃ sayaṃvajjhe kilese niravasesaṃ samucchindamānaṃ anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭadukkhasamuddaṃ sosayamānaṃ sabbāpāyadvārāni pidahamānaṃ sattaariyadhanasammukhībhāvaṃ kurumānaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ micchāmaggaṃ pajahamānaṃ sabbaverabhayāni vūpasamayamānaṃ sammāsambuddhassa orasaputtabhāvamupanayamānaṃ aññāni ca anekāni ānisaṃsasatāni paṭilābhayamānaṃ maggañāṇaṃ uppajjati.
一个想站稳的人,跨过水沟到了对岸;
犹如以速度来到后,抓住绑在远岸树上的绳子。
跃过绳子或棍子,身体朝对岸倾斜。
然而,已达彼岸者放下那摇摆,稳稳站在彼岸。
就这样,瑜伽修行者在这个有身所成的此岸;
已经看到怖畏的人,却想在无畏的不死彼岸安住。
随观生灭者以迅猛之势前来的绳套;
或者,那根被称为“色”的棍棒,以及其余被称为“蕴”的棍棒,都正确地(执取)。
执取了转向之后,确实,以心,就像前面所说的那样。
超越随顺之后,倾向于寂灭,那时就安住于禅定。
种姓智虽然放下了它,却因为没有获得反复修习,仍然摇摆不定。
掉进有为的彼岸之后,他就以道智在那里站稳了。
想看见月亮,月亮却被层层乌云遮住了;
当粗的、细的、极细的云被风吹散,依次散去之时,
就像一个人看见月亮那样,以随顺智也依次同样地看见。
当遮蔽真理的迷痴已被摧毁,种姓智者便亲见不死。
就像风吹过却看不见月亮,随顺法的人确实也看不见不死。
就像一个人无法用光明驱散黑暗,种姓者也不能消除黑暗。
当车轮转动时,站立的人,怀着别人所给之想。
就像盯着看要一箭射穿一百块木板一样。
就像这样,在这里,道智不放弃种姓智所赋予的想。
空在涅槃中运转,摧毁贪蕴等。
它让轮回的苦海干涸,并关上通往恶趣的门。
他修行圣财,并且舍断邪道。
平息怨敌与怖畏,成为保护者的亲生儿子。
智慧还能带来其他成百上千种利益。巴利
Ṭhātuṃ icchaṃ puriso, laṅghitvā mātikāya paratīre; Vegenāgamma yathā, gaṇhitvā orimatiratarubaddhaṃ. Rajjuṃ vā daṇḍaṃ vā, ullaṅghitvāna pāraninnatanu; Pārāpanno pana taṃ, muñciya vedhaṃ patiṭṭhahati pāre. Evaṃ yogāvacaro, sakkāyamayamhi orime tīre; Diṭṭhabhayo abhaye pana, ṭhātuṃ icchaṃ amatapāre. Udayabbayānupassa , pabhutikavegena āgato rajjuṃ; Rūpāvhaṃ daṇḍaṃ vā, taditarakhandhāvhayaṃ sammā. Gaṇhitvā āvajjana, cittena hi pubbavuttanayatova; Anulomehullaṅghiya, nibbutininno tadāsanopagato. Taṃ muñciya gotrabhunā, aladdhaāsevanena tu pavedhaṃ; Patito saṅkhatapāre, tato patiṭṭhāti maggañāṇena. Passitukāmo candaṃ, cande channamhi abbhapaṭalehi; Thulakasukhumasukhumesu, abbhesu haṭesu vāyunā kamato. Candaṃ passeyya naro, yathā tathevānulomañāṇehi kamā; Saccacchādakamohe, vināsite pekkhate hi gotrabhu amataṃ. Vātā viya te candaṃ, amataṃ na hi pekkharenulomāni; Puriso abbhāni yathā, gotrabhu na tamaṃ vinodeti. Bhamitamhi cakkayante, ṭhito naro aññadinnasaññāya; Usupāte phalakasataṃ, apekkhamāno yathā vijjhe. Evamidha maggañāṇaṃ, gotrabhunā dinnasaññamavihāya; Nibbāne vattantaṃ, lobhakkhandhādike padāleti. Saṃsāradukkhajaladhiṃ , sosayati pidahati duggatidvāraṃ; Kurute ca ariyadhaninaṃ, micchāmaggañca pajahāti. Verabhayāni samayate, karoti nāthassa orasasutattaṃ; Aññe ca anekasate, ānīsaṃse dadāti ñāṇamidanti.
12 12.“勤行止息智”是指在果中(生起)的智。这里,“勤行”指极度精勤的努力,也就是为了亲证果而修习道、从两方面出起的努力;那种勤行的止息、完成,就是“勤行止息”。那是什么?就是四道作用的最终完成。以这种勤行止息为因,在果中生起的慧,就是“勤行止息智”。phalati 的意思是成熟,所以叫“果”;在那个果中与果相应的智,就是在果中的智。因为每一道智之后,紧接着就会生起作为该道智异熟果的果心,它们以涅槃为所缘,有时三个,有时两个,有时一个。正因为是即刻异熟,所以出世间善法被称为“定,说为无间”(《小诵》6.5;《经集》228),以及“缓慢地证得无间,以达到诸漏的灭尽”(《增支部》4.162)等。若有两种随顺,那么第三种是种姓心,第四种是道心,就有三个果心。若有三种随顺,那么第四种是种姓心,第五种是道心,就有两个果心。若有四种随顺,那么第五种是种姓心,第六种是道心,就有一个果心。这是道心路过程中的果。至于后来生起的果——通过等至而生起的,以及从灭尽定出起时生起的果——也都包含在这里面了。巴利
12.Payogappaṭippassaddhipaññā phale ñāṇanti ettha payogoti bhuso yogo, phalasacchikiriyāya maggabhāvanāya ubhato vuṭṭhānapayogo, tassa payogassa paṭippassambhanaṃ niṭṭhānaṃ payogapaṭippassaddhi. Kiṃ taṃ? Catumaggakiccapariyosānaṃ. Tassā payogapaṭippassaddhiyā hetubhūtāya pavattā phale paññā payogappaṭippassaddhipaññā. Phalati vipaccatīti phalaṃ, tasmiṃ phale taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Ekekassa hi maggañāṇassa anantarā tassa tasseva vipākabhūtāni nibbānārammaṇāni tīṇi vā dve vā ekaṃ vā phalacittāni uppajjanti. Anantaravipākattāyeva lokuttarakusalānaṃ ‘‘samādhimānantarikaññamāhū’’ti (khu. pā. 6.5; su. ni. 228) ca, ‘‘dandhaṃ ānantarikaṃ pāpuṇāti āsavānaṃ khayāyā’’ti (a. ni. 4.162) ca ādi vuttaṃ. Yassa dve anulomāni, tassa tatiyaṃ gotrabhu, catutthaṃ maggacittaṃ, tīṇi phalacittāni honti. Yassa tīṇi anulomāni, tassa catutthaṃ gotrabhu, pañcamaṃ maggacittaṃ, dve phalacittāni honti. Yassa cattāri anulomāni, tassa pañcamaṃ gotrabhu, chaṭṭhaṃ maggacittaṃ, ekaṃ phalacittaṃ hoti. Idaṃ maggavīthiyaṃ phalaṃ. Kālantaraphalaṃ pana samāpattivasena uppajjamānaṃ nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa uppajjamānañca eteneva saṅgahitaṃ.
13 13. 在观察已断除的烦恼时的慧:就是用每一种圣道彻底断除了每一种随烦恼之后,再去观察那些已被断除的烦恼,这时的慧。“解脱智”:就是关于解脱的智。而所谓“解脱”,是指从随烦恼中解脱出来的清净心,或者指解脱的状态。对那种解脱的了知,就是智,也就是解脱智。当一个人观察从烦恼中解脱出来的心相续,以及从烦恼中解脱的状态时,他并不是离开烦恼而去观察的——因此,这句话说的就是对已断烦恼的观察。“在解脱时,生起‘已解脱’的智”,正是针对这一点而说的。至于对剩余烦恼的观察,虽然没有明说,也应该理解为已经由这句话一并说到了。正如所说——巴利
13.Chinnavaṭumānupassane paññāti tena tena ariyamaggena samucchinnaṃ taṃ taṃ upakkilesaṃ pacchā passane paññā. Vimuttiñāṇanti vimuttiyā ñāṇaṃ. Vimuttīti ca upakkilesehi vimuttaṃ parisuddhaṃ cittaṃ, vimuttabhāvo vā. Tassā vimuttiyā jānanaṃ ñāṇaṃ vimuttiñāṇaṃ. Kilesehi vimuttaṃ cittasantatimpi kilesehi vimuttabhāvampi paccavekkhanto kilesehi na vinā paccavekkhatīti etena pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hotī’’ti (mahāva. 23; dī. ni. 1.248) hi idameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Avasiṭṭhakilesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ pana avuttampi imināva vuttaṃ hotīti gahetabbaṃ. Vuttañca –
当说到一法时,凡是具有同一特相的法,也就因此都说到了。
一切都已经宣说完毕,这就是所说的“相之理趣”。巴利
‘‘Vuttamhi ekadhamme, ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā tena; Vuttā bhavanti sabbe, iti vutto lakkhaṇo hāro’’ti. (netti. 4.5 niddesavāra);
或者,因为阿罗汉没有对残余烦恼的省察,所以应当知道,这里说的只是四种圣者都有的、对已断烦恼的省察。巴利
Atha vā arahato avasiṭṭhakilesapaccavekkhaṇābhāvā catunnaṃ ariyānaṃ labbhamānaṃ pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇameva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
14 14.‘在观察那时生起的诸法时的慧’是指:那时,在道刹那和果刹那,以证得和通达的方式生起、到达、具足的道果法和四圣谛法,对它们的观察、审察、了知,就是慧。而“省察智”是指回转之后彻底地观察、了知的智。通过这两种智,就说明了各种省察智。
因为入流者在道心路过程中,当入流果结束时,心沉入有分。然后从有分出来,为了观察道,生起意门转向。这个意门转向灭去后,依次生起七个观察道的速行心。然后心再沉入有分,又以同样的方式,为了观察果等,生起转向等心。由于这些心生起,他观察道、观察果、观察已断的烦恼、观察残余的烦恼、观察涅槃。
他这样观察道:“我确实是由这条道而来的。”然后观察果:“我获得了这样的功德利益。”然后观察已断的烦恼:“这些烦恼我已经断除了。”然后观察残余的烦恼:“这些烦恼还残留在我身上,要由更高的道来断除。”最后观察涅槃:“这个法是我以它为所缘而证得的。”这样,入流圣弟子有五种省察。就像入流者一样,一来者、不还者也是如此。但阿拉汉没有对残余烦恼的省察,所以只有四种省察。这样总共有十九种省察智。这是最高的分类方式。
已断和残余烦恼的省察,对有学圣者来说,可能有,也可能没有。正因为没有这种省察,摩诃男释迦才问佛陀:“我内心还有什么法没有断除,以至于有时候连贪欲的法也会占据我的心?”等等。巴利
14.Tadā samudāgate dhamme passane paññāti tadā maggakkhaṇe phalakkhaṇe ca samudāgate paṭilābhavasena ca paṭivedhavasena ca samāgate sampatte samaṅgibhūte maggaphaladhamme catusaccadhamme ca passanā pekkhaṇā pajānanā paññā. Paccavekkhaṇe ñāṇanti nivattitvā bhusaṃ passanaṃ jānanaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Iminā ca ñāṇadvayena paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni vuttāni honti. Sotāpannassa hi maggavīthiyaṃ sotāpattiphalapariyosāne cittaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, tato bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā maggapaccavekkhaṇatthāya manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjati, tasmiṃ niruddhe paṭipāṭiyā satta maggapaccavekkhaṇajavanānīti. Puna bhavaṅgaṃ otaritvā teneva nayena phalādīnaṃ paccavekkhaṇatthāya āvajjanādīni uppajjanti. Yesaṃ uppattiyā esa maggaṃ paccavekkhati, phalaṃ paccavekkhati, pahīnakilese paccavekkhati, avasiṭṭhakilese paccavekkhati, nibbānaṃ paccavekkhati. So hi ‘‘iminā vatāhaṃ maggena āgato’’ti maggaṃ paccavekkhati, tato ‘‘ayaṃ me ānisaṃso laddho’’ti phalaṃ paccavekkhati, tato ‘‘ime nāma me kilesā pahīnā’’ti pahīnakilese paccavekkhati, tato ‘‘ime nāma me kilesā avasiṭṭhā’’ti uparimaggavajjhe kilese paccavekkhati, avasāne ‘‘ayaṃ me dhammo ārammaṇato paṭiladdho’’ti amataṃ nibbānaṃ paccavekkhati. Iti sotāpannassa ariyasāvakassa pañca paccavekkhaṇāni honti. Yathā ca sotāpannassa, evaṃ sakadāgāmianāgāmīnampi. Arahato pana avasiṭṭhakilesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ nāma natthīti cattāriyeva paccavekkhaṇāni. Evaṃ sabbāni ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni. Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedoyeva ceso. Pahīnāvasiṭṭhakilesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ sekkhānaṃ hoti vā na vā. Tassa hi abhāvatoyeva mahānāmo sakko bhagavantaṃ pucchi ‘‘kosu nāma me dhammo ajjhattaṃ appahīno, yena me ekadā lobhadhammāpi cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhantī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.175).
在这里,为了说明法住智等十一种智,应当理解这个譬喻:就像一个人心想“我要抓鱼”,拿起鱼网,走进合适的水里,把手从网口伸进去,在水底有一条黑蛇,他误以为是鱼,紧紧抓住蛇的脖子,高兴地想“我抓到了一条大鱼!”提起来一看,见到蛇身上的卍字纹,认出“这是蛇”,顿时害怕起来,看到过患,对抓蛇感到厌离,想要放开它。为了找到放开的方法,他从蛇尾尖开始,把手挣脱出来,举起手臂,在头顶上方转了两三圈,让蛇变得虚弱,说道“去吧,毒蛇!”就把蛇扔掉了。然后他飞快地登上旱地,站在那里,欢喜地回望来路,心想“哎呀,我从大蛇的嘴里逃出来了!”巴利
Ettha dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇādīnaṃ ekādasannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ vibhāvanatthāya ayaṃ upamā veditabbā – yathā puriso ‘‘macche gahessāmī’’ti macchakhippaṃ gahetvā tadanurūpe udake osāretvā khippamukhena hatthaṃ otāretvā antoudake kaṇhasappaṃ macchasaññāya gīvāya daḷhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘mahā vata mayā maccho laddho’’ti tuṭṭho ukkhipitvā passanto sovatthikattayadassanena ‘‘sappo’’ti sañjānitvā bhīto ādīnavaṃ disvā gahaṇe nibbinno muñcitukāmo hutvā muñcanassa upāyaṃ karonto agganaṅguṭṭhato paṭṭhāya hatthaṃ nibbeṭhetvā bāhaṃ ukkhipitvā uparisīse dve tayo vāre paribbhametvā sappaṃ dubbalaṃ katvā ‘‘gaccha re duṭṭhasappā’’ti nissajjitvā vegena thalaṃ āruyha ṭhitova ‘‘mahantassa vata bho sappassa mukhato muttomhī’’ti haṭṭho āgatamaggaṃ olokeyya.
在这里,就像那个人把黑蛇误认成鱼,紧紧抓住它而欢喜;同样,这位修行者最初还是愚痴凡夫时,对令人怖畏的五蕴,以无常等相,却以“常”等想,用“我”“我的”这些邪见和渴爱紧紧抓住它,因而欢喜。就像那人从捕鱼筐口把蛇抽出来,看见蛇身上的三个卍字纹,认出“这是蛇”;同样,修行者通过把握有因有缘的名色,破除密集想,再以聚思惟等智,看见五蕴无常、苦、无我的三相,从而确定“这是无常、是苦、是无我”。就像那人害怕起来,这好比修行者的怖畏现起智。就像看见蛇的过患,这好比过患随观智。就像对抓蛇生起厌离,这好比厌离随观智。就像想要把蛇放掉,这好比欲解脱智。就像寻找放掉蛇的方法,这好比审察随观智。就像把蛇甩来甩去,使它虚弱无力,再也不能回头咬人;同样,把三相投射到诸行上,以行舍智和随顺智把诸行转来转去,使它虚弱无力,再也不能以常、乐、我的样子出现。就像终于把蛇放掉,这好比种姓智。就像放掉蛇后登上旱地站住,这好比登上涅槃之地而安住的道果智。就像欢喜的人回望来路,这好比道等省察智。巴利
Tattha tassa purisassa macchasaññāya kaṇhasappaṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā tussanaṃ viya imassa yogino ādito bālaputhujjanassa aniccatādivasena bhayānakaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ niccādisaññāya ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti diṭṭhitaṇhāhi daḷhaṃ gahetvā tussanaṃ, tassa khippamukhato sappaṃ nīharitvā sovatthikattayaṃ disvā ‘‘sappo’’ti sañjānanaṃ viya sappaccayanāmarūpapariggahena ghanavinibbhogaṃ katvā kalāpasammasanādīhi ñāṇehi khandhapañcakassa aniccatādilakkhaṇattayaṃ disvā ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā’’ti tassa vavatthāpanaṃ , tassa bhāyanaṃ viya imassa bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ, sappe ādīnavadassanaṃ viya ādīnavānupassanāñāṇaṃ, sappagahaṇe nibbindanaṃ viya nibbidānupassanāñāṇaṃ, sappaṃ muñcitukāmatā viya muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṃ, muñcanassa upāyakaraṇaṃ viya paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇaṃ, sappaṃ paribbhametvā dubbalaṃ katvā nivattitvā ḍaṃsituṃ asamatthabhāvapāpanaṃ viya tilakkhaṇāropanena saṅkhārupekkhānulomañāṇehi saṅkhāre paribbhametvā dubbalaṃ katvā puna niccasukhattākārena upaṭṭhātuṃ asamatthatāpāpanaṃ, sappavissajjanaṃ viya gotrabhuñāṇaṃ, sappaṃ vissajjetvā thalaṃ āruyha ṭhānaṃ viya nibbānathalaṃ āruyha ṭhitaṃ maggaphalañāṇaṃ, haṭṭhassa āgatamaggolokanaṃ viya maggādipaccavekkhaṇañāṇanti.
这十四种智,从闻所成智等开始,因为是按照生起的次第、修行的次第和说法的次第来讲说的,所以应当知道:在省察的时候,最先省察的是烦恼,之后才是省察道、果和涅槃。巴利
Imesañca sutamayañāṇādīnaṃ cuddasannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ uppattikkamena paṭipattikkamena ca desanakkamassa katattā paccavekkhaṇesu paṭhamaṃ kilesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ hoti, tato maggaphalanibbānapaccavekkhaṇānīti veditabbaṃ.
他修习出世间禅那,这种禅那是能导出的、能令诸法减损的,目的是断除各种恶见,目的是让欲贪和嗔恚变薄弱,目的是无余地断除欲贪和嗔恚,目的是无余地断除色贪、无色贪、慢、掉举和无明。(《法集论》277, 361–363)由于这些教导是侧重断除烦恼而讲修道实践的,所以按照修行实际的情形,把对烦恼的省察放在开头是合理的。不过,注疏里所说的次第已经展示过了。那个次第有五种:生起次第、断除次第、修行次第、地位次第、说法次第。巴利
‘‘Lokuttaraṃ jhānaṃ bhāveti niyyānikaṃ apacayagāmiṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāya, kāmarāgabyāpādānaṃ tanubhāvāya, kāmarāgabyāpādānaṃ anavasesappahānāya, rūparāgaarūparāgamānauddhaccaavijjānaṃ anavasesappahānāyā’’ti (dha. sa. 277, 361-363) ca kilesappahānaṃyeva adhikaṃ katvā maggapaṭipattiyā vuttattā paṭipattānurūpeneva kilesapaccavekkhaṇassa ādibhāvo yujjati, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttakkamo pana dassitoyeva. So pana kamo pañcavidho uppattikkamo pahānakkamo paṭipattikkamo bhūmikkamo desanakkamoti.
最初是羯罗蓝,从羯罗蓝成为阿浮陀;
从阿浮陀生出闭尸,从闭尸生出伽那。巴利
‘‘Paṭhamaṃ kalalaṃ hoti, kalalā hoti abbudaṃ; Abbudā jāyate pesi, pesi nibbattatī ghano’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.235) –
像这样“生起的次第”等等。“见所断的法、修所断的法”(《法集论·论母》三法8)这样一类,是断除的次第。“戒清净、心清净、见清净、度疑清净、道非道知见清净、行道知见清净、知见清净”这样一类,是修行的次第。“欲界法、色界法、无色界法”(《法集论·论母》二法93-95)这样一类,是地的次第。“四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八支圣道”(《中部》3.43;《大义释》191;《小义释·慈童请问义释》22),或者“他讲了次第说法,也就是:布施论、戒论、生天论、诸欲的过患、卑下、杂染,以及出离的功德”(《大品》31;《长部》1.298;2.83)这样一类,是说法次第。但在这里,因为这十四种智是按生起次第和修行次第这两种先后顺序来说的,所以应当知道有三种次第:生起次第、修行次第、说法次第。巴利
Evamādi uppattikkamo. ‘‘Dassanena pahātabbā dhammā, bhāvanāya pahātabbā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. tikamātikā 8) evamādi pahānakkamo. ‘‘Sīlavisuddhi cittavisuddhi diṭṭhivisuddhi kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi ñāṇadassanavisuddhī’’ti evamādi paṭipattikkamo. ‘‘Kāmāvacarā dhammā, rūpāvacarā dhammā, arūpāvacarā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 93-95) evamādi bhūmikkamo. ‘‘Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā cattāro sammappadhānā cattāro iddhipādā pañcindriyāni pañca balāni satta bojjhaṅgā ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti (ma. ni. 3.43; mahāni. 191; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 22) vā, ‘‘anupubbikathaṃ kathesi. Seyyathidaṃ – dānakathaṃ sīlakathaṃ saggakathaṃ kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃ nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsesī’’ti (mahāva. 31; dī. ni. 1.298; 2.83) vā evamādi desanakkamo. Idha pana cuddasannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ uppattikkamo paṭipattikkamo ca tadubhayavasena paṭipāṭiyā desitattā desanakkamo cāti tayo kamā veditabbā.
15 15. 现在,因为前面没有用具体的方式说明名色确定智,所以为了显示名色的五种区分,列出了“于内确定之慧”“于境差别之智”等五种智。确实,当整体说明名色时,凡是能够把握的,以及应当把握的,他都会去把握。因为出世间的名法既无法把握,由于尚未证得的缘故;也不应当把握,因为它不是观智的所缘。其中,“于内确定”是指:以“如此运转的我们将会落入‘我’的执取”这样的意图,把自己作为对象而运转,所以称为“内”。“内”这个词出现在四种含义中:所行内、自有内、内内、境内。比如“阿难,那位比丘应当就在先前那个定相上,只让心在内安住,以内为喜乐、得定”(《法句》362等)这类句子中,这是“所行内”。在“内净信”(《长部》1.228;《法集论》161)、“或者于内诸法中随观法而住”(《长部》2.373等)这类句子中,是“自有内”。在“六内处”“内法”(《法集论·论母》三法20等)这类句子中,是“内内”。在“然而阿难,这个住法乃是如来所现证——即不作意一切相,具足内空而住”(《中部》3.187等)这类句子中,是“境内”,意思是自在之处。因为果定对诸佛来说就叫作自在之处。但在这里应当理解为“内内”。对诸内的确定,就是“于内确定”。“于境差别”是指境的种种不同,意思是种种不同的境。在这里,作为速行意识的条件的有分心,也像眼等五识一样,因为是生起的处所,所以被称为“境”。作意也应当依止它而进行。巴利
15. Idāni yasmā heṭṭhā sarūpena nāmarūpavavatthānañāṇaṃ na vuttaṃ, tasmā pañcadhā nāmarūpappabhedaṃ dassetuṃ ajjhattavavatthāne paññā vatthunānatte ñāṇantiādīni pañca ñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Sakale hi nāmarūpe vutte yaṃ pariggahetuṃ sakkā, yañca pariggahetabbaṃ, taṃ pariggahessati. Lokuttaranāmañhi pariggahetuñca na sakkā anadhigatattā, na ca pariggahetabbaṃ avipassanūpagattā. Tattha ajjhattavavatthāneti ‘‘evaṃ pavattamānā mayaṃ attāti gahaṇaṃ gamissāmā’’ti iminā viya adhippāyena attānaṃ adhikāraṃ katvā pavattāti ajjhattā. Ajjhattasaddo panāyaṃ gocarajjhatte niyakajjhatte ajjhattajjhatte visayajjhatteti catūsu atthesu dissati . ‘‘Tena, ānanda, bhikkhunā tasmiṃyeva purimasmiṃ samādhinimitte ajjhattameva cittaṃ saṇṭhapetabbaṃ, ajjhattarato samāhito’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 362) hi ayaṃ gocarajjhatte dissati. ‘‘Ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ (dī. ni. 1.228; dha. sa. 161), ajjhattaṃ vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.373) niyakajjhatte. ‘‘Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni, ajjhattikā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. tikamātikā 20) ajjhattajjhatte. ‘‘Ayaṃ kho, panānanda, vihāro tathāgatena abhisambuddho yadidaṃ sabbanimittānaṃ amanasikārā ajjhattaṃ suññataṃ upasampajja viharatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.187) visayajjhatte, issariyaṭṭhāneti attho. Phalasamāpatti hi buddhānaṃ issariyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Idha pana ajjhattajjhatte daṭṭhabbo. Tesaṃ ajjhattānaṃ vavatthāne ajjhattavavatthāne. Vatthunānatteti vatthūnaṃ nānābhāve, nānāvatthūsūti attho. Ettha javanamanoviññāṇassa paccayabhūto bhavaṅgamanopi cakkhādipañcakaṃ viya uppattiṭṭhānattā vatthūti vutto. Āvajjanampi tannissitameva kātabbaṃ.
“外”是指相对于六种内处而言,存在于外的那些境。“行境差别”是指在境域上的差别。巴利
Bahiddhāti chahi ajjhattajjhattehi bahibhūtesu tesaṃ visayesu. Gocaranānatteti visayanānatte.
17 17. 关于“行安立”:这是指依照识行、无明行、智行来对诸行加以确定。也有人把“行安立”读成短音形式。巴利
17.Cariyāvavatthāneti viññāṇacariyāaññāṇacariyāñāṇacariyāvasena cariyānaṃ vavatthāne. ‘‘Cariyavavatthāne’’ti rassaṃ katvāpi paṭhanti.
18 18. 关于“四法安立”:这是指依照欲界地等十四种四法组合,对四法一组一组地进行确定。而“地”这个词,在“在地上与在空中的”等语句中,指的是大地;在“孩子,不要亲近非地”等语句中,指的是领域;在“于乐地,即欲界”等语句中,指的是生起之处。在这里,则是指分类,也有人说是分界。巴利
18.Catudhammavavatthāneti kāmāvacarabhūmiādīnaṃ cuddasannaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena catunnaṃ catunnaṃ dhammānaṃ vavatthāne. Bhūmīti ca ‘‘bhūmigatañca vehāsaṭṭhañcā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.136) pathaviyaṃ vattati. ‘‘Abhūmiṃ tāta, mā sevā’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.6.34) visaye. ‘‘Sukhabhūmiyaṃ kāmāvacare’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 988) uppajjanaṭṭhāne. Idha pana koṭṭhāse vattati. Paricchedetipi vadanti.
19 19. “于九法安立”:是指依欲界善等、以欢悦为根本、以如理作意为根本,对九法一组一组地加以确定。在这五种智中,首先应当确定内法,所以在事差别上说的智是第一;接着应当确定它们的境,所以紧接着说了行境差别智;之后三种智,则是按三、四、九的数目依次而说。巴利
19.Navadhammavavatthāneti kāmāvacarakusalādivasena pāmojjamūlakavasena yoniso manasikāramūlakavasena ca navannaṃ navannaṃ dhammānaṃ vavatthāne. Imesu ca pañcasu ñāṇesu paṭhamaṃ ajjhattadhammā vavatthāpetabbāti vatthunānatte ñāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ, tato tesaṃ visayā vavatthāpetabbāti tadanantaraṃ gocaranānatte ñāṇaṃ vuttaṃ, tato parāni tīṇi ñāṇāni tiṇṇaṃ catunnaṃ navannaṃ vasena gaṇanānulomena vuttāni.
20 现在,因为对名色本身按分类加以确定的那种智就是知遍知,紧接着它的是审察遍知,再紧接着它的是断遍知,这样就有三种遍知。与它们相关的还有修习与作证,所以在法差别智之后,列举了知义智等五种智。其实,三种遍知就是知遍知、审察遍知和断遍知。其中,像“色以变坏为特征,受以感受为特征”这样,通过把握每一种法各自的特征而生起的智慧,就叫知遍知。像“色是无常、苦、无我,受是无常、苦、无我”这样,把共同特征套用到每一种法上而生起的、以特征为所缘的观慧,就叫审察遍知。而在这些法上,为了断除常想等而生起的、以特征为所缘的观,就叫断遍知。巴利
20. Idāni yasmā nāmarūpasseva pabhedato vavatthāpanañāṇaṃ ñātapariññā, tadanantaraṃ tīraṇapariññā, tadanantaraṃ pahānapariññāti tisso pariññā. Taṃsambandhā ca bhāvanāsacchikiriyā honti, tasmā dhammanānattañāṇānantaraṃ ñātaṭṭhe ñāṇādīni pañca ñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tisso hi pariññā ñātapariññā tīraṇapariññā pahānapariññā ca. Tattha ‘‘ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ, vedayitalakkhaṇā vedanā’’ti evaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ paccattalakkhaṇasallakkhaṇavasena pavattā paññā ñātapariññā nāma. ‘‘Rūpaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā, vedanā aniccā dukkhā anattā’’tiādinā nayena tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā pavattā lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāpaññā tīraṇapariññā nāma. Tesuyeva pana dhammesu niccasaññādipajahanavasena pavattā lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāva pahānapariññā nāma.
在这当中,从行分别开始,直到缘摄受,属于知遍知的阶段。在这个阶段,是以通达诸法的自相为主导。从蕴聚思择开始,直到生灭随观,属于度遍知的阶段。在这个阶段,是以通达共相为主导。从坏灭随观开始往上,属于断遍知的阶段。因为从那时起,正如《无碍解道》所说:“随观无常的人舍断常想,随观苦的人舍断乐想,随观无我的人舍断我想,厌离的人舍断欢喜,离贪的人舍断贪,随观灭的人舍断集,舍遣的人舍断执取。”如此,以断除常想等为目标的七种随观就成为主导。巴利
Tattha saṅkhāraparicchedato paṭṭhāya yāva paccayapariggahā ñātapariññāya bhūmi. Etasmiñhi antare dhammānaṃ paccattalakkhaṇapaṭivedhasseva ādhipaccaṃ hoti. Kalāpasammasanato paṭṭhāya yāva udayabbayānupassanā tīraṇapariññāya bhūmi. Etasmiñhi antare sāmaññalakkhaṇapaṭivedhasseva ādhipaccaṃ hoti. Bhaṅgānupassanaṃ ādiṃ katvā upari pahānapariññāya bhūmi. Tato paṭṭhāya hi ‘‘aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahati, dukkhato anupassanto sukhasaññaṃ pajahati, anattato anupassanto attasaññaṃ pajahati, nibbindanto nandiṃ pajahati, virajjanto rāgaṃ pajahati, nirodhento samudayaṃ pajahati, paṭinissajjanto ādānaṃ pajahatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.52) evaṃ niccasaññādipahānasādhikānaṃ sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ ādhipaccaṃ hoti.
在这里,“胜智”是指以诸法变坏等自性而了知的智慧。它因为abhi一词具有善美的含义,在作“以了知一一法的自性而善美地了知”之解后,被称为胜智。“知义智”则是以了知为自性的智慧。巴利
Tattha abhiññāpaññāti dhammānaṃ ruppanādisabhāvena jānanapaññā. Sā hi sobhanaṭṭhena abhisaddena ‘‘tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvajānanavasena sobhanaṃ jānana’’nti katvā abhiññāti vuccati. Ñātaṭṭhe ñāṇanti jānanasabhāvaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
21 遍知智就是了知的智慧。它因为前缀pari有周遍的意思,所以称为遍知,意思是依无常等共相,或依各自作用的完成而周遍了知。度义智则是具有审察之性、或具有思惟之性的智慧。巴利
21.Pariññāpaññāti jānanapaññā. Sā hi byāpanaṭṭhena parisaddena ‘‘aniccādisāmaññalakkhaṇavasena sakiccasamāpanavasena vā byāpitaṃ jānana’’nti katvā pariññāti vuccati. Tīraṇaṭṭhe ñāṇanti upaparikkhaṇasabhāvaṃ, sammasanasabhāvaṃ vā ñāṇaṃ.
22 22.「断慧」是指断除常想等(颠倒想)的慧;或者因为“它断除”,或者因为“以它而断除”,所以叫“断”。「舍义智」是指以舍离为本质的智。巴利
22.Pahānepaññāti niccasaññādīnaṃ pajahanā paññā, pajahatīti vā, pajahanti etenāti vā pahānaṃ. Pariccāgaṭṭheñāṇanti pariccajanasabhāvaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
23 修习智就是不断增长的智慧。一味义智,是指具有同一作用这一本质的智,或者从解脱味来说,是指具有一味这一本质的智。巴利
23.Bhāvanāpaññāti vaḍḍhanapaññā. Ekarasaṭṭhe ñāṇanti ekakiccasabhāvaṃ ñāṇaṃ, vimuttirasena vā ekarasasabhāvaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
24 作证智,是指通过通达或通过获得而现前证得的智慧。触义智,则是依这两者而具有发现性质的智慧。巴利
24.Sacchikiriyāpaññāti paṭivedhavasena paṭilābhavasena vā paccakkhakaraṇapaññā. Phassanaṭṭhe ñāṇanti tadubhayavaseneva vindanasabhāvaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
25-28 25-28. 现在,因为断智、修习智和作证智也都与圣道、圣果相应,所以紧接着列出了只有圣者才能获得的四种无碍解智。其中,作为缘所生的“义”就像苦谛一样明显、容易理解,所以先列出义无碍解智;这个“义”以因法为所缘,所以紧接着列出法无碍解智;这两者都以言辞为所缘,所以紧接着列出辞无碍解智;此智在前三种智中都能运转,所以紧接着列出辩无碍解智。诵读时,把“pa”音拉长来念。巴利
25-28. Idāni yasmā pahānabhāvanāsacchikiriyañāṇāni ariyamaggaphalasampayuttānipi honti, tasmā tadanantaraṃ ariyapuggalānaṃyeva labbhamānāni cattāri paṭisambhidāñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tatthāpi paccayuppanno attho dukkhasaccaṃ viya pākaṭo suviññeyyo cāti paṭhamaṃ atthapaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, tassa atthassa hetudhammavisayattā tadanantaraṃ dhammapaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ, tadubhayassa niruttivisayattā tadanantaraṃ niruttipaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ, tesu tīsupi ñāṇesu pavattanato tadanantaraṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ. Pa-kāraṃ dīghaṃ katvā ca paṭhanti.
29-31 从这之后,“住义智”等三种智,因为只有圣者才能生起,而且是从无碍解的差别来分类的,所以紧接在无碍解智之后列出。关于“住”这个义的智就是法无碍解,关于“等至”这个义的智就是义无碍解。在《无碍解道》(2.30)中说到:对法自性的智是法无碍解。而对涅槃的智则是义无碍解。这里所说的“住之种种”,是指以无常随观等不同方式进行的种种观住。“住义”是指观住的自性。“住”指的就是与相应心所一起生起的观本身。“等至之种种”,是指以无相等不同方式入的种种果等至。“等至”是指属于出世间果的心与心所法。“住等至之种种”则是从“住”和“等至”两方面来说的。巴利
29-31. Ito parāni vihāraṭṭhe ñāṇādīni tīṇi ñāṇāni ariyānaṃyeva sambhavato paṭisambhidāpabhedato ca paṭisambhidāñāṇānantaraṃ uddiṭṭhāni. Vihāraṭṭhe ñāṇañhi dhammapaṭisambhidā hoti, samāpattaṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā. Dhammasabhāve ñāṇañhi paṭisambhidākathāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 2.30) dhammapaṭisambhidāti vuttaṃ. Nibbāne ñāṇaṃ pana atthapaṭisambhidā eva. Tattha vihāranānatteti aniccānupassanādivasena nānāvipassanāvihāre. Vihāraṭṭheti vipassanāvihārasabhāve. Vihāroti ca sasampayuttā vipassanā eva. Samāpattinānatteti animittādivasena nānāphalasamāpattiyaṃ. Samāpattīti ca lokuttaraphalabhūtā cittacetasikadhammā. Vihārasamāpattinānatteti ubhayavasena vuttaṃ.
32 32. 此后,为了用原因来特别说明那能实现住定之智的、先前已说过的“从两边出起与转向的慧”即道智,具有断尽诸漏的能力以及给予无间果的性质,又以另一种方式来说明它,所以就把这同一个道智举示为“无间定中的智”。其中,“由无散乱的清净性故”:使心散乱的东西就是散乱,这是掉举的名称。没有散乱就是无散乱,这是与掉举相对立的定的名称。清净的状态就是清净性,无散乱的清净性就是无散乱的清净性,因此,“由无散乱的清净性故”的意思就是:由于定的清净状态。这确实是用来说明断尽诸漏以及给予无间果的原因的说法。在“断尽诸漏”中:因为它们流漏,所以称为漏,意思是它们从眼……乃至从意流出、转起。或者,就法而言直到种姓智,就处所而言直到有顶,它们都在流动,所以是漏,意思是在这法和这处所的范围内运作。这里的“ā”前缀,就是“在内运作”的意思。又因为长久存留的性质,就像酒等被称为漏一样,这些也可称为漏。因为在世间,长久存放的酒等就被称为漏。如果因为长久存留的性质而称为漏,那么只有这些才配称为漏。因为确实这样说过——巴利
32. Tato vihārasamāpattiñāṇasādhakassa ‘‘dubhato vuṭṭhānavivaṭṭane paññā’’ti pubbe vuttassāpi maggañāṇassa āsavasamucchedasamatthataṃ anantaraphaladāyakattañca kāraṇena visesetvā aparenākārena vattukāmena tadeva ‘‘ānantarikasamādhimhi ñāṇa’’nti uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha avikkhepaparisuddhattāti vikkhipati tena cittanti vikkhepo, uddhaccassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Na vikkhepo avikkhepo, uddhaccapaṭipakkhassa samādhissetaṃ nāmaṃ. Parisuddhassa bhāvo parisuddhattaṃ, avikkhepassa parisuddhattaṃ avikkhepaparisuddhattaṃ, tasmā avikkhepaparisuddhattā samādhissa parisuddhabhāvenāti attho. Idañhi āsavasamucchedassa anantaraphaladāyakattassa ca kāraṇavacanaṃ. Āsavasamucchedeti ettha āsavantīti āsavā, cakkhutopi…pe… manatopi sandanti pavattantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammato yāva gotrabhuṃ, okāsato yāva bhavaggaṃ savantīti vā āsavā, etaṃ dhammaṃ etañca okāsaṃ antokaritvā pavattantīti attho. Antokaraṇattho hi ayaṃ ā-kāro. Cirapārivāsikaṭṭhena madirādayo āsavā viyātipi āsavā. Lokasmiñhi cirapārivāsikā madirādayo āsavāti vuccanti. Yadi ca cirapārivāsikaṭṭhena āsavā, eteyeva bhavitumarahanti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,无明的起始点无法得知,所谓“在这之前并没有无明,之后才生起了无明”等等。巴利
‘‘Purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, ito pubbe avijjā nāhosi, atha pacchā samabhavī’’tiādi.
或者,它们让漫长的轮回之苦流动、涌出,所以叫漏。被这个斩断,因此称为斩断。慧,即欲漏等四种漏的断除的智慧。巴利
Āyataṃ vā saṃsāradukkhaṃ savanti pasavantītipi āsavā, samucchijjati etenāti samucchedo. Paññāti kāmāsavādīnaṃ catunnaṃ āsavānaṃ samucchede paññā.
“无间定中的智”:这是指道定,因为它在自己生起之后,必定紧接着无间地产生果,所以得到“无间”这个名字。因为当道定已经生起时,确实没有任何障碍能阻止它的果产生。正如所说的:巴利
Ānantarikasamādhimhiñāṇanti attano pavattisamanantaraṃ niyameneva phalappadānato ānantarikoti laddhanāmo maggasamādhi. Na hi maggasamādhimhi uppanne tassa phaluppattinisedhako koci antarāyo atthi. Yathāha –
如果这个人正在为了亲证入流果而修行,而劫火也正要烧起来,那么只要这个人还没有亲证入流果,劫火就不会烧起来。这种人就叫作“住劫者”。一切具有道的人,都是住劫者。巴利
‘‘Ayañca puggalo sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno assa, kappassa ca uḍḍayhanavelā assa, neva tāva kappo uḍḍayheyya, yāvāyaṃ puggalo na sotāpattiphalaṃ sacchikaroti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo ṭhitakappī. Sabbepi maggasamaṅgino puggalā ṭhitakappino’’ti (pu. pa. 17).
这就是与那无间定相应的智。巴利
Idaṃ tena ānantarikasamādhinā sampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
33 33. 因为以这个道智而证得果位的圣者们才有这种智,所以紧接着这个智之后,列出了无害住智等四种智。在那里,无害住智只属于阿罗汉,而且因为它只在阿罗汉身上持续生起,所以被列在第一位;紧接着它之后,因为灭尽定虽然也能在不还者和阿罗汉身上生起,但由于需要诸多资粮,而且特别因为灭被认定为涅槃,所以列出了灭尽定智;紧接着那之后,因为般涅槃要经过一段时间,要到般涅槃的时候才现前,所以是长时的,因此列出了般涅槃智;紧接着那之后,因为齐首住者在一切烦恼灭尽之后,随即到达般涅槃的时刻而安住,所以是短时的,因此列出了齐首住智。其中,“而寂静的”这个“而”字,应当与“见增上”、“寂静的住证得”以及“胜妙决意性”这三个词连接起来理解。“见”是指观智;“增上”就是增上的意思,或者因为是从增上而来的,所以叫增上;它既是见又是增上,所以叫“见增上”。“住”是指他安住,或者因为他依此而住所以叫住;“证得”是指被证得、被达到;“住证得”就是住本身就是证得。这个住证得因为没有烦恼的热恼,所以是“寂静的”。它也就是阿罗汉果等至的智慧。“胜妙”因为是最上的意义、没有逼迫恼害的意义,所以叫胜妙,或者因为被置于首要地位所以叫胜妙;在胜妙中决意、心无旁骛、以此为最上者,就是“胜妙决意者”,他的状态就是“胜妙决意性”。而这个胜妙决意性,就是趣向果等至之前分慧。巴利
33. Iminā maggañāṇena phalappattānaṃ ariyānaṃyeva sambhavato imassa ñāṇassa anantaraṃ araṇavihārañāṇādīni cattāri ñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tatrāpi ca arahatoyeva satatameva ca sambhavato araṇavihāre ñāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, tadanantaraṃ nirodhassa anāgāmiarahantānaṃ sambhavepi bahusambhārattā visesena ca nirodhassa nibbānasammatattā ca nirodhasamāpattiyā ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, tadanantaraṃ parinibbānassa kālantare parinibbānakālaṃ āhacca ṭhitattā dīghakālikanti parinibbāne ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, tadanantaraṃ samasīsaṭṭhassa sabbakilesakhayānantaraṃ parinibbānakālaṃ āhacca ṭhitattā rassakālikanti samasīsaṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha santo cāti ca-kāro dassanādhipateyyañca santo vihārādhigamo ca paṇītādhimuttatā cāti tīhipi padehi sambandhitabbo. Dassananti vipassanāñāṇaṃ, adhipatiyeva ādhipateyyaṃ, adhipatito vā āgatattā ādhipateyyaṃ, dassanañca taṃ ādhipateyyañcāti dassanādhipateyyaṃ. Viharatīti vihāro, viharanti tena vāti vihāro, adhigammati pāpuṇīyatīti adhigamo, vihāro eva adhigamo vihārādhigamo. So ca kilesapariḷāhavirahitattā nibbutoti santo. So ca arahattaphalasamāpattipaññā. Uttamaṭṭhena atappakaṭṭhena ca paṇīto, padhānabhāvaṃ nītoti vā paṇīto, paṇīte adhimutto visaṭṭhacitto tapparamo paṇītādhimutto, tassa bhāvo paṇītādhimuttatā. Sā ca phalasamāpattādhimuttā pubbabhāgapaññā eva.
“无害住”就是指没有烦恼的住。贪等烦恼会伤害、粉碎、折磨众生,所以叫“害”;或者说,众生因为这些烦恼而哭泣、悲叹,所以叫“害”。所说的住有三种。这个住没有那些害,所以叫“无害”。它能带走种种敌对的法,所以叫“住”。也就是在这个无害住当中。《详说分》(《无碍解道》1.82)里所说的初禅等,正因为属于胜妙决意性,所以也被包含在这里面。因为想进入果等至的人,先进入初禅等,出定之后观照与禅那相应的诸法;而世尊在《无害分别经》(中部3.323等)里所教导的无害行道,也应该知道同样被这里所包含。世尊在那里是这样说的:巴利
Araṇavihāreti nikkilesavihāre. Rāgādayo hi raṇanti satte cuṇṇenti pīḷentīti raṇā, raṇanti etehi sattā kandanti paridevantīti vā raṇā. Vutto tividhopi vihāro. Natthi etassa raṇāti araṇo. Vividhe paccanīkadhamme haranti etenāti vihāro. Tasmiṃ araṇe vihāre. Niddesavāre (paṭi. ma. 1.82) vuttapaṭhamajjhānādīni ca paṇītādhimuttatāya eva saṅgahitāni. Phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitukāmatāya hi paṭhamajjhānādiṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttadhamme vipassati, yā ca araṇavibhaṅgasuttante (ma. ni. 3.323 ādayo) bhagavatā desitā araṇapaṭipadā, sāpi imināva saṅgahitāti veditabbā . Vuttañhi tattha bhagavatā –
比丘们,我要为你们讲说“无诤分别”……不要沉溺于欲乐,那是低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫式的、非圣的、没有利益的;也不要沉溺于自我折磨,那是痛苦的、非圣的、没有利益的。比丘们,不靠近这两个极端,如来所彻底觉悟的中道,能让人生起清净的眼、生起智慧,导向寂静、证智、正觉、涅槃。要知道什么该抬高、什么该贬低;知道抬高和贬低之后,既不抬高也不贬低,只教导正法。要知道对快乐的判定;知道对快乐的判定之后,应当致力于内在的快乐。不说背后话,不当面说刻薄话;说话不慌不忙,不要急促。不要执著于地方方言,不要越过通用的说法。这就是“无诤分别”的总纲……比丘们,在这里,不沉溺于与欲贪相连的快乐和喜悦随顺,那是低劣的……没有利益的。这种法是无苦、无害、无忧、无热恼的,是正行道。所以这种法是“无诤”……比丘们,在这里,不沉溺于自我折磨,那是痛苦的、非圣的、没有利益的。这种法是无苦的……所以这种法是“无诤”。比丘们,在这里,如来所彻底觉悟的中道……这种法是无苦的……所以这种法是“无诤”……比丘们,在这里,既不抬高也不贬低地教导正法,这种法是无苦的……所以这种法是“无诤”……比丘们,在这里,出离的快乐、远离的快乐、寂静的快乐、正觉的快乐,这种法是无苦的……所以这种法是“无诤”……比丘们,在这里,真实的、符合事实的、有利益的背后话,这种法是无苦的……所以这种法是“无诤”……比丘们,在这里,真实的、符合事实的、有利益的当面直言,这种法是无苦的……所以这种法是“无诤”……比丘们,在这里,不慌不忙地说话,这种法是无苦的……所以这种法是“无诤”……比丘们,在这里,不执著于地方方言、不越过通用说法,这种法是无苦的……所以这种法是“无诤”。因此,比丘们,我们应当学:我们要了知有诤之法,也要了知无诤之法;了知有诤之法和无诤之法后,我们要实践无诤之道。比丘们,你们应当这样学。比丘们,善男子须菩提已经实践了无诤之道。巴利
‘‘Araṇavibhaṅgaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi…pe… na kāmasukhaṃ anuyuñjeyya hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, na ca attakilamathānuyogaṃ anuyuñjeyya dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ. Ete kho, bhikkhave, ubho ante anupagamma majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati. Ussādanañca jaññā, apasādanañca jaññā, ussādanañca ñatvā apasādanañca ñatvā nevussādeyya na apasādeyya, dhammameva deseyya. Sukhavinicchayaṃ jaññā, sukhavinicchayaṃ ñatvā ajjhattaṃ sukhamanuyuñjeyya, rahovādaṃ na bhāseyya, sammukhā na khīṇaṃ bhaṇe, ataramānova bhāseyya no taramāno, janapadaniruttiṃ nābhiniveseyya, samaññaṃ nātidhāveyyāti. Ayamuddeso araṇavibhaṅgassa …pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yo kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṃ ananuyogo hīnaṃ…pe… anatthasaṃhitaṃ, adukkho eso dhammo avighāto anupāyāso apariḷāho sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yo attakilamathānuyogaṃ ananuyogo dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ. Adukkho eso dhammo …pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yāyaṃ majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā…pe… adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yāyaṃ nevussādanā na apasādanā dhammadesanā ca, adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yadidaṃ nekkhammasukhaṃ pavivekasukhaṃ upasamasukhaṃ sambodhisukhaṃ, adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ rahovādo bhūto taccho atthasaṃhito, adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo …pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ sammukhā khīṇavādo bhūto taccho atthasaṃhito, adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yadidaṃ ataramānassa bhāsitaṃ, adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ janapadaniruttiyā ca anabhiniveso samaññāya ca anatisāro, adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇoti. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, saraṇañca dhammaṃ jānissāma, araṇañca dhammaṃ jānissāma. Saraṇañca dhammaṃ ñatvā araṇañca dhammaṃ ñatvā araṇaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipajjissāmāti evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṃ. Subhūti ca pana, bhikkhave, kulaputto araṇapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno’’ti.
在这里,中道由以见为主导的寂静住证得所涵盖。不随逐欲乐与自我折磨,就是中道本身。对阿罗汉来说,观的前分阶段是中道,以八支圣道现起的阿罗汉果等至也是中道。其余的则应理解为仅由殊胜信解所涵盖。虽然一切阿罗汉都是无诤而住者,但其他阿罗汉在说法时,仍会依人而作赞叹或贬损,说“对正行者,是正行”“对邪行者,是邪行”。而须菩提长老说法时,只依法而说:“这是邪行道,这是正行道。”因此,世尊称赞他行于无诤之道,并把他在无诤而住者中列为第一:“诸比丘,在我的声闻比丘中,无诤而住者第一,就是须菩提。”由此把他安立在无诤而住者中最高的位置。巴利
Tattha majjhimā paṭipadā dassanādhipateyyena ca santena vihārādhigamena ca saṅgahitā. Kāmasukhaṃ attakilamathaṃ ananuyogo majjhimā paṭipadā eva. Arahato hi vipassanāpubbabhāgamajjhimā paṭipadā hoti, arahattaphalasamāpatti aṭṭhaṅgamaggavasena majjhimā paṭipadā ca. Sesā pana paṇītādhimuttatāya eva saṅgahitāti veditabbā. Kiñcāpi sabbepi arahanto araṇavihārino, aññe arahanto dhammaṃ desentā ‘‘sammāpaṭipanne sammāpaṭipannā’’ti ‘‘micchāpaṭipanne micchāpaṭipannā’’ti puggalavasenāpi ussādanāpasādanāni katvā dhammaṃ desenti. Subhūtitthero pana ‘‘ayaṃ micchāpaṭipadā, ayaṃ sammāpaṭipadā’’ti dhammavaseneva dhammaṃ desesi. Teneva bhagavā taṃyeva araṇapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannoti ca vaṇṇesi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ araṇavihārīnaṃ yadidaṃ subhūtī’’ti (a. ni. 1.198, 201) ca araṇavihārīnaṃ aggaṭṭhāne ṭhapesīti.
34 以两种力:就是以止的力和观的力。具足:意思是相应,或者圆满。说“三”是语法上的变化,实际说的是“三种”。“诸行”:指语行、身行、心行。“寂止”:是为了寂止、为了灭尽,也就是不再生起。“十六”:无常随观等八种,加上道与果八种,共十六种。“智行”:指智的运作。“九”:色界定、无色界定以及近行定,共九种。“自在性慧”:轻快就是自在,能随自己意愿运作就是自在力,拥有这个力的人就是自在者,自在者的状态就是自在性,自在性本身就是自在性,就像厌逆本身就是厌逆一样。这样的慧,就是依自在性而说的慧。也有人把它读成长音的“sī”。“具足”“寂止”“智行”“定行”这几个词里的“以及”,应当连在一起理解。巴利
34.Dvīhi balehīti samathabalavipassanābalehi. Samannāgatattāti yuttattā paripuṇṇattā vā. Tayo cāti vibhattivipallāso, tiṇṇañcāti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṅkhārānanti vacīsaṅkhārakāyasaṅkhāracittasaṅkhārānaṃ. Paṭippassaddhiyāti paṭippassaddhatthaṃ nirodhatthaṃ, appavattatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Soḷasahīti aniccānupassanādīni aṭṭha, maggaphalāni aṭṭhāti soḷasahi. Ñāṇacariyāhīti ñāṇappavattīhi. Navahīti rūpārūpāvacarasamādhi tadupacāro cāti navahi. Vasibhāvatā paññāti lahutā, yathāsukhavattanaṃ issariyaṃ vaso, so assa atthīti vasī, vasino bhāvo vasibhāvo, vasibhāvo eva vasibhāvatā, yathā pāṭikulyameva pāṭikulyatā. Evaṃvidhā paññā vasibhāvatāya paññāti vā attho. Si-kāraṃ dīghaṃ katvā ca paṭhanti. Samannāgatattā ca paṭippassaddhiyā ca ñāṇacariyāhi ca samādhicariyāhi cāti ca-kāro sambandhitabbo.
称为“灭尽定之智”的,是不来者和阿拉汉关于灭尽定相的智,就像“豹子因为自己的皮而被杀”那个比喻一样。而所谓“灭尽定”,只是非想非非想处的无有而已,并不是任何实法,仅仅是假名施设,因为纯粹是无有,所以称为“灭”。由于是入定者所入,所以称为“定”。巴利
Nirodhasamāpattiyā ñāṇanti anāgāmiarahantānaṃ nirodhasamāpattinimittaṃ ñāṇaṃ, yathā ajinamhi haññate dīpīti. Nirodhasamāpattīti ca nevasaññānāsaññāyatanassa abhāvamattaṃ, na koci dhammo, paññattimattaṃ abhāvamattattā nirodhoti ca. Samāpajjantena samāpajjīyati nāmāti samāpattīti ca vuccati.
35 “正知者”:因为以正确的方式了知,所以叫“正知者”。这里指的就是那位正知者。“于转起的耗尽”:“转起”就是现行,意思是活动。既包括烦恼的转起,也包括五蕴的转起。对这种转起的耗尽、灭尽、不再生起,就是“转起的耗尽”。在这个转起的耗尽中。“于般涅槃的智”:就是阿拉汉在省察自身爱欲等烦恼的般涅槃——不再生起——以及五蕴无余般涅槃时,对烦恼般涅槃和蕴般涅槃所生起的智慧。巴利
35.Sampajānassāti sammā pakārehi jānātīti sampajāno. Tassa sampajānassa. Pavattapariyādāneti pavattanaṃ pavattaṃ, samudācāroti attho. Kilesapavattaṃ khandhapavattañca. Tassa pavattassa pariyādānaṃ parikkhayo appavatti pavattapariyādānaṃ. Tasmiṃ pavattapariyādāne. Parinibbāne ñāṇanti arahato kāmacchandādīnaṃ parinibbānaṃ appavattaṃ anupādisesaparinibbānañca paccavekkhantassa tasmiṃ kilesaparinibbāne khandhaparinibbāne ca pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
36 “对一切法”:指三界里的一切法。“彻底断除”:就是通过断掉相续,让它完全灭尽。“灭去后不再出现”:是说已经灭去的法不会再显现,也就是不再生起的意思。这里要把“彻底断除”“灭去”和“不再出现”这几层意思连起来理解。巴利
36.Sabbadhammānanti sabbesaṃ tebhūmakadhammānaṃ. Sammā samucchedeti santatisamucchedavasena suṭṭhu nirodhe. Nirodhe ca anupaṭṭhānatāti nirodhe gate puna na upaṭṭhānatāya, puna anuppattiyanti attho. Sammāsamucchede ca nirodhe ca anupaṭṭhānatā cāti ca-kāro sambandhitabbo.
称为“等首义智”的,是出离等三十七种“等”和贪爱等十三种“首”。因为平息了敌对之法,所以叫“等”;因为它们按各自情况最为首要、最为顶尖,所以叫“首”。在同一种威仪中,或在同一种疾病中,或依同类相续而在同一命根中,既有出离等这些“等”,也有信等这些“首”——这样的人就是“等首者”;等首者的状态就是“等首义”。意思是:在那种等首的状态中。也就是说,在同一种威仪、疾病或同类相续的寿命中发起观禅后,就在那同一种威仪、疾病或同类相续的寿命中证得四道四果,并在那里般涅槃的阿拉汉,才具有这种等首的状态。因此说“在那种等首状态中的智”。《人施设论》及其注释中也这样说:巴利
Samasīsaṭṭhe ñāṇanti nekkhammādīni sattatiṃsa samāni, taṇhādīni terasa sīsāni. Paccanīkadhammānaṃ samitattā samāni, yathāyogaṃ padhānattā ca koṭittā ca sīsāni. Ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe vā ekasmiṃ roge vā sabhāgasantativasena ekasmiṃ jīvitindriye vā nekkhammādīni samāni ca saddhādīni sīsāni ca assa santīti samasīsī, samasīsissa attho samasīsaṭṭho. Tasmiṃ samasīsaṭṭhe, samasīsibhāveti attho. Ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe roge vā sabhāgasantativasena jīvite vā vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā tasmiṃyeva iriyāpathe roge sabhāgajīvite vā cattāri maggaphalāni patvā, tasmiṃyeva parinibbāyantassa arahatoyeva samasīsibhāvo hotīti tasmiṃ samasīsibhāve ñāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañca puggalapaññattiyaṃ (pu. pa. 16), tassā ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pu. pa. aṭṭha. 16) –
什么样的人是“等首者”呢?如果一个人,他的烦恼漏尽和寿命终结同时发生,没有先后之分,这样的人就称为“等首者”。巴利
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo samasīsī? Yassa puggalassa apubbaṃ acarimaṃ āsavapariyādānañca hoti jīvitapariyādānañca. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo samasīsī’’ti (pu. pa. 16).
对“等首者”的解释:“非前非后”就是不先不后,从相续与现在的角度来说,只是同一刹那、同一时刻的意思。“尽”就是灭尽。“此”指这个人,称为“等首者”。这个人又分三种:威仪等首者、病等首者、命等首者。其中,有人在经行时就开始修观,证得阿罗汉果后,还在经行时就般涅槃;有人在站立时就开始修观,证得阿罗汉果后,还在站立时就般涅槃;有人在坐着时就开始修观,证得阿罗汉果后,还在坐着时就般涅槃;有人在躺卧时就开始修观,证得阿罗汉果后,还在躺卧时就般涅槃;这种人称为“威仪等首者”。另有人得了某种病,就在病中开始修观,证得阿罗汉果后,就因为那种病而般涅槃;这种人称为“病等首者”。哪种是“命等首者”?有十三种“首”。其中,烦恼首是无明,由阿罗汉道灭尽;生命延续的首是命根,由死心灭尽。能灭尽无明的心不能灭尽命根,能灭尽命根的心不能灭尽无明。能灭尽无明的心是一回事,能灭尽命根的心是另一回事。如果这两个首同时灭尽,这个人就称为“命等首者”。这怎么能同时呢?靠速行刹那一致。也就是说,在那一刹那里生起道。在预流道有五种省察,在一来道有五种,在不还道有五种,在阿罗汉道有四种,共十九种省察智;安住于此之后,落入有分,然后般涅槃。正是由于这种速行刹那一致,两个首的灭尽才叫作同时。因此,这个人被称为“命等首者”。而这里所指的,正是这种人。巴利
‘‘Samasīsiniddese apubbaṃ acarimanti apure apacchā, santatipaccuppannavasena ekavāraṃyeva, ekakālaṃyevāti attho. Pariyādānanti parikkhayo. Ayanti ayaṃ puggalo samasīsī nāma vuccati. So panesa tividho hoti iriyāpathasamasīsī rogasamasīsī jīvitasamasīsīti. Tattha yo caṅkamantova vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ patvā caṅkamantova parinibbāti, yo ṭhitakova vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ patvā ṭhitakova parinibbāti, yo nisinnova vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ patvā nisinnova parinibbāti, yo nipannova vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ patvā nipannova parinibbāti, ayaṃ iriyāpathasamasīsī nāma. Yo pana ekaṃ rogaṃ patvā antorogeyeva vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ patvā teneva rogena parinibbāti, ayaṃ rogasamasīsī nāma. Kataro jīvitasamasīsī? Terasa sīsāni. Tattha kilesasīsaṃ avijjaṃ arahattamaggo pariyādiyati, pavattasīsaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ cuticittaṃ pariyādiyati, avijjāpariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti, jīvitindriyapariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ avijjaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti. Avijjāpariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ aññaṃ, jīvitindriyapariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ aññaṃ. Yassa cetaṃ sīsadvayaṃ samaṃ pariyādānaṃ gacchati, so jīvitasamasīsī nāma. Kathamidaṃ samaṃ hotīti? Vārasamatāya. Yasmiñhi vāre maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Sotāpattimagge pañca paccavekkhaṇāni, sakadāgāmimagge pañca, anāgāmimagge pañca, arahattamagge cattārīti ekūnavīsatime paccavekkhaṇañāṇe patiṭṭhāya bhavaṅgaṃ otaritvā parinibbāyati. Imāya vārasamatāya eva ubhayasīsapariyādānampi samaṃ hoti nāma. Tenāyaṃ puggalo ‘jīvitasamasīsī’ti vuccati. Ayameva ca idha adhippeto’’ti.
37 37. 现在,因为闻所成慧、戒所成慧、修所成慧只是轮回的基础,并不叫“减损”;只有出世间的基础以及这些和其他智才叫“减损”。所以,为了显示那些以削减敌对法之行相生起的智,在讲了“等首”义之后,紧接着列出了“减损”义的智。其中,“在种种不同的火热彻底耗尽时的慧”:这是说,以不与出世间法混杂之义为“种种”;以烧灼之义而得名的欲贪等,以及贪等种种不同、各有自性的烦恼,以及恶戒之类,这些的彻底耗尽、消尽,就是慧;亦即说为在出离等三十七种法中的慧。或者,“种种不同的火热”即是广大而种种的火热,这些广大而种种的恶戒等五种火热的灭尽,即是慧义。在《详说分》中,我们将阐明由火热所摄取的广大与种种。巴利
37. Idāni yasmā sutamayasīlamayabhāvanāmayañāṇāni vaṭṭapādakāni sallekhā nāma na honti, lokuttarapādakāneva etāni ca aññāni ca ñāṇāni sallekhāti vuccanti, tasmā paccanīkasallekhanākārena pavattāni ñāṇāni dassetuṃ samasīsaṭṭhe ñāṇānantaraṃ sallekhaṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha puthunānattatejapariyādāne paññāti lokuttarehi asammissaṭṭhena puthūnaṃ rāgādīnañca nānattānaṃ nānāsabhāvānaṃ kāmacchandādīnañca santāpanaṭṭhena ‘‘tejā’’ti laddhanāmānaṃ dussīlyādīnañca pariyādāne khepane paññā, nekkhammādimhi sattatiṃsabhede dhamme paññāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā puthubhūtā nānattabhūtā ca tejā eva tesaṃ puthubhūtānaṃ nānattabhūtānaṃ dussīlyādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ tejānaṃ pariyādāne paññāti attho. Tejehiyeva puthūnaṃ nānattānañca saṅgahaṃ niddesavāre pakāsayissāma.
称为“削减义之智”的,是能削减、断除敌对法的智慧,所以叫“削减”。这种智存在于出离等三十七种具有削减性质的法中。应当知道,世尊在《削减经》里以“他人将会伤害众生,我们在这里要成为不伤害众生的人——应当这样修削减”等方式所说的四十四种削减,也都包含在这里面。巴利
Sallekhaṭṭhe ñāṇanti paccanīkadhamme sallekhati samucchindatīti sallekho, tasmiṃ nekkhammādike sattatiṃsappabhede sallekhasabhāve ñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Pare vihiṃsakā bhavissanti, mayamettha avihiṃsakā bhavissāmāti sallekho karaṇīyo’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.83) nayena bhagavatā sallekhasuttante vutto catucattālīsabhedopi sallekho iminā saṅgahitoyevāti veditabbo.
38 现在,为了显示安住于削减烦恼的人应当修习的正勤精进,紧接着就列出了精进发勤之智。其中,不退缩己、已发勤精进、策励义:因为不懈怠,所以不退缩、不萎靡,所谓自己就是指心,因此叫不退缩己。正如所说:巴利
38. Idāni sallekhe ṭhitena kattabbaṃ sammappadhānavīriyaṃ dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ vīriyārambhe ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha asallīnattapahitattapaggahaṭṭheti kosajjavasena asallīno asaṅkucito attā assāti asallīnatto. Attāti cittaṃ. Yathāha –
引水的人引导水流,造箭的人把箭杆弄直;
木匠把木头调直,智者调伏自己。”等等(《法句经》80-82)——巴利
‘‘Udakañhi nayanti nettikā, usukārā namayanti tejanaṃ; Dāruṃ namayanti tacchakā, attānaṃ damayanti paṇḍitā’’ti. ādi (dha. pa. 80-82) –
对于身体和生命都不眷恋,把自己派遣出去、送出去、彻底放下,因此称为“心已投向目标的人”。“自己”指的是这个身心组合。正如经文说:“如果有比丘尼一再打自己而哭泣”等等。他既不退缩,又是心已投向目标的人,所以称为“不退缩且心已投向目标的人”。能提举、支持同时生起的诸法,就是“策励”;策励本身就是这个意思,即“策励之义”,也就是具有策励的本性。不退缩且心已投向目标者的策励之义,就是“不退缩且心已投向目标者的策励之义”。也就是住于那不退缩且心已投向目标者的策励之义中。因为经文说:“因此,比丘们,你们也应当毫不退缩地精勤努力。即使只剩下皮肤、筋、骨,身体里的血肉干枯,凡是应当以男子的力量、男子的精进、男子的奋发而证得的,如果还没有证得,精进就绝不停息。”依据这段话,用“不退缩且心已投向目标”这一说法,表明了在勤修中不退缩、不回头;而用“策励之义”这一说法,则说明了脱离懈怠和掉举、持续生起的精进。巴利
Kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāya pahito pesito vissaṭṭho attā etenāti pahitatto. Attāti attabhāvo. Yathāha – ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī attānaṃ vadhitvā vadhitvā rodeyyā’’tiādi (pāci. 880) . Asallīnatto ca so pahitatto cāti asallīnattapahitatto. Sahajātadhamme paggaṇhāti upatthambhetīti paggaho, paggaho eva attho paggahaṭṭho, paggahasabhāvoti attho. Asallīnattapahitattassa paggahaṭṭho asallīnattapahitattapaggahaṭṭho. Tasmiṃ asallīnattapahitattapaggahaṭṭhe. ‘‘Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, tumhepi appaṭivānaṃ padaheyyātha. Kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu, upasussatu sarīre maṃsalohitaṃ. Yaṃ taṃ purisathāmena purisavīriyena purisaparakkamena pattabbaṃ, na taṃ apāpuṇitvā vīriyassa saṇṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti (a. ni. 2.5) vuttattā asallīnattapahitattavacanena padhānasmiṃ appaṭivānitā anivattanatā vuttā. Paggahaṭṭhavacanena pana kosajjuddhaccavimuttaṃ samappavattaṃ vīriyaṃ vuttaṃ.
“精进发勤之智”:“精进”就是英勇的状态,或者说是英雄的行为;或者按照规则、方法、途径应当被激发、应当被推动,所以叫精进。它的特相是奋发,作用是支撑同时生起的诸法,现起是不消沉。依据“悚惧者如理精勤”这句话,它的近因是悚惧,或者说是精进发勤的所依。应当知道:正确发起的精进是一切成就的根本。以精进为名的发勤,就是精进发勤。这个说法排除了其余意义上的发勤,因为“ārambha”这个词在业、犯戒、动作、精进、伤害、破坏等许多含义中都有出现。巴利
Vīriyārambhe ñāṇanti vīrabhāvo vīriyaṃ, vīrānaṃ vā kammaṃ, vidhinā vā nayena upāyena īrayitabbaṃ pavattayitabbanti vīriyaṃ. Tadetaṃ ussāhalakkhaṇaṃ, sahajātānaṃ dhammānaṃ upatthambhanarasaṃ, asaṃsīdanabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, ‘‘saṃviggo yoniso padahatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.113) vacanato saṃvegapadaṭṭhānaṃ, vīriyārambhavatthupadaṭṭhānaṃ vā. Sammā āraddhaṃ sabbasampattīnaṃ mūlaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vīriyasaṅkhāto ārambho vīriyārambho. Iminā sesārambhe paṭikkhipati. Ayañhi ārambhasaddo kamme āpattiyaṃ kiriyāyaṃ vīriye hiṃsāyaṃ vikopaneti anekesu atthesu āgato.
无论什么苦产生,全都以发勤为缘;
通过灭除种种造作,苦就不会生起。巴利
‘‘Yaṃkiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti, sabbaṃ ārambhapaccayā; Ārambhānaṃ nirodhena, natthi dukkhassa sambhavo’’ti. (su. ni. 749) –
在这里,业是作为“发勤”而来的。在“他发勤,又追悔”这句里,指的是犯戒。在“大祭祀、大发勤,那些没有大果报”这句里,指的是竖柱等行为。在“你们要发勤、前进、致力于佛陀的教法”这句里,指的是精进。在“他们为了沙门乔达摩而发勤杀生”这句里,指的是伤害。在“远离伤害种子与植物之行”这句里,指的是砍伐、破坏等损害。但在这里,唯独是指精进。因此说“被称为精进的发勤,就是精进发勤”。因为精进从发起、启动的角度被称为发勤。在那个精进发勤中有智慧。也有人读作“由于不懈怠、已发勤”,意思是以不懈怠的状态、已发勤的状态。前面的读法更好。有些人则解释说:“念、择法、精进、喜这些觉支的平衡,是不懈怠性;念、定、轻安、舍这些觉支的平衡,是已发勤性;七觉支的平衡,就是策励的意思。”巴利
Ettha hi kammaṃ ārambhoti āgataṃ. ‘‘Ārambhati ca vippaṭisārī ca hotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.142; pu. pa. 191) ettha āpatti. ‘‘Mahāyaññā mahārambhā, na te honti mahapphalā’’ti (a. ni. 4.39; saṃ. ni. 1.120) ettha yūpussāpanādikiriyā. ‘‘Ārambhatha nikkamatha, yuñjatha buddhasāsane’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.185) ettha vīriyaṃ. ‘‘Samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ uddissa pāṇaṃ ārambhantī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.51-52) ettha hiṃsā. ‘‘Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.10; ma. ni. 1.293) ettha chedanabhañjanādikaṃ vikopanaṃ. Idha pana vīriyameva adhippetaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vīriyasaṅkhāto ārambho vīriyārambho’’ti. Vīriyañhi ārabhanakavasena ārambhoti vuccati. Tasmiṃ vīriyārambhe ñāṇaṃ. Asallīnattā pahitattātipi paṭhanti, asallīnabhāvena pahitabhāvenāti attho. Purimapāṭhoyeva sundaro. Keci pana ‘‘satidhammavicayavīriyapītisambojjhaṅgānaṃ samatā asallīnattatā, satisamādhipassaddhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgānaṃ samatā pahitattatā, sattannaṃ sambojjhaṅgānaṃ samatā paggahaṭṭho’’ti vaṇṇayanti.
39 现在,为了说明那位通过正精进而成就道果的人应当为世间利益而说法,紧接着就在示义上列出了智慧。其中,“种种法的显示性”,就是依一切有为法和无为法,来显示、阐明、解说种种法。“显示性”就是显示。“示义”,就是把种种义理开示给他人。法和义,这两者本身就是一回事。巴利
39. Idāni sammāvāyāmasiddhaṃ maggaphalaṃ pattena lokahitatthaṃ dhammadesanā kātabbāti dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ atthasandassane ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha nānādhammappakāsanatāti sabbasaṅkhatāsaṅkhatavasena nānādhammānaṃ pakāsanatā dīpanatā desanatā. Pakāsanatāti ca pakāsanā eva. Atthasandassaneti nānāatthānaṃ paresaṃ sandassane. Dhammā ca atthā ca te eva.
40 40. 现在,为了说明那位以如法之言开示他人的圣者,其作为依真实自性而说法之因的见清净,紧接着就列出了见清净智。其中,一切法的一摄以及种种性与单一性的通达:就是通过一切有为法和无为法的一摄,以及对欲贪等的种种性、对出离等的单一性的通达,这就是现观的意思。它则是道智和果智。道智在现观诸谛的刹那,以现观诸谛而通达,所以叫通达;果智因为已经通达,所以叫通达。一摄性:这里摄有四种——生类摄、同生类摄、作用摄、计数摄。其中,所有刹帝利都来,所有婆罗门都来,所有吠舍都来,所有首陀罗都来;毗舍佉贤友,正语、正业、正命,这些法摄在戒蕴中,这名叫生类摄。就像说同一生类者都来的地方那样,这里一切依生类而成为一摄。所有憍萨罗人都来,所有摩揭陀人都来,所有婆卢羯车人都来;毗舍佉贤友,正精进、正念、正定,这些法摄在定蕴中,这名叫同生类摄。就像说在同一地方出生、成长的人都来的地方那样,这里一切依出生地和居住地而成为一摄。所有象兵都来,所有马兵都来,所有车兵都来;毗舍佉贤友,正见、正思惟,这些法摄在慧蕴中,这名叫作用摄。因为那一切都是以自身的作用而成为一摄。眼处算入哪一蕴的数目?眼处算入色蕴的数目。如果眼处算入色蕴的数目,那么就应该说眼处被色蕴所摄,这名叫计数摄。这里所指的就是这一种。在如性等十二种行相中,各各单独以一法而摄、以计数而限定,这些就是“一摄”;一摄的状态,就是一摄性。巴利
40. Idāni paresaṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassentassa tassa ariyapuggalassa yathāsabhāvadhammadesanākāraṇaṃ dassanavisuddhiṃ dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ dassanavisuddhiñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha sabbadhammānaṃ ekasaṅgahatā nānattekattapaṭivedheti sabbesaṃ saṅkhatāsaṅkhatadhammānaṃ ekasaṅgahatāya ca kāmacchandādīnaṃ nānattassa ca nekkhammādīnaṃ ekattassa ca paṭivedho, abhisamayoti attho. So pana maggapaññā phalapaññā ca. Maggapaññā saccābhisamayakkhaṇe saccābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhatīti paṭivedho, phalapaññā paṭividdhattā paṭivedho. Ekasaṅgahatāti ettha jātisaṅgaho, sañjātisaṅgaho, kiriyāsaṅgaho, gaṇanasaṅgahoti catubbidho saṅgaho. Tattha ‘‘sabbe khattiyā āgacchantu, sabbe brāhmaṇā, sabbe vessā, sabbe suddā āgacchantu’’, ‘‘yā, cāvuso visākha, sammāvācā, yo ca sammākammanto, yo ca sammāājīvo, ime dhammā sīlakkhandhe saṅgahitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.462) ayaṃ jātisaṅgaho nāma. ‘‘Ekajātikā āgacchantū’’ti vuttaṭṭhāne viya hi idha sabbe jātiyā ekasaṅgahitā. ‘‘Sabbe kosalakā āgacchantu, sabbe māgadhikā, sabbe bhārukacchakā āgacchantu’’, ‘‘yo, cāvuso visākha, sammāvāyāmo, yā ca sammāsati, yo ca sammāsamādhi, ime dhammā samādhikkhandhe saṅgahitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.462) ayaṃ sañjātisaṅgaho nāma. ‘‘Ekaṭṭhāne jātā saṃvaḍḍhā āgacchantū’’ti vuttaṭṭhāne viya hi idha sabbe jātiṭṭhānena nivutthokāsena ekasaṅgahitā. ‘‘Sabbe hatthārohā āgacchantu, sabbe assārohā āgacchantu, sabbe rathikā āgacchantu’’, ‘‘yā, cāvuso visākha, sammādiṭṭhi, yo ca sammāsaṅkappo, ime dhammā paññākkhandhe saṅgahitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.462) ayaṃ kiriyāsaṅgaho nāma. Sabbeva hi te attano kiriyākaraṇena ekasaṅgahitā. ‘‘Cakkhāyatanaṃ katamaṃ khandhagaṇanaṃ gacchati, cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpakkhandhagaṇanaṃ gacchati. Hañci cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpakkhandhagaṇanaṃ gacchati, tena vata re vattabbe cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpakkhandhena saṅgahita’’nti (kathā. 471) ayaṃ gaṇanasaṅgaho nāma. Ayamidha adhippeto. Tathaṭṭhādīsu dvādasasu ākāresu visuṃ visuṃ ekena saṅgaho gaṇanaparicchedo etesanti ekasaṅgahā, ekasaṅgahānaṃ bhāvo ekasaṅgahatā.
见清净智指的是道果智即见。见本身就是清净,所以叫见清净;见清净本身就是智,所以叫见清净智。道智得以清净,所以叫见清净;果智因为已经清净,所以也叫见清净。巴利
Dassanavisuddhiñāṇanti maggaphalañāṇaṃ dassanaṃ. Dassanameva visuddhi dassanavisuddhi, dassanavisuddhi eva ñāṇaṃ dassanavisuddhiñāṇaṃ. Maggañāṇaṃ visujjhatīti dassanavisuddhi, phalañāṇaṃ visuddhattā dassanavisuddhi.
41 41. 现在,为了把能成就见清净的观智分成两种来说明,紧接着就列出了忍智和摄受智。其中,“已解慧”是指对色蕴等法从无常等角度已经了知而生起的慧。“忍智”是指对已经了知的内容能够安忍,所以叫忍;这忍本身就是智,所以叫忍智。这个名称排除了单纯的承受之忍。这是通过“对聚的思惟”等方式生起的初阶观智。巴利
41. Idāni dassanavisuddhisādhakāni vipassanāñāṇāni dvidhā dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ khantiñāṇapariyogāhaṇañāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tattha viditattā paññāti rūpakkhandhādīnaṃ aniccādito viditattā pavattā paññā. Khantiñāṇanti viditameva khamatīti khanti, khanti eva ñāṇaṃ khantiñāṇaṃ. Etena adhivāsanakhantiṃ paṭikkhipati. Etaṃ kalāpasammasanādivasena pavattaṃ taruṇavipassanāñāṇaṃ.
42 42. 因为已被触及,所以称为慧:由于对色蕴等以无常等方式,以智的接触而触及,所以生起的慧就是“已触慧”。“摄受智”是指:已经触及之后,就深入、进入,所以叫摄受智。也有人把“ga”这个音节读成短音。这是依坏灭随观等方式而生起的锐利观智。不过有些人说:“观智本身,如果由信来引导,就是忍智;如果由慧来引导,就是摄受智。”如果真是这样,那么这两种智就不可能同时存在于同一个人身上;如果它们不能共存,那么一个声闻弟子就不可能具备与六十七种声闻弟子共通的诸智,所以那种说法不合理。巴利
42.Phuṭṭhattā paññāti rūpakkhandhādīnaṃ aniccādivasena ñāṇaphassena phuṭṭhattā pavattā paññā. Pariyogāhaṇe ñāṇanti phuṭṭhameva pariyogāhati pavisatīti pariyogāhaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Gā-kāraṃ rassaṃ katvāpi paṭhanti. Etaṃ bhaṅgānupassanādivasena pavattaṃ tikkhavipassanāñāṇaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘vipassanāñāṇameva saddhāvāhissa khantiñāṇaṃ, paññāvāhissa pariyogāhaṇañāṇa’’nti vadanti. Evaṃ sante etāni dve ñāṇāni ekassa na sambhavanti , tadasambhave ekassa sāvakassa sattasaṭṭhi sāvakasādhāraṇañāṇāni na sambhavanti, tasmā taṃ na yujjati.
43 43. 现在,因为凡夫和有学对观所涉及的蕴等诸法,是整体地审察,而不是只审察其中一部分,所以他们得不到“部分住”;只有阿罗汉才能随自己的意愿得到“部分住”。因此,在讲了成就见清净的诸智之后,紧接着就列出了阿罗汉见清净成就后的“部分住智”。其中,“统合慧”是指:对蕴等诸法中某一特定部分——也就是受法——进行统合、总集、聚集的慧。也有人读作“统合慧”,意思是一样的。巴利
43. Idāni yasmā puthujjanā sekkhā ca vipassanūpage khandhādayo dhamme sakale eva sammasanti, na tesaṃ ekadesaṃ, tasmā tesaṃ padesavihāro na labbhati, arahatoyeva yathāruci padesavihāro labbhatīti dassanavisuddhisādhakāni ñāṇāni vatvā tadanantaraṃ arahato dassanavisuddhisiddhaṃ padesavihārañāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha samodahane paññāti khandhādīnaṃ ekadesassa vedanādhammassa samodahanapaññā, sampiṇḍanapaññā rāsikaraṇapaññā. Samodhāne paññātipi pāṭho, soyeva attho.
对“部分住智”来说,所谓“部分住”,就是依蕴等法的一部分、一分、一个组成来安住;对那个部分住的智,就是部分住智。这里说的“部分”有很多种:蕴的部分、处的部分、界的部分、谛的部分、根的部分、缘起支的部分、念处的部分、禅那的部分、名色的部分、法的部分。虽然有这么多种,但这里的部分其实就是受。怎么理解呢?在五蕴里,依受蕴来说,这是蕴的一部分;在十二处里,依受来说,这是法处的一部分;在十八界里,依受来说,这是法界的一部分;在四谛里,依受来说,这是苦谛的一部分;在二十二根里,依五受根来说,这是根的一部分;在十二缘起支里,依触缘受来说,这是缘起支的一部分;在四念处里,依受随观来说,这是念处的一部分;在四禅里,依乐、舍来说,这是禅那的一部分;在名色里,依受来说,这是名色的一部分;在善等一切法中,依受来说,这是法的一部分。这样,受就是蕴等法的一部分,以对那受的观察来说,就是部分住。巴利
Padesavihāre ñāṇanti khandhādīnaṃ padesena ekadesena avayavena vihāro padesavihāro, tasmiṃ padesavihāre ñāṇaṃ. Tattha padeso nāma khandhapadeso āyatanadhātusaccaindriyapaccayākārasatipaṭṭhānajhānanāmarūpadhammapadesoti nānāvidho. Evaṃ nānāvidho cesa vedanā eva. Kathaṃ? Pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ vedanākkhandhavasena khandhekadeso, dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ vedanāvasena dhammāyatanekadeso, aṭṭhārasannaṃ dhātūnaṃ vedanāvasena dhammadhātekadeso, catunnaṃ saccānaṃ vedanāvasena dukkhasaccekadeso, bāvīsatiyā indriyānaṃ pañcavedanindriyavasena indriyekadeso, dvādasannaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṅgānaṃ phassapaccayā vedanāvasena paccayākārekadeso, catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ vedanānupassanāvasena satipaṭṭhānekadeso, catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sukhaupekkhāvasena jhānekadeso, nāmarūpānaṃ vedanāvasena nāmarūpekadeso, kusalādīnaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ vedanāvasena dhammekadesoti evaṃ vedanā eva khandhādīnaṃ padeso, tassā vedanāya eva paccavekkhaṇavasena padesavihāro.
44 44. 现在,因为凡夫和有学在修习定所生慧等的时候,是把各自应当修习的修行法门作为主导、作为首要,然后观察那些应当被断除的、与修行法门相对立的、自性各不相同的种种法具众多过患,从过患的角度去审视,再依照每一种修行法门把心安立下来,从而断除那些对立之法。在断除的时候,他们在观智阶段看见一切行是空的,之后以彻底断除的方式断除。这样断除时,他们以一次通达的方式证悟诸谛而断除。一切圣者都按照上面所说的方式,随各自的情况而修行。因此,在部分住智之后,依次列举了想转智等六种智。其中,由于是主导,所以叫慧,意思是以出离等为主导,把出离等放在优先地位,依这种优先地位而生起的慧。“想转智”中,想的转开、回转、背离,就是想转;以那个把各种修行法门当作主导的想为因、为工具,从欲贪等处转开的智,这样说。虽然这里没有说“从何处转开”,但从哪里转开,就从那里转开,这是自然被理解的,就像“转开随观”一样。而这个想,它的特相是认知;作用是再次认知“就是这个”,并制造原因相,就像木匠等人在木头上做记号;现起是依照所执取的相而生起执著,就像盲人摸象;或者,因为它在所缘上不深入而停留不久,所以现起为不久住,就像闪电;它的直接原因是当时呈现于面前的境界,就像在草丛中的稻草人那里,小鹿生起“是人”的想法。巴利
44. Idāni yasmā samādhibhāvanāmayañāṇādīni bhāventā puthujjanā sekkhā ca te te bhāvetabbabhāvanādhamme adhipatī jeṭṭhake katvā tena tena pahātabbe tappaccanīke nānāsabhāve dhamme anekādīnave ādīnavato paccavekkhitvā tassa tassa bhāvanādhammassa vasena cittaṃ patiṭṭhapetvā te te paccanīkadhamme pajahanti. Pajahantā vipassanākāle sabbasaṅkhāre suññato disvā pacchā samucchedena pajahanti, tathā pajahantā ca ekābhisamayavasena saccāni paṭivijjhantā pajahanti. Yathāvutteheva ākārehi sabbepi ariyā yathāyogaṃ paṭipajjanti, tasmā padesavihārañāṇānantaraṃ saññāvivaṭṭañāṇādīni cha ñāṇāni yathākkamena uddiṭṭhāni. Tattha adhipatattā paññāti nekkhammādīnaṃ adhipatibhāvena nekkhammādīni adhikāni katvā tadadhikabhāvena pavattā paññāti attho. Saññāvivaṭṭe ñāṇanti saññāya vivaṭṭanaṃ parāvaṭṭanaṃ parammukhabhāvoti saññāvivaṭṭo, yāya saññāya te te bhāvanādhamme adhipatiṃ karoti, tāya saññāya hetubhūtāya, karaṇabhūtāya vā tato tato kāmacchandādito vivaṭṭane ñāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etto vivaṭṭoti avuttepi yato vivaṭṭati, tato eva vivaṭṭoti gayhati yathā vivaṭṭanānupassanāya. Sā pana saññā sañjānanalakkhaṇā, tadevetanti puna sañjānanapaccayanimittakaraṇarasā dāruādīsu tacchakādayo viya, yathāgahitanimittavasena abhinivesakaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānā hatthidassakaandhā viya, ārammaṇe anogāḷhavuttitāya aciraṭṭhānapaccupaṭṭhānā vā vijju viya, yathāupaṭṭhitavisayapadaṭṭhānā tiṇapurisakesu migapotakānaṃ purisāti uppannasaññā viya.
45 「种种慧」:因为应当修习与种种自性不同的法,所以是借着观察欲贪等种种不同法的过患而生起的慧。「种种」这个词是表示相状的处格。或者,「断除种种」就是「种种」,意思是:以断除种种为相、以断除种种为因,安住在出离等法上的慧——这就是它的意趣。「心转智」:就是心从欲贪等转向出离等的智。这里说的「心」,特指「思」。这个思,特相是意志的状态,或者说是策励连结;作用是累积业行;现起是协调结合,就像大工匠等人督导最胜的弟子完成他本职和其他任务一样。再者,在忆念紧急事务等情况下,这个思会以激励相应法的方式变得很明显。巴利
45.Nānatte paññāti nānāsabhāve bhāvetabbato aññasabhāve kāmacchandādike ādīnavadassanena pavattā paññā. Nānatteti ca nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ. Nānattappahānaṃ vā nānattaṃ, nānattappahānanimittaṃ nānattappahānahetu nekkhammādīsu paññāti adhippāyo. Cetovivaṭṭe ñāṇanti cetaso kāmacchandādito vivaṭṭanaṃ nekkhammādīsu ñāṇaṃ. Cetoti cettha cetanā adhippetā. Sā cetanābhāvalakkhaṇā, abhisandahanalakkhaṇā vā, āyūhanarasā, saṃvidahanapaccupaṭṭhānā sakiccaparakiccasādhakā jeṭṭhasissamahāvaḍḍhakiādayo viya. Accāyikakammānussaraṇādīsu ca panāyaṃ sampayuttānaṃ ussāhanabhāvena pākaṭā hoti.
46 46. 安立慧:就是依靠出离等,把心安立下来的慧。心转智:就是通过断除欲贪等,使心转离的智。这里说的心,以了别为特相,以在前引导为作用,以相续连结为现起,以名色为所依。巴利
46.Adhiṭṭhānepaññāti nekkhammādivasena cittassa patiṭṭhāpane paññā. Cittavivaṭṭe ñāṇanti kāmacchandādipahānavasena cittassa vivaṭṭane ñāṇaṃ . Cittañcettha vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ, pubbaṅgamarasaṃ, sandhānapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, nāmarūpapadaṭṭhānaṃ.
47 对于“空性”的慧,是指以“我”与“我所”皆空,而转向无我、无我所的无我随观慧。在“智的转离”中称为智,是因为智本身就从执取中回转,所以称为转离;那成为智之转离的智。巴利
47.Suññate paññāti attattaniyasuññatāya anattānattaniye pavattā anattānupassanā paññā. Ñāṇavivaṭṭe ñāṇanti ñāṇameva abhinivesato vivaṭṭatīti vivaṭṭo, taṃ ñāṇavivaṭṭabhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
48 48. 关于“放舍慧”:这里,“放舍”就是舍弃、放下。从欲贪等中放舍,就是依出离等而生起的慧。“解脱转智”:因为从欲贪等中解脱出来,所以叫解脱;解脱本身就是转,叫解脱转;这解脱转就是智。巴利
48.Vosagge paññāti ettha vosajjatīti vosaggo, kāmacchandādīnaṃ vosaggo nekkhammādimhi paññā. Vimokkhavivaṭṭe ñāṇanti kāmacchandādikehi vimuccatīti vimokkho, vimokkho eva vivaṭṭo vimokkhavivaṭṭo, so eva ñāṇaṃ.
49 对于每一谛的四种、四种无颠倒自性,以作用而不迷惑地生起的慧,就是“如实义慧”。“谛转智”:从四谛双双出起而转起,所以叫谛转,这本身就是智。同一个智,依增上法而说,称为“想转”;依应断法而说,称为“心转”;依心之安立而说,称为“心转”;依断除敌对法而说,称为“解脱转”,这样说了四种。无我随观从空的样貌而说为“智转智”。而道智在前面被说为“道智”和“无间定智”两种,这里则从转起的样貌而说为“谛转智”。巴利
49.Tathaṭṭhe paññāti ekekassa saccassa catubbidhe catubbidhe aviparītasabhāve kiccavasena asammohato pavattā paññā. Saccavivaṭṭe ñāṇanti catūsu saccesu dubhato vuṭṭhānavasena vivaṭṭatīti saccavivaṭṭo, so eva ñāṇaṃ. Ekameva ñāṇaṃ adhipatikatadhammavasena saññāvivaṭṭoti, pahātabbadhammavasena cetovivaṭṭoti, cittapatiṭṭhāpanavasena cittavivaṭṭoti, paccanīkapahānavasena vimokkhavivaṭṭoti evaṃ catudhā vuttaṃ. Anattānupassanāva suññatākāravasena ‘‘ñāṇavivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti vuttā. Maggañāṇameva heṭṭhā ‘‘magge ñāṇa’’nti ca, ‘‘ānantarikasamādhimhi ñāṇa’’nti ca dvidhā vuttaṃ, vivaṭṭanākāravasena ‘‘saccavivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
50 现在,按照顺序,把由谛转智而运作的漏尽智所引生的六种神通智一一列出。其中,因为神变智的威力世间人都知道、最令人震撼,所以最先列出神变智;因为天耳智的所缘比较粗显,而他心智的所缘比较微细,所以第二列出天耳智;因为所缘微细,所以第三列出他心智。在三明当中,因为能破除覆盖宿世的过去黑暗,所以最先列出宿住随念智;因为能破除现在和未来的黑暗,所以第二列出天眼智;因为能彻底断除一切黑暗,所以第三列出漏尽智。其中,“身”也指色身。“心”也指作为基础的禅那心。“单一决定状态”,是指以预备心把身心置于单一状态,以及在想前往时,无论以可见之身还是不可见之身,都相应地使身与心融合在一起——这就是这里所说的意思。这里,“身”指身体。身体因为是不净的积聚,是头发等可厌之物以及眼病等几百种疾病的生起之处,所以称为身。“乐想与轻想”:这里,与第四禅相应的想只有一个,但按行相的差别分为两种,并用“与”字表示合集。在第四禅中,舍因为寂静而被称为“乐”,与它相应的想就是“乐想”。正是这个想,因为脱离了诸盖以及寻等敌对法,所以成为“轻想”。“以决意为先导”:就是依增强而住立的方式,也就是依进入的方式,这是它的意趣。“以决意为先导”中的“与”字应当连接起来理解。到这里,已经按相应方式说明了所有种类神变智的原因。巴利
50. Idāni tassa saccavivaṭṭañāṇavasena pavattassa āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇassa vasena pavattāni kamato cha abhiññāñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tatthāpi lokapākaṭānubhāvattā ativimhāpananti paṭhamaṃ iddhividhañāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, cetopariyañāṇassa visayato dibbasotañāṇaṃ oḷārikavisayanti dutiyaṃ dibbasotañāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, sukhumavisayattā tatiyaṃ cetopariyañāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tīsu vijjāsu pubbenivāsacchādakātītatamavinodakattā paṭhamaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, paccuppannānāgatatamavinodakattā dutiyaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, sabbatamasamucchedakattā tatiyaṃ āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha kāyampīti rūpakāyampi. Cittampīti pādakajjhānacittampi. Ekavavatthānatāti parikammacittena ekato ṭhapanatāya ca dissamānakāyena, adissamānakāyena vā gantukāmakāle yathāyogaṃ kāyassapi cittassapi missīkaraṇatāya cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāyoti cettha sarīraṃ. Sarīrañhi asucisañcayato kucchitānaṃ kesādīnañceva cakkhurogādīnaṃ rogasatānañca āyabhūtato kāyoti vuccati. Sukhasaññañca lahusaññañcāti ettha catutthajjhānasampayuttaṃ ekaṃyeva saññaṃ ākāranānattato dvidhā katvā samuccayattho ca-saddo payutto. Catutthajjhānasmiñhi upekkhā santattā sukhanti vuttā, taṃsampayuttā saññā sukhasaññā. Sāyeva nīvaraṇehi ceva vitakkādipaccanīkehi ca vimuttattā lahusaññā. Adhiṭṭhānavasenāti adhikaṃ katvā ṭhānavasena, pavisanavasenāti adhippāyo. Adhiṭṭhānavasena cāti ca-saddo sambandhitabbo. Ettāvatā sabbappakārassa iddhividhassa yathāyogaṃ kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ.
“成就”这个词,指的是成就的本质,所以“成就”就是慧。关于“神变种类”的智:以成就之义为神变,也就是以产生之义和获得之义来说的。凡是能产生、能获得的,就称为“成就”。正如经中所说:“对于渴望欲乐的人,他这愿望就会成就。”(《经集》772)同样地,“出离成就,所以是神变;能示现,所以是教诫神变;阿罗汉道成就,所以是神变;能示现,所以是教诫神变。”(《无碍解道》3.32)另一种说法:以成就之义为神变,这是“方便成就”的别名。因为方便成就能够产生所期望的果报,所以是成就的。正如经中所说:“这位质多居士具足戒行、有善法,如果他发愿:‘愿我未来成为转轮王’,那么由于戒行清净,他心中的誓愿就会成就。”(《相应部》4.352)另一种说法:众生依靠这个而成就,所以是神变;“成就”就是增长、达到殊胜的状态,这是所说的意思。神变本身就有种种形态,所以叫“神变种类”,意思是神变的部分、神变的区分。对那神变种类的智,就称为“关于神变种类的智”。巴利
Ijjhanaṭṭhe paññāti ijjhanasabhāve paññā. Iddhividhe ñāṇanti ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhi, nipphattiatthena paṭilābhaṭṭhena cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yañhi nipphajjati paṭilabbhati ca, taṃ ijjhatīti vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘kāmaṃ kāmayamānassa, tassa cetaṃ samijjhatī’’ti (su. ni. 772). Tathā ‘‘nekkhammaṃ ijjhatīti iddhi, paṭiharatīti pāṭihāriyaṃ, arahattamaggo ijjhatīti iddhi, paṭiharatīti pāṭihāriya’’nti (paṭi. ma. 3.32). Aparo nayo – ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhi, upāyasampadāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Upāyasampadā hi ijjhati adhippetaphalappasavanato. Yathāha – ‘‘ayaṃ kho citto gahapati sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo, sace paṇidahissati, anāgatamaddhānaṃ rājā assaṃ cakkavattīti. Ijjhissati hi sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.352). Aparo nayo – etāya sattā ijjhantīti iddhi, ijjhantīti iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti vuttaṃ hoti. Iddhi eva vidhaṃ iddhividhaṃ, iddhikoṭṭhāso iddhivikappoti attho. Taṃ iddhividhaṃ ñāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
51 依寻的扩散力:在为了生起天耳界而作准备修行的时候,对自己在种种声音相上的寻的扩散力,也就是寻的冲力。这里说的“寻”,就是能寻思,所以叫寻;或者寻思本身就是寻,意思是审虑。这个寻以把心安置到所缘上为特征,以撞击、反复撞击为作用。正因为这样,才说修行者通过它让所缘成为被寻撞击、被寻反复撞击的。它以把心引向所缘为表现;不过,因为它在被同类作意所摄、又被根所限定的境域中无障碍地生起,所以说它以“进入视野的境域”为足处。所谓“种种与单一声音相”,是指种种自性的与单一自性的声音相。这里,声音本身就是相,因为它是寻生起之因,又因是行相。依鼓声等而成为一团的声音,或者多种声音,或者不同方向的声音,或者不同众生的声音,是“种种声音”;同一方向的声音,或者同一众生的声音,或者依鼓声等而各自单一的声音,是“单一声音”。这里说的“声音”,就是能响,意思是被告知。所谓“贯通之慧”,就是进入之慧,意思是了知之慧。所谓“耳界清净智”,就是以闻之义及无命者之义为耳界,又以作耳界作用之义而称为耳界,因为清净、无杂染,所以是清净;耳界本身就是清净,即耳界清净;耳界清净本身就是智,即耳界清净智。巴利
51.Vitakkavipphāravasenāti dibbasotadhātuuppādanatthaṃ parikammakaraṇakāle saddanimittesu attano vitakkavipphāravasena vitakkavegavasena. Vitakkoti cettha vitakketīti vitakko, vitakkanaṃ vā vitakko, ūhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Svāyaṃ ārammaṇe cittassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇo, āhananapariyāhananaraso . Tathā hi tena yogāvacaro ārammaṇaṃ vitakkāhataṃ vitakkapariyāhataṃ karotīti vuccati. Ārammaṇe cittassa ānayanapaccupaṭṭhāno, tajjāsamannāhārena pana indriyena ca parikkhitte visaye anantarāyena uppajjanato āpāthagatavisayapadaṭṭhānoti vuccati. Nānattekattasaddanimittānanti nānāsabhāvānaṃ ekasabhāvānañca saddanimittānaṃ. Saddā eva cettha vitakkuppattikāraṇattā saṅkhāranimittattā ca nimittāni. Bherisaddādivasena ekagghanībhūtā, anekā vā saddā, nānādisāsu vā saddā, nānāsattānaṃ vā saddā nānattasaddā, ekadisāya saddā, ekasattassa vā saddā, bherisaddādivasena ekekasaddā vā ekattasaddā. Saddoti cettha sappatīti saddo, kathīyatīti attho. Pariyogāhaṇe paññāti pavisanapaññā, pajānanapaññāti attho. Sotadhātuvisuddhiñāṇanti savanaṭṭhena ca nijjīvaṭṭhena ca sotadhātu, sotadhātukiccakaraṇavasena ca sotadhātu viyātipi sotadhātu, parisuddhattā nirupakkilesattā visuddhi, sotadhātu eva visuddhi sotadhātuvisuddhi, sotadhātuvisuddhi eva ñāṇaṃ sotadhātuvisuddhiñāṇaṃ.
52 三种心:就是与喜俱行的心、与忧俱行的心、与舍俱行的心这三种心。由于扩散:意思是以扩散的状态、以冲劲的方式。这里用的是从格来表示原因,也就是说,为了生起他心智而做准备工作的时候,以他人这三种心的扩散为因。以诸根的明净为途径:是指以眼等六根的明净为途径。这里,诸根所依的地方,通过以果说因的比喻方式,被称为“根”,就像经里说的:“贤友,你的诸根非常明净,肤色清净、皎洁。”(《大品》60)在诸根所依的地方中,这里特指心所依处。以明净为途径,就是以没有浑浊的状态为途径。应该知道,本来应该说“以明净和不明净为途径”,但省略了“不明净”这个词。或者也可以这样理解:因为“察觉这个是不明净的”这种认知,只有依靠明净才可能产生,所以只说“以明净为途径”,就已经包含了不明净的意思。于种种与单一心识运作之通达慧:就是随其相应,了知具有多种性质和单一性质的八十九种心之运作的智慧。在这里,未得定者的心识运作是多种多样的,得定者的心识运作是单一的。或者说,有贪等心是多种多样的,离贪等心是单一的。他心智这个词中,pari 是遍的意思,也就是限定、确定的意思。心的限定就是他心,他心与智合在一起就是他心智。也有写成 vipphāratā 的读法,意思是扩散性。巴利
52.Tiṇṇannaṃ cittānanti somanassasahagatadomanassasahagataupekkhāsahagatavasena tiṇṇannaṃ cittānaṃ. Vipphārattāti vipphārabhāvena vegenāti attho. Hetuatthe nissakkavacanaṃ, cetopariyañāṇuppādanatthaṃ parikammakaraṇakāle paresaṃ tiṇṇannaṃ cittānaṃ vipphārahetunā. Indriyānaṃ pasādavasenāti cakkhādīnaṃ channaṃ indriyānaṃ pasādavasena, indriyānaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsā cettha phalūpacārena indriyānanti vuttā yathā ‘‘vippasannāni kho te, āvuso, indriyāni parisuddho chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto’’ti (mahāva. 60). Indriyapatiṭṭhitokāsesupi hadayavatthu eva idhādhippetaṃ. Pasādavasenāti ca anāvilabhāvavasena. ‘‘Pasādappasādavasenā’’ti vattabbe appasādasaddassa lopo katoti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā idamappasannanti gahaṇassa pasādamapekkhitvā eva sambhavato ‘‘pasādavasenā’’ti vacaneneva appasādopi vuttova hotīti veditabbaṃ. Nānattekattaviññāṇacariyā pariyogāhaṇe paññāti yathāsambhavaṃ nānāsabhāvaekasabhāvaekūnanavutiviññāṇapavattivijānanapaññā. Ettha asamāhitassa viññāṇacariyā nānattā, samāhitassa viññāṇacariyā ekattā. Sarāgādicittaṃ vā nānattaṃ, vītarāgādicittaṃ ekattaṃ. Cetopariyañāṇanti ettha pariyātīti pariyaṃ, paricchindatīti attho. Cetaso pariyaṃ cetopariyaṃ, cetopariyañca taṃ ñāṇañcāti cetopariyañāṇaṃ. Vipphāratātipi pāṭho, vipphāratāyāti attho.
53 依缘而转起之法:是指依缘起法则、从缘而生起的缘所生法。依种种与单一业扩散之力:在这里,不善业是“种种”,善业是“单一”。或者,欲界业是“种种”,色界与无色界业是“单一”。语法关系是:依种种与单一业扩散之力,对依缘而转起之法进行通达的慧。宿住随念智:过去往昔诸生中曾住过的诸蕴,就是“宿住”。“住过”是指曾居住、经历过,在自己的相续中生起后又灭去。或者,过去往昔诸生中曾住过的法,就是“宿住”。“住过”是指以境而住,以自己的识所知、所限定,或者也为他人的识所知。在“忆念截断足迹等”中,这些只属于诸佛。宿住随念:以那随念宿住的念,就是“宿住随念”;“智”是指与那念相应的智。巴利
53.Paccayappavattānaṃ dhammānanti paṭiccasamuppādavasena paccayato pavattānaṃ paccayuppannadhammānaṃ. Nānattekattakammavipphāravasenāti ettha akusalaṃ kammaṃ nānattaṃ, kusalaṃ kammaṃ ekattaṃ. Kāmāvacaraṃ vā kammaṃ nānattaṃ, rūpāvacarārūpāvacaraṃ kammaṃ ekattaṃ. Nānattekattakammavipphāravasena paccayapavattānaṃ dhammānaṃ pariyogāhaṇe paññāti sambandho. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇanti pubbe atītajātīsu nivutthakhandhā pubbenivāso. Nivutthāti ajjhāvutthā anubhūtā attano santāne uppajjitvā niruddhā. Pubbe atītajātīsu nivutthadhammā vā pubbenivāso. Nivutthāti gocaranivāsena nivutthā attano viññāṇena viññātā paricchinnā, paraviññāṇena viññātāpi vā. Chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsu te buddhānaṃyeva labbhanti . Pubbenivāsānussatīti yāya satiyā pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati, sā pubbenivāsānussati, ñāṇanti tāya satiyā sampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
54 以光明为途径:为了用天眼看见色法,凭借火遍、白遍、光明遍当中任意一种作为第四禅所缘的遍处光明的力量为途径。种种与单一之色相:不同众生的色,或投生到不同身类的众生的色,或不同方向的色,或不混杂的色,这些是种种色;一个众生的色,或投生到同一身类的众生的色,或同一方向的色,或从不同方向等混杂在一起的色,这些是单一色。这里,色只指颜色处。因为它能显现,当它呈现色彩变化时,能显示已入心之状态,所以叫色。这些色本身就是色相。此即就种种与单一之色相而言。于见义之慧:指具有见之自性的智慧。巴利
54.Obhāsavasenāti dibbena cakkhunā rūpadassanatthaṃ pasāritassa tejokasiṇaodātakasiṇaālokakasiṇānaṃ aññatarassa catutthajjhānārammaṇassa kasiṇobhāsassa vasena. Nānattekattarūpanimittānanti nānāsattānaṃ rūpāni, nānattakāyaṃ upapannānaṃ vā sattānaṃ rūpāni, nānādisāsu vā rūpāni, asammissāni vā rūpāni nānattarūpāni, ekasattassa rūpāni, ekattakāyaṃ upapannassa vā rūpāni, ekadisāya vā rūpāni, nānādisādīnaṃ sammissībhūtāni vā rūpāni ekattarūpāni. Rūpanti cettha vaṇṇāyatanameva. Tañhi rūpayatīti rūpaṃ, vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānaṃ hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsetīti attho. Rūpameva rūpanimittaṃ. Tesaṃ nānattekattarūpanimittānaṃ. Dassanaṭṭhe paññāti dassanasabhāve paññā.
“天眼智”:它和天眼相似,所以叫“天”。因为天人们由善业所生的清净眼根,不被胆汁、痰、血等阻碍,远离了种种杂染,所以能够领受极远处的所缘,这就是“天”眼。而这里的智眼也是由精进修行之力所生,和那种天眼一样,所以因为与天眼相似而叫“天”;又因为是通过天住而获得、依止于天住,所以也叫“天”;又因为以光明遍为基础而具有大光明,所以也叫“天”;又因为能看见穿过墙壁等处的色法、具有广大远达性,所以也叫“天”。这一切应当依据声论来理解。以“见”为义,所以是眼;能执行眼的作用,所以也像眼一样是眼。它既是天又是眼,所以叫“天眼”;这天眼本身就是智,所以叫“天眼智”。巴利
Dibbacakkhuñāṇanti dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ. Devānañhi sucaritakammanibbattaṃ pittasemharuhirādīhi apalibuddhaṃ upakkilesavimuttatāya dūrepi ārammaṇasampaṭicchanasamatthaṃ dibbaṃ pasādacakkhu hoti. Idañcāpi vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattaṃ ñāṇacakkhu tādisamevāti dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ, dibbavihāravasena paṭiladdhattā attanā dibbavihārasannissitattāpi dibbaṃ, ālokapariggahena mahājutikattāpi dibbaṃ, tirokuṭṭādigatarūpadassanena mahāgatikattāpi dibbaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabbaṃ. Dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu, cakkhukiccakaraṇena cakkhumivātipi cakkhu, dibbañca taṃ cakkhu cāti dibbacakkhu, dibbacakkhu ca taṃ ñāṇañcāti dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ.
55 以六十四种行相:在八种道果中,每一种道果都按八根来算,这样就有六十四种行相。三根:指未知当知根、已知根、具知根这三根。自在转之慧:就是以自在而转起的慧。应当知道,这是在阿拉汉果位上,以八根之力、八种行相,唯独就具知根达到自在状态来说的。即使在阿拉汉道的刹那,具知根的自在并不存在,但以因成就故、为成彼义而说,因此称为自在转之慧。漏尽智:能够摧坏自己应被断除诸漏的阿拉汉道智,就称为漏尽智。巴利
55.Catusaṭṭhiyā ākārehīti aṭṭhasu maggaphalesu ekekasmiṃ aṭṭhannaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ indriyānaṃ vasena catusaṭṭhiyā ākārehi. Tiṇṇannaṃ indriyānanti anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ aññindriyaṃ aññātāvindriyanti, imesaṃ tiṇṇannaṃ indriyānaṃ. Vasibhāvatā paññāti vasibhāvatāya pavattā paññā, arahattaphale aṭṭhannaṃ indriyānaṃ vasena aṭṭhahi ākārehi aññātāvindriyasseva vasibhāvatāya arahattamaggakkhaṇe abhāvepi kāraṇasiddhivasena tadatthasādhanatāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇanti attanā vajjhānaṃ āsavānaṃ khayakaraṃ arahattamaggañāṇaṃ.
56-59 56-59. 现在,为了说明与称为“漏尽智”的阿拉汉道智相关联的四种道智,每一种道智都以单一方式通达(四谛),所以列出了“遍知义的慧”等四种智。在那里,苦谛因为粗显、又是一切众生共通的,所以容易了知,因此先说;为了显示它的因,紧接着说集谛;为了让人知道“因灭则果灭”,紧接着说灭谛;为了显示证得灭的方法,最后说道谛。或者,为了令贪著有乐之乐的众生生起悚惧,先说苦;为了让人知道“这苦不是无因来的,也不是自在天等所造,而是从这个因来的”,紧接着说集谛;然后,因为被有因之苦所制伏、心生悚惧、寻求出离的众生,通过看见出离而获得安慰,所以说灭;再之后,为了证得灭,说能到达灭的道。现在,以这个顺序列出了以这些为对象的诸智。其中,“遍知义”是指苦的应遍知自性,有逼迫等四种;“断除义”是指集的应断除自性,有招感等四种;“作证义”是指灭的应作证自性,有出离等四种;“修习义”是指道的应修习自性,有导向出离等四种。巴利
56-59. Idāni āsavānaṃ khayañāṇasaṅkhātaarahattamaggañāṇasambandhe catunnampi maggañāṇānaṃ ekekassa maggañāṇassa ekābhisamayataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pariññaṭṭhe paññā’’tiādīni cattāri ñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tatthāpi oḷārikattā sabbasattasādhāraṇattā ca suviññeyyanti dukkhasaccaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ, tasseva hetudassanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ samudayasaccaṃ, hetunirodhā phalanirodhoti ñāpanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, tadadhigamūpāyadassanatthaṃ ante maggasaccaṃ. Bhavasukhassādagadhitānaṃ vā sattānaṃ saṃvegajananatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ dukkhamāha, taṃ neva akataṃ āgacchati, na issaranimmānādito hoti, ito pana hotīti ñāpanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ samudayasaccaṃ, tato sahetukena dukkhena abhibhūtattā saṃviggamānasānaṃ dukkhanissaraṇagavesīnaṃ nissaraṇadassanena assāsajananatthaṃ nirodhaṃ, tato nirodhādhigamatthaṃ nirodhasampāpakaṃ magganti. Idāni tabbisayāni ñāṇāni teneva kamena uddiṭṭhāni. Tattha pariññaṭṭheti dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭhādike catubbidhe parijānitabbasabhāve. Pahānaṭṭheti samudayassa āyūhanaṭṭhādike catubbidhe pahātabbasabhāve. Sacchikiriyaṭṭheti nirodhassa nissaraṇaṭṭhādike catubbidhe sacchikātabbasabhāve. Bhāvanaṭṭheti maggassa niyyānaṭṭhādike catubbidhe bhāvetabbasabhāve.
60-63 60-63. 现在,为了说明已修习道的人通过省察的方式,或者未修习道的人通过听闻传承的方式,分别了知各别的谛智,所以列出了“于苦之智”等四种智。其中,在“于苦”这个词里,“du”这个音表示可厌的。人们把可厌的儿子叫做“劣子”。而“kha”这个音表示空的。空的虚空就叫做“kha”。这第一圣谛,因为是种种灾祸的依处所以可厌,因为远离了凡夫所执取的恒常、清净、安乐、自我之性所以是空的。因此,由于可厌和空,就称为“苦”。巴利
60-63. Idāni bhāvitamaggassa paccavekkhaṇavasena vā abhāvitamaggassa anussavavasena vā visuṃ visuṃ saccañāṇāni dassetuṃ dukkhe ñāṇādīni cattāri ñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tattha dukkheti ettha du-iti ayaṃ saddo kucchite dissati. Kucchitañhi puttaṃ duputtoti vadanti. Khaṃ-saddo pana tucche. Tucchañhi ākāsaṃ ‘kha’nti vuccati. Idañca paṭhamasaccaṃ kucchitaṃ anekupaddavādhiṭṭhānato, tucchaṃ bālajanaparikappitadhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahitato. Tasmā kucchitattā tucchattā ca ‘‘dukkha’’nti vuccati.
在“苦集”这个词里,“saṃ”这个音表示结合,就像在“samāgamo(集合)”“sametaṃ(会合)”这些词里那样。“u”这个音表示生起,就像在“uppannaṃ(已生)”“uditaṃ(已起)”这些词里那样。而“aya”这个音表示原因。这第二圣谛,就是当其余诸缘和合时,苦生起的原因。因此,因为它是苦的结合与生起之因,所以称为“苦集”。巴利
Dukkhasamudayeti ettha saṃ-iti ayaṃ saddo ‘‘samāgamo sameta’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 199; dī. ni. 2.396) viya saṃyogaṃ dīpeti. U-iti ayaṃ saddo ‘‘uppannaṃ udita’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 172; cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 141) viya uppattiṃ. Aya-saddo pana kāraṇaṃ dīpeti. Idañcāpi dutiyasaccaṃ avasesapaccayasamāyoge sati dukkhassa uppattikāraṇaṃ. Iti dukkhassa saṃyoge uppattikāraṇattā ‘‘dukkhasamudaya’’nti vuccati.
在“苦灭”这个词里,“ni”这个音表示不存在,“rodha”这个音表示牢狱。所以,因为在这里,被称为轮回牢狱的苦的牢狱在一切趣中都空无所有,所以是“不存在”;或者,因为证得它的时候,轮回牢狱的苦的牢狱就不存在了,因为它与它正好相反,所以也称为“苦灭”。又或者,因为它是苦不再生起、灭尽的缘,所以称为“苦灭”。巴利
Dukkhanirodheti ettha ni-saddo abhāvaṃ, rodha-saddo ca cārakaṃ dīpeti. Tasmā abhāvo ettha saṃsāracārakasaṅkhātassa dukkharodhassa sabbagatisuññattā, samadhigate vā tasmiṃ saṃsāracārakassa dukkharodhassa abhāvo hoti tappaṭipakkhattātipi ‘‘dukkhanirodha’’nti vuccati. Dukkhassa vā anuppattinirodhapaccayattā dukkhanirodhanti vuccati.
在“趣向苦灭之道”这个说法里,因为这条道以取苦灭为所缘的方式走向苦灭,面向它,而且它也是达到苦灭的修行,所以称为“趣向苦灭之道”。前面为了显示从诸行出起的样貌,把四种道智说成“于道之智”;为了显示能给出无间果的因的样貌,说成“于无间定之智”;为了显示从诸行转离的样貌,说成“于谛转离之智”;为了显示阿罗汉道智是依照道的次第才生起,以及那智是证知的状态,所以只把阿罗汉道智说成“漏尽智”。然后,为了显示四种道智是同一通达,说了“遍知义之慧是于苦之智”等四种智。再进一步,为了显示在每一个谛上各别各别地生起,列举了“于苦之智”等四种智。应当这样了知前后之间的差别。巴利
Dukkhanirodhagāminiyāpaṭipadāyāti ettha yasmā ayaṃ etaṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchati ārammaṇakaraṇavasena tadabhimukhībhūtattā, paṭipadā ca hoti dukkhanirodhappattiyā, tasmā dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāti vuccati. Cattāri maggañāṇāneva heṭṭhā vuṭṭhānākāradīpanavasena ‘‘magge ñāṇa’’nti vuttāni, anantaraphaladāyakattassa kāraṇaparidīpanavasena ‘‘ānantarikasamādhimhi ñāṇa’’nti vuttāni, vivaṭṭanākāradīpanavasena ‘‘saccavivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti vuttāni, maggapaṭipāṭikkameneva arahattamaggañāṇuppattiṃ, tassa ca ñāṇassa abhiññābhāvaṃ dīpetuṃ arahattamaggañāṇameva ‘‘āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Puna catunnampi maggañāṇānaṃ ekābhisamayataṃ dīpetuṃ ‘‘pariññaṭṭhe paññā dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādīni cattāri ñāṇāni vuttāni. Puna ekekasmiṃ sacce visuṃ visuṃ uppattidīpanavasena ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādīni cattāri ñāṇāni uddiṭṭhānīti evaṃ pubbāparaviseso veditabboti.
64-67 64-67. 现在,为了说明一切圣者的四无碍解智都是依靠圣道的力量才得以成就的,又列举了义无碍解智等四种无碍解智。应当知道,这些无碍解智即使没有无碍解的细分,也是所有圣者共通的纯粹无碍解智;而前面所列举的,则是已获得无碍解分别的人所达到的、有区分的无碍解智。这就是两者在前后文中所说的差别。或者说,因为紧接着前面列举的、以苦为所缘和以灭为所缘的智是义无碍解,以集为所缘和以道为所缘的智是法无碍解,对这两者的表述的智是辞无碍解,对这些智的智是辩无碍解,所以为了显示这一层意义上的差别,应当知道此处列举的是纯粹的无碍解智。正因为如此,前面用“种种”一词加以区分来说,而这里则不作这样的区分来说。巴利
64-67. Idāni sabbesaṃ ariyapuggalānaṃ ariyamaggānubhāveneva paṭisambhidāñāṇāni siddhānīti dassetuṃ atthapaṭisambhide ñāṇantiādīni puna cattāri paṭisambhidāñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Imāni hi paṭisambhidāpabhedābhāvepi sabbaariyapuggalasādhāraṇāni suddhikapaṭisambhidāñāṇāni, heṭṭhā uddiṭṭhāni pana pabhinnapaṭisambhidānaṃ pabhedappattāni paṭisambhidāñāṇānīti veditabbānīti ayametesaṃ ubhayatthavacane viseso. Yasmā vā anantaraṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ dukkhārammaṇaṃ nirodhārammaṇañca ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā hoti, samudayārammaṇaṃ maggārammaṇañca ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā, tadabhilāpe ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā, tesu ñāṇesu ñāṇaṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidā, tasmā tampi atthavisesaṃ dassetuṃ suddhikapaṭisambhidāñāṇāni uddiṭṭhānīti veditabbāni. Tasmāyeva ca heṭṭhā nānattasaddena visesetvā vuttāni. Idha tathā avisesetvā vuttānīti.
68 68. 这样按顺序列举了六十七种与声闻弟子共通的智慧之后,现在为了显示声闻弟子所不共、唯如来独有的智慧,便列举了“根上下智”等六种不共智。在这里,如来观察众生是否堪受教法时,是用佛眼来观察的。所谓佛眼,就是指“根上下智”和“心性随眠智”这两种智慧。正如经中所说:巴利
68. Evaṃ paṭipāṭiyā sattasaṭṭhi sāvakasādhāraṇañāṇāni uddisitvā idāni sāvakehi asādhāraṇāni tathāgatānaṃyeva āveṇikāni ñāṇāni dassetuṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇādīni cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tatthapi yasmā tathāgatā sattānaṃ dhammadesanāya bhājanābhājanattaṃ olokentā buddhacakkhunā olokenti. Buddhacakkhu nāma indriyaparopariyattāsayānusayañāṇadvayameva. Yathāha –
世尊确实以佛眼观察世间,当他观察众生时,看见有些众生的烦恼尘垢少,有些众生的烦恼尘垢多,有些众生根器锐利,有些众生根器迟钝,等等。巴利
‘‘Addasā kho bhagavā buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento satte apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe tikkhindriye mudindriye’’tiādi (mahāva. 9; ma. ni. 1.283; 2.339).
在观察众生的心相续时,他们首先观察根器成熟还是没成熟;知道根器成熟之后,为了随顺其意乐等而说法,接着观察意乐、随眠和行迹。因此,最先列出的是根上下智,紧接着是意乐随眠智。而说法的时候,对于那些应当用神通来调伏的人,他们就示现神通,所以在意乐随眠智之后,紧接着列出了双神变智。为了说明这三种智的因,紧接着列出了大悲智。为了说明大悲智的清净,紧接着列出了一切知智。为了说明一切知智必定与对一切法的转向相关联,以及一切知智本身没有障碍,紧接着列出了无障智。应当这样理解。巴利
Sattasantāne ca olokentā paṭhamaṃ indriyaparipākāparipākaṃ olokenti, indriyaparipākañca ñatvā āsayādīnaṃ anurūpena dhammadesanatthaṃ tato āsayānusayacaritāni olokenti, tasmāpi paṭhamaṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, tadanantaraṃ āsayānusayañāṇaṃ. Dhammaṃ desentā ca yasmā pāṭihāriyena vinetabbānaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ karonti, tasmā āsayānusayañāṇānantaraṃ yamakapāṭihāriye ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ñāṇānaṃ hetuparidīpanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ mahākaruṇāñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Mahākaruṇāñāṇassa parisuddhabhāvaparidīpanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Sabbaññussāpi sabbadhammānaṃ āvajjanapaṭibaddhabhāvaparidīpanatthaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇassa anāvariyabhāvaparidīpanatthañca tadanantaraṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ.
关于“根上下智”,这里要把上面“众生”这个词拿过来,组合成“众生的根上下智”。本来该说“parāni ca aparāni ca parāparāni”,也就是殊胜和低劣合称“胜劣”,但按照连声规则变成了“ro”音,所以说成“paroparāni”。“paroparānaṃ bhāvo”就是“胜劣性”,即“paropariyaṃ”;“paropariyameva paropariyattaṃ”,也就是胜劣性本身就是胜劣的状态。对于应受教化的众生,他们信等五根的胜劣状态就是“indriyaparopariyattaṃ”,即根的胜劣状态;了知这种根器胜劣状态的智慧,就是“indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ”,意思是了知诸根殊胜或低劣的智慧。也有读作“indriyavarovariyattañāṇa”的。“varāni ca avariyāni ca varovariyāni”,殊胜和不殊胜合称“胜劣”;“varovariyānaṃ bhāvo varovariyattaṃ”,即胜劣性,应这样组合理解。“avariyāni”的意思是不殊胜。或者也可以这样理解:“parāni ca oparāni ca paroparāni”,殊胜和低劣合称“胜劣”;“tesaṃ bhāvo paropariyattaṃ”,即它们的状态就是胜劣性,应这样组合。“oparāni”说的就是“orāni”,意思是低劣的,就像“paroparā yassa samecca dhammā”等句中的用法一样。也有用依格说成“indriyaparopariyatte ñāṇaṃ”的读法。巴利
Indriyaparopariyattañāṇanti ettha upari ‘‘sattāna’’nti padaṃ idheva āharitvā ‘‘sattānaṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇa’’nti yojetabbaṃ. Parāni ca aparāni ca parāparānīti vattabbe sandhivasena ro-kāraṃ katvā paroparānīti vuccati. Paroparānaṃ bhāvo paropariyaṃ, paropariyameva paropariyattaṃ, veneyyasattānaṃ saddhādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ paropariyattaṃ indriyaparopariyattaṃ, indriyaparopariyattassa ñāṇaṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ, indriyānaṃ uttamānuttamabhāvañāṇanti attho. ‘‘Indriyavarovariyattañāṇa’’ntipi pāṭho. Varāni ca avariyāni ca varovariyāni, varovariyānaṃ bhāvo varovariyattanti yojetabbaṃ. Avariyānīti ca na uttamānīti attho. Atha vā parāni ca oparāni ca paroparāni, tesaṃ bhāvo paropariyattanti yojetabbaṃ. Oparānīti ca orānīti vuttaṃ hoti, lāmakānīti attho, ‘‘paroparā yassa samecca dhammā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 479) viya. ‘‘Indriyaparopariyatte ñāṇa’’nti bhummavacanenāpi pāṭho.
69 对于“众生的意乐与随眠智”这一说法,在这里,对色等诸蕴,因为欲贪而执著,所以称为“众生”。世尊确实这样说过:巴利
69.Sattānaṃ āsayānusaye ñāṇanti ettha rūpādīsu khandhesu chandarāgena sattā visattāti sattā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
罗陀,在诸色中,凡是欲、贪、欢喜、渴爱,心在那里执著、在那里黏着,因此就被称为“众生”。在受、想、行、识中,凡是欲、贪、欢喜、渴爱,心在那里执著、在那里黏着,因此就被称为“众生”。巴利
‘‘Rūpe kho, rādha, yo chando yo rāgo yā nandī yā taṇhā, tatra satto tatra visatto, tasmā ‘satto’ti vuccati. Vedanāya saññāya saṅkhāresu viññāṇe yo chando yo rāgo yā nandī yā taṇhā, tatra satto tatra visatto, tasmā ‘satto’ti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.161).
只琢磨字面的人,不去考察其中的含义,就主张“这不过是个名称而已”。而那些考察含义的人,则依据“执著”这层关联,主张它就是有情,也就是这些有情。所谓“意乐”,就是“依止于此”的意思,这是对为邪见或正见、为欲贪等或出离等所熏修的心相续的称呼。在有情的心相续中随眠、随之运作的,就是随眠,这是对已经具有力量的欲贪等烦恼的称呼。意乐和随眠合在一起,就是意乐随眠。通过总举其类以及相违释的构词方式,应当知道这里用的是单数形式。因为行为和胜解都包含在意乐随眠之中,所以在总标时,就把关于行为和胜解的智一并归入意乐随眠智,而说为“意乐随眠智”。因为是以什么意图作了总标,也就是以同样的意图作了详解。巴利
Akkharacintakā pana atthaṃ avicāretvā ‘‘nāmamattameta’’nti icchanti. Yepi atthaṃ vicārenti, te satvayogena sattāti icchanti, tesaṃ sattānaṃ. Āsayanti nissayanti etaṃ iti āsayo, micchādiṭṭhiyā, sammādiṭṭhiyā vā kāmādīhi, nekkhammādīhi vā paribhāvitassa santānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sattasantāne anusenti anupavattantīti anusayā, thāmagatānaṃ kāmarāgādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Āsayo ca anusayo ca āsayānusayo. Jātiggahaṇena ca dvandasamāsavasena ca ekavacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yasmā caritādhimuttiyo āsayānusayasaṅgahitā, tasmā uddese caritādhimuttīsu ñāṇāni āsayānusayañāṇeneva saṅgahetvā ‘‘āsayānusaye ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Yeneva hi adhippāyena uddeso kato, teneva adhippāyena niddeso katoti.
70 关于“双神变智”:这里,火堆、水流等不先不后,在同一刹那同时生起,所以叫“双”;因为能去除不信等对立之法,所以叫“神变”;它既是双又是神变,因此叫“双神变”。巴利
70.Yamakapāṭihīre ñāṇanti ettha aggikkhandhaudakadhārādīnaṃ apubbaṃ acarimaṃ sakiṃyeva pavattito yamakaṃ, assaddhiyādīnaṃ paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ haraṇato pāṭihīraṃ, yamakañca taṃ pāṭihīrañcāti yamakapāṭihīraṃ.
71 关于“大悲等至智”:在这里,当他人受苦时,能让善人的心震动,所以叫“悲”;或者说,它削减、灭除他人的苦,所以叫“悲”;或者说,它以遍满的方式在受苦的人当中扩散开来,所以叫“悲”。因为遍满的作用和功德特质而变得广大,这广大的悲就是“大悲”。具大悲心的人证入这个定,所以叫“等至”;大悲本身就是这个等至,所以叫“大悲等至”。在那个大悲等至当中,与它相应的智慧,就是这里说的“大悲等至智”。巴利
71.Mahākaruṇāsamāpattiyā ñāṇanti ettha paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ hadayakampanaṃ karotīti karuṇā, kināti vā paradukkhaṃ hiṃsati vināsetīti karuṇā, kirīyati vā dukkhitesu pharaṇavasena pasārīyatīti karuṇā, pharaṇakammavasena kammaguṇavasena ca mahatī karuṇā mahākaruṇā, samāpajjanti etaṃ mahākāruṇikāti samāpatti, mahākaruṇā ca sā samāpatti cāti mahākaruṇāsamāpatti. Tassaṃ mahākaruṇāsamāpattiyaṃ, taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
72-73 72-73. “一切知智”和“无障智”这里,因为已经了知了一切,也就是了知了五种所导之相的全部,所以叫“一切知”;一切知的状态就是“一切知性”,那智本身在应该说成“一切知性智”的地方,被说成了“一切知智”。其实,一切法可以分成有为、无为等等,也就是行、变化、相、涅槃、施设,正好就是五种所导。而“一切知”可以有五种:次第一切知、一时一切知、常一切知、能一切知、已知一切知。其中,因为不可能按顺序了知一切的时候,所以“次第一切知”不成立;因为不能在一刹那间执取一切所缘,所以“一时一切知”不成立;因为眼识等各自按照自己的所缘生起心,这与有分心相违背,没有道理,所以“常一切知”不成立。剩下的当中,因为完全具备遍知一切的能力,所以“能一切知”可以成立;因为已经了知一切法,所以“已知一切知”可以成立。如果说能一切知的人还没有遍知一切的体性,那也不对。巴利
72-73.Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇanti ettha pañcaneyyapathappabhedaṃ sabbaṃ aññāsīti sabbaññū, sabbaññussa bhāvo sabbaññutā, sā eva ñāṇaṃ ‘‘sabbaññutāñāṇa’’nti vattabbe ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Saṅkhatāsaṅkhatādibhedā sabbadhammā hi saṅkhāro vikāro lakkhaṇaṃ nibbānaṃ paññattīti pañceva neyyapathā honti. Sabbaññūti ca kamasabbaññū, sakiṃsabbaññū, satatasabbaññū, sattisabbaññū, ñātasabbaññūti pañcavidhā sabbaññuno siyuṃ. Kamena sabbajānanakālāsambhavato kamasabbaññutā na hoti, sakiṃ sabbārammaṇagahaṇābhāvato sakiṃsabbaññutā na hoti, cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārammaṇacittasambhavato bhavaṅgacittavirodhato yuttiabhāvato ca satatasabbaññutā na hoti, parisesato sabbajānanasamatthattā sattisabbaññutā vā siyā, viditasabbadhammattā ñātasabbaññutā vā siyā. Sattisabbaññuno sabbajānanattaṃ natthīti tampi na yujjati.
在他那里,没有任何东西是没见过的,也没有任何东西是未知的、不可知的。
如来彻底了知一切应当了知之法,因此被称为普眼。巴利
‘‘Na tassa addiṭṭhamidhatthi kiñci, atho aviññātamajānitabbaṃ; Sabbaṃ abhiññāsi yadatthi neyyaṃ, tathāgato tena samantacakkhū’’ti. (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. ma. 1.208) –
因为前面已经说过,所以只有“知一切智”才说得通。这样一来,从作用上、从不迷乱上、从理由成立上、从与转向相系属上,确实就是一切知智。正因为它与转向相系属,所以对它来说不存在障碍,这就是“无障碍”;而这无障碍本身就是“无障碍智”。巴利
Vuttattā ñātasabbaññuttameva yujjati. Evañhi sati kiccato asammohato kāraṇasiddhito āvajjanapaṭibaddhato sabbaññuttameva hotīti. Āvajjanapaṭibaddhattā eva hi natthi etassa āvaraṇanti anāvaraṇaṃ, tadeva anāvaraṇañāṇanti vuccatīti.
这些七十三智,是依与声闻共和不共的方式列出的。对于这七十三智,从开头起所说的这七十三智,这里的属格表示“总括”的意思。也有读作“七十三”的文本。当应该说“七十三”时,要知道这是用一个复数形式来表达。六十七智,就是从开头起所说的六十七智。与声闻共:因为在听闻之后生于圣洁的种姓,所以叫声闻;他们共同持有这些智,所以叫共;对如来来说,与声闻弟子们共通的智,就是与声闻共的智。六智,就是最后列出的六智。声闻不共:不与声闻们所共同,唯属如来的智。巴利
Imāni tesattati ñāṇānīti sāvakehi sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇavasena uddiṭṭhāni imāni tesattati ñāṇāni. Imesaṃ tesattatiyā ñāṇānanti ādito paṭṭhāya vuttānaṃ imesaṃ tesattatiñāṇānaṃ. Ubbāhanatthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Tesattatīnantipi pāṭho. ‘‘Tesattatiyā’’ti vattabbe ekasmiṃ bahuvacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sattasaṭṭhi ñāṇānītiādito paṭṭhāya sattasaṭṭhi ñāṇāni. Sāvakasādhāraṇānīti savanante ariyāya jātiyā jātattā sāvakā, samānaṃ dhāraṇametesanti sādhāraṇāni, tathāgatānaṃ sāvakehi sādhāraṇāni sāvakasādhāraṇāni. Cha ñāṇānīti ante uddiṭṭhāni cha ñāṇāni. Asādhāraṇāni sāvakehīti sāvakehi asādhāraṇāni tathāgatānaṃyeva ñāṇānīti.
1. 《闻所成智详解》的注释巴利
1. Sutamayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
解答总说的注释巴利
Vissajjanuddesavaṇṇanā
1 现在,为了按照前面安立的总说来分类展示所摄集的诸法,开始了解说分:“如何于倾听中,慧是闻所成智”等。其中,所说的“于倾听中,慧是闻所成智”,这是怎么回事呢?这是想要说明的提问。问确实有五种:未见解明问、已见合和问、断疑问、同意问、想说问。它们的差别如下:巴利
1. Idāni yathānikkhittena uddesena saṅgahite dhamme pabhedato dassetuṃ kathaṃ sotāvadhāne paññā sutamaye ñāṇantiādi niddesavāro āraddho. Tattha yaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘sotāvadhāne paññā sutamaye ñāṇa’’nti , taṃ kathaṃ hotīti? Ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā. Pañcavidhā hi pucchā – adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā, diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā, vimaticchedanāpucchā, anumatipucchā, kathetukamyatāpucchāti. Tāsaṃ idaṃ nānattaṃ –
什么是“未见而求阐明”的提问?从本质上说,某个特征还不被知道、还不被看见、还不被衡量、还不被判断、还不清楚、还不明了,为了知道它、看见它、衡量它、判断它、让它清楚、让它明了而提问,这就是“未见而求阐明”的提问。巴利
Katamā adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā? (Mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12) pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ aññātaṃ hoti adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ, tassa ñāṇāya dassanāya tulanāya tīraṇāya vibhūtāya vibhāvanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā.
什么是“已见对照之问”?按照事物的本性,它的特征已经被知道、被看见、被衡量、被判断、变得清楚、被清楚地了解,他为了和其他有智慧的人一起对照验证而提问,这就是“已见对照之问”。巴利
Katamā diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā? (Mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12) pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ ñātaṃ hoti diṭṭhaṃ tulitaṃ tīritaṃ vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ, so aññehi paṇḍitehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā.
什么是断疑之问?有人本性上就陷在疑惑里,陷在犹豫里,心存两端:“是这样吗?不是这样吗?是什么?怎么样?”他为了断除疑惑而发问,这就是断疑之问。巴利
Katamā vimaticchedanāpucchā? (Mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12) pakatiyā saṃsayapakkhando hoti vimatipakkhando dveḷhakajāto ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, nanu kho, kiṃ nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti? So vimaticchedanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ vimaticchedanāpucchā.
什么是征询同意之问?世尊为了征得比丘们的同意而提问:“比丘们,你们认为怎样?色是常的还是无常的?”“无常,尊者。”“那无常的东西是苦还是乐?”“苦,尊者。”“那无常、苦、会变坏的东西,适合这样看待吗——‘这是我的,这就是我,这是我的我’?”“尊者,不适合。”这就是征询同意之问。巴利
Katamā anumatipucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ anumatiyā pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti? ‘‘Aniccaṃ, bhante’’. ‘‘Yaṃ panāniccaṃ, dukkhaṃ vā taṃ sukhaṃ vā’’ti? ‘‘Dukkhaṃ, bhante’’. ‘‘Yaṃ panāniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ, kallaṃ nu taṃ samanupassituṃ ‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti? ‘‘No hetaṃ, bhante’’ti (mahāva. 21), ayaṃ anumatipucchā.
什么样的问法叫做“想说法而问”?世尊因为想为比丘们说法,就向他们提问:“比丘们,有四种念处。是哪四种呢?”这就是想说法而问。在这些问法当中,应当知道这是长老想说法而问。巴利
Katamā kathetukamyatāpucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ kathetukamyatāya pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘cattārome , bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.390)? Ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchāti. Tāsu ayaṃ therassa kathetukamyatāpucchāti veditabbā.
现在,针对想要宣说总纲而提问,有十六种解答概要,即“这些法应证知——倾听,那了知之慧是闻所成智”等。其中,“这些法应证知”省略了“正在说法者”。当世尊,或某位可尊敬的同梵行者正在说法时,依照前面所说的方法去倾听、去听闻,就称为倾听。那了知之慧,即对所听闻的内容加以抉择、分辨的慧,称为闻所成智,这就是它的含义。“它的了知”即“那了知”,是一个属格复合词;或者,“那了知”是由于格位变化而成为对格。“应证知”,是指通过明了自性相,以善巧的方式了知。“应遍知”,是指通过明了共相,以及通过圆满成就所应作,而全面地了知。“应修习”,指应增长。“应证得”,指应现前。因为证得有两种:获得证得和所缘证得。由于依与善法相反的现行,而归于名为退的退失,所以称为退分;由于依随顺彼法的念而安住,归于名为住的住立,所以称为住分;由于依获得更上的殊胜,归于殊胜,所以称为殊胜分。圣道能穿透、能打破从前未被穿透、未被打破的贪蕴、嗔蕴、痴蕴,所以称为刺破;由于依伴随厌离之想与作意的现行,而归于那刺破,所以称为刺破分。巴利
Idāni samātikuddesāya kathetukamyatāpucchāya ‘‘ime dhammā abhiññeyyāti sotāvadhānaṃ, taṃpajānanā paññā sutamaye ñāṇa’’ntiādayo soḷasa vissajjanuddesā. Tattha ime dhammā abhiññeyyāti ‘‘desayantassā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Ime dhammā abhijānitabbāti satthuno, aññatarassa vā garuṭṭhāniyassa sabrahmacārissa dhammaṃ desayantassa pubbe vuttanayena sotāvadhānaṃ sutaṃ sotāvadhānaṃ nāma. Taṃpajānanā paññā tassa sutassa pajānanā pariyāyaparicchindakapaññā sutamaye ñāṇaṃ nāmāti attho. Tassa pajānanā taṃpajānanāti sāmivacanasamāso. Taṃ pajānanāti vibhattivipallāsavasena upayogavacanaṃ vā. Abhiññeyyāti ca sabhāvalakkhaṇāvabodhavasena sobhanenākārena jānitabbā. Pariññeyyāti sāmaññalakkhaṇāvabodhavasena kiccasamāpanavasena ca byāpitvā jānitabbā. Bhāvetabbāti vaḍḍhetabbā. Sacchikātabbāti paccakkhaṃ kātabbā. Duvidhā hi sacchikiriyā paṭilābhasacchikiriyā ārammaṇasacchikiriyā ca. Paccanīkasamudācāravasena parihāniyasaṅkhātaṃ hānaṃ bhajantīti hānabhāgiyā. Tadanudhammatāya satiyā saṇṭhānavasena ṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ ṭhitiṃ bhajantīti ṭhitibhāgiyā. Uparivisesādhigamavasena visesaṃ bhajantīti visesabhāgiyā. Anibbiddhapubbaṃ appadālitapubbaṃ lobhakkhandhaṃ dosakkhandhaṃ mohakkhandhaṃ nibbijjhati padāletīti ariyamaggo nibbedho nāma, nibbidāsahagatānaṃ saññāmanasikārānaṃ samudācāravasena taṃ nibbedhaṃ bhajantīti nibbedhabhāgiyā.
“一切诸行”指的是所有有因有缘的法。它们确实被称为“有为行”。因为是被各种条件聚合造作出来的,所以叫“行”;正由于它们是由各种条件聚合而成的,所以特别称为“有为”。注释书里把业所生的三地色法和无色法称为“已造作之行”,它们也归入“诸行无常”等所说的有为行之中。在“比丘们,这个被无明笼罩的人,造作福行……”等经文里,以无明为缘而生的行,也就是三地的善与不善的思,称为“能造作之行”。在“造作能走多远,就走了那么远,像撞到车轴一样停住”等文句里,提到的身体和心的精进努力,称为“方便造作”。在“贤友毗舍佉,进入想受灭定的比丘,首先语行灭,然后身行灭,再然后心行灭”等文句里,提到的寻与伺是“语行”——因为它们造作语言;出入息是“身行”——因为它们由身体造作;想与受是“心行”——因为它们由心造作。但在这里,指的是“有为行”。巴利
Sabbe saṅkhārāti sabbe sappaccayā dhammā. Te hi saṅkhatasaṅkhārā nāma. Paccayehi saṅgamma karīyantīti saṅkhārā, te eva paccayehi saṅgamma katattā saṅkhatāti visesetvā vuttā. Kammanibbattā tebhūmakarūpārūpadhammā abhisaṅkhatasaṅkhārāti aṭṭhakathāsu (visuddhi. 2.587; vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa) vuttā. Tepi ‘‘aniccā va saṅkhārā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.186; 2.143; dī. ni. 2.221, 272) saṅkhatasaṅkhāresu saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. ‘‘Avijjāgato ayaṃ, bhikkhave, purisapuggalo puññañceva saṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharotī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.51) avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāva āgatā tebhūmikakusalākusalacetanā abhisaṅkharaṇakasaṅkhārā nāma. ‘‘Yāvatikā abhisaṅkhārassa gati, tāvatikaṃ gantvā akkhāhataṃ maññe aṭṭhāsī’’tiādīsu āgataṃ kāyikaṃ cetasikaṃ vīriyaṃ payogābhisaṅkhāro nāma. ‘‘Saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ samāpannassa kho, āvuso visākha, bhikkhuno paṭhamaṃ nirujjhati vacīsaṅkhāro, tato kāyasaṅkhāro, tato cittasaṅkhāro’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.464) āgatā vitakkavicārā. Vācaṃ saṅkharontīti vacīsaṅkhārā. Assāsapassāsā kāyena saṅkharīyantīti kāyasaṅkhārā. Saññā ca vedanā ca cittena saṅkharīyantīti cittasaṅkhārā. Idha pana saṅkhatasaṅkhārā adhippetā.
“无常”,意思是生起之后就不存在。“苦”,意思是逼迫。“一切法”,这是把涅槃也包括在内而说的。“无我”,意思是没有自主性。在“此是苦圣谛”等说法里,本来应该说“苦的集”“苦的灭”,却说成“苦集”“苦灭”,这是语法上性数格的颠倒。不过,因为佛陀等圣者们证悟了它们,所以称为圣谛。正如经中所说:“比丘们,有这四圣谛……比丘们,这些就是四圣谛。圣者们证悟这些,因此称为圣谛。”也可以理解为“圣者的真谛”,所以叫圣谛。如说:“在包括天人的世间……如来是圣者,因此称为圣谛。”又因为如实彻底证悟这些而成就了圣者的身份,所以也是圣谛。如说:“比丘们,因为如实彻底证悟这四圣谛,如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者被称为圣者。”也可以理解为“圣性的真谛”,所以叫圣谛。“圣”就是不虚妄、不欺诳的意思。如说:“比丘们,这四圣谛是真实的、不虚妄的、不改变的,因此称为圣谛。”那么“谛”的真实含义是什么呢?用智慧眼观察时,它不像幻术那样颠倒,不像阳焰那样欺诳,也不像外道所构想的那样根本没有真实存在;相反,它以逼迫、生起、寂静、出离的方式,以真实不虚、非颠倒的状态,成为圣者智慧的所缘境。这种真实不虚、非颠倒的状态,就像火的热性、世间的常态一样,应当知道就是“谛”的真实含义。如经中详细说:“比丘们,这是苦,这是真实的、不虚妄的、不改变的。”再者——巴利
Aniccāti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena. Dukkhāti pīḷanaṭṭhena. Sabbe dhammāti nibbānampi antokatvā vuttā. Anattāti avasavattanaṭṭhena. Idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccantiādīsu ‘‘dukkhasamudayo dukkhanirodho’’ti vattabbe ‘‘dukkhasamudayaṃ dukkhanirodha’’nti liṅgavipallāso kato. Yasmā pana buddhādayo ariyā paṭivijjhanti, tasmā ariyasaccānīti vuccanti. Yathāha ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, ariyasaccāni…pe… imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri ariyasaccāni. Ariyā imāni paṭivijjhanti, tasmā ariyasaccānīti vuccantī’’ti. Ariyassa saccānītipi ariyasaccāni. Yathāha ‘‘sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya tathāgato ariyo, tasmā ariyasaccānīti vuccantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1098). Etesaṃ abhisambuddhattā ariyabhāvasiddhitopi ariyasaccāni. Yathāha ‘‘imesaṃ kho, bhikkhave, catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho ariyoti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1093). Ariyāni saccānītipi ariyasaccāni. Ariyānīti avitathāni, avisaṃvādakānīti attho. Yathāha ‘‘imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri ariyasaccāni tathāni avitathāni anaññathāni, tasmā ariyasaccānīti vuccantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1097). Saccānīti ko saccaṭṭhoti ce? Yo paññācakkhunā upaparikkhamānānaṃ māyāva viparīto, marīcīva visaṃvādako, titthiyānaṃ parikappitaattāva anupalabbhasabhāvo ca na hoti, atha kho bādhanapabhavasantiniyyānappakārena tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvena ariyañāṇassa gocaro hotiyeva. Esa aggilakkhaṇaṃ viya lokapakati viya ca tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvo saccaṭṭhoti veditabbo. Yathāha ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti, bhikkhave, tathametaṃ avitathametaṃ anaññathameta’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1090) vitthāro. Apica –
因为苦并非逼迫,所以由苦而生的其他法也不造成逼迫。
以逼迫性的规则来看,因此这个被认为是真理。
没有它,苦就不会从别处产生;而那苦也不从它那里产生。
苦以渴爱为因,这是确定的;这就是谛,也就是系缚。
除了涅槃,没有别的寂静;因为那(涅槃)并非不寂静。
通过寂静的显现规律,因此这被认为是真理。
除了道,没有别的出离;而它本身也不是不出离。
由于真实出离之性质,所以它被认为是真理。
就这样,在四谛中,它都是真实而不颠倒的。
智者说,根据苦等(四谛)无差别地,这就是“谛”的含义。巴利
Nābādhakaṃ yato dukkhaṃ, dukkhā aññaṃ na bādhakaṃ; Bādhakattaniyāmena, tato saccamidaṃ mataṃ. Taṃ vinā nāññato dukkhaṃ, na hoti na ca taṃ tato; Dukkhahetu niyāmena, iti saccaṃ visattikā. Nāññā nibbānato santi, santaṃ na ca na taṃ yato; Santabhāvaniyāmena, tato saccamidaṃ mataṃ. Maggā aññaṃ na niyyānaṃ, aniyyāno na cāpi so; Tacchaniyyānabhāvena, iti so saccasammato. Iti tacchāvipallāsa-bhūtabhāvaṃ catūsvapi; Dukkhādīsvavisesena, saccaṭṭhaṃ āhu paṇḍitāti.
不过,这个“sacca”一词出现在多种含义中。比如“应当说真话,不应发怒”等句中,指的是言语之谛。“安住于谛的沙门婆罗门”等句中,指的是离妄语之谛。“为何人们说种种谛,自称善说者”等句中,指的是见解之谛。“谛只有一个,没有第二个,了知者不会因此与人争论”等句中,指的是究竟义之谛,即涅槃与道。“四谛中哪些是善、哪些是不善”等句中,指的是圣谛。而在这里,它也是用在圣谛的含义上。巴利
So panāyaṃ saccasaddo anekesu atthesu dissati. Seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘saccaṃ bhaṇe na kujjheyyā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 224) vācāsacce. ‘‘Sacce ṭhitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā cā’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.21.433) viratisacce. ‘‘Kasmā nu saccāni vadanti nānā, pavādiyāse kusalāvadānā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 891) diṭṭhisacce. ‘‘Ekañhi saccaṃ na dutīyamatthi, yasmiṃ pajā no vivade pajāna’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 890; mahāni. 119) paramatthasacce nibbāne ceva magge ca. ‘‘Catunnaṃ saccānaṃ kati kusalā kati akusalā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 216) ariyasacce. Svāyamidhāpi ariyasacce pavattatīti.
应遍知解说的注释巴利
Abhiññeyyaniddesavaṇṇanā
2 现在,为了按类别说明那些被收在回答式论题里的法,就开始了“这些法应当如何被遍知”等这一解说部分。其中,在应遍知解说等五种解说里,从最初开始,按一法、二法这样的方式,各有十种回答,再依照《十上经》的次第配合起来列出。在这些当中,先说应遍知解说里的“一切众生”:这是指在欲有、想有、一蕴有等一切有中的一切众生。“依食而住”:他们的存在依靠食物,所以叫依食而住。这里说的“住”,是指在各自那一刹那中的存在。因此,作为一切众生存在之因的食这一法,应当以更高的智慧去了知。因为一旦了知了缘,缘所生的法也就被了知了,这两者是互相观待的。这样就说了“知遍知”。那么,这样一来,岂不是和“无想有情天无因、无食、无触”等说法相矛盾吗?并不矛盾。因为对那些众生来说,禅那就是他们的食。即使这样,那又岂不是和“比丘们,有四种食,能使已生的众生住立,也能帮助寻求再生的众生。哪四种?段食,或粗或细;第二是触食;第三是意思食;第四是识食”这段经文相矛盾吗?这也不矛盾。因为在那部经里,是直接按食的特相来说诸法为食。而在这里,则是间接地把缘说为食。因为一切有为法都可以有缘,而那个缘产生什么果,就摄持什么果,所以叫食。因此才这样说:巴利
2. Idāni vissajjanuddesasaṅgahite dhamme pabhedato dassetuṃ kathaṃ ime dhammā abhiññeyyātiādi niddesavāro āraddho. Tattha abhiññeyyaniddesādīsu pañcasu ādito ekakādivasena dasa dasa vissajjanāni dasuttarapariyāyena saṃsandetvā uddiṭṭhāni. Tesu abhiññeyyaniddese tāva sabbe sattāti kāmabhavādīsu saññābhavādīsu ekavokārabhavādīsu ca sabbabhavesu sabbe sattā. Āhāraṭṭhitikāti āhārato ṭhiti etesanti āhāraṭṭhitikā. Ṭhitīti cettha sakakkhaṇe atthitā adhippetā. Iti sabbasattānaṃ ṭhitihetu āhāro nā eko dhammo adhikena ñāṇena jānitabbo. Paccaye hi abhiññāte paccayuppannāpi abhiññātā honti ubhinnampi aññamaññāpekkhattā. Etena ñātapariññā vuttā hoti. Nanu ca evaṃ sante yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘asaññasattā devā ahetukā anāhārā aphassakā’’tiādi (vibha. 1017), taṃ virujjhatīti. Tañca na virujjhati. Tesañhi jhānaṃ āhāroti. Evaṃ santepi ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārā bhūtānaṃ vā sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā, sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāya. Katame cattāro? Kabaḷīkāro āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā, phasso dutiyo, manosañcetanā tatiyā, viññāṇaṃ catuttha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.11) idaṃ virujjhatīti. Idampi na virujjhati. Etasmiñhi sutte nippariyāyena āhāralakkhaṇāva dhammā āhārāti vuttā. Idha pana pariyāyena paccayo āhāroti vutto. Sabbasaṅkhatadhammānañhi paccayo laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, so ca yaṃ yaṃ phalaṃ janeti, taṃ taṃ āharati nāma. Tasmā āhāroti vuccati. Tenevāha –
比丘们,我说无明是有食的,不说它没有食。比丘们,什么是无明的食呢?应该回答:五盖。比丘们,我说五盖是有食的,不说它们没有食。比丘们,什么是五盖的食呢?应该回答:不恰当作意。这就是这里所指的意思。巴利
‘‘Avijjampāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sāhāraṃ vadāmi, no anāhāraṃ. Ko ca, bhikkhave, avijjāya āhāro? ‘Pañca nīvaraṇā’tissa vacanīyaṃ. Pañca nīvaraṇepāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sāhāre vadāmi, no anāhāre. Ko ca, bhikkhave, pañcannaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ āhāro. ‘Ayoniso manasikāro’tissa vacanīya’’ntiādi (a. ni. 10.61). Ayaṃ idha adhippeto.
在这当中,一旦把握了缘食,那么无论是方便食还是直接食,全部都一并把握了。巴利
Etasmiñhi paccayāhāre gahite pariyāyāhāropi nippariyāyāhāropi sabbo gahitova hoti.
在这里,无想有中的众生也可以得到缘食。在佛陀还没有出世的时候,有人在外道的修行场所出家,以风遍作为所缘来修预备行,证得第四禅,从那里出定后,生起这样的认可和意乐:“呸,心!呸,心!心不存在才是好的。因为依靠心,才会生起杀、缚等缘所引生的苦;如果没有心,这些苦就不会有。”他保持着不退失的禅那命终,便投生到无想有中。他在人间习惯用哪种姿势,就以那种姿势投生,并在五百劫中安住。在这么长的时间里,他就像躺着、像坐着、像站着一样。像这样的众生,也可以得到缘食。因为他们修习禅那而投生,那个禅那就是他们的缘。就像被弓弦的力量射出的箭,只要弓弦的力量还在,就会一直飞行;同样,只要禅那这个缘还在,他们就一直存在。当这个缘结束时,他们就像箭的力量耗尽一样坠落下来。巴利
Tattha asaññabhave paccayāhāro labbhati. Anuppanne hi buddhe titthāyatane pabbajitvā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘dhī cittaṃ, dhī cittaṃ, cittassa nāma abhāvoyeva sādhu. Cittañhi nissāya vadhabandhanādipaccayaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, citte asati nattheta’’nti khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā aparihīnajjhānā kālaṃkatvā asaññabhave nibbattanti. Yo yassa iriyāpatho manussaloke paṇihito ahosi, so tena iriyāpathena nibbattitvā pañca kappasatāni tiṭṭhati. Ettakaṃ addhānaṃ nipanno viya nisinno viya ṭhito viya hoti. Evarūpānañca sattānaṃ paccayāhāro labbhati. Te hi yaṃ jhānaṃ bhāvetvā nibbattā , tade nesaṃ paccayo hoti. Yathā jiyāvegena khittasaro yāva jiyāvego atthi, tāva gacchati, evaṃ yāva jhānapaccayo atthi, tāva tiṭṭhanti. Tasmiṃ niṭṭhite khīṇavego saro viya patanti.
那些被称为“不靠勤勉之果活命、不靠福德之果活命”的地狱众生,他们以什么为食呢?他们的业本身就是他们的食。是不是有五种食呢?不能说“是五种,不是五种”。既然已经说过“缘就是食”,那么使他们投生到地狱的那份业,正是他们得以持续存在的缘,所以那就是他们的食。针对这一点,才有这样的说法:“只要那恶业还没有耗尽,他们就还不会死。”因此,“以食而存续”的意思就是“以缘而存续”。在这里,不应该就段食这件事起争论。因为就连他们口中生出的唾液,也能起到食的作用。唾液在地狱里成为苦受的缘,在天界则成为乐受的缘。这样一来,在欲界中,完全具备四种食;在色界和无色界中,除了无想有情之外,其余众生具备三种食;至于无想有情以及其他众生,则是以缘为食。靠着这种食,一切众生都以食而存续。巴利
Ye pana te nerayikā ‘‘nevuṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino na puññaphalūpajīvino’’ti vuttā, tesaṃ ko āhāroti? Tesaṃ kammameva āhāroti. Kiṃ pañca āhārā atthīti? ‘‘Pañca, na pañcā’’ti idaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Nanu ‘‘paccayo āhāro’’ti vutto, tasmā yena kammena te niraye nibbattā, tadeva tesaṃ ṭhitipaccayattā āhāro. Yaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘na tāva kālaṃ karoti, yāva na taṃ pāpakammaṃ byantī hotī’’ti (a. ni. 3.36; ma. ni. 3.250). Tasmā āhāraṭṭhitikāti paccayaṭṭhitikāti attho. Kabaḷīkāraṃ āhāraṃ ārabbhāti cettha vivādo na kātabbo. Mukhe uppannakheḷopi hi tesaṃ āhārakiccaṃ sādheti. Kheḷo hi niraye dukkhavedanīyo hutvā paccayo hoti, sagge sukhavedanīyo. Iti kāmabhave nippariyāyena cattāro āhārā, rūpārūpabhavesu ṭhapetvā asaññabhavaṃ sesānaṃ tayo , asaññānañceva avasesānañca paccayāhāroti iminā āhārena sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā.
“一切众生”这种说法,是以人为立足点来说法,真正的用意是指“一切行”。对世尊来说,依据法和人,说法有四种:以法为立足点说法,以法为立足点说人,以人为立足点说人,以人为立足点说法。比如“比丘们,我看不到有哪一种法像心这样,经过修习就变得柔软好用。比丘们,心经过修习就变得柔软好用”,这类就是以法为立足点说法。比如“比丘们,见具足的人把任何行执为常,这是不可能的,没有这个道理”,这类就是以法为立足点说人。比如“比丘们,一个人出现在世间,是为了大众的利益、大众的安乐、对世间的怜悯、为了天人的利益和安乐”,这类就是以人为立足点说人。比如“比丘们,一个人的出现,就是大眼的出现”,这类就是以人为立足点说法。在这些当中,这里是以人为立足点说法。要知道,因为上面一直到十法都只取了法,所以说取众生其实就是取法;或者更特别地说,因为应当用更殊胜的智慧,对属于众生相续的法从自性上加以观察,所以说取众生;又或者,依诸行而施设“众生”只是假名,因此以果来代称,把诸行说为“众生”。因为除了诸行之外,并没有任何依缘而立的众生,只是随顺世俗说法才这样说。这样就说明了已知遍知。巴利
Sabbe sattāti ca puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā, sabbe saṅkhārāti adhippāyo. Bhagavatopi hi dhammapuggalānaṃ vasena catubbidhā desanā – dhammādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā, dhammādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā, puggalādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā, puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanāti. ‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ bhāvitaṃ kammaniyaṃ hoti, yathayidaṃ cittaṃ. Cittaṃ, bhikkhave, bhāvitaṃ kammaniyaṃ hotī’’ti (a. ni. 1.22) evarūpī dhammādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā. ‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (a. ni. 1.268) evarūpī dhammādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā. ‘‘Ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussāna’’nti (a. ni. 1.170, 309), evarūpī puggalādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā. ‘‘Ekapuggalassa bhikkhave, pātubhāvā mahato cakkhussa pātubhāvo hotī’’ti (a. ni. 1.175-186) evarūpī puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā. Tāsu idha puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā . Upari yāva dasakā dhammānaṃyeva gahitattā sattaggahaṇena dhammaggahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ, visesena vā sattasantānapariyāpannadhammānaṃyeva adhikena ñāṇena sabhāvato upaparikkhitabbattā sattaggahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ, saṅkhāre upādāya sattoti paññattimattasambhavato vā phalopacārena saṅkhārā ‘‘sattā’’ti vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Na hi koci satto paccayaṭṭhitiko atthi aññatra saṅkhārehi, vohāravasena pana evaṃ vuccati. Evametena ñātapariññā vuttā hoti.
“二界”:就是有为界和无为界。其中,由种种缘和合而造作出来的五蕴,是有为界;非由任何缘所造作而成的涅槃,是无为界。巴利
Dve dhātuyoti saṅkhatā ca dhātu asaṅkhatā ca dhātu. Tattha anekehi paccayehi saṅgamma katā pañcakkhandhā saṅkhatā dhātu, kehici paccayehi akataṃ nibbānaṃ asaṅkhatā dhātu.
三界:欲界、色界、无色界(《分别论》181-182)。其中,什么是欲界?从最下面的无间地狱算起,到最上面的他化自在天为止,在这范围之内,属于此处的、摄于此处的蕴、界、处——色、受、想、行、识,这称为欲界(《分别论》182;《法集论》1287)。其中,什么是色界?从最下面的梵天世界算起,到最上面的色究竟天为止,在这范围之内,属于此处的、摄于此处的,无论是入定者的、投生者的,还是现法乐住者的心与心所法,这称为色界。其中,什么是无色界?从最下面的空无边处天算起,到最上面的非想非非想处天为止,在这范围之内,属于此处的、摄于此处的,无论是入定者的、投生者的,还是现法乐住者的心与心所法,这称为无色界。不过,在注释书中这样说:“欲界就是欲有,可以得到五蕴;色界就是色有,可以得到五蕴;无色界就是无色有,可以得到四蕴。”这是按照《十上经》的方式进行的搭配。巴利
Tisso dhātuyoti kāmadhātu rūpadhātu arūpadhātu (vibha. 181-182). Tattha katamā kāmadhātu? Heṭṭhato avīcinirayaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito paranimmitavasavattī deve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā khandhā dhātū āyatanā rūpā vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati kāmadhātu (vibha. 182; dha. sa. 1287). Tattha katamā rūpadhātu? Heṭṭhato brahmalokaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito akaniṭṭhe deve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa vā cittacetasikā dhammā. Ayaṃ vuccati rūpadhātu. Tattha katamā arūpadhātu? Heṭṭhato ākāsānañcāyatanūpage deve pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpage deve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa vā cittacetasikā dhammā. Ayaṃ vuccati arūpadhātu. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘kāmadhātūti kāmabhavo pañcakkhandhā labbhanti, rūpadhātūti rūpabhavo pañcakkhandhā labbhanti. Arūpadhātūti arūpabhavo cattāro khandhā labbhantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ dasuttarapariyāyena yojanā.
按照《等诵经》的讲法,还有另外三善界:出离界、无嗔界、无害界。另外还有三界:色界、无色界、灭界。另外还有三界:下劣界、中界、殊胜界(《长部》1.3.305)。这些界在这里也同样适用(《分别论》181-182)。与出离相应的寻、伺……乃至正思惟,这称为出离界。一切善法都是出离界。与无嗔相应的寻、伺……乃至正思惟,是无嗔界。对众生所起的慈、慈爱、慈的状态、慈心解脱,这称为无嗔界。与无害相应的寻、伺……乃至正思惟,是无害界。对众生所起的悲、悲悯、悲的状态、悲心解脱,这称为无害界(《分别论》182)。色界和无色界如前文所说。灭界就是涅槃。下劣界指十二种不善心的生起;中界指其余属于三界的诸法;殊胜界指九种出世间法。而这一切,都因为无命之义,所以称为界。巴利
Saṅgītipariyāyena pana ‘‘tisso kusaladhātuyo – nekkhammadhātu abyāpādadhātu avihiṃsādhātu. Aparāpi tisso dhātuyo – rūpadhātu arūpadhātu nirodhadhātu. Aparāpi tisso dhātuyo – hīnā dhātu majjhimā dhātu paṇītā dhātū’’ti (dī. ni. 1.3.305) vuttā dhātuyopi ettha yujjanti (vibha. 181-182). Nekkhammapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… sammāsaṅkappo. Ayaṃ vuccati nekkhammadhātu. Sabbepi kusalā dhammā nekkhammadhātu. Abyāpādapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… sammāsaṅkappo abyāpādadhātu. Yā sattesu metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṃ mettācetovimutti. Ayaṃ vuccati abyāpādadhātu. Avihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… sammāsaṅkappo avihiṃsādhātu. Yā sattesu karuṇā karuṇāyanā karuṇāyitattaṃ karuṇācetovimutti. Ayaṃ vuccati avihiṃsādhātu (vibha. 182). Rūpārūpadhātuyo vuttāyeva. Nirodhadhātu nibbānaṃ. Hīnā dhātu dvādasākusalacittuppādā, majjhimā dhātu avasesā tebhūmakadhammā. Paṇītā dhātu nava lokuttaradhammā. Sabbāpi ca nijjīvaṭṭhena dhātu.
所谓四圣谛,就是:苦圣谛、苦集圣谛、苦灭圣谛、导向苦灭的道圣谛。这些的解释,将在解说圣谛的部分里说明。巴利
Cattāri ariyasaccānīti dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, dukkhasamudayaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṃ. Imesaṃ vaṇṇanā saccavissajjanesuyeva bhavissati.
所谓五种解脱处,就是:为了自己的利益而听闻别人说法;为了别人的利益而把自己听来的法讲给别人听;对自己听来的法加以读诵;用自己的心去反复思考听来的法;以及以遍处、不净等作为随顺的所缘。这五种就是解脱的原因。正如经中所说:巴利
Pañca vimuttāyatanānīti attano hitatthāya parehi pavattitadhammadesanāsavanaṃ, paresaṃ hitatthāya attano yathāsutadhammadesanā, yathāsutassa dhammassa sajjhāyakaraṇaṃ, yathāsutassa dhammassa cetasā anuvitakkanaṃ, kasiṇāsubhādīsu anukūlaṃ ārammaṇanti, imāni pañca vimuccanakāraṇāni. Yathāha –
比丘们,在这里,一位比丘的导师,或者某位受人尊敬的同梵行者,为他宣说法。比丘们,导师或某位受人尊敬的同梵行者怎样为这位比丘宣说法,他就怎样在那法中体会到义、体会到法。当他体会到义、体会到法时,欢悦就生起;欢悦之后,喜就生起;内心有喜之后,身体就变得轻安;身体轻安之后,就感受到乐;有乐之后,心就入定。这是第一种解脱处。巴利
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, tathā tathā so tasmiṃ dhamme atthapaṭisaṃvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṃvedī ca, tassa atthapaṭisaṃvedino dhammapaṭisaṃvedino pāmojjaṃ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedeti, sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati, idaṃ paṭhamaṃ vimuttāyatanaṃ.
比丘们,又有另一种情况:比丘不是由导师为他宣说法,也不是由某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他宣说法,而是把自己所听闻、所掌握的法,详细地为别人宣说。比丘们,随着他如实地、如所掌握地宣说那个法,他对这个法就有了义上的体证和法上的体证。有了义上的体证和法上的体证,欢悦就生起;欢悦了,喜悦就生起;心里喜悦,身体就轻安;身体轻安,就感受到乐;感受到乐,心就入定。这是第二种解脱处。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno na heva kho satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, api ca kho yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti. Yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno…pe… sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati. Idaṃ dutiyaṃ vimuttāyatanaṃ.
比丘们,还有第三种情况:一位比丘既没有导师为他说法,也没有某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他说法,他自己也不把所听闻、所学的法详细地为他人宣说,但他把所听闻、所学的法详细地读诵。比丘们,当他这样读诵时……内心快乐而得定。这是第三种解脱处。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno naheva kho satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti, api ca kho yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena sajjhāyaṃ karoti. Yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno…pe… sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati. Idaṃ tatiyaṃ vimuttāyatanaṃ.
比丘们,又有一种情况:既没有导师为比丘说法,也没有某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他说法;他也没有把从听闻、学习得来的法详细地为别人宣说;他也没有把从听闻、学习得来的法详细地读诵;但他把从听闻、学习得来的法用心反复思考、反复观察,用意仔细审视。比丘们,当比丘这样用心审视法时……内心安乐而得定。这是第四种解脱处。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno naheva kho satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena sajjhāyaṃ karoti, api ca kho yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ cetasā anuvitakketi anuvicāreti manasānupekkhati. Yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno…pe… sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati. Idaṃ catutthaṃ vimuttāyatanaṃ.
比丘们,又有一种情况:比丘不是由导师为他说法,也不是由某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他说法;他也没有把所听闻、所掌握的法详细地讲给别人听;也没有详细地背诵所听闻、所掌握的法;也没有用内心反复思考、反复观察、以意仔细审察所听闻、所掌握的法。但是,他对某个定相已经很好地把握、很好地作意、很好地持守、以智慧很好地通达。比丘们,比丘对某个定相把握得越好、作意得越好、持守得越好、以智慧通达得越好,他就越能在那个法上体会到义理,也体会到法。当他体会到义理、体会到法时,就生起欢悦;欢悦了就生起喜;心里有喜,身体就变得轻安;身体轻安,就感受到乐;有乐,心就入定。这是第五种解脱处。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno naheva kho satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena sajjhāyaṃ karoti, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ cetasā anuvitakketi anuvicāreti manasānupekkhati, api ca khvassa aññataraṃ samādhinimittaṃ suggahitaṃ hoti sumanasikataṃ sūpadhāritaṃ suppaṭividdhaṃ paññāya, yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno aññataraṃ samādhinimittaṃ suggahitaṃ hoti sumanasikataṃ sūpadhāritaṃ suppaṭividdhaṃ paññāya tathā tathā so tasmiṃ dhamme atthapaṭisaṃvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṃvedī ca. Tassa atthapaṭisaṃvedino dhammapaṭisaṃvedino pāmojjaṃ jāyati , pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedeti, sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati. Idaṃ pañcamaṃ vimuttāyatana’’nti (a. ni. 5.26; dī. ni. 3.322).
这里说的“六种无上”:在这些当中,没有比它们更高的,所以叫“无上”;它们本身就是无上,也就是最殊胜的意思。世尊确实这样说过——巴利
Cha anuttariyānīti ettha natthi etesaṃ uttaranti anuttarāni, anuttarāni eva anuttariyāni, jeṭṭhakānīti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,有六种无上。哪六种呢?见无上、闻无上、得无上、学无上、侍奉无上、随念无上。巴利
‘‘Chayimāni (a. ni. 6.8, 30), bhikkhave, anuttariyāni. Katamāni cha? Dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ, lābhānuttariyaṃ, sikkhānuttariyaṃ, pāricariyānuttariyaṃ, anussatānuttariyanti.
比丘们,什么是见无上?比丘们,在这里,有些人为了看象宝而出门,为了看马宝而出门,为了看珠宝而出门,或者为了看各种高低贵贱的东西而出门,或者为了见持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门而出门。比丘们,这确实也是一种见,我不会说它不存在。但是,比丘们,这种见是低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、没有利益的,不导向厌离,不导向离欲,不导向灭尽,不导向寂止,不导向证智,不导向正觉,不导向涅槃。比丘们,如果有人怀着坚定深厚的信心、坚定深厚的敬爱、一心归向、完全净信,为了见如来或如来的弟子而出门——比丘们,这才是见中最无上的,能让众生清净,超越愁悲,灭除苦忧,证达正道,作证涅槃,也就是:怀着坚定深厚的信心、坚定深厚的敬爱、一心归向、完全净信,为了见如来或如来的弟子而出门。比丘们,这称为见无上。这就是见无上。巴利
‘‘Katamañca, bhikkhave, dassanānuttariyaṃ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco hatthiratanampi dassanāya gacchati, assaratanampi dassanāya gacchati, maṇiratanampi dassanāya gacchati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana dassanāya gacchati, samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā micchādiṭṭhikaṃ micchāpaṭipannaṃ dassanāya gacchati. Atthetaṃ, bhikkhave, dassanaṃ, netaṃ natthīti vadāmi. Tañca kho etaṃ, bhikkhave, dassanaṃ hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā dassanāya gacchati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, dassanānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāya dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāya ñāyassa adhigamāya nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā dassanāya gacchati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, dassanānuttariyaṃ. Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ.
比丘们,什么是闻无上呢?在这里,比丘们,有些人为了听鼓声而去,为了听琴声而去,为了听歌声而去,或者为了听各种高低不同的声音而去;也有人为了听法,而去找持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门。比丘们,这确实是一种听,我不会说这种听不存在。但是,比丘们,这种听是低劣的……不导向涅槃。比丘们,如果有人怀着深植的信心、深植的爱敬、一心归向、极度清净的信心,为了听法而去找如来或如来的弟子——比丘们,这就是听中的无上,能让众生清净……能作证涅槃,也就是怀着深植的信心、深植的爱敬、一心归向、极度清净的信心,为了听法而去找如来或如来的弟子。比丘们,这称为闻无上。以上就是见无上、闻无上。巴利
‘‘Savanānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco bherisaddampi savanāya gacchati, vīṇāsaddampi savanāya gacchati, gītasaddampi savanāya gacchati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana savanāya gacchati, samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā micchādiṭṭhikassa micchāpaṭipannassa dhammassavanāya gacchati. Atthetaṃ, bhikkhave, savanaṃ, netaṃ natthīti vadāmi . Tañca kho etaṃ, bhikkhave, savanaṃ hīnaṃ…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakassa vā dhammassavanāya gacchati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, savanānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakassa vā dhammassavanāya gacchati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, savanānuttariyaṃ. Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ.
比丘们,什么是无上的获得呢?在这里,有些人得到儿子,得到妻子,得到财富,或者得到各种各样的东西;或者对持有邪见、行持邪道的沙门或婆罗门生起信心。比丘们,这也是一种获得,我不是说它不存在。但比丘们,这种获得是低劣的……不导向涅槃。比丘们,如果有人对如来或如来的弟子生起信心,信心坚定,敬爱坚定,完全归向,极度清净信——比丘们,这在各种获得中是无上的,能让众生清净……能证得涅槃,也就是对如来或如来的弟子生起信心,信心坚定,敬爱坚定,完全归向,极度清净信。比丘们,这称为无上的获得。这样,就是见无上、闻无上、得无上。巴利
‘‘Lābhānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puttalābhampi labhati, dāralābhampi labhati, dhanalābhampi labhati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana lābhampi labhati. Samaṇe vā brāhmaṇe vā micchādiṭṭhike micchāpaṭipanne saddhaṃ paṭilabhati. Attheso, bhikkhave, lābho, neso natthīti vadāmi. So ca kho eso, bhikkhave, lābho hīno…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgate vā tathāgatasāvake vā saddhaṃ paṭilabhati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, lābhānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgate vā tathāgatasāvake vā saddhaṃ paṭilabhati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, lābhānuttariyaṃ . Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ, lābhānuttariyaṃ.
比丘们,什么是修学无上呢?在这里,有些人学习骑象,学习骑马,学习驾车,学习射箭,学习刀术,或者学习各种高低不同的技艺;或者向持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门学习。比丘们,这也是一种修学,我不说它不存在。但是,比丘们,这种修学是卑下的……中略……不导向涅槃。比丘们,如果有人以扎根的净信、扎根的敬爱、全然归向、极其明净的信心,在如来所宣说的法与律中,修学增上戒,修学增上心,修学增上慧——比丘们,这在各种修学中是无上的,能令众生清净……中略……证得涅槃,也就是以扎根的净信、扎根的敬爱、全然归向、极其明净的信心,在如来所宣说的法与律中,修学增上戒,修学增上心,修学增上慧。比丘们,这称为修学无上。如此,有见无上、闻无上、得无上、修学无上。巴利
‘‘Sikkhānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco hatthismimpi sikkhati, assasmimpi sikkhati, rathasmimpi sikkhati, dhanusmimpi sikkhati, tharusmimpi sikkhati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana sikkhati, samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā micchādiṭṭhikassa micchāpaṭipannassa sikkhati. Atthesā, bhikkhave, sikkhā, nesā natthīti vadāmi. Sā ca kho esā, bhikkhave, sikkhā hīnā…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgatappavedite dhammavinaye adhisīlampi sikkhati, adhicittampi sikkhati, adhipaññampi sikkhati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave , sikkhānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgatappavedite dhammavinaye adhisīlampi sikkhati, adhicittampi sikkhati, adhipaññampi sikkhati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sikkhānuttariyaṃ. Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ, lābhānuttariyaṃ, sikkhānuttariyaṃ.
什么是侍奉无上呢?比丘们,在这里,有些人侍奉刹帝利,也侍奉婆罗门,也侍奉居士,或者侍奉各种高低不同的人;或者侍奉持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门。比丘们,这确实是一种侍奉,我不说它不存在。然而,比丘们,这种侍奉是卑下的……乃至……不导向涅槃。而比丘们,如果有人以扎根的净信、扎根的敬爱、一心归向、极度明净的信心,侍奉如来或如来的弟子。比丘们,这在种种侍奉中是无上的,为了众生的清净……乃至……为了作证涅槃,也就是以扎根的净信、扎根的敬爱、一心归向、极度明净的信心,侍奉如来或如来的弟子。比丘们,这称为侍奉无上。如此,有见无上、闻无上、得无上、学无上、侍奉无上。巴利
‘‘Pāricariyānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco khattiyampi paricarati, brāhmaṇampi paricarati, gahapatimpi paricarati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana paricarati, samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā micchādiṭṭhikaṃ micchāpaṭipannaṃ paricarati. Atthesā, bhikkhave, pāricariyā, nesā natthīti vadāmi. Sā ca kho esā, bhikkhave, pāricariyā hīnā…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā paricarati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, pāricariyānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā paricarati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, pāricariyānuttariyaṃ. Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ, lābhānuttariyaṃ, sikkhānuttariyaṃ, pāricariyānuttariyaṃ.
什么是随念无上呢?比丘们,在这里,有些人随念得到儿子,随念得到妻子,随念得到财物,或者随念各种高低不同的事物,或者随念持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门。比丘们,这确实是一种随念,我不说它不存在。但是,比丘们,这种随念是低劣的……不导向涅槃。比丘们,如果有人以扎根的净信、扎根的敬爱、一心归向、极度净信,随念如来或如来的弟子,比丘们,这才是一切随念中最无上的,为了众生的清净……为了证得涅槃,也就是以扎根的净信、扎根的敬爱、一心归向、极度净信,随念如来或如来的弟子。比丘们,这称为随念无上。比丘们,这些就是六种无上。巴利
‘‘Anussatānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puttalābhampi anussarati, dāralābhampi anussarati, dhanalābhampi anussarati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana anussarati, samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā micchādiṭṭhikaṃ micchāpaṭipannaṃ anussarati. Atthesā, bhikkhave, anussati, nesā natthīti vadāmi. Sā ca kho esā, bhikkhave, anussati hīnā…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā anussarati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, anussatīnaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā anussarati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, anussatānuttariyaṃ. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, cha anuttariyānī’’ti (a. ni. 6.30).
七种无十之事这句话里,这里没有这个十,就是无十。无十者的状态、无十的原因,就是无十之事。因为漏已尽的人在十岁般涅槃后,由于不再有结生,就不会再有十岁,所以称为无十。而且不只是不再有十岁,即使九岁……乃至连一刹那也不再有了。不只是十岁时般涅槃的人如此,即使在七岁时般涅槃的人,也是无众生、无十、无刹那的。然而,世尊把外道时期所用的这个说法,转用到教法中的漏已尽者身上,为了显示外道中没有那样的人,而这里却有,于是开示那种状态的原因,称为七种无十之事。正如所说——巴利
Satta niddasavatthūnīti ettha natthi etassa dasāti niddaso. Niddasassa niddasabhāvassa vatthūni kāraṇāni niddasavatthūni. Khīṇāsavo hi dasavassakāle parinibbuto puna paṭisandhiyā abhāvā puna dasavasso na hotīti niddasoti vuccati. Na kevalañca dasavassova na hoti, navavassopi…pe… ekamuhuttikopi na hotiyeva. Na kevalañca dasavassakāle parinibbuto, sattavassikakāle parinibbutopi nissatto niddaso nimuhutto hotiyeva. Titthiyasamaye uppannavohāraṃ pana sāsane khīṇāsavassa āropetvā tattha tādisassa abhāvaṃ, idha ca sabbhāvaṃ dassento bhagavā tādisasabhāvassa kāraṇāni ‘‘satta niddasavatthūnī’’ti āha. Yathāha –
比丘们,有七种“无十之事”。是哪七种呢?在这里,一位比丘对受持学处有强烈的意愿,并且对未来受持学处也怀着不曾消退的爱乐;对法的审察有强烈的意愿,并且对未来法的审察也怀着不曾消退的爱乐;对调伏欲望有强烈的意愿,并且对未来调伏欲望也怀着不曾消退的爱乐;对独处静修有强烈的意愿,并且对未来独处静修也怀着不曾消退的爱乐;对发起精进有强烈的意愿,并且对未来发起精进也怀着不曾消退的爱乐;对正念与明察有强烈的意愿,并且对未来正念与明察也怀着不曾消退的爱乐;对通达见解有强烈的意愿,并且对未来通达见解也怀着不曾消退的爱乐。比丘们,这就是七种“无十之事”。巴利
‘‘Sattimāni, bhikkhave, niddasavatthūni. Katamāni satta? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sikkhāsamādāne tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca sikkhāsamādāne avigatapemo. Dhammanisantiyā tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca dhammanisantiyā avigatapemo. Icchāvinaye tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca icchāvinaye avigatapemo. Paṭisallāne tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca paṭisallāne avigatapemo. Vīriyārambhe tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca vīriyārambhe avigatapemo . Satinepakke tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca satinepakke avigatapemo. Diṭṭhipaṭivedhe tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca diṭṭhipaṭivedhe avigatapemo. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, satta niddasavatthūnī’’ti (a. ni. 7.20).
长老也照样引述了那段教导,说道:七种无十之事。巴利
Theropi tatheva desanaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘satta niddasavatthūnī’’ti āha.
“八胜处”在这里是指:这些处被那些禅那所胜伏,所以叫“胜处”,也就是诸禅那。“处”则是从依止的意义上说,被称为处的那些遍处所缘。因为具有殊胜智慧的人,智慧明净,他会这样想:“在这里,于这个所缘上有什么须要入定的呢?要让心得一境性,对我来说并不是负担。”他胜伏这些所缘之后而入定,就在相生起的同时,在这里生起安止定,这就是它的意思。这样生起的诸禅那,就称为“胜处”。巴利
Aṭṭha abhibhāyatanānīti ettha abhibhuyyamānāni āyatanāni etesaṃ jhānānanti abhibhāyatanāni, jhānāni. Āyatanānīti adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanasaṅkhātāni kasiṇārammaṇāni. Ñāṇuttariko hi puggalo visadañāṇo ‘‘kiṃ ettha ārammaṇe samāpajjitabbaṃ. Na mayhaṃ cittekaggatākaraṇe bhāro atthī’’ti, tāni ārammaṇāni abhibhavitvā samāpajjati, saha nimittuppādenevettha appanaṃ nibbattetīti attho. Evaṃ uppāditāni jhānāni ‘‘abhibhāyatanānī’’ti vuccanti.
哪八种呢?一个人具有内在的色想,独自在外看到有限的各种色,有好看的也有难看的。他征服那些色而知道、看见:“我知道它们,我看见它们。”生起这样的想。这就是第一胜处。巴利
‘‘Katamāni (a. ni. 8.65) aṭṭha? Ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ paṭhamaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心有色想,一人看到外在的诸色,这些色无量无边,有好看的也有难看的,他生起这样的想:“我战胜了那些色,我知道、我看见。”这就是第二胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ dutiyaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心没有色想,独自向外看各种色,这些色是有限的、有美有丑;他生起这样的想法:“我战胜了那些色,我知道、我看见。”这就是第三胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ tatiyaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心不取色想,独自向外看见各种色,这些色无量无边,有好看的也有难看的;他压伏了这些色之后,生起“我知、我见”这样的想。这就是第四胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ catutthaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心无色想,独自向外看见各种青色的事物,青色的、具有青色外观的、显现为青色的、散发青色的辉光。就像青莲花,是青色的、具有青色外观的、显现为青色的、散发青色的辉光;又像波罗奈出产的布料,两面都打磨光滑,是青色的、具有青色外观的、显现为青色的、散发青色的辉光。同样地,内心无色想,独自向外看见各种青色的事物,青色的、具有青色外观的、显现为青色的、散发青色的辉光,他生起这样的想:“我超越了那些事物,我知道,我看见。”这是第五胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma umāpupphaṃ nīlaṃ nīlavaṇṇaṃ nīlanidassanaṃ nīlanibhāsaṃ, seyyathāpi vā pana taṃ vatthaṃ bārāṇaseyyakaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ nīlaṃ nīlavaṇṇaṃ nīlanidassanaṃ nīlanibhāsaṃ, evameva ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ pañcamaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心不取色想,独自向外看见各种黄色的色,黄色、带黄色的外观、显现为黄色、散发黄色的光。就像迦尼迦罗花,是黄色的,带黄色的外观,显现为黄色,散发黄色的光;又像波罗奈出产的布料,两面都打磨得很光滑,是黄色的,带黄色的外观,显现为黄色,散发黄色的光。同样地,内心不取色想的人,独自向外看见各种黄色的色,黄色、带黄色的外观、显现为黄色、散发黄色的光,他生起这样的想:“我战胜了那些色,我知道、我看见。”这是第六胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma kaṇikārapupphaṃ pītaṃ pītavaṇṇaṃ pītanidassanaṃ pītanibhāsaṃ, seyyathāpi vā pana taṃ vatthaṃ bārāṇaseyyakaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ pītaṃ pītavaṇṇaṃ pītanidassanaṃ pītanibhāsaṃ, evameva ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心不取色想,独自向外看见各种色,这些色是红色的,有红的色泽,显现为红,放出红光。就像班杜吉瓦卡花,是红色的,有红的色泽,显现为红,放出红光;又像波罗奈出产的布料,两面都打磨得很光滑,是红色的,有红的色泽,显现为红,放出红光。同样地,内心不取色想,独自向外看见各种色,这些色是红色的,有红的色泽,显现为红,放出红光,他生起这样的想:“我战胜了这些色,我知道、我看见。”这就是第七胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma bandhujīvakapupphaṃ lohitakaṃ lohitakavaṇṇaṃ lohitakanidassanaṃ lohitakanibhāsaṃ, seyyathāpi vā pana taṃ vatthaṃ bārāṇaseyyakaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ lohitakaṃ lohitakavaṇṇaṃ lohitakanidassanaṃ lohitakanibhāsaṃ, evameva ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ sattamaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心不取色想,独自向外看见各种色,这些色是白色的,具有白色的外观,显现为白色,放出白色的光。就像晨星是白色的,具有白色的外观,显现为白色,放出白色的光;又像波罗奈出产的布料,两面都精细光滑,是白色的,具有白色的外观,显现为白色,放出白色的光。同样地,内心不取色想,独自向外看见各种色,这些色是白色的,具有白色的外观,显现为白色,放出白色的光。他战胜这些色之后,生起这样的想:我知、我见。这是第八胜处。以上就是八胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma osadhitārakā odātā odātavaṇṇā odātanidassanā odātanibhāsā, seyyathāpi vā pana taṃ vatthaṃ bārāṇaseyyakaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ odātaṃ odātavaṇṇaṃ odātanidassanaṃ odātanibhāsaṃ, evameva ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ. Imāni aṭṭha abhibhāyatanāni (a. ni. 8.65; dī. ni. 3.358).
九次第住:因为要一个接一个、按顺序去安住、去证入,所以这些安住就叫“次第住”,意思是按顺序依次证入的安住。巴利
Nava anupubbavihārāti pubbaṃ pubbaṃ anu anupubbaṃ, anupubbaṃ viharitabbato samāpajjitabbato vihārā anupubbavihārā, anupaṭipāṭiyā samāpajjitabbavihārāti attho.
是哪九种呢?比丘们,在这里,一位比丘远离欲乐、远离不善法,进入并安住于初禅——有寻有伺,由远离而生起喜和乐。寻和伺平息下来后,内心清净,心念专一,进入并安住于第二禅——没有寻也没有伺,由定而生起喜和乐。由于对喜也离了贪,他安住在舍心中,具足正念和正知,以身感受乐,圣者们说这就是“舍、具念、住于乐”,他进入并安住于第三禅。由于舍弃了乐、舍弃了苦,以及先前喜和忧的消失,他进入并安住于第四禅——不苦不乐、舍念清净。他完全超越了一切色想,灭除了有对想,不再作意种种想,心里想着“虚空没有边际”,进入并安住于空无边处。他完全超越了空无边处,心里想着“识没有边际”,进入并安住于识无边处。他完全超越了识无边处,心里想着“什么都没有”,进入并安住于无所有处。他完全超越了无所有处,进入并安住于非想非非想处。他完全超越了非想非非想处,进入并安住于想受灭定。巴利
‘‘Katame nava? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti, tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’ti (a. ni. 9.33; dī. ni. 3.343, 359) vuttā nava anupubbavihārāva.
十种断除的依据:正见等能断除、消灭邪见等,所以叫“断除”;“依据”就是原因。既是断除,又是依据,所以叫“断除依据”。这是正见等法的别名。巴利
Dasa nijjaravatthūnīti micchādiṭṭhādīni nijjarayanti nāsayantīti nijjarāni. Vatthūnīti kāraṇāni. Nijjarāni ca tāni vatthūni cāti nijjaravatthūni. Sammādiṭṭhādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
是哪十种呢?比丘们,对于有正见的人,邪见已经被灭尽。凡是依靠邪见而生起的种种恶的、不善的法,在他那里也已经被灭尽;而依靠正见生起的种种善法,则通过修习而达到圆满。巴利
‘‘Katamāni (a. ni. 10.106; dī. ni. 3.360) dasa? Sammādiṭṭhikassa, bhikkhave, micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchādiṭṭhipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammādiṭṭhipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于有正思惟的人,邪思惟就被彻底灭除了。凡是依靠邪思惟而生起的种种恶的、不善的法,在他那里也都被灭除了;而依靠正思惟的种种善法,则通过修习而达到圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāsaṅkappassa, bhikkhave, micchāsaṅkappo nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchāsaṅkappapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti , te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāsaṅkappapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正语的人,邪语已经被彻底灭除。凡是依靠邪语而生起的种种恶、不善法,在他那里也都被灭除了;而依靠正语的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāvācassa, bhikkhave, micchāvācā nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchāvācāpaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāvācāpaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正业的人,邪业就被彻底消灭了。凡是依靠邪业而生起的种种恶的、不善的法,对那个人来说也都被消灭了;而依靠正业生起的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammākammantassa, bhikkhave, micchākammanto nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchākammantapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammākammantapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于有正命的人,邪命已经被消除。凡是依靠邪命而生起的种种恶的、不善的法,在他那里也都被消除了;而依靠正命生起的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāājīvassa, bhikkhave, micchāājīvo nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchāājīvapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāājīvapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正精进的人,邪精进已被断除。凡是因邪精进而生起的种种恶、不善法,在他那里也已被断除;而因正精进而生起的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāvāyāmassa, bhikkhave, micchāvāyāmo nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchāvāyāmapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāvāyāmapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正念的人,邪念已被断除。凡是依靠邪念而生起的种种恶、不善法,在他那里也已被断除;而依靠正念的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāsatissa, bhikkhave, micchāsati nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchāsatipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāsatipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于有正定的人,邪定就被灭尽了。那些以邪定为缘而生起的种种恶、不善法,在他那里也被灭尽;而以正定为缘的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāsamādhissa, bhikkhave, micchāsamādhi nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchāsamādhipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāsamādhipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正智的人,邪智已经被消尽。凡是依靠邪智而生起的种种恶、不善法,在这样的人身上也都被消尽;而依靠正智的种种善法,则走向修习的圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāñāṇissa, bhikkhave, micchāñāṇaṃ nijjiṇṇaṃ hoti. Ye ca micchāñāṇapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāñāṇapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对正解脱的人来说,邪解脱已被消尽。凡是因邪解脱而生起的种种恶、不善法,对他也都被消尽;而因正解脱生起的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。以上是《增支部》10.106和《长部》3.360中所说的十种消尽事。巴利
‘‘Sammāvimuttissa , bhikkhave, micchāvimutti nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchāvimuttipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāvimuttipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantī’’ti (a. ni. 10.106; dī. ni. 3.360) vuttāni dasa nijjaravatthūni.
3 应该明白,“诸比丘,一切应被遍知”等等,是世尊所说,这里引用来加以说明。“Kiñca”中的“ca”这个词,只是用来补足句子的虚词。眼等三十种解说,是在六个门中每一门各有五种,按照门、所缘、转起的顺序来说明的。其中,眼有两种:肉眼和慧眼。在这两者中,佛眼、遍眼、智眼、天眼、法眼,这五种属于慧眼。“诸比丘,我以佛眼观察世间时,看见了……”——这叫做佛眼。“遍眼被称为一切知智”——这叫做遍眼。“眼生起了,智生起了”——这叫做智眼。“诸比丘,我以清净的天眼,看见了……”——这叫做天眼。“远离尘垢、远离污秽的法眼生起了”——这叫做法眼,也就是下三道(须陀洹、斯陀含、阿那含)所摄的智慧。巴利
3.Sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, abhiññeyyantiādi bhagavatā vuttaṃ idha āharitvā dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Kiñca-iti ca-kāro padapūraṇamatte nipāto. Cakkhādīni tiṃsa vissajjanāni chasu dvāresu ekekasmiṃ pañca pañca katvā dvārārammaṇapavattikkamena niddiṭṭhāni. Tattha duvidhaṃ cakkhu – maṃsacakkhu paññācakkhu ca. Tesu buddhacakkhu samantacakkhu ñāṇacakkhu dibbacakkhu dhammacakkhūti pañcavidhaṃ paññācakkhu. ‘‘Addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento’’ti (ma. ni. 1.283; 2.339; mahāva. 9) idaṃ buddhacakkhu nāma. ‘‘Samantacakkhu vuccati sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. dhotakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 32; mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85) idaṃ samantacakkhu nāma. ‘‘Cakkhuṃ udapādi ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15) idaṃ ñāṇacakkhu nāma. ‘‘Addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.285) idaṃ dibbacakkhu nāma. ‘‘Virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.395) idaṃ heṭṭhimamaggattayasaṅkhātaṃ ñāṇaṃ dhammacakkhu nāma.
肉眼又分成两种:带辅助结构的眼和净色眼。所谓带辅助结构的眼,就是位于眼窝里,下面以眼窝骨、上面以眉骨为界,两边以眼角为界,外面以睫毛为界,从眼窝中间伸出一条筋丝连到脑髓,由白环、黑环、极黑环交织而成的一团肉。这就叫带辅助结构的眼。而依止在这里、系在这里,由四大种所造的净色,就叫净色眼。这里要说的就是它。这个净色眼位于带辅助结构的眼的白环所围绕的黑环中央,正对着面前身体形态出现的地方,在视野范围内,像油浸透七层棉布一样遍满七层眼膜,大小如半粒绿豆,适当地充当眼识等的依处和门而安住。它能看,所以叫眼,意思是它品尝色、辨明色。能显现,所以叫色,意思是当颜色发生变化时,能显示它进入心中的状态。从眼生起的识,或者眼的识,就是眼识。能触碰,就是触。加上前缀来修饰这个词,所以说“等触”。从眼生起的等触,就是眼触。以眼触为缘,就是以与眼识相应的触为缘。感受,就是领纳,是受的意思。那能让人快乐的,就是乐,意思是让生起它的人变得快乐。或者,能好好吞噬、挖除身心病痛的,就是乐。能让人痛苦的,就是苦,意思是让生起它的人变得痛苦。不苦也不乐,就是不苦不乐。这里的ma音是连音而说的。而这个眼触,对于与自己相应的受,以俱生、相互、依止、异熟、食、相应、有、不离去这八种方式成为缘;对于与领受相应的受,以无间、等无间、无间亲依止、非有、离去这五种方式成为缘;对于与推度等相应的受,只以亲依止的方式成为缘。巴利
Maṃsacakkhupi sasambhāracakkhu , pasādacakkhūti duvidhaṃ hoti. Yvāyaṃ akkhikūpake patiṭṭhito heṭṭhā akkhikūpakaṭṭhikena upari bhamukaṭṭhikena ubhato akkhikūṭehi bahiddhā akkhipakhumehi paricchinno akkhikūpakamajjhā nikkhantena nhārusuttakena matthaluṅge ābaddho setakaṇhātikaṇhamaṇḍalavicitto maṃsapiṇḍo, idaṃ sasambhāracakkhu nāma. Yo pana ettha sito ettha paṭibaddho catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya pasādo, idaṃ pasādacakkhu nāma. Idamidhādhippetaṃ. Tadetaṃ tassa sasambhāracakkhuno setamaṇḍalaparikkhittassa kaṇhamaṇḍalassa majjhe abhimukhe ṭhitānaṃ sarīrasaṇṭhānuppattidese diṭṭhimaṇḍale sattasu picupaṭalesu āsittatelaṃ picupaṭalāni viya satta akkhipaṭalāni byāpetvā pamāṇato muggavidalamattaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Taṃ cakkhatīti cakkhu, rūpaṃ assādeti vibhāveti cāti attho. Rūpayantīti rūpā, vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānā hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsentīti attho. Cakkhuto pavattaṃ viññāṇaṃ, cakkhussa vā viññāṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Phusatīti phasso. Upasaggena padaṃ maṇḍetvā samphassoti vuttaṃ. Cakkhuto pavatto samphasso cakkhusamphasso. Cakkhusamphassapaccayāti cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttaphassapaccayā. Vedayitanti vindanaṃ, vedanāti attho. Tadeva sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Suṭṭhu vā khādati, khanati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ. Dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ dukkhitaṃ karotīti attho. Na dukkhaṃ na sukhanti adukkhamasukhaṃ. Ma-kāro padasandhivasena vutto. So pana cakkhusamphasso attanā sampayuttāya vedanāya sahajāta aññamaññanissaya vipākaāhārasampayuttaatthiavigatavasena aṭṭhadhā paccayo hoti, sampaṭicchanasampayuttāya anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatavasenapañcadhā, santīraṇādisampayuttānaṃ upanissayavaseneva paccayo hoti.
能听,所以叫耳。它位于带有扶根尘的耳孔内部、长着细软褐色毛发的指套状区域,在那里适当地充当耳识等的依处和门而存在。能被发出,就是声,意思是能被说出来。能嗅,所以叫鼻。它位于带有扶根尘的鼻腔内部、形如山羊蹄的区域,在那里适当地充当鼻识等的依处和门而存在。能散发气味,就是香,意思是能显示自己的来源。能唤取生命,就是舌;或者从品尝的意义上说,也叫舌。它位于带有扶根尘的舌上,避开舌尖、舌根和两侧,在上表面正中央、形如破开的青莲花瓣尖的区域,在那里适当地充当舌识等的依处和门而存在。有情品尝它们,就是味,意思是令满足。种种有漏的丑恶法由此集起,就是身。集起处就是生起之处。在这个有执受的身体中,只要有生命活动存在,身净色就大体上在那里适当地充当身识等的依处和门而存在。能被触碰,就是触。能了知,就是意,意思是能识别。能保持自相,就是法。意,指与转向俱行的有分心。法,指十二类法所缘。意识,指速行心。意触,指与彼相应的触。这个触对于相应受,除异熟缘外,以其余七缘为缘;对于无间受,也以那七缘为缘;对于其余受,只以亲依止缘为缘。巴利
Suṇātīti sotaṃ. Taṃ sasambhārasotabilassa anto tanutambalomācite aṅgulivedhakasaṇṭhāne padese sotaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Sappantīti saddā, udāharīyantīti attho. Ghāyatīti ghānaṃ. Taṃ sasambhāraghānabilassa anto ajapadasaṇṭhāne padese ghānaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Gandhayantīti gandhā, attano vatthuṃ sūcentīti attho. Jīvitamavhāyatīti jivhā, sāyanaṭṭhena vā jivhā. Sā sasambhārajivhāya atiaggamūlapassāni vajjetvā uparimatalamajjhe bhinnauppaladalaggasaṇṭhāne padese jivhāviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānā tiṭṭhati. Rasanti te sattāti rasā, assādentīti attho. Kucchitānaṃ sāsavadhammānaṃ āyoti kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. So yāvatā imasmiṃ kāye upādiṇṇappavatti nāma atthi, tattha yebhuyyena kāyapasādo kāyaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamāno tiṭṭhati. Phusīyantīti phoṭṭhabbā. Munātīti mano, vijānātīti attho. Attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentīti dhammā. Manoti sahāvajjanaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ. Dhammāti dvādasapabhedā dhammārammaṇā dhammā. Manoviññāṇanti javanamanoviññāṇaṃ. Manosamphassoti taṃsampayutto phasso. So sampayuttāya vedanāya vipākapaccayavajjehi sesehi sattahi paccayo hoti, anantarāya teheva, sesānaṃ upanissayavaseneva paccayo hoti.
色等五种解说,是依蕴而说。因为被冷等所逼迫、损害,所以叫色。能感受,所以叫受。能识别,所以叫想。能造作,所以叫行。能了别,所以叫识。眼等乃至法伺这十种解说,是依六六而说;六十种解说,是依可爱、可悦而说。眼触所生受等,就是与各自相应的那种受。对色的想,就是色想。能思虑,所以叫思;意思是能连结。能渴求,所以叫爱;意思是渴。能寻思,所以叫寻;或者说,寻就是寻思,也就是粗的推度。心靠着它而在所缘上活动,所以叫伺;或者说,活动就是伺,也就是细的随行。巴利
Rūpādīni pañca vissajjanāni khandhavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sītādīhi ruppati pīḷīyatīti rūpaṃ. Vedayatīti vedanā. Sañjānātīti saññā. Saṅkharontīti saṅkhārā. Vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ. Cakkhādīni dhammavicārapariyantāni dasa chakkavasena, saṭṭhi vissajjanāni piyarūpasātarūpavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Cakkhusamphassajādikā vedanā taṃtaṃsampayuttāva. Rūpesu saññā rūpasaññā. Sañcetayatīti sañcetanā, abhisandahatīti attho. Tasatīti taṇhā, pipāsatīti attho. Vitakketīti vitakko, vitakkanaṃ vā vitakko, ūhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Ārammaṇe tena cittaṃ vicaratīti vicāro, vicaraṇaṃ vā vicāro, anusañcaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
4 地界等解说,是简要地按名色来区分说明的。因为遍及各处,所以叫地。它能渗入,或被吸收,或使增长,所以叫水。它能发热,所以叫火。它能吹动,所以叫风。不能被耕、不能被拖,不能被切割或破坏,所以叫虚空。以没有众生的性质,所以叫界。巴利
4.Pathavīdhātādīni cha vissajjanāni saṃkhittena nāmarūpavavatthānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Patthaṭattā pathavī. Appeti, āpīyati, appāyatīti vā āpo. Tejayatīti tejo. Vāyatīti vāyo. Na kassati na nikassati, kasituṃ chindituṃ bhindituṃ vā na sakkāti ākāso. Nissattaṭṭhena dhātu.
地遍等十种解说,是依遍的修习而说的。所谓“遍”,因为能遍满一切,所以遍的圆盘、在它上面生起的相、以它为所缘的禅那,都叫做遍。但这里指的是禅那。最初四种是以四大为所缘的禅那,接下来四种是以颜色为所缘的禅那。空遍,是指限定虚空,以及以它为所缘的禅那;除去遍相的虚空,以及以它为所缘的空无边处。识遍,是指空无边处的识,以及以它为所缘的识无边处。巴利
Pathavīkasiṇādīni dasa vissajjanāni kasiṇabhāvanāvasena niddiṭṭhāni. Kasiṇanti sakalapharaṇavasena kasiṇamaṇḍalampi tasmiṃ upaṭṭhitanimittampi tadārammaṇaṃ jhānampi vuccati. Idha pana jhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Ādimhi cattāri mahābhūtakasiṇārammaṇāni jhānāni, tato parāni cattāri vaṇṇakasiṇārammaṇāni. Ākāsakasiṇanti paricchedākāso, tadārammaṇañca jhānaṃ, kasiṇugghāṭimākāso, tadārammaṇañca ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ. Viññāṇakasiṇanti ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇaṃ, tadārammaṇañca viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ.
头发等三十二种(身体部分)的解说,是依据三十二行相的业处来说明的。在它们当中,当头发等以厌恶的方式呈现时,就是依身至念而修的不净业处;当以颜色相呈现时,就是遍业处;当以界相呈现时,就是四界差别的业处。还应当知道:头发等以厌恶或颜色相呈现时,以它们为所缘的诸禅那;以界相呈现时,那些部分以及以它们为所缘的界修习。巴利
Kesādīni dvattiṃsa vissajjanāni dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Tesu pana kesādīsu paṭikūlato upaṭṭhitesu kāyagatāsativasena asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, vaṇṇato upaṭṭhitesu kasiṇakammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, dhātuto upaṭṭhitesu catudhātuvavatthānakammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, kesātiādīni ca paṭikūlato vaṇṇato vā upaṭṭhitānaṃ tadārammaṇāni jhānāni, dhātuto upaṭṭhitassa te ca koṭṭhāsā tadārammaṇā ca dhātubhāvanā veditabbā.
头发在两边以耳尖、前面以额际、后面以喉结为界,长在覆盖头骨的皮肉里,深入约一粒米那么长,数量有数十万根。巴利
Kesā ubhosu passesu kaṇṇacūḷikāhi purato nalāṭantena, pacchato ca galavāṭakena paricchinnā sīsakaṭāhaveṭhanacamme vīhaggamattaṃ pavisitvā ṭhitā anekasatasahassasaṅkhā.
体毛除了头发等所占据的位置,以及手掌和脚底之外,大多数都长在身体皮肤上,在九十九万个毛孔中,进入约一粒虱卵的大小而安住。巴利
Lomā ṭhapetvā kesādīnaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsaṃ hatthatalapādatalāni ca yebhuyyena sarīracamme navanavutiyā lomakūpasahassesu likkhāmattaṃ pavisitvā ṭhitā.
二十片指甲长在手指和脚趾的尖端背面。巴利
Nakhā aṅgulīnaṃ aggapiṭṭhesu ṭhitā vīsati.
牙齿位于上下两颚的骨头上,通常有三十二颗。巴利
Dantā dvīsu haṇukaṭṭhikesu ṭhitā yebhuyyena dvattiṃsa.
皮肤即是覆盖整个身体后位于可见的提膜之上、表皮之下的皮。巴利
Taco sakalasarīraṃ pariyonandhitvā pākaṭakilomakassa upari chaviyā heṭṭhā ṭhitaṃ cammaṃ.
九百片肉贴在三百多块骨头上。巴利
Maṃsaṃ sādhikāni tīṇi aṭṭhisatāni anulimpitvā ṭhitāni navamaṃsapesisatāni.
九百条筋遍布全身,把骨头连接起来,让它们保持在原位。巴利
Nhārū sakalasarīre aṭṭhīni ābandhitvā ṭhitāni nava nhārusatāni.
全身的骨头共有三百多块,下面的骨头支撑着上面的骨头。巴利
Aṭṭhī sakalasarīre heṭṭhā aṭṭhīnaṃ upari ṭhitāni sādhikāni tīṇi aṭṭhisatāni.
骨髓就是存在于每一块骨头内部的髓。巴利
Aṭṭhimiñjā tesaṃ tesaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantare ṭhitā miñjā.
肾是两块肉团,由一根从喉窝伸出的粗筋连着;这根筋往前延伸一小段后分成两股,缠住并环绕心脏肌肉而停在那里。巴利
Vakkaṃ galavāṭakā nikkhantena ekamūlena thokaṃ gantvā dvidhā bhinnena thūlanhārunā vinibaddhā hutvā hadayamaṃsaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitā dve maṃsapiṇḍikā.
心脏位于身体内部、两乳之间,是心所依止的地方,里面充满大约半掌量的血液,有一个像棠梨籽那么大的凹陷,这就是心脏肉。巴利
Hadayaṃ sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ majjhe ṭhitaṃ anto cittasannissayaṃ aḍḍhapasatamattalohitapuṇṇaṃ punnāgaṭṭhipatiṭṭhānamattāvāṭakaṃ hadayamaṃsaṃ.
肝:位于两乳之间、靠近右侧而住立的一对肉膜。巴利
Yakanaṃ dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ abbhantare dakkhiṇapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ yamakamaṃsapaṭalaṃ.
缠绕肉有两种:一种覆盖心脏和肾脏而存在,称为“覆膜膈膜”;另一种遍布全身皮下,包裹肌肉而存在,称为“不覆膜膈膜”。巴利
Kilomakaṃ hadayavakkāni paṭicchādetvā ṭhitaṃ paṭicchannakilomakasaṅkhātañca sakalasarīre cammassa heṭṭhato maṃsaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ appaṭicchannakilomakasaṅkhātañcāti duvidhaṃ pariyonahanamaṃsaṃ.
脾位于心脏左侧,贴近腹腔膜的上方而住立,就是胃舌肉。巴利
Pihakaṃ hadayassa vāmapasse udarapaṭalassa matthakapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ udarajivhāmaṃsaṃ.
肺位于身体内部,在两乳头之间、心脏和肝脏的上方,覆盖着它们并向下悬垂而住,是由三十二块肉片组成的肺肉。巴利
Papphāsaṃ sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ antare hadayayakanānaṃ upari chādetvā olambantaṃ ṭhitaṃ dvattiṃsamaṃsakhaṇḍappabhedaṃ papphāsamaṃsaṃ.
肠位于身体内部,上端绑在颈窝,下端绑在粪道,以颈窝和粪道为两端。男子的肠长三十二肘,女子的肠长二十八肘,在二十一个地方盘曲。巴利
Antaṃ upari galavāṭake heṭṭhā karīsamagge vinibandhattā galavāṭakakarīsamaggapariyante sarīrabbhantare ṭhitā purisassa dvattiṃsahatthā itthiyā aṭṭhavīsatihatthā ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu obhaggā antavaṭṭi.
肠间膜把二十一个肠环捆在一起,让它们不散开,自己则位于这些肠环之间。巴利
Antaguṇaṃ antabhoge ekato agalante ābandhitvā ekavīsatiyā antabhogānaṃ antarā ṭhitaṃ bandhanaṃ.
胃中物:就是被牙齿嚼碎、被舌头和手翻搅过、混着唾液和痰的食物。它落进胃里的那一瞬间,就失去了色泽、香气、味道等所有好处,像织布机上的污水,又像狗吐出来的东西。它被胆汁、痰和风包住,在胃火的烧灼和翻涌中沸腾,里面爬满了虫子,上面不断冒出泡沫和水泡,变成极度腐烂、恶臭、令人作呕的状态,停留在肚脐上方那层叫“生藏”的内膜里——也就是各种被吃下、喝下、嚼过、尝过的东西。巴利
Udariyaṃ dantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ jivhāhatthaparivattitaṃ kheḷalālāpalibuddhaṃ taṃkhaṇavigatavaṇṇagandharasādisampadaṃ tantavāyakhalisuvānavamathusadisaṃ nipatitvā pittasemhavātapaliveṭhitaṃ hutvā udaraggisantāpavegakuthitaṃ kimikulākulaṃ uparūpari pheṇabubbuḷakāni muñcantaṃ paramakasambukaduggandhajegucchabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā āmāsayasaṅkhāte uparinābhiantapaṭale ṭhitaṃ nānappakārakaṃ asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ.
粪:指的是位于肚脐和脊骨根部之间下方、上下高度大约八指宽处、安住在肠道末端的粪便,这个地方叫作“熟藏”。巴利
Karīsaṃ pakkāsayasaṅkhāte heṭṭhā nābhipiṭṭhikaṇṭakamūlānaṃ antare ubbedhena aṭṭhaṅgulamatte antāvasāne ṭhitaṃ vaccaṃ.
胆汁有两种:一种叫“有缚胆”,它依附在心肉与肺之间的肝脏上,位于像大苦瓜囊一样的胆囊里;另一种叫“无缚胆”,它遍布全身其余部分,但不包括头发、体毛、指甲、牙齿这些没有肉的地方,以及又硬又干的皮肤。巴利
Pittaṃ hadayamaṃsapapphāsānaṃ antare yakanamaṃsaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ mahākosātakīkosakasadise pittakosake ṭhitaṃ baddhapittasaṅkhātañca, kesalomanakhadantānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ sarīraṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ abaddhapittasaṅkhātañcāti duvidhaṃ pittaṃ.
痰:停留在胃壁上的痰,量满一钵他。巴利
Semhaṃ udarapaṭale ṭhitaṃ ekapatthapūrappamāṇaṃ semhaṃ.
当身体某个部位被木桩、荆棘刺伤,或者被殴打、火烧等伤害,或者因为体内界扰动而生起疮、疖等时,那里血液的腐败成熟就是脓。血也有两种:一种叫积聚血,它充满肝脏下方,一点一点地从心脏、肾脏、肺的上方渗流出来,浸润着肾、心脏、肝、肺,量满一钵他;另一种叫循环血,除了头发、体毛、指甲、牙齿这些没有肉的地方以及坚硬干燥的皮肤之外,它沿着脉管网遍布整个执受身。巴利
Pubbo khāṇukaṇṭakapaharaṇaggijālādīhi abhihate vā sarīrappadese abbhantaradhātukkhobhavasena vā uppannesu gaṇḍapīḷakādīsu paripakkalohitapariṇāmo. Lohitaṃ yakanassa heṭṭhābhāgaṃ pūretvā hadayavakkapapphāsānaṃ upari thokaṃ thokaṃ paggharantaṃ vakkahadayayakanapapphāse temayamānaṃ ṭhitaṃ ekapatthapūramattaṃ sannicitalohitasaṅkhātañca, kesalomanakhadantānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca ṭhapetvā dhamanijālānusārena sabbaṃ upādiṇṇasarīraṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ saṃsaraṇalohitasaṅkhātañcāti duvidhaṃ lohitaṃ.
汗:当身体被火的热力、太阳的炙烤或季节变化等所灼热时,从一切毛发和毛孔中渗流出来的水界。巴利
Sedo aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvikārādīhi santatte sarīre sabbakesalomakūpavivarehi paggharaṇakaāpodhātu.
脂肪:在胖人身上,它遍布全身的皮肉之间;在瘦人身上,则依附在小腿肉等部位,是一种黏稠的油脂。巴利
Medo thūlassa sakalasarīre cammamaṃsantare kisassa jaṅghamaṃsādīni nissāya ṭhito thinasineho.
眼泪:由喜、忧、不适宜的饮食和时节等生起,充满眼眶,或者停在那里,或者流出来,这就是水界。巴利
Assu somanassadomanassavisabhāgāhārautūhi samuṭṭhahitvā akkhikūpake pūretvā tiṭṭhantī vā paggharantī vā āpodhātu.
油脂在火的热力、太阳的热力、季节不适等所产生的暖热中,大多数情况下停留在手掌、手背、脚掌、脚背、鼻翼、额头、肩峰等处,是已经融化的脂肪。巴利
Vasā aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvisabhāgehi usmājātesu yebhuyyena hatthatalahatthapiṭṭhipādatalapādapiṭṭhināsāpuṭanalāṭaaṃsakūṭesu ṭhito vilīnasineho.
唾液在看见或想起那样的食物时,或在把食物放进嘴里时,或心脏感到疲惫时,或对某种东西生起厌恶时,就会更多地生起,从两边脸颊流下来,停在舌头上,是混着泡沫的水界。巴利
Kheḷo tathārūpaṃ āhāraṃ passantassa vā sarantassa vā mukhe vā ṭhapentassa hadayaṃ vā ākilāyantassa kismiñcideva vā jigucchaṃ uppādentassa bhiyyo uppajjitvā ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya tiṭṭhamānā pheṇamissā āpodhātu.
鼻涕:因不适宜的食物或时节导致生起之界被扰动,或者因为哭泣,从脑流下来,经过上颚中部的孔道落下去,充满鼻腔,或者停在那里,或者往下流,是腐臭的、不净的、黏滑的。巴利
Siṅghāṇikā visabhāgāhārautuvasena sañjātadhātukkhobhassa vā rodantassa vā antosīse matthaluṅgato galitvā tālumatthakavivarena otaritvā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā tiṭṭhantaṃ vā paggharantaṃ vā pūti asuci picchilaṃ.
关节滑液负责润滑关节,它住在全身一百八十个关节里面,是一种黏滑的腐肉。巴利
Lasikā aṭṭhisandhīnaṃ abbhañjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ asītisatasandhīnaṃ abbhantare ṭhitaṃ picchilakuṇapaṃ.
尿:依靠食物和时节,住在膀胱内部的水界。巴利
Muttaṃ āhārautuvasena vatthipuṭabbhantare ṭhitā āpodhātu.
脑髓位于头盖骨内部,依靠四条缝合线而安住,是四个团块聚合而成的髓堆。巴利
Matthaluṅgaṃ sīsakaṭāhabbhantare cattāro sibbinimagge nissāya ṭhito catupiṇḍasamodhāno miñjarāsi.
眼处等十二种,是依十二处的分类而说明的。从“处”的含义来说,它是诸法到来的途径,是扩展,也是引导那漫长轮回的所在。因为在眼、色等当中,那些依各自的门与所缘而活动的心与心所法,以各自领受等作用而到来,也就是生起、努力、精勤,这叫作“来”。而这些处又使那些已到来的法扩展、增大,这叫作“扩展”。还有,在无始轮回中流转的极其漫长的轮回之苦,只要它还没有停止,这些处就引导它、使它持续流转,这叫作“引导”。巴利
Cakkhāyatanādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni dvādasāyatanavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Āyatanato, āyānaṃ tananato, āyatassa ca nayanato āyatanaṃ. Cakkhurūpādīsu hi taṃtaṃdvārārammaṇā cittacetasikā dhammā sena sena anubhavanādinā kiccena āyatanti uṭṭhahanti ghaṭanti, vāyamantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Te ca pana āyabhūte dhamme etāni tanonti, vitthārentīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idañca anamatagge saṃsāre pavattaṃ atīva āyataṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ yāva na nivattati, tāva nayanti, pavattayantīti vuttaṃ hoti.
另外,从“住处”的意义、“矿藏”的意义、“汇集处”的意义、“出生地”的意义和“原因”的意义来说,都叫“处”。就像在世间,“自在天处”“瓦苏德瓦处”等说法里,住处被称为“处”;“金处”“银处”等说法里,是矿藏的意思。在教法中,“于可意的处所,群鸟依止它”等说法里,是汇集处的意思;“南牛道是牛的出生地”等说法里,是出生地的意思;“当有处存在时,他就在那里获得作证的能力”等说法里,是原因的意思。在眼等当中,种种心和心所法安住于其中,因为它们依眼等而活动,所以眼等是它们的住处;它们又遍布在眼等之中,因为以眼等为依止、以眼等为所缘,所以眼等是它们的矿藏;因为依各自的依处、门和所缘而在各处汇集,所以眼等是它们的汇集处;因为以眼等为依止和所缘就在那里生起,所以眼等是它们的出生地;因为眼等不存在它们就不存在,所以眼等是它们的原因。按照上面所说的意义,眼本身就是处,所以叫“眼处”。其余的处也是这样。巴利
Apica nivāsaṭṭhānaṭṭhena ākaraṭṭhena samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṭṭhena sañjātidesaṭṭhena kāraṇaṭṭhena ca āyatanaṃ . Tathā hi loke ‘‘issarāyatanaṃ vāsudevāyatana’’ntiādīsu nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘āyatana’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Suvaṇṇāyatanaṃ rajatāyatana’’ntiādīsu ākaro. Sāsane pana ‘‘manorame āyatane, sevanti naṃ vihaṅgamā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.38) samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Dakkhiṇāpatho gunnaṃ āyatana’’ntiādīsu sañjātideso. ‘‘Tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṃ pāpuṇāti sati satiāyatane’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.102; 5.23) kāraṇaṃ. Cakkhuādīsu cāpi te te cittacetasikā dhammā nivasanti tadāyattavuttitāyāti cakkhādayo nesaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ , cakkhādīsu ca te ākiṇṇā tannissayattā tadārammaṇattā cāti cakkhādayo ca nesaṃ ākaro, tattha tattha vatthudvārārammaṇavasena samosaraṇato cakkhādayo ca nesaṃ samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, taṃnissayārammaṇabhāvena tattheva uppattito cakkhādayo ca nesaṃ sañjātideso, cakkhādīnaṃ abhāve abhāvato cakkhādayo ca nesaṃ kāraṇanti yathāvuttenatthena cakkhu ca taṃ āyatanañcāti cakkhāyatanaṃ. Evaṃ sesānipi.
眼界等十八种解说,是依照十八界来说明的。在眼等每一种法中,随各自的情况,它安立、被保持,或者安立与被保持同时发生,或者通过它、在它之中被保持,所以叫“界”。世间的界确实是以原因的性质被确定的,就像金界、银界等能产生金、银那样,它们产生种种轮回之苦。又像挑担者承担重担一样,诸界被众生承担、担负,这就是它的意思。而且,由于不能自主,它们只是苦的安立者。以这些界为原因,轮回之苦被众生随顺着安立。那种被安立的状态也保持在这些界当中,也就是被安置,这是它的意思。再说,就像外道所说的“我”在自性上根本不存在,这些界却不是这样。这些界保持着自己的自性,所以叫“界”。又像世间把各种颜色的雌黄、雄黄等岩石成分叫做“界”一样,这些也类似界,所以叫“界”。因为它们各部分是被智慧所了知的对象。或者,就像在叫做“身体”的集合体中,味、血等组成部分各自有着互相不同的特相、彼此区分,而得到“界”这个名称;同样,在叫做五蕴的这个有身的组成部分中,也应当知道有“界”这个名称。因为这些眼等是互相有着不同特相而彼此区分的。再说,“界”是非命者的同义词。事实上,世尊在“这个比丘,人是六界所成”等经文中,就是为了消除命想而教导界。按照上面所说的意义,眼即是界,所以叫“眼界”。其余的界也是这样。意界是指三种意界。法界是指受蕴、想蕴、行蕴、十六种微细色以及涅槃。意识界是指七十六种意识界。巴利
Cakkhudhātādīni aṭṭhārasa vissajjanāni aṭṭhārasadhātuvasena niddiṭṭhāni. Cakkhādīsu ekeko dhammo yathāsambhavaṃ vidahati, dhīyate, vidhānaṃ vidhīyate, etāya, ettha vā dhīyatīti dhātu. Lokiyā hi dhātuyo kāraṇabhāvena vavatthitā hutvā suvaṇṇarajatādidhātuyo viya suvaṇṇarajatādiṃ, anekappakāraṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ vidahanti. Bhārahārehi ca bhāro viya sattehi dhīyante, dhārīyantīti attho. Dukkhavidhānamattameva cetā avasavattanato. Etāhi ca karaṇabhūtāhi saṃsāradukkhaṃ sattehi anuvidhīyati. Tathāvihitañcetaṃ etāsveva dhīyati, ṭhapīyatīti attho. Apica yathā titthiyānaṃ attā nāma sabhāvato natthi, na evametā. Etā pana attano sabhāvaṃ dhārentīti dhātuyo. Yathā ca loke vicittā haritālamanosilādayo selāvayavā dhātuyoti vuccanti, evametāpi dhātuyo viyāti dhātuyo. Vicittā hetā ñāṇaneyyāvayavāti. Yathā vā sarīrasaṅkhātassa samudāyassa avayavabhūtesu rasasoṇitādīsu aññamaññavisabhāgalakkhaṇaparicchinnesu dhātusamaññā, evamevetesupi pañcakkhandhasaṅkhātassa attabhāvassa avayavesu dhātusamaññā veditabbā. Aññamaññavisabhāgalakkhaṇaparicchinnā hete cakkhādayoti. Apica dhātūti nijjīvamattassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tathā hi bhagavā ‘‘chadhāturo ayaṃ bhikkhu puriso’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.343-344) jīvasaññāsamūhananatthaṃ dhātudesanaṃ akāsīti. Yathāvuttenatthena cakkhu ca taṃ dhātu cāti cakkhudhātu. Evaṃ sesāpi. Manodhātūti ca tisso manodhātuyo. Dhammadhātūti vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhā soḷasa sukhumarūpāni nibbānañca. Manoviññāṇadhātūti chasattati manoviññāṇadhātuyo.
眼根等二十二种解答,是依二十二根来说明的。眼本身在“看”这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫眼根。耳本身在“听”这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫耳根。鼻本身在“嗅”这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫鼻根。舌本身在“尝”这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫舌根。身本身在“触”这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫身根。能思量,所以叫意,就是了知的意思。不过义注师们说:就像用细管仔细测量,或者用大秤仔细称量一样,意能对所缘思量、了知,所以叫意;这意本身在“思量”这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫意根。巴利
Cakkhundriyādīni bāvīsati vissajjanāni bāvīsatindriyavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Cakkhumeva dassanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti cakkhundriyaṃ. Sotameva savanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti sotindriyaṃ. Ghānameva ghāyanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti ghānindriyaṃ. Jivhā eva sāyanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti jivhindriyaṃ. Kāyo eva phusanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti kāyindriyaṃ. Manate iti mano, vijānātīti attho. Aṭṭhakathācariyā panāhu – nāliyā minamāno viya mahātulāya dhārayamāno viya ca ārammaṇaṃ manati jānātīti mano, tadeva mananalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti manindriyaṃ.
诸法依靠它而存活,所以它就叫“命”;这个命本身又在守护的特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫“命根”。命根有两种:色命根和非色命根。与一切业生色同时生起、并守护这些俱生色的,是色命根;与一切心同时生起、并守护与心俱生的非色法的,是非色命根。巴利
Jīvanti tena taṃsahajātā dhammāti jīvitaṃ, tadeva anupālanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti jīvitindriyaṃ. Taṃ rūpajīvitindriyaṃ arūpajīvitindriyanti duvidhaṃ. Sabbakammajarūpasahajaṃ sahajarūpānupālanaṃ rūpajīvitindriyaṃ, sabbacittasahajaṃ sahajaarūpānupālanaṃ arūpajīvitindriyaṃ.
女性因为胎儿在她体内凝结成团,所以叫“女性”;在女性特征等方面作主宰义,所以叫“根”;一定是女性才有的根,所以叫“女根”。巴利
Thīyati saṅghātaṃ gacchati etissā gabbhoti itthī, itthiliṅgādīsu indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, niyamato itthiyā eva indriyaṃ itthindriyaṃ.
“puṃ”称为地狱;在地狱里被伤害、被折磨,所以叫男子。在男性特征等上面行使主宰的作用,所以叫根;按固定的规则,只属于男子的根,就叫男根。在这两个根当中,每一个都依各自的自性,与各自的业生色同时生起。巴利
Puṃ-vuccati nirayo, puṃ saṅkhāte niraye risīyati hiṃsīyatīti puriso, purisaliṅgādīsu indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, niyamato purisasseva indriyaṃ purisindriyaṃ. Dvīsupetesu ekekaṃ sabhāvakassa ekekassa kammajarūpasahajaṃ hoti.
与善果报身识相应的乐,在身体舒适这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫根;这乐本身就是根,所以叫乐根。巴利
Kusalavipākakāyaviññāṇasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, kāyikasātalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, sukhameva indriyaṃ sukhindriyaṃ.
与不善果报身识相应的苦,在身体不适这个特征上发挥根的作用,所以叫“根”;这苦本身就是根,所以叫“苦根”。巴利
Akusalavipākakāyaviññāṇasampayuttaṃ dukkhaṃ, kāyikaasātalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, dukkhameva indriyaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ.
因为与喜和悦相应,心变得美好,所以叫“悦心”;悦心的状态就是“悦”。它在内心愉悦这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫“根”;这悦本身就是根,所以叫“悦根”。巴利
Pītisomanassayogato sobhanaṃ mano assāti sumano, sumanassa bhāvo somanassaṃ, cetasikasātalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, somanassameva indriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ.
因为与忧相应,心变得恶劣,所以叫“心坏”;或者因为它是低劣的感受,心变得可鄙,所以叫“心坏”。心坏的状态就是忧。“根”的意思是:它在心所的不适这个特相上,起到根的主导作用;所以忧本身就是根,也就是忧根。
“舍”是指:它舍弃了苦和乐那种运作方式,因为安住于中舍的行相,所以以那种行相生起,因此叫舍。“根”的意思是:它在中舍这个特相上,起到根的主导作用;所以舍本身就是根,也就是舍根。巴利
Domanassayogato duṭṭhu mano assāti, hīnavedanattā vā kucchitaṃ mano assāti dummano, dummanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ, cetasikaasātalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, domanassameva indriyaṃ domanassindriyaṃ. Sukhadukkhākārapavattiṃ upekkhati majjhattākārasaṇṭhitattā tenākārena pavattatīti upekkhā, majjhattalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, upekkhā eva indriyaṃ upekkhindriyaṃ.
人们以此而相信,或者它自己就相信,或者它仅仅是相信本身,所以叫信。因为它能战胜不信,具有主导作用,所以叫根;或者它在决断的特相上发挥根的支配作用,所以叫根。信本身就是根,这就是信根。巴利
Saddahanti etāya, sayaṃ vā saddahati, saddahanamattameva vā esāti saddhā, assaddhiyassa abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, adhimokkhalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, saddhāyeva indriyaṃ saddhindriyaṃ.
精进根:精进就是英雄的本性,或者说是英雄的行为,或者说是应当依照方法、依照理则去激励、去推动的,所以叫精进。它能战胜懈怠,具有增上的意义,所以叫根;或者它在策励这个特相上,行使根的支配作用,所以叫根。因此,精进本身就是根,就是精进根。巴利
Vīrabhāvo vīriyaṃ, vīrānaṃ vā kammaṃ, vidhinā vā nayena īrayitabbaṃ pavattayitabbanti vīriyaṃ, kosajjassa abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, paggahaṇalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, vīriyameva indriyaṃ vīriyindriyaṃ.
念的意思是:依靠它来忆念,或者自己就在忆念,或者它仅仅是忆念本身,所以叫念。它能克服失念,以主导作用称为根;或者在“现前”这个特征上行使主的作用,所以叫根。念本身就是根,就叫念根。巴利
Saranti tāya, sayaṃ vā sarati, saraṇamattameva vā esāti sati, muṭṭhasaccassa abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, sati eva indriyaṃ satindriyaṃ.
心以善的方式把持、安住于所缘,所以叫定。因为它能压伏散乱,以增上的意义而成为根;或者,它在不散乱的特相上发挥根的作用,所以是根。定本身就是根,所以叫定根。巴利
Ārammaṇe cittaṃ sammā ādhiyati ṭhapetīti samādhi, vikkhepassa abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, avikkhepalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, samādhi eva indriyaṃ samādhindriyaṃ.
以“这是苦”等方式了知诸圣谛,这就是慧。不过,在注疏中说:“以令了知无常、苦、无我的方式而称为慧。”由于能克服无明,以增上的意义而称为根;或者在“见”的特相上行使根的作用,所以称为根。因此,慧本身就是根,称为慧根。巴利
‘‘Idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā nayena ariyasaccāni pajānātīti paññā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattāti paññāpanavasena paññā’’ti vuttaṃ. Avijjāya abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, dassanalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, paññā eva indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ.
在无始轮回中,为了证知未曾证知的不死境界,或者为了了知四圣谛之法,而踏上“我将了知”这条修行道路的人,在他心中生起这种根;又因为它具备根的作用,所以叫“未知当知根”。这是入流道智的名称。巴利
Anamatagge saṃsāravaṭṭe anaññātaṃ amataṃ padaṃ catusaccadhammameva vā jānissāmīti paṭipannassa uppajjanato indriyaṭṭhasambhavato ca anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ. Sotāpattimaggañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ.
以初道所了知的界限为限,不超越这个界限,只了知那些由该道所了知的四圣谛法,又因为具备根的意义,所以叫已知根。这是入流果等六个阶段中智的名称。巴利
Paṭhamamaggena ñātaṃ mariyādaṃ anatikkamitvā tesaṃyeva tena maggena ñātānaṃ catusaccadhammānameva jānanato indriyaṭṭhasambhavato ca ājānanakaṃ indriyaṃ aññindriyaṃ. Sotāpattiphalādīsu chasu ṭhānesu ñāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ.
具知根:对于已遍知四圣谛、已完成了智的作用的漏尽者,因为它的生起,以及因为根的意义得以成立,所以叫具知根;或者,对于已遍知者——也就是在四圣谛上已完成作用、通达四圣谛而安住的诸法当中——由于内在成就了主宰的意义,所以叫具知根。这是阿拉汉果智的名称。而所有这些根,随各自相应的情况,都以“根的印相意义、根由主宰所说、根由主宰所见、根由主宰所教、根由主宰所行”这几层意义而称为根。因为世尊、正自觉者由于具有最上的自在,所以是“主宰”;而善业和不善业,因为在诸业当中,对任何事物都没有自在。正因如此,这里由业所生的诸根,能标示善业与不善业,并且是由那主宰所教示的,所以依“根的印相意义”和“根由主宰所教的意义”而称为根。再者,所有这些根,都是由世尊、牟尼主如实开显、现等觉的,所以依“根由主宰所说的意义”和“根由主宰所见的意义”而称为根。也正因为如此,由世尊、牟尼主,某些根是通过行境的修习而被运用,某些根是通过修习的修习而被运用,所以也依“根由主宰所行的意义”而称为根。此外,这些根也依增上——也就是自在——的意义而称为根。因为在眼识等生起运作时,眼等的主宰作用是成立的:它们锐利时作用就锐利,迟钝时作用就迟钝。巴利
Aññātāvino catusaccesu niṭṭhitañāṇakiccassa khīṇāsavassa uppajjanato indriyaṭṭhasambhavato ca aññātāvindriyaṃ, aññātāvīnaṃ vā catūsu saccesu niṭṭhitakiccānaṃ cattāri saccāni paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitānaṃ dhammānaṃ abbhantare indaṭṭhasādhanena aññātāvindriyaṃ. Arahattaphalañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sabbānipetāni yathāyogaṃ indaliṅgaṭṭhena indadesitaṭṭhena indadiṭṭhaṭṭhena indasiṭṭhaṭṭhena indajuṭṭhaṭṭhena ca indriyāni. Bhagavā hi sammāsambuddho paramissariyabhāvato indo, kusalākusalañca kammaṃ kammesu kassaci issariyābhāvato. Tenevettha kammajanitāni indriyāni kusalākusalakammaṃ ulliṅgenti , tena ca siṭṭhānīti indaliṅgaṭṭhena indasiṭṭhaṭṭhena ca indriyāni. Sabbāneva panetāni bhagavatā munindena yathābhūtato pakāsitāni abhisambuddhāni cāti indadesitaṭṭhena indadiṭṭhaṭṭhena ca indriyāni. Teneva ca bhagavatā munindena kānici gocarāsevanāya, kānici bhāvanāsevanāya sevitānīti indajuṭṭhaṭṭhenapi indriyāni. Api ca ādhipaccasaṅkhātena issariyaṭṭhenapi etāni indriyāni. Cakkhuviññāṇādipavattiyañhi cakkhādīnaṃ siddhamādhipaccaṃ tasmiṃ tikkhe tikkhattā mande ca mandattāti.
欲界等十二界,是按存在种类的划分来安立的。与被称为欲贪的欲相应的界,就是欲界;或者,被称为欲的界,就是欲界。巴利
Kāmadhātuādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni bhavappabhedavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena yuttā dhātu kāmadhātu, kāmasaṅkhātā vā dhātu kāmadhātu.
舍弃了欲之后,与色相应而存在的界,就是色界;或者,以“色”来命名的那一界,就是色界。巴利
Kāmaṃ pahāya rūpena yuttā dhātu rūpadhātu, rūpasaṅkhātā vā dhātu rūpadhātu.
舍弃了欲和色之后,与无色相应的界,就是无色界;或者,以无色来命名的界,就是无色界。巴利
Kāmañca rūpañca pahāya arūpena yuttā dhātu arūpadhātu, arūpasaṅkhātā vā dhātu arūpadhātu.
这些界,换个说法,又用“有”来讲。因为“存在”,所以就叫“有”。和想相应的有,就是“有想有”;和想一起存在的有,也是“有想有”;或者在这个有当中存在想,所以叫“有想有”。它可以是欲有,可以是除了无想有之外的色有,也可以是除了非想非非想有之外的无色有。巴利
Tā eva dhātuyo puna bhavapariyāyena vuttā. Bhavatīti hi bhavoti vuccati. Saññāya yutto bhavo saññābhavo, saññāsahagato vā bhavo saññābhavo, saññā vā ettha bhave atthīti saññābhavo. So kāmabhavo ca asaññābhavamutto rūpabhavo ca nevasaññānāsaññābhavamutto arūpabhavo ca hoti.
无想有不是有想有,它是色有的一部分。巴利
Na saññābhavo asaññābhavo, so rūpabhavekadeso.
因为不存在粗想,所以是“非想”;因为还有极微细的想存在,所以是“非非想”,合起来就是“非想非非想”。与这种状态相应的存在,就是“非想非非想有”。或者说,因为粗想不存在、细想还存在,所以这种存在状态中的众生就叫“非想非非想”,因此称为“非想非非想有”。这是无色有的一部分。巴利
Oḷārikattābhāvato nevasaññā, sukhumattena sambhavato nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññā, tāya yutto bhavo nevasaññānāsaññābhavo. Atha vā oḷārikāya saññāya abhāvā, sukhumāya ca bhāvā nevasaññānāsaññā asmiṃ bhaveti nevasaññānāsaññābhavo, so arūpabhavekadeso.
与一种色蕴混杂的有,具有一种因,所以叫“一因有”,它也就是无想有。巴利
Ekena rūpakkhandhena vokiṇṇo bhavo ekena vokāro assa bhavassāti ekavokārabhavo, so asaññabhavova.
与四种无色蕴混杂在一起的有,具有四种构成成分,所以叫四蕴有;它就是无色有。巴利
Catūhi arūpakkhandhehi vokiṇṇo bhavo catūhi vokāro assa bhavassāti catuvokārabhavo, so arūpabhavo eva.
由五种蕴混杂而成的存在,以五种蕴为它的构成部分,所以叫五蕴有。它属于欲有,也属于色有的一部分。巴利
Pañcahi khandhehi vokiṇṇo bhavo pañcahi vokāro assa bhavassāti pañcavokārabhavo, so kāmabhavo ca rūpabhavekadeso ca hoti.
6 初禅等十二种解答,是依禅那等至的状态来阐述的。这里说的“禅那”,只指梵住而言。与寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性相应的,是第一禅。与喜、乐、心一境性相应的,是第二禅。与乐、心一境性相应的,是第三禅。与舍、心一境性相应的,是第四禅。巴利
6.Paṭhamajjhānādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni jhānasamāpattivasena niddiṭṭhāni. Jhānanti idha brahmavihāramattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Vitakkavicārapītisukhacittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ. Pītisukhacittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ. Sukhacittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ. Upekkhācittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ.
“慈”之所以叫慈,是因为它滋润、柔和,意思是让人感到亲切。或者说,它存在于友善的人身上,或者是友善之人的行为表现,所以叫“慈”。由于脱离了敌对的状态,又因为心倾向于所缘的对象,所以叫“解脱”;心的解脱就是“心解脱”;慈本身就是心解脱,所以叫“慈心解脱”。巴利
Medati mejjatīti mettā, siniyhatīti attho. Mitte vā bhavā, mittassa vā esā pavattīti mettā, paccanīkadhammehi muttattā ārammaṇe cādhimuttattā vimutti, cetaso vimutti cetovimutti, mettā eva cetovimutti mettācetovimutti.
悲的含义已经说过了。巴利
Karuṇā vuttatthā eva.
具有喜的人通过它而欢喜,或者它本身就欢喜,或者它只是欢喜的状态,所以称为“喜”。通过舍弃“愿他们没有怨敌”这类造作,以及进入平等心的状态,所以称为“舍”。慈等三种梵住分别与初禅、第二禅、第三禅相应。舍梵住则与第四禅相应。巴利
Modanti tāya taṃsamaṅgino, sayaṃ vā modati, modanamattameva vā tanti muditā. ‘‘Averā hontū’’tiādibyāpārappahānena majjhattabhāvūpagamanena ca upekkhatīti upekkhā. Mettādayo tayo brahmavihārā paṭhamādīhi tīhi jhānehi yuttā. Upekkhābrahmavihāro catutthajjhānena yutto.
由于遍满,它没有边际,所以叫“无边”。虚空是无边的,所以叫“空无边”,也就是除去遍处后的虚空。空无边本身就是空无边,它作为依处,对于与它相应的心所法和禅那来说,就是处所,如同“诸天的天处”一样,所以叫“空无边处”。空无边处本身就是等至,所以叫“空无边处等至”。同样,由于遍满而没有边际,所以叫“无边”,那是取虚空为所缘的识。无边的就是“无边”,识的无边不说“识无边”,而说“识无边”。这里用的是惯用语。那识的无边作为依处,对于与它相应的心所法和禅那来说,就是处所,如同“诸天的天处”一样,所以叫“识无边处”。没有任何东西,就是连一丝残余都没有,所以说“无所有”。无所有的状态就是“无所有”。这是空无边处识不存在的同义词。那无所有作为依处,对于与它相应的心所法和禅那来说,就是处所,如同“诸天的天处”一样,所以叫“无所有处”。因为粗的想不存在,细的想存在,所以与它相应的心所法和禅那的想,既不是想也不是非想,所以叫“非想非非想”。非想非非想属于意处和法处,所以叫“非想非非想处”。或者说,这里的想因为不能执行明确的想的功能,所以叫“非想”;因为以残余行蕴的细微状态而存在,所以叫“非非想”,合起来就是“非想非非想”。非想非非想又作为其余诸法的依处,所以叫“处”,合起来就是“非想非非想处”。这是以无所有处为所缘的等至的同义词。在这里,不仅想是这样的,受也是非受非非受,心也是非心非非心,触也是非触非非触。其余相应法也依此类推。不过,这个开示是以想为首来说的。巴利
Pharaṇavasena natthi etassa antoti ananto. Ākāso ananto ākāsānanto, kasiṇugghāṭimākāso . Ākāsānantoyeva ākāsānañcaṃ, taṃ ākāsānañcaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa ‘‘devānaṃ devāyatanamivā’’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ. Ākāsānañcāyatanameva samāpatti ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpatti. Pharaṇavasena ca natthi etassa antoti anantaṃ, taṃ ākāsārammaṇaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Anantameva ānañcaṃ, viññāṇaṃ ānañcaṃ ‘‘viññāṇānañca’’nti avatvā ‘‘viññāṇañca’’nti vuttaṃ. Ayañhettha ruḷhisaddo. Taṃ viññāṇañcaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa ‘‘devānaṃ devāyatanamivā’’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ. Natthi etassa kiñcananti akiñcanaṃ, antamaso bhaṅgamattampi assa avasiṭṭhaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Akiñcanassa bhāvo ākiñcaññaṃ. Ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇābhāvassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ ākiñcaññaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa ‘‘devānaṃ devāyatanamivā’’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ. Oḷārikāya saññāya abhāvato, sukhumāya ca bhāvato nevassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa saññā nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññaṃ. Nevasaññānāsaññañca taṃ manāyatanadhammāyatanapariyāpannattā āyatanañcāti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ. Atha vā yāyamettha saññā sā paṭusaññākiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthatāya nevasaññā, saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvena vijjamānattā nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññā, nevasaññānāsaññā ca sā sesadhammānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanañcāti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ. Ākiñcaññāyatanārammaṇāya samāpattiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Na kevalaṃ ettha saññā edisī, atha kho vedanāpi nevavedanā nāvedanā. Cittampi nevacittaṃ nācittaṃ. Phassopi nevaphasso nāphasso. Esa nayo sesasampayuttadhammesu. Saññāsīsena panāyaṃ desanā katāti.
无明等十二项解说,是依缘起支来指示的。身恶行等法,因为不可能圆满,所以叫“不应得”,意思是得不到。它却得到那不应得的东西,所以叫无明。反过来,身善行等法叫“应得”,它却得不到那应得的东西,所以也叫无明。它让人不知道蕴的积聚义、处的处义、界的空义、根的主宰义、谛的真实义,所以叫无明。对于苦等,依压迫等四方面所说的四重含义,它让人不知道,所以也叫无明。在无始的轮回中,它驱使众生奔走于一切生、趣、有、识住、有情居,所以叫无明。它在究竟意义上并不存在的女人、男人等事物上奔走,而对真实存在的蕴等事物却不奔走,所以叫无明。再者,它覆蔽眼识等的依处和所缘,以及缘起和缘生法,所以叫无明。造作有为法,所以叫行。了知,所以叫识。倾向,或者导向,所以叫名。会变坏,所以叫色。扩展并导向扩展,所以叫处。接触,所以叫触。感受,所以叫受。颤抖,所以叫渴爱。紧紧执取,所以叫取。存在,或者令存在,所以叫有。产生,叫生。衰老,叫老。以此而死,叫死。巴利
Avijjādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni paṭiccasamuppādaṅgavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Pūretuṃ ayuttaṭṭhena kāyaduccaritādi avindiyaṃ nāma, aladdhabbanti attho. Taṃ avindiyaṃ vindatīti avijjā. Tabbiparītato kāyasucaritādi vindiyaṃ nāma, taṃ vindiyaṃ na vindatīti avijjā. Khandhānaṃ rāsaṭṭhaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanaṭṭhaṃ, dhātūnaṃ suññaṭṭhaṃ, indriyānaṃ adhipatiyaṭṭhaṃ, saccānaṃ tathaṭṭhaṃ aviditaṃ karotīti avijjā. Dukkhādīnaṃ pīḷanādivasena vuttaṃ catubbidhaṃ catubbidhaṃ atthaṃ aviditaṃ karotītipi avijjā, antavirahite saṃsāre sabbayonigatibhavaviññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsesu satte javāpetīti avijjā, paramatthato avijjamānesu itthipurisādīsu javati, vijjamānesupi khandhādīsu na javatīti avijjā, api ca cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ vatthārammaṇānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannānañca dhammānaṃ chādanatopi avijjā. Saṅkhatamabhisaṅkharontīti saṅkhārā. Vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ. Namatīti nāmaṃ, nāmayatīti vā nāmaṃ. Ruppatīti rūpaṃ. Āye tanoti , āyatañca nayatīti āyatanaṃ. Phusatīti phasso. Vedayatīti vedanā. Paritassatīti taṇhā. Upādiyati bhusaṃ gaṇhātīti upādānaṃ. Bhavati, bhāvayatīti vā bhavo. Jananaṃ jāti. Jīraṇaṃ jarā. Maranti etenāti maraṇaṃ.
7 苦等八百零八种解答,是依照四谛的关联方式来说明的。在“苦应被遍知”等当中,依六组四句的搭配方式,有二十四种解答;从“眼、老死”这类列举开始,一直到“眼应被遍知、耳应被遍知”等,最后以“生应被遍知”结束,这样配合起来一共说了一百九十五种解答。一百九十五组四句加起来,依这些四句来算,就有七百八十种解答。在“老死应被遍知”等四句当中,共有“四种解答”,这样全部加起来就是八百零八种解答。在这里应当知道,对每一种法来说,作为主要条件的缘就是“集”。空于一切有为法的涅槃,就是“灭”。因为这里指的是“未已知欲知根”等三种出世间根不存在,所以说“未已知欲知根之灭”等话是说得通的。而“趣向灭的道路”,在一切地方都只是指圣道。这样说来,在果位上也可以使用“道”这个称呼,所以对“已知根”和“具知根”也同样适用。再者,依苦等的“遍知”等含义,说明了八百零八种解答;又依苦等的“遍知通达”等含义,说明了八百零八种解答。遍知就是依“应当通达”这个意义而说通达,所以叫遍知通达。遍知通达这个意义,就是遍知通达的含义。巴利
7.Dukkhādīni aṭṭhasatāni aṭṭha ca vissajjanāni catusaccayojanāvasena niddiṭṭhāni. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ abhiññeyya’’ntiādīsu hi channaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena catuvīsati vissajjanāni ‘‘cakkhu jarāmaraṇa’’nti peyyāle ‘‘cakkhu abhiññeyyaṃ sotaṃ abhiññeyya’’ntiādinā ‘‘jāti abhiññeyyā’’ti pariyosānena pañcanavutādhikena vissajjanasatena yojetvā vuttāni. Pañcanavutādhikaṃ catukkasataṃ hoti, tesaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena asītiadhikāni satta vissajjanasatāni. ‘‘Jarāmaraṇaṃ abhiññeyya’’ntiādike catukke ‘‘cattāri vissajjanānī’’ti evaṃ sabbāni aṭṭha ca satāni aṭṭha ca vissajjanāni honti. Ettha ca tassa tassa dhammassa padhānabhūto paccayo samudayoti veditabbo. Sabbasaṅkhārehi suññaṃ nibbānaṃ nirodhoti veditabbaṃ. Anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīnaṃ tiṇṇampi hi lokuttarindriyānaṃ ettha abhāvaṃ sandhāya anaññātaññassāmītindriyanirodhotiādi yujjati . Nirodhagāminipaṭipadāti ca sabbattha ariyamaggo eva. Evañhi vuccamāne phalepi maggavohārasambhavato aññindriyaaññātāvindriyānampi yujjati. Puna dukkhādīnaṃ pariññaṭṭhādivasena aṭṭhasatāni aṭṭha ca vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni, puna dukkhādīnaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhaṭṭhādivasena aṭṭhasatāni aṭṭha ca vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Pariññā ca sā paṭivijjhitabbaṭṭhena paṭivedho cāti pariññāpaṭivedho. Pariññāpaṭivedhova attho pariññāpaṭivedhaṭṭho.
8 再进一步,把那些以老死为终点的苦等二百零二句,分别与集等七句一一配合,按照二百零二组八句来计算,就说明了一千六百一十六种解答。其中,作为主导条件的缘就是集,它的灭就是集灭。欲本身就是贪,所以叫欲贪;因为对苦生起乐想,所以对苦有欲贪,它的灭就是欲贪灭。依于苦而生起的乐和喜悦,是苦的味。苦的无常、苦的变易本性,是苦的过患。调伏对苦的欲贪、舍断对苦的欲贪,是苦的出离。依据“凡是存在的、有为的、缘生的,其灭就是它的出离”这一说法,涅槃正是苦的出离。“苦灭、集灭、欲贪灭、苦的出离”——在这四处,是以不同的有为法对立面、用不同的同义语来说明涅槃,应当这样理解。不过有些人说:“由食的集起而有苦的集起,由食的灭而有苦的灭,这是从自性上说的集灭;或者,由观见生灭而说的集灭,连同观慧,就是道,就是欲贪灭。”如果这样说的话,因为出世间根不参与观照,就不能普遍适用,所以应当采用前面所说的方式。因为在出世间根中,本来就没有欲贪,所以说欲贪灭是合理的。对身体有欲贪,对身体各部分如头发等也有欲贪;对具有老死的事物有欲贪,对老死本身也有欲贪。味和过患也应当这样配合。再进一步,把那些以老死为终点的苦等二百零二句,分别与集等六句一一配合,按照二百零二组七句来计算,就说明了一千四百一十四种解答。巴利
8. Puna tāneva dukkhādīni jarāmaraṇapariyantāni dviadhikāni dve padasatāni samudayādīhi sattahi sattahi padehi yojetvā dviadhikānaṃ dvinnaṃ aṭṭhakasatānaṃ vasena sahassañca cha ca satāni soḷasa ca vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Tattha padhānabhūto paccayo samudayo, tassa nirodho samudayanirodho. Chando eva rāgo chandarāgo, dukkhe sukhasaññāya dukkhassa chandarāgo, tassa nirodho chandarāganirodho. Dukkhaṃ paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ sukhaṃ somanassaṃ dukkhassa assādo. Dukkhassa aniccatā dukkhassa vipariṇāmadhammatā dukkhassa ādīnavo. Dukkhe chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānaṃ dukkhassa nissaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ kho pana kiñci bhūtaṃ saṅkhataṃ paṭiccasamuppannaṃ nirodho tassa nissaraṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.24) vacanato nibbānameva dukkhassa nissaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhanirodho samudayanirodho chandarāganirodho dukkhassa nissaraṇa’’nti nānāsaṅkhatapaṭipakkhavasena nānāpariyāyavacanehi catūsu ṭhānesu nibbānameva vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘āhārasamudayā dukkhasamudayo āhāranirodhā dukkhanirodho sarasavasena samudayanirodho, atha vā udayabbayadassanena samudayanirodho saha vipassanāya maggo chandarāganirodho’’ti vadanti. Evañca vuccamāne lokuttarindriyānaṃ avipassanūpagattā na sabbasādhāraṇaṃ hotīti paṭhamaṃ vuttanayova gahetabbo. Lokuttarindriyesu hi chandarāgābhāvatoyeva chandarāganirodhoti yujjati. Sarīre chandarāgeneva sarīrekadesesu kesādīsupi chandarāgo katova hoti, jarāmaraṇavantesu chandarāgeneva jarāmaraṇesupi chandarāgo katova hoti. Evaṃ assādādīnavāpi yojetabbā. Puna dukkhādīni jarāmaraṇapariyantāni dviadhikāni dve padasatāni samudayādīhi chahi chahi padehi yojetvā dviadhikānaṃ dvinnaṃ sattakasatānaṃ vasena nayasahassañca cattāri ca satāni cuddasa ca vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni.
9 现在,为了把以色等开始、一直到老死为终点的二百零一句,配合七种随观来解说,先列出了无常随观等七种随观。这些全部加起来,连同七种纯净随观的解答,一共有一千四百一十四种解答。以无常为所缘的随观,就叫无常随观,它是对治常想的。以苦为所缘的随观,就叫苦随观,它是对治乐想的。以无我为所缘的随观,就叫无我随观,它是对治我想的。前三种随观修满之后生起厌离,这厌离本身就是随观,所以叫厌离随观,它是对治喜的。前四种随观修满之后生起离染,这离染本身就是随观,所以叫离染随观,它是对治贪的。前五种随观修满之后生起灭,这灭本身就是随观,所以叫灭随观,它是对治集的。前六种随观修满之后生起舍遣,这舍遣本身就是随观,所以叫舍遣随观,它是对治执取的。即使没有出世间根,对于能趣入观照的诸法,依据“一切行无常,一切行苦,一切法无我”的教说,它们本身也具有无常、苦、无我的性质;在那里没有常想、乐想、我想,也没有喜和贪,因此它们是具有灭的,可以依此随观;又因为存在遍舍舍遣和趣入舍遣这两种舍遣的可能,所以它们也可以配合七种随观,应当这样理解。对于以老死为终点的诸法,以无常等来观见时,老死也就算是以无常等被观见了;对于以老死为终点的诸法,厌离者、离染者,对老死也是厌离和离染的;对于以老死为终点的诸法,以灭来观见时,老死也就算是以灭被观见了;对于以老死为终点的诸法,舍遣者,就是在舍遣老死。因此,应当理解老死也与七种随观相配合。巴利
9. Idāni rūpādīni jarāmaraṇapariyantāni ekādhikāni dve padasatāni sattahi anupassanāhi yojetvā niddisituṃ paṭhamaṃ tāva aniccānupassanādayo satta anupassanā niddiṭṭhā. Tāni sabbāni sattahi suddhikaanupassanāvissajjanehi saddhiṃ sahassañca cattāri ca satāni cuddasa ca vissajjanāni honti. Aniccanti anupassanā aniccānupassanā. Sā niccasaññāpaṭipakkhā. Dukkhanti anupassanā dukkhānupassanā. Sā sukhasaññāpaṭipakkhā. Anattāti anupassanā anattānupassanā. Sā attasaññāpaṭipakkhā. Tissannaṃ anupassanānaṃ paripūrattā nibbindatīti nibbidā, nibbidā ca sā anupassanā cāti nibbidānupassanā. Sā nandipaṭipakkhā. Catassannaṃ anupassanānaṃ paripūrattā virajjatīti virāgo, virāgo ca so anupassanā cāti virāgānupassanā. Sā rāgapaṭipakkhā. Pañcannaṃ anupassanānaṃ paripūrattā rāgaṃ nirodhetīti nirodho, nirodho ca so anupassanā cāti nirodhānupassanā. Sā samudayapaṭipakkhā. Channaṃ anupassanānaṃ paripūrattā paṭinissajjatīti paṭinissaggo, paṭinissaggo ca so anupassanā cāti paṭinissaggānupassanā. Sā ādānapaṭipakkhā. Lokuttarindriyānaṃ asatipi vipassanūpagatte ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā, sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhā, sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti (dha. pa. 277-279; paṭi. ma. 1.31) vacanato tesampi aniccadukkhānattattā tattha niccasukhattasaññānaṃ nandiyā rāgassa ca abhāvā nirodhavantānīti anupassanato pariccāgapaṭinissaggapakkhandanapaṭinissaggasambhavato ca tehipi satta anupassanā yojitāti veditabbā. Jarāmaraṇavantesu aniccādito diṭṭhesu jarāmaraṇampi aniccādito diṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti, jarāmaraṇavantesu nibbindanto virajjanto jarāmaraṇe nibbinno ca viratto ca hoti, jarāmaraṇavantesu nirodhato diṭṭhesu jarāmaraṇampi nirodhato diṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti, jarāmaraṇavantesu paṭinissajjanto jarāmaraṇaṃ paṭinissajjantova hotīti jarāmaraṇehi satta anupassanā yojitāti veditabbā.
10 现在,依照过患智所依的五种所缘——即生等——来说明它们的同义词,共有十五种解答;依照寂静智的对治所缘,来说明无生等,也有十五种解答;再把那些生与无生等词按对句的方式组合起来,说明三十种解答。这样,在这一理趣中,总共就有六十种解答。其中,“生”:是指以过去的业为缘,在这里生起。“转起”:是指这样生起之后的持续活动。“相”:是指一切行的行相;对修观的人来说,诸行显现得好像有形状一样,所以称为相。“积累”:是指成为未来结生之因的业;因为它有造作的含义,所以称为积累。巴利
10. Idāni ādīnavañāṇassa vatthubhūtānaṃ uppādādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ ārammaṇānaṃ vasena uppādādīni tesaṃ vevacanāni pañcadasa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni, santipadañāṇassa tappaṭipakkhārammaṇavasena anuppādādīni pañcadasa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni, puna tāneva uppādānuppādādīni padāni yugaḷakavasena yojetvā tiṃsa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Evaṃ imasmiṃ nayeva saṭṭhi vissajjanāni honti. Tattha uppādoti purimakammapaccayā idha uppatti. Pavattanti tathāuppannassa pavatti. Nimittanti sabbampi saṅkhāranimittaṃ. Yogāvacarassa hi saṅkhārā sasaṇṭhānā viya upaṭṭhahanti, tasmā nimittanti vuccanti. Āyūhanāti āyatiṃ paṭisandhihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ. Tañhi abhisaṅkharaṇaṭṭhena āyūhanāti vuccati.
结生:指未来的投生。因为它连接前后世,所以称为结生。趣:指结生所依托的趣。因为那是应当前往之处,所以称为趣。再生:指诸蕴的产生。投生:即《无碍解道》中所说的“已入者或投生者……”那样,是异熟的现起。生:指诞生。当有情在各处投生时,诸蕴首次显现,也就是那些诸蕴的最初出现。老:指衰老。它有两种:一是被称为住异相的有为相,二是在生命相续中,属于同一期生命的诸蕴变旧的状态,也就是大家公认的牙齿脱落等。这里指的是后者。病:指由界扰动等因缘而生起的八种疾病,即由胆汁、痰、风、三者聚合、时节变化、不适当的养护、突发伤害、业异熟所导致的疾病。因为它带来种种痛苦,所以称为病;或者因为它折磨、烧恼、动摇,所以称为病。死:众生以它而死,所以称为死。它有两种:一是被称为衰亡相的有为相,二是在同一期生命中,生命根相续的断绝。这里指的是后者。巴利
Paṭisandhīti āyatiṃ uppatti. Sā hi bhavantarapaṭisandhānato paṭisandhīti vuccati. Gatīti yāya gatiyā sā paṭisandhi hoti. Sā hi gantabbato gatīti vuccati. Nibbattīti khandhānaṃ nibbattanaṃ. Upapattīti ‘‘samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.72) evaṃ vuttā vipākapavatti. Jātīti jananaṃ. Tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ tesaṃ paṭhamaṃ pātubhāvo. Jarāti jīraṇaṃ. Sā duvidhā ṭhitaññathattalakkhaṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca khaṇḍiccādisammato santatiyaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannakhandhānaṃ purāṇabhāvo ca. Sā idha adhippetā. Byādhīti dhātukkhobhapaccayasamuṭṭhito pittasemhavātasannipātautuvipariṇāmavisamaparihāraupakkamakammavipākavasena aṭṭhavidho ābādho. Vividhaṃ dukkhaṃ ādahati vidahatīti byādhi, byādhayati tāpeti, kampayatīti vā byādhi. Maraṇanti maranti etenāti maraṇaṃ. Taṃ duvidhaṃ vayalakkhaṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyappabandhavicchedo ca. Taṃ idha adhippetaṃ.
“愁”就是忧伤:当人遭遇亲友、财产、疾病、戒行、见解方面的灾祸时,内心受到灼烧般的苦恼。“悲叹”就是哀号:当人遭遇亲友等灾祸时,口中发出的哭诉。“绝望”就是极度忧恼:当人遭遇亲友等灾祸时,由极重的内心痛苦所产生的嗔恨。这里,生等五项是就过患智的对象来说的,其余则是它们的同义词。因为“再生”是“生起”的同义词,“生”是“结生”的同义词,“趣、再生”这两个词指的是转起,“老”等指的是相。而“不生起”等说法,则直接指的是涅槃。巴利
Sokoti socanaṃ. Ñātibhogarogasīladiṭṭhibyasanehi phuṭṭhassa cittasantāpo. Paridevoti paridevanaṃ. Ñātibyasanādīhiyeva phuṭṭhassa vacīpalāpo. Upāyāsoti bhuso āyāso. Ñātibyasanādīhiyeva phuṭṭhassa adhimattacetodukkhappabhāvito dosoyeva. Ettha ca uppādādayo pañceva ādīnavañāṇassa vatthuvasena vuttā, sesā tesaṃ vevacanavasena. ‘‘Nibbattī’’ti hi uppādassa, ‘‘jātī’’ti paṭisandhiyā vevacanaṃ, ‘‘gati upapattī’’ti idaṃ dvayaṃ pavattassa, jarādayo nimittassāti. Anuppādādivacanehi pana nibbānameva vuttaṃ.
接着,又把那些生起、不生起等六十个词,分别配合苦与乐、怖畏与安稳、有染着与无染着、行与涅槃这几组词,每一组都阐述了六十种解答。其中,“苦”是因为无常,所以是苦。“乐”是因为它是苦的反面,所以是乐。凡是苦的,就是“怖畏”。“安稳”是因为它是怖畏的反面,所以是安稳。凡是怖畏的,由于还没有脱离轮回的染着和世间的染着,所以是“有染着”。“无染着”是因为它是染着的反面,所以是无染着。凡是有染着的,那不过就是“行”而已。“涅槃”是因为它是行的反面,是寂静的,所以是涅槃。因为行是燃烧着的,而涅槃是寂静的。应当这样理解:针对苦的样子、怖畏的样子、有染着的样子、行的样子,如此依照每一种样子,就流转的情况而作了相应的分别述说。巴利
Puna tāneva uppādānuppādādīni saṭṭhi padāni dukkhasukhapadehi yojetvā saṭṭhi vissajjanāni, bhayakhemapadehi yojetvā saṭṭhi vissajjanāni, sāmisanirāmisapadehi yojetvā saṭṭhi vissajjanāni, saṅkhāranibbānapadehi yojetvā saṭṭhi vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Tattha dukkhanti aniccattā dukkhaṃ. Dukkhapaṭipakkhato sukhaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ bhayaṃ. Bhayapaṭipakkhato khemaṃ. Yaṃ bhayaṃ, taṃ vaṭṭāmisalokāmisehi avippamuttattā sāmisaṃ. Sāmisapaṭipakkhato nirāmisaṃ. Yaṃ sāmisaṃ, taṃ saṅkhāramattameva. Saṅkhārapaṭipakkhato santattā nibbānaṃ. Saṅkhārā hi ādittā, nibbānaṃ santanti. Dukkhākārena bhayākārena sāmisākārena saṅkhārākārenāti evaṃ tena tena ākārena pavattiṃ sandhāya tathā tathā vuttanti veditabbanti.
11 摄持义等三十一种解答,是依据圣道生起的刹那来阐述的。与圣道相应的那些法,从一开始就是为了生起而被摄持,所以叫“摄持”,它们自身的本性就是摄持义。正是这些法,以彼此互为眷属的状态存在,所以是眷属义。以修习达到圆满的状态,所以是圆满义。也正是这些法,凭借正定的力量专注于同一个所缘,所以是一境义。从它们不散乱到种种不同所缘这一点来看,所以是不散乱义。依于正精进的作用,所以是策励义。凭借正定的力量,就像沐浴香粉不会被水冲散一样,这些法不会离散,所以是不流散义。因为与正定结合而不混乱,所以是无浊义。因为不被摇动,所以是不动义。依于安住在一个所缘的状态,以及依于正定的结合而稳固地住立在一个所缘上的状态,所以是住立义;以不动状态住立于所缘,所以是住立义。彼以涅槃为所缘,以其为所依、所缘之状态,所以是所缘义。对于那个所缘能自在活动的状态,所以是行境义。以出离和断除的方式,所以是涅槃的断义。依于彻底舍弃烦恼的方式,所以是圣道的遍舍义。依于从两端一同出起的状态,所以是出起义。依于从相的转起中返还回来的状态,所以是退还义。因为已经寂灭,所以是寂静义。因为没有热恼,并且最为殊胜,所以是美妙义。因为已经从种种烦恼中解脱,并且一心倾向所缘,所以是解脱义。由于它不是诸漏活动的范围,是极为清净的,所以是无漏义。因为超越了烦恼荒漠和轮回荒漠,所以是渡越义。因为没有行的相状,所以是无相义。因为没有渴爱的愿望期求,所以是无愿义。因为没有可以作为我的坚实之物,所以是空义。以解脱的滋味而成为同一滋味,或者以止和观的滋味同一,所以是一味义。止与观彼此不互相超越,所以是不超越义。正是它们二者如同双驾马车并行的状态,所以是双运义。圣道从诸行中脱离开来,所以是出离义。因为能证得涅槃,所以是因义。因为能现前知见涅槃,所以是见义。以作为主导和上首的状态,所以是增上主义。巴利
11.Pariggahaṭṭhādīni ekatiṃsa vissajjanāni ariyamaggakkhaṇavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Ariyamaggasampayuttā hi dhammā ādito pabhuti uppādanatthaṃ pariggayhante iti pariggahā, tesaṃ sabhāvo pariggahaṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva aññamaññaparivārabhāvena parivāraṭṭho. Bhāvanāpāripūrivasena paripūraṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva samādhivasena ekārammaṇapariggahamapekkhitvā ekaggaṭṭho. Nānārammaṇavikkhepābhāvamapekkhitvā avikkhepaṭṭho. Vīriyavasena paggahaṭṭho. Samādhivasena udakena nhānīyacuṇṇānaṃ viya avippakiṇṇatā avisāraṭṭho. Samādhiyogena alulitattā anāvilaṭṭho. Avikampitattā aniñjanaṭṭho. Ekattupaṭṭhānavasenāti samādhiyogena ca ekārammaṇe bhusaṃ patiṭṭhānavasena ca. Ṭhitaṭṭhoti ārammaṇe niccalabhāvena patiṭṭhitaṭṭho. Tassa nibbānārammaṇassa ālambanabhāvena ārammaṇaṭṭho. Tattheva nikāmacārabhāvena gocaraṭṭho. Nissaraṇapahānabhāvena nibbānassa pahānaṭṭho. Kilesapariccāgavasena ariyamaggassa pariccāgaṭṭho. Dubhato vuṭṭhānavasena vuṭṭhānaṭṭho. Nimittapavattehi nivattanavasena nivattanaṭṭho. Nibbutattā santaṭṭho. Atappakattā uttamattā ca paṇītaṭṭho. Kilesehi vimuttattā, ārammaṇe ca adhimuttattā vimuttaṭṭho. Āsavānaṃ avisayabhāvena parisuddhattā anāsavaṭṭho. Kilesakantārasaṃsārakantārātikkamanena taraṇaṭṭho. Saṅkhāranimittābhāvena animittaṭṭho. Taṇhāpaṇidhiabhāvena appaṇihitaṭṭho. Attasārābhāvena suññataṭṭho. Vimuttirasena ekarasatāya, samathavipassanānaṃ ekarasatāya vā ekarasaṭṭho. Samathavipassanānaṃ aññamaññaṃ anativattanaṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva yuganaddhaṭṭho. Ariyamaggassa saṅkhārato niggamane niyyānaṭṭho. Nibbānasampāpanena hetuṭṭho. Nibbānapaccakkhakaraṇena dassanaṭṭho. Adhipatibhāvena ādhipateyyaṭṭhoti.
12 止等四种解答,是依止与观来说明。因为随顺无常等相而一再观察,所以叫“随观义”。对于止与观二者如同双驾马车并行,由于它们一味一味、互不超越,所以叫“不超越义”。学等九种解答,是依圣道的初、中、后阶段来说明。应当修学,所以叫“学”。应当受持,所以叫“受持义”。依戒安住之后,以业处的方式执取的所缘,因为是修习持续生起的依处,也是心活动的行境,所以叫“行境义”。在修止或修观时,对于因懈怠而沉滞的心,以修习择法觉支、精进觉支、喜觉支来策励,这就是“策励义”。对于因掉举而浮躁的心,以修习轻安觉支、定觉支、舍觉支来使它平静,这就是“抑制义”。“两边清净”是指从两边都清净,也就是排除沉滞与浮躁两边之后清净的心。应当知道,这是就那些安住于中道、以平等状态持续运作的心,而用复数来说。在策励与抑制之中,没有造作者在起作用,这就是“旁观义”。依于平等运转的心而修习,证得殊胜,这就是“殊胜证得义”。以圣道显现,就是“更上通达义”。以圣道所成就的四谛通达,就是“谛现观义”。以果定安立于灭,就是“安立于灭义”——因为它使具足者安立于称为灭尽的涅槃之中。巴利
12.Samathādīni cattāri vissajjanāni samathavipassanāvasena niddiṭṭhāni. Aniccādivasena anu anu passanato anupassanaṭṭho. Yuganaddhassa samathavipassanādvayassa ekarasabhāvena anativattanaṭṭho. Sikkhādīni nava vissajjanāni ariyamaggassa ādimajjhapariyosānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sikkhitabbattā sikkhā. Tassā samādātabbato samādānaṭṭho. Sīle patiṭṭhāya kammaṭṭhānavasena gahitassa ārammaṇassa bhāvanāpavattiṭṭhānattā gocaraṭṭhānattā ca gocaraṭṭho. Samathakāle vipassanākāle vā kosajjavasena līnassa cittassa dhammavicayavīriyapītisambojjhaṅgabhāvanāvasena ussāhanaṭṭho paggahaṭṭho. Uddhaccavasena uddhatassa cittassa passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgabhāvanāvasena sannisīdāpanaṭṭho niggahaṭṭho. Ubho visuddhānanti ubhato visuddhānaṃ, līnuddhatapakkhato nivāretvā visuddhānaṃ cittānanti attho. Majjhimabhāve ṭhitānaṃ santativasena pavattamānānaṃ cittānaṃ vasena bahuvacanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Ussāhanasannisīdāpanesu sabyāpārābhāvo ajjhupekkhanaṭṭho. Samappavattassa cittassa vasena bhāvanā visesādhigamaṭṭho. Ariyamaggapātubhāvavasena uttaripaṭivedhaṭṭho. Ariyamaggasiddhacatusaccapaṭivedhavasena saccābhisamayaṭṭho. Phalasamāpattivasena nirodhe patiṭṭhāpakaṭṭho. Sā hi taṃsamaṅgipuggalaṃ nirodhasaṅkhāte nibbāne patiṭṭhāpeti.
信根等五个释答,是依据根的义理而说的。胜解义,就是胜解之义。近住义,就是靠近所缘并安住下来的意思。见义,就是观察自性的意思。信力等五个释答,是依据力的义理而说的。以不可动摇的义理来说,信本身就是力,所以叫信力。以不信,就是由于不信。所谓不信,是指与信对立的心生起。不可动摇义,就是不可被摇动的意思,也就是无法动摇的意思。以懈怠,就是由称为懒惰状态的昏沉睡眠。以放逸,就是由与念对立的心生起。以掉举,就是由称为不寂静的掉举。以无明,就是由愚痴。念觉支等七个释答,是依据觉支的义理而说的。觉者的支分,就是觉支。殊胜且善妙的觉支,就是善觉支;念本身就是善觉支,所以叫念觉支。能简择诸法,所以叫择法。这是慧的名称。简择义,就是审察的意思。能令喜悦,所以叫喜。遍满义,就是散布的意思。令止息,就是轻安。寂止义,就是无恼害的意思。依平等而观,所以叫舍,就是平等而观,不偏袒而观的意思。这里的舍,就是那中舍,也叫觉支舍。因为具有平衡的特相,所以叫审视义。巴利
Saddhindriyādīni pañca vissajjanāni indriyaṭṭhavasena vuttāni. Adhimokkhaṭṭhoti adhimuccanaṭṭho. Upaṭṭhānaṭṭhoti ārammaṇaṃ upecca patiṭṭhānaṭṭho. Dassanaṭṭhoti sabhāvapekkhanaṭṭho. Saddhābalādīni pañca vissajjanāni balaṭṭhavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Akampiyaṭṭhena saddhāva balanti saddhābalaṃ. Assaddhiyeti assaddhiyena. Assaddhiyanti ca saddhāpaṭipakkhabhūto cittuppādo. Akampiyaṭṭhoti akampetabbaṭṭho, kampetuṃ na sakkāti attho. Kosajjeti kusītabhāvasaṅkhātena thinamiddhena. Pamādeti satipaṭipakkhena cittuppādena. Uddhacceti avūpasamasaṅkhātena uddhaccena. Avijjāyāti mohena. Satisambojjhaṅgādīni satta vissajjanāni bojjhaṅgaṭṭhavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Bujjhanakassa aṅgo bojjhaṅgo. Pasattho sundaro ca bojjhaṅgo sambojjhaṅgo, satiyeva sambojjhaṅgo satisambojjhaṅgo. Dhamme vicinātīti dhammavicayo. Paññāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Pavicayaṭṭhoti vicāraṭṭho. Pīnayatīti pīti. Pharaṇaṭṭhoti visaraṇaṭṭho. Passambhanaṃ passaddhi. Upasamaṭṭhoti niddarathaṭṭho. Upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā, samaṃ pekkhati apakkhapatitāva hutvā pekkhatīti attho. Sā idha tatramajjhattupekkhā, bojjhaṅgupekkhātipi tassā nāmaṃ. Samavāhitalakkhaṇattā paṭisaṅkhānaṭṭho.
正见等八个解释,是依道的角度来说明的。正确地见,或者依它而正确地见,或者被称赞的、善妙的见,就是正见。这属于正见。正确地思惟,或者依它而正确地思惟,或者被称赞的、善妙的思惟,就是正思惟。安立的意思,就是令心安立于所缘的意思。也有“安立所缘”这个读法。正确地语,或者依它而正确地语,或者被称赞的、善妙的语,就是正语。这是远离邪语的名称。摄持的意思,就是摄持四种语律仪的意思。正确地作,或者依它而正确地作,或者被称赞的、善妙的业,就是正业,正业就是正行。这是远离邪业的名称。等起的意思,就是等起三种身律仪的意思。正确地活命,或者依它而正确地活命,或者被称赞的、善妙的活命,就是正命。这是远离邪命的名称。清净的意思,就是清净的意思。正确地精勤,或者依它而正确地精勤,或者被称赞的、善妙的精勤,就是正精进。正确地念,或者依它而正确地念,或者被称赞的、善妙的念,就是正念。正确地定,或者依它而正确地定,或者被称赞的、善妙的定,就是正定。巴利
Sammādiṭṭhādīni aṭṭha vissajjanāni maggavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sammā passati, sammā vā tāya passanti, pasatthā sundarā vā diṭṭhīti sammādiṭṭhi. Tassā sammādiṭṭhiyā. Sammā saṅkappeti, sammā vā tena saṅkappenti, pasattho sundaro vā saṅkappoti sammāsaṅkappo. Abhiropanaṭṭhoti cittassa ārammaṇāropanaṭṭho. Ārammaṇābhiniropanaṭṭhotipi pāṭho. Sammā vadati , sammā vā tāya vadanti, pasatthā sundarā vā vācāti sammāvācā. Micchāvācāviratiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Pariggahaṭṭhoti catubbidhavacīsaṃvarapariggahaṭṭho. Sammā karoti, sammā vā tena karonti, pasatthaṃ sundaraṃ vā kammanti sammākammaṃ, sammākammameva sammākammanto. Micchākammantaviratiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Samuṭṭhānaṭṭhoti tividhakāyasaṃvarasamuṭṭhānaṭṭho. Sammā ājīvati, sammā vā tena ājīvanti, pasattho sundaro vā ājīvoti sammāājīvo. Micchājīvaviratiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Vodānaṭṭhoti parisuddhaṭṭho. Sammā vāyamati, sammā vā tena vāyamanti, pasattho sundaro vā vāyāmoti sammāvāyāmo. Sammā sarati, sammā vā tāya saranti, pasatthā sundarā vā satīti sammāsati. Sammā samādhiyati, sammā vā tena samādhiyanti, pasattho sundaro vā samādhīti sammāsamādhi.
13 13. “根”等十项回答,把它们归拢之后,按顺序逐一说明。“增上义”,就是像因陀罗的作用那样,以主宰、支配的方式成为增上。“不可动摇义”,就是不能被对立面所动摇。“出离义”,就是从世间和出世间的对立面中脱离出来。“因义”,就是正见等是断除邪见等的因,或者说一切正见等都是使人到达涅槃的因,所以叫因义。在念处中,因为跃入所缘、投入所缘而现起,所以叫“安住”;念本身就是安住,所以叫“念处”。然而,对于身、受、心、法,它依执取不净、苦、无常、无我这些行相,以及完成舍弃净、乐、常、我想的作用而运作,所以有四种分类。这些在前分阶段,可以出现在不同的心中;但在道的刹那,只有一个念,却得到四种名称。巴利
13.Indriyādīni dasa vissajjanāni rāsikatvā anupubbapaṭipāṭivasena niddiṭṭhāni. Ādhipateyyaṭṭhoti indaṭṭhakaraṇavasena adhipatiattho. Akampiyaṭṭhoti paṭipakkhehi kampetuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṭṭho. Niyyānaṭṭhoti lokiyalokuttarānampi paṭipakkhato niggamanaṭṭho. Hetuṭṭhoti micchādiṭṭhādīnaṃ pahānāya sammādiṭṭhādayo hetūti vā sabbepi sammādiṭṭhādayo nibbānasampāpakahetūti vā hetuṭṭho. Satipaṭṭhānesu ārammaṇesu okkhanditvā pakkhanditvā upaṭṭhānato upaṭṭhānaṃ, satiyeva upaṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Kāyavedanācittadhammesu panassā asubhadukkhāniccānattākāragahaṇavase subhasukhaniccattasaññāpahānakiccasādhanavasena ca pavattito catudhā bhedo hoti. Etāni pubbabhāge nānācittesu labbhanti, maggakkhaṇe pana ekāyeva sati cattāri nāmāni labhati.
在诸正勤中,人们依靠它来精勤努力,所以叫“勤”;它是善妙的勤,所以叫“正勤”。或者说,人们正确地依靠它来精勤努力,所以叫“正勤”;或者说,它是善妙的,因为它远离了烦恼的丑恶,同时也是勤,因为它能带来利益和安乐,由于带来最殊胜的状态,能造成勤的状态,所以叫“正勤”。这是精进的同义词。不过,按照断除已生的不善法、不让未生的不善法生起、让未生的善法生起、让已生的善法安住这四种作用来运作,它就有四种分类。这些在修行前分阶段,也存在于不同的心中;但在圣道刹那,只有一个精进,却得到四种名称。“勤励之义”,就是策励的意思。也有写成“勤之义”的异读,意思是一样的。巴利
Sammappadhānesu padahanti etenāti padhānaṃ, sobhanaṃ padhānaṃ sammappadhānaṃ. Sammā vā padahanti etenāti sammappadhānaṃ, sobhanaṃ vā taṃ kilesavirūpattavirahato padhānañca hitasukhanipphādakattena seṭṭhabhāvāvahanato padhānabhāvakaraṇato vā sammappadhānaṃ. Vīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Uppannānuppannānaṃ anuppannuppannānañca akusalakusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānānuppattiuppādaṭṭhitikiccasādhanavasena pavattito panassa catudhā bhedo hoti. Etānipi pubbabhāge nānācittesu labbhanti, maggakkhaṇe pana ekameva vīriyaṃ cattāri nāmāni labhati. Padahanaṭṭhoti ussāhanaṭṭho. Padhānaṭṭhotipi pāṭho, soyevattho.
在“神足”这个词里,欲、精进、心、观慧这四者,每一个都能成就,所以叫“神”,意思是能圆满、能生起。或者说,众生依靠它而成就、增长、达到最殊胜的状态,所以叫“神”。按第一种含义,神本身就是足,所以叫“神足”,意思是神的一部分。按第二种含义,是神的足,所以叫“神足”。“足”是立足处,意思是达到的方法。因为依靠它,人们才能一步一步进入并到达更殊胜的境界——也就是所谓的神——所以叫“足”。这些欲等法,在前期以主导作用存在于不同心中,但在道刹那则同时存在。“成就之义”即产生之义或安立处之义。“诸谛”指四圣谛。“如性之义”指如其自性之义。这八种解说混合了世间与出世间。“诸精勤”指四种圣道精勤。“止息之义”指四种圣果的止息之义。因为道精勤在果刹那已止息,所作已办。或者,由于果的生起,诸道精勤有止息的状态。“诸果之作证之义”指以回顾方式对诸圣果的现前作证之义。这是说所缘作证,或者在果刹那说获得作证。寻等五种解说依禅支而说。寻思是寻,意思是推度。伺察是伺,意思是随伺察。“随伺察之义”即反复审察之义。“润湿之义”即依定力而令心专一之义。巴利
Iddhipādānanti ettha chandavīriyacittavīmaṃsāsu ekeko ijjhatīti iddhi, samijjhati nipphajjatīti attho. Ijjhanti vā etāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iddhi, paṭhamenatthena iddhi eva pādo iddhipādo, iddhikoṭṭhāsoti attho. Dutiyenatthena iddhiyā pādoti iddhipādo. Pādoti patiṭṭhā, adhigamūpāyoti attho. Tena hi yasmā uparūpari visesasaṅkhātaṃ iddhiṃ pajjanti pāpuṇanti, tasmā pādoti vuccati. Ete chandādayo pubbabhāge adhipativasena nānācittesu labbhanti, maggakkhaṇe pana saheva labbhanti. Ijjhanaṭṭhoti nipphajjanaṭṭho patiṭṭhānaṭṭho vā. Saccānanti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ. Tathaṭṭhoti yathāsabhāvaṭṭho. Imāni aṭṭha vissajjanāni lokiyalokuttaramissakāni. Payogānanti catunnaṃ ariyamaggapayogānaṃ. Paṭippassaddhaṭṭhoti catunnaṃ ariyaphalānaṃ paṭippassaddhaṭṭho. Maggapayogo hi phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddho hoti niṭṭhitakiccattā. Maggapayogānaṃ phalodayena paṭippassaddhabhāvo vā. Phalānaṃ sacchikiriyaṭṭhoti ariyaphalānaṃ paccavekkhaṇavasena paccakkhakaraṇaṭṭho. Ārammaṇasacchikiriyā vuttā hoti, phalakkhaṇe paṭilābhasacchikiriyā vā. Vitakkādīni pañca vissajjanāni jhānaṅgavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Vitakkanaṃ vitakko, ūhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Vicaraṇaṃ vicāro, anusañcaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Upavicāraṭṭhoti anumajjanaṭṭho. Abhisandanaṭṭhoti temanaṭṭho samādhivasena cittassa ekaggaṭṭho.
转向等十五种解释,是按杂项分类来说明的。在五门和意门中,有两种心把心相续转向不同于有分所缘的其他所缘,这就是转向的作用。识的作用是了别。慧的作用是了知。想的作用是认知。定的作用是专一。因为在第二禅中,定单独生起,所以称为专一,意思是它不被寻和伺所覆盖,作为最上、最殊胜的状态而生起。世间中,最上者也被称为一。或者,它远离寻和伺,作为单独的、没有伴侣的状态生起,这样也说得通。又或者,一切善定因为是诸盖或掉举的对立面,不被它们所覆盖,所以作为最上状态而生起;或者因为远离它们而作为没有伴侣的状态生起;这两种情况下,都可以合理地称为专一。证智的已知作用,是依知遍知而了知自性的作用。遍知的审察作用,是依审度遍知,从无常等角度观察的作用。断的遍舍作用,是依断遍知而断除对立面的作用。平等转起的修习有一味的作用。触的作用是接触、感受。以压迫、荷负重担等意义,是蕴的作用。以空无等意义,是界的作用。以各自界限等意义,是处的作用。依诸缘和合而造作,是有为的作用。与此相反,是无为的作用。巴利
Āvajjanādīni pañcadasa vissajjanāni pakiṇṇakavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Pañcadvāramanodvāresu bhavaṅgārammaṇato aññārammaṇe cittasantānaṃ namentānaṃ dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ āvajjanaṭṭho. Viññāṇassa vijānanaṭṭho. Paññāya pajānanaṭṭho. Saññāya sañjānanaṭṭho. Samādhissa ekodaṭṭho. Dutiyajjhānasmiñhi samādhi eko udetīti ekodīti vuccati, vitakkavicārehi anajjhāruḷhattā aggo seṭṭho hutvā uppajjatīti attho. Seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccati. Vitakkavicāravirahito vā eko asahāyo hutvā udetītipi vaṭṭati. Sabbopi vā kusalasamādhi nīvaraṇādīnaṃ uddhaccasseva vā paṭipakkhattā tehi anajjhāruḷhoti aggo hutvā udetīti vā tehi virahitoti asahāyo hutvā udetīti vā ekodīti yujjati. Abhiññāya ñātaṭṭhoti ñātapariññāya sabhāvajānanaṭṭho. Pariññāya tīraṇaṭṭhoti tīraṇapariññāya aniccādito upaparikkhaṇaṭṭho. Pahānassa pariccāgaṭṭhoti pahānapariññāya paṭipakkhapajahanaṭṭho. Samappavattāya bhāvanāya ekarasaṭṭho. Phassanaṭṭhoti phusanaṭṭho vindanaṭṭho. Pīḷābhāravahanādinā khandhaṭṭho. Suññādinā dhātuṭṭho. Sakasakamariyādāyatanādinā āyatanaṭṭho. Paccayehi saṅgamma katavasena saṅkhataṭṭho. Tabbiparītena asaṅkhataṭṭho.
14 心义等十五种解释,是就与心的关联来说明的。关于“心义”:在这里,能思虑所缘的就是心,意思是“识知”。不过,其中如果是速行心,它依照速行路线的方式累积自己的相续,所以也叫心;如果是果报心,它由业和烦恼所造作,所以也叫心。一切心都随各自的情况,因为具有认知的性质而叫心,因为具有造作的性质而叫心。再者,凡是成为轮回之因、能累积轮回之苦的,也叫心。这样,由于对所缘有认知等性质,这就是“心义”。“无间”:在它之后,下一个心或果心生起时,中间没有任何间隔,所以叫无间。这种无间的性质,就是无间性。心的这种无间性,就是心无间性,这就是心无间性的含义。具体来说,除了阿罗汉的死亡心之外,任何一颗刚灭去的无间心,都有能力让下一个心生起;同样,道心灭后,能无间地令果心生起,这是它的要点。“心的出起”:种姓心从相出起,道心从相的相续出起,这就是出起的作用。“心的回转”:就是这两种心,按上面所说的方式出起后,转向涅槃,这就是回转的作用。“心的因”:心以九种因作为因缘,这就是因的作用。“心的缘”:心以依处、所缘等许多缘为缘,这就是缘的作用。“心的依处”:心以眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、心所依处为依处,这就是依处的作用。“心的地”:心依生起之处,有欲界等地的作用。“心的所缘”:以色等为所缘的作用。“心的行处”:以惯常所缘的转起处为行处的作用。“心的行”:按上面所说的识之行的方式,就是行的作用;或者,以发动和现行的意义为行的作用。“心的去”:即使心没有移动,但依取远、近所缘的方式,而有去的作用。“心的引出”:为了使心从已取的所缘转向其他所缘,而有引出的作用。“心的出离”:道心从轮回出离,这就是出离的作用。又如“已得离欲者,心从欲贪中解脱出来”等所说,按这种方式,心从烦恼中解脱,就是出离的作用。巴利
14.Cittaṭṭhādīni pañcadasa vissajjanāni cittasambandhena niddiṭṭhāni. Cittaṭṭhoti ettha ārammaṇaṃ cintetīti cittaṃ, vijānātīti attho. Yaṃ panettha javanaṃ hoti, taṃ javanavīthivasena attano santānaṃ cinotītipi cittaṃ, yaṃ vipākaṃ hoti, taṃ kammakilesehi citantipi cittaṃ, sabbampi yathānurūpaṃ cittatāya cittaṃ, cittakaraṇatāya cittaṃ, yaṃ vaṭṭassa paccayo hoti, taṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ cinotītipi cittaṃ. Evaṃ ārammaṇe cittatādito cittaṭṭho. Cittuppādane phaluppādane vā nāssa antaramatthīti anantaraṃ, anantarassa bhāvo ānantariyaṃ, cittassa ānantariyaṃ cittānantariyaṃ, so cittānantariyaṭṭho. Arahato cuticittaṃ vajjetvā yassa kassaci samanantaraniruddhassa cittassa anantaracittuppādane samatthabhāvo maggacittassa anantaraṃ phaluppādane samatthabhāvoti adhippāyo. Cittassa vuṭṭhānaṭṭhoti gotrabhucittassa nimittato, maggacittassa nimittapavattato vuṭṭhānaṭṭho. Cittassa vivaṭṭanaṭṭhoti tasseva cittadvayassa yathāvuttato vuṭṭhitassa nibbāne vivaṭṭanaṭṭho. Cittassa hetuṭṭhoti cittassa hetupaccayabhūtānaṃ navannaṃ hetūnaṃ hetuṭṭho. Cittassa paccayaṭṭhoti cittassa vatthārammaṇādīnaṃ anekesaṃ paccayānaṃ paccayaṭṭho. Cittassa vatthuṭṭhoti cittassa vatthubhūtānaṃ cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyahadayavatthūnaṃ vatthuṭṭho. Cittassa bhūmaṭṭhoti cittassa uppattidesavasena kāmāvacarādibhūmiattho. Cittassa ārammaṇaṭṭhoti rūpādiārammaṇaṭṭho. Paricitassārammaṇassa sañcaraṇaṭṭhānaṭṭhena gocaraṭṭho. Upari vuttaviññāṇacariyāvasena cariyaṭṭho. Atha vā payogasamudācāraṭṭho cariyaṭṭho. Cittassa gamanābhāvepi dūrasantikārammaṇagahaṇavasena gataṭṭho. Abhinīhāraṭṭhoti gahitārammaṇato aññārammaṇamanasikāratthaṃ cittassa abhinīharaṇaṭṭho. Cittassa niyyānaṭṭhoti maggacittassa vaṭṭato niyyānaṭṭho. ‘‘Nekkhammaṃ paṭiladdhassa kāmacchandato cittaṃ nissaṭaṃ hotī’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.24, 191 thokaṃ visadisaṃ) nayena cittassa nissaraṇaṭṭho.
15 “一性”等四十二种解释,是联系“一性”来说明的。“一性”指所缘的单一性,意思是只有一个所缘。依初禅进入所缘,这是趋入的作用。依第二禅生起净信,这是净信的作用。依第三禅安住,这是安住的作用。依第四禅解脱,这是解脱的作用。依观察而见到“这是寂静的”,这是观见的作用。“已修习状态”等五种,是定自在力差别的表现。“已修习状态”是指变得像已调伏、随时可用的车乘一样。“已为所依状态”是指在稳固基础的意义上,变得像地基一样。“已现前状态”是指已经现前、已掌握的状态。“已熟习状态”是指从各方面完全熟悉、反复修习的状态。“善精勤状态”是指善于精勤,也就是善加完成的状态。或者,按转向自在、入定自在、决意自在、出定自在、观察自在的顺序,依次对应这五种词。当依遍处等所缘修习达到顶峰时,心与心所法被完全掌握、随顺和圆满,这是摄持、随从、圆满的作用。由于它们正确地安止于同一所缘,汇集一处,这是汇聚的作用。由于它们力量已臻圆满,能够胜伏所缘而安立,这是决意的作用。或者,依止与观,从最初起,以恭敬修习之力,这是修习的作用。以增长之力,这是修行的作用。以反复行持之力,这是多修的作用。已多修者以善能生起之力,这是善生起的作用。已善生起者,以善能从违逆法中解脱、以及对所缘善能胜解之力,这是善解脱的作用。巴利
15.Ekattādīni dvācattālīsa vissajjanāni ekattasambandhena niddiṭṭhāni. Ekatteti ārammaṇekatte, ekārammaṇeti attho. Paṭhamajjhānavasena pakkhandanaṭṭho. Dutiyajjhānavasena pasīdanaṭṭho. Tatiyajjhānavasena santiṭṭhanaṭṭho. Catutthajjhānavasena muccanaṭṭho. Paccavekkhaṇavasena etaṃ santanti passanaṭṭho. Yānīkataṭṭhādayo pañca samādhissa vasībhāvavisesā. Yānīkataṭṭhoti yuttayānasadisakataṭṭho. Vatthukataṭṭhoti patiṭṭhaṭṭhena vatthu viya kataṭṭho. Anuṭṭhitaṭṭhoti paccupaṭṭhitaṭṭho. Paricitaṭṭhoti samantato citaṭṭho. Susamāraddhaṭṭhoti suṭṭhu samāraddhaṭṭho , sukataṭṭhoti attho. Āvajjanasamāpajjanaadhiṭṭhānavuṭṭhānapaccavekkhaṇavasitāvasena vā paṭipāṭiyā pañca padāni yojetabbāni. Kasiṇādiārammaṇabhāvanāya sikhāppattakāle cittacetasikānaṃ pariggahaparivāraparipūraṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva sammā samāhitattā ekārammaṇe samosaraṇena samodhānaṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva balappattiyā ārammaṇaṃ abhibhavitvā patiṭṭhānavasena adhiṭṭhānaṭṭho. Samathassa vipassanāya vā ādito, ādarena vā sevanavasena āsevanaṭṭho. Vaḍḍhanavasena bhāvanaṭṭho. Punappunaṃ karaṇavasena bahulīkammaṭṭho. Bahulīkatassa suṭṭhu samuṭṭhitavasena susamuggataṭṭho. Susamuggatassa paccanīkehi suṭṭhu vimuttivasena ārammaṇe ca suṭṭhu adhimuttivasena suvimuttaṭṭho.
依觉支来说,觉悟之义等四个词是:入流道觉支的作用是觉悟,一来道觉支的作用是随觉,不来道觉支的作用是对觉,阿拉汉道觉支的作用是正觉。或者,观智觉支的作用是觉悟,见道觉支的作用是随觉,修道觉支的作用是对觉,果位觉支的作用是正觉。应当知道,正如前面所说,诸觉支对相应的修行者以令觉悟等方式起作用,因此有觉悟之义等四种作用。正如前面所说的那些觉支,以觉悟之义成为被称为“觉者”的修行者的一方,所以叫菩提分法。应当知道,前面所说的那些觉支,其菩提分法之义等四种作用也是如此。依观智之慧照明所缘,这是照明的作用。依次依四种道智,有照明、辉照、对耀、遍耀的作用。或者,依次依四种道智有照明等作用,依果智则有遍耀的作用。巴利
Bujjhanaṭṭhādīni cattāri padāni bojjhaṅgavasena vuttāni. Sotāpattimaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ bujjhanaṭṭho. Sakadāgāmimaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ anubujjhanaṭṭho. Anāgāmimaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ paṭibujjhanaṭṭho. Arahattamaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ sambujjhanaṭṭho. Vipassanābojjhaṅgānaṃ vā bujjhanaṭṭho. Dassanamaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ anubujjhanaṭṭho. Bhāvanāmaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ paṭibujjhanaṭṭho. Phalabojjhaṅgānaṃ sambujjhanaṭṭho. Yathāvuttanayeneva bojjhaṅgānaṃ tassa tassa puggalassa bodhanādikaraṇena bodhanaṭṭhādayo cattāro atthā veditabbā. Yathāvuttānaṃyeva bojjhaṅgānaṃ bujjhanaṭṭhena ‘‘bodho’’ti laddhanāmassa puggalassa pakkhe bhavattā bodhipakkhiyā nāma. Tesaṃ yathāvuttānaṃyeva bodhipakkhiyaṭṭhādayo cattāro atthā veditabbā. Vipassanāpaññāvasena jotanaṭṭho. Kamato catumaggapaññāvasena ujjotanānujjotanapaṭijjotanasañjotanaṭṭho. Kamato catumaggapaññāvasena vā jotanaṭṭhādayo, phalapaññāvasena sañjotanaṭṭho veditabbo.
16 令光辉等十八个释义,是依圣道来说明的。圣道在谁心中生起,就使那个人发光、明亮、照耀,所以叫“令光辉”,这就是令光辉的涵义。由于圣道自身具有极其明亮的状态,所以有自照耀的涵义。由于能使烦恼干枯,所以有令热干的涵义。由于以无垢的涅槃为所缘,所以有无垢的涵义。由于与圣道相应的心所法没有污垢,所以有离垢的涵义。由于在以涅槃为所缘这件事上没有污垢,所以有无垢秽的涵义。或者也可以说:入流道有无垢的涵义;一来道和不来道有离垢的涵义;阿拉汉道有无垢秽的涵义。又或者说:声闻道有无垢的涵义;独觉道有离垢的涵义;正等正觉者的道有无垢秽的涵义。由于没有烦恼所造成的不平等,所以有平等的涵义。就像“正确地通达慢”等经文里那样,以断除烦恼为意义,所以有通达的涵义。在镇伏断、彼分断、正断、止息断、出离断这五种远离中,因为圣道属于正断远离,所以有远离的涵义,也就是分离的涵义。由于践行于出离远离即涅槃,所以有远离行的涵义。在五种离贪中,因为属于正断离贪,所以有离贪的涵义,也就是离染的涵义。由于践行于出离离贪即涅槃,所以有离贪行的涵义。在五种灭中,因为属于正断灭,所以有灭的涵义。由于践行于苦灭即涅槃,所以有灭行的涵义。由于舍遣、跃入、放下的缘故,所以有放舍的涵义。因为圣道以正断的方式断除烦恼,所以是舍遣放舍;以取涅槃为所缘而跃入涅槃,所以是跃入放舍。而观则以彼分的方式断除烦恼,所以是舍遣放舍;由于倾向于涅槃,所以是跃入放舍。这里指的不是观。由于以放舍的方式行持,所以有放舍行的涵义。在五种解脱中,因为属于正断解脱,所以有解脱的涵义。由于践行于出离解脱,所以有解脱行的涵义。巴利
16.Patāpanaṭṭhādīni aṭṭhārasa vissajjanāni ariyamaggavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Ariyamaggo hi yassuppajjati, taṃ patāpeti pabhāseti virocāpetīti patāpano, tassa patāpanaṭṭho. Tasseva atipabhassarabhāvena sayaṃ virocanaṭṭho. Kilesānaṃ visosanena santāpanaṭṭho. Amalanibbānārammaṇattā amalaṭṭho. Sampayuttamalābhāvena vimalaṭṭho. Ārammaṇakaraṇamalābhāve nimmalaṭṭho. Atha vā sotāpattimaggassa amalaṭṭho. Sakadāgāmianāgāmimaggānaṃ vimalaṭṭho. Arahattamaggassa nimmalaṭṭho. Atha vā sāvakamaggassa amalaṭṭho. Paccekabuddhamaggassa vimalaṭṭho. Sammāsambuddhamaggassa nimmalaṭṭho. Kilesavisamābhāvena samaṭṭho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.28; a. ni. 3.33; 5.200) viya kilesappahānaṭṭhena samayaṭṭho. Vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇasaṅkhātesu pañcasu vivekesu samucchedavivekattā vivekaṭṭho, vinābhāvaṭṭho. Nissaraṇaviveke nibbāne caraṇato vivekacariyaṭṭho. Pañcasu virāgesu samucchedavirāgattā virāgaṭṭho, virajjanaṭṭho. Nissaraṇavirāge nibbāne caraṇato virāgacariyaṭṭho. Pañcasu nirodhesu samucchedanirodhattā nirodhaṭṭho. Dukkhanirodhe nibbāne caraṇato nirodhacariyaṭṭho. Pariccāgapakkhandanavosaggattā vosaggaṭṭho. Ariyamaggo hi samucchedavasena kilesappahānato pariccāgavosaggo, ārammaṇakaraṇena nibbānapakkhandanato pakkhandanavosaggo ca. Vipassanā pana tadaṅgavasena kilesappahānato pariccāgavosaggo, tanninnabhāvena nibbānapakkhandanato pakkhandanavosaggo. Na so idha adhippeto. Vosaggabhāvena caraṇato vosaggacariyaṭṭho. Pañcasu vimuttīsu samucchedavimuttittā vimuttaṭṭho. Nissaraṇavimuttiyaṃ caraṇato vimutticariyaṭṭho.
在欲、精进、心、观这四种被称为神足的法中,按照每一种神足各十条、依四种神足合计四十条来解说,对“欲之义”等四十项作了说明。欲之义,就是想要去做的作用。以欲为首、开始修习的时候,它是根本的作用。因为它是与它同时生起的诸法的依靠处,所以是足的作用;也可以读作足之义。由于是神足,以主导的地位策励修行,所以是精勤的作用。在实际用功的时候,它能成就所愿,所以是成就的作用。与信相应时,是坚定信解的作用。与精进相应时,是策励的作用。与念相应时,是现起的作用。与定相应时,是不散乱的作用。与慧相应时,是观见的作用。策励之义就是精进之义。以精进为首、开始修习的时候,它是根本的作用。因为本身就是精进,所以是策励的作用。思惟等作用就是心之义。以心为首、开始修习的时候,它是根本的作用。审察的作用就是观之义。以观为首、开始修习的时候,它是根本的作用。因为本身就是观,所以是观见的作用。巴利
Chandavīriyacittavīmaṃsāsaṅkhātesu catūsu iddhipādesu ekekaiddhipādavasena dasa dasa katvā caturiddhipādavasena chandaṭṭhādīni cattālīsa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Kattukamyataṭṭho chandaṭṭho. Chandaṃ sīsaṃ katvā bhāvanārambhakāle mūlaṭṭho. Sahajātānaṃ patiṭṭhābhāvena pādaṭṭho. Padaṭṭhoti vā pāṭho. Iddhipādattā adhipatibhāvena padhānaṭṭho. Payogakāle ijjhanaṭṭho. Saddhāsampayogena adhimokkhaṭṭho. Vīriyasampayogena paggahaṭṭho. Satisampayogena upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Samādhisampayogena avikkhepaṭṭho. Paññāsampayogena dassanaṭṭho. Paggahaṭṭho vīriyaṭṭho. Vīriyaṃ sīsaṃ katvā bhāvanārambhakāle mūlaṭṭho. Sayaṃ vīriyattā paggahaṭṭho. Cintanaṭṭhādiko cittaṭṭho. Cittaṃ sīsaṃ katvā bhāvanārambhakāle mūlaṭṭho. Upaparikkhanaṭṭho vīmaṃsaṭṭho. Vīmaṃsaṃ sīsaṃ katvā bhāvanārambhakāle mūlaṭṭho. Sayaṃ vīmaṃsattā dassanaṭṭho.
17 苦的“逼迫义”等十六个解释,是依照四谛各自的真实特征来说明的。仅仅通过观察苦,就有逼迫义。通过观察苦的积聚即集,就有有为义。通过观察能消除一切烦恼热恼的清凉之道,就有热恼义。通过观察不变易法的灭,就有变易义。仅仅通过观察集,就有积聚义。通过观察由集所积聚的苦,就有因缘义。通过观察脱离联结的灭,就有联结义。通过观察作为出离的道,就有障碍义。仅仅通过观察灭,就有出离义。通过观察不离烦恼的集,就有远离义。通过观察有为的道,就有无为义。通过观察如毒般的苦,就有甘露义。仅仅通过观察道,就有出离义。通过观察不能成就涅槃的因即集,就有因义。通过观察极难见到的灭,就有见义。通过观察如贫贱之人般的苦,就显现出如高贵家族般的自在义。这样,通过观察各个圣谛以及观察其他圣谛,每一圣谛各有四种特征义,已经宣说完毕。巴利
17.Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭhotiādīni soḷasa vissajjanāni saccānaṃ tathalakkhaṇavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Dukkhadassaneneva pīḷanaṭṭho. Dukkhāyūhanasamudayadassanena saṅkhataṭṭho. Sabbakilesasantāpaharasusītalamaggadassanena santāpaṭṭho. Avipariṇāmadhammanirodhadassanena vipariṇāmaṭṭho. Samudayadassaneneva āyūhanaṭṭho. Samudayāyūhitadukkhadassanena nidānaṭṭho. Visaññogabhūtanirodhadassanena saññogaṭṭho. Niyyānabhūtamaggadassanena palibodhaṭṭho. Nirodhadassaneneva nissaraṇaṭṭho. Avivekabhūtasamudayadassanena vivekaṭṭho. Saṅkhatabhūtamaggadassanena asaṅkhataṭṭho. Visabhūtadukkhadassanena amataṭṭho. Maggadassaneneva niyyānaṭṭho. Nibbānasampattiyā ahetubhūtasamudayadassanena hetuṭṭho. Sududdasanirodhadassanena dassanaṭṭho. Kapaṇajanasadisadukkhadassanena uḷārakulasadiso ādhipateyyaṭṭho pātubhavatīti. Evaṃ taṃtaṃsaccadassanena tadaññasaccadassanena ca ekekassa saccassa cattāro cattāro lakkhaṇaṭṭhā vuttā.
这里,“真实义”等十二个解答,是按统摄一切法的十二句来显示的。“真实义”,就是如自性存在的义;“无我义”,就是没有我的义;“谛义”,就是不欺诳的义;“通达义”,就是应当通达的义;“证知义”,就是应当证知的义;“遍知义”,就是应当以知遍知、度遍知来了知的义;“法义”,就是持自性等的义;“界义”,就是空等的义;“已知义”,就是能够了知的义;“作证义”,就是应当作证的义;“触达义”,就是应当以智触达的义;“现观义”,就是应当以省察智正确现观的义,或者应当以智获得的义。因为像“贤者以义现观”这样的说法里,获得也称为现观。巴利
Tathaṭṭhādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni sabbadhammasaṅgāhakadvādasapadavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Tathaṭṭhoti yathāsabhāvaṭṭho. Anattaṭṭhoti attavirahitaṭṭho. Saccaṭṭhoti avisaṃvādanaṭṭho. Paṭivedhaṭṭhoti paṭivijjhitabbaṭṭho. Abhijānanaṭṭhoti abhijānitabbaṭṭho. Parijānanaṭṭhoti ñātatīraṇapariññāya parijānitabbaṭṭho. Dhammaṭṭhoti sabhāvadhāraṇādiattho. Dhātuṭṭhoti suññādiattho. Ñātaṭṭhoti jānituṃ sakkuṇeyyaṭṭho. Sacchikiriyaṭṭhoti sacchikātabbaṭṭho. Phassanaṭṭhoti ñāṇena phusitabbaṭṭho. Abhisamayaṭṭhoti paccavekkhaṇañāṇena abhisammāgantabbaṭṭho, ñāṇena paṭilabhitabbaṭṭho vā. Paṭilābhopi hi ‘‘atthābhisamayā dhīro’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.130) viya abhisamayoti vuccati.
18 18. “出离”等七项解答,是依近行定来说明的。“出离”,就是与欲贪相对治的无贪。“光明想”,就是在与昏沉睡眠相对治的光明相上生起的想。“不散乱”,就是与掉举相对治的定。“法决定”,就是与疑相对治的智。“智”,就是与无明相对治的智。“喜悦”,就是与不喜相对治的喜。“初禅”等八项解答,是依色界与无色界等至来说明的。不过,下文在色界等至之后,紧接着依与色界禅那的关联,说明了四梵住。巴利
18. Nekkhammādīni satta vissajjanāni upacārajjhānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Nekkhammanti kāmacchandassa paṭipakkho alobho. Ālokasaññāti thinamiddhassa paṭipakkhe ālokanimitte saññā. Avikkhepoti uddhaccassa paṭipakkho samādhi. Dhammavavatthānanti vicikicchāya paṭipakkhaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Ñāṇanti avijjāya paṭipakkhaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Pāmojjanti aratipaṭipakkhā pīti. Paṭhamajjhānādīni aṭṭha vissajjanāni rūpārūpasamāpattivasena niddiṭṭhāni. Heṭṭhā pana rūpasamāpattianantaraṃ rūpajjhānasambandhena cattāro brahmavihārā niddiṭṭhā.
无常随观等,是在出世间道的前分,按十八种大观来说明的。下面则只说了能与色等配合的七种随观,这里则全部都说了。有人问:为什么不讲聚思惟和生灭随观呢?因为依靠这两种,无常随观等才能成就,所以说了这些,那两种也就等于说了;或者,离开了无常随观等,那两种就无法生起,所以说了这些,那两种也就等于说了。坏灭随观:就是观察现在色蕴等坏灭的智,以及见到每一蕴坏灭之后,紧接着观察以该蕴为所缘的心、心所坏灭的智。衰灭随观:就是在见到现在诸蕴坏灭之后,随即类推观察过去、未来诸蕴坏灭的智。变异随观:由于心已倾向于称为坏灭的灭尽,于是见到一切过去、未来、现在诸蕴都是变异的,这就是对一切诸蕴变异相的观察智。无相随观:这样见到一切行都是变异,进而以无常来观照时,那个无常随观由于断除常相、没有常相,就称为无相随观。无愿随观:在无常随观之后生起的苦随观,由于断除对乐的希求、没有愿求,就称为无愿随观。巴利
Aniccānupassanādīni lokuttaramaggassa pubbabhāge aṭṭhārasamahāvipassanāvasena niddiṭṭhāni. Heṭṭhā pana rūpādīhi yojanūpagā satta anupassanā eva vuttā, idha pana sabbāpi vuttā. Kalāpasammasanaudayabbayānupassanā kasmā na vuttāti ce? Tāsaṃ dvinnaṃ vasena aniccānupassanādīnaṃ sijjhanato imāsu vuttāsu tā dvepi vuttāva honti, aniccānupassanādīhi vā vinā tāsaṃ dvinnaṃ appavattito imāsu vuttāsu tā dvepi vuttāva honti. Khayānupassanāti paccuppannānaṃ rūpakkhandhādīnaṃ bhaṅgadassanañāṇañca taṃtaṃkhandhabhaṅgadassanānantaraṃ tadārammaṇacittacetasikabhaṅgadassanañāṇañca. Vayānupassanāti paccuppannānaṃ khandhānaṃ bhaṅgadassanānantaraṃ tadanvayeneva atītānāgatakhandhānaṃ bhaṅgadassanañāṇaṃ. Vipariṇāmānupassanāti tasmiṃ bhaṅgasaṅkhāte nirodhe adhimuttattā, atha sabbepi atītānāgatapaccuppannā khandhā vipariṇāmavantoti sabbesaṃ vipariṇāmadassanañāṇaṃ. Animittānupassanāti evaṃ sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ vipariṇāmaṃ disvā aniccato vipassantassa aniccānupassanāva niccanimittapajahanavasena niccanimittābhāvā animittānupassanā nāma hoti. Appaṇihitānupassanāti aniccānupassanānantaraṃ pavattā dukkhānupassanāva sukhapatthanāpajahanavasena paṇidhiabhāvā appaṇihitānupassanā nāma hoti.
空随观:紧接在苦随观之后生起的,就是无我随观;它因为舍弃我执、见到诸法空无自我,所以叫空随观。增上慧法观:这样反复见到诸行的坏灭之后,以无常等角度观照的禅修者,见到诸行本身在坏灭,诸行的死灭之外没有别的什么;这是依坏灭而把握空之后生起的观。它既是增上慧,又是对诸法的观,所以叫增上慧法观。如实知见:反复见到坏灭之后,生起“诸行是可怖的”这种怖畏现起智。过患随观:依怖畏现起而生起的、见到一切生存状态等当中过患的智。依据《无碍解道》所说:“怖畏现起之慧、过患之智以及厌离,这些法意义同一,只是名称不同。”因此,说到怖畏现起和过患随观时,厌离随观在这里也已经被说到了;只是因为它从开头算起列为第四项,所以这里没有另外说。审察随观:由欲解脱智生起的、成为解脱方法的、名为审察随观的无常苦无我随观智。依据《无碍解道》所说:“欲解脱、审察随观以及行舍,这些法意义同一,只是名称不同。”因此,审察随观被说出时,欲解脱智和行舍智也就已经被说到了。转向随观:依随顺智而生起的种姓智。因为种姓智是依随顺智而成就的,所以说种姓智时,随顺智也就已经被说到了。这样,十八种大观的次第被宣说时,与巴利圣典文本是相符的。因为在根论中说道——巴利
Suññatānupassanāti dukkhānupassanānantaraṃ pavattā anattānupassanāva attābhinivesapajahanavasena attasuññatādassanato suññatānupassanā nāma hoti. Adhipaññādhammavipassanāti evaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ bhaṅgaṃ passitvā passitvā aniccādito vipassantassa saṅkhārāva bhijjanti, saṅkhārānaṃ maraṇaṃ na añño koci atthīti bhaṅgavasena suññataṃ gahetvā pavattā vipassanā. Sā hi adhipaññā ca dhammesu ca vipassanāti katvā adhipaññādhammavipassanāti vuccati. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti bhaṅgaṃ disvā disvā ‘‘sabhayā saṅkhārā’’ti pavattaṃ bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ. Ādīnavānupassanāti bhayatupaṭṭhānavasena uppannaṃ sabbabhavādīsu ādīnavadassanañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Yā ca bhayatupaṭṭhāne paññā yañca ādīnave ñāṇaṃ yā ca nibbidā, ime dhammā ekatthā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.227) vacanato bhayatupaṭṭhānādīnavānupassanāsu vuttāsu nibbidānupassanā idhāpi vuttāva hoti. Ādito catutthaṃ katvā vuttattā panidha na vuttā. Paṭisaṅkhānupassanāti muñcitukamyatāñāṇavasena uppannaṃ muñcanassa upāyakaraṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanāsaññitaṃ aniccadukkhānattānupassanāñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Yā ca muñcitukamyatā yā ca paṭisaṅkhānupassanā yā ca saṅkhārupekkhā, ime dhammā ekatthā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.227) vacanato paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya vuttāya muñcitukamyatāsaṅkhārupekkhāñāṇāni vuttāneva honti. Vivaṭṭanānupassanāti anulomañāṇavasena uppannaṃ gotrabhuñāṇaṃ. Anulomañāṇena gotrabhuñāṇassa sijjhanato gotrabhuñāṇe vutte anulomañāṇaṃ vuttameva hoti. Evañhi aṭṭhārasannaṃ mahāvipassanānaṃ paṭipāṭi vuccamānā pāḷiyā sameti. Vuttañhi indriyakathāyaṃ –
在前分阶段,以五根依初禅的方式,五根已从五根中脱离;在初禅中,以五根依第二禅的方式,五根已从五根中脱离。巴利
‘‘Pubbabhāge pañcahindriyehi paṭhamajjhānavasena pañcindriyāni nissaṭāni honti, paṭhame jhāne pañcahindriyehi dutiyajjhānavasena pañcindriyāni nissaṭāni hontī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.192) –
按照这样的方法,从最初开始,一直到阿拉汉果,诸根是依次第由低到高被宣说的。因此,十八种大观按照上面所说的顺序,与巴利圣典是相符的。不过在《清净道论》中——巴利
Ādinā nayena yāva arahattaphalā uttaruttaripaṭipāṭiyā indriyāni vuttāni. Tasmā aṭṭhārasa mahāvipassanā yathāvuttakkamena pāḷiyā yujjanti. Visuddhimagge pana –
坏灭随观:通过分解密集,以“无常即坏灭”之义,如此观见坏灭的智慧。变易随观:依色七法、非色七法等,超越各个分界而见其以其他方式转起;或见已生起者以老与死两种方式变易。如实智见:即把握有缘的名色。巴利
‘‘Khayānupassanāti ghanavinibbhogaṃ katvā aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenāti evaṃ khayaṃ passato ñāṇaṃ. Vipariṇāmānupassanāti rūpasattakaarūpasattakādivasena taṃ taṃ paricchedaṃ atikkamma aññathā pavattidassanaṃ. Uppannassa vā jarāya ceva maraṇena ca dvīhākārehi vipariṇāmadassanaṃ. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti sapaccayanāmarūpapariggaho’’ti (visuddhi. 2.850) –
已经说过了。那看起来和巴利圣典相矛盾。所谓“转向随观”,说的是行舍智和随顺智。那也看起来和巴利圣典相矛盾。因为在《行论》中说:巴利
Vuttaṃ. Taṃ tāya pāḷiyā viruddhaṃ viya dissati. Vivaṭṭanānupassanāti saṅkhārupekkhā ceva anulomañcāti vuttaṃ. Tañca pāḷiyā viruddhaṃ viya dissati. Cariyākathāyañhi –
为了无常随观而转向,是唯作无记的识行;无常随观是智行……乃至为了审察随观而转向,是唯作无记的识行;审察随观是智行。巴利
‘‘Aniccānupassanatthāya āvajjanakiriyābyākatā viññāṇacariyā. Aniccānupassanā ñāṇacariyā…pe… paṭisaṅkhānupassanatthāya āvajjanakiriyābyākatā viññāṇacariyā. Paṭisaṅkhānupassanā ñāṇacariyā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.71) –
对于每一种智,都能各自获得不同的转向,所以对每一种智都分别说明了各自的转向。但是,对于“转向随观”,并没有说明它的转向,而只是说“转向随观是智行”。如果行舍智和随顺智可以称为转向随观,那么既然这类转向可能存在,就应该为了这个目的而说明转向,然而并没有为了这个目的说明转向。至于种姓智,它没有单独的转向,因为它只生起于随顺转向的路心之中。因此,既然没有说明以转向随观为目的的转向,那么只有种姓智才恰好可以称为“转向随观”。巴利
Yassa yassa ñāṇassa visuṃ visuṃ āvajjanaṃ labbhati, tassa tassa visuṃ visuṃ āvajjanaṃ vuttaṃ. Vivaṭṭanānupassanāya pana āvajjanaṃ avatvāva ‘‘vivaṭṭanānupassanā ñāṇacariyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadi saṅkhārupekkhānulomañāṇāni vivaṭṭanānupassanā nāma siyuṃ, tadāvajjanasambhavā tadatthāya ca āvajjanaṃ vadeyya, na ca tadatthāya āvajjanaṃ vuttaṃ. Gotrabhuñāṇassa pana visuṃ āvajjanaṃ natthi anulomāvajjanavīthiyaṃyeva uppattito. Tasmā vivaṭṭanānupassanatthāya āvajjanassa avuttattā gotrabhuñāṇameva ‘‘vivaṭṭanānupassanā’’ti yujjati.
19 入流道等八种解说,是依出世间道与果来阐明的。入流,就是进入圣流;这入流本身就是道,所以叫入流道。入流的果叫入流果;等至的意思是真正达到,入流果本身就是等至,所以叫入流果等至。依结生只再来这世间一次,所以叫一来者,他的道叫一来道。一来者的果叫一来果。依结生不再来欲界,所以叫不来者,他的道叫不来道。不来者的果叫不来果。因为远离烦恼、已杀尽烦恼之敌、已断轮回之轮的辐条、没有恶行的隐藏、值得承受资具供养等,所以叫阿拉汉;阿拉汉的状态就是阿拉汉性。那是什么?就是阿拉汉果。阿拉汉的道叫阿拉汉道,阿拉汉的果就是阿拉汉果。巴利
19.Sotāpattimaggādīni aṭṭha vissajjanāni lokuttaramaggaphalavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sotassa āpajjanaṃ sotāpatti, sotāpatti eva maggo sotāpattimaggo. Sotāpattiyā phalaṃ sotāpattiphalaṃ, samāpajjīyatīti samāpatti, sotāpattiphalameva samāpatti sotāpattiphalasamāpatti. Paṭisandhivasena sakiṃyeva imaṃ lokaṃ āgacchatīti sakadāgāmī, tassa maggo sakadāgāmimaggo. Sakadāgāmissa phalaṃ sakadāgāmiphalaṃ. Paṭisandhivaseneva kāmabhavaṃ na āgacchatīti anāgāmī, tassa maggo anāgāmimaggo. Anāgāmissa phalaṃ anāgāmiphalaṃ. Kilesehi ārakattā, kilesārīnaṃ hatattā, saṃsāracakkassa arānaṃ hatattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā arahaṃ, arahato bhāvo arahattaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Arahattaphalaṃ. Arahattassa maggo arahattamaggo. Arahattameva phalaṃ arahattaphalaṃ.
“以决断之义称为信根”等,一直到“以真实之义称为谛”,一共指出了三十三种解答。这些和前文“信根具有决断之义”等三十三种解答是相同的。唯一的差别在于:那里是依诸法来说明其义,这里是依诸义来说明相应的法。“以不散乱之义称为止”等四种解答,与前文“止具有不散乱之义”等四种解答之间的差别,也应当按照同样的方式理解。巴利
‘‘Adhimokkhaṭṭhena saddhindriya’’ntiādīni ‘‘tathaṭṭhena saccā’’tipariyantāni tettiṃsa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Heṭṭhā ‘‘saddhindriyassa adhimokkhaṭṭho’’tiādīhi tettiṃsāya vissajjanehi samānāni. Kevalañhi tattha dhammehi atthā niddiṭṭhā, idha atthehi dhammā niddiṭṭhāti ayaṃ viseso. ‘‘Avikkhepaṭṭhena samatho’’tiādīnañca catunnaṃ vissajjanānaṃ heṭṭhā ‘‘samathassa avikkhepaṭṭho’’tiādīnañca catunnaṃ vissajjanānaṃ viseso vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
“以防护之义”等八种解答,是依戒、定等直到力与究竟法的次第来说明的。戒清净,是指极其清净的巴帝摩卡防护等四种戒,因为它能洗净破戒之垢。心清净,是指近行定和八种等至。这里以心为首要而说定,因为它能净除心之垢,所以是心清净。见清净,是指如实照见名色,因为它能净除有身见之垢,所以是见清净。“以解脱之义”,是指依彼分而解脱随烦恼,以及于所缘决定信解。这就是彼分解脱。“以通达之义”而称为明:宿住随念智,以通达过去生的意义而称为明;天眼智,以通达众生生死流转的意义而称为明;漏尽智,以通达诸谛的意义而称为明。“以通达之义”,就是了知的意思。“以遍舍之义”而称为解脱:凡有所遍舍,就从那里面解脱出来,所以是果解脱。“以正断之义”而称为尽智:以断除烦恼之义,就是在能断尽烦恼的圣道中的智。“以寂止之义”而称为无生智:因为被称为道的作用的加行已经寂止,依结生而不再生起,对于各各道所断的烦恼达到无生的究竟时所生起的圣果智。巴利
Saṃvaraṭṭhenātiādīni aṭṭha vissajjanāni sīlādibalapariyosānadhammavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sīlavisuddhīti suparisuddhapātimokkhasaṃvarādicatubbidhaṃ sīlaṃ dussīlyamalavisodhanato. Cittavisuddhīti saupacārā aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Cittasīsena hettha samādhi vutto. So cittamalavisodhanato cittavisuddhi. Diṭṭhivisuddhīti nāmarūpānaṃ yathāsabhāvadassanaṃ sattadiṭṭhimalavisodhanato diṭṭhivisuddhi. Muttaṭṭhenāti tadaṅgavasena upakkilesato vimuttaṭṭhena ārammaṇe ca adhimuttaṭṭhena. Vimokkhoti tadaṅgavimokkho. Paṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjāti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ purimabhavapaṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjā, dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ sattānaṃ cutūpapātapaṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjā, āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ saccapaṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjā. Paṭivedhaṭṭhenāti jānanaṭṭhena. Pariccāgaṭṭhena vimuttīti yaṃ yaṃ pariccattaṃ, tato tato vimuttattā phalavimutti. Samucchedaṭṭhena khaye ñāṇanti kilesasamucchindanatthena kilesakkhayakare ariyamagge ñāṇaṃ. Paṭippassaddhaṭṭhena anuppāde ñāṇanti maggakiccasaṅkhātapayogapaṭippassaddhattā paṭisandhivasena anuppādabhūte taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesānaṃ anuppādapariyosāne uppanne ariyaphale ñāṇaṃ.
20 “欲以根义”等九种解答,是依圣道的初、中、后三个阶段来说明的。“欲以根义”:对善法生起想要去做的欲,因为它是修行和成就的根本,所以从根的意义上称为欲。“作意以等起义”:如理作意能等起一切善法,所以从等起的意义上称为作意。“触以和合义”:因为在渴爱中,受是特别主要的原因;而渴爱被断除时,特别要通过遍知受才能断除;对于那个受,触正是主要的原因;当触被遍知时,受也就被遍知了。因此,在七种应遍知的事中,触被最先说出。而且,触是依它自身的因——也就是所谓三事和合——而被说明的,并且被称为“以三事和合为现起”,所以应从和合的意义上遍知它。不过有些人说:“智触才是触。”巴利
20.Chando mūlaṭṭhenātiādīni nava vissajjanāni ariyamaggassa ādimajjhapariyosānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Chando mūlaṭṭhenāti kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ kattukamyatāchando paṭipattiyā ca nipphattiyā ca mūlattā mūlaṭṭhena. Manasikāro samuṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti yonisomanasikāro sabbakusaladhamme samuṭṭhāpetīti samuṭṭhānaṭṭhena. Phasso samodhānaṭṭhenāti yasmā taṇhāya visesena vedanā padhānakāraṇaṃ, taṇhā ca pahīyamānā visesena vedanāya pariññātāya pahīyati, tassā ca vedanāya phassova padhānakāraṇaṃ, tasmiṃ pariññāte vedanā pariññātā hoti, tasmā sattasu abhiññeyyavatthūsu phasso paṭhamaṃ vutto. So ca tikasannipātasaṅkhātassa attano kāraṇassa vasena paveditattā ‘‘tikasannipātapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti vuttattā samodhānaṭṭhena abhiññeyyo. Keci pana ‘‘ñāṇaphasso phasso’’ti vadanti.
受能随心所欲地驱使心和心所,并汇入、进入它们之中,或者说,受直接进入心相续,所以受以“汇入”的意义而应当被遍知。不过有些人说:“一切应当被遍知的法都汇入受中;当受被遍知时,一切渴爱的立足处也就被遍知了。这是什么原因呢?因为一切渴爱都以受为条件。所以,受以汇入的意义而应当被遍知。”又因为定能像屋顶的尖梁收束所有椽子那样,把心和心所聚合在一起,在一切善法中最为首要、最为尊上,所以说定以“首要”的意义而应当被遍知。也有写成“以最上意义”的版本。又因为在修习止观的人那里,念是让所缘显现出来的主导力量;当念使所缘现前时,一切善法都能各自完成自己的作用,所以说念以“主导”的意义而应当被遍知。慧以“更超越”的意义而应当被遍知,也就是说,圣道之慧相对于那些善法,以更超越、最殊胜的意义而应当被遍知。或者也可以说,因为它能从那些烦恼中超越出去,从轮回的循环中超越出去,所以叫“彼更超越”,它的含义就是“更超越的意义”。也有写成“以彼更超越意义”的版本,意思是从那之上更超越。解脱以“坚实”的意义而应当被遍知:果位上的解脱因为不退失而坚固,所以是坚实的;又因为除了它之外,再没有别的什么需要去寻求,所以它也是坚实的。那解脱就以这种“坚实”的意义而应当被遍知。涅槃是“不死的归宿”:它没有被称为死亡的那种死,所以是不死;又因为它是烦恼之毒的对治法,所以也叫不死;又因为它是众生亲证真理的依托之处,所以叫归宿;又因为它是轮回之苦的止息,所以叫寂灭;在这里没有被称为渴爱的“织网”,所以叫涅槃。涅槃因为是整个教法的终点,所以以“终极”的意义而应当被遍知。如此,在这个关于应当被遍知者的解释中,一共有了七千七百四十个解答。巴利
Yasmā pana vedanā cittacetasike attano vase vattāpayamānā tattha samosarati pavisati, cittasantānameva vā pavisati, tasmā samosaraṇaṭṭhena abhiññeyyāti vuttā. Keci pana ‘‘sabbānipi pariññeyyāni vedanāsu samosaranti, vedanāsu pariññātāsu sabbaṃ taṇhāvatthu pariññātaṃ hoti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Vedanāpaccayā hi sabbāpi taṇhā. Tasmā vedanā samosaraṇaṭṭhena abhiññeyyā’’ti vadanti. Yasmā sabbagopānasīnaṃ ābandhanato kūṭāgārakaṇṇikā viya cittacetasikānaṃ sampiṇḍanato samādhi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pamukho hoti jeṭṭhako, tasmā samādhi pamukhaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ. Pāmukhaṭṭhenātipi pāṭho. Yasmā samathavipassanaṃ bhāventassa ārammaṇūpaṭṭhānādhipati hoti sati, satiyā upaṭṭhite ārammaṇe sabbepi kusalā dhammā sakaṃ sakaṃ kiccaṃ sādhenti, tasmā sati ādhipateyyaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ. Paññā taduttaraṭṭhenāti ariyamaggapaññā tesaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uttaraṭṭhena seṭṭhaṭṭhena abhiññeyyā. Atha vā tato kilesehi, saṃsāravaṭṭato vā uttarati samatikkamatīti taduttarā, tassā attho taduttaraṭṭho. Tena taduttaraṭṭhena. Tatuttaraṭṭhenātipi pāṭho, tato uttaraṭṭhenāti attho. Vimutti sāraṭṭhenāti phalavimutti aparihānivasena thirattā sāro, taṃ atikkamitvā aññassa pariyesitabbassa abhāvatopi sāro. Sā vimutti tena sāraṭṭhena abhiññeyyā. Amatogadhaṃ nibbānanti natthi etassa maraṇasaṅkhātaṃ matanti amataṃ, kilesavisapaṭipakkhattā agadantipi amataṃ , sacchikiriyāya sattānaṃ patiṭṭhābhūtanti ogadhaṃ, saṃsāradukkhasantibhūtattā nibbutanti nibbānaṃ, natthettha taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ vānantipi nibbānaṃ. Taṃ sāsanassa niṭṭhābhūtattā pariyosānaṭṭhena abhiññeyyaṃ. Evaṃ imasmiṃ abhiññeyyaniddese sattasahassāni sattasatāni cattālīsañca vissajjanāni honti.
现在,针对刚才已经这样说明的那些法,作出总结:“凡是已被遍知的法,这些法就成为已知的。”意思是让心面向它们,使它们成为已知的。以“已被如此了知”这一含义来说,称为智,也就是对前面所说的那类法,以了知的作用来说,是智。以“了知”这一含义来说,称为慧,也就是从种种方面去了知的作用,是慧。从“因此说”等语句开始,是把所问的各个问题归结起来显示出来。由于这个原因,说:“‘这些法应当遍知’即是专注听闻,了知它们就是慧,是闻所成智。”这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Idāni tesaṃ evaṃ niddiṭṭhānaṃ dhammānaṃ ‘‘ye ye dhammā abhiññātā, te te dhammā ñātā hontī’’ti nigamanaṃ karoti, tassa abhimukhaṃ katvā ñātā hontīti adhippāyo. Taṃñātaṭṭhena ñāṇanti tesaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ dhammānaṃ jānanaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ. Pajānanaṭṭhena paññāti pakārato jānanaṭṭhena paññā. Tena vuccatītiādito pucchitapucchā nigametvā dassitā. Tena kāraṇena ‘‘ime dhammā abhiññeyyāti sotāvadhānaṃ, taṃpajānanā paññā sutamaye ñāṇa’’nti vuccatīti atthoti.
应遍知解说的注释巴利
Pariññeyyaniddesavaṇṇanā
21 在“应遍知”的解说中,虽然“遍知”这个词已经包含了知遍知、审察遍知、断遍知这三种遍知,但因为在前面“应了知”的部分已经讲了知遍知,后面“应断”的部分会讲断遍知,所以这里指的只是审察遍知。“有漏、有取的触”:说的是作为漏和取的缘、属于三地(欲界、色界、无色界)的触。因为它与以自己为所缘而生起的那些漏共同存在,所以叫“有漏”;它成为所缘之后,通过和取的联结而帮助诸取生起,所以叫“有取”。当触被审察遍知所遍知时,通过触这个入口,其余的非色法也随它一起被遍知,色法也随之被遍知,因此只举触来代表。其余的诸法也应当根据各自的情况这样来理解。巴利
21. Pariññeyyaniddese kiñcāpi pariññāsaddena ñātapariññā, tīraṇapariññā, pahānapariññāti tisso pariññā saṅgahitā. Heṭṭhā ‘‘abhiññeyyā’’ti ñātapariññāya vuttattā upari ‘‘pahātabbā’’ti pahānapariññāya vuttattā tīraṇapariññāva idha adhippetā. Phasso sāsavo upādāniyoti āsavānañceva upādānānañca paccayabhūto tebhūmakaphasso. Sopi hi attānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānehi saha āsavehīti sāsavo, ārammaṇabhāvaṃ upagantvā upādānasambandhanena upādānānaṃ hitoti upādāniyo. Yasmā phasse tīraṇapariññāya pariññāte phassamukhena sesāpi arūpadhammā tadanusārena ca rūpadhammā pariññāyanti, tasmā ekova phasso vutto. Evaṃ sesesupi yathāyogaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
名:指四个无色蕴以及涅槃。色:指四大种,以及四大种所造的二十四种所造色。四个蕴因为“朝向、倾向”的含义而称为名,因为它们面向所缘而倾向。其实一切法都以“倾向”的含义而称为名:因为四个蕴在所缘上互相倾向,涅槃则作为所缘增上缘,使自身中无过失的法倾向。色则是以相续的方式,被冷热等破坏,所以叫色。“被破坏”就是被扰动、动摇的意思。因为以相续变异的方式,能被冷热等所触及损害的法聚,就称为色。不过在这里,“名”只指世间的,而“色”则完全是指世间的。巴利
Nāmanti cattāro khandhā arūpino nibbānañca. Rūpanti cattāri ca mahābhūtāni catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpāni catuvīsati. Cattāro khandhā namanaṭṭhena nāmaṃ. Te hi ārammaṇābhimukhā namanti. Sabbampi nāmanaṭṭhena nāmaṃ. Cattāro hi khandhā ārammaṇe aññamaññaṃ nāmenti, nibbānaṃ ārammaṇādhipatipaccayatāya attani anavajjadhamme nāmeti. Santativasena sītādīhi ruppanaṭṭhena rūpaṃ. Ruppanaṭṭhenāti kuppanaṭṭhena. Santativipariṇāmavasena hi sītādīhi ghaṭṭanīyaṃ dhammajātaṃ rūpanti vuccati. Idha pana nāmanti lokikameva adhippetaṃ, rūpaṃ pana ekantena lokikameva.
三种受:乐受、苦受、不苦不乐受。它们只是世间的。食就是缘。因为缘能带来自己的果,所以叫食。食有四种:段食、触食、意思食、识食。段食,因为要捏成团才能吃,所以叫段食;因为可以吞进去,所以叫食。这是指以饭团、粥等为载体的营养。因为它能带来以营养为第八法的色法,所以叫食。触食,眼触等六种触能带来三种受,所以叫食。意思食,是意的思,不是有情的思,所以叫意思食,就像说“心一境性”那样;或者说,与意相应的思叫意思食,就像说“骏马车”那样。这是指三地所摄的善和不善的思。因为它能带来三有,所以叫食。识食,指十九种结生识。因为它能带来结生的名色,所以叫食。取蕴,指取所行境的蕴,这里应理解为省略了中间的词。或者,由取所生的蕴叫取蕴,就像草火、糠火那样。或者,被取所执持的蕴叫取蕴,就像国王的人那样。或者,以取为因而生的蕴叫取蕴,就像花树、果树那样。取有四种:欲取、见取、戒禁取、我语取。从义理上说,强烈的执取就是取。五取蕴是:色取蕴、受取蕴、想取蕴、行取蕴、识取蕴。巴利
Tisso vedanāti sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Tā lokikā eva. Āhārāti paccayā. Paccayā hi attano phalaṃ āharantīti āhārā. Kabaḷīkāro āhāro phassāhāro manosañcetanāhāro viññāṇāhāroti cattāro. Vatthuvasena kabaḷīkātabbattā kabaḷīkāro , ajjhoharitabbattā āhāro. Odanakummāsādivatthukāya ojāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sā hi ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharatīti āhāro. Cakkhusamphassādiko chabbidho phasso tisso vedanā āharatīti āhāro. Manaso sañcetanā, na sattassāti manosañcetanā yathā cittekaggatā. Manasā vā sampayuttā sañcetanā manosañcetanā yathā ājaññaratho. Tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā. Sā hi tayo bhave āharatīti āhāro. Viññāṇanti ekūnavīsatibhedaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Tañhi paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ āharatīti āhāro. Upādānakkhandhāti upādānagocarā khandhā, majjhapadalopo daṭṭhabbo. Upādānasambhūtā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā yathā tiṇaggi thusaggi. Upādānavidheyyā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā yathā rājapuriso. Upādānappabhavā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā yathā puppharukkho phalarukkho. Upādānāni pana kāmupādānaṃ diṭṭhupādānaṃ sīlabbatupādānaṃ attavādupādānanti cattāri. Atthato pana bhusaṃ ādānanti upādānaṃ. Rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandhoti pañca.
六内处:眼处、耳处、鼻处、舌处、身处、意处。巴利
Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanānīti cakkhāyatanaṃ, sotāyatanaṃ, ghānāyatanaṃ, jivhāyatanaṃ, kāyāyatanaṃ, manāyatanaṃ.
七识住是哪七种呢?世尊曾经这样说过:巴利
Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti katamā satta? Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,有这样一类众生,他们身体各不相同,感知也各不相同。比如人类,还有一些天人和一些堕入恶道的众生。这是第一种识住。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave (a. ni. 7.44; dī. ni. 3.332), sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino. Seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā. Ayaṃ paṭhamā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
诸比丘,有一类众生身体各异、想同一,例如初化生的梵众天。这是第二种识住。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino. Seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā. Ayaṃ dutiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
诸比丘,有一类有情身同而想异,譬如光音天。这是第三识住。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino. Seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā. Ayaṃ tatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有些众生的身体是同一种,想也是同一种,比如遍净天的天人。这就是第四种识住。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino. Seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Ayaṃ catutthā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了色想,灭掉了有对想,不再作意种种想,他们以“虚空无边”进入空无边处。这就是第五个识住。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ pañcamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了空无边处,以“识是无边的”这一认知,投生到识无边处。这就是第六种识住。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ chaṭṭhā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了识无边处,达到“什么都没有”的无所有处。这是第七种识住。比丘们,以上就是七种识住。巴利
‘‘Santi , bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ sattamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti. Imā kho, bhikkhave, satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo’’ti (a. ni. 7.44; dī. ni. 3.332).
关于“识住”,指的是结生识的安住处,也就是有识的诸蕴。其中,“譬如”是表示举例的虚词。说“人类”,是因为在无量的轮围世界中,无量人类的肤色、相貌等没有两个是完全相同的。即使有些人在肤色或相貌上相似,他们在看、顾视等行为上也各不相同,所以称为“身异”。而他们的结生想,有的是三因,有的是二因,也有无因的,所以称为“想异”。说“一部分天人”,指六欲界天人。在他们当中,有些人的身体是青色的,有些是黄色等;而他们的想,有的是三因,有的是二因,没有无因的。说“一部分堕恶趣者”,指脱离四恶趣的众生,比如富那婆薮母夜叉、毕央伽罗母、普萨弥多、达摩瞿多等,以及其他在宫殿中受报的饿鬼。这些众生的身体,在肤色上有白、黑、黄褐、黑褐、金色等差别,在体型上有瘦、胖、短、长等差别,所以身各不同;和人类一样,他们的想也有三因、二因、无因的差别。但他们不像天人那样有大威德,而是像可怜的人类一样,威德微小,难以得到食物和衣服,备受痛苦煎熬。其中一些在黑半月受苦,在白半月享乐,正因为他们从安乐聚集之处堕落,所以称为“堕恶趣者”。其中那些三因的,也能证悟法理,就像毕央伽罗母等一样。巴利
Viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti paṭisandhiviññāṇassa ṭhānāni saviññāṇakā khandhā eva. Tattha seyyathāpīti nidassanatthe nipāto. Manussāti aparimāṇesupi cakkavāḷesu aparimāṇānaṃ manussānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena dvepi ekasadisā natthi. Yepi vaṇṇena vā saṇṭhānena vā sadisā honti, tepi ālokitavilokitādīhi visadisāva honti, tasmā nānattakāyāti vuttā. Paṭisandhisaññā pana nesaṃ tihetukāpi duhetukāpi ahetukāpi hoti, tasmā nānattasaññinoti vuttā. Ekacce ca devāti cha kāmāvacaradevā. Tesu hi kesañci kāyo nīlo hoti, kesañci pītakādivaṇṇo, saññā pana nesaṃ tihetukāpi duhetukāpi hoti, ahetukā na hoti. Ekacce ca vinipātikāti catuapāyavinimuttā punabbasumātā yakkhinī, piyaṅkaramātā, phussamittā, dhammaguttāti evamādayo aññe ca vemānikā petā. Etesañhi odātakāḷamaṅguracchavisāmavaṇṇādivasena ceva kisathūlarassadīghavasena ca kāyo nānā hoti, manussānaṃ viya tihetukadvihetukāhetukavasena saññāpi. Te pana devā viya na mahesakkhā, kapaṇamanussā viya appesakkhā dullabhaghāsacchādanā dukkhapīḷitā viharanti. Ekacce kāḷapakkhe dukkhitā juṇhapakkhe sukhitā honti, tasmā sukhasamussayato vinipatitattā vinipātikāti vuttā. Ye panettha tihetukā, tesaṃ dhammābhisamayopi hoti piyaṅkaramātādīnaṃ viya.
梵身天,就是梵众天、梵辅天和大梵天。初禅所生,是说他们全都是依靠初禅而投生的。不过,梵众天是靠下品初禅投生,梵辅天是靠中品初禅投生,他们的身体也比前者更广大;大梵天是靠上品初禅投生,身体又更加广大。这样一来,他们的身体各不相同,而想都同属于初禅,所以称为身异想一。四恶趣里的众生也是这样。地狱里,有些众生的身体有一由旬,有些半由旬,有些三由旬,而提婆达多的身体则有一百由旬;畜生里,有些小,有些大;饿鬼界里,有些身高六十肘,有些八十肘,有些金色,有些丑陋;黑耳阿修罗也是这样。此外,这里还有一种叫长背的饿鬼,身体甚至长达六十由旬。不过,他们所有的想都是不善异熟无因的。因此,恶趣众生也归入身异想一这一类。巴利
Brahmakāyikāti brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmāno. Paṭhamābhinibbattāti te sabbepi paṭhamajjhānena nibbattā. Brahmapārisajjā pana parittena, brahmapurohitā majjhimena, kāyo ca tesaṃ vipphārikataro hoti. Mahābrahmāno paṇītena, kāyo pana nesaṃ ativipphārikataro hoti. Iti te kāyassa nānattā, paṭhamajjhānavasena saññāya ekattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññinoti vuttā. Yathā ca te, evaṃ catūsu apāyesu sattā. Nirayesu hi kesañci gāvutaṃ, kesañci aḍḍhayojanaṃ , kesañci tigāvutaṃ attabhāvo hoti, devadattassa pana yojanasatiko jāto. Tiracchānesupi keci khuddakā honti, keci mahantā. Pettivisayesupi keci saṭṭhihatthā keci asītihatthā honti keci suvaṇṇā keci dubbaṇṇā. Tathā kālakañcikā asurā. Apicettha dīghapiṭṭhikā petā nāma saṭṭhiyojanikāpi honti, saññā pana sabbesampi akusalavipākāhetukāva hoti. Iti apāyikāpi ‘‘nānattakāyā ekattasaññino’’ti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti.
光音天:就像从火把的火焰中,火光一段一段地断裂、掉落、流散开来一样,这些天人的身体也一段一段地放出光明、流散开来,所以叫光音天。在五禅那的分类里,修习第二禅和第三禅的下品而往生的,叫少光天;修习中品而往生的,叫无量光天;修习上品而往生的,叫光音天。这里则是按最高标准来统摄,把所有这些天人都包括进来了。因为他们所有的天人身体放光都是同一种方式,但想则有唯无寻有伺和无寻无伺等种种差别。巴利
Ābhassarāti daṇḍaukkāya acci viya etesaṃ sarīrato ābhā chijjitvā chijjitvā patantī viya sarati visaratīti ābhassarā. Tesu pañcakanaye dutiyatatiyajjhānadvayaṃ parittaṃ bhāvetvā uppannā parittābhā nāma honti, majjhimaṃ bhāvetvā uppannā appamāṇābhā nāma honti, paṇītaṃ bhāvetvā uppannā ābhassarā nāma honti. Idha pana ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sabbeva te gahitā. Sabbesañhi tesaṃ kāyo ekavipphārova hoti, saññā pana avitakkavicāramattā ca avitakkaavicārā cāti nānā.
遍净天:就是被清净的光辉所遍满、散布,整个身体的光色纯净一体,这是它的意思。因为他们的光明不像光音天那样一段一段地断续放出。在四禅那的分类里属于第三禅那,在五禅那的分类里属于第四禅那。依下品、中品、上品禅那的力量,往生后分别成为少净天、无量净天、遍净天。应当知道,这些天众全都是同一类身体,而且因为第四禅那之想而成为同一想者。广果天也属于第四识住。无想有情天因为没有识,所以不归入识住,而归入众生居。巴利
Subhakiṇhāti subhena vokiṇṇā vikiṇṇā, subhena sarīrappabhāvaṇṇena ekagghanāti attho. Etesañhi na ābhassarānaṃ viya chijjitvā chijjitvā pabhā gacchatīti. Catukkanaye tatiyassa, pañcakanaye catutthassa parittamajjhimapaṇītassa jhānassavasena parittasubhaappamāṇasubhasubhakiṇhā nāma hutvā nibbattanti. Iti sabbepi te ekattakāyā ceva catutthajjhānasaññāya ekattasaññino cāti veditabbā. Vehapphalāpi catutthaviññāṇaṭṭhitimeva bhajanti. Asaññasattā viññāṇābhāvā ettha saṅgahaṃ na gacchanti, sattāvāsesu gacchanti.
净居天的众生站在还灭这一边,并不是任何时候都存在。即使经过百千劫、无数劫,在无佛出世的世间里,他们也不会出生;只有在十六千劫之中有佛出世时,他们才出生。他们就像转法轮世尊的临时营地一样。因此,他们既不归入识住,也不归入众生居。不过,大西瓦长老引用经文说:“舍利弗,这个众生居实在不容易得到,在这漫长的时间里,我从未住过,除了净居天的诸天之外。”依据这段经文,净居天的众生也归入第四识住和第四众生居。由于这个说法无法被反驳,所以经典是认可它的。巴利
Suddhāvāsā vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhitā na sabbakālikā, kappasatasahassampi asaṅkhyeyampi buddhasuññe loke na uppajjanti, soḷasakappasahassabbhantare buddhesu uppannesuyeva uppajjanti, dhammacakkappavattassa bhagavato khandhāvārasadisā honti, tasmā neva viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ, na ca sattāvāsaṃ bhajanti. Mahāsīvatthero pana – ‘‘na kho pana so, sāriputta, sattāvāso sulabharūpo, yo mayā anāvutthapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā aññatra suddhāvāsehi devehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.160) iminā suttena suddhāvāsāpi catutthaṃ viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ catutthaṃ sattāvāsañca bhajantīti vadati, taṃ appaṭibāhitattā suttassa anuññātaṃ.
非想非非想处也跟想一样,因为识同样极其微细,所以既不能说有识、也不能说无识,因此在诸识住中没有提到它。巴利
Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ yatheva saññāya, evaṃ viññāṇassāpi sukhumattā nevaviññāṇaṃ nāviññāṇaṃ, tasmā viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu na vuttaṃ.
八种世间法,就是:得利、失利、有名声、没名声、被讥嫌、被称赞、快乐、痛苦。这八种法在世间运行的过程中从不停息,是世间之法,所以叫世间法。没有任何众生能摆脱它们,连诸佛也一样。正如经中所说:巴利
Aṭṭha lokadhammāti lābho, alābho, yaso, ayaso, nindā, pasaṃsā, sukhaṃ, dukkhanti ime aṭṭha lokappavattiyā sati anuparamadhammakattā lokassa dhammāti lokadhammā. Etehi mutto satto nāma natthi, buddhānampi hontiyeva. Yathāha –
比丘们,有这八种世间法跟着世间转,世间也跟着这八种世间法转。是哪八种呢?得与失、誉与毁、讥与赞、乐与苦。比丘们,就是这八种世间法跟着世间转,世间也跟着这八种世间法转。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, lokadhammā lokaṃ anuparivattanti, loko ca aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattati. Katame aṭṭha? Lābho ca alābho ca yaso ca ayaso ca nindā ca pasaṃsā ca sukhañca dukkhañca. Ime kho, bhikkhave, aṭṭha lokadhammā lokaṃ anuparivattanti, loko ca ime aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattatī’’ti (a. ni. 8.6).
在这里,“随转”的意思是跟随、不舍弃,也就是不随世间而退转。“利得”指出家人的衣钵等物,在家人则指钱财粮食等收入。当这些利得得不到时,利得就成了“衰”。如果只说“没有利得就是衰”,那在道理上就说不通,也就无法被正确了知。“誉”指眷属围绕。当这种誉得不到时,誉就成了“毁”。“讥”是指说人的坏话。“赞”是指说人的好话。“乐”指欲界众生身心两方面的乐受。“苦”指凡夫、入流者和一来者身心两方面的苦受;对不来者和阿拉汉来说,则只是身体上的苦受。巴利
Tattha anuparivattantīti anubandhanti nappajahanti, lokato na nivattantīti attho. Lābhoti pabbajitassa cīvarādi, gahaṭṭhassa dhanadhaññādi lābho. Soyeva alabbhamāno lābho alābho. Na lābho alābhoti vuccamāne atthābhāvāpattito pariññeyyo na siyā. Yasoti parivāro. Soyeva alabbhamānā yaso ayaso. Nindāti avaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ. Pasaṃsāti vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ. Sukhanti kāmāvacarānaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ. Dukkhanti puthujjanasotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ, anāgāmiarahantānaṃ kāyikameva.
九众生居,就是众生的住处,也就是居住的地方。不过,这些其实就是前面所说的那些蕴。是哪九种呢?因为世尊这样说过——巴利
Navasattāvāsāti sattānaṃ āvāsā, vasanaṭṭhānānīti attho. Tāni pana tathāpakāsitā khandhā eva. Katame nava? Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,有九种众生居。是哪九种呢?比丘们,有些众生身不同、想也不同,比如人类、某些天人和某些堕入恶趣的众生。这是第一种众生居。巴利
‘‘Navayime, bhikkhave (a. ni. 9.24; dī. ni. 3.341), sattāvāsā. Katame nava? Santi, bhikkhave, sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā. Ayaṃ paṭhamo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生身体各不相同,但想法一致,比如刚投生到梵身天的那些梵天。这就是第二种众生居。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā. Ayaṃ dutiyo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生身体是同一种,但想各不相同,比如光音天的天人。这是第三种众生居处。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā. Ayaṃ tatiyo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生身体是同一种,想也是同一种,比如遍净天的天人。这是第四种众生居住的地方。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Ayaṃ catuttho sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生没有想,也没有感受,比如无想有情天的天神。这是第五种众生居所。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā asaññino appaṭisaṃvedino, seyyathāpi devā asaññasattā. Ayaṃ pañcamo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了色想,灭掉了有对想,不再作意种种想,他们安住在“虚空无边”的空无边处。这是第六种众生居所。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ chaṭṭho sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了空无边处,达到“识是无边”的识无边处。这是第七种众生居所。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ sattamo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了识无边处,投生到“什么都没有”的无所有处。这是第八种众生居所。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ aṭṭhamo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了无所有处,投生到非想非非想处。这是第九种众生的居处。比丘们,以上就是九种众生的居处。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpagā . Ayaṃ navamo sattāvāso. Ime kho, bhikkhave, nava sattāvāsā’’ti (a. ni. 9.24; dī. ni. 3.341).
十处就是眼处、色处、耳处、声处、鼻处、香处、舌处、味处、身处、触处,这样一共十种。意处和法处因为和出世间法混在一起,所以这里没有收进来。对这十处的解释,是依观的力量来说审察遍知。而在“比丘们,一切应当被遍知”等说法里,则是依证得的力量来说审察遍知——也就是通过证得未知当知根等三根,证得作为灭尽行道作证修习处的法,证得它们通达之处,证得对苦等出离、不生起等十五种法,证得摄益等三十一种,证得更上通达等三种,证得八支圣道,证得“加行止息之义”等两种,证得无为处的出起处等两种,证得出离处的随觉处等三种,证得随觉处等三种,证得随觉资粮等三种,证得照耀处等四种,证得光耀处等十八种,证得转向随观等九种,证得尽智和无生智中的慧解脱与涅槃。其余的法,应当知道是随各自情况,或者依观的力量、或者依证得的力量来说审察遍知。巴利
Dasāyatanānīti cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ sotāyatanaṃ saddāyatanaṃ ghānāyatanaṃ gandhāyatanaṃ jivhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ kāyāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatananti evaṃ dasa. Manāyatanadhammāyatanāni pana lokuttaramissakattā na gahitāni. Imesu dasasu vissajjanesu vipassanāvasena tīraṇapariññā vuttā, ‘‘sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, pariññeyya’’ntiādīsu pana anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, nirodhapaṭipadānaṃ sacchikiriyābhāvanaṭṭhānaṃ tesaṃyeva paṭivedhaṭṭhānaṃ dukkhādīnaṃ nissaraṇassa anuppādādīnaṃ pañcadasannaṃ, pariggahaṭṭhādīnaṃ ekatiṃsāya, uttaripaṭivedhaṭṭhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, maggaṅgānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ, ‘‘payogānaṃ paṭippassaddhaṭṭho’’tiādīnaṃ dvinnaṃ, asaṅkhataṭṭhassa vuṭṭhānaṭṭhādīnaṃ dvinnaṃ, niyyānaṭṭhassa anubujjhanaṭṭhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, anubodhanaṭṭhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, anubodhapakkhiyādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, ujjotanaṭṭhādīnaṃ catunnaṃ, patāpanaṭṭhādīnaṃ aṭṭhārasannaṃ, vivaṭṭanānupassanādīnaṃ navannaṃ, khayeñāṇaanuppādeñāṇānaṃ paññāvimuttinibbānānanti imesaṃ dhammānaṃ paṭilābhavasena tīraṇapariññā vuttā, sesānaṃ yathāyogaṃ vipassanāvasena ca paṭilābhavasena ca tīraṇapariññā vuttāti veditabbā.
为了证得哪些法而精进努力,那些法就会被证得。这样一来,那些法既已被遍知,也已被审察完毕。因此,这是从作用完成的角度来说明审察遍知。因为作用一旦完成,那些法就已经被证得了。不过有些人说:“不适用于观的法属于知遍知。”这种说法并不妥当,因为知遍知是就“应被证知”这一点来说的。所谓“既已被遍知,也已被审察完毕”,意思是:那些已被证得的法,才叫作被遍知、被审察完毕。这样,就是从作用完成的角度说明了遍知的含义。巴利
Yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ paṭilābhatthāya vāyamantassa, te te dhammā paṭiladdhā honti. Evaṃ te dhammā pariññātā ceva honti tīritā cāti hi kiccasamāpanaṭṭhena tīraṇapariññā vuttā. Kicce hi samāpite te dhammā paṭiladdhā hontīti. Keci pana ‘‘avipassanūpagānaṃ ñātapariññā’’ti vadanti. Abhiññeyyena ñātapariññāya vuttattā taṃ na sundaraṃ. Pariññātā ceva honti tīritā cāti te paṭiladdhā eva dhammā pariññātā ca nāma honti, tīritā ca nāmāti attho. Evaṃ kiccasamāpanatthavasena pariññātattho vutto hoti.
22 现在,为了把同一个道理依照每一种法的获取方式逐一配起来说明,并在最后作总结,所以开始讲“出离”等内容。这一切都应该按照前面已经说过的来理解。巴利
22. Idāni tamevatthaṃ ekekadhamme paṭilābhavasena yojetvā ante ca nigametvā dassetuṃ nekkhammantiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ pubbe vuttānusāreneva veditabbanti.
应断分别的注释巴利
Pahātabbaniddesavaṇṇanā
23 在“应断”的解释中,“我慢”是指在色等五种取蕴上生起的“我是”之慢。当这个我慢被断除时,就证得了阿罗汉果。虽然在色贪等烦恼还存在时,也不提其余那些烦恼,而只说我慢,应当知道这是因为它与邪见相似,而且它的相状粗重。“无明”,依经教的方式,是指对苦等四事无知;依阿毗达摩的方式,则连同前际等一起,共为八事。对此,确实曾这样说——巴利
23. Pahātabbaniddese asmimānoti rūpādīsu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu asmīti māno. Tasmiñhi pahīne arahattaṃ pattaṃ hoti. Rūparāgādīsu vijjamānesupi sesāni avatvā asmimānasseva vacanaṃ diṭṭhipatirūpakattena tassa oḷārikattāti veditabbaṃ. Avijjāti suttantapariyāyena dukkhādīsu catūsu ṭhānesu aññāṇaṃ, abhidhammapariyāyena pubbantādīhi saddhiṃ aṭṭhasu. Vuttañhetaṃ –
在这里,什么是无明?对苦无知,对苦的集起无知,对苦的灭尽无知,对通往苦灭尽的道路无知;对前际无知,对后际无知,对前后际无知;对依此缘性而缘起的诸法无知。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā avijjā? Dukkhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya aññāṇaṃ, pubbante aññāṇaṃ, aparante aññāṇaṃ, pubbantāparante aññāṇaṃ, idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu aññāṇa’’nti (dha. sa. 1106; vibha. 226).
“有爱”就是对欲有等各类生命存在状态的渴求。正如经中所说——巴利
Bhavataṇhāti kāmabhavādīsu bhavesu patthanā. Yathāha –
在这里,什么是有爱?就是对各种生命存在状态的欲求、贪着、欢喜、渴爱、黏着、热恼、迷恋、执取。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Yo bhavesu bhavacchando bhavarāgo bhavanandī bhavataṇhā bhavasineho bhavapariḷāho bhavamucchā bhavajjhosāna’’nti (vibha. 895).
三种爱:欲爱、有爱、无有爱。在阿毗达摩里,对它们是这样解释的:其中,什么是有爱?与有见相伴的贪……(中略)……心的贪染,这称为有爱。其中,什么是无有爱?与断见相伴的贪……(中略)……心的贪染,这称为无有爱。剩下的爱就是欲爱。其中,什么是欲爱?与欲界相关的贪……(中略)……心的贪染,这称为欲爱。其中,什么是有爱?与色界、无色界相关的贪……(中略)……其中,什么是无有爱?与断见相伴的贪……(中略)……(《分别论》916)巴利
Tisso taṇhāti kāmataṇhā, bhavataṇhā, vibhavataṇhā. Tāsaṃ abhidhamme evaṃ niddeso kato – tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Bhavadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo…pe… cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati bhavataṇhā. Tattha katamā vibhavataṇhā? Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo…pe… cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati vibhavataṇhā. Avasesā taṇhā kāmataṇhā. Tattha katamā kāmataṇhā? Kāmadhātupaṭisaṃyutto rāgo…pe… cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati kāmataṇhā. Tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Rūpadhātuarūpadhātupaṭisaṃyutto rāgo…pe… tattha katamā vibhavataṇhā? Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo…pe… (vibha. 916).
不过在注释书里则是这样说:对五种欲乐的贪染是欲爱;对色界和无色界存在的贪染,也就是对禅那的喜好以及与常见相应的贪染,以“有”的方式生起的渴求,这是有爱;与断见相应的贪染,这是无有爱。这是按照《十上经》的教导方式来组织的。而按照《合诵》的教导方式和阿毗达摩的教导方式,另外还有三种渴爱——“欲爱、色爱、无色爱”,以及另外三种渴爱——“色爱、无色爱、灭爱”(《长部》3.305;《分别论》917-918),这些渴爱的分类在这里也都适用。其中,前五种是与欲界、色界、无色界相应的,最后一种是与断见相应的。巴利
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmataṇhā, rūpārūpabhavesu rāgo jhānanikantisassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo bhavavasena patthanā bhavataṇhā, ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo vibhavataṇhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ dasuttarasuttapariyāyena yojanā. Saṅgītipariyāyena pana abhidhammapariyāyena ca ‘‘aparāpi tisso taṇhā kāmataṇhā rūpataṇhā arūpataṇhā. Aparāpi tisso taṇhā rūpataṇhā arūpataṇhā nirodhataṇhā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.305; vibha. 917-918) vuttā taṇhāpi ettha yujjanti. Tāsu pañca kāmadhāturūpadhātuarūpadhātupaṭisaṃyuttā, antimā ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatā.
四种瀑流:欲瀑流、有瀑流、见瀑流、无明瀑流。对于具有这些瀑流的人,它们会把人冲走、使人沉没在轮回之中,所以叫瀑流。这些是力量很强的烦恼。在被称为五欲的欲乐对象上,那瀑流就是欲瀑流,这是欲爱的名称。在由业和投生两种方式所说的色界与无色界之有上,那瀑流就是有瀑流,这是有爱的名称。见本身就是瀑流,就是见瀑流,这是“世间是常”等见的名称。无明本身就是瀑流,就是无明瀑流,这是对苦等事无知的名称。巴利
Cattāro oghāti kāmogho, bhavogho, diṭṭhogho, avijjogho. Yassa saṃvijjanti, taṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ ohananti osīdāpentīti oghā. Balavakilesā ete. Kāmaguṇasaṅkhāte kāme ogho kāmogho. Kāmataṇhāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Rūpārūpasaṅkhāte kammato ca upapattito ca duvidhepi bhave ogho bhavogho. Bhavataṇhāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Diṭṭhi eva ogho diṭṭhogho. ‘‘Sassato loko’’tiādikāya diṭṭhiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Avijjā eva ogho avijjogho, dukkhādīsu aññāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ.
五种盖:欲贪盖、嗔恚盖、昏沉睡眠盖、掉举恶作盖、疑盖。它们遮蔽、缠缚心,所以叫“盖”。“欲求”就叫欲,即五种欲乐。对诸欲的欲望,就是欲贪。或者说,欲求本身就叫“欲”,这个欲本身就是贪,不是想做某事的欲,也不是对佛法的善法欲,所以叫欲贪。这是欲爱的名称。由于它,心被嗔害所败坏,变得腐坏;或者它破坏威仪、正行、端正相貌所带来的安乐,所以叫嗔恚。这是嗔的名称。僵硬不灵活的状态是昏沉,昏昏欲睡的状态是睡眠,意思是缺乏精进、收缩、无力而障碍。心不精进是昏沉,心所不灵活、不堪作业是睡眠,昏沉和睡眠合在一起就是昏沉睡眠。心高举动荡的状态是掉举,意思是不寂静。这是散乱的名称。做了可耻的恶行,叫恶作;恶行的状态叫恶作,意思是做了应受责备的事。这是追悔的名称。决择已离去,就是疑,意思是智慧已离去。或者,以此探究诸法实相时,感到困顿、疲惫,就是疑。这是对佛等生起疑惑的名称。欲贪本身就是盖,所以叫欲贪盖。其余几种也是这样。巴利
Pañca nīvaraṇānīti kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ byāpādanīvaraṇaṃ thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ uddhaccakukkuccanīvaraṇaṃ vicikicchānīvaraṇaṃ. Cittaṃ nīvaranti pariyonandhantīti nīvaraṇāni. Kāmīyantīti kāmā. Pañca kāmaguṇā. Kāmesu chando kāmacchando. Kāmayatīti vā kāmo, kāmo eva chando, na kattukamyatāchando na dhammacchandoti kāmacchando. Kāmataṇhāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Byāpajjati tena cittaṃ pūtibhāvaṃ gacchati, byāpādayati vā vinayācārarūpasampattihitasukhānīti byāpādo. Dosassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Thinanatā thinaṃ, middhanatā middhaṃ, anussāhasaṃhananatā asattivighāto cāti attho. Cittassa anussāho thinaṃ, cetasikānaṃ akammaññatā middhaṃ, thinañca middhañca thinamiddhaṃ. Uddhatassa bhāvo uddhaccaṃ, avūpasamoti attho. Vikkhepassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Kucchitaṃ kataṃ kukataṃ, kukatassa bhāvo kukkuccaṃ, garahitakiriyabhāvoti attho. Pacchānutāpassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vigatā cikicchāti vicikicchā, vigatapaññāti attho. Sabhāvaṃ vā vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamatīti vicikicchā. Buddhādīsu saṃsayassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Kāmacchando eva nīvaraṇaṃ kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi.
有“六法”的读法,或“六法”的诵读。六爱身就是:色爱、声爱、香爱、味爱、触爱、法爱。对色的渴爱就是色爱。这个渴爱本身又按欲爱等分成很多种,因为它是聚集的意思,所以叫“身”。其余几种也是这样。巴利
Cha dhammā, chaddhammāti vā pāṭho. Cha taṇhākāyāti rūpataṇhā saddataṇhā gandhataṇhā rasataṇhā phoṭṭhabbataṇhā dhammataṇhā. Rūpe taṇhā rūpataṇhā. Sā eva kāmataṇhādibhedena anekabhedattā rāsaṭṭhena kāyoti vuttā. Evaṃ sesesupi.
七随眠:欲贪随眠、嗔恚随眠、慢随眠、见随眠、疑随眠、有贪随眠、无明随眠。因为还没有被断除,所以它们一直潜伏着,因此叫随眠。对诸欲的贪就是欲贪;或者欲本身就是贪,所以叫欲贪。对所缘对象产生抵触,就是嗔。以不如实的看法为本质,就是见。以“我胜过别人”等想法来抬高自己,就是慢。对存在的贪,就是有贪。力量强猛的欲贪,就是欲贪随眠。其余几种也应当这样理解。巴利
Sattānusayāti kāmarāgānusayo paṭighānusayo mānānusayo diṭṭhānusayo vicikicchānusayo bhavarāgānusayo avijjānusayo. Appahīnaṭṭhena anusentīti anusayā. Kāmesu rāgo kāmarāgo, kāmo eva vā rāgoti kāmarāgo. Ārammaṇasmiṃ paṭihaññatīti paṭighaṃ. Ayāthāvadassanaṭṭhena diṭṭhi. Seyyādivasena maññatīti māno. Bhavesu rāgo bhavarāgo. Thāmagato kāmarāgo kāmarāgānusayo. Evaṃ sesesupi.
八邪道就是:邪见、邪思惟、邪语、邪业、邪命、邪精进、邪念、邪定。即使有人发愿说“愿这些能给我带来利益和安乐”,但因为事实并非如此,而且它们在不净等对象上生起“净”等颠倒想,所以其本质是邪的,因此称为邪道。邪见,就是以错误的方式去看,或者依它而错误地看。或者说,颠倒的见解就是邪见;不真实的见解就是邪见;偏离真实而执取的见解就是邪见;不能带来利益、被智者所呵责的见解就是邪见。邪思惟等其余各项,也应依同样的方式理解。邪见,就是执著常见或断见。邪思惟,就是欲思惟等三种思惟。邪语,就是妄语等四种语行。邪业,就是杀生等三种业行。邪命,就是发起邪命谋生方式的思。邪精进,就是与不善心相应的精进。邪念,就是与正念相对立的不善心生起。邪定,就是不善定。巴利
Aṭṭha micchattāti micchādiṭṭhi micchāsaṅkappo micchāvācā micchākammanto micchāājīvo micchāvāyāmo micchāsati micchāsamādhi. ‘‘Hitasukhāvahā me bhavissantī’’ti evaṃ āsīsitāpi tathāabhāvato asubhādīsuyeva subhantiādiviparītappavattito ca micchāsabhāvāti micchattā. Micchā passati, micchā vā etāya passantīti micchādiṭṭhi. Atha vā viparītā diṭṭhīti micchādiṭṭhi, ayāthāvadiṭṭhīti vā micchādiṭṭhi, virajjhitvā gahaṇato vā vitathā diṭṭhīti micchādiṭṭhi, anattāvahattā paṇḍitehi kucchitā diṭṭhīti vāmicchādiṭṭhi. Micchāsaṅkappādīsupi eseva nayo. Micchādiṭṭhīti sassatucchedābhiniveso. Micchāsaṅkappoti kāmavitakkāditividho vitakko. Micchāvācāti musāvādādicatubbidhā cetanā. Micchākammantoti pāṇātipātāditividhā cetanā. Micchāājīvoti micchājīvapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā. Micchāvāyāmoti akusalacittasampayuttaṃ vīriyaṃ. Micchāsatīti satipaṭipakkhabhūto akusalacittuppādo. Micchāsamādhīti akusalasamādhi.
九种以爱为根的法:依止爱而有寻求,依止寻求而有获得,依止获得而有裁决,依止裁决而有欲贪,依止欲贪而有执取,依止执取而有占有,依止占有而有悭吝,依止悭吝而有守护;由于守护,便生起执杖、执刀、斗诤、口角、争论、恶口、两舌、妄语等种种恶不善法。这就是九种以爱为根的法。爱是它们的根,所以叫以爱为根。寻求等这些本身就是不善的。“依止爱”是指依靠爱。“寻求”是指对色等所缘的寻求,因为有爱才有寻求。“获得”是指得到色等所缘,因为有寻求才有获得。而“裁决”有四种:依智、依爱、依见、依思惟。其中,“应知乐的裁决,知乐的裁决后,应于内追求乐”,这是智的裁决。“裁决有两种:爱的裁决和见的裁决”,这样传来的一百零八种爱的行相是爱的裁决,六十二种见是见的裁决。但在“帝释,欲以思惟为因”这部经里,这里所说的裁决其实就是思惟。得到之后,对可爱不可爱、美好不美好,都是用思惟来裁决:“这么多将为我作色所缘用,这么多作声等所缘用;这么多将归我,那么多归别人;这么多我要享用,这么多我要储存。”因此说“依止获得而有裁决”。“欲贪”是指这样以不善思惟思量之后,对那事物生起弱的贪和强的贪。这里“欲”是弱贪的别名,“贪”是强贪的别名。“执取”是指强烈地认定“这是我、这是我的”。“占有”是指以爱和见的方式据为己有。“悭吝”是指不能忍受与他人共有。古代注师就是这样解释它的词义:“这东西真稀奇,只该是我的,不该是别人的稀奇东西”,因为它这样发生,所以叫悭吝。“守护”是指关门、藏入箱中等种种严密的保护。“成为因”就是因。“守护为因”是依主释复合词,意思是守护的原因。在“执杖”等当中,为了阻止他人而拿起杖,是执杖;拿起单刃刀等武器,是执刀;身体冲突和言语冲突都是斗诤;前前的对立是口角;后后的争执是争论;“你你”是以不恭敬的方式互称“你”。巴利
Nava taṇhāmūlakāti (dī. ni. 2.103; 3.359) taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho, lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo, vinicchayaṃ paṭicca chandarāgo, chandarāgaṃ paṭicca ajjhosānaṃ, ajjhosānaṃ paṭicca pariggaho, pariggahaṃ paṭicca macchariyaṃ, macchariyaṃ paṭicca ārakkho, ārakkhādhikaraṇaṃ daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṃtuvaṃpesuññamusāvādā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti (dī. ni. 2.104; 3.359). Ime nava taṇhāmūlakā dhammā. Taṇhā mūlaṃ etesanti taṇhāmūlakā. Pariyesanādayo akusalā eva. Taṇhaṃ, paṭiccāti taṇhaṃ nissāya. Pariyesanāti rūpādiārammaṇapariyesanā. Sā hi taṇhāya sati hoti. Lābhoti rūpādiārammaṇapaṭilābho, so hi pariyesanāya sati hoti. Vinicchayo pana ñāṇataṇhādiṭṭhivitakkavasena catubbidho. Tattha ‘‘sukhavinicchayaṃ jaññā, sukhavinicchayaṃ ñatvā ajjhattaṃ sukhamanuyuñjeyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.323) ayaṃ ñāṇavinicchayo. ‘‘Vinicchayoti dve vinicchayā taṇhāvinicchayo ca diṭṭhivinicchayo cā’’ti (mahāni. 102) evaṃ āgatāni aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni taṇhāvinicchayo. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo diṭṭhivinicchayo. ‘‘Chando kho, devānaminda, vitakkanidāno’’ti (dī. ni. 2.358) imasmiṃ pana sutte idha vinicchayoti vutto vitakkoyeva āgato. Lābhaṃ labhitvā hi iṭṭhāniṭṭhaṃ sundarāsundarañca vitakkeneva vinicchināti ‘‘ettakaṃ me rūpārammaṇatthāya bhavissati, ettakaṃ saddādiārammaṇatthāya, ettakaṃ mayhaṃ bhavissati, ettakaṃ parassa, ettakaṃ paribhuñjissāmi, ettakaṃ nidahissāmī’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo’’ti. Chandarāgoti evaṃ akusalavitakkena vitakkite vatthusmiṃ dubbalarāgo ca balavarāgo ca uppajjati. Chandoti ettha dubbalarāgassādhivacanaṃ, rāgoti balavarāgassa. Ajjhosānanti ahaṃ mamāti balavasanniṭṭhānaṃ. Pariggahoti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena pariggahakaraṇaṃ. Macchariyanti parehi sādhāraṇabhāvassa asahanatā. Tenevassa porāṇā evaṃ vacanatthaṃ vadanti ‘‘idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayhameva hotu, mā aññassa acchariyaṃ hotūti pavattattā macchariyanti vuccatī’’ti. Ārakkhoti dvārapidahanamañjūsagopanādivasena suṭṭhu rakkhaṇaṃ. Adhikarotīti adhikaraṇaṃ. Kāraṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ārakkhādhikaraṇanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, ārakkhahetūti attho. Daṇḍādānādīsu paranisedhanatthaṃ daṇḍassa ādānaṃ daṇḍādānaṃ. Ekatodhārādinā satthassa ādānaṃ satthādānaṃ. Kāyakalahopi vācākalahopi kalaho. Purimo purimo virodho viggaho. Pacchimo pacchimo vivādo. Tuvaṃtuvanti agāravavasena tuvaṃtuvaṃvacanaṃ.
十种邪性,就是邪见……乃至邪定、邪智、邪解脱。其中,邪智是指:在造作恶行时,以盘算造恶手段的方式造恶,以及以“我做得很好”这样的心态反复回顾时,所生起的愚痴。邪解脱是指:明明没有解脱,却把它当成解脱。巴利
Dasa micchattāti micchādiṭṭhi…pe… micchāsamādhi micchāñāṇaṃ micchāvimutti. Tattha micchāñāṇanti pāpakiriyāsu upāyacintāvasena pāpaṃ katvā sukataṃ mayāti paccavekkhaṇākārena ca uppanno moho. Micchāvimuttīti avimuttasseva sato vimuttisaññitā.
现在,为了说明应当通过种种断来舍断的法,开始讲“二断”等内容。因为一旦明白了各种断,那些应当一一断除的法就容易理解了。在五种断当中,除了两种世间断和不费力的出离断之外,先说不费力的两种出世间断。能正确地斩断烦恼,所以叫“正断”;因为能断除,所以叫“断”。以正断为断,而不是以其余的断为断,所以叫“正断断”。由于烦恼已经止息,所以叫“止息”;因为已经断除,所以叫“断”;以止息为断,就叫“止息断”。超越世间,所以叫“出世间”。趋向被称为涅槃的灭尽,所以叫“趣灭”;这个趣向灭尽之道,就是“趣灭道”。对于修习此道的人来说,他的道就是正断断,这是它的含义。同样,在果位的那一刹那,只有出世间果才是止息断。巴利
Idāni anekabhedena pahānena pahātabbe dassetuṃ dve pahānānītiādi āraddhaṃ. Pahānesu hi viññātesu tena tena pahātabbā dhammā suviññeyyā honti. Pañcasu pahānesu lokikāni ca dve pahānāni appayogaṃ nissaraṇappahānañca ṭhapetvā appayogāneva dve lokuttarapahānāni paṭhamaṃ vuttāni. Sammā ucchijjanti etena kilesāti samucchedo, pahīyanti etena kilesāti pahānaṃ. Samucchedasaṅkhātaṃ pahānaṃ, na sesappahānanti samucchedappahānaṃ. Kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhattā paṭippassaddhi, pahīnattā pahānaṃ, paṭippassaddhisaṅkhātaṃ pahānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ. Lokaṃ uttaratīti lokuttaro. Nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ khayaṃ gacchatīti khayagāmī, khayagāmī ca so maggo cāti khayagāmimaggo, taṃ bhāvayato so maggo samucchedappahānanti attho. Tathā phalakkhaṇe lokuttaraphalameva paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ.
在“这是诸欲的出离”等语句中,因为通过它从欲、从色、从有为法中出离,所以叫“出离”;或者因为已经从这些当中脱离,所以叫“出离”。这是指不净禅那。因为从诸欲中出离,所以叫“出离”。或者指不还道。因为不净禅那通过镇伏成为诸欲的出离,而以那禅那作为基础所生起的不还道,则通过彻底断除而成为诸欲的究竟出离。会变坏,所以叫“色”;不是色,就是“无色”,就像与朋友对立的是非朋友,与贪等对立的是无贪等一样,意思是与色对立。或者依果来说,这里没有“色”,所以是“无色”,无色本身就是“无色〔界〕”。是指无色禅那。那些是色的出离。而无色〔禅那〕以及阿罗汉道,由于再次阻止生起,所以是一切色的出离。生的,叫“已生”。由诸缘和合所作的,叫“有为”。依彼彼诸缘而正确共同生起的,叫“缘起”。第一句“已生”显示无常性;第二句显示即使无常存在,也依缘之力而有所依赖;第三句显示即使有所依赖存在,诸缘也无作用,从而显示法性如此。“灭”是指涅槃。因为依涅槃而苦灭,所以叫“灭”。而那正因为从一切有为法中出离,所以叫那有为法的出离。然而在义注中——巴利
Kāmānametaṃnissaraṇantiādīsu kāmato rūpato saṅkhatato nissaranti etenāti nissaraṇaṃ, tehi vā nissaṭattā nissaraṇaṃ. Asubhajjhānaṃ. Kāmehi nikkhantattā nekkhammaṃ. Anāgāmimaggo vā. Asubhajjhānañhi vikkhambhanato kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppāditaanāgāmimaggo pana samucchedato sabbaso kāmānaṃ accantanissaraṇaṃ. Ruppatīti rūpaṃ, na rūpaṃ arūpaṃ mittapaṭipakkhā amittā viya, lobhādipaṭipakkhā alobhādayo viya ca rūpapaṭipakkhoti attho. Phalavasena vā natthettha rūpanti arūpaṃ, arūpameva āruppaṃ. Arūpajjhānāni. Tāni rūpānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma. Arūpehipi arahattamaggo puna uppattinivāraṇato sabbaso rūpānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma. Bhūtanti jātaṃ. Saṅkhatanti paccayehi saṅgamma kataṃ. Paṭiccasamuppannanti te te paccaye paṭicca sammā saha ca uppannaṃ. Paṭhamena sañjātattadīpanena aniccatā, dutiyena aniccassāpi sato paccayānubhāvadīpanena parāyattatā, tatiyena parāyattassāpi sato paccayānaṃ abyāpārattadīpanena evaṃdhammatā dīpitā hoti. Nirodhoti nibbānaṃ. Nibbānañhi āgamma dukkhaṃ nirujjhatīti nirodhoti vuccati. So eva ca sabbasaṅkhatato nissaṭattā tassa saṅkhatassa nissaraṇaṃ nāma. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
“灭是它的出离”:这里,“灭”指的是阿拉汉果。因为通过阿拉汉果亲证涅槃之后,未来一切诸行不再生起,所以它被称为“灭”——这是就它作为名为阿拉汉的灭的缘而言。巴利
‘‘Nirodho tassa nissaraṇanti idha arahattaphalaṃ nirodhoti adhippetaṃ. Arahattaphalena hi nibbāne diṭṭhe puna āyatiṃ sabbasaṅkhārā na hontīti arahattasaṅkhātassa nirodhassa paccayattā nirodhoti vutta’’nti vuttaṃ.
在“已获得出离”等语句中:由于不净禅那是一种出离,所以通过镇伏断,欲被断除也被舍弃;由于不来道是一种出离,所以通过断除断,欲同样被断除也被舍弃。对于无色禅那是一种出离、以及阿拉汉道是一种出离,也应当以同样的方式配合到“色”上。因为通过断除对色的欲贪,色就被彻底断除。这里“色”这个词是做了语法性别的转换。由于涅槃是一种出离,所以通过出离断;由于阿拉汉果是一种出离,所以通过止息断——诸行既被断除也被舍弃。而涅槃作为一种出离,应当理解为是以作为所缘的方式而获得的。巴利
Nekkhammaṃ paṭiladdhassātiādīsu asubhajjhānassa nissaraṇatte vikkhambhanappahānena, anāgāmimaggassa nissaraṇatte samucchedappahānena kāmā pahīnā ceva honti pariccattā ca. Arūpajjhānānaṃ nissaraṇatte ca arahattamaggassa nissaraṇatte ca evameva rūpā yojetabbā. Rūpesu hi chandarāgappahānena rūpānaṃ samucchedo hoti. Rūpāti cettha liṅgavipallāso kato. Nibbānassa nissaraṇatte nissaraṇappahānena, arahattaphalassa nissaraṇatte paṭippassaddhippahānena saṅkhārā pahīnā ceva honti pariccattā ca. Nibbānassa ca nissaraṇatte ārammaṇakaraṇavasena paṭilābho veditabbo.
在“苦谛”等语句中,“遍知通达”等词是中性的抽象名词用法。以遍知而通达,就叫遍知通达;那个遍知通达(就是这里说的)。其余各处也按同样的方式理解。“舍断”:在这样那样地通达时,舍断应当被舍断的烦恼——应当这样理解其含义。无论在世间还是出世间,也都是通过舍断欲贪而舍断它们,这是其含义。也有写成“舍断”的异读。就像一艘船在同一刹那、没有先后地完成四件事:舍弃此岸、截断水流、运载货物、抵达彼岸;同样,道智在同一刹那、没有先后地现观四谛:以遍知现观而现观苦,以舍断现观而现观集,以修习现观而现观道,以作证现观而现观灭。这话说的是什么?因为《清净道论》中说“以灭为所缘,而到达、看见、通达四谛”,所以应当知道,即使在同一刹那中,也像是分别宣说那样,说为有舍断等。巴利
Dukkhasaccantiādīsu pariññāpaṭivedhantiādi bhāvanapuṃsakavacanaṃ. Pariññāya paṭivedho pariññāpaṭivedho. Taṃ pariññāpaṭivedhaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Pajahātīti tathā tathā paṭivijjhanto pahātabbe kilese pajahatīti attho gahetabbo. Lokiyalokuttaresupi chandarāgappahānena vā tāni pajahatīti attho. Pajahatītipi pāṭho. Yathā nāvā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ ekakkhaṇe cattāri kiccāni karoti, orimaṃ tīraṃ pajahati, sotaṃ chindati, bhaṇḍaṃ vahati, pārimaṃ tīraṃ appeti, evamevaṃ maggañāṇaṃ apubbaṃ acarimaṃ ekakkhaṇe cattāri saccāni abhisameti, dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena abhisameti, samudayaṃ pahānābhisamayena abhisameti, maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayena abhisameti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cattāri saccāni pāpuṇāti passati paṭivijjhatī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.839) vuttattā ekakkhaṇepi visuṃ visuṃ viya pahānāni vuttānīti veditabbāni.
在五种断里,就像把水罐丢进长满水藻的水中,水藻被排开一样,通过种种世间定,把盖等敌对法镇伏、排除掉,这叫作镇伏断。应当知道,说镇伏断是就“修习初禅的人断除诸盖”而说的,因为诸盖的断除很明显。诸盖在禅那的前分和后分都不会突然压住心,一旦心被盖压住,禅那就退失了;而寻等法在第二禅等之前和之后,都不是作为敌对法而现起的。所以,诸盖的镇伏是明显的。再者,就像夜里点亮的灯去除黑暗一样,通过作为观的一部分的种种禅支,以敌对的方式断除各种应断之法,这叫作彼分断。应当知道,说彼分断是就“修习能摧破恶见的抉择分定的人断除恶见”而说的,这是从粗重法的角度来说的。因为恶见是粗重的,常想等则是微细的。其中,“恶见”就是指恶见本身,就像“粪所行处”“尿所行处”等说法一样。又因为没有可去之处,恶见只是所到之处,所以也叫恶见;由于包含在六十二见之中,所以也叫入于诸见中者。这里用复数,是指那些恶见。“抉择分定”就是与观相应的定。再者,就像被雷击中的树不再生长一样,通过圣道智,使结缚之法永不再生起,这样的断除叫作正断。灭就是涅槃,也就是被称为灭的涅槃。巴利
Pañcasu pahānesu yaṃ sasevāle udake pakkhittena ghaṭena sevālassa viya tena tena lokiyasamādhinā nīvaraṇādīnaṃ paccanīkadhammānaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ dūrīkaraṇaṃ, idaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ nāma. Vikkhambhanappahānañca nīvaraṇānaṃ paṭhamaṃjhānaṃ bhāvayatoti nīvaraṇānaṃyeva pahānaṃ pākaṭattā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Nīvaraṇāni hi jhānassa pubbabhāgepi pacchābhāgepi na sahasā cittaṃ ajjhottharanti, ajjhotthaṭesu ca tesu jhānaṃ parihāyati, vitakkādayo pana dutiyajjhānādito pubbe pacchā ca appaṭipakkhā hutvā pavattanti. Tasmā nīvaraṇānaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ pākaṭaṃ. Yaṃ pana rattibhāge samujjalitena padīpena andhakārassa viya tena tena vipassanāya avayavabhūtena jhānaṅgena paṭipakkhavaseneva tassa tassa ca pahātabbadhammassa pahānaṃ, idaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ nāma. Tadaṅgappahānañca diṭṭhigatānaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ samādhiṃ bhāvayatoti diṭṭhigatānaṃyeva pahānaṃ oḷārikavasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Diṭṭhigatañhi oḷārikaṃ, niccasaññādayo sukhumā. Tattha diṭṭhigatānanti diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigataṃ ‘‘gūthagataṃ muttagata’’ntiādīni (a. ni. 9.11) viya. Gantabbābhāvato cadiṭṭhiyā gatamattamevetantipi diṭṭhigataṃ, dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhīsu antogadhattā diṭṭhīsu gatantipi diṭṭhigataṃ. Bahuvacanena tesaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ. Nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ samādhinti vipassanāsampayuttaṃ samādhiṃ. Yaṃ pana asanivicakkābhihatassa (visuddhi. 2.851) rukkhassa viya ariyamaggañāṇena saṃyojanānaṃ dhammānaṃ yathā na puna pavattati, evaṃ pahānaṃ, idaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ nāma. Nirodhonibbānanti nirodhasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ.
像这样,从舍断的角度说明了应当断除的诸法之后,现在为了再从这些法本身的角度说明应当断除的诸法,于是说“诸比丘,一切皆应断”等等。其中,眼等应当通过断除欲贪来断除。在“见色时即舍断”等语句中,意思是:以无常等角度观察色时,便舍断了应当断除的烦恼。在“眼……乃至……老死……乃至……深入不死之处的涅槃”这两处省略重复的段落中,对于“观察未知当知根时即舍断”等语句,应当根据各法的特性来配合理解:当观察、注视、期待、希求那些出世间法中的未知当知根时,在观的刹那便舍断了应当断除的烦恼。巴利
Evaṃ pahānavasena pahātabbe dhamme dassetvā idāni sarūpeneva puna pahātabbe dhamme dassetuṃ sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, pahātabbantiādimāha. Tattha cakkhādīni chandarāgappahānena pahātabbāni. Rūpaṃ passanto pajahātītiādīsu rūpaṃ aniccādito passanto pahātabbe kilese pajahāti. Cakkhuṃ…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ…pe… amatogadhaṃ nibbānanti peyyāladvaye anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ ‘‘passanto pajahātī’’tiādīsu tesu lokuttaresu anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ passanto udikkhanto apekkhamāno icchamāno vipassanākkhaṇesu pahātabbe kilese pajahātīti taṃtaṃdhammānurūpena yojetabbaṃ.
应修的解说巴利
Bhāvetabbaniddesavaṇṇanā
25 25. 在“应当修习”的解说中,“身至念”是指《身至念经》等经典中所说的念,它与入出息念、四威仪、小威仪、三十二身分、四界差别、九种坟场不净观、以及抉择作意相应,并且随其适合而与色界禅那相应。因为这种念进入并运行于这些“身”中,所以称为“身至”。“与乐俱行”是指与被称为甘美之乐的乐受达到同生等状态。在佛陀的教法中,“俱行”一词出现在五种含义中:同体、混杂、所缘、所依、相杂。比如“那种导致再有、伴随喜贪的渴爱”中,是指同体,意思是喜贪本身。“那种与懈怠俱行的考察”中,是指混杂,意思是被偶尔生起的懈怠所混杂。“获得与色俱行或与无色俱行的等至”中,是指所缘,意思是以色界或无色界为所缘。“修习与骨想俱行的念觉支”中,是指所依,意思是依止骨想、修习骨想而获得。“此乐与此喜俱行、俱生、相应”中,是指相杂,意思是相互混合。在这里,“乐俱行”也是指相杂。因为与乐相杂,所以说为“乐俱行”。实际上,除了第四禅以外,其余禅那中它都是与乐俱行的。虽然在第四禅中是与舍俱行,但按照多数情况而说为“乐俱行”;或者因为第四禅以之前的禅那为根本,所以说乐俱行时,与舍俱行的第四禅也被包括在内;又或者因为世尊在舍的寂静之乐中说为乐俱行,所以与第四禅相应的也被说为乐俱行。巴利
25. Bhāvetabbaniddese kāyagatāsatīti kāyagatāsatisuttante (ma. ni. 3.153 ādayo) vuttā ānāpānacatuiriyāpathakhuddakairiyāpathadvattiṃsākāracatudhātunavasivathikāpaṭikūla- vavatthāpakamanasikārasampayuttā yathānurūpaṃ rūpajjhānasampayuttā ca sati. Sā hi tesu kāyesu gatā pavattāti kāyagatāti vuccati. Sātasahagatāti madhurasukhavedayitasaṅkhātena sātena saha ekuppādādibhāvaṃ gatā. Tabbhāve vokiṇṇe ārammaṇe nissaye saṃsaṭṭhe dissati sahagatasaddo pañcasu atthesu jinavacane. ‘‘Yāyaṃ taṇhā ponobbhavikā nandirāgasahagatā’’ti (vibha. 203) ettha tabbhāve, nandirāgabhūtāti attho. ‘‘Yā, bhikkhave, vīmaṃsā kosajjasahagatā kosajjasampayuttā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.832) ettha vokiṇṇe, antarantarā uppajjamānena kosajjena vokiṇṇāti attho. ‘‘Lābhī hoti rūpasahagatānaṃ vā samāpattīnaṃ arūpasahagatānaṃ vā samāpattīna’’nti (pu. pa. 3-8) ettha ārammaṇe, rūpārūpārammaṇānanti attho. ‘‘Aṭṭhikasaññāsahagataṃ satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.238) ettha nissaye, aṭṭhikasaññānissayaṃ aṭṭhikasaññaṃ bhāvetvā paṭiladdhanti attho. ‘‘Idaṃ sukhaṃ imāya pītiyā sahagataṃ hoti sahajātaṃ sampayutta’’nti (vibha. 578) ettha saṃsaṭṭhe, sammissanti attho. Imasmimpi pade saṃsaṭṭho adhippeto. Sātasaṃsaṭṭhā hi sātasahagatāti vuttā. Sā hi ṭhapetvā catutthaṃ jhānaṃ sesesu sātasahagatā hoti, satipi ca upekkhāsahagatatte yebhuyyavasena sātasahagatāti vuttā, purimajjhānamūlakattā vā catutthajjhānassa sātasahagatāya upekkhāsahagatāpi vuttāva hoti , upekkhāya pana sante sukhe vuttattā bhagavatā sātasahagatāti catutthajjhānasampayuttāpi vuttāva hoti.
止与观:所谓“止”,就是让欲贪等敌对的法平息、消灭,所以叫止。这是定的名称。所谓“观”,就是依无常等,以种种方式观察诸法,所以叫观。这是慧的名称。不过,这两种在《十上经》的教示里被称为前分,在《集异门经》的教示里则说是世间与出世间混合的。
三种定:有寻有伺定、无寻唯伺定、无寻无伺定。与当下现起的寻相应,就是有寻;与当下现起的伺相应,就是有伺。这有寻有伺定,就是刹那定、观定、近行定、初禅定。没有寻,就是无寻。在寻和伺两者中,伺是“唯”,是最上,是极限,所以叫唯伺,意思是不再和寻相应。这无寻唯伺定,在五法论中是第二禅定。两者都没有,就是无寻无伺定,在四法论中是第二禅等,在五法论中是第三禅等,也就是色界定。这三种定都只是世间的。在《集异门经》的教示中,还说了另外三种定——空定、无相定、无愿定,但这里说的不是那些。巴利
Samatho ca vipassanā cāti kāmacchandādayo paccanīkadhamme sameti vināsetīti samatho. Samādhissetaṃ nāmaṃ. Aniccatādivasena vividhehi ākārehi dhamme passatīti vipassanā. Paññāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ime pana dve dasuttarapariyāye pubbabhāgāti vuttā, saṅgītipariyāye ca lokiyalokuttaramissakāti. Tayo samādhīti savitakko savicāro samādhi , avitakko vicāramatto samādhi, avitakko avicāro samādhi. Sampayogavasena vattamānena saha vitakkena savitakko, saha vicārena savicāro. So khaṇikasamādhi, vipassanāsamādhi, upacārasamādhi, paṭhamajjhānasamādhi. Natthi etassa vitakkoti avitakko. Vitakkavicāresu vicāro mattā paramā pamāṇaṃ etassāti vicāramatto, vicārato uttari vitakkena sampayogaṃ na gacchatīti attho. So pañcakanaye dutiyajjhānasamādhi, tadubhayavirahito avitakko avicāro samādhi. So catukkanaye dutiyajjhānādi, pañcakanaye tatiyajjhānādi rūpāvacarasamādhi. Ime tayopi lokiyā eva. Saṅgītipariyāye aparepi tayo samādhī vuttā – ‘‘suññato samādhi, animitto samādhi, appaṇihito samādhī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.305). Na te idha adhippetā.
四念处:就是身随观念处、受随观念处、心随观念处、法随观念处。应当知道,在前期阶段,以十四种方式把握身,是身随观念处;以九种方式把握受,是受随观念处;以十六种方式把握心,是心随观念处;以五种方式把握法,是法随观念处。不过,这里说的并不是出世间的念处。五支定:因为它具有五个支分,所以叫五支,指的是第四禅定。五个支分是:喜遍满、乐遍满、心遍满、光明遍满、观察相。喜遍满生起,指的是两种禅那中的慧,叫喜遍满。乐遍满生起,指的是三种禅那中的慧,叫乐遍满。遍满他人之心而生起,指的是他心智,叫心遍满。遍满光明而生起,指的是天眼智,叫光明遍满。观察智就叫观察相。这也是曾经说过的:巴利
Cattāro satipaṭṭhānāti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Pubbabhāge cuddasavidhena kāyaṃ pariggaṇhato kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, navavidhena vedanaṃ pariggaṇhato vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, soḷasavidhena cittaṃ pariggaṇhato cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, pañcavidhena dhamme pariggaṇhato dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Lokuttaraṃ pana idha na adhippetaṃ. Pañcaṅgiko samādhīti pañca aṅgāni assa santīti pañcaṅgiko, catutthajjhānasamādhi. Pītipharaṇatā, sukhapharaṇatā, cetopharaṇatā, ālokapharaṇatā, paccavekkhaṇanimittanti pañca aṅgāni. Pītiṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti dvīsu jhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā nāma. Sukhaṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti tīsu jhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā nāma. Paresaṃ ceto pharamānā uppajjatīti cetopariyapaññā cetopharaṇatā nāma. Ālokaṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti dibbacakkhupaññā ālokapharaṇatā nāma. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇanimittaṃ nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
在两种禅那中,慧是喜遍满;在三种禅那中,慧是乐遍满;他心智是心遍满;天眼智是光明遍满;从每一种定出来之后的观察智,就是观察相。巴利
‘‘Dvīsu jhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā, tīsu jhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā, paracittapaññā cetopharaṇatā, dibbacakkhupaññā ālokapharaṇatā, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhitassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇanimitta’’nti (vibha. 804).
这个相之所以被称为“相”,是因为它能把握住从定中出来的人所生起的行相。在这里,喜遍满和乐遍满就像两只脚,心遍满和光明遍满就像两只手,作为神通基础的第四禅就像躯干,观察相就像头部。这样,具寿法将舍利弗长老就把五支正定展示成一个四肢五体俱全的人。巴利
Tañhi vuṭṭhitasamādhissa pavattākāragahaṇato nimittanti vuttaṃ. Tattha ca pītipharaṇatā sukhapharaṇatā dve pādā viya, cetopharaṇatā ālokapharaṇatā dve hatthā viya, abhiññāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ majjhimakāyo viya, paccavekkhaṇanimittaṃ sīsaṃ viya. Iti āyasmā dhammasenāpati sāriputtatthero pañcaṅgikaṃ sammāsamādhiṃ aṅgapaccaṅgasampannaṃ purisaṃ viya katvā dassesi.
“六随念处”:因为一再地生起,所以念本身就是随念;又因为它只在应当运作的所缘上生起,所以对依信心出家的善男子来说,念也是相应的随念;而这些随念正是喜等生起之处,所以称为随念处。是哪六种呢?佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、舍随念、天随念。
“觉支”:是觉悟的支分,或者觉悟者的支分。这里说的是:圣弟子依靠在出世间道的刹那中生起的那一组法——也就是被称为念、择法、精进、喜、轻安、定、舍的这一法之组合,它能对治昏沉、掉举、停滞、过度精进、贪著欲乐、自我折磨、执断、执常等种种过患——而觉悟,因此,那法之组合就称为“觉悟”。所谓“觉悟”,就是从烦恼相续所形成的睡眠中醒来,或者通达四圣谛,或者亲证涅槃。属于那被称为“法之组合”的觉悟的支分,所以称为觉支,就像禅支、道支等一样。或者,按照上面所说的方式,圣弟子因为依靠那种法之组合而觉悟,所以称为“觉悟者”,属于这位觉悟者的支分,也可以称为觉支,就像军队的支分、战车的部件一样。因此,注释师们说:“或者是觉悟者的支分,所以是觉支。”此外,觉支的含义还应按照“觉支是什么含义?能导向觉悟,所以是觉支”等理趣来理解。
“圣八支道”:因为远离该道所应断除的种种烦恼,因为能造就圣者的品质,因为能获得圣者的果证,所以是“圣”。具有八个支分,所以是“八支”。这就像四支的军队、五支的乐器一样,只是支分的组合,离开支分就没有独立的自体。觉支和道支属于出世间,但按照十上经的理趣,前行阶段(世间)的也可以纳入其中。巴利
Cha anussatiṭṭhānānīti punappunaṃ uppajjanato satiyo eva anussatiyo, pavattitabbaṭṭhānasmiṃyeva pavattattā saddhāpabbajitassa kulaputtassa anurūpā satiyotipi anussatiyo, anussatiyo eva pītiādīnaṃ ṭhānattā anussatiṭṭhānāni. Katamāni cha? Buddhānussati dhammānussati saṅghānussati sīlānussati cāgānussati devatānussati (dī. ni. 3.327). Bojjhaṅgāti bodhiyā, bodhissa vā aṅgā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā esā dhammasāmaggī yāya lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe uppajjamānāya līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanakāmasukhattakilamathānuyogaucchedasassatābhinivesādīnaṃ anekesaṃ upaddavānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāya satidhammavicayavīriyapītipassaddhisamādhiupekkhāsaṅkhātāya dhammasāmaggiyā ariyasāvako bujjhatīti katvā bodhīti vuccati. Bujjhatīti kilesasantānaniddāya vuṭṭhahati, cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati, nibbānameva vā sacchikaroti, tassā dhammasāmaggisaṅkhātāya bodhiyā aṅgātipi bojjhaṅgā jhānaṅgamaggaṅgādayo viya. Yo panesa yathāvuttappakārāya etāya dhammasāmaggiyā bujjhatīti katvā ariyasāvako bodhīti vuccati, tassa bodhissa aṅgātipi bojjhaṅgā senaṅgarathaṅgādayo viya. Tenāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā ‘‘bujjhanakassa puggalassa aṅgāti vā bojjhaṅgā’’ti. Apica ‘‘bojjhaṅgāti kenaṭṭhena bojjhaṅgā, bodhāya saṃvattantīti bojjhaṅgā’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 2.17) nayena bojjhaṅgaṭṭho veditabbo. Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi ārakattā ariyabhāvakarattā ariyaphalapaṭilābhakarattā ca ariyo. Aṭṭha aṅgāni assāti aṭṭhaṅgiko. Soyaṃ caturaṅgikā viya senā, pañcaṅgikaṃ viya ca tūriyaṃ aṅgamattameva hoti, aṅgavinimutto natthi. Bojjhaṅgamaggaṅgā lokuttarā, dasuttarapariyāyena pubbabhāgāpi labbhanti.
九种清净精勤支:戒清净是清净精勤支,心清净是清净精勤支,见清净是清净精勤支,度疑清净是清净精勤支,道非道知见清净是清净精勤支,行道知见清净是清净精勤支,知见清净是清净精勤支,慧是清净精勤支,解脱是清净精勤支。
所谓“戒清净”,指能使人达到清净的四遍净戒,因为这种戒能清除犯戒的污垢。“清净精勤支”的意思是:作为清净状态中最殊胜的精勤支分。
所谓“心清净”,指作为观禅立足处、已经修习熟练的八种等至。因为那些等至能清除欲贪等心的污垢。所谓“见清净”,指了知有缘的名色。因为那能清除有情之见的污垢。所谓“度疑清净”,指缘起相的智慧。因为通过它,以缘的方式观察诸法在三世中生起者,就能超越三世中有情的疑惑之垢而清净。所谓“道非道知见清净”,指在生灭随观之时生起的光明、智、喜、轻安、乐、胜解、策励、现起、舍、欲这十种观随烦恼不是道,而进入轨道的生灭智是道,如此名为道非道的智。因为通过它,能清除非道之垢。所谓“行道知见清净”,指进入轨道的生灭随观智、坏随观智、怖畏现起随观智、过患随观智、厌离随观智、欲脱智、审察随观智、行舍智、随顺智,这九种观智。因为它们能清除常想等污垢。所谓“知见清净”,指四圣道的慧。因为它以断除的方式清除各自道所应断的烦恼污垢。所谓“慧”,指阿罗汉果的慧。所谓“解脱”,指阿罗汉果的解脱。巴利
Navapārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgānīti sīlavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, cittavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, diṭṭhivisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, ñāṇadassanavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, paññā pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, vimutti pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ (dī. ni. 3.359). Sīlavisuddhīti visuddhiṃ pāpetuṃ samatthaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Tañhi dussīlyamalaṃ visodheti. Pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅganti parisuddhabhāvassa padhānaṃ uttamaṃ aṅgaṃ. Cittavisuddhīti vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtā paguṇā aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Tā hi kāmacchandādicittamalaṃ visodhenti. Diṭṭhivisuddhīti sappaccayanāmarūpadassanaṃ. Tañhi sattadiṭṭhimalaṃ visodheti. Kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhīti paccayākārañāṇaṃ. Tena hi tīsu addhāsu paccayavasena dhammā pavattantīti passanto tīsupi addhāsu sattakaṅkhāmalaṃ vitaranto visujjhati. Maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhīti udayabbayānupassanakkhaṇe uppannā obhāsañāṇapītipassaddhisukhaadhimokkhapaggahaupaṭṭhānaupekkhānikantīti dasa vipassanupakkilesā, na maggo, vīthipaṭipannaṃ udayabbayañāṇaṃ maggoti evaṃ maggāmagge ñāṇaṃ nāma. Tena hi amaggamalaṃ visodheti. Paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhīti vīthipaṭipannaṃ udayabbayānupassanāñāṇaṃ bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ bhayatupaṭṭhānānupassanāñāṇaṃ ādīnavānupassanāñāṇaṃ nibbidānupassanāñāṇaṃ muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ anulomañāṇanti imāni nava vipassanāñāṇāni. Tāni hi niccasaññādimalaṃ visodhenti. Ñāṇadassanavisuddhīti catuariyamaggapaññā. Sā hi samucchedato sakasakamaggavajjhakilesamalaṃ visodheti. Paññāti arahattaphalapaññā. Vimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti.
十遍处,就是经里说的:“有人认知地遍,向上、向下、横向,无二、无量;有人认知水遍……乃至……有人认知火遍……乃至……有人认知风遍……乃至……有人认知青遍……乃至……有人认知黄遍……乃至……有人认知红遍……乃至……有人认知白遍……乃至……有人认知虚空遍……乃至……有人认知识遍,向上、向下、横向,无二、无量。”这样说了十种。这些之所以叫“遍”,是因为它们以完全遍满为义;之所以叫“处”,是因为它们对以它们为所缘的诸法有田地的意义,或者有确立的意义。向上,是朝向上方虚空界。向下,是朝向下方地界。横向,是像田地的圆形范围那样,在一切方位上划定界限。因为有些人只向上扩大遍,有些人向下,有些人向一切方位。也有人以这样那样的原因,像想看色的人扩展光明那样,把它这样伸展出去。因此说:“有人认知地遍,向上、向下、横向。”无二,这是为了说明它不随顺于成为别的什么。譬如进入水中的人,在一切方向只有水,没有别的;同样,地遍就只是地遍,没有它与别的遍混杂。这个道理在一切处都一样。无量,这是依它各自遍满的无量而说。因为以心遍满它时,就遍满全部,不取“这是它的开始,这是它的中间”这样的量。虚空遍,是除去遍后的虚空以及作为分划虚空的遍。识遍,是在除去遍后的虚空中转起的识。其中,依遍的方面,应在除去遍后的虚空中;依除去遍后的虚空的方面,应在那里转起的识中,了知向上、向下、横向;因为作为分划虚空的遍也应扩大,所以也依它的方面(了知)。巴利
Dasa kasiṇāyatanānīti ‘‘pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṃ adho tiriyaṃ advayaṃ appamāṇaṃ, āpokasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… tejokasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… vāyokasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… nīlakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… pītakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… lohitakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… odātakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… ākāsakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… viññāṇakasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṃ adho tiriyaṃ advayaṃ appamāṇa’’nti (a. ni. 10.25; dī. ni. 3.360) evaṃ vuttāni dasa. Etāni hi sakalapharaṇaṭṭhena kasiṇāni, tadārammaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ khettaṭṭhena adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vā āyatanāni. Uddhanti uparigaganatalābhimukhaṃ. Adhoti heṭṭhābhūmitalābhimukhaṃ. Tiriyanti khettamaṇḍalamiva samantā paricchinnaṃ. Ekacco hi uddhameva kasiṇaṃ vaḍḍheti ekacco adho, ekacco samantato. Ekopi tena tena vā kāraṇena evaṃ pasāreti ālokamiva rūpadassanakāmo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṃ adho tiriya’’nti (a. ni. 10.25; dī. ni. 3.360). Advayanti idaṃ pana ekassa aññabhāvānupagamanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā hi udakaṃ paviṭṭhassa sabbadisāsu udakameva hoti na aññaṃ, evameva pathavīkasiṇaṃ pathavīkasiṇameva hoti, natthi tassa aññakasiṇasambhedoti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Appamāṇanti idaṃ tassa tassa pharaṇaappamāṇavasena vuttaṃ. Tañhi manasā pharanto sakalameva pharati, na ‘‘ayamassa ādi idaṃ majjha’’nti pamāṇaṃ gaṇhātīti. Ākāsakasiṇanti kasiṇugghāṭimākāso paricchedākāsakasiṇañca. Viññāṇakasiṇanti kasiṇugghāṭimākāse pavattaviññāṇaṃ. Tattha kasiṇavasena kasiṇugghāṭimākāse, kasiṇugghāṭimākāsavasena tattha pavattaviññāṇe uddhaṃadhotiriyatā veditabbā, paricchedākāsakasiṇassapi vaḍḍhanīyattā tassa vasenapīti.
26 现在要说明修习的分类,所以说了“二种修习”等话。其中,在“世间的”等词里,“世间”是指以毁坏、崩坏为意义的轮回。因为被包含在轮回之中、系属于世间,所以叫“世间的”;世间法的修习,就是“世间修习”。虽然按习惯说法叫“法的修习”,但离开那些法并没有另外的修习——那些法本身在被修习时,就叫作修习。“超越的”即“更上的”,因为不属于世间、超越了世间,所以叫“出世间”。巴利
26. Idāni bhāvanāpabhedaṃ dassento dve bhāvanātiādimāha. Tattha lokiyātiādīsu loko vuccati lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena vaṭṭaṃ, tasmiṃ pariyāpannabhāvena loke niyuttāti lokiyā, lokiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanā lokiyā. Kiñcāpi dhammānaṃ bhāvanāti vohāravasena vuccati, tehi pana visuṃ bhāvanā natthi. Te eva hi dhammā bhāviyamānā bhāvanāti vuccanti. Uttiṇṇāti uttarā, loke apariyāpannabhāvena lokato uttarāti lokuttarā.
色界,就是名为“色界”的色法;在其中活动的,就是色界(色界心、色界法)。不过在这里,“善”这个词可以在无病、无过失、善巧、乐果这几种意思上出现。比如“尊者身体还好吗?尊者没有病痛吗?”这类句子里,是指无病。在“那么,尊者,什么样的身行是善呢?大王,没有过失的身行就是善”以及“再者,尊者,世尊在善法方面说法,这是无上的”这类句子里,是指无过失。在“王子,你认为怎样?你善巧于车的各个部件吗?”以及“那些善巧歌舞的才艺女子”这类句子里,是指善巧。在“因为受持善法,这样福德就增长”以及“由于已作、已积集的善业”这类句子里,是指乐果。在这里,无病、无过失、乐果这几个意思都适用。再说词义:那些能令可憎的、邪恶的法动摇、颤动、被摧毁、被破坏的,就是善;或者以可憎的方式存在、活动的,就是“俱舍”(kusa);它们切断、斩断名为不善的“俱舍”,所以是善;或者可憎之法的削减、变少就是“俱舍”,也就是智慧。以这个“俱舍”而可得到、可把握、可令其活动的,就是善;又像“俱舍”草割断手部上下两边的部位一样,这些法也以已生和未生的方式割断属于烦恼的那一边,因此像“俱舍”草一样割断的,就是善。这些色界善法的修习,就是色界修。无色界,就是名为“无色界”的无色法;在其中活动的,就是无色界。属于三界轮回、被包含、被摄在内的,是“有摄”;不属于那里面的,是“无摄”,也就是出世间。巴利
Rūpabhavasaṅkhāte rūpe avacarantīti rūpāvacarā. Kusalasaddo panettha ārogyaanavajjachekasukhavipākesu dissati. ‘‘Kacci nu bhoto kusalaṃ? Kacci bhoto anāmaya’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.15.146; 2.20.129) ārogye. ‘‘Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro kusalo? Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro anavajjo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.361) ca ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhante, etadānuttariyaṃ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti kusalesu dhammesū’’ti (dī. ni. 3.145) ca evamādīsu anavajje. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññasi, rājakumāra, kusalo tvaṃ rathassa aṅgapaccaṅgāna’’nti? (Ma. ni. 2.87) ‘‘kusalā naccagītassa sikkhitā cāturitthiyo’’ti (jā. 2.22.94) ca ādīsu cheke. ‘‘Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samādānahetu evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.80) ‘‘kusalassa kammassa katattā upacitattā’’ti (dha. sa. 431) ca ādīsu sukhavipāke. Svāyamidha ārogyepi anavajjepi sukhavipākepi vaṭṭati. Vacanattho panettha kucchite pāpake dhamme salayanti calayanti kampenti viddhaṃsentīti kusalā, kucchitena vā ākārena sayanti pavattantīti kusā, te akusalasaṅkhāte kuse lunanti chindantīti kusalā, kucchitānaṃ vā sānato tanukaraṇato kusaṃ, ñāṇaṃ. Tena kusena lātabbā gahetabbā pavattetabbāti kusalā, yathā vā kusā ubhayabhāgagataṃ hatthappadesaṃ lunanti, evamimepi uppannānuppannabhāvena ubhayabhāgagataṃ saṃkilesapakkhaṃ lunanti, tasmā kusā viya lunantīti kusalā. Tesaṃ rūpāvacarakusalānaṃ bhāvanā. Arūpabhavasaṅkhāte arūpe avacarantīti arūpāvacarā. Tebhūmakavaṭṭe pariyāpannā antogadhāti pariyāpannā, tasmiṃ na pariyāpannāti apariyāpannā, lokuttarā.
如果有人问:为什么欲界善法的修习没有被说成“修习”呢?因为在阿毗达摩里,“修习”指的就是已经达到安止的修习。正如在那里所说的——巴利
Kāmāvacarakusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanā kasmā na vuttāti ce? Appanāppattāya eva bhāvanāya abhidhamme bhāvanāti adhippetattā. Vuttañhi tattha –
在那些属于修行所依的业处、技艺处或知识领域中,对于“业属于自己的”或“随顺真理”的内容——也就是“色是无常的”“受是无常的”“想是无常的”“行是无常的”“识是无常的”——如果他没有从别人那里听闻,就自己获得了这类随顺的忍、见、喜好、柔软、观察、对法审察的忍,这就叫作思所成慧。在那些属于修行所依的业处……中略……如果他是从别人那里听闻之后,才获得对法审察的忍,这就叫作闻所成慧。而已经证入等至的人,他的一切智慧都是修所成慧。巴利
‘‘Yogavihitesu vā kammāyatanesu yogavihitesu vā sippāyatanesu yogavihitesu vā vijjāṭṭhānesu kammassakataṃ vā saccānulomikaṃ vā rūpaṃ aniccanti vā, vedanā aniccāti vā, saññā aniccāti vā, saṅkhārā aniccāti vā, viññāṇaṃ aniccanti vā yaṃ evarūpaṃ anulomikaṃ khantiṃ diṭṭhiṃ ruciṃ mudiṃ pekkhaṃ dhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ parato asutvā paṭilabhati, ayaṃ vuccati cintāmayā paññā. Yogavihitesu vā kammāyatanesu…pe… dhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ parato sutvā paṭilabhati, ayaṃ vuccati sutamayā paññā. Sabbāpi samāpannassa paññā bhāvanāmayā paññā’’ti (vibha. 768).
不过要知道,欲界的这种修习,因为被转向心和有分心的生起隔断了,所以不被称为“修习”。但一切福德都包含在三种福行事里面,因此近行定和观定就成立为修所成福。不过在这里,只把它们归入世间修习。色界和无色界的修习有下劣、中等、殊胜三种:低劣的就叫“下劣”;处在下劣和殊胜之间的就叫“中等”,也有读作“中等的”;被引向精勤努力的状态,就叫“殊胜”,也就是最上等的意思。应当根据策励用功的状态来理解这里的下劣、中等、殊胜:如果在策励的那个刹那,欲、精进、心或审察慧当中任何一个属于下劣,这种修习就叫“下劣”;如果这些法属于中等,就叫“中等”;如果这些法属于殊胜,就叫“殊胜”。或者说,与软弱的根相应的叫“下劣”,与中等的根相应的叫“中等”,与强力的根相应的叫“殊胜”。至于不属于三界的出世间修习,因为没有下劣和中等这两种状态,所以只说它是“殊胜”。因为它以最上之义与无热恼之义故为殊胜。巴利
Sā pana kāmāvacarabhāvanā āvajjanabhavaṅgapātehi antaritattā bhāvanāti na vuttāti veditabbā. Sabbesaṃ pana puññānaṃ tividhapuññakiriyavatthūnaṃ antogadhattā upacārasamādhivipassanāsamādhīnaṃ bhāvanāmayapuññatā siddhā. Idha pana lokiyabhāvanāya eva saṅgahitā. Rūpārūpāvacarānaṃ tividhabhāve hīnāti lāmakā. Hīnuttamānaṃ majjhe bhavā majjhā, majjhimātipi pāṭho. Padhānabhāvaṃ nītāti paṇītā, uttamāti attho. Āyūhanavasena ayaṃ hīnamajjhimapaṇītatā veditabbā. Yassā hi āyūhanakkhaṇe chando vā hīno hoti vīriyaṃ vā cittaṃ vā vīmaṃsā vā, sā hīnā nāma. Yassā te dhammā majjhimā, sā majjhimā nāma. Yassā te dhammā paṇītā, sā paṇītā nāma. Mudukehi vā indriyehi sampayuttā hīnā nāma, majjhimehi indriyehi sampayuttā majjhimā, adhimattehi indriyehi sampayuttā paṇītā nāma. Apariyāpannāya hīnamajjhimattābhāvā paṇītatā eva vuttā. Sā hi uttamaṭṭhena atappakaṭṭhena ca paṇītā.
27 在第一种四类修习里,“修习”是指在同一个刹那,以各种方式通达而修习圣道。在第二种四类修习里,“寻求修习”是指在安止之前的阶段所修的修习。因为它以这个来寻求安止,所以称为“寻求”。“获得修习”是指安止本身的修习。因为通过那个寻求而获得它,所以称为“获得”。“一味修习”是指已经获得安止、想要达到自在的人,在加行阶段的修习。因为它通过一次次的舍断,从种种烦恼中解脱出来,以解脱之味而成为一味,所以称为“一味”。“习行修习”是指已经获得安止、达到自在的人,在随意受用时的修习。因为它被大量地亲近运用,所以称为“习行”。然而有些人解释说:“习行修习是自在业,一味修习是遍一切处的。”在四类分别中,“正在入定的人”是指正在现起的近处之语。其中所生起的,是指在那个前行阶段所生起的。成为一味,是指在安止生起时具有相同作用。对于已入定的人,是指已安止者的安止。其中所生起的,是指由那种安止所生起的。互相不超过,是指在完全现起时不互相超越。在“以决意之义而修习信根”等当中,即使在同一个刹那,当每一个根各自执行自己的作用时,依各自各自的所依,其余诸根也各自执行自己的作用,以解脱之味而成为一味,因此就是以解脱之味的一味之义而修习。在力、觉支、道支当中也是同样的道理。而“一味”一词是作了性别的颠倒。巴利
27. Paṭhamabhāvanācatukke bhāvetīti ekasmiṃyeva khaṇe tathā tathā paṭivijjhanto ariyamaggaṃ bhāveti. Dutiyabhāvanācatukke esanābhāvanāti appanāpubbabhāge bhāvanā. Sā hi appanaṃ esanti etāyāti esanāti vuttā. Paṭilābhabhāvanāti appanābhāvanā. Sā hi tāya esanāya paṭilabbhatīti paṭilābhoti vuttā. Ekarasābhāvanāti paṭilābhe vasībhāvaṃ pattukāmassa payogakāle bhāvanā. Sā hi tena tena pahānena tehi tehi kilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasāti katvā ekarasāti vuttā. Āsevanābhāvanāti paṭilābhe vasippattassa yathāruci paribhogakāle bhāvanā. Sā hi bhusaṃ sevīyatīti āsevanāti vuttā. Keci pana ‘‘āsevanābhāvanā vasīkammaṃ, ekarasābhāvanā sabbatthikā’’ti vaṇṇayanti. Catukkavibhāge samādhiṃ samāpajjantānanti vattamānasamīpe vattamānavacanaṃ. Tattha jātāti tasmiṃ pubbabhāge jātā. Ekarasā hontīti appanuppādane samānakiccā honti. Samādhiṃ samāpannānanti appitappanānaṃ. Tattha jātāti tassā appanāya jātā. Aññamaññaṃ nātivattantīti samappavattiyā aññamaññaṃ nātikkamanti. Adhimokkhaṭṭhenasaddhindriyaṃbhāvayatotiādīsu ekakkhaṇepi ekekassa indriyassa sakasakakiccakaraṇe taṃtaṃnissayavasena sakasakakiccakārakāni sesānipi indriyāni vimuttirasena ekarasā hontīti vimuttiraseneva ekarasaṭṭhena bhāvanā. Balabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgesupi eseva nayo. Ekarasāti ca liṅgavipallāso kato.
这里说“比丘”,是指在这样的教法中的比丘。因为他在轮回中看到怖畏,所以叫比丘。“在上午时分”等说法,用的是表示极强关联的宾格,但从意义上看其实就是处格,意思是“在一天的前一段时间”。“习行”是指反复不断地运用已经达到自在的定。“在正午时分”,是指在一天的正中间。“在傍晚时分”,是指在一天的傍晚时候。“食前”,是指在日中午餐之前。“食后”,是指在日中午餐之后。“也在初夜分”,是指在夜间的第一个时段。“在黑分”,是指在黑半月的日子。“在白分”,是指在白半月的日子。“也在早期的寿份”,是指在早期年龄的范围内,也就是“初期之年龄”。在三种年龄中,对于寿量百岁之人而言,每个年龄阶段为三十三年零四个月。巴利
Idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhatīti bhikkhu. Pubbaṇhasamayantiādīsu accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ, atthato pana bhummameva , divasassa pubbakāleti attho. Āsevatīti vasippattaṃ samādhiṃ bhusaṃ sevati. Majjhanhikasamayanti divasassa majjhakāle. Sāyanhasamayanti divasassa sāyanhakāle. Purebhattanti divābhattato purekāle. Pacchābhattanti divābhattato pacchākāle. Purimepi yāmeti rattiyā paṭhame koṭṭhāse. Kāḷeti kāḷapakkhe. Juṇheti sukkapakkhe. Purimepi vayokhandheti paṭhame vayokoṭṭhāse, paṭhamavayeti attho. Tīsu ca vayesu vassasatāyukassa purisassa ekekasmiṃ vaye catumāsādhikāni tettiṃsa vassāni honti.
28 在第三种四类修习中,“在那里生起的诸法互不超越”的意思是:在出离等各类修习中,定与慧这两种被称为“双运法”的法同时生起,它们彼此之间不会互相越过、互相压过。所谓“诸根一味”,是说就在这些修习当中,信等诸根因为已经从种种烦恼中解脱出来,所以以解脱为味,成为一味。“随顺于彼的精进承载”是说:对于那些互不超越、成为一味的法,随顺它们、与它们相称的精进起到了承载、运载的作用。“习行”是指在那时进行的反复练习。以那习行的习行性。巴利
28. Tatiyabhāvanācatukke tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhenāti tattha nekkhammādīsu bhāvanāvisesesu jātānaṃ samādhipaññāsaṅkhātānaṃ yuganaddhadhammānaṃ aññamaññaṃ anatikkamanabhāvena. Indriyānaṃ ekarasaṭṭhenāti tattheva saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ nānākilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasabhāvena. Tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhenāti tesaṃ anativattanaekarasabhāvānaṃ anucchavikassa vīriyassa vāhanabhāvena. Āsevanaṭṭhenāti yā tassa tasmiṃ samaye pavattā āsevanā. Tassā āsevanāya āsevanabhāvena.
色想:依善、异熟、唯作来分,有十五种,就是属于色界禅那的想。色界禅那本身在“有色者见色”等经文里也被称为色,而那个禅那的所缘,在“在外见色,有妙色、有恶色”等经文里也被称为色。因为是以想为首,对色生起想,所以称为色想。有对想:善异熟五种、不善异熟五种,这样共十种有对想。与双五识相应的想,因为是由眼等依处和色等所缘的撞击而生起的,所以称为有对想。色想、声想、香想、味想、触想,这些也都是它的名字。种种想:八种欲界善想、十二种不善想、十一种欲界善异熟想、两种不善异熟想、十一种欲界唯作想,这样共四十四种,就是种种想。因为这种想在种种不同自性、种种不同种类的色、声等不同境界上生起,所以是种种想;或者,由于四十四种分类而各不相同、自性相异、彼此不相似,所以称为种种想。想虽然有很多种,但按总类来举,所以用单数。巴利
Rūpasaññanti kusalavipākakiriyavasena pañcadasavidhaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānasaṅkhātaṃ rūpasaññaṃ. Rūpāvacarajjhānampi hi rūpanti vuccati ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.174; a. ni. 8.66; dha. sa. 248), tassa jhānassa ārammaṇampi ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passati suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.173; a. ni. 8.65-66; dha. sa. 247, 249). Rūpāvacarajjhānañhi saññāsīsena rūpe saññāti katvā rūpasaññāti vuccati. Paṭighasaññanti kusalavipākā pañca, akusalavipākā pañcāti evaṃ dasavidhaṃ paṭighasaññaṃ. Dvipañcaviññāṇasampayuttā hi saññā cakkhādīnaṃ vatthūnaṃ rūpādīnaṃ ārammaṇānañca paṭighātena uppannattā paṭighasaññāti vuccati. Rūpasaññā saddasaññā gandhasaññā rasasaññā phoṭṭhabbasaññātipi etissā eva nāmaṃ. Nānattasaññanti aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalasaññā, dvādasa akusalasaññā , ekādasa kāmāvacarakusalavipākasaññā, dve akusalavipākasaññā, ekādasa kāmāvacarakiriyasaññāti evaṃ catucattālīsavidhaṃ nānattasaññaṃ. Sā hi nānatte nānāsabhāve rūpasaddādibhede gocare pavattā saññāti nānattasaññā, catucattālīsabhedato nānattā nānāsabhāvā aññamaññaṃ asadisā saññāti vā nānattasaññāti vuccati. Saññābahukattepi jātiggahaṇena ekavacanaṃ kataṃ.
“常想”就是认为“常”的想,也就是常想。同样地,乐想、我想也是这样。“欢喜”是指带有喜的渴爱。“贪”是指没有喜的渴爱。“集”是指贪的集起。或者说,因为在坏灭随观中只看到坏灭本身,所以这里说诸行的生起。“执取”是指依烦恼生起而执取,或者因为看不到过患而对有为所缘的执取。“密集想”是指依相续而认为“密集”的想。“造作”是指为了诸行而付出努力。“恒常想”是指认为“坚固”的想。“相”是指常相。“希求”是指对快乐的希求。“执著”是指“有我”的执著。“执取实有的执著”是指执取常、坚实、实体的执著。“痴迷执著”是指以“我过去世是否存在过”这类方式,以及以“世界是由自在主所生”这类方式产生的痴迷执著。“依着执著”是指由于见有过患,仍然执著“这是应该依附的”。“不正思惟”是指执取错误的方法。“结缚执著”是指欲缚等烦恼的活动。巴利
Niccasaññanti niccanti saññaṃ niccasaññaṃ. Evaṃ sukhasaññaṃ attasaññaṃ. Nandinti sappītikaṃ taṇhaṃ. Rāganti nippītikaṃ taṇhaṃ. Samudayanti rāgassa samudayaṃ. Atha vā bhaṅgānupassanāya bhaṅgasseva dassanato saṅkhārānaṃ udayaṃ. Ādānanti nibbattanavasena kilesānaṃ, adosadassāvitāya saṅkhatārammaṇassa vā ādānaṃ. Ghanasaññanti santativasena ghananti saññaṃ. Āyūhananti saṅkhārānaṃ atthāya payogakaraṇaṃ. Dhuvasaññanti thiranti saññaṃ. Nimittanti niccanimittaṃ. Paṇidhinti sukhapatthanaṃ. Abhinivesanti atthi attāti abhinivesaṃ. Sārādānābhinivesanti niccasārattasāragahaṇābhinivesaṃ. Sammohābhinivesanti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’ntiādivasena (saṃ. ni. 2.20) ‘‘issarato loko sambhotī’’tiādivasena ca sammohābhinivesaṃ. Ālayābhinivesanti ādīnavādassanena allīyitabbamidanti abhinivesaṃ. Appaṭisaṅkhanti anupāyagahaṇaṃ. Saññogābhinivesanti kāmayogādikaṃ kilesappavattiṃ.
“见共住”是指与诸见共同住在一个(人)当中,所以叫“见共住”。那些就是“见共住”。能烧恼、能逼迫,所以叫“烦恼”。那些就是“烦恼”。共住有两种:断除共住和俱生共住。
“断除共住”是指:以有身见为首的六十二见,直到被入流道断除为止,都住在同一个人当中。这里指的就是这个意思。因为在十种烦恼里,这里只提到了见烦恼。至于其余九种能使人堕入恶趣的烦恼——贪、嗔、痴、慢、疑、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧——与见一起以断除共住的方式,被入流道断除;或者说,在以贪、嗔、痴为首的一千五百种烦恼中,当入流道断除见时,与见一起能使人堕入恶趣的一切烦恼都以断除共住的方式被断除。俱生共住是指与见共同住在一个心中。当入流道断除两种与见相应、无行的心时,与它们俱生的贪、痴、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼以俱生共住的方式被断除;当入流道断除两种与见相应、有行的心时,与它们俱生的贪、痴、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼以俱生共住的方式被断除。“粗烦恼”是指粗重的欲贪和嗔恚。“随细烦恼”是指微细的欲贪和嗔恚。“一切烦恼”是指被三道所断除的剩余部分。巴利
Diṭṭhekaṭṭheti diṭṭhīhi saha ekasmiṃ ṭhitāti diṭṭhekaṭṭhā. Te diṭṭhekaṭṭhe. Kilesenti upatāpenti, vibādhenti vāti kilesā. Te kilese. Duvidhañhi ekaṭṭhaṃ pahānekaṭṭhaṃ sahajekaṭṭhañca. Pahānekaṭṭhaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhipamukhāhi tesaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīhi saha (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.118) yāva sotāpattimaggena pahānā, tāva ekasmiṃ puggale ṭhitāti attho. Idamidhādhippetaṃ. Dasasu hi kilesesu idha diṭṭhikilesoyeva āgato. Sesesu pana apāyagamanīyo lobho doso moho māno vicikicchā thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti nava kilesā diṭṭhiyā saha pahānekaṭṭhā hutvā sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti, rāgadosamohapamukhesu vā diyaḍḍhesu kilesasahassesu sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhiyā pahīyamānāya diṭṭhiyā saha apāyagamanīyā sabbakilesā pahānekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti, sahajekaṭṭhe diṭṭhiyā saha ekasmiṃ citte ṭhitāti attho. Sotāpattimaggena hi dvīsu diṭṭhisampayuttaasaṅkhārikacittesu pahīyamānesu tehi sahajāto lobho moho uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti, dvīsu diṭṭhisampayuttasasaṅkhārikacittesu pahīyamānesu tehi sahajāto lobho moho thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Oḷārike kileseti oḷārikabhūte kāmarāgabyāpāde. Anusahagate kileseti sukhumabhūte kāmarāgabyāpāde. Sabbakileseti maggattayena pahīnāvasese.
“策励精进”的意思是:瑜伽行者让精进运转起来。前面说的“寻求”“获得”“一味”“习行”这些词,是为了显示各种修习之间的差别,才说“如是所成的修习”。而这里说的“以不超越那些生起之法为义,以诸根一味为义,以推动随顺的精进为义,以习行为义”,是为了显示修习的因,才说“由这个因和那个因而有修习”。前面是从不同刹那的角度说“习行修习”,这里则是从同一刹那的角度说“以习行之义为修习”,这就是差别所在。“见色而修习”等句中,意思是以应当见色的方式去见色等,从而修习应当修习的修习。“成为一味”:是以解脱味,或者以作用味而成为一味。解脱味就是成就味。因为说过“由作用成就之义而称为味”。巴利
Vīriyaṃ vāhetīti yogāvacaro vīriyaṃ pavatteti. Heṭṭhā esanāpaṭilābhaekarasaāsevanavacanāni bhāvanānaṃ visesadassanatthaṃ vuttāni ‘‘evaṃbhūtā ca bhāvanā’’ti. Idha ‘‘tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena indriyānaṃ ekarasaṭṭhena tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena āsevanaṭṭhenā’’ti vacanāni bhāvanāhetudassanatthaṃ vuttāni ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca hetunā bhāvanā’’ti. Heṭṭhā āsevanābhāvanāti nānākkhaṇavasena vuttā, idha āsevanaṭṭhena bhāvanāti ekakkhaṇavasenāti viseso. Rūpaṃ passanto bhāvetītiādīsu rūpādīni passitabbākārena passanto bhāvetabbaṃ bhāvanaṃ bhāvetīti attho. Ekarasā hontīti vimuttirasena, kiccarasena vā ekarasā honti. Vimuttirasoti sampattiraso. Kiccasampattiatthena raso nāma pavuccatīti hi vuttanti.
应证得解说注释巴利
Sacchikātabbaniddesavaṇṇanā
29 在“应证得”的解说中,以证得和亲证的方式,说了十种增一法的解答。其中,“不动心解脱”是指阿拉汉果的解脱。它不会被动摇、不会变动、不会退失,所以叫“不动”;又因为心已经从一切烦恼中解脱,所以叫“心解脱”。“明”是指三种明。“解脱”按《增十经》的方式是指阿拉汉果,但按《等诵经》的方式则说“解脱有两种:心的胜解和涅槃”。在这里,八种等至因为完全从五盖等烦恼中解脱,所以叫解脱;涅槃因为从一切有为法中解脱,所以叫解脱。“三明”:能回忆过去世住处的智慧是明,能了知有情死生(死亡与再生)的智慧是明,能了知诸漏灭尽的智慧是明。以照破黑暗之义为明,以令事物被清楚认知之义也为明。也就是说,回忆宿住的智慧生起时,能照破遮蔽过去世住处的黑暗,并清楚地了知过去世住处,所以是明。了知死生的智慧能照破遮蔽死亡与结生的黑暗,并清楚地了知死与生,所以是明。了知漏尽的智慧能照破遮蔽四圣谛的黑暗,并清楚地了知四圣谛法,所以是明。“四沙门果”:即入流果、一来果、不来果、阿拉汉果。能平息并消灭恶法,所以叫沙门;沙门的境界就是沙门性。这是四种圣道的名称。沙门性的果,就是沙门果。巴利
29. Sacchikātabbaniddese dasa ekuttaravissajjanāni paṭilābhasacchikiriyāvasena vuttāni. Tattha akuppā cetovimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti. Sā hi na kuppati na calati na parihāyatīti akuppā, sabbakilesehi cittassa vimuttattā cetovimuttīti vuccati. Vijjāti tisso vijjā. Vimuttīti dasuttarapariyāyena arahattaphalaṃ vuttaṃ, saṅgītipariyāyena pana ‘‘vimuttīti dve vimuttiyo cittassa ca adhimutti nibbānañcā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.304) vuttaṃ. Ettha ca aṭṭha samāpattiyo nīvaraṇādīhi suṭṭhu vimuttattā vimutti nāma, nibbānaṃ sabbasaṅkhatato vimuttattā vimutti nāma. Tisso vijjāti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ vijjā sattānaṃ cutūpapāte ñāṇaṃ vijjā āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ vijjā. Tamavijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā, viditakaraṇaṭṭhenāpi vijjā. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇañhi uppajjamānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ chādetvā ṭhitaṃ tamaṃ vijjhati, pubbenivāsañca viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Cutūpapāte ñāṇaṃ cutipaṭisandhicchādakaṃ tamaṃ vijjhati, cutūpapātañca viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ catusaccacchādakaṃ tamaṃ vijjhati, catusaccadhamme ca viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Cattāri sāmaññaphalānīti sotāpattiphalaṃ, sakadāgāmiphalaṃ, anāgāmiphalaṃ, arahattaphalaṃ. Pāpadhamme sameti vināsetīti samaṇo, samaṇassa bhāvo sāmaññaṃ. Catunnaṃ ariyamaggānametaṃ nāmaṃ. Sāmaññassa phalāni sāmaññaphalāni.
五法蕴:戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴、解脱蕴、解脱知见蕴。法蕴的意思是法的分类、法的组成部分。戒蕴等也同样这样理解。世间的戒、定、慧和出世间的戒、定、慧,本身就是戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴。断除解脱、止息解脱、出离解脱,本身就是解脱蕴。对解脱的三种省察,本身就是解脱知见蕴。而这个解脱知见蕴只是世间的。以了知之义就是知,以照见之义就是见,所以叫知见;对解脱的知见,就称为解脱知见。至于镇伏解脱和彼分解脱,则已经包含在定蕴和慧蕴里面了。这五种法蕴,对有学的人来说是有学的,对无学的人来说是无学的。在这些法蕴当中,世间的法蕴和出离解脱,既不是有学的也不是无学的。虽然它们可以属于有学的人,但就说“这些是有学的人的”,所以称为有学的;属于无学的人,就说“这些是无学的人的”,所以称为无学的。至于“具足有学的解脱蕴”这句话,应当理解为以出离解脱为所缘的方式而具足。六通:就是六种更殊胜的智慧。是哪六种呢?神变智、天耳界智、宿住随念智、他心智、天眼智、漏尽智,就是这六种。巴利
Pañca dhammakkhandhāti sīlakkhandho, samādhikkhandho, paññākkhandho, vimuttikkhandho, vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandho. Dhammakkhandhāti dhammavibhāgā dhammakoṭṭhāsā. Sīlakkhandhādīsupi eseva nayo. Lokiyalokuttarā sīlasamādhipaññā eva sīlasamādhipaññākkhandhā . Samucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttiyo eva vimuttikkhandho. Tividhā vimuttipaccavekkhaṇā eva vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandho. So lokiyo eva. Jānanaṭṭhena ñāṇameva dassanaṭṭhena dassananti ñāṇadassanaṃ, vimuttīnaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ vimuttiñāṇadassananti vuccati. Vikkhambhanatadaṅgavimuttiyo pana samādhipaññākkhandheheva saṅgahitā. Ime pañca dhammakkhandhā sekkhānaṃ sekkhā, asekkhānaṃ asekkhāti vuttā. Etesu hi lokiyā ca nissaraṇavimutti ca nevasekkhānāsekkhā. Sekkhā hontāpi sekkhānaṃ ime iti sekkhā, asekkhānaṃ ime iti asekkhāti vuccanti. ‘‘Sekkhena vimuttikkhandhena samannāgato hotī’’ti ettha pana nissaraṇavimuttiyā ārammaṇakaraṇavasena samannāgatoti veditabbo. Cha abhiññāti cha adhikāni ñāṇāni. Katamā cha? Iddhividhañāṇaṃ , dibbasotadhātuñāṇaṃ, pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ, cetopariyañāṇaṃ, dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ, āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇanti imā cha.
七种漏尽者的力量。诸漏已灭尽,所以叫漏尽者;漏尽者所具有的力量,就是漏尽者的力量。是哪七种呢?世尊已经说过——巴利
Satta khīṇāsavabalānīti khīṇā āsavā assāti khīṇāsavo, khīṇāsavassa balāni khīṇāsavabalāni. Katamāni satta? Vuttāni bhagavatā –
比丘们,在这里,一位漏已尽的比丘,以正慧如实善见一切行都是无常的。比丘们,一位漏已尽的比丘,以正慧如实善见一切行都是无常的,这本身就是漏已尽比丘的一种力。依靠这种力,漏已尽的比丘能宣称诸漏已尽:我的诸漏已尽。巴利
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno aniccato sabbe saṅkhārā yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti. Yampi, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno aniccato sabbe saṅkhārā yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti, idampi, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma khīṇāsavo bhikkhu āsavānaṃ khayaṃ paṭijānāti ‘khīṇā me āsavā’ti.
比丘们,再者,漏尽比丘以正慧如实地善见“诸欲如同火炭坑”。比丘们……(中略)……这也是漏尽比丘的一种力。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno aṅgārakāsūpamā kāmāti yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti. Yampi, bhikkhave…pe… idampi khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṃ hoti…pe….
再者,比丘们,漏尽比丘的心倾向于远离,朝向远离,偏向远离,安住于远离,乐于出离,完全摆脱了一切能令烦恼生起之法。比丘们……(中略)……这也是漏尽比丘的一种力。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno vivekaninnaṃ cittaṃ hoti vivekapoṇaṃ vivekapabbhāraṃ vivekaṭṭhaṃ nekkhammābhirataṃ byantībhūtaṃ sabbaso āsavaṭṭhāniyehi dhammehi. Yampi, bhikkhave…pe… idampi khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṃ hoti…pe….
比丘们,再者,漏尽比丘已修习四念处,且善加修习;已修习五根,且善加修习;已修习七觉支,且善加修习;已修习圣八支道,且善加修习。比丘们,漏尽比丘已修习、善加修习圣八支道,这也是漏尽比丘的一种力。正是依靠这种力,漏尽比丘才能宣称:我的诸漏已尽。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā honti subhāvitā. Pañcindriyāni bhāvitāni honti subhāvitāni. Satta bojjhaṅgā bhāvitā honti subhāvitā. Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvito hoti subhāvito. Yampi, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvito hoti subhāvito, idampi khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma khīṇāsavo bhikkhu āsavānaṃ khayaṃ paṭijānāti ‘khīṇā me āsavā’’’ti (a. ni. 10.90; dī. ni. 3.357; paṭi. ma. 2.44).
在这里,通过第一种力,说明了苦圣谛的通达;通过第二种力,说明了集圣谛的通达;通过第三种力,说明了灭圣谛的通达;通过四种力,说明了道圣谛的通达。巴利
Tattha paṭhamena balena dukkhasaccapaṭivedho, dutiyena samudayasaccapaṭivedho, tatiyena nirodhasaccapaṭivedho, catūhi maggasaccapaṭivedho pakāsito hoti.
八解脱:因为能对所缘生起胜解,又能彻底从敌对法中解脱出来,所以叫解脱。哪八种呢?有色身的人看见各种色,这是第一种解脱。内无色想者看见外色,这是第二种解脱。一心胜解于清净,这是第三种解脱。完全超越色想,灭除对抗想,不再作意种种差别想,进入“虚空无边”的空无边处并安住其中,这是第四种解脱。完全超越空无边处,进入“识无边”的识无边处并安住其中,这是第五种解脱。完全超越识无边处,进入“无所有”的无所有处并安住其中,这是第六种解脱。完全超越无所有处,进入非想非非想处并安住其中,这是第七种解脱。完全超越非想非非想处,进入想受灭定并安住其中,这是第八种解脱。巴利
Aṭṭha vimokkhāti ārammaṇe adhimuccanaṭṭhena paccanīkadhammehi ca suṭṭhu muccanaṭṭhena vimokkhā. ‘‘Katame aṭṭha? Rūpī rūpāni passati, ayaṃ paṭhamo vimokkho. Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati, ayaṃ dutiyo vimokkho. ‘Subha’nteva adhimutto hoti, ayaṃ tatiyo vimokkho. Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ catuttho vimokkho. Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ pañcamo vimokkho. Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ chaṭṭho vimokkho. Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ sattamo vimokkho. Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ aṭṭhamo vimokkho’’ti (dī. ni. 2.174; 3.358; a. ni. 8.66).
九种次第灭,就是九种按顺序渐次灭尽。哪九种呢?入初禅时,欲想已灭;入第二禅时,寻与伺已灭;入第三禅时,喜已灭;入第四禅时,入出息已灭;入空无边处时,色想已灭;入识无边处时,空无边处想已灭;入无所有处时,识无边处想已灭;入非想非非想处时,无所有处想已灭;入想受灭定时,想与受都已灭。巴利
Nava anupubbanirodhāti nava anupaṭipāṭiyā nirodhā. ‘‘Katame nava? Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa kāmasaññā niruddhā hoti, dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa vitakkavicārā niruddhā honti, tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa pīti niruddhā hoti, catutthaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa assāsapassāsā niruddhā honti, ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samāpannassa rūpasaññā niruddhā hoti, viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samāpannassa ākāsānañcāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti, ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpannassa viññāṇañcāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samāpannassa ākiñcaññāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti, saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ samāpannassa saññā ca vedanā ca niruddhā hontī’’ti (a. ni. 9.31; dī. ni. 3.344, 359).
十无学法:因为再没有需要修学的地方,所以不再修学,因此叫无学。或者说,在三学中还在修学的人叫有学,已经达到修学圆满的有学就叫无学,也就是阿罗汉。这些法属于无学者,所以叫无学法。“哪十种呢?无学正见、无学正思惟、无学正语、无学正业、无学正命、无学正精进、无学正念、无学正定、无学正智、无学正解脱。”无学正智是指除了阿罗汉果智以外,其余的一切世间智慧。正解脱是指阿罗汉果的解脱。不过义注里这样说:巴利
Dasa asekkhā dhammāti upari sikkhitabbābhāvato na sikkhantīti asekkhā. Atha vā tīsu sikkhāsu sikkhantīti sekkhā, vuddhippattā sekkhāti asekkhā, arahanto. Asekkhānaṃ ime iti asekkhā. ‘‘Katame dasa? Asekkhā sammādiṭṭhi, asekkho sammāsaṅkappo, asekkhā sammāvācā, asekkho sammākammanto, asekkho sammāājīvo, asekkho sammāvāyāmo, asekkhā sammāsati, asekkho sammāsamādhi, asekkhaṃ sammāñāṇaṃ, asekkhā sammāvimuttī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348, 360). Asekkhaṃ sammāñāṇanti arahattaphalapaññaṃ ṭhapetvā sesalokiyapaññā. Sammāvimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.348) pana vuttaṃ –
无学正见等所有这些法,都是与果相应的法。在这里,正见和正智这两处说的都是慧。而“正解脱”这个词,则涵盖了其余所说的、属于果定的那些法。巴利
‘‘Asekkhā sammādiṭṭhītiādayo sabbepi phalasampayuttadhammā eva. Ettha ca sammādiṭṭhi sammāñāṇanti dvīsu ṭhānesu paññāva kathitā. Sammāvimuttīti iminā pana padena vuttāvasesā phalasamāpattidhammā saṅgahitā’’ti.
比丘们,在“一切法都应被亲证”这类说法里,应当理解为“以所缘来亲证”。在“正在见色者,就是在亲证”这类说法里,是指:以可被见的方式去见色等世间法时,他就是在以所缘亲证的方式亲证那些色等法;或者,以可被见的方式去见色等法时,他通过这个因由,亲证了应当被亲证的涅槃。因为研究字义的人认为,“见者”这个词也可以表示“因”的意思。至于“未知当知根”等出世间法,则是在以省察的方式见它们时,就是在以所缘亲证的方式亲证它们。“以究竟义亲证不死之深处的涅槃”,这一句是直截了当的,因为涅槃属于应遍知、应断、应亲证、应修这四类法中的应亲证一类。“凡是已被亲证的法,就是已被触达的法”,这是说:以所缘亲证而亲证的法,是被所缘之触所触达;以获得亲证而亲证的法,是被获得之触所触达。巴利
Sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, sacchikātabbantiādīsu ārammaṇasacchikiriyā veditabbā. Rūpaṃ passanto sacchikarotītiādīsu rūpādīni lokiyāni passitabbākārena passanto tāneva rūpādīni ārammaṇasacchikiriyāya sacchikaroti, rūpādīni vā passitabbākārena passanto tena hetunā sacchikātabbaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti. Passantoti hi padaṃ hetuatthepi akkharacintakā icchanti. Anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīni pana lokuttarāni paccavekkhaṇavasena passanto tāneva ārammaṇasacchikiriyāya sacchikaroti. ‘‘Amatogadhaṃ nibbānaṃ pariyosānaṭṭhena sacchikarotī’’ti idaṃ pariññeyyapahātabbasacchikātabbabhāvetabbesu sacchikātabbattā ujukameva. Ye ye dhammā sacchikatā honti, te te dhammā phassitā hontīti ārammaṇasacchikiriyāya sacchikatā ārammaṇaphassena phuṭṭhā honti, paṭilābhasacchikiriyāya sacchikatā paṭilābhaphassena phuṭṭhā hontīti.
退分四法的解说巴利
Hānabhāgiyacatukkaniddesavaṇṇanā
30 30. 现在,因为退分性等只是每一种定依状态差别而有,所以退分四法作为一类来解说。其中,初禅的获得者就是初禅的证得者。这里是在“拥有”的意义上使用这个词。有得到、即证悟的人,就称为获得者。在与欲俱行中,这里的俱行一词是指所缘的意义,也就是以事欲和烦恼欲为所缘。想与作意指速行想和那时的转向作意,理解为与想相应的作意也可以。现行的意思是转起。法指初禅法。从禅那退失的人,由三种原因退失:烦恼现行、不适当的行为、或不勤加行。由烦恼现行而退失的人,退失得快;由乐著于工作、乐著于谈话、乐著于睡眠、乐著于聚会等不适当的行为而退失的人,退失得慢;由于疾病等资具不具足等障碍,不能经常证入,由不勤加行而退失的人,也退失得慢。但这里为了显示强力的原因,只说了烦恼现行。然而,从二禅等退失的人,也会由于生起对更低禅那的欣求现行而退失。怎样才算已退失?当不能证入时,就算已退失。彼随法性:随顺的法就是随法,这是对以禅那为增上而生起的欣求法的异名。随法本身就是随法性,对彼禅那的随法性,就是彼随法性。念指欣求。安住指确立。意思是:随顺彼初禅的欣求在转起。与无寻俱行指以二禅为所缘。因为那里没有寻,所以称为无寻。与厌离俱行指以观为所缘。因为它对诸行厌患,所以称为厌离。经中说:厌患者离贪。与离贪相连指与圣道相连接的观。因为观达到顶点时,会导向道的出起。因此,以观为所缘的想与作意,称为与离贪相连。经中说:由离贪而解脱。巴利
30. Idāni yasmā hānabhāgiyāditā ekekasseva samādhissa avatthābhedena hoti, tasmā hānabhāgiyacatukkaṃ ekatoyeva niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhinti paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhino . Sāmiatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Lābho sacchikiriyā assa atthīti lābhīti vuccati. Kāmasahagatāti ettha sahagatasaddassa ārammaṇattho adhippeto, vatthukāmakilesakāmārammaṇāti attho. Saññāmanasikārāti javanasaññā ca tadāvajjanamanasikāro ca, saññāsampayuttamanasikāropi vaṭṭati. Samudācarantīti pavattanti. Dhammoti paṭhamajjhānadhammo. Jhānā parihāyanto tīhi kāraṇehi parihāyati kilesasamudācārena vā asappāyakiriyāya vā ananuyogena vā. Kilesasamudācārena parihāyanto sīghaṃ parihāyati, kammārāmatābhassārāmatāniddārāmatāsaṅgaṇikārāmatānuyogavasena asappāyakiriyāya parihāyanto dandhaṃ parihāyati, gelaññapaccayavekallādinā palibodhena abhikkhaṇaṃ asamāpajjanto ananuyogena parihāyantopi dandhaṃ parihāyati. Idha pana balavakāraṇameva dassento kilesasamudācāramevāha. Dutiyajjhānādīhi pana parihāyanto heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānanikantisamudācārenapi parihāyati. Kittāvatā parihīno hotīti? Yadā na sakkoti samāpajjituṃ, ettāvatā parihīno hotīti. Tadanudhammatāti anupavatto dhammo anudhammo, jhānaṃ adhikaṃ katvā pavattassa nikantidhammassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Anudhammo eva anudhammatā, tassa jhānassa anudhammatā tadanudhammatā. Satīti nikanti. Santiṭṭhatīti patiṭṭhāti . Taṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ anuvattamānā nikanti pavattatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Avitakkasahagatāti dutiyajjhānārammaṇā. Tañhi natthettha vitakkoti avitakkanti vuccati. Nibbidāsahagatāti vipassanārammaṇā. Sā hi saṅkhāresu nibbindanato nibbidāti vuccati. ‘‘Nibbindaṃ virajjatī’’ti (mahāva. 23; saṃ. ni. 3.61) hi vuttaṃ. Virāgūpasaṃhitāti ariyamaggapaṭisaññuttā vipassanā. Vipassanā hi sikhāppattā maggavuṭṭhānaṃ pāpeti. Tasmā vipassanārammaṇā saññāmanasikārā ‘‘virāgūpasaṃhitā’’ti vuccanti, ‘‘virāgā vimuccatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ.
与寻俱行:以寻为依,以初禅为所缘。与舍乐俱行:以中舍性和乐受为依,以第三禅为所缘。与喜乐俱行:以喜和乐受为依,以第二禅为所缘。与不苦不乐俱行:以舍受为依,以第四禅为所缘。那个受既不是苦也不是乐,所以称为不苦不乐。这里的“m”字母是按连声规则说出来的。与色俱行:以色界禅那为所缘。对于住在非想非非想处的人,虽然存在退分、住分、抉择分,但因为不存在胜分,所以没有解说非想非非想处。而且,这一切世间定,对于放逸而住、根器迟钝的人,是退分;对于不放逸而住、根器迟钝的人,是住分;对于贪爱行者、根器锐利的人,是胜分;对于见行者、根器锐利的人,是抉择分。巴利
Vitakkasahagatāti vitakkavasena paṭhamajjhānārammaṇā. Upekkhāsukhasahagatāti tatramajjhattupekkhāya ca sukhavedanāya ca vasena tatiyajjhānārammaṇā. Pītisukhasahagatāti pītiyā ca sukhavedanāya ca vasena dutiyajjhānārammaṇā. Adukkhamasukhasahagatāti upekkhāvedanāvasena catutthajjhānārammaṇā. Sā hi vedanā na dukkhā na sukhāti adukkhamasukhāti vuccati , ma-kāro panettha padasandhivasena vutto. Rūpasahagatāti rūpajjhānārammaṇā. Nevasaññānāsaññāyatane ṭhitassa hānabhāgiyaṭhitibhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyattesu vijjamānesupi visesabhāgiyattābhāvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ na niddiṭṭhaṃ. Sabbopi cesa lokiyo samādhi pamādavihārissa mudindriyassa hānabhāgiyo hoti, appamādavihārissa mudindriyassa ṭhitibhāgiyo hoti, taṇhācaritassa tikkhindriyassa visesabhāgiyo hoti, diṭṭhicaritassa tikkhindriyassa nibbedhabhāgiyo hotīti vuccati.
相三法解说释义巴利
Lakkhaṇattikaniddesavaṇṇanā
31 31. 现在,因为每一个世间法都被三法印所贯穿,所以把相论(三法印的分类)合在一起统一解说。其中,无常,是以灭尽之义来说明的:就是在各处,由于有坏灭的性质,所以是无常。有些人说:“因为具有灭尽的性质、衰败的性质、离贪的性质、止息的性质,所以是无常。”苦,是以怖畏之义来说明的:由于有令人恐惧的性质,所以是苦。凡是无常的,就会带来怖畏,就像《师子譬喻经》(相应部尼柯耶3.78)中对诸天所说的那样。有些人说:“以生、老、病、死的怖畏之义为苦。”无我,是以无坚实之义来说明的:对于被设想为“我是住者、作者、受者、自在者”的那种自我之坚实,因为不存在,所以是无我。凡是无常、苦的,连自身的无常性或生灭逼迫都维持不了,哪里还能有作者等身份呢?经中也这样说:“诸比丘!如果这色是我,这色就不该导致疾病”等等。有些人说:“因为缺乏我之坚实与常之坚实,所以是无我。”巴利
31. Idāni yasmā ekekopi lokiyadhammo tilakkhaṇabbhāhato, tasmā lakkhaṇattikaṃ ekato niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenāti tattha tattheva khīyanabhāvena aniccaṃ. ‘‘Khayadhammattā, vayadhammattā, virāgadhammattā, nirodhadhammattā anicca’’nti eke. Dukkhaṃ bhayaṭṭhenāti sappaṭibhayatāya dukkhaṃ. Yañhi aniccaṃ, taṃ bhayāvahaṃ hoti sīhopamasutte (saṃ. ni. 3.78) devānaṃ viya. ‘‘Jātijarābyādhimaraṇabhayaṭṭhena dukkha’’nti eke. Anattā asārakaṭṭhenāti ‘‘attā nivāsī kārako vedako sayaṃvasī’’ti evaṃ parikappitassa attasārassa abhāvena anattā. Yañhi aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ attanopi aniccataṃ vā udayabbayapīḷanaṃ vā dhāretuṃ na sakkoti, kuto tassa kārakādibhāvo. Vuttañca ‘‘rūpañca hidaṃ, bhikkhave, attā abhavissa, nayidaṃ rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvatteyyā’’tiādi (mahāva. 20). ‘‘Attasāraniccasāravirahitattā anattā’’ti eke.
苦圣谛解说的注释巴利
Dukkhasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
四圣谛也是因为诸谛在真实义上相互关联,所以被合在一起解说。其中的“彼彼”,是指在四圣谛之中。“什么”是想要解说而提出的问题。“苦圣谛”是指出所问的法。在“生也是苦”等句子中,“生”这个词先被说明了有多种含义。正如所说:巴利
Ariyasaccacatukkampi tathaṭṭhena saccānaṃ ekasambandhattā ekato eva niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu catūsu ariyasaccesu. Katamanti kathetukamyatāpucchā . Dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti pucchitadhammanidassanaṃ. Tattha jātipi dukkhātiādīsu jātisaddassa tāva aneke atthā paveditā. Yathāha –
有、族、类,戒、施设、相;
pasūti和sandhi也被宣说为jāti(生)的含义。巴利
‘‘Bhavo kulaṃ nikāyo ca, sīlaṃ paññatti lakkhaṇaṃ; Pasūti sandhi cevāti, jātiatthā paveditā’’.
同样地,在“一生、二生”等说法中,这里的“生”是指“有”。在“不因出身而被呵责、被讥嫌”中,是指家族。在“毗舍佉,有称为尼干陀的一类沙门”中,是指部类。在“姊妹,我从圣生以来,不曾了知”中,是指圣戒。在“有一种叫横生草的种类,从脐生出,触到天空而停住”中,是指施设。在“生由二蕴所摄”中,是指有为相。在“阿难,菩萨刚刚诞生”中,是指出生。在“缘有而有生”以及“生也是苦”中,这里是间接指结生蕴。而直接来说,则是指在各处正在出生的众生,他们各自诸蕴的初次显现。巴利
Tathā hissa ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’tiādīsu (pārā. 12) bhavo attho. ‘‘Akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.331) ettha kulaṃ. ‘‘Atthi, visākhe, nigaṇṭhā nāma samaṇajātī’’ti (a. ni. 3.71) ettha nikāyo. ‘‘Yatohaṃ, bhagini, ariyāya jātiyā jāto nābhijānāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.351) ettha ariyasīlaṃ. ‘‘Tiriyā nāma tiṇajāti nābhiyā uggantvā nabhaṃ āhacca ṭhitā ahosī’’ti (a. ni. 5.196) ettha paññatti. ‘‘Jāti dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahitā’’ti (dhātu. 71) ettha saṅkhatalakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto’’ti (ma. ni. 3.207) ettha pasūti. ‘‘Bhavapaccayā jātī’’ti (vibha. 354) ca ‘‘jātipi dukkhā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.33; vibha. 190) ca ettha pariyāyato paṭisandhikhandhā. Nippariyāyato pana tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ tesaṃ paṭhamaṃ pātubhāvo.
那么,为什么“生”是苦呢?因为它是一切众多苦的依托之处。苦有很多种,比如:苦苦、变易苦、行苦、隐蔽苦、非隐蔽苦、间接苦、直接苦。其中,身体的苦受和心的苦受,无论从自性上看还是从名称上看都是苦,所以叫苦苦。乐受因为会变坏而成为产生苦的原因,所以叫变易苦。舍受以及其余三界的一切有为法,因为被生灭逼迫,所以叫行苦。像耳痛、牙痛、因贪而生的热恼、因嗔而生的热恼等身心疾病,需要询问才能知道,而且病因不明显,所以叫隐蔽苦。由三十二种业行等所引起的疾病,不用询问就能知道,而且病因明显,所以叫非隐蔽苦。除了苦苦之外,其余在《苦谛分别》中所说的“生”等一切,因为都是各种苦的依托之处,所以叫间接苦。而苦苦,则叫直接苦。巴利
Kasmā panesā jāti dukkhāti ce? Anekesaṃ dukkhānaṃ vatthubhāvato. Anekāni hi dukkhāni. Seyyathidaṃ – dukkhadukkhaṃ, vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ, saṅkhāradukkhaṃ, paṭicchannadukkhaṃ, appaṭicchannadukkhaṃ , pariyāyadukkhaṃ, nippariyāyadukkhanti. Ettha kāyikacetasikā dukkhā vedanāsabhāvato ca nāmato ca dukkhattā dukkhadukkhanti vuccati. Sukhā vedanā vipariṇāmena dukkhuppattihetuto vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ. Upekkhāvedanā ceva avasesā ca tebhūmakasaṅkhārā udayabbayapaṭipīḷitattā saṅkhāradukkhaṃ. Kaṇṇasūladantasūlarāgajapariḷāhadosajapariḷāhādi kāyikacetasiko ābādho pucchitvā jānitabbato upakkamassa ca apākaṭabhāvato paṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Dvattiṃsakammakāraṇādisamuṭṭhāno ābādho apucchitvāva jānitabbato upakkamassa ca pākaṭabhāvato appaṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Ṭhapetvā dukkhadukkhaṃ sesaṃ dukkhasaccavibhaṅge (vibha. 190 ādayo) āgataṃ jātiādi sabbampi tassa tassa dukkhassa vatthubhāvato pariyāyadukkhaṃ. Dukkhadukkhaṃ pana nippariyāyadukkhanti vuccati.
这里说的“生”,就是世尊在《愚人智者经》等经里用譬喻说明的恶趣之苦,以及即使在善趣的人间,以入胎等为根本而生起的苦;因为它是这些苦的所依处,所以是苦。这里,以入胎等为根本的苦是这样的:这个有情在母胎中受生时,并不是受生在青莲、红莲、白莲等地方,而是在胃的下方、熟脏的上方、腹膜、脊椎与脊椎棘之间,一个极其狭窄、极其黑暗的地方;那里弥漫着各种腐尸般的臭气,极其恶臭的气流在其中流动;在这极其可厌的子宫部位,他就像生在腐鱼、腐粥、粪坑等处的蛆虫一样。他在那里受生之后,整整十个月,被母胎所生的热力像烤陶器一样烤着,像揉面团一样揉着,不能弯曲,不能伸展,极度地感受着苦。这就是以入胎为根本的苦。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ jāti yaṃ taṃ bālapaṇḍitasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.246 ādayo) bhagavatāpi upamāvasena pakāsitaṃ āpāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yañca sugatiyampi manussaloke gabbhokkantimūlakādibhedaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, tassa vatthubhāvato dukkhā. Tatridaṃ gabbhokkantimūlakādibhedaṃ dukkhaṃ – ayañhi satto mātukucchimhi nibbattamāno na uppalapadumapuṇḍarīkādīsu nibbattati, atha kho heṭṭhā āmāsayassa upari pakkāsayassa udarapaṭalapiṭṭhikaṇṭakānaṃ vemajjhe paramasambādhe tibbandhakāre nānākuṇapagandhaparibhāvitaparamaduggandhapavanavicarite adhimattajegucche kucchippadese pūtimacchapūtikummāsacandanikādīsu kimi viya nibbattati. So tattha nibbatto dasa māse mātukucchisambhavena usmanā puṭapākaṃ viya paccamāno piṭṭhapiṇḍi viya sediyamāno samiñjanapasāraṇādivirahito adhimattaṃ dukkhaṃ paccanubhotīti. Idaṃ tāva gabbhokkantimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
当母亲突然踉跄、行走、坐下、起身、翻身等时,他就像落在醉汉手里的山羊,又像落在捕蛇人手里的幼蛇,被拽拉、拖扯、摇晃、抖动等种种动作弄得极度受苦。母亲喝冷水时,他就像堕入了寒地狱;母亲吞下热粥、饭食等时,他就像被炭火雨撒满全身;母亲咽下咸、酸等食物时,他就像遭受碱水、刀割等刑罚一样,极度受苦。这就是以护胎为根本的苦。巴利
Yaṃ pana so mātu sahasā upakkhalanagamananisīdanauṭṭhānaparivattanādīsu surādhuttahatthagato eḷako viya ahituṇḍikahatthagato sappapotako viya ca ākaḍḍhanaparikaḍḍhanaodhunananiddhunanādinā upakkamena adhimattaṃ dukkhamanubhoti, yañca mātu sītudakapānakāle sītanarakūpapanno viya uṇhayāgubhattādiajjhoharaṇakāle aṅgāravuṭṭhisamparikiṇṇo viya loṇambilādiajjhoharaṇakāle khārāpatacchikādikammakāraṇappatto viya adhimattaṃ dukkhamanubhoti. Idaṃ gabbhapariharaṇamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
当母亲胎位不正时,在连亲友、熟人等都不该看到的痛苦部位,胎儿被切割、剖开等操作弄得感受着苦。这就是以胎位不正为根源的苦。巴利
Yaṃ panassa mūḷhagabbhāya mātuyā mittāmaccasuhajjādīhipi adassanārahe dukkhuppattiṭṭhāne chedanaphālanādīhi dukkhamanubhavati. Idaṃ gabbhavipattimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
母亲正在分娩时,胎儿被业力所生的风翻转,被送进像地狱悬崖一样极其恐怖的产道,受到极度狭窄的产门挤压,就像被从钥匙孔里硬拽出来一样,又像大龙象或地狱众生被众合山碾碎一样,这时生起的苦。这就是以分娩为根本的苦。巴利
Yaṃ vijāyamānāya mātuyā kammajehi vātehi parivattetvā narakappapātaṃ viya atibhayānakaṃ yonimaggaṃ paṭipādiyamānassa paramasambādhena ca yonimukhena tāḷacchiggaḷena viya nikaḍḍhiyamānassa mahānāgassa narakasattassa viya ca saṅghātapabbatehi vicuṇṇiyamānassa dukkhamuppajjati. Idaṃ vijāyanamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
然而,对于刚出生的婴儿,身体像新鲜创口一样娇嫩,在被人抱持、沐浴、冲洗、用布擦拭等时候,会生起像针尖和刀锋刺穿、劈裂一样的痛苦。这就是以离开母胎为根本的苦。巴利
Yaṃ pana jātassa taruṇavaṇasadisassa sukumārasarīrassa hatthagahaṇanhāpanadhovanacoḷaparimajjanādikāle sūcimukhakhuradhārāvijjhanaphālanasadisaṃ dukkhamuppajjati. Idaṃ mātukucchito bahi nikkhamanamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
此后,在生命延续的过程中,自己折磨自己:以裸形外道等戒行,投入自我炙烤与自我折磨的修行;或因愤怒而绝食,或上吊自缢。这时生起的苦,就是以自己为根源的苦。巴利
Yaṃ tato paraṃ pavattiyaṃ attanāva attānaṃ vadhentassa acelakavatādivasena ātāpanaparitāpanānuyogamanuyuttassa kodhavasena abhuñjantassa ubbandhantassa ca dukkhaṃ hoti. Idaṃ attupakkamamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
而当一个人被他人杀害、捆绑等时生起的苦,这就是以他人加害为根源的苦。这样一来,这一切苦的依处,正是这个“生”。因此这样说:巴利
Yaṃ pana parato vadhabandhanādīni anubhavantassa uppajjati. Idaṃ parūpakkamamūlakaṃdukkhanti. Iti imassa sabbassāpi dukkhassa ayaṃ jāti vatthumeva hoti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
如果众生不投生到地狱里,那里那些烈火焚烧等等无法忍受的苦就不会发生;
苦能在哪里得到立足处呢?牟尼在此就生而说:这是苦。
在畜生道里,苦是来自鞭打、刺棒……
由杖击等而来的种种有
那生如何会在那里存在呢?
除了那里,从那里受生也是苦。
在饿鬼道里,则有饥渴之苦。
风、热、火等所生的种种。
因为对于未生者来说,那里并不存在。
所以牟尼也说生就是苦。
在浓重的黑暗和难以忍受的严寒中,
在诸世间之中,阿修罗众那里有什么苦呢?
不在那种有里,也不会有生。
因为有了这“生”,所以从那里(生)也是苦。
就像在粪尿地狱里一样,在母亲的胎中,
众生或长寿或短寿,皆从外出来;
即使到达了极其可怕之苦,这也仍未超越生。
就算没有生,生也还是苦;因为生本身就是苦。
说那么多有什么用?难道在任何地方不都是
这里确实有某种苦,有时会出现;
大仙在脱离生中并不存在,当此之时。
他首先说了这个:生是苦。巴利
‘‘Jāyetha no ce narakesu satto, tatthaggidāhādikamappasayhaṃ; Labhetha dukkhaṃ nu kuhiṃ patiṭṭhaṃ, iccāha dukkhāti munīdha jātiṃ. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ tiracchesu kasāpatoda- Daṇḍābhighātādibhavaṃ anekaṃ; Yaṃ taṃ kathaṃ tattha bhaveyya jātiṃ, Vinā tahiṃ jāti tatopi dukkhā. ‘‘Petesu dukkhaṃ pana khuppipāsā- Vātātapādippabhavaṃ vicittaṃ; Yasmā ajātassa na tattha atthi, Tasmāpi dukkhaṃ muni jātimāha. ‘‘Tibbandhakāre ca asayhasīte, Lokantare yaṃ asuresu dukkhaṃ; Na taṃ bhave tattha na cassa jāti, Yato ayaṃ jāti tatopi dukkhā. ‘‘Yañcāpi gūthanarake viya mātugabbhe, Satto vasaṃ ciramato bahi nikkhamañca; Pappoti dukkhamatighoramidampi natthi, Jātiṃ vinā itipi jāti ayañhi dukkhā. ‘‘Kiṃ bhāsitena bahunā nanu yaṃ kuhiñci, Atthīdha kiñcidapi dukkhamidaṃ kadāci; Nevatthi jātivirahe yadato mahesī, Dukkhāti sabbapaṭhamaṃ imamāha jāti’’nti.
老也是苦。这里的老有两种:一种是有为相,另一种是在相续中、属于同一个有的诸蕴变旧的状态,也就是通常说的牙齿脱落等。这里指的就是后者。这种老之所以是苦,既因为它是行苦,也因为它是苦的所依。正如肢节松弛、诸根变异丑陋、青春毁坏、力量损毁、念慧离去、遭他人轻蔑等多种因缘所生的身心之苦生起时,老是其依处。因此这样说道:巴利
Jarāpi dukkhāti ettha duvidhā jarā saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca, khaṇḍiccādisammato santatiyaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannakhandhapurāṇabhāvo ca. Sā idha adhippetā. Sā panesā dukkhā saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato ceva dukkhavatthuto ca. Yaṃ hidaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgasithilībhāvaindriyavikāravirūpatā yobbanavināsabalūpaghātasatimativippavāsaparaparibhavādianekappaccayaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ dukkhamuppajjati, jarā tassa vatthu. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
因为肢体变得松弛,感官功能也发生衰变;
青春消逝,体力衰败。
要远离自己的儿女妻子等亲人,以及要远离自己。
既因为让人无法生起净信,也因为更加陷入愚痴。
凡人会遭遇身苦和心苦,两者都是如此。
这一切都以老为因,所以老就是苦。巴利
‘‘Aṅgānaṃ sithilībhāvā, indriyānaṃ vikārato; Yobbanassa vināsena, balassa upaghātato. ‘‘Vippavāsā satādīnaṃ, puttadārehi attano; Appasādanīyato ceva, bhiyyo bālattapattiyā. ‘‘Pappoti dukkhaṃ yaṃ macco, kāyikaṃ mānasaṃ tathā; Sabbametaṃ jarāhetu, yasmā tasmā jarā dukhā’’ti.
在讲完老苦之后,接着本该讲病苦,但因为在讲身苦的时候就已经把病苦包含进去了,所以这里没有再单独说,这一点应该知道。巴利
Jarādukkhānantaraṃ byādhidukkhe vattabbepi kāyikadukkhagahaṇeneva byādhidukkhaṃ gahitaṃ hotīti na vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“死也是苦”这句话里,死有两种:一种是有为相,经里说的“老死由两种蕴所含摄”(《界论》71)就是指这个。另一种是在一期生命之内所摄的生命根相续的断灭,经里说的“因为恒常有死的威胁,所以有怖畏”(《经集》581)就是指这个。这里要说的正是后一种。依生缘而有的死、横死、自性死、寿尽死、福尽死,这些也都是它的名字。另外,这里还应当知道有另一种分类:刹那死、概念死、断灭死。在生命流转过程中,色法和名法的坏灭,就叫刹那死。“帝须死了”“弗沙死了”这种说法,因为从究竟义上讲并没有真实的有情存在,所以叫概念死;“庄稼死了”“树死了”这种说法,因为其中没有命根,也叫概念死。诸漏尽者不再结生的寿尽,叫断灭死。除了纯粹外在的概念死之外,其余的概念死和断灭死,都已经被前面所说的相续断灭所含摄了。又因为死是苦生起的所依,所以它本身就是苦。因此这样说:巴利
Maraṇampi dukkhanti etthāpi duvidhaṃ maraṇaṃ – saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahita’’nti (dhātu. 71). Ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyappabandhavicchedo ca, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘niccaṃ maraṇato bhaya’’nti (su. ni. 581). Taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Jātipaccayamaraṇaṃ upakkamamaraṇaṃ sarasamaraṇaṃ āyukkhayamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayamaraṇantipi tasseva nāmaṃ. Puna khaṇikamaraṇaṃ sammutimaraṇaṃ samucchedamaraṇanti ayampettha bhedo veditabbo. Pavatte rūpārūpadhammānaṃ bhedo khaṇikamaraṇaṃ nāma. ‘‘Tisso mato, phusso mato’’ti idaṃ paramatthato sattassa abhāvā, ‘‘sassaṃ mataṃ, rukkho mato’’ti idaṃ jīvitindriyassa abhāvā sammutimaraṇaṃ nāma. Khīṇāsavassa appaṭisandhikā kālakiriyā samucchedamaraṇaṃ nāma. Bāhirakaṃ sammutimaraṇaṃ ṭhapetvā itaraṃ sammutimaraṇañca samucchedamaraṇañca yathāvuttapabandhavicchedeneva saṅgahitaṃ. Dukkhassa pana vatthubhāvato dukkhaṃ. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
正在观察恶业等的相状的人,
忍受灾厄的善人的别离,以及所爱之物的别离,
临终者内心的苦,是无有差别的。
对于一切众生,甚至凡是关节与束缚之切断等之类的,
当我被刺穿时,就会产生身体上的苦受。
此苦的根源无法忍受且无可对治,因为此苦正是从它而生。
死亡这件事本身就是苦,所以才会说死就是苦。巴利
‘‘Pāpassa pāpakammādinimittamanupassato; Bhaddassāpasahantassa, viyogaṃ piyavatthukaṃ; Mīyamānassa yaṃ dukkhaṃ, mānasaṃ avisesato. ‘‘Sabbesañcāpi yaṃ sandhibandhanacchedanādikaṃ; Vitujjamānamammānaṃ , hoti dukkhaṃ sarīrajaṃ. ‘‘Asayhamappaṭikāraṃ, dukkhassetassidaṃ yato; Maraṇaṃ vatthu tenetaṃ, dukkhamicceva bhāsita’’nti.
在愁等诸苦当中,「愁」是指被亲友遭难等事触动后,内心以向内郁结忧思为特征的心热恼。而「苦」则是从苦苦的角度,以及从作为苦之依据的角度来说的。因此这样说:巴利
Sokādīsu soko nāma ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa antonijjhānalakkhaṇo cittasantāpo. Dukkho pana dukkhadukkhato dukkhavatthuto ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
众生的心被忧愁刺穿,就像被毒箭射中一样。
就像被火烧着的箭,又像糠秕一样猛烈燃烧。
它带来疾病,还有衰老、死亡与毁灭;
因为苦也是种种的,所以就叫它苦。巴利
‘‘Sattānaṃ hadayaṃ soko, visasallaṃva tujjati; Aggitattova nārāco, bhusaṃva dahate puna. ‘‘Samāvahati byādhiñca, jarāmaraṇabhedanaṃ; Dukkhampi vividhaṃ yasmā, tasmā dukkhoti vuccatī’’ti.
所谓悲泣,就是当人遭遇亲属死亡等不幸时,嘴里发出的哀叹哭诉。而苦,则因为它是行苦的性质,又是苦的所依之处。因此这样说:巴利
Paridevo nāma ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa vacīpalāpo. Dukkho pana saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato dukkhavatthuto ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
被忧箭射中的人一边哭泣哀号,喉咙、嘴唇、上颚和舌头干得受不了;
他只会得到越来越多的苦,所以世尊说悲叹就是苦。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ sokasallavihato paridevamāno, kaṇṭhoṭṭhatālutalasosajamappasayhaṃ; Bhiyyodhimattamadhigacchatiyeva dukkhaṃ, dukkhoti tena bhagavā paridevamāhā’’ti.
所谓苦,就是以逼迫身体为特相的身苦。而苦又从苦苦以及能带来心苦的角度来说。因此这样说:巴利
Dukkhaṃ nāma kāyapīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ kāyikadukkhaṃ. Dukkhaṃ pana dukkhadukkhato mānasadukkhāvahanato ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
这身的苦在逼迫身体,而心的苦还要更重;
因为它能产生苦,所以特别称之为苦。巴利
‘‘Pīḷeti kāyikamidaṃ, dukkhaṃ dukkhañca mānasaṃ bhiyyo; Janayati yasmā tasmā, dukkhanti visesato vutta’’nti.
所谓“忧”,就是以逼迫心为特征的心苦。而“苦”则是从苦苦的意义上说的,也是因为它能带来身体上的苦。被心苦所逼的人,确实会散开头发哭泣,捶打胸口,翻来滚去,辗转反侧,倒立扑地,拿刀,服毒,用绳子上吊,跳进火里,感受种种不同的痛苦。因此说:巴利
Domanassaṃ nāma cittapīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ mānasaṃ dukkhaṃ. Dukkhaṃ pana dukkhadukkhato kāyikadukkhāvahanato ca. Cetodukkhasamappitā hi kese pakiriya kandanti, urāni paṭipisanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti, uddhaṃpādaṃ papatanti, satthaṃ āharanti, visaṃ khādanti, rajjuyā ubbandhanti, aggiṃ pavisantīti nānappakārakaṃ dukkhamanubhavanti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
因为它逼迫心,同时给身体带来压迫;
忧就是苦,因此离忧者们说它为苦。巴利
‘‘Pīḷeti yato cittaṃ, kāyassa ca pīḷanaṃ samāvahati; Dukkhanti domanassaṃ, vidomanassā tato āhū’’ti.
所谓恼,就是当人遭遇亲属离散等不幸时,由极重的内心痛苦所生起的嗔。有些人说,它是属于行蕴的一个法。而苦,则是从行苦的状态、内心的灼烧以及身体的萎靡来说的。因此这样说——巴利
Upāyāso nāma ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa adhimattacetodukkhappabhāvito dosoyeva. ‘‘Saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpanno eko dhammo’’ti eke. Dukkho pana saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato cittaparidahanato kāyavisādanato ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
心的极度燃烧,以及身体的极度消瘦;
因为恼能生起苦,所以它被称为苦。巴利
‘‘Cittassa ca paridahanā, kāyassa visādanā ca adhimattaṃ; Yaṃ dukkhamupāyāso, janeti dukkho tato vutto’’ti.
在这里,愁就像用小火在容器里煮东西;悲就像用猛火煮时,东西从容器里溢出来;恼则像溢出来之后剩下的部分,再也溢不出去,只能在容器里一直煮到耗尽。应当这样理解。巴利
Ettha ca mandagginā antobhājane pāko viya soko, tikkhagginā paccamānassa bhājanato bahinikkhamanaṃ viya paridevo, bahinikkhantāvasesassa nikkhamitumpi appahontassa antobhājaneyeva yāva parikkhayā pāko viya upāyāso daṭṭhabbo.
怨憎会,就是与不可爱的众生和诸行聚在一起。而它是苦,则是因为它是苦的所依。因此这样说:巴利
Appiyasampayogo nāma appiyehi sattasaṅkhārehi samodhānaṃ. Dukkho pana dukkhavatthuto. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
一看到不喜欢的事物,心里立刻就生出苦;
然后,由那努力所生的,就在这里,从这个身体。
所以,从依据上来说,那两种苦也是由那位大仙(所说)的;巴利
‘‘Disvāva appiye dukkhaṃ, paṭhamaṃ hoti cetasi; Tadupakkamasambhūtamatha kāye yato idha. ‘‘Tato dukkhadvayassāpi, vatthuto so mahesinā;
所谓“苦”,应当理解为与不喜欢的事物相聚。巴利
Dukkho vuttoti viññeyyo, appiyehi samāgamo’’ti.
所谓爱别离,就是与所爱的七诸行分离。从苦的立足点来说,它确实是苦。因此这样说:巴利
Piyavippayogo nāma piyehi sattasaṅkhārehi vinābhāvo. Dukkho pana dukkhavatthuto. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
和亲人、财富等分开时,他们被忧愁之箭射中,痛苦不堪;
愚人们因此把与所爱者分离视为苦。巴利
‘‘Ñātidhanādiviyogā , sokasarasamappitā vitujjanti; Bālā yato tatoyaṃ, dukkhoti mato piyaviyogo’’ti.
在未得所求之时,对得不到的东西生起欲求,所谓“求而不得,那也是苦”,说的就是这个。意思是:一个人怀着欲求去追求某个得不到的东西,结果得不到,那么这种对得不到的东西的欲求本身就是苦。而苦,是就它作为苦的所在来说的。因此这样说:巴利
Icchitālābhe alabbhaneyyavatthūsu icchāva yampicchaṃ na labhati, tampi dukkhanti vuttā. Yenapi dhammena alabbhaneyyaṃ vatthuṃ icchanto na labhati, tampi alabbhaneyyavatthumhi icchanaṃ dukkhanti attho. Dukkhaṃ pana dukkhavatthuto. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
对于那些渴求各种事物的人来说,因为得不到这个那个;
众生在这里生起的,是由忧恼所成的苦。
对得不到的东西的渴求,就是那苦的成因。
因此,胜者说:求不得就是苦。巴利
‘‘Taṃ taṃ patthayamānānaṃ, tassa tassa alābhato; Yaṃ vighātamayaṃ dukkhaṃ, sattānaṃ idha jāyati. ‘‘Alabbhaneyyavatthūnaṃ, patthanā tassa kāraṇaṃ; Yasmā tasmā jino dukkhaṃ, icchitālābhamabravī’’ti.
在“简而言之,五取蕴”这句话里,“简而言之”是就开示而说的。因为苦没办法被概括成“就这么几百种苦”或者“就这么几千种苦”,但开示却可以概括。所以,为了把开示收摄起来,他这样说:“所谓的苦,不是别的什么,简而言之,五取蕴就是苦。”“五”是数量上的限定。“取蕴”就是取的活动范围——诸蕴。巴利
Saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhāti ettha pana saṅkhittenāti desanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dukkhañhi ettakāni dukkhasatānīti vā ettakāni dukkhasahassānīti vā saṅkhipituṃ na sakkā, desanā pana sakkā. Tasmā ‘‘dukkhaṃ nāma na aññaṃ kiñci, saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti desanaṃ saṅkhipanto evamāha. Pañcāti gaṇanaparicchedo. Upādānakkhandhāti upādānagocarā khandhā.
从生开始就有的苦,正是那位如来在此处所说的。
凡是未曾宣说的那一切,离开了这个就存在。
因为如此,简略来说,这些就是取蕴。
那位宣说苦之尽头的大仙,被称为苦。巴利
Jātippabhutikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ vuttamidha tādinā; Avuttaṃ yañca taṃ sabbaṃ, vinā etena vijjati. Yasmā tasmā upādānakkhandhā saṅkhepato ime; Dukkhāti vuttā dukkhanta-desakena mahesinā.
就像火依靠柴薪,靶子招来箭矢,牛身招来牛虻蚊蚋之类,田地招来收割的人,村庄招来劫村的人一样,生等种种苦也正是以各种方式逼迫这五取蕴;它们就像大地上的草藤之类,像树上的花、果、嫩叶一样,只在这五取蕴当中生起。五取蕴最初的苦是生,中间的苦是老,最终的苦是死;被临死的苦逼迫而产生的灼烧般的苦,是愁;因为承受不住而哭喊的苦,是悲;由于被称为界扰动的不可意触境和合,身体所受的病痛之苦,是苦;被这种病痛折磨的凡夫对此生起抗拒,内心受到逼恼之苦,是忧;因为愁等不断增长而心生悲伤、哀叹之苦,是恼;愿望受到阻碍、所求得不到满足之苦,是求不得。这样从种种方面来考察,五取蕴本身就是苦。如果要一个一个地详细说明,即使经过许多劫也说不完;世尊为了把这一切苦总摄在五取蕴中显示出来,就像一滴水含藏整个大海水的味道一样,所以长老说:略说五取蕴是苦。巴利
Tathā hi indhanamiva pāvako, lakkhamiva paharaṇāni, gorūpaṃ viya ḍaṃsamakasādayo, khettamiva lāyakā, gāmaṃ viya gāmaghātakā, upādānakkhandhapañcakameva jātiādayo nānappakārehi vibādhentā tiṇalatādīni viya bhūmiyaṃ, pupphaphalapallavāni viya rukkhesu upādānakkhandhesuyeva nibbattanti. Upādānakkhandhānañca ādidukkhaṃ jāti, majjhedukkhaṃ jarā, pariyosānadukkhaṃ maraṇaṃ, māraṇantikadukkhābhighātena pariḍayhanadukkhaṃ soko , tadasahanato lālappanadukkhaṃ paridevo, tato dhātukkhobhasaṅkhātaaniṭṭhaphoṭṭhabbasamāyogato kāyassa ābādhanadukkhaṃ dukkhaṃ, tena ābādhiyamānānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ tattha paṭighuppattito cetobādhanadukkhaṃ domanassaṃ, sokādivuddhiyā janitavisādānaṃ anutthunanadukkhaṃ upāyāso, manorathavighātappattānaṃ icchāvighātadukkhaṃ icchitālābhoti evaṃ nānappakārato upaparikkhiyamānā upādānakkhandhāva dukkhāti yadetaṃ ekamekaṃ dassetvā vuccamānaṃ anekehipi kappehi na sakkā anavasesato vattuṃ, taṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ ekajalabindumhi sakalasamuddajalarasaṃ viya yesu kesuci pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu saṅkhipitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti bhagavatā vuttameva thero avocāti.
在这里,“生”等词的详细解释中,“在那里”是指在苦谛解说中所说的“生”等。“那些众生的”是从总体上对众多众生的概括说明。如果只说“提婆达多的生、索马达达的生”,这样即使整天讲说,也不能穷尽一切众生,也不能成就其余含义的完整说明;但用这两句话,就没有任何一个众生被遗漏,没有任何一种含义不能成就。“在彼彼”是依趣处和生类,对众多众生群体的概括说明。“有情众”是指有情的群体、有情的聚合、有情的集合。“生”是就出生而言,这是显示其自性的词。“生起”是就完全出生而言,这个词因加上前缀而扩展了。“入胎”是就进入而言。或者,以出生的含义称为“生”,这是就诸处尚未圆满而说的;以完全出生的含义称为“生起”,这是就诸处已经圆满而说的;以进入的含义称为“入胎”,这是就卵生和胎生而说的。因为它们进入卵壳和胎膜,进入时就像执取结生一样。以再生的含义称为“再生”,这是就湿生和化生而说的,因为它们显现而出生。以上是世俗的说法。巴利
Tattha katamā jātītiādīsu padabhājanīyesu tatthāti dukkhasaccaniddese vuttesu jātiādīsu. Yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānanti saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso. Yā devadattassa jāti, yā somadattassa jātīti evañhi divasampi kathiyamāne neva sattā pariyādānaṃ gacchanti, na sabbaṃ aparatthadīpanaṃ sijjhati, imehi pana dvīhi padehi na koci satto apariyādinno hoti, na kiñci aparatthadīpanaṃ na sijjhati. Tamhi tamhīti ayaṃ gatijātivasena anekesaṃ sattanikāyānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso. Sattanikāyeti sattānaṃ nikāye, sattaghaṭāyaṃ sattasamūheti attho. Jātīti jāyanavasena. Idamettha sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Sañjātīti sañjāyanavasena. Upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Okkantīti okkamanavasena. Jāyanaṭṭhena vā jāti, sā aparipuṇṇāyatanavasena vuttā. Sañjāyanaṭṭhena sañjāti, sā paripuṇṇāyatanavasena vuttā. Okkamanaṭṭhena okkanti, sā aṇḍajajalābujavasena vuttā. Te hi aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca okkamanti, okkamantā pavisantā viya paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanti. Abhinibbattanaṭṭhena abhinibbatti, sā saṃsedajaopapātikavasena vuttā. Te hi pākaṭā eva hutvā nibbattanti, ayaṃ tāva sammutikathā.
现在要讲的是诸蕴的显现和诸处的获得,这是胜义层面的解说。因为在胜义上,只有诸蕴在显现,而不是有情在显现。这里说的“诸蕴”,要理解为:在一蕴有中取一个蕴,在四蕴有中取四个蕴,在五蕴有中取五个蕴。“显现”就是生起。“诸处”要理解为按照各处生起的方式来做归类。“获得”就是在相续中的显现本身。因为那些正在显现的,才叫作获得。这就叫作“生”——这个就被称为生。巴利
Idāni khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo, āyatanānaṃ paṭilābhoti paramatthakathā hoti. Khandhā eva hi paramatthato pātubhavanti, na sattā. Ettha ca khandhānanti ekavokārabhave ekassa, catuvokārabhave catunnaṃ, pañcavokārabhave pañcannampi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pātubhāvoti uppatti. Āyatanānanti tatra tatra uppajjamānāyatanavasena saṅgaho veditabbo. Paṭilābhoti santatiyaṃ pātubhāvoyeva. Pātubhavantāneva hi tāni paṭiladdhāni nāma honti. Ayaṃ vuccati jātīti ayaṃ jāti nāma kathīyati.
在解释“老”时,“老”是指它的自性;“衰老性”是指它的表现方式。“齿落”等三种,是从时间推移的角度说明它的作用;最后两种,是从本来状态的角度说明。这里,“老”这个词是从自性上显示的,所以这是它的自性特征。“衰老性”是从表现方式上显示的,所以这是它的表现方式说明。“齿落”等,是通过时间推移导致牙齿、指甲损坏的作用来说明。“发白”是通过使头发、体毛变白的作用来说明。“皮皱”是通过使肌肉萎缩、皮肤起皱的作用来说明。所以这三种是从时间推移说明作用。通过这些变化显露出来,就显示出明显的老。就像水、风、火或者草木等,因为冲毁、破坏或者烧毁,使旧路显露出来,但那条旧路并不是那些水等本身。同样,老通过牙齿等的齿落等方式显示出它的踪迹,即使睁开眼睛也能看到,但齿落等并不是老本身。因为老不是眼识所能认知的。巴利
Jarāniddese jarāti sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Jīraṇatāti ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccantiādayo tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā, pacchimā dve pakatiniddesā. Ayañhi jarāti iminā padena sabhāvato dīpitā, tenassā idaṃ sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Jīraṇatāti iminā ākārato, tenassāyaṃ ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccanti iminā kālātikkame dantanakhānaṃ khaṇḍitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Pāliccanti iminā kesalomānaṃ palitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Valittacatāti iminā maṃsaṃ milāpetvā tace valibhāvakaraṇakiccato dīpitā. Tenassā ime tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā. Tehi imesaṃ vikārānaṃ dassanavasena pākaṭībhūtā pākaṭajarā dassitā. Yatheva hi udakassa vā vātassa vā aggino vā tiṇarukkhādīnaṃ sambhaggapalibhaggatāya vā jhāmatāya vā gatamaggo pākaṭo hoti, na ca so gatamaggo tāneva udakādīni, evameva jarāya dantādīsu khaṇḍiccādivasena gatamaggo pākaṭo cakkhuṃ ummīletvāpi gayhati, na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarā. Na hi jarā cakkhuviññeyyā hoti.
“寿的衰减”和“诸根的成熟”这两句,是在说明:只有随着时间推移而显现出来的、被称为寿尽以及眼等诸根成熟这种本性。因此应当知道,这是对两种本性的解说。其中,因为到了衰老阶段的人寿命会衰减,所以以果代因,把老称为“寿的衰减”。又因为年轻时眼等诸根极为清净,连细微的所缘也能轻松地把握,而到了衰老阶段,诸根则变得成熟、混乱、不清明,连粗大的所缘也无法把握,所以同样以果代因,把老称为“诸根的成熟”。巴利
Āyuno saṃhāni indriyānaṃ paripākoti imehi pana padehi kālātikkameyeva abhibyattāya āyukkhayacakkhādiindriyaparipākasaṅkhātāya pakatiyā dīpitā, tenassime dve pakatiniddesāti veditabbā. Tattha yasmā jaraṃ pattassa āyu hāyati, tasmā jarā ‘‘āyuno saṃhānī’’ti phalūpacārena vuttā. Yasmā ca daharakāle suppasannāni sukhumampi attano visayaṃ sukheneva gaṇhanasamatthāni cakkhādīni indriyāni jaraṃ pattassa paripakkāni āluḷitāni avisadāni oḷārikampi attano visayaṃ gahetuṃ asamatthāni honti, tasmā ‘‘indriyānaṃ paripāko’’ti phalūpacāreneva vuttā.
这种老,按照上面所说的那样,也分为两种:显露的老和隐藏的老。其中,在牙齿等色法上能看出缺损、脱落等状态,所以色法中的老叫“显露老”。而在无色法上,因为看不到那种变异,所以叫“隐藏老”。不过,那种能看到的缺损、脱落状态,其实只是那些牙齿等的颜色罢了。用眼睛看到之后,再通过意门去思惟:“这些牙齿已经被老击坏了”,这样才了知老。就像看着绑在水里的牛角等物,从而知道下面有水的存在一样。再者,这种老还可以分为有间老和无间老两种。其中,在摩尼宝珠、黄金、白银、珊瑚、月亮、太阳等上面,以及在只有十岁等短寿的有情身上,还有在花、果、嫩叶等非有情物上,因为中间那些颜色变化等很难辨认,所以这种老叫“无间老”,意思是不间断的老。而在那些之外的其他上述情况中,因为中间那些颜色变化等很容易辨认,所以这种老叫“有间老”。巴利
Sā panesā evaṃ niddiṭṭhā sabbāpi jarā pākaṭā paṭicchannāti duvidhā hoti. Tattha dantādīsu khaṇḍādibhāvadassanato rūpadhammesu jarā pākaṭajarā nāma. Arūpadhammesu pana jarā tādisassa vikārassa adassanato paṭicchannajarā nāma. Tatra yvāyaṃ khaṇḍādibhāvo dissati, so tādisānaṃ dantādīnaṃ vaṇṇoyeva. Taṃ cakkhunā disvā manodvārena cintetvā ‘‘ime dantā jarāya pahaṭā’’ti jaraṃ jānāti, udakaṭṭhāne baddhāni gosiṅgādīni oloketvā heṭṭhā udakassa atthibhāvajānanaṃ viya. Puna ayaṃ jarā savīci avīcīti evampi duvidhā hoti. Tattha maṇikanakarajatapavāḷacandasūriyādīnaṃ mandadasakādīsu pāṇīnaṃ viya, pupphaphalapallavādīsu apāṇīnaṃ viya ca antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ dubbiññeyyattā jarā avīcijarā nāma, nirantarajarāti attho. Tato aññesu pana yathāvuttesu antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā jarā savīcijarā nāma.
在这里,“有间老”应当从执取与非执取两方面来理解:幼童最先长出的是乳齿,它们并不坚固。乳齿脱落后,又会再长出牙齿。这些新牙最初是白色的,等到被老之风击中时,就变成黑色。头发最初是红褐色的,之后变黑,再后来变白。皮肤则带血色。随着不断生长,白色的事物显现为白色,黑色的事物显现为黑色。但被老之风击中时,就会生出皱纹。一切谷物在播种时都是白色的,之后变绿,被老之风击中时则变黄。用芒果嫩芽也可以说明这一点。巴利
Tattha savīcijarā upādiṇṇakaanupādiṇṇakavasena evaṃ veditabbā – daharakumārakānañhi paṭhamameva khīradantā nāma uṭṭhahanti, na te thirā. Tesu pana patitesu puna dantā uṭṭhahanti. Te paṭhamameva setā honti, jarāvātena pahaṭakāle kāḷakā honti. Kesā paṭhamameva tambā honti, tato kāḷakā, tato setā. Chavi pana salohitikā hoti. Vaḍḍhantānaṃ vaḍḍhantānaṃ odātānaṃ odātabhāvo, kāḷakānaṃ kāḷakabhāvo paññāyati. Jarāvātena pana pahaṭakāle valiṃ gaṇhāti. Sabbampi sassaṃ vapitakāle setaṃ hoti, pacchā nīlaṃ. Jarāvātena pana pahaṭakāle paṇḍukaṃ hoti. Ambaṅkurenāpi dīpetuṃ vaṭṭati.
在解释“死”时,说“死没”是就命终离去的层面来说的。这是对一蕴、四蕴、五蕴的统称。“死没性”是用状态词来显示它的特征。“坏灭”是说明将死诸蕴的崩坏。“消失”是说明将死诸蕴就像破了的瓶子一样,无论如何都不再存在。“死神之死”是指被称为死神的死,不是刹那生灭的死。“时”就是终结者,它的作用叫“寿尽”。到这里,已经说明了世俗意义上的死。巴利
Maraṇaniddese cutīti cavanavasena vuttaṃ. Ekacatupañcakkhandhānaṃ sāmaññavacanametaṃ. Cavanatāti bhāvavacanena lakkhaṇanidassanaṃ. Bhedoti cutikhandhānaṃ bhaṅguppattiparidīpanaṃ. Antaradhānanti ghaṭassa viya bhinnassa bhinnānaṃ cutikhandhānaṃ yena kenaci pariyāyena ṭhānābhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Maccu maraṇanti maccusaṅkhātaṃ maraṇaṃ, na khaṇikamaraṇaṃ. Kālo nāma antako, tassa kiriyāti kālakiriyā. Ettāvatā ca sammutiyā maraṇaṃ dīpitaṃ.
现在,为了从胜义的角度来说明,所以接着说了“诸蕴的坏灭”等话。因为从胜义来看,坏灭的只是诸蕴,并没有任何一个叫“有情”的东西在死去。不过,当诸蕴正在坏灭时,就说“有情死了”;诸蕴已经坏灭时,就说“已死”,这只是世俗的说法。在这里,应当理解为:依四蕴有和五蕴有来说,是“诸蕴的坏灭”;依一蕴有来说,是“弃舍尸体”;或者依四蕴有来说,是“诸蕴的坏灭”,依其余两种有来说,是“弃舍尸体”。为什么呢?因为在这两种有中,也有被称为色身的尸体存在。又因为即使在四大王天等天界,诸蕴同样在坏灭,却不会弃舍任何东西,所以依那些天界众生来说,是“诸蕴的坏灭”;而在人类等地方,则是弃舍尸体。在这里,由于有弃舍尸体这件事,所以死被称为“弃舍尸体”。巴利
Idāni paramatthena dīpetuṃ khandhānaṃ bhedotiādimāha. Paramatthena hi khandhāyeva bhijjanti, na satto nāma koci marati. Khandhesu pana bhijjamānesu satto marati, bhinnesu matoti vohāro hoti. Ettha ca catuvokārapañcavokāravasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, ekavokāravasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo, catuvokāravasena vā khandhānaṃ bhedo, sesadvayavasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo veditabbo. Kasmā? Bhavadvayepi rūpakāyasaṅkhātassa kaḷevarassa sambhavato. Yasmā vā cātumahārājikādīsupi khandhā bhijjanteva, na kiñci nikkhipati, tasmā tesaṃ vasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, manussādīsu kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Ettha ca kaḷevarassa nikkhepakaraṇato maraṇaṃ ‘‘kaḷevarassa nikkhepo’’ti vuttaṃ.
“命根的断绝”这句话是在说明:只有与根相连属的,才叫做死;不与根相连属的,就没有所谓的死。至于“谷物死了”“树死了”这种说法,只是世俗的惯用语而已;从实际意义来说,这类话只是在显示谷物等的耗尽与衰灭。巴利
Jīvitindriyassupacchedoti iminā indriyabaddhasseva maraṇaṃ nāma hoti, anindriyabaddhassa maraṇaṃ nāma natthīti dasseti. ‘‘Sassaṃ mataṃ, rukkho mato’’ti idaṃ pana vohāramattameva, atthato pana evarūpāni vacanāni sassādīnaṃ khayavayabhāvameva dīpenti.
再说,这些生、老、死,对众生来说,就像伺机下手的杀手和仇敌一样,到处寻找可乘之机。打个比方,有一个人有三个仇敌,都在找机会下手。第一个说:“我去夸赞某处森林有多好,把他带到那里,这对我来说一点也不难。”第二个说:“等你把他带到那里,我把他打一顿,让他虚弱不堪,这对我来说一点也不难。”第三个说:“等你把他打得虚弱了,我用利剑砍下他的头,这就是我的活儿。”他们这样商量好之后,就真的照做了。其中,第一个仇敌夸赞森林、把人带到那里,就好比把人从亲友圈子里拽出来,让他投生到某个地方——这就是“生”的作用;第二个仇敌把人打至虚弱,就好比落在已经生起的诸蕴上,让他变得依赖他人、只能卧床——这就是“老”的作用;第三个仇敌用利剑砍头,就好比让寿命终结——这就是“死”的作用。应当这样理解。巴利
Apica imāni jātijarāmaraṇāni nāma imesaṃ sattānaṃ vadhakapaccāmittā viya otāraṃ gavesantāni vicaranti. Yathā hi purisassa tīsu paccāmittesu otārāpekkhesu vicarantesu eko vadeyya ‘‘ahaṃ asukaaraññassa nāma vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā etaṃ ādāya tattha gamissāmi, ettha mayhaṃ dukkaraṃ natthī’’ti. Dutiyo vadeyya ‘‘ahaṃ tava etaṃ gahetvā gatakāle pothetvā dubbalaṃ karissāmi, ettha mayhaṃ dukkaraṃ natthī’’ti. Tatiyo vadeyya ‘‘tayā etasmiṃ pothetvā dubbale kate tiṇhena asinā sīsacchedanaṃ nāma mayhaṃ bhāro hotū’’ti te evaṃ vatvā tathā kareyyuṃ. Tattha paṭhamapaccāmittassa araññavaṇṇaṃ kathetvā taṃ ādāya tattha gatakālo viya suhajjañātimaṇḍalato nikkaḍḍhitvā yattha katthaci nibbattāpanaṃ nāma jātiyā kiccaṃ, dutiyassa pothetvā dubbalakaraṇaṃ viya nibbattakkhandhesu nipatitvā parādhīnamañcaparāyaṇabhāvakaraṇaṃ jarāya kiccaṃ, tatiyassa tiṇhena asinā sīsacchedanaṃ viya jīvitakkhayapāpanaṃ maraṇassa kiccanti veditabbaṃ.
另外,在这里应当把生苦看作进入充满危险的大旷野;把老苦看作在那旷野中没有饮食而虚弱无力;把死苦看作那虚弱者在行走活动时气力尽失,被猛兽等加害而陷入灾祸。巴利
Apicettha jātidukkhaṃ sādīnavamahākantārappaveso viya daṭṭhabbaṃ, jarādukkhaṃ tattha annapānarahitassa dubbalaṃ viya, maraṇadukkhaṃ dubbalassa iriyāpathapavattane vihataparakkamassa vāḷādīhi anayabyasanāpādanaṃ viya daṭṭhabbanti.
在解释“忧”时,“viyasati”就是毁坏的意思;“毁坏”指舍弃、摧毁利益和安乐。亲族的毁坏就是“亲族灾祸”,意思是亲族因为盗贼、疾病、恐惧等而耗尽、消亡。被这种亲族灾祸所触,就是被覆盖、被压倒、被具有。其余几项也按同样的方式理解。但这里有一个不同之处:财富的毁坏就是“财富灾祸”,意思是财富因为国王、盗贼等而耗尽、丧失。疾病本身就是灾祸,所以叫“病灾祸”,因为疾病毁坏、破坏健康,所以是灾祸。戒的毁坏就是“戒灾祸”,这是对无道德状态的称呼。正在破坏正见而生起的见本身就是灾祸,叫“见灾祸”。在这里,前两种灾祸是未完成的,后三种是已完成的,并且被三相所逼恼。前三种既不是善也不是不善,而戒灾祸和见灾祸这两种则是不善。巴利
Sokaniddese viyasatīti byasanaṃ, hitasukhaṃ khipati viddhaṃsetīti attho. Ñātīnaṃ byasanaṃ ñātibyasanaṃ, corarogabhayādīhi ñātikkhayo ñātivināsoti attho. Tena ñātibyasanena. Phuṭṭhassāti ajjhotthaṭassa abhibhūtassa, samannāgatassāti attho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – bhogānaṃ byasanaṃ bhogabyasanaṃ, rājacorādivasena bhogakkhayo bhogavināsoti attho. Rogoyeva byasanaṃ rogabyasanaṃ. Rogo hi ārogyaṃ viyasati vināsetīti byasanaṃ. Sīlassa byasanaṃ sīlabyasanaṃ. Dussīlyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhiṃ vināsayamānā uppannā diṭṭhi eva byasanaṃ diṭṭhibyasanaṃ. Ettha ca purimāni dve anipphannāni, pacchimāni tīṇi nipphannāni tilakkhaṇabbhāhatāni. Purimāni ca tīṇi neva kusalāni na akusalāni, sīladiṭṭhibyasanadvayaṃ akusalaṃ.
“以某一种”是指:在已经发生的各种灾祸中,比如朋友、同伴等遭遇的灾祸,无论是哪一种;或者在尚未发生的灾祸中,无论以任何方式。所谓“具足”,是指被它跟随、缠住而无法脱身。“以某一种苦法”是指任何一种能引生忧的苦因。“忧”就是因忧愁而成为忧。这是由那些原因所生起的忧的自性本身。“忧愁”是忧愁的样子。“忧愁的状态”就是忧愁的存在状态。“内忧”就是内在的忧。第二个词因为加上前缀而语气加强。因为这种忧生起时,好像把内在烤干、彻底烤干一样,所以称为“内忧、内枯”。“心的焦灼”是心焦灼的样子。因为忧生起时,就像火一样烧心、灼心,让人说出“我的心被烧了,我什么都想不起来了”。“忧心”就是痛苦的心,它的状态就是忧。由于随入之义,忧本身就是箭,所以称为“忧箭”。巴利
Aññataraññatarenāti gahitesu vā yena kenaci aggahitesu vā mittāmaccabyasanādīsu yena kenaci. Samannāgatassāti samanubandhassa aparimuccamānassa. Aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammenāti yena kenaci sokadukkhassa uppattihetunā. Sokoti socanakavasena soko. Idaṃ tehi kāraṇehi uppajjanakasokassa sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Socanāti socanākāro. Socitattanti socitabhāvo. Antosokoti abbhantarasoko. Dutiyapadaṃ upasaggena vaḍḍhitaṃ. So hi abbhantaraṃ sukkhāpento viya parisukkhāpento viya uppajjatīti ‘‘antosoko antoparisoko’’ti vuccati. Cetaso parijjhāyanāti cittassa parijjhāyanākāro. Soko hi uppajjamāno aggi viya cittaṃ jhāpeti dahati, ‘‘cittaṃ me jhāmaṃ, na me kiñci paṭibhātī’’ti vadāpeti. Dukkhito mano dummano, tassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Anupaviṭṭhaṭṭhena sokova sallanti sokasallaṃ.
在解释“悲叹”时,人们这样反复喊“我的女儿,我的儿子”,一边喊一边哭,所以叫“哀号”。反复称赞、描述这个那个的样子,一边说一边哭,所以叫“悲叹”。接下来两组两个词,都是按照前面两组那样,从行相和状态的角度来说明的。“语”就是言语。“空话”就是空洞、没有意义的话。因为话说一半、说错等等而变成不正的话,就是“乱说”。“喃喃”就是一再地说。“喃喃的方式”就是喃喃性。“已喃喃的状态”就是喃喃状态。巴利
Paridevaniddese ‘‘mayhaṃ dhītā, mayhaṃ putto’’ti evaṃ ādissa ādissa devanti rodanti etenāti ādevo. Taṃ taṃ vaṇṇaṃ parikittetvā parikittetvā devanti etenāti paridevo. Tato parāni dve dve padāni purimadvayasseva ākārabhāvaniddesavasena vuttāni. Vācāti vacanaṃ. Palāpoti tucchaṃ niratthakavacanaṃ. Upaḍḍhabhaṇitaaññabhaṇitādivasena virūpo palāpoti vippalāpo. Lālappoti punappunaṃ lapanaṃ. Lālappanākāro lālappanā. Lālappitassa bhāvo lālappitattaṃ.
在解释“苦”的时候,因为它是依止于身体的,所以是“身苦”。以非甜为含义,所以是“不可意”。“身”这个词排除了心理上的不可意,“不可意”这个词排除了身体上的可意。那本身就在逼迫、折磨,所以叫“苦”,意思是:它让生起它的那个人陷入苦。或者,仅仅因为它本身就是苦,所以叫“苦”。“身触所生”,就是从身触生起的。不可意、苦的感受,就是不可意的感受而不是可意的,是苦的感受而不是乐的感受。后面这三个词是按阴性词性来说的。不可意的受不是可意的受,苦的受不是乐的受——这里的意思就是这样。那身体的、不可意的、苦的感受,那从身触生起的不可意、苦的受——这就叫作“苦”。应当这样连接来理解。巴利
Dukkhaniddese kāyanissitattā kāyikaṃ. Amadhuraṭṭhena asātaṃ. Kāyikapadena cetasikaasātaṃ paṭikkhipati, asātapadena kāyikasātaṃ. Tadeva dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ dukkhitaṃ karotīti attho. Dukkhamattā vā dukkhaṃ. Kāyasamphassajanti kāyasamphasse jātaṃ. Asātaṃ dukkhaṃ vedayitanti asātaṃ vedayitaṃ na sātaṃ, dukkhaṃ vedayitaṃ na sukhaṃ. Parato tīṇi padāni itthiliṅgavasena vuttāni. Asātā vedanā na sātā, dukkhā vedanā na sukhāti ayameva panettha attho. Yaṃ kāyikaṃ asātaṃ dukkhaṃ vedayitaṃ, yā kāyasamphassajā asātā dukkhā vedanā, idaṃ vuccati dukkhanti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
在解说“忧”时,“意恶”就是心被败坏,或者说,因为感受低劣,心是卑劣的,所以叫“意恶”。“意恶”的状态就是“忧”。因为它依止于心,所以是“心所”。 “心触所生”,就是从心触而生起的。巴利
Domanassaniddese duṭṭhu manoti dummano, hīnavedanattā vā kucchitaṃ manoti dummano, dummanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Cittanissitattā cetasikaṃ. Cetosamphassajanti cittasamphasse jātaṃ.
在解释“恼”时,以疲惫为含义,所以叫“恼”。这是指心陷入消沉、沮丧状态时所产生的疲惫,这就是它的名称。强烈的疲惫,就是“大恼”。被疲惫所困的状态,就是“恼性”。被大恼所困的状态,就是“大恼性”。巴利
Upāyāsaniddese āyāsanaṭṭhena āyāso. Saṃsīdanavisīdanākārappavattassa cittakilamathassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Balavaāyāso upāyāso. Āyāsitabhāvo āyāsitattaṃ. Upāyāsitabhāvo upāyāsitattaṃ.
在解释“怨憎会”时,“此处”指的就是这个世界。“他所有的”就是“他拥有的那些”。“不可爱”是指不是自己主动寻求的。不管是不是主动寻求,这都只是对不讨人喜欢的所缘的一种叫法。它们在心中不讨喜、进不去心,所以叫“不可喜”。它们在心里不被喜欢,或者说不让心增长,所以叫“不可意”。“色”等等,是在说明它们的本性。想要无利的人,就是“想无利的人”。想要无益的人,就是“想无益的人”。想要不安乐、想要苦住的人,就是“想不安乐的人”。他们不希望众生得到由四种轭带来的安稳、无畏、脱离轮回,反而希望众生处在有怖畏的轮回里,所以叫“想非离轭安稳的人”。另外,因为不希望信等增长这种利益,反而希望信等退减这种无利,所以叫“想无利的人”。因为不希望得到作为信等之方法的利益,反而希望得到作为信等退减之方法的无益,所以叫“想无益的人”。因为不希望得到安乐住,反而希望得到不安乐住,所以叫“想不安乐的人”。因为不希望任何人得到无畏,反而希望得到怖畏,所以叫“想非离轭安稳的人”。这里的意思应当这样理解。巴利
Appiyasampayoganiddese idhāti imasmiṃ loke. Yassāti ye assa. Aniṭṭhāti apariyesitā. Pariyesitā vā hontu apariyesitā vā, nāmamevetaṃ amanāpārammaṇānaṃ. Manasmiṃ na kamanti na pavisantīti akantā. Manasmiṃ na appiyanti, na vā manaṃ vaḍḍhentīti amanāpā. Rūpātiādi tesaṃ sabhāvanidassanaṃ. Anatthaṃ kāmenti icchantīti anatthakāmā. Ahitaṃ kāmenti icchantīti ahitakāmā. Aphāsuṃ dukkhavihāraṃ kāmenti icchantīti aphāsukāmā. Catūhi yogehi khemaṃ nibbhayaṃ vivaṭṭaṃ na kāmenti, sabhayaṃ vaṭṭameva nesaṃ kāmenti icchantīti ayogakkhemakāmā. Apica saddhādīnaṃ vuddhisaṅkhātassa atthassa akāmanato, tesaṃyeva hānisaṅkhātassa anatthassa ca kāmanato anatthakāmā. Saddhādīnaṃyeva upāyabhūtassa hitassa akāmanato, saddhāhāniādīnaṃ upāyabhūtassa ahitassa ca kāmanato ahitakāmā. Phāsuvihārassa akāmanato, aphāsuvihārassa ca kāmanato aphāsukāmā. Yassa kassaci nibbhayassa akāmanato, bhayassa ca kāmanato ayogakkhemakāmāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“会合”是指去了之后结合在一起。“来会”是指和来的人结合在一起。“共处”是指在站立、坐下等情况下共同在一起。“和合”是指一切事务一起做。这是按有情来说的。如果按诸行来说,那么凡能得到的,就应当采用它。然而,那个“怨憎会”从实质上说并不是单独存在的一个法,只是因为它是与怨憎会合者的两种苦的所依处,才被称为苦。巴利
Saṅgatīti gantvā saṃyogo. Samāgamoti āgatehi saṃyogo. Samodhānanti ṭhānanisajjādīsu sahabhāvo. Missībhāvoti sabbakiccānaṃ sahakaraṇaṃ. Ayaṃ sattavasena yojanā. Saṅkhāravasena pana yaṃ labbhati, taṃ gahetabbaṃ. So pana appiyasampayogo atthato eko dhammo nāma natthi, kevalaṃ appiyasampayuttānaṃ duvidhassāpi dukkhassa vatthubhāvato dukkhoti vutto.
爱别离的解释,应当依照前面所说的相反方式来理解。这里说的“母或”等等,是为了具体说明那些属于想利益自己的人。其中,因为珍爱,所以是母亲;因为喜爱,所以是父亲。因为亲近,所以是兄弟;姊妹也是这样。因为慈爱,所以是朋友;或者因为能推心置腹,把一切秘密都放在心里,所以是朋友。在应做的事务上共同参与,所以是同僚。因为知道“这是我们的内亲”,或者因为被知晓,所以是亲戚。因为有血缘关系,所以是血亲。父方的亲戚是亲戚,母方的亲戚是血亲。或者,父母双方的亲戚是亲戚,岳父母和公婆方的亲戚是血亲。这个爱别离,从究竟意义上说也不是单独一个法,只是因为它是与所爱别离者的两种苦的所依处,所以被称为苦。以上是所有注释的说法。不过,因为诸谛具有如实相,所以用相应和分离的说法,正好特别说明了不可爱与可爱的事物,这样说也是合理的。巴利
Piyavippayoganiddeso vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo. Mātā vātiādi panettha atthakāme sarūpena dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha mamāyatīti mātā, piyāyatīti pitā. Bhajatīti bhātā, tathā bhaginī. Mettāyantīti mittā, minanti vā sabbaguyhesu anto pakkhipantīti mittā. Kiccakaraṇīyesu sahabhāvaṭṭhena amā hontīti amaccā. ‘‘Ayaṃ amhākaṃ ajjhattiko’’ti evaṃ jānanti, ñāyantīti vā ñātī. Lohitena sambandhāti sālohitā. Pitupakkhikā ñātī, mātupakkhikā sālohitā. Mātāpitupakkhikā vā ñātī, sassusasurapakkhikā sālohitā. Ayampi piyavippayogo atthato eko dhammo nāma natthi, kevalaṃ piyavippayuttānaṃ duvidhassāpi dukkhassa vatthubhāvato dukkhoti vutto. Idamettha sabbaaṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ. Saccānaṃ pana tathalakkhaṇattā sampayogavippayogavacanehi appiyapiyavatthūniyeva visesitānīti vattuṃ yujjatīti.
在解释“求不得”时,“有生法者”指具有生的性质、以生为本性的众生。“欲求生起”就是渴爱生起。“啊,但愿”是希求。“我们成为”意思是“我们将会成为”。然而,这种事并不是单靠欲求就能达到的——也就是这种心愿:“啊,但愿我们不成为有生法者,但愿生不再降临到我们身上。”这种无生的状态,存在于已断除集因的贤善者身上,也存在于已般涅槃者身上——生不再来。而这种所愿,对于有欲求的人来说,不修习道就无法达到;对于没有欲求的人来说,通过修习道也能达到。所以,它并不是单靠欲求就能得到的。“此亦”中的“亦”,是连同上面其余诸苦一起说的。巴利
Icchitālābhaniddese jātidhammānanti jātisabhāvānaṃ jātipakatikānaṃ. Icchā uppajjatīti taṇhā uppajjati. Aho vatāti patthanā. Assāmāti bhaveyyāma. Na kho panetaṃ icchāya pattabbanti yaṃ etaṃ ‘‘aho vata mayaṃ na jātidhammā assāma, na ca vata no jāti āgaccheyyā’’ti evaṃ pahīnasamudayesu sādhūsu vijjamānaṃ ajātidhammattaṃ parinibbutesu ca vijjamānaṃ jātiyā anāgamanaṃ icchitaṃ, taṃ icchantassāpi maggabhāvanāya vinā appattabbato, anicchantassāpi ca bhāvanāya pattabbato na icchāya pattabbaṃ nāma hoti. Idampīti etampi. Upari sesāni upādāya apisaddo.
在解释取蕴时,“seyyathidaṃ”是个不变词,它的意思是“那些是哪些呢?”色本身就是取蕴,所以叫色取蕴。其余几个蕴也按同样的方式理解。巴利
Upādānakkhandhaniddese seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa te katame iti ceti attho. Rūpameva upādānakkhandhoti rūpupādānakkhandho. Eseva nayo sesesupi.
集谛的解释巴利
Samudayasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
34 在解释集谛时,“那种渴爱”指的就是这种渴爱。“后有性”是指:能造成后有,就是后有;因为具有后有的习性,所以叫后有性。另外,它能带来后有,能导向后有,能一次又一次地在生存中产生结生,所以叫后有性。不过,这种渴爱有时是后有的给予者,有时不是;有时能导向后有,有时不能;有时只是因为已经给予了结生,而在生命所依方面仅仅是异熟。即使有这三种情况,它仍然得到“后有性”这个名称。也可以读作ponabbhavikā,意思相同。“喜贪俱行”是指:与被称为欢喜的贪爱一起存在,所以叫喜贪俱行。意思是说,它在意义上与贪爱完全合为一体。“处处欢喜”是指:无论在哪里结生,就在那里欢喜。或者说,在色等所缘中处处欢喜,也就是喜欢色、喜欢声、喜欢香、喜欢味、喜欢触、喜欢法。也有读作tatra tatrābhinandī,意思是处处欢喜。Seyyathidaṃ是虚词,意思是“那是什么呢”。“欲爱”是指对诸欲的渴爱,这是对五种欲乐之贪的称呼。“有爱”是指对有(生存)的渴爱。这是指以希求生存而生起的、与常见相应的贪,以及对色界、无色界生存的贪,和对禅那的贪爱。“无有爱”是指对无有的渴爱。这是指与断见相应的贪。巴利
34. Samudayasaccaniddese yāyaṃ taṇhāti yā ayaṃ taṇhā. Ponobhavikāti punabbhavakaraṇaṃ punobhavo, punobhavo sīlamassāti ponobhavikā. Apica punabbhavaṃ deti, punabbhavāya saṃvattati, punappunaṃ bhave nibbattetīti ponobhavikā. Sā panesā punabbhavassa dāyikāpi atthi adāyikāpi, punabbhavāya saṃvattanikāpi atthi asaṃvattanikāpi, dinnāya paṭisandhiyā upadhivepakkamattāpi. Sā tippakārāpi ponobhavikāti nāmaṃ labhati. Ponabbhavikātipi pāṭho, soyevattho. Abhinandanasaṅkhātena nandirāgena saha gatāti nandirāgasahagatā. Nandirāgena saddhiṃ atthato ekattameva gatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatra tatrābhinandinīti yatra yatra attabhāvo nibbattati, tatra tatra abhinandinī. Rūpādīsu vā ārammaṇesu tatra tatrābhinandinī, rūpābhinandinī saddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbadhammābhinandinīti attho. Tatra tatrābhinandītipi pāṭho, tatra tatra abhinandayatīti attho. Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa sā katamā iti ceti attho. Kāmataṇhāti kāme taṇhā, pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bhavataṇhāti bhave taṇhā. Bhavapatthanāvasena uppannassa sassatadiṭṭhisahagatassa rāgassa rūpārūpabhavarāgassa ca jhānanikantiyā ca etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vibhavataṇhāti vibhave taṇhā. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
现在,为了详细说明那渴爱的所依处,说出了“而那个确实……”等话。其中,“生起”就是产生。“安住”是指以反复运转的方式确立下来。它生起时在哪里生起?安住时又在哪里安住?这就是它们之间的关联。“世间中可爱、可喜的色”——是指在世间中具有可爱性质和甜美性质的东西。在“眼在世间”等说法中,众生因为把眼等执为“我的”而深深执着,安住在自己的成就中,他们随着在镜子等物中取相的方式,把清净的眼净色想象成黄金天宫里敞开的宝石狮窗一样;把耳想象成银制导管或装饰的腰带绳一样;把被称为“高鼻”的鼻想象成旋转放置的雌黄圆棒一样;把舌想象成红色毛毯片,柔软、光滑、具足甘甜滋味;把身想象成沙罗树干或黄金拱门一样;把意想象成与他人之心不同、极为广大;把色想象成金色翅子树花等的颜色;把声想象成陶醉的杜鹃、夜莺柔和吹奏的宝石笛声一样;对自己所获得的、由四大生起的香等所缘,他们想:“别人谁有这样的东西?”当他们这样想时,那些眼等对他们就成了可爱、可喜的。于是,对他们来说,在那上面,未生起的渴爱生起了,已生起的则以反复运转的方式安住下来。因此,长老说:“眼在世间是可爱、可喜的,这渴爱生起时就在这里生起”等。其中,“生起时”的意思是:当它生起时,就在这里生起。巴利
Idāni tassā taṇhāya vatthuṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ sā kho panesātiādimāha. Tattha uppajjatīti jāyati. Nivisatīti punappunaṃ pavattivasena patiṭṭhāti. Uppajjamānā kattha uppajjati, nivisamānā kattha nivisatīti sambandho. Yaṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpanti yaṃ lokasmiṃ piyasabhāvañceva madhurasabhāvañca. Cakkhu loketiādīsu lokasmiñhi cakkhuādīsu mamattena abhiniviṭṭhā sattā sampattiyaṃ patiṭṭhitā attano cakkhuṃ ādāsādīsu nimittaggahaṇānusārena vippasannaṃ pañcapasādaṃ suvaṇṇavimāne ugghāṭitamaṇisīhapañjaraṃ viya maññanti, sotaṃ rajatapanāḷikaṃ viya pāmaṅgasuttakaṃ viya ca maññanti, tuṅganāsāti laddhavohāraṃ ghānaṃ vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitaharitālavaṭṭiṃ viya maññanti, jivhaṃ rattakambalapaṭalaṃ viya mudusiniddhamadhurarasadaṃ maññanti, kāyaṃ sālalaṭṭhiṃ viya suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya ca maññanti, manaṃ aññesaṃ manena asadisaṃ uḷāraṃ maññanti, rūpaṃ suvaṇṇakaṇikārapupphādivaṇṇaṃ viya, saddaṃ mattakaravīkakokilamandadhamitamaṇivaṃsanigghosaṃ viya, attanā paṭiladdhāni catusamuṭṭhānikagandhārammaṇādīni ‘‘kassaññassa evarūpāni atthī’’ti maññanti, tesaṃ evaṃ maññamānānaṃ tāni cakkhādīni piyarūpāni ceva sātarūpāni ca honti. Atha nesaṃ tattha anuppannā ceva taṇhā uppajjati , uppannā ca punappunaṃ pavattivasena nivisati. Tasmā thero ‘‘cakkhu loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjatī’’tiādimāha. Tattha uppajjamānāti yadā uppajjati, tadā ettha uppajjatīti attho.
灭谛的解释的注释巴利
Nirodhasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
在解释灭谛的时候,对于“那正是这渴爱”这句话,本来应该说成“那正是这苦”,但因为苦只有靠灭除集才能灭,没有别的办法。正如所说的:巴利
Nirodhasaccaniddese yo tassāyeva taṇhāyāti ettha ‘‘yo tasseva dukkhassā’’ti vattabbe yasmā samudayanirodheneva dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, no aññathā. Yathāha –
就像树根没受损、还很结实,即使树被砍了,也还是会再长出来;
就是这样,当渴爱的随眠还没有被断除时,这苦就会一次又一次地生起。巴利
‘‘Yathāpi mūle anupaddave daḷhe, chinnopi rukkho punareva rūhati; Evampi taṇhānusaye anūhate, nibbattatī dukkhamidaṃ punappuna’’nti. (dha. pa. 338);
所以,为了说明苦的灭,而要通过说明集的灭来说明它,才这样讲。如来的行为方式像狮子,他们在灭苦和显示苦灭时,都是从因上下手,而不是从果上下手。外道的行为方式则像狗,他们在灭苦和显示苦灭时,通过自我折磨的苦行以及宣说该苦行,从果上下手,而不是从因上下手。导师因为具有狮子般的行为方式,所以从因上下手,说了“yo tassāyeva”等这段话。法将舍利弗也同样按照导师所说的次第来讲。巴利
Tasmā taṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ dassento samudayanirodhena dassetuṃ evamāha. Sīhasamānavuttino hi tathāgatā, te dukkhaṃ nirodhentā dukkhanirodhañca dassentā hetumhi paṭipajjanti, na phale. Suvānavuttino pana aññatitthiyā , te dukkhaṃ nirodhentā dukkhanirodhañca dassentā attakilamathānuyogena ceva tasseva ca desanāya phale paṭipajjanti, na hetumhīti. Sīhasamānavuttitāya satthā hetumhi paṭipajjanto ‘‘yo tassāyevā’’tiādimāha. Dhammasenāpatipi satthārā vuttakkamenevāha.
在这里,“就是那渴爱”指的是:前面已经说它“能导致再生”,又按欲爱等分类加以区分,并按生起和安住的方式阐明过的那一种渴爱,就是那渴爱本身。“无余离贪灭尽”中,“离贪”指的是圣道,因为经上说“由离贪而解脱”。由离贪而有的灭,就是离贪灭;由于彻底拔除了随眠烦恼,所以是无余的离贪灭,即“无余离贪灭尽”。或者也可以说,“离贪”就是断除,因此无余的离贪就是无余的灭,这里应当这样理解其搭配。不过从义理上说,这些“无余离贪灭尽”等等,全都是涅槃的同义词。因为从究竟意义上说,苦灭圣谛就叫涅槃。又因为依靠涅槃,渴爱才无余地离贪、止息,所以说它是“就是那渴爱的无余离贪灭尽”。而依靠涅槃,渴爱被舍弃、被彻底放下、被解脱,不再执著;在种种欲乐的执著处中,连一丝一毫的执著也不存在,因此涅槃被称为舍弃、彻底放下、解脱、无执著。涅槃只有一个,但它的名称,相对于一切有为法的名称而言,却有许多个,比如:无余离贪、无余灭尽、舍弃、彻底放下、解脱、无执著、灭尽贪、灭尽瞋、灭尽痴、灭尽渴爱、不生起、不转起、无相、无愿、不驱使、不再结生、不再受生、不去趣、不生、不老、不病、不死、无忧、无悲泣、无苦恼、无染污等等。巴利
Tattha tassāyeva taṇhāyāti yā sā taṇhā ‘‘ponobhavikā’’ti vatvā kāmataṇhādivasena vibhattā uppattinivesanavasena ca heṭṭhā pakāsitā, tassāyeva taṇhāya. Asesavirāganirodhoti virāgo vuccati maggo, ‘‘virāgā vimuccatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.245; saṃ. ni. 3.12; mahāva. 23) hi vuttaṃ. Virāgena nirodho virāganirodho, anusayasamugghātato aseso virāganirodho asesavirāganirodho. Atha vā virāgoti hi pahānaṃ vuccati, tasmā aseso virāgo aseso nirodhoti evampettha yojanā daṭṭhabbā. Atthato pana sabbāneva panetāni asesavirāganirodhotiādīni nibbānasseva vevacanāni. Paramatthato hi dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccanti nibbānaṃ vuccati. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma taṇhā asesā virajjati nirujjhati, tasmā taṃ ‘‘tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho’’ti vuccati. Nibbānañca āgamma taṇhā cajīyati paṭinissajjīyati muccati na allīyati, kāmaguṇālayesu cettha ekopi ālayo natthi, tasmā nibbānaṃ cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayoti vuccati. Ekameva hi nibbānaṃ, nāmāni panassa sabbasaṅkhatānaṃ nāmapaṭipakkhavasena anekāni honti. Seyyathidaṃ – asesavirāgo asesanirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo mohakkhayo taṇhākkhayo anuppādo appavattaṃ animittaṃ appaṇihitaṃ anāyūhanaṃ appaṭisandhi anupapatti agati ajātaṃ ajaraṃ abyādhi amataṃ asokaṃ aparidevaṃ anupāyāsaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhantiādīni.
现在,为了说明那已被圣道断除、又依涅槃而不再生起的渴爱,在先前指出它生起的那些所依处中确实不存在,经文便说“sā kho panesā”(而那个……)等语。其中,譬如有人看见田里长出一株苦瓜藤,就从顶端开始追根寻底,把它砍断。那藤蔓渐渐枯萎,最终完全辨认不出。这时就可以说,那块田里的苦瓜已经灭尽、已经断除。同样,田里的苦瓜好比存在于眼等处的渴爱。这渴爱被圣道连根砍断后,依涅槃而不再生起;一旦到了这个地步,它在那些所依处中就像田里的苦瓜一样,不再显现。又譬如从林中抓来一群盗贼,在城南门处将他们处死,人们便可以说“林中的盗贼已经死了、已经被杀了”。同样,林中的盗贼好比存在于眼等处的渴爱;这些渴爱达到涅槃,正如盗贼在南门被处决,因为已在涅槃中灭尽,所以说在涅槃中灭尽。这样灭尽之后,它在那些所依处中就像林中的盗贼一样,不再显现。因此,为了表明它正是在这些处所灭去的,经文便说:“眼在世间是可爱之色、可意之色,就在这里,那渴爱被断除时便被断除”等等。或者也可以说:由于已经遍知渴爱生起的所依处,在那已被遍知的所依处中不再生起,所以从“不再生起而灭”的角度说,渴爱正是在它生起的所依处中灭去。这里,“被断除”是从与生起相对立的角度说的,“灭去”是从与执著相对立的角度说的。巴利
Idāni maggena chinnāya nibbānaṃ āgamma appavattippattāyapi ca taṇhāya yesu vatthūsu tassā uppatti dassitā, tattheva abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ sā kho panesātiādimāha. Tattha yathā puriso khette jātaṃ tittakālābuvalliṃ disvā aggato paṭṭhāya mūlaṃ pariyesitvā chindeyya, sā anupubbena milāyitvā appaññattiṃ gaccheyya, tato tasmiṃ khette tittakālābu niruddhā pahīnāti vucceyya, evameva khette tittakālābu viya cakkhādīsu taṇhā. Sā ariyamaggena mūlacchinnā nibbānaṃ āgamma appavattiṃ gacchati. Evaṃ gatā pana tesu vatthūsu khette tittakālābu viya na paññāyati. Yathā ca aṭavito core ānetvā nagarassa dakkhiṇadvāre ghāteyyuṃ, tato aṭaviyaṃ corā matāti vā māritāti vā vucceyyuṃ, evameva aṭaviyaṃ corā viya yā cakkhādīsu taṇhā, sā dakkhiṇadvāre corā viya nibbānaṃ āgamma niruddhattā nibbāne niruddhā. Evaṃ niruddhā pana tesu vatthūsu aṭaviyaṃ corā viya na paññāyati. Tenassā tattheva nirodhaṃ dassento ‘‘cakkhu loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyatī’’tiādimāha. Atha vā taṇhuppādavatthussa pariññātattā pariññātavatthusmiṃ puna na uppajjanato anuppādanirodhavasena taṇhuppādavatthusmiṃyeva nirujjhatīti vuccati. Ettha ca uppajjanapaṭipakkhavasena pahīyatīti vuttaṃ, nivisanapaṭipakkhavasena nirujjhatīti.
第4章 道谛的解说注释巴利
Maggasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
在解释道谛时,说“就是这个”,是为了否定其他道而作出的限定(《分别论注》205)。称为“圣”,是因为它远离了各自圣道所要断除的烦恼,能成就圣者的状态,也能使证得圣果。“具有八支”,所以叫“八支的”。这八支圣道,就像四支的军队或五支的乐器一样,只是诸支分的组合而已;离开诸支分,就没有所谓的“道”。巴利
Maggasaccaniddese ayamevāti aññamaggapaṭikkhepanatthaṃ niyamanaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 205). Ariyoti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi ārakattā, ariyabhāvakarattā, ariyaphalapaṭilābhakarattā ca ariyo. Aṭṭha aṅgāni assāti aṭṭhaṅgiko. Svāyaṃ caturaṅgikā viya senā, pañcaṅgikaṃ viya tūriyaṃ aṅgamattameva hoti, aṅgavinimutto natthi.
现在,为了说明“道只是诸支分而已,离开诸支分就没有道”,便说出“正见……正定”等。其中,正见以正确观见为特征;正思惟以正确安立为特征;正语以正确摄持为特征;正业以正确策起为特征;正命以正确净化为特征;正精进以正确策励为特征;正念以正确安住为特征;正定以正确专注为特征。在这八支中,每一支各有三种作用。比如:正见首先断除邪见以及与自己相违的其他烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,并且如实观见相应法而没有迷惑——这是通过消除覆盖这些相应法的愚痴而实现的。正思惟等其余各支也同样断除邪思惟等,并以涅槃为所缘。不过在这里特别指出:正思惟把俱生法正确安立,正语正确摄持,正业正确策起,正命正确净化,正精进正确策励,正念正确安住,正定正确专注。巴利
Idāni aṅgamattameva maggo aṅgavinimutto natthīti dassento sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhītiādimāha. Tattha sammā dassanalakkhaṇā sammādiṭṭhi. Sammā abhiniropanalakkhaṇo sammāsaṅkappo. Sammā pariggahalakkhaṇā sammāvācā. Sammā samuṭṭhāpanalakkhaṇo sammākammanto. Sammā vodāpanalakkhaṇo sammāājīvo. Sammā paggahalakkhaṇo sammāvāyāmo. Sammā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇā sammāsati. Sammā samādhānalakkhaṇo sammāsamādhi. Tesu ekekassa tīṇi tīṇi kiccāni honti. Seyyathidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi tāva aññehipi attano paccanīkakilesehi saddhiṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ pajahati, nirodhañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca passati tappaṭicchādakamohavidhamanavasena asammohato. Sammāsaṅkappādayopi tatheva micchāsaṅkappādīni ca pajahanti, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karonti. Visesato panettha sammāsaṅkappo sahajātadhamme sammā abhiniropeti, sammāvācā sammā pariggaṇhāti, sammākammanto sammā samuṭṭhāpeti, sammāājīvo sammā vodāpeti, sammāvāyāmo sammā paggaṇhāti, sammāsati sammā upaṭṭhāpeti, sammāsamādhi sammā samādahati.
此正是正见,在道前阶段是不同刹那、不同所缘的,到了道刹那则是同一刹那、同一所缘。从作用上说,它获得“苦智”等四种名称。正思惟等在道前阶段也是不同刹那、不同所缘,到了道刹那则是同一刹那、同一所缘。其中,正思惟从作用上获得“出离思惟”等三种名称。正语等三支在道前阶段既是远离也是思,但在道刹那则只是远离。正精进和正念这两者,从作用上依据四正勤和四念处而获得四种名称。至于正定,无论在道前阶段还是在道刹那,都只是正定。巴利
Apicesā sammādiṭṭhi nāma pubbabhāge nānākkhaṇā nānārammaṇā hoti, maggakāle ekakkhaṇā ekārammaṇā. Kiccato pana ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādīni cattāri nāmāni labhati . Sammāsaṅkappādayopi pubbabhāge nānākkhaṇā nānārammaṇā honti, maggakāle ekakkhaṇā ekārammaṇā. Tesu sammāsaṅkappo kiccato nekkhammasaṅkappotiādīni tīṇi nāmāni labhati. Sammāvācādayo tayo pubbabhāge viratiyopi honti cetanāyopi, maggakkhaṇe pana viratiyoyeva. Sammāvāyāmo sammāsatīti idampi dvayaṃ kiccato sammappadhānasatipaṭṭhānavasena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Sammāsamādhi pana pubbabhāgepi maggakkhaṇepi sammāsamādhiyeva.
在这八法中,世尊之所以首先宣说正见,是因为对于为证得涅槃而修行的瑜伽行者来说,正见的帮助最大。正如《法集论》中所说,这正见被称为“慧灯、慧剑”。因此,在道前分位,以这称为观智的正见,破除无明黑暗,摧毁烦恼贼,瑜伽行者便能安稳地到达涅槃。所以,首先宣说正见。巴利
Iti imesu aṭṭhasu dhammesu bhagavatā nibbānādhigamāya paṭipannassa yogino bahūpakārattā paṭhamaṃ sammādiṭṭhi desitā. Ayañhi ‘‘paññāpajjoto paññāsattha’’nti (dha. sa. 16, 20, 29) ca vuttā. Tasmā etāya pubbabhāge vipassanāñāṇasaṅkhātāya sammādiṭṭhiyā avijjandhakāraṃ vidhamitvā kilesacore ghātento khemena yogāvacaro nibbānaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā paṭhamaṃ sammādiṭṭhi desitā.
正思惟对正见有很大的帮助,所以紧接着正见之后宣说。就像金匠用手把钱币反复翻来翻去,再用眼睛观察,就能知道“这枚是假的,这枚是真的”;同样,瑜伽行者在道前阶段,用寻思反复思量之后,再以观慧来观察,就能知道“这些法是欲界的,这些法是色界等的”。又像有人抓住树的一端,把大树反复翻转后交给木匠,木匠用斧头砍削后拿去使用;同样,瑜伽行者对经过寻思反复思量后交付的诸法,以智慧简别——“这些法是欲界的,这些法是色界等的”——然后拿去用于修行。因此,正思惟在正见之后宣说。巴利
Sammāsaṅkappo pana tassā bahūpakāro. Tasmā tadanantaraṃ vutto. Yathā hi heraññiko hatthena parivattetvā parivattetvā cakkhunā kahāpaṇaṃ olokento ‘‘ayaṃ kūṭo ayaṃ cheko’’ti jānāti, evaṃ yogāvacaropi pubbabhāge vitakkena vitakketvā vitakketvā vipassanāpaññāya olokayamāno ‘‘ime dhammā kāmāvacarā, ime rūpāvacarādayo’’ti jānāti. Yathā vā pana purisena koṭiyaṃ gahetvā parivattetvā parivattetvā dinnaṃ mahārukkhaṃ tacchako vāsiyā tacchetvā kamme upaneti, evaṃ vitakkena vitakketvā vitakketvā dinnadhamme yogāvacaro paññāya ‘‘ime dhammā kāmāvacarā, ime rūpāvacarā’’tiādinā nayena paricchinditvā kamme upaneti. Tasmā sammāsaṅkappo sammādiṭṭhānantaraṃ vutto.
这个正思惟,就像对正见有帮助一样,对正语也同样有帮助。正如经中所说:“居士,先经过寻与伺的思量,然后才开口说话。”所以,紧接着它之后,就宣说了正语。巴利
Svāyaṃ yathā sammādiṭṭhiyā, evaṃ sammāvācāyapi upakārako. Yathāha – ‘‘pubbe kho, gahapati, vitakketvā vicāretvā pacchā vācaṃ bhindatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.463). Tasmā tadanantaraṃ sammāvācā vuttā.
因为世间人总是先在心里盘算“我要做这个、做那个”,然后用言语商量好,才动手去从事各种行业做事,所以语对身业有辅助作用。因此,在正语之后紧接着宣说正业。巴利
Yasmā pana ‘‘idañcidañca karissāmā’’ti paṭhamaṃ vācāya saṃvidahitvā loke kammante payojenti, tasmā vācā kāyakammassa upakārikāti sammāvācāya anantaraṃ sammākammanto vutto.
不过,只有断除了四种语恶行和三种身恶行、并圆满这两种善行的人,才能具足活命第八戒;不是这样的人就不能具足。因此,在正语和正业之后,接着宣说了正命。巴利
Catubbidhaṃ pana vacīduccaritaṃ, tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ pahāya ubhayaṃ sucaritaṃ pūrentasseva yasmā ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ pūrati, na itarassa , tasmā tadubhayānantaraṃ sammāājīvo vutto.
活命已经这样清净的人,不该只以“我的活命清净了”这一点就感到满足,然后放逸懈怠地过日子;而应当在一切行住坐卧的行为举止中发起精进。为了说明这一点,紧接着就说了正精进。巴利
Evaṃ visuddhājīvena pana ‘‘parisuddho me ājīvo’’ti ettāvatā paritosaṃ katvā suttappamattena viharituṃ na yuttaṃ, atha kho sabbairiyāpathesu idaṃ vīriyamārabhitabbanti dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ sammāvāyāmo vutto.
为了说明:即使已经发起精进,也应当在身体等四种所依处上把念好好地建立起来,所以紧接着正念之前,就说了正念。巴利
Tato āraddhavīriyenāpi kāyādīsu catūsu vatthūsu sati sūpaṭṭhitā kātabbāti dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ sammāsati vuttā.
因为,当念这样善巧地安立之后,他能先探寻有助与无助於定诸法的行相,然后使心专注于单一所缘,所以应当知道:正念之后紧接着就说了正定。巴利
Yasmā pana evaṃ sūpaṭṭhitāya satiyā samādhissa upakārānupakārānaṃ dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesitvā pahoti ekattārammaṇe cittaṃ samādhātuṃ, tasmā sammāsatianantaraṃ sammāsamādhi vuttoti veditabboti.
在正见的解说里,通过“于苦有智”等说法,开示了以四圣谛为所缘的业处。其中,前二谛属于轮回流转,后二谛属于还灭。对这两组谛,比丘对流转的部分会产生投入业处的倾向,对还灭的部分则没有这种倾向。因为前二谛,也就是“五蕴是苦,渴爱是集”,无论是以简要的方式,还是以“哪些是五蕴?色蕴……”这样详细的方式,瑜伽行者从师长那里学来之后,反复用言语念诵,以此修行业处。而对于后二谛,也就是“灭谛是可爱、可喜、可意的,道谛是可爱、可喜、可意的”,他只是通过听闻来修行业处。他这样修行业处时,以一次通达而通达四谛,以一次现观而现观四谛。他以遍知通达而通达苦,以断舍通达而通达集,以作证通达而通达灭,以修习通达而通达道。他以遍知现观而现观苦……以修习现观而现观道。巴利
Sammādiṭṭhiniddese ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādinā catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ dassitaṃ. Tattha purimāni dve saccāni vaṭṭaṃ, pacchimāni dve vivaṭṭaṃ. Tesu bhikkhuno vaṭṭe kammaṭṭhānābhiniveso hoti, vivaṭṭe natthi abhiniveso. Purimāni hi dve saccāni ‘‘pañcakkhandhā dukkhaṃ, taṇhā samudayo’’ti evaṃ saṅkhepena ca, ‘‘katame pañcakkhandhā? Rūpakkhandho’’tiādinā nayena vitthārena ca ācariyasantike uggaṇhitvā vācāya punappunaṃ parivattento yogāvacaro kammaṃ karoti. Itaresu pana dvīsu saccesu ‘‘nirodhasaccaṃ iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ manāpaṃ, maggasaccaṃ iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ manāpa’’nti evaṃ savaneneva kammaṃ karoti. So evaṃ kammaṃ karonto cattāri saccāni ekapaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, ekābhisamayena abhisameti. Dukkhaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, samudayaṃ pahānapaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati. Nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, maggaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati. Dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena…pe… maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti.
这样,他在前行阶段,对前二谛是通过学习、反复询问、听闻、忆持、遍察而通达的;对后二谛则仅仅是通过听闻而通达。在后一阶段,对三谛是依作用而通达,对灭谛则是依所缘而通达。其中,一切通达智都是出世间的,而听闻、忆持、遍察之智则是世间的、属于欲界的。不过,省察只发生在已经证得真理的人身上,而这个人还是初学者,所以这里没有提到它。而且,这位比丘在摄取之前,并没有“我遍知苦,我断集,我证灭,我修道”这样的加行、等引、作意和省察;从摄取阶段开始才有。在后一阶段,苦确实已被遍知……道确实已被修习。巴利
Evamassa pubbabhāge dvīsu saccesu uggahaparipucchāsavanadhāraṇasammasanapaṭivedho hoti, dvīsu savanapaṭivedhoyeva. Aparabhāge tīsu kiccato paṭivedho hoti nirodhe ārammaṇapaṭivedho. Tattha sabbampi paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ, savanadhāraṇasammasanañāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ kāmāvacaraṃ. Paccavekkhaṇā pana pattasaccassa hoti, ayañca ādikammiko. Tasmā sā idha na vuttā. Imassa ca bhikkhuno pubbe pariggahato ‘‘dukkhaṃ parijānāmi, samudayaṃ pajahāmi, nirodhaṃ sacchikaromi, maggaṃ bhāvemī’’ti ābhogasamannāhāramanasikārapaccavekkhaṇā natthi, pariggahato paṭṭhāya hoti. Aparabhāge pana dukkhaṃ pariññātameva hoti…pe… maggo bhāvitova hoti.
在这里,有两谛因为难以见到而甚深,另有两谛因为甚深而难以见到。苦谛从生起方面来说是很明显的,比如被树桩、荆棘刺伤时,也会说出“啊,真苦”这样的话。集谛从想吃喝等生起方面来说也是明显的。然而,从证悟特相来看,两者都是甚深的。所以,这两谛是因为难以见到而甚深。而要见到另外两谛,所付出的努力就像为了抓住有顶天而伸手、为了触到无间地狱而伸脚,又像把一根分成百份的毛发的尖端与另一根毛发的尖端对接一样。所以,这两谛是因为甚深而难以见到。如此,对于这四谛——前两谛因难以见到而甚深,后两谛因甚深而难以见到——针对通过学习等方式生起前行智这一点,这里说了“苦智”等。但在证悟的刹那,那只有一种智。巴利
Tattha dve saccāni duddasattā gambhīrāni, dve gambhīrattā duddasāni. Dukkhasaccañhi uppattito pākaṭaṃ, khāṇukaṇṭakappahārādīsu ‘‘aho dukkha’’nti vattabbatampi āpajjati. Samudayasaccaṃ khāditukāmatābhuñjitukāmatādivasena uppattito pākaṭaṃ. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhato pana ubhayampi gambhīraṃ. Iti tāni duddasattā gambhīrāni. Itaresaṃ pana dvinnaṃ dassanatthāya payogo bhavaggaggahaṇatthaṃ hatthapasāraṇaṃ viya, avīciphusanatthaṃ pādapasāraṇaṃ viya, satadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭipaṭipādanaṃ viya ca hoti. Iti tāni gambhīrattā duddasāni. Evaṃ duddasattā gambhīresu gambhīrattā ca duddasesu catūsu saccesu uggahādivasena pubbabhāgañāṇuppattiṃ sandhāya idaṃ ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭivedhakkhaṇe pana ekameva taṃ ñāṇaṃ hoti.
另有一些人说:四谛有四种智——闻所成智、确定智、遍察智、现观智。其中,什么是闻所成智?就是或简略或详细地听闻四谛之后,知道“这是苦,这是集,这是灭,这是道”。这就是闻所成智。什么是确定智?他审查所听闻的意义,从法和相两方面来确定:“这些法属于这个谛,这个谛有这个相。”这就是确定智。什么是遍察智?他这样按顺序确定四谛之后,再只取苦,一直到种姓智之前,以无常、苦、无我来遍察。这就是遍察智。什么是现观智?在出世间道的刹那,以一种智同时无前无后地现观四谛,即“以遍知现观来现观苦,以断现观来现观集,以作证现观来现观灭,以修习现观来现观道”。这就是现观智。巴利
Apare panāhu – catubbidhaṃ saccesu ñāṇaṃ sutamayañāṇaṃ vavatthānañāṇaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ abhisamayañāṇanti. Tattha katamaṃ sutamayañāṇaṃ? Saṃkhittena vā vitthārena vā cattāri saccāni sutvā jānāti ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ayaṃ samudayo, ayaṃ nirodho, ayaṃ maggo’’ti. Idaṃ sutamayañāṇaṃ. Katamaṃ vavatthānañāṇaṃ? So sutānaṃ atthaṃ upaparikkhati dhammato ca lakkhaṇato ca, ‘‘ime dhammā imasmiṃ sacce pariyāpannā, imassa saccassa idaṃ lakkhaṇa’’nti sanniṭṭhānaṃ karoti. Idaṃ vavatthānañāṇaṃ. Katamaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ? So evaṃ yathānupubbaṃ cattāri saccāni vavatthapetvā atha dukkhameva gahetvā yāva gotrabhuñāṇaṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato sammasati. Idaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ. Katamaṃ abhisamayañāṇaṃ? Lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe ekena ñāṇena cattāri saccāni apubbaṃ acarimaṃ abhisameti ‘‘dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena, samudayaṃ pahānābhisamayena, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayena maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisametī’’ti. Idaṃ abhisamayañāṇanti.
在正思惟的解说中,从欲乐出离,就是出离思惟;从嗔恨出离,就是无嗔思惟;从伤害出离,就是无害思惟。在这里,出离寻生起时,会摧毁、截断欲寻;无嗔寻生起时,会摧毁、截断嗔恚寻;无害寻生起时,会摧毁、截断害寻。同样地,出离寻、无嗔寻、无害寻生起时,是作为欲寻、嗔恚寻、害寻的对立面而生的。巴利
Sammāsaṅkappaniddese kāmato nissaṭoti nekkhammasaṅkappo. Byāpādato nissaṭoti abyāpādasaṅkappo. Vihiṃsāya nissaṭoti avihiṃsāsaṅkappo. Tattha nekkhammavitakko kāmavitakkassa padaghātaṃ padacchedaṃ karonto uppajjati, abyāpādavitakko byāpādavitakkassa, avihiṃsāvitakko vihiṃsāvitakkassa. Tathā nekkhammaabyāpādaavihiṃsāvitakkā kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāvitakkānaṃ paccanīkā hutvā uppajjanti.
在这里,瑜伽行者为了断除欲寻,就随观欲寻,或者随观其他某种行。当他的观智刹那生起时,与观相应的思惟就以“彼分断”的方式,断除、截断欲寻而生起;它策励观,并导向圣道。然后在他的圣道刹那,与道相应的思惟就以“正断”的方式,断除、截断欲寻而生起。为了断除嗔恚寻,他也随观嗔恚寻或其他某种行;为了断除害寻,他随观害寻或其他某种行。至于“当他的观智刹那”等,一切都应按照前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Tattha yogāvacaro kāmavitakkassa padaghātanatthaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ vā sammasati aññaṃ vā pana kiñci saṅkhāraṃ. Athassa vipassanākkhaṇe vipassanāsampayutto saṅkappo tadaṅgavasena kāmavitakkassa padaghātaṃ padacchedaṃ karonto uppajjati, vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā maggaṃ pāpeti. Athassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayutto saṅkappo samucchedavasena kāmavitakkassa padaghātaṃ padacchedaṃ karonto uppajjati. Byāpādavitakkassapi padaghātanatthaṃ byāpādavitakkaṃ vā aññaṃ vā saṅkhāraṃ, vihiṃsāvitakkassa padaghātanatthaṃ vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vā aññaṃ vā saṅkhāraṃ sammasati. Athassa vipassanākkhaṇeti sabbaṃ purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.
不过,对于欲寻等这三种寻,在经中已经分别说明的三十八种所缘里,实际上没有任何一种业处不是它们的对治。但从确定的角度来说:对欲寻而言,在不净所缘中,只有初禅才是它的直接对治;对嗔恚寻而言,以慈心修习时,第三禅或第四禅是它的对治;对害寻而言,以悲心修习时,第三禅或第四禅是它的对治。因此,一个人修不净业处并证入禅那后,在安止定的那一刹那,与禅那相应的寻,以镇伏的方式成为欲寻的对立面而生起;以禅那为基础再修观的人,在观的刹那,与观相应的思惟,以彼分断的方式成为欲寻的对立面而生起;进一步推动观、最终到达道的人,在道的刹那,与道相应的思惟,以正断的方式成为欲寻的对立面而生起。应当知道,这样生起的,就叫作出离思惟。巴利
Kāmavitakkādīnaṃ pana tiṇṇampi pāḷiyaṃ vibhattesu aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesu ekakammaṭṭhānampi apaccanīkaṃ nāma natthi. Ekantato pana kāmavitakkassa tāva asubhesu paṭhamajjhānameva paccanīkaṃ, byāpādavitakkassa mettāya tikacatukkajjhānāni, vihiṃsaāvitakkassa karuṇāya tikacatukkajjhānāni. Tasmā asubhaparikammaṃ katvā jhānaṃ samāpannassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānasampayutto vitakko vikkhambhanavasena kāmavitakkassa paccanīko hutvā uppajjati, jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapentassa vipassanākkhaṇe vipassanāsampayutto saṅkappo tadaṅgavasena kāmavitakkassa paccanīko hutvā uppajjati, vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā maggaṃ pāpentassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayutto saṅkappo samucchedavasena kāmavitakkassa paccanīko hutvā uppajjati. Evaṃ uppanno nekkhammasaṅkappoti vuccatīti veditabbo.
修完慈心业处之后进入禅那,以及修完悲心业处之后进入禅那的情况,都应按照前面所说的方式类推。应当知道,这样生起的心,就称为“无嗔思惟”,也称为“无害思惟”。如此,这些出离思惟等,因为依观和禅那而生起的方式不同,所以在预备阶段各自不同;但在道刹那,对于这三种情况中所生起的不善思惟,圣道以断除、令不再生起的方式圆满道支,那时只有一种善思惟生起,这就称为“正思惟”。巴利
Mettāya pana parikammaṃ katvā, karuṇāya parikammaṃ katvā jhānaṃ samāpannassāti sabbaṃ purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ uppanno abyāpādasaṅkappoti vuccati, avihiṃsāsaṅkappoti vuccatīti veditabbo. Evamete nekkhammasaṅkappādayo vipassanājhānavasena uppattīnaṃ nānattā pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana imesu tīsu ṭhānesu uppannassa akusalasaṅkappassa padacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamāno ekova kusalasaṅkappo uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāsaṅkappo nāma.
在解说“正语”时,由于是以一种心远离妄语,又以另一种心远离离间语等,所以这四种远离在预备阶段是各不相同的;但在道刹那,对于被称为“邪语”的四种不善坏戒之思,圣道以截断、令其不再生起的方式圆满道支,那时只有一种被称为“正语”的善远离生起。这就叫做“正语”。巴利
Sammāvācāniddesepi yasmā aññeneva cittena musāvādā viramati, aññena aññena pisuṇāvācādīhi, tasmā catassopetā veramaṇiyo pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana micchāvācāsaṅkhātāya catubbidhāya akusaladussīlyacetanāya padacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva sammāvācāsaṅkhātā kusalaveramaṇi uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāvācā nāma.
在解说正业时,因为是以一种心远离杀生,以另一种心远离不与取,再以另一种心远离邪淫,所以这三种远离在预备阶段是各不相同的;但在道刹那,那唯一的善远离——也就是所谓的正业——以截断、令其不再生起的方式,圆满被称为邪业的三种不善坏戒之思,并圆满道支,那时它生起。这就叫做正业。巴利
Sammākammantaniddesepi yasmā aññeneva cittena pāṇātipātā viramati, aññena adinnādānā, aññena micchācārā, tasmā tissopetā veramaṇiyo pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana micchākammantasaṅkhātāya tividhāya akusaladussīlyacetanāya padacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva sammākammantasaṅkhātā kusalaveramaṇi uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammākammanto nāma.
在解释正命时,“此处”指的是这个教法之中。“圣弟子”指的是圣者佛陀的弟子。“断除邪命”指的是舍弃了邪恶的谋生方式。“以正命”指的是以佛陀所赞叹的善的谋生方式。“维持生活”指的是让生命延续下去。在这里,因为是以一种心远离通过身门所犯的过失,以另一种心远离通过语门所犯的过失,所以在预备阶段,它们是在不同时刻生起的。但在道刹那,对于通过两门中的七种业道而生起的邪命坏戒之思,那一种善的远离以截断、令其不再生起的方式圆满道支,这时只有一种所谓的正命生起。这就叫做正命。巴利
Sammāājīvaniddese idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Ariyasāvakoti ariyassa buddhassa sāvako. Micchāājīvaṃ pahāyāti pāpakaṃ ājīvaṃ pajahitvā. Sammāājīvenāti buddhappasatthena kusalaājīvena. Jīvikaṃ kappetīti jīvitappavattiṃ pavatteti. Idhāpi yasmā aññeneva cittena kāyadvāravītikkamā viramati, aññeneva vacīdvāravītikkamā, tasmā pubbabhāge nānākkhaṇesu uppajjati, maggakkhaṇe pana dvīsu dvāresu sattannaṃ kammapathānaṃ vasena uppannāya micchāājīvadussīlyacetanāya padacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva sammāājīvasaṅkhātā kusalaveramaṇi uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāājīvo nāma.
在解释“正精进”时,“于此,比丘”是指在这教法中修行的比丘。“未生”是指还没有生起的。“诸恶”是指低劣的。“不善法”是指从不善巧生起的法。“为了令不生起”是指为了不让它们生起。“生起欲”是指生起并引发想做这件事的善法欲,也就是善的意欲。“策励”是指发起精勤,作出努力。“发勤精进”是指发动身体和心的精进。“策心”是指用那同时生起的精进把心提振起来。“精勤”是指作出勇猛的精进。按顺序,这四句应当结合反复修习、修持、多修、持续不断地精进来理解。巴利
Sammāvāyāmaniddese idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane paṭipannako bhikkhu. Anuppannānanti anibbattānaṃ. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Akusalānaṃ dhammānanti akosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Anuppādāyāti na uppādanatthāya. Chandaṃ janetīti kattukamyatāsaṅkhātaṃ kusalacchandaṃ janeti uppādeti. Vāyamatīti payogaṃ janeti parakkamaṃ karoti. Vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti kāyikaṃ cetasikaṃ vīriyaṃ karoti. Cittaṃ paggaṇhātīti teneva sahajātavīriyena cittaṃ ukkhipati. Padahatīti padhānavīriyaṃ karoti. Paṭipāṭiyā panetāni cattāripi padāni āsevanābhāvanābahulīkammasātaccakiriyāhi yojetabbāni.
“已生”是指那些已经达到“不能说未生”状态的法。“为了断除”是指为了舍弃它们。“未生诸善法”是指尚未生起、由善巧所产生的诸法。“为了令生起”是指为了令它们生起。“已生”是指已经生起的。“为了令住立”是指为了稳固安住。“为了令不忘失”是指为了不遗失。“为了令倍复增长”是指为了一再地增长。“为了令广大”是指为了达到广大。“为了令修习”是指为了增长。“为了令圆满”是指为了达到完全圆满。巴利
Uppannānanti anuppannānanti avattabbataṃ āpannānaṃ. Pahānāyāti pajahanatthāya. Anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānanti anibbattānaṃ kosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Uppādāyāti uppādanatthāya. Uppannānanti nibbattānaṃ. Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthāya. Asammosāyāti anassanatthaṃ. Bhiyyobhāvāyāti punappunaṃ bhāvāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Bhāvanāyāti vaḍḍhiyā. Pāripūriyāti paripūraṇatthāya.
这四种被称为正精进的四正勤,在预备阶段属于世间,在道刹那则属于出世间。而在道刹那,只有一种精进,因为它能完成四种作用,所以得到四个名称。其中,世间的四正勤应当依照《迦叶相应》中所说的方式来了知。因为在那里已经说过:巴利
Ete pana sammāvāyāmasaṅkhātā cattāro sammappadhānā pubbabhāge lokiyā, maggakkhaṇe lokuttarā. Maggakkhaṇe pana ekameva vīriyaṃ catukiccasādhanavasena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Tattha lokiyā kassapasaṃyutte vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Vuttañhi tattha –
贤友,有四种正勤。哪四种呢?贤友,在这里,比丘为了让自己还没生起的恶不善法不生起,如果它们生起就会带来不利,因此努力精勤;为了断除自己已经生起的恶不善法,如果不断除就会带来不利,因此努力精勤;为了让自己还没生起的善法能够生起,如果没生起就会带来不利,因此努力精勤;为了让自己已经生起的善法不退失,如果退失就会带来不利,因此努力精勤。巴利
‘‘Cattārome , āvuso, sammappadhānā; Katame cattāro? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu ‘anuppannā me pāpakā akusalā dhammā uppajjamānā anatthāya saṃvatteyyu’nti ātappaṃ karoti, ‘uppannā me pāpakā akusalā dhammā appahīyamānā anatthāya saṃvatteyyu’nti ātappaṃ karoti, ‘anuppannā me kusalā dhammā anuppajjamānā anatthāya saṃvatteyyu’nti ātappaṃ karoti, ‘uppannā me kusalā dhammā nirujjhamānā anatthāya saṃvatteyyu’nti ātappaṃ karotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.145);
在这里,“未生起”是指还没有以现行活动的方式出现,或者还没有作为所缘被经验到。否则,在无始轮回中,根本不存在从未生起过的恶不善法。不过,所谓“未生起”,是说当它们生起时,生起的正是这些法;当它们被断除时,被断除的也正是这些法。巴利
Tattha ca anuppannāti asamudācāravasena vā ananubhūtārammaṇavasena vā anuppannā. Aññathā hi anamatagge saṃsāre anuppannā pāpakā akusalā dhammā nāma natthi, anuppannā pana uppajjamānāpi eteyeva uppajjanti, pahīyamānāpi eteyeva pahīyanti.
在这里,有些人因为履行义务、修头陀支、修定、修观或做新事务等其中某一种原因,烦恼不会现起。怎么讲呢?有些人具足行仪,当他履行八十项犍度行仪、十四项大行仪,以及打扫塔院、菩提树院、饮水台、布萨堂,还有迎送客比丘等种种行仪时,烦恼根本找不到机会生起。可是后来,他舍弃了这些行仪,像不守护律仪的人那样生活,因为不如理作意、忘失正念,烦恼就生起了。这样,从“尚未现行”的意义上来说,就叫做“未生起的生起”。巴利
Tattha ekaccassa vattaganthadhutaṅgasamādhivipassanānavakammabhavānaṃ aññataravasena kilesā na samudācaranti. Kathaṃ? Ekacco hi vattasampanno hoti, asīti khandhakavattāni cuddasa mahāvattāni cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇapānīyamāḷakauposathāgāraāgantukagamikavattāni ca karontasseva kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa vattāni vissajjetvā bhinnavattassa carato ayonisomanasikāraṃ sativossaggañca āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有些人执着于经典学习,受持一部尼柯耶,或者两部、三部、四部、五部。当他按照义理、按照巴利文句、按照前后关联、按照上下文次第,去受持、背诵、思惟、朗读、讲说、开示这三藏佛语时,烦恼找不到机会生起。但后来,他放弃经典学习,像懈怠的人那样过日子,因为不如理作意、忘失正念,烦恼就生起来了。这样,从尚未现行的角度来说,就叫做“未生起的生起”。巴利
Ekacco ganthayutto hoti, ekampi nikāyaṃ gaṇhāti dvepi tayopi cattāropi pañcapi. Tassa tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ atthavasena pāḷivasena anusandhivasena pubbāparavasena gaṇhantassa sajjhāyantassa cintentassa vācentassa desentassa pakāsentassa kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa ganthakammaṃ pahāya kusītassa carato ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有些人则是头陀支的受持者,受持并实践十三种头陀功德。当他护持这些头陀功德时,烦恼找不到可乘之机。但后来,他舍弃了头陀支,转而回到生活丰足的状态中,因为不如理作意和忘失正念,烦恼就生起了。像这样,从“尚未现行”的角度来说,就叫做“未生起的烦恼生起”。巴利
Ekacco pana dhutaṅgadharo hoti, terasa dhutaṅgaguṇe samādāya vattati, tassa dhutaṅgaguṇe pariharantassa kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa dhutaṅgāni vissajjetvā bāhullāya āvattassa carato ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有些人能在八种禅定中熟练自如,当他依靠初禅等的转向自在等能力安住时,烦恼找不到可乘之机。但后来,当他退失了禅定或舍弃了禅定,沉溺于闲聊等事情中生活时,由于不如理作意和忘失正念,烦恼就生起了。这样,也是从尚未实际现行的角度,说未生起的烦恼“生起”。巴利
Ekacco aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu ciṇṇavasī hoti, tassa paṭhamajjhānādīsu āvajjanavasīādīnaṃ vasena viharantassa kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa parihīnajjhānassa vā vissaṭṭhajjhānassa vā bhassādīsu anuyuttassa viharato ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
还有一类人是修观的,他持续进行七种随观或十八种大观的修行。当他这样安住时,烦恼找不到可乘之机。但后来,他舍弃了观业,转而多从事身体方面的活动而住,由于不如理作意和失念,烦恼就生起了。这样,也是从尚未现行的角度,说未生起的烦恼“生起”。巴利
Ekacco pana vipassako hoti, sattasu vā anupassanāsu (paṭi. ma. 3.35) aṭṭhārasasu vā mahāvipassanāsu (paṭi. ma. 1.22) kammaṃ karonto viharati, tassa evaṃ viharato kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa vipassanākammaṃ pahāya kāyadaḷhībahulassa viharato ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有些人负责修建工作,建造布萨堂、食堂等。当他心里盘算这些工程所需的材料时,烦恼找不到可乘之机。但后来,当修建工作完成或放下之后,由于不如理作意和忘失正念,烦恼就生起了。这样,也是从还没有实际现起的角度,说未生起的烦恼“生起”。巴利
Ekacco navakammiko hoti, uposathāgārabhojanasālādīni karoti , tassa tesaṃ upakaraṇāni cintentassa kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa navakamme niṭṭhite vā vissaṭṭhe vā ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
还有一类人,是从梵天世界来的清净众生,由于没有习近,烦恼找不到可乘之机。但后来,当烦恼有了习近的机会,依靠不如理作意和失念,它们就生起了。这样,也是从还没有实际现行的角度,说未生起的烦恼生起了。以上,首先应当知道:从还没有实际现行的角度,就是“未生起”的意思。巴利
Ekacco pana brahmalokato āgato suddhasatto hoti, tassa anāsevanāya kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa laddhāsevanassa ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma. Evaṃ tāva asamudācāravasena anuppannatā veditabbā.
如何是依未曾体验过的所缘来说?这里,有人得到过去从未体验过的、属于可意等种类的所缘,由于对那所缘不如理作意、失去正念,贪等烦恼就生起。这样,就是依未曾体验过的所缘,说未生起的烦恼生起。如此,就未生起的不善法之生起而言,他见到这对自身有害,为了令它们不生起,就致力于修习念处,修习第一正勤;而当那些不善法已经生起后,他见到由于不断除它们,这对自身有害,为了断除它们,同样地修习第二正勤。巴利
Kathaṃ ananubhūtārammaṇavasena? Idhekacco ananubhūtapubbaṃ manāpikādibhedaṃ ārammaṇaṃ labhati, tassa tattha ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma rāgādayo kilesā uppajjanti. Evaṃ ananubhūtārammaṇavasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma. Evaṃ anuppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ uppāde sati attano anatthaṃ passitvā tesaṃ anuppādāya satipaṭṭhānabhāvanānuyogena paṭhamaṃ sammappadhānaṃ bhāveti, uppannesu pana tesu tesaṃ appahānato attano anatthaṃ passitvā tesaṃ pahānāya dutiyaṃ tatheva sammappadhānaṃ bhāveti.
“未生起的善法”,指的是止观以及道。看到它们还没有生起,对自己来说是一种损失,为了让他们生起,同样地修习第三正勤。“已生起的善法”,指的只是止观。但道一旦生起后就灭去,并不会造成损失,因为它是先给出了果的缘之后才灭去的。看到那些止观灭去会对自己造成损失,为了让它们保持安住,同样地修习第四正勤。而在出世间道的那一刻,实际上只有一种精进。巴利
Anuppannā kusalā dhammāti samathavipassanā ceva maggo ca. Tesaṃ anuppāde attano anatthaṃ passitvā tesaṃ uppādanatthāya tatheva tatiyaṃ sammappadhānaṃ bhāveti. Uppannā kusalā dhammāti samathavipassanāva. Maggo pana sakiṃ uppajjitvā nirujjhamāno anatthāya saṃvattanako nāma natthi. So hi phalassa paccayaṃ datvāva nirujjhati. Tāsaṃ samathavipassanānaṃ nirodhato attano anatthaṃ passitvā tāsaṃ ṭhitiyā tatheva catutthaṃ sammappadhānaṃ bhāveti. Lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekameva vīriyaṃ.
那些未生起而可能生起的,通过让它们如此确实不生起,就完成了令未生起的不生起这一作用,以及令已生起的断除这一作用。这里所说的“已生起”,有四种已生起:现在已生起、已过去已生起、得机会已生起、得地已生起。其中,一切具有生、老、灭的有为法,称为现在已生起。善与不善的心,在体验了所缘的作用之后灭去,称为已体验而过去;其余有为法没有经历生、老、灭三者便灭去,称为已灭而过去,这两种合称为已过去已生起。像“凡是他以前所作的诸业”等经文所说的业,虽然已经过去,但它排斥其他果报、为自己的果报制造机会而住立,因此连同如此制造了机会而虽未生起却必定会在所制造的机会中生起的果报,称为得机会已生起。在各种地中,那些未被拔除的不善法,称为得地已生起。巴利
Ye evaṃ anuppannā uppajjeyyuṃ, te yathā neva uppajjanti, evaṃ tesaṃ anuppannānaṃ anuppādakiccaṃ, uppannānañca pahānakiccaṃ sādheti. Uppannāti cettha catubbidhaṃ uppannaṃ vattamānuppannaṃ bhūtāpagatuppannaṃ okāsakatuppannaṃ bhūmiladdhuppannanti. Tattha sabbampi uppādajarābhaṅgasamaṅgisaṅkhātaṃ vattamānuppannaṃ nāma. Ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavitvā niruddhaṃ anubhūtāpagatasaṅkhātaṃ kusalākusalaṃ uppādādittayamanuppatvā niruddhaṃ bhutvāpagatasaṅkhātaṃ sesasaṅkhatañca bhūtāpagatuppannaṃ nāma. ‘‘Yānissa tāni pubbe katāni kammānī’’ti evamādinā (ma. ni. 3.248) nayena vuttaṃ kammaṃ atītampi samānaṃ aññaṃ vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā attano vipākassa okāsaṃ katvā ṭhitattā tathā katokāsañca vipākaṃ anuppannampi samānaṃ evaṃ kate okāse ekantena uppajjanato okāsakatuppannaṃ nāma. Tāsu tāsu bhūmīsu asamūhataṃ akusalaṃ bhūmiladdhuppannaṃ nāma.
在这里,要了解“地”和“得地”的差别。“地”是指作为观智所缘的三界五蕴。“得地”是指在那些蕴中能够生起的烦恼类。正因为那些烦恼,才说它“得地”,所以称为“得地”。但这不是从所缘的角度说的。如果从所缘的角度说,那么缘着过去、未来以及已被遍知的漏尽者的蕴,烦恼也会生起。如果那种情况也算“得地”,那因为它没有被断除,就没有人能断除轮回的根本了。应当从依处的角度来理解“得地”。因为无论在哪里,只要那些尚未被观智遍知的蕴生起,从它们生起的那一刻起,属于轮回根本的烦恼类就随眠在其中。由于未被断除,应知这就是“得地”。巴利
Ettha ca bhūmiyā bhūmiladdhassa ca nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ – bhūmīti hi vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā tebhūmakā pañcakkhandhā. Bhūmiladdhaṃ nāma tesu khandhesu uppattirahaṃ kilesajātaṃ. Tena hi sā bhūmiladdhā nāma hotīti tasmā bhūmiladdhanti vuccati. Sā ca kho na ārammaṇavasena. Ārammaṇavasena hi sabbepi atītānāgate pariññātepi ca khīṇāsavānaṃ khandhe ārabbha kilesā uppajjanti. Yadi ca taṃ bhūmiladdhaṃ nāma siyā, tassa appaheyyato na koci bhavamūlaṃ pajaheyya. Vatthuvasena pana bhūmiladdhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yattha yattha hi vipassanāya apariññātā khandhā uppajjanti, tattha tattha uppādato pabhuti tesu vaṭṭamūlaṃ kilesajātaṃ anuseti. Taṃ appahīnaṭṭhena bhūmiladdhanti veditabbaṃ.
在这里,对于某个人来说,烦恼以未被断除的状态随眠在哪些蕴里,那些蕴就是那些烦恼的依处,而不是属于其他人的蕴。对于烦恼以未被断除的状态随眠在过去蕴中的人,过去蕴才是那些烦恼的依处,而不是其他蕴。这个道理也适用于未来蕴等。同样地,对于烦恼以未被断除的状态随眠在欲界蕴中的人,欲界蕴才是那些烦恼的依处,而不是其他界的蕴。这个道理也适用于色界和无色界。然而,对于入流者等圣者,某位圣者的蕴中,某种轮回根本的烦恼类已被某条道断除,那么那些蕴对于已被断除的那些轮回根本烦恼来说,就不再能被称为依处或“地”。对于凡夫,因为一切轮回根本烦恼都未被断除,无论他造作什么善业或不善业,正是以业和烦恼为缘,轮回才得以延续。对这位凡夫,不能说“那轮回根本只在色蕴中,不在受等蕴中”,也不能说“只在识蕴中,不在色蕴等中”。为什么呢?因为它无差别地随眠在全部五蕴中。是怎样的呢?就像地味等之于树一样。譬如一棵大树,依止地表,依靠地味和水味,以此为缘,以根、干、枝、小枝、嫩芽、叶、花、果而生长,充满虚空,直到劫末,以种子相续使树系绵延不绝;这时不能说“那地味等只在根中,不在干等中”,也不能说“只在果中,不在根等中”。为什么呢?因为它无差别地遍及一切根等部位。又譬如有人对那棵树的花果等感到厌离,便在四方钉入名为“蛙刺”的毒刺;那棵树被这种毒触所触后,因地味和水味被耗尽,便进入不再萌发的状态,无法再产生相续。同样地,厌离蕴之相续流转的善男子,就像那人在树的四方施毒一样,在自身相续中开始修习四种圣道。于是他的蕴相续被四道之毒触所触,一切轮回根本烦恼悉皆耗尽,身业等一切业类都变成唯作的性质,进入未来不再投生后有之法性,无法再产生来世的相续,唯有最后识灭尽,如无薪之火,无所执取而般涅槃。应当这样了知地与已得地之间的差别。巴利
Tattha ca yassa yesu khandhesu appahīnaṭṭhena anusayitā kilesā, tassa te eva khandhā tesaṃ kilesānaṃ vatthu, na aññesaṃ santakā khandhā. Atītakkhandhesu ca appahīnānusayitānaṃ kilesānaṃ atītakkhandhāva vatthu, na itare. Esa nayo anāgatādīsu. Tathā kāmāvacarakkhandhesu appahīnānusayitānaṃ kilesānaṃ kāmāvacarakkhandhā eva vatthu, na itare. Esa nayo rūpārūpāvacaresu. Sotāpannādīsu pana yassa yassa ariyapuggalassa khandhesu taṃ taṃ vaṭṭamūlaṃ kilesajātaṃ tena tena maggena pahīnaṃ, tassa tassa te te khandhā pahīnānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ vaṭṭamūlakānaṃ kilesānaṃ avatthuto bhūmīti saṅkhaṃ na labhanti. Puthujjanassa sabbaso vaṭṭamūlakilesānaṃ appahīnattā yaṃkiñci kariyamānaṃ kammaṃ kusalamakusalaṃ vā hoti, iccassa kammakilesapaccayāva vaṭṭaṃ vaṭṭati, tassa tasseva taṃ vaṭṭamūlaṃ rūpakkhandheyeva, na vedanādīsu. Viññāṇakkhandheyeva vā, na rūpakkhandhādīsūti na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Avisesena pañcasupi khandhesu anusayitattā. Kathaṃ? Pathavīrasādi viya rukkhe. Yathā hi mahārukkhe pathavītalaṃ adhiṭṭhāya pathavīrasañca āporasañca nissāya tappaccayā mūlakhandhasākhāpasākhāpallavapalāsapupphaphalehi vaḍḍhitvā nabhaṃ pūretvā yāva kappāvasānā bījaparamparāya rukkhapaveṇiṃ santānayamāne ṭhite taṃ pathavīrasādimūleyeva, na khandhādīsu. Phaleyeva vā, na mūlādīsūti na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Avisesena sabbesu mūlādīsu anugatattāti. Yathā pana tasseva rukkhassa pupphaphalādīsu nibbinno koci puriso catūsu disāsu maṇḍūkakaṇṭakaṃ nāma visakaṇṭakaṃ ākoṭeyya, atha so rukkho tena visasamphassena phuṭṭho pathavīrasaāporasānaṃ pariyādinnattā appasavadhammataṃ āgamma puna santānaṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya, evameva khandhappavattiyaṃ nibbinno kulaputto tassa purisassa catūsu disāsu rukkhe visayojanaṃ viya attano santāne catumaggabhāvanaṃ ārabhati. Athassa so khandhasantāno tena catumaggavisasamphassena sabbaso vaṭṭamūlakilesānaṃ pariyādinnattā kiriyasabhāvamattaṃ upagatakāyakammādisabbakammappabhedo hutvā āyatiṃ punabbhavānabhinibbattanadhammataṃ āgamma bhavantarasantānaṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti, kevalaṃ carimaviññāṇanirodhena nirindhano viya jātavedo anupādāno parinibbāyati. Evaṃ bhūmiyā bhūmiladdhassa ca nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
另外还有四种“已生”:现行已生、执取所缘已生、未镇伏已生、未正断已生。其中,只有当下正在生起的,才是现行已生。当眼等诸门的所缘出现在面前时,有些烦恼虽然在之前还没有生起,但因为已经执取了那个所缘,后来就必定会生起,这就叫作执取所缘已生。有些烦恼,无论依止或观哪一种修行都没有被镇伏,即使还没有进入心的相续流,但因为缺少能阻止它生起的因,所以叫作未镇伏已生。还有些烦恼,虽然已经通过止或观被镇伏了,但还没有被圣道彻底断除,因此仍然没有超越它会生起的法性,这就叫作未正断已生。应当知道,这三种已生——执取所缘已生、未镇伏已生、未正断已生——都归入得地已生之中。巴利
Aparampi catubbidhaṃ uppannaṃ samudācāruppannaṃ ārammaṇādhiggahituppannaṃ avikkhambhituppannaṃ asamūhatuppannanti. Tattha vattamānuppannameva samudācāruppannaṃ. Cakkhādīnaṃ pana āpāthagate ārammaṇe pubbabhāge anuppajjamānampi kilesajātaṃ ārammaṇassa adhiggahitattā eva aparabhāge ekantena uppattito ārammaṇādhiggahituppannanti vuccati. Samathavipassanānaṃ aññataravasena avikkhambhitaṃ kilesajātaṃ cittasantatimanārūḷhampi uppattinivārakassa hetuno abhāvā avikkhambhituppannaṃ nāma. Samathavipassanāvasena pana vikkhambhitampi ariyamaggena asamūhatattā uppattidhammataṃ anatītattā asamūhatuppannanti vuccati. Tividhampi cetaṃ ārammaṇādhiggahitāvikkhambhitāsamūhatuppannaṃ bhūmiladdheneva saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti veditabbaṃ.
对于上述各种分类中已经生起的“已生”,其中被称为“当下现前已生、已过去已生、已作机会已生、现行已生”的那种,因为不属于道所断的范围,所以不需要靠任何一种道智来断除。然而,那些被称为“得地已生、执取所缘已生、未镇伏已生、未正断已生”的“已生”,由于种种世间与出世间的智慧生起时,会摧毁它们那种“已生”的状态,因此这一切都是应当断除的。如此,那句“已生(的恶法应当断除)……”等说法,是针对那些为圣道所断除的烦恼而说的。巴利
Iccetasmiṃ vuttappabhede uppanne yadetaṃ vattamānabhūtāpagatokāsakatasamudācārasaṅkhātaṃ uppannaṃ, taṃ amaggavajjhattā kenaci maggañāṇena pahātabbaṃ na hoti. Yaṃ panetaṃ bhūmiladdhārammaṇādhiggahitāvikkhambhitāsamūhatasaṅkhātaṃ uppannaṃ, tassa taṃ uppannabhāvaṃ nāsayamānaṃ yasmā taṃ taṃ lokiyalokuttarañāṇaṃ uppajjati, tasmā taṃ sabbampi pahātabbaṃ hotīti. Evaṃ ye maggo kilese pajahati, te sandhāya ‘‘uppannāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
那么,在出世间道的刹那,怎么算是“为了还没生起的善法能够生起而修习”,又怎么算是“为了已经生起的善法能够保持而修习”呢?其实正是通过道本身的运作来实现的。因为道在运作时,由于它以前从未生起过,所以被称为“未生”。就像有人会说:“我们到了以前从没到过的地方,体验了以前从没体验过的所缘。”而就在它运作的当下,这本身就是“保持”,所以说“为了保持而修习”也是可以的。这样一来,这位比丘在出世间道的刹那,同一个精进就获得了“为了还没生起的恶、不善法不生起”等四种名称。以上就是关于出世间道刹那正勤的说明。因此,这里所讲的就是世间与出世间混合在一起的正勤。巴利
Atha maggakkhaṇe kathaṃ anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ uppādāya bhāvanā hoti, kathañca uppannānaṃ ṭhitiyāti? Maggappavattiyā eva. Maggo hi pavattamāno pubbe anuppannapubbattā anuppanno nāma vuccati. Anāgatapubbañhi ṭhānaṃ āgantvā ananubhūtapubbaṃ vā ārammaṇaṃ anubhavitvā vattāro bhavanti ‘‘anāgataṭṭhānaṃ āgatamha, ananubhūtaṃ ārammaṇaṃ anubhavāmā’’ti. Yāvassa pavatti, ayameva ṭhiti nāmāti ṭhitiyā bhāvetītipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Evametassa bhikkhuno idaṃ lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe ekameva vīriyaṃ ‘‘anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāyā’’tiādīni cattāri nāmāni labhati. Ayaṃ lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe sammappadhānakathā. Evamettha lokiyalokuttaramissakā sammappadhānā niddiṭṭhāti.
在正念的解说中,“身”指的是色身。因为这里的色身,是以肢体、头发等法的聚集之义而被理解为“身”的,就像象身、车身等一样。正如以聚集为义,也以可厌之物的来处为义。因为那些极其可厌、极其令人厌恶之物的来处,也就是身。“来处”就是生起之处。这里的词义解释是:它们从那里而来,所以叫“来处”。什么从那里而来?可厌的头发等。因此,可厌之物的来处就是“身”。巴利
Sammāsatiniddese kāyeti rūpakāye. Rūpakāyo hi idha aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca dhammānaṃ samūhaṭṭhena hatthikāyarathakāyādayo viya kāyoti adhippeto. Yathā ca samūhaṭṭhena, evaṃ kucchitānaṃ āyaṭṭhena. Kucchitānañhi paramajegucchānaṃ so āyotipi kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – āyanti tatoti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo. Iti kucchitānaṃ āyoti kāyo.
「随观身」是指习惯于随观身,或者正在随观身。虽然已经说了「身」,后面在「随观身」中又第二次提到「身」,应当知道这是为了显示不混杂地界定、破除密集等。因此,他并不是在身之中随观受、随观心或随观法,而只是随观身;这就通过显示在名为身的所依上唯有随观身这一行相,显示了不混杂的界定。同样,他并不是在身之中随观脱离肢体各部分的单一法,也不是随观脱离头发、体毛等的女人或男人。即使在这里,对于由头发、体毛等四大及所造色聚集而成的这个身,他也不是随观脱离四大与所造色的单一法,而是像随观车乘部件的人那样随观肢体的聚集,像随观城市组成部分的人那样随观头发、体毛等的聚集,像剥开芭蕉树干的人、拆解空拳的人那样,纯粹只是随观四大与所造色的聚集。这样,通过从种种不同方面显示名为身的所依,就显示了破除密集。因为在这里,除了如上所说的聚集之外,根本看不到有所谓的身、女人、男人或任何其他法,众生只是对如上所说的诸法聚集,以种种方式生起邪执。因此古德们说:巴利
Kāyānupassīti kāyaṃ anupassanasīlo, kāyaṃ vā anupassamāno. Kāyeti ca vatvāpi puna kāyānupassīti dutiyaṃ kāyaggahaṇaṃ asammissato vavatthānaghanavinibbhogādidassanatthaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tena na kāye vedanānupassī cittadhammānupassī vā, atha kho kāyānupassīyevāti kāyasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ kāyānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā na kāye aṅgapaccaṅgavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, nāpi kesalomādivinimuttaitthipurisānupassī. Yopi cettha kesalomādiko bhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhāto kāyo, tatthāpi na bhūtupādāyavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, atha kho rathasambhārānupassako viya aṅgapaccaṅgasamūhānupassī, nagarāvayavānupassako viya kesalomādisamūhānupassī, kadalikkhandhapattavaṭṭivinibhujjako viya rittamuṭṭhiviniveṭhako viya ca bhūtupādāyasamūhānupassīyevāti samūhavaseneva kāyasaṅkhātassa vatthuno nānappakārato dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dassito hoti. Na hettha yathāvuttasamūhavinimutto kāyo vā itthī vā puriso vā añño vā koci dhammo dissati, yathāvuttadhammasamūhamatteyeva pana tathā tathā sattā micchābhinivesaṃ karonti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
他看到的东西,并不是被看见的;而被看见的东西,他却没有看到。
愚人不见真相,所以被束缚;一旦被束缚,就解脱不了。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ passati na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passati; Apassaṃ bajjhate mūḷho, bajjhamāno na muccatī’’ti.
“为了显示破除密集等”这句话已经说过了。这里“等”这个字还应当让人明白另一层意思:他在这身体上,只是身随观,而不是随观其他法。这话说的是什么呢?就像在没有水的阳焰中,有人却把它随观为水;并非如此,他并不对这个实际上是无常、苦、无我、不净的身体随观为常、乐、我、净,而是身随观。巴利
Ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthanti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddena cettha ayampi attho veditabbo – ayañhi etasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassīyeva, na aññadhammānupassī. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā anudakabhūtāyapi marīciyā udakānupassino honti, na evaṃ aniccadukkhānattāsubhabhūteyeva imasmiṃ kāye niccasukhattasubhabhāvānupassī, atha kho kāyānupassī
应当这样说:他正是随观无常、苦、无我、不净这些行相的聚集。或者,在《大念处经》中这样描述身:“在此,诸比丘,比丘前往森林,或到树下……他具念地入息、出息。”依此方式,从入出息一直到碎成粉末的骨头,这整个身都被说到了;而在后面讲念处时又这样说:“在此,有人于地界随观无常,于水界、火界、风界、发界、毛界、皮肤界、真皮界、肉界、血界、筋界、骨界、骨髓界随观无常。”对于这全部的身,由于都是在这同一个身中随观,所以也可以这样理解其义:于身,他是身随观者。巴利
Aniccadukkhānattāsubhākārasamūhānupassīyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yvāyaṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhāne ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā…pe… so satova assasatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.374; ma. ni. 1.107) nayena assāsapassāsādi cuṇṇakajātaaṭṭhikapariyosāno kāyo vutto, yo ca parato satipaṭṭhānakathāyaṃ ‘‘idhekacco pathavīkāyaṃ aniccato anupassati, āpokāyaṃ, tejokāyaṃ, vāyokāyaṃ, kesakāyaṃ, lomakāyaṃ, chavikāyaṃ, cammakāyaṃ, maṃsakāyaṃ, ruhirakāyaṃ, nhārukāyaṃ, aṭṭhikāyaṃ, aṭṭhimiñjakāya’’nti (paṭi. ma. 3.35) kāyo vutto, tassa sabbassa imasmiṃyeva kāye anupassanato kāye kāyānupassīti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo.
或者,由于不观见任何可以被执为“我”或“我所”的东西,而只随观头发、身毛等种种法的聚集,因此应理解为:于身,随观身——也就是在由头发等种种法聚集所成的身上随观。再者,依据下文“于此身中随观无常,不随观常”等次第,因为随观的是由无常相等种种行相聚集而成的身,所以也是“于身,随观身”的意思。而这正是四种念处共通的意义。巴利
Atha vā kāye ahanti vā mamanti vā evaṃ gahetabbassa kassaci ananupassanato tassa tasseva pana kesalomādikassa nānādhammasamūhassa anupassanato kāye kesādidhammasamūhasaṅkhātakāyānupassīti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Apica ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye aniccato anupassati, no niccato’’tiādinā anukkamena parato āgatanayassa sabbasseva aniccalakkhaṇādino ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassa kāyassa anupassanatopi kāye kāyānupassīti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo. Ayaṃ pana catusatipaṭṭhānasādhāraṇo attho.
在身体方面随观身体,是指对入出息身等以多种方式所说的身体,逐一随观每一种身体。住,是为了说明与四种威仪住中的某一种相结合,意思是:以另一种威仪切断一种威仪的障碍,不倒下地让自身保持运转。热诚,是为了说明与执持身体的精进相结合。因为那时,那种在三有中烧尽烦恼而被称为热诚的精进,为此人所具备,所以称为热诚。正知,是具备被称为执持身体的正知的智慧。具念,是具备执持身体的念。然而,这里先以念把握所缘,再以慧随观,因为离开念就不可能有随观。因此世尊说:诸比丘,我说念于一切处都有用。所以,仅凭于身随观身而住这一句,就已经开示了身随观念处的业处。或者,因为不热诚的人内心收缩,成为障碍;不正知的人在把握方法和舍弃非方法时迷惑;失念的人无能于不舍弃方法、不执取非方法,因此他的业处不能成就。所以,为了显示依其威力而使业处成就的诸法,才说热诚、正知、具念,应当这样理解。巴利
Kāye kāyānupassīti assāsapassāsakāyādike bahudhā vutte kāye ekekakāyānupassī. Viharatīti catūsu iriyāpathavihāresu aññataravihārasamāyogaparidīpanametaṃ, ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā apatamānaṃ attānaṃ harati pavattetīti attho. Ātāpīti kāyapariggāhakavīriyasamāyogaparidīpanametaṃ. So hi yasmā tasmiṃ samaye yaṃ taṃ vīriyaṃ tīsu bhavesu kilesānaṃ ātāpanato ātāpoti vuccati, tena samannāgato hoti , tasmā ‘‘ātāpī’’ti vuccati. Sampajānoti kāyapariggāhakena sampajaññasaṅkhātena ñāṇena samannāgato. Satimāti kāyapariggāhikāya satiyā samannāgato. Ayaṃ pana yasmā satiyā ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā paññāya anupassati . Na hi sativirahitassa anupassanā nāma atthi. Tenevāha – ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Tasmā ettha ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’ti ettāvatā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānakammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yasmā anātāpino antosaṅkhepo antarāyakaro hoti, asampajāno upāyapariggahe anupāyaparivajjane ca sammuyhati, muṭṭhassati upāyāpariccāge anupāyāpariggahe ca asamattho hoti, tenassa taṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ na sampajjati, tasmā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ ānubhāvena taṃ sampajjati, tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ātāpī sampajāno satimā’’ti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
这样,先说明了身随观念处的相应支,现在为了说明断除支,而说“除遣世间贪忧”。其中,“除遣”是指以彼分断或镇伏断来除遣。“世间”:就是先前所执取的这个身体,这里依坏散之义而称为世间。意思是在这个世间中舍弃贪与忧。然而,因为贪忧不只是在身上被断除,在受等上面也同样被断除,所以《分别论》中说:“五取蕴为世间。”应当知道,这是因为那些法本身就名为世间,所以依此义理引出这个说法。至于所说的“此中,什么是世间?就是这身体本身”,这就是这里的含义。“贪忧”是合起来说的,但在《相应部》和《增支部》的文本中则分开来诵读。那“贪”是指以它而希求、以它而贪求,或者它自己贪求,或者它只是贪求而已,这就是贪。然而,因为这里以“贪”一词摄取了欲贪,以“忧”一词摄取了嗔恚,所以应当知道,这是通过显示属于五盖的两种强盛之法来说明断除五盖。巴利
Iti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ sampayogaṅgañca dassetvā idāni pahānaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti vuttaṃ. Tattha vineyyāti tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā vinayitvā. Loketi yvāyaṃ kāyo pubbe pariggahito, sveva idha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko nāma. Tasmiṃ loke abhijjhaṃ domanassañca pajahitvāti attho. Yasmā panassa na kāyamatteyeva abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīyati, vedanādīsupi pahīyatiyeva, tasmā ‘‘pañcapi upādānakkhandhā loko’’ti (vibha. 362) vibhaṅge vuttaṃ. Lokasaṅkhātattāyeva tesaṃ dhammānaṃ atthuddhāravasenetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ panāha – ‘‘tattha katamo loko (vibha. 538), sveva kāyo loko’’ti ayamevettha attho. Abhijjhādomanassanti ca samāsetvā vuttaṃ. Saṃyuttaṅguttarapāṭhantaresu pana visuṃ katvā paṭhanti. Sā pana abhijjhāyanti patthayanti etāya, sayaṃ vā abhijjhāyati, abhijjhāyanamattameva vā esāti abhijjhā. Yasmā panettha abhijjhāgahaṇena kāmacchando, domanassagahaṇena byāpādo saṅgahaṃ gacchati, tasmā nīvaraṇapariyāpannabalavadhammadvayadassanena nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
这里特别要说明的是:通过断除贪欲,就断除了以身体健全为根源的贪著;通过断除忧恼,就断除了以身体败坏为根源的抗拒;通过断除贪欲,就断除了对身体的喜乐执著;通过断除忧恼,就断除了对修身的不喜;通过断除贪欲,就断除了将身体上非真实的净、乐等状态投射上去;通过断除忧恼,就断除了将身体上真实的不净、苦等状态排斥掉。由此显示了瑜伽行者的瑜伽力和瑜伽堪能性。这确实是瑜伽力:即这位修行者脱离了贪著与抗拒,能忍受不喜与喜,远离了对非真实的投射和对真实的排斥。而脱离了贪著与抗拒,能忍受不喜与喜,不投射非真实,不排斥真实,就是具备瑜伽堪能性。巴利
Visesena panettha abhijjhāvinayena kāyasampattimūlakassa anurodhassa, domanassavinayena kāyavipattimūlakassa virodhassa, abhijjhāvinayena ca kāye abhiratiyā, domanassavinayena kāyabhāvanāya anabhiratiyā, abhijjhāvinayena kāye abhūtānaṃ subhasukhabhāvādīnaṃ pakkhepassa, domanassavinayena kāye bhūtānaṃ asubhāsukhabhāvādīnaṃ apanayanassa pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena yogāvacarassa yogānubhāvo yogasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti. Yogānubhāvo hi esa, yadayaṃ anurodhavirodhavippamutto aratiratisaho abhūtapakkhepabhūtāpanayanavirahito ca hoti. Anurodhavirodhavippamutto cesa aratiratisaho abhūtaṃ apakkhipanto bhūtañca anapanento yogasamattho hotīti.
另一种理解方式:在“于身随观身”这句话里,说的是以随观作为业处。“住”这句话里,说的是以所说的“住”来护持业处修行者的身体。“热诚”等话里,是以热诚说正勤,以念和正知说遍一切处的业处,或者说是护持业处的方法。也可以这样理解:以念说通过身随观而获得的止,以正知说观,以除遣贪忧说修习的果。巴利
Aparo nayo – ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti ettha anupassanāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Viharatī’’ti ettha vuttavihārena kammaṭṭhānikassa kāyapariharaṇaṃ. ‘‘Ātāpī’’tiādīsu ātāpena sammappadhānaṃ, satisampajaññena sabbatthakakammaṭṭhānaṃ, kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇūpāyo vā. Satiyā vā kāyānupassanāvasena paṭiladdhasamatho, sampajaññena vipassanā, abhijjhādomanassavinayena bhāvanāphalaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
在“于受随观受”等说法中,受等词再次出现的作用,应当依照在身随观中已经说过的方式,按各自相应的情况套用后理解。这里的不共含义是:在乐受等许多种类的受中,对每一种受各自从无常等角度随观,就是“于受随观受”;在有贪等十六种心之中,对每一种心各自从无常等角度随观,就是“于心随观心”;在除去身、受、心之外的其余三地诸法中,对每一种法各自从无常等角度随观,就是“于法随观法”;或者依照《念处经》所说的方法,随观盖等法。这里还应知道,“身”用单数,是因为身体是单一的;“心”用单数,是因为心没有自性上的差别,是依种类来把握的。应当知道,像这样随观受等法的人,就是于受随观受、于心随观心、于法随观法。那么,受应当怎样随观呢?首先,乐受应观为苦,苦受应观为箭,不苦不乐受应观为无常。正如所说:巴利
Vedanāsu vedanānupassītiādīsu ca vedanādīnaṃ puna vacane payojanaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva yathāyogaṃ yojetvā veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana asādhāraṇattho – sukhādīsu anekappabhedāsu vedanāsu visuṃ visuṃ aniccādito ekekavedanānupassīti, sarāgādike soḷasappabhede citte visuṃ visuṃ aniccādito ekekacittānupassīti, kāyavedanācittāni ṭhapetvā sesatebhūmakadhammesu visuṃ visuṃ aniccādito ekekadhammānupassīti, satipaṭṭhānasuttante (dī. ni. 2.382; ma. ni. 1.115) vuttanayena nīvaraṇādidhammānupassīti vā. Ettha ca ‘‘kāye’’ti ekavacanaṃ sarīrassa ekattā, ‘‘citte’’ti ekavacanaṃ cittassa sabhāvabhedābhāvato jātiggahaṇena katanti veditabbaṃ. Yathā ca vedanādayo anupassitabbā, tathā anupassanto vedanāsu vedanānupassī, citte cittānupassī, dhammesu dhammānupassīti veditabbo. Kathaṃ tāva vedanā anupassitabbā? Sukhā tāva vedanā dukkhato, dukkhā vedanā sallato, adukkhamasukhā vedanā aniccato anupassitabbā. Yathāha –
如果有人把乐看成苦,把苦看成箭;
他把不苦不乐、寂静的它,看成了无常;
那位真正以正见观察的比丘,他遍知诸受。巴利
‘‘Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda, dukkhamaddakkhi sallato; Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, addakkhi naṃ aniccato; Sa ve sammaddaso bhikkhu, parijānāti vedanā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 4.253);
所有这些受,都应该从苦的角度来观察。因为经中这样说:“无论什么感受,这一切我都说是苦。”(《相应部》4.259)也应该从乐和苦的角度来观察。正如经中所说:“乐受,安住时是乐,变坏时是苦;苦受,安住时是苦,变坏时是乐;不苦不乐受,有智慧时是乐,没有智慧时是苦。”(《中部》1.465)此外,还可以依照无常等七种随观来观察它们。巴利
Sabbā eva cetā dukkhatopi anupassitabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃkiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.259). Sukhadukkhatopi ca anupassitabbā. Yathāha – ‘‘sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā. Dukkhā vedanā ṭhitidukkhā vipariṇāmasukhā. Adukkhamasukhā vedanā ñāṇasukhā aññāṇadukkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465). Apica aniccādisattaanupassanāvasenāpi anupassitabbā.
在心法当中,先就“心”来说,应当从所缘、增上、俱生、地、业、果、唯作等种种差别来观察,也要从无常等七种随观来观察,还要从有贪等十六种分类来观察。就“法”来说,应当从自相、共相、空法,以及无常等七种随观,还有寂静、非寂静等角度来观察。不过在这里,对于已经在这个被称为“身”的世间断除了贪和忧的人,他在受等其他世间里的贪忧也同样是断除了的;但为了说明不同的人有差别,也为了说明不同刹那修习念处的情形,所以处处都这样宣说。或者说,在一个地方断除了,在其余地方也就断除了。因此,为了显示他在这件事上断除的情形,才这样宣说。应当这样理解。巴利
Cittadhammesupi cittaṃ tāva ārammaṇādhipatisahajātabhūmikammavipākakiriyādinānattabhedānaṃ aniccādisattaanupassanānaṃ sarāgādisoḷasabhedānañca vasena anupassitabbaṃ, dhammā salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇānaṃ suññatādhammassa aniccādisattaanupassanānaṃ santāsantādīnañca vasena anupassitabbā. Kāmañcettha yassa kāyasaṅkhāte loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīnaṃ, tassa vedanādilokesupi taṃ pahīnameva, nānāpuggalavasena pana nānākkhaṇikasatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāvasena ca sabbattha vuttaṃ. Yato vā ekattha pahīnaṃ, sesesupi pahīnaṃ hoti. Tenevassa tattha pahānadassanatthampi evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
这四种念处,在修行前期阶段,是可以在不同心中生起的。因为人确实是用一个心去把握身,用另一个心去把握受,用另一个心去把握心,再用另一个心去把握法。但在出世间道的刹那,它们只在一个心中生起。最初把握身之后,与观相应的念,就叫身随观;具备这种念的人,就叫身随观者。努力修观而证得圣道的人,在道刹那,与道相应的念,就叫身随观;具备这种念的人,就叫身随观者。把握受、把握心、把握法之后,与观相应的念,就叫法随观;具备这种念的人,就叫法随观者。努力修观而证得圣道的人,在道刹那,与道相应的念,就叫法随观;具备这种念的人,就叫法随观者。这样,教说首先是依人而安立的。不过,就身来说,为了断除认为身是“净”的颠倒,把握身的念通过道而圆满成就,所以叫身随观。就受来说,为了断除认为受是“乐”的颠倒,把握受的念通过道而圆满成就,所以叫受随观。就心来说,为了断除认为心是“常”的颠倒,把握心的念通过道而圆满成就,所以叫心随观。就法来说,为了断除认为法有“我”的颠倒,把握法的念通过道而圆满成就,所以叫法随观。因此,同一个与道相应的念,因为能完成四种作用,就得到四个名称。所以论中说:“但在出世间道的刹那,它们只在一个心中生起。”巴利
Iti ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā pubbabhāge nānācittesu labbhanti. Aññeneva hi cittena kāyaṃ pariggaṇhāti, aññena vedanaṃ, aññena cittaṃ, aññena dhamme pariggaṇhāti. Lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitteyeva labbhanti. Ādito hi kāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā āgatassa vipassanāsampayuttā sati kāyānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo kāyānupassī nāma. Vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggaṃ pattassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayuttā sati kāyānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo kāyānupassī nāma. Vedanaṃ pariggaṇhitvā cittaṃ pariggaṇhitvā dhamme pariggaṇhitvā āgatassa vipassanāsampayuttā sati dhammānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo dhammānupassī nāma. Vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggaṃ pattassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayuttā sati dhammānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo dhammānupassī nāma. Evaṃ tāva desanā puggale tiṭṭhati. Kāye pana ‘‘subha’’nti vipallāsappahānā kāyapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti kāyānupassanā nāma. Vedanāya ‘‘sukhā’’ti vipallāsappahānā vedanāpariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti vedanānupassanā nāma. Citte ‘‘nicca’’nti vipallāsappahānā cittapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti cittānupassanā nāma. Dhammesu ‘‘attā’’ti vipallāsappahānā dhammapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti dhammānupassanā nāma. Iti ekāva maggasampayuttā sati catukiccasādhakattena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitteyeva labbhantī’’ti.
在解释正定时,“离诸欲”的意思是:远离诸欲、与诸欲分开、没有诸欲、从诸欲中退离。这里出现的“唯”字,应当理解为决定、限定的意思。正因为它是决定的意思,所以在成就初禅并安住的时候,即使诸欲并不存在,也能表明诸欲正是初禅的对立面,而初禅的证得必须靠彻底舍离诸欲。这是怎么表明的呢?当以“唯离诸欲”这样来作限定时,就可以看出:毫无疑问,诸欲是这禅那的对立面,只要有诸欲存在,这禅那就不会生起,就像黑暗中不会有灯光一样;要证得这禅那,就必须彻底舍离诸欲,就像要舍离此岸才能到达彼岸一样。所以才作这样的限定。巴利
Sammāsamādhiniddese vivicceva kāmehīti kāmehi viviccitvā vinā hutvā apakkamitvā. Yo panāyamettha evakāro, so niyamatthoti veditabbo. Yasmā ca niyamattho, tasmā paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharaṇasamaye avijjamānānampi kāmānaṃ tassa paṭhamajjhānassa paṭipakkhabhāvaṃ kāmapariccāgeneva cassa adhigamaṃ dīpeti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Vivicceva kāmehī’’ti evañhi niyame kayiramāne idaṃ paññāyati – nūnimassa jhānassa kāmā paṭipakkhabhūtā, yesu sati idaṃ na pavattati, andhakāre sati padīpobhāso viya, tesaṃ pariccāgeneva cassa adhigamo hoti orimatīrapariccāgena pārimatīrassa viya. Tasmā niyamaṃ karotīti.
这里可能会有人问:为什么这个“唯”字只出现在前一句,而不出现在后一句?难道即使不远离不善法也能成就禅那并安住吗?但不能这样理解。这个“唯”字用在前一句,是因为初禅就是从欲中出离。因为超越了欲界、又对治了欲贪,所以这禅那正是对欲的出离。正如经中所说:“欲的出离,就是出离。”(《如是语》72)至于后一句,也应该像“诸比丘,只有在这里才有第一沙门,只有在这里才有第二沙门”(《中部》1.139;《增支部》4.241)那样,把“唯”字带进来理解并宣说。因为如果不远离其余那些称为“盖”的不善法,就不可能成就禅那并安住。所以,“唯离诸欲”和“唯离诸不善法”这两句,都应该这样理解。另外,这两句虽然都用“离”这个共同的说法,可以涵盖彼分离、镇伏离、断离、安息离、出离离,以及心离、身离、依离等,但在世间加行阶段,应该理解为身离、心离、镇伏离;在出世间道的刹那,则应该理解为身离、心离、断离、安息离、出离离。巴利
Tattha siyā, kasmā panesa pubbapadeyeva vutto, na uttarapade, kiṃ akusalehi dhammehi aviviccāpi jhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyyāti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃnissaraṇato hi pubbapade esa vutto. Kāmadhātusamatikkamanato hi kāmarāgapaṭipakkhato ca idaṃ jhānaṃ kāmānameva nissaraṇaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ nekkhamma’’nti (itivu. 72). Uttarapadepi pana yathā ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241) ettha evakāro ānetvā vuccati, evaṃ vattabbo. Na hi sakkā ito aññehipi nīvaraṇasaṅkhātehi akusalehi dhammehi avivicca jhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ. Tasmā ‘‘vivicceva kāmehi vivicceva akusalehi dhammehī’’ti evaṃ padadvayepi esa daṭṭhabbo. Padadvayepi ca kiñcāpi viviccāti iminā sādhāraṇavacanena tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavivekā cittakāyaupadhivivekā ca saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, tathāpi pubbabhāge kāyavivekacittavivekavikkhambhanavivekā daṭṭhabbā, lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe kāyavivekacittavivekasamucchedavivekapaṭippassaddhivivekanissaraṇavivekā.
“诸欲”这个词,应当理解为:既包括《大义释》里以“哪些是事欲?可爱的色……”这种方式所说的事欲,也包括同一《大义释》和《分别论》里以“欲求是欲,贪是欲,欲贪是欲,思惟是欲,贪是欲,思惟贪是欲”这种方式所说的烦恼欲——这两类全都包含在内。只有这样,“唯离诸欲”理解为“从事欲中远离”,这个意思才说得通。这样一来,说的就是身远离。巴利
Kāmehīti iminā pana padena ye ca mahāniddese ‘‘katame vatthukāmā manāpikā rūpā’’tiādinā (mahāni. 1) nayena vatthukāmā vuttā, ye ca tattheva vibhaṅge ca ‘‘chando kāmo, rāgo kāmo, chandarāgo kāmo, saṅkappo kāmo, rāgo kāmo, saṅkapparāgo kāmo’’ti (mahāni. 1; vibha. 564) evaṃ kilesakāmā vuttā, te sabbepi saṅgahitā icceva daṭṭhabbā. Evañhi sati vivicceva kāmehīti vatthukāmehipi viviccevāti attho yujjati. Tena kāyaviveko vutto hoti.
“远离不善法”这句话的意思是:从烦恼欲或一切不善法中远离,这样理解才讲得通。由此说的是“心远离”。在这里,前一句说的是从事欲中远离,正好表明了舍弃欲乐;后一句说的是从烦恼欲中远离,则表明了摄取离欲之乐。同样,正是通过说事欲远离和烦恼欲远离,前一句揭示了舍弃杂染的所依,后一句揭示了断除杂染本身。前一句揭示了舍弃贪求状态的因,后一句揭示了舍弃愚痴状态的因。前一句揭示了修行上的清净,后一句揭示了内心倾向的培育——应当这样了知。以上就是针对“诸欲”一词中取“事欲”这一方的理趣。巴利
Vivicca akusalehi dhammehīti kilesakāmehi sabbākusalehi vā viviccāti attho yujjati. Tena cittaviveko vutto hoti. Purimena cettha vatthukāmehi vivekavacanato eva kāmasukhapariccāgo, dutiyena kilesakāmehi vivekavacanato nekkhammasukhapariggaho vibhāvito hoti. Evaṃ vatthukāmakilesakāmavivekavacanatoyeva ca etesaṃ paṭhamena saṃkilesavatthuppahānaṃ, dutiyena saṃkilesappahānaṃ. Paṭhamena lolabhāvassa hetupariccāgo, dutiyena bālabhāvassa. Paṭhamena ca payogasuddhi, dutiyena āsayaposanaṃ vibhāvitaṃ hotīti viññātabbaṃ. Esa tāva nayo kāmehīti ettha vuttakāmesu vatthukāmapakkhe.
不过在“烦恼欲”这一边,“欲”所指的,是以“欲求”“贪”等种种不同分类来说的欲贪本身。它虽然属于不善法,但在《分别论》中,按照“其中什么是欲?欲求就是欲……”这样的方式,为了显示它是禅支的对立面而单独加以说明;或者因为它是烦恼欲,所以在前一句中提到,又因为它属于不善法,所以在后一句中提到。由于它有多种分类,所以没有单说“欲”,而是说“诸欲”。此外,虽然其他法也有不善的性质,但在《分别论》中,按照“其中什么是不善法?欲贪……”这样的方式,为了显示它们是与禅支相违的对立面,所以只说了诸盖。因为诸盖与禅支相违,而诸禅支正是它们的对治、摧毁者、消灭者,所以这样说。正如《藏论》中所说:“定对治欲贪,喜对治嗔恚,寻对治昏沉睡眠,乐对治掉举恶作,伺对治疑。”巴利
Kilesakāmapakkhe pana chandoti ca rāgoti ca evamādīhi anekabhedo kāmacchandova kāmoti adhippeto. So ca akusalapariyāpannopi samāno ‘‘tattha katame kāmā, chando kāmo’’tiādinā (vibha. 564) nayena vibhaṅge upari jhānaṅgapaṭipakkhato visuṃ vutto, kilesakāmattā vā purimapade vutto, akusalapariyāpannattā dutiyapade. Anekabhedato cassa kāmatoti avatvā kāmehīti vuttaṃ. Aññesampi ca dhammānaṃ akusalabhāve vijjamāne ‘‘tattha katame akusalā dhammā, kāmacchando’’tiādinā (vibha. 564) nayena vibhaṅge upari jhānaṅgapaccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanato nīvaraṇāneva vuttāni. Nīvaraṇāni hi jhānaṅgapaccanīkāni, tesaṃ jhānaṅgāneva paṭipakkhāni viddhaṃsakāni vināsakānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi ‘‘samādhi kāmacchandassa paṭipakkho, pīti byāpādassa, vitakko thinamiddhassa, sukhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccassa, vicāro vicikicchāyā’’ti peṭake vuttaṃ.
在这里,“远离诸欲”这一句,说的是以镇伏的方式远离欲贪;“远离不善法”这一句,说的是以镇伏的方式远离五种盖。虽然没有直接点名,但第一句实际上指欲贪,第二句指其余诸盖。同样,第一句对应三种不善根中,以五欲功德品类为所缘的贪;第二句对应以嗔恚事等品类为所缘的嗔和痴。或者在诸流等法中,第一句对应欲流、欲轭、欲漏、欲取、贪欲身系、欲贪结;第二句对应其余诸流、轭、漏、取、身系、结。第一句对应渴爱以及与它相应之法,第二句对应无明以及与它相应之法。此外应当知道:第一句说的是以镇伏的方式远离与贪相应的八种心,第二句说的是以镇伏的方式远离其余四种不善心。巴利
Evamettha ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’ti iminā kāmacchandassa vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hoti. ‘‘Vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’ti iminā pañcannampi nīvaraṇānaṃ. Agahitaggahaṇena pana paṭhamena kāmacchandassa, dutiyena sesanīvaraṇānaṃ. Tathā paṭhamena tīsu akusalamūlesu pañcakāmaguṇabhedavisayassa lobhassa, dutiyena āghātavatthubhedādivisayānaṃ dosamohānaṃ. Oghādīsu vā dhammesu paṭhamena kāmoghakāmayogakāmāsavakāmupādānaabhijjhākāyagantha kāmarāgasaññojanānaṃ, dutiyena avasesaoghayogāsavaupādānaganthasaṃyojanānaṃ. Paṭhamena taṇhāya taṃsampayuttakānañca, dutiyena avijjāya taṃsampayuttakānañca. Apica paṭhamena lobhasampayuttaaṭṭhacittuppādānaṃ, dutiyena sesānaṃ catunnaṃ akusalacittuppādānaṃ vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hotīti veditabbo.
到这里,已经说明了初禅的舍断支;现在为了说明相应支,所以说了“有寻有伺”等话。其中,寻的特相是把心投向所缘;伺的特相是持续审察所缘。虽然这两者于任何处皆不相离,但因为寻粗显、先起,所以就像撞钟时的第一击,是心最初投向所缘;因为伺微细、以审察为本性,所以就像钟声的回响,是随后相续不断。在这里,寻是动荡的,是心刚生起时的颤动,就像想要飞上天空的鸟拍动翅膀,又像被香气吸引的蜜蜂扑向莲花;伺则运作安静,心的动荡不多,就像已经飞上天空的鸟展开翅膀,又像已经扑近莲花、在莲花上方盘旋的蜜蜂。巴利
Ettāvatā ca paṭhamassa jhānassa pahānaṅgaṃ dassetvā idāni sampayogaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ savitakkaṃ savicārantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ārammaṇe cittassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇo vitakko. Ārammaṇānumajjanalakkhaṇo vicāro. Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge oḷārikaṭṭhena pubbaṅgamaṭṭhena ca ghaṇḍābhighāto viya cetaso paṭhamābhinipāto vitakko, sukhumaṭṭhena anumajjanasabhāvena ca ghaṇḍānuravo viya anuppabandho vicāro. Vipphāravā cettha vitakko paṭhamuppattikāle paripphandanabhūto cittassa, ākāse uppatitukāmassa pakkhino pakkhavikkhepo viya, padumābhimukhapāto viya ca gandhānubandhacetaso bhamarassa. Santavutti vicāro nātiparipphandanabhūto cittassa, ākāse uppatitassa pakkhino pakkhappasāraṇaṃ viya, paribbhamanaṃ viya ca padumābhimukhapatitassa bhamarassa padumassa uparibhāge.
不过在《二集注》里这样说:就像一只大鸟在空中飞行,先用两只翅膀把风兜住,再把翅膀收拢起来往前飞——寻也是这样,它以把心牢牢安放在所缘上的方式生起;又像那只鸟为了兜住风而扇动翅膀往前飞——伺也是这样,它以不断细细察看的方式生起。这是从相续不断生起的角度来说的。而这两者的区别,在初禅和第二禅里才看得清楚。再说,就像一个人抓住一个沾了污垢的铜盆,一只手紧紧握着,另一只手拿粉、油和毛刷去擦——紧握的那只手好比寻,擦拭的那只手好比伺。又像陶匠用棍子敲打轮盘,让轮盘转起来做器皿——往下压的那只手好比寻,来回移动的那只手好比伺。又像画圆时,固定在中心不动的钉子好比牢牢安立的寻,在外围转圈的钉子好比细细察看的伺。就这样,这个禅那和这样的寻、这样的伺一起生起,就像树和花、果同时存在一样,所以这个禅那被称为有寻有伺。巴利
Dukanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ākāse gacchato mahāsakuṇassa ubhohi pakkhehi vātaṃ gahetvā pakkhe sannisīdāpetvā gamanaṃ viya ārammaṇe cetaso abhiniropanabhāvena pavatto vitakko, vātaggahaṇatthaṃ pakkhe phandāpayamānassa gamanaṃ viya anumajjanabhāvena pavatto vicāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ anuppabandhena pavattiyaṃ yujjati. So pana tesaṃ viseso paṭhamadutiyajjhānesu pākaṭo hoti. Apica malaggahitaṃ kaṃsabhājanaṃ ekena hatthena daḷhaṃ gahetvā itarena hatthena cuṇṇatelavālaṇḍupakena parimajjantassa daḷhaggahaṇahattho viya vitakko, parimajjanahattho viya vicāro. Tathā kumbhakārassa daṇḍappahārena cakkaṃ bhamayitvā bhājanaṃ karontassa uppīḷanahattho viya vitakko, ito cito ca saṃsaraṇahattho viya vicāro. Tathā maṇḍalaṃ karontassa majjhe sannirujjhitvā ṭhitakaṇṭako viya abhiniropano vitakko, bahi paribbhamanakaṇṭako viya anumajjano vicāro. Iti iminā ca vitakkena iminā ca vicārena saha vattati rukkho viya pupphena phalena cāti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti vuccati.
“离生”在这里,“离”就是远离,意思是诸盖的离去。或者,“离”是指已远离的状态,也就是已远离诸盖的、与禅那相应的一整团法。因此,从远离而生起,或者在那远离中生起的,就叫“离生”。“喜乐”在这里,能使人喜悦的就是喜,它的特征是喜爱。而这喜有五种:小喜、刹那喜、继起喜、踊跃喜、遍满喜。巴利
Vivekajanti ettha vivitti viveko, nīvaraṇavigamoti attho. Vivittoti vā viveko, nīvaraṇavivitto jhānasampayuttadhammarāsīti attho. Tasmā vivekā, tasmiṃ vā viveke jātanti vivekajaṃ. Pītisukhanti ettha pīṇayatīti pīti, sā sampiyāyanalakkhaṇā. Sā panesā khuddikā pīti, khaṇikā pīti, okkantikā pīti, ubbegā pīti, pharaṇā pītīti pañcavidhā hoti.
在这五种喜当中,小喜只能让身体毛发竖立起来。刹那喜则像闪电一样,一刹那、一刹那地生起。继起喜就像拍打海岸的海浪,一次又一次地冲击身体,然后破碎。踊跃喜力量很强,能把身体向上提起,甚至达到腾空跳跃的程度。遍满喜的力量极其强大,当它生起时,整个身体就像被吹胀的皮囊,又像大水灌入山洞一样,被完全充满。
这五种喜在逐渐成熟时,会圆满两种轻安:身轻安和心轻安。轻安逐渐成熟时,会圆满两种乐:身体的乐和心的乐。乐逐渐成熟时,会圆满三种定:刹那定、近行定和安止定。其中,遍满喜作为安止定的根基,不断增长,并与定相应,这就是这里所说的“喜”。巴利
Tattha khuddikā pīti sarīre lomahaṃsanamattameva kātuṃ sakkoti. Khaṇikā pīti khaṇe khaṇe vijjuppādasadisā hoti. Okkantikā pīti samuddatīraṃ vīci viya kāyaṃ okkamitvā okkamitvā bhijjati. Ubbegā pīti balavatī hoti kāyaṃ uddhaggaṃ katvā ākāse laṅghāpanappamāṇappattā. Pharaṇā pīti atibalavatī hoti. Tāya hi uppannāya sakalasarīraṃ dhamitvā pūritavatthi viya mahatā udakoghena pakkhandapabbatakucchi viya ca anupariphuṭaṃ hoti. Sā panesā pañcavidhā pīti gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī paripākaṃ gacchantī duvidhaṃ passaddhiṃ paripūreti kāyapassaddhiñca cittapassaddhiñca. Passaddhi gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī paripākaṃ gacchantī duvidhampi sukhaṃ paripūreti kāyikañca cetasikañca. Sukhaṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhantaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ tividhaṃ samādhiṃ paripūreti – khaṇikasamādhiṃ, upacārasamādhiṃ, appanāsamādhiñcāti. Tāsu ca yā appanāsamādhissa mūlaṃ hutvā vaḍḍhamānā samādhisampayogaṃ gatā pharaṇā pīti, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā pītīti.
另一种被称为“乐”,是因为它能让人快乐;意思是说,它使生起它的那个人变得快乐。或者,“乐”是“好好咀嚼”的意思,也就是彻底咬碎、摧毁身心的病痛,所以叫“乐”,这是悦受的名称。它以甜美为特征。虽然喜和乐有时并不分离,但获得可爱对象时的欢喜是喜,体验已获得之味的感受是乐。有喜的地方就有乐,有乐的地方却不一定有喜。喜属于行蕴,乐属于受蕴。就像在旷野中疲惫的人,看见或听见树林和水时的心情像喜,进入树荫、享用水时的心情像乐。应当知道,这是就各个阶段中最明显的状态来说的。因此,这个禅那有这种喜和这种乐,或者这个禅那中有这种喜和这种乐,所以这个禅那被称为“喜乐”。或者,就像“法与律”这样的复合词一样,喜和乐合在一起就是“喜乐”。这个禅那有离所生的喜乐,或者这个禅那中有离所生的喜乐,所以也叫“离生喜乐”。正如这禅那一样,这里的喜乐也是离所生的;而这个禅那具有它,所以不拆开,只用“离生喜乐”一个词来总称,也是合理的。巴利
Itaraṃ pana sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Sukhanaṃ vā sukhaṃ, suṭṭhu vā khādati, khaṇati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ, somanassavedanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Taṃ sātalakkhaṇaṃ. Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge iṭṭhārammaṇapaṭilābhatuṭṭhi pīti, paṭiladdharasānubhavanaṃ sukhaṃ. Yattha pīti, tattha sukhaṃ. Yattha sukhaṃ, tattha na niyamato pīti. Saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitā pīti, vedanākkhandhasaṅgahitaṃ sukhaṃ. Kantārakhinnassa vanantudakadassanasavanesu viya pīti, vanacchāyāpavesanaudakaparibhogesu viya sukhaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye pākaṭabhāvato cetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Iti ayañca pīti idañca sukhaṃ assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘pītisukha’’nti vuccati. Atha vā pīti ca sukhañca pītisukhaṃ dhammavinayādayo viya. Vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti evampi vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ. Yatheva hi jhānaṃ, evaṃ pītisukhampettha vivekajameva hoti. Tañcassa atthīti tasmā alopasamāsaṃ katvā ekapadeneva ‘‘vivekajaṃpītisukha’’ntipi vattuṃ yujjati.
“第一”是因为按数目顺序排在最前,或者因为最先生起,所以叫第一。禅那有两种:所缘禅那和相禅那。其中,八种等至因为专注于地遍等所缘,所以被称为所缘禅那。观、道、果则叫相禅那。其中,观因为观照无常等相,所以是相禅那;道因为由观已完成的作用而成就,所以是相禅那;果因为观照灭谛的真实相,所以是相禅那。在这两者中,这里指的是前行阶段的所缘禅那,以及出世间道刹那的相禅那。因此,应当从所缘禅那、相禅那以及烧毁敌对法而理解为禅那。“具足”是达到、证得的意思,或是使之成就的意思。“安住”是以相应的威仪而住,具足上述禅那而维持个体的生存。巴利
Paṭhamanti gaṇanānupubbatā paṭhamaṃ, paṭhamaṃ uppannantipi paṭhamaṃ. Jhānanti duvidhaṃ jhānaṃ ārammaṇūpanijjhānañca lakkhaṇūpanijjhānañca. Tattha aṭṭha samāpattiyo pathavīkasiṇādiārammaṇaṃ upanijjhāyantīti ‘‘ārammaṇūpanijjhāna’’nti saṅkhyaṃ gatā. Vipassanāmaggaphalāni pana lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ nāma. Tattha vipassanā aniccādilakkhaṇassa upanijjhānato lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, vipassanāya katakiccassa maggena ijjhanato maggo lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, phalaṃ pana nirodhasaccaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Tesu idha pubbabhāge ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ adhippetaṃ, tasmā ārammaṇūpanijjhānato lakkhaṇūpanijjhānato paccanīkajjhāpanato ca ‘‘jhāna’’nti veditabbaṃ. Upasampajjāti upagantvā, pāpuṇitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasampādayitvā vā, nipphādetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Viharatīti tadanurūpena iriyāpathavihārena iriyati, vuttappakārajhānasamaṅgī hutvā attabhāvassa vuttiṃ abhinipphādeti.
“寻与伺的寂止”这句话里,说的是寻和伺这两者的寂止、超越,也就是在第二禅那的那一刻,它们不再出现。在这里,虽然第二禅那中初禅的一切法都不存在了——因为初禅里的触等法和第二禅那里的触等法是不同的——但为了说明由于粗重支分被超越,才能从初禅证得第二禅等,所以才说“寻与伺的寂止”。“内”在这里指的是自身之内,所以意思是:在自身中生起,在自己的相续中现起。巴利
Vitakkavicārānaṃvūpasamāti ettha vitakkassa ca vicārassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vūpasamā samatikkamā, dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe apātubhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kiñcāpi dutiyajjhāne sabbepi paṭhamajjhānadhammā na santi, aññeyeva hi paṭhamajjhāne phassādayo, aññe idhāti. Oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamo hotīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ . Ajjhattanti idha niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, tasmā attani jātaṃ, attasantāne nibbattanti attho.
净信:信被称为净信。因为与净信相应,禅那本身也被称为净信,就像因为与蓝色相应,衣服就被称为蓝衣一样。或者,因为那种禅那具足净信,并且由于寻与伺的波动止息,使心变得清净、生起净信,所以也被称为净信。在后一种释义中,应当把“净信”与“心的”这个词连在一起理解;而在前一种释义中,“心的”这个词则应与“心一境性”连在一起。巴利
Sampasādananti sampasādanaṃ vuccati saddhā. Sampasādanayogato jhānampi sampasādanaṃ nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viya. Yasmā vā taṃ jhānaṃ sampasādanasamannāgatattā vitakkavicārakkhobhavūpasamanena ca ceto sampasādayati, tasmāpi sampasādananti vuttaṃ. Imasmiñca atthavikappe sampasādanaṃ cetasoti evaṃ padasambandho veditabbo, purimasmiṃ pana atthavikappe cetasoti etaṃ ekodibhāvena saddhiṃ yojetabbaṃ.
这里对这句话的解释是:“单独生起”,所以叫“一境”;意思是,由于不被寻和伺所控制,它以最殊胜、最顶尖的状态生起。因为在世间,最殊胜的东西也被称为“一”。或者也可以说,远离寻和伺,成为独自一个、没有伴侣,这样来理解。又或者,它让相应的心所法生起,所以叫“起”,意思是使它们生起;以最殊胜的含义来说,既是“一”又是“起”,所以叫“一境”。这是定的同义词。这样,“修习、增长这个一境”——这就是第二禅的心一境性。而这个“一境”,因为是属于心的,不是属于众生的,也不是属于命我的,所以说它是“心的心一境性”。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ atthayojanā – eko udetīti ekodi, vitakkavicārehi anajjhārūḷhattā aggo seṭṭho hutvā udetīti attho. Seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccati. Vitakkavicāravirahito vā eko asahāyo hutvā itipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Atha vā sampayuttadhamme udāyatīti udi, uṭṭhapetīti attho. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena eko ca so udi cāti ekodi. Samādhissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Iti imaṃ ekodiṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti idaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ ekodibhāvaṃ. So panāyaṃ ekodi yasmā cetaso, na sattassa na jīvassa. Tasmā etaṃ ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti vuttaṃ.
难道初禅里就没有这种信吗?初禅里也有称为“一境”的定啊。那为什么唯独第二禅才说它是“心的净信”和“心一境性”呢?回答是:初禅被寻和伺的搅动所扰乱,就像水面被波浪搅得动荡不安,不够清澈,所以那里虽然有信,却不叫“净信”。也正因为不够清澈,那里的定也不够明显,所以不叫“心一境性”。而在第二禅里,因为没有寻和伺的障碍,信获得了空间,变得强而有力;又因为得到了强有力之信作为助伴,定也变得明显。因此应当知道,唯独在这里才这样宣说。巴利
Nanu cāyaṃ saddhā paṭhamajjhānepi atthi, ayañca ekodināmako samādhi. Atha kasmā idameva ‘‘sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti ca vuttanti? Vuccate – aduñhi paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkavicārakkhobhena vīcitaraṅgasamākulamiva jalaṃ na suppasannaṃ hoti, tasmā satiyāpi saddhāya ‘‘sampasādana’’nti na vuttaṃ. Na suppasannattāyeva cettha samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭo. Tasmā ‘‘ekodibhāva’’ntipi na vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana jhāne vitakkavicārapalibodhābhāvena laddhokāsā balavatī saddhā, balavasaddhāsahāyapaṭilābheneva ca samādhipi pākaṭo, tasmā idameva evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“无寻无伺”:因为通过修习已经断除了,所以在这个禅那里没有寻;或者说这个禅那本身没有寻,所以叫“无寻”。用同样的方式,也叫“无伺”。这里有人问:“‘寻与伺的寂止’这句话,不是已经把这个意思说明了吗?那为什么还要再说‘无寻无伺’呢?”回答说:确实如此,这个意思已经成立了,但那句话并不是直接用来显示这个意思的。我们不是已经说过了吗:“为了显示从初禅超越粗重的禅支、从而证得第二禅等其他禅那,所以才说‘寻与伺的寂止’。”巴利
Avitakkaṃavicāranti bhāvanāya pahīnattā etasmiṃ, etassa vā vitakko natthīti avitakkaṃ. Imināva nayena avicāraṃ. Etthāha – ‘‘nanu ca ‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’ti imināpi ayamattho siddho. Atha kasmā puna vuttaṃ ‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’nti’’? Vuccate – evametaṃ, siddhovāyamattho, na panetaṃ tadatthadīpakaṃ, nanu avocumha ‘‘oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ samadhigamo hotīti dassanatthaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti evaṃ vutta’’nti.
另外,这里说的“寻与伺的寂止”是这种清净信心的原因,而不是由于烦恼污垢的寂止。寻与伺的寂止也是心一境性的原因,但不像近行定那样靠断除诸盖而得到,也不像初禅那样靠禅支显现而得到。所以这句话是在说明清净信心和心一境性的原因。同样,寻与伺的寂止是这种无寻无伺的原因,但不像第三禅和第四禅那样因为根本没有寻伺,也不像眼识等那样因为本身就不存在。所以这句话也是在说明无寻无伺的原因。然而,“无寻无伺”这句话并不是在说明寻与伺的不存在,它只是在说明寻与伺的不存在。因此,前面虽然已经说过了,这里还是应当再说一次。巴利
Apica vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ sampasādanaṃ, na kilesakālussiyassa. Vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā ekodibhāvaṃ, na upacārajjhānamiva nīvaraṇappahānā, na paṭhamajjhānamiva ca aṅgapātubhāvāti evaṃ sampasādanaekodibhāvānaṃ hetuparidīpakamidaṃ vacanaṃ. Tathā vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ avitakkaavicāraṃ, na tatiyacatutthajjhānāni viya cakkhuviññāṇādīni viya ca abhāvāti evaṃ avitakkaavicārabhāvassa hetuparidīpakañca. Na vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakaṃ, vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakameva pana ‘‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ. Tasmā purimaṃ vatvāpi puna vattabbamevāti.
“定生”:从初禅的定所生,或者从与初禅相应的定所生,这就是它的意思。在这里,虽然初禅也是从相应的定所生,但只有这第二禅的定,因为远离了寻和伺的波动,极其安稳、极其清净,才真正配得上称为“定”。所以,为了赞叹这第二禅的功德,才在这里只说它是“定生”。“喜乐”:和前面所说的一样。“第二”:按照数数的顺序,它是第二个,所以叫第二;或者说,这个第二是接着初禅生起的,所以也叫第二。巴利
Samādhijanti paṭhamajjhānasamādhito, sampayuttasamādhito vā jātanti attho. Tattha kiñcāpi paṭhamajjhānampi sampayuttasamādhito jātaṃ, atha kho ayameva samādhi ‘‘samādhī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati vitakkavicārakkhobhavirahena ativiya acalattā suppasannattā ca. Tasmā imassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ idameva ‘‘samādhija’’nti vuttaṃ. Pītisukhanti idaṃ vuttanayameva. Dutiyanti gaṇanānupubbatā dutiyaṃ, idaṃ dutiyaṃ uppannantipi dutiyaṃ.
“由喜的离贪”:“离贪”是指对前面所说的那种喜的厌离或超越。而两者之间的“和”字是集合连接词,它集合的是“寂止”,或者“寻与伺的寂止”。在这里,当它只集合“寂止”时,应当这样理解句子的连接:“由喜的离贪,以及更进一步,由寂止。”在这个连接中,“离贪”是厌离的意思,因此应当这样理解其含义:“由对喜的厌离与超越。”然而,当它集合“寻与伺的寂止”时,应当这样理解句子的连接:“由喜的离贪,以及更进一步,由寻与伺的寂止。”在这个连接中,“离贪”是超越的意思,因此应当这样理解其含义:“由喜的超越,以及由寻与伺的寂止。”巴利
Pītiyā ca virāgāti virāgo nāma vuttappakārāya pītiyā jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā, ubhinnaṃ pana antarā casaddo sampiṇḍanattho, so vūpasamaṃ vā sampiṇḍeti vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ vā. Tattha yadā vūpasamameva sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā virāgā ca, kiñca bhiyyo vūpasamā cāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāya virāgo jigucchanattho hoti, tasmā pītiyā jigucchanā ca samatikkamā cāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo. Yadā pana vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā ca virāgā, kiñca bhiyyo vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāya virāgo samatikkamanattho hoti, tasmā pītiyā ca samatikkamā, vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo.
寻与伺虽然在第二禅时就已经止息了,但这里之所以这样说,是为了显示进入此第三禅的道路,同时也是为了赞叹。因为当说到“寻与伺的止息”时,就会让人明白:“这寻与伺的止息,正是进入此禅那的道路。”就像在第三圣道时,对那些其实还没有被断除的有身见等烦恼,却说“断除五下分结”,这样宣说断除是为了赞叹,也是为了激励那些为此精勤努力的人生起更大的干劲;同样地,在这里,寻与伺其实尚未止息,却说“止息”,也是为了赞叹。因此,这个意思就被表述为:“由喜的超越,以及由寻与伺的止息。”巴利
Kāmañcete vitakkavicārā dutiyajjhāneyeva vūpasantā, imassa pana jhānassa maggaparidīpanatthaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthañcetaṃ vuttaṃ. Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti hi vutte idaṃ paññāyati ‘‘nūna vitakkavicāravūpasamo maggo imassa jhānassā’’ti. Yathā ca tatiye ariyamagge appahīnānampi sakkāyadiṭṭhādīnaṃ ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ pahānā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.373; ma. ni. 2.133; saṃ. ni. 5.184; a. ni. 3.88) evaṃ pahānaṃ vuccamānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti, tadadhigamāya ussukkānaṃ ussāhajanakaṃ, evameva idha avūpasantānampi vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo vuccamāno vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti. Tenāyamattho vutto ‘‘pītiyā ca samatikkamā vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā’’ti.
“他以舍而住”:在这里,“舍”(upekkhā)来自“从旁观察”(upapattito ikkhati),意思是平等地看待,也就是不偏袒任何一方地看。因为具备那种清净、广大、稳固的舍,成就第三禅那的人就被称为“以舍而住”。巴利
Upekkhako ca viharatīti ettha upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā , samaṃ passati apakkhapatitā hutvā passatīti attho. Tāya visadāya vipulāya thāmagatāya samannāgatattā tatiyajjhānasamaṅgī ‘‘upekkhako’’ti vuccati.
舍有十种:六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、精进舍、行舍、受舍、观舍、中舍、禅那舍、遍净舍。巴利
Upekkhā pana dasavidhā hoti chaḷaṅgupekkhā brahmavihārupekkhā bojjhaṅgupekkhā vīriyupekkhā saṅkhārupekkhā vedanupekkhā vipassanupekkhā tatramajjhattupekkhā jhānupekkhā pārisuddhupekkhāti.
在这里,所谓“六支舍”,就是经里说的:“比丘们,在此教法中,漏已尽的比丘用眼看色之后,既不欢喜也不忧愁,住于舍,具念、正知。”(《增支部》6.1)也就是说,漏已尽的人在六个根门面对可爱和不可爱的六种所缘境时,那种不放弃本来清净状态的舍,就叫六支舍。巴利
Tattha yā ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavo bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno’’ti (a. ni. 6.1) evamāgatā khīṇāsavassa chasu dvāresu iṭṭhāniṭṭhachaḷārammaṇāpāthe parisuddhapakatibhāvāvijahanākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ chaḷaṅgupekkhā nāma.
不过,还有一种舍,是像经文里说的那样:“以与舍俱行的心,遍满一个方向而安住。”这是面对众生时保持中立平等的舍,名叫梵住舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.556; ma. ni. 1.77) evamāgatā sattesu majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ brahmavihārupekkhā nāma.
不过,像这样出现在经文里的“依远离修习舍觉支”,那是与俱生诸法相应的、以中立不偏为本质的舍,这就叫觉支舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti vivekanissita’’nti (ma. ni. 2.247) evamāgatā sahajātadhammānaṃ majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ bojjhaṅgupekkhā nāma.
不过,如果是像经里说的“时时作意舍相”那样提到的舍,也就是不过于紧绷、也不过于松缓的精进,这种舍就叫精进舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘kālena kālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasikarotī’’ti (a. ni. 3.103) evamāgatā anaccāraddhanātisithilavīriyasaṅkhātā upekkhā, ayaṃ vīriyupekkhā nāma.
不过,还有一种舍,是像《无碍解道》里说的那样来的:“有多少种行舍是依止的力量生起的?有多少种行舍是依观的力量生起的?八种行舍依止的力量生起,十种行舍依观的力量生起。”在对诸盖等进行简择、舍离、安住、执取时,处于中立状态的舍,这就叫行舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘kati saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, kati saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti? Aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.57) evamāgatā nīvaraṇādipaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanāgahaṇe majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā nāma.
还有一种被称为不苦不乐舍的舍,也就是《法集论》里说的“当欲界善心生起、与舍同行时”所说的那种舍,这叫作受舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti upekkhāsahagata’’nti (dha. sa. 150) evamāgatā adukkhamasukhasaññitā upekkhā, ayaṃ vedanupekkhā nāma.
依经文所说“凡是存在的、已生的,他都舍断,并证得舍”,在简择中处于中立状态的舍,就叫观舍。巴利
Yā ‘‘yadatthi yaṃ bhūtaṃ, taṃ pajahati, upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.71; a. ni. 7.55) evamāgatā vicinane majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā nāma.
不过,在欲等随附诸法中提到的那种成为俱生诸法之平等运载的舍,这就叫作“此中立舍”。巴利
Yā pana chandādīsu yevāpanakesu āgatā sahajātānaṃ samavāhitabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhā nāma.
另外,像“具舍而住”这样出现在经文中的舍,即使面对最上等的乐也不会产生偏袒,这叫做禅那舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhako ca viharatī’’ti (dha. sa. 163; dī. ni. 1.230) evamāgatā aggasukhepi tasmiṃ apakkhapātajananī upekkhā, ayaṃ jhānupekkhā nāma.
不过,所谓“舍念清净的第四禅”这样出现在经典中的舍,它已清净于一切对立面,即使在对立面已经平息时也不起作用,这就叫作遍净舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhāna’’nti (dha. sa. 165; dī. ni. 1.232) evamāgatā sabbapaccanīkaparisuddhā paccanīkavūpasamanepi abyāpārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ pārisuddhupekkhā nāma.
在这里,六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、中舍、禅那舍和遍净舍,从含义上来说其实是一回事,就是中舍本身。只是根据各种不同的阶段状态,才有了这些区分。就像同一个人,依照男孩、青年、长老、将军、国王等不同身份而有不同的称呼。所以要这样理解:在这些舍当中,有六支舍的地方,就没有觉支舍等;反过来,有觉支舍的地方,就没有六支舍等。巴利
Tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā ca brahmavihārupekkhā ca bojjhaṅgupekkhā ca tatramajjhattupekkhā ca jhānupekkhā ca pārisuddhupekkhā ca atthato ekā, tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti. Tena tena avatthābhedena panassāyaṃ bhedo. Ekassāpi sato sattassa kumārayuvattherasenāpatirājādivasena bhedo viya, tasmā tāsu yattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā, na tattha bojjhaṅgupekkhādayo. Yattha vā pana bojjhaṅgupekkhā, na tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhādayo hontīti veditabbā.
就像这些舍在义理上是一体的,行舍和观舍也是如此。那其实就是慧本身,只是按作用分成两种。譬如一个人在黄昏时进了家,听说有蛇,就拿起山羊脚棍去找。他看见蛇盘在谷堆里,仔细打量:“这到底是蛇,还是不是?”等看清了那三圈纹路,心里不再犹豫,在分辨“是蛇,不是蛇”的时候,生起了中立的心态。同样,已经开始修观的人,以观智照见三相之后,在分辨诸行是无常等的过程中生起的中立心态,就是观舍。又譬如那个人用山羊脚棍紧紧压住蛇,心里盘算:“我怎样才能既不伤害这条蛇,又不让它咬到自己,把它放走呢?”在他寻找放走办法的时候,对抓取这件事保持中立。同样,因为已经照见三相,修行者看三界就像看到大火燃烧一样,对抓取诸行保持中立,这就是行舍。这样,观舍成就了,行舍也就成就了。而这舍,正是按“分辨时的中立”和“抓取时的中立”这两种作用,才分成两种。至于精进舍和受舍,这两者彼此之间,以及与其他诸舍在义理上,则是完全不同的。这里说:巴利
Yathā cetāsaṃ atthato ekībhāvo, evaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanupekkhānampi. Paññā eva hi sā, kiccavasena dvidhā bhinnā. Yathā hi purisassa sāyaṃ gehaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ sappaṃ ajapadadaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pariyesamānassa taṃ thusakoṭṭhake nipannaṃ disvā ‘‘sappo nu kho, no’’ti avalokentassa sovatthikattayaṃ disvā nibbematikassa ‘‘sappo, na sappo’’ti vicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, evameva yā āraddhavipassakassa vipassanāñāṇena lakkhaṇattaye diṭṭhe saṅkhārānaṃ aniccabhāvādivicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā. Yathā pana tassa purisassa ajapadadaṇḍena gāḷhaṃ sappaṃ gahetvā ‘‘kintāhaṃ imaṃ sappaṃ aviheṭhento attānañca iminā aḍaṃsāpento muñceyya’’nti muñcanākārameva pariyesato gahaṇe majjhattatā hoti, evameva yā lakkhaṇattayassa diṭṭhattā āditte viya tayo bhave passato saṅkhāragahaṇe majjhattatā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā. Iti vipassanupekkhāya siddhāya saṅkhārupekkhāpi siddhāva hoti. Iminā panesā vicinanagahaṇesu majjhattasaṅkhātena kiccena dvidhā bhinnāti. Vīriyupekkhā pana vedanupekkhā ca aññamaññañca avasesāhi ca atthato bhinnā evāti. Āha cettha –
中舍、梵住、觉支、六支、禅那、清净——这些就是舍。
观、行受、精进。
从广说的角度看,舍有十种;接下来,从六种的角度看,则有中舍等。
有两种慧,再加上另外两种,就成了这四种。巴利
‘‘Majjhattabrahmabojjhaṅgachaḷaṅgajhānasuddhiyo; Vipassanā ca saṅkhāravedanā vīriyaṃ iti. Vitthārato dasopekkhā, cha majjhattādito tato; Duve paññā tato dvīhi, catassova bhavantimā’’ti.
因此,在这些舍当中,这里指的是禅那舍。它的特相是中舍。对此有人问:从含义上说,这不就是中舍吗?而中舍在初禅和第二禅里也存在,所以在那两个禅那里也应该说“具舍而住”,为什么那里没有这样说呢?因为作用不明显。在那些禅那里,它的作用之所以不明显,是因为被寻等所压倒;但在这里,这个舍不被寻、伺、喜所压倒,就像抬起头一样,作用变得明显,所以在这里说了。巴利
Iti imāsu upekkhāsu jhānupekkhā idha adhippetā. Sā majjhattalakkhaṇā. Etthāha – ‘‘nanu cāyaṃ atthato tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti, sā ca paṭhamadutiyajjhānesupi atthi, tasmā tatrapi ‘upekkhako ca viharatī’ti evamayaṃ vattabbā siyā, sā kasmā na vuttā’’ti? Aparibyattakiccato. Aparibyattañhi tassa tattha kiccaṃ vitakkādīhi abhibhūtattā, idha panāyaṃ vitakkavicārapītīhi anabhibhūtattā ukkhittasirā viya hutvā paribyattakiccā jātā, tasmā vuttāti.
现在讲“具念与正知”这里:“念”就是能忆念,“正知”就是能清楚觉知。这是就人来说念和正知。其中,念的特相是忆念,正知的特相是不迷惑。虽然这念与正知在之前的禅那里也有——因为失念、没有正知的人,连近行定都达不到,更不用说安止定了——但那些禅那比较粗,就像在平地上人的心的运行容易,所以那时念与正知的作用还不明显。而第三禅因为舍掉了粗重的禅支,变得微细,就像走在刀刃上,心必须靠念与正知的作用来摄持才能安住,所以只在这里强调念与正知。还有,就像小牛被从母牛身边拉开,没人看管就又跑回母牛那里;同样,这第三禅的乐虽然已经离开了喜,如果不靠念与正知守护,就可能又回到喜,变成和喜相应。而且众生对乐容易起贪染,这第三禅的乐极其甜美,因为再往上就没有乐了。但正是靠念与正知的力量,才能对这乐不贪染,没有别的办法。要知道,为了显示这个特殊的要点,才只在这里说。巴利
Idāni sato ca sampajānoti ettha saratīti sato. Sampajānātīti sampajāno. Iti puggalena sati ca sampajaññañca vuttaṃ. Tattha saraṇalakkhaṇā sati. Asammohalakkhaṇaṃ sampajaññaṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi idaṃ satisampajaññaṃ purimajjhānesupi atthi, muṭṭhassatissa hi asampajānassa upacāramattampi na sampajjati, pageva appanā. Oḷārikattā pana tesaṃ jhānānaṃ bhūmiyaṃ viya purisassa cittassa gati sukhā hoti, abyattaṃ tattha satisampajaññakiccaṃ. Oḷārikaṅgappahānena pana sukhumattā imassa jhānassa purisassa khuradhārāyaṃ viya satisampajaññakiccapariggahitā eva cittassa gati icchitabbāti idheva vuttaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo – yathā dhenupago vaccho dhenuto apanīto arakkhiyamāno punadeva dhenuṃ upagacchati, evamidaṃ tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ pītito apanītampi satisampajaññārakkhena arakkhiyamānaṃ punadeva pītiṃ upagaccheyya, pītisampayuttameva siyā. Sukhe vāpi sattā sārajjanti, idañca atimadhuraṃ sukhaṃ tato paraṃ sukhābhāvā. Satisampajaññānubhāvena panettha sukhe asārajjanā hoti, no aññathāti imampi atthavisesaṃ dassetuṃ idaṃ idheva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
现在解释“以身体感受乐”这一句:虽然证得第三禅的人并没有感受乐的作意,但即便如此,因为他有与名身相应的乐,而且由于这种与名身相应的乐所生起的极其殊胜的色法触及了他的色身,因为被触及的缘故,即使从禅那出来之后也还能感受乐。为了显示这个意思,所以说“以身体感受乐”。巴利
Idāni sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetīti ettha kiñcāpi tatiyajjhānasamaṅgino sukhapaṭisaṃvedanābhogo natthi, evaṃ santepi yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, yaṃ vā taṃ nāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhānenassa yasmā atipaṇītena rūpena rūpakāyo phuṭṭho, yassa phuṭṭhattā jhānā vuṭṭhitopi sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyya, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedehī’’ti āha.
现在,在此,由于何种禅那之因、何种禅那之缘,圣者们——佛陀等——如此称赞、宣说、施设、建立、开显、分别、阐明、显示、赞叹具有第三禅的那个人,这就是其意趣。如何呢?舍具、念具、乐住。他进入第三禅而住。应当这样理解此处的句式连结。巴利
Idāni yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti ettha yaṃjhānahetu yaṃjhānakāraṇā taṃ tatiyajjhānasamaṅgipuggalaṃ buddhādayo ariyā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti pakāsenti, pasaṃsantīti adhippāyo. Kinti? Upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti. Taṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatīti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
为什么圣者们会这样赞叹它呢?因为它值得赞叹。在第三禅里,乐已经到了极致、极其甘美,可他仍然保持舍,不会被对乐的贪著牵着走。正如喜不再生起那样,他以此正念现前,所以是具念。还因为他用名身感受那种没有杂染、圣者所爱、只有圣者才亲近的乐,所以值得赞叹。因此,圣者们为了显示这些成为值得赞叹之因的功德,就这样赞叹说具舍、具念、乐住。应当这样理解。第三,按数目顺序是第三,也因为它是第三个生起的,所以叫第三。巴利
Kasmā pana taṃ te evaṃ pasaṃsantīti? Pasaṃsārahato. Ayañhi yasmā atimadhurasukhe sukhapāramippattepi tatiyajjhāne upekkhako, na tattha sukhābhisaṅgena ākaḍḍhīyati. Yathā ca pīti na uppajjati, evaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitāya satimā. Yasmā ca ariyakantaṃ ariyajanasevitameva ca asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ sukhaṃ nāmakāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, tasmā pasaṃsāraho hoti. Iti pasaṃsārahato naṃ ariyā te evaṃ pasaṃsārahahetubhūte guṇe pakāsentā ‘‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsantīti veditabbaṃ. Tatiyanti gaṇanānupubbatā tatiyaṃ, tatiyaṃ uppannantipi tatiyaṃ.
“由舍断乐,由舍断苦”,就是舍断身体的乐和身体的苦。“先已”,是说这舍断确实是在之前就已经完成,不是在第四禅的那个刹那。“由喜与忧的息灭”,是说心的乐和心的忧这两种也是先已息灭,也就是舍断。那么,它们是在什么时候被舍断的呢?是在四种禅各自的近行刹那。喜只在第四禅的近行刹那被舍断,苦、忧、乐则在初禅、二禅、三禅的近行刹那被舍断。因此,虽然这里没有按照舍断的先后次第来说,但依照《根分别》(vibha. 219等)中诸根的列举顺序,应当知道这里所说的乐、苦、喜、忧的舍断也是同样的道理。巴利
Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānāti kāyikasukhassa ca kāyikadukkhassa ca pahānā. Pubbevāti tañca kho pubbeva, na catutthajjhānakkhaṇe. Somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāti cetasikasukhassa cetasikadukkhassa cāti imesampi dvinnaṃ pubbeva atthaṅgamā, pahānā icceva vuttaṃ hoti. Kadā pana nesaṃ pahānaṃ hoti? Catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe. Somanassañhi catutthassa jhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyati, dukkhadomanassasukhāni paṭhamadutiyatatiyānaṃ upacārakkhaṇesu. Evametesaṃ pahānakkamena avuttānaṃ indriyavibhaṅge (vibha. 219 ādayo) pana indriyānaṃ uddesakkameneva idhāpi vuttānaṃ sukhadukkhasomanassadomanassānaṃ pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
如果这些受只是在各个禅那的近行阶段被断除,那为什么经中这样说:“所生的苦根在哪里无余灭尽?比丘们,在这里,比丘远离诸欲……成就初禅而住。所生的苦根就在这里无余灭尽。所生的忧根、乐根、喜根在哪里无余灭尽?比丘们,在这里,比丘由断乐……成就第四禅而住。所生的喜根就在这里无余灭尽。”——这样岂不是把灭尽说在诸禅那本身之中吗?这是因为殊胜的灭尽。在初禅等之中,对这些受来说是殊胜的灭尽,而不只是灭尽而已。仅仅灭尽是在近行阶段,而不是殊胜的灭尽。因为当转向不同所缘时,苦根虽然在初禅近行中已经灭尽,但仍可能因蚊虻叮咬之类的触感,或因坐姿不适带来的逼迫而生起,但在安止定内则绝不会生起。或者说,在近行中灭尽的这个,并没有真正彻底灭尽,因为还没有被对立面所摧毁。而在安止定内,由于喜遍满全身,全身被乐浸润;对于被乐浸润的身体,苦根就被彻底灭尽,因为已被对立面摧毁。同样,当转向不同所缘时,忧根虽然在第二禅近行中已被断除,但因为忧根是以寻和伺为条件,在身体疲劳和心有损恼时就会生起,而在没有寻和伺时则绝不生起。它生起的地方,就有寻和伺存在。而在第二禅近行中,寻和伺尚未被断除,所以忧根在那里还可能生起,但在第二禅中则不会,因为它的生起条件已被断除。同样,在第三禅近行中,乐根虽然已被断除,但对于被喜所生起的殊胜色法所触及的身体,乐根还可能生起,而在第三禅中则不会。因为在第三禅中,作为乐之条件的喜已经彻底灭尽。同样,在第四禅近行中,喜根虽然已被断除,但由于接近第四禅,又因为已达安止之舍尚不存在,所以还未完全超越,因此喜根还可能生起,而在第四禅中则不会。也正因为如此,经中在各处都采用“在这里所生的苦根无余灭尽”这样的“无余”说法。巴利
Yadi panetāni tassa tassa jhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyanti , atha kasmā ‘‘kattha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ettha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati. Kattha cuppannaṃ domanassindriyaṃ, sukhindriyaṃ, somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ettha cuppannaṃ somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.510) evaṃ jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti? Atisayanirodhattā. Atisayanirodho hi tesaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīsu, na nirodhoyeva. Nirodhoyeva pana upacārakkhaṇe, nātisayanirodho. Tathā hi nānāvajjane paṭhamajjhānūpacāre niruddhassāpi dukkhindriyassa ḍaṃsamakasādisamphassena vā visamāsanūpatāpena vā siyā uppatti, na tveva antoappanāyaṃ. Upacāre vā niruddhampetaṃ na suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti paṭipakkhena avihatattā. Antoappanāyaṃ pana pītipharaṇena sabbo kāyo sukhokkanto hoti, sukhokkantakāyassa ca suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti dukkhindriyaṃ paṭipakkhena vihatattā. Nānāvajjaneyeva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi domanassindriyassa, yasmā etaṃ vitakkavicārapaccayepi kāyakilamathe cittūpaghāte ca sati uppajjati, vitakkavicārābhāve neva uppajjati. Yattha pana uppajjati, tattha vitakkavicārabhāve. Appahīnāyeva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre vitakkavicārāti tatthassa siyā uppatti, natveva dutiyajjhāne pahīnapaccayattā. Tathā tatiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi sukhindriyassa pītisamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭṭhakāyassa siyā uppatti, natveva tatiyajjhāne. Tatiyajjhāne hi sukhassa paccayabhūtā pīti sabbaso niruddhā hoti. Tathā catutthajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi somanassindriyassa āsannattā, appanāppattāya upekkhāya abhāvena sammā anatikkantattā ca siyā uppatti, natveva catutthajjhāne. Tasmā eva ca ‘‘etthuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti tattha tattha aparisesaggahaṇaṃ katanti.
这里有人问:既然这些受在各自禅那的近行阶段就已经被断除了,为什么在这里还要把它们都提出来呢?是为了把握乐受。因为这里所说的“不苦不乐”这种受,极其微细,难以辨认,没办法用乐受的方式去把握它。就好比一个牧牛人想抓住一头凶恶的牛,那头牛不管你怎么靠近都抓不住,于是牧牛人为了抓住它,就把所有的牛都赶进同一个牛栏里,然后一头一头往外赶,当那头牛按顺序出来的时候,他就说:“就是这头,抓住它!”这样就能把它抓住了。同样地,为了把握乐受,就把所有这些受都集中到一起。这样集中之后,一一指出来,就能让人认识到:“那个既不是乐、也不是苦、既不是喜、也不是忧的,就是不苦不乐受。”巴利
Etthāha – ‘‘athevaṃ tassa tassa jhānassūpacāre pahīnāpi etā vedanā idha kasmā samāharī’’ti ? Sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ . Yā hi ayaṃ ‘‘adukkhamasukha’’nti ettha adukkhamasukhā vedanā vuttā, sā sukhumā dubbiññeyyā na sakkā sukhena gahetuṃ, tasmā yathā nāma duṭṭhassa yathā tathā vā upasaṅkamitvā gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyassa goṇassa gahaṇatthaṃ gopo ekasmiṃ vaje sabbā gāvo samāharati, athekekaṃ nīharanto paṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ ‘‘ayaṃ so gaṇhatha na’’nti tampi gāhāpeti, evamevaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ sabbāpi etā samāhari. Evañhi samāhaṭā etā dassetvā ‘‘yaṃ neva sukhaṃ, na dukkhaṃ, na somanassaṃ, na domanassaṃ, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhāvedanā’’ti sakkā hoti esā gāhayituṃ.
另外也要知道,这里说这些受,是为了显示不苦不乐心解脱的缘。因为舍断乐、舍断苦等,就是它的缘。就像经里说的:“贤友,有四种缘能成就进入不苦不乐心解脱。贤友,在这里,比丘因为舍断乐……成就并安住于第四禅。贤友,这四种缘就是成就进入不苦不乐心解脱的缘。”又像在其他地方,虽然身见等烦恼早已断除,但为了称赞第三道的功德,仍然说它们是在那里断除的;同样,这里说这些受,也应当知道是为了称赞这第四禅的功德。或者也应当知道,这里说这些受,是为了以摧毁缘的方式,来显示贪和嗔离得极远。因为在这些受当中,乐是喜的缘,喜是贪的缘;苦是忧的缘,忧是嗔的缘。当乐等被摧毁时,以它们为缘的贪和嗔也就被摧毁了,因此就变得极远。巴利
Apica adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā paccayadassanatthañcāpi etā vuttāti veditabbā. Sukhadukkhappahānādayo hi tassā paccayā. Yathāha – ‘‘cattāro kho, āvuso, paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ime kho āvuso, cattāro paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458). Yathā vā aññattha pahīnāpi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo tatiyamaggassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ tattha pahīnāti vuttā , evaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthampetassa jhānassetā idha vuttātipi veditabbā. Paccayaghātena vā ettha rāgadosānaṃ atidūrabhāvaṃ dassetumpetā vuttāti veditabbā. Etāsu hi sukhaṃ somanassassa paccayo, somanassaṃ rāgassa, dukkhaṃ domanassassa, domanassaṃ dosassa. Sukhādighātena ca sappaccayā rāgadosā hatāti atidūre hontīti.
不苦不乐:因为没有苦,所以是不苦;因为没有乐,所以是不乐。这里是要指出与苦、乐相对立的第三种受,而不只是说没有苦、没有乐而已。这第三种受就叫不苦不乐,也叫舍。它的特相是领纳可爱、不可爱以及与此相反的各种境况。舍念清净:就是由舍所产生的念清净。在这个禅那中,念非常清净,而这份念的清净是由舍造成的,不是由别的什么造成的。所以这就叫作舍念清净。而在这里让念得以清净的那个舍,从义理上说,应当知道就是中舍性。而且在这里,不只是念清净,一切与它相应的心所法也都是清净的,只是开示时以念为代表来说罢了。巴利
Adukkhamasukhanti dukkhābhāvena adukkhaṃ. Sukhābhāvena asukhaṃ. Etenettha dukkhasukhapaṭipakkhabhūtaṃ tatiyavedanaṃ dīpeti, na dukkhasukhābhāvamattaṃ. Tatiyavedanā nāma adukkhamasukhā, upekkhātipi vuccati. Sā iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇā. Upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti upekkhāya janitasatipārisuddhiṃ. Imasmiñhi jhāne suparisuddhā sati, yā ca tassā satiyā pārisuddhi, sā upekkhāya katā, na aññena. Tasmā etaṃ ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti vuccati. Yāya ca upekkhāya ettha satiyā pārisuddhi hoti, sā atthato tatramajjhattatāti veditabbā. Na kevalañcettha tāya satiyeva parisuddhā, apica kho sabbepi sampayuttadhammā, satisīsena pana desanā vuttā.
在这里,虽然这种舍在下三禅里也存在,但就像白天虽然也有月亮,可是因为太阳光太强,把它盖住了,加上它本身柔和,又没有得到与之相应的夜晚来帮衬,所以白天里的月牙就显得不清净、不明亮;同样,这种中舍性的月牙,在初禅等里面虽然也有,却被寻、伺等敌对法的势力压住,又没有得到与之相应的舍受之夜来配合,所以显得不清净。因为它不清净,那些与它同时生起的念等法,也就像白天里不清净的月牙之光一样,都是不清净的。所以在那些禅里,连一个也不能说是“舍念清净”。但在这里,因为不再被寻、伺等敌对法的势力压住,又得到了与之相应的舍受之夜,这种中舍性的月牙就非常清净。因为它清净,那些与它同时生起的念等法,也就像清净月牙的光一样,变得清净、明亮。因此应当知道,只有这第四禅才叫作“舍念清净”。第四:按数目的顺序是第四,也因为它是第四个生起的,所以叫第四。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpi ayaṃ upekkhā heṭṭhāpi tīsu jhānesu vijjati, yathā pana divā sūriyappabhābhibhavā sommabhāvena ca attano upakārakattena vā sabhāgāya rattiyā alābhā divā vijjamānāpi candalekhā aparisuddhā hoti apariyodātā, evamayampi tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā vitakkādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā alābhā vijjamānāpi paṭhamajjhānādibhede aparisuddhā hoti. Tassā ca aparisuddhāya divā aparisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo aparisuddhāva honti. Tasmā tesu ekampi ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti na vuttaṃ. Idha pana vitakkādipaccanīkatejābhibhavābhāvā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā paṭilābhā ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā ativiya parisuddhā. Tassā parisuddhattā parisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo parisuddhā honti pariyodātā. Tasmā idameva ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Catutthanti gaṇanānupubbatā catutthaṃ, catutthaṃ uppannantipi catutthaṃ.
这四种禅那,在前分阶段和道刹那阶段都各不相同。在前分阶段,是依等至的不同而不同;在道刹那阶段,则是依不同种类的道而不同。因为对某个人来说,初道属于初禅类型,第二道等也可能属于初禅类型,或者属于第二禅等中的某一种禅那类型。对另一个人来说,初道属于第二禅等中的某一种禅那类型,第二道等也可能属于第二禅等中的某一种禅那类型,或者属于初禅类型。这样一来,四道从禅那的角度来看,就可能相同、不同,或者部分相同。而这里的差别,是由作为基础的禅那所决定的。因为,证得初禅的人从初禅出定后修观,所生起的道属于初禅类型,而且在这里,道支和觉支都是圆满的。从第二禅出定后修观,所生起的道属于第二禅类型,但这里的道支只有七支。从第三禅出定后修观,所生起的道属于第三禅类型,这里的道支有七支,觉支有六支。从第四禅开始,一直到非想非非想处,都遵循同样的道理。在无色界中,生起的是四禅或五禅,而且那是出世间的,不是世间的,这是已经说过的。这里怎么说呢?在这里也一样,从初禅等出定,证得入流道之后,再修习无色定,在无色界中证得更高境界的人,其后生起的三种道,也都属于那种禅那的类型。如此,正是作为基础的禅那决定了这一点。不过,有些长老说:“作为观所缘的诸蕴决定了这一点。”有些说:“个人的根性倾向决定了这一点。”有些说:“导向出起的观决定了这一点。”巴利
Imāni cattāri jhānāni pubbabhāgepi nānā, maggakkhaṇepi. Pubbabhāge samāpattivasena nānā, maggakkhaṇe nānāmaggavasena. Ekassa hi paṭhamamaggo paṭhamajjhāniko hoti, dutiyamaggādayopi paṭhamajjhānikā vā dutiyādīsu aññatarajjhānikā vā. Ekassa paṭhamamaggo dutiyādīnaṃ aññatarajjhāniko hoti, dutiyādayopi dutiyādīnaṃ aññatarajjhānikā vā paṭhamajjhānikā vā. Evaṃ cattāropi maggā jhānavasena sadisā vā asadisā vā ekaccasadisā vā honti. Ayaṃ panassa viseso pādakajjhānaniyamena hoti. Paṭhamajjhānalābhino hi paṭhamajjhānā vuṭṭhāya vipassantassa uppannamaggo paṭhamajjhāniko hoti, maggaṅgabojjhaṅgāni panettha paripuṇṇāneva honti. Dutiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya vipassantassa uppanno dutiyajjhāniko hoti, maggaṅgāni panettha satta honti. Tatiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya vipassantassa uppanno tatiyajjhāniko, maggaṅgāni panettha satta, bojjhaṅgāni cha honti. Esa nayo catutthajjhānato paṭṭhāya yāva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanā. Āruppe catukkapañcakajjhānaṃ uppajjati, tañca kho lokuttaraṃ, na lokiyanti vuttaṃ. Ettha kathanti? Etthapi paṭhamajjhānādīsu yato vuṭṭhāya sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭilabhitvā arūpasamāpattiṃ bhāvetvā yo āruppe uppanno, taṃjhānikāva tassa tattha tayo maggā uppajjanti. Evaṃ pādakajjhānameva niyameti. Keci pana therā ‘‘vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā niyamentī’’ti vadanti. Keci ‘‘puggalajjhāsayo niyametī’’ti vadanti. Keci ‘‘vuṭṭhānagāminī vipassanā niyametī’’ti vadanti.
这里接着按顺序说明。依照观的决定:干观者所生起的道,以及获得等至的人不把禅那作为基础而所生起的道,都是以初禅为类型的;即使是以初禅为基础,对种种行作观之后所引生的道,也同样是以初禅为类型的。在所有这些情况里,七觉支、八道支、五禅支都具足。因为他们的前行观,可能是与喜相应的,也可能是与舍相应的;可是在出起的时候,到达行舍状态时,就只是与喜相应的。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – vipassanāniyamena hi sukkhavipassakassa uppannamaggopi, samāpattilābhino jhānaṃ pādakaṃ akatvā uppannamaggopi, paṭhamajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā pakiṇṇakasaṅkhāre sammasitvā uppāditamaggopi paṭhamajjhānikova hoti, sabbesu satta bojjhaṅgāni aṭṭha maggaṅgāni pañca jhānaṅgāni honti. Tesañhi pubbabhāgavipassanā somanassasahagatāpi upekkhāsahagatāpi hutvā vuṭṭhānakāle saṅkhārupekkhābhāvaṃ pattā somanassasahagatāva hoti.
在五禅支的分类里,以第二禅、第三禅、第四禅作为基础禅那而引生的道,随着次序不同,禅那分别是四支、三支、二支;但在所有这些道中,道支都是七支,而在第四禅时,觉支是六支。这个差别既由基础禅那的限定造成,也由观的限定造成。因为,它们的前分观也是喜俱或舍俱;而出起观则唯独是喜俱。巴利
Pañcakanaye dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānāni pādakāni katvā uppāditamaggesu yathākkameneva jhānaṃ caturaṅgikaṃ tivaṅgikaṃ duvaṅgikañca hoti, sabbesu pana satta maggaṅgāni honti, catutthe cha bojjhaṅgāni. Ayaṃ viseso pādakajjhānaniyamena ceva vipassanāniyamena ca hoti. Tesampi hi pubbabhāgavipassanā somanassasahagatāpi upekkhāsahagatāpi hoti, vuṭṭhānagāminī somanassasahagatāva.
以第五禅作为基础禅那而引生的道,则依舍与心一境性,有两个禅支;觉支和道支则分别是六支和七支。这个差别同样是由两种决定造成的。因为在这个方式中,前分观可以是喜俱,也可以是舍俱;而出起观则唯独是舍俱。以无色界禅那为基础而引生的道,道理也是如此。不过,在这里的四禅分类中,由于没有无寻唯伺的第二禅,所以应把它排除,再按其余禅那来配合。如此,从基础禅那出定后,对任何诸行进行观察而引生的道,在临近出起的阶段,那种出起的等至会使道与自身相似,就像地面的颜色会使蜥蜴的体色与自身相似一样。巴利
Pañcamajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā nibbattitamagge pana upekkhācittekaggatāvasena dve jhānaṅgāni, bojjhaṅgamaggaṅgāni cha satta ceva. Ayampi viseso ubhayaniyamavasena hoti. Imasmiñhi naye pubbabhāgavipassanā somanassasahagatā vā upekkhāsahagatā vā hoti, vuṭṭhānagāminī upekkhāsahagatāva hoti. Arūpajjhānāni pādakāni katvā uppāditamaggepi eseva nayo. Idha pana catukkanaye avitakkavicāramattassa dutiyajjhānassa abhāvā taṃ apanetvā sesānaṃ vasena yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ pādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya ye keci saṅkhāre sammasitvā nibbattitamaggassa āsannapadese vuṭṭhitasamāpatti attanā sadisabhāvaṃ karoti bhūmivaṇṇo viya godhāvaṇṇassa.
在第二种长老的说法里,从任何一种等至出定之后,观察那些等至相关的法而引生出来的道,就和那种等至相似。在这里,关于观的决定,也应当依照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Dutiyattheravāde pana yato yato samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ye ye samāpattidhamme sammasitvā maggo nibbattito hoti, taṃtaṃsamāpattisadisova hoti. Tatrāpi ca vipassanāniyamo vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
在第三种长老的说法里,随着自己的意乐,无论以哪一种禅那作为基础,观察了哪些禅那的法之后所生起的道,就与那种禅那相似。但是,如果没有作为基础的禅那,或者没有所观察的禅那,只靠意乐本身,这道是成不了的。在这里,关于观的决定,也应当按前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Tatiyattheravāde attano ajjhāsayānurūpena yaṃ yaṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā ye ye jhānadhamme sammasitvā maggo nibbattito, taṃtaṃjhānasadisova hoti. Pādakajjhānaṃ pana sammasitajjhānaṃ vā vinā ajjhāsayamatteneva taṃ na ijjhati. Etthāpi ca vipassanāniyamo vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
这称为正定:在四种禅那中的一境性,前期是世间的,后期是出世间的,这称为正定。法将(舍利弗)就是这样按世间和出世间两方面来开示道谛。
其中,在世间道里,所有道支都随各自的情况,以六种所缘中的某一种作为所缘。但在出世间道里,对于为证悟四谛而精进的圣弟子来说:以涅槃为所缘、能断除无明随眠的慧眼,就是正见;对于具足这种见的人,与它相应、能断除三种邪思惟、把心投向涅槃之境的,就是正思惟;对于这样见、这样思惟的人,与它相应、能断除四种语恶行、远离邪语的,就是正语;对于这样远离的人,与它相应、能断除三种邪业、远离邪业的,就是正业;而作为他的语业和身业的清净基础,与它相应、能断除诡诈等邪命、远离邪命的,就是正命;对于这样安住在由正语、正业、正命所构成的戒地上的人,与它相应、能断除懈怠,使未生的不善法不生起、已生的不善法被断除、未生的善法生起、已生的善法安住成就的这种精进努力,就是正精进;对于这样精进的人,与它相应、能驱除邪念,成就于身等修习身随观等的心的不忘失,就是正念;对于以无上正念善加守护其心的人,与它相应、能摧破邪定的一境性,就是正定。这就是出世间的圣八支道。巴利
Ayaṃ vuccati sammāsamādhīti yā imesu catūsu jhānesu ekaggatā, ayaṃ pubbabhāge lokiyo, aparabhāge lokuttaro sammāsamādhi nāma vuccati. Evaṃ lokiyalokuttaravasena dhammasenāpati maggasaccaṃ deseti. Tattha lokiyamagge sabbāneva maggaṅgāni yathānurūpaṃ chasu ārammaṇesu aññatarārammaṇāni honti. Lokuttaramagge pana catusaccappaṭivedhāya pavattassa ariyasāvakassa nibbānārammaṇaṃ avijjānusayasamugghātakaṃ paññācakkhu sammādiṭṭhi, tathā sampannadiṭṭhissa taṃsampayutto tividhamicchāsaṅkappasamugghātako cetaso nibbānapadābhiniropano sammāsaṅkappo, tathā passantassa vitakkentassa ca taṃsampayuttāva catubbidhavacīduccaritasamugghātikā micchāvācāya virati sammāvācā, tathā viramantassa taṃsampayuttāva tividhamicchākammantasamucchedikā micchākammantā virati sammākammanto, tesaṃyeva cassa vācākammantānaṃ vodānabhūtā taṃsampayuttāva kuhanādisamucchedikā micchāājīvā virati sammāājīvo, tassāyevassa sammāvācākammantājīvasaṅkhātāya sīlabhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhamānassa tadanurūpo taṃsampayuttova kosajjasamucchedako, anuppannuppannānaṃ akusalakusalānaṃ anuppādappahānuppādaṭṭhitisādhako ca vīriyārambho sammāvāyāmo, evaṃ vāyamantassa taṃsampayuttova micchāsativiniddhunako, kāyādīsu kāyānupassanādisādhako ca cetaso asammoso sammāsati. Evaṃ anuttarāya satiyā suvihitacittārakkhassa taṃsampayuttāva micchāsamādhividdhaṃsikā cittekaggatā sammāsamādhi. Esa lokuttaro ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo.
这条与世间道一起、被称为“趣向苦灭之道”的道,因为正见和正思惟被归入“明”,其余诸法被归入“行”,所以它既是明,也是行。同样,因为前两支被归入“观乘”,其余各支被归入“止乘”,所以它既是止,也是观。又因为前两支被归入慧蕴,紧接着的三支被归入戒蕴,其余三支被归入定蕴,并且被归入增上慧学、增上戒学、增上心学,所以它既是三蕴,也是三学。具足这条道的圣弟子,就像同时拥有能看的眼睛和能走的双脚的旅人一样,成为明行具足的人;他以观乘避开沉溺欲乐的极端,以止乘避开自我折磨的极端,从而走上中道;他以慧蕴摧毁愚痴蕴,以戒蕴摧毁嗔恚蕴,以定蕴摧毁贪欲蕴;通过增上慧学成就慧的圆满,通过增上戒学成就戒的圆满,通过增上心学成就定的圆满,证得这三种成就,亲证不死涅槃。他已经进入初善、中善、后善,以三十七菩提分法宝装饰,被称为入正性决定之圣地。巴利
Yo saha lokiyena maggena dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāti saṅkhyaṃ gato, so kho panesa maggo sammādiṭṭhisaṅkappānaṃ vijjāya sesadhammānaṃ caraṇena saṅgahitattā vijjā ceva caraṇañca. Tathā tesaṃ dvinnaṃ vipassanāyānena itaresaṃ samathayānena saṅgahitattā samatho ceva vipassanā ca. Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ paññākkhandhena tadanantarānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sīlakkhandhena avasesānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhikkhandhena adhipaññāadhisīlaadhicittasikkhāhi ca saṅgahitattā khandhattayañceva sikkhattayañca hoti. Yena samannāgato ariyasāvako dassanasamatthehi cakkhūhi gamanasamatthehi ca pādehi samannāgato addhiko viya vijjācaraṇasampanno hutvā vipassanāyānena kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ samathayānena attakilamathānuyoganti antadvayaṃ parivajjetvā majjhimapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno paññākkhandhena mohakkhandhaṃ, sīlakkhandhena dosakkhandhaṃ, samādhikkhandhena ca lobhakkhandhaṃ padālento adhipaññāsikkhāya paññāsampadaṃ, adhisīlasikkhāya sīlasampadaṃ, adhicittasikkhāya samādhisampadanti tisso sampattiyo patvā amataṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti. Ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇaṃ sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammaratanavicittaṃ sammattaniyāmasaṅkhātaṃ ariyabhūmiṃ okkanto hotīti.
关于谛的杂论解释巴利
Saccapakiṇṇakavaṇṇanā
在四圣谛当中,苦谛的特相是逼迫,集谛的特相是生起,灭谛的特相是寂静,道谛的特相是出离;此外,依次还有转起、令转起、还灭、令还灭的特相。同样,还有有为、渴爱、无为、见的特相。巴利
Catūsu pana saccesu bādhanalakkhaṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, pabhavalakkhaṇaṃ samudayasaccaṃ, santilakkhaṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ maggasaccaṃ, apica pavattipavattakanivattinivattakalakkhaṇāni paṭipāṭiyā. Tathā saṅkhatataṇhāasaṅkhatadassanalakkhaṇāni ca.
为什么只说了四圣谛,不多不少呢?因为再没有别的圣谛可以添加,而且其中任何一个圣谛都无法去除。因为在这四圣谛之外,确实不可能再增加一个圣谛,也不可能从这四圣谛中去掉任何一个。正如所说的:巴利
Kasmā pana cattāreva ariyasaccāni vuttāni anūnāni anadhikānīti ce? Aññassa asambhavato aññatarassa ca anapaneyyabhāvato. Na hi etehi aññaṃ adhikaṃ vā, etesaṃ vā ekampi apanetabbaṃ sambhoti. Yathāha –
比丘们,在这里,如果有沙门或婆罗门来说:“这不是苦圣谛,另有一个苦圣谛。我要把沙门乔达摩所教导的这个苦圣谛放到一边,另外安立一个苦圣谛。”这是不可能的。巴利
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, āgaccheyya samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ‘netaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, aññaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ. Yaṃ samaṇena gotamena desitaṃ, ahametaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ paññapessāmī’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’tiādi.
比丘们,如果有任何沙门或婆罗门这样说:“这不是沙门乔达摩所教导的第一苦圣谛,我否定这个第一苦圣谛,要另外安立一个第一苦圣谛。”这是不可能的。巴利
‘‘Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṃ vadeyya ‘netaṃ dukkhaṃ paṭhamaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, yaṃ samaṇena gotamena desitaṃ, ahametaṃ dukkhaṃ paṭhamaṃ ariyasaccaṃ paccakkhāya aññaṃ dukkhaṃ paṭhamaṃ ariyasaccaṃ paññapessāmī’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.1086).
另外,世尊在说明流转时,也说明了它的因;在说明还灭时,也说明了它的方法。因此,对于流转、还灭以及这两者的因,最多也就只说了这四谛。同样地,按照应遍知、应断、应证、应修习;按照渴爱的依据、渴爱、渴爱的灭、灭渴爱的方法;以及按照执著、执著中的贪乐、断除执著、断除执著的方法,也只是说了这四谛。巴利
Apica pavattimācikkhanto bhagavā sahetukaṃ ācikkhi, nivattiñca saupāyaṃ. Iti pavattinivattitadubhayahetūnaṃ etapparamato cattāreva vuttāni. Tathā pariññeyyapahātabbasacchikātabbabhāvetabbānaṃ, taṇhāvatthutaṇhātaṇhānirodhataṇhānirodhūpāyānaṃ, ālayaālayarāmatāālayasamugghātaālayasamugghātūpāyānañca vasenāpi cattāreva vuttānīti.
在这里,苦谛因为粗显,又是一切众生共通的,所以很容易理解,因此先说苦谛。为了显示它的因,紧接着就说集谛;为了说明“因灭则果灭”,接下来就说灭谛;为了显示证得灭谛的方法,最后说道谛。或者,为了令贪著生存之乐的有情生起警醒,先说了苦。为了说明“这苦不是无缘无故来的,也不是自在天等创造出来的,而是从这个因缘产生的”,紧接着就说集。然后,对于被有因之苦所压倒、内心警醒、寻求从苦中出离的人,通过显示苦的止息来让他们获得安慰,所以说灭。最后,为了证得灭,就说能导向灭的道。这就是它们这样的次第。巴利
Ettha ca oḷārikattā sabbasattasādhāraṇattā ca suviññeyyanti dukkhasaccaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasseva hetudassanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ samudayasaccaṃ, hetunirodhā phalanirodhoti ñāpanatthaṃ tato nirodhasaccaṃ, tadadhigamūpāyadassanatthaṃ ante maggasaccaṃ. Bhavasukhassādagadhitānaṃ vā sattānaṃ saṃvegajananatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ dukkhamāha. Taṃ neva akataṃ āgacchati, na issaranimmānādito hoti, ito pana hotīti ñāpanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ samudayaṃ. Tato sahetukena dukkhena abhibhūtattā saṃviggamānasānaṃ dukkhanissaraṇagavesīnaṃ nissaraṇadassanena assāsajananatthaṃ nirodhaṃ. Tato nirodhādhigamanatthaṃ nirodhasampāpakaṃ magganti ayametesaṃ kamo.
对于这些(四圣谛),应当把苦谛看作重担,把集谛看作拿起重担,把灭谛看作放下重担,把道谛看作放下重担的方法。或者,把苦谛看作疾病,把集谛看作病因,把灭谛看作病愈,把道谛看作药物。或者,把苦谛看作饥荒,把集谛看作干旱,把灭谛看作丰收,把道谛看作及时雨。此外,还可以用怨敌、怨敌的根源、拔除怨敌、拔除怨敌的方法来对应;用毒树、树根、砍断树根、砍断树根的方法来对应;用怖畏、怖畏的根源、无怖畏、证得无怖畏的方法来对应;用此岸、大水、彼岸、运送人到达彼岸的努力来对应——应当通过譬喻来了知这些。巴利
Etesu pana bhāro viya dukkhasaccaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, bhārādānamiva samudayasaccaṃ, bhāranikkhepanamiva nirodhasaccaṃ, bhāranikkhepanūpāyo viya maggasaccaṃ. Rogo viya vā dukkhasaccaṃ, roganidānamiva samudayasaccaṃ, rogavūpasamo viya nirodhasaccaṃ, bhesajjamiva maggasaccaṃ. Dubbhikkhamiva vā dukkhasaccaṃ, dubbuṭṭhi viya samudayasaccaṃ, subhikkhamiva nirodhasaccaṃ, suvuṭṭhi viya maggasaccaṃ. Apica verīveramūlaverasamugghātaverasamugghātūpāyehi, visarukkharukkhamūlamūlūpacchedatadupacchedūpāyehi, bhayabhayamūlanibbhayatadadhigamūpāyehi, orimatīramahoghapārimatīrataṃsampāpakavāyāmehi ca yojetvāpetāni upamāto veditabbānīti.
然而应当知道,这一切圣谛从究竟意义上来说都是空的,因为不存在感受者、造作者、寂灭者和到达者。因此这样说:巴利
Sabbāneva panetāni saccāni paramatthena vedakakārakanibbutagamakābhāvato suññānīti veditabbāni. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
确实只有苦,而没有谁在受苦;没有造作者,只存在行为本身。
有寂灭,但没有寂灭的人;有道,却找不到走在道上的人。巴利
‘‘Dukkhameva hi na koci dukkhito, kārako na kiriyāva vijjati; Atthi nibbuti na nibbuto pumā, maggamatthi gamako na vijjatī’’ti.
前两类(苦与集)空于常、净、乐、我;不死之境空于我。
道远离常、乐、我,因此在他们之中就是空性。巴利
Dhuvasubhasukhattasuññaṃ, purimadvayamattasuññamamatapadaṃ; Dhuvasukhaattavirahito, maggo iti suññatā tesu.
或者,这三者(苦、集、道)在灭中为空,而灭在其余三者中为空。又或者,在这里果在因中为空:因为在集里没有苦,在道里没有灭——不像自然论者所说的自性那样,把果和因放在一起。果在因中为空:因为苦与集、灭与道并不和合,不像和合论者所说的二微尘等那样,主张因与果和合。因此,这样说:巴利
Nirodhasuññāni vā tīṇi, nirodho ca sesattayasuñño. Phalasuñño vā ettha hetu samudaye dukkhassa abhāvato, magge ca nirodhassa, na phalena sagabbho pakativādīnaṃ pakati viya. Hetusuññañca phalaṃ dukkhasamudayānaṃ nirodhamaggānañca asamavāyā, na hetusamavetaṃ hetuphalaṃ samavāyavādīnaṃ dviaṇukādi viya. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
在这里,那三者以灭为空,涅槃也以那三者为空;
因以果为空,果也以那个因为空。巴利
‘‘Tayamidha nirodhasuññaṃ, tayena tenāpi nibbutī suññā; Suñño phalena hetu, phalampi taṃhetunā suñña’’nti.
一切圣谛彼此都有共同的性质:它们都不虚妄,都是无我空,而且都难以彻底证悟。正如经中所说:巴利
Sabbāneva saccāni aññamaññasabhāgāni avitathato attasuññato dukkarapaṭivedhato ca. Yathāha –
“阿难,你怎么看?哪一种更难做到、更难实现呢?是有人从远处用极细的箭穿过钥匙孔,一箭接一箭,丝毫不差;还是用箭尖射穿分成七分的毫毛的毛尖?”
“然而,阿难,那些如实彻证‘这是苦’……如实彻证‘这是导向苦灭之道’的人,他们所彻证的才是更难彻证的。”巴利
‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññasi, ānanda, katamaṃ nu kho dukkarataraṃ vā durabhisambhavataraṃ vā, yo dūratova sukhumena tāḷacchiggaḷena asanaṃ atipāteyya poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ avirādhitaṃ, yo vā sattadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭivijjheyyāti? Etadeva, bhante, dukkaratarañceva durabhisambhavatarañca; Yo vā sattadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭivijjheyyāti; Atha kho te, ānanda, duppaṭivijjhataraṃ paṭivijjhanti, ye ‘idaṃ dukkha’nti yathābhūtaṃ paṭivijjhanti…pe… ‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṃ paṭivijjhantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1115);
这些法彼此不同,是依据它们各自的特相来区分的。前两个(苦谛和集谛)彼此相同,因为都深奥难入、属于世间、有漏;它们的不同,则在于果和因的差别,以及一个是应当遍知的、一个是应当断除的。后两个(灭谛和道谛)也彼此相同,因为都深奥难入、属于出世间、无漏;它们的不同,则在于所缘和能缘的差别,以及一个是应当证得的、一个是应当修习的。第一和第三(苦谛和灭谛)也彼此相同,因为从某种角度来说都可以称为果;它们的不同,在于一个是有为、一个是无为。第二和第四(集谛和道谛)也彼此相同,因为都可以称为因;它们的不同,在于一个是纯粹不善、一个是纯粹善。第一和第四(苦谛和道谛)也彼此相同,因为都是有为;它们的不同,在于一个是世间、一个是出世间。第二和第三(集谛和灭谛)也彼此相同,因为都处于既非有学也非无学的状态;它们的不同,在于一个有所缘、一个无所缘。巴利
Visabhāgāni salakkhaṇavavatthānato. Purimāni ca dve sabhāgāni duravagāhatthena gambhīrattā lokiyattā sāsavattā ca, visabhāgāni phalahetubhedato pariññeyyapahātabbato ca. Pacchimānipi dve sabhāgāni gambhīrattena duravagāhattā lokuttarattā anāsavattā ca, visabhāgāni visayavisayībhedato sacchikātabbabhāvetabbato ca. Paṭhamatatiyāni cāpi sabhāgāni phalāpadesato, visabhāgāni saṅkhatāsaṅkhatato . Dutiyacatutthāni cāpi sabhāgāni hetuapadesato, visabhāgāni ekantakusalākusalato. Paṭhamacatutthāni cāpi sabhāgāni saṅkhatato, visabhāgāni lokiyalokuttarato. Dutiyatatiyāni cāpi sabhāgāni nevasekkhanāsekkhabhāvato, visabhāgāni sārammaṇānārammaṇato.
智者就是这样,依据各种类别和方法来辨别。
应了知诸圣谛的同分与异分。巴利
‘‘Iti evaṃ pakārehi, nayehi ca vicakkhaṇo; Vijaññā ariyasaccānaṃ, sabhāgavisabhāgata’’nti.
在这里,一切苦都可分为一类,因为都是生起的状态。可分为两类,因为有名和色。可分为三类,因为有不同的生有,也就是欲有、色有、无色有。可分为四类,因为有四种食的差别。可分为五类,因为有五种取蕴的差别。集也可分为一类,因为是能令生起的状态。可分为两类,因为与见相应或不相应。可分为三类,因为有欲爱、有爱、无有爱的差别。可分为四类,因为由四道所断。可分为五类,因为对色的欢喜等差别。可分为六类,因为有六种渴爱身的差别。灭也可分为一类,因为是无为界的状态;但从方便说,可分为两类,因为有余依和无余依。可分为三类,因为三种有的寂止。可分为四类,因为由四道所证得。可分为五类,因为五种欢喜的寂止。可分为六类,因为六种渴爱身灭尽的差别。道也可分为一类,因为应当修习。可分为两类,因为止和观的差别,或者因为见和修的差别。可分为三类,因为三蕴的差别。这个道有部分,就像城市被国土包含一样,它被无部分的三蕴所包含。正如所说——巴利
Sabbameva cettha dukkhaṃ ekavidhaṃ pavattibhāvato, duvidhaṃ nāmarūpato, tividhaṃ kāmarūpārūpūpapattibhavabhedato, catubbidhaṃ catuāhārabhedato, pañcavidhaṃ pañcupādānakkhandhabhedato. Samudayopi ekavidho pavattakabhāvato, duvidho diṭṭhisampayuttāsampayuttato, tividho kāmabhavavibhavataṇhābhedato, catubbidho catumaggappaheyyato, pañcavidho rūpābhinandanādibhedato, chabbidho chataṇhākāyabhedato. Nirodhopi ekavidho asaṅkhatadhātubhāvato, pariyāyato pana duvidho saupādisesaanupādisesato, tividho bhavattayavūpasamato, catubbidho catumaggādhigamanīyato, pañcavidho pañcābhinandanavūpasamato, chabbidho chataṇhākāyakkhayabhedato. Maggopi ekavidho bhāvetabbato, duvidho samathavipassanābhedato, dassanabhāvanābhedato vā, tividho khandhattayabhedato. Ayañhi sappadesattā nagaraṃ viya rajjena nippadesehi tīhi khandhehi saṅgahito. Yathāha –
贤友毗舍佉,并不是三蕴被圣八支道所包含。贤友毗舍佉,而是圣八支道被三蕴所包含。贤友毗舍佉,正语、正业、正命——这些法被包含在戒蕴中;正精进、正念、正定——这些法被包含在定蕴中;正见、正思惟——这些法被包含在慧蕴中。巴利
‘‘Na kho, āvuso visākha, ariyena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena tayo khandhā saṅgahitā, tīhi ca kho, āvuso visākha, khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahito. Yā, cāvuso visākha, sammāvācā yo ca sammākammanto yo ca sammāājīvo, ime dhammā sīlakkhandhe saṅgahitā. Yo ca sammāvāyāmo yā ca sammāsati yo ca sammāsamādhi, ime dhammā samādhikkhandhe saṅgahitā. Yā ca sammādiṭṭhi yo ca sammāsaṅkappo, ime dhammā paññākkhandhe saṅgahitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.462).
按入流道等来分,有四种。巴利
Catubbidho sotāpattimaggādivasena.
另外,一切谛从一种方式来看,都是真实不虚的,或者都是应当被证知的。从两种方式来看,可以按世间与出世间来分,或者按有为与无为来分。从三种方式来看,可以按见道与修道所断、无所断,以及非所断非无所断来分。从四种方式来看,就是应当遍知、应当断除、应当证悟、应当修习。巴利
Apica sabbāneva saccāni ekavidhāni avitathattā, abhiññeyyattā vā. Duvidhāni lokiyalokuttarato, saṅkhatāsaṅkhatato vā. Tividhāni dassanabhāvanāhi pahātabbato appahātabbato nevapahātabbanāpahātabbato ca. Catubbidhāni pariññeyyapahātabbasacchikātabbabhāvetabbatoti.
觉者就这样了知了难以了悟的圣谛之道。
应当从种种不同的分类去了解,这是为了利益和安乐。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ, dubbodhānaṃ budho vidhiṃ; Anekabhedato jaññā, hitāya ca sukhāya cā’’ti.
现在,法将(舍利弗)按照世尊所教导的次第,在最后指出了四谛的组合,然后通过“那以了知之义为智”等语句,以四谛组合的方式,把闻所成智归纳总结并显示出来。如此,便把先前所说的“在专注听法时的慧就是闻所成智”这一切内容都归纳总结并显示出来。巴利
Idāni dhammasenāpati bhagavatā desitakkameneva ante saccacatukkaṃ niddisitvā ‘‘taṃ ñātaṭṭhena ñāṇa’’ntiādinā saccacatukkavasena sutamaye ñāṇaṃ nigametvā dasseti. Evaṃ ‘‘sotāvadhāne paññā sutamaye ñāṇa’’nti pubbe vuttaṃ sabbaṃ nigametvā dassetīti.
戒所成智的解说注释巴利
2. Sīlamayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
37 在“戒所成智”的解释中,“五”是数目的限定。“戒”是指出被限定的法。“有边清净戒”等,是从五种戒各自的体相来说明。在“有边清净”等词中,就像因为衣料与蓝色相结合,即使衣料本身不是蓝色,也可以说它有蓝色,因此称为“蓝衣”;同样地,因为从数目上有边际、有范围,所以称为“有边”;或者,对已受具足戒的人来说,他的戒到达了终点,因为未受具足戒者的戒在已受具足戒者的戒那里终结;由于有这样一个终点,所以称为“有边”。本来应该说“有边的”,要知道这里省略了s音,就像“dakaṃ dakāsayā pavisantī”这句话中省略了u音一样。清净的状态就是“清净”,既有边又清净,所以称为“有边清净”;这种被称为有边清净的戒,就是“有边清净戒”。与上面所说的相反,不是有边际的,所以称为“无边”;或者说,它没有边际,所以也称为“无边”;或者说,它的边际已经增长,所以也称为“无边”。从受戒那一刻起,因为不曾破损;即使破损了,也因为已经作了补救;而且因为连一念之间都没有染污,所以像天然纯净的宝石、像经过彻底锻炼和精细加工的金子一样清净,因此成为圣道的立足处,因为无所欠缺而圆满。因为邪见已被断除,因为不被邪见的执取所抓住,所以“不执取”。或者说,因为任何指责者都无法抓住它说“这是你戒上的过失”,所以“不执取”。在阿罗汉果的特征中,因为一切烦恼热恼都已止息,所以“止息”。“未受具足戒者”是指:以完全受持的方式具足戒的圆满者,称为“受具足戒”;不是这样受具足戒的,就是“未受具足戒”。那些未受具足戒者的……巴利
37. Sīlamayañāṇaniddese pañcāti gaṇanaparicchedo. Sīlānīti paricchinnadhammanidassanaṃ. Pariyantapārisuddhisīlantiādi pañcannaṃ sarūpato dassanaṃ. Pariyantapārisuddhītiādīsu yathā nīlavaṇṇayogato vatthampi nīlamassa atthīti nīlanti vuccati, evaṃ gaṇanavasena pariyanto paricchedo assā atthīti pariyantā, upasampannasīle patto anupasampannasīlassa avasānasabbhāvato vā pariyanto avasānaṃ assā atthīti pariyantā. Sapariyantāti vā vattabbe sakāralopo katoti veditabbo ‘‘dakaṃ dakāsayā pavisantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.78; a. ni. 4.33) ettha ukāralopo viya. Parisuddhabhāvo pārisuddhi, pariyantā ca sā pārisuddhi cāti pariyantapārisuddhi, pariyantapārisuddhisaṅkhātaṃ sīlaṃ pariyantapārisuddhisīlaṃ. Vuttapaṭipakkhena na pariyantāti apariyantā, natthi etissā pariyantotipi apariyantā, vuddho etissā pariyantotipi apariyantā. Samādānato pabhuti akhaṇḍitattā khaṇḍitāpi katapaṭikammattā cittuppādamattakenāpi malena virahitattā ca parisuddhajātimaṇi viya sudhantasuparikammakatasuvaṇṇaṃ viya ca parisuddhattā ariyamaggassa padaṭṭhānabhūtā anūnaṭṭhena paripūṇṇā. Diṭṭhiyā pahīnattā diṭṭhiparāmāsena aggahitattā aparāmaṭṭhā.Ayaṃ te sīle dosoti kenaci codakena parāmasituṃ asakkuṇeyyattā vā aparāmaṭṭhā. Arahattaphalakkhaṇe sabbadarathapaṭippassaddhiyā paṭippassaddhi. Anupasampannānanti anavasesasamādānavasena sīlasampadāya bhusaṃ sampannāti upasampannā, na upasampannā anupasampannā. Tesaṃ anupasampannānaṃ.
关于“有边学处”这句:在这里,从“应当学”的意义上说是“学”,从“部分”的意义上说是“处”,意思就是应当学的各个部分。再者,因为立足于戒的人还要向上修证更高的法,所以一切善法都是“学”;而戒是这些“学”的立足处,所以是“处”;因为是诸学的根基,所以叫“学处”。以这些学处为边际,就是“有边学处”,这里指的是那些有边学处。其中有两种边际:学处边际和时间边际。什么是学处边际?近事男、近事女按照各自受持的方式,有一条、两条、三条、四条、五条、八条或十条学处;学尼、沙弥、沙弥尼则有十条学处。这就是学处边际。什么是时间边际?近事男、近事女在布施时,受持以施食结束为期限的戒;到了寺院,受持以住在寺院期间为期限的戒;或者限定一天、两天、三天或更多日夜为期限而受持戒。这就是时间边际。在这两种边际中,以学处为边际而受持的戒,会因为违犯或死亡而中止;以时间为边际而受持的戒,则会因为相应时限的超过而中止。巴利
Pariyantasikkhāpadānanti ettha sikkhitabbaṭṭhena sikkhā, koṭṭhāsaṭṭhena padāni, sikkhitabbakoṭṭhāsānīti attho. Apica sīle patiṭṭhitena uparipattabbattā sabbe kusalā dhammā sikkhā, sīlāni tāsaṃ sikkhānaṃ patiṭṭhaṭṭhena padānīti sikkhānaṃ padattā sikkhāpadāni , pariyantāni sikkhāpadāni etesanti pariyantasikkhāpadā. Tesaṃ pariyantasikkhāpadānaṃ. Ettha ca dve pariyantā sikkhāpadapariyanto ca kālapariyanto ca. Katamo sikkhāpadapariyanto? Upāsakopāsikānaṃ yathāsamādānavasena ekaṃ vā dve vā tīṇi vā cattāri vā pañca vā aṭṭha vā dasa vā sikkhāpadāni honti, sikkhamānasāmaṇerasāmaṇerīnaṃ dasa sikkhāpadāni. Ayaṃ sikkhāpadapariyanto. Katamo kālapariyanto? Upāsakopāsikā dānaṃ dadamānā parivesanapariyantaṃ sīlaṃ samādiyanti, vihāragatā vihārapariyantaṃ sīlaṃ samādiyanti, ekaṃ vā dve vā tayo vā bhiyyo vā rattindivāni paricchedaṃ katvā sīlaṃ samādiyanti. Ayaṃ kālapariyanto. Imesu dvīsu pariyantesu sikkhāpadaṃ pariyantaṃ katvā samādinnaṃ sīlaṃ vītikkamanena vā maraṇena vā paṭippassambhati, kālaṃ pariyantaṃ katvā samādinnaṃ taṃtaṃkālātikkamena paṭippassambhati.
无边的学处——巴利
Apariyantasikkhāpadānanti –
九千俱胝,还有八十百俱胝;
五百万,另外还有三十六。
这些律仪戒,是正自觉者所开示的。
通过省略的方式已经指出,这些就是律仪防护中的诸学处。巴利
‘‘Nava koṭisahassāni, asīti satakoṭiyo; Paññāsa satasahassāni, chattiṃsa ca punāpare. ‘‘Ete saṃvaravinayā, sambuddhena pakāsitā; Peyyālamukhena niddiṭṭhā, sikkhā vinayasaṃvare’’ti. –
就这样,从数量上看,这些学处即使有界限,但因为它们被毫无保留地受持,不为了利养、名声、亲属、身体和生命而给自己划定界限,并且没有上界应当守护的戒的界限,所以这些学处没有界限,因此称为“无边界”。他们具有无边的学处,所以叫“无边界学处者”。对这些无边界学处者,或者也可以理解为“增上边界的学处者”。巴利
Evaṃ gaṇanavasena pariyantānampi sikkhāpadānaṃ anavasesasamādānabhāvavasena lābhayasañātiaṅgajīvitahetu adiṭṭhapariyantabhāvavasena upari rakkhitabbasīlaparicchedābhāvavasena ca natthi etesaṃ pariyantoti apariyantāni. Apariyantāni sikkhāpadāni etesanti apariyantasikkhāpadā. Tesaṃ apariyantasikkhāpadānaṃ, vuddhapariyantasikkhāpadānanti vā attho.
在“凡夫善人”等词当中——巴利
Puthujjanakalyāṇakānantiādīsu –
由于种种生起等因缘,而称为凡夫。
因为属于凡夫的范畴,所以称为众人。巴利
‘‘Puthūnaṃ jananādīhi, kāraṇehi puthujjano; Puthujjanantogadhattā, puthuvāyaṃ jano iti’’. –
即使还没有超越前面所说的凡夫特征——巴利
Vuttaputhujjanalakkhaṇānatikkamepi –
佛陀,太阳族的世尊,说了有两种凡夫。
盲目的凡夫是单独一种,善良的凡夫是另一种凡夫。巴利
‘‘Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano’’ti. –
在两种凡夫当中,因为与善法相应,超越了盲目凡夫的状态,而安住在善凡夫状态的那些人,就称为“凡夫善人”,也就是“善凡夫”。或者说,在凡夫当中那些善良的人,就是“凡夫善人”。巴利
Vuttaputhujjanadvaye kalyāṇadhammasamāgamena andhaputhujjanabhāvaṃ atikkamma kalyāṇaputhujjanabhāve ṭhitānaṃ puthujjanakalyāṇakānaṃ kalyāṇaputhujjanānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Puthujjanesu vā kalyāṇakānaṃ puthujjanakalyāṇakānaṃ.
在“与善法相应”这句话里,“善”这个词首先出现在健康、无过失、善巧、乐报这几种意思中。比如在“尊者是否安好?尊者是否无病?”这类话里,它表示健康。在“尊者,什么样的身行是善?”“大王,没有过失的身行就是善”以及“尊者,再者,世尊在善法中开示法,这是无上的”等处,它表示无过失。在“你擅长车的各部分”“四位女子学会了歌舞的善巧”等处,它表示善巧。在“诸比丘,由于受持善法”“由于造作和累积了善业”等处,它表示乐报。而在这里,这个词适用于健康、无过失和乐报三种意思。巴利
Kusaladhamme yuttānanti ettha kusalasaddo tāva ārogyānavajjachekasukhavipākesu dissati. Ayañhi ‘‘kacci nu bhoto kusalaṃ, kacci bhoto anāmaya’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.15.146; 2.20.129) ārogye dissati. ‘‘Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro kusalo? Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro anavajjo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.361) ca ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhante, etadānuttariyaṃ yathā bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti kusalesu dhammesū’’ti ca (dī. ni. 3.145) evamādīsu anavajje. ‘‘Kusalo tvaṃ rathassa aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ (ma. ni. 2.87), kusalā naccagītassa sikkhitā cāturitthiyo’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.22.94) cheke. ‘‘Kusalānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ samādānahetu (dī. ni. 3.80). Kusalassa kammassa katattā upacitattā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 431) sukhavipāke. Svāyamidha ārogyepi anavajjepi sukhavipākepi vaṭṭati.
这里说的词义是:能动摇、摇撼、震动、摧毁那些卑劣恶劣之法,所以叫“善”。或者,以卑劣的方式躺卧、运作,所以叫“库沙草”;把这些“库沙草”割断、斩断,所以叫“善”。或者,能使卑劣之法变得微细、薄弱的智慧,就是“库沙”;依靠这种“库沙”而应获得、应执取、应令生起的,所以叫“善”。又像库沙草会割断手握住的两端那样,这些法也同样割断落在两边的杂染——已生的和未生的,所以像库沙草一样能割断,因此叫“善”。另外,也可以从健康的意义、无过失的意义,或者从由善巧所生的意义来说,叫“善”。不过在这里,因为特指观善,所以应当知道,这是舍弃其余含义,为了只显示这一含义而把“善法”说成单数。意思是:在观善法中,以持续不断地实行、以恭敬地实行,所以是相应的。巴利
Vacanattho panettha kucchite pāpake dhamme salayanti calayanti kampenti viddhaṃsentīti kusalā. Kucchitena vā ākārena sayanti pavattantīti kusā, te kuse lunanti chindantīti kusalā. Kucchitānaṃ vā sānato tanukaraṇato kusaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tena kusena lātabbā gahetabbā pavattetabbāti kusalā, yathā vā kusā ubhayabhāgagataṃ hatthappadesaṃ lunanti, evamimepi uppannānuppannabhāvena ubhayabhāgagataṃ saṃkilesapakkhaṃ lunanti, tasmā kusā viya lunantīti kusalā. Apica ārogyaṭṭhena anavajjaṭṭhena kosallasambhūtaṭṭhena vā kusalā. Idha pana yasmā vipassanākusalameva adhippetaṃ, tasmā sese vihāya tasseva dassanatthaṃ ‘‘kusaladhamme’’ti ekavacanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Vipassanākusaladhamme sātaccakiriyatāya sakkaccakāritāya ca yuttānanti attho.
“有学边际”这里的“有学”,是指从三学中产生的人,也指这些法属于七有学,或者指他们自己还在修学。具体就是:入流道与果、一来道与果、不来道与果、阿拉汉道这些法。这些有学法处在边际、终点,或者这些有学法就是它的边际、界限,所以叫“有学边际”。应当这样连接:在那些有学边际中的诸法。“圆满行者”,是指让它们圆满、令它们达到圆满的人,或者是指具备圆满行、圆满作为的人。这是指在入流道之前分的有学边际行道法中,因为观修圆满而成为圆满行者的人。“于身命无恋着”中,“身”指身体。身体由不净物积聚而成,又由头发等低劣之物以及眼病等数百种病所依,所以叫身。“命”指命根。众生依它而活,所以叫命。这些人对身和命没有恋着,意思是没有爱着。他们就是那样对身和命无恋着的人。巴利
Sekkhapariyante paripūrakārīnanti ettha tīsu sikkhāsu jātātipi sekkhā, sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ etetipi sekkhā, sayameva sikkhantītipi sekkhā . Sotāpattimaggaphalasakadāgāmimaggaphalaanāgāmimaggaphalaarahattamaggadhammā . Te sekkhā dhammā pariyante avasāne etassa, te vā sekkhā dhammā pariyanto paricchedo etassāti sekkhapariyanto. Tasmiṃ sekkhapariyante dhammeti sambandho. Paripūraṃ paripuṇṇataṃ karontīti paripūrakārino, paripūrakāro paripūrakiriyā etesaṃ atthīti vā paripūrakārino. Tesaṃ sotāpattimaggassa pubbabhāgabhūte sekkhapariyante paṭipadādhamme vipassanāpāripūriyā paripūrakārīnaṃ. Kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhānanti ettha kāyeti sarīre. Sarīrañhi asucisañcayato kucchitānañca kesādīnaṃ cakkhurogādīnañca rogasatānaṃ āyabhūtattā kāyoti vuccati. Jīviteti jīvitindriye. Tañhi jīvanti tenāti jīvitanti vuccati. Natthi etesaṃ apekkhāti anapekkhā, nissinehāti attho. Tesaṃ tasmiṃ kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhānaṃ.
现在,为了说明他们对这些事物无所眷恋的原因,说了“已舍弃生命”这句话。因为正是由于为世尊或导师而舍弃自己的生命,他们即使身体疲惫、生命正在消亡,也无所眷恋。“七类有学”:被称为“有学”,是因为他们正在修学;也就是入流道等七种圣者。“如来弟子”:即如来的弟子。这八种圣者因为在听闻的终点,由圣洁的出生而出生,以不动摇的净信相应,恭敬地听闻世尊的教导和教诫,所以称为“弟子”。为了在其中特别指出最高果——漏尽者,说了“漏尽者”这句话,即以阿罗汉道智完全断尽一切漏者之义。“独觉佛”:依种种因缘,独自无师而觉悟四圣谛者,名为独觉佛。如此这般的独觉佛们。巴利
Idāni tesaṃ tesu anapekkhattassa kāraṇaṃ dassento pariccattajīvitānanti āha. Bhagavato ācariyassa vā sakajīvitapariccāgeneva hi te kilamamānepi kāye vinassamānepi jīvite anapekkhā hontīti. Sattannaṃ sekkhānanti sikkhantīti sekkhāti laddhanāmānaṃ sotāpattimaggaṭṭhādīnaṃ sattannaṃ ariyapuggalānaṃ. Tathāgatasāvakānanti tathāgatassa sāvakānaṃ. Aṭṭhapi hi ariyapuggalā savanante ariyāya jātiyā jātattā bhagavato desanaṃ anusiṭṭhiṃ aveccappasādayogena sakkaccaṃ suṇantīti sāvakā. Tesupi arahattaphalaṭṭheyeva visesetvā dassento khīṇāsavānanti āha, arahattamaggañāṇena parikkhīṇasabbāsavānanti attho. Paccekabuddhānanti taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca ekova anācariyako catusaccaṃ bujjhitavāti paccekabuddho. Tādisānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ.
在这里,世尊以八种理由被称为如来:因为像过去诸佛那样而来,所以是如来;因为像过去诸佛那样而去,所以是如来;因为来到如实之相,所以是如来;因为对如实之法如实彻底觉悟,所以是如来;因为如实而见,所以是如来;因为如实而说,所以是如来;因为如实而行,所以是如来;因为超越、胜伏一切,所以是如来。巴利
Tathāgatānanti ettha aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato – tathā āgatoti tathāgato, tathā gatoti tathāgato, tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato, tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato, tathadassitāya tathāgato, tathavāditāya tathāgato, tathā kāritāya tathāgato, abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato.
世尊为什么被称为如来呢?就像过去那些正自觉者一样,为了利益一切世间而发起精勤,这样而来。这话说的是什么意思呢?过去那些世尊是凭着怎样的愿行而来的,我们的世尊也是凭着同样的愿行而来。或者说,就像过去那些世尊圆满了布施、持戒、出离、智慧、精进、忍辱、真实、决意、慈、舍这十种波罗蜜,十种近波罗蜜,十种究竟波罗蜜,一共三十种波罗蜜;又舍弃了肢体、眼睛、财物、王位、妻儿这五种大舍;圆满了前际瑜伽、前际行、法开示、义利知行等修行,到达悲智之行的顶点而来——我们的世尊也是这样而来的。又像过去那些世尊修习并增长了四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八圣道支而来——我们的世尊也是这样而来的。因此称为如来。巴利
Kathaṃ bhagavā tathā āgatoti tathāgato? Yathā sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannā purimakā sammāsambuddhā āgatā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yenābhinīhārena purimakā bhagavanto āgatā, teneva amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Atha vā yathā purimakā bhagavanto dānasīlanekkhammapaññāvīriyakhantisaccādhiṭṭhānamettupekkhāsaṅkhātā dasa pāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā aṅgapariccāgaṃ nayanadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāganti ime pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajitvā, pubbayogapubbacariyadhammakkhānañātatthacariyādayo pūretvā buddhicariyāya koṭiṃ patvā āgatā, tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Yathā ca purimakā bhagavanto cattāro satipaṭṭhāne cattāro sammappadhāne cattāro iddhipāde pañcindriyāni pañca balāni satta bojjhaṅge ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvetvā brūhetvā āgatā, tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgatoti tathāgato.
就像燃灯佛等诸位牟尼一样,这些牟尼来到这里,具有一切知的状态。
同样地,这位释迦牟尼也这样来了,因此被称为如来,也就是具眼者。巴利
‘‘Yatheva dīpaṅkarabuddhaādayo, sabbaññubhāvaṃ munayo idhāgatā; Tathā ayaṃ sakyamunīpi āgato, tathāgato vuccati tena cakkhumā’’ti.
为什么叫“如来”?因为他是“如去”——像过去那些刚刚降生的世尊们一样行去。他们又是怎么行去的呢?他们刚降生时,双足平平稳稳地站在大地上,面朝北方,走了七步。就像经里说的:“阿难,菩萨刚降生时,双足平平稳稳地站在大地上,面朝北方,走了七步。白色的伞盖被高举着跟随,他遍观一切方向,发出狮子吼:‘我是世间最上者,我是世间最尊者,我是世间最殊胜者。这是我最后一生,从此不再有后有。’”(《中部》3.207;《长部》2.31)他这样的行走是真实不虚的,因为它成为后来证得许多殊胜成就的前兆。具体来说:他刚降生时双足平稳站立,这是他获得四神足的前兆;面朝北方,是他超胜一切世间的前兆;走七步,是他获得七觉支宝的前兆;经中说的“金色拂尘飘动”(《经集》693),那拂尘的摇曳,是他摧伏一切外道的前兆;高举白伞盖,是他证得阿罗汉果、解脱殊胜无垢白伞盖的前兆;遍观一切方向,是他获得遍知无障智的前兆;发出狮子吼,则是他转动不退转殊胜法轮的前兆。同样地,这位世尊也是这样行去的。他这样的行走也是真实不虚的,因为它同样成为那些殊胜成就的前兆。因此古人说——巴利
Kathaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato? Yathā sampatijātā purimakā bhagavanto gatā. Kathañca te gatā? Te hi sampatijātā samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya uttarenamukhā sattapadavītihārena gatā. Yathāha ‘‘sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gacchati setamhi chatte anudhārayamāne, sabbā ca disā anuviloketi, āsabhiñca vācaṃ bhāsati ‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’’’ti (ma. ni. 3.207; dī. ni. 2.31). Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi avitathaṃ anekesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Yañhi so sampatijāto samehi pādehi patiṭṭhahi, idamassa caturiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, uttaramukhabhāvo panassa sabbalokuttarabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ, sattapadavītihāro sattabojjhaṅgaratanapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, ‘‘suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā’’ti (su. ni. 693) ettha vuttacāmarukkhepo pana sabbatitthiyanimmathanassa pubbanimittaṃ, setacchattadhāraṇaṃ arahattaphalavimuttivaravimalasetacchattapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, sabbādisānuvilokanaṃ sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, āsabhivācābhāsanaṃ pana appaṭivattiyavaradhammacakkappavattanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Tathāyaṃ bhagavāpi gato. Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi avitathaṃ tesaṃyeva visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Tenāhu porāṇā –
就像牛王刚出生时,用平正的诸足触碰大地;
乔达摩迈出七步,天神们为他撑着一顶白伞盖。
乔达摩走了七步之后,便向四周平等地观察各个方向。
他发出具足八支的音声,就像狮子站在山顶上。巴利
‘‘Muhuttajātova gavaṃpatī yathā, samehi pādehi phusī vasundharaṃ; So vikkamī satta padāni gotamo, setañca chattaṃ anudhārayuṃ marū. ‘‘Gantvāna so satta padāni gotamo, disā vilokesi samā samantato; Aṭṭhaṅgupetaṃ giramabbhudīrayi, sīho yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito’’ti.
他就是这样地“如是而去”,所以叫如来。巴利
Evaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato.
或者,就像过去那些世尊一样,这位世尊也同样通过出离而舍弃了欲贪……通过初禅而舍弃了诸盖……通过无常随观而舍弃了常想……通过阿罗汉道而舍弃了一切烦恼,从而逝去。因此,由于是“那样逝去”,所以称为如来。巴利
Atha vā yathā purimakā bhagavanto, ayampi bhagavā tatheva nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ…pe… paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇe…pe… aniccānupassanāya niccasaññaṃ…pe… arahattamaggena sabbakilese pahāya gato. Evampi tathā gatoti tathāgato.
如来是怎么因为“到达真实特相而来”而被称为如来的呢?地界的坚硬特相是真实的、不虚妄的,水界的流动特相是真实的、不虚妄的,火界的热特相是真实的、不虚妄的,风界的支撑特相是真实的、不虚妄的,空界的无触特相是真实的、不虚妄的,识界的了别特相是真实的、不虚妄的。巴利
Kathaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato? Pathavīdhātuyā kakkhaḷattalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ, āpodhātuyā paggharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, tejodhātuyā uṇhattalakkhaṇaṃ, vāyodhātuyā vitthambhanalakkhaṇaṃ, ākāsadhātuyā asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ, viññāṇadhātuyā vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
色的特征是变坏,受的特征是感受,想的特征是认知,诸行的特征是造作,识的特征是了别。巴利
Rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ, saññāya sañjānanalakkhaṇaṃ, saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
寻的特征是投向目标,伺的特征是反复审察,喜的特征是遍满,乐的特征是愉悦,心一境性的特征是不散乱,触的特征是接触。巴利
Vitakkassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ, vicārassa anumajjanalakkhaṇaṃ, pītiyā pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, sukhassa sātalakkhaṇaṃ, cittekaggatāya avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信根的特征是决意,精进根的特征是策励,念根的特征是现前,定根的特征是不散乱,慧根的特征是了知。巴利
Saddhindriyassa adhimokkhalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyindriyassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ, satindriyassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, samādhindriyassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, paññindriyassa pajānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信力的特征是不被无信动摇,精进力的特征是不被懈怠动摇,念力的特征是不被失念动摇,定力的特征是不被掉举动摇,慧力的特征是不被无明动摇。巴利
Saddhābalassa assaddhiye akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyabalassa kosajje, satibalassa muṭṭhassacce, samādhibalassa uddhacce, paññābalassa avijjāya akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ.
念觉支的特征是现起,择法觉支的特征是审察,精进觉支的特征是策励,喜觉支的特征是遍满,轻安觉支的特征是寂止,定觉支的特征是不散乱,舍觉支的特征是审观。巴利
Satisambojjhaṅgassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pavicayalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ, pītisambojjhaṅgassa pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa upasamalakkhaṇaṃ, samādhisambojjhaṅgassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇaṃ.
正见的特相是照见,正思惟的特相是投向,正语的特相是摄受,正业的特相是等起,正命的特相是清净,正精进的特相是策励,正念的特相是现起,正定的特相是不散乱。巴利
Sammādiṭṭhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāsaṅkappassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāvācāya pariggahalakkhaṇaṃ, sammākammantassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāājīvassa vodānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāvāyāmassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāsatiyā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāsamādhissa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ.
无明的特征是不知,行的特征是思,识的特征是了别,名的特征是命名,色的特征是变坏,六处的特征是处,触的特征是接触,受的特征是感受,爱的特征是因,取的特征是执取,有的特征是累积,生的特征是生起,老的特征是衰老,死的特征是死灭。巴利
Avijjāya aññāṇalakkhaṇaṃ, saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇaṃ, viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ, nāmassa namanalakkhaṇaṃ, rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ, saḷāyatanassa āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ, phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ, taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇaṃ, upādānassa gahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, bhavassa āyūhanalakkhaṇaṃ, jātiyā nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ, jarāya jīraṇalakkhaṇaṃ, maraṇassa cutilakkhaṇaṃ.
诸界的特相是空,诸处的特相是处,诸念处的特相是现起,诸正勤的特相是精勤,诸神足的特相是成就,诸根的特相是增上,诸力的特相是不动摇,诸觉支的特相是导引,道的特相是因。巴利
Dhātūnaṃ suññatālakkhaṇaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ, satipaṭṭhānānaṃ upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammappadhānānaṃ padahanalakkhaṇaṃ, iddhipādānaṃ ijjhanalakkhaṇaṃ, indriyānaṃ adhipatilakkhaṇaṃ, balānaṃ akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ, bojjhaṅgānaṃ niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ, maggassa hetulakkhaṇaṃ.
诸谛以真实为它们的特征,止以不散乱为特征,观以随观为特征,止与观以同一味为特征,双运以不超越为特征。巴利
Saccānaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ, samathassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, vipassanāya anupassanālakkhaṇaṃ, samathavipassanānaṃ ekarasalakkhaṇaṃ, yuganaddhānaṃ anativattanalakkhaṇaṃ.
戒清净的特点是防护,心清净的特点是不散乱,见清净的特点是照见。巴利
Sīlavisuddhiyā saṃvaralakkhaṇaṃ, cittavisuddhiyā avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, diṭṭhivisuddhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ.
灭尽智以彻底断除为特征,无生智以寂止为特征。巴利
Khaye ñāṇassa samucchedalakkhaṇaṃ, anuppāde ñāṇassa passaddhilakkhaṇaṃ.
欲的根特征,作意的生起特征,触的会合特征,受的汇集特征,定的主导特征,念的增上特征,慧的更进一步特征,解脱的核心特征,汇入不死的涅槃的究竟特征,这些是真实的、不虚妄的。这些真实特征,通过智的行进而到达,没有偏离地证得,随证得,这就是如来。如此,因为到达了真实特征,所以是如来。巴利
Chandassa mūlalakkhaṇaṃ, manasikārassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, phassassa samodhānalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanāya samosaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ, samādhissa pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ, satiyā ādhipateyyalakkhaṇaṃ, paññāya tatuttarilakkhaṇaṃ, vimuttiyā sāralakkhaṇaṃ, amatogadhassa nibbānassa pariyosānalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ. Etaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ ñāṇagatiyā āgato avirajjhitvā patto anuppattoti tathāgato. Evaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato.
为什么说如来是如实正觉了真实法呢?所谓真实法,就是指四圣谛。就像经里说的:“比丘们,有四种法是真实的、不虚的、不异的。是哪四种呢?‘这是苦’,比丘们,这是真实的,是不虚的,是不异的。”……(详细展开)。世尊已经正觉了这些法,因为正觉了真实法,所以称为如来。这里“来”这个字,就是正觉的意思。巴利
Kathaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato? Tathadhammā nāma cattāri ariyasaccāni. Yathāha – ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāni avitathāni anaññathāni. Katamāni cattāri? ‘Idaṃ dukkha’nti, bhikkhave, tathametaṃ avitathametaṃ anaññathameta’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1090) vitthāro. Tāni ca bhagavā abhisambuddhoti tathānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Abhisambodhattho hi ettha gatasaddo.
另外,老死以生为缘而生起、集起的意义,是真实的、不虚的、不变的……诸行以无明为缘而生起、集起的意义,也是真实的、不虚的、不变的。同样,无明作为诸行之缘的意义,是真实的、不虚的、不变的……生作为老死之缘的意义,也是真实的、不虚的、不变的。这一切,世尊都已现等觉。因此,也正因为已现等觉这些真实,所以称为如来。如此,因为如实现等觉了真实之法,所以是如来。巴利
Apica jarāmaraṇassa jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho…pe… saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāpaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Tathā avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho…pe… jātiyā jarāmaraṇassa paccayaṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Taṃ sabbaṃ bhagavā abhisambuddho. Tasmāpi tathānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgato. Evaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato.
如来为什么是“如实见者”呢?世尊对于有天神在内的世间……(中略)……在有天神、有人类的无量世界中,无量众生的色所缘通过眼门进入视野时,他完全知道、看见这一切。以这样知道、看见,他无论是以可意、不可意等角度,还是以在所见、所闻、所觉、所识中可得的名称角度,比如“什么是色、什么是色处?就是依靠四大种而有的、有颜色、有光泽、可见、有阻碍的色,青色、黄色……”这样,以种种名称、十三种方式、五十二种方法加以分析,它都确实如此,没有虚妄。这个道理也适用于耳门等,当声音等进入范围时。世尊也这样说过:“比丘们,在有天神在内的世间……(中略)……有天神、有人类所见、所闻、所觉、所识、所得、所求、以心随寻的,我都知道,我都证知。这是如来所知的,但如来不执取它。”这样,因为如实见,所以是如来。在这里,应当知道“如来”这个词是从“如实见者”这个意思产生的。巴利
Kathaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato? Bhagavā yaṃ sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchantaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ sabbākārena jānāti passati. Evaṃ jānatā passatā ca tena taṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādivasena vā diṭṭhasutamutaviññātesu labbhamānakapadavasena vā ‘‘katamaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ? Yaṃ rūpaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītaka’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 616) nayena anekehi nāmehi terasahi vārehi dvipaññāsāya nayehi vibhajjamānaṃ tathameva hoti, vitathaṃ natthi . Esa nayo sotadvārādīsupi āpāthamāgacchantesu saddādīsu. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… sadevamanussāya diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, tamahaṃ jānāmi, tamahaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ, taṃ tathāgatassa viditaṃ, taṃ tathāgato na upaṭṭhāsī’’ti (a. ni. 4.24). Evaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato. Tattha tathadassīatthe tathāgatoti padasambhavo veditabbo.
如来为什么是“如实语者”呢?从世尊在菩提道场的不败座上坐下,击溃四魔,证得无上正等正觉的那一夜起,到他在双沙罗树之间,以无余涅槃界般涅槃的那一夜为止,在这中间大约四十五年的时间里,世尊所说的经典、应颂……乃至方广,这一切无论从义理还是从文句来看,都无可过失、无可指责、不增不减、一切方面圆满,能摧伏贪的迷醉,摧伏嗔与痴的迷醉。其中连一丝一毫的差错都没有。这一切就像用同一枚印章盖印、用同一量器称量、用同一杆秤称过一样,完全如此真实。正如世尊所说:“准陀,如来在哪一夜证得无上正等正觉,在哪一夜以无余涅槃界般涅槃,在这中间所说、所谈、所阐释的一切,全都如此,不会变成别的样子。因此称为‘如来’。”这里“来”(gata)就是“说”的意思。这样,因为如实而说,所以是如来。巴利
Kathaṃ tathavāditāya tathāgato? Yaṃ rattiṃ bhagavā bodhimaṇḍe aparājitapallaṅke nisinno catunnaṃ mārānaṃ matthakaṃ madditvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, yañca rattiṃ yamakasālānamantare anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi, etthantare pañcacattālīsavassaparimāṇe kāle paṭhamabodhiyāpi majjhimabodhiyāpi pacchimabodhiyāpi yaṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ…pe… vedallaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ atthato ca byañjanato ca anavajjaṃ anupavajjaṃ anūnamanadhikaṃ sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ rāgamadanimmadanaṃ dosamohamadanimmadanaṃ, natthi tattha vālaggamattampi pakkhalitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ ekamuddikāya lañchitaṃ viya, ekanāḷikāya mitaṃ viya, ekatulāya tulitaṃ viya, ca tathameva hoti. Yathāha ‘‘yañca, cunda, rattiṃ tathāgato anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhati, yañca rattiṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, yaṃ etasmiṃ antare bhāsati lapati niddisati, sabbaṃ taṃ tathameva hoti, no aññathā. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.188). Gadaattho hi ettha gatasaddo. Evaṃ tathavāditāya tathāgato.
另外,“āgadana”就是“āgada”,意思是话语。他拥有真实、不颠倒的话语,所以把 d 音变成 t 音,就成为“tathāgata(如来)”。应当知道,这个词在这一含义上就是这样成立的。巴利
Apica āgadanaṃ āgado, vacananti attho. Tatho aviparīto āgado assāti dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti evametasmiṃ atthe padasiddhi veditabbā.
如来为什么是“如行”呢?因为世尊的身随顺语,语也随顺身,所以他说什么就做什么,做什么就说什么。这样一来,他的语怎样,身就怎样运作;他的身怎样,语也就怎样运作。因此世尊说:“比丘们,如来怎么说就怎么做,怎么做就怎么说。正因如此,才被称为如来。”这就是从“如行”的意义上称为如来。巴利
Kathaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato? Bhagavato hi vācāya kāyo anulometi, kāyassāpi vācā, tasmā yathāvādī tathākārī yathākārī tathāvādī ca hoti. Evaṃbhūtassa cassa yathā vācā, kāyopi tathā gato pavattoti attho. Yathā ca kāyo, vācāpi tathā gatā pavattāti tathāgato. Tenevāha – ‘‘yathāvādī, bhikkhave, tathāgato tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Iti yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti. Evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato.
如来怎么是“征服”意义上的呢?他把上面到有顶天、下面到无间地狱作为边界,横向遍及无量世界,以戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见征服一切众生。没有人能衡量他,也没有标准能测度他。他无可衡量、不可测度、无与伦比,是王中之王、天中之天、帝释中的帝释、梵天中的梵天。所以这样说:“比丘们,在连同天神的世间……乃至连同天神与人的世间里,如来是征服者,不被征服,唯是全见者、自在者。因此称为‘如来’。”(增支部4.23)巴利
Kathaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato? Upari bhavaggaṃ heṭṭhā avīciṃ pariyantaṃ katvā tiriyaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu sabbasatte abhibhavati sīlena samādhinā paññāya vimuttiyā vimuttiñāṇadassanena, na tassa tulā vā pamāṇaṃ vā atthi, atulo appameyyo anuttaro rājādhirājā devānaṃ atidevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā. Tenāha – ‘‘sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… sadevamanussāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthu daso vasavattī. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23).
在这里,应当这样理解这个词的构成:agado 就像 agada(药)。那么这药是什么呢?就是说法的善巧和福德的积聚。因为他具有这样的大威力,所以这位医师就像用天药对付蛇毒一样,能战胜一切外道论师以及包括天界在内的世间。这样,在战胜一切世间这一点上,他拥有真实不颠倒的、由说法善巧和福德所成的药,于是把 d 音变成 t 音,就应当理解为 tathāgata(如来)。这就是从“战胜”的含义来说明如来。巴利
Tatthevaṃ padasiddhi veditabbā – agado viya agado. Ko panesa? Desanāvilāso ceva puññussayo ca. Tena hesa mahānubhāvo bhisakko dibbāgadena sappe viya sabbaparappavādino sadevakañca lokaṃ abhibhavati. Iti sabbalokābhibhavane tatho aviparīto desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññamayo ca agado assāti dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti veditabbo. Evaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato.
另外,如来也因为是“如实而去”才叫如来,也因为是“去到了如实”才叫如来。“去”的意思是已经了知、已经超越、已经到达、已经修行。其中,对整个世间,以审察遍知而如实去了、了知了,所以是如来;对世间的集起,以舍断遍知而如实去了、超越了,所以是如来;对世间的灭尽,以亲证而如实去了、到达了,所以是如来;对导向世间灭尽的道,以如实去了、修行了,所以是如来。因此世尊说:“比丘们,世间已被如来正觉,如来已离世间。比丘们,世间的集起已被如来正觉,如来的世间集起已断。比丘们,世间的灭尽已被如来正觉,如来的世间灭尽已亲证。比丘们,导向世间灭尽的道已被如来正觉,如来的导向世间灭尽的道已修习。比丘们,凡包含天神在内的世间……乃至以心所游历思量的一切,这一切都已被如来正觉。因此称为如来。”(增支部4.23)这个含义也应当这样理解。而这只是显示如来之所以为如来的一个概要而已。然而,只有如来才能以一切方式赞叹如来的如来性。又因为一切佛陀在如来功德上也是完全平等的,所以说“诸佛如来”。巴利
Apica tathāya gatotipi tathāgato, tathaṃ gatotipi tathāgatoti. Gatoti avagato atīto patto paṭipannoti attho . Tattha sakalaṃ lokaṃ tīraṇapariññāya tathāya gato avagatoti tathāgato, lokasamudayaṃ pahānapariññāya tathāya gato atītoti tathāgato, lokanirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāya tathāya gato pattoti tathāgato, lokanirodhagāminipaṭipadaṃ tathaṃ gato paṭipannoti tathāgato. Tena yaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘loko, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasmā tathāgato visaṃyutto. Lokasamudayo, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasamudayo tathāgatassa pahīno. Lokanirodho, bhikkhave , tathāgatena abhisambuddho lokanirodho tathāgatassa sacchikato. Lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, lokanirodhagāminīpaṭipadā tathāgatassa bhāvitā. Yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… anuvicaritaṃ manasā, sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Tassa evampi attho veditabbo. Idampi ca tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvadīpane mukhamattameva. Sabbākārena pana tathāgatova tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvaṃ vaṇṇeyya. Yasmā pana sabbabuddhā tathāgataguṇenāpi samasamā, tasmā sabbesaṃ vasena tathāgatānanti āha.
阿拉汉:因为已经远离烦恼,因为已经无怨敌、无轮辐、斩断,因为值得接受资具等供养,因为造恶时无所隐藏,所以如来是阿拉汉。确实,他凭借道断除了连同习气在内的烦恼,因此远远远离一切烦恼,安住在极远之处,所以称为阿拉汉。巴利
Arahantānanti kilesehi ārakattā, arīnaṃ arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvā tathāgato arahaṃ. Ārakā hi so sabbakilesehi suvidūravidūre ṭhito maggena savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ pahīnattāti arahaṃ.
他之所以被称为“远离”,是因为不与那些东西相应。
世尊不与诸过失相应,因此被称为阿拉汉。
他以道灭尽了那些烦恼之敌,因此从“杀敌”的意义上,也被称为阿罗汉。
因为被称为贪等的所有怨敌都已被消灭;
他以智慧为利剑,是众生的依怙,因此也被称为阿罗汉。巴利
So tato ārakā nāma, yassa yenāsamaṅgitā; Asamaṅgī ca dosehi, nātho tenārahaṃ mato. Te cānena kilesārayo maggena hatāti arīnaṃ hatattāpi arahaṃ. Yasmā rāgādisaṅkhātā, sabbepi arayo hatā; Paññāsatthena nāthena, tasmāpi arahaṃ mato.
这个轮回之轮,以无明、有、渴爱为轮毂,以福行等诸行为轮辐,以老死为轮辋,被那由漏集所成的轴贯穿,装配在三有之车上,无始以来一直转动。他在菩提座上,以精进之足稳稳站在戒地上,用信之手拿起能灭尽诸业的智斧,斩断了它所有的辐条。因为辐条已被斩断,所以他就是阿拉汉。巴利
Yañcetaṃ avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhipuññādiabhisaṅkhārānaṃ jarāmaraṇanemi āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā tibhavarathe samāyojitaṃ anādikālappavattaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ, tassānena bodhimaṇḍe vīriyapādehi sīlapathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya saddhāhatthena kammakkhayakaraṃ ñāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā sabbe arā hatāti arānaṃ hatattāpi arahaṃ.
轮回之轮的辐条已被智慧之剑斩断,因为
这位世间怙主因此被称为阿拉汉。巴利
Arā saṃsāracakkassa, hatā ñāṇāsinā yato; Lokanāthena tenesa, arahanti pavuccati.
因为他是最上应供者,所以值得受用衣等资具,也值得接受殊胜的供养。正因如此,当如来出世时,凡是具有大威力的天与人,都不会到别处去作供养。就像梵天娑婆主用须弥山那么大的宝鬘供养如来,其他天与人,比如频婆娑罗王、憍萨罗王等,也各自随力供养。对已经般涅槃的世尊,阿育王也散尽九十六俱胝的财富,在全赡部洲建了八万四千座精舍,更何况其他种种殊胜供养。由于值得受用资具等供养,所以他是阿拉汉。巴利
Aggadakkhiṇeyyattā ca cīvarādipaccaye arahati pūjāvisesañca. Teneva ca uppanne tathāgate ye keci mahesakkhā devamanussā, na te aññattha pūjaṃ karonti. Tathā hi brahmā sahampati sinerumattena ratanadāmena tathāgataṃ pūjesi, yathābalañca aññe devā manussā ca bimbisārakosalarājādayo. Parinibbutampi ca bhagavantaṃ uddissa channavutikoṭidhanaṃ vissajjetvā asokamahārājā sakalajambudīpe caturāsīti vihārasahassāni patiṭṭhāpesi, ko pana vādo aññesaṃ pūjāvisesānanti paccayādīnaṃ arahattāpi arahaṃ.
因为这位世间庇护者,确实配得上殊胜的供养和种种资具;
在世间,他随顺实义而堪受供养,因此这位胜利者才配得上“阿拉汉”这个名称。巴利
Pūjāvisesaṃ saha paccayehi, yasmā ayaṃ arahati lokanātho; Atthānurūpaṃ arahanti loke, tasmā jino arahati nāmametaṃ.
就像世间有些自以为聪明的愚人,因为害怕坏名声,就偷偷地做坏事;这位却从来不会那样做。由于他作恶时毫无隐秘可言,所以也是阿拉汉。巴利
Yathā ca loke ye keci paṇḍitamānino bālā asilokabhayena raho pāpaṃ karonti, evamesa na kadāci karotīti pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvatopi arahaṃ.
因为对于这样的如是者来说,在恶业中根本没有什么隐秘可言。
因为没有任何隐秘,他因此被称为阿拉汉,广为人知。巴利
Yasmā natthi raho nāma, pāpakammesu tādino; Rahābhāvena tenesa, arahaṃ iti vissuto.
这样一来,从一切方面来说——巴利
Evaṃ sabbathāpi –
因为远离与杀灭烦恼之敌,那位牟尼……
已摧破轮回之轮,堪受资具等供养,
他不于隐秘处造恶,以此故名为“阿拉汉”。巴利
Ārakattā hatattā ca, kilesārīna so muni; Hatasaṃsāracakkāro, paccayādīna cāraho; Na raho karoti pāpāni, arahaṃ tena vuccatīti.
因为一切佛陀连阿拉汉的功德都是完全平等的,所以这里是就所有佛陀而说“诸阿拉汉”。巴利
Yasmā pana sabbabuddhā arahattaguṇenāpi samasamā, tasmā sabbesaṃ vasena ‘‘arahantāna’’nti āha.
正自觉者:因为正确、亲自觉悟了一切法,所以是正自觉者。他确实正确觉悟了一切法:对应当了知的法,觉悟为应当了知;对应当遍知的法,觉悟为应当遍知;对应当断除的法,觉悟为应当断除;对应当证悟的法,觉悟为应当证悟;对应当修习的法,觉悟为应当修习。因此他说:巴利
Sammāsambuddhānanti sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho. Tathā hesa sabbadhamme sammā sambuddho, abhiññeyye dhamme abhiññeyyato buddho, pariññeyye dhamme pariññeyyato, pahātabbe dhamme pahātabbato, sacchikātabbe dhamme sacchikātabbato, bhāvetabbe dhamme bhāvetabbato. Tenevāha –
应当了知的,已经了知;应当修习的,已经修习。
应当断除的,我已经断除了,婆罗门,所以我是佛陀。巴利
‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhiññātaṃ, bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṃ; Pahātabbaṃ pahīnaṃ me, tasmā buddhosmi brāhmaṇā’’ti. (ma. ni. 2.399; su. ni. 563);
或者也可以这样理解:眼是苦谛,作为它的根本原因、能令它生起的过去渴爱是集谛,这两者不再生起的状态是灭谛,了知灭的道是道谛。就这样,以逐一选取每一法的方式,对一切法正确而亲证地觉悟。对耳、鼻、舌、身、意也是同样的道理。依照这个方式,色等六处、眼识等六识身、眼触等六触、眼触所生受等六受、色想等六想、色思等六思、色渴爱等六渴爱身、色寻等六寻、色伺等六伺、色蕴等五蕴、十遍、十随念、依膨胀想等十想、发等三十二身分、十二处、十八界、欲有等九有、初禅等四禅那、慈修习等四无量、四无色定,逆观老死等、顺观无明等缘起支,都应这样配合理解。这里用一句话贯穿:老死是苦谛,生是集谛,从这两者中出离是灭谛,了知灭的道是道谛。就这样,以逐一选取每一法的方式,对一切法正确、亲自、随觉、通达。再者,凡有任何应当了知之法,他都已经正确觉悟了这一切,因此以解脱终智而成为正自觉者。关于这一点的详细分别,后面会说明。又因为一切佛陀在正自觉者这项功德上完全平等,所以为了涵盖一切佛,经文说诸正自觉者。巴利
Atha vā cakkhu dukkhasaccaṃ, tassa mūlakāraṇabhāvena samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhappajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccanti evaṃ ekekapaduddhārenāpi sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho. Esa nayo sotaghānajivhākāyamanesu. Eteneva nayena rūpādīni cha āyatanāni, cakkhuviññāṇādayo cha viññāṇakāyā, cakkhusamphassādayo cha phassā, cakkhusamphassajādayo cha vedanā, rūpasaññādayo cha saññā, rūpasañcetanādayo cha cetanā, rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā, rūpavitakkādayo cha vitakkā, rūpavicārādayo cha vicārā, rūpakkhandhādayo pañcakkhandhā, dasa kasiṇāni, dasa anussatiyo, uddhumātakasaññādivasena dasa saññā, kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā, dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, kāmabhavādayo nava bhavā, paṭhamādīni cattāri jhānāni, mettābhāvanādayo catasso appamaññā, catasso arūpasamāpattiyo, paṭilomato jarāmaraṇādīni, anulomato avijjādīni paṭiccasamuppādaṅgāni ca yojetabbāni. Tatrāyaṃ ekapadayojanā – jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, jāti samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhappajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccanti evaṃ ekekapaduddhārena sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho anubuddho paṭividdho. Yaṃ vā pana kiñci atthi neyyaṃ nāma, sabbassa sammā sambuddhattā vimokkhantikañāṇavasena sammāsambuddho. Tassa pana vibhāgo upari āvi bhavissatīti. Yasmā pana sabbabuddhā sammāsambuddhaguṇenāpi samasamā, tasmā sabbesaṃ vasena ‘‘sammāsambuddhāna’’nti āha.
38 现在,为了说明“有边清净”和“无边清净”这两种戒各自分成五种,所以说“有边戒、无边戒”等等。但在其余三种戒里,并没有这样的区分。其中,“以利得为边”是说利得就是它的边界,越过这个边界戒就坏了,所以叫“以利得为边”。其余几个词也是这样。“名声”在这里指眷属。“于此”指在这个世间。“有一类”指某一个人。“以利得为因”是说利得本身就是因,所以说“以利得为因”,这是用从格来表示因的意思。“以利得为缘”“以利得为原因”都是它的同义词。正是依着这个因,果才生起,所以叫“缘”;又因为它能使果产生,所以叫“原因”。巴利
38. Idāni pariyantapārisuddhiapariyantapārisuddhisīladvaye ekekameva sīlaṃ pañcadhā bhinditvā dassetuṃ atthi sīlaṃ pariyantaṃ, atthi sīlaṃ apariyantantiādimāha. Itaresu pana tīsu sīlesu tathāvidho bhedo natthīti. Tattha lābhapariyantanti lābhena pariyanto bhedo etassāti lābhapariyantaṃ. Evaṃ sesānipi. Yasoti panettha parivāro. Idhāti imasmiṃ loke. Ekaccoti eko. Lābhahetūti lābhoyeva hetu lābhahetu, tasmā lābhahetutoti vuttaṃ hoti. Hetvatthe nissakkavacanaṃ. ‘‘Lābhapaccayā lābhakāraṇā’’ti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Hetumeva hi paṭicca etaṃ phalametīti paccayoti ca, phaluppattiṃ kārayatīti kāraṇanti ca vuccati.
凡是已经受持、已经领受的戒,就叫“已受持”。违犯,就是实际去做、去犯。像这样一类,是指具有这种性质、属于上面所说的那种情况。所谓戒,不管是居士戒还是出家戒:如果开头或结尾有一条破了,这些戒就像衣服边缘被割破一样,是破裂的;如果中间有一条破了,就像衣服中间被戳穿一样,是有孔的;如果按顺序连着破了两条或三条,就像母牛背上或肚子上鼓起一块长条等形状、颜色怪异的斑块,而母牛身体则是黑红色等颜色中的某一种一样,是斑驳的;如果隔一条破一条,就像母牛身上隔一段就有不同颜色的斑点一样,是杂色的。总的来说,因为被七种淫欲结合,以及忿怒、怀恨等恶法所损害,这些戒都是破裂的、有孔的、斑驳的、杂色的。这些戒本身,因为没有从渴爱的奴役中解脱出来、没有成就自由的状态,所以是非自由的;因为不被佛陀等智者称赞,所以是非智者所赞的;因为被渴爱和邪见执取,或者因为任何人都能指责说“你在戒上有这样的过失”而被执取,所以是所执取的;因为它们不能导向近行定或安止定,也不能导向道定或果定,所以是不引生定的。也有写成“不引生定”的版本。巴利
Yathāsamādinnanti yaṃ yaṃ samādinnaṃ gahitaṃ. Vītikkamatīti ajjhācarati. Evarūpānīti evaṃsabhāvāni, vuttappakārānīti adhippāyo. Sīlānīti gahaṭṭhasīlāni vā hontu pabbajitasīlāni vā, yesaṃ ādimhi vā ante vā ekaṃ bhinnaṃ, tāni pariyante chinnasāṭako viya khaṇḍāni. Yesaṃ vemajjhe ekaṃ bhinnaṃ, tāni majjhe vinividdhasāṭako viya chiddāni. Yesaṃ paṭipāṭiyā dve vā tīṇi vā bhinnāni, tāni piṭṭhiyā vā kucchiyā vā uṭṭhitena dīghavaṭṭādisaṇṭhānena visabhāgavaṇṇena kāḷarattādīnaṃ aññatarasarīravaṇṇā gāvī viya sabalāni. Yesaṃ antarantarā ekekāni bhinnāni, tāni antarantarā visabhāgavaṇṇabinduvicitrā gāvī viya kammāsāni. Avisesena vā sabbānipi sattavidhena methunasaṃyogena kodhūpanāhādīhi ca pāpadhammehi upahatattā khaṇḍāni chiddāni sabalāni kammāsānīti. Tāniyeva taṇhādāsabyato mocetvā bhujissabhāvākaraṇena na bhujissāni. Buddhādīhi viññūhi na pasatthattā na viññuppasatthāni. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi parāmaṭṭhattā, kenaci vā ‘‘ayaṃ te sīlesu doso’’ti parāmaṭṭhuṃ sakkuṇeyyatāya parāmaṭṭhāni. Upacārasamādhiṃ appanāsamādhiṃ vā, atha vā maggasamādhiṃ phalasamādhiṃ vā na saṃvattayantīti asamādhisaṃvattanikāni. Na samādhisaṃvattanikānītipi pāṭho.
有些人则这样解释它的含义:说“破裂”,是因为这些戒成了善法无法安住的地方;“有孔”也是同样的道理。说“斑驳”,是因为它使清净变得杂乱了;“杂色”也是同样的道理。说“非自由的”,是因为落入了渴爱的奴役状态。说“非智者所赞”,是因为被善者们所呵责。说“所执取”,是因为被渴爱抓住了。说“不引生定”,是因为成了引发懊悔的依处。巴利
Keci pana ‘‘khaṇḍānīti kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ appatiṭṭhābhūtattā, chiddānītipi evaṃ. Sabalānīti vivaṇṇakaraṇattā, kammāsānītipi evaṃ. Na bhujissānīti taṇhādāsabyaṃ gatattā. Na viññuppasatthānīti kusalehi garahitattā. Parāmaṭṭhānīti taṇhāya gahitattā. Asamādhisaṃvattanikānīti vippaṭisāravatthubhūtattā’’ti evamatthaṃ vaṇṇayanti.
不是无懊悔的依处:意思是说,由于这些戒会带来懊悔,所以它们不是无懊悔的立足之处。不是欢悦的依处:它们不能成为由无懊悔所生的微弱喜悦的依处,因为不能引生那种喜悦。剩下的各个词句也应当这样连接理解。不是喜的依处:它们不能成为由微弱喜悦所生的强烈喜悦的依处。不是轻安的依处:它们不能成为由强烈喜悦所生的身轻安与心轻安的依处。不是乐的依处:它们不能成为由轻安所生的身乐与心乐的依处。不是定的依处:它们不能成为由乐所生的定的依处。不是如实知见的依处:它们不能成为以定为近因的如实知见的依处。巴利
Na avippaṭisāravatthukānīti vippaṭisārāvahattā avippaṭisārassa patiṭṭhā na hontīti attho. Na pāmojjavatthukānīti avippaṭisārajāya dubbalapītiyā na vatthubhūtāni tassā anāvahattā . Evaṃ sesesupi yojanā kātabbā. Na pītivatthukānīti dubbalapītijāya balavapītiyā na vatthubhūtāni. Na passaddhivatthukānīti balavapītijāya kāyacittapassaddhiyā na vatthubhūtāni. Na sukhavatthukānīti passaddhijassa kāyikacetasikasukhassa na vatthubhūtāni. Na samādhivatthukānīti sukhajassa samādhissa na vatthubhūtāni. Na yathābhūtañāṇadassanavatthukānīti samādhipadaṭṭhānassa yathābhūtañāṇadassanassa na vatthubhūtāni.
在“非一向厌离”等句里,要把“非”这个字提出来,按“非离贪”等的方式,同样套到后面剩下的几个词上。也可以读成带有“sa”音的“非离贪”等版本。其中,“一向厌离”的意思是:并不是纯粹为了对轮回生起厌离,所以不导向厌离——前后文就是这样关联的。剩下的几个词也应当这样套上去。“离贪”是为了对轮回离染。“灭”是为了让轮回灭尽。“寂止”是为了让已经灭尽的轮回不再生起,从而归于寂静。“证知”是为了彻底了知轮回。“正觉”是为了从烦恼的沉睡中醒来,从而觉悟轮回。“涅槃”是为了不死涅槃。巴利
Na ekantanibbidāyātiādīsu na-kārameva āharitvā ‘‘na virāgāyā’’tiādinā nayena sesapadehipi yojetabbaṃ. Na virāgāyātiādīsu sanakāro vā pāṭho. Tattha ekantanibbidāyāti ekantena vaṭṭe nibbindanatthāya na saṃvattantīti sambandho. Evaṃ sesesupi yojetabbaṃ. Virāgāyāti vaṭṭe virajjanatthāya. Nirodhāyāti vaṭṭassa nirodhanatthāya. Upasamāyāti nirodhitassa puna anuppattivasena vaṭṭassa upasamanatthāya. Abhiññāyāti vaṭṭassa abhijānanatthāya. Sambodhāyāti kilesaniddāvigamena vaṭṭato pabujjhanatthāya. Nibbānāyāti amatanibbānatthāya.
“为了违犯已受持的学处”,意思是:为了违犯那已受持的学处。不过这里因为格位变化上的颠倒,用了宾格来表达。至于说“连心也不生起”,这是为了显示:由于心念生起的清净,戒才达到极度清净的状态;并不是说仅仅有心念生起,戒就破裂了。“他怎么会违犯呢?”意思是:他为了什么目的会去违犯呢?也就是说,他根本不会去违犯。“不破裂”等说法,应当按前面所说的相反方式来理解。也有读作“不破裂”的版本。在“纯一厌离”等语句中,应当按“纯粹为了对轮回厌离”这样的方式去连接。不过在这里,“厌离”指的是观。“离贪”指的是道。“灭”和“寂止”指的是涅槃。“证知”和“正觉”指的是道。“涅槃”指的就是涅槃本身。应当知道有这样的安立说法:一处说观,两处说道,三处说涅槃。然而,从同义异名的角度来说,所有这些词也都可以是道的同义词和涅槃的同义词。巴利
Yathāsamādinnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ vītikkamāyāti yathāsamādinnassa sikkhāpadassa vītikkamanatthāya. Vibhattivipallāsavasena panettha upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Cittampi na uppādetīti cittuppādasuddhiyā sīlassa ativisuddhabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana cittuppādamattena sīlaṃ bhijjati. Kiṃ so vītikkamissatīti kimatthaṃ vītikkamaṃ karissati, neva vītikkamaṃ karissatīti attho. Akhaṇḍānītiādīni heṭṭhā vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbāni. Na khaṇḍānītipi pāṭho. ‘‘Ekantanibbidāyā’’tiādīsu ekantena vaṭṭe nibbindanatthāyātiādinā nayena yojetabbaṃ . Ettha pana nibbidāyāti vipassanā. Virāgāyāti maggo. Nirodhāya upasamāyāti nibbānaṃ. Abhiññāya sambodhāyāti maggo. Nibbānāyāti nibbānameva. Ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vipassanā, dvīsu maggo, tīsu nibbānaṃ vuttanti evaṃ avatthānakathā veditabbā. Pariyāyena pana sabbānipetāni maggavevacanānipi nibbānavevacanānipi hontiyeva.
39 现在,为了通过“有边”和“无边”的角度来显示戒存在的分类,接着又要通过法、通过生起方式、通过缘、通过相应法来显示戒的分类,所以开始说“什么是戒”等话。其中,“依此而生起”就是生起处。这是缘的名称。“它的生起处是什么?”就是问“它以什么为生起处?”“它是多少法的集合、结合?”就是问“它是由多少法集合而成的?”巴利
39. Idāni pariyantāpariyantavasena vijjamānapabhedaṃ dassetvā puna dhammavasena jātivasena paccayavasena sampayuttavasena sīlassa pabhedaṃ dassetuṃ kiṃ sīlantiādimāha. Tattha samuṭṭhāti etenāti samuṭṭhānaṃ. Paccayassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Kiṃ samuṭṭhānamassāti kiṃsamuṭṭhānaṃ. Katinaṃ dhammānaṃ samodhānaṃ samavāyo assāti katidhammasamodhānaṃ.
所谓思戒,就是远离杀生等行为的人,或者正在履行义务和修行的人,内心生起的思。所谓心所戒,就是远离杀生等行为的人,内心生起的远离。再者,思戒是指断除杀生等七种业道时的思。心所戒是指按照“断除世间的贪欲,以离贪的心而住”等经文所说的无贪、无嗔、正见这些法。关于律仪戒,这里应当知道有五种律仪:巴帝摩卡律仪、念律仪、智律仪、忍律仪、精进律仪。其中,“以此巴帝摩卡律仪具足、完全具足”,这就是巴帝摩卡律仪。“守护眼根,在眼根上获得律仪”,这就是念律仪。巴利
Cetanāsīlanti pāṇātipātādīhi viramantassa, vattapaṭipattiṃ vā pūrentassa cetanā. Cetasikaṃ sīlanti pāṇātipātādīhi viramantassa virati. Apica cetanā sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīni pajahantassa sattakammapathacetanā . Cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ nāma ‘‘abhijjhaṃ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.217) nayena vuttā anabhijjhāabyāpādasammādiṭṭhidhammā. Saṃvaro sīlanti ettha pañcavidho saṃvaro veditabbo – pātimokkhasaṃvaro, satisaṃvaro, ñāṇasaṃvaro, khantisaṃvaro, vīriyasaṃvaroti. Tattha ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto’’ti (vibha. 511) ayaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvaro. ‘‘Rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.213; ma. ni. 1.295; saṃ. ni. 4.239; a. ni. 3.16) ayaṃ satisaṃvaro.
阿耆多啊,世间有哪些流?
正念是对那些流的阻挡。
我说,守护诸流;它们要靠智慧来关闭。巴利
‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasmiṃ, (ajitāti bhagavā;) Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ; Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti. (su. ni. 1041) –
这就是智防护。对资具的受用也归入这里面。凡是依照“能忍受寒冷炎热……”这类方式所说的,就叫忍防护。凡是依照“不忍受已生起的欲寻……”这类方式所说的,就叫精进防护。活命清净也归入这里面。这样一来,这五种防护,再加上那些害怕造恶的善男子对现前境界的远离,这一切都应当理解为防护戒。不违犯就是戒,意思是受持了戒的人,在身体行为和言语行为上不违犯。以上是对“什么是戒”这个问题的回答。巴利
Ayaṃ ñāṇasaṃvaro. Paccayapaṭisevanampi ettheva samodhānaṃ gacchati. Yo panāyaṃ ‘‘khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.24; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) nayena āgato, ayaṃ khantisaṃvaro nāma. Yo cāyaṃ ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) nayena āgato, ayaṃ vīriyasaṃvaro nāma. Ājīvapārisuddhipi ettheva samodhānaṃ gacchati. Iti ayaṃ pañcavidhopi saṃvaro, yā ca pāpabhīrukānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ sampattavatthuto virati, sabbametaṃ saṃvarasīlanti veditabbaṃ. Avītikkamo sīlanti samādinnasīlassa kāyikavācasiko avītikkamo. Idaṃ tāva kiṃ sīlanti pañhassa vissajjanaṃ.
在回答“戒有多少种”这个问题时,提到了善戒、不善戒和无记戒。这里,因为世间众生的各自本性就被称为“戒”,比如人们会说“这个人是乐戒者,这个人是苦戒者,这个人是诤戒者,这个人是装饰戒者”。所以,按照这种说法,从义理上提取来说,不善戒也被称为戒。然而,根据“听闻之后,以慧防护”这句话,这种不善戒并不是这里所说的戒。巴利
Kati sīlānīti pañhassa vissajjane kusalasīlaṃ akusalasīlaṃ abyākatasīlanti ettha yasmā loke tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ pakati sīlanti vuccati, yaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ayaṃ sukhasīlo, ayaṃ dukkhasīlo, ayaṃ kalahasīlo, ayaṃ maṇḍanasīlo’’ti bhaṇanti. Tasmā tena pariyāyena atthuddhāravasena akusalasīlamapi sīlanti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana ‘‘sutvāna saṃvare paññā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.37) vacanato idhādhippetasīlaṃ na hotīti.
因为以思等类别来区分的戒,是以相应的心为生起因,所以就说“由善心生起的戒就是善戒”等等。巴利
Yasmā pana cetanādibhedassa sīlassa sampayuttacittaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā kusalacittasamuṭṭhānaṃ kusalasīlantiādimāha.
“防护的聚集”就是戒,也就是与防护相应的诸蕴。因为这些蕴确实与防护结合、混融在一起,所以称为“防护的聚集”。同样,“不违犯的聚集”也应理解为戒。在那种状态下生起的思,其聚集就是戒,也就是在防护的状态、不违犯的状态中生起的、与思相应的诸蕴。又因为在这三种情况里,所指的都是与它们相应的法,所以思的聚集已经包含了心所法,因此不必另外单独列出“心所聚集的戒”,应当这样理解。前面说到思等法被称为“戒”,但并不是只有它们才是戒,与它们相应的法也是戒。为了说明这个意思,才说了这三分法,应当这样理解。巴利
Saṃvarasamodhānaṃ sīlanti saṃvarasampayuttakhandhā. Te hi saṃvarena samāgatā missībhūtāti saṃvarasamodhānanti vuttā. Evaṃ avītikkamasamodhānaṃ sīlampi veditabbaṃ. Tathābhāve jātacetanā samodhānaṃ sīlanti saṃvarabhāve avītikkamabhāve jātacetanāsampayuttā khandhā. Yasmā ca tīsupi cetesu taṃsampayuttā dhammā adhippetā, tasmā cetanāsamodhānena cetasikānampi saṅgahitattā cetasikasamodhānasīlaṃ visuṃ na niddiṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ. Heṭṭhā cetanādayo dhammā ‘‘sīla’’nti vuttā. Na kevalaṃ te eva sīlaṃ, taṃsampayuttā dhammāpi sīlamevāti dassanatthaṃ ayaṃ tiko vuttoti veditabbo.
40 现在,因为思和心所本身就是防护和不违犯,并不是分开存在的,所以只就防护和不违犯,按照一直贯通到阿拉汉道的共通次第来组织,经文才这样说:“以防护的意义来说是戒,以不违犯的意义来说是戒”——也就是针对杀生等来说。因为离杀生等,各自防护自己的对立面,并且不违犯它,所以从防护和不违犯这两方面,就称为“以防护的意义来说是戒”“以不违犯的意义来说是戒”。其中,“以防护杀生的意义”是指以遮止杀生的意义为戒。那是什么?就是离杀生。而这个离杀生既能防护杀生,又不违犯它,所以也以不违犯的意义为戒。同样,离不与取等,以及无贪、无瞋、正见,都应当这样配合解释。巴利
40. Idāni yasmā cetanācetasikā saṃvarāvītikkamāyeva honti na visuṃ, tasmā saṃvarāvītikkameyeva yāva arahattamaggā sādhāraṇakkamena yojento pāṇātipātaṃ saṃvaraṭṭhena sīlaṃ, avītikkamaṭṭhena sīlantiādimāha. Pāṇātipātā veramaṇiādayo hi yasmā attano attano paccanīkaṃ saṃvaranti, taṃ na vītikkamanti ca, tasmā saṃvaraṇato avītikkamanato ca saṃvaraṭṭhena sīlaṃ avītikkamaṭṭhena sīlaṃ nāma hoti. Tattha pāṇātipātaṃ saṃvaraṭṭhenāti pāṇātipātassa pidahanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī. Sā ca taṃ saṃvarantīyeva taṃ na vītikkamatīti avītikkamaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Evameva adinnādānā veramaṇiādayo anabhijjhāabyāpādasammādiṭṭhiyo yojetabbā.
在杀生等十种不善业道当中,杀害生命就是杀生。这说的就是杀死生命、夺去生命。这里说的“生命”,从世俗习惯来说是指有情众生,从究竟真实来说是指命根。对于那个生命,生起“这是生命”的认知,然后发起能截断命根的加行,通过身门或语门中的任意一门所生起的杀心,就是杀生。对于没有功德的众生,比如畜生之类,杀小的生命过失轻,杀体型大的过失重。为什么?因为加行大。即使加行相同,也因为对象大而过失重。对于有功德的众生,比如人等等,功德少的生命过失轻,功德大的生命过失重。如果身体大小和功德都相同,那么烦恼和加行轻微就过失轻,猛烈就过失重,应当这样理解。它有五个组成部分:生命、生命想、杀心、加行、由此而死。巴利
Pāṇātipātantiādīsu pana dasasu akusalakammapathesu pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto. Pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto. So guṇavirahitesu tiracchānagatādīsu pāṇesu khuddake pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāsarīre mahāsāvajjo. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya. Payogasamattepi vatthumahantatāya. Guṇavantesu manussādīsu appaguṇe pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo. Sarīraguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjoti veditabbo. Tassa pañca sambhārā – pāṇo, pāṇasaññitā, vadhakacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena maraṇanti.
把别人没有给的东西拿走,就叫不与取,也叫夺取他人之物、偷窃、盗窃。这里说的“没有给”,是指别人所拥有、所守护的东西,别人对那东西可以随意支配,拿走的人不会因此受到惩罚,也不算有过失。对于别人所拥有、所守护的这样东西,心里认定这是别人所拥有、所守护的,然后生起偷盗的念头,并采取行动去拿,通过身体或语言这两种途径中的某一种表现出来,这种偷盗的意志就是不与取。这种不与取,如果对象是低劣的、属于他人的东西,过失就轻;如果对象是贵重的东西,过失就重。为什么?因为物品本身贵重。当物品本身相同的时候,偷取功德更高的人的东西,过失就重;偷取功德较低的人的东西,过失就轻。它有五个组成部分:别人所拥有、所守护的东西,认定这是别人所拥有、所守护的,偷盗的心,采取行动,以及通过这个行动把东西拿走。巴利
Adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ, parasaṃharaṇaṃ, theyyaṃ, corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha adinnanti parapariggahitaṃ, yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti, tasmiṃ parapariggahite parapariggahitasaññino tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ. Taṃ hīne parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, paṇīte mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Vatthupaṇītatāya. Vatthusamatte sati guṇādhikānaṃ santake vatthusmiṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ, taṃ taṃ guṇādhikaṃ upādāya tato tato hīnaguṇassa santake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ. Tassa pañca sambhārā – parapariggahitaṃ, parapariggahitasaññitā theyyacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena haraṇanti.
“诸欲”指的是男女交合之事。“邪行”指的是完全该受呵责的卑劣行为。从特征上说,就是怀着不善法的意图,通过身体行为表现出来、侵犯不可行处的思,这就是对诸欲的邪行。巴利
Kāmesūti methunasamācāresu. Micchācāroti ekantanindito lāmakācāro. Lakkhaṇato pana asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā kāmesu micchācāro.
在这里,“不可行处”是指:对男人来说,首先是母亲守护的、父亲守护的、父母守护的、兄弟守护的、姐妹守护的、亲属守护的、宗族守护的、法守护的、有夫守护的、有罚守护的,这十种;以及以财买来的、自愿共住的、因财产共住的、因衣物共住的、以水钵娶得的、取下环饰的、女奴、妻子、职业妻、战利妻、暂时妻,这十种。总共二十种女人。而对女人来说,有夫守护、有罚守护这两种,加上以财买来的等十种,共十二种女人。凡是这些女人所归属的男人之外的其他男人,就是不可行处。巴利
Tattha agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma purisānaṃ tāva māturakkhitā, piturakkhitā, mātāpiturakkhitā, bhāturakkhitā, bhaginirakkhitā, ñātirakkhitā, gottarakkhitā, dhammarakkhitā, sārakkhā, saparidaṇḍāti māturakkhitādayo dasa, dhanakkītā, chandavāsinī, bhogavāsinī, paṭavāsinī, odapattakinī, obhatacumbaṭā, dāsī ca, bhariyā ca, kammakārī ca bhariyā ca, dhajāhaṭā muhuttikāti dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati itthiyo. Itthīsu pana dvinnaṃ sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānaṃ dasannañca dhanakkītādīnanti dvādasannaṃ itthīnaṃ aññe purisā, idaṃ agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma.
这种邪行,如果对象是缺乏戒律等功德、不该行淫的人,罪过就轻;如果对象具备戒律等功德,罪过就重。它有四个构成条件:不该行淫的对象、对那对象生起行淫的心、实际行淫的行为、以及忍受道非道之行。巴利
So panesa micchācāro sīlādiguṇarahite agamanīyaṭṭhāne appasāvajjo, sīlādiguṇasampanne mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā – agamanīyavatthu, tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ, sevanapayogo, maggenamaggapaṭipattiadhivāsananti.
所谓“虚妄”,是指以欺骗为目的、损害他人利益的语言行为或身体行为。怀着欺骗的意图,能引发欺骗他人的身体行为或语言行为的那个思,就是妄语。另一种解释是:“虚妄”指不真实、不如实的事情;“语”指把这件事说成真实、如实。从特征上说,想让别人把不真实的事情当作真实来理解,能引发这种传达的思,就是妄语。这种妄语,如果所损害的利益小,罪过就轻;如果所损害的利益大,罪过就重。此外,在家人因为舍不得把自己的东西给别人而说“没有”之类的话,罪过较轻;如果作为证人,为了损害他人利益而说,罪过就重。出家人得到一点点油或酥,出于开玩笑的心态,用夸张的说法说“今天村里好像有油流成河了”,这种妄语罪过较轻;但把没看见的说成“我亲眼看见了”之类,罪过就重。它有四个构成条件:不真实的事情、想欺骗的心、相应的加行,以及对方知道那件事的含义。巴利
Musāti visaṃvādanapurekkhārassa atthabhañjako vacīpayogo, kāyapayogo vā. Visaṃvādanādhippāyena panassa paravisaṃvādakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. Aparo nayo – musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu. Vādoti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. So yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appatāya appasāvajjo, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Apica gahaṭṭhānaṃ attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya natthītiādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, sakkhinā hutvā atthabhañjanatthaṃ vutto mahāsāvajjo. Pabbajitānaṃ appakampi telaṃ vā sappiṃ vā labhitvā hasādhippāyena ‘‘ajja gāme telaṃ nadī maññe sandatī’’ti pūraṇakathānayena pavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃyeva pana diṭṭhantiādinā nayena vadantānaṃ mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā – atathaṃ vatthu, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, parassa tadatthavijānananti.
如果一个人用某种话对某人说,这话在对方心里造成说话者自己可爱、而他人空无,这种话就是离间语。如果一个人用某种话既让自己也变得粗恶,也让别人变得粗恶,而且这话本身也刺耳难听,既不悦耳也不悦心,这种话就是粗恶语。如果一个人东拉西扯地说些毫无意义的话,那就是杂秽语。作为这些言语行为根源的思,也就分别得到离间语等名称。这里所说的,正是那个思。巴利
Yāya vācāya yassa taṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tassa hadaye attano piyabhāvaṃ, parassa ca suññabhāvaṃ karoti, sā pisuṇā vācā. Yāya pana attānampi parampi pharusaṃ karoti, yā vācā sayampi pharusā neva kaṇṇasukhā na hadayasukhā vā, ayaṃ pharusā vācā. Yena samphaṃ palapati niratthakaṃ, so samphappalāpo. Tesaṃ mūlabhūtā cetanāpi pisuṇāvācādināmameva labhati. Sā eva ca idha adhippetāti.
在这里,出于杂染心,或者为了离间他人,或者为了让自己讨人喜欢,而发起身业和语业的思,就是离间语。它对谁造成分裂,如果那个人德行小,罪过就轻;如果德行大,罪过就重。它有四个构成条件:被离间的人、以“这样他们就会分裂”为前提的分裂意图,或者以“这样我就会被人喜欢、被人信任”为前提的讨好意图、相应的努力,以及对方领会这个意思。不过,如果别人还没有被离间,就不构成业道;只有真正被离间了,才构成业道。巴利
Tattha saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa paresaṃ vā bhedāya attano piyakamyatāya vā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pisuṇā vācā. Sā yassa bhedaṃ karoti, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā cattāro sambhārā – bhinditabbo paro, ‘‘iti ime nānā bhavissantī’’ti bhedapurekkhāratā vā ‘‘iti ahaṃ piyo bhavissāmi vissāsiko’’ti piyakamyatā vā, tajjo vāyāmo, tassa tadatthavijānananti. Pare pana abhinne kammapathabhedo natthi, bhinneyeva hoti.
由伤害他人要害的身业或语业所引发的、完全粗暴的思,就是粗恶语。不过,即使行为是伤害对方要害,如果心是柔软的,也不成为粗恶语。比如父母有时也会对孩子们这样说:“让贼把你们砍成一块一块的!”可哪怕一片青莲花叶落在孩子们身上,他们都不愿意。亲教师和教授师有时也会对依止者这样说:“这些无惭无愧的家伙,把他们赶走!”但他们心里还是希望这些人能获得教法和证悟。就像心柔软时粗恶语不成立一样,言语柔软而心不柔软时,也仍然不是不粗恶的语。因为想让人被杀的人说“让他舒舒服服地躺着吧”,这话并不是不粗恶的语,由于内心凶暴,这本身就是粗恶语。这话是针对谁而说的,如果那人功德小,罪过就轻;功德大,罪过就重。它有三个构成条件:对方是应被辱骂的人、心是愤怒的、以及辱骂的行为。巴利
Parassa mammacchedakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā ekantapharusacetanā pharusā vācā. Mammacchedakopi pana payogo cittasaṇhatāya pharusā vācā na hoti. Mātāpitaro hi kadāci puttake evampi vadanti ‘‘corā vo khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ karontū’’ti. Uppalapattampi ca nesaṃ upari patantaṃ na icchanti. Ācariyupajjhāyā ca kadāci nissitake evaṃ vadanti ‘‘kiṃ ime ahirikā anottappino, niddhamatha ne’’ti. Atha ca nesaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiṃ icchanti. Yathā ca cittasaṇhatāya pharusā vācā na hoti, evaṃ vacanasaṇhatāya apharusā vācāpi na hoti. Na hi mārāpetukāmassa ‘‘imaṃ sukhaṃ sayāpethā’’ti vacanaṃ apharusā vācā hoti, cittapharusatāya panesā pharusā vācāva. Sā yaṃ sandhāya pavattitā, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā tayo sambhārā – akkositabbo paro, kupitacittaṃ, akkosanāti.
以身心和语言的行为传达无意义内容的,就是由不善思发起的绮语。偶尔说,过失轻;经常说、说得多,过失就重。它有两个构成条件:一是以谈论婆罗多战争、抢走悉多之类的无聊闲话为动机;二是实际说出那样的话。另一些人认为,如果对方没有听懂这些话,就不构成业道;只有对方听懂了这些绮语,才构成业道。巴利
Anatthaviññāpikā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā akusalacetanā samphappalāpo. So āsevanamandatāya appasāvajjo, āsevanamahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Tassa dve sambhārā – bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇādiniratthakakathāpurekkhāratā, tathārūpikathākathanañcāti. Pare pana taṃ kathaṃ agaṇhante kammapathabhedo natthi, parena samphappalāpe gahiteyeva hoti.
贪欲就是贪求,意思是面对他人的财物时,心倾向于那边而运作。它的特相是面对他人财物时生起“啊,但愿这属于我”这样的贪求。就像不与取一样,它也有罪轻和罪重之分。它有两个条件:他人的财物,以及想把它归为自己。因为即使对他人财物生起了贪,只要还没有生起“啊,但愿这属于我”而把它归为自己,这时还不构成业道。巴利
Abhijjhāyatīti abhijjhā, parabhaṇḍābhimukhī hutvā tanninnatāya pavattatīti attho. Sā ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamassā’’ti evaṃ parabhaṇḍābhijjhāyanalakkhaṇā, adinnādānaṃ viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca. Tassa dve sambhārā – parabhaṇḍaṃ, attano pariṇāmanañcāti. Parabhaṇḍavatthuke hi lobhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamassā’’ti attano na pariṇāmeti.
伤害利益与安乐就是嗔害。它的特相是想要毁灭对方的心意伤害,就像粗恶语一样,有罪轻的,也有罪重的。它有两个条件:其他有情,以及想让他毁灭。因为即使对其他有情生起了忿怒,只要还没有想到“啊,但愿他被消灭、被毁灭”,这时还不算构成业道。巴利
Hitasukhaṃ byāpādayatīti byāpādo. So paravināsāya manopadosalakkhaṇo, pharusā vācā viya appasāvajjo mahāsāvajjo ca. Tassa dve sambhārā – parasatto ca, tassa ca vināsacintāti. Parasattavatthuke hi kodhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatāyaṃ ucchijjeyya vinasseyyā’’ti tassa vināsaṃ na cinteti.
邪见就是不如实地执取,以颠倒的方式去看,所以叫邪见。它的特相是以“没有布施的果报”等颠倒的方式看待事物。像绮语一样,它可以是罪轻的,也可以是罪重的。另外,不决定的邪见罪轻,决定的邪见罪重。它有两个条件:一是对事物的认知方式颠倒;二是事物正好以符合那种颠倒认知的样子呈现在他面前。在这当中,只有持无有见、无因见、无作业见才构成业道的破犯,其他邪见则不构成。巴利
Yathābhuccagahaṇābhāvena micchā passatīti micchādiṭṭhi. Sā ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā nayena viparītadassanalakkhaṇā, samphappalāpo viya appasāvajjā, mahāsāvajjā ca. Apica aniyatā appasāvajjā, niyatā mahāsāvajjā. Tassā dve sambhārā – vatthuno ca gahitākāraviparītatā, yathā ca taṃ gaṇhāti, tathābhāvena tassūpaṭṭhānanti. Tattha natthikāhetukaakiriyadiṭṭhīhi eva kammapathabhedo hoti, na aññadiṭṭhīhi.
对这十种不善业道,应当从五个方面来判定:法、类别、所缘、受、根源。巴利
Imesaṃ pana dasannaṃ akusalakammapathānaṃ dhammato, koṭṭhāsato, ārammaṇato, vedanāto, mūlatoti pañcahākārehi vinicchayo veditabbo.
在这里,就“法”这一项来说:在这十种不善业道当中,按顺序前七种都只是思心所本身;而贪欲等后三种,则是与思心所相应的心所。巴利
Tattha dhammatoti etesu hi satta paṭipāṭiyā cetanādhammāva honti, abhijjhādayo tayo cetanāsampayuttā.
从“部分”的角度来说:按顺序排的前七种,再加上邪见,这八种只是业道,不是根本。贪欲和嗔恚既是业道,也是根本。因为贪欲一旦作为根本,就是贪这个不善根;嗔恚就是嗔不善根。巴利
Koṭṭhāsatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta, micchādiṭṭhi cāti ime aṭṭha kammapathā eva honti, no mūlāni. Abhijjhābyāpādā kammapathā ceva mūlāni ca. Abhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvā lobho akusalamūlaṃ hoti, byāpādo doso akusalamūlaṃ.
从所缘来看,杀生以命根为所缘,所以是以行(造作)为所缘。不与取,或者以有情为所缘,或者以行为所缘。邪淫,从触的角度来说,是以行为所缘;也有些论师认为是以有情为所缘。妄语,或者以有情为所缘,或者以行为所缘。离间语也是这样。粗恶语只以有情为所缘。杂秽语,从见、闻、觉、知的角度来说,或者以有情为所缘,或者以行为所缘。贪欲也是这样。嗔恚只以有情为所缘。邪见,从三界诸法的角度来说,只以行为所缘。巴利
Ārammaṇatoti pāṇātipāto jīvitindriyārammaṇato saṅkhārārammaṇo. Adinnādānaṃ sattārammaṇaṃ vā saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ vā. Micchācāro phoṭṭhabbavasena saṅkhārārammaṇo, sattārammaṇotipi eke. Musāvādo sattārammaṇo vā saṅkhārārammaṇo vā. Tathā pisuṇā vācā. Pharusā vācā sattārammaṇāva samphappalāpo diṭṭhasutamutaviññātavasena sattārammaṇo vā saṅkhārārammaṇo vā. Tathā abhijjhā. Byāpādo sattārammaṇova. Micchādiṭṭhi tebhūmakadhammavasena saṅkhārārammaṇāva.
从受的角度说,杀生是苦受。就算国王们看见盗贼,笑着下令“去,把他杀了”,他们下定决心的思心所仍然与苦受相应。不与取有三种受。看见别人的财物,欢欢喜喜地拿,是乐受;因为害怕、战栗而拿,是苦受;省察异熟、等流与果者也是如此;拿的时候心态中立,是不苦不乐受。邪淫有乐受和中舍受两种,但在下定决心的心里,不会有中舍受。妄语和不与取说的一样,有三种受;离间语也一样。粗恶语是苦受。杂秽语有三种受。别人喝彩、举起衣物等时,欢欢喜喜地讲劫夺悉多、婆罗多、打仗之类的话题,是乐受;先前有人给了报酬,后来另一个人来了说“从头讲起”,他为此心里不痛快,想“我到底要不要毫无保留地顺着脉络把这些杂七杂八的话都讲出来呢”,这样讲的时候是苦受;以中舍心讲,是不苦不乐受。贪欲有乐受和中舍受两种;邪见也一样。嗔恚是苦受。巴利
Vedanātoti pāṇātipāto dukkhavedano hoti. Kiñcāpi hi rājāno coraṃ disvā hasamānāpi ‘‘gacchatha bhaṇe, māretha na’’nti vadanti, sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā pana nesaṃ dukkhasampayuttāva hoti. Adinnādānaṃ tivedanaṃ. Tañhi parabhaṇḍaṃ disvā haṭṭhatuṭṭhassa gaṇhato sukhavedanaṃ hoti, bhītatasitassa gaṇhato dukkhavedanaṃ, tathā vipākanissandaphalāni paccavekkhantassa. Gahaṇakāle majjhattabhāve ṭhitassa pana gaṇhato adukkhamasukhavedanaṃ hoti. Micchācāro sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedano, sanniṭṭhāpakacitte pana majjhattavedano na hoti. Musāvādo adinnādāne vuttanayeneva tivedano, tathā pisuṇā vācā. Pharusā vācā dukkhavedanā. Samphappalāpo tivedano. Paresu hi sādhukāraṃ dentesu celādīni ukkhipantesu haṭṭhatuṭṭhassa sītāharaṇabhāratayuddhādīni kathanakāle so sukhavedano hoti, paṭhamaṃ dinnavetanena ekena pacchā āgantvā ‘‘ādito paṭṭhāya kathehī’’ti vutte ‘‘niravasesaṃ yathānusandhikaṃ pakiṇṇakakathaṃ kathessāmi nu kho, no’’ti domanassitassa kathanakāle dukkhavedano hoti, majjhattassa kathayato adukkhamasukhavedano hoti. Abhijjhā sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedanā, tathā micchādiṭṭhi. Byāpādo dukkhavedano.
从根来说:杀生以嗔和痴为根,是二根。不与取以嗔和痴为根,或者以贪和痴为根。邪淫以贪和痴为根。妄语以嗔和痴为根,或者以贪和痴为根。离间语和绮语也一样。粗恶语以嗔和痴为根。贪欲只以痴为根,是单根;嗔恚也是如此。邪见以贪和痴为根,是二根。巴利
Mūlatoti pāṇātipāto dosamohavasena dvimūlako hoti, adinnādānaṃ dosamohavasena vā lobhamohavasena vā, micchācāro lobhamohavasena, musāvādo dosamohavasena vā lobhamohavasena vā. Tathā pisuṇā vācā samphappalāpo ca. Pharusā vācā dosamohavasena, abhijjhā mohavasena ekamūlā, tathā byāpādo. Micchādiṭṭhi lobhamohavasena dvimūlāti.
远离杀生等,再加上无贪、无嗔、正见,这十种就叫作善业道。所谓“离”,就是以此远离杀生等,或者自己主动远离,或者仅仅是指远离这个行为本身。一个人远离杀生等恶行时,与善心相应的离,按类别分有三种:成就离、受持离、正断离。其中,没有受持学处的人,在遇到造恶的机会时,会考虑自己的出身、年龄、多闻等条件,心想“做这样的恶事对我们不合适”,于是不去违犯,这时心中生起的离,就叫成就离。已经受持学处的人,在受持学处时以及受持之后,即使舍弃自己的生命也不去违犯造恶的机会,这时生起的离,就叫受持离。与圣道相应的离,则叫正断离,从它生起的那一刻起,圣者们连“我要杀生”这样的念头都不会再生起。巴利
Pāṇātipātādīhi pana viratiyo, anabhijjhāabyāpādasammādiṭṭhiyo cāti ime dasa kusalakammapathā nāma. Pāṇātipātādīhi etāya viramanti, sayaṃ vā viramati, viramaṇamattameva vā etanti virati. Yā pāṇātipātādīhi viramantassa kusalacittasampayuttā virati, sā pabhedato tividhā hoti sampattavirati samādānavirati samucchedaviratīti. Tattha asamādinnasikkhāpadānaṃ attano jātivayabāhusaccādīni paccavekkhitvā ‘‘ayuttaṃ amhākaṃ evarūpaṃ pāpaṃ kātu’’nti sampattavatthuṃ avītikkamantānaṃ uppajjamānā virati sampattavirati nāma. Samādinnasikkhāpadānaṃ pana sikkhāpadasamādāne ca tatuttari ca attano jīvitampi pariccajitvā vatthuṃ avītikkamantānaṃ uppajjamānā virati samādānavirati nāma. Ariyamaggasampayuttā pana virati samucchedavirati nāma, yassā uppattito pabhuti ariyapuggalānaṃ ‘‘pāṇaṃ ghātessāmā’’tiādicittampi na uppajjatīti.
现在,就像分析不善业道那样,对这些善业道也应当从五个方面来判定:法、部分、所缘、受、根。巴利
Idāni akusalakammapathānaṃ viya imesaṃ kusalakammapathānaṃ dhammato, koṭṭhāsato, ārammaṇato, vedanāto, mūlatoti pañcahākārehi vinicchayo veditabbo.
在这里,就“法”而言:在这些依次中,七个思也存在,离也存在;最后三者则只与思相应。巴利
Tattha dhammatoti etesupi paṭipāṭiyā satta cetanāpi vaṭṭanti viratiyopi, ante tayo cetanāsampayuttāva.
从部分来说,按顺序,前七项只是业道,不是根本;最后三项既是业道,也是根本。因为无贪欲到达根本时,就是无贪善根;无嗔到达根本时,就是无嗔善根;正见到达根本时,就是无痴善根。巴利
Koṭṭhāsatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta kammapathā eva, no mūlāni, ante tayo kammapathā ceva mūlāni ca. Anabhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvā alobho kusalamūlaṃ hoti, abyāpādo adoso kusalamūlaṃ, sammādiṭṭhi amoho kusalamūlaṃ.
从所缘的角度来说,杀生等(恶行)各自的所缘,就是这些(善业道)的所缘。因为所谓“离”,正是以应当避免的事为所缘才生起的。然而,就像以涅槃为所缘的圣道能舍断烦恼一样,这些以命根等为所缘的业道,也能舍断杀生等破戒行为。巴利
Ārammaṇatoti pāṇātipātādīnaṃ ārammaṇāneva etesaṃ ārammaṇāni. Vītikkamitabbatoyeva hi veramaṇī nāma hoti. Yathā pana nibbānārammaṇo ariyamaggo kilese pajahati, evaṃ jīvitindriyādiārammaṇāpete kammapathā pāṇātipātādīni dussīlyāni pajahantīti.
从受的角度来说:这些全都是乐受或者舍受。因为一旦进入善的状态,就不存在所谓的苦受了。巴利
Vedanātoti sabbe sukhavedanā vā honti majjhattavedanā vā. Kusalaṃ patvā hi dukkhā vedanā nāma natthi.
从根来说:按顺序,以与智相应的心远离(杀生等)时,依无贪、无嗔、无痴而成为三根。以与智不相应的心远离时,依无贪、无嗔而成为二根。不贪(无贪)业道,以与智相应的心远离时,依无嗔、无痴而成为二根。以与智不相应的心远离时,依无嗔而成为一根。不过,无贪本身不能成为自己的根。无嗔也是同样的道理。正见则依无贪、无嗔而成为二根。巴利
Mūlatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta ñāṇasampayuttacittena viramantassa alobhaadosaamohavasena timūlā honti. Ñāṇavippayuttacittena viramantassa alobhādosavasena dvimūlā. Anabhijjhā ñāṇasampayuttacittena viramantassa adosaamohavasena dvimūlā. Ñāṇavippayuttacittena viramantassa adosavasena ekamūlā. Alobho pana attanāva attano mūlaṃ na hoti. Abyāpādepi eseva nayo. Sammādiṭṭhi alobhādosavasena dvimūlāvāti.
像这样,先用十善业道来说明戒,现在为了进一步用出离等三十七种法来说明戒,直到以阿罗汉道为终点,于是说:“以出离防护欲贪,从防护的意义上说是戒,从不违犯的意义上说是戒”等等。在这里,因为以出离防护欲贪、不违犯它,所以用意是:出离就是戒。或者,这里的语词是“各自”义中的工具格,意思就是“以出离”。其余诸法也照同样的方式理解。不过在巴利原文中,先举出出离和无嗔,然后因为前面已经说过的方式,把其余的省略了,最后只显示了阿罗汉道。巴利
Evaṃ dasakusalakammapathavasena sīlaṃ dassetvā idāni nekkhammādīnaṃ arahattamaggapariyosānānaṃ sattatiṃsadhammānaṃ vasena dassetuṃ nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ saṃvaraṭṭhena sīlaṃ, avītikkamaṭṭhena sīlantiādimāha. Tattha yasmā nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ saṃvarati na vītikkamati, tasmā nekkhammaṃ sīlanti adhippāyo. Paccattatthe vā karaṇavacanaṃ, nekkhammanti attho. Esa nayo sesesu. Pāḷiyaṃ pana nekkhammaabyāpāde dassetvā heṭṭhā vuttanayattā sesaṃ saṅkhipitvā ante arahattamaggoyeva dassito.
像这样,从防护和不违犯的角度说明了戒之后,现在为了展示那两者的具体分类,就说“五种戒:断除杀生是戒”等等。在这里应该这样理解它们的关联:断除杀生是戒,远离杀生是戒,与杀生相对立的思是戒,防护杀生是戒,不违犯杀生是戒。所谓“断除”,除了前面所说的杀生等不再生起之外,并没有另外某种叫做“法”的东西存在。然而,因为每一种断除都具有安立相应善法的“持守”意义,也具有令散乱状态不再散乱的“摄合”意义,所以依据前面所说的、以“持守”和“摄合”为内涵的“戒行”之义,它被称为戒。其余四种,则是就心的活动状态而言:有的从“远离”的角度说,有的从“防护”的角度说,有的从与这两者相应的思的角度说,有的对不违犯者从“不违犯”的角度说。巴利
Evaṃ saṃvaraavītikkamavasena sīlaṃ dassetvā idāni tesaṃyeva dvinnaṃ pabhedadassanatthaṃ pañca sīlāni pāṇātipātassa pahānaṃ sīlantiādimāha. Ettha ca pāṇātipātassa pahānaṃ sīlaṃ, pāṇātipātā veramaṇī sīlaṃ, pāṇātipātassa paṭipakkhacetanā sīlaṃ, pāṇātipātassa saṃvaro sīlaṃ, pāṇātipātassa avītikkamo sīlanti yojanā kātabbā. Pahānanti ca koci dhammo nāma natthi aññatra vuttappakārānaṃ pāṇātipātādīnaṃ anuppādamattato. Yasmā pana taṃ taṃ pahānaṃ tassa tassa kusalassa dhammassa patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena upadhāraṇaṃ hoti, vippakiṇṇasabhāvākaraṇena ca samodhānaṃ, tasmā pubbe vutteneva upadhāraṇasamodhānasaṅkhātena sīlanaṭṭhena sīlanti vuttaṃ. Itare cattāro dhammā tato tato veramaṇivasena tassa tassa saṃvaravasena tadubhayasampayuttacetanāvasena taṃ taṃ avītikkamantassa avītikkamavasena ca cetaso pavattisabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttā.
或者,从法的角度来看,断除本身也确实存在。怎么理解呢?通过它来断除杀生等对立面,或者它本身就在断除那个对立面,所以叫断除。那这个断除是什么?就是所有善蕴。不过其他老师主张:即使在出离等法里,只要抓住“离就是戒”这个说法,就能认定在一切善法中也确实存在一种叫“离”的、决定能舍断的状态。但这里不是这个意思。所以,用断除等五种表述来区分时,在有边际戒和无边际戒这两种戒中,这里说的只是无边际戒。正因为如此,这类戒能导向心无懊悔……乃至……在应证悟的法上为证悟而修学,经中是这样说的。巴利
Atha vā pahānampi dhammato atthiyeva. Kathaṃ? Pahīyate anena pāṇātipātādipaṭipakkho, pajahati vā taṃ paṭipakkhanti pahānaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Sabbepi kusalā khandhā. Aññe pana ācariyā ‘‘nekkhammādīsupi ‘veramaṇī sīla’nti vacanamattaṃ gahetvā sabbakusalesupi niyatayevāpanakabhūtā virati nāma atthī’’ti vadanti, na tathā idhāti. Evamimehi pahānādīhi pañcahi padehi visesetvā pariyantāpariyantasīladvaye apariyantasīlameva vuttaṃ. Tasmā eva hi evarūpāni sīlāni cittassa avippaṭisārāya saṃvattanti…pe… sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikaronto sikkhatīti vuttaṃ.
在这里,戒能导向无懊悔。因为经中说:“防护是为了无懊悔”(《无碍解道》366),又说:“阿难,善戒以无懊悔为目的,以无懊悔为利益”(《增支部》10.1;11.1),所以戒能导向无懊悔。经中又说:“无懊悔是为了欢悦”(《无碍解道》366),又说:“如理作意的人,欢悦就会生起”(《无碍解道》1.74),所以戒能导向欢悦。经中又说:“欢悦是为了喜”(《无碍解道》366),又说:“心生欢悦的人,喜就会生起”(《增支部》5.26;《相应部》5.376;《长部》3.322),所以戒能导向喜。经中又说:“喜是为了轻安”(《无碍解道》366),又说:“内心有喜的人,身体就会轻安”(《增支部》5.26;《相应部》5.376;《长部》3.322),所以戒能导向轻安。经中又说:“轻安是为了乐”(《无碍解道》366),又说:“身体轻安的人,就能感受到乐”(《增支部》5.26;《相应部》5.376;《长部》3.322),所以戒能导向悦。这里说的属于心所的乐,就叫做悦。所谓“修习”,就是反复地、强有力地练习。修习什么呢?因为紧接着“悦”这个说法已经提到了乐,所以这里乐已经成立。又因为经中说“有乐的人,心就能得定”(《增支部》5.26;《相应部》5.376;《长部》3.322),所以依靠这个乐,定就能成就。这样成就的定,就是这里所说的修习。戒能导向对这种定的修习,意思是戒能导向使这种定变得熟练、有力。所谓“修习”,就是使这个定增长。所谓“多修习”,就是对这个定反复不断地去做。戒作为无懊悔等状态生起时的根本原因,通过成就定中的信根等庄严,能导向庄严。通过成就无懊悔等定的资粮,能导向资具。比如在“出家人应当聚集的这些生活资具”等说法中,这里的“资具”一词是“资粮”的意思。而在“戒是车的资具,禅那为轴,精进为轮”等说法中,则是“庄严”的意思。在“以七种城郭资具而善加装备”等说法中,则是“围绕、眷属”的意思。但在这里,因为庄严和围绕已经分别说过,所以说是“资粮”的意思。而“资粮”的意思也就是“条件”的意思。戒仅仅以根本原因的身份,通过成就与定相应中的触等法的圆满,能导向围绕。通过使定和观达到作为近因的状态,以及通过使定和观达到自在的状态,能导向圆满,因为戒能成就圆满的状态。巴利
Tattha avippaṭisārāya saṃvattantīti ‘‘saṃvaro avippaṭisāratthāyā’’ti (pari. 366) ca ‘‘avippaṭisāratthāni kho, ānanda, kusalāni sīlāni avippaṭisārānisaṃsānī’’ti (a. ni. 10.1; 11.1) ca vacanato avippaṭisāratthāya saṃvattanti. ‘‘Avippaṭisāro pāmojjatthāyā’’ti (pari. 366) ca ‘‘yoniso manasikaroto pāmojjaṃ jāyatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.74) ca vacanato pāmojjāya saṃvattanti. ‘‘Pāmojjaṃ pītatthāyā’’ti (pari. 366) ca ‘‘pamuditassa pīti jāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.26; saṃ. ni. 5.376; dī. ni. 3.322) ca vacanato pītiyāsaṃvattanti. ‘‘Pīti passaddhatthāyā’’ti (pari. 366) ca ‘‘pītimanassa kāyo passambhatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.26; saṃ. ni. 5.376; dī. ni. 3.322) ca vacanato passaddhiyā saṃvattanti. ‘‘Passaddhi sukhatthāyā’’ti (pari. 366) ca ‘‘passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedetī’’ti (a. ni. 5.26; saṃ. ni. 5.376; dī. ni. 3.322) ca vacanato somanassāya saṃvattanti. Cetasikaṃ sukhañhi somanassanti vuccati. Āsevanāyāti bhusā sevanā āsevanā. Kassa āsevanā? Anantaraṃ somanassavacanena sukhassa vuttattā sukhaṃ siddhaṃ. ‘‘Sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.26; saṃ. ni. 5.376; dī. ni. 3.322) ca vacanato tena sukhena samādhi siddho hoti. Evaṃ siddhassa samādhissa āsevanā. Tassa samādhissa āsevanāya saṃvattanti, paguṇabalavabhāvāya saṃvattantīti attho. Bhāvanāyāti tasseva samādhissa vuddhiyā. Bahulīkammāyāti tasseva samādhissa punappunaṃ kiriyāya. Avippaṭisārādipavattiyā mūlakāraṇaṃ hutvā samādhissa saddhindriyādialaṅkārasādhanena alaṅkārāya saṃvattanti. Avippaṭisārādikassa samādhisambhārassa sādhanena parikkhārāya saṃvattanti. ‘‘Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.192) viya hi ettha sambhārattho parikkhārasaddo. ‘‘Ratho sīlaparikkhāro, jhānakkho cakkavīriyo’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.54) pana alaṅkārattho. ‘‘Sattahi nagaraparikkhārehi suparikkhataṃ hotī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 7.67) parivārattho. Idha pana alaṅkāraparivārānaṃ visuṃ āgatattā sambhāratthoti vuttaṃ. Sambhārattho ca paccayatthoti. Mūlakāraṇabhāveneva samādhisampayuttaphassādidhammasampattisādhanena parivārāya saṃvattanti. Samādhissa vipassanāya ca padaṭṭhānabhāvapāpanena vasībhāvapāpanena ca paripuṇṇabhāvasādhanato pāripūriyā saṃvattanti.
像这样,先说明了以戒为依托、在一切方面都圆满的定,现在为了指出:以戒为根本、以定为直接基础的如实知见等,而引“心定时,如实知、如实见;如实知、如实见,就厌离;厌离,就离贪;由于离贪,就得解脱”这段话,于是说出“彻底厌离”等语。因为一旦显示出厌离,作为它直接基础的如实知见也就一并显示出来了。如果如实知见没有成立,厌离就不可能成立。这些内容正是接下来经文所说的。不过,这里说的如实知见,指的是对有因有缘的名色法的把握。巴利
Evaṃ sīlūpanissayena sabbākāraparipūraṃ samādhiṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘samāhite citte yathābhūtaṃ jānāti passati, yathābhūtaṃ jānaṃ passaṃ nibbindati, nibbindaṃ virajjati, virāgā vimuccatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.73; dī. ni. 3.359) vacanato sīlamūlakāni samādhipadaṭṭhānāni yathābhūtañāṇadassanādīni dassento ekantanibbidāyātiādimāha. Nibbidāya hi dassitāya tassā padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ dassitameva hoti. Tasmiñhi asiddhe nibbidā na sijjhatīti. Tāni pana vuttatthāneva. Yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ panettha sappaccayanāmarūpapariggaho.
像这样,先说明了以不死的伟大涅槃为最终归宿的戒的功用之后,现在为了指出这种戒就是增上戒学,以及以它为基础的增上心学和增上慧学,就说了“对于这样的诸戒,防护的清净就是增上戒”等话。其中,防护本身就是清净,所以叫“防护清净”。对于这样没有边际的、以出离为依托的诸戒来说,因为它的防护清净是依托出离的,所以比其余的戒更殊胜,因此称为“增上戒”。所谓“安住于防护清净的心”,意思是:安立在这样戒的防护清净上的心,因为能很好地带来不后悔等利益,所以不会走向散乱,而能稳稳地安住在定中。不散乱本身就是清净,所以叫“不散乱清净”。这种远离一切染污、属于抉择分的定,因为比其余的定更殊胜,所以称为“增上心”。这里是用“心”作为代表来指称定的。正确地观察防护清净,就是以知遍知和度遍知的方式,正确地观察清净的戒的防护;同样,也正确地观察那称为不散乱清净的清净的定。对这样观察的人来说,他那称为“见”的清净,就是“见清净”。这种见清净,因为比其余的慧更殊胜,所以称为“增上慧”。“在其中”,就是在防护、不散乱和见这三者之中。“防护的状态”,就是防护本身。同样,也应该知道“不散乱的状态”和“见的状态”。增上戒本身就是修学,所以叫“增上戒学”。另外两个也应当同样理解。巴利
Evaṃ amatamahānibbānapariyosānaṃ sīlappayojanaṃ dassetvā idāni tassa sīlassa adhisīlasikkhābhāvaṃ tammūlakā ca adhicittaadhipaññāsikkhā dassetukāmo evarūpānaṃ sīlānaṃ saṃvarapārisuddhi adhisīlantiādimāha. Tattha saṃvaroyeva pārisuddhi saṃvarapārisuddhi. Evarūpānaṃ apariyantabhūtānaṃ vivaṭṭanissitānaṃ sīlānaṃ saṃvarapārisuddhi vivaṭṭanissitattā sesasīlato adhikaṃ sīlanti adhisīlanti vuccati. Saṃvarapārisuddhiyā ṭhitaṃ cittanti edisāya sīlasaṃvarapārisuddhiyā patiṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ suṭṭhu avippaṭisārādīnaṃ āvahanato na vikkhepaṃ gacchati, samādhismiṃ patiṭṭhātīti attho. Avikkhepoyeva pārisuddhi avikkhepapārisuddhi. So sabbamalavirahito nibbedhabhāgiyo samādhi sesasamādhito adhikattā adhicittanti vuccati. Cittasīsena hettha samādhi niddiṭṭho. Saṃvarapārisuddhiṃ sammā passatīti parisuddhaṃ sīlasaṃvaraṃ ñātapariññāvasena tīraṇapariññāvasena ca sammā passati, evameva avikkhepapārisuddhisaṅkhātaṃ parisuddhaṃ samādhiṃ sammā passati. Evaṃ passato cassa dassanasaṅkhātā pārisuddhi dassanapārisuddhi. Sāyeva sesapaññāya adhikattā adhipaññāti vuccati. Yo tatthāti yo tattha saṃvaraavikkhepadassanesu. Saṃvaraṭṭhoti saṃvarabhāvo. Evameva avikkhepaṭṭhadassanaṭṭhā ca veditabbā. Adhisīlameva sikkhā adhisīlasikkhā. Evaṃ itarāpi veditabbā.
这样开示了三学之后,现在为了说明它们圆满的次第,便说“转向这三种学而修学”等话。它的意思是:为了逐一圆满每一种学而转向它,也叫修学;转向之后,知道“这是某某学”,也叫修学;知道之后,再三地观察,也叫修学;观察之后,按照所见到的去反复审察,也叫修学;审察之后,把心安住在那里不动摇、令它稳固,也叫修学;以与每一种学相应的信、精进、念、定、慧来履行各自的作用,也叫修学;在应当证知、应当了知等阶段,履行那阶段应做的作用时,也是在修这三种学。接下来“五种戒”等句,含义和前面已说的一样。至于“以阿罗汉道断尽一切烦恼”等句,因为阿罗汉完全没有追悔等状态,又具有反复修习等状态,所以这些词句在这里完全适用。而“一向导向厌离”等句,则应当像念处、正勤那样,只配合于证道的那一刹那来理解。巴利
Evaṃ tisso sikkhāyo dassetvā idāni tāsaṃ pāripūrikkamaṃ dassetuṃ imā tisso sikkhāyo āvajjanto sikkhatītiādimāha. Tassattho – paccekaṃ paripūretuṃ āvajjantopi sikkhati nāma, āvajjetvā ‘‘ayaṃ nāma sikkhā’’ti jānantopi sikkhati nāma, jānitvā punappunaṃ passantopi sikkhati nāma, passitvā yathādiṭṭhaṃ paccavekkhantopi sikkhati nāma, paccavekkhitvā tattheva cittaṃ acalaṃ katvā patiṭṭhapentopi sikkhati nāma, taṃtaṃsikkhāsampayuttasaddhāvīriyasatisamādhipaññāhi sakasakakiccaṃ karontopi sikkhati nāma, abhiññeyyābhijānanādikālepi taṃ taṃ kiccaṃ karonto tissopi sikkhāyo sikkhati nāmāti . Puna pañca sīlānītiādīni vuttatthāneva. Arahattamaggena sabbakilesānantiādīsu pana arahantānaṃ suṭṭhu vippaṭisārādiabhāvato āsevanādibhāvato ca tāni padāni yujjanteva. Ekantanibbidāyātiādīni pana satipaṭṭhānasammappadhānāni viya maggakkhaṇeyeva yojetabbāni.
他正确地看见律仪清净,也正确地看见不散乱清净。不过,这两句话应当配合观,为了证得果等至来理解;而第二句也可以配合观,为了证得灭等至来理解。在“转向而学”等五句里,虽然阿罗汉已经没有可学的东西,但因为具有无学戒蕴等的实质,所以说“学”。至于“以信胜解而学”等句,则是就道的刹那而说的。其他那些依近行、安止、观、道而说的句子,也应当按各自相应的情况来理解。巴利
Saṃvarapārisuddhiṃ sammā passati, avikkhepapārisuddhiṃ sammā passatīti idaṃ pana vacanadvayaṃ phalasamāpattatthāya vipassanāvasena yojetabbaṃ, dutiyavacanaṃ pana nirodhasamāpattatthāya vipassanāvasenāpi yujjati. Āvajjanto sikkhatītiādīsu pañcasu vacanesu arahato sikkhitabbābhāvepi asekkhasīlakkhandhādisabhāvato ‘‘sikkhatī’’ti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Saddhāya adhimuccanto sikkhatītiādīni pana maggakkhaṇaññeva sandhāya vuttāni. Aññānipi upacārappanāvipassanāmaggavasena vuttāni vacanāni yathāyogaṃ yojetabbānīti.
定修所成智的解释巴利
3. Samādhibhāvanāmayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
43 43. 在解释“定修所成智”时,先从一种定开始,一直到十种定,逐一说明定的分类差别,所以说了“一种定”等话。其中,“心一境性”的意思是:因为没有种种所缘造成的散乱,只以同一个所缘为最上、最殊胜,所以叫“一境”;一境的状态,就是一境性。不过,这种一境性是心的,不是有情的,为了表明这一点,所以说了“心的”。在二法里,“世间”:因为具有毁坏、崩坏的意义,所以叫世间,也就是轮回;由于被包含在轮回之中,所以叫世间。 “出世间”:已经超越,所以叫超出;因为不被世间所包含,所以从世间超出,叫出世间。在三法里,“有寻有伺”:既有寻也有伺,所以叫有寻有伺。同样,“无寻无伺”:没有寻也没有伺,所以叫无寻无伺。“唯伺”:在寻和伺当中,只有伺是它的量、它的标准,所以叫唯伺;意思是说,它只与伺相应,不和寻相应。“无寻唯伺”:没有寻而只有伺,所以叫无寻唯伺。这三种也可以分开来读。四法和五法的含义已经说过了。在六法里,“随念”:因为一再反复生起,所以念就是随念;或者说,因为它只在应当生起的对象上生起,所以对于因信心而出家的善男子来说,是相应的念,因此叫随念。“佛随念”:以佛陀为所缘而生起的随念。这是以阿拉汉等佛陀功德为所缘的念的名称。依靠这种佛随念,心一境性因为与被称为掉举的散乱正好相对治,所以称为不散乱。“法随念”:以法为所缘而生起的随念。这是以“善说”等法功德为所缘的念的名称。“僧随念”:以僧为所缘而生起的随念。这是以“善行”等僧功德为所缘的念的名称。“戒随念”:以戒为所缘而生起的随念。这是以自己“无缺”等戒功德为所缘的念的名称。“舍随念”:以舍为所缘而生起的随念。这是以自己“已施舍”等舍功德为所缘的念的名称。“天随念”:以天为所缘而生起的随念。这是以天为见证,对自己信心等功德为所缘的念的名称。巴利
43. Samādhibhāvanāmayañāṇaniddese ādito tāva ekakato paṭṭhāya yāva dasakā samādhippabhedaṃ dassento eko samādhītiādimāha. Tattha cittassa ekaggatāti nānārammaṇavikkhepābhāvato ekaṃ ārammaṇaṃ aggaṃ uttamaṃ assāti ekaggo, ekaggassa bhāvo ekaggatā. Sā pana ekaggatā cittassa, na sattassāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘cittassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Duke lokiyoti loko vuccati lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena vaṭṭaṃ, tasmiṃ pariyāpannabhāvena loke niyuttoti lokiyo. Lokuttaroti uttiṇṇoti uttaro, loke apariyāpannabhāvena lokato uttaroti lokuttaro. Tike savitakko ca so savicāro cāti savitakkasavicāro. Evaṃ avitakkaavicāro. Vitakkavicāresu vicārova mattā pamāṇaṃ etassāti vicāramatto, vicārato utthari vitakkena saddhiṃ sampayogaṃ na gacchatīti attho. Avitakko ca so vicāramatto cāti avitakkavicāramatto. Tīsupi vicchedaṃ katvāpi paṭhanti. Catukkapañcakā vuttatthā . Chakke punappunaṃ uppajjanato satiyeva anussati, pavattitabbaṭṭhānamhiyeva vā pavattattā saddhāpabbajitassa kulaputtassa anurūpā satītipi anussati, buddhaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati bauddhānussati. Arahatādibuddhaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tassā buddhānussatiyā vasena cittassa ekaggatāyeva uddhaccasaṅkhātassa vikkhepassa paṭipakkhabhāvato na vikkhepoti avikkhepo. Dhammaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati dhammānussati. Svākkhātatādidhammaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saṅghaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati saṅghānussati. Suppaṭipannatādisaṅghaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ . Sīlaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati sīlānussati. Attano akhaṇḍatādisīlaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cāgaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati cāgānussati. Attano muttacāgatādicāgaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Devatā ārabbha uppannā anussati devatānussati. Devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā attano saddhādiguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
在七法中,定善巧是指:对定有种种分类,比如一种定、多种定等等,能够清楚地辨别“这个定是这样的,那个定是那样的”,这种熟练就是定善巧。这是对辨别定的智慧的一种称呼。在让定生起的方法上也很熟练,同样叫做定善巧。巴利
Sattake samādhikusalatāti ekavidhādibhedena anekabhede samādhimhi ‘‘ayamevaṃvidho samādhi, ayamevaṃvidho samādhī’’ti chekabhāvo. Samādhiparicchedakapaññāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Samādhiuppādanavidhānepi chekabhāvo samādhikusalatā.
对已生起的定,能够熟练地进入,这就是“入定善巧”。这样说,指的是入定的自在能力。巴利
Samādhissa samāpattikusalatāti uppāditassa samādhissa samāpajjane chekabhāvo. Etena samāpajjanavasitā vuttā hoti.
对定的安住善巧,是指对已进入的定,能随着相续、随自己的意愿安住,具有善巧能力。这说明了决意自在。或者说,他通过取相,再次以那些行相令定成就时,只是安止而已,并不能长久安住。能长久安住,则是因为定的障碍法被很好地净化了。因为,如果一位比丘没有通过观察欲的过患等,好好镇伏欲贪;没有通过身轻安,好好止息身的粗重;没有通过发起界作意等,好好驱除昏沉睡眠;没有通过止相作意等,好好消除掉举恶作;也没有好好净化其他定的障碍法,就进入禅那,那他就会像进入未净化蜂巢的蜜蜂,或像进入不净园林的国王一样,很快就退出来。但如果能好好净化定的障碍法之后再入定,他就会像进入善加净化蜂巢的蜜蜂,或像进入极其清净园林的国王一样,整整一天都安住在等至当中。因此古人说:巴利
Samādhissa ṭhitikusalatāti samāpannassa samādhissa santativasena yathāruci ṭhapane chekabhāvo. Etena adhiṭṭhānavasitā vuttā hoti. Atha vā nimittaggahaṇena cassa puna te ākāre sampādayato appanāmattameva ijjhati, na ciraṭṭhānaṃ. Ciraṭṭhānaṃ pana samādhiparipanthānaṃ dhammānaṃ suvisodhitattā hoti. Yo hi bhikkhu kāmādīnavapaccavekkhaṇādīhi kāmacchandaṃ na suṭṭhu vikkhambhetvā, kāyapassaddhivasena kāyaduṭṭhullaṃ na suppaṭippassaddhaṃ katvā, ārambhadhātumanasikārādivasena thinamiddhaṃ na suṭṭhu paṭivinodetvā, samathanimittamanasikārādivasena uddhaccakukkuccaṃ na suṭṭhu samūhataṃ katvā, aññepi samādhiparipanthe dhamme na suṭṭhu visodhetvā jhānaṃ samāpajjati, so avisodhitaṃ āsayaṃ paviṭṭhabhamaro viya, asuddhaṃ uyyānaṃ paviṭṭharājā viya ca khippameva nikkhamati. Yo pana samādhiparipanthe dhamme suṭṭhu visodhetvā jhānaṃ samāpajjati, so suvisodhitaṃ āsayaṃ paviṭṭhabhamaro viya, suparisuddhaṃ uyyānaṃ paviṭṭharājā viya ca sakalampi divasabhāgaṃ antosamāpattiyaṃyeva hoti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
应当驱除对诸欲的贪欲和嗔怒,以及掉举、昏沉和作为第五项的疑。
以远离带来的欢喜之心,就像国王进入清净的内宫一样,在那里享受喜悦。巴利
‘‘Kāmesu chandaṃ paṭighaṃ vinodaye, uddhaccathīnaṃ vicikicchapañcamaṃ; Vivekapāmojjakarena cetasā, rājāva suddhantagato tahiṃ rame’’ti .
因此,既然说过“想要让定长久安住的人,应当先清除障碍法,然后再入定”,按照这个方法去实行之后,在让定长久安住这件事上就很善巧——这就是这段话要表达的意思。巴利
Tasmā ‘‘ciraṭṭhitikāmena pāripanthikadhamme sodhetvā jhānaṃ samāpajjitabba’’nti vuttattā taṃ vidhiṃ sampādetvā samādhissa ciraṭṭhitikaraṇe chekabhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti.
定的出定善巧,是指对随着心相续的势头、随自己的意愿而转起的定,恰好在预先限定的时间出定,从而在出定方面具有善巧。应当知道,像《本生经》“Yassa hi dhammaṃ puriso vijaññā”等句子中,是为了表达从格的意思而用了属格,也可以理解为只是用了属格。由此说明了“出定自在”。巴利
Samādhissa vuṭṭhānakusalatāti santativasena yathāruci pavattassa samādhissa yathāparicchinnakāleyeva vuṭṭhānena samādhissa vuṭṭhāne chekabhāvo. ‘‘Yassa hi dhammaṃ puriso vijaññā’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.10.152) viya nissakkatthe vā sāmivacanaṃ katanti veditabbanti. Etena vuṭṭhānavasitā vuttā hoti.
定的“堪任善巧”,是指没有病、健康的状态。因为生病的人就被称为“不堪任”。律藏里也说:“尊者,我没有病。”在《无秽经》和《布经》等经文里,由于那些所说的证得禅那的障碍——各种邪恶的欲求行境不存在,以及贪欲等心的随烦恼消除,在使定远离疾病上的善巧,就是定的“堪任善巧”,也就是在远离烦恼病方面的善巧。或者说,“堪任”就是“适业性”,因为“kalla”这个词和“适业性”是同义词。正如《法集论》中说:“心的那种不堪任、不适业”,以及“堪任的心、柔软的心、离盖的心”。这里的“kalla”就是“适业”的意思。因此,通过遍的顺行、遍的逆行、遍的顺逆行、禅那的顺行、禅那的逆行、禅那的顺逆行、禅那的跳跃、遍的跳跃、禅那与遍的跳跃、支的转移、所缘的转移、支与所缘的转移、支的确定、所缘的确定——这十四种方式,或者加上支与所缘的确定共十五种方式,通过调练心而使定变得适业,这种善巧就称为“定的堪任善巧”。巴利
Samādhissa kallatākusalatāti agilānabhāvo arogabhāvo kallatā. Gilāno hi akallakoti vuccati. Vinayepi vuttaṃ ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhante, akallako’’ti (pārā. 151). Anaṅgaṇasuttavatthasuttesu (ma. ni. 1.57 ādayo, 70 ādayo) vuttānaṃ jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkānaṃ pāpakānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ abhāvena ca abhijjhādīnaṃ cittassa upakkilesānaṃ vigamena ca samādhissa agilānabhāvakaraṇe chekabhāvo samādhissa kallatākusalatā, kilesagelaññarahitabhāve kusalatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā kallatāti kammaññatā kammaññatāpariyāyattā kallavacanassa. ‘‘Yā cittassa akallatā akammaññatā’’ti (dha. sa. 1162) hi vuttaṃ ‘‘kallacittaṃ muducittaṃ vinīvaraṇacitta’’nti (dī. ni. 1.298; ma. ni. 2.395; mahāva. 26) ca. Ettha kallasaddo kammaññattho. Tasmā kasiṇānulomato kasiṇapaṭilomato kasiṇānulomapaṭilomato jhānānulomato jhānapaṭilomato jhānānulomapaṭilomato jhānukkantikato kasiṇukkantikato jhānakasiṇukkantikato aṅgasaṅkantito ārammaṇasaṅkantito aṅgārammaṇasaṅkantito aṅgavavatthānato ārammaṇavavatthānatoti imehi cuddasahi ākārehi, aṅgārammaṇavavatthānatoti iminā saha pañcadasahi vā ākārehi cittaparidamanena samādhissa kammaññabhāvakaraṇe kusalabhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti.
对定的行处善巧,是指在定的行处——即诸遍等所缘中,为了想要进入这种或那种禅那,随着自己的意愿作意转向,对这些所缘非常熟练。通过这个,依遍的转向方式,就说了“转向自在”。或者,对于在各个方向区域以遍的遍满方式如此触及的遍,以及依长久安住的方式,在定的行处方面熟练。巴利
Samādhissa gocarakusalatāti samādhissa gocaresu kasiṇādīsu ārammaṇesu taṃ taṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitukāmatāya yathāruci āvajjanakaraṇavasena tesu ārammaṇesu chekabhāvo. Etena kasiṇāvajjanavasena āvajjanavasitā vuttā hoti. Atha vā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ disābhāge kasiṇapharaṇavasena evaṃ phuṭṭhassa kasiṇassa ciraṭṭhānavasena ca samādhissa gocaresu chekabhāvo.
定的转向善巧,是指以连贯的方式,把下下层的定引导、转入上上层的定,在这种引导和转入上很熟练。因为,已经达到自在的近行定,会为了初禅或为了观而转向;同样,初禅等会为了第二禅等或为了观而转向;第四禅会为了无色定、为了神通或为了观而转向;空无边处等会为了识无边处等或为了观而转向——像这样,在各方面对定的转向都很善巧。不过,因为善巧其实就是慧,而慧不是定,所以应当知道,这是依据作为定之引导者的慧,才说这七种定。巴利
Samādhissa abhinīhārakusalatāti ekattanayena heṭṭhāheṭṭhāsamādhiṃ uparūparisamādhibhāvūpanayanena abhinīharaṇe abhininnāmane chekabhāvo. Upacārajjhānañhi vasippattaṃ paṭhamajjhānatthāya vipassanatthāya vā abhinīharati, evaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīni dutiyajjhānādiatthāya vipassanatthāya vā, catutthajjhānaṃ arūpasamāpattatthāya abhiññatthāya vipassanatthāya vā, ākāsānañcāyatanādayo viññāṇañcāyatanādiatthāya vipassanatthāya vā abhinīharatīti evaṃ samādhissa tattha tattha abhinīhārakusalatā. Yasmā pana kusalatā nāma paññā, sā samādhi na hoti, tasmā samādhipariṇāyakapaññāvasena sattavidho samādhi vuttoti veditabbo.
有些老师则这样解释这些词的含义:所谓“定善巧”,就是依靠某种作意,让心不散乱,对这一点很熟练。所谓“入定善巧”,就是依靠某种作意,让正在入定的人禅支显现出来,对这一点很熟练。所谓“住定善巧”,就是依靠某种作意,让已经安住的定不散乱,对这一点很熟练。所谓“出定善巧”,就是在初禅时知道从诸盖出起,在三禅时知道从禅支出起,在无色定中知道从所缘出起,在境界过于强烈等情况下知道从散乱出起,在即将结束和应当收尾的时候知道随自己的意愿出起。所谓“适业善巧”,就是知道由于心的舒适、身体的舒适、食物的舒适、坐卧处的舒适、以及人的舒适,定就变得适合修习。所谓“行处善巧”,就是知道如何限定所缘,知道如何把范围扩展开去,知道如何使它增长。所谓“转向善巧”,就是以如理作意,把心在各处转向、引导过去;在已达到自在的近行定上,转向初禅;同样地,也转向更高的诸禅、诸神通、诸无色定以及诸观。像这样,在各方面都具备转向的善巧。他们就是这样解释这些词的含义。巴利
Keci pana ācariyā ‘‘samādhikusalatāti yena manasikārena cittaṃ na vikkhipati, tattha kusalatā. Samāpattikusalatāti yena manasikārena samāpajjantassa jhānaṅgāni pātubhavanti, tattha kusalatā. Ṭhitikusalatāti yena manasikārena appito samādhi na vikkhipati, tattha kusalatā. Vuṭṭhānakusalatāti nīvaraṇavuṭṭhānaṃ jānāti paṭhamajjhāne, aṅgavuṭṭhānaṃ jānāti tīsu jhānesu, ārammaṇavuṭṭhānaṃ jānāti arūpasamāpattīsu, vikkhepavuṭṭhānaṃ jānāti visayādhimattesu, sacchandavuṭṭhānaṃ jānāti pariyantakāle ca avasānakaraṇīyakāle ca. Kallatākusalatāti cittaphāsutāya sarīraphāsutāya āhāraphāsutāya senāsanaphāsutāya puggalaphāsutāya ca samādhissa kallatā hotīti jānāti. Gocarakusalatāti ārammaṇassa paricchedaṃ kātuṃ jānāti, disāpharaṇaṃ kātuṃ jānāti, vaḍḍhetuṃ jānāti. Abhinīhārakusalatāti tattha tattha sammā manasikārena cittaṃ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti, upacāre vasippatte paṭhamajjhāne abhinīharati, evaṃ uparūparijhānesu abhiññāsu arūpasamāpattīsu vipassanāsu ca abhinīharati. Evaṃ tattha tattha abhinīhārakusalatā’’ti evametesaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti.
第八组的意义已经说过了。关于第九组,“属于色界”是指:它包含在按照“哪些法是色界法?下从梵众天开始,上到阿迦腻吒天为界限”等(《法集论》1289)方式所说的色界法当中。这里的词义是:以色蕴所构成的色在这里活动,而不是在欲界活动,所以叫色界。色蕴也被称为“色”,就像“色蕴是色”等说法(《双论》1.蕴双2)那样。而这个色界,按梵众天、梵辅天、大梵天、少光天、无量光天、光音天、少净天、无量净天、遍净天、无想有情天、广果天,以及无烦天、无热天、善见天、善现天、阿迦腻吒天来分,有十六种区域。那名为“色界”的区域,省略后面的词,就称为“色”,在色中活动,所以是色界。或者,色有就是色,在其中活动,所以叫色界。虽然这种定也会在欲有中活动,但就像因为常在战场上活动而得到“战场活动者”之名的象,即使走在城里,仍然被称为“战场活动者”;又像陆行、水行的生物,即使站在非陆地、非水中,仍然被称为陆行者、水行者;同样地,这种定虽然在别处也活动,仍然被称为色界。再者,把结生推进到名为“色有”的色中。劣就是低劣。劣与胜之间的存在是中;也有读作“中等”的,意思一样。被带到首要状态就是殊胜,也就是上等的意思。这些应当按积集的方式来理解:因为在积集时,无论他的欲、精进、心、观智是低劣的,他就是劣;如果这些法是中等的,他就是中;如果是殊胜的,他就是胜。或者,刚刚生起的是劣,没有很好修习的是中,修习得很好、达到自在的是胜。无色界应当依照色界所说的方式来理解。巴利
Aṭṭhakaṃ vuttatthameva. Navake rūpāvacaroti ‘‘katame dhammā rūpāvacarā? Heṭṭhato brahmapārisajjaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito akaniṭṭhe deve antokaritvā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1289) nayena vuttesu rūpāvacaradhammesu pariyāpanno. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – rūpakkhandhasaṅkhātaṃ rūpaṃ ettha avacarati, na kāmoti rūpāvacaro. Rūpakkhandhopi hi rūpanti vuccati ‘‘rūpakkhandho rūpa’’ntiādīsu (yama. 1.khandhayamaka.2) viya. So pana brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmānaṃ parittābhaappamāṇābhaābhassarānaṃ parittasubhaappamāṇasubhasubhakiṇhānaṃ asaññasattavehapphalānaṃ avihātappasudassasudassīakaniṭṭhānañca vasena soḷasavidho padeso. So rūpāvacarasaṅkhāto padeso uttarapadalopaṃ katvā ‘‘rūpa’’nti vuccati, tasmiṃ rūpe avacaratīti rūpāvacaro. Rūpabhavo vā rūpaṃ, tasmiṃ avacaratīti rūpāvacaraṃ. Kiñcāpi hi eso samādhi kāmabhavepi avacarati, yathā pana saṅgāme avacaraṇato saṅgāmāvacaroti laddhanāmo nāgo nagare carantopi saṅgāmāvacaroti vuccati, thalacarā jalacarā ca pāṇino athale ajale ca ṭhitāpi thalacarā jalacarāti vuccanti, evamayaṃ aññattha avacarantopi rūpāvacaroti vutto. Apica rūpabhavasaṅkhāte rūpe paṭisandhiṃ avacāretītipi rūpāvacaro. Hīnoti lāmako. Hīnuttamānaṃ majjhe bhavo majjho. Majjhimotipi pāṭho, soyevattho. Padhānabhāvaṃ nīto paṇīto, uttamoti attho. Ete pana āyūhanavasena veditabbā. Yassa hi āyūhanakkhaṇe chando vā hīno hoti vīriyaṃ vā cittaṃ vā vīmaṃsā vā, so hīno nāma. Yassa te dhammā majjhimā, so majjhimo. Yassa paṇītā, so paṇīto. Uppāditamatto vā hīno, nātisubhāvito majjhimo, atisubhāvito vasippatto paṇīto. Arūpāvacaro rūpāvacare vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
在“空定”等说法中:当一个人按照“一切诸行都是无常、苦、无我”的观修次第进行观察时,由无我随观而生起的道之出起一旦生起,由于这种观是在远离我的诸行上以“空”的方式运作,所以就叫作“空”。由它所成就的圣道定,就叫作“空定”,意思是依空的方式而运作的定。因为它是随着观运作的方式而运作的。当由无常随观而生起的道之出起一旦生起时,由于这种观是以与常相相反的方式运作,所以就叫作“无相”。由它所成就的圣道定,就叫作“无相定”,意思是远离常相的定。因为它是随着观运作的方式而运作的。当由苦随观而生起的道之出起一旦生起时,由于这种观是以与愿求相反的方式运作,所以就叫作“无愿”。由它所成就的圣道定,就叫作“无愿定”,意思是远离愿求的定。因为它是随着观运作的方式而运作的。同样地,应当知道,三种果定也被这三种定所包含。不过,由于出世间定极为殊胜,所以没有列出劣、中等这样的分类。巴利
Suññato samādhītiādīsu ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā dukkhā anattā’’ti vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā vipassantassa anattānupassanāya maggavuṭṭhāne jāte yasmā sā vipassanā attavirahitesu saṅkhāresu suññato pavattā, tasmā suññatā nāma hoti. Tāya siddho ariyamaggasamādhi suññato samādhi nāma hoti, suññatavasena pavattasamādhīti attho. Vipassanāya pavattākārena hi so pavattati. Aniccānupassanāya maggavuṭṭhāne jāte yasmā sā vipassanā niccanimittapaṭipakkhavasena pavattā, tasmā animittā nāma hoti. Tāya siddho ariyamaggasamādhi animitto samādhi nāma hoti, niccanimittavirahito samādhīti attho. Vipassanāya pavattākārena hi so pavattati. Dukkhānupassanāya maggavuṭṭhāne jāte yasmā sā vipassanā paṇidhipaṭipakkhavasena pavattā, tasmā appaṇihitā nāma hoti. Tāya siddho ariyamaggasamādhi appaṇihito samādhi nāma hoti, paṇidhivirahito samādhīti attho. Vipassanāya pavattākārena hi so pavattati. Tādisā eva tayo phalasamādhayopi etehiyeva tīhi samādhīhi gahitā hontīti veditabbā. Lokuttarasamādhīnaṃ pana paṇītattā hīnādibhedo na uddhaṭo.
在《十集》中,以膨胀想等来说:就像皮囊被风吹得鼓起来那样,命终之后,随着寿命逐渐耗尽,尸体按顺序因为肿胀的状态而膨胀,这就是“膨胀”;“膨胀”本身就是“膨胀相”;或者因为它是令人厌恶的、不净的膨胀,所以叫“膨胀相”。这是对那种尸体的称呼。颜色变坏叫“青瘀”;“青瘀”本身就是“青瘀相”;或者因为它是令人厌恶的、不净的青瘀,所以叫“青瘀相”。这是对那种尸体的称呼:在肌肉隆起的地方呈红色,在脓液积聚的地方呈白色,而大部分地方呈青黑色,就像披着青布的尸体一样。在破裂的地方流出脓液,叫“脓烂”;“脓烂”本身就是“脓烂相”;或者因为它是令人厌恶的、不净的脓烂,所以叫“脓烂相”。这是对那种尸体的称呼。被从中间砍断、分成两段,叫“断坏”;“断坏”本身就是“断坏相”;或者因为它是令人厌恶的、不净的断坏,所以叫“断坏相”。这是对那种从中间被切断的尸体的称呼。被狗、豺等从这边那边用各种方式啃食,叫“食残”——本来应该说 vikhāyita,却说成了 vikkhāyita。“食残”本身就是“食残相”;或者因为它是令人厌恶的、不净的食残,所以叫“食残相”。这是对那种尸体的称呼。被扔散各处,叫“散乱”;“散乱”本身就是“散乱相”;或者因为它是令人厌恶的、不净的散乱,所以叫“散乱相”。这是对那种尸体的称呼:一只手被扔到一边,一只脚被扔到另一边,头又被扔到别处,就这样从各处被丢散。又被砍坏,又像前面那样被丢散,所以叫“斩散相”。这是对那种尸体的称呼:像乌鸦脚印那样,用刀在四肢和身体各部分砍坏,然后按前面说的方式被丢散。血滴落、流散,从这里那里流出来,叫“血涂相”。这是对那种被流出的血涂满的尸体的称呼。蛆虫叫 puḷavā,有蛆虫散布,叫“虫聚相”。这是对那种布满蛆虫的尸体的称呼。只是骨头,叫“骨相”;或者因为它是令人厌恶的、不净的骨头,所以叫“骨相”。这也是对骨头相连的骨架、甚至一块骨头的称呼。而且,依靠这些膨胀相等生起的相,以及在相上获得禅那的人,它们的名称也正是这些。但在这里,对于膨胀相,以取令人厌恶之相的方式生起的安止定相应的想,就是“膨胀想”;以那个膨胀想的力量,就是“以膨胀想的方式”。其余各项也应同样理解。所谓“五十五种定”,是依一种等类别来说的。巴利
Dasake uddhumātakasaññāvasenātiādīsu bhastā viya vāyunā uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā yathānukkamaṃ samuggatena sūnabhāvena uddhumātattā uddhumātaṃ, uddhumātameva uddhumātakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ uddhumātanti uddhumātakaṃ. Tathārūpassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vinīlaṃ vuccati viparibhinnavaṇṇaṃ, vinīlameva vinīlakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vinīlanti vinīlakaṃ. Maṃsussadaṭṭhānesu rattavaṇṇassa, pubbasannicayaṭṭhānesu setavaṇṇassa, yebhuyyena ca nīlavaṇṇassa nīlaṭṭhāne nīlasāṭakapārutasseva chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Paribhinnaṭṭhānesu vissandamānapubbaṃ vipubbaṃ, vipubbameva vipubbakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vipubbanti vipubbakaṃ. Tathārūpassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vicchiddaṃ vuccati dvidhā chindanena apadhāritaṃ, vicchiddameva vicchiddakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vicchiddanti vicchiddakaṃ. Vemajjhe chinnassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ito ca etto ca vividhākārena soṇasiṅgālādīhi khāyitanti vikkhāyitaṃ, vikhāyitanti vattabbe vikkhāyitanti vuttaṃ. Vikkhāyitameva vikkhāyitakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vikkhāyitanti vikkhāyitakaṃ. Tathārūpassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vividhaṃ khittaṃ vikkhittaṃ, vikkhittameva vikkhittakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vikkhittanti vikkhittakaṃ. Aññena hatthaṃ aññena pādaṃ aññena sīsanti evaṃ tato tato khittassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Hatañca taṃ purimanayeneva vikkhittakañcāti hatavikkhittakaṃ. Kākapadākārena aṅgapaccaṅgesu satthena hanitvā vuttanayena vikkhittassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Lohitaṃ kirati vikkhipati ito cito ca paggharatīti lohitakaṃ. Paggharitalohitamakkhitassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Puḷavā vuccanti kimayo, puḷave kiratīti puḷavakaṃ. Kimiparipuṇṇassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Aṭṭhiyeva aṭṭhikaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ aṭṭhīti aṭṭhikaṃ. Aṭṭhisaṅkhalikāyapi ekaṭṭhikassapi etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Imāni ca pana uddhumātakādīni nissāya uppannanimittānampi nimittesu paṭiladdhajjhānānampi etāneva nāmāni. Idha pana uddhumātakanimitte paṭikūlākāragāhikā appanāvasena uppannā saññā uddhumātakasaññā, tassā uddhumātakasaññāya vasena uddhumātakasaññāvasena. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Pañcapaññāsa samādhīti ekakādivasena vuttā.
44 44. 像这样,通过单一等类别展示了定的分类之后,现在想用另一种方式来显示定,于是以“再者”开启另一种方式,然后说出“二十五”等。在这里,“定的地基”是指:就定的状态、定的自性而言,那些自性使定成为定,它们在定当中就是“义”。以“摄受”的意义来说,定因为被信等根所摄受,所以是以已被摄受为自性的定。而那些根互相作为眷属,并且因为修习圆满而成为完备。因此,以“眷属”的意义、以“圆满”的意义,而成为定。对于那些根依于定而朝向同一个所缘,这是一境的意义;相对于没有种种所缘的散乱,这是不散乱的意义;唯独对于出世间定,因为它需要凭借强大的精进力量才能证得,又唯独对于出世间道,因为没有由于退失而流散的情况,所以前面所取的“策励”义和“不放逸”义,在这里没有被采用,应当这样理解。由于没有烦恼的浑浊,以“无浊”的意义为定。由于不被动摇,以“无摇动”的意义为定。由于通过镇伏或断除而解脱了烦恼,并且对所缘已经倾向,以“解脱”的意义为定。巴利
44. Evaṃ ekakādivasena samādhippabhedaṃ dassetvā idāni aññenapi pariyāyena samādhiṃ dassetukāmo apicāti aññaṃ pariyāyārambhaṃ dassetvā pañcavīsatītiādimāha. Tattha samādhissa samādhiṭṭhāti samādhissa samādhibhāve sabhāvā, yehi sabhāvehi so samādhi hoti, te tasmiṃ atthā nāma. Pariggahaṭṭhena samādhīti saddhādīhi indriyehi pariggahitattā tasmā pariggahitasabhāvena samādhi. Tāneva ca indriyāni aññamaññaparivārāni honti, bhāvanāpāripūriyā paripuṇṇāni ca honti. Tasmā parivāraṭṭhena paripūraṭṭhena samādhi. Tesaṃyeva samādhivasena ekārammaṇamapekkhitvā ekaggaṭṭhena, nānārammaṇavikkhepābhāvamapekkhitvā avikkhepaṭṭhena, lokuttarasseva mahatā vīriyabalapaggahena pattabbattā lokuttaramaggasseva ca parihānivasena visārābhāvato heṭṭhā gahitapaggahaṭṭhaavisāraṭṭhā idha na gahitāti veditabbā. Kilesakālussiyassābhāvena anāvilaṭṭhena samādhi. Avikampattā aniñjanaṭṭhena samādhi. Vikkhambhanavasena samucchedavasena vā kilesehi vimuttattā ārammaṇe ca adhimuttattā vimuttaṭṭhena samādhi.
因为心以“专注一境”的方式安住,所以说“心的安住”:正是通过与定相应,心强烈地安住于一个所缘,以对所缘不动摇的状态而安住。在八对中,“寻求、不寻求”“执取、不执取”“行道、不行道”这三对,应当知道是在安止速行之前,按近行定的弱、中、强状态而说的;“禅思、燃烧”这一对,应当知道是在安止速行中,按近行定而说的。“已寻求故、已不寻求故”“已执取故、已不执取故”“已行道故、已不行道故”“已禅思故、已不燃烧故”这四对,应当知道是按安止定而说的。巴利
Ekattupaṭṭhānavasenacittassa ṭhitattāti samādhiyogeneva ekārammaṇe bhusaṃ patiṭṭhānavasena cittassa ārammaṇe niccalabhāvena patiṭṭhitattā. Aṭṭhasu yugalesu esati nesati, ādiyati nādiyati, paṭipajjati na paṭipajjatīti imāni tīṇi yugalāni appanāvīthito pubbabhāge upacārassa mudumajjhādhimattatāvasena vuttānīti veditabbāni, jhāyati jhāpetīti idaṃ appanāvīthiyaṃ upacāravasena veditabbaṃ. Esitattā nesitattā, ādinnattā anādinnattā, paṭipannattā nappaṭipannattā, jhātattā na jhāpitattāti imāni cattāri yugalāni appanāvasena vuttānīti veditabbāni.
其中,在“平等地寻求,所以是定”等说法里,“平等”指的是安止。因为安止能平息敌对法,所以叫“平等”;或者因为它远离了敌对法的不平等状态,所以是“平等”的。它寻求那个“平等”,也就是根据自己的意乐去寻求。“iti”这个词表示原因:因为寻求“平等”,所以叫“定”。不寻求“不平等”,就是不去寻求那些被称为禅那敌对法的“不平等”。前分阶段的定比较弱,因为还在初始阶段,所以说它寻求“平等”、不寻求“不平等”。中等的定因为已经稳固,所以执取“平等”,不执取“不平等”。殊胜的定因为接近安止速行心路,所以行于“平等”,不行于“不平等”。“平等地禅思”是修习用语的中性表达,意思是成为“平等”之后而禅思,或者以“平等”的方式禅思。因为在安止速行心路中,定由于敌对法消失而寂静,又因为安住于随顺寂静安止的状态,所以它以“平等”的方式运作。“禅思”是燃烧的意思,就像“这些殿堂里的灯整夜燃烧”“油灯整夜燃烧,这里的油灯也可能燃烧”等说法中那样。也有“平等地生起”的读法,意思是以“平等”的方式生起。不过,因为“禅思”和“令燃烧”是一对,所以前面的读法更好。“令燃烧”就是烧毁的意思。它因为让定的敌对法远远离去,所以叫烧毁。再者,由于寻求、不寻求等是由安止成就的,所以用“已寻求故、已不寻求故”等说法来讲安止定。“平等地燃烧故”,就是平等地炽燃故。也有“平等地生起故”的读法。这样,依这八对共十六项,加上前面的九项,这二十五项就是定的安住处。巴利
Tattha samaṃ esatīti samādhītiādīsu samanti appanaṃ. Sā hi paccanīkadhamme sameti nāsetīti samā, paccanīkavisamābhāvato vā samabhūtāti samā. Taṃ samaṃ esati ajjhāsayavasena gavesati. Itisaddo kāraṇattho, yasmā samaṃ esati, tasmā samādhīti attho. Visamaṃ nesatīti taṃ taṃ jhānapaccanīkasaṅkhātaṃ visamaṃ na esati. Mudubhūto hi pubbabhāgasamādhi ādibhūtattā samaṃ esati, visamaṃ nesati nāma. Majjhimabhūto thirabhūtattā samaṃ ādiyati, visamaṃ nādiyati nāma. Adhimattabhūto appanāvīthiyā āsannabhūtattā samaṃ paṭipajjati, visamaṃ nappaṭipajjati nāma. Samaṃ jhāyatīti bhāvanapuṃsakavacanaṃ, samaṃ hutvā jhāyati, samena vā ākārena jhāyatīti attho. Appanāvīthiyañhi samādhi paccanīkadhammavigamena santattā, santāya appanāya anukūlabhāvena ca ṭhitattā samenākārena pavattati. Jhāyatīti ca pajjalatīti attho ‘‘ete maṇḍalamāḷe dīpā jhāyanti (dī. ni. 1.159) sabbarattiṃ, sabbarattiyo ca telappadīpo jhāyati, telappadīpo cettha jhāyeyyā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.255-256) viya. Samaṃ jāyatītipi pāṭho , samenākārena uppajjatīti attho. Jhāyati jhāpetīti yugalattā pana purimapāṭhova sundarataro. Jhāpetīti ca dahatīti attho. So hi samādhipaccanīkadhamme dūratarakaraṇena dahati nāma. Esanānesanādīnaṃ pana appanāya siddhattā ‘‘esitattā nesitattā’’tiādīhi appanāsamādhi vutto. Samaṃ jhātattāti samaṃ jalitattā. Samaṃ jātattātipi pāṭho. Iti imesaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ yugalānaṃ vasena soḷasa, purimā ca navāti ime pañcavīsati samādhissa samādhiṭṭhā.
“既是平等、又是已安立、又是乐,所以称为定”:这句话是为了说明由二十五种行相所成就的定的意义而说的。其中,“等”是sama这个词或saṃ这个前缀的意思。因为它远离了敌对、扰动的不平等状态,所以是“等”。“已安立”是ādhi前缀的意思,指的是对于所缘,通过造作不动摇的状态而得以安立、确立。合此二者,便说“既是等、又是已安立,所以叫定”。“乐”:以寂静的意义为“乐”。因为经中说:“尊者,那不苦不乐受,是世尊所说的寂静、殊胜之乐所摄。”又说:“然而,舍受因其寂静,故也称为乐。”以这个寂静的意义,通过“乐”这个词,也包含了与舍俱行的定。因为在这里,一切定都是以通例的方式宣说的。而那个“乐”字,也说明了“已安立”的原因。应当知道其意是:因为寂静,所以对于一种所缘是已安立的。巴利
Samoca hito ca sukho cāti samādhīti idaṃ pana pañcavīsatiyā ākārehi sādhitassa samādhissa atthasādhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha samoti samasaddassa, saṃsaddassa vā attho. So hi paccanīkakkhobhavisamavirahitattā samo. Hitoti ādhisaddassa attho, ārammaṇe āhito niccalabhāvakaraṇena patiṭṭhāpitoti adhippāyo. Ubhayena samo ca āhito cāti samādhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sukhoti santaṭṭhena sukho. ‘‘Yāyaṃ, bhante, adukkhamasukhā vedanā, santasmiṃ esā paṇīte sukhe vuttā bhagavatā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.88) ca ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti ca vuttattā tena santatthena sukhasaddena upekkhāsahagatasamādhipi gahito hoti. Aniyāmena hi sabbasamādhayo idha vuccanti. Tena ca sukhasaddena āhitabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmā santo, tasmā ekārammaṇe āhitoti adhippāyo veditabboti.
法住智解说的注释巴利
4. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
45 在《法住智解说》中,讲到“无明、行的生起住立”等句时,“住立”是指诸行依它而住立。那是什么?就是无明。因为无明是诸行生起、产生的住立,也就是原因,所以叫“生起住立”;对于已经生起的诸行,它也是持续运转的原因,所以叫“运转住立”。虽然能生缘的作用只在它生起的那一刹那发挥,但由于诸行是被它生起之后才持续运转的,所以就它自身那一刹那而言,也可以说是运转的原因;或者从相续的角度说,它是运转的原因。这里的“pavattanti”是中性、表“成为”的词,所以“pavattaṃ”和“pavatti”在意义上是一回事。不过因为“pavatti”这个词更常见,所以就结合它来解释含义。“ṭhiti”这个词也可以表示“成为”,但这里不是那个意思,而是指“原因”。为了表明这一点,就说“相住立”,意思是:作为相的住立,也就是作为原因的住立。它不只是单纯的相而已,在产生诸行时,它实际上是在努力、在运作,为了显示它作为缘的能力,就说“造作住立”,意思是:作为造作的住立。因为无明在产生诸行时,可以说是把它们连结起来,也就是结合、连接的意思;在使诸行持续运转时,可以说是障碍、系缚,也就是绑住的意思。因此说“结缚住立”“障碍住立”,意思是:作为结缚的住立,作为障碍的住立。因为无明在产生诸行时,以它是生起和运转的根本原因这一意义,就叫作“集起”,所以“集起住立”就是作为集起的住立,意思是作为根本原因的住立。无明对于诸行的生起是能生缘,对于运转是支持缘,因此说“因住立”“缘住立”,意思是:作为因的住立,作为缘的住立。能生缘就叫因,支持缘就叫缘。其余的也应这样配合理解。巴利
45. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaniddese avijjāsaṅkhārānaṃ uppādaṭṭhitītiādīsu tiṭṭhanti etāya saṅkhārāti ṭhiti. Kā sā? Avijjā. Sā hi saṅkhārānaṃ uppādāya nibbattiyā ṭhiti kāraṇanti uppādaṭṭhiti. Uppannānaṃ pavattiyāpi kāraṇanti pavattaṭṭhiti. Kiñcāpi hi janakapaccayassa jananakkhaṇeyeva kiccānubhāvo hoti, tena pana janitānaṃyeva pavattattā sakakkhaṇe pavattiyāpi kāraṇaṃ nāma hoti, santativasena vā pavattiyā kāraṇanti attho . Pavattanti ca napuṃsake bhāvavacanametaṃ, tasmā pavattaṃ pavattīti atthato ekaṃ. Pavattisaddassa pana pākaṭattā tena yojetvā attho vutto. Bhāvepi ṭhitisaddassa sijjhanato na idha bhāve ṭhitisaddo, kāraṇe ṭhitisaddoti dassanattaṃ nimittaṭṭhitīti vuttaṃ, nimittabhūtā ṭhitīti attho, kāraṇabhūtāti vuttaṃ hoti. Na kevalaṃ nimittamattaṃ hoti, atha kho saṅkhārajanane sabyāpārā viya hutvā āyūhati vāyamatīti paccayasamatthataṃ dassento āyūhanaṭṭhitīti āha, āyūhanabhūtā ṭhitīti attho. Yasmā avijjā saṅkhāre uppādayamānā uppāde saṃyojeti nāma, ghaṭetīti attho. Saṅkhāre pavattayamānā pavattiyaṃ palibundhati nāma, bandhatīti attho. Tasmā saññogaṭṭhiti palibodhaṭṭhitīti vuttā. Saññogabhūtā ṭhiti, palibodhabhūtā ṭhitīti attho. Yasmā avijjāva saṅkhāre uppādayamānā uppādāya pavattiyā ca mūlakāraṇaṭṭhena samudayo nāma, samudayabhūtā ṭhitīti samudayaṭṭhiti, mūlakāraṇabhūtā ṭhitīti attho. Avijjāva saṅkhārānaṃ uppāde janakapaccayattā, pavattiyaṃ upatthambhakapaccayattā hetuṭṭhiti paccayaṭṭhitīti vuttā, hetubhūtā ṭhiti, paccayabhūtā ṭhitīti attho. Janakapaccayo hi hetūti, upatthambhako paccayoti vuccati. Evaṃ sesesupi yojetabbaṃ.
在“有是生的缘,生是老死的缘”这里,应当知道:这些词是依“生起”的方式组合起来的,也就是“生起住立”“结缚住立”“因住立”等,并且是依具有生、老、死的诸蕴,以间接的方式来说的。不过,有些人用“对于生起而住立,就是生起住立”这样的方式,在这里解释其含义。“以无明为缘”这句话,是着眼于无明作为诸行之缘的状态而说的。因为无明本身也是由缘所生的,为了说明它也能被缘所包含,所以说:“这两种法都是缘所生的,这就是在把握缘方面的智慧。”其余各支也应当这样套用。而“生是缘,老死是缘所生”,则是以间接的方式来说的。“过去时的长时”,指已经过去的时间。“未来的长时”,指尚未到来的时间。这两处都是就极其长远的相续这一意义,而使用业格。巴利
Bhavojātiyā, jāti jarāmaraṇassāti ettha pana uppādaṭṭhiti saññogaṭṭhiti hetuṭṭhitīti uppādavasena yojitāni padāni jātijarāmaraṇavantānaṃ khandhānaṃ vasena pariyāyena vuttānīti veditabbāni. Keci pana ‘‘uppādāya ṭhiti uppādaṭṭhitī’’ti evamādinā nayenettha atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Avijjā paccayoti avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayabhāvaṃ apekkhitvā vuttaṃ. Avijjāyapi paccayasambhūtattā tassā api paccayapariggahaṇadassanatthaṃ ubhopete dhammā paccayasamuppannāti paccayapariggahe paññāti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi yojetabbaṃ. Jāti paccayo, jarāmaraṇaṃ paccayasamuppannanti pana pariyāyena vuttaṃ. Atītampi addhānanti atikkantampi kālaṃ. Anāgatampi addhānanti appattampi kālaṃ. Ubhayatthāpi accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ.
46 现在,在九种行相的分轮之后,舍弃那九种行相,只按因、缘、缘生这些词来搭配,开示了“无明是因,行是因所生”等三个分轮。在九种行相的分轮里,是依能生与支持的作用而说“缘”。但在这里,因为因分轮和缘分轮是分开来的,所以应当知道:“因”指能生的缘的性质,“缘”指支持的缘的性质,因为无明等每一个缘,都可以从这两方面成立。在缘起分轮中,“缘于无明”:诸行在自身生起时需要依靠无明,所以对诸行来说,无明是应当面向、应当趋近的,因此叫“缘”。这就说明了无明具有使诸行生起的能力。“行是缘所生”:诸行缘于无明,朝着它而转起,以它为面向,不离开它而一同生起。其余的支,也应当按名词的性别相应搭配。或者,也有以“努力”的方式读作“无明是所缘”的读法,但这里的意思是顺着“无明是朝着自己的缘而转起”这一读法的余势来搭配的,其余各支也是如此。在这四个分轮中,因为法住智应当依十二缘起支的缘来说明,所以只就无明等十一支来解说;而老死因为处在最后,就不依它来解说。然而,由于老死也是愁、悲、苦、忧、恼的缘,所以当人把老死作为它们的缘来观察时,依老死来成立法住智也是可以的。巴利
46. Idāni navākāravārānantaraṃ te navākāre vihāya hetupaṭiccapaccayapadeheva yojetvā avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannātiādayo tayo vārā niddiṭṭhā. Navākāravāre janakaupatthambhakavasena paccayo vutto. Idha pana hetuvārassa paccayavārassa ca visuṃ āgatattā hetūti janakapaccayattaṃ, paccayoti upatthambhakapaccayattaṃ veditabbaṃ ekekassāpi avijjādikassa paccayassa ubhayathā sambhavato. Paṭiccavāre avijjā paṭiccāti attano uppāde saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāpekkhattā saṅkhārehi avijjā paṭimukhaṃ etabbā gantabbāti paṭiccā. Etena avijjāya saṅkhāruppādanasamatthatā vuttā hoti. Saṅkhārā paṭiccasamuppannāti saṅkhārā avijjaṃ paṭicca tadabhimukhaṃ pavattanato paṭimukhaṃ katvā na vihāya samaṃ uppannā. Evaṃ sesesupi liṅgānurūpena yojetabbaṃ. Avijjā paṭiccāti ussukkavasena vā pāṭho, attho panettha avijjā attano paccaye paṭicca pavattāti pāṭhasesavasena yojetabbo. Evaṃ sesesupi. Catūsupi ca etesu vāresu dvādasannaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṅgānaṃ paccayasseva vasena dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇassa niddisitabbattā avijjādīnaṃ ekādasannaṃyeva aṅgānaṃ vasena dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ, jarāmaraṇassa pana ante ṭhitattā tassa vasena na niddiṭṭhaṃ. Jarāmaraṇassāpi sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsānaṃ paccayattā jarāmaraṇaṃ tesaṃ paccayaṃ katvā upaparikkhamānassa tassāpi jarāmaraṇassa vasena dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ yujjateva.
47 47. 现在,为了把这同样的十二缘起支按二十种行相来分别,并显示四种概要、三时、三连结,而想解说法住智,所以说了“于过去的业有中”等话。其中,“于过去的业有中”是指在过去的业有中,也就是在过去生中正被造作的业有里。“痴就是无明”:当时对苦等(圣谛)的痴,因为被这种痴所蒙蔽而造业,那个痴就是无明。“造作就是行”:对正在造作那个业的人来说,生起“我要布施”的心之后,用一个月或一整年准备布施用品时,心中生起的那些前思;然而,把布施物放到接受者手中时的那个思,则称为“有”。或者,在一个转向心和六个速行心中的思,名为“造作即行”;第七个速行心中的思,是“有”。或者,任何一种思是“有”,与它相应的,就名为“造作即行”。巴利
47. Idāni tāneva dvādasa paṭiccasamuppādaṅgāni vīsatiākāravasena vibhajitvā catusaṅkhepatiyaddhatisandhiyo dassetvā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ niddisitukāmo purimakammabhavasmintiādimāha. Tattha purimakammabhavasminti purime kammabhave, atītajātiyaṃ kammabhave kariyamāneti attho. Moho avijjāti yo tadā dukkhādīsu moho, yena mūḷho kammaṃ karoti, sā avijjā. Āyūhanā saṅkhārāti taṃ kammaṃ karontassa purimacetanāyo, yathā ‘‘dānaṃ dassāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā māsampi saṃvaccharampi dānūpakaraṇāni sajjentassa uppannā purimacetanāyo. Paṭiggāhakānaṃ pana hatthe dakkhiṇaṃ patiṭṭhāpayato cetanā bhavoti vuccati. Ekāvajjanesu vā chasu javanesu cetanā āyūhanā saṅkhārā nāma, sattamajavane cetanā bhavo. Yā kāci vā pana cetanā bhavo, taṃsampayuttā āyūhanā saṅkhārā nāma.
“贪求就是渴爱”:一个人造业时,对那业的果报、对将来投生到某个存在状态生起欢喜和希求,这就叫渴爱。“趋近就是取”:作为业有的条件而出现的趋近和紧紧抓取,比如认为“做了这个业,欲乐就会实现”,或者“做完这件事,我就能在某个地方享受欲乐”,或者“自我断灭了,彻底断灭了”,或者“我会变得快乐,远离热恼”,或者“戒禁能靠安乐圆满”——像这样生起的趋近、牢牢抓取,就叫取。“思就是有”:在造作活动完成时的那个思,叫有。“在过去业有中”:在过去生中造业时生起的那些,在这里就是结生的条件,也就是现在这一世结生的条件。巴利
Nikanti taṇhāti yā kammaṃ karontassa tassa phale upapattibhave nikāmanā patthanā, sā taṇhā nāma. Upagamanaṃ upādānanti yaṃ kammabhavassa paccayabhūtaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ nāma kamme kate kāmā sampajjantī’’ti vā ‘‘idaṃ katvā asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne kāme sevissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘attā ucchinno suucchinno hotī’’ti vā ‘‘sukhī hotiṃ vigatapariḷāho’’ti vā ‘‘sīlabbataṃ sukhena paripūratī’’ti vā pavattaṃ upagamanaṃ daḷhagahaṇaṃ, idaṃ upādānaṃ nāma. Cetanā bhavoti āyūhanāvasāne vuttā cetanā bhavo nāma. Purimakammabhavasminti atītajātiyā kammabhave kariyamāne pavattā. Idha paṭisandhiyā paccayāti paccuppannapaṭisandhiyā paccayabhūtā.
在这里,结生识是指:由于它是为了从当前这一有转生到另一有而生起的,所以称为结生,那个就是识。入胎的名色是指:就像色法与非色法前来进入母胎一样,这个就是名色。明净的处是指:那种明净的状态,就是处。以“生”这个词来称呼,是单数形式。由此说明了眼等五处。由于“比丘们,此心极光净,然而它被客来的染污所染污”这句话里指的是有分心,所以应当知道,这里意处也是异熟性质的,而且它没有烦恼的暗昧,是明净的,因此“明净”这个词也表达了意处。已触的触是指:凡是已经触到、正在触着所缘而生起的,这就是触。已感受的受是指:与结生识一起生起的,或者以六处为缘的触一起生起的,那种异熟感受,这就是受。这里的“在再生有中,由先前所作之业的缘”意思是:在现在的异熟有中,由过去生中所造之业作为缘而转起。巴利
Idha paṭisandhi viññāṇanti yaṃ paccuppannabhavassa bhavantarapaṭisandhānavasena uppannattā paṭisandhīti vuccati, taṃ viññāṇaṃ. Okkanti nāmarūpanti yā gabbhe rūpārūpadhammānaṃ okkanti āgantvā pavisanaṃ viya, idaṃ nāmarūpaṃ. Pasādo āyatananti yo pasannabhāvo, idaṃ āyatanaṃ. Jātiggahaṇena ekavacanaṃ kataṃ. Etena cakkhādīni pañcāyatanāni vuttāni. ‘‘Pabhassaramidaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, tañca kho āgantukehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭha’’nti (a. ni. 1.49) ettha bhavaṅgacittaṃ adhippetanti vacanato idhāpi manāyatanassa vipākabhūtattā, tassa ca kilesakālussiyābhāvena pasannattā pasādavacanena manāyatanampi vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Phuṭṭho phassoti yo ārammaṇaṃ phuṭṭho phusanto uppanno, ayaṃ phasso. Vedayitaṃ vedanāti yaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇena vā saḷāyatanapaccayena vā phassena saha uppannaṃ vipākavedayitaṃ, ayaṃ vedanā. Idhupapattibhavasmiṃ purekatassa kammassa paccayāti paccuppanne vipākabhave atītajātiyaṃ katassa kammassa paccayena pavattantīti attho.
这里说“因为诸处已经成熟”,指的是诸处成熟的人造业的时候,无明等烦恼就被显示出来了。“对于未来的结生”,意思是对于将来的结生。“未来的结生识”等等,这些词的含义前面已经解释过了。巴利
Idha paripakkattā āyatanānanti paripakkāyatanassa kammakaraṇakāle mohādayo dassitā. Āyatiṃ paṭisandhiyāti anāgate paṭisandhiyā. Āyatiṃ paṭisandhi viññāṇantiādīni vuttatthāni.
那么,十二缘起支又是怎么把这二十种行相都包含进去的呢?“无明”和“行”这两支,是直接按它们本身说为过去因的。可是,因为无明的人会恐惧不安,恐惧不安就会执取,以他的执取为缘就有了“有”,所以当这两支被包含时,渴爱、执取和有也就同样被包含了。现在的识、名色、六处、触、受,是直接按它们本身说为现在果的。渴爱、执取、有,是直接按它们本身说为现在因的。而当“有”被包含时,它之前那些与它相应的“行”也就被包含了;通过包含渴爱和执取,与它们相应的行也被包含。又或者,愚痴的人造业时,那个无明也就被包含了。未来的生和老死这两支是按它们本身说出来的,但仅仅通过包含生和老死,识等五种未来果就已经被包含了,因为那些就是生和老死。这样,十二支就把二十种行相都包含进去了。巴利
Kathaṃ pana dvādasahi paṭiccasamuppādaṅgehi ime vīsati ākārā gahitā hontīti? Avijjā saṅkhārāti ime dve atītahetuyo sarūpato vuttā. Yasmā pana avidvā paritassati, paritassito upādiyati, tassupādānapaccayā bhavo, tasmā tehi dvīhi gahitehi taṇhupādānabhavāpi gahitāva honti. Paccuppanne viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanā sarūpato vuttāyeva. Taṇhupādānabhavā paccuppannahetuyo sarūpato vuttā . Bhave pana gahite tassa pubbabhāgā taṃsampayuttā vā saṅkhārā gahitāva honti, taṇhupādānaggahaṇena ca taṃsampayuttā. Yāya vā mūḷho kammaṃ karoti, sā avijjā gahitāva hoti. Anāgate jāti jarāmaraṇanti dve sarūpena vuttāni, jātijarāmaraṇaggahaṇeneva pana viññāṇādīni pañca anāgataphalāni gahitāneva honti. Tesaṃyeva hi jātijarāmaraṇānīti evaṃ dvādasahi aṅgehi vīsati ākārā gahitā honti.
过去因有五种,现在果有五种;
现在有五种因,未来有五种果。巴利
‘‘Atīte hetavo pañca, idāni phalapañcakaṃ; Idāni hetavo pañca, āyatiṃ phalapañcaka’’nti. –
这首偈颂说的就是这个意思。“Itimeti”就是“iti me”(如此我),或者也可以读作“iti ime”(如此这些)。巴利
Gāthāya ayamevattho vutto. Itimeti iti ime. Iti imeti vā pāṭho.
把“四”归纳起来,就是四组。过去的五种因法,是一组“因”;现在的五种果法,是一组“果”;现在的五种因法,是一组“因”;未来的五种果法,是一组“果”。巴利
Catusaṅkhepeti caturo rāsī. Atīte pañca hetudhammā eko hetusaṅkhepo, paccuppanne pañca phaladhammā eko phalasaṅkhepo, paccuppanne pañca hetudhammā eko hetusaṅkhepo, anāgate pañca phaladhammā eko phalasaṅkhepo.
三时,就是三个时间段。应当知道:按第一组五支来说,是过去时;按第二组和第三组五支来说,是现在时;按第四组五支来说,是未来时。巴利
Tayo addheti tayo kāle. Paṭhamapañcakavasena atītakālo, dutiyatatiyapañcakavasena paccuppannakālo, catutthapañcakavasena anāgatakālo veditabbo.
三连结,就是具有三个连结,那三连结是:过去因与现在果之间,有一个因果连结;现在果与未来因之间,有一个果因连结;现在因与未来果之间,有一个因果连结。巴利
Tisandhinti tayo sandhayo assāti tisandhi, taṃ tisandhiṃ. Atītahetupaccuppannaphalānamantarā eko hetuphalasandhi, paccuppannaphalaanāgatahetūnamantarā eko phalahetusandhi, paccuppannahetuanāgataphalānamantarā eko hetuphalasandhi.
在《缘起经》中,若按诸支自身呈现的方式来归纳,无明与行是第一个概要,识、名色、六处、触、受是第二个,渴爱、取、有是第三个,生、老死是第四个。无明与行这两支属于过去时;从识到有这八支属于现在时;生与老死这两支属于未来时。行与识之间是一个因果连接,受与渴爱之间是一个果因连接,有与生之间是一个因果连接。巴利
Paṭiccasamuppādapāḷiyaṃ sarūpato āgatavasena pana avijjāsaṅkhārā eko saṅkhepo, viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanā dutiyo, taṇhupādānabhavā tatiyo, jātijarāmaraṇaṃ catuttho. Avijjāsaṅkhārāti dve aṅgāni atītakālāni, viññāṇādīni bhavāvasānāni aṭṭha paccuppannakālāni , jātijarāmaraṇanti dve anāgatakālāni. Saṅkhāraviññāṇānaṃ antarā eko hetuphalasandhi, vedanātaṇhānamantarā eko phalahetusandhi, bhavajātīnamantarā eko hetuphalasandhi.
“以二十种行相”是指以二十个部分。关联的意思是:他以二十种行相了知四摄、三时、三连结以及缘起。巴利
Vīsatiyāākārehīti vīsatiyā koṭṭhāsehi. Catusaṅkhepe ca tayo addhe ca tisandhiṃ paṭiccasamuppādañca vīsatiyā ākārehi jānātīti sambandho.
“了知”:他依据所听闻的教法,以修行初起之智而了知。“观见”:对于已经了知的对象,他唯以智清楚地观见,就像用眼睛看见、又像掌中的庵摩罗果被亲手触摸到一样。“遍知”:在观见的范围内不断修习,他唯以智而了知。这里所说的“行相”,就是范围的意思。“通达”:由于修行圆满而达到究竟,他唯以智而通达。或者,他以自相而了知,以味而观见,以现起而遍知,以足处而通达。巴利
Jānātīti sutānusārena bhāvanārambhañāṇena jānāti. Passatīti ñātameva cakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ viya hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya ca phuṭaṃ katvā ñāṇeneva passati. Aññātīti diṭṭhamariyādeneva āsevanaṃ karonto ñāṇeneva jānāti. Mariyādattho hi ettha ākāro. Paṭivijjhatīti bhāvanāpāripūriyā niṭṭhaṃ pāpento ñāṇeneva paṭivedhaṃ karoti. Salakkhaṇavasena vā jānāti, sarasavasena passati, paccupaṭṭhānavasena aññāti, padaṭṭhānavasena paṭivijjhati.
在这里,“缘起”应当理解为缘法。“缘生法”则是指由各种因缘所生起的法。怎么知道这一点呢?依据世尊的话。因为世尊在《缘起与缘生法开示经》中这样说:巴利
Tattha paṭiccasamuppādoti paccayadhammā veditabbā. Paṭiccasamuppannā dhammāti tehi tehi paccayehi nibbattadhammā. Kathamidaṃ jānitabbanti ce? Bhagavato vacanena. Bhagavatā hi paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannadhammadesanāsutte –
比丘们,什么是缘起呢?比丘们,以生为缘而有老死。无论如来出现于世,还是如来不出现于世,那个界、那个法的安住性、法的决定性、此缘性,都一直安住着。如来觉悟这一点、通达这一点,觉悟通达之后,就宣说、开示、设定、建立、揭示、分别、阐明,并说:你们来看。比丘们,以生为缘而有老死;以有为缘而有生……以无明为缘而有行。无论如来出现于世,还是如来不出现于世……阐明,并说:你们来看。比丘们,以无明为缘而有行。比丘们,这样一来,那其中的如性、不虚妄性、不异如性、此缘性——比丘们,这就叫做缘起。巴利
‘‘Katamo ca, bhikkhave, paṭiccasamuppādo, jātipaccayā, bhikkhave, jarāmaraṇaṃ, uppādā vā tathāgatānaṃ anuppādā vā tathāgatānaṃ ṭhitāva sā dhātu dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatā idappaccayatā, taṃ tathāgato abhisambujjhati abhisameti, abhisambujjhitvā abhisametvā ācikkhati deseti paññāpeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati vibhajati uttānīkaroti ‘passathā’ti cāha. Jātipaccayā, bhikkhave, jarāmaraṇaṃ, bhavapaccayā, bhikkhave, jāti…pe… avijjāpaccayā, bhikkhave, saṅkhārā. Uppādā vā tathāgatānaṃ…pe… uttānīkaroti ‘passathā’ti cāha. Avijjāpaccayā, bhikkhave, saṅkhārā. Iti kho, bhikkhave, yā tatrata thatā avitathatā anaññathatā idappaccayatā. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.20) –
说法者这样讲缘起时,用“如性”等不同的名称,其实就是在说:缘法本身就是缘起。所以,以老死等法的缘为特征的是缘起,它的作用是持续不断地连着苦,它表现为邪道,而它本身也要依靠条件,所以它以自己特有的缘作为依据。巴利
Evaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ desentena tathatādīhi vevacanehi paccayadhammāva paṭiccasamuppādoti vuttā. Tasmā jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayalakkhaṇo paṭiccasamuppādo, dukkhānubandhanaraso kummaggapaccupaṭṭhāno, ayampi sapaccayattā attano visesapaccayapadaṭṭhāno.
“无论出现或不出现”,意思是:无论如来出现于世间,还是如来不出现于世间。“那界恒住”,意思是:那作为缘的自性恒常安住,从来没有一时不是生老死的缘。“法住性、法决定性、此缘性”,说的正是“以生为缘”本身。因为由生之缘而生起、被称为老死的缘生法,是依于生而安住的;正是“以生为缘”决定了老死法,所以“生”被称为“法住性、法决定性”。又因为生正是这老死的缘,所以生是“此缘”,而此缘本身的状态就是“此缘性”。“彼”,指那个缘。“觉悟”,是用智慧彻底觉悟。“通达”,是用智慧完全通达。“宣说”,是讲出来。“开示”,是指明出来。“令知”,是让人知道。“安立”,是放在智慧面前。“开显”,是揭开之后显示出来。“分别”,是从分类上显示出来。“阐明”,是使它变得清楚明白。“如是”,就是“这样”。“那些”,是指在“以生为缘,有老死”等教法中的那些法。而这缘起,因为一切法都是依于那些不多不少、恰好如此的缘才生起,所以称为“如性”;因为当诸缘和合时,由它们所生的法连一刹那也不可能不生起,所以称为“不虚妄性”;因为不是由其他法的缘使其他法生起,所以称为“不异性”。对于上面所说的老死等法,无论从缘来说,还是从缘的聚合来说,都称为“此缘性”。这里的词义是:这些法的缘就是“此缘”,“此缘”本身就是“此缘性”;或者“此缘”的聚合就是“此缘性”。而这里的特征,应当依据语法学来理解。巴利
Uppādāvā anuppādā vāti uppāde vā anuppāde vā, tathāgatesu uppannesupi anuppannesupīti attho. Ṭhitāva sā dhātūti ṭhitova so paccayasabhāvo, na kadāci jātijarāmaraṇassa paccayo na hotīti attho. Dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatā idappaccayatāti jātipaccayoyeva. Jātipaccayena hi jarāmaraṇasaṅkhāto paccayasamuppannadhammo tadāyattatāya tiṭṭhati, jātipaccayova jarāmaraṇadhammaṃ niyameti, tasmā jāti ‘‘dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatā’’ti vuccati. Jātiyeva imassa jarāmaraṇassa paccayoti idappaccayo, idappaccayova idappaccayatā. Tanti taṃ paccayaṃ. Abhisambujjhatīti ñāṇena abhisambujjhati. Abhisametīti ñāṇena abhisamāgacchati. Ācikkhatīti katheti. Desetīti dasseti. Paññāpetīti jānāpeti. Paṭṭhapetīti ñāṇamukhe ṭhapeti. Vivaratīti vivaritvā dasseti. Vibhajatīti vibhāgato dasseti. Uttānīkarotīti pākaṭaṃ karoti. Iti khoti evaṃ kho. Yā tatrāti yā tesu ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’ntiādīsu . So panāyaṃ paṭiccasamuppādo tehi tehi paccayehi anūnādhikeheva tassa tassa dhammassa sambhavato tathatāti, sāmaggiṃ upagatesu paccayesu muhuttampi tato nibbattanadhammānaṃ asambhavābhāvato avitathatāti, aññadhammapaccayehi aññadhammānuppattito anaññathatāti, yathāvuttānaṃ etesaṃ jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayato vā paccayasamūhato vā idappaccayatāti vutto. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – imesaṃ paccayā idappaccayā, idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā, idappaccayānaṃ vā samūho idappaccayatā. Lakkhaṇaṃ panettha saddasatthato veditabbanti.
第五 思择智详说的注释巴利
5. Sammasanañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
48 在思择智的解释中,“任何”是指毫无遗漏地完全涵盖。“色”是为了防止过度引申而作的限定。通过这两个词,就已经完成了对色的无余把握。接下来,开始从过去等方面对它加以区分,因为“任何”色有过去、未来等种种分类。这个道理同样适用于受等其他诸蕴。其中,先说色。色依世、相续、时、刹那这四种方式,有过去、未来、现在之分。首先依世来说:一个有情在某一生中,结生之前是过去,死亡之后是未来,两者之间是现在。依相续来说:属于同一种类、由同一时节或同一食素所生的色,虽然前后相续地生起,但正在生起的部分是现在;在此之前,由不同种类的时节、食素所生的色是过去;在此之后的是未来。由心所生的色:在同一心路、同一速行心或同一等至中所生的是现在,在此之前的是过去,在此之后的是未来。至于由业所生的色,依各别相续而言,并没有过去、未来等的区分;不过,应当借助那些时节、食素、心所生色对它的支持作用,来了解它的过去、未来等状态。依时来说:在一须臾、上午、中午、下午、夜晚、白昼等各个时段中,依相续而正在运行的那个时段,就称为现在;在此之前的是过去,在此之后的是未来。依刹那来说:属于生等三刹那所摄的是现在,在此之前的是未来,在此之后的是过去。此外,因的作用已经过去的是过去;因的作用已完成而缘的作用尚未完成的是现在;因缘两种作用都尚未完成的是未来。或者,正在发挥自身作用的刹那是现在,在此之前的是未来,在此之后的是过去。在这里,关于刹那等的说法是了义说,其余的说法是方便说。巴利
48. Sammasanañāṇaniddese yaṃ kiñcīti anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Rūpanti atippasaṅganiyamanaṃ. Evaṃ padadvayenāpi rūpassa asesapariggaho kato hoti. Athassa atītādinā vibhāgaṃ ārabhati. Tañhi kiñci atītaṃ kiñci anāgatādibhedanti. Esa nayo vedanādīsupi. Tattha rūpaṃ tāva addhāsantatisamayakhaṇavasena catudhā atītaṃ nāma hoti, tathā anāgatapaccuppannaṃ. Tattha addhāvasena tāva ekassa ekasmiṃ bhave paṭisandhito pubbe atītaṃ, cutito uddhaṃ anāgataṃ, ubhinnamantare paccuppannaṃ. Santativasena sabhāgaekautusamuṭṭhānaṃ ekāhārasamuṭṭhānañca pubbāpariyabhāvena vattamānampi paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe visabhāgautuāhārasamuṭṭhānaṃ atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ. Cittajaṃ ekavīthiekajavanaekasamāpattisamuṭṭhānaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ, kammasamuṭṭhānassa pāṭiyekkaṃ santativasena atītādibhedo natthi, tesaññeva pana utuāhāracittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ upatthambhanavasena tassa atītādibhāvo veditabbo. Samayavasena ekamuhuttapubbaṇhasāyanharattindivādīsu samayesu santānavasena pavattamānaṃ taṃ taṃ samayaṃ paccuppannaṃ nāma, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ. Khaṇavasena uppādādikhaṇattayapariyāpannaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe anāgataṃ, pacchā atītaṃ. Apica atikkantahetupaccayakiccaṃ atītaṃ, niṭṭhitahetukiccamaniṭṭhitapaccayakiccaṃ paccuppannaṃ, ubhayakiccamasampattaṃ anāgataṃ. Sakiccakkhaṇe vā paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe anāgataṃ, pacchā atītaṃ. Ettha ca khaṇādikathāva nippariyāyā sesā sapariyāyā.
在此,对于五蕴来说,这里特指自身内在的色。因此应当知道,在自己相续中生起的、属于个人自身的色,就是“内”。而除此之外的色,不论与根结合还是不结合,都叫“外”。所谓“粗”,指眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、色、声、香、味、触,以及地、火、风,这十二种色。因为它们可以透过碰触而被感知,所以是粗的。其余十六种色——水界、女根、男根、命根、心所依处、食素、空界、身表、语表,以及色的轻快性、柔软性、适业性、积集、相续、老性、无常性——因为不能透过碰触而被感知,所以是细的。所谓“或劣或胜”,这里劣与胜的区分可以从方便说和究竟说两方面来理解。其中,比起色究竟天的色,善见天的色是劣的;而同样是善见天的色,比起善现天的色,又是胜的。这样一路类推,直到地狱有情的色,都应当依照方便说来理解劣与胜。从究竟说来讲,不善异熟生起的地方,那里的色是劣的;善异熟生起的地方,那里的色是胜的。所谓“或远或近”,这里凡是细的色,因为它的体性难以通达,所以是远;凡是粗的色,因为它的体性容易了知,所以是近。巴利
Ajjhattanti pañcasupi khandhesu idha niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, tasmā attano santāne pavattaṃ pāṭipuggalikaṃ rūpaṃ ajjhattanti veditabbaṃ. Tato bahibhūtaṃ pana indriyabaddhaṃ vā anindriyabaddhaṃ vā rūpaṃ bahiddhā nāma. Oḷārikanti cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyarūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbasaṅkhātā pathavītejovāyo cāti dvādasavidhaṃ rūpaṃ ghaṭṭanavasena gahetabbato oḷārikaṃ. Sesaṃ pana āpodhātu itthindriyaṃ purisindriyaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ hadayavatthu ojā ākāsadhātu kāyaviññatti vacīviññatti rūpassa lahutā mudutā kammaññatā upacayo santati jaratā aniccatāti soḷasavidhaṃ rūpaṃ ghaṭṭanavasena agahetabbato sukhumaṃ. Hīnaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vāti ettha hīnapaṇītabhāvo pariyāyato nippariyāyato ca. Tattha akaniṭṭhānaṃ rūpato sudassīnaṃ rūpaṃ hīnaṃ, tadeva sudassānaṃ rūpato paṇītaṃ. Evaṃ yāva narakasattānaṃ rūpaṃ, tāva pariyāyato hīnapaṇītatā veditabbā. Nippariyāyato pana yattha akusalavipākaṃ uppajjati, taṃ hīnaṃ. Yattha kusalavipākaṃ, taṃ paṇītaṃ. Yaṃ dūre santike vāti ettha yaṃ sukhumaṃ, tadeva duppaṭivijjhasabhāvattā dūre. Yaṃ oḷārikaṃ, tadeva suppaṭivijjhasabhāvattā santike.
把一切色都判定为无常,这是一种观照思择;把一切色都判定为苦,这是一种观照思择;把一切色都判定为无我,这是一种观照思择。在这里,这位比丘把“凡任何色”这样没有特别限定而说的一切色,按过去、未来、现在这三类,以及内、外等四组二法,一共十一个方面加以界定之后,把一切色都判定为无常,也就是把它作为无常来观照思择。怎么观照呢?按照后面所说的方式。因为这样说:“过去、未来、现在的色是无常的,因为它的意义是灭尽。”所以,他这样观照思择:过去的色,因为它在过去就已经灭尽,没有到达现在这个存在,所以是无常的,因为它的意义是灭尽;未来的色,将在下一个存在中生起,但也就在那里灭尽,不会从那里再去往更后面的存在,所以是无常的,因为它的意义是灭尽;现在的色,就在此处灭尽,不会从这里离去,所以是无常的,因为它的意义是灭尽;内的色,也是在内部灭尽,不会变成外在的状态,所以是无常的,因为它的意义是灭尽;外在的、粗的、细的、低劣的、殊胜的、远的、近的色,也都在各自那里灭尽,不会变成远的状态,所以是无常的,因为它的意义是灭尽——他这样观照思择。这一切,从“无常,因为它的意义是灭尽”这一点来说,是一种观照思择;但如果按类别区分,则有十一种。巴利
Sabbaṃrūpaṃ aniccato vavattheti ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, dukkhato vavattheti ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, anattato vavattheti ekaṃ sammasananti ettha ayaṃ bhikkhu ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpa’’nti evaṃ aniyamaniddiṭṭhaṃ sabbampi rūpaṃ atītattikena ceva catūhi ajjhattādidukehi cāti ekādasahi okāsehi paricchinditvā sabbaṃ rūpaṃ aniccato vavattheti aniccanti sammasati. Kathaṃ? Parato vuttanayena. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.48). Tasmā esa yaṃ atītaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ yasmā atīteyeva khīṇaṃ, nayimaṃ bhavaṃ sampattanti aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena, yaṃ anāgataṃ rūpaṃ anantarabhave nibbattissati, tampi tattheva khīyissati, na tato paraṃ bhavaṃ gamissatīti aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena, yaṃ paccuppannaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ idheva khīyati, na ito gacchatīti aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena, yaṃ ajjhattaṃ rūpaṃ, tampi ajjhattameva khīyati, na bahiddhābhāvaṃ gacchatīti aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena, yaṃ bahiddhā oḷārikaṃ sukhumaṃ hīnaṃ paṇītaṃ dūre santike, tampi ettheva khīyati, na dūrabhāvaṃ gacchatīti aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenāti sammasati. Idaṃ sabbampi ‘‘aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenā’’ti etassa vasena ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, pabhedato pana ekādasavidhaṃ hoti.
他把这一切都思择为“苦,因为可怕”。说“因为可怕”,是因为它确实令人恐惧。凡是无常的,就会带来恐惧,就像《狮子譬喻经》里所说的诸天那样。所以,这也是依“苦,因为可怕”这一角度而算作一种思择;如果按类别来分,则有十一种。巴利
Sabbameva cetaṃ dukkhaṃ bhayaṭṭhenāti sammasati. Bhayaṭṭhenāti sappaṭibhayatāya. Yañhi aniccaṃ, taṃ bhayāvahaṃ hoti sīhopamasutte (a. ni. 4.33; saṃ. ni. 3.78) devānaṃ viya. Iti idampi ‘‘dukkhaṃ bhayaṭṭhenā’’ti etassa vasena ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, pabhedato pana ekādasavidhaṃ hoti.
就像对苦一样,他也同样把这一切思择为“无我,因为无坚实之义”。所谓“因为无坚实之义”,就是说:那种被设想为“我是常住者、是作者、是感受者、是自主者”的自我坚实性并不存在。因为凡是无常、苦的,连自身的无常性或生灭的逼迫都无法阻止,又怎么可能有作者等状态呢?因此说:“比丘们,如果这色是我,这色就不该导致疾病……”等等。这样,依“无我,因为无坚实之义”来说,这是一种思择;若从分类来看,则有十一种。对受等诸蕴也是同样的方法。如此,在每一蕴中各作十一种思择,在五蕴中就有五十五种思择;从无常看有五十五种,从苦看有五十五种,从无我看也有五十五种。依这三种随观,总共就有一百六十五种思择。巴利
Yathā ca dukkhaṃ, evaṃ sabbampi taṃ anattā asārakaṭṭhenāti sammasati. Asārakaṭṭhenāti ‘‘attā nivāsī kārako vedako sayaṃvasī’’ti evaṃ parikappitassa attasārassa abhāvena. Yañhi aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ, attanopi aniccataṃ vā udayabbayapīḷanaṃ vā vāretuṃ na sakkoti, kuto tassa kārakādibhāvo. Tenāha – ‘‘rūpañca hidaṃ, bhikkhave, attā abhavissa, nayidaṃ rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvatteyyā’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.59). Iti idaṃ ‘‘anattā asārakaṭṭhenā’’ti etassa vasena ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, pabhedato pana ekādasavidhaṃ hoti. Eseva nayo vedanādīsu. Iti ekekasmiṃ khandhe ekādasa ekādasa katvā pañcasu khandhesu pañcapaññāsa sammasanāni honti, aniccato pañcapaññāsa , dukkhato pañcapaññāsa, anattato pañcapaññāsāti tividhānupassanāvasena sabbāni pañcasaṭṭhisatasammasanāni honti.
有些人则说:把“一切色、一切受、一切想、一切行、一切识”这一句也加进去,在每一个蕴里各作十二种,五蕴就有六十种;再从随观的角度来说,就有一百八十种思择。巴利
Keci pana ‘‘sabbaṃ rūpaṃ, sabbaṃ vedanaṃ, sabbaṃ saññaṃ, sabbe saṅkhāre, sabbaṃ viññāṇanti padampi pakkhipitvā ekekasmiṃ khandhe dvādasa dvādasa katvā pañcasu saṭṭhi, anupassanāto asītisatasammasanānī’’ti vadanti.
在这里,关于过去等的分类,应当从相续和刹那两个角度来理解受的过去、未来、现在三种状态。其中,从相续的角度来说:属于同一心路过程、同一速行、同一等至,并且在与同一种所缘相应的情况下生起的受,就是现在;在那之前的是过去,在那之后的是未来。从刹那等的角度来说:包含在三刹那之中,位于前际和后际的中间,并且正在执行自身作用的受,就是现在;在那之前的是过去,在那之后的是未来。内与外的区分,应当只从自身内部的角度来理解。巴利
Atītādivibhāge panettha santativasena khaṇādivasena ca vedanāya atītānāgatapaccuppannabhāvo veditabbo. Tattha santativasena ekavīthiekajavanaekasamāpattipariyāpannā ekavidhavisayasamāyogappavattā ca paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Khaṇādivasena khaṇattayapariyāpannā pubbantāparantamajjhagatā sakiccañca kurumānā vedanā paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Ajjhattabahiddhābhedo niyakajjhattavaseneva veditabbo.
粗与细的状态,应该按照《分别论》里说的“不善受是粗的,善受和无记受是细的”等这样的方法来了知,也就是从种类、自性、补特伽罗、世间和出世间这几个方面来理解。
先说从种类来看:不善受因为是作为有罪过行为之因、有烦恼热恼的性质,而且不寂静地运作,所以比善受粗;因为它有造作、有努力、有异熟、有烦恼热恼、有罪过,所以比异熟无记受粗;又因为它有异熟、有烦恼热恼、有苦、有罪过,所以比唯作无记受粗。反过来,善受和无记受则与上面说的相反,比不善受细。
善和不善这两种受,因为有造作、有异熟等,按各自对应的情况,也比两种无记受粗;反过来,两种无记受则比它们细。这样,从种类的角度就应该知道粗和细。巴利
Oḷārikasukhumabhāvo ‘‘akusalā vedanā oḷārikā, kusalābyākatā vedanā sukhumā’’tiādinā (vibha. 4) nayena vibhaṅge vuttena jātisabhāvapuggalalokiyalokuttaravasena veditabbo. Jātivasena tāva akusalā vedanā sāvajjakiriyahetuto, kilesasantāpabhāvato ca avūpasantavuttīti kusalavedanāya oḷārikā, sabyāpārato saussāhato savipākato kilesasantāpabhāvato sāvajjato ca vipākābyākatāya oḷārikā, savipākato kilesasantāpabhāvato sabyābajjhato sāvajjato ca kiriyābyākatāya oḷārikā. Kusalābyākatā pana vuttavipariyāyato akusalāya vedanāya sukhumā. Dvepi kusalākusalā vedanā sabyāpārato saussāhato savipākato ca yathāyogaṃ duvidhāyapi abyākatāya oḷārikā, vuttavipariyāyena duvidhāpi abyākatā tāhi sukhumā. Evaṃ tāva jātivasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.
从自性方面来说,苦受因为没有滋味、具有扩散性、能造成扰动、令人厌惧、具有压倒性,所以比另外两种受更粗;而另外两种受则因为乐、寂静、殊胜、悦意、中舍,按各自相应的情况,比苦受更细。乐受和苦受两者,因为具有扩散性、令人厌惧、能造成扰动、明显,所以比不苦不乐受更粗;不苦不乐受则与上面所说的相反,比这两种受更细。这样,应当从自性方面来理解粗与细。巴利
Sabhāvavasena pana dukkhā vedanā nirassādato savipphārato khobhakaraṇato ubbejanīyato abhibhavanato ca itarāhi dvīhi oḷārikā, itarā pana dve sātato santato paṇītato manāpato majjhattato ca yathāyogaṃ dukkhāya sukhumā. Ubho pana sukhadukkhā savipphārato ubbejanīyato khobhakaraṇato pākaṭato ca adukkhamasukhāya oḷārikā, sā vuttavipariyāyena tadubhayato sukhumā. Evaṃ sabhāvavasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.
从个人差别来看,未入定者的受因为心散乱在各种不同的所缘上,所以比入定者的受更粗;反过来,入定者的受则更细。这样,就应当从个人差别来理解粗和细。巴利
Puggalavasena pana asamāpannassa vedanā nānārammaṇe vikkhittabhāvato samāpannassa vedanāya oḷārikā, vipariyāyena itarā sukhumā. Evaṃ puggalavasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.
从世间和出世间的角度来看,有漏受属于世间,因为它是有漏生起的原因,是暴流的所缘,是轭的所缘,是结的所缘,是盖的所缘,是取的所缘,是杂染的,还与凡夫共通,所以比起无漏受来是粗的;而无漏受则反过来,比起有漏受来是细的。这样,就应该从世间和出世间的角度来理解粗和细。巴利
Lokiyalokuttaravasena pana sāsavā vedanā lokiyā, sā āsavuppattihetuto oghaniyato yoganiyato ganthaniyato nīvaraṇiyato upādāniyato saṃkilesikato puthujjanasādhāraṇato ca anāsavāya oḷārikā, anāsavā ca vipariyāyena sāsavāya sukhumā. Evaṃ lokiyalokuttaravasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.
在这里,应当按种类等来避免混淆。因为与不善异熟身识相应的受,从种类上说,由于是无记的,虽然微细,但从自性等方面来看,则是粗的。确实是这样说的:巴利
Tattha jātiādivasena sambhedo pariharitabbo. Akusalavipākakāyaviññāṇasampayuttā hi vedanā jātivasena abyākatattā sukhumāpi samānā sabhāvādivasena oḷārikā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
无记的受是微细的,苦受是粗重的。得定者的受是微细的,未得定者的受是粗重的。无漏的受是微细的,有漏的受是粗重的。巴利
‘‘Abyākatā vedanā sukhumā, dukkhā vedanā oḷārikā. Samāpannassa vedanā sukhumā, asamāpannassa vedanā oḷārikā. Anāsavā vedanā sukhumā, sāsavā vedanā oḷārikā’’ti (vibha. 11).
就像苦受一样,乐受等受也是如此。因为它们从种类上说属于粗的,从自性等方面说则是微细的。因此,应当在不混淆种类等的前提下,理解诸受的粗与细。也就是说,无记受从种类上说比善受和不善受更微细。在这里,不应该执取自性等方面的差别:什么是无记?什么是苦?什么是乐?什么是得定者的?什么是未得定者的?什么是有漏的?什么是无漏的?这个原则适用于一切情况。巴利
Yathā ca dukkhā vedanā, evaṃ sukhādayopi. Tāpi hi jātivasena oḷārikā, sabhāvādivasena sukhumā honti. Tasmā yathā jātiādivasena sambhedo na hoti, tathā vedanānaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā. Seyyathidaṃ, abyākatā jātivasena kusalākusalāhi sukhumā. Tattha katamā abyākatā? Kiṃ dukkhā? Kiṃ sukhā? Kiṃ samāpannassa? Kiṃ asamāpannassa? Kiṃ sāsavā? Kiṃ anāsavāti? Evaṃ sabhāvādibhedo na parāmasitabbo. Esa nayo sabbattha.
另外,按照“应当依着每一种受,把受看作粗或细”这个说法,在不善等法当中,与嗔相应的受就像火烧到自己的依处一样,所以比与贪相应的受更粗;与贪相应的受则更细。与嗔相应的受里,决定性的更粗,不定性的更细。决定性的当中,能持续一劫的更粗,其余的更细。能持续一劫的当中,无行的更粗,其余的更细。与贪相应的受里,和邪见相应的更粗,其余的更细。那和邪见相应的受当中,如果是决定性的、能持续一劫的、无行的,就更粗,其余的更细。总的来说,不善法里,能带来很多异熟的更粗,能带来很少异熟的更细;善法里,能带来很少异熟的更粗,能带来很多异熟的更细。巴利
Apica ‘‘taṃ taṃ vā pana vedanaṃ upādāyupādāya vedanā oḷārikā sukhumā daṭṭhabbā’’ti vacanato akusalādīsupi lobhasahagatāya dosasahagatā vedanā aggi viya nissayadahanato oḷārikā, lobhasahagatā sukhumā. Dosasahagatāpi niyatā oḷārikā, aniyatā sukhumā. Niyatāpi kappaṭṭhitikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Kappaṭṭhitikāsupi asaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Lobhasahagatā pana diṭṭhisampayuttā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Sāpi niyatā kappaṭṭhitikā asaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Avisesena ca akusalā bahuvipākā oḷārikā, appavipākā sukhumā. Kusalā pana appavipākā oḷārikā, bahuvipākā sukhumā.
另外,欲界的善法是粗的,色界的善法是细的,无色界的善法比色界更细,出世间的善法又比无色界更细。在欲界善法里,布施所成的善法是粗的,持戒所成的善法是细的;持戒所成的善法又是粗的,相比之下修习所成的善法更细。修习所成的善法里,二因的是粗的,三因的是细的;三因的当中,有行的(需要造作努力的)是粗的,无行的(不需造作努力的)是细的。色界方面,与初禅相应的法是粗的……乃至与第五禅相应的是最细的。无色界方面,与空无边处相应的法是粗的……乃至与非想非非想处相应的是最细的。出世间方面,与入流道相应的法是粗的……乃至与阿拉汉道相应的是最细的。这个道理同样适用于各地的异熟、唯作和受,也可以按苦受等、未入定等、有漏等的方式来说。若按生存处所来说:地狱中的苦受是粗的,畜生道中的是细的……乃至他化自在天中的是最细的。苦受如此,乐受也应在一切处按相应情况这样搭配。若按所依事物来说:凡是依托低劣事物的任何受都是粗的,依托殊胜事物的是细的。应当知道,在低劣与殊胜的区分中,凡是粗的就是低劣的,凡是细的就是殊胜的。巴利
Apica kāmāvacarakusalā oḷārikā, rūpāvacarā sukhumā, tato arūpāvacarā, tato lokuttarā. Kāmāvacarā ca dānamayā oḷārikā, sīlamayā sukhumā. Sīlamayāpi oḷārikā, tato bhāvanāmayā sukhumā. Bhāvanāmayāpi duhetukā oḷārikā, tihetukā sukhumā. Tihetukāpi sasaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, asaṅkhārikā sukhumā . Rūpāvacarā ca paṭhamajjhānikā oḷārikā…pe… pañcamajjhānikā sukhumāva. Arūpāvacarā ca ākāsānañcāyatanasampayuttā oḷārikā…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasampayuttā sukhumāva. Lokuttarā ca sotāpattimaggasampayuttā oḷārikā…pe… arahattamaggasampayuttā sukhumāva. Esa nayo taṃtaṃbhūmivipākakiriyāvedanāsu dukkhādiasamāpannādisāsavādivasena vuttavedanāsu ca. Okāsavasena vāpi niraye dukkhā oḷārikā, tiracchānayoniyaṃ sukhumā…pe… paranimmitavasavattīsu sukhumāva. Yathā ca dukkhā, evaṃ sukhāpi sabbattha yathānurūpaṃ yojetabbā. Vatthuvasena cāpi hīnavatthukā yā kāci vedanā oḷārikā, paṇītavatthukā sukhumā. Hīnapaṇītabhede yā oḷārikā, sā hīnā. Yā ca sukhumā, sā paṇītāti daṭṭhabbā.
在“远”和“近”这两个词上,论典《分别论》里用这样的方式做了分别:“不善受与善受、无记受相距远;不善受与不善受相距近”等等。因此,不善受因为类别不同、不相混杂、不相似,所以与善受和无记受相距远;同样地,善受和无记受与不善受也相距远。这个道理适用于所有情况。而不善受因为类别相同、相互混杂、彼此相似,所以与不善受相距近——这是分别受的过去、未来、现在等分类时的详细讨论的开端。与各种受相应的想等其他心所,也应该按照同样的方式理解。巴利
Dūrasantikapade pana ‘‘akusalā vedanā kusalābyākatāhi vedanāhi dūre, akusalā vedanā akusalāya vedanāya santike’’tiādinā (vibha. 13) nayena vibhaṅge vibhattā. Tasmā akusalā vedanā visabhāgato asaṃsaṭṭhato asarikkhato ca kusalābyākatāhi dūre, tathā kusalābyākatā akusalāya. Esa nayo sabbavāresu. Akusalā pana vedanā sabhāgato saṃsaṭṭhato sarikkhato ca akusalāya santiketi idaṃ vedanāya atītādivibhāge vitthārakathāmukhaṃ. Taṃtaṃvedanāsampayuttānaṃ pana saññādīnampi etaṃ evameva veditabbaṃ.
不过,在这里按“受……”等,一直到“老死”这样用省略方式简略说到的诸法当中,如果出现了出世间法,因为它们不能成为观照的对象,所以在这一部分里不取它们。它们只是通过各自那个词所涵盖的法、以及按照《应遍知解说》里所说的方法被提到而已。至于那些能成为观照对象的法,其中哪些对某人来说是明显的,就容易把握,就应该从那些法开始观照。即使没有单独按“生”和“老死”来观照,但在观照具有生和老死的那些法时,生和老死本身也就同样被观照到了,所以应当知道,这是以间接的方式说明了按生和老死来观照。由于“将过去、未来、现在的(法)确定为无常”等说法,是只按过去等三时来说明观照的,所以即使不涉及内、外等分类,也可以只按过去等三时来限定,然后作无常等的观照。巴利
Ye panettha vedanādīsu cakkhu…pe… jarāmaraṇanti peyyālena saṃkhittesu ca dhammesu lokuttaradhammā āgatā, te asammasanūpagattā imasmiṃ adhikāre na gahetabbā. Te pana kevalaṃ tena tena padena saṅgahitadhammadassanavasena ca abhiññeyyaniddese āgatanayena ca vuttā. Yepi ca sammasanūpagā, tesu ye yassa pākaṭā honti, sukhena pariggahaṃ gacchanti, tesu tena sammasanaṃ ārabhitabbaṃ. Jātijarāmaraṇavasena visuṃ sammasanābhāvepi jātijarāmaraṇavantesuyeva pana sammasitesu tānipi sammasitāni hontīti pariyāyena tesampi vasena sammasanaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ aniccato vavatthetītiādinā nayena atītattikasseva ca vasena sammasanassa vuttattā ajjhattādibhedaṃ anāmasitvāpi atītattikasseva vasena paricchinditvāpi aniccādito sammasanaṃ kātabbameva.
然而,凡是无常的,由于它必定属于有为等类别,为了显示它的同义词,或者为了显示作意以种种方式生起,所以说“色,过去、未来、现在的,是无常、有为……”等等。因为那色以“有已还无”之义而为无常,或者因为以无常为终结、因为有始有终而为无常。由诸缘聚合而造作,所以是有为。依缘、靠缘而平等生起,或者与缘一同生起,所以是缘生。以此显示:虽然由缘所造作,但缘并没有刻意的作为。灭法,就是具有灭尽性质的法,以灭尽为自性。坏法,就是具有坏灭性质的法。这里并不是以变弱而灭称为灭法,纯粹是以消失为自性。因为在世间,大量之物变弱也被称为灭。离染法:这并不是以去往某处为坏法,纯粹是以超越自性为自性。因为经中说:“离染,即名为厌离或超越。”灭法:这并不是超越自性后又回转的法,纯粹是以不再回转的灭而止息为自性——应知后后句是为了解释前前句之义而说的。巴利
Yaṃ pana aniccaṃ, taṃ yasmā niyamato saṅkhatādibhedaṃ hoti, tenassa pariyāyadassanatthaṃ, nānākārehi vā manasikārappavattidassanatthaṃ rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ aniccaṃ saṅkhatantiādimāha . Tañhi hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccaṃ, aniccantikatāya ādiantavantatāya vā aniccaṃ. Paccayehi samāgantvā katattā saṅkhataṃ. Paccaye paṭicca nissāya samaṃ, saha vā uppannattā paṭiccasamuppannaṃ. Etena paccayehi katepi paccayānaṃ abyāpārataṃ dasseti. Khayadhammanti khīyanadhammaṃ khīyanapakatikaṃ. Vayadhammanti nassanadhammaṃ. Nayidaṃ mandībhāvakkhayavasena khayadhammaṃ, kevalaṃ vigamanapakatikaṃ. Pahūtassa mandībhāvopi hi loke khayoti vuccati. Virāgadhammanti nayidaṃ kuhiñci gamanavasena vayadhammaṃ, kevalaṃ sabhāvātikkamanapakatikaṃ. ‘‘Virāgo nāma jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Nirodhadhammanti nayidaṃ sabhāvātikkamena punarāvattidhammaṃ, kevalaṃ apunarāvattinirodhena nirujjhanapakatikanti purimapurimapadassa atthavivaraṇavasena pacchimapacchimapadaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
或者也可以这样搭配:以属于同一期生命的色法坏灭来说,它是灭尽法;以属于同一相续的色法灭尽来说,它是坏灭法;以色法的刹那坏灭来说,它是离染法;以这三者都不再生起来说,它是止息法。巴利
Atha vā ekabhavapariyāpannarūpabhaṅgavasena khayadhammaṃ, ekasantatipariyāpannarūpakkhayavasena vayadhammaṃ, rūpassa khaṇabhaṅgavasena virāgadhammaṃ, tiṇṇampi apunappavattivasena nirodhadhammantipi yojetabbaṃ.
在“老死是无常”这类说法里,老死本身并不是无常的;不过,因为具有无常本性的诸蕴会表现为老死,所以才说它得到了“无常”这个名称。在“有为”等说法中,道理也是一样。在中间省略的部分,对于“生”,因为它也是无常等,道理同样如此。巴利
Jarāmaraṇaṃ aniccantiādīsu jarāmaraṇaṃ na aniccaṃ, aniccasabhāvānaṃ pana khandhānaṃ jarāmaraṇattā aniccaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Saṅkhatādīsupi eseva nayo. Antarapeyyāle jātiyāpi aniccāditāya eseva nayo.
缘生而有老死等等,并不是从观智的角度说的,而只是把缘起的每一支归纳、确定下来,因此才叫“思择智”——这是从间接的角度来说的。但这并不是“聚思择智”,它只是“法住智”。“无生时”是词性上的颠倒说法,实际说的是“因为没有生”;“无行时”是表达上的颠倒说法,实际说的是“因为没有诸行”。应当按“缘有而有生,无有则无生”这样的方式来接合,也就是:“缘有而有生,无有则无生”等等。巴利
Jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇantiādi na vipassanāvasena vuttaṃ, kevalaṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa ekekaaṅgavasena saṅkhipitvā vavatthānato sammasanañāṇaṃ nāma hotīti pariyāyena vuttaṃ. Na panetaṃ kalāpasammasanañāṇaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇameva taṃ hotīti. Asati jātiyāti liṅgavipallāso kato, asatiyā jātiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Asati saṅkhāresūti vacanavipallāso kato, asantesu saṅkhāresūti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhavapaccayā jāti, asatītiādi ‘‘bhavapaccayā jāti, asati bhave natthi jātī’’tiādinā nayena yojetabbaṃ.
第六 生灭智论的解释巴利
6. Udayabbayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
49 现在,为了说明紧接着前面所说的“遍知智”,通过种种方式修习使它稳固、达到究竟而安住之后,从无常等角度观见诸行,再以生灭来界定诸行,为了从无常等角度修观而宣说的“生灭随观智”,在解释它的时候,从“已生的色”等开始说起:按照相续的道理,色是依各自的因缘而生的。这个已生之色的生起相——即生、生起、新生的状态,称为“生”;它的变坏相——即尽、坏灭,称为“灭”;“随观”就是反复地观察,因此意思是“生灭随观智”。对受等也是如此。因为只有具有生、老、死的法,其生灭才能被把握,而生、老、死本身并没有生灭,所以不涉及生、老、死,而用“已生的眼……乃至……已生的有”这样的省略格式来说。他这样观见五蕴的生灭时,便如此了知:“这些蕴在生起之前,没有堆积也没有积聚;正在生起时,也不是从堆积或积聚中来的;正在灭去时,也没有去往任何方向;已经灭去之后,也不在任何地方堆积、积聚或储藏。就像弹琵琶时生起的声音,在生起之前并没有积聚,生起时也不是从积聚中来的,灭去时没有去往任何方向,灭去之后也不在任何地方积聚而停留;只是依靠琵琶、琴弦和人的相应努力,原本没有而生起,生起之后又消失。同样,一切色法与名法,都是原本没有而生起,生起之后又消失。”巴利
49. Idāni anantaraṃ vuttassa sammasanañāṇassa nānānayehi bhāvanāthirakaraṇena pāraṃ gantvā ṭhitena aniccādito diṭṭhe saṅkhāre udayabbayena paricchinditvā aniccādito vipassanatthaṃ vuttassa udayabbayānupassanāñāṇassa niddese jātaṃ rūpantiādīsu santativasena yathāsakaṃ paccayehi nibbattaṃ rūpaṃ. Tassa jātassa rūpassa nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ jātiṃ uppādaṃ abhinavākāraṃ udayoti, vipariṇāmalakkhaṇaṃ khayaṃ bhaṅgaṃ vayoti, anupassanā punappunaṃ nisāmanā, udayabbaya anupassanāñāṇanti attho. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Jātijarāmaraṇavantānaṃyeva udayabbayassa pariggahetabbattā jātijarāmaraṇānaṃ udayabbayābhāvato jātijarāmaraṇaṃ anāmasitvā jātaṃ cakkhu…pe… jāto bhavoti peyyālaṃ kataṃ. So evaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ passanto evaṃ jānāti ‘‘imesaṃ khandhānaṃ uppattito pubbe anuppannānaṃ rāsi vā nicayo vā natthi, uppajjamānānampi rāsito vā nicayato vā āgamanaṃ nāma natthi, nirujjhamānānampi disāvidisāgamanaṃ nāma natthi, niruddhānampi ekasmiṃ ṭhāne rāsito nicayato nidhānato avaṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi. Yathā pana vīṇāya vādiyamānāya uppannassa saddassa neva uppattito pubbe sannicayo atthi, na uppajjamāno sannicayato āgato, na nirujjhamānassa disāvidisāgamanaṃ atthi, na niruddho katthaci sannicito tiṭṭhati, atha kho vīṇañca upavīṇañca purisassa ca tajjaṃ vāyāmaṃ paṭicca ahutvā sambhoti, hutvā paṭiveti, evaṃ sabbepi rūpārūpino dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’’ti.
50 这样从简略的角度说明了生灭观之后,现在为了从详细的角度来说明,先以“观五蕴的生起时,观见多少相?”等语句,从总体上提问;再以“观五蕴的生起时,观见二十五相”等语句,从总体上回答;然后以“观色蕴的生起时,观见多少相?”等语句,从分别的角度提问;以“观色蕴的生起时,观见五相”等语句,从分别的角度回答;接着又以“观色蕴的生起时,观见哪五相?”等语句,询问相的分别,随后作出回答。巴利
50. Evaṃ saṅkhepato udayabbayadassanaṃ dassetvā idāni vitthārato dassetuṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayaṃ passanto kati lakkhaṇāni passatītiādīhi rāsito gaṇanaṃ pucchitvā, pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayaṃ passanto pañcavīsati lakkhaṇāni passatītiādīhi rāsitova gaṇanaṃ vissajjetvā, puna rūpakkhandhassa udayaṃ passanto kati lakkhaṇāni passatītiādīhi vibhāgato gaṇanaṃ pucchitvā rūpakkhandhassa udayaṃ passanto pañca lakkhaṇāni passatītiādīhi vibhāgato gaṇanaṃ vissajjetvā, puna rūpakkhandhassa udayaṃ passanto katamāni pañca lakkhaṇāni passatītiādīhi lakkhaṇavibhāgaṃ pucchitvā vissajjanaṃ kataṃ.
在这里,“由无明集而有色集”,意思是:当存在“过去业有中的迷妄就是无明”所说的那种无明时,在这个有当中,色就生起。“以缘集的意义”,是指缘已经生起的状态。这里,无明、渴爱、业是作为结生之因的过去缘。这三法一旦被取,行和取也就同样被取了。“由食集”,是因为在转起的诸缘中,段食力量最强,所以只取段食;而取段食时,作为转起之因的时节与心也同样被取了。“生起的相”,是依分位、相续、刹那而说的色的生起;这生起本身,因为就是有为的相状,所以也说是“相”。所谓“五相”,就是无明、渴爱、业、食、生起这五种相。无明等也是色生起的标志,因为它们而得以标示,所以称为“相”;而“生起”纯粹就是有为的相状,它也是用来标示诸法为有为的那个标志,所以也叫做“相”。巴利
Tattha avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayoti ‘‘purimakammabhavasmiṃ moho avijjā’’ti vuttāya avijjāya sati imasmiṃ bhave rūpassa uppādo hotīti attho. Paccayasamudayaṭṭhenāti paccayassa uppannabhāvenāti attho. Avijjātaṇhākammāni cettha idha paṭisandhihetubhūtā atītapaccayā . Imesu ca tīsu gahitesu saṅkhārupādānāni gahitāneva honti. Āhārasamudayāti pavattipaccayesu kabaḷīkārāhārassa balavattā soyeva gahito. Tasmiṃ pana gahite pavattihetubhūtāni utucittānipi gahitāneva honti. Nibbattilakkhaṇanti addhāsantatikhaṇavasena rūpassa uppādaṃ, uppādoyeva saṅkhatalakkhaṇattā lakkhaṇanti ca vutto. Pañca lakkhaṇānīti avijjā taṇhā kammāhārā nibbatti cāti imāni pañca lakkhaṇāni. Avijjādayopi hi rūpassa udayo lakkhīyati etehīti lakkhaṇāni. Nibbatti pana saṅkhatalakkhaṇameva, tampi saṅkhatanti lakkhīyati etenāti lakkhaṇaṃ.
“由无明灭而色灭”的意思是:当那作为未来有的缘、属于现在有的无明,被阿罗汉道智灭除时,由于缘不存在了,未来的色就不再生起,这就是灭。“以缘灭之义”是指缘已灭尽的状态。而这里的灭,是指作为未来结生之缘的、就在现在有中的无明、渴爱和业的灭。“由食灭而色灭”是指:当作为转起之缘的段食不存在时,由它所生的色也就不存在了。“变易之相”是指依分位、相续、刹那而说的色的坏灭;这坏灭本身就是有为的相状,所以也称为“相”。这里说的“五相”,就是无明、渴爱、业、食这四者的不存在与灭尽,再加上变易这一相,共为五种。这个道理也适用于受蕴等。但有一点不同:对于非色蕴,其生灭的观察是依分位和相续来说的,不是依刹那。触是受、想、行蕴的转起之缘,所以触灭了,那些蕴也就随之而灭。名色是识蕴的转起之缘,所以名色灭了,识蕴也就随之而灭。巴利
Avijjānirodhā rūpanirodhoti anāgatabhavassa paccayabhūtāya imasmiṃ bhave avijjāya arahattamaggañāṇena nirodhe kate paccayābhāvā anāgatassa rūpassa anuppādo nirodho hotīti attho. Paccayanirodhaṭṭhenāti paccayassa niruddhabhāvenāti attho. Nirodho cettha anāgatapaṭisandhipaccayānaṃ idha avijjātaṇhākammānaṃyeva nirodho. Āhāranirodhā rūpanirodhoti pavattipaccayassa kabaḷīkārāhārassa abhāve taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpābhāvo hoti. Vipariṇāmalakkhaṇanti addhāsantatikhaṇavasena rūpassa bhaṅgaṃ, bhaṅgoyeva saṅkhatalakkhaṇattā lakkhaṇanti vutto. Idha pañca lakkhaṇānīti avijjātaṇhākammāhārānaṃ abhāvanirodhā cattāri, vipariṇāmo ekanti pañca. Esa nayo vedanākkhanthādīsu. Ayaṃ pana viseso – arūpakkhandhānaṃ udayabbayadassanaṃ addhāsantativasena, na khaṇavasena. Phasso vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhānaṃ pavattipaccayo, taṃnirodhā ca tesaṃ nirodho. Nāmarūpaṃ viññāṇakkhandhassa pavattipaccayo, taṃnirodhā ca tassa nirodhoti.
有些人则这样说:在依缘观察生灭的四种方式中,不涉及过去、未来等的区分,只从总体共同的特征上来把握,认为“由无明等而生起”,这只是把握了正在生起的状态,并不是把握生起本身;认为“由无明等灭尽而灭去”,这只是把握了不再生起的状态,并不是把握坏灭本身。而在依刹那观察生灭时,则是把握现在诸法的生起与坏灭。巴利
Keci panāhu – ‘‘catudhā paccayato udayabbayadassane atītādivibhāgaṃ anāmasitvāva sabbasāmaññavasena avijjādīhi udetīti uppajjamānabhāvamattaṃ gaṇhāti, na uppādaṃ. Avijjādinirodhā nirujjatīti anuppajjamānabhāvamattaṃ gaṇhāti, na bhaṅgaṃ. Khaṇato udayabbayadassane paccuppannānaṃ uppādaṃ bhaṅgaṃ gaṇhātī’’ti.
然而,修观的人在实际修观时,先按缘来作意生灭,到了修观的阶段,就放下无明等四种法,只取有生有灭的诸蕴,观察它们的生灭。他这样详细观察依缘和依刹那的生灭:“色等是这样生起的,色等是这样灭去的;色等是这样生起,这样灭去。”这时,他对“这些法确实先前没有而生成,生成之后又灭去”的智慧就变得更加清晰,四圣谛、缘起的理路和相状的差别也都变得明显。因为他观察到“由无明等集起,所以有诸蕴的集起”,以及“由无明等灭尽,所以有诸蕴的灭尽”,这就是他依缘观察生灭。而当他观察到生起之相和变易之相,见到诸蕴的生灭时,这就是他依刹那观察生灭。因为生起之相只存在于生起的那一刹那,变易之相只存在于坏灭的那一刹那。巴利
Vipassamāno pana vipassako paṭhamaṃ paccayato udayabbayaṃ manasikaritvā vipassanākāle avijjādike caturo dhamme vissajjetvā udayabbayavanteyeva khandhe gahetvā tesaṃ udayabbayaṃ passati, evañca tassa vipassakassa ‘‘evaṃ rūpādīnaṃ udayo, evaṃ vayo, evaṃ rūpādayo udenti, evaṃ ventī’’ti paccayato ca khaṇato ca vitthārena udayabbayaṃ passato ‘‘iti kira ime dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’’ti ñāṇaṃ visadataraṃ hoti, saccapaṭiccasamuppādanayalakkhaṇabhedā pākaṭā honti . Yañhi so avijjādisamudayā khandhānaṃ samudayaṃ avijjādinirodhā ca khandhānaṃ nirodhaṃ passati, idamassa paccayato udayabbayadassanaṃ. Yaṃ pana nibbattilakkhaṇavipariṇāmalakkhaṇāni passanto khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ passati, idamassa khaṇato udayabbayadassanaṃ. Uppattikkhaṇeyeva hi nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ, bhaṅgakkhaṇe ca vipariṇāmalakkhaṇaṃ.
这样,当他从缘和刹那两方面观察生灭时:通过从缘的角度观察生起,明白了“能生”的道理,集谛就显现出来;通过从刹那的角度观察生起,明白了生本身就是苦,苦谛就显现出来;通过从缘的角度观察灭去,明白了缘若不生起,缘所生之法也不生起,灭谛就显现出来;通过从刹那的角度观察灭去,明白了死本身就是苦,苦谛本身也显现出来。而他这种生灭观察,是世间之道,因为在此中灭除了迷惑,所以道谛就显现出来。巴利
Iccassevaṃ paccayato ceva khaṇato ca dvedhā udayabbayaṃ passato paccayato udayadassanena samudayasaccaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti janakāvabodhato. Khaṇato udayadassanena dukkhasaccaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti jātidukkhāvabodhato. Paccayato vayadassanena nirodhasaccaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti paccayānuppādena paccayavataṃ anuppādāvabodhato. Khaṇato vayadassanena dukkhasaccameva pākaṭaṃ hoti maraṇadukkhāvabodhato. Yañcassa udayabbayadassanaṃ, maggovāyaṃ lokikoti maggasaccaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti tatra sammohavighātato.
依靠缘来观察生起时,因为能体悟“这个存在,那个就存在”,顺的缘起就变得清楚明白。依靠缘来观察灭去时,因为能体悟“这个灭去,那个就灭去”,逆的缘起就变得清楚明白。而依靠刹那来观察生灭时,因为能体悟有为法的特相,缘生的诸法就变得清楚明白。因为确实,具有生灭的就是有为法,而那些正是缘生的。巴利
Paccayato cassa udayadassanena anulomo paṭiccasamuppādo pākaṭo hoti ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.404; saṃ. ni. 2.21; udā. 1) avabodhato. Paccayato vayadassanena paṭilomo paṭiccasamuppādo pākaṭo hoti ‘‘imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.406; saṃ. ni. 2.21; udā. 2) avabodhato. Khaṇato pana udayabbayadassanena paṭiccasamuppannā dhammā pākaṭā honti saṅkhatalakkhaṇāvabodhato. Udayabbayavanto hi saṅkhatā, te ca paṭiccasamuppannāti.
依靠缘来观察生起时,因为能看清因果之间的关联、相续不断,所以“同一性”的道理就清楚显现出来。这时,就能更彻底地舍断断见。依靠刹那来观察生起时,因为能看清新的法不断生起,所以“差异性”的道理就清楚显现出来。这时,就能更彻底地舍断常见。依靠缘来观察生灭时,因为能看清诸法没有自主性、不能自己掌控,所以“无作用”的道理就清楚显现出来。这时,就能更彻底地舍断我见。依靠缘来观察生起时,因为能看清果是随顺缘而生的,所以“法性”的道理就清楚显现出来。这时,就能更彻底地舍断无作用见。巴利
Paccayato cassa udayadassanena ekattanayo pākaṭo hoti hetuphalasambandhena santānassa anupacchedāvabodhato. Atha suṭṭhutaraṃ ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati. Khaṇato udayadassanena nānattanayo pākaṭo hoti navanavānaṃ uppādāvabodhato. Atha suṭṭhutaraṃ sassatadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati. Paccayato cassa udayabbayadassanena abyāpāranayo pākaṭo hoti dhammānaṃ avasavattibhāvāvabodhato. Atha suṭṭhutaraṃ attadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati. Paccayato pana udayadassanena evaṃdhammatānayo pākaṭo hoti paccayānurūpena phalassuppādāvabodhato. Atha suṭṭhutaraṃ akiriyadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati.
从缘的角度观察生起时,诸法的无我相就会清楚显现,因为能体会到:诸法没有造作者,它们的生起完全依赖于各种条件。从刹那的角度观察生灭时,无常相就会清楚显现,因为能体会到:诸法生起之后就不存在了,而且前际与后际彼此隔绝。苦相也会清楚显现,因为能体会到:生与灭本身就是逼迫。自性相也会清楚显现,因为能体会到:诸法被生与灭所限定。在自性相中,有为相的暂时性也会清楚显现,因为能体会到:在生的刹那,灭并不存在;在灭的刹那,生也不存在。巴利
Paccayato cassa udayadassanena anattalakkhaṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti dhammānaṃ nirīhakattapaccayapaṭibaddhavuttitāvabodhato. Khaṇato udayabbayadassanena aniccalakkhaṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti hutvā abhāvāvabodhato, pubbantāparantavivekāvabodhato ca. Dukkhalakkhaṇampi pākaṭaṃ hoti udayabbayehi paṭipīḷanāvabodhato. Sabhāvalakkhaṇampi pākaṭaṃ hoti udayabbayaparicchinnāvabodhato . Sabhāvalakkhaṇe saṅkhatalakkhaṇassa tāvakālikattampi pākaṭaṃ hoti, udayakkhaṇe vayassa, vayakkhaṇe ca udayassa abhāvāvabodhatoti.
当他对谛、缘起、理和相的差别已经这样清楚地了知之后,诸行就以“这些法确实是从未生起而新生起,生起之后又灭去”的方式,显现为刹那刹那都是新的。而且不只是刹那常新,它们还像太阳升起时的露珠、水泡、水中的棍影、针尖上的芥子、闪电一样,住留极短;又像幻术、阳焰、梦境、旋火轮、乾闼婆城、水沫、芭蕉树等一样,显现为没有实质、没有核心。到了这一步,他通过“只有坏灭之法生起,生起之后又走向坏灭”这种方式,通达并安住于五十种相,这时的观智就叫作生灭随观,是最初还稚嫩的观智;由于获得这种观智,他被称为“已开始修观的人”。安住于这种观智时,光明等十种观随染会生起。因为这些随染生起,不善巧的修行者会把它们当成道智,把不是道的执为“道”,于是被随染的缠结所缠缚。善巧的修行者则把这些随染作为观照的对象,解开随染的缠结,这样判定:“这些法不是道,只有远离随染、走上正确轨道的观智才是道。”从而分清什么是道、什么是非道。这样了知道与非道而安住的智,就叫作道非道智见清净。巴利
Tassevaṃ pākaṭībhūtasaccapaṭiccasamuppādanayalakkhaṇabhedassa ‘‘evaṃ kira nāmime dhammā anuppannapubbā uppajjanti, uppannā nirujjhantī’’ti niccanavāva hutvā saṅkhārā upaṭṭhahanti. Na kevalañca niccanavāva, sūriyuggamane ussāvabindu viya udakapubbuḷo viya udake daṇḍarāji viya āragge sāsapo viya vijjuppādo viya ca parittaṭṭhāyino māyāmarīcisupinantaalātacakkagandhabbanagarapheṇakadaliādayo viya asārā nissārāti cāpi upaṭṭhahanti. Ettāvatā tena ‘‘vayadhammameva uppajjati, uppannañca vayaṃ upetī’’ti iminā ākārena samapaññāsa lakkhaṇāni paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitaṃ udayabbayānupassanā nāma paṭhamaṃ taruṇavipassanāñāṇaṃ adhigataṃ hoti, yassādhigamā ‘‘āraddhavipassako’’ti saṅkhaṃ gacchati. Imasmiṃ ñāṇe ṭhitassa obhāsādayo dasa vipassanūpakkilesā uppajjanti, yesaṃ uppattiyā akusalo yogāvacaro tesu maggañāṇasaññī hutvā amaggameva ‘‘maggo’’ti gaṇhāti, upakkilesajaṭājaṭito ca hoti. Kusalo pana yogāvacaro tesu vipassanaṃ āropento upakkilesajaṭaṃ vijaṭetvā ‘‘ete dhammā na maggo, upakkilesavimuttaṃ pana vīthipaṭipannaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggo’’ti maggañca amaggañca vavatthapeti. Tassevaṃ maggañca amaggañca ñatvā ṭhitaṃ ñāṇaṃ maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi nāma.
到这里,他已经对四谛作出了确定。怎么确定的呢?当把握了名色,就必然能把握它们的因缘,因此,通过前面讲过的、被称为“法住智”的、也就是名为“见清净”的名色确定,就是对苦谛作出了确定;通过名为“度疑清净”的因缘把握,就是对集谛作出了确定。以生灭随观,通过观察刹那的生灭,对苦谛作出了确定;通过观察因缘方面的生起,对集谛作出了确定;通过观察因缘方面的灭去,对灭谛作出了确定。再者,他观察生灭时,认识到“这是世间道”,由此消除了迷惑;并且在“道非道智见清净”中,修观者通过确定什么是真正的道,就是对道谛作出了确定。这样,暂时依世间智,就已经对四谛作出了确定。巴利
Ettāvatā ca pana tena catunnaṃ saccānaṃ vavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Kathaṃ? Nāmarūpapariggahe sati paccayapariggahasambhavato dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇavacaneneva vuttena diṭṭhivisuddhisaṅkhātena nāmarūpavavatthāpanena dukkhasaccassa vavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti, kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhisaṅkhātena paccayapariggahaṇena samudayasaccassa vavatthānaṃ, udayabbayānupassanena ca khaṇato udayabbayadassanena dukkhasaccassa vavatthānaṃ kataṃ, paccayato udayadassanena samudayasaccassa vavatthānaṃ, paccayato vayadassanena nirodhasaccassa vavatthānaṃ, yañcassa udayabbayadassanaṃ, maggovāyaṃ lokikoti tatra sammohavighātato imissañca maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhiyaṃ vipassato sammā maggassa avadhāraṇena maggasaccassa vavatthānaṃ kataṃ. Evaṃ lokiyena tāva ñāṇena catunnaṃ saccānaṃ vavatthānaṃ kataṃ hotīti.
7. 坏灭随观智的详细解释巴利
7. Bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
51 51. 当一位修行的瑜伽行者安住在生灭随观中时,他通过分辨什么是道、什么不是道,认识到那个远离随烦恼、走在正确道路上的生灭随观智就是“道”。然后,为了通过观察三相使这个道变得更加清晰,他再次开始修习生灭随观。他对被生灭所限定的诸行,从无常等方面进行观察。这样一来,他的智变得锐利并持续运转,诸行轻快地呈现出来。当智锐利地运转、诸行轻快地呈现时,念就超越了生起,只安住在坏灭上。或者因为心倾向于灭,他舍弃了对生起的观察,只把念安立在坏灭上。在这个阶段,坏灭随观智生起了。现在,在解释这个智时——“以色为所缘的心生起后坏灭”——意思是,缘取色所缘的心生起之后便坏灭了。或者也可以说:当以色为所缘的状态存在时,心生起后便坏灭。“审察那个所缘”——就是审察、了知那个色所缘,见到它是灭尽、是衰坏。“随观这个心的坏灭”——意思是用那个见到色所缘为灭尽、衰坏的心,再以随后生起的心去随观那个心的坏灭。因此古代的大师们说:“所知的与能知的,两者都观照。”这里说的“心”,指的是与相应心所一起生起的心。巴利
51. So udayabbayānupassanāyaṃ ṭhito yogāvacaro maggāmaggavavatthāpanena upakkilesavimuttaṃ vīthipaṭipannaṃ udayabbayānupassanāñāṇaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti ñatvā tilakkhaṇasallakkhaṇena tasseva maggassa suvisadakaraṇatthaṃ puna udayabbayānupassanaṃ ārabhitvā udayabbayena paricchinne saṅkhāre aniccādito vipassati. Evaṃ tassa taṃ ñāṇaṃ tikkhaṃ hutvā vahati, saṅkhārā lahuṃ upaṭṭhahanti, ñāṇe tikkhe vahante saṅkhāresu lahuṃ upaṭṭhahantesu uppādaṃ atikkamitvā bhaṅge eva sati santiṭṭhati. Nirodhādhimuttattā vā udayaṃ pahāya bhaṅgeyeva satiṃ upaṭṭhapeti. Etasmiṃ ṭhāne bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Idāni tassa ñāṇassa niddese rūpārammaṇatā cittaṃ uppajjitvā bhijjatīti rūpārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ uppajjitvā bhijjati. Atha vā rūpārammaṇabhāve cittaṃ uppajjitvā bhijjatīti attho. Taṃ ārammaṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhāti taṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhāya jānitvā, khayato vayato disvāti attho. Tassa cittassa bhaṅgaṃ anupassatīti yena cittena taṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ khayato vayato diṭṭhaṃ, tassa cittassa aparena cittena bhaṅgaṃ anupassatīti attho. Tenāhu porāṇā – ‘‘ñātañca ñāṇañca ubho vipassatī’’ti. Cittanti cettha sasampayuttacittaṃ adhippetaṃ.
“随观”就是一再地观、以种种方式反复地观察。因此说“随观”。怎样随观呢?就是以无常等方式来随观,等等。在这里,因为坏灭是无常性的终极界限,所以修习坏灭随观的瑜伽行者,对一切色法都以无常来随观,而不是以常来观。接着,因为无常的就是苦,苦的就是无我,所以他就以苦来随观那色法,而不是以乐来观;以无我来随观,而不是以我来观。又因为凡是无常、苦、无我的,就不应该欢喜;凡不应该欢喜的,就不应该对它生起贪染。因此,他随顺坏灭随观的次第,在见到色法为“无常、苦、无我”时,便厌离而不欢喜,离欲而不贪染。他这样离欲时,首先仅以世间智令贪爱止息,而不令它生起,也就是不令贪爱积聚生起。或者也可以说,他这样离欲之后,对于已见的色法如此,对于未见的也依类智令其止息,而不令它生起。他只作意于灭,只见到灭,不见生起。他这样修行时,就弃舍而不执取。这话说的是什么意思呢?因为这种无常等随观,以彼分断的方式,连同诸行的造作一起舍断烦恼,又由于见到有为法的过患,而倾向、投入与它相反的涅槃,所以称为“舍离之弃舍”和“趣入之弃舍”。因此,具备这种观的比丘,按照上面所说的方式,既舍断烦恼,又投入涅槃;他不再以令烦恼生起的方式执取烦恼,也不以不见过患的方式执取有为法的所缘。因此说“弃舍而不执取”。巴利
Anupassatīti anu anu passati, anekehi ākārehi punappunaṃ passatīti attho. Tenāha anupassatīti kathaṃ anupassati, aniccato anupassatītiādi . Tattha yasmā bhaṅgo nāma aniccatāya paramā koṭi, tasmā bhaṅgānupassako yogāvacaro sabbaṃ rūpagataṃ aniccato anupassati, no niccato. Tato aniccassa dukkhattā, dukkhassa ca anattattā, tadeva dukkhato anupassati, no sukhato. Anattato anupassati, no attato . Yasmā pana yaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā, na taṃ abhinanditabbaṃ. Yañca na abhinanditabbaṃ, na tattha rajjitabbaṃ. Tasmā esa tasmiṃ bhaṅgānupassanānusārena ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā’’ti diṭṭhe rūpagate nibbindati, no nandati. Virajjati, no rajjati. So evaṃ virajjanto lokikeneva tāva ñāṇena rāgaṃ nirodheti, no samudeti, samudayaṃ na karotīti attho. Atha vā so evaṃ viratto yathā diṭṭhaṃ rūpagataṃ, tathā adiṭṭhampi anvayañāṇavasena nirodheti, no samudeti. Nirodhatova manasi karoti, nirodhamevassa passati, no samudayanti attho. So evaṃ paṭipanno paṭinissajjati, no ādiyati. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ayampi hi aniccādianupassanā tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilesānaṃ pariccajanato, saṅkhatadosadassanena ca tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandanato pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo cāti vuccati. Tasmā tāya samannāgato bhikkhu yathāvuttena nayena kilese ca pariccajati, nibbāne ca pakkhandati. Nāpi nibbattanavasena kilese ādiyati, na adosadassitāvasena saṅkhatārammaṇaṃ. Tena vuccati paṭinissajjati, no ādiyatīti.
52 52. 现在,为了说明他以那些智断除哪些法,所以说了“以无常随观断除常想”等话。其中,“欣乐”指带着喜悦的渴爱;“贪”指其余的渴爱;“集”指贪的生起,或者也可以指色法所摄事物的生起;“执取”指烦恼以再生的方式被执取。这里以及下文所说的“受所缘性”等,也应当依照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
52. Idānissa tehi ñāṇehi yesaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānaṃ hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahatītiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nandinti sappītikaṃ taṇhaṃ. Rāganti sesaṃ taṇhaṃ. Samudayanti rāgassa uppattiṃ. Atha vā rūpagatassa udayaṃ. Ādānanti nibbattanavasena kilesānaṃ ādānaṃ. Vedanārammaṇatātiādīni idha ca heṭṭhā ca vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.
在偈颂中,“事转移”是指:逐一看到色等法的坏灭之后,为了看到那个以坏灭为所缘的心本身的坏灭,又从先前那个事转到另一个事。“以慧离转”是指:舍弃生起,而安住在坏灭上。“以及转向之力”是指:逐一看到色等法的坏灭之后,为了看到以坏灭为所缘的心之坏灭,能够紧接着无间转向的力量。“审察观”是指:这种对所缘的审察,就叫坏灭随观。“以所缘类比,对两者作同一确定”是指:以现前所见到的所缘为类比、随顺推究,从而确定,以现见所缘为类比,推知“如今所见,过去诸行所摄亦曾坏灭,未来亦将坏灭”,从而将过去与未来二者确定为同一性质巴利
Gāthāsu pana vatthusaṅkamanāti rūpādīsu ekekassa bhaṅgaṃ disvā puna yena cittena bhaṅgo diṭṭho, tassāpi bhaṅgadassanavasena purimavatthuto aññavatthusaṅkamanā. Paññāya ca vivaṭṭanāti udayaṃ pahāya vaye santiṭṭhanā. Āvajjanā balañcevāti rūpādīsu ekekassa bhaṅgaṃ disvā puna bhaṅgārammaṇassa cittassa bhaṅgadassanatthaṃ anantarameva āvajjanasamatthatā. Paṭisaṅkhā vipassanāti esā ārammaṇapaṭisaṅkhā bhaṅgānupassanā nāma. Ārammaṇaanvayenaubho ekavavatthanāti paccakkhato diṭṭhassa ārammaṇassa anvayena anugamanena yathā idaṃ, tathā atītepi saṅkhāragataṃ bhijji, anāgatepi bhijjissatīti evaṃ ubhinnaṃ ekasabhāveneva vavatthāpananti attho. Vuttampi cetaṃ porāṇehi –
当清净的见现前时,就能依着它推及过去与未来;
一切属于行的法都会坏灭,就像太阳升起时的露珠一样。巴利
‘‘Saṃvijjamānamhi visuddhadassano, tadanvayaṃ neti atītanāgate; Sabbepi saṅkhāragatā palokino, ussāvabindū sūriyeva uggate’’ti.
对灭的倾向:这样把两者的坏灭方式归为一种确定之后,对那被称为坏灭的灭生起倾向、以它为重、朝向它、趣向它、倾注于它——这就是它的意思。坏相观:这就是说,这叫做坏相观。并审察所缘:就是先了知色等在前面的所缘。并随观坏灭:就是见到那所缘的坏灭之后,也随观以那所缘为对象的心的坏灭。并现起为空:对于这样随观坏灭的人,“只有诸行在坏灭,它们的破灭就是死,没有别的任何东西”——这样,空的现起就得以成就。因此古德说——巴利
Nirodhe adhimuttatāti evaṃ ubhinnaṃ bhaṅgavasena ekavavatthānaṃ katvā tasmiṃyeva bhaṅgasaṅkhāte nirodhe adhimuttatā taggarutā tanninnatā tappoṇatā tappabbhāratāti attho. Vayalakkhaṇavipassanāti esā vayalakkhaṇavipassanā nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ārammaṇañca paṭisaṅkhāti purimañca rūpādiārammaṇaṃ jānitvā. Bhaṅgañca anupassatīti tassārammaṇassa bhaṅgaṃ disvā tadārammaṇassa cittassa ca bhaṅgaṃ anupassati. Suññato ca upaṭṭhānanti tassevaṃ bhaṅgamanupassato ‘‘saṅkhārāva bhijjanti, tesaṃ bhedo maraṇaṃ, na añño koci atthī’’ti suññato upaṭṭhānaṃ ijjhati. Tenāhu porāṇā –
诸蕴在坏灭,此外并无别的什么;诸蕴的坏灭,就被称为死。
他不放逸地看见它们的灭尽,就像用金刚钻如理地穿透宝珠一样。巴利
‘‘Khandhā nirujjhanti na catthi añño, khandhāna bhedo maraṇanti vuccati; Tesaṃ khayaṃ passati appamatto, maṇiṃva vijjhaṃ vajirena yoniso’’ti.
“增上慧观”是指:对所缘的审察、对坏灭的随观,以及空的现起——这就叫作增上慧观。“于三随观善巧”是指:比丘在无常随观等三种随观中善巧。“及于四观”是指在厌离观等四种观中善巧。“于三种现起善巧”是指在坏灭现起、衰灭现起、空现起这三种现起中善巧。“于种种见不动摇”是指在常见等种种邪见中不动摇。他就这样不动摇,持续作意“未灭的正在灭,未坏的正在坏”,舍弃一切行生起、停留、转起的相状,只看见坏灭,就像脆弱的瓶子碎裂,像细微的灰尘飞散,像芝麻被碾碎一样。譬如一个有眼睛的人站在池塘边或河边,大雨的粗水滴落下时,他看见水面上一个个大水泡生起又迅速破灭;同样,他看见一切行都在坏灭、坏灭。世尊正是针对这样的修行者而说:巴利
Adhipaññā vipassanāti yā ca ārammaṇapaṭisaṅkhā, yā ca bhaṅgānupassanā, yañca suññato upaṭṭhānaṃ, ayaṃ adhipaññā vipassanā nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kusalo tīsu anupassanāsūti aniccānupassanādīsu tīsu cheko bhikkhu. Catasso ca vipassanāsūti nibbidādīsu ca catūsu vipassanāsu. Tayo upaṭṭhāne kusalatāti khayato vayato suññatoti imasmiñca tividhe upaṭṭhāne kusalatāya. Nānādiṭṭhīsu na kampatīti sassatadiṭṭhiādīsu nānappakārāsu diṭṭhīsu na vedhati. So evaṃ avedhamāno ‘‘aniruddhameva nirujjhati, abhinnameva bhijjatī’’ti pavattamanasikāro dubbalabhājanassa viya bhijjamānassa, sukhumarajasseva vippakiriyamānassa, tilānaṃ viya bhajjiyamānānaṃ sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ uppādaṭṭhitipavattanimittaṃ vissajjetvā bhedameva passati. So yathā nāma cakkhumā puriso pokkharaṇītīre vā nadītīre vā ṭhito thūlaphusitake deve vassante udakapiṭṭhe mahantamahantāni udakapubbuḷāni uppajjitvā uppajjitvā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ bhijjamānāni passeyya, evameva sabbe saṅkhārā bhijjanti bhijjantīti passati. Evarūpañhi yogāvacaraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ bhagavatā –
就像看水泡一样,就像看阳焰一样;
如是观察世间者,死王便不见他。」(法句)巴利
‘‘Yathā pubbuḷakaṃ passe, yathā passe marīcikaṃ; Evaṃ lokaṃ avekkhantaṃ, maccurājā na passatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 170);
他这样反复地观见“一切行都在坏灭、都在坏灭”,那伴随着八种利益的坏灭随观智就变得强而有力。这八种利益是:舍弃有见、放下对生命的贪恋、持续不断地精勤用功、活命清净、舍弃焦虑、没有怖畏、获得忍辱与柔和、能忍受不乐与乐。因此古德这样说:巴利
Tassevaṃ ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā bhijjanti bhijjantī’’ti abhiṇhaṃ passato aṭṭhānisaṃsaparivāraṃ bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ balappattaṃ hoti. Tatrime aṭṭhānisaṃsā – bhavadiṭṭhippahānaṃ, jīvitanikantipariccāgo, sadāyuttapayuttatā, visuddhājīvitā, ussukkappahānaṃ, vigatabhayatā, khantisoraccapaṭilābho, aratiratisahanatāti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
看到这些八种最上等的功德后,就在那里一次又一次地反复观察。
像头发着火、衣服着火的牟尼,不断观照坏灭以证得不死。巴利
‘‘Imāni aṭṭhagguṇamuttamāni, disvā tahiṃ sammasatī punappunaṃ; Ādittacelassirasūpamo muni, bhaṅgānupassī amatassa pattiyā’’ti.
过患智释义的注解巴利
8. Ādīnavañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
53 在《过患智解说》中,“生起”是指以过去的业为条件,在这里产生。“转起”是指这样产生之后的持续存在。“相”是指一切行相。“积集”是指作为未来结生之因的业。“结生”是指未来的产生。“趣”是指以某种趣而结生。“生出”是指诸蕴的产生。“往生”是指像“入定者或往生者”这样所说的果报转起。“生”是指以有为缘的出生,它是老等(苦)的条件。从确切意义上说,在各处出生的有情,那些诸蕴显现出来,它们最初显现就是“生”。“老”是指在同一生命期内,诸蕴相续被认定为牙齿脱落等而呈现旧态。“愁”是指被亲属遭难等触动后的内心焦灼。“悲”是指被亲属遭难等触动后的空洞言说。“忧”是指被亲属遭难等触动后,极度的心苦所引发的强烈忧恼,它其实就是嗔。在这里,只有生起等五种是依过患智的对象而说的,其余都是它们的同义词。因为“生出”和“生”这两个是“生起”和“结生”的同义词,“趣”和“往生”这两个是“转起”的同义词,老等则是“相”的同义词。因此说:巴利
53. Ādīnavañāṇaniddese uppādoti purimakammapaccayā idha uppatti. Pavattanti tathāuppannassa pavatti. Nimittanti sabbampi saṅkhāranimittaṃ. Āyūhanāti āyatiṃ paṭisandhihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ. Paṭisandhīti āyatiṃ uppatti. Gatīti yāya gatiyā sā paṭisandhi hoti. Nibbattīti khandhānaṃ nibbattanaṃ. Upapattīti ‘‘samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā’’ti (dha. sa. 1289) evaṃ vuttā vipākappavatti . Jātīti jarādīnaṃ paccayabhūtā bhavapaccayā jāti. Nippariyāyato tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ paṭhamapātubhāvo jāti. Jarāti khaṇḍiccādisammato santatiyaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannakhandhasantānassa purāṇabhāvo. Sokoti ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa cittasantāpo. Paridevoti ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa vacīpalāpo. Upāyāsoti bhuso āyāso, ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa adhimattacetodukkhappabhāvito dosoyeva. Ettha ca uppādādayo pañceva ādīnavañāṇassa vatthuvasena vuttā, sesā tesaṃ vevacanavasena. ‘‘Nibbatti jātī’’ti idañhi dvayaṃ uppādassa ceva paṭisandhiyā ca vevacanaṃ, ‘‘gati upapattī’’ti idaṃ dvayaṃ pavattassa, jarādayo nimittassāti. Tenāha –
他看见生起、持续和相都是苦;
积聚和结生,智于过患,如此。
这个过患智,在五种处生起。巴利
‘‘Uppādañca pavattañca, nimittaṃ dukkhanti passati; Āyūhanaṃ paṭisandhiṃ, ñāṇaṃ ādīnave ida’’nti. ca ‘‘Idaṃ ādīnave ñāṇaṃ, pañcaṭhānesu jāyatī’’ti. ca
在所有这些词当中,“bhayanti”这个词要拆成“bhayaṃ iti”来理解。“Bhayaṃ”(怖畏):因为和逼迫相连,具有令人恐惧的性质,所以叫怖畏。“iti”(如此):这是说明怖畏现起的缘由。巴利
Sabbapadesu ca bhayanti iccetassa vacanassa bhayaṃ itīti padacchedo . Bhayanti pīḷāyogato sappaṭibhayatāya bhayaṃ. Itīti bhayatupaṭṭhānassa kāraṇaniddeso.
“不生起是安稳”等话,是为了显示与过患智相对立的智而说的。或者,有些人通过怖畏现起看到过患之后,内心感到惊恐,为了让他们生起安慰,才说:也有没有怖畏的安稳,没有过患。又或者,当一个人的生起等现象以怖畏的方式清晰地呈现时,他的心就会倾向于这些现象的对立面,因此,这样说也是为了显示通过怖畏现起而成就的过患智的功德。应当这样理解。“不生起、不转起”等,指的就是涅槃。“寂静处”,就是寂静的那一部分,意思是涅槃。因为即使只是通过传闻,仅仅抓住“寂静处”这个名称而生起的智,也被称为“寂静处之智”。巴利
Anuppādo khemanti santipade ñāṇantiādi pana ādīnavañāṇassa paṭipakkhañāṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Bhayatupaṭṭhānena vā ādīnavaṃ disvā ubbiggahadayānaṃ abhayampi atthi khemaṃ nirādīnavanti assāsajananatthampi etaṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā vā yassa uppādādayo bhayato sūpaṭṭhitā honti, tassa tappaṭipakkhaninnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tasmā bhayatupaṭṭhānavasena siddhassa ādīnavañāṇassa ānisaṃsadassanatthampetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Anuppādo appavattantiādi nibbānameva. Santipadeti santikoṭṭhāse, nibbāneti attho. Anussavavasenāpi hi santipadanti nāmamattaṃ gahetvā uppannaṃ ñāṇampi ‘‘santipade ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
“生起是怖畏,不生起是安稳”等等,是站在对立面与对治面的角度把两者合起来说,并且是把握住正在生起的智而说的。在这里,凡是怖畏,因为它必定是苦;凡是苦,因为它没有脱离轮回的染着、世间的染着和烦恼的染着,所以就是有染着的;凡是有染着的,就只是诸行。因此,“生起是苦”等等,是在怖畏现起时以慧了知,称为过患智等等。即便如此,应当知道,这里是按照怖畏的样子、苦的样子、有染着的样子、诸行的样子这样不同的行相,从生起的方式来说有差别。“生起是怖畏、是苦、是有染着、是诸行”,这是不看不生起等词的词性,而像“这不是安稳的皈依,这不是最上的皈依”(《法句经》189)等句那样,只按照事物本身的词性来说的。而“诸行”一词,也是不看单一性,像“无缘法、无为法”(《法集论·双论母》7-8)等那样用复数;或者,因为生起等只是诸行的一部分,就像“北般遮罗、南般遮罗”等说法那样,对多数中的一部分也用复数,应当这样理解。“安稳、乐、无染着、涅槃”,是针对前面所说各种样子的对立面,把涅槃说为四种。“他以十种智了知”:在修过患智时,以生起等为所缘的五种,以不生起等为所缘的五种,他以这十种智了知、通达、证得。“于两种智善巧”等等,是指对过患智和寂静处智这两种智的善巧。“在各种见解中不动摇”:对于依究竟现法涅槃等而起的各种见解,不动摇。巴利
Uppādobhayaṃ, anuppādo khemantiādi vipakkhapaṭipakkhavasena ubhayaṃ samāsetvā uppajjamānaṃ ñāṇaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Ettha ca yaṃ bhayaṃ, taṃ yasmā niyamato dukkhaṃ. Yañca dukkhaṃ, taṃ vaṭṭāmisalokāmisakilesāmisehi avippamuttattā sāmisameva. Yañca sāmisaṃ, taṃ saṅkhāramattameva. Tasmā uppādo dukkhanti bhayatupaṭṭhāne paññā ādīnave ñāṇantiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi bhayākārena dukkhākārena sāmisākārena saṅkhārākārenāti evaṃ ākāranānattato pavattivasenettha nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Uppādo bhayaṃ, dukkhaṃ, sāmisaṃ, saṅkhārā cāti uppādādiliṅgamanapekkhitvā ‘‘netaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, netaṃ saraṇamuttama’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 189) viya attano liṅgāpekkhameva vuttaṃ. Saṅkhārāti ca ekattamanapekkhitvā ‘‘appaccayā dhammā, asaṅkhatā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. dukamātikā 7-8) viya bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ, uppādādīnaṃ vā saṅkhārekadesattā ‘‘uttare pañcālā, dakkhiṇe pañcālā’’tiādīsu viya bahunnaṃ ekadesepi bahuvacanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Khemaṃ sukhaṃ nirāmisaṃ nibbānanti nibbānameva vuttākārānaṃ paṭipakkhavasena catudhā vuttaṃ. Dasa ñāṇe pajānātīti ādīnave ñāṇaṃ pajānanto uppādādivatthukāni pañca, anuppādādivatthukāni pañcāti dasa ñāṇe pajānāti paṭivijjhati sacchikaroti. Dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kusalatāti ādīnavañāṇassa ceva santipadañāṇassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kusalatāya. Nānādiṭṭhīsu na kampatīti paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānādivasena pavattāsu diṭṭhīsu na vedhatīti.
行舍智的论释巴利
9. Saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
54 在《行舍智论释》中,“生起”等词的意思和前面说过的完全一样。“是苦”“是怖畏”“是有染着”“是诸行”这些说法,是用来表达“从生起等中解脱之智”产生的原因。这样从特相上说明了行舍之后,现在为了从含义上说明它,就说“生起即是诸行,对诸行保持中舍,所以叫行舍”等等。其中,“对诸行保持中舍”的意思是:那位已经开始修观的行者,因为以观智见到了三种特相,在拣择诸相方面已经放下了造作,就像看着燃烧着的三界一样,对诸行的执取处于中舍状态。那观智一方面特别地照见诸行,另一方面也以不执取的方式照见、观察,所以就叫“行舍”。就像世间说“特别地战胜”叫“胜”,说“舍离食物而住”叫“斋戒”一样,这个词的构成也是这个道理。再者,从无常等方面观照诸行之后,安住在对执取保持中舍状态的行舍,又再对行舍本身从无常等方面加以观照。因为这种智本身也安住在对执取的中舍状态,所以由于行舍智的存在,就说“那些行以及那种舍”等等。巴利
54. Saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaniddese uppādādīni vuttatthāneva. Dukkhanti bhayanti sāmisanti saṅkhārāti uppādādimuñcanañāṇassa kāraṇavacanāni. Evañca lakkhaṇato saṅkhārupekkhaṃ dassetvā idāni atthato dassetuṃ uppādo saṅkhārā, te saṅkhāre ajjhupekkhatīti saṅkhārupekkhātiādimāha. Tattha saṅkhāre ajjhupekkhatīti tassa āraddhavipassakassa vipassanāñāṇena lakkhaṇattayassa diṭṭhattā lakkhaṇavicinane pahīnabyāpārassa āditte viya tayo bhave passato saṅkhāraggahaṇe majjhattassa taṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ te saṅkhāre visesena ca ikkhati, gahaṇena vajjitañca hutvā ikkhati oloketīti saṅkhārupekkhā nāmāti attho. Yathā loke visesena jayanto adhijayatīti, annena vajjito vasanto upavasatīti vuccati. Puna saṅkhāre aniccādito vipassitvā gahaṇe majjhattabhāvasaṇṭhitaṃ saṅkhārupekkhampi aniccādito vipassitvā tassāpi saṅkhārupekkhāya gahaṇe majjhattākārasaṇṭhitāya saṅkhārupekkhāya sabbhāvato ye ca saṅkhārā yā ca upekkhātiādi vuttaṃ.
55 55. 现在为了说明将心导向行舍的种种差别,说了“以几种行相”等话。其中,“于行舍”是位格用法。“将心导向”,是指已获得行舍的人,让除此之外的心朝向行舍,强有力地牵引过去。这里“abhi”这个词是“朝向”的意思,“nī”这个词是“强力”的意思。对于“以几种行相”这个提问,回答了“以八种行相”之后,本应通过第二次问答来显示那八种行相,却没有先显示它们,而是提出了“凡夫以几种行相”等问题。至于“凡夫”——巴利
55. Idāni saṅkhārupekkhāya cittābhinīhārabhedaṃ dassetuṃ katihākārehītiādimāha. Tattha saṅkhārupekkhāyāti bhummavacanaṃ. Cittassa abhinīhāroti saṅkhārupekkhālābhino tato aññassa cittassa saṅkhārupekkhābhimukhaṃ katvā bhusaṃ haraṇaṃ. Abhimukhattho hi ettha abhisaddo, bhusattho nīsaddo. Katihākārehīti pucchitaṃ pucchaṃ aṭṭhahākārehīti vissajjetvā dutiyapucchāvissajjaneneva te aṭṭhākāre dassetukāmo te adassetvāva puthujjanassa katihākārehītiādi pucchaṃ akāsi. Puthujjanassāti ettha pana –
佛陀,这位太阳的族亲,宣说了两种凡夫。
一种是盲凡夫,一种是善凡夫。巴利
Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjanoti.
在这当中,如果有人对蕴、界、处等没有学习、追问、听闻、记持、观察等,这个人就是盲凡夫。如果有人具备这些,他就是善凡夫。而这两类人——巴利
Tattha yassa khandhadhātuāyatanādīsu uggahaparipucchāsavanadhāraṇapaccavekkhaṇādīni natthi, ayaṃ andhaputhujjano. Yassa tāni atthi, so kalyāṇaputhujjano. Duvidhopi panesa –
因为生起众多烦恼等原因,所以叫凡夫。
因为属于凡夫众的范畴,所以称为“众人”。巴利
Puthūnaṃ jananādīhi, kāraṇehi puthujjano; Puthujjanantogadhattā, puthuvāyaṃ jano iti.
他确实因为产生种种不同种类的烦恼等原因而被称为凡夫。正如经中所说:“他们产生种种烦恼,所以叫凡夫;他们具有种种未破除的身见,所以叫凡夫;他们仰望众多导师的面孔,所以叫凡夫;他们未能从一切趣中出离,所以叫凡夫;他们造作种种不同的行,所以叫凡夫;他们被种种暴流冲走,所以叫凡夫;他们被种种热恼烧灼,所以叫凡夫;他们被种种炽燃焚烧,所以叫凡夫;他们对五种欲乐贪染、贪求、耽著、迷醉、执取、粘著、固著、被障碍,所以叫凡夫;他们被五种盖遮蔽、包围、笼罩、覆盖、隐藏、封堵,所以叫凡夫。”又因为这个人归属于那些数量不可计算、背离圣法、行持卑劣法的人之中,所以叫凡夫;或者,这个人被单独算作一类,与具足戒、多闻等功德的圣者们相分离,所以叫凡夫。在这里,指的是善凡夫,因为另一类根本没有修习。巴利
So hi puthūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesādīnaṃ jananādīhi kāraṇehi puthujjano. Yathāha – ‘‘puthu kilese janentīti puthujjanā, puthu avihatasakkāyadiṭṭhikāti puthujjanā, puthu satthārānaṃ mukhullokikāti puthujjanā, puthu sabbagatīhi avuṭṭhitāti puthujjanā, puthu nānābhisaṅkhāre abhisaṅkharontīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāoghehi vuyhantīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāsantāpehi santappentīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāpariḷāhehi pariḍayhantīti puthujjanā, puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattā giddhā gadhitā mucchitā ajjhosannā laggā laggitā palibuddhāti puthujjanā, puthu pañcahi nīvaraṇehi āvutā nivutā ovutā pihitā paṭicchannā paṭikujjitāti puthujjanā’’ti (mahāni. 94). Puthūnaṃ vā gaṇanapathātītānaṃ ariyadhammaparammukhānaṃ nīcadhammasamācārānaṃ janānaṃ antogadhattāpi puthujjanā, puthu vā ayaṃ visuṃyeva saṅkhaṃ gato, visaṃsaṭṭho sīlasutādiguṇayuttehi ariyehi janotipi puthujjano. Tesu kalyāṇaputhujjano idhādhippeto itarassa bhāvanāya eva abhāvā.
这里说的“有学”,指的是七有学:住于入流道、入流果、一来道、一来果、不来道、不来果、阿罗汉道的人。因为他们还在修学三学,所以叫“有学”。其中,住于入流果、一来果、不来果这三种,是这里所指的;因为住于道者缺乏以行舍之心转向。巴利
Sekkhassāti ettha satta sekkhā sotāpattimaggaphalasakadāgāmimaggaphalaanāgāmimaggaphalaarahattamaggaṭṭhā. Te hi tisso sikkhā sikkhantīti sekkhā. Tesu sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmiphalaṭṭhā tayo idhādhippetā maggaṭṭhānaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāya cittābhinīhārābhāvā.
这里“离贪者”的意思是:通过彻底断除而贪已经消失,所以叫离贪者。这是对阿罗汉的称呼。在三处段落中,因为都是指同一种人,所以统一用了单数形式。巴利
Vītarāgassāti ettha samucchedavigamena vigato rāgo assāti vītarāgo. Arahato etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tīsupi padesu jātiggahaṇena ekavacanaṃ kataṃ.
对行舍感到欢喜,意思是:在那舍的安住中,获得了安住之乐想之后,由于喜爱安住之乐,便朝向行舍而欢喜,生起带有喜的渴爱,这就是它的含义。观察,是指为了证得入流道,以无常等角度作各种观察;有学圣者为了证得更高的道而观察;离贪者为了现法乐住而观察。审虑之后,是指同样以无常等角度加以审察。然而,因为入流等圣者进入各自相应的果等至时,如果不以生灭智等九种观智先行观察,就无法进入,所以才说或者审虑之后进入果等至。巴利
Saṅkhārupekkhaṃ abhinandatīti tasmiṃ upekkhāvihāre phāsuvihārasaññaṃ paṭilabhitvā phāsuvihāranikantiyā saṅkhārupekkhābhimukho hutvā nandati, sappītikaṃ taṇhaṃ uppādetīti attho. Vipassatīti sotāpattimaggapaṭilābhatthaṃ aniccādivasena vividhā passati, sekkho uparimaggatthaṃ, vītarāgo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ vipassati. Paṭisaṅkhāyāti aniccādivaseneva upaparikkhitvā. Yasmā pana sotāpannādayo ariyā sakaṃ sakaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjamānā udayabbayañāṇādīhi navahi vipassanāñāṇehi avipassitvā samāpajjituṃ na sakkonti, tasmā paṭisaṅkhāya vā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjatīti vuttaṃ.
为了说明果等至的运作方式,关于它们有这些论题:什么是果等至?哪些人进入它?哪些人不进入它?为什么进入它?进入它的方式是怎样的?安住的方式是怎样的?出起的方式是怎样的?什么紧接在果之后?果又紧接在什么之后?巴利
Phalasamāpattiyā pavattidassanatthaṃ pana tesaṃ idaṃ pañhakammaṃ – kā phalasamāpatti? Ke taṃ samāpajjanti? Ke na samāpajjanti? Kasmā samāpajjanti? Kathañcassā samāpajjanaṃ hoti? Kathaṃ ṭhānaṃ? Kathaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ? Kiṃ phalassa anantaraṃ? Kassa ca phalaṃ anantaranti?
在这里,什么是果等至?就是心对圣果的灭尽(涅槃)的安止。巴利
Tattha kā phalasamāpattīti? Yā ariyaphalassa nirodhe appanā.
哪些人能进入它?哪些人不能进入?所有凡夫都不能进入。为什么?因为他们还没有证得。而所有圣者都能进入。为什么?因为他们已经证得。不过,上位的圣者不进入下位的果等至,因为他们已经超越了个别位次而得以止息;下位的圣者也不进入上位的果等至,因为还没有证得。至于每一位圣者进入各自相应的果等至,则所有圣者都能,这就是这里的结论。巴利
Ke taṃ samāpajjanti? Ke na samāpajjantīti? Sabbepi puthujjanā na samāpajjanti. Kasmā? Anadhigatattā. Ariyā pana sabbepi samāpajjanti. Kasmā ? Adhigatattā. Uparimā pana heṭṭhimaṃ na samāpajjanti puggalantarabhāvūpagamanena paṭippassaddhattā, heṭṭhimā ca uparimaṃ anadhigatattā. Attano attanoyeva pana phalaṃ sabbepi samāpajjantīti idamettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ.
有些人却说:“入流者和一来者也不入果定,只有上面那两种圣者才入。”他们的理由是:“因为只有这些人在定上修到了圆满。”但这个理由根本站不住脚,因为凡夫也能入自己已证得的世间定。在这里何必去争论理由成立不成立呢?难道不就在这《无碍解道》里,回答“哪十种行舍依观而生的?哪十种种姓法依观而生的?”这些问题时,已经分别说到了“为入流果等至”“为一来果等至”吗?所以,应当在这里得出定论:一切圣者都能入各自相应的果定。巴利
Keci pana ‘‘sotāpannasakadāgāminopi na samāpajjanti, uparimā dveyeva samāpajjantī’’ti vadanti. Idañca nesaṃ kāraṇaṃ – ete hi samādhismiṃ paripūrakārinoti. Taṃ puthujjanassāpi attanā paṭiladdhaṃ lokiyasamādhiṃ samāpajjanato akāraṇameva. Kiñcettha kāraṇākāraṇacintāya. Nanu idheva pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘katame dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti, katame dasa gotrabhudhammā vipassanāvasena uppajjantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.60) imesaṃ pañhānaṃ vissajjane ‘‘sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāya sakadāgāmiphalasamāpattatthāyā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.60) visuṃ visuṃ vuttā. Tasmā sabbepi ariyā attano attano phalaṃ samāpajjantīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
为什么他们进入果等至呢?是为了在当下亲身体验安乐而住。就像国王享受王权的快乐、天神享受天界的快乐那样,圣者们心想“我们要体验出世间之乐”,于是划定一段时间,在想要进入的时刻就进入果等至。巴利
Kasmā samāpajjantīti? Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ. Yathā hi rājāno rajjasukhaṃ, devatā dibbasukhamanubhavanti, evaṃ ariyā ‘‘lokuttarasukhaṃ anubhavissāmā’’ti addhānaparicchedaṃ katvā icchiticchitakkhaṇe phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjanti.
它如何进入、如何安住、如何出起呢?首先,它有两种进入方式:不作意涅槃以外的任何所缘,以及作意涅槃。正如经中所说:“贤友,进入无相心解脱的等至有两个条件:不作意一切相,以及作意无相界。”这里,进入的次第是这样的:想要进入果等至的圣弟子,应当独自静坐,从生灭等方面观照诸行。当他这样依次修观时,在以诸行为所缘的种姓智之后,心就依果等至的力量,投向并安住于灭。在这里,因为心倾向于果等至,所以即使是有学圣者,生起的也只是果心,而不是道心。但有些人说:“入流者为进入果等至而修观,结果变成一来者;一来者又变成不来者。”对他们应当说:“照这样说,不来者就会变成阿拉汉,阿拉汉就会变成独觉佛,独觉佛又会变成佛陀了。”巴利
Kathañcassā samāpajjanaṃ hoti, kathaṃ ṭhānaṃ, kathaṃ vuṭṭhānanti? Dvīhi tāva ākārehi assā samāpajjanaṃ hoti nibbānato aññassa ārammaṇassa amanasikārā, nibbānassa ca manasikārā. Yathāha – ‘‘dve kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā sabbanimittānañca amanasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā manasikāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458). Ayaṃ panettha samāpajjanakkamo – phalasamāpattatthikena hi ariyasāvakena rahogatena paṭisallīnena udayabbayādivasena saṅkhārā vipassitabbā. Tassa pavattānupubbavipassanassa saṅkhārārammaṇagotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ phalasamāpattivasena nirodhe cittaṃ appeti. Phalasamāpattininnatāya cettha sekkhassāpi phalameva uppajjati, na maggo. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘sotāpanno ‘phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjissāmī’ti vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā sakadāgāmī hoti, sakadāgāmī ca anāgāmī’’ti. Te vattabbā ‘‘evaṃ sati anāgāmī arahā bhavissati, arahā paccekabuddho, paccekabuddho ca buddho’’ti.
因此,那(种异论)毫无根据,也不应认为它仅是依圣典文句而被驳斥。真正应当接受的是这个:即使是有学圣者,生起的也只是果心,不是道心。而且,就他的果来说,如果他之前证得的是初禅的道,那生起的就是初禅的果;如果证得的是第二禅等当中某一种禅的道,那生起的就是第二禅等当中相应那一种禅的果。这样,就是他进入果定方式。巴利
Tasmā na kiñci etaṃ, pāḷivaseneva ca paṭikkhittantipi na gahetabbaṃ. Idameva pana gahetabbaṃ. Sekkhassāpi phalameva uppajjati, na maggo. Phalañcassa sace anena paṭhamajjhāniko maggo adhigato hoti, paṭhamajjhānikameva uppajjati, sace dutiyādīsu aññatarajjhāniko, dutiyādīsu aññatarajjhānikamevāti evaṃ tāvassā samāpajjanaṃ hoti.
贤友,无相心解脱的安住有三种缘:不作意一切相,作意无相界,以及事先的加行。根据这段经文,它的安住就通过这三种方式成立。其中,事先的加行是指在入定之前对时间所作的限定。因为他已经限定“我将在某个时候出定”,在那个时间到来之前,它就能一直安住。这就是它安住的方式。巴利
‘‘Tayo kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā ṭhitiyā sabbanimittānañca amanasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā manasikāro, pubbe ca abhisaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458) vacanato panassā tīhākārehi ṭhānaṃ hoti. Tattha pubbe ca abhisaṅkhāroti samāpattito pubbe kālaparicchedo. ‘‘Asukasmiṃ nāma kāle vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti paricchinnattā hissā yāva so kālo nāgacchati, tāva ṭhānaṃ hoti. Evamassa ṭhānaṃ hoti.
贤友,从无相心解脱出定有两个缘:作意于一切相,以及不作意于无相界。根据这个说法,它的出定就有这两种方式。其中,一切相指的是色相、受相、想相、行相、识相。虽然他并不是一下子对所有这些都作意,但这是从总括一切的角度来说的。因此,当他作意于那个成为有分所缘的对象时,就从果等至中出定。应当这样来理解它的出定方式。巴利
‘‘Dve kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā vuṭṭhānāya sabbanimittānañca manasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā amanasikāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458) vacanato panassā dvīhākārehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Tattha sabbanimittānanti rūpanimittavedanāsaññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇanimittānaṃ. Kāmañca na sabbānevetāni ekato manasi karoti, sabbasaṅgāhikavasena panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ bhavaṅgassa ārammaṇaṃ hoti, taṃ manasikaroto phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti evamassā vuṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
果的无间是什么?什么又是以果为无间?先说果本身:它的无间要么是另一个果,要么是有分。不过,果有以道为无间的,有以果为无间的,有以种姓为无间的,也有以非想非非想处为无间的。其中,在道心路中,果以道为无间;前一个果之后的后一个果,以前一个果为无间;在果等至中,前一个(随顺)以种姓为无间。这里所说的“种姓”,应当理解为随顺。因为《发趣论》中这样说:“阿拉汉的随顺,以无间缘为果等至的缘。有学的随顺,也以无间缘为果等至的缘。”而由那个果出灭尽定的,则以非想非非想处为无间。在此,除了在道心路中生起的果,其余一切果都是依果等至而生起的。以上,即是从道心路或果等至中的生起方式而说的。巴利
Kiṃ phalassa anantaraṃ, kassa ca phalaṃ anantaranti? Phalassa tāva phalameva vā anantaraṃ hoti bhavaṅgaṃ vā. Phalaṃ pana atthi maggānantaraṃ, atthi phalānantaraṃ, atthi gotrabhuanantaraṃ, atthi nevasaññānāsaññāyatanānantaranti. Tattha maggavīthiyaṃ maggānantaraṃ, purimassa purimassa pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ phalānantaraṃ, phalasamāpattīsu purimaṃ purimaṃ gotrabhuanantaraṃ. Gotrabhūti cettha anulomaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭṭhāne ‘‘arahato anulomaṃ phalasamāpattiyā anantarapaccayena paccayo. Sekkhānaṃ anulomaṃ phalasamāpattiyā anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417). Yena phalena nirodhā vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, taṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanānantaranti. Tattha ṭhapetvā maggavīthiyaṃ uppannaphalaṃ avasesaṃ sabbaṃ phalasamāpattivasena pavattaṃ nāma. Evametaṃ maggavīthiyaṃ vā phalasamāpattiyaṃ vā uppajjanavasena –
热恼已经止息,以不死为所缘,清净美好;
舍弃了世间诱惑、寂静的、最上的沙门果。巴利
‘‘Paṭippassaddhadarathaṃ, amatārammaṇaṃ subhaṃ; Vantalokāmisaṃ santaṃ, sāmaññaphalamuttama’’nti.
“已审察彼”的意思是:用另一种同类的观智去审察那个行舍。在“以空住”等说法里,对于不想进入果等至、只想以观住而住的阿罗汉,他看见对自我的执取是可怕的,因此心倾向于空,在行舍中观见诸行的坏灭,这三种观住就叫作“空住”;他看见诸行的相是可怕的,因此心倾向于无相,在行舍中观见诸行的坏灭,这三种观住就叫作“无相住”;他看见渴爱的愿求是可怕的,因此心倾向于无愿,在行舍中观见诸行的坏灭,这三种观住就叫作“无愿住”。正如接下来所说的——巴利
Tadajjhupekkhitvāti taṃ saṅkhārupekkhaṃ aññena tādiseneva vipassanāñāṇena ajjhupekkhitvā. Suññatavihārena vātiādīsu phalasamāpattiṃ vinā vipassanāvihāreneva viharitukāmassa arahato attābhinivesaṃ bhayato disvā suññatādhimuttassa saṅkhārupekkhāya vayaṃ passantassa vipassanattayavihāro suññatavihāro nāma, saṅkhāranimittaṃ bhayato disvā animittādhimuttassa saṅkhārupekkhāya vayaṃ passantassa vipassanattayavihāro animittavihāro nāma, taṇhāpaṇidhiṃ bhayato disvā appaṇihitādhimuttassa saṅkhārupekkhāya vayaṃ passantassa vipassanattayavihāro appaṇihitavihāro nāma. Tathā hi parato vuttaṃ –
把执取看成可怕的事,因为心倾向于空,所以在每一次接触中都看到坏灭,这就是空住。把相看成可怕的事,因为心倾向于无相,所以在每一次接触中都看到坏灭,这就是无相住。把愿求看成可怕的事,因为心倾向于无愿,所以在每一次接触中都看到坏灭,这就是无愿住。巴利
‘‘Abhinivesaṃ bhayato sampassamāno suññate adhimuttattā phussa phussa vayaṃ passati, suññato vihāro. Nimittaṃ bhayato sampassamāno animitte adhimuttattā phussa phussa vayaṃ passati, animitto vihāro. Paṇidhiṃ bhayato sampassamāno appaṇihite adhimuttattā phussa phussa vayaṃ passati, appaṇihito vihāro’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.78).
因为具备了六支舍,又因为安住于对违逆境的不违逆想等状态,只有阿罗汉才能以一切方式完全自在地掌控其心,所以说这种观住只有阿罗汉才能成就。至于“离贪者观行舍”等文句,这里应当理解为:既不落入三种怖畏,也不落入三种倾向,纯粹只是观而已。这样,前后文就有了区别。巴利
Chaḷaṅgupekkhāsabbhāvena ca paṭikūle appaṭikūlasaññādivihārasabbhāvena ca arahatoyeva sabbākārena cittaṃ vase vattati, tato ayaṃ vipassanāvihāro arahatoyeva ijjhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vītarāgo saṅkhārupekkhaṃ vipassati vāti ettha pana tidhā ca bhayaṃ, tidhā ca adhimuttiṃ anāpajjitvā kevalaṃ vipassanāti veditabbā. Evañhi sati pubbāparaviseso hoti.
56 现在,为了依据两种或三种人的情况,说明行舍的单一性与差异性的分别,经文开始说“如何对凡夫和有学……”等。在这里,“心的引出成为单一性”就是成为一,应当知道这是依自性而说的抽象名词。就像说“此缘”即是“此缘性”,同样,“单一性”也就是单一。或者,“引出”是属格作主格用,意思是“引出的”;应当知道,就像“清扫该处后”等例子中那样,发生了格的转变。“心被染污”,是指被称作观喜的贪烦恼所染污,意思是心被烧灼、被逼迫。“成为修习的障碍”,是指对已获得的观修造成损害。“成为通达的障碍”,是指对依观修应当获得的圣谛通达造成障碍。“成为未来结生的缘”,意思是:由于与行舍相应的业力量强大,当以此业而投生善趣时,那种名为随喜的贪烦恼,就成为未来欲界善趣结生的缘。因为与烦恼俱行的业能产生果报,所以业是令生缘,烦恼是支持缘。对于有学来说,“更高的通达”,是指以一来道等方式证得圣谛的通达。“成为未来结生的缘”,则是这样:有学之中,那些未证得禅那的入流者和一来者,当依行舍业投生于欲界善趣时,随喜烦恼便成为结生的缘;然而,对于已证禅那者以及不来者,因为他们在梵天世界结生,所以不是缘。还应当知道,依随顺与种姓所给予的结生,此烦恼亦是缘。巴利
56. Idāni dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena saṅkhārupekkhāya ekattanānattabhedaṃ dassetukāmo kathaṃ puthujjanassa ca sekkhassa cātiādimāha. Tattha cittassa abhinīhāro ekattaṃ hotīti eko hoti, sakatthe bhāvavacananti veditabbaṃ. Yathā idappaccayā eva idappaccayatāti vuttaṃ, tathā ekova ekattaṃ. Abhinīhāroti sāmiatthe paccattavacanaṃ vā, abhinīhārassāti attho. ‘‘So deso sammajjitvā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 168) viya vibhattivipallāso katoti veditabbo. Cittaṃ kilissatīti vipassanānikantisaṅkhātena lobhakilesena cittaṃ kilissati, tāpīyati bādhīyatīti attho. Bhāvanāya paripantho hotīti paṭiladdhāya vipassanābhāvanāya upaghāto hoti. Paṭivedhassa antarāyo hotīti vipassanābhāvanāya paṭilabhitabbassa saccappaṭivedhassa paṭilābhantarāyo hoti. Āyatiṃ paṭisandhiyā paccayo hotīti saṅkhārupekkhāsampayuttakammassa balavattā teneva sugatipaṭisandhiyā dīyamānāya atinandanasaṅkhāto lobhakileso anāgate kāmāvacarasugatipaṭisandhiyā paccayo hoti . Yasmā kilesasahāyaṃ kammaṃ vipākaṃ janeti, tasmā kammaṃ janakapaccayo hoti, kileso upatthambhakapaccayo. Sekkhassa pana uttaripaṭivedhassāti sakadāgāmimaggādivasena saccappaṭivedhassa. Āyatiṃ paṭisandhiyā paccayo hotīti sekkhesu sotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃ anadhigatajjhānānaṃ saṅkhārupekkhākammena dīyamānāya kāmāvacarasugatipaṭisandhiyā abhinandanakileso paccayo hoti, jhānalābhīnaṃ pana anāgāmissa ca brahmalokeyeva paṭisandhānato paccayo na hoti, anulomagotrabhūhi ca dīyamānāya paṭisandhiyā ayameva kileso paccayo hotīti veditabbo.
从无常的角度看:因为存在之后又归于消失,所以具有无常性,又因为有开始和终结,所以观为无常。从苦的角度看:因为不断逼迫,又因为生灭的逼迫,以及作为苦的所依,所以观为苦。从无我的角度看:因为不能自主,又因为依因缘而生起,以及没有主人、没有住者、没有作者、没有受者,所以观为无我。从随观的角度看:就是对无常等不断反复地观察。引出成为多样性:应当理解为,引出是种种,或者引出有种种状态。巴利
Aniccatoti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccantikatāya ādiantavantatāya ca aniccato. Dukkhatoti abhiṇhaṃ paṭipīḷanaṭṭhena uppādavayapaṭipīḷanatāya dukkhavatthutāya ca dukkhato. Anattatoti avasavattanaṭṭhena paccayāyattavuttitāya sāminivāsīkārakavedakābhāvena ca anattato. Anupassanaṭṭhenāti anu anu aniccādito passanaṭṭhena. Abhinīhāro nānattaṃ hotīti abhinīhāro nānā hotīti vā abhinīhārassa nānābhāvo hotīti vā veditabbaṃ.
善:因为无病、没有过失、由善巧而生,所以叫善。无记:因为不能用善或不善来说明。有时能清楚知道:指修观的时候能清楚地知道。有时不能清楚知道:指生起欢喜执著的时候不能清楚地知道。彻底清楚知道:因为已经断除了欢喜执著,所以一向都清楚地知道。从“已知”和“非已知”这两个意义来说:在这里,凡夫和有学圣者即使处于清楚知道的状态,也成为已知;离贪者即使处于彻底清楚知道的状态,也成为已知;两者即使处于不能清楚知道的状态,也不是非已知。巴利
Kusalāti ārogyaṭṭhena anavajjaṭṭhena kosallasambhūtaṭṭhena ca. Abyākatāti kusalākusalabhāvena na byākatā. Kiñcikāle suviditāti vipassanākāle suṭṭhu viditā. Kiñcikāle na suviditāti abhinandanakāle na suṭṭhu viditā. Accantaṃ suviditāti abhinandanāya pahīnattā ekantena suviditā. Viditaṭṭhena ca aviditaṭṭhena cāti ettha puthujjanasekkhānaṃ suviditaṭṭhopi vītarāgassa accantasuviditaṭṭhopi viditaṭṭhova hoti, dvinnampi na suviditaṭṭho aviditaṭṭhova.
所谓“未满足”,是因为观应当完成的事还没有做完,所以还不算圆满殊胜。与此相反,就是“满足”。“为了断除三种结”,就是为了断除有身见、疑和戒禁取。即使是最后一生投生的菩萨,也归入这一类。而不是最后一生投生的菩萨,则把观推进到行舍智之后就停在那里。“为了获得入流道”,不连读就是“为了获得入流道”,连读的话,文句更优美。“有学,因为已断三种结”,这是对入流者、一来者和不还者的通称。因为一来者和不还者也已断除这三结。“为了获得更高果位”,是为了获得一层比一层更高的道。“为了现法安乐住”,是为了在现前可见的自体中那安乐而住。“以果定之义的住”,是以有学者的果定之义,是以离贪者的观住和果定之义。巴利
Atittattāti vipassanāya karaṇīyassa apariyositattā appaṇītabhāvena. Tabbiparītena tittattā. Tiṇṇaṃ saññojanānaṃ pahānāyāti sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsānaṃ pahānatthaṃ. Pacchimabhavikāpi bodhisattā ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Apacchimabhavikā pana vipassanaṃ saṅkhārupekkhaṃ pāpetvā ṭhapenti. Sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭilābhatthāyāti asamāsetvā paṭhanti, samāsetvā pāṭho sundarataro. Sekkho tiṇṇaṃ saññojanānaṃ pahīnattāti sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmīnaṃ sāmaññena vuttaṃ. Sakadāgāmianāgāmīnampi hi tāni pahīnāneva. Uttaripaṭilābhatthāyāti uparūparimaggapaṭilābhatthaṃ. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthāyāti diṭṭheva dhamme paccakkhe attabhāve yo sukho vihāro, tadatthāya. Vihārasamāpattaṭṭhenāti sekkhassa phalasamāpattaṭṭhena, vītarāgassa vipassanāvihāraphalasamāpattaṭṭhena.
57 57. 现在为了说明行舍的数目界限,说了“行舍有几种”等话。其中,“依止”是指依于定。或者,这正是原文的读法。“于盖中审虑”:把五盖把握为应当断除的。“安住”:因为已经朝向断除诸盖,即使在断除它们时也不作加行,以中舍的状态而安住。“于行舍中”:因为在断盖时不作加行,所以对被称为行的那些盖法,处于舍的状态。这个道理对寻、伺等也同样适用。在止中,所谓行舍,是指接近安止道前分、已获得强力的修所成慧。关于“为得入流道”等四道句中,可以获得空、无相、无愿三道中的任意一种。然而,在“为得入流果等至”等四果句中,应当知道是指无愿果等至。为什么?因为“为得空住等至、为得无相住等至”已经把其余两种果等至单独说了。也就是说,从无常随观出起,是无相道;同样,在果等至时,是无相果等至。从苦随观出起,是无愿道与果等至。从无我随观出起,是空道与果等至。这应当依经教的理路来理解。巴利
57. Idāni saṅkhārupekkhānaṃ gaṇanaparicchedaṃ dassetuṃ kati saṅkhārupekkhātiādimāha. Tattha samathavasenāti samādhivasena. Ayameva vā pāṭho. Nīvaraṇe paṭisaṅkhāti pañca nīvaraṇāni pahātabbabhāvena pariggahetvā. Santiṭṭhanāti nīvaraṇānaṃ pahānābhimukhībhūtattā tesaṃ pahānepi abyāpārabhāvūpagamanena majjhattatāya santiṭṭhanā. Saṅkhārupekkhāsūti nīvaraṇappahāne byāpārākaraṇena nīvaraṇasaṅkhātānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ upekkhanāsu. Esa nayo vitakkavicārādīsu ca. Samathe saṅkhārupekkhā nāma appanāvīthiyā āsannapubbabhāge balappattabhāvanāmayañāṇaṃ. Sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭilābhatthāyātiādīsu catūsu maggavāresu suññatānimittaappaṇihitamaggānaṃ aññataraññataro maggo labbhati. Sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāyātiādīsu catūsu phalavāresu pana appaṇihitā phalasamāpatti veditabbā. Kasmā? ‘‘Suññatavihārasamāpattatthāya animittavihārasamāpattatthāyā’’ti itarāsaṃ dvinnaṃ phalasamāpattīnaṃ visuṃ vuttattā. Aniccānupassanāvuṭṭhānavasena hi animittamaggo, tatheva phalasamāpattikāle animittaphalasamāpatti, dukkhānupassanāvuṭṭhānavasena appaṇihitamaggaphalasamāpattiyo, anattānupassanāvuṭṭhānavasena suññatamaggaphalasamāpattiyo suttantanayeneva veditabbā.
在这里,四道句里说了“生”等五根本句和“去”等十同义词句,一共十五句。但在六种果等至句里,只说了五根本句。这是什么原因呢?因为行舍达到猛利时,能断烦恼的道才会生起;为了显示行舍的猛利,所以连同同义词句一起,把根本句牢固地建立起来。而果不起加行,体性寂静,又依属于道,所以即使行舍比较柔和,也能成为果的缘;为了显示这一点,就只说了根本句。应当这样理解。巴利
Ettha ca catūsu maggavāresu uppādantiādīni pañca mūlapadāni, gatintiādīni dasa vevacanapadānīti pannarasa padāni vuttāni. Chasu pana phalasamāpattivāresu pañca mūlapadāneva vuttāni. Taṃ kasmā iti ce? Saṅkhārupekkhāya tikkhabhāve sati kilesappahāne samatthassa maggassa sambhavato tassā tikkhabhāvadassanatthaṃ vevacanapadehi saha daḷhaṃ katvā mūlapadāni vuttāni. Phalassa nirussāhabhāvena santasabhāvattā maggāyattattā ca mandabhūtāpi saṅkhārupekkhā phalassa paccayo hotīti dassanatthaṃ mūlapadāneva vuttānīti veditabbāni.
58 58. 现在,为了按类别提问、按可获得的方式来解答,说出了“善的行舍有多少种”等话。其中,“十五种行舍”:依止禅修来说有八种,依四种道和三種果来说有七种,合起来就是十五种。依止禅修来说的八种行舍,对阿罗汉而言,因为不再有对诸盖的审察,也因为不必再费力断除寻、伺等,就能轻松地断除,所以与“行舍”这个名称并不相符,因此应当知道,那些行舍没有被说成是无记的。然而,阿罗汉入果等至时,没有行舍就无法进入,所以说三种行舍是无记的。因为对阿罗汉来说,依无愿、空、无相而有三种行舍。巴利
58. Idāni jātivasena pucchitvā labbhamānavasena vissajjetuṃ kati saṅkhārupekkhā kusalātiādimāha. Tattha pannarasa saṅkhārupekkhāti samathavasena aṭṭha, catunnaṃ maggānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ phalānaṃ vasena sattāti pannarasa. Samathavasena aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā arahato nīvaraṇapaṭisaṅkhāabhāvato, vitakkavicārādīnaṃ pahānabyāpāraṃ vinā sukhena pahānato ca saṅkhārupekkhānāmassa ananurūpāti katvā tāsaṃ abyākatatā na vuttāti veditabbā. Arahatā pana phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjantena saṅkhārupekkhaṃ vinā samāpajjituṃ na sakkāti tisso saṅkhārupekkhā abyākatāti vuttā. Appaṇihitasuññatānimittavasena hi arahato tisso saṅkhārupekkhā.
现在,在通过解说行舍而说的三首偈颂中,“审察而安住”的慧就是行舍。“八种是心的行境”:依止禅修而说的八种行舍,是定的领域,也就是定的境地,这是它的意思。就像在“应修心与慧”等说法中,是用“心”来指代定;又像在“比丘们,应行于行境,即自己父祖的领域”等说法中,是用“行境”这个词来指代领域。凡是某法所依靠的,那里就被说成是它的领域。凡夫有两种:依止禅修和依观禅修。有学有三种:依止禅修、观禅和等至而有三种。离贪者也有三种:依无愿、空、无相的果等至而有三种。本来应该说“tisso”这个阴性词,却说成了“tayo”这个阳性词,这是语法性别上的颠倒。也可以把它理解为“三种行舍法”。所谓“以此心离转”:就是由于这些行舍法,心从寻、伺等中,或者从生起等中离开。因为离贪者也有行舍,所以说心从诸行离转后,便趣入涅槃。“八种是定的缘”:依止禅修而说的八种行舍,因为能引生安止,所以是安止定的缘。“十种是智的行境”:依观禅修而说的十种行舍,是道智和果智的境地。“是三种解脱的缘”:它们是空、无相、无愿三种解脱的亲依止缘。“于种种异见不动摇”:不舍弃坏灭,以无常等角度观照诸行时,对于常见等种种异见不动摇。巴利
Idāni saṅkhārupekkhānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāvasena vuttāsu tīsu gāthāsu paṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanā paññāti saṅkhārupekkhā . Aṭṭha cittassa gocarāti samathavasena vuttā aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samādhissa visayā, bhūmiyoti attho. ‘‘Cittaṃ paññañca bhāvaya’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192) viya cittasīsena samādhi niddiṭṭho, ‘‘gocare, bhikkhave, caratha sake pettike visaye’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.372) viya gocarasaddena visayo. Yañhi yadāyattaṃ, tasseso visayoti vuccati. Puthujjanassa dveti samathavasena vipassanāvasena ca. Tayosekkhassāti samathavipassanāsamāpattivasena. Tayo ca vītarāgassāti appaṇihitasuññatānimittaphalasamāpattivasena. ‘‘Tisso’’ti vattabbe ‘‘tayo’’ti ca liṅgavipallāso kato. Tayo saṅkhārupekkhā dhammāti vā yojetabbaṃ. Yehi cittaṃ vivaṭṭatīti yehi saṅkhārupekkhādhammehi vitakkavicārādito, uppādādito vā cittaṃ apagacchati. Vītarāgassāpi hi saṅkhārupekkhāsabbhāvato ca saṅkhārato cittaṃ vivaṭṭitvā nibbānaṃ pakkhandatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Aṭṭha samādhissa paccayāti samathavasena vuttā aṭṭha appanāsampāpakattā appanāsamādhissa paccayā. Dasa ñāṇassa gocarāti vipassanāvasena vuttā dasa maggañāṇassa phalañāṇassa ca bhūmiyo. Tiṇṇaṃ vimokkhāna paccayāti suññatānimittaappaṇihitavimokkhānaṃ upanissayapaccayā. Nānādiṭṭhīsu na kampatīti bhaṅgaṃ avissajjitvāva saṅkhāre aniccādivasena vipassanto sassatadiṭṭhiādīsu nānappakārāsu diṭṭhīsu na vedhatīti.
第10章 种姓智解说的注释巴利
10. Gotrabhuñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
59 在种姓智的解说中,“被胜伏”就是被制伏、被超越。“外诸行相”是指相对于自身相续中生起的不善蕴而言,属于外在的诸行相。因为世间诸行是烦恼的相,或者以相状显现,所以称为“相”。由于胜伏了凡夫种姓,所以说“被胜伏”而名为“种姓”;由于修习圣种姓,所以说“跃进”而名为“种姓”;说“胜伏已并跃进”而名为“种姓”,这是把这两层含义合起来说的。至于说“出起”而名为种姓,以及说“离转”而名为种姓,这是配合论母中“出起”“离转”的文句,只表达了胜伏凡夫种姓这一含义。然而,在依止奢摩他而说的种姓中,因为胜伏了盖等种姓,所以称为种姓;在“为证入预流果等至”等六种等至句中,因为胜伏了生起等种姓,所以称为种姓;在“为证得一来道”等三种道句中,因为胜伏了预流者等种姓,所以称为种姓——应当这样理解。这里“种姓”的含义就是“种子”的含义。据说在《流转论》中这样说:涅槃称为种姓,因为它从一切边执中得到保护,趣向它,所以称为种姓;八种等至也是种姓,因为它们从种姓的边执中得到保护,趣向这种姓,所以称为种姓。他们说:“只有四种道的种姓是以涅槃为所缘,四种果等至的种姓是以诸行为所缘,因为果等至倾向于(以诸行为所缘)。”这在《清净道论》中确实说过:“对于那持续生起的观,在以诸行为所缘的种姓智之后,紧接着以果等至的方式将心转向灭。”因此应当知道,在这里的道句中,把“外诸行相”这个词作为第十六项来把握,而在等至句中则不把它作为第六项来把握。否则的话,就会以根本词条的方式来把握了。巴利
59. Gotrabhuñāṇaniddese abhibhuyyatīti abhibhavati atikkamati. Bahiddhā saṅkhāranimittanti sakasantānappavattaakusalakkhandhato bahiddhābhūtaṃ saṅkhāranimittaṃ. Lokikasaṅkhārā hi kilesānaṃ nimittattā, nimittākārena upaṭṭhānato vā nimittanti vuccanti. Abhibhuyyatīti gotrabhūti ca puthujjanagottābhibhavanato gotrabhubhāvo vutto. Pakkhandatīti gotrabhūti ariyagottabhāvanato gotrabhubhāvo vutto. Abhibhuyyitvā pakkhandatīti gotrabhūti ubho atthe samāsetvā vuttaṃ. Vuṭṭhātīti gotrabhūti ca vivaṭṭatīti gotrabhūti ca mātikāya vuṭṭhānavivaṭṭanapadānurūpena puthujjanagottābhibhavanatthoyeva vutto. Samathavasena vuttagotrabhūnaṃ pana nīvaraṇādigottābhibhavanato gotrabhūti, ‘‘sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāyā’’tiādīsu chasu samāpattivāresu uppādādigottābhibhavanato gotrabhūti, ‘‘sakadāgāmimaggaṃ paṭilābhatthāyā’’tiādīsu tīsu maggavāresu sotāpannādigottābhibhavanato gotrabhūti attho veditabbo. Gottattho cettha bījattho. Vattanipakaraṇe kira vuttaṃ – gottaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ sabbaparipanthehi guttattā, taṃ paṭipajjatīti gotrabhūti, aṭṭha samāpattiyopi gottaṃ gotrabhuparipanthehi guttattā, taṃ gottaṃ paṭipajjatīti gotrabhūti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Catunnaṃ maggānaṃyeva gotrabhu nibbānārammaṇaṃ, catassannaṃ phalasamāpattīnaṃ gotrabhu saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattininnattā’’ti vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ visuddhimagge – ‘‘tassa pavattānupubbavipassanassa saṅkhārārammaṇagotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ phalasamāpattivasena nirodhe cittaṃ appetī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.863). Tenevettha maggavāresu soḷasamaṃ katvā gahitassa bahiddhāsaṅkhāranimittapadassa samāpattivāresu chaṭṭhaṃ katvā gahaṇaṃ na katanti veditabbaṃ. Itarathā hi mūlapadagahaṇena gahetabbaṃ bhaveyya.
另有一些人说:“最初把心转向涅槃、最初作意涅槃的,这叫作种姓。”但就果来说,这个说法并不成立。应当知道,在“十五种种姓法是善”这一说法里,因为阿拉汉无有应胜伏之盖,而且寻、伺等本来就容易断除,所以从“胜伏”这个意义上说,它们不配称为种姓;因此,种姓的无记性未被说出。然而,阿拉汉进入果等至时,如果不胜伏诸行,就无法进入,因此才说“三种种姓法是无记”。还有些人说:“这里列出的只是属于顺决择分的八种等至,所以这八种等至的种姓是善的。”对行舍智也应当这样理解。巴利
Aññe pana ‘‘yo nibbāne paṭhamābhogo paṭhamasamannāhāro, ayaṃ vuccati gotrabhū’’ti vadanti. Taṃ phalaṃ sandhāya na yujjati. Pannarasa gotrabhudhammā kusalāti ettha arahato abhibhavitabbanīvaraṇābhāvato vitakkavicārādīnaṃ sukheneva pahātabbabhāvato ca abhibhavanaṭṭhena gotrabhunāmaṃ nārahantīti katvā gotrabhūnaṃ abyākatatā na vuttāti veditabbā. Arahatā pana phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjantena saṅkhāre anabhibhuyya samāpajjituṃ na sakkāti ‘‘tayo gotrabhudhammā abyākatā’’ti vuttā. Keci pana ‘‘aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbedhabhāgiyā eva idha niddiṭṭhā, tasmā aṭṭha samāpattigotrabhū kusalā hontī’’ti vadanti. Tathā saṅkhārupekkhāyapi veditabbaṃ.
60 在“有食”等说法中,因为以烦恼为食的轮回食、世间食、烦恼食都具有烦恼食那种令人贪著的性质,所以叫“有食”。那是什么?是八种止的种姓智。这里,“轮回食”指的就是三地轮回,“世间食”指五欲,“烦恼食”指烦恼本身。“无食”指十种观的种姓智,因为它不具有令人贪著的性质。圣者们确实不会对种姓智生起贪著。有些书写本写作“sāmisañce”,这样写不太好。同样,对于“有愿”和“无愿”、“有结缚”和“无结缚”、“出起”和“未出起”,也应当这样理解。因为贪爱之愿而称为“有愿”,意思是有所希求;因为没有这种愿而称为“无愿”。因为与贪爱相连结而称为“有结缚”;因为没有这种连结而称为“无结缚”。“出起”指的就是观的种姓智,因为它能切断贪爱,所以称为“出起”;另一种则是“未出起”。或者,因为是从外诸行相中出起,所以称为“出起”。也就是说,果种姓智因为以涅槃为意向、面向涅槃,所以称为从外诸行相中出起,应当这样理解。在下面“胜伏、出起、还灭”等段落中,也应当这样理解:果种姓智因为以涅槃为意向、面向涅槃,所以被称为胜伏、出起、还灭。因为三种解脱的缘故:对于三种出世间解脱来说,止的种姓智是自然依止缘,观的种姓智是无间、等无间、依止缘。所谓“他的智慧已经修习”,是指他之前的智慧已经修习、已经反复练习。所谓“善于还灭、出起”,是指以不愚痴而善于称为还灭的种姓智,或者以之前的智慧而善于。所谓“在各种见解中不动摇”,是指对于已经彻底断除的各种见解不动摇。巴利
60.Sāmisañcātiādīsu vaṭṭāmisalokāmisakilesāmisānaṃ kilesāmisena sāmisaṃ sanikantikattā. Kiṃ taṃ? Aṭṭhavidhaṃ samathagotrabhuñāṇaṃ. Vaṭṭāmisanti cettha tebhūmakavaṭṭameva. Lokāmisanti pañca kāmaguṇā. Kilesāmisanti kilesā eva. Nirāmisanti dasavidhaṃ vipassanāgotrabhuñāṇaṃ anikantikattā. Na hi ariyā gotrabhusmiṃ nikantiṃ karonti. Potthake ‘‘sāmisañce’’ti likhanti, taṃ na sundarataraṃ. Evameva paṇihitañca appaṇihitaṃ saññuttañca visaññuttaṃ vuṭṭhitañca avuṭṭhitaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nikantipaṇidhiyā hi paṇihitaṃ patthitanti attho. Tadabhāvena appaṇihitaṃ. Nikantisaññogeneva saññuttaṃ. Tadabhāvena visaññuttaṃ. Vuṭṭhitanti vipassanāgotrabhuñāṇameva. Tañhi nikanticchedakattā vuṭṭhitaṃ nāma. Itaraṃ avuṭṭhitaṃ. Bahiddhā vuṭṭhānattā vā vuṭṭhitaṃ. Phalagotrabhupi hi nibbānajjhāsayavasena nibbānābhimukhībhūtattā bahiddhāsaṅkhāranimittā vuṭṭhitaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Heṭṭhābhibhavanavuṭṭhānavivaṭṭanavāresupi phalagotrabhu ajjhāsayavasena nibbānābhimukhībhūtattā abhibhuyyati vuṭṭhāti vivaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ vimokkhāna paccayāti tiṇṇaṃ lokuttaravimokkhānaṃ samathagotrabhu pakatūpanissayapaccayā honti, vipassanāgotrabhu anantarasamanantarūpanissayapaccayā honti. Paññā yassa pariccitāti pubbabhāgapaññā yassa paricitā pariciṇṇā. Kusalo vivaṭṭe vuṭṭhāneti asammohavaseneva vivaṭṭasaṅkhāte gotrabhuñāṇe kusalo cheko, pubbabhāgañāṇena vā kusalo. Nānādiṭṭhīsu na kampatīti samucchedena pahīnāsu nānappakārāsu diṭṭhīsu na vedhatīti.
第11章 道智解说的注释巴利
11. Maggañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
61 在“道智解说”这一部分中,“从邪见出起”的意思是:通过断除邪见随眠,以彻底断除的方式,从六十二种邪见中出起。“以及从随顺彼的烦恼”是指:从那些与邪见相应、以邪见为依止而生起、随顺邪见的种种烦恼中出起。这就说明了与邪见同处的烦恼也被断除。同处有两种:俱生同处和断除同处。与那邪见同在一个心中,或同在一个补特伽罗中,一直持续到被断除为止,这就是同处。当邪见被断除时,在两个无行心中与那邪见俱生的贪、痴、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,以及在两个有行心中与那邪见俱生的贪、痴、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,就以俱生同处的方式被断除。当邪见烦恼本身被断除时,与它同在一个补特伽罗中、能导致堕入恶趣的贪、嗔、痴、慢、疑、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,就以断除同处的方式被断除。“从蕴”是指:从那些随顺的蕴——也就是随顺那邪见而转的、以俱生同处和断除同处两种方式存在的四种非色蕴,或者连同由那邪见等所生起的色法一起的五蕴,以及从以邪见等烦恼为缘、将来会生起的异熟蕴中出起。“以及从外一切行相”是指:从如上所说的烦恼和蕴之外的一切有为法行相中出起。“从邪思惟出起”是指:从须陀洹道所应断除的四种与邪见相应的心,以及与疑俱生的心——这五种心中——以及从其余能导致堕入恶趣的不善心中,从邪思惟出起。巴利
61. Maggañāṇaniddese micchādiṭṭhiyā vuṭṭhātīti diṭṭhānusayappahānena samucchedavasena dvāsaṭṭhibhedato micchādiṭṭhito vuṭṭhāti. Tadanuvattakakilesehīti micchādiṭṭhisampayogavasena ca micchādiṭṭhiupanissayena ca uppajjamānehi micchādiṭṭhianuvattamānehi nānāvidhehi kilesehi. Tena tadekaṭṭhakilesappahānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Duvidhañhi ekaṭṭhaṃ sahajekaṭṭhaṃ pahānekaṭṭhañca. Tāya diṭṭhiyā saha ekasmiṃ citte, ekasmiṃ puggale vā yāva pahānā ṭhitāti tadekaṭṭhā. Diṭṭhiyā hi pahīyamānāya diṭṭhisampayuttesu dvīsu asaṅkhārikacittesu tāya diṭṭhiyā sahajātā lobho moho uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā, dvīsu sasaṅkhārikacittesu tāya diṭṭhiyā sahajātā lobho moho thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Diṭṭhikileseyeva pahīyamāne tena saha ekasmiṃ puggale ṭhitā apāyagamanīyā lobho doso moho māno vicikicchā thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā pahānekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Khandhehīti tadanuvattakeheva khandhehi, taṃ diṭṭhiṃ anuvattamānehi sahajekaṭṭhehi ca pahānekaṭṭhehi ca catūhi arūpakkhandhehi, taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpehi vā saha pañcahi khandhehi micchādiṭṭhiādikilesapaccayā anāgate uppajjitabbehi vipākakkhandhehi. Bahiddhā ca sabbanimittehīti yathāvuttakilesakkhandhato bahibhūtehi sabbasaṅkhāranimittehi. Micchāsaṅkappā vuṭṭhātīti sotāpattimaggena pahātabbesu catūsu diṭṭhisampayuttesu, vicikicchāsahagate cāti pañcasu cittesu apāyagamanīyasesākusalacittesu ca micchāsaṅkappā vuṭṭhāti.
从邪语出起,是指从妄语,以及从能导致堕入恶趣的粗恶语、杂秽语中出起。从邪业出起,是指从杀生、不与取、邪行中出起。从邪命出起,是指从诡诈、谄媚、占相、强取、以利求利,以及从以活命为因的七种身业和语业中出起。从邪精进、邪念、邪定中出起,应当依照从邪思惟中出起的同样方式来理解。所谓邪念,只是以与正念对立的方式生起的不善心念而已。在更高的三道中,“以见之义为正见”等八支圣道,就像在初禅和初道中可以获得那样,同样可以获得。其中,在初道中,正见能断除邪见,所以叫正见。正思惟等也应当以断除邪思惟等的意义来理解。既然如此,因为初道已经断除了六十二种恶见,所以在更高的三道中,就不存在什么还需要断除的见了。巴利
Micchāvācāya vuṭṭhātīti musāvādato ceva apāyagamanīyapisuṇapharusasamphappalāpehi ca vuṭṭhāti . Micchākammantā vuṭṭhātīti pāṇātipātādinnādānamicchācārehi vuṭṭhāti. Micchāājīvāvuṭṭhātīti kuhanā lapanā nemittikatā nippesikatā lābhenalābhaṃnijigīsanatā, ājīvahetukehi vā sattahipi kāyavacīkammehi vuṭṭhāti. Micchāvāyāmamicchāsatimicchāsamādhīhi vuṭṭhānaṃ micchāsaṅkappavuṭṭhāne vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Micchāsatīti ca satiyā paṭipakkhākārena uppajjamānā akusalacittuppādamattameva. Uparimaggattaye ‘‘dassanaṭṭhena sammādiṭṭhī’’tiādīni aṭṭha maggaṅgāni yathā paṭhamajjhānike paṭhamamagge labbhanti, tatheva labbhanti. Tattha paṭhamamagge sammādiṭṭhi micchādiṭṭhiṃ pajahatīti sammādiṭṭhi. Sammāsaṅkappādayopi micchāsaṅkappādīnaṃ pajahanaṭṭheneva veditabbā. Evaṃ sante paṭhamamaggeneva dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahīnattā uparimaggattayena pahātabbā diṭṭhi nāma natthi.
这里,“正见”这个名称是怎么来的呢?就像解毒药,不管毒存在还是不存在,它都叫解毒药;同样,不管邪见存在还是不存在,这个就叫正见。如果这样的话,它就只是个名称而已,但在上面三道中,正见就没有作用了,道支也就不能圆满。所以,正见应当有其作用,道支也应当圆满。在这里,正见有其作用,应当依照它实际获得的方式来解说。因为在上三道所断的范围内,有一个慢,它占据着见的位置,正见能断除那个慢,所以叫正见。在入流道中,正见断除邪见。对入流者来说,还有一个被一来道所断的慢,正见断除那个慢,所以叫正见。他还有与七种不善心俱生的思惟,有与那些心一起生起的语门动摇、身门动摇、受用资具、俱生精进、失念、俱生心一境性,这些就叫邪思惟等。在一来道中,正思惟等因为断除了它们,所以成为正思惟等,应当这样理解。这样一来,在一来道中,八支都各有其作用。对一来者来说,还有一个被不来道所断的慢,它占据着见的位置。他还有与七种心俱生的思惟等。因为断除了它们,在不来道中,八支各有其作用,应当了知。对不来者来说,还有一个被阿罗汉道所断的慢,它占据着见的位置。他还有五种不善心,有与那些心俱生的思惟等。因为断除了它们,在阿罗汉道中,八支各有其作用,应当了知。巴利
Tattha sammādiṭṭhīti nāmaṃ kathaṃ hotīti? Yathā visaṃ atthi vā hotu mā vā, agado agadotveva vuccati, evaṃ micchādiṭṭhi atthi vā hotu mā vā, ayaṃ sammādiṭṭhi eva nāma. Yadi evaṃ nāmamattamevetaṃ hoti, uparimaggattaye pana sammādiṭṭhiyā kiccābhāvo āpajjati, maggaṅgāni na paripūrenti. Tasmā sammādiṭṭhi sakiccakā kātabbā, maggaṅgāni paripūretabbānīti. Sakiccakā cettha sammādiṭṭhi yathālābhaniyamena dīpetabbā. Uparimaggattayavajjho hi eko māno atthi, so diṭṭhiṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, sā taṃ mānaṃ pajahatīti sammādiṭṭhi. Sotāpattimaggasmiñhi sammādiṭṭhi micchādiṭṭhiṃ pajahati. Sotāpannassa pana sakadāgāmimaggavajjho māno atthi, taṃ mānaṃ pajahatīti sammādiṭṭhi. Tasseva sattaakusalacittasahajāto saṅkappo atthi, teheva cittehi vācaṅgacopanaṃ atthi, kāyaṅgacopanaṃ atthi, paccayaparibhogo atthi, sahajātavāyāmo atthi, assatiyabhāvo atthi, sahajātacittekaggatā atthi, ete micchāsaṅkappādayo nāma. Sakadāgāmimagge sammāsaṅkappādayo tesaṃ pahānena sammāsaṅkappādayoti veditabbā. Evaṃ sakadāgāmimagge aṭṭhaṅgāni sakiccakāni honti. Sakadāgāmissa anāgāmimaggavajjho māno atthi, so diṭṭhiṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Tasseva sattahi cittehi sahajātā saṅkappādayo atthi. Tesaṃ pahānena anāgāmimagge aṭṭhannaṃ aṅgānaṃ sakiccakatā veditabbā. Anāgāmissa arahattamaggavajjho māno atthi, so diṭṭhiṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Yāni panassa pañca akusalacittāni, tehi sahajātā saṅkappādayo atthi. Tesaṃ pahānena arahattamagge aṭṭhannaṃ aṅgānaṃ sakiccakatā veditabbā.
粗大:因为它是通过身门和语门违犯的缘,所以从粗大的状态来说。欲贪结:就是被称为淫欲贪的结。因为它把众生系缚在欲有中,所以称为结。嗔结:就是嗔恚结。因为它对所缘生起抵触,所以称为嗔。这些烦恼以强力之义在相续中潜伏,所以称为随眠。细俱行:就是细小,意思是微细。这里“俱行”这个词是表示在那个状态中存在。对于一来者来说,欲贪和嗔恚因为两个原因而变得微细:一是不经常生起,二是现行时极其微弱。因为他的烦恼不像愚痴凡夫那样频繁生起,只是偶尔生起。而且生起时,也不像愚痴凡夫那样压制、遍满、充满、令盲瞎般地生起,而是因为由两道所断,所以微微生起、微薄行相,没有能力导致违犯。如此微薄的它们由不来道所断。色贪:就是对色有的欲贪。无色贪:就是对无色有的欲贪。慢:以高举为特相。掉举:以不寂静为特相。无明:以盲暗为特相。有贪随眠:以色贪及无色贪而转起的有贪随眠。巴利
Oḷārikāti kāyavacīdvāre vītikkamassa paccayabhāvena thūlabhūtamhā. Kāmarāgasaññojanāti methunarāgasaṅkhātā saññojanā. So hi kāmabhave saññojetīti saññojananti vuccati. Paṭighasaññojanāti byāpādasaññojanā. So hi ārammaṇe paṭihaññatīti paṭighanti vuccati. Te eva thāmagataṭṭhena santāne anusentīti anusayā. Aṇusahagatāti aṇubhūtā, sukhumabhūtāti attho. Tabbhāve hi ettha sahagatasaddo. Sakadāgāmissa hi kāmarāgabyāpādā dvīhi kāraṇehi aṇubhūtā adhiccuppattiyā ca pariyuṭṭhānamandatāya ca. Tassa hi bālaputhujjanassa viya kilesā abhiṇhaṃ na uppajjanti, kadāci karahaci uppajjanti. Uppajjamānā ca bālaputhujjanassa viya maddantā pharantā chādentā andhaandhaṃ karontā na uppajjanti, dvīhi pana maggehi pahīnattā mandamandā tanukākārā hutvā uppajjanti, vītikkamaṃ pāpetuṃ samatthā na honti. Evaṃ tanubhūtā anāgāmimaggena pahīyanti rūparāgāti rūpabhave chandarāgā. Arūparāgāti arūpabhave chandarāgā. Mānāti unnatilakkhaṇā. Uddhaccāti avūpasamalakkhaṇā. Avijjāyāti andhalakkhaṇāya. Bhavarāgānusayāti rūparāgārūparāgavasena pavattabhavarāgānusayā.
62 现在,为了说明道的智,说了“未生的被烧尽”等话。其中,“未生的被烧尽”是指:以已生起的、在自己相续中显现的种种出世间禅那,具足该禅那的人将那些尚未生起的种种烦恼烧尽、焚毁、断除;由于这个原因,那出世间法被称为“禅那”。意思是如此。“于禅那、解脱有善巧”:对于与圣道相应的寻等禅那,以及被称为解脱的圣道,以不迷惑的善巧,对于初道就已断除的种种邪见不动摇。禅那有两种:所缘现观和特相现观。世间的初禅等,以取遍相等所缘而现观,所以是禅那;观以诸行的自相与共相而现观,所以是禅那;出世间禅那以涅槃的真实特相而现观,所以是禅那。但这里不取与种姓智共通的特相现观之义,而是以不共的烧尽烦恼之义来说“禅那”。而这里的“解脱”,是指对涅槃所缘极善信解、并从烦恼中极善解脱的意思。巴利
62. Idāni maggañāṇasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ karonto ajātaṃ jhāpetītiādimāha. Tattha ca ajātaṃ jhāpeti jātena, jhānaṃ tena pavuccatīti attano santāne pātubhūtena tena tena lokuttarajjhānena taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo ajātameva taṃ taṃ kilesaṃ jhāpeti dahati samucchindati, tena kāraṇena taṃ lokuttaraṃ jhānanti pavuccatīti attho. Jhānavimokkhe kusalatāti tasmiṃ ariyamaggasampayutte vitakkādike jhāne ca vimokkhasaṅkhāte ariyamagge ca asammohavasena kusalatāya paṭhamamaggeneva pahīnāsu nānādiṭṭhīsu na kampati. Jhānaṃ nāma duvidhaṃ ārammaṇūpanijjhānañca lakkhaṇūpanijjhānañca. Lokiyapaṭhamajjhānādikaṃ kasiṇādiārammaṇūpanijjhānaṭṭhena jhānaṃ, vipassanāsaṅkhārānaṃ sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṭṭhena jhānaṃ, lokuttaraṃ nibbāne tathalakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṭṭhena jhānaṃ. Idha pana gotrabhunāpi sādhāraṇaṃ lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṭṭhaṃ anāmasitvā asādhāraṇena kilesajhāpanaṭṭhena jhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Vimokkhaṭṭho panettha nibbānārammaṇe suṭṭhu adhimuccanaṭṭho kilesehi ca suṭṭhu muccanaṭṭho.
先用近行定、安止定或刹那定中的某一种定把心安定下来,然后再如实观察。“而”这个字把观也一并包括进来了。正在观的时候,也应当让心安止下来:因为这种观是粗糙的、没有滋味的,而止则是柔软的、有滋味的。所以,为了让那粗糙的心变得柔软滋润,正在观的时候也要让心进入安止。观者再次进入定,应当同样让心安住,就像观一样——这就是这里的意思。这里的“而”字把安止也包括进来了。这两处用“而”字是为了凑合偈颂的韵律,但意思就是“与”。观与止,在那个时候存在:因为只有当止和观双运时,圣道才会显现,所以在能够产生圣道的时候,也就是两者结合的时候,那时就有观和止,这就叫“有止观”。那些止和观在趋向圣道的时候以及在道刹那,是同分、双运而运作的。“同分”是指它们有相等的部分、相等的分量;“双运”就像在轭中连接在一起,彼此不超越,意思是等力、均势。详细内容将在双运论中阐明。巴利
Samādahitvā yathā ce vipassatīti appanūpacārakhaṇikasamādhīnaṃ aññatarena samādhinā paṭhamaṃ cittasamādhānaṃ katvā pacchā yathā vipassati ca. Samuccayattho ce-saddo vipassanaṃ samuccinoti. Vipassamāno tathā ce samādaheti vipassanā nāmesā lūkhabhūtā nirassādā, samatho ca nāma siniddhabhūto saassādo. Tasmā tāya lūkhabhūtaṃ cittaṃ sinehetuṃ vipassamāno tathā ca samādahe. Vipassamāno puna samādhiṃ pavisitvā cittasamādhānañca tatheva kareyya, yatheva vipassananti attho. Idha ce-saddo samādahanaṃ samuccinoti. Ubhayatthāpi gāthābandhānuvattanena ce-kāro kato, attho pana ca-kārattho eva. Vipassanā ca samatho tadā ahūti yasmā samathavipassanānaṃ yuganaddhabhāve sati ariyamaggapātubhāvo hoti, tasmā ariyamaggajananasamatthattā yadā tadubhayasamāyogo hoti, tadā vipassanā ca samatho ca ahu, samathavipassanā bhūtā nāma hotīti attho. Tā ca samathavipassanā ariyamaggābhimukhīkāle ca maggakkhaṇe ca samānabhāgā yuganaddhā vattare samāno samo bhāgo koṭṭhāso etesanti samānabhāgā, yuge naddhā viyāti yuganaddhā, aññamaññaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena samadhurā samabalāti attho. Vitthāro panassa yuganaddhakathāyaṃ āvibhavissati.
“诸行是苦,寂灭是乐”,这是一种见。从两方面超越出来的慧,触及不死之境。对于已经走上“诸行是苦,寂灭即涅槃是乐”这条修行路的人,由此而见到涅槃的圣道智,就叫做“从两方面超越出来的慧”。这种慧以涅槃为所缘,触及并证得不死之境,意思是获得。因为涅槃以没有热恼的缘故,像不死一样,所以叫“不死”;又因为它没有死亡、没有衰老坏灭,所以也叫“不死”。从前行阶段开始,就以极大的精勤、以伟大的修行道而被修习、被实践,所以叫“境”。巴利
Dukkhā saṅkhārā sukho, nirodho iti dassanaṃ. Dubhato vuṭṭhitāpaññā, phasseti amataṃpadanti dukkhā saṅkhārā, sukho nirodho nibbānanti paṭipannassa tato nibbānadassanaṃ ariyamaggañāṇaṃ dubhato vuṭṭhitā paññā nāma. Sā eva ca paññā amataṃ padaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaphusanena phusati, paṭilabhatīti attho. Nibbānañhi atappakaṭṭhena amatasadisanti amataṃ, nāssa mataṃ maraṇaṃ vayo atthītipi amataṃ, pubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya mahatā ussāhena mahatiyā paṭipadāya pajjati paṭipajjīyatīti padanti vuccati.
他了知解脱行,意思是:他以不迷乱的方式了知解脱的运作,以省察的方式了知。因为在后文讲解脱的部分(《无碍解道》1.209等)中说到:“从两边出起的解脱,从两边出起的四种解脱,从两边出起的四种随顺解脱,从两边出起的四种止息解脱”——应当知道,这些就是解脱行,详细解释就在那里。“善巧于种种与单一”:就是对这些解脱的种种状态和单一状态都很善巧。因为依从两边出起的解脱来说,它们是单一的;依四种圣道来说,它们是种种的;或者,每一种圣道依随观方式的不同而有种种,依圣道本身来说则是单一的,应当这样理解。“二智的善巧”:就是对这两种智——称为“见”的智和称为“修”的智——很善巧。所谓“见”,就是入流道。因为它最先见到涅槃,所以称为“见”。种姓心虽然更早见到涅槃,但就像有人因为某件事来到国王那里,远远看见国王坐在象背上在街上走,被问“你见到国王了吗?”时,因为该办的事还没办成,就说“我没看见”;同样,种姓心虽然见到了涅槃,但因为还没有断除应当断除的烦恼,所以不称为“见”。因为那种智处在转向圣道的位置上。所谓“修”,指其余三种道。因为它们是在第一道已经见到的同一法上,依修习而生起,并不是见到了以前没见过的什么法,所以称为“修”。前面因为修习道还未圆满,所以没有说“二智”,而是针对证得入流道、一来道、不来道的人说“善巧于禅那解脱”;对于证得阿罗汉道的人来说,因为修习道已经圆满,所以说“二智的善巧”。应当这样理解。巴利
Vimokkhacariyaṃ jānātīti vimokkhapavattiṃ asammohavasena jānāti, paccavekkhaṇavasena jānāti. ‘‘Dubhato vuṭṭhāno vimokkho, dubhato vuṭṭhānā cattāro vimokkhā, dubhato vuṭṭhānānaṃ anulomā cattāro vimokkhā, dubhato vuṭṭhānapaṭippassaddhi cattāro vimokkhā’’ti hi upari vimokkhakathāyaṃyeva (paṭi. ma. 1.209 ādayo) āgatā vimokkhacariyā veditabbā. Tesaṃ vitthāro tattheva āgato. Nānattekattakovidoti tesaṃ vimokkhānaṃ nānābhāve ekabhāve ca kusalo. Dubhato vuṭṭhānavimokkhavasena hi tesaṃ ekattaṃ, catuariyamaggavasena nānattaṃ, ekekassāpi vā ariyamaggassa anupassanābhedena nānattaṃ, ariyamaggabhāvena ekattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kusalatāti dassanasaṅkhātassa ca bhāvanāsaṅkhātassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kusalatāya. Dassananti hi sotāpattimaggo. So hi paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato dassananti vutto. Gotrabhu pana kiñcāpi paṭhamataraṃ nibbānaṃ passati, yathā pana rañño santikaṃ kenacideva karaṇīyena āgato puriso dūratova rathikāya carantaṃ hatthikkhandhagataṃ rājānaṃ disvāpi ‘‘diṭṭho te rājā’’ti puṭṭho disvā kattabbakiccassa akatattā ‘‘na passāmī’’ti āha, evameva nibbānaṃ disvā kattabbassa kilesappahānassābhāvā na ‘‘dassana’’nti vuccati. Tañhi ñāṇaṃ maggassa āvajjanaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Bhāvanāti sesamaggattayaṃ. Tañhi paṭhamamaggena diṭṭhasmiṃyeva dhamme bhāvanāvasena uppajjati, na adiṭṭhapubbaṃ kiñci passati, tasmā ‘‘bhāvanā’’ti vuccati. Heṭṭhā pana bhāvanāmaggassa apariniṭṭhitattā ‘‘dvinnaṃ ñāṇāna’’nti avatvā sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmimaggalābhino sandhāya ‘‘jhānavimokkhe kusalatā’’ti vuttaṃ, arahattamaggalābhino pana bhāvanāmaggassa pariniṭṭhitattā ‘‘dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kusalatā’’ti vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
第12章 果智解说的注释巴利
12. Phalañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
63 在果智的解说中,“由于那加行已止息”的意思是:由于那向内外出离的加行已经止息。因为道在自己的那一刹那,以断除烦恼而称为作两边出离的加行;在果的那一刹那,由于烦恼已被断除,道两边出离的加行就称为已止息、已寂止。“生起”:在道之后,有时只生起一次或两次;入果等至时则多次生起;从灭尽定出定时,生起两次。这一切确实都是由于加行止息而生起。“这是道的果”:为了指向果,这里用了中性词。在一来道等道刹那,也应当知道,只是依每一道支来安立出离。巴利
63. Phalañāṇaniddese taṃpayogappaṭippassaddhattāti tassa ajjhattabahiddhā vuṭṭhānapayogassa paṭippassaddhattā. Maggo hi sakakkhaṇe kilesappahānena ubhato vuṭṭhānapayogaṃ karoti nāma, phalakkhaṇe kilesānaṃ pahīnattā maggassa ubhato vuṭṭhānapayogo paṭippassaddho vūpasanto nāma hoti. Uppajjatīti maggānantaraṃ sakiṃ vā dvikkhattuṃ vā uppajjati, phalasamāpattikāle pana bahukkhattuṃ, nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa dvikkhattuṃ uppajjati, sabbampi hi taṃ payogappaṭippassaddhattā uppajjati. Maggassetaṃ phalanti phalaṃ apekkhitvā napuṃsakavacanaṃ kataṃ. Sakadāgāmimaggakkhaṇādīsupi ekekamaggaṅgavaseneva vuṭṭhānayojanā veditabbā.
第13章 解脱智解说的注释巴利
13. Vimuttiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
64 在解脱智的解说中,“有身见”是指:在真实存在的意义上,对被称为五蕴集合的这个身体,或者认为“我”就在这个身体中,这样的见解就叫有身见。“疑”是指:离开了治疗,或者在抉择事物本质时因此陷入困苦、疲惫,所以叫疑。“戒禁取”是指:执取“通过戒得清净,通过禁制得清净,通过戒禁得清净”这样的主张并紧抓不放。因为它超出真实,从外面去执取,所以叫戒禁取。虽然这两者都属于见,但为了显示:仅仅断除本来就有的、以二十种事为基础的、自然生起的有身见,就能断除一切见,所以才说有身见。而戒禁取则是另外单独说的,目的是为了显示那些修行“我们要修清净之道”的人,他们的修行其实是邪道。应当这样理解。为了显示这三者都是通过断除随眠而断除,所以说了“见随眠、疑随眠”,并不是说它们是各自单独的烦恼。“随烦恼”:它们令心烦恼、热恼、损害;因为势力强盛,成为粗重的烦恼,所以叫随烦恼。“正确地被根断”:以断灭的方式断除,达到不再生起的灭尽,所以叫正确地被根断。“与缠俱”:缠是指覆盖心而现起、生起,这是对已经现起的烦恼的称呼。“与缠俱”就是和那些缠在一起。以那些与缠俱的、随眠的随烦恼,心得到解脱:因为那些已经不可能再生起,所以相续流转的心从它们那里解脱,就叫作解脱。正因为彻底解脱,所以叫善解脱。以了知那解脱的意义来说,就是了知那解脱。巴利
64. Vimuttiñāṇaniddese sakkāyadiṭṭhīti vijjamānaṭṭhena sati khandhapañcakasaṅkhāte kāye, sayaṃ vā satī tasmiṃ kāye diṭṭhīti sakkāyadiṭṭhi. Vicikicchāti vigatā cikicchā, sabhāvaṃ vā vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamatīti vicikicchā. Sīlabbataparāmāsoti sīlena suddhi vatena suddhi sīlabbatena suddhīti gahitaabhiniveso. So hi sabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasatīti sīlabbataparāmāso. Ubhinnaṃ samānepi diṭṭhibhāve takkañca parūpadesañca vinā pakatiyā eva sakkāyadiṭṭhigahaṇato pakatibhūtāya vīsativatthukāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā pahāneneva sabbadiṭṭhippahānadassanatthaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhi vuttā. Sīlabbataparāmāso pana ‘‘suddhipaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjāmā’’ti paṭipannānaṃ paṭipadāya micchābhāvadassanatthaṃ visuṃ vuttoti veditabbo. Tiṇṇampi anusayappahāneneva pahānaṃ dassetuṃ diṭṭhānusayo vicikicchānusayoti vuttaṃ, na visuṃ kilesattā. Upakkilesāti kilesenti upatāpenti vibādhentīti kilesā, thāmagataṭṭhena bhusā kilesāti upakkilesā. Sammā samucchinnā hontīti samucchedappahānena anuppādanirodhena sammā samucchinnā honti. Sapariyuṭṭhānehīti cittaṃ pariyonandhantāni uṭṭhenti uppajjantīti pariyuṭṭhānāni, samudācārappattānaṃ kilesānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saha pariyuṭṭhānehīti sapariyuṭṭhānāni. Tehi sapariyuṭṭhānehi anusayitaupakkilesehi. Cittaṃ vimuttaṃ hotīti tesaṃ abhabbuppattikabhūtattā santativasena pavattamānaṃ cittaṃ tato vimuttaṃ nāma hoti. Tadeva suṭṭhu vimuttattā suvimuttaṃ. Taṃvimuttiñātaṭṭhenāti tassā vimuttiyā jānanaṭṭhena.
14. 省察智解说的注释巴利
14. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
65 在省察智的解说中,先就在道刹那当下,以“因”的含义分别说明各道支;然后又把那些以“觉悟”的含义而得名为“菩提”的圣者支分——包括属于道支的法与不属于道支的法——按觉支的方式分别显示出来。念觉支、择法觉支、精进觉支、定觉支本身就是道支;喜觉支、轻安觉支、舍觉支则不是道支。接着,从“力”和“根”的角度分别解说时,只有信不是道支。然后,为了说明在道刹那生起的诸法,以聚集的方式显示它们,所以说了“以增上义”等话。其中,“以现前安立的含义为念处”,是指只有一种以涅槃为所缘的念,由于它完成了在身、受、心、法中舍弃净想、乐想、常想、我想的作用,所以称为四念处。只有一种以涅槃为所缘的精进,由于它完成了断除已生和未生的不善、令其不再生起,以及令未生和已生的善生起、安住的作用,所以称为四正勤。巴利
65. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaniddese maggakkhaṇeyeva hetuṭṭhena paṭhamaṃ maggaṅgāni visuṃ visuṃ vatvā puna maggaṅgabhūte ca amaggaṅgabhūte ca dhamme ‘‘bujjhanaṭṭhena bodhī’’ti laddhanāmassa ariyassa aṅgabhāvena bojjhaṅge visuṃ dassesi. Satidhammavicayavīriyasamādhisambojjhaṅgā hi maggaṅgāneva, pītipassaddhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgā amaggaṅgāni. Puna balavasena indriyavasena ca visuṃ niddiṭṭhesu saddhā eva amaggaṅgabhūtā. Puna maggakkhaṇe jāteyeva dhamme rāsivasena dassento ādhipateyyaṭṭhenātiādimāha. Tattha upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena satipaṭṭhānāti ekāva nibbānārammaṇā sati kāyavedanācittadhammesu subhasukhaniccaattasaññāpahānakiccasādhanavasena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā nāma. Nibbānārammaṇaṃ ekameva vīriyaṃ uppannānuppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ pahānānuppattikiccassa, anuppannuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ uppādaṭṭhitikiccassa sādhanavasena cattāro sammappadhānā nāma.
以“如实”的意义称为谛,是指在对苦性等法不生欺诳的意义上,有四种圣谛。在这里,正是这四谛以通达的意义在那个时候生起;而另外单独说的“不死之所入——涅槃”,则是涅槃本身,其余诸法是以获得的意义在那个时候生起。从“以如实义为谛,在那个时候生起”这句话来看,应当得出结论:在道与果的终点,必然会省察四谛。又因为经文说“了知:应作已作,不再有这样的状态”,以及“苦已被遍知,集已被断除,灭已被证得,道已被修习”这样的省察,可知省察是必然的。这样省察也是合理的。这里所说的“集”,应当理解为各别圣道所应断除的烦恼。正是依据这里所说的对集的省察,注释中说:两种烦恼的省察,以及道、果、涅槃的省察,在这里都以本来面目出现了。只是没有提到对苦的省察。虽然没有提到,但依据经典本身和合理性,仍然应当接受。因为一个为了通达圣谛而修行的人,在完成圣谛的通达之后,自然会省察自己所完成的事,这是合理的。“以不散乱义为止”等语,是为了显示与道相应的止和观这些法,具有一味性、不相超越,所以才这样说。以守护义为戒清净,就是指正语、正业、正命本身。以不散乱义为心清净,就是指正定本身。以见义为见清净,就是指正见本身。以解脱义,是指以彻底断除的方式从圣道所应断的烦恼中解脱出来,或者是指以涅槃为所缘而决意朝向它。解脱,是指彻底断除的解脱,就是圣道本身。以通达义为明,是指以通达圣谛的意义为明,就是正见本身。以舍离义为解脱,是指以舍弃圣道所应断的烦恼、从那里解脱出来的意义为解脱,就是圣道本身。以彻底断除义为尽智,是指以断尽烦恼的意义,在能断尽烦恼的圣道中的智,就是正见本身。巴利
Tathaṭṭhena saccāti dukkhabhāvādīsu avisaṃvādakaṭṭhena cattāri ariyasaccāni. Etāneva cettha paṭivedhaṭṭhena tadā samudāgatāni, ‘‘amatogadhaṃ nibbāna’’nti visuṃ vuttaṃ nibbānañca, sesā pana dhammā paṭilābhaṭṭhena tadā samudāgatā. ‘‘Tathaṭṭhena saccā tadā samudāgatā’’ti vacanato maggaphalapariyosāne avassaṃ cattāri saccāni paccavekkhatīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. ‘‘Kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ nāparaṃ itthattāyāti pajānātī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.248) vacanato ca ‘‘dukkhaṃ me pariññātaṃ, samudayo me pahīno, nirodho me sacchikato, maggo ca me bhāvito’’ti paccavekkhaṇaṃ vuttameva hoti. Tathā paccavekkhaṇaṃ yujjati ca. Samudayoti cettha taṃtaṃmaggavajjhoyeva veditabbo. Ettha vuttasamudayapaccavekkhaṇavaseneva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ duvidhaṃ kilesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ maggaphalanibbānapaccavekkhaṇāni idha sarūpeneva āgatānīti vuttāni. Kevalaṃ dukkhapaccavekkhaṇameva na vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi na vuttaṃ, atha kho pāṭhasabbhāvato yuttisabbhāvato ca gahetabbameva. Saccapaṭivedhatthañhi paṭipannassa niṭṭhite saccapaṭivedhe sayaṃ katakiccapaccavekkhaṇaṃ yuttamevāti. Avikkhepaṭṭhena samathotiādi maggasampayutte eva samathavipassanādhamme ekarasaṭṭhena anativattanaṭṭhena ca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Saṃvaraṭṭhena sīlavisuddhīti sammāvācākammantājīvā eva. Avikkhepaṭṭhena cittavisuddhīti sammāsamādhi eva. Dassanaṭṭhena diṭṭhivisuddhīti sammādiṭṭhiyeva. Vimuttaṭṭhenāti samucchedavasena maggavajjhakilesehi muccanaṭṭhena, nibbānārammaṇe vā adhimuccanaṭṭhena. Vimokkhoti samucchedavimokkho, ariyamaggoyeva. Paṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjāti saccapaṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjā, sammādiṭṭhiyeva. Pariccāgaṭṭhena vimuttīti maggavajjhakilesānaṃ pajahanaṭṭhena tato muccanato vimutti, ariyamaggoyeva. Samucchedaṭṭhena khaye ñāṇanti kilesasamucchindanaṭṭhena kilesakkhayakare ariyamagge ñāṇaṃ, sammādiṭṭhiyeva.
欲等法应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。不过这里只在道刹那,才以道的初、中、后三个阶段来显示。这里的“解脱”就是道的解脱。虽然在“以如实之义为谛”那里已经提到了涅槃,但在这里为了显示它作为最终归宿,所以再次说,应当这样理解。在果刹那,这个道理也一样。不过在这里,“以因的意义为道”仅以果道之性成为道。“正勤”应当理解为:在道刹那完成四种作用,到了果生起的刹那,因为已经成就,所以这样说。否则在果刹那,正勤本身就不可得。因为长老在举示道刹那三十七菩提分法时说:“在果刹那,除了四正勤,其余三十三法可得。”同样,诸谛等也应当依照相应情况,以证悟作用等成就的方式来了知。“解脱”是果解脱。“解脱”是果解脱。以寂静之义,在无生中的智,就是所说的意思。“出起”是因为没有中间出起,所以以果为终结而这样说。“这些法在那时集起”:上述诸法,在道刹那与果刹那已经集起,他如此审察。应当将“iti”一词作为句子的剩余部分,如此连接来了知。巴利
Chandādayo heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Kevalañhettha maggakkhaṇeyeva maggassa ādimajjhapariyosānākārena dassitā. Vimuttīti cettha maggavimuttiyeva. ‘‘Tathaṭṭhena saccā’’ti ettha gahitampi ca nibbānaṃ idha pariyosānabhāvadassanatthaṃ puna vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Phalakkhaṇepi eseva nayo. Ettha pana hetuṭṭhena maggoti phalamaggabhāveneva. Sammappadhānāti maggakkhaṇe catukiccasādhakassa vīriyakiccassa phalassa uppādakkhaṇe siddhattā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Aññathā hi phalakkhaṇe sammappadhānā eva na labbhanti. Vuttañhi maggakkhaṇe sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhamme uddharantena therena ‘‘phalakkhaṇe ṭhapetvā cattāro sammappadhāne avasesā tettiṃsa dhammā labbhantī’’ti. Evameva paṭivedhakiccādisiddhivasena saccādīnipi yathāyogaṃ veditabbāni. Vimokkhoti ca phalavimokkho. Vimuttīti phalavimutti. Paṭippassaddhaṭṭhena anuppāde ñāṇaṃ vuttatthameva. Vuṭṭhahitvāti antarā vuṭṭhānābhāvā phalāvasānena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ime dhammā tadā samudāgatāti ime vuttappakārā dhammā maggakkhaṇe phalakkhaṇe ca samudāgatāti paccavekkhatīti iti-saddaṃ pāṭhasesaṃ katvā sambandho veditabbo.
15. 种种事智解说的注释巴利
15. Vatthunānattañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
66 在“种种事智的解说”中,“于内确定眼”的意思是:确定属于内在的眼。为了说明他是怎样确定眼的,先问“如何于内确定眼?”,然后以“眼由无明所生”等语句来展示确定的方式。其中,过去的无明和渴爱是资助因,过去的业是生起因,现在的食是资助因。由此也把资助眼的时节与心都包含在内了。“基于四大种”:这里的属格表示受格的意义,意思是执取四大种而生起。由此显示了净色眼的状态,排除了附带物的状态。“已生”:从时间上,或从相续刹那来说,指现在。“集起”:指从因而生起。到这里,显示了修观前行阶段对眼的确定。通过“非有而生”等语句显示无常随观。因为在生起之前并不存在,所以是“非有而生”;由于将来坏灭之后不再存在,所以是“有已,便不存在”。“有边故”:“有边”是指它有终结,有边者就是“有边者”,如同说“有念者、有行者、有慧者”一样。因此,“有边者故”是指它有坏灭的存在状态。“不坚固”:因为在一切阶段都会破坏,也没有坚固性,所以不坚固。“非常”:即无常。“变易法”:因为衰老和死亡这两方面而有变易的性质。“眼无常”等句,以及“眼是无常”等句,其含义已如前述。“意”:这里指的是有分意,所以“由无明所生”等说法正好适用。“由食所生”:这里应当理解为,从相应触食和意思食的角度来说。“已生”:从时间相续的角度来说。巴利
66. Vatthunānattañāṇaniddese cakkhuṃ ajjhattaṃ vavatthetīti ajjhattabhūtaṃ cakkhuṃ vavatthapeti. Yathā so cakkhuṃ vavatthapeti, tathā vattukāmo kathaṃ cakkhuṃ ajjhattaṃ vavatthetīti pucchitvā puna cakkhu avijjāsambhūtanti vavatthetītiādinā vavatthāpanākāraṃ dasseti. Tattha avijjātaṇhā atītā upatthambhakahetuyo, kammaṃ atītaṃ janakahetu, āhāro idāni upatthambhakahetu. Etena cakkhūpatthambhakāni utucittāni gahitāneva honti. Catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyāti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, cattāri mahābhūtāni upādiyitvā pavattanti attho. Etena pasādacakkhubhāvo dassito hoti, sasambhārabhāvo paṭikkhitto. Uppannanti addhāvasena, santatikhaṇavasena vā paccuppannaṃ. Samudāgatanti hetuto samuṭṭhitaṃ. Ettāvatā vipassanāpubbabhāge cakkhuvavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ. Ahutvā sambhūtantiādīhi aniccānupassanā. Pubbe udayā avijjamānato ahutvā sambhūtaṃ, uddhaṃ vayā abhāvato hutvā na bhavissati. Antavantatoti anto assa atthīti antavā, antavā eva antavanto yathā ‘‘satimanto, gatimanto, dhitimanto ca yo isī’’ti (theragā. 1052). Tato antavantato, bhaṅgavijjamānatoti attho. Addhuvanti sabbāvatthānipātitāya, thirabhāvassa ca abhāvatāya na thiraṃ. Asassatanti na niccaṃ. Vipariṇāmadhammanti jarāya ceva maraṇena cāti dvedhā vipariṇāmapakatikaṃ. Cakkhu aniccantiādīni cakkhuṃ aniccatotiādīni ca vuttatthāni. Manoti idha bhavaṅgamanassa adhippetattā avijjāsambhūtotiādi yujjatiyeva. Āhārasambhūtoti ettha sampayuttaphassāhāramanosañcetanāhāravasena veditabbaṃ. Uppannoti ca addhāsantativasena.
种种行境智的解说注释巴利
16. Gocaranānattañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
67 在“种种行境智”的解说中,“于外确定诸色”的意思是:相对于内在,对外在的色处诸法加以确定。“无明所生”等语,是因为它们属于自身相续中的业生色而说的。因为食也是业生色的资助缘。而声音因为是时节与心所生起的,所以没有说“无明所生”等四法。触境因为本身就是四大种,所以没有说“依于四大种”。这里所说的“法”,包括与有分心相应的三个无色蕴、属于法处且由业所生的细色,以及所有的色等诸法。此外,任何法由何种因生起,就应当依那种因来理解它。否则,即使是属于自身相续的色等诸法,也无法全部涵盖。因为不系属于根的色等法也是观禅的所缘,所以应当知道它们被“业所生”这一词所包含。因为它们也是以一切众生共通的业为缘而由时节所生的。然而,另有一些人说:“不系属于根的色等法不是观禅的所缘。”然而——巴利
67. Gocaranānattañāṇaniddese rūpe bahiddhā vavatthetīti ajjhattato bahiddhābhūte rūpāyatanadhamme vavatthapetīti attho. Avijjāsambhūtātiādi attabhāvapariyāpannakammajarūpattā vuttaṃ. Āhāropi hi kammajarūpassa upatthambhakapaccayo hoti. Saddassa pana utucittasamuṭṭhānattā avijjāsambhūtādicatukkaṃ na vuttaṃ. Phoṭṭhabbānaṃ sayaṃ mahābhūtattā ‘‘catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyā’’ti na vuttaṃ. Dhammāti cettha bhavaṅgamanosampayuttā tayo arūpino khandhā, dhammāyatanapariyāpannāni sukhumarūpāni ca kammasamuṭṭhānāni, sabbānipi rūpādīni ca. Apica yāni yāni yena yena samuṭṭhahanti, tāni tāni tena tena veditabbāni. Itarathā hi sakasantānapariyāpannāpi rūpādayo dhammā sabbe na saṅgaṇheyyuṃ. Yasmā anindriyabaddharūpādayopi vipassanūpagā, tasmā tesaṃ kammasambhūtapadena saṅgaho veditabbo. Tepi hi sabbasattasādhāraṇakammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānā. Aññe pana ‘‘anindriyabaddhā rūpādayo avipassanūpagā’’ti vadanti. Taṃ pana –
当以智慧看见“一切行都是无常”时,
这时就对苦生起厌离,这就是通向清净的道路。巴利
‘‘Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccāti, yadā paññāya passati; Atha nibbindati dukkhe, esa maggo visuddhiyā’’ti. (dha. pa. 277) –
这与最初的巴利圣典相违。在《清净道论》中也这样说:“在这里,有人从一开始就执取内在的诸行而修观。然而,仅仅以纯粹观察内在并不能使道生起,外在的也必须被观见。因此,对他人的蕴以及无执受的诸行,也观为无常、苦、无我。”(《清净道论》2.784)因此,对他人眼等处的分别,以及对不系属于根之色等处的分别,也是应当被接受的。所以,三界的一切行中,并不存在不能作为观禅对象的。巴利
Ādikāya pāḷiyā virujjhati. Vuttañca visuddhimagge – ‘‘idhekacco āditova ajjhattasaṅkhāre abhinivisitvā vipassati, yasmā pana na suddhaajjhattadassanamatteneva maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, bahiddhāpi daṭṭhabbameva, tasmā parassa khandhepi anupādinnasaṅkhārepi aniccaṃ dukkhamanattāti vipassatī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.784). Tasmā paresaṃ cakkhādivavatthānampi anindriyabaddharūpādivavatthānampi icchitabbameva, tasmā tebhūmakasaṅkhārā avipassanūpagā nāma natthi.
行差别智解说的注释巴利
17. Cariyānānattañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
68 在“行差别智”的解说中,关于“识行”等说法:在所缘上活动,所以叫“行”;识本身就是行,所以叫“识行”。以无明而活动,或以无明而行动,或在未知中活动,或无明的活动,所以叫“无明行”。智本身就是行,或以智为行,或以智而活动,或在已知中活动,或智的活动,所以叫“智行”。“为了见”:为了见色而生起。“转向唯作无记”:把心相续从有分流中拉开,转向色所缘,使心转向、朝向,这叫“转向”;因为没有果报,只是单纯的作用,所以是“唯作”;不依善或不善来记别,所以是“无记”。“见的含义”:依它而见,或它自己见,或只是见本身,所以叫“见”;见本身就是其含义,所以叫“见的含义”。“眼识”:指善果报或不善果报。“因为已见”:由于眼识已经见了色所缘,所以对还没见的所缘就没有领受心。“领受的果报意界”:登上那已见的所缘,所以叫“领受”;这是兼具两种果报的领受意界。“因为已被领受”:指已经登上了色所缘。“果报意识界”:指兼具两种果报的推度意识界。这个道理也适用于耳门等。推度之后,论中虽然没有提到确定心,但注释师们说过,所以应当知道确定心也是可以有的。“为了了知”:为了了知法所缘以及色等所缘。“转向唯作无记”:指意门转向心。“了知的含义”:依紧接着其后的速行来说,所缘的了知本身就是其含义,不是别的。由于上面已经分别说了不善速行以及毗婆舍那、道、果速行,所以其余的速行应当在这里摄取。然而,依据“与善业不相应而活动,就是识行”等说法(《无碍解道》1.70),这里只应取笑起心速行。因为在六门中只说了无因心,即两个转向、两个五识、两个领受、三个推度、一个笑起心,所以应当知道,只有十八种无因心是识行。巴利
68. Cariyānānattañāṇaniddese viññāṇacariyātiādīsu ārammaṇe caratīti cariyā, viññāṇameva cariyā viññāṇacariyā. Aññāṇena caraṇaṃ , aññāṇena vā carati, aññāte vā carati, aññāṇassa vā caraṇanti aññāṇacariyā. Ñāṇameva cariyā, ñāṇena vā cariyā, ñāṇena vā carati, ñāte vā carati, ñāṇassa vā caraṇanti ñāṇacariyā. Dassanatthāyāti rūpadassanatthāya pavattā. Āvajjanakiriyābyākatāti bhavaṅgasantānato apanetvā rūpārammaṇe cittasantānaṃ āvajjeti nāmetīti āvajjanaṃ, vipākābhāvato karaṇamattanti kiriyā, kusalākusalavasena na byākatāti abyākatā. Dassanaṭṭhoti passanti tena, sayaṃ vā passati, dassanamattameva vā tanti dassanaṃ, dassanameva attho dassanaṭṭho. Cakkhuviññāṇanti kusalavipākaṃ vā akusalavipākaṃ vā. Diṭṭhattāti adiṭṭhe sampaṭicchanassa abhāvato cakkhuviññāṇena rūpārammaṇassa diṭṭhattā. Abhiniropanā vipākamanodhātūti diṭṭhārammaṇameva ārohatīti atiniropanā, ubhayavipākā sampaṭicchanamanodhātu. Abhiniropitattāti rūpārammaṇaṃ abhiruḷhattā. Vipākamanoviññāṇadhātūti ubhayavipākā santīraṇamanoviññāṇadhātu. Esa nayo sotadvārādīsupi. Santīraṇānantaraṃ voṭṭhabbane avuttepi aṭṭhakathācariyehi vuttattā labbhatīti gahetabbaṃ. Vijānanatthāyāti dhammārammaṇassa ceva rūpādiārammaṇassa ca vijānanatthāya. Āvajjanakiriyābyākatāti manodvārāvajjanacittaṃ. Vijānanaṭṭhoti tadanantarajavanavasena ārammaṇassa vijānanameva attho, na añño. Upari akusalajavanānaṃ vipassanāmaggaphalajavanānañca visuṃ vuttattā sesajavanāni idha gahetabbāni siyuṃ. ‘‘Kusalehi kammehi vippayuttā caratīti viññāṇacariyā’’tiādivacanato (paṭi. ma. 1.70) pana hasituppādacittajavanameva gahetabbaṃ. Chasu dvāresu ahetukānaṃyeva cittānaṃ vuttattā dve āvajjanāni dve pañcaviññāṇāni dve sampaṭicchanāni tīṇi santīraṇāni ekaṃ hasituppādacittanti aṭṭhārasa ahetukacittāniyeva viññāṇacariyāti veditabbāni.
69 现在,为了说明“识行”只是以了知所缘为本质,所以说了“无贪而行”等话。识在和贪等相应、和信等相应的时候,会变成不同的状态;当这些相应法不存在时,它就只安住在自己的状态里。因此,用“无贪”等说法,是在显示前面所说的那些识纯粹只是识的作用。“此中没有贪”,所以叫“无贪”。“无贪”也有读成短音的“nirāgā”。这里,贪就是染着的状态。其余几项:嗔是厌恶的状态,痴是迷惑的状态,慢是自恃的状态,见是颠倒看的状态。掉举,就是心的散乱状态,或者是不寂静的状态。疑,前面已经解释过了。随眠,就是潜伏存在。本来应该说“无随眠”,却说成“非随眠”,意思是一样的。这里应当知道,这是就那些已经达到缠缚状态的法来说其不存在的。因为识行并不是只就那些已断随眠者而说的。凡是名为“无贪”等的,那它就是与贪等相离的,因此为了显示另一种说法,说了“与贪相离”等话。接着,为了显示与其他的善法相离,说了“以善业”等话。善法因为远离贪等过失,所以是无过失的。因为与能令清净的惭、愧相应,所以是清净的。因为现起的快乐,所以“乐生起”,即这些法的生起是乐的;或者说,因为乐异熟,所以“乐生起”,即这些法的增长是乐的。与所说的相反,不善法应当配合起来说。“于识知而行”:由识所了知的对象,名为“识知”;于那个识知的对象中。这说的是什么意思呢?就像因与蓝色颜料结合而成为蓝布一样,因与识结合而成为“识知”的识;于那个识中而行,就说为“识行”。识本身就有这样的行,就是说,上述那样的识有上述那样的行,这是意思。并且,依世俗说法,说为“识的行”,然而从识之外,并没有另外的行。自性清净的心,因为无烦恼故,这里所说的这种心,因为贪等烦恼不存在,所以自性本来就是清净的。因此,只是了知,就是行,所以说为“识行”。也有“因为无烦恼故”这样的读法。巴利
69. Idāni visayavijānanamattaṭṭhena viññāṇacariyāti dassetuṃ nīrāgā caratītiādimāha, viññāṇañhi rāgādisampayoge saddhādisampayoge ca avatthantaraṃ pāpuṇāti, tesu asati sakāvatthāyameva tiṭṭhati. Tasmā nīrāgādivacanena tesaṃ vuttaviññāṇānaṃ viññāṇakiccamattaṃ dasseti. Natthi etissā rāgoti nīrāgā. Nirāgāti rassaṃ katvāpi paṭhanti . So pana rajjanavasena rāgo. Itaresu dussanavasena doso. Muyhanavasena moho. Maññanavasena māno. Viparītadassanavasena diṭṭhi. Uddhatabhāvo, avūpasantabhāvo vā uddhaccaṃ. Vicikicchā vuttatthā. Anusentīti anusayā. ‘‘Niranusayā’’ti vattabbe nānusayāti vuttaṃ, soyevattho. Pariyuṭṭhānappattānamevettha abhāvo veditabbo. Na hi viññāṇacariyā pahīnānusayānaṃyeva vuttā. Yā ca nīrāgādināmā, sā rāgādīhi vippayuttāva nāma hotīti pariyāyantaradassanatthaṃ rāgavippayuttātiādimāha. Puna aññehi ca vippayuttataṃ dassetuṃ kusalehi kammehītiādimāha. Kusalāniyeva rāgādivajjābhāvā anavajjāni. Parisuddhabhāvakarehi hiriottappehi yuttattā sukkāni. Pavattisukhattā sukho udayo uppatti etesanti sukhudrayāni, sukhavipākattā vā sukho udayo vaḍḍhi etesanti sukhudrayāni. Vuttavipakkhena akusalāni yojetabbāni. Viññāte caratīti viññāṇena viññāyamānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ viññātaṃ nāma, tasmiṃ viññāte ārammaṇe. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viya viññāṇayogato viññātaṃ viññāṇaṃ nāma hoti, tasmiṃ viññāṇe caratīti viññāṇacariyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Viññāṇassaevarūpā cariyā hotīti vuttappakārassa viññāṇassa vuttappakārā cariyā hotīti attho. ‘‘Viññāṇassa cariyā’’ti ca vohāravasena vuccati, viññāṇato pana visuṃ cariyā natthi. Pakatiparisuddhamidaṃ cittaṃ nikkilesaṭṭhenāti idaṃ vuttappakāraṃ cittaṃ rāgādikilesābhāvena pakatiyā eva parisuddhaṃ. Tasmā vijānanamattameva cariyāti viññāṇacariyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Niklesaṭṭhenātipi pāṭho.
在无明行中,对于可意的事物:它们让心投入、让心欢喜,或者让心增长、扩展,所以叫可意;可意的本身就是可意的。在那些可意的事物中。然而,那些事物无论是可喜的还是不可喜的,从执取的角度来说,都是可意的。因为并不是只在可喜的事物上才生起贪,只在不可喜的事物上才生起嗔。为了贪的速行:指以相续的方式,为了贪的生起而转起的。转向唯作无记:指在眼门中,属于不如理作意的转向唯作无记意界。贪的速行:指贪大多数生起七次,那一次又一次反复生起的贪本身。无明行:因为贪是由无明产生的,所以说贪是以无明而行的,这就叫无明行。其余各项也是同样的道理。以这两者不加观察的事中:指因贪和嗔而缺乏平等观察的、名为色所缘的事。为了痴的速行:指以疑和掉举的方式,为了痴的生起而转起的。无明行:纯粹是无明的行,不是别的行。结缚的等等,是描述慢等自性的词。其中,结缚的:指以高举的方式结缚而安住的状态。所执取的:指超越了色的无常等真实状态,而从反面执取了常等状态。散乱的:指在色所缘上达到散乱状态的。达未决定状态的:指达到不确定状态的。得强力的:指达到力量强盛状态的。在诸法中:指在色等法中,或者在作为法所缘的诸法中。巴利
Aññāṇacariyāya manāpiyesūti manasi appenti pasīdanti, manaṃ vā appāyanti vaḍḍhentīti manāpāni, manāpāniyeva manāpiyāni. Tesu manāpiyesu. Tāni pana iṭṭhāni vā hontu aniṭṭhāni vā, gahaṇavasena manāpiyāni. Na hi iṭṭhasmiṃyeva rāgo aniṭṭhasmiṃyeva doso uppajjati. Rāgassa javanatthāyāti santativasena rāgassa javanatthāya pavattā. Āvajjanakiriyābyākatāti cakkhudvāre ayoniso manasikārabhūtā āvajjanakiriyābyākatā manodhātu. Rāgassa javanāti yebhuyyena sattakkhattuṃ rāgassa pavatti, punappunaṃ pavatto rāgoyeva. Aññāṇacariyāti aññāṇena rāgassa sambhavato aññāṇena rāgassa cariyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Tadubhayena asamapekkhanasmiṃ vatthusminti rāgadosavasena samapekkhanavirahite rūpārammaṇasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ. Mohassa javanatthāyāti vicikicchāuddhaccavasena mohassa javanatthāya. Aññāṇacariyāti aññāṇasseva cariyā, na aññassa. Vinibandhassātiādīni mānādīnaṃ sabhāvavacanāni. Tattha vinibandhassāti unnativasena vinibandhitvā ṭhitassa. Parāmaṭṭhāyāti rūpassa aniccabhāvādiṃ atikkamitvā parato niccabhāvādiṃ āmaṭṭhāya gahitāya. Vikkhepagatassāti rūpārammaṇe vikkhittabhāvaṃ gatassa. Aniṭṭhaṅgatāyāti asanniṭṭhānabhāvaṃ gatāya. Thāmagatassāti balappattassa. Dhammesūti rūpādīsu vā dhammārammaṇabhūtesu vā dhammesu.
70 因为贪等是由无明而产生的,所以为了说明无明在与贪等相应时的特殊作用,就说了“有贪而行”等话。其中,“有贪而行”应当理解为:以痴、慢、邪见、慢随眠、见随眠和无明随眠的速行方式而行的。“有瞋而行”是以痴和无明随眠的速行方式而行的。“有痴而行”是以贪、瞋、慢、见、掉举、疑随眠的速行方式而行的。“有慢而行”是以贪、痴、欲贪、有贪和无明随眠的速行方式而行的。“有见而行”是以贪、痴、欲贪和无明随眠的速行方式而行的。“有掉举而行”和“有疑而行”是以痴和无明随眠的速行方式而行的。“有随眠而行”在这里也应按同样的方式理解:以每一种随眠为根本,在那个心里根据可得的其余随眠,来构成“有随眠”的状态。“与贪相应”等说法,只是“有贪”等的另一种表达。正是这个行,因为与贪等相应而一起生起,所以得到“有贪”等名称;因为与贪等在俱生、俱灭、同依处、同所缘等方式上相结合,所以得到“与贪相应”等名称。再者,为了说明它也是无明行,因为与善业不相应、与不善业相应,所以说了“与善业”等话。其中,“未知”是指:由于痴以无智为特征,所以是就依真实面目而未被了知的所缘而说的。其余内容与前面所说相同。巴利
70. Yasmā rāgādayo aññāṇena honti, tasmā rāgādisampayogena aññāṇaṃ visesento sarāgā caratītiādimāha. Tattha sarāgā caratīti mohamānadiṭṭhimānānusayadiṭṭhānusayaavijjānusayajavanavasena cariyā veditabbā. Sadosā caratīti mohaavijjānusayajavanavasena. Samohā caratīti rāgadosamānadiṭṭhiuddhaccavicikicchānusayajavanavasena. Samānā caratīti rāgamohakāmarāgabhavarāgāvijjānusayajavanavasena. Sadiṭṭhi caratīti rāgamohakāmarāgāvijjānusayajavanavasena. Sauddhaccā carati savicikicchā caratīti mohaavijjānusayajavanavasena. Sānusayā caratīti etthāpi vuttanayeneva ekekaṃ anusayaṃ mūlaṃ katvā tasmiṃ citte labbhamānakasesānusayavasena sānusayatā yojetabbā. Rāgasampayuttātiādi sarāgādivevacanameva. Sā eva hi cariyā sampayogavasena saha rāgādīhi vattatīti sarāgādiādīni nāmāni labhati. Rāgādīhi samaṃ ekuppādekanirodhekavatthekārammaṇādīhi pakārehi yuttāti rāgasampayuttānītiādīni nāmāni labhati. Sāyeva ca yasmā kusalādīhi kammehi vippayuttā, akusalādīhi kammehi sampayuttā, tasmāpi aññāṇacariyāti dassetuṃ kusalehi kammehītiādimāha. Tattha aññāteti mohassa aññāṇalakkhaṇattā yathāsabhāvena aññāte ārammaṇe. Sesaṃ vuttatthameva.
71 在智行这部分,因为能作为还灭随观等的无间缘的转向作用无记心并不存在,所以为了它们,就不说转向作用无记,而只说了还灭随观等。因为转向只是为了随顺智才生起,从此之后才有还灭随观、道和果。这里说的“果等至”,不论是紧接在道之后生起的,还是隔一段时间才生起的,两种都包括在内。在“无贪而行”等说法中,应当知道“无贪”等是就与贪等相对治的角度来说的;而在识行中,则只是从没有贪等的意义上说。“于已知中”是指依照真实状况而了知。“其余的识行”等说法,显示三种行互不混杂。纯粹以识的作用生起的无因心,是识行;专以无知的作用生起的十二种不善心,是无知行;以殊胜的智慧作用生起的观、道、果,是智行。这样一来,这些行互不混杂,而除了观之外的有因欲界唯作与善,以及有因欲界果报,还有色界、无色界的善与无记,应当知道它们是脱离这三种行的。由于以涅槃为所缘的还灭随观已经归入智行,所以应当知道,那些观察涅槃、道、果的、属于有学和无学的观察智,也包含在智行之内。因为它们同样殊胜地发挥着智慧的作用。巴利
71. Ñāṇacariyāyaṃ yasmā vivaṭṭanānupassanādīnaṃ anantarapaccayabhūtā āvajjanakiriyābyākatā natthi, tasmā tesaṃ atthāya āvajjanakiriyābyākataṃ avatvā vivaṭṭanānupassanādayova vuttā. Anulomañāṇatthāya eva hi āvajjanā hoti, tato vivaṭṭanānupassanāmaggaphalāni. Phalasamāpattīti cettha maggānantarajā vā hotu kālantarajā vā, ubhopi adhippetā. Nīrāgā caratītiādīsu rāgādīnaṃ paṭipakkhavasena nīrāgāditā veditabbā, viññāṇacariyāyaṃ rāgādīnaṃ abhāvamattaṭṭhena. Ñāteti yathāsabhāvato ñāte. Aññā viññāṇacariyātiādīhi tissannaṃ cariyānaṃ aññamaññamasammissataṃ dasseti. Viññāṇakiccamattavasena hi ahetukacittuppādā viññāṇacariyā, aññāṇakiccavataṃ dvādasannaṃ akusalacittuppādānaṃ vaseneva aññāṇacariyā, visesena ñāṇakiccakārīnaṃ vipassanāmaggaphalānaṃ vasena ñāṇacariyā. Evamimā aññamaññamasammissā ca, vipassanaṃ ṭhapetvā sahetukakāmāvacarakiriyākusalā ca, sahetukakāmāvacaravipākā ca, rūpāvacarārūpāvacarakusalābyākatā ca tīhi cariyāhi vinimuttāti veditabbā. Nibbānārammaṇāya vivaṭṭanānupassanāya ñāṇacariyāya niddiṭṭhattā nibbānamaggaphalapaccavekkhaṇabhūtāni sekkhāsekkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni ñāṇacariyāya saṅgahitānīti veditabbāni. Tānipi hi visesena ñāṇakiccakarānevāti.
第十八 地差别智解说的注释巴利
18. Bhūminānattañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
72 在“地差别智”的解说中,“地”指的是部分或划分。说到“欲界”,这里欲有两种:烦恼欲和事欲。烦恼欲就是欲贪,事欲就是三界的轮回。烦恼欲是因为它能欲求,所以叫欲;事欲是因为它被欲求,所以叫欲。这两种欲,按照它们活动的方式,在哪个地方活动,那个地方就是欲活动的地方,所以叫“欲界”。而这个地方按四恶趣、人界和六层天界来分,共有十一种。就像某个地方有带武器的人活动,即使那里也有其他两足、四足众生在活动,但因为那些带武器的人更显著,那个地方就被称为“带武器者活动的地方”;同样,即使其他色界等地方也有这些欲在活动,但因为这些欲在这里更显著,这个地方就只被称为“欲界”。这个“欲界”,就像“色有”略去后半个词而说成“色”一样,也略去后半个词而只说成“欲”。凡是与这个欲相关联的每一种法,在这被称为十一种地方的“欲”中活动,就是欲界法。虽然这里有些法也在色界、无色界中活动,但就像一头因在战场上活动而得到“战场之象”这个名字的象,即使它在城里行走,仍然被称为“战场之象”;又像陆生、水生的动物,即使站在干地或水里,仍然被称为“陆生”“水生”;同样,这些法虽然在别处活动,也应当知道它们就是欲界法。或者,从所缘的角度来说,这些法以欲为所缘而活动,所以是欲界法。虽然这欲也活动于色界、无色界的法中,但就像说“会叫的所以叫犊,躺在地上的所以叫水牛”,并不是所有会叫的、躺在地上的都得到那个名字。这个道理应当这样理解。这里把这一切法归为一类,根据前面所说的“地”这个词,而说“欲界”,用的是阴性复数形式。在“色界”等中,色有就是色,在那种色中活动,所以是色界法;无色有就是无色,在那种无色中活动,所以是无色界法。包含在三界轮回之中的,就是“有漏”;不包含在其中的,就是“无漏”。巴利
72. Bhūminānattañāṇaniddese bhūmiyoti bhāgā paricchedā vā. Kāmāvacarāti ettha duvidho kāmo kilesakāmo vatthukāmo ca. Kilesakāmo chandarāgo, vatthukāmo tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ. Kilesakāmo kāmetīti kāmo, vatthukāmo kāmīyatīti kāmo. So duvidho kāmo pavattivasena yasmiṃ padese avacarati, so padeso kāmo ettha avacaratīti kāmāvacaro. So pana padeso catunnaṃ apāyānaṃ, manussalokassa, channañca devalokānaṃ vasena ekādasavidho . Yathā hi yasmiṃ padese sasatthā purisā avacaranti, so vijjamānesupi aññesu dvipadacatuppadesu avacarantesu tesaṃ abhilakkhitattā ‘‘sasatthāvacaro’’ti vuccati, evaṃ vijjamānesupi aññesu rūpāvacarādīsu tattha avacarantesu tesaṃ abhilakkhitattā ayaṃ padeso ‘‘kāmāvacaro’’tveva vuccati. Svāyaṃ yathā rūpabhavo rūpaṃ, evaṃ uttarapadalopaṃ katvā ‘‘kāmo’’tveva vuccati. Tappaṭibaddho ekeko dhammo imasmiṃ ekādasavidhapadesasaṅkhāte kāme avacaratīti kāmāvacaro. Kiñcāpi hi ettha keci dhammā rūpārūpabhavesupi avacaranti, yathā pana saṅgāme avacaraṇato ‘‘saṅgāmāvacaro’’ti laddhanāmo nāgo nagare carantopi ‘‘saṅgāmāvacaro’’tveva vuccati, thalajalacarā ca pāṇino athale ajale ca ṭhitāpi ‘‘thalacarā jalacarā’’tveva vuccanti, evaṃ te aññattha avacarantāpi kāmāvacarāyevāti veditabbā. Ārammaṇakaraṇavasena vā etesu vuttappakāresu dhammesu kāmo avacaratīti kāmāvacarā. Kāmañcesa rūpārūpāvacaradhammesupi avacarati, yathā pana ‘‘vadatīti vaccho, mahiyaṃ setīti mahiṃso’’ti vutte na yattakā vadanti, mahiyaṃ vā senti, sabbesaṃ taṃ nāmaṃ hoti. Evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ettha sabbe te dhamme ekarāsiṃ katvā vuttabhūmisaddamapekkhitvā kāmāvacarāti itthiliṅgavacanaṃ kataṃ. Rūpāvacarātiādīsu rūpabhavo rūpaṃ, tasmiṃ rūpe avacarantīti rūpāvacarā. Arūpabhavo arūpaṃ, tasmiṃ arūpe avacarantīti arūpāvacarā. Tebhūmakavaṭṭe pariyāpannā antogadhāti pariyāpannā, tasmiṃ na pariyāpannāti apariyāpannā.
在解说欲界等地时,“下方”是指靠下的部分。无间地狱:因为那里火焰、众生或感受之间没有任何空隙,所以叫“无间”。因为那里没有所谓的一丝安乐,所以叫“地狱”;也以没有喜悦之义而叫“地狱”。以它为边界,就是把那个叫无间的地狱作为尽头。“上方”是指靠上的部分。他化自在天:因为在他人所化的欲乐上能自在支配,所以这样得名的天众。包含在内,就是把它放进去。“在这个区间中”,是指在那个范围内。“yanti”这个词,是把性、数、格作了变通处理。说“行处”,是因为在这个区间里,其他众生有时也在某处活动,为了不把他们也算进去,所以只说“行处”。这样一来,那些沉浸在一个区间里活动、并且到处、任何时候都可能出现,又在下方活动——因为无间地狱下方有生起之法的运转——的诸法,就被包含进来了。因为它们沉浸而活动,又在下方活动,所以叫“行处”。而说“所属”,是因为这些法虽然也活动于其他地方,却不属于那里,所以把那些也活动于其他地方的情况一并收摄了。巴利
Kāmāvacarādibhūminiddesesu heṭṭhatoti heṭṭhābhāgena. Avīcinirayanti jālānaṃ vā sattānaṃ vā vedanānaṃ vā vīci antaraṃ chiddaṃ ettha natthīti avīci. Sukhasaṅkhāto ayo ettha natthīti nirayo, niratiatthenapi nirayo. Pariyantaṃ karitvāti taṃ avīcisaṅkhātaṃ nirayaṃ antaṃ katvā. Uparitoti uparibhāgena. Paranimmitavasavattī deveti paranimmitesu kāmesu vasaṃ vattanato evaṃladdhavohāre deve. Anto karitvāti anto pakkhipitvā. Yaṃ etasmiṃ antareti ye etasmiṃ okāse. Yanti ca liṅgavacanavipallāso kato. Etthāvacarāti iminā yasmā tasmiṃ antare aññepi caranti kadāci katthaci sambhavato, tasmā tesaṃ asaṅgaṇhanatthaṃ avacarāti vuttaṃ. Tena ye ekasmiṃ antare ogāḷhā hutvā caranti, sabbattha sadā ca sambhavato, adhobhāge ca caranti avīcinirayassa heṭṭhā bhūtūpādāya pavattibhāvena, tesaṃ saṅgaho kato hoti. Te hi ogāḷhā caranti, adhobhāge ca carantīti avacarā. Ettha pariyāpannāti iminā pana yasmā ete etthāvacarā aññatthāpi avacaranti, na pana tattha pariyāpannā honti, tasmā tesaṃ aññatthāpi avacarantānaṃ pariggaho kato hoti.
现在,为了说明这些在此范围内的法,从蕴聚空性作为缘的角度以及从自性角度,他说了“蕴、界、处”等。梵界:就是被称为初禅地的梵天处所。色究竟天:以最上的意义,不是低劣的。入定者:指已入等至的人。以此说了善禅那。已投生者:指以异熟果报投生于梵界的人。以此说了异熟禅那。现法乐住者:现法就是眼前可见的自身,乐住就是现法乐住,他拥有这个,所以是现法乐住者,也就是阿罗汉。对于这位现法乐住者,以此说了作用禅那。心所:存在于心中的,就是心所,意思是与心相应。空无边处有:指已趋入被称为空无边处之有的有情。第二句也是同样的道理。道:就是四种圣道。道果:就是四种圣道的果。无为界:就是不由缘所造作的涅槃界。巴利
Idāni te ettha pariyāpanne dhamme rāsisuññatāpaccayabhāvato ceva sabhāvato ca dassento khandhadhātuāyatanātiādimāha. Brahmalokanti paṭhamajjhānabhūmisaṅkhātaṃ brahmaṭṭhānaṃ. Akaniṭṭheti uttamaṭṭhena na kaniṭṭhe. Samāpannassāti samāpattiṃ samāpannassa. Etena kusalajjhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Upapannassāti vipākavasena brahmaloke upapannassa. Etena vipākajjhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissāti diṭṭheva dhamme paccakkhe attabhāve sukho vihāro diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāro, so assa atthīti diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārī, arahā. Tassa diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa. Etena kiriyajjhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Cetasikāti cetasi bhavā cetasikā, cittasampayuttāti attho. Ākāsānañcāyatanūpageti ākāsānañcāyatanasaṅkhātaṃ bhavaṃ upagate. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Maggāti cattāro ariyamaggā. Maggaphalānīti cattāri ariyamaggaphalāni. Asaṅkhatā ca dhātūti paccayehi akatā nibbānadhātu.
另外还有四种地,应当按每一组四法来理解。四念处:就是身随观念处、受随观念处、心随观念处、法随观念处。它的含义是:能建立,所以叫“处”,意思是安住、进入、投入而运作。念本身就是处,所以叫念处;或者,以忆念为“念”,以安住现起为“处”,念和处合起来也叫念处。因为所缘不同而有多种这样的念,所以叫四念处。四正勤:为了不让未生的不善法生起而正勤,为了断除已生的不善法而正勤,为了让未生的善法生起而正勤,为了让已生的善法保持不退而正勤。依靠这个去勤奋、努力,所以叫“勤”,这是精进的名称。正勤就是不颠倒的勤、有原因的勤、有方法的勤、如理的勤。同一个精进,按作用分成四种,所以叫四正勤。四神足:就是欲神足、心神足、精进神足、观神足。它的含义前面已经说过。四禅:依靠寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性这五支,是初禅;依靠喜、乐、心一境性这三支,是第二禅;依靠乐、心一境性这两支,是第三禅;依靠舍、心一境性这两支,是第四禅。这些支分,因为是对所缘静虑的意思,所以叫禅那。四无量:就是慈、悲、喜、舍。因为遍满无量,所以叫无量。这些确实能以身心的方式遍满无量的众生,或者即使只有一个众生也能无余地遍满,所以叫遍满无量,也叫无量。四无色定:就是空无边处定、识无边处定、无所有处定、非想非非想处定。四无碍解,含义已经说过。巴利
Aparāpi catasso bhūmiyoti ekekacatukkavasena veditabbā. Cattāro satipaṭṭhānāti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Tassattho – patiṭṭhātīti paṭṭhānaṃ, upaṭṭhāti okkanditvā pakkhanditvā pavattatīti attho. Satiyeva paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Atha vā saraṇaṭṭhena sati, upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena paṭṭhānaṃ, sati ca sā paṭṭhānañcātipi satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Ārammaṇavasena bahukā tā satiyoti satipaṭṭhānā. Cattāro sammappadhānāti anuppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ anuppādāya sammappadhānaṃ, uppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ pahānāya sammappadhānaṃ, anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ uppādāya sammappadhānaṃ, uppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ ṭhitiyā sammappadhānaṃ. Padahanti vāyamanti etenāti padhānaṃ, vīriyassetaṃ nāmaṃ . Sammappadhānanti aviparītappadhānaṃ kāraṇappadhānaṃ upāyappadhānaṃ yonisopadhānaṃ. Ekameva vīriyaṃ kiccavasena catudhā katvā sammappadhānāti vuttaṃ. Cattāro iddhipādāti chandiddhipādo, cittiddhipādo, vīriyiddhipādo, vīmaṃsiddhipādo. Tassattho vuttoyeva. Cattāri jhānānīti vitakkavicārapītisukhacittekaggatāvasena pañcaṅgikaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ. Pītisukhacittekaggatāvasena tivaṅgikaṃ dutiyajjhānaṃ, sukhacittakaggatāvasena duvaṅgikaṃ tatiyajjhānaṃ, upekkhācittekaggatāvasena duvaṅgikaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ. Imāni hi aṅgāni ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṭṭhena jhānanti vuccanti. Catasso appamaññāyoti mettā, karuṇā, muditā, upekkhā. Pharaṇaappamāṇavasena appamaññāyo. Etāyo hi ārammaṇavasena appamāṇe vā satte pharanti, ekaṃ sattampi vā anavasesapharaṇavasena pharantīti pharaṇaappamāṇavasena appamaññāyoti vuccanti. Catasso arūpasamāpattiyoti ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpatti, viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpatti, ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpatti, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpatti. Catasso paṭisambhidā vuttatthā eva.
四种行道:就是“苦行道且迟钝通达、苦行道且迅速通达、乐行道且迟钝通达、乐行道且迅速通达”(《长部》3.311)所说的四种行道。四种所缘:就是小所缘且小对境、小所缘且无量对境、无量所缘且小对境、无量所缘且无量对境(《法集论》181等)所说的四种所缘。应当知道,这是就不能确定遍等所缘、但具有所缘的禅那来说的。四种圣种:圣者指的是诸佛、辟支佛和如来弟子,这些圣者的世系、传统、相续,就是圣种。是哪四种呢?就是满足于衣服、满足于团食、满足于坐卧处、乐于修习,这四种。对病缘药的满足,在说到满足于团食时就已经说到了。因为一个人如果对团食能知足,怎么会对病缘药不知足呢?巴利
Catassopaṭipadāti ‘‘dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā, dukkhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā, sukhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā, sukhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.311) vuttā catasso paṭipadā. Cattāri ārammaṇānīti parittaṃ parittārammaṇaṃ, parittaṃ appamāṇārammaṇaṃ, appamāṇaṃ parittārammaṇaṃ, appamāṇaṃ appamāṇārammaṇanti (dha. sa. 181 ādayo) vuttāni cattāri ārammaṇāni. Kasiṇādiārammaṇānaṃ avavatthāpetabbato ārammaṇavantāni jhānāni vuttānīti veditabbāni. Cattāro ariyavaṃsāti ariyā vuccanti buddhā ca paccekabuddhā ca tathāgatasāvakā ca, tesaṃ ariyānaṃ vaṃsā tantiyo paveṇiyoti ariyavaṃsā. Ke pana te? Cīvarasantoso piṇḍapātasantoso senāsanasantoso bhāvanārāmatāti ime cattāro. Gilānapaccayasantoso piṇḍapātasantose vutte vuttoyeva hoti. Yo hi piṇḍapāte santuṭṭho, so kathaṃ gilānapaccaye asantuṭṭho bhavissati.
四摄事,就是四种摄受大众的方法——布施、爱语、利行、同事,这四种。布施,就是随宜适当的布施。爱语,就是随宜适当的亲切话语。利行,就是在各种场合该做的就去做,并教导什么该做、什么不该做,以此来利益他人。同事,就是“与自己同等”——意思是“有共同的衡量、有共同的计较”。所谓“他与我同等”,就是通过这个“同等”来对待他人,这就叫“同己”;“同己”的状态就是“同事”。意思是:先衡量“这个人比我低”“这个人跟我差不多”“这个人比我强”,然后按照相应的方式去对待。也有人说:“同甘共苦,就是同事。”巴利
Cattāri saṅgahavatthūnīti cattāri janasaṅgaṇhanakāraṇāni – dānañca peyyavajjañca atthacariyā ca samānattatā cāti imāni cattāri. Dānanti yathārahaṃ dānaṃ. Peyyavajjanti yathārahaṃ piyavacanaṃ. Atthacariyāti tattha tattha kattabbassa karaṇavasena kattabbākattabbānusāsanavasena ca vuddhikiriyā. Samānattatāti saha mānena samāno, saparimāṇo saparigaṇanoti attho. Samāno parassa attā etenāti samānatto, samānattassa bhāvo samānattatā, ‘‘ayaṃ mayā hīno, ayaṃ mayā sadiso, ayaṃ mayā adhiko’’ti parigaṇetvā tadanurūpena upacaraṇaṃ karaṇanti attho. ‘‘Samānasukhadukkhatā samānattatā’’ti ca vadanti.
“四轮”在这里,“轮”有五种:木轮、宝轮、法轮、威仪轮、成就轮。其中,“大王,那个用六个月减去六天做成的轮”(《增支部》3.15)指的是木轮。“取轮而转”(《本生》1.13.68)指的是宝轮。“我所转的轮”(《经集》562)指的是法轮。“有四轮九门”(《相应部》1.29)指的是威仪轮。“比丘们,有这四种轮,具足这四种轮的天与人,他们的四轮才能运转。是哪四种?住在适宜的地方、亲近善士、正确地发愿、过去所积的福”(《增支部》4.31)指的是成就轮。这里要说的也正是这个成就轮。其中,住在适宜的地方,是指住在四众弟子都能见到的、合适的地方。亲近善士,是指依靠、亲近、结交佛陀等善士。正确地发愿,是指正确地安立自己——如果过去具有无信等过失,就舍弃它们,安立在信等善法中。过去所积的福,是指过去积累的善业。这里就是以这个为标准。因为,以与智慧相应的心所做的善业,这个善业就会把这个人引导到适宜的地方,让他亲近善士,而这个人自己也能正确地安立自己。巴利
Cattāri cakkānīti ettha cakkaṃ nāma dārucakkaṃ, ratanacakkaṃ, dhammacakkaṃ, iriyāpathacakkaṃ, sampatticakkanti pañcavidhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘yaṃ pana taṃ, deva, cakkaṃ chahi māsehi niṭṭhitaṃ chārattūnehī’’ti (a. ni. 3.15) idaṃ dārucakkaṃ. ‘‘Cakkaṃ vattayato pariggahetvā’’ti (jā. 1.13.68) idaṃ ratanacakkaṃ. ‘‘Mayā pavattitaṃ cakka’’nti (su. ni. 562) idaṃ dhammacakkaṃ. ‘‘Catucakkaṃ navadvāra’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.29) idaṃ iriyāpathacakkaṃ. ‘‘Cattārimāni , bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ vattati. Katamāni cattāri? Patirūpadesavāso, sappurisāvassayo, attasammāpaṇidhi, pubbe ca katapuññatā’’ti (a. ni. 4.31) idaṃ sampatticakkaṃ. Idhāpi etadeva adhippetaṃ. Tattha patirūpadesavāsoti yattha catasso parisā sandissanti, evarūpe anucchavike dese vāso. Sappurisāvassayoti buddhādīnaṃ sappurisānaṃ avassayanaṃ sevanaṃ bhajanaṃ. Attasammāpaṇidhīti attano sammā patiṭṭhāpanaṃ. Sace pubbe assaddhādīhi samannāgato hoti, tāni pahāya saddhādīsu patiṭṭhāpanaṃ. Pubbe ca katapuññatāti pubbe upacitakusalatā. Idameva cettha pamāṇaṃ. Yena hi ñāṇasampayuttacittena kusalakammaṃ kataṃ hoti, tadeva kusalaṃ taṃ purisaṃ patirūpadese upaneti, sappurise bhajāpeti, so eva puggalo attānaṃ sammā ṭhapetīti.
“四法句”就是四种法的分类。是哪四种呢?无贪法句、无嗔法句、正念法句、正定法句。所谓“无贪法句”,指的是无贪,或者以无贪为主导而证得的禅那、观、道、果、涅槃。所谓“无嗔法句”,指的是无嗔,或者以慈心为首而证得的禅那等。所谓“正念法句”,指的是善建立的念,或者以念为首而证得的禅那等。所谓“正定法句”,指的是八等至,或者以八等至为首而证得的禅那等。另外,以十不净为依据而证得的禅那等,是无贪法句;以四梵住为依据而证得的,是无嗔法句;以十随念和食厌想为依据而证得的,是正念法句;以十遍和入出息念为依据而证得的,是正定法句。这四种地,每一种都应该按四法组合的方式来搭配理解。巴利
Cattāri dhammapadānīti cattāro dhammakoṭṭhāsā. Katamāni cattāri? Anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ, abyāpādo dhammapadaṃ, sammāsati dhammapadaṃ, sammāsamādhi dhammapadaṃ. Anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ nāma alobho vā anabhijjhāvasena adhigatajjhānavipassanāmaggaphalanibbānāni vā. Abyāpādo dhammapadaṃ nāma akopo vā mettāsīsena adhigatajjhānādīni vā. Sammāsati dhammapadaṃ nāma sūpaṭṭhitassati vā satisīsena adhigatajjhānādīni vā. Sammāsamādhi dhammapadaṃ nāma aṭṭhasamāpatti vā aṭṭhasamāpattisīsena adhigatajjhānādīni vā. Dasaasubhavasena vā adhigatajjhānādīni anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ, catubrahmavihāravasena adhigatāni abyāpādo dhammapadaṃ, dasānussatiāhārepaṭikūlasaññāvasena adhigatāni sammāsati dhammapadaṃ, dasakasiṇaānāpānavasena adhigatāni sammāsamādhi dhammapadanti. Imā catasso bhūmiyoti ekekaṃ catukkavaseneva yojetabbaṃ.
法种种智解说的注释巴利
19. Dhammanānattañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
73 在“法种种智”的解说中,“业道”是指那些业本身也是道,因为它们是通往恶趣的路,所以叫业道,也就是那些业道。所谓“十善业道”,就是远离杀生、远离不与取、远离欲邪行,这三种是身善行;远离妄语、远离离间语、远离粗恶语、远离杂秽语,这四种是语善行;无贪、无嗔、正见,这三种是意善行。所谓“十不善业道”,就是杀生、不与取、欲邪行,这三种是身恶行;妄语、离间语、粗恶语、杂秽语,这四种是语恶行;贪欲、嗔害、邪见,这三种是意恶行。善与不善当中,只有能引生结生的才叫业道;其余在引生结生上作用不定的,就不叫业道。应当知道,举出粗显的善与不善时,其余的善与不善也就被包含在内了。“色”:按大种和所造色的差别,有二十八种色。“异熟”:欲界善异熟十六种,不善异熟七种,合计二十三种异熟。“唯作”:无因唯作三种,有因唯作八种,合计十一种欲界唯作。因为没有异熟,只是纯粹的造作,所以叫唯作。到这里为止,已按欲界的色无记、异熟无记、唯作无记三类作了说明。巴利
73. Dhammanānattañāṇaniddese kammapatheti kammāni ca tāni pathā ca apāyagamanāyāti kammapathā, te kammapathe. Dasa kusalakammapathā nāma pāṇātipātā adinnādānā kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇīti tīṇi kāyasucaritāni, musāvādā pisuṇāya vācāya pharusāya vācāya samphappalāpā veramaṇīti cattāri vacīsucaritāni, anabhijjhā abyāpādo sammādiṭṭhīti tīṇi manosucaritāni. Dasa akusalakammapathā nāma pāṇātipāto adinnādānaṃ kāmesumicchācāroti tīṇi kāyaduccaritāni, musāvādo pisuṇā vācā pharusā vācā samphappalāpoti cattāri vacīduccaritāni, abhijjhā byāpādo micchādiṭṭhīti tīṇi manoduccaritāni. Kusalākusalāpi ca paṭisandhijanakāyeva kammapathāti vuttā, vuttāvasesā paṭisandhijanane anekanti kattā kammapathāti na vuttā. Oḷārikakusalākusalagahaṇeneva sesakusalākusalāpi gahitāti veditabbā. Rūpanti bhūtopādāyabhedato aṭṭhavīsatividhaṃ rūpaṃ. Vipākanti kāmāvacarakusalavipākānaṃ soḷasannaṃ, akusalavipākānaṃ sattannañca vasena tevīsatividhaṃ vipākaṃ. Kiriyanti tiṇṇamahetukakiriyānaṃ, aṭṭhannaṃ sahetukakiriyānañca vasena ekādasavidhaṃ kāmāvacarakiriyaṃ. Vipākābhāvato kiriyāmattāti kiriyā. Ettāvatā kāmāvacarameva rūpābyākatavipākābyākatakiriyābyākatavasena vuttaṃ.
“住在这里”是指住在这个世间。因为大多数情况下,人间有很多人修习禅那,所以主要是依据人间来说的;但禅那偶尔在天界也能得到,在色界梵天中,也可以根据在那里投生、从下地投生、从上地投生这些情况而获得。不过在净居天和无色界,没有从下地投生的情况。在色界和无色界,没有修习过禅那的人投生下地时,只会生在欲界的善趣,不会生在恶趣。“在那里投生的人”是指因为异熟而投生在梵天的人,他们的四种异熟禅那以结生、有分、死心的方式持续运作。色界和无色界禅那等至中的唯作无记,这里没有提到。虽然没有提到,但因为它们和善的生起方式相同,所以在说到善的时候,实际上就已经包含了它们,应该这样理解。就像《发趣论》里说的“善和不善灭去时,异熟以它们为所缘而生起”,仅仅举出善速行就已经包含了唯作速行,这里也应该这样理解。“沙门果”是指四种沙门果。以此说明了出世间异熟无记。“涅槃”是指涅槃无记。巴利
Idhaṭṭhassāti imasmiṃ loke ṭhitassa. Yebhuyyena manussaloke jhānabhāvanāsabbhāvato manussalokavasena vuttaṃ, jhānāni pana kadāci karahaci devalokepi labbhanti, rūpībrahmalokepi tatrūpapattikaheṭṭhūpapattikauparūpapattikānaṃ vasena labbhanti. Suddhāvāse pana arūpāvacare ca heṭṭhūpapattikā natthi. Rūpārūpāvacaresu abhāvitajjhānā heṭṭhā nibbattamānā kāmāvacarasugatiyaṃyeva nibbattanti, na duggatiyaṃ. Tatrūpapannassāti vipākavasena brahmaloke upapannassa paṭisandhibhavaṅgacutivasena vattamānāni cattāri vipākajjhānāni. Rūpārūpāvacarajjhānasamāpattīsu kiriyābyākatāni na vuttāni. Kiñcāpi na vuttāni, atha kho kusalehi samānapavattittā kusalesu vuttesu vuttāneva hontīti veditabbāni. Yathā paṭṭhāne ‘‘kusalākusale niruddhe vipāko tadārammaṇatā uppajjatī’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.406, 409) kusalajavanaggahaṇeneva kiriyajavanaṃ saṅgahitaṃ, evamidhāpi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sāmaññaphalānīti cattāri sāmaññaphalāni. Etena lokuttaravipākābyākataṃ vuttaṃ. Nibbānanti nibbānābyākataṃ.
以欢悦为根本:欢悦是这些法的根本和起点,所以叫“以欢悦为根本”,意思是以欢悦为首。因为这些法确实都是和欢悦一起生起的。当人作意无常时,欢悦就生起——在这里,只有如理作意时欢悦才生起,不如理作意时不会生起。不如理作意的人,连善法都根本不会生起,更不用说观了。为什么直接以欢悦本身来说呢?是为了显示欢悦的力量强大。因为如果没有欢悦,对偏远住处和殊胜善法就会生起不乐和厌倦,这样一来修行就会退失。反之,如果有欢悦,就不会有不乐,修行就能达到圆满。又因为如理作意是根本,对修习有很大帮助,为了显示这一点,下文将说到九法。巴利
Pāmojjamūlakāti pāmojjaṃ mūlaṃ ādi etesanti pāmojjamūlakā, pāmojjādikāti attho. Pāmojjena hi samāgatāneva honti. Aniccato manasikaroto pāmojjaṃ jāyatīti ettha yonisomanasikarotoyeva pāmojjaṃ jāyati, na ayonisomanasikaroto. Ayonisomanasikaroto kusaluppattiyeva natthi, pageva vipassanā. Kasmā sarūpena vuttanti ce? Pāmojjassa balavabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Pāmojje hi asati pantesu ca senāsanesu adhikusalesu ca dhammesu arati ukkaṇṭhitā uppajjati. Evaṃ sati bhāvanāyeva ukkamati. Pāmojje pana sati aratiabhāvato bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchati. Yonisomanasikārassa pana mūlabhāvena bhāvanāya bahūpakārattaṃ dassetuṃ upari navakaṃ vakkhati.
每当如实观察诸蕴的生起与坏灭,
有智慧的人能获得喜悦和欢欣,那就是不死的境界。巴利
‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 374) –
从言说来说,观者的欢悦以观为缘而生起。但在这里,应当理解为欢悦以聚的思择为缘而生起。欢悦就是欢悦的状态,是微弱的喜。在初修行的意义上,应当看到前缀“pa-”的作用。欢悦者,就是因那种欢悦而欢喜、满足的人。也有读作pamoditassa的版本,意思相同。喜,就是强有力的喜。喜心者,就是与喜相应的心。应当看到“相应”这个词被省略了,就像“马车”的说法一样。身,指名身,或者连同色身一起。轻安,就是内心的热恼止息了。轻安身者,因为两种轻安相应,所以身体获得寂止。感受乐,就是领受心所法的乐,或者连同身体上的乐一起领受。乐者,就是具备乐的人。心得定,就是心被平稳地安置,成为专一的状态。于定心,这是处格用法,表示“以定心为状态”的意思。因为正是以心定的状态,才被认定为如实知。如实知,就是依生灭智等,如实了知诸行。见,就是用慧眼去看,仿佛用肉眼看到一样,把它变得触手可及。厌离,就是通过九种观智的作用,对诸行感到厌倦。厌离而离欲,就是在修习那种观智时,通过道智的作用,对诸行离欲。由离欲而解脱,就是由离欲这个道智之因,以果解脱而决意于涅槃,从而解脱。不过,在某些版本中,这一段写的是“以定心,如实知此是苦”等四谛的教法;在某些版本中,又写的是“如理作意此是苦”等方式。两段只是在文句上有差别,在意义上没有差别。因为“厌离而离欲”已经说明了道智,道智成就时,四谛现观的作用也就成就了。所以,以四谛教法所说的那一段,和这一段在意义上并没有差别。巴利
Vacanato vipassakassa vipassanāpaccayā pāmojjaṃ uppajjati. Idha pana kalāpasammasanapaccayā pāmojjaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Pamuditassa bhāvo pāmojjaṃ, dubbalā pīti. Ādikammatthe pa-kāro daṭṭhabbo. Pamuditassāti tena pāmojjena pamuditassa tuṭṭhassa. Pamoditassātipi pāṭho. Soyevattho. Pītīti balavapīti. Pītimanassāti pītiyuttamanassa. Yuttasaddassa lopo daṭṭhabbo yathā assarathoti . Kāyoti nāmakāyo, rūpakāyena saha vā. Passambhatīti vūpasantadaratho hoti. Passaddhakāyoti ubhayapassaddhiyogena nibbutakāyo. Sukhaṃ vedetīti cetasikaṃ sukhaṃ vindati, kāyikasukhena saha vā. Sukhinoti sukhasamaṅgissa. Cittaṃ samādhiyatīti cittaṃ samaṃ ādhiyati, ekaggaṃ hoti. Samāhite citteti bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇatthe bhummavacanaṃ. Cittasamāhitabhāvena hi yathābhūtajānanaṃ lakkhīyati. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti udayabbayañāṇādivasena saṅkhāraṃ yathāsabhāvaṃ jānāti. Passatīti taṃyeva cakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ viya phuṭaṃ katvā paññācakkhunā passati. Nibbindatīti navavidhavipassanāñāṇayogena saṅkhāresu ukkaṇṭhati. Nibbindaṃ virajjatīti taṃ vipassanaṃ sikhaṃ pāpento maggañāṇayogena saṅkhārehi viratto hoti. Virāgā vimuccatīti virāgasaṅkhātamaggahetu phalavimuttiyā nibbāne adhimokkhena vimuccati. Kesuci pana potthakesu imasmiṃ vāre ‘‘samāhitena cittena idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’tiādi saccanayo likhito, sopi ca kesuci potthakesu ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti yoniso manasi karotī’’tiādinā nayena likhito. Vāradvayepi byañjanatoyeva viseso, na atthato. ‘‘Nibbindaṃ virajjatī’’ti hi maggañāṇassa vuttattā maggañāṇe ca siddhe catusaccābhisamayakiccaṃ siddhameva hoti. Tasmā catusaccanayena vuttavāropi iminā vārena atthato avisiṭṭhoyeva.
74 现在,因为前面用“无常”等来说时没有区分所缘,所以为了区分所缘,就说了“对色作意无常”等。以如理作意为根本,是说如理作意是这些法的根本和依止,所以叫以如理作意为根本。因为一旦离开如理作意,欢悦等九法就不会生起。以定心,是指以作为原因的定心。如实知,是指以智慧了知。当说“如理作意‘这是苦’”时,也包含了以随闻之故的前分圣谛随觉。如理作意,就是通过正确的方法作意。巴利
74. Idāni aniccatotiādīhi ārammaṇassa avisesetvā vuttattā ārammaṇaṃ visesento rūpaṃ aniccato manasi karotītiādimāha. Yonisomanasikāramūlakāti yonisomanasikāro mūlaṃ patiṭṭhā etesanti yonisomanasikāramūlakā. Yonisomanasikāraṃ muñcitvāyeva hi pāmojjādayo nava na honti. Samāhitena cittenāti kāraṇabhūtena cittena. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti paññāya pajānāti. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhanti yoniso manasi karotī’’ti vuccamāne anussavavasena pubbabhāgasaccānubodhopi saṅgayhati. Yonisomanasikāroti ca upāyena manasikāro.
依于界的种种差别,生起触的种种差别。意思是:依于眼等界的种种差别,生起眼触等的种种差别。依于触的种种差别,是指依于眼触等的种种差别。受的种种差别,是指眼触所生受等的种种差别。想的种种差别,是指欲想等的种种差别。思惟的种种差别,是指欲思惟等的种种差别。欲的种种差别,是指由于思惟的种种差别,对诸色有欲、对诸声有欲,这样生起欲的种种差别。热恼的种种差别,是指由于欲的种种差别,对诸色有热恼、对诸声有热恼,这样生起热恼的种种差别。遍求的种种差别,是指由于热恼的种种差别,生起对诸色遍求等的种种差别。获得的种种差别,是指由于遍求的种种差别,生起获得诸色等的种种差别。巴利
Dhātunānattaṃpaṭicca uppajjati phassanānattanti cakkhādidhātunānattaṃ paṭicca cakkhusamphassādinānattaṃ uppajjatīti attho. Phassanānattaṃ paṭiccāti cakkhusamphassādinānattaṃ paṭicca. Vedanānānattanti cakkhusamphassajādivedanānānattaṃ . Saññānānattanti kāmasaññādinānattaṃ. Saṅkappanānattanti kāmasaṅkappādinānattaṃ. Chandanānattanti saṅkappanānattatāya rūpe chando sadde chandoti evaṃ chandanānattaṃ uppajjati. Pariḷāhanānattanti chandanānattatāya rūpapariḷāho saddapariḷāhoti evaṃ pariḷāhanānattaṃ uppajjati. Pariyesanānānattanti pariḷāhanānattatāya rūpapariyesanādinānattaṃ uppajjati. Lābhanānattanti pariyesanānānattatāya rūpapaṭilābhādinānattaṃ uppajjatīti.
20-24. 智五支解说的注释巴利
20-24. Ñāṇapañcakaniddesavaṇṇanā
75 在“五智的解说”这一节里,因为这五种智有前后相续的关联,所以把它们放在一起提问和回答。“已善知”:是依照了知诸法自性特相的智慧,而很好地了知。“已知悉”:是依照“已知遍知”,从自性上了知,所以称为已知悉。以那种智慧了知这些法,那智慧就“已知”的意义而言是智,就“了知”的意义而言是慧——应当这样理解它们的关联。按同样的方式,其余几种智也应这样配合解释。“已遍知”:是依照共相,从各方面周遍了知。“已决断者”:是依照“决断遍知”,从无常等角度审察决断。“已断除者”:是由无常随观等智慧,从坏灭随观开始,断除常想等。“已舍遣者”:是依舍断而舍遣。“已修习者”:是已令其增长,反复修习。“一味者”:是由于各自的作用而成为一味、同一相,或者由于对治而成为一味,即依解脱而具有解脱味。“已证得”:是依获得而证得果法,依通达而证得涅槃法,成为现前。“已感受”:是依获得的触和通达的触而感受、体验。这五智在上文是依闻所成智而说,在这里则是依各自作用而说。巴利
75. Ñāṇapañcakaniddese tesaṃ pañcannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ anupubbasambandhasabbhāvato ekatova pucchāvissajjanāni katāni. Abhiññātā hontīti dhammasabhāvalakkhaṇajānanavasena suṭṭhu ñātā honti. Ñātā hontīti ñātapariññāvasena sabhāvato ñātattā ñātā nāma honti. Yena ñāṇena te dhammā ñātā honti, taṃ ñātaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ, pajānanaṭṭhena paññāti sambandho. Imināva nayena sesañāṇānipi yojetabbāni. Pariññātā hontīti sāmaññalakkhaṇavasena samantato ñātā honti. Tīritā hontīti tīraṇapariññāvasena aniccādito upaparikkhitā samāpitā nāma honti. Pahīnā hontīti aniccānupassanādinā ñāṇena niccasaññādayo bhaṅgānupassanato paṭṭhāya pahīnā honti. Pariccattā hontīti pahānavaseneva chaḍḍitā nāma honti. Bhāvitā hontīti vaḍḍhitā paribhāvitā ca honti. Ekarasā hontīti sakiccasādhanapaṭipakkhapahānena ekakiccā honti, paccanīkato vā vimuttivasena vimuttirasena ekarasā honti. Sacchikatā hontīti paṭilābhavasena phaladhammo paṭivedhavasena nibbānadhammoti paccakkhakatā honti. Phassitā hontīti paṭilābhaphusanena paṭivedhaphusanena ca phassitā anubhūtā honti. Imāni pañca ñāṇāni heṭṭhā sutamayañāṇavasena vuttāni, idha sakiccasādhanavasena.
无碍解智的解说释义巴利
25-28. Paṭisambhidāñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
76 76. 在《无碍解智解说》中,因为如果不先解说“法”,就无法说明它的作用,所以没有按照列举的顺序,而是先解说了“法”。法和它们的含义前面已经说过了。先用“信根是法”等说法,讲明“法”这个词所涵盖的法,然后为了显示“种种”这个词的含义,又说“与信根不同的其他法是……”。因为说了“不同的法”,就显示出了法的种种差别。“已现知”:就是以面对面的方式了知,变得清清楚楚。这样,就说明了“无碍解”这个词的含义。用“胜解之义为义”等说法,是在说明:信等这些法的胜解等作用,就叫作“义”。“作开示”:就是想要让别人知道时,为别人开示;别人在听他说话时,也同样能够得到开示。“音节、训释、言说”:就是名的音节、名的训释、名的言说。因为“名”能表明意义,所以叫“音节”;就像“诸比丘,因为‘有为’是造作出来的,所以称为‘行’”这样,经过确定、带上理由来说,所以叫“训释”;人们用它来表达意义,所以叫“言说”。巴利
76. Paṭisambhidāñāṇaniddese yasmā dhamme avutte tassa kiccaṃ na sakkā vattuṃ, tasmā uddiṭṭhānaṃ paṭipāṭiṃ anādiyitvā paṭhamaṃ dhammā niddiṭṭhā. Dhammādīnaṃ atthā vuttāyeva. Saddhindriyaṃ dhammotiādīhi dhammasaddapariyāpanne dhamme vatvā nānattasaddassa atthaṃ dassento añño saddhindriyaṃ dhammotiādimāha. ‘‘Añño dhammo’’ti hi vutte dhammānaṃ nānattaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Paṭividitāti abhimukhabhāvena viditā pākaṭā nāma honti. Tena paṭisambhidāpadassa attho vutto. Adhimokkhaṭṭho atthotiādīhi tesaṃ saddhādīnaṃ adhimuccanādikiccaṃ attho nāmāti dasseti. Sandassetunti paraṃ ñāpetukāmassa paraṃ sandassetuṃ. Parassa pana vacanaṃ suṇantassāpi labbhatiyeva. Byañjananiruttābhilāpāti nāmabyañjanaṃ nāmanirutti nāmābhilāpo. Nāmañhi atthaṃ byañjayatīti byañjanaṃ, ‘‘saṅkhatamabhisaṅkharontīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā saṅkhārāti vuccantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.79) evaṃ niddhāretvā sahetukaṃ katvā vuccamānattā nirutti, abhilapīyati etena atthoti abhilāpoti vuccati.
名也有四种:共名、德名、假名、化生名。其中,在最初劫时,由大众共同推举而确立的“大选出者”这一国王之名,就是共名。经中针对这一点说:“婆悉咤,因为受到大众推举,所以最初就安立了‘大选出者、大选出者’这个名称。”(长部3.131)像“说法者、粪扫衣者、持律者、三藏持者、有信仰者、具念者”这样,依功德而来的名称,就是德名。“世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者”等,乃至如来成百上千的名号,也都是德名。因此说:巴利
Nāmañca nāmetaṃ catubbidhaṃ – sāmaññanāmaṃ, guṇanāmaṃ, kittimanāmaṃ, opapātikanāmanti. Tattha paṭhamakappikesu mahājanena sammannitvā ṭhapitattā ‘‘mahāsammato’’ti rañño nāmaṃ sāmaññanāmaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘mahājanasammatoti kho, vāseṭṭha, ‘mahāsammato mahāsammato’tveva paṭhamaṃ akkharaṃ upanibbatta’’nti (dī. ni. 3.131). ‘‘Dhammakathiko paṃsukūliko vinayadharo tipiṭakadharo saddho sato’’ti evarūpaṃ guṇato āgatanāmaṃ guṇanāmaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādīnipi tathāgatassa anekāni nāmasatāni guṇanāmāneva. Tena vuttaṃ –
具足功德的大仙,他的名号多得数不清;
即使有一千个名字,也应当根据功德来命名。巴利
‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino; Guṇehi nāmamuddheyyaṃ, api nāmasahassato’’ti.
孩子出生后,在命名那天,亲友们先供养应受供养的人,然后聚在近旁,商量来商量去,说“他叫某某”,这个名字就是假名。前一个名称落到后一个名称上,前一种叫法落到后一种叫法上。比如,过去劫中月亮就叫“月”,现在也还是叫“月”;过去的太阳、海洋、大地、山,叫“山”,现在也还是叫“山”——这就是化生名。这四种名其实都只是一种名,它仅仅依靠世间的约定而成立,从究竟意义上说并不存在。另外一些人则说:“所谓名,就是能表明意义的音声。”至于力、觉支、道支的意义,应当依照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Yaṃ pana jātassa kumārakassa nāmaggahaṇadivase dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ sakkāraṃ katvā samīpe ṭhitā ñātakā kappetvā pakappetvā ‘‘ayaṃ asuko nāmā’’ti nāmaṃ karonti, idaṃ kittimanāmaṃ. Yā pana purimapaññatti aparapaññattiyaṃ patati, purimavohāro pacchimavohāre patati. Seyyathidaṃ, purimakappepi cando candoyeva nāma, etarahipi candoyeva. Atīte sūriyo, samuddo, pathavī, pabbato pabbatoyeva nāma, etarahipi pabbatoyevāti, idaṃ opapātikanāmaṃ. Idaṃ catubbidhampi nāmaṃ ekaṃ nāmameva hoti , taṃ lokasaṅketamattasiddhaṃ paramatthato avijjamānaṃ. Aññe pana ‘‘nāmaṃ nāma atthajotako saddo’’ti vadanti. Balabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgānaṃ vuttanayānusāreneva attho veditabbo.
三种智的解说释义巴利
29-31. Ñāṇattayaniddesavaṇṇanā
78 在“三种智”的解说中,“相”指的是行相。“无相”指的是与行相相反的涅槃。“已倾向”是说心以倾向于那个境界的方式而舒展解脱。“触了又触,见到坏灭”的意思是:以智慧反复触及行相,再以观智见到它的坏灭。由此,坏灭随观就成立了。它成就无常随观;因为无常就是苦,所以它成就苦随观;因为苦就是无我,所以它成就无我随观。这样,这里就说了三种随观。“无相住”是因为把相看作可怕,所以这三种随观的安住方式就叫无相住。“愿”指渴爱。“无愿”指与渴爱相反的涅槃。“执取倾向”指对“我”的执取。“空”指远离了“我”的涅槃。所谓“空”,就是本来就空,所以叫空。“舍置相续”是指以行舍智舍置异熟相续。众生确实喜欢、贪著那可称为善趣的异熟相续。但这位想进入果等至的修行者,见到那相续以及一切行法是无常等之后,就只是舍置不顾。只有这样见了之后,才能进入果等至,不然不行。“转向”是指以转向心转向。“进入”是指进入果等至。“无相定”是因为见到相的可怕而进入,所以叫无相定。“无相住定”则是依观住和果等至这两者而得名的。巴利
78. Ñāṇattayaniddese nimittanti saṅkhāranimittaṃ. Animitteti saṅkhāranimittapaṭipakkhe nibbāne. Adhimuttattāti tanninnabhāvena cittassa vissaṭṭhattā. Phussa phussa vayaṃ passatīti saṅkhāranimittaṃ ñāṇena phusitvā phusitvā tassa bhaṅgaṃ vipassanāñāṇeneva passati. Etena bhaṅgānupassanā siddhā. Sā aniccānupassanaṃ sādheti, aniccassa dukkhattā sā dukkhānupassanaṃ, dukkhassa anattattā sā anattānupassananti evamettha tisso anupassanā vuttā honti. Animitto vihāroti nimittaṃ bhayato diṭṭhattā so vipassanattayavihāro animittavihāro nāma hoti. Paṇidhinti taṇhaṃ. Appaṇihiteti taṇhāpaṭipakkhe nibbāne. Abhinivesanti attābhinivesaṃ. Suññateti attavirahite nibbāne. Suññatoti suññaṃyeva suññato. Pavattaṃ ajjhupekkhitvāti vipākappavattaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāya ajjhupekkhitvā. Sugatisaṅkhātavipākappavattābhinandino hi sattā. Ayaṃ pana phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitukāmo taṃ pavattaṃ, sabbañca saṅkhāragataṃ aniccādito passitvā ajjhupekkhatiyeva. Evañhi diṭṭhe phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjituṃ sakkoti, na aññathā. Āvajjitvāti āvajjanena āvajjitvā. Samāpajjatīti phalasamāpattiṃ paṭipajjati. Animittā samāpattīti nimittaṃ bhayato disvā samāpannattā animittā samāpatti nāma. Animittavihārasamāpattīti vipassanāvihāravasena ca phalasamāpattivasena ca tadubhayaṃ nāma hoti.
79 79. 现在,为了把行相本身分开来详细说明,说出了“色相”等话。关于“执取老死”的部分,应当说的前面已经说过了。接着用“另一种无相住”等话,把已经说过的内容归纳之后再显示出来。简要地说:所谓“住”意义上的智,是指在果等至之前的前行阶段,安住在行舍智中的修行者,对于观住种种差别的智;所谓“等至”意义上的智,是指对于果等至种种差别的智;所谓“住等至”意义上的智,是指对于这两者种种差别的智。如果他想只以观住来度过时间,就只让观住生起;如果他想只以果等至住来度过时间,就顺着观的次第向上推进之后,只让果等至住生起;如果想以两者来度过时间,就让两者都生起。这样,依照个人的意乐,就形成了三种不同。这里其余应当说明的内容,都已经在行舍智的解说中说过了。巴利
79. Idāni saṅkhāranimittameva vibhajitvā dassento rūpanimittantiādimāha. Jarāmaraṇaggahaṇe vattabbaṃ pubbe vuttameva. ‘‘Añño animittavihāro’’tiādīhi vutteyeva nigametvā dasseti. Saṅkhepena vihāraṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ nāma phalasamāpattiyā pubbabhāge saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇe ṭhitassa vipassanāvihāranānatte ñāṇaṃ samāpattaṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ nāma phalasamāpattinānatte ñāṇaṃ. Vihārasamāpattaṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ nāma tadubhayanānatte ñāṇaṃ. Vipassanāvihāreneva vītināmetukāmo vipassanāvihārameva pavatteti, phalasamāpattivihāreneva vītināmetukāmo vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā ussakkitvā phalasamāpattivihārameva pavatteti, tadubhayena vītināmetukāmo tadubhayaṃ pavatteti. Evaṃ puggalādhippāyavasena tividhaṃ jātaṃ. Sesamettha vattabbaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva.
第32章 无间定智解说的注释巴利
32. Ānantarikasamādhiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
80 在“无间定智解说”中,从“依出离之力”等开始的部分是说:对干观者而言,出离、无嗔、光明想、无散乱、法之抉择、智慧、喜悦这七法,与近行禅那相应,是各自对应烦恼的对治,并且这七法在同一心中生起。“心一境性”就是“无散乱”:成为专一的状态叫一境性;心不散乱于种种所缘,因此叫无散乱;也就是说,心一境性这一性质就叫无散乱。“定”:心平等地安住在同一所缘上,因此叫定。“依那定的威力”:对于依近行定而心得定的人,因为能如实了知,所以是依前面所说的那种定力。“智生起”:道智依次第生起。“灭尽”:以断除之力而灭尽。“如是”:是对上述内容的总结。“先有止”:在前期阶段有定。“后有智”:在后期阶段,也就是道心刹那,智生起。巴利
80. Ānantarikasamādhiñāṇaniddese nekkhammavasenātiādīsu nekkhammaabyāpādaālokasaññāavikkhepadhammavavatthānañāṇapāmojjāni sukkhavipassakassa upacārajjhānasampayuttā tassa tassa kilesassa vipakkhabhūtā satta dhammā ekacittasampayuttā eva. Cittassa ekaggatā avikkhepoti ekaggassa bhāvo ekaggatā, nānārammaṇe na vikkhipati tena cittanti avikkhepo, cittassa ekaggatāsaṅkhāto avikkhepoti attho. Samādhīti ekārammaṇe samaṃ ādhīyati tena cittanti samādhi nāmāti attho. Tassa samādhissa vasenāti upacārasamādhināpi samāhitacittassa yathābhūtāvabodhato vuttappakārassa samādhissa vasena. Uppajjati ñāṇanti maggañāṇaṃ yathākkamena uppajjati. Khīyantīti samucchedavasena khīyanti. Itīti vuttappakārassa atthassa nigamanaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ samathoti pubbabhāge samādhi hoti. Pacchā ñāṇanti aparabhāge maggakkhaṇe ñāṇaṃ hoti.
欲漏,就是对五种欲乐的贪染。有漏,就是对色界和无色界生存的欲贪、对禅那的喜贪、与常见一起生起的贪染,以及以渴求生存的方式生起的期盼。见漏,就是六十二种邪见。无明漏,就是对苦等八种事理的无知。这里先用处格提出处所的问题,然后通过“以入流道……”等说法,显示以能灭尽诸漏的道来灭尽诸漏,再用“在此处”回答处所的问题,也就是说,在道心刹那的时刻。“无余”是说它没有任何剩余。“导至恶趣者”:地狱、畜生道、饿鬼道、阿修罗身,这四种因为远离了被称为安乐的趣,所以叫恶趣;如果一个人具足它,就会使他投生到恶趣,所以叫导至恶趣者。关于灭尽诸漏的论述,已经在“两边出起之说”中讲过了。巴利
Kāmāsavoti pañcakāmaguṇikarāgo. Bhavāsavoti rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo jhānanikanti sassatadiṭṭhisahajāto rāgo bhavavasena patthanā. Diṭṭhāsavoti dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo. Avijjāsavoti dukkhādīsu aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu aññāṇaṃ. Bhummavacanena okāsapucchaṃ katvā ‘‘sotāpattimaggenā’’tiādinā āsavakkhayakarena maggena āsavakkhayaṃ dassetvā ‘‘etthā’’ti okāsavissajjanaṃ kataṃ, maggakkhaṇeti vuttaṃ hoti. Anavasesoti natthi etassa avasesoti anavaseso. Apāyagamanīyoti nirayatiracchānayonipettivisayāsurakāyā cattāro sukhasaṅkhātā ayā apetattā apāyā, yassa saṃvijjati , taṃ puggalaṃ apāye gametīti apāyagamanīyo. Āsavakkhayakathā dubhatovuṭṭhānakathāyaṃ vuttā.
“依不散乱之力”是指,依靠作为正在生起的定的近因的定力。“依地遍之力……”等句中,十种遍是依以这些遍为所缘的安止定之力而说;佛随念等、死随念和寂止随念,是依近行禅那之力而说;入出息念和身至念,是依安止定之力而说;十种不净是依初禅之力而说。巴利
Avikkhepavasenāti pavattamānassa samādhissa upanissayabhūtasamādhivasena. Pathavīkasiṇavasenātiādīsu dasa kasiṇāni tadārammaṇikaappanāsamādhivasena vuttāni, buddhānussatiādayo maraṇassati upasamānussati ca upacārajjhānavasena vuttā, ānāpānassati kāyagatāsati ca appanāsamādhivasena vuttā, dasa asubhā paṭhamajjhānavasena vuttā.
以佛陀为所缘而生起的随念,就是佛随念。这是指以“彼世尊确实是应供……”等佛陀功德为所缘的念,依于佛随念之力。同样地,以法为所缘而生起的随念,就是法随念。这是指以“法由世尊善说……”等法功德为所缘的念。以僧为所缘而生起的随念,就是僧随念。这是指以“世尊的声闻僧团善行道……”等僧功德为所缘的念。以戒为所缘而生起的随念,就是戒随念。这是指以自己戒行无缺等戒功德为所缘的念。以施舍为所缘而生起的随念,就是施随念。这是指以自己慷慨施舍等施功德为所缘的念。以天为所缘而生起的随念,就是天随念。这是指把诸天作为见证者,以自己信心等功德为所缘的念。以入出息为所缘而生起的念,就是入出息念。这是指以入出息相为所缘的念。以死为所缘而生起的念,就是死随念。这是指以“属于一生范围内的生命根断绝”所说的死为所缘的念。对于头发等这些可厌恶、令人反感的东西,它们依附于、来源于这个叫作身体的东西,念已进入并活动于这样的身体中;或者念已进入这样的身体,就是身至念。本来应该说“kāyagatasati”,但没有把元音缩短,而说成“kāyagatāsati”。在这里也同样,是依身至念之力而说的。这是指以头发等身体各部分的不净相为所缘的念。以寂静为所缘而生起的随念,就是寂止随念。这是指以一切苦的止息为所缘的念。十种不净的含义,前面已经说过。巴利
Buddhaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati buddhānussati. ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā araha’’ntiādibuddhaguṇārammaṇāya (ma. ni. 1.74; a. ni. 3.71; 9.27) satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tassā buddhānussatiyā vasena. Tathā dhammaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati dhammānussati. ‘‘Svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo’’tiādidhammaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saṅghaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati saṅghānussati. ‘‘Suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’’tiādisaṅghaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sīlaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati sīlānussati. Attano akhaṇḍatādisīlaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cāgaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati cāgānussati. Attano muttacāgatādicāgaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Devatā ārabbha uppannā anussati devatānussati. Devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā attano saddhādiguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ānāpāne ārabbha uppannā sati ānāpānassati. Ānāpānanimittārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Maraṇaṃ ārabbha uppannā sati maraṇassati. Ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyupacchedasaṅkhātamaraṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ kesādīnaṃ paṭikūlānaṃ āyattā ākarattā kāyotisaṅkhāte sarīre gatā pavattā, tādisaṃ vā kāyaṃ gatā sati kāyagatāsati. ‘‘Kāyagatasatī’’ti vattabbe rassaṃ akatvā ‘‘kāyagatāsatī’’ti vuttā. Tatheva idhāpi kāyagatāsativasenāti vuttaṃ. Kesādikesu kāyakoṭṭhāsesu paṭikūlanimittārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Upasamaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati upasamānussati. Sabbadukkhūpasamārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Dasa asubhā heṭṭhā vuttatthā.
81 “依长入息的方式”等说法,只是为了显示安止定和近行定的区别。“依长入息的方式”,就是依被称为“长”的入息。因为经中说:“入息长时,他了知‘我入息长’……”(长部2.374;中部1.107;3.148)。其余几句也是同样的道理。“觉知全身”,是觉知整个入出息的身体过程。“令身行宁静”,是让粗显的、被称为入出息的身行变得宁静、止息。用“长、短、觉知全身、令身行宁静”这四句,说的是安止定。“觉知喜”,是让喜变得明显。“觉知乐”,是让乐变得明显。“觉知心行”,是让被称为想和受的心行变得明显。“令心行宁静”,是让粗显的心行变得宁静、止息。“觉知心”,是让心变得明显。“令心欢喜”,是让心喜悦。“令心入定”,是把心平稳地安放在所缘上。“令心解脱”,是让心从五盖等障碍中解脱出来。觉知喜、觉知乐、觉知心行、令心行宁静这四句,以及觉知心、令心欢喜、令心入定、令心解脱这四句,是依安止定和与观相应的定来说的。“随观无常”,是依无常随观来说的。“随观离欲”,是依厌离随观来说的。“随观灭”,是依坏灭随观来说的。“随观弃舍”,是依出起观来说的。因为这种观以分断连同蕴之行造一起舍弃烦恼。且由于见到有为的过患,因倾向于与其相反的涅槃而跃入。这第四组四法唯是依与观相应的定而说的。依入息的方式、依出息的方式,在这里是依入出息生起的状态来说的,并不是依以它为所缘来说的。详细说明将在《入出息论》中阐明。巴利
81.Dīghaṃassāsavasenātiādīni appanūpacārasamādhibhedaṃyeva dassetuṃ vuttāni. Dīghaṃ assāsavasenāti dīghanti vuttaassāsavasena. ‘‘Dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānātī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.374; ma. ni. 1.107; 3.148) hi vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedīti sabbassa assāsapassāsakāyassa paṭisaṃvedī. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti oḷārikaṃ assāsapassāsaṅkhātaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento vūpasamento. ‘‘Dīghaṃ rassaṃ sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti imināva catukkena appanāsamādhi vutto. Pītipaṭisaṃvedīti pītiṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto. Cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedīti saññāvedanāsaṅkhātaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto. Abhippamodayaṃ cittanti cittaṃ modento. Samādahaṃ cittanti ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ṭhapento. Vimocayaṃ cittanti cittaṃ nīvaraṇādīhi vimocento. Pītipaṭisaṃvedī sukhapaṭisaṃvedī cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedī passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāranti catukkañca cittapaṭisaṃvedī abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ samādahaṃ cittaṃ vimocayaṃ cittanti catukkañca appanāsamādhivasena vipassanāsampayuttasamādhivasena ca vuttāni. Aniccānupassīti aniccānupassanāvasena. Virāgānupassīti nibbidānupasanāvasena. Nirodhānupassīti bhaṅgānupassanāvasena. Paṭinissaggānupassīti vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanāvasena. Sā hi tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati. Saṅkhatadosadassanena ca tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandati. Idaṃ catukkaṃ vipassanāsampayuttasamādhivaseneva vuttaṃ. Assāsavasena passāsavasenāti cettha assāsapassāsapavattimattaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ, na tadārammaṇakaraṇavasena. Vitthāro panettha ānāpānakathāyaṃ āvibhavissati.
第33章 无诤住智的解说注释巴利
33. Araṇavihārañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
82 在“无诤住智的解说”中,无常随观等含义前面已经讲过了。空住,是指依靠无我随观出起之后,纯粹以空的形式持续生起的阿罗汉果定。无相住,是指依靠无常随观出起之后,以无相的形式持续生起的阿罗汉果定。无愿住,是指依靠苦随观出起之后,以无愿的形式持续生起的阿罗汉果定。已倾向于空,是指因为空性果定之前那部分慧的力量而倾向于空。其余两种也是同样的道理。从“初禅”等开始,是就那些想要证入阿罗汉果定的人,把作为观之所缘的禅那定说出来。实际上,只有阿罗汉的观、果定、殊胜倾向及禅那定,才因断尽一切烦恼而配称为“无诤住”。巴利
82. Araṇavihārañāṇaniddese aniccānupassanādayo vuttatthā. Suññato vihāroti anattānupassanāya vuṭṭhitassa suññatākāreneva pavattā arahattaphalasamāpatti. Animitto vihāroti aniccānupassanāya vuṭṭhitassa animittākārena pavattā arahattaphalasamāpatti. Appaṇihitovihāroti dukkhānupassanāya vuṭṭhitassa appaṇihitākārena pavattā arahattaphalasamāpatti. Suññate adhimuttatāti suññate phalasamāpattiyā pubbabhāgapaññāvasena adhimuttatā. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Paṭhamaṃ jhānantiādīhi arahattaphalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitukāmassa vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā jhānasamāpattiyo vuttā. Arahatoyeva hi vipassanāphalasamāpattipaṇītādhimuttijhānasamāpattiyo sabbakilesānaṃ pahīnattā ‘‘araṇavihāro’’ti vattuṃ arahanti.
以初禅去除诸盖,所以叫无诤住。意思是:具足初禅的人以初禅去除诸盖,因此那初禅就是无诤住。其余诸禅也是同样的道理。应当知道,虽然阿罗汉已经没有诸盖,但因为初禅与诸盖相违,所以说“以初禅去除诸盖”。有人问:既然已经从观、果定、殊胜倾向三个方面开示了无诤住智,为什么只把禅那等至说成无诤住呢?回答:因为仅仅通过开示,那三种的无诤住性就已经成立了。但是,作为果定和观之基础的禅那等至,如果不说明它们的无诤住性,就不能成立,所以为了成立尚未成立的部分,才说“初禅是无诤住”等等,应当这样理解。因为那些禅那的无诤住性,虽然还没有通过开示成立,却通过解说而成立了。或者,按照同样的搭配方式来理解:“无常随观去除常想,所以是无诤住;苦随观去除乐想,所以是无诤住;无我随观去除我想,所以是无诤住;空住去除不空,所以是无诤住;无相住去除相,所以是无诤住;无愿住去除愿,所以是无诤住;空胜解去除不空胜解,所以是无诤住;无相胜解去除相胜解,所以是无诤住;无愿胜解去除愿胜解,所以是无诤住。”应当这样搭配来理解。巴利
Paṭhamena jhānena nīvaraṇe haratīti araṇavihāroti paṭhamajjhānasamaṅgī paṭhamena jhānena nīvaraṇe haratīti taṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ araṇavihāroti attho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Arahato nīvaraṇābhāvepi nīvaraṇavipakkhattā paṭhamassa jhānassa nīvaraṇe haratīti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Vipassanāphalasamāpattipaṇītādhimuttivasena tidhā araṇavihārañāṇaṃ uddisitvā kasmā jhānasamāpattiyova araṇavihāroti niddiṭṭhāti ce? Uddesavaseneva tāsaṃ tissannaṃ araṇavihāratāya siddhattā. Phalasamāpattivipassanāya pana bhūmibhūtānaṃ jhānasamāpattīnaṃ araṇavihāratā avutte na sijjhati, tasmā asiddhameva sādhetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ araṇavihāro’’tiādi vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tāsañhi araṇavihāratā uddesavasena asiddhāpi niddese vuttattā siddhāti. Tesaṃ vā yojitanayeneva ‘‘aniccānupassanā niccasaññaṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, dukkhānupassanā sukhasaññaṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, anattānupassanā attasaññaṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, suññato vihāro asuññataṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, animitto vihāro nimittaṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, appaṇihito vihāro paṇidhiṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, suññatādhimuttatā asuññatādhimuttiṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, animittādhimuttatā nimittādhimuttiṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, appaṇihitādhimuttatā paṇihitādhimuttiṃ haratīti araṇavihāro’’ti yojetvā gahetabbaṃ.
34. 灭尽定智的解说巴利
34. Nirodhasamāpattiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
83 在解说灭尽定智的部分里,“止力”是指:能够平息欲贪等敌对法的,就是止;这个止本身因为不可动摇,所以叫力。只有阿那含和阿拉汉,因为已经断除了与定敌对的欲贪,达到了定的圆满,所以只有他们的定才算达到了力,才被称为“止力”,不是其他人的。也有写成“定力”的版本。“观力”是指:以无常等种种方式观察诸法,这就是观;这个观本身因为不可动摇,所以叫力。只有他们两者才具有达到力的观智。其中,止力是为了逐步让心相续寂静,也是为了导向灭尽;观力是为了看见流转中的过患,也是为了看见灭尽的功德。巴利
83. Nirodhasamāpattiñāṇaniddese samathabalanti kāmacchandādayo paccanīkadhamme sametīti samatho, soyeva akampanīyaṭṭhena balaṃ. Anāgāmiarahantānaṃyeva samādhipaṭipakkhassa kāmacchandassa pahānena samādhismiṃ paripūrakāribhāvappattattā tesaṃyeva samādhi balappattoti katvā ‘‘samathabala’’nti vuccati, na aññesaṃ. Samādhibalantipi pāṭho. Vipassanābalanti aniccādivasena vividhehi ākārehi dhamme passatīti vipassanā, sāyeva akampanīyaṭṭhena balaṃ. Tesaṃyeva ubhinnaṃ balappattaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Tattha samathabalaṃ anupubbena cittasantānavūpasamanatthaṃ nirodhe ca paṭipādanatthaṃ, vipassanābalaṃ pavatte ādīnavadassanatthaṃ nirodhe ca ānisaṃsadassanatthaṃ.
关于“盖”这个词,是表示原因时的处格,意思是“盖的相”、“盖的缘”。或者是表示工具时的处格,意思是“以盖”。 “不摇动”,指的是具备禅那的人。或者说,因为“禅那”指的是诸禅支,所以与初禅相应的定,在诸盖中不摇动。这里应该采用这种理解。 “在掉举等中”:就是在掉举以及和掉举俱生的心生起中。而“掉举”就是掉举的状态,它的特征是不寂静。 “在掉举俱生的烦恼等中”:就是在与掉举俱生、同一生起等状态的、与掉举相应的痴、无惭、无愧诸烦恼中。 “在诸蕴等中”:就是在与掉举相应的四蕴中。 “不摇动、不颤动、不战栗”:是彼此同义的词。应当这样连接:在掉举中不摇动,在掉举俱生的烦恼中不颤动,在掉举俱生的诸蕴中不战栗。 因为观之力是就七种随观而说的,所以应当知道,正是依于这七种随观,观之力才得以圆满。 “以及无明”:就是在十二种不善心生起中的无明。 “以及无明俱生的烦恼”:就是随其所应,与无明相应的贪、瞋、慢、邪见、疑、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧诸烦恼。巴利
Nīvaraṇeti nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ, nīvaraṇanimittaṃ nīvaraṇapaccayāti attho. Karaṇatthe vā bhummavacanaṃ, nīvaraṇenāti attho. Na kampatīti jhānasamaṅgīpuggalo. Atha vā jhānanti jhānaṅgānaṃ adhippetattā paṭhamena jhānena taṃsampayuttasamādhi nīvaraṇe na kampati. Ayameva cettha yojanā gahetabbā. Uddhacce cāti uddhaccasahagatacittuppāde uddhacce ca. Uddhaccanti ca uddhatabhāvo , taṃ avūpasamalakkhaṇaṃ. Uddhaccasahagatakilese cāti uddhaccena sahagate ekuppādādibhāvaṃ gate uddhaccasampayutte mohaahirikaanottappakilese ca. Khandhe cāti uddhaccasampayuttacatukkhandhe ca. Na kampati na calati na vedhatīti aññamaññavevacanāni. Uddhacce na kampati, uddhaccasahagatakilese na calati, uddhaccasahagatakkhandhe na vedhatīti yojetabbaṃ. Vipassanābalaṃ sattannaṃyeva anupassanānaṃ vuttattā tāsaṃyeva vasena vipassanābalaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Avijjāya cāti dvādasasupi akusalacittuppādesu avijjāya ca. Avijjāsahagatakilese cāti yathāyogaṃ avijjāya sampayuttalobhadosamānadiṭṭhivicikicchāthinauddhaccaahirikaanottappakilese ca.
语行就是寻与伺。因为《中部》里说:“贤友毗舍佉,先有寻、后有伺,然后才开口说话,所以寻与伺是语行。”再者,它们造作、产生语言,所以叫语行。身行就是入出息。因为《中部》里说:“贤友毗舍佉,入出息这些法属于身体、系缚于身体,所以入出息是身行。”再者,它们被身体所造作,所以叫身行。想受灭就是想与受的灭。心行就是想与受。因为《中部》里说:“这些法是心所法、系缚于心,所以想与受是心行。”再者,它们被心所造作,所以叫心行。巴利
Vacīsaṅkhārāti vitakkavicārā. ‘‘Pubbe kho, āvuso visākha, vitakketvā vicāretvā pacchā vācaṃ bhindati, tasmā vitakkavicārā vacīsaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.463) vacanato vācaṃ saṅkharonti uppādentīti vacīsaṅkhārā. Kāyasaṅkhārāti assāsapassāsā. ‘‘Assāsapassāsā kho, āvuso visākha, kāyikā ete dhammā kāyapaṭibaddhā, tasmā assāsapassāsā kāyasaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.463) vacanato kāyena saṅkharīyantīti kāyasaṅkhārā. Saññāvedayitanirodhanti saññāya vedanāya ca nirodhaṃ. Cittasaṅkhārāti saññā ca vedanā ca. ‘‘Cetasikā ete dhammā cittapaṭibaddhā, tasmā saññā ca vedanā ca cittasaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.463) vacanato cittena saṅkharīyantīti cittasaṅkhārā.
84 在智行中,随观修到末尾时,或者通过把还灭随观也纳入进来,那作为行说开端的智行就已经把其余的随观也都包含在内了,这一点应当知道。说到“以十六种智行”,这是就最高限度来说的;但对阿那含来说,除了阿罗汉道和阿罗汉果之外,以十四种智行也能圆满具足其力。巴利
84. Ñāṇacariyāsu anupassanāvasāne, vivaṭṭanānupassanāgahaṇena vā tassā ādibhūtā cariyākathāya ñāṇacariyāti vuttā sesānupassanāpi gahitā hontīti veditabbaṃ. Soḷasahi ñāṇacariyāhīti ca ukkaṭṭhaparicchedo, anāgāmissa pana arahattamaggaphalavajjāhi cuddasahipi hoti paripuṇṇabalattā.
85 85. “以九种定行”:这里,初禅等八种,加上为了证得初禅等而在一切处依近行定修成的每一种,一共九种定行。力和行有什么差别呢?在止力中,也通过“以出离”等七种方式说了近行定;在广说中,又通过“以初禅”等七十七种情况,随宜说了安止定和近行定;在定行中,也通过“初禅”等八种方式说了安止定,通过“为了证得初禅”等八种方式说了近行定。所以这两者说的都是安止定和近行定。尽管如此,应当知道:从不可动摇的意义来说是力,从自在的意义来说是行。但在观力方面,七种随观就被称为“观力”;在智行中,说了七种随观,还特别把还灭随观等九种区分出来说。这就是它们的差别。七种随观应当以不可动摇的意义作为力,以自在的意义作为行。巴利
85.Navahi samādhicariyāhīti ettha paṭhamajjhānādīhi aṭṭha, paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ paṭilābhatthāya sabbattha upacārajjhānavasena ekāti nava samādhicariyā. Balacariyānaṃ kiṃ nānattaṃ? Samathabalenapi hi ‘‘nekkhammavasenā’’tiādīhi sattahi pariyāyehi upacārasamādhi vutto, peyyālavitthārato ‘‘paṭhamajjhānavasenā’’tiādīhi samasattatiyā vārehi yathāyogaṃ appanūpacārasamādhi vutto, samādhicariyāyapi ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhāna’’ntiādīhi aṭṭhahi pariyāyehi appanāsamādhi vutto. Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ paṭilābhatthāyātiādīhi aṭṭhahi pariyāyehi upacārasamādhi vuttoti ubhayatthāpi appanūpacārasamādhiyeva vutto. Evaṃ santepi akampiyaṭṭhena balāni vasībhāvaṭṭhena cariyāti veditabbā. Vipassanābale pana satta anupassanāva ‘‘vipassanābala’’nti vuttā, ñāṇacariyāya satta ca anupassanā vuttā, vivaṭṭanānupassanādayo nava ca visesetvā vuttā. Idaṃ nesaṃ nānattaṃ. Satta anupassanā pana akampiyaṭṭhena balāni vasībhāvaṭṭhena cariyāti veditabbā.
“以自在状态为慧”,在《论母》1.34 这句中,为了解释所说的“自在”,依女性名词的用法说“自在”就是五种自在。这里说的“自在”本身就是“自在”。接着,在以人为中心的教法里,为了解释这些自在,又说了“转向自在”等。转向的自在就是转向自在,他具有这种自在,所以叫转向自在。其余各项也是同样的道理。第一禅定“于所欲处”:无论在哪个地方,在村庄或森林,他都能随意转向那里。“于所欲时”:无论在什么时候,在寒冷时或炎热时,他都能随意转向那时。或者,无论他想要哪一种第一禅定,以地遍为所缘或其余所缘,他都能转向那一种。由于也已说过单一遍所缘禅定的自在,所以前面的搭配更为优胜。“随所欲量”:无论想要多长时间,一弹指顷或七日,他都能转向那么长时间。“转向”:以意门转向。 “迟缓”:不自在的状态,或懈怠的状态。“入定”:进入,即令现前之义。“决意”:在定中作更久住立。“出定自在”:第一禅定,这是依离格而说的业格,即“从第一禅定”之义。“审察”:以审察速行返回而观见。这就是此处的经文注释。巴利
‘‘Vasībhāvatā paññā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.34 mātikā) ettha vuttavasiyo vissajjetuṃ vasīti pañca vasiyoti itthiliṅgavohārena vuttaṃ. Vaso eva vasīti vuttaṃ hoti. Puna puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya tā vasiyo vissajjento āvajjanavasītiādimāha. Āvajjanāya vaso āvajjanavaso, so assa atthīti āvajjanavasī. Eseva nayo sesesu. Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ yatthicchakanti yattha yattha padese icchati gāme vā araññe vā, tattha tattha āvajjati. Yadicchakanti yadā yadā kāle sītakāle vā uṇhakāle vā, tadā tadā āvajjati. Atha vā yaṃ yaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ icchati pathavīkasiṇārammaṇaṃ vā sesārammaṇaṃ vā, taṃ taṃ āvajjati. Ekekakasiṇārammaṇassāpi jhānassa vasitānaṃ vuttattā purimayojanāyeva sundaratarā. Yāvaticchakanti yāvatakaṃ kālaṃ icchati accharāsaṅghātamattaṃ sattāhaṃ vā, tāvatakaṃ kālaṃ āvajjati. Āvajjanāyāti manodvārāvajjanāya. Dandhāyitattanti avasavattibhāvo, alasabhāvo vā. Samāpajjatīti paṭipajjati, appetīti attho. Adhiṭṭhātīti antosamāpattiyaṃ adhikaṃ katvā tiṭṭhati. Vuṭṭhānavasiyaṃpaṭhamaṃ jhānanti nissakkatthe upayogavacanaṃ, paṭhamajjhānāti attho. Paccavekkhatīti paccavekkhaṇajavanehi nivattitvā passati. Ayamettha pāḷivaṇṇanā.
这里说明其含义:从初禅出定后,当修行者把心转向“寻”时,有分心被切断,紧接着生起转向心,随后立刻生起以“寻”为所缘的四或五个速行心;之后有两个有分心;然后再转向“伺”为所缘,同样如前生起速行。这样,当心能对五个禅支无间断地运转时,他的“转向自在”就成就了。而这种达到顶点的自在,只有在世尊示现双神变时才能获得,再没有比这更快的转向自在了。对其他修行者来说,中间经过的有分心数量则无法计算。像大目犍连尊者调伏难陀乌巴难达龙王时那样,能够迅速入定的能力,叫“入定自在”。能够把定安住一弹指或十弹指的短暂时间,叫“住定自在”。同样,能够迅速从定中出来,叫“出定自在”。而“观察自在”,其实在说转向自在时就已经说明了,因为在那里,转向之后紧接着生起的就是观察速行。所以,转向自在成就时,观察自在也就成就;住定自在成就时,出定自在也就成就。尽管如此,由于文中说“这种达到顶点的自在,只有在世尊的双神变中才能获得”,所以在示现神变时,并没有对禅支的观察;而种种颜色等的化现,是因为依各种遍处而成就,所以当他想入以某种遍处为所缘的定时,能随自己的意愿,轻易地按照在该遍处所说的方式使转向心生起,这种能力就是“转向自在”;就在那转向心路中,那禅定能够安止的能力,就是“入定自在”。这样说来,既与道理不相违,自在的次第也正好按顺序成立。不过在观察禅支时,因为说“达到顶点的只有五个速行心”,所以按前面所说,当七个速行心生起时,就只有“观察自在”。既然如此,那么“转向初禅”这种说法就不成立了吗?就像依遍处生起的禅定,以因的假说而称为“遍处”一样,作为禅定之因的遍处,也像“诸佛出世乐”等句中那样,以果的假说而称为“禅定”。比如在限定时间安住后出定,又像从睡眠中醒来后再次入睡那样,再次入定时,虽然也有住定自在,但仍叫“住定自在”;而按限定时间出定后,就在出定的当下,虽然有住定,却叫“出定自在”。这就是它们的区别。巴利
Ayaṃ pana atthappakāsanā – paṭhamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya vitakkaṃ āvajjayato bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā pavattāvajjanānantaraṃ vitakkārammaṇāneva cattāri pañca vā javanāni javanti, tato dve bhavaṅgāni, tato puna vicārārammaṇaṃ āvajjanaṃ vuttanayeneva javanānīti evaṃ pañcasu jhānaṅgesu yadā nirantaraṃ cittaṃ pesetuṃ sakkoti, athassa āvajjanavasī siddhāva hoti. Ayaṃ pana matthakappattā vasī bhagavato yamakapāṭihāriyeva labbhati. Ito paraṃ sīghatarā āvajjanavasī nāma natthi. Aññesaṃ pana antarantarā bhavaṅgavāre gaṇanā natthi. Mahāmoggallānattherassa nandopanandadamane viya sīghaṃ samāpattisamāpajjanasamatthatā samāpajjanavasī nāma. Accharāmattaṃ vā dasaccharāmattaṃ vā khaṇaṃ samāpattiṃ ṭhapetuṃ samatthatā adhiṭṭhānavasī nāma. Tatheva tato lahuṃ vuṭṭhānasamatthatā vuṭṭhānavasī nāma. Paccavekkhaṇavasī pana āvajjanavasiyā eva vuttā. Paccavekkhaṇajavanāneva hi tattha āvajjanānantarānīti. Iti āvajjanavasiyā siddhāya paccavekkhaṇavasī siddhā hoti, adhiṭṭhānavasiyā ca siddhāya vuṭṭhānavasī siddhā hoti. Evaṃ santepi ‘‘ayaṃ pana matthakappattā vasī bhagavato yamakapāṭihāriyeva labbhatī’’ti vuttattā pāṭihāriyakāle jhānaṅgapaccavekkhaṇānaṃ abhāvato nānāvidhavaṇṇādinimmānassa nānākasiṇavasena ijjhanato taṃtaṃkasiṇārammaṇaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitukāmassa yathāruci lahuṃ tasmiṃ kasiṇe vuttanayena āvajjanapavattanasamatthatā āvajjanavasī, tadāvajjanavīthiyaṃyeva tassa jhānassa appanāsamatthatāsamāpajjanasamatthatā samāpajjanavasī. Evañhi vuccamāne yutti ca na virujjhati, vasīpaṭipāṭi ca yathākkameneva yujjati. Jhānaṅgapaccavekkhaṇāyaṃ pana ‘‘matthakappattāyeva pañca javanānī’’ti vuttattā vuttanayena sattasupi javanesu javantesu paccavekkhaṇavasīyeva hoti. Evaṃ sante ‘‘paṭhamajjhānaṃ āvajjatī’’ti vacanaṃ na yujjatīti ce? Yathā kasiṇe pavattaṃ jhānaṃ kāraṇopacārena kasiṇanti vuttaṃ, tathā jhānapaccayaṃ kasiṇaṃ ‘‘sukho buddhānamuppādo’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 194) viya phalopacārena jhānanti vuttaṃ. Yathāparicchinne kāle ṭhatvā vuṭṭhitassa niddāya pabuddhassa puna niddokkamane viya puna jhānokkamane satipi adhiṭṭhānavasīyeva nāma, yathāparicchedena vuṭṭhitassa pana vuṭṭhāneyeva adhiṭṭhāne satipi vuṭṭhānavasī nāma hotīti ayaṃ tesaṃ viseso.
为了说明灭尽定,这里再提出一组问题:什么是灭尽定?哪些人能入灭尽定,哪些人不能入?在哪里入?为什么入?怎样入?入定是怎样的状态?怎样安住?怎样出定?出定之后心倾向于什么?死者和入定者有什么区别?灭尽定是有为法还是无为法?是世间法还是出世间法?是已造作完成的法还是未造作完成的法?巴利
Nirodhasamāpattiyā vibhāvanatthaṃ pana idaṃ pañhakammaṃ – kā nirodhasamāpatti, ke taṃ samāpajjanti, ke na samāpajjanti, kattha samāpajjanti, kasmā samāpajjanti, kathañcassā samāpajjanaṃ hoti, kathaṃ ṭhānaṃ, kathaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ, vuṭṭhitassa kinninnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, matassa ca samāpannassa ca ko viseso, nirodhasamāpatti kiṃ saṅkhatā asaṅkhatā lokiyā lokuttarā nipphannā anipphannāti?
在这里,什么是灭尽定?就是由于逐步灭去,心和心所法不再生起。巴利
Tattha kā nirodhasamāpattīti? Yā anupubbanirodhavasena cittacetasikānaṃ dhammānaṃ appavatti.
哪些人能进入这个定,哪些人不能?所有凡夫、入流者、一来者、干观的不来者和干观的阿罗汉,都不能进入这个定;但证得八等至的不来者和诸漏尽者,则能进入。巴利
Ke taṃ samāpajjanti, ke na samāpajjantīti? Sabbepi puthujjanā sotāpannā sakadāgāmino sukkhavipassakā ca anāgāmī arahanto na samāpajjanti, aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino pana anāgāmino ca khīṇāsavā ca samāpajjanti.
在哪里入这种定?在五趣有中。为什么?因为那里有依次第而入的等至。但在四趣有中,初禅等根本就不会生起,所以不能在那里入定。巴利
Katthasamāpajjantīti? Pañcavokārabhave. Kasmā? Anupubbasamāpattisabbhāvato. Catuvokārabhave pana paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ uppattiyeva natthi, tasmā na sakkā tattha samāpajjituṃ.
为什么他们要入这种定呢?因为他们对诸行的生灭变易感到厌离,希望就在这一生中成为无心者,想着“证得灭尽涅槃之后,安住于安乐”,所以就入这种定。巴利
Kasmā samāpajjantīti? Saṅkhārānaṃ pavattibhede ukkaṇṭhitvā diṭṭheva dhamme acittakā hutvā ‘‘nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ patvā sukhaṃ viharissāmā’’ti samāpajjanti.
这个定是怎样进入的呢?通过止和观两种力量向上推进,已经完成了先前该做的事,在灭掉非想非非想处的时候,就这样进入这个定。如果只靠止的力量向上推进,他就会到达非想非非想处等至并停在那里。如果只靠观的力量向上推进,他就会到达果等至并停在那里。但如果靠止和观两者向上推进,灭掉非想非非想处,他就能进入这个定。这就是这里的简要说明。巴利
Kathaṃ cassā samāpajjanaṃ hotīti? Samathavipassanāvasena ussakkitvā katapubbakiccassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ nirodhayato evamassā samāpajjanaṃ hoti. Yo hi samathavaseneva ussakkati, so nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ patvā tiṭṭhati. Yo vipassanāvaseneva ussakkati, so phalasamāpattiṃ patvā tiṭṭhati. Yo pana ubhayavasena ussakkitvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ nirodheti, so taṃ samāpajjatīti ayamettha saṅkhepo.
这个详细的修法是这样的:在这里,比丘想要进入灭尽定,先吃完饭、做完该做的事,洗净手脚,找一个安静的地方,在铺好的座位上坐下,盘腿结跏趺坐,把身体挺直,把正念安放在面前。他先进入初禅,出定之后,对那里的诸行观察无常、苦、无我。这种观有三种:观察诸行的观、果等至的观、灭尽定的观。其中,观察诸行的观不管是迟钝还是锐利,都一定能成为道的依止。果等至的观必须锐利才行,它和修道的性质相似。而灭尽定的观则不能太迟钝,也不能太锐利。所以,他用不太迟钝也不太锐利的观来观察那些诸行。然后进入第二禅,出定后,同样观察那里的诸行。接着进入第三禅……乃至进入识无边处,出定后,同样观察那里的诸行。之后进入无所有处,出定后,做四种准备工作:不让非共缚的物品损坏、等待僧团、等候佛陀召唤、以及限定时间。巴利
Ayaṃ pana vitthāro – idha bhikkhu nirodhaṃ samāpajjitukāmo katabhattakicco sudhotahatthapādo vivitte okāse supaññatte āsane nisīdati pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā. So paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya tattha saṅkhāre aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassati. Vipassanā panesā tividhā hoti – saṅkhārapariggaṇhanakavipassanā, phalasamāpattivipassanā, nirodhasamāpattivipassanāti. Tattha saṅkhārapariggaṇhanakavipassanā mandā vā hotu tikkhā vā, maggassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hotiyeva. Phalasamāpattivipassanā tikkhāva vaṭṭati maggabhāvanāsadisā. Nirodhasamāpattivipassanā pana nātimandā nātitikkhā vaṭṭati. Tasmā esa nātimandāya nātitikkhāya vipassanāya te saṅkhāre vipassati. Tato dutiyajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya tattha saṅkhāre tatheva vipassati. Tato tatiyajjhānaṃ…pe… tato viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya tattha saṅkhāre tatheva vipassati. Atha ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya catubbidhaṃ pubbakiccaṃ karoti – nānābaddhaavikopanaṃ, saṅghapaṭimānanaṃ, satthupakkosanaṃ, addhānaparicchedanti.
这里说的“不破坏非共缚物”,是指:凡是跟这位比丘不共同绑定的东西——也就是单独放置、并非与他本人绑定的物品,比如钵和袈裟、床和椅子、住所,或者其他任何资具——为了让它们不被破坏,不被火烧、水淹、风吹、盗贼偷走、老鼠等咬坏,他应当这样决意。决意的方法是这样的:“愿这些物品在七天内不被火烧,不被水冲走,不被风吹散,不被贼偷走,不被老鼠等咬坏。”这样决意之后,七天之内这些物品不会遭遇任何危险;如果不决意,就会被火等毁坏。这就叫“不破坏非共缚物”。至于那些共同绑定的东西,比如下衣、上衣,或者坐的座位,就不需要另外决意;灭尽定本身就会保护它们。巴利
Tattha nānābaddhaavikopananti yaṃ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekābaddhaṃ na hoti, nānābaddhaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ pattacīvaraṃ vā mañcapīṭhaṃ vā nivāsagehaṃ vā aññaṃ vā pana kiñci parikkhārajātaṃ, taṃ yathā na vikuppati, aggiudakavātacoraundūrādīnaṃ vasena na vinassati, evaṃ adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Tatridaṃ adhiṭṭhānavidhānaṃ – ‘‘idañcidañca imasmiṃ sattāhabbhantare mā agginā jhāyatu, mā udakena vuyhatu, mā vātena viddhaṃsatu, mā corehi harīyatu, mā undūrādīhi khajjatū’’ti. Evaṃ adhiṭṭhite taṃ sattāhaṃ tassa na koci parissayo hoti, anadhiṭṭhahato pana aggiādīhi vinassati. Idaṃ nānābaddhaavikopanaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana ekābaddhaṃ hoti nivāsanapārupanaṃ vā nisinnāsanaṃ vā, tattha visuṃ adhiṭṭhānakiccaṃ natthi, samāpattiyeva naṃ rakkhati.
所谓“等待僧团”,就是等候、期盼比丘僧团。意思是:在那位比丘到来之前,不举行僧团羯磨。这里要注意,等待本身不是入定前的准备工作,对“等待”的作意才是入定前的准备工作。所以应该这样作意:“如果我入灭尽定坐满七天,这期间僧团想要做白告羯磨等任何羯磨,那么在任何比丘前来叫我之前,我就在那时立刻出定。”这样作意之后再入定的人,到那时候一定会出定。如果不这样作意,僧团集会时看不到那位比丘,就会问“某比丘在哪里”,有人回答“他入了灭尽定”,于是僧团派一位比丘去,说“去,以僧团的名义叫他”。那位比丘站在能听到声音的地方,刚说出“贤友,僧团在等你”,他就立刻出定了。因为僧团的命令就是如此重大。所以应当先这样作意,让自己能自行出定,然后再入定。巴利
Saṅghapaṭimānananti bhikkhusaṅghassa paṭimānanaṃ udikkhanaṃ. Yāva eso bhikkhu āgacchati, tāva saṅghakammassa akaraṇanti attho. Ettha ca na paṭimānanaṃ etassa pubbakiccaṃ, paṭimānanāvajjanaṃ pana pubbakiccaṃ. Tasmā evaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ – ‘‘sace mayi sattāhaṃ nirodhaṃ samāpajjitvā nisinne saṅgho apalokanakammādīsu kiñcideva kammaṃ kattukāmo hoti, yāva maṃ koci bhikkhu āgantvā na pakkosati, tāvadeva vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti. Evaṃ katvā samāpanno hi tasmiṃ samaye vuṭṭhātiyeva. Yo pana evaṃ na karoti, saṅgho ca sannipatitvā taṃ apassanto ‘‘asuko bhikkhu kuhi’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘nirodhaṃ samāpanno’’ti vutte kañci bhikkhuṃ peseti ‘‘gaccha taṃ saṅghassa vacanena pakkosā’’ti. Athassa tena bhikkhunā savanūpacāre ṭhatvā ‘‘saṅgho taṃ āvuso paṭimānetī’’ti vuttamatteyeva vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Evaṃgarukā hi saṅghassa āṇā nāma. Tasmā taṃ āvajjitvā yathā sayameva vuṭṭhāti, evaṃ samāpajjitabbaṃ.
关于“导师召唤”:在这里,作意导师的召唤同样是入定前要做的事。所以应当这样作意:“如果我入灭尽定,安坐七天,在这期间,导师因为发生了某件事而制定学处,或者因为类似的因缘而说法——只要没有人来叫我,我就一直不出定。”这样作意之后再入座,到那时候他自然就会出定。如果不这样作意,导师在僧团集会时看不到那位比丘,就会问:“某某比丘在哪里?”有人回答:“他入了灭尽定。”导师就会派一位比丘去,说:“去,以我的名义叫他。”那位比丘走到能听见声音的地方,导师呼唤尊者。话音刚落,他就出定了。因为导师的召唤就是这么重大。所以,应当先这样作意,好让自己能自行出定,然后再入定。巴利
Satthupakkosananti idhāpi satthupakkosanāvajjanameva imassa pubbakiccaṃ. Tasmā tampi evaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ – ‘‘sace mayi sattāhaṃ nirodhaṃ samāpajjitvā nisinne satthā otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ sikkhāpadaṃ vā paññapeti, tathārūpāya vā aṭṭhuppattiyā dhammaṃ deseti. Yāva maṃ koci āgantvā na pakkosati, tāvadeva vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti. Evaṃ katvā nisinno hi tasmiṃ samaye vuṭṭhātiyeva. Yo pana evaṃ na karoti, satthā ca saṅghe sannipatite taṃ apassanto ‘‘asuko bhikkhu kuhi’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘nirodhaṃ samāpanno’’ti vutte kañci bhikkhuṃ peseti ‘‘gaccha taṃ mama vacanena pakkosā’’ti. Athassa tena bhikkhunā savanūpacāre ṭhatvā satthā āyasmantaṃ āmantetī’’ti vuttamatteyeva vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Evaṃgarukañhi satthupakkosanaṃ. Tasmā taṃ āvajjitvā yathā sayameva vuṭṭhāti, evaṃ samāpajjitabbaṃ.
「时限的限定」就是指对寿命时限的限定。这位比丘应当以善巧来把握寿命的时限。他应当先作意:「我的寿行在七天内会持续,还是不会持续?」然后才入定。因为如果他的寿行会在七天内灭尽,而他没作意就入定,那么他的灭尽定就没办法挡住死亡。在灭尽定当中不会死亡,所以他会在中途就出定。因此,必须这样作意之后才能入定。其余的事项就算不作意也可以,但这一项必须作意。他这样进入无所有处定,出定之后完成这些前行准备,再进入非想非非想处定。然后经过一个或两个心识刹那,他就成为无心,触证了灭。为什么在两个心识之后心识不再生起呢?因为这是趣入灭尽的加行。这位比丘把止和观这两法结合起来并行,次第登上八种等至,这就是渐次趣入灭尽的加行,而不是为了得到非想非非想处定的加行。正因为是趣入灭尽的加行,所以在两个心识之后心识不再生起。巴利
Addhānaparicchedoti jīvitaddhānassa paricchedo. Iminā hi bhikkhunā addhānaparicchede kusalena bhavitabbaṃ. ‘‘Attano āyusaṅkhārā sattāhaṃ pavattissanti, na pavattissantī’’ti āvajjitvāva samāpajjitabbaṃ. Sace hi sattāhabbhantare nirujjhanake āyusaṅkhāre anāvajjitvāva samāpajjati, tassa nirodhasamāpatti maraṇaṃ paṭibāhituṃ na sakkoti. Antonirodhe maraṇassa natthitāya antarāva samāpattito vuṭṭhāti, tasmā etaṃ āvajjitvāva samāpajjitabbaṃ. Avasesañhi anāvajjitumpi vaṭṭati, idaṃ pana āvajjitabbamevāti vuttaṃ. So evaṃ ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya imaṃ pubbakiccaṃ katvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samāpajjati. Athekaṃ vā dve vā cittavāre atikkamitvā acittako hoti, nirodhaṃ phusati. Kasmā panassa dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ upari cittāni nappavattantīti? Nirodhassa payogattā. Idañhi imassa bhikkhuno dve samathavipassanādhamme yuganaddhe katvā aṭṭhasamāpattiārohanaṃ anupubbanirodhassa payogo, na nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyāti nirodhassa payogattā dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ upari nappavattanti.
“怎样才算具备条件呢?”对这样进入(此状态)的人来说,以时限限定以及在这中间不会寿命耗尽、不会(有)僧团的期待、不会导师召唤,才算具备条件。巴利
Kathaṃ ṭhānanti? Evaṃ samāpannāya panassā kālaparicchedavasena ceva antarā āyukkhayasaṅghapaṭimānanasatthupakkosanābhāvena ca ṭhānaṃ hoti.
怎样出定?出定有两种情况:不来者(阿那含)从不来果的等至出定,阿罗汉从阿罗汉果的等至出定。巴利
Kathaṃ vuṭṭhānanti? Anāgāmissa anāgāmiphalasamāpattiyā arahato arahattaphalasamāpattiyāti evaṃ dvedhā vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti.
从灭尽定出定的人,心倾向哪里?倾向涅槃。经中确实这样说:“毗舍佉贤友,从想受灭定出定的比丘,心倾向远离,趣向远离,朝向远离。”(《中部》1.464)巴利
Vuṭṭhitassa kinninnaṃ cittaṃ hotīti? Nibbānaninnaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhitassa kho, āvuso visākha, bhikkhuno vivekaninnaṃ cittaṃ hoti vivekapoṇaṃ vivekapabbhāra’’nti (ma. ni. 1.464).
已死的人和入定的人,差别在哪里?这个道理经里已经讲过了。就像经中所说:“贤友,一个已经死去、已经命终的人,他的身行已经灭去、已经止息,语行、心行也已经灭去、已经止息,寿命已经耗尽,暖热已经消散,诸根已经毁坏。而一位进入想受灭定的比丘,他的身行也同样已经灭去、已经止息,语行、心行也同样已经灭去、已经止息,但寿命还没有耗尽,暖热还没有消散,诸根还没有毁坏。”巴利
Matassa ca samāpannassa ca ko visesoti? Ayampi attho sutte vuttoyeva. Yathāha – ‘‘yo cāyaṃ, āvuso, mato kālaṅkato, tassa kāyasaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, vacīsaṅkhārā, cittasaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, āyu parikkhīṇo, usmā vūpasantā, indriyāni paribhinnāni. Yvāyaṃ bhikkhu saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ samāpanno, tassapi kāyasaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, vacīsaṅkhārā, cittasaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, āyu aparikkhīṇo, usmā avūpasantā, indriyāni aparibhinnānī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.457).
在问到“灭尽定是有为吗”这类问题时,不能说它是“有为”,也不能说它是“无为”;不能说它是“世间”,也不能说它是“出世间”。为什么?因为从它的自性来看,它根本不存在。不过,由于正在入定者入定的作用,而被称为“入定者”,所以可以说它是“已成就的”,不能说它是“未成就的”。巴利
Nirodhasamāpatti kiṃ saṅkhatātiādipucchāyaṃ pana ‘‘saṅkhatā’’tipi ‘‘asaṅkhatā’’tipi ‘‘lokiyā’’tipi ‘‘lokuttarā’’tipi na vattabbā. Kasmā? Sabhāvato natthitāya. Yasmā pana samāpajjantassa vasena samāpanno nāma hoti, tasmā nipphannāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati, no anipphannāti.
这样的等至是寂静的,是圣者所亲近的。
就在眼前这一生中,就已经被称为涅槃了。巴利
‘‘Iti santā samāpatti, ayaṃ ariyanisevitā; Diṭṭheva dhamme nibbānamiti saṅkhamupāgatā’’ti.
般涅槃智的详细解释与注释巴利
35. Parinibbānañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
86 86. 在般涅槃智的解说中,“此处”指这个教法。“正知”是通过四种正知——有益正知、适宜正知、行境正知、无痴正知——而具足正知。“流转”指在一切处随其所应地以缠缚现行和以随眠现行的流转。“遍取”指:对以近行定和安止定所说的情况,以镇伏的方式灭尽;对以观所说的情况,以彼分断的方式灭尽;对以道所说的情况,以正断的方式灭尽,令其不再生起。通过省略重复的方式,第二禅那等定、大观和道也被收摄在内。因为这样观见者,其已生起的智即名为般涅槃智,所以镇伏般涅槃、彼分断般涅槃、正断般涅槃也被说及。依这些,说的是烦恼般涅槃的观察智。其次,以“或者又”等语,指示蕴般涅槃的观察智。“无余依涅槃界”:涅槃界有两种,即有余依和无余依。其中,被执取为“我、我所”而强烈执持,故为取;这是对五蕴的称呼。那取即是残余、所剩,故为取余;与取余俱而存在,故为有余依。此处无取余,故为无余依。有余依已先说。而此是无余依。依那无余依涅槃界。“眼流转”指眼的生起与作用。“遍取”指被灭尽、被摧破。其余诸项亦同此理。巴利
86. Parinibbānañāṇaniddese idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Sampajānoti sātthakasampajaññaṃ, sappāyasampajaññaṃ, gocarasampajaññaṃ, asammohasampajaññanti imehi catūhi sampajaññehi sampajāno. Pavattanti sabbattha yathānurūpaṃ pariyuṭṭhānapavattañca anusayappavattañca. Pariyādiyatīti upacārappanāvasena vuttesu vikkhambhanavasena, vipassanāvasena vuttesu tadaṅgavasena, maggavasena vuttesu samucchedavasena khepeti appavattaṃ karoti. Peyyālamukhena hi dutiyādijhānasamāpattimahāvipassanāmaggā saṃkhittā. Yasmā etaṃ paccavekkhantassa pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ parinibbāne ñāṇaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā vikkhambhanaparinibbānaṃ tadaṅgaparinibbānaṃ samucchedaparinibbānantipi vuttameva hoti. Etehi kilesaparinibbānapaccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Atha vā panātiādīhi khandhaparinibbānapaccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ niddisati. Anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyāti duvidhā hi nibbānadhātu saupādisesā ca anupādisesā ca. Tattha upādīyate ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti bhusaṃ gaṇhīyatīti upādi, khandhapañcakassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Upādiyeva seso avasiṭṭhoti upādiseso, saha upādisesena vattatīti saupādisesā. Natthettha upādisesoti anupādisesā. Saupādisesā paṭhamaṃ vuttā. Ayaṃ pana anupādisesā. Tāya anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā. Cakkhupavattanti cakkhupavatti cakkhusamudācāro. Pariyādiyatīti khepīyati maddīyatīti. Esa nayo sesesu.
36. 等首智注释巴利
36. Samasīsaṭṭhañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
87 在“等首义智”的解说中,应当知道:以“五蕴”等十种聚集,可以统摄一切法。因为并不是凭每一种聚集各自分开,就能把除处、界、色、戒四类聚集之外的其余八种聚集,一一统摄一切法。然而,由于出世间法并不是靠断除其因而被断除的,所以虽然“一切法”这个词也把出世间法包括在内,但在这里,从正断的角度来说,不应把出世间法拿来讨论;只有那些必须靠断除其因才能断除的三地法,才是这里所应讨论的。所谓“正确地断除”,就是按照相应情况,通过镇伏断、彼分断、正断、弃舍这些断除方式,使缠缚烦恼和随眠烦恼止息,这就是正确地断除。如此,以众生为立足点的教说,就说明了正断。“令灭”就是通过不再生起的灭而令其灭尽。这是说明正断的含义。“不现起”就是说:这样灭除之后,那法不再现起,也就是不再生起。这是说明灭的含义。如此,从“法不现起”的角度,说明了不现起的状态。“平等”是因为贪欲等已被平息,所以称为平等。这些法则是:出离等七种、色界与无色界禅那八种、大观十八种、圣道四种,共三十七种。巴利
87. Samasīsaṭṭhañāṇaniddese pañcakkhandhātiādīhi dasahi rāsīhi sabbadhammasaṅgaho veditabbo. Na hi ekekassa vasena āyatanadhāturāsivajjehi sesehi aṭṭhahi rāsīhi visuṃ visuṃ sabbadhammo saṅgayhatīti. Yasmā pana lokuttaradhammā hetusamucchedena samucchinditabbā na honti, tasmā sabbadhammasaddena saṅgahitāpi lokuttaradhammā samucchedavasena sambhavato idha na gahetabbā, hetusamucchedena samucchinditabbā eva tebhūmakadhammā gahetabbā. Sammā samucchindatīti yathāyogaṃ vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedapahānavasena pariyuṭṭhānaṃ anusayañca nirodhento sammā samucchindati. Evaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya sammā samucchedo niddiṭṭho. Nirodhetīti anuppādanirodhena nirodheti. Iminā samucchedattho vutto. Na upaṭṭhātīti evaṃ nirodhe kate so so dhammo puna na upatiṭṭhati, na uppajjatīti attho. Iminā nirodhattho vutto. Evaṃ anupaṭṭhahanadhammavasena anupaṭṭhānabhāvo niddiṭṭho. Samanti kāmacchandādīnaṃ samitattā samaṃ. Tāni pana nekkhammādīni satta, rūpārūpajjhānāni aṭṭha, mahāvipassanā aṭṭhārasa, ariyamaggā cattāroti sattatiṃsa honti.
十三种“头”是就一切被称为“头”的法,从总摄的角度来说的。但在这里,只有信等八种“头”是适用的,因为阿罗汉没有渴爱等五种“头”。
“障碍头”中,障碍就是束缚,意思是障碍通向涅槃之道。“头”是主要、增上的意思。障碍本身就是“头”,或者在与之相应等一切障碍中处于首要地位,所以叫“障碍头”。其余各项也按同样的方式理解。
分别来说:“系缚”是指因增上慢而在轮回中被绑缚;“执取”是指顽固的执著;“散乱”是指分散杂乱的状态;“烦恼”是指染污;“胜解”是指信解决定;“策励”是指激励推动;“现起”是指令其现前不忘;“不散乱”是指不分散杂乱;“见”是指如实通达;“流转”是指已执取的五蕴在相续运转;“行境”是指所缘。
在这十二项中,“头”都是主要的意思。
“解脱”:在镇伏解脱、彼分解脱、正断解脱、寂止解脱、出离解脱这五种解脱中,出离解脱就是涅槃。
“行头”:一切有为行的“头”,意思是顶端、终点。以此宣说了无余涅槃。或者,仅从诸行不存在的角度来说,说的就是五蕴的涅槃。
“出离等”是平等,“信等”是头,或者具有平等之头,所以叫“等首者”。
另外,十三种头中,渴爱等五种头是集谛,信等五种头是道谛,流转头是命根即苦谛,行境头和行头是灭谛。如果有人能于这四圣谛,在一种病、一种威仪或一种同类命根中成就通达和无余涅槃,那么由于具有前面所说的平等以及这些头,就称为“等首者”。巴利
Terasa sīsāni sīsabhūtānaṃ sabbesaṃ saṅgahavasena vuttāni. Idha pana saddhādīni aṭṭheva sīsāni yujjanti. Na hi arahato taṇhādīni pañca sīsāni santi. Palibodhasīsanti palibundhanaṃ palibodho, nibbānamaggāvaraṇanti attho. Sīsanti padhānaṃ, adhikanti attho. Palibodhoyeva sīsaṃ, taṃsampayuttādisabbapalibodhesu vā sīsanti palibodhasīsaṃ. Esa nayo sesesu. Visesato pana vinibandhananti unnativasena saṃsāre bandhanaṃ. Parāmāsoti abhiniveso. Vikkhepoti vippakiṇṇatā. Kilesoti kilissanaṃ. Adhimokkhoti adhimuccanaṃ. Paggahoti ussāhanaṃ. Upaṭṭhānanti apilāpanaṃ. Avikkhepoti avippakiṇṇatā. Dassananti yathāsabhāvapaṭivedho. Pavattanti upādinnakkhandhapavattaṃ. Gocaroti ārammaṇaṃ. Imesu dvādasasupi vāresu padhānaṭṭho sīsaṭṭho. Vimokkhoti vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttīsu pañcasu nissaraṇavimutti nibbānaṃ. Saṅkhārasīsanti sabbasaṅkhatasaṅkhārānaṃ sīsaṃ, koṭi avasānanti attho. Etena anupādisesaparinibbānaṃ vuttaṃ. Saṅkhārābhāvamattavasena vā khandhaparinibbānameva vuttaṃ hoti. Nekkhammādikaṃ samañca saddhādikaṃ sīsañca, samasīsaṃ vā assa atthīti samasīsīti. Atha vā terasannaṃ sīsānaṃ taṇhādīni pañca sīsāni samudayasaccaṃ, saddhādīni pañca maggasaccaṃ, pavattasīsaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, gocarasīsañca saṅkhārasīsañca nirodhasaccanti imesaṃ catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ekasmiṃ roge vā ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe vā ekasmiṃ sabhāgajīvitindriye vā abhisamayo ca anupādisesaparinibbānañca yassa hoti, so pubbe vuttasamānañca imesañca sīsānaṃ atthitāya samasīsīti vuccati.
第37章 削减之义智的解释巴利
37. Sallekhaṭṭhañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
88 在“削减义智”的解释中,“贪是各别的”意思是:贪是分开的,不与出世间法混杂。其余烦恼也按这个道理理解。“贪”,是从染著的意义上说;“嗔”,是从损害的意义上说;“痴”,是从迷惑的意义上说。贪的特相是染著,嗔的特相是损害,痴的特相是迷惑——说完这三个根本烦恼之后,现在要从分类上说明,所以开始讲“忿”等。
其中,“忿”的特相是发怒,这里指的是以有情为对象的愤怒。“恨”的特相是紧紧抓住不放,它只是变得坚固的忿。“覆”的特相是抹杀他人的功德,意思是擦掉他人的长处。“恼”的特相是抓住对立不放,意思是以对立的方式看待他人的功德。“嫉”的特相是嫉妒他人的成就,意思就是妒忌。“悭”的特相是隐藏自己的成就,意思是“这是我的,不要让别人得到”。“诳”的特相是掩盖自己已造的恶行,意思就像用东西盖住一样,以掩盖为本质。“谄”的特相是炫耀自己本来没有的功德,意思是奸诈。“骄”的特相是内心膨胀的状态,意思是心变得僵硬。“害”的特相是较劲、争胜。“慢”的特相是高估自己。“过慢”的特相是更加高估自己。“醉”的特相是自我陶醉。“放逸”的特相是心在五种欲乐对象上放纵散乱。巴利
88. Sallekhaṭṭhañāṇaniddese rāgo puthūti rāgo visuṃ, lokuttarehi asammissoti attho. Esa nayo sesesu. Rāgoti rañjanaṭṭhena. Dosoti dussanaṭṭhena. Mohoti muyhanaṭṭhena. Rañjanalakkhaṇo rāgo, dussanalakkhaṇo doso, muyhanalakkhaṇo mohoti ime tayo sīsakilese vatvā idāni pabhedato dassento kodhotiādimāha. Tattha kujjhanalakkhaṇo kodhoti idha sattavatthuko adhippeto. Upanandhanalakkhaṇo upanāho, daḷhabhāvappatto kodhoyeva. Paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇo makkho, paraguṇapuñchananti attho. Yugaggāhalakkhaṇo paḷāso, yugaggāhavasena paraguṇadassananti attho. Parasampattikhīyanalakkhaṇā issā, usūyanāti attho . Attasampattinigūhanalakkhaṇaṃ macchariyaṃ, ‘‘mayhaṃ acchariyaṃ mā parassa hotū’’ti attho. Attanā katapāpapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā māyā, paṭicchādanaṭṭhena māyā viyāti attho. Attano avijjamānaguṇappakāsanalakkhaṇaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ, saṭhabhāvoti attho. Cittassa uddhumātabhāvalakkhaṇo thambho, thaddhabhāvoti attho. Karaṇuttariyalakkhaṇo sārambho. Unnatilakkhaṇo māno. Abbhunnatilakkhaṇo atimāno. Mattabhāvalakkhaṇo mado. Pañcasu kāmaguṇesu cittavosaggalakkhaṇo pamādo.
像这样,把烦恼按各自不同的类别分开来展示之后,为了再用总括的方式,把已经说过的烦恼和没有说过的其他烦恼全都涵盖进来,就说了“一切烦恼”等等这样的话。
其中,这些法在今生和来世都能让众生烦恼、灼烧、逼迫,所以叫“烦恼”。它们既包括已经被归入不善业道的,也包括没有被归入不善业道的。
“恶行”:因为行为恶劣,或者说是恶劣的行为,所以叫恶行。恶行有三种:身恶行、语恶行、意恶行。
“行”:因为它们能造作出异熟果报,所以叫行。行也有三种:福行、非福行、不动行。
因为异熟而趋向于“有”的,叫“趣有者”;趋向于有的业,就是“趣有之业”。虽然这些也属于行的范畴,但这里排除了不能感得异熟的业,这就是差别所在。
这里把“恶行”和“业”两个词的词性做了转换。
“种种与单一”:在总说中,虽然没有出现“单一”这个词,但因为种种与单一互相参照,为了也想指出“单一”,就用了“种种与单一”这样的总说。在削减种种的过程中显示出单一,这样就能容易地展示削减智。
所谓“种种”,是因为不安住、有动摇,所以是种种的自性。所谓“单一”,是因为安住、无动摇,所以是单一的自性。巴利
Evaṃ visuṃ visuṃ kilesavasena puthū dassetvā vuttakilese ca avutte ca aññe sabbasaṅgāhikavasena dassetuṃ sabbe kilesātiādimāha. Tattha diṭṭhadhammasamparāyesu satte kilesenti upatāpenti vibādhentīti kilesā. Akusalakammapathasaṅgahitā ca asaṅgahitā ca. Duṭṭhu caritā, duṭṭhā vā caritāti duccaritā. Te pana kāyaduccaritaṃ vacīduccaritaṃ manoduccaritanti tippakārā. Vipākaṃ abhisaṅkharontīti abhisaṅkhārā. Tepi puññābhisaṅkhāro apuññābhisaṅkhāro āneñjābhisaṅkhāroti tippakārā. Vipākavasena bhavaṃ gacchantītibhavagāmino , bhavagāmino kammā bhavagāmikammā. Iminā abhisaṅkhārabhāvepi sati avedanīyāni kammāni paṭikkhittāni hontīti ayaṃ viseso. ‘‘Duccaritā’’ti ca ‘‘kammā’’ti ca liṅgavipallāso kato. Nānattekattanti ettha uddese ekattasaddassa abhāvepi nānattekattānaṃ aññamaññāpekkhattā ekattampi niddisitukāmena ‘‘nānattekatta’’nti uddeso kato. Nānattasallekhake ekatte dassite sallekhañāṇaṃ sukhena dassīyatīti. Nānattanti anavaṭṭhitattā saparipphandattā ca nānāsabhāvo. Ekattanti avaṭṭhitattā aparipphandattā ca ekasabhāvo.
行焰:依靠它而行,能到达从未到过的方向——涅槃,所以叫“行”。那是什么?是戒。这戒本身能烧毁对立面,所以叫“焰”。德焰:以戒为立足处而得到的定之焰。慧焰:以定为立足处而得到的观慧之焰。福焰:以观慧为立足处而得到的圣道善法之焰。法焰:作为以上四种焰之依托的佛语之焰。由于被行焰所燃烧:即由于被戒焰所磨砺而变得锐利。无戒之焰:即被称为无戒状态的那种焰。那种状态也能灼烧心相续,所以叫焰。它耗尽:即完全消灭。无德之焰:与定对立的散乱之焰。劣慧之焰:与观慧对立的愚痴之焰。非福之焰:通过断除各道所应断除的烦恼而伴随烦恼的不善业之焰。它不仅耗尽非福,正如经文所说:“比丘们,有一种业,既不黑也不白,没有黑白报应,能导致业的灭尽。”(增支部4.233;长部3.312;中部2.18)根据此说,它也耗尽善业。由于与福焰相对,所以只说非福焰。非法焰:各种外道学说的言论之焰。在此智的略释中,在第二义释里,贪等十九种各别是无戒之焰。在“诸行,趣有之业”中,非福行与不善业是非福焰;不动行是世间善业,因由福焰所灭,故属于非福焰之类。欲贪等十五种各别是无德焰;常想等十八种各别是劣慧焰;四道所断的四种各别是非福焰。入流道所断的各别,应归入非法焰。巴利
Caraṇatejoti caranti tena agataṃ disaṃ nibbānaṃ gacchantīti caraṇaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Sīlaṃ. Tadeva paṭipakkhatāpanaṭṭhena tejo. Guṇatejoti sīlena laddhapatiṭṭho samādhitejo. Paññātejoti samādhinā laddhapatiṭṭho vipassanātejo. Puññatejoti vipassanāhi laddhapatiṭṭho ariyamaggakusalatejo. Dhammatejoti catunnaṃ tejānaṃ patiṭṭhābhūto buddhavacanatejo. Caraṇatejena tejitattāti sīlatejena tikhiṇīkatattā. Dussīlyatejanti dussīlabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ tejaṃ. Tampi hi santānaṃ tāpanato tejo nāma. Pariyādiyatīti khepeti. Aguṇatejanti samādhissa paṭipakkhaṃ vikkhepatejaṃ. Duppaññatejanti vipassanāñāṇapaṭipakkhaṃ mohatejaṃ. Apuññatejanti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesappahānena kilesasahāyaṃ akusalakammatejaṃ. Na kevalañhetaṃ apuññameva khepeti, ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kammaṃ akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ akaṇhaasukkavipākaṃ kammaṃ kammakkhayāya saṃvattatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.233; dī. ni. 3.312; ma. ni. 2.18) vacanato kusalakammampi khepetiyeva. Puññatejapaṭipakkhavasena apuññatejameva vuttaṃ. Adhammatejanti nānātitthiyānaṃ samayavacanatejaṃ. Imassa ñāṇassa uddesavaṇṇanāyaṃ vutte dutiye atthavikappe rāgādayo ekūnavīsati puthu dussīlyatejā honti. ‘‘Abhisaṅkhārā, bhavagāmikammā’’ti ettha apuññābhisaṅkhārā akusalakammañca apuññatejā honti, āneñjābhisaṅkhārāni lokiyakusalakammāni puññatejeneva khepanīyato apuññatejapakkhikāva honti. Kāmacchandādayo pañcadasa nānattā aguṇatejā honti, niccasaññādayo aṭṭhārasa nānattā duppaññatejā honti, catumaggavajjhā cattāro nānattā apuññatejā honti. Sotāpattimaggavajjhanānattena adhammatejo saṅgahetabbo.
在释义部分,想要通过与非削减相对立的削减来显示削减,所以先说明了非削减,然后才说明削减。出离等三十七种法,其实是同一类法,因为它们能削减各自的对立面,所以被称为“削减”。对出离等三十七种削减的了知,就是“削减义之智”。巴利
Niddese sallekhapaṭipakkhena asallekhena sallekhaṃ dassetukāmena asallekhapubbako sallekho niddiṭṭho. Nekkhammādayo sattatiṃsa ekattadhammāva paccanīkānaṃ sallikhanato ‘‘sallekho’’ti vuttā. Tasmiṃ nekkhammādike sattatiṃsapabhede sallekhe ñāṇaṃ sallekhaṭṭhe ñāṇanti.
38. 精进发起的智慧之释义巴利
38. Vīriyārambhañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
89 在“精进发动之智”的解说中,“未生起的”是指在某一个生命体里,或者在某一个所缘上,还没有生起的。因为在无始的轮回中,根本不存在未生起的不善法,但善法确实有未生起的。“恶的”是指低劣的。“不善法”是指从不善巧产生的法。“为了不让它生起”就是为了不令生起。“已生起的”是指在这个生命体里已经产生的。“为了断除”就是为了断除。“未生起的善法”是指在这个生命体里从未产生过的、从善巧产生的法。“为了令生起”就是为了令生起。“已生起的”是指在这个生命体里已经产生的。“为了安住”就是为了安住。“为不忘失”是为了不毁坏。“为更增广”是为了反复增上。“为广大”是为了广大。“为修习”是为了增长。“为圆满”是为了圆满。巴利
89. Vīriyārambhañāṇaniddese anuppannānanti ekasmiṃ attabhāve, ekasmiṃ vā ārammaṇe anibbattānaṃ. Anamatagge hi saṃsāre anuppannā akusalā nāma natthi, kusalā pana atthi. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Akusalānaṃ dhammānanti akosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Anuppādāyāti na uppādanatthāya. Uppannānanti imasmiṃ attabhāve nibbattānaṃ. Pahānāyāti pajahanatthāya. Anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānanti imasmiṃ attabhāve anibbattapubbānaṃ kosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Uppādāyāti uppādanatthāya. Uppannānanti imasmiṃ attabhāve nibbattānaṃ. Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthāya. Asammosāyāti avināsatthāya. Bhiyyobhāvāyāti punappunabhāvāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Bhāvanāyāti vaḍḍhiyā. Pāripūriyāti paripūraṇatthāya.
现在,为了在不善法里特别指出欲贪、在善法里特别指出出离,而说了“未生起的欲贪”等话。其中,“欲贪”是指与定相反的欲贪。“出离”是指初禅的定,或者指初禅,或者也可以说一切善法都是出离。巴利
Idāni akusalesu kāmacchandaṃ, kusalesu nekkhammaṃ visesetvā dassetuṃ anuppannassa kāmacchandassātiādimāha. Tattha kāmacchandoti samādhipaṭipakkho kāmarāgo. Nekkhammanti paṭhamajjhānasamādhi, paṭhamajjhānaṃ vā, sabbe eva vā kusalā dhammā nekkhammaṃ.
现在,为了把一切烦恼以及对治一切烦恼的阿拉汉道配合起来说明,而说了“未生起的一切烦恼”等。其中,在“已生起的阿拉汉道之安住”等语句里,应当知道这是就生起刹那已生起的阿拉汉道,按住刹那和灭刹那来配合说“安住”等。《分别论注》里也说:“它的转起,这就叫住。”不过有些人说:“应当看作阿拉汉道的前分道。”巴利
Idāni sabbakilesānaṃ sabbakilesapaṭipakkhassa arahattamaggassa ca vasena yojetvā dassetuṃ anuppannānaṃ sabbakilesānantiādimāha. Tattha uppannassa arahattamaggassa ṭhitiyātiādīsu uppādakkhaṇe uppannassa arahattamaggassa ṭhitikkhaṇabhaṅgakkhaṇavasena ‘‘ṭhitiyā’’tiādiyojanā veditabbā. Vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘yā cassa pavatti, ayameva ṭhiti nāmā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 406) vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘arahattamaggassa pubbabhāgamaggo daṭṭhabbo’’ti vadanti.
第39章 义开示智的解说注释巴利
39. Atthasandassanañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
90 在“义开示智”的解说中,“五蕴”等词,其含义和前面所说的一样。“开显”的意思是使之明显,也就是让听众用智眼看见,成就他们的见。所说的“种种法”,是指世间和出世间的一切法。有人问:为什么在开显的解说中只说了世间法?因为是从无常等角度开始开显的。而出世间法不适合作为思维观察的对象,所以没有说出世间法。不过,通过“种种法”的解说和“义开示”的解说,已经把它们包含在内了,所以应当开显的就如其所应地开显,那开显就是开显。“令断除”的意思是令听众断除。“开示”是指对听众正确地开示。不过有些人按照“因为欲贪已断,所以为出离之义而开示”等方式来读诵。应当知道,这是为了表明:当听众断除过失和获得功德都已完成时,教法之智就达到了顶峰,所以说这个道理。巴利
90. Atthasandassanañāṇaniddese pañcakkhandhātiādīni vuttatthāneva. Pakāsetīti pākaṭaṃ karoti, sotūnaṃ ñāṇacakkhunā dassanaṃ sampādetīti attho. Nānādhammāti lokiyalokuttarā sabbadhammā vuttā. Kasmā pakāsanāniddese lokiyā eva vuttāti ce? Aniccādivasena pakāsanāya āraddhattā. Lokuttarānañca asammasanūpagattā lokuttarā na vuttā. Nānādhammaniddesena pana atthasandassananiddesena ca tesaṃ saṅgahitattā yathā te pakāsetabbā, tathā pakāsanā pakāsanāyeva. Pajahantoti sotāraṃ pajahāpentoti attho. Sandassetīti sotūnaṃ sammā dasseti. Keci pana ‘‘kāmacchandassa pahīnattā nekkhammatthaṃ sandassetī’’tiādinā nayena paṭhanti. Tesaṃ ujukameva sotūnaṃ dosappahāne guṇapaṭilābhe ca kate sikhāppattaṃ desanāñāṇaṃ hotīti dassanatthaṃ ayaṃ nayo vuttoti veditabbo.
第40章 见清净智的解说注释巴利
40. Dassanavisuddhiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
91 在“见清净智的解说”这一节里,“一切法被一者所摄”:意思是,一切有为法和无为法都被同一个东西所摄持、所限定。“以如义”:就是以真实义,也就是依各自的自性而存在的意思。“以无我义”:就是远离了被称为作者、受者的“我”的意思。“以谛义”:就是不欺诳义,意思是自性不会变成别的状态。“以通达义”:就是依自性应当以智慧通达。这里应当知道,是由出世间智无迷乱地、从所缘上通达。“以了知义”:就是依世间智从所缘上,依出世间智无迷乱地、从所缘上,对那些法依其自性应当了知。“一切,诸比丘,是应遍了知的”这样说。“以遍知义”:按前述方式,依世间与出世间智,对已依自性了知的诸法,通过无常等以及出离等加以限定而了知。“一切,诸比丘,是应遍知的”这样说。“以法义”:以自性执持等的法义。“以界义”:无命等的界义。“以所知义”:依世间与出世间智可被认知的意思。正如以可被见等的意思说“见、闻、觉、知、色”,这里也应当知道,可被认知的意思就是所知义。“以作证义”:于所缘应现前证得的意思。“以触义”:对已现前证得的所缘应反复触证的意思。“以现观义”:依世间智应当现前到达的意思。虽然“如义中的慧是谛现观智,了知义中的慧是了知智,作证义中的慧是触义智”这样各各的智被分别说出。而且在义注中——巴利
91. Dassanavisuddhiñāṇaniddese sabbe dhammā ekasaṅgahitāti sabbe saṅkhatāsaṅkhatā dhammā ekena saṅgahitā paricchinnā. Tathaṭṭhenāti bhūtaṭṭhena, attano attano sabhāvavasena vijjamānatthenāti attho. Anattaṭṭhenāti kārakavedakasaṅkhātena attanā rahitaṭṭhena. Saccaṭṭhenāti avisaṃvādakaṭṭhena, attano sabhāvaññathattābhāvenāti attho. Paṭivedhaṭṭhenāti sabhāvato ñāṇena paṭivijjhitabbaṭṭhena. Idha lokuttarañāṇena asammohato ārammaṇato ca paṭivedho veditabbo. Abhijānanaṭṭhenāti lokikena ñāṇena ārammaṇato, lokuttarena ñāṇena asammohato ārammaṇato ca tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvato abhijānitabbaṭṭhena. ‘‘Sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, abhiññeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.46) hi vuttaṃ. Parijānanaṭṭhenāti vuttanayeneva lokiyalokuttarehi ñāṇehi sabhāvato abhiññātānaṃ dhammānaṃ aniccādito niyyānādito ca paricchinditvā jānitabbaṭṭhena. ‘‘Sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, pariññeyya’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Dhammaṭṭhenāti sabhāvadhāraṇādinā dhammaṭṭhena. Dhātuṭṭhenāti nijjīvatādinā dhātuṭṭhena. Ñātaṭṭhenāti lokiyalokuttarehi ñāṇehi ñātuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṭṭhena. Yathā daṭṭhuṃ sakkuṇeyyādinā atthena ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ rūpa’’nti vuttaṃ, evamidhāpi ñātuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṭṭho ñātaṭṭhoti veditabbo. Sacchikiriyaṭṭhenāti ārammaṇato paccakkhakātabbaṭṭhena. Phusanaṭṭhenāti paccakkhakatassa ārammaṇato punappunaṃ phusitabbaṭṭhena. Abhisamayaṭṭhenāti lokikena ñāṇena abhisamāgantabbaṭṭhena. Kiñcāpi hi ‘‘tathaṭṭhe paññā saccavivaṭṭe ñāṇaṃ, abhiññāpaññā ñātaṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ, sacchikiriyāpaññā phassanaṭṭhe ñāṇa’’nti ekekameva ñāṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyañca –
在集合、刹那、时间、聚集、因、见这些含义中,
在获得、断除和通达中,都能见到它。巴利
‘‘Samavāye khaṇe kāle, samūhe hetudiṭṭhisu; Paṭilābhe pahāne ca, paṭivedhe ca dissatī’’ti . –
在偈颂的注释里,“现观”这个词被说成是通达的意思;但在这里,应该按照上面所说的含义来理解它们的多样性。因为正是在那部义注里,它才是依世间智而被称为“法现观”的。巴利
Gāthāvaṇṇanāyaṃ abhisamayasaddassa paṭivedhattho vutto, idha pana yathāvuttena atthena tesaṃ nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyameva hi so lokiyañāṇavasena dhammābhisamayo vuttoti.
欲贪是多样性的,因为它的本性就是散乱,而且所缘对象各不相同,所以自性就是多样的——这就是它的含义。一切烦恼也应该这样理解。出离是单一性的,因为它的本性是心一境性,而且没有各种所缘对象的散乱,所以自性就是单一的——这就是它的含义。一切善法也应该这样理解。在这里,以简略方式提到的嗔恨等不善法,应该按照前面所说的含义理解为多样性。至于寻、伺等,则应该从下到上、从粗到细地理解为多样性。因为在道生起的那一刹那,通过谛的通达,就成就了对“被总摄为一的多样性与单一性”的通达,所以特别提出“通达”这个词,来显示对谛的现观。巴利
Kāmacchando nānattanti vikkhepasabbhāvato nānārammaṇattā ca nānāsabhāvoti attho. Evaṃ sabbakilesā veditabbā. Nekkhammaṃ ekattanti cittekaggatāsabbhāvato nānārammaṇavikkhepābhāvato ca ekasabhāvanti attho. Evaṃ sabbakusalā veditabbā. Idha peyyālena saṃkhittānaṃ byāpādādīnaṃ akusalānaṃ yathāvuttena atthena nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vitakkavicārādīnaṃ pana heṭṭhimānaṃ heṭṭhimānaṃ uparimato uparimato oḷārikaṭṭhena nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yasmā ekasaṅgahitanānattekattānaṃ paṭivedho maggakkhaṇe saccapaṭivedhena sijjhati, tasmā ‘‘paṭivedho’’ti padaṃ uddharitvā saccābhisamayaṃ dassesi.
以遍知通达而通达,就是以遍知现观而现观。其余各句也按同样的方式理解。因为在现观四谛的那一刻,道智在同一个刹那中完成四种作用:遍知、舍断、证悟、修习。就像一艘船在同一个刹那中,不前不后地完成四件事:离开此岸、截断水流、运载货物、抵达彼岸;同样地,道智在同一个刹那中,不前不后地现观四谛:以遍知现观而现观苦,以舍断现观而现观集,以修习现观而现观道,以证悟现观而现观灭。这说的是什么?说的是:以涅槃为所缘,通过作用而触及、看见、通达四谛。就像离开此岸一样,道智遍知苦。就像截断水流一样,道智舍断集。就像运载货物一样,道智以俱生等缘之力修习道。就像抵达彼岸一样,道智证悟如同彼岸一般的涅槃。应当这样把譬喻和意义对应起来理解。巴利
Pariññā paṭivedhaṃ paṭivijjhatīti pariññābhisamayena abhisameti. Esa nayo sesesu. Saccābhisamayakālasmiñhi maggañāṇassa ekakkhaṇe pariññā, pahānaṃ, sacchikiriyā, bhāvanāti cattāri kiccāni honti. Yathā nāvā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ ekakkhaṇe cattāri kiccāni karoti, orimaṃ tīraṃ pajahati, sotaṃ chindati, bhaṇḍaṃ vahati, pārimaṃ tīraṃ appeti, evameva maggañāṇaṃ apubbaṃ acarimaṃ ekakkhaṇe cattāri saccāni abhisameti, dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena abhisameti, samudayaṃ pahānābhisamayena abhisameti, maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayena abhisameti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccavasena cattāripi saccāni pāpuṇāti passati paṭivijjhatīti. Yathā orimaṃ tīraṃ pajahati, evaṃ maggañāṇaṃ dukkhaṃ parijānāti. Yathā sotaṃ chindati, evaṃ samudayaṃ pajahati. Yathā bhaṇḍaṃ vahati, evaṃ sahajātādipaccayatāya maggaṃ bhāveti. Yathā pārimaṃ tīraṃ appeti, evaṃ pārimatīrabhūtaṃ nirodhaṃ sacchikarotīti evaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“见清净”:通过断除各个道所应断的烦恼黑暗,智见达到清净的状态。“见已清净”:在各自果生起的那一刹那,因为各自道智的作用已经完成,智见就达到了清净的状态。由于以总摄一切法的、通达种种与单一的智慧,依道果智而成就,所以最后开示了道果智。巴利
Dassanaṃvisujjhatīti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesatamappahānena ñāṇadassanaṃ visuddhibhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti. Dassanaṃ visuddhanti tassa tassa phalassa uppādakkhaṇe tassa tassa maggañāṇassa kiccasiddhippattito ñāṇadassanaṃ visuddhibhāvaṃ pattaṃ hoti. Sabbadhammānaṃ ekasaṅgahitāya nānattekattapaṭivedhapaññāya maggaphalañāṇehi siddhito ante maggaphalañāṇāni vuttāni.
第41-42项:忍智与洞察智解说的注释巴利
41-42. Khantiñāṇapariyogāhaṇañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
92-93 92-93. 在解说“忍智”和“洞察智”的部分:
“色被了知为无常”——这是通过无常随观,了知色为无常。
“色被了知为苦”——这是通过苦随观,了知色为苦。
“色被了知为无我”——这是通过无我随观,了知色为无我。
“凡是被了知的,那些都堪忍”:意思是,凡是被了知为无常等的色,那些色就作为无常等而被堪忍、被接受、被认可。
在某些写本中,“色被了知为无常,凡是被了知的,那些都堪忍”这一句被分开单独写出来。
至于“受、想、行被了知为无常”等等,则应转换其性和数的语法形式来配合理解。
“触知”:是通过观智的接触而触知、遍满。
“洞察”:是通过观智而进入。
也有读作“pariyogāhati”(洞察)的写法。巴利
92-93. Khantiñāṇapariyogāhaṇañāṇaniddesesu rūpaṃ aniccato viditanti aniccānupassanāya aniccanti ñātaṃ. Rūpaṃ dukkhato viditanti dukkhānupassanāya dukkhanti ñātaṃ. Rūpaṃ anattato viditanti anattānupassanāya anattāti ñātaṃ. Yaṃ yaṃ viditaṃ, taṃ taṃ khamatīti yaṃ yaṃ rūpaṃ aniccādito viditaṃ, taṃ taṃ rūpaṃ aniccādito khamati ruccati. ‘‘Rūpaṃ aniccato viditaṃ, yaṃ yaṃ viditaṃ, taṃ taṃ khamatī’’ti visuṃ visuñca katvā kesuci potthakesu likhitaṃ. ‘‘Vedanā saññā saṅkhārā aniccato viditā’’tiādinā liṅgavacanāni parivattetvā yojetabbāni. Phusatīti vipassanāñāṇaphusanena phusati pharati. Pariyogahatīti vipassanāñāṇena pavisati. Pariyogāhatītipi pāṭho.
第43项:一分住智解说的注释巴利
43. Padesavihārañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
94 在“一分住智”的解说中,应当观察论母里所列出的“一分”是以什么方式呈现的。为了说明这一点,就说了“以邪见为缘也有感受”等话。这里,“以邪见为缘”既包括与邪见相应的受,也包括以邪见为亲依止而生起的善受、不善受,以及异熟受。其中,与邪见相应的受只能是不善的;但依靠邪见,善的受也能生起,不善的受也能生起。因为持邪见的人依靠邪见,在半月日等日子布施粥饭,照料盲人、麻风病人等,在十字路口建盖殿堂,让人挖掘池塘,种植花园和果园,在河流险要处架桥,把崎岖不平的地方修平。这样,他们就生起了善受。可是,他们又依靠邪见,辱骂、诽谤持正见的人,做杀害、捆绑等事,杀生后供奉给天神。这样,他们就生起了不善受。至于异熟受,则是投生到别的生存界的人才有的。那种邪见对于与自己同时生起的受,是通过俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、有缘、不离去缘这些缘而起作用的;刚刚灭去的邪见对于现在与邪见相应的受,是通过无间缘、等无间缘、亲依止缘、习行缘、无有缘、离去缘这些缘而起作用的;把邪见看得很重、欢喜它的人,其与贪俱行的受,是以邪见为所缘,通过所缘缘、所缘增上缘、所缘亲依止缘这些缘而起作用的;对于以一切不善法仅将邪见作为所缘的人,一切不善受是以邪见为所缘,通过所缘缘而起作用的;对于观察邪见、观照邪见的人,善受和无记受是以邪见为所缘,通过所缘缘而起作用的;邪见对于以邪见为缘而生起的善受、不善受,以及投生到别的生存界后的异熟受,是通过亲依止缘而起作用的。巴利
94. Padesavihārañāṇaniddese yenākārena mātikāya uddiṭṭho padeso paccavekkhitabbo, taṃ dassento micchādiṭṭhipaccayāpi vedayitantiādimāha. Tattha micchādiṭṭhipaccayāti diṭṭhisampayuttavedanāpi vaṭṭati diṭṭhiṃ upanissayaṃ katvā uppannā kusalākusalavedanāpi vipākavedanāpi. Tattha micchādiṭṭhisampayuttā akusalāva hoti, diṭṭhiṃ pana upanissāya kusalāpi uppajjanti akusalāpi. Micchādiṭṭhikā hi diṭṭhiṃ upanissāya pakkhadivasesu yāgubhattādīni denti, andhakuṭṭhiādīnaṃ vattaṃ paṭṭhapenti, catumahāpathe sālaṃ karonti, pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇāpenti, pupphārāmaṃ phalārāmaṃ ropenti, nadīviduggesu setuṃ attharanti, visamaṃ samaṃ karonti. Iti tesaṃ kusalā vedanā uppajjati. Micchādiṭṭhiṃ pana nissāya sammādiṭṭhike akkosanti paribhāsanti vadhabandhādīni karonti, pāṇaṃ vadhitvā devatānaṃ upaharanti. Iti nesaṃ akusalā vedanā uppajjati. Vipākavedanā pana bhavantaragatānaṃ hoti. Sā pana micchādiṭṭhi sahajātāya vedanāya sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayo hoti, samanantaraniruddhā micchādiṭṭhi paccuppannamicchādiṭṭhisampayuttāya vedanāya anantarasamanantarūpanissayaāsevananatthivigatapaccayehi paccayo hoti, micchādiṭṭhiṃ garuṃ katvā abhinandantassa lobhasahagatavedanāya ārammaṇaārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayapaccayehi paccayo hoti, sabbākusalehi micchādiṭṭhiṃ ārammaṇamattaṃ karontassa sabbākusalavedanāya micchādiṭṭhiṃ paccavekkhantassa vipassantassa kusalābyākatavedanāya ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo hoti, micchādiṭṭhipaccayena uppajjamānānaṃ kusalākusalavedanānaṃ bhavantare vipākavedanānañca upanissayapaccayena paccayo hoti.
以邪见的寂止为缘:所谓邪见的寂止,就是正见。因此,前面所说的以正见为缘而感受的,就应当理解为“以邪见的寂止为缘”。不过有些人说:“邪见的寂止,是指在观的刹那,以及在入流道的刹那。”巴利
Micchādiṭṭhivūpasamapaccayāti micchādiṭṭhivūpasamo nāma sammādiṭṭhi, tasmā yaṃ sammādiṭṭhipaccayā vedayitaṃ vuttaṃ, tadeva ‘‘micchādiṭṭhivūpasamapaccayā’’ti veditabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘micchādiṭṭhivūpasamo nāma vipassanākkhaṇe sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe cā’’ti vadanti.
以正见为缘也有感受,在这里,与正见相应的受也可以;以正见为亲依止而生起的善、不善受也可以;异熟受也可以。其中,与正见相应的受只能是善的。然而,依止正见,人们做供养佛陀、燃灯、听闻大法、在还没有塔庙的地方建立塔庙等种种福德行为,他们就这样生起善受。同样依止正见,他们辱骂、诽谤持邪见的人,抬高自己、贬低他人,他们就这样生起不善受。异熟受则只属于投生到另一生存界的人。那种正见对于同时生起的、紧接灭去的、现在的受,就像解说邪见时所说的那些缘一样,以那些缘为缘。世间正见对于与省察相应、与观相应、与贪欲相应的受,以所缘缘为缘;也按照解说邪见时的方式,以亲依止缘为缘。道与果的正见对于与省察相应的受,则以所缘缘、所缘增上缘、所缘亲依止缘的方式为缘。巴利
Sammādiṭṭhipaccayāpi vedayitanti etthāpi sammādiṭṭhisampayuttavedanāpi vaṭṭati sammādiṭṭhiṃ upanissayaṃ katvā uppannā kusalākusalavedanāpi vipākavedanāpi. Tattha sammādiṭṭhisampayuttā kusalāva hoti, sammādiṭṭhiṃ pana upanissāya buddhapūjā dīpamālāropanaṃ mahādhammassavanaṃ appatiṭṭhite disābhāge cetiyapatiṭṭhāpananti evamādīni puññāni karonti. Iti nesaṃ kusalā vedanā uppajjati. Sammādiṭṭhimeva nissāya micchādiṭṭhike akkosanti paribhāsanti, attānaṃ ukkaṃsanti, paraṃ vambhenti. Iti nesaṃ akusalā vedanā uppajjati. Vipākavedanā pana bhavantaragatānaṃyeva hoti. Sā pana sammādiṭṭhi sahajātāya samanantaraniruddhāya paccuppannāya vedanāya micchādiṭṭhiyā vuttapaccayeheva paccayo hoti, lokikasammādiṭṭhi paccavekkhaṇasampayuttāya vipassanāsampayuttāya nikantisampayuttāya ca vedanāya ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo hoti, micchādiṭṭhiyā vuttanayeneva upanissayapaccayena paccayo hoti, maggaphalasammādiṭṭhi paccavekkhaṇasampayuttāya vedanāya ārammaṇaārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayapaccayavasena paccayo hoti.
“以正见的寂止为缘也有感受”:这里所谓的“正见的寂止”,其实就是邪见。因此,前面所说的“以邪见为缘而生的感受”,在这里就应当理解为“以正见的寂止为缘”。在“以邪思惟为缘”“以邪思惟的寂止为缘”等说法中,道理也是一样的。因为凡是被称为“以某法的寂止为缘”的,其真正意思就是以与那法相对立的法为缘,所生起的那些感受。至于“邪智”等说法:所谓“邪智”,是指造作恶行时所用的方法思惟;或者也可以说,“邪智”就是错误的反思观察之智。所谓“正智”,是指除了作为观智的正见和出世间正见之外,其余那些善的和无记的智。所谓“邪解脱”,是指倾向于恶;或者说,是指不真实的解脱、不能导向出离的解脱,也就是本来没有解脱却自以为“我已解脱”。所谓“正解脱”,是指倾向于善,以及证果的解脱。至于正见等的含义,和前面所说的一样。巴利
Sammādiṭṭhivūpasamapaccayāpivedayitanti sammādiṭṭhivūpasamo nāma micchādiṭṭhi, tasmā yaṃ micchādiṭṭhipaccayā vedayitaṃ vuttaṃ, tadeva ‘‘sammādiṭṭhivūpasamapaccayā’’ti veditabbaṃ. Micchāsaṅkappapaccayā micchāsaṅkappavūpasamapaccayātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Yassa yassa hi ‘‘vūpasamapaccayā’’ti vuccati, tassa tassa paṭipakkhadhammapaccayāva taṃ taṃ vedayitaṃ adhippetaṃ. Micchāñāṇādīsu pana micchāñāṇaṃ nāma pāpakiriyāsu upāyacintā. Atha vā micchāñāṇaṃ micchāpaccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Sammāñāṇaṃ nāma vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiṃ lokuttarasammādiṭṭhiñca ṭhapetvā avasesakusalābyākataṃ ñāṇaṃ. Micchāvimutti nāma pāpādhimuttitā. Atha vā ayāthāvavimutti aniyyānikavimutti avimuttasseva sato vimuttisaññīti. Sammāvimutti nāma kalyāṇādhimuttitā phalavimutti ca. Sammādiṭṭhiādayo heṭṭhā vuttatthāyeva.
在“以欲为缘”等说法里,这里的“欲”就是指贪。以欲为缘,应当理解为与八种贪俱行心相应的受。以欲的止息为缘,就是初禅的受。以寻为缘,是初禅的受。以寻的止息为缘,是第二禅的受。以想为缘,除了初禅以外,是其余六种等至的受。以想的止息为缘,是非想非非想处的受。巴利
Chandapaccayāpītiādīsu pana chando nāma lobho, chandapaccayā aṭṭhalobhasahagatacittasampayuttavedanā veditabbā. Chandavūpasamapaccayā paṭhamajjhānavedanāva. Vitakkapaccayā paṭhamajjhānavedanā. Vitakkavūpasamapaccayā dutiyajjhānavedanā. Saññāpaccayā ṭhapetvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ sesā cha samāpattivedanā. Saññāvūpasamapaccayā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanavedanā.
在“欲未被止息”等句子里,意思是:如果欲、寻、想都没有被止息。“由彼为缘”的意思是:那欲、寻、想的未止息状态本身就是缘,所以叫“由彼为缘”;也就是说,以欲、寻、想未止息为缘,受就生起。这指的是与八种贪俱行心相应的受。如果欲已被止息,而寻和想还没有被止息。“由彼为缘”的意思是:那欲的止息以及寻和想的未止息状态本身就是缘,所以叫“由彼为缘”。这指的就是初禅的受。如果欲和寻都已被止息,而想还没有被止息。“由彼为缘”的意思是:那欲与寻的止息以及想的未止息状态本身就是缘,所以叫“由彼为缘”。这指的就是第二禅的受。如果欲、寻、想都已被止息。“由彼为缘”的意思是:那欲、寻、想的止息状态本身就是缘,所以叫“由彼为缘”。这指的就是非想非非想处的受。不过有些人这样解释:“所谓‘欲’,是指在达到安止之前,生起‘我要证得安止’的对法的欲求;已经达到安止的人,那个欲就止息了。在初禅里有寻;达到第二禅的人,寻就止息了。在七种等至里有想;已经进入非想非非想处定以及进入灭尽定的人,想就止息了。”但在这里,灭尽定并不适用。“为证得未证得者”,是为了证得阿罗汉果。“有勤”就是有精进。也有写成“āyāvanti”的版本。在那一处,“未证得”是指以那种精进努力为条件,在那个阿罗汉果的因——圣道——还没有证得的时候。“由彼为缘而感受”是指以阿罗汉果的境地为缘而感受。以此涵盖了与四种道俱生而生的出世间受。不过有些人这样解释:“‘āyavanti’是修行。‘在那一处未证得’是指还没有证得那个层次的证得。”巴利
Chando ca avūpasanto hotītiādīsu sace chandavitakkasaññā avūpasantā hontīti attho. Tappaccayāti so chandavitakkasaññānaṃ avūpasamo eva paccayo tappaccayo, tasmā tappaccayā. Chandavitakkasaññāavūpasamapaccayā vedanā hotīti attho. Sā aṭṭhalobhasahagatacittasampayuttavedanā hoti. Sace chando vūpasanto vitakkasaññā avūpasantā. Tappaccayāti so chandassa vūpasamo vitakkasaññānaṃ avūpasamo eva paccayo tappaccayo, tasmā tappaccayā. Sā paṭhamajjhānavedanāva. Sace chandavitakkā vūpasantā saññā avūpasantā. Tappaccayāti so chandavitakkānaṃ vūpasamo saññāya avūpasamo eva paccayo tappaccayo, tasmā tappaccayā. Sā dutiyajjhānavedanāva. Sace chandavitakkasaññā vūpasantā. Tappaccayāti so chandavitakkasaññānaṃ vūpasamo eva paccayo tappaccayo, tasmā tappaccayā. Sā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanavedanāva. Keci pana ‘‘chando nāma appanaṃ pāpuṇissāmīti pubbabhāge dhammacchando, appanāppattassa so chando vūpasanto hoti. Paṭhamajjhāne vitakko hoti, dutiyajjhānappattassa vitakko vūpasanto hoti. Sattasu samāpattīsu saññā hoti, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samāpannassa ca nirodhaṃ samāpannassa ca saññā vūpasantā hotī’’ti evaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Idha pana nirodhasamāpatti na yujjati. Appattassapattiyāti arahattaphalassa pattatthāya. Atthi āyavanti atthi vīriyaṃ. Āyāvantipi pāṭho. Tasmimpi ṭhāne anuppatteti tassa vīriyārambhassa vasena tasmiṃ arahattaphalassa kāraṇe ariyamagge anuppatte . Tappaccayāpi vedayitanti arahattassa ṭhānapaccayā vedayitaṃ. Etena catumaggasahajātā nibbattitalokuttaravedanā gahitā. Keci pana ‘‘āyavanti paṭipatti. Tasmimpi ṭhāne anuppatteti tassā bhūmiyā pattiyā’’ti vaṇṇayanti.
44-49. 对“还灭智六种”讲解的注释。巴利
44-49. Vivaṭṭañāṇachakkaniddesavaṇṇanā
95 在“还灭智六种”的解说中,由于以出离为增上,所以称为慧,意思是:把出离放在首要位置,依出离为增上而生起的慧。从欲贪中回转,是指以与出离增上慧相应的想为因,或以它为手段,而从欲贪中回转、退离、背向而去。其余各处也是同样的道理。巴利
95. Vivaṭṭañāṇachakkaniddese nekkhammādhipatattā paññāti nekkhammaṃ adhikaṃ katvā nekkhammādhikabhāvena pavattā paññā. Kāmacchandato saññāya vivaṭṭatīti nekkhammādhipatikatapaññāsampayuttasaññāya hetubhūtāya, karaṇabhūtāya vā kāmacchandato vivaṭṭati parāvattati, parammukhī hotīti attho. Esa nayo sesesu.
96 欲贪是多种多样的:欲贪不是单一性质的,因为它并非以寂静的方式生起。出离是单一的:出离是单一性质的,因为它以寂静的方式生起。思量出离为单一的人:是指通过观察欲贪的过患而使出离生起的人。心从欲贪中回转:由于见到了欲贪的过患,所以在出离生起的那一刹那,心便从欲贪中回转过来。其余各处也是同样的道理。巴利
96.Kāmacchando nānattanti kāmacchando santavuttitāya abhāvato na ekasabhāvo. Nekkhammaṃ ekattanti nekkhammaṃ santavuttibhāvato ekasabhāvo. Nekkhammekattaṃ cetayatoti kāmacchande ādīnavadassanena nekkhammaṃ pavattayato. Kāmacchandato cittaṃ vivaṭṭatīti diṭṭhādīnavato kāmacchandato nekkhammakkhaṇe cittaṃ vivaṭṭati. Esa nayo sesesu.
97 正在断除欲贪的人,是指在出离心生起的刹那,通过镇伏断的方式断除欲贪。以出离之力让心安住,是指凭借已经获得的出离之力,让与出离相应的心安住、强化并持续运转,也就是让它不断生起。其余各处也是同样的道理。巴利
97.Kāmacchandaṃ pajahantoti nekkhammapavattikkhaṇe kāmacchandaṃ vikkhambhanappahānena pajahanto. Nekkhammavasena cittaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti paṭiladdhassa nekkhammassa vasena taṃsampayuttacittaṃ adhitiṭṭhati adhikaṃ karonto tiṭṭhati, pavattetīti attho. Esa nayo sesesu.
98 眼是空的,因为不存在“我”。凡夫妄想的“我”,要么被当成造作者,要么被当成感受者,而这样的“我”根本不存在,所以眼依“我”来说是空的。在哪里不存在,那里就依那个而说是空的。眼也是空的,因为不存在“我所拥有的”。既然“我”都不存在,“我所拥有的”自然也不存在,所以眼依“我所拥有的”来说也是空的。世间人会执取“我”和“我所拥有的”这两种东西,为了否定这两种执取,才说“我”不存在、“我所拥有的”不存在。眼是空的,因为不存在“常”。没有任何东西能越过坏灭而一直存在,所以眼依“常”来说是空的。眼是空的,因为不存在“坚固”。即使在生起的那一刹那,也没有任何东西是坚住不变的,所以眼依“坚固”来说是空的。眼是空的,因为不存在“永恒”。没有任何东西能在一切时间都存在,所以眼依“永恒”来说是空的。眼是空的,因为不存在“非变易法”。没有任何东西的自性能不被老和坏这两种力量改变,所以眼依“非变易法”来说是空的。或者说,就是依常性、坚固性、永恒性、非变易法性而说为空。这里的“或”字是总括的意思。“如实知见者”,是指以无我随观智,按照事物本来的样子去了知、去照见的人。就像用眼睛看东西一样。因为人们执着于“眼是我”或“眼是我所拥有的”,智慧就从这种执着的对立面转出,以那部分断除的方式使智慧转出。其余各处也是同样的道理。巴利
98.Cakkhu suññaṃ attena vāti bālajanaparikappitassa kārakavedakasaṅkhātassa attano abhāvā cakkhu attena ca suññaṃ. Yañhi yattha na hoti, tena taṃ suññaṃ nāma hoti. Attaniyena vāti attano abhāveneva attano santakassapi abhāvā attano santakena ca suññaṃ. Lokassa attāti ca attaniyanti ca ubhayathā gāhasambhavato tadubhayagāhapaṭisedhanatthaṃ attābhāvo ca attaniyābhāvo ca vutto. Niccena vāti bhaṅgaṃ atikkamitvā tiṭṭhantassa kassaci abhāvato niccena ca suññaṃ. Dhuvena vāti pavattikkhaṇepi thirassa kassaci abhāvato dhuvena ca suññaṃ. Sassatena vāti sabbakālepi vijjamānassa kassaci abhāvato sassatena ca suññaṃ. Avipariṇāmadhammena vāti jarābhaṅgavasena dvidhā aparivattamānapakatikassa kassaci abhāvato avipariṇāmadhammena ca suññaṃ. Atha vā niccabhāvena ca dhuvabhāvena ca sassatabhāvena ca avipariṇāmadhammabhāvena ca suññanti attho. Samuccayattho vā-saddo. Yathābhūtaṃ jānato passatoti iccevaṃ anattānupassanāñāṇena yathāsabhāvena jānantassa cakkhunā viya ca passantassa. Cakkhābhinivesato ñāṇaṃ vivaṭṭatīti cakkhu attāti vā attaniyanti vā pavattamānato diṭṭhābhinivesato tadaṅgappahānavasena ñāṇaṃ vivaṭṭati. Esa nayo sesesu.
99 以出离舍弃爱欲,是说证得出离的人,以出离断除与它相对立的爱欲。在舍弃中有慧,是指在作为爱欲之舍弃的出离中,与出离相应的慧。其余各处也是同样的道理。逼迫等含义,前面已经说过。遍知而转出,这是依人而作的开示:具足道的人,以作用遍知苦的四种含义,从两方面出起而转出;在慧转出中,也说具慧者转出。巴利
99.Nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ vosajjatīti nekkhammalābhī puggalo nekkhammena tappaṭipakkhaṃ kāmacchandaṃ pariccajati. Vosagge paññāti kāmacchandassa vosaggabhūte nekkhamme taṃsampayuttā paññā. Esa nayo sesesu. Pīḷanaṭṭhādayo heṭṭhā vuttatthā eva. Parijānanto vivaṭṭatīti puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā, maggasamaṅgīpuggalo dukkhassa catubbidhaṃ atthaṃ kiccavasena parijānanto dubhato vuṭṭhānavasena vivaṭṭati, ñāṇavivaṭṭanepi ñāṇasamaṅgī vivaṭṭatīti vutto.
100 “于谛义之慧”,就是这个人本身在谛义上的转出之慧。其余各项也是同样的道理。现在,为了说明在道刹那,仅依作用而区分的六种转出智在行相上的不同,先立下“想转出”等论母,然后从义理上加以分别,说出“想知而转出”等话。其中,“想知而转出”就是“想转出”:因为在预备阶段,修行者以出离等为主而想知,之后又以与出离相应的智慧从爱欲等中转出,所以那智慧就叫作想转出。“思而转出”就是“思转出”:因为修行者思惟出离等单一性,再以相应的智慧从爱欲等中转出,所以那智慧就叫作思转出。“了别而转出”就是“心转出”:因为修行者依出离等,以心为依止而了别,再以与那相应的智慧从爱欲等中转出,所以那智慧就叫作心转出。“作智而转出”就是“智转出”:因为修行者以无我随观之智,把六种内处了知为空,就以那智从见的执著中转出,所以那智慧就叫作智转出。“舍放而转出”就是“解脱转出”:因为修行者以出离等舍放爱欲等,再以与那相应的智慧从爱欲等中转出,所以那智慧就叫作解脱转出。“于谛义转出”就是“谛转出”:因为修行者从两方面出起,在四种谛义上转出,所以道智就叫作谛转出。或者说,道智本身就是以从两方面出起于谛义的方式而转出,所以叫谛转出。巴利
100.Tathaṭṭhepaññāti etassa puggalasseva tathaṭṭhe vivaṭṭanā paññā. Esa nayo sesesu. Idāni maggakkhaṇe eva kiccavasena ākāranānattato cha vivaṭṭañāṇāni dassetuṃ saññāvivaṭṭotiādimātikaṃ ṭhapetvā taṃ atthato vibhajanto sañjānanto vivaṭṭatītiādimāha. Tattha sañjānanto vivaṭṭatīti saññāvivaṭṭoti yasmā pubbabhāge nekkhammādiṃ adhipatito sañjānanto yogī pacchā nekkhammasampayuttañāṇena kāmacchandādito vivaṭṭati, tasmā taṃ ñāṇaṃ saññāvivaṭṭo nāmāti attho. Cetayanto vivaṭṭatīti cetovivaṭṭoti yasmā yogī nekkhammekattādīni cetayanto sampayuttañāṇena kāmacchandādito vivaṭṭati, tasmā taṃ ñāṇaṃ cetovivaṭṭo nāmāti attho. Vijānanto vivaṭṭatīti cittavivaṭṭoti yasmā yogī nekkhammādivasena cittādhiṭṭhānena vijānanto taṃsampayuttañāṇena kāmacchandādito vivaṭṭati, tasmā taṃ ñāṇaṃ cittavivaṭṭo nāmāti attho. Ñāṇaṃ karonto vivaṭṭatīti ñāṇavivaṭṭoti yasmā yogī chabbidhaṃ ajjhattikāyatanaṃ anattānupassanāñāṇena suññato viditaṃ karonto teneva ñāṇena diṭṭhābhinivesato vivaṭṭati, tasmā taṃ ñāṇaṃ ñāṇavivaṭṭo nāmāti attho. Vosajjanto vivaṭṭatīti vimokkhavivaṭṭoti yasmā yogī nekkhammādīhi kāmacchandādīni vosajjanto taṃsampayuttañāṇena kāmacchandādito vivaṭṭati, tasmā taṃ ñāṇaṃ vimokkhavivaṭṭo nāmāti attho. Tathaṭṭhe vivaṭṭatīti saccavivaṭṭoti yasmā yogī catubbidhe tathaṭṭhe dubhato vuṭṭhānavasena vivaṭṭati, tasmā maggañāṇaṃ saccavivaṭṭo nāmāti attho. Maggañāṇameva vā tathaṭṭhe dubhato vuṭṭhānabhāvena vivaṭṭatīti saccavivaṭṭoti attho.
“在哪里想转出”等说法,应当知道是针对谛转出智的说明中所说的谛转出智那一刹那而说的。因为这一切确实只在道那一刹那才成立。怎么成立呢?在智转出中,除了智本身,其余诸法在圣道里是以自身本来面目出现的。而观的作用其实正是通过道才得以完成,所以从观的作用得以成就这一点来说,智转出之智在道那一刹那也能成立。或者说,因为正是通过道智,以“眼是空,离我或离我所”等方式而通达,所以在道那一刹那,说那个智成立也完全说得通。不过,这里的义理贯通应当按这样的方式在一切关联处加以连接:“在道那一刹那有想转出的地方,那里就有心转出;在道那一刹那有心转出的地方,那里就有想转出。”或者,因为在想转出、心转出、心转出、解脱转出这四种中出现了四种圣道,所以谛转出也就自然出现了;而智转出则是通过谛转出的作用方式而成就的。再者,当在想转出、心转出、心转出、解脱转出中以省略方式详细展开时,由于有这些经文:“因为以无我随观为主,慧从执取中通过想而转出,所以为主的慧是想转出中的智”“执取是种种相,无我随观是单一相。当思惟无我随观的单一相时,心从执取中转出,所以在种种相中的慧是心转出中的智”“舍弃执取而以无我随观安住于心,所以在安住中的慧是心转出中的智”“以无我随观舍断执取,所以在舍断中的慧是解脱转出中的智”,因此智转出中的智也在这些当中出现了。而且在智转出中,从无我随观出起而获得圣道的人,由于以“眼是空,离我或离我所”等方式作用,所以谛转出也就可得。因此,在每一个转出中,其余五种转出也都可得。所以应当知道,正是因此才说“在哪里有想转出,那里就有心转出”等这些关联语句。巴利
Yatthasaññāvivaṭṭotiādi saccavivaṭṭañāṇaniddese vuttattā saccavivaṭṭañāṇakkhaṇameva sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Maggakkhaṇeyeva hi sabbāni yujjanti. Kathaṃ? Ñāṇavivaṭṭe ñāṇañhi vajjetvā sesesu ariyamaggo sarūpeneva āgato. Vipassanākiccassa pana maggeneva sijjhanato vipassanākiccasiddhivasena ñāṇavivaṭṭañāṇampi maggakkhaṇe yujjati. Maggañāṇeneva vā ‘‘cakkhu suñña’’ntiādi kiccavasena paṭividdhameva hotīti maggakkhaṇe taṃ ñāṇaṃ vattuṃ yujjatiyeva. Atthayojanā panettha ‘‘yattha maggakkhaṇe saññāvivaṭṭo, tattha cetovivaṭṭo. Yattha maggakkhaṇe cetovivaṭṭo , tattha saññāvivaṭṭo’’ti evamādinā nayena sabbasaṃsandanesu yojanā kātabbā. Atha vā saññāvivaṭṭacetovivaṭṭacittavivaṭṭavimokkhavivaṭṭesu catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ āgatattā saccavivaṭṭo āgatoyeva hoti. Ñāṇavivaṭṭo ca saccavivaṭṭeneva kiccavasena siddho hoti. Saññācetocittavimokkhavivaṭṭesveva ca peyyāle vitthāriyamāne ‘‘anattānupassanādhipatattā paññā abhinivesato saññāya vivaṭṭatīti adhipatattā paññā saññāvivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti ca, ‘‘abhiniveso nānattaṃ, anattānupassanā ekattaṃ. Anattānupassanekattaṃ cetayato abhinivesato cittaṃ vivaṭṭatīti nānatte paññā cetovivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti ca, ‘‘abhinivesaṃ pajahanto anattānupassanāvasena cittaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti adhiṭṭhāne paññā cittavivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti ca, ‘‘anattānupassanāya abhinivesaṃ vosajjatīti vosagge paññā vimokkhavivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti ca pāṭhasambhavato ñāṇavivaṭṭe ñāṇampi tesu āgatameva hoti. Ñāṇavivaṭṭe ca anattānupassanāya vuṭṭhāya ariyamaggaṃ paṭiladdhassa kiccavasena ‘‘cakkhu suññaṃ attena vā attaniyena vā’’tiādiyujjanato saccavivaṭṭo labbhati, tasmā ekekasmiṃ vivaṭṭe sesā pañca pañca vivaṭṭā labbhanti. Tasmā evaṃ ‘‘yattha saññāvivaṭṭo, tattha cetovivaṭṭo’’tiādikāni saṃsandanāni vuttānīti veditabbaṃ.
神变智的详细解释之注释巴利
50. Iddhividhañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
101 101. 在神变智的说明中,“于此,比丘”指的是在这个教法中的比丘。“具足欲定与勤行”——这里,以欲为因的定,或者以欲为增上主的定,就是欲定;这是指以“想要做”的欲作为主导而获得的定的同义词。作为勤的行,就是勤行;这是指成就四种作用的正勤精进的同义词。因为能成就四种作用,所以用了复数形式。“具足”就是具备欲定和勤行。“神足”:从成就的角度来说,或者从“众生由此而成就、增长、达到殊胜”的角度来说,称为“神”——也就是近行定等善心相应的欲定和勤行,以这些作为安住的基础,就是“足”;意思是其余的心和心所的集合。如《神足分别·经分别》中说:“神足,就是处于那种状态者的受蕴……中略……识蕴。”(《分别论》434)《阿毗达摩分别》中也说:“神足,就是处于那种状态者的触、受……中略……策励、不散乱。”(《分别论》447)因此,对于“其余的心、心所集合”,应该这样理解:在欲、定、勤行中,把每一法单独作为“神”,再连同其余二者,用“其余”一词来表述。这样,四蕴以及触等一切法都被包含在其中了。按照这个方式,其余各处也应该这样理解。就像以欲为主导而获得的定称为“欲定”一样,以精进为主导而获得的定称为“精进定”,以心为主导而获得的定称为“心定”,以观为主导而获得的定称为“观定”。同样地,在每一个神足中,以欲为首、以精进为首、以心为首、以观为首的三法,既是“神”,也是“神足”;而其余相应的四蕴,只是“神足”而非“神”。又或者,因为这各组三法,只有与相应的四蕴一起才能成就,离开它们就不能成就,所以按照这个道理,一切四蕴也都以“成就”之义而称为“神”,也应该知道以“安立”之义而称为“足”。巴利
101. Iddhividhañāṇaniddesaṃ idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgatanti ettha chandahetuko samādhi, chandādhiko vā samādhi chandasamādhi, kattukamyatāchandaṃ adhipatiṃ karitvā paṭiladdhasamādhissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Padhānabhūtā saṅkhārā padhānasaṅkhārā, catukiccasādhakassa sammappadhānavīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Catukiccasādhanavasena bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ. Samannāgatanti chandasamādhinā ca padhānasaṅkhārehi ca upetaṃ. Iddhipādanti nipphattipariyāyena vā ijjhanaṭṭhena, ijjhanti etāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iminā vā pariyāyena iddhīti saṅkhaṃ gatānaṃ upacārajjhānādikusalacittasampayuttānaṃ chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena pādabhūtaṃ sesacittacetasikarāsinti attho. Vuttañhi iddhipādavibhaṅge suttantabhājanīye ‘‘iddhipādoti tathābhūtassa vedanākkhandho…pe… viññāṇakkhandho’’ti (vibha. 434). Abhidhammabhājanīye ca ‘‘iddhipādoti tathābhūtassa phasso vedanā…pe… paggāho avikkhepo’’ti (vibha. 447) vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘sesacittacetasikarāsi’’nti ettha? Chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhāresu ekekaṃ iddhiṃ katvā dvīhi dvīhi saha sesavacanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Evañhi cattāro khandhā sabbe ca phassādayo dhammā saṅgahitā honti. Iminā nayena sesesupi attho veditabbo. Yatheva hi chandaṃ adhipatiṃ karitvā paṭiladdhasamādhi chandasamādhīti vutto, evaṃ vīriyaṃ cittaṃ vīmaṃsaṃ adhipatiṃ karitvā paṭiladdhasamādhi vīmaṃsāsamādhīti vuccati. Evamekekasmiṃ iddhipāde chandādayo vīriyādayo cittādayo vīmaṃsādayoti tayo tayo dhammā iddhīpi honti iddhipādāpi, sesā pana sampayuttakā cattāro khandhā iddhipādāyeva . Yasmā vā ime tayo tayo dhammā sampayuttakehi catūhi khandhehi saddhiṃyeva ijjhanti, na vinā tehi, tasmā tena pariyāyena sabbe cattāropi khandhā ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhi nāma honti, patiṭṭhaṭṭhena pādā nāmātipi veditabbaṃ.
在“具足精进定与勤行”这句话里,“精进”和“勤行”其实是同一个东西。那为什么分成两种来说呢?先举出“精进”,是为了显示精进的主导作用;再说“勤行”,是为了显示它同样能成就四种作用。正因为这样分成两种来说,这里也就说有三法一组、三法一组。不过有些论师说:“《分别论》里讲‘神,就是那些法的成就、成功、成就状态、成功状态’,所以‘神’不是实成,‘神足’才是实成。”但在这里,神和神足都被确定为实成,是以自相触证来决断的。应当知道,“成就”“成功”等说法,只是依成就的状态而说的法。巴利
Vīriyasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgatanti ettha pana vīriyanti ca padhānasaṅkhāroti ca ekoyeva. Kasmā dvidhā vuttanti ce? Vīriyassa adhipatibhāvadassanavasenettha paṭhamaṃ vīriyaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, tasseva catukiccasādhakattadassanatthaṃ padhānasaṅkhāravacanaṃ kataṃ. Evaṃ dvidhā vuttattā eva cetthāpi tayo tayo dhammāti vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘vibhaṅge ‘iddhīti yā tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ iddhi samiddhi ijjhanā samijjhanā’ti (vibha. 434) vuttattā iddhi nāma anipphannā, iddhipādo nipphanno’’ti vadanti. Idha pana iddhipi iddhipādopi nipphanno lakkhaṇabbhāhatoti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ. Iddhi samiddhītiādīhi ijjhanākārena dhammā eva vuttāti veditabbaṃ.
“修习”就是反复练习。就像《经分别》(《分别论》431等)里所说的那样,这里的神足修习也纯粹是世间层面的。所以,想成就神变的人,在修世间神足时,对地遍等八种遍处已经证得八等至并达到更高自在之后,以十四种方式调练心:顺遍、逆遍、顺逆遍;顺禅、逆禅、顺逆禅;跳禅、跳遍、跳禅与遍;跳支、跳所缘、跳支与所缘;确定支、确定所缘。以这十四种方式调练心之后,再以欲为主、精进为主、心为主、观为主,反复入禅。也有人主张还应该有“确定支与所缘”这一项。不过,对于具足前因、只在遍处上熟练了四种禅那并获得自在的人来说,也可以修。他在修每一种神足定时,会确立“为了让尚未生起的恶不善法不生起……”等四种精进,并且了解了退减与增长之后,确立精进的平衡。他这样在四种神足中反复修心,就能成就神变。巴利
Bhāvetīti āsevati. Suttantabhājanīye (vibha. 431 ādayo) viya idhāpi iddhipādabhāvanā lokiyā eva. Tasmā iddhividhaṃ tāva sampādetukāmo lokiyaṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvento pathavīkasiṇādīsu aṭṭhasu kasiṇesu adhikatavasippattaaṭṭhasamāpattiko kasiṇānulomato kasiṇapaṭilomato kasiṇānulomapaṭilomato jhānānulomato jhānapaṭilomato jhānānulomapaṭilomato jhānukkantikato kasiṇukkantikato jhānakasiṇukkantikato aṅgasaṅkantikato ārammaṇasaṅkantikato aṅgārammaṇasaṅkantikato aṅgavavatthānato ārammaṇavavatthānatoti imehi cuddasahi ākārehi cittaṃ paridametvā chandasīsavīriyasīsacittasīsavīmaṃsāsīsavasena punappunaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjati. Aṅgārammaṇavavatthānampi keci icchanti. Pubbahetusampannena pana kasiṇesu catukkajjhānamatte ciṇṇavasināpi kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti taṃ taṃ iddhipādaṃ samādhiṃ bhāvento ‘‘anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāyā’’tiādikaṃ (vibha. 432) catuppakāraṃ vīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāti, tassa ca hānivuddhiyo ñatvā vīriyasamataṃ adhiṭṭhāti. So evaṃ catūsu iddhipādesu cittaṃ paribhāvetvā iddhividhaṃ sampādeti.
“在四种神足中……”等句里,“他”指已经修习四种神足的比丘。“在四种神足中修心”,意思是:反复以欲等每一种作为主导,通过进入禅那的方式,在那些神足中修心,也就是让心熟习欲等。“调练”就是让心没有障碍。前一句是后一句的原因,因为已经修习的心就是已经被调练的心。“令柔软”就是让这样调伏的心达到自在。能自在运转的心,就称为“柔软”。“令堪任”就是让心适合做事、能够做事。柔软的心就像善加冶炼的黄金一样堪任。“将身并合于心”,就是把自己的生身并合于基本定心中,投入、安立,意思是令身随心而转。“将心并合于身”,就是将基本定心并合于自己的生身中,安立,意思是令心随身而转。“以身调心”,就是执取基本定心而安置于生身,令心随身转,这是“将心并合于身”的同义语。“以心调身”,就是执取生身而安置于基本定心,令身随心转,这是“将身并合于心”的同义语。“决意”,就是“愿如此”而决意。巴利
Soimesu catūsu iddhipādesūtiādīsu soti so bhāvitacaturiddhipādo bhikkhu. Catūsu iddhipādesu cittaṃ paribhāvetīti punappunaṃ chandādīsu ekekaṃ adhipatiṃ katvā jhānasamāpajjanavasena tesu cittaṃ paribhāveti nāma, chandādivāsanaṃ gāhāpetīti attho. Paridametīti nibbisevanaṃ karoti. Purimaṃ pacchimassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Paribhāvitañhi cittaṃ paridamitaṃ hotīti. Muduṃ karotīti tathā dantaṃ cittaṃ vasippattaṃ karoti. Vase vattamānañhi cittaṃ ‘‘mudū’’ti vuccati. Kammaniyanti kammakkhamaṃ kammayoggaṃ karoti. Mudu hi cittaṃ kammaniyaṃ hoti sudhantamiva suvaṇṇaṃ, idha pana iddhividhakammakkhamaṃ. Soti so paribhāvitacitto bhikkhu. Kāyampi citte samodahatītiādi iddhikaraṇakāle yathāsukhaṃ cittacārassa ijjhanatthaṃ yogavidhānaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha kāyampi citte samodahatīti attano karajakāyampi pādakajjhānacitte samodahati paveseti āropeti, kāyaṃ cittānugatikaṃ karotīti attho. Evaṃ karaṇaṃ adissamānena kāyena gamanassa upakārāya hoti. Cittampi kāye samodahatīti pādakajjhānacittaṃ attano karajakāye samodahati āropeti , cittampi kāyānugatikaṃ karotīti attho. Evaṃ karaṇaṃ dissamānena kāyena gamanassa upakārāya hoti. Samādahatītipi pāṭho, patiṭṭhāpetīti attho. Kāyavasena cittaṃ pariṇāmetīti pādakajjhānacittaṃ gahetvā karajakāye āropeti kāyānugatikaṃ karoti, idaṃ cittaṃ kāye samodahanassa vevacanaṃ. Cittavasena kāyaṃ pariṇāmetīti karajakāyaṃ gahetvā pādakajjhānacitte āropeti, cittānugatikaṃ karoti, idaṃ kāyaṃ citte samodahanassa vevacanaṃ. Adhiṭṭhātīti ‘‘evaṃ hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāti. Samodahanassa atthavivaraṇatthaṃ pariṇāmo vutto, pariṇāmassa atthavivaraṇatthaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā samodahatīti mūlapadaṃ, pariṇāmeti adhiṭṭhātīti tassa atthaniddesapadāni , tasmā tesaṃ dvinnaṃyeva padānaṃ vasena pariṇāmetvāti adhiṭṭhahitvāti vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ samodahitvāti.
他心里想“我要让身体生起乐想和轻想”,于是进入第四禅,连同与第四禅同时生起的乐想和轻想一起,以入定的方式让它们进入并渗入这个由父母所生的身体,然后安住其中。当这些想进入他的身体时,他这个由父母所生的身体也会像棉絮一样轻快。“他”指的是已经完成修行准备的比丘。“以这样修习的心”:这是一个表示状态的具格用法,说明“以这种状态存在”;也可以理解为表示原因,意思是“以这样修习的心作为因”。“清净”:因为舍和念达到清净的状态而清净。正因为清净,所以“洁白”,意思是极其光明。“为了神变智”:为了神变这一类,或者为了神变的各种变化,也就是为了这种智。“引导心”:那位比丘在神通的基础心已经生起时,按照上面所说的方式,为了证得神变智,而引导遍作的心,把它从遍的所缘上移开,引向神变。“倾向”:让心朝向应当证得的神变,向神变倾斜。“他”就是已经这样引导心的比丘。“种种”:多种多样。“神变”:神变这一类,或者神变的各种变化。“体验”:亲自经历,也就是接触、证悟、达到。巴利
Sukhasaññañca lahusaññañca kāye okkamitvā viharatīti catutthajjhānena sahajātasukhasaññañca lahusaññañca samāpajjanavasena karajakāye okkamitvā pavesetvā viharati. Tāya saññāya okkantakāyassa panassa karajakāyopi tūlapicu viya lahuko hoti. Soti so katayogavidhāno bhikkhu. Tathābhāvitena cittenāti itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ, hetuatthe vā, tathābhāvitena cittena hetubhūtenāti attho. Parisuddhenāti upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvato parisuddhena. Parisuddhattāyeva pariyodātena, pabhassarenāti attho. Iddhividhañāṇāyāti iddhikoṭṭhāse, iddhivikappe vā ñāṇatthāya. Cittaṃ abhinīharatīti so bhikkhu vuttappakāravasena tasmiṃ citte abhiññāpādake jāte iddhividhañāṇādhigamatthāya parikammacittaṃ abhinīharati, kasiṇārammaṇato apanetvā iddhividhābhimukhaṃ peseti. Abhininnāmetīti adhigantabbaiddhipoṇaṃ iddhipabbhāraṃ karoti. Soti so evaṃ katacittābhinīhāro bhikkhu. Anekavihitanti anekavidhaṃ nānappakārakaṃ. Iddhividhanti iddhikoṭṭhāsaṃ, iddhivikappaṃ vā. Paccanubhotīti paccanubhavati, phasseti sacchikaroti pāpuṇātīti attho.
102 102. 现在为了说明它的种种不同形态,说了“一身”等话。其中,“一身”:在修神变之前,按原本的状态是一身。“成为多身”:想去众人跟前经行,或者想诵经,或者想问问题,就变成一百身、一千身。那么,他怎么能做到这样呢?先把作为神通基础、足处的法修成,进入神通基础禅那,出定后,如果想变成一百身,就作意“我是一百身,我是一百身”作为前行准备,再进入基础禅那,出定后决意。与决意心同时,就成了一百身。一千身等也是这样。如果这样还不成功,就再作前行准备,第二次入定、出定后决意。因为《相应部注》里说:“可以入定一次或两次。”其中,基础禅那心以似相为所缘;前行准备的心则以一百身或一千身为所缘。而且那些只是从颜色方面来说,不是从概念方面来说。决意心也同样以一百身或一千身为所缘,它像初安止心紧接种姓心之后那样,只生起一次,是色界第四禅那的心。那些众多化出来的身,因为没有特别设定区别,所以化出来的就和有神通的人本身一样。无论是行、住、坐、卧等威仪,还是说话、沉默等,有神通的人做什么,他们就做什么。但如果他想化作各种不同的形态:有的在少年期,有的在中年期,有的在老年期;同样,长发、半秃、全秃、杂发,半红袈裟、黄袈裟;有的在诵文句,有的在说法,有的在唱诵,有的在提问,有的在答问,有的在染衣,有的在煮染料,有的在缝衣,有的在洗衣等等;或者想化作其他种种形态,他就从基础禅那出定,按“愿这些比丘是少年期”这样的方式作前行准备,再入定,出定后决意。与决意心同时,就正好变成想要的那种形态。“变成多身之后又成为一身”等,也是同样的道理。但这里有一个差别:这位比丘这样化作多身之后,又想到“我要独自一人经行、诵经、问问题”,或者出于少欲之心,想到“这个住处比丘很少,如果有人来了,看见这么多一模一样的比丘,一定会知道‘这肯定是长老的威神之力’”,于是中途生起“我成为一人”的意愿;他就进入基础禅那,出定后作“我成为一人”的前行准备,再入定,出定后决意“我成为一人”。与决意心同时,就成为一人。如果不这样做,那么到了所限定的时间,自己就会恢复成一人。巴利
102. Idānissa anekavihitabhāvaṃ dassento ekopi hutvātiādimāha. Tattha ekopi hutvāti iddhikaraṇato pubbe pakatiyā ekopi hutvā. Bahudhā hotīti bahunnaṃ santike caṅkamitukāmo vā, sajjhāyaṃ vā kattukāmo, pañhaṃ vā pucchitukāmo hutvā satampi sahassampi hoti. Kathaṃ panāyamevaṃ hoti? Iddhiyā bhūmipādapadamūlabhūte dhamme sampādetvā abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya sace sataṃ icchati, ‘‘sataṃ homi sataṃ homī’’ti parikammaṃ katvā puna pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya adhiṭṭhāti. Adhiṭṭhānacittena saheva sataṃ hoti. Sahassādīsupi eseva nayo. Sace evaṃ na ijjhati, puna parikammaṃ katvā dutiyampi samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Saṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyañhi ‘‘ekavāraṃ dvevāraṃ samāpajjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha pādakajjhānacittaṃ nimittārammaṇaṃ, parikammacittāni satārammaṇāni vā sahassārammaṇāni vā. Tāni ca kho vaṇṇavaseneva, no paṇṇattivasena. Adhiṭṭhānacittampi tatheva satārammaṇaṃ vā sahassārammaṇaṃ vā, taṃ paṭhamappanācittamiva gotrabhuanantaraṃ ekameva uppajjati rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānikaṃ . Tattha ye te bahū nimmitā, te aniyametvā nimmitattā iddhimatā sadisāva honti. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu vā bhāsitatuṇhībhāvādīsu vā yaṃ yaṃ iddhimā karoti, taṃtadeva karonti. Sace pana nānāvaṇṇe kātukāmo hoti, keci paṭhamavaye keci majjhimavaye keci pacchimavaye, tathā dīghakese upaḍḍhamuṇḍamuṇḍe missakakese upaḍḍharattacīvare paṇḍukacīvare padabhāṇadhammakathāsarabhaññapañhapucchanapañhavissajjanarajanapacanacīvarasibbanadhovanādīni karonte, aparepi vā nānappakārake kātukāmo hoti, tena pādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ettakā bhikkhū paṭhamavayā hontū’’tiādinā nayena parikammaṃ katvā puna samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānacittena saddhiṃ icchitappakārāyeva hontīti. Esa nayo ‘‘bahudhāpi hutvā eko hotī’’tiādīsu. Ayaṃ pana viseso – iminā hi bhikkhunā evaṃ bahubhāvaṃ nimminitvā puna ‘‘ekova hutvā caṅkamissāmi, sajjhāyaṃ karissāmi, pañhaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti cintetvā vā ‘‘ayaṃ vihāro appabhikkhuko, sace keci āgamissanti, kuto ime ettakā ekasadisā bhikkhū addhā therassa esānubhāvoti maṃ jānissantī’’ti appicchatāya vā antarāva ‘‘eko homī’’ti icchantena pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘eko homī’’ti parikammaṃ katvā puna samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘eko homī’’ti adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ . Adhiṭṭhānacittena saddhiṃyeva eko hoti. Evaṃ akaronto pana yathāparicchinnakālavasena sayameva eko hoti.
“显现”就是让事物变得明显。“隐匿”就是让事物变得隐蔽。也可以和前面的话连起来理解:体验显现,体验隐匿。在这里,这位有神通的人如果想显现,就让黑暗变成光明,让被遮住的东西露出来,或者让不在眼前的东西出现在眼前。怎么做呢?他想让自己或别人——即使原本被遮住或站在远处——也能被看见,就从基础禅那出定,作意“这里黑暗要变成光明”,或“这里被遮住的要露出来”,或“这里不在眼前的要出现在眼前”,作完准备功夫后,按照前面说的方法决意。决意的同时,就按照决意的那样变成现实。别人即使站在远处也能看见,自己想看也能看见。如果想隐匿,就让光明变成黑暗,让没遮住的变成被遮住,或者让在眼前的变成不在眼前。怎么做呢?他想让自己或别人——即使原本没被遮住或站在近处——也不被看见,就从基础禅那出定,作意“这里光明的地方要变成黑暗”,或“这里没遮住的要变成被遮住”,或“这里在眼前的要变成不在眼前”,作完准备功夫后,按照前面说的方法决意。决意的同时,就按照决意的那样变成现实。别人即使站在近处也看不见,自己不想看也看不见。另外,一切明显的示现都叫“显现”,不明显的示现都叫“隐匿”。其中,在明显的示现里,神通和具有神通的人都能被看出来,这要用双神变来说明。在不明显的示现里,只能看出神通,看不出具有神通的人,这要用《大迦叶经》和《梵天请经》来说明。巴利
Āvibhāvanti pākaṭabhāvaṃ karotīti attho. Tirobhāvanti paṭicchannabhāvaṃ karotīti attho. Āvibhāvaṃ paccanubhoti, tirobhāvaṃ paccanubhotīti purimena vā sambandho. Tatrāyaṃ iddhimā āvibhāvaṃ kattukāmo andhakāraṃ vā ālokaṃ karoti, paṭicchannaṃ vā vivaṭaṃ karoti, anāpāthaṃ vā āpāthaṃ karoti. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi yathā paṭicchannopi dūre ṭhitopi vā dissati, evaṃ attānaṃ vā paraṃ vā kattukāmo pādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘idaṃ andhakāraṃ ālokajātaṃ hotū’’ti vā, ‘‘idaṃ paṭicchannaṃ vivaṭaṃ hotū’’ti vā, ‘‘idaṃ anāpāthaṃ āpāthaṃ hotū’’ti vā āvajjitvā parikammaṃ katvā vuttanayeneva adhiṭṭhāti. Saha adhiṭṭhānā yathādhiṭṭhitameva hoti. Pare dūre ṭhitāpi passanti, sayampi passitukāmo passati. Tirobhāvaṃ kattukāmo pana ālokaṃ vā andhakāraṃ karoti, appaṭicchannaṃ vā paṭicchannaṃ, āpāthaṃ vā anāpāthaṃ karoti. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi yathā appaṭicchannopi samīpe ṭhitopi vā na dissati, evaṃ attānaṃ vā paraṃ vā kattukāmo pādakajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā ‘‘idaṃ ālokaṭṭhānaṃ andhakāraṃ hotū’’ti vā, ‘‘idaṃ appaṭicchannaṃ paṭicchannaṃ hotū’’ti vā, ‘‘idaṃ āpāthaṃ anāpāthaṃ hotū’’ti vā āvajjitvā parikammaṃ katvā vuttanayeneva adhiṭṭhāti. Saha adhiṭṭhānā yathādhiṭṭhitameva hoti. Pare samīpe ṭhitāpi na passanti, sayampi apassitukāmo na passati. Apica sabbampi pākaṭapāṭihāriyaṃ āvibhāvo nāma, apākaṭapāṭihāriyaṃ tirobhāvo nāma. Tattha pākaṭapāṭihāriye iddhipi paññāyati iddhimāpi. Taṃ yamakapāṭihāriyena dīpetabbaṃ. Apākaṭapāṭihāriye iddhiyeva paññāyati, na iddhimā. Taṃ mahakasuttena (saṃ. ni. 4.346) ca brahmanimantanikasuttena (ma. ni. 1.501 ādayo) ca dīpetabbaṃ.
“穿墙”是指墙的另一边,也就是墙的对面。这个说法同样适用于“穿墙壁”和“穿山”。“墙”指房屋的墙壁。“墙壁”指房屋、寺院、村落等的围墙。“山”指土山或石山。“无碍”是指不粘着、不被挡住。就像在虚空中一样。想要这样行走的比丘,要先进入虚空遍的禅定,出定后把心转向墙、墙壁或山,作好准备工作后决意:“愿它成为虚空。”它就会变成虚空。如果想向下走或向上走,它就会变成中空的;如果想穿透过去,它就会出现孔洞。他就在那里无碍地行走。不过,如果这位比丘在决意行走的途中,有山或树突然出现,那还需要重新入定再决意吗?这没有过失。因为再次入定决意,就像在亲教师面前重新求取依止一样。但由于这位比丘已经决意“愿它成为虚空”,所以它确实就是虚空。凭先前决意的力量,途中不可能出现另一座由时节所生的山或树。如果是由其他有神通的人变化出来的,那么先变化出来的那个更强。他就应该从上方或下方过去。巴利
Tirokuṭṭanti parakuṭṭaṃ, kuṭṭassa parabhāganti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo tiropākāratiropabbatesu. Kuṭṭoti ca gehabhitti. Pākāroti gehavihāragāmādīnaṃ parikkhepapākāro. Pabbatoti paṃsupabbato vā pāsāṇapabbato vā. Asajjamānoti alaggamāno. Seyyathāpi ākāseti ākāse viya. Evaṃ gantukāmena pana ākāsakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya kuṭṭaṃ vā pākāraṃ vā pabbataṃ vā āvajjitvā kataparikammena ‘‘ākāso hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhātabbo, ākāsova hoti. Adho otaritukāmassa, uddhaṃ vā ārohitukāmassa susiro hoti, vinivijjhitvā gantukāmassa chiddo. So tattha asajjamāno gacchati. Sace panassa bhikkhuno adhiṭṭhahitvā gacchantassa antarā pabbato vā rukkho vā uṭṭheti, kiṃ puna samāpajjitvā adhiṭṭhātabbanti? Doso natthi. Puna samāpajjitvā adhiṭṭhānañhi upajjhāyassa santike nissayaggahaṇasadisaṃ hoti. Iminā pana bhikkhunā ‘‘ākāso hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhitattā ākāso hotiyeva. Purimādhiṭṭhānabaleneva cassa antarā añño pabbato vā rukkho vā utumayo uṭṭhahissatīti aṭṭhānametaṃ. Aññena iddhimatā nimmite pana paṭhamaṃ nimmānaṃ balavaṃ hoti. Itarena tassa uddhaṃ vā adho vā gantabbaṃ.
在地中也能出没:这里“出”是浮上来,“没”是沉下去,浮出和沉入合起来就叫“出没”。想做这件事的人,先进入水遍的禅定,出定后划定范围:“愿这一片地方的地变成水。”作好准备功夫后,按照前面说的方法决意。决意的同时,在划定的范围内,地就变成了水。他在那里浮出沉入,就像在水里一样。不只是浮出沉入,洗澡、喝水、洗脸、洗东西等等,他想做什么就做什么。而且不只是能变成水,酥油、油、蜂蜜、糖浆等,他想变成什么,就作意:“愿这些变成这样这样的分量。”作好准备功夫后决意,就按照决意的那样实现。取出来放进容器里时,酥油还是酥油,油等还是油等,水还是水。他想浸湿才浸湿,不想浸湿就不会浸湿。而且那片地只对这位比丘来说是水,对其他的人来说还是地。在那里,人们用脚走也行,乘车等通行也行,照样耕地等等。如果这位比丘希望“让他们也看到是水”,那也能变成水。不过,超过限定的时间之后,除了原本就在罐子、池塘等处的水保留之外,其余被划定的区域还是恢复成地。巴利
Pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjanti ettha ummujjanti uṭṭhānaṃ, nimujjanti saṃsīdanaṃ, ummujjañca nimujjañca ummujjanimujjaṃ. Evaṃ kattukāmena pana āpokasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā uṭṭhāya ‘‘ettake ṭhāne pathavī udakaṃ hotū’’ti paricchinditvā parikammaṃ katvā vuttanayeneva adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Saha adhiṭṭhānā yathāparicchinne ṭhāne pathavī udakameva hoti. So tattha ummujjanimujjaṃ karoti seyyathāpi udake. Na kevalañca ummujjanimujjameva, nhānapānamukhadhovanabhaṇḍakadhovanādīsu yaṃ yaṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ karoti. Na kevalañca udakameva karoti, sappitelamadhuphāṇitādīsupi yaṃ yaṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ ‘‘idañcidañca ettakaṃ hotū’’ti āvajjitvā parikammaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhahantassa yathādhiṭṭhitameva hoti. Uddharitvā bhājanagataṃ karontassa sappi sappiyeva hoti, telādīni telādīniyeva, udakaṃ udakameva. So tattha temitukāmova temeti, na temitukāmo na temeti. Tasseva ca sā pathavī udakaṃ hoti, sesajanassa pathavīyeva. Tattha manussā pattikāpi gacchanti, yānādīhipi gacchanti, kasikammādīnipi karontiyeva. Sace panāyaṃ ‘‘tesampi udakaṃ hotū’’ti icchati, hotiyeva. Paricchinnakālaṃ pana atikkamitvā yaṃ pakatiyā ghaṭataḷākādīsu udakaṃ, taṃ ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ paricchinnaṭṭhānaṃ pathavīyeva hoti.
在水上也能行走而不沉没。这里说的是:如果踩到水会陷下去,那就叫“破”;反过来不会陷下去,就叫“不破”。想这样行走的人,要先进入地遍的禅定,出定后划定一个范围,心想“在这个范围内,水要变成地”,做好准备工作后,再按照前面说的方法下定决心。决心一下,所划范围内的水就真的变成了地。他在上面行走,就像走在陆地上一样。不只是能走,他想用什么姿势就用什么姿势。而且不只是能把水变成地,他想把水变成宝石、黄金、山、树等等,只要按照前面说的方法作意并下定决心,就会随着他的决心变成那样。不过,这水变成地只是对他自己而言,对其他人来说还是水。鱼、龟、水鸟等还是照常在水里自由游动。如果他想让其他人也看到那个地方是地,也能做到。但是一旦超过了限定的时间,就又会变回水。巴利
Udakepi abhijjamāne gacchatīti ettha yaṃ udakaṃ akkamitvā saṃsīdati, taṃ bhijjamānanti vuccati, viparītaṃ abhijjamānaṃ. Evaṃ gantukāmena pana pathavīkasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ettake ṭhāne udakaṃ pathavī hotū’’ti paricchinditvā parikammaṃ katvā vuttanayeneva adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Saha adhiṭṭhānā yathāparicchinnaṭṭhāne udakaṃ pathavīyeva hoti. So tattha gacchati seyyathāpi pathaviyaṃ. Na kevalañca gacchati, yaṃ yaṃ iriyāpathaṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ kappeti. Na kevalañca pathavimeva karoti, maṇisuvaṇṇapabbatarukkhādīsupi yaṃ yaṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ vuttanayeneva āvajjitvā adhiṭṭhāti, yathādhiṭṭhitameva hoti. Tasseva ca taṃ udakaṃ pathavī hoti, sesajanassa udakameva . Macchakacchapā ca udakakākādayo ca yathāruci vicaranti. Sace panāyaṃ aññesampi manussānaṃ taṃ pathaviṃ kātuṃ icchati, karotiyeva. Yathāparicchinnakālātikkamena pana udakameva hoti.
“也在空中结跏趺坐而行”的意思是:他在虚空中,以双腿盘结的坐姿四处行走。“有翼之鸟”是指翅膀完整的鸟,不是翅膀还没长全或者被剪掉翅膀的鸟。那样的鸟是没办法在空中飞行的。所以,想这样在空中行走的人,要先进入地遍禅定,出定以后,如果想坐着走,就划定一个跏趺坐那么大的范围;如果想躺着走,就划定一张床那么大的范围;如果想迈步走,就划定一条路那么大的范围。这样按照需要划定范围后,就按前面说的方法决意:“变成大地。”决意一完成,那里就真的变成大地。而且,想在空中行走的比丘,还必须获得天眼。为什么呢?因为途中会有由时节变化而出现的山、树之类,或者有龙、金翅鸟等出于嫉妒而变现出来的东西,为了能看见它们,就需要天眼。看见之后又该怎么做呢?要进入根本禅定,出定后作意“变成虚空”,完成准备工作后再决意。另外,为了看清该在哪里降落,也必须具备天眼。因为如果他在不合适的地方降落,比如在浴场或村口,就会被大众看得清清楚楚。所以要用天眼观察,避开不合适的地方,在合适的地方降落。巴利
Ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamatīti antalikkhe samantato ūrubaddhāsanena gacchati. Pakkhī sakuṇoti pakkhehi yutto sakuṇo, na aparipuṇṇapakkho lūnapakkho vā. Tādiso hi ākāse gantuṃ na sakkoti. Evamākāse gantukāmena pana pathavīkasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya sace nisinno gantumicchati, pallaṅkappamāṇaṃ ṭhānaṃ paricchinditvā parikammaṃ katvā vuttanayeneva adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Sace nipanno gantukāmo hoti, mañcappamāṇaṃ, sace padasā gantukāmo hoti, maggappamāṇanti evaṃ yathānurūpaṃ ṭhānaṃ paricchinditvā vuttanayeneva ‘‘pathavī hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Saha adhiṭṭhānā pathavīyeva hoti. Ākāse gantukāmena ca bhikkhunā dibbacakkhulābhināpi bhavitabbaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā antarā utusamuṭṭhānā vā pabbatarukkhādayo honti, nāgasupaṇṇādayo vā usūyantā māpenti, tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ. Te pana disvā kiṃ kātabbanti? Pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ākāso hotū’’ti parikammaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Apica okāse orohaṇatthampi iminā dibbacakkhulābhinā bhavitabbaṃ. Ayañhi sace anokāse nhānatitthe vā gāmadvāre vā orohati, mahājanassa pākaṭo hoti, tasmā dibbacakkhunā passitvā anokāsaṃ vajjetvā okāse otaratīti.
“也能触摸这些如此大神力、如此大威德的日月”,在这里应当理解:日月在四万二千由旬的高空运行,所以有大神力;在一刹那间照亮三洲,所以有大威德。或者说,因为在高空运行和光明遍照,所以有大神力,又正因为这大神力而有大威德。“触摸”就是抓住或碰到某个部位。“遍摩”就是像打磨镜面那样全面地摩擦。这种神变只靠作为神通基础的禅那就能成就,这里并不要求一定以遍禅定成就。如果他想去触摸,就去触摸。如果他就坐在或躺在原地想要触摸,就决意:“愿它来到伸手可及的地方。”靠决意的力量,日月就像脱了柄的棕榈果一样,来到伸手可及之处;他要么触摸停在原处的日月,要么伸手去触摸。伸手的时候,增长的是执受色还是非执受色?是依着执受色,非执受色增长。这样做了以后,他不仅能触摸日月,如果愿意,还可以把日月当作脚凳来搁脚,当作椅子来坐,当作床来躺,当作靠板来倚靠。一个人这样做,另一个人也能这样。即使有成百上千位比丘同时这样做,对每一个人也都同样成就。日月的运行和放光也照样不变。就像成千上万个盛满水的钵中都能映现月轮,而月亮的运行和放光仍照常一样,这个神通也是同样的道理。“乃至以身体自在行于梵天界”,就是以梵天界为范围,在这中间以种种神通自在支配自己的身体。详细的说明将在“神变论”中展开。巴利
Imepi candimasūriye evaṃmahiddhike evaṃmahānubhāveti ettha candimasūriyānaṃ dvācattālīsayojanasahassoparicaraṇena mahiddhikatā, tīsu dīpesu ekakkhaṇe ālokakaraṇena mahānubhāvatā veditabbā, evaṃ uparicaraṇaālokapharaṇehi vā mahiddhike, teneva mahiddhikattena mahānubhāve . Parāmasatīti pariggaṇhāti, ekadese vā phusati. Parimajjatīti samantato ādāsatalaṃ viya parimajjati. Ayaṃ panassa iddhi abhiññāpādakajjhānavaseneva ijjhati, natthettha kasiṇasamāpattiniyamo. Svāyaṃ yadi icchati gantvā parāmasituṃ, gantvā parāmasati. Sace pana idheva nisinnako vā nipannako vā parāmasitukāmo hoti, ‘‘hatthapāse hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāti. Adhiṭṭhānabalena vaṇṭā muttatālaphalaṃ viya āgantvā hatthapāse ṭhite vā parāmasati, hatthaṃ vā vaḍḍhetvā parāmasati. Hatthaṃ vaḍḍhentassa pana kiṃ upādinnakaṃ vaḍḍhati anupādinnakaṃ vāti? Upādinnakaṃ nissāya anupādinnakaṃ vaḍḍhati. Yo evaṃ katvā na kevalaṃ candimasūriye parāmasati, sace icchati, pādakathalikaṃ katvā pāde ṭhapeti, pīṭhaṃ katvā nisīdati, mañcaṃ katvā nipajjati, apassenaphalakaṃ katvā apassayati. Yathā eko, evaṃ aparopi. Anekesupi hi bhikkhusatasahassesu evaṃ karontesu tesañca ekamekassa tatheva ijjhati. Candimasūriyānañca gamanampi ālokakaraṇampi tatheva hoti. Yathā hi pātisahassesu udakapūresu sabbapātīsu candamaṇḍalāni dissanti, pākatikameva candassa gamanaṃ ālokakaraṇañca hoti, tathūpamametaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ. Yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṃ vattetīti brahmalokaṃ paricchedaṃ katvā etthantare anekavidhaṃ abhiññaṃ karonto attano kāyena vasaṃ issariyaṃ vatteti. Vitthāro panettha iddhikathāyaṃ āvibhavissatīti.
天耳界清净智的解说巴利
51. Sotadhātuvisuddhiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
103 在“天耳界清净智”的解说中,“即使远处的声音”等这段话,是为了给想要修出天耳的初学比丘展示修行方法而说的。其中,“即使远处声音的声相”,指的是远处声音当中的声音。声音本身就是形成“相”的依据,所以叫“声相”。虽然说“远处”,其实也只是指普通耳朵能听到的范围。“粗大的”,指粗重的声音;“微细的”,指细小的声音;“极细的”,指比微细还微细,也就是最微细的意思。这样一来,就把最微细的声音也都包括进去了。想要修出这种智的初学禅修者,应当先进入作为神通基础的禅那,出定之后,用遍作定的心,先从普通耳朵能听到的范围开始,作意远处粗大的声音。比如在森林里狮子等野兽的叫声,在精舍里钟声、鼓声、螺声,沙弥和年轻比丘们尽力诵经的诵经声,平常说话时“尊者,什么?”“贤友,什么?”这样的声音,鸟声、风声、脚步声、沸腾的水发出的嘶嘶声、太阳下晒干的棕榈叶声、蚂蚁之类发出的声音。就这样,从最粗大的声音开始,依次作意越来越微细的声音。巴利
103. Sotadhātuvisuddhiñāṇaniddese dūrepi saddānantiādi dibbasotaṃ uppādetukāmassa ādikammikassa bhikkhuno upāyasandassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha dūrepi saddānaṃ saddanimittanti dūre saddānaṃ antare saddaṃ. Saddoyeva hi nimittakaraṇavasena saddanimittaṃ. ‘‘Dūre’’ti vuttepi pakatisotassa āpāthaṭṭhāneyeva. Oḷārikānanti thūlānaṃ. Sukhumānanti aṇūnaṃ. Saṇhasaṇhānanti saṇhatopi saṇhānaṃ, atisaṇhānanti attho. Etena paramasukhumā saddā vuttā honti. Imaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppādetukāmena ādikammikena jhāyinā abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya parikammasamādhicittena paṭhamataraṃ pakatisotapathe dūre oḷāriko araññe sīhādīnaṃ saddo āvajjitabbo. Vihāre ghaṇḍisaddo bherisaddo saṅkhasaddo sāmaṇeradaharabhikkhūnaṃ sabbathāmena sajjhāyantānaṃ sajjhāyanasaddo pakatikathaṃ kathentānaṃ ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, kiṃ, āvuso’’tiādisaddo sakuṇasaddo vātasaddo padasaddo pakkuthitaudakassa cicciṭāyanasaddo ātape sussamānatālapaṇṇasaddo kunthakipillikādisaddoti evaṃ sabboḷārikato pabhuti yathākkamena sukhumasukhumasaddā āvajjitabbā.
这样做的时候,还要依次把东、西等十个方向的声相,按前面说的方法,在每个方向上一一作意。作意的时候,对于自己平常耳朵能听到的那些声音,要以平常耳朵为基础,用意识门的心去作意。那些声音对平常心来说本来就已经很明显,而对遍作定的心来说就更加明显。当他这样作意声相时,心想“现在天耳界就要生起了”,于是以那些声音中的某一个为所缘,生起意门转向心。那个心灭去后,有四到五个速行心生起。其中前面三到四个是欲界心,叫做遍作、近行、随顺、种姓;第四个或第五个是安止心,属于色界第四禅。与那个安止心同时生起的智慧,就是天耳界。要让这个天耳界变得稳固有力,就应当以“我在这个范围内听到声音”为念,先限定一个指节大小的范围,然后逐步扩大:从两个指节、四个指节、八个指节,到一拃、一肘;再按内室、露台、精舍、僧园、行乞的村落、国土等范围,一直到轮围山,甚至更远,不断划定范围而扩展。这样证得神通的人,即使不再进入根本禅那,也能以神通智听到落入根本禅那所缘范围内的一切声音。这样听的时候,即使从下方一直到梵天界,螺贝声、大鼓声、小鼓声等同时响成一片,如果他想分别辨认,也能一一分辨:“这是螺贝声,这是大鼓声。”以神通智听到有意义的声音后,再用欲界心去了解其中的意思。天耳界是依平常耳朵生起的,不是对聋人生起。诸师说:后来即使平常耳朵坏了,天耳界也不会坏。巴利
Evaṃ karontena ca puratthimādīsu dasasu disāsu kamena ekekissā disāya saddanimittaṃ vuttanayena manasi kātabbaṃ. Manasi karontena ca ye saddā pakatisotassa suyyanti, tesu pakatisotamodhāya manodvārikena cittena manasi kātabbaṃ. Tassa te saddā pakaticittassāpi pākaṭā honti, parikammasamādhicittassa pana ativiya pākaṭā honti. Tassevaṃ saddanimittaṃ manasikaroto idāni dibbasotadhātu uppajjissatīti tesu saddesu aññataraṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjati, tasmiṃ niruddhe cattāri pañca vā javanāni javanti. Yesaṃ purimāni tīṇi cattāri vā parikammopacārānulomagotrabhunāmakāni kāmāvacarāni, catutthaṃ pañcamaṃ vā appanācittaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānikaṃ. Tattha yaṃ tena appanācittena saddhiṃ uppannaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ayaṃ dibbasotadhātu. Taṃ thāmagataṃ karontena ‘‘etthantare saddaṃ suṇāmī’’ti ekaṅgulamattaṃ paricchinditvā vaḍḍhetabbaṃ, tato dvaṅgulacaturaṅgulaaṭṭhaṅgulavidatthiratanaantogabbhapamukha- pāsādapariveṇasaṅghārāmagocaragāmajanapadādivasena yāva cakkavāḷaṃ, tato vā bhiyyopi paricchinditvā paricchinditvā vaḍḍhetabbaṃ. Evaṃ adhigatābhiñño esa pādakajjhānārammaṇena phuṭṭhokāsabbhantaragate sadde puna pādakajjhānaṃ asamāpajjitvāpi abhiññāñāṇena suṇātiyeva. Evaṃ suṇanto ca sacepi yāvabrahmalokā saṅkhabheripaṇavādisaddehi ekakolāhalaṃ hoti, pāṭiyekkaṃ vavatthāpetukāmatāya sati ‘‘ayaṃ saṅkhasaddo, ayaṃ bherisaddo’’ti vavatthāpetuṃ sakkotiyeva. Abhiññāñāṇena sute sātthake sadde pacchā kāmāvacaracittena atthaṃ jānāti. Dibbasotaṃ pakatisotavatoyeva uppajjati, no badhirassa. Pacchā pakatisote vinaṭṭhepi dibbasotaṃ na vinassatīti vadanti.
天耳界:这里说“天”,是因为和天相似。诸天的耳界,是由善业所生,不被胆汁、痰、血等阻碍,因为远离了随烦恼,所以即使很远也能接收所缘,这就是清净的净色耳界,也就是天耳。而这位比丘由精进修行之力所生起的智耳界,也和它一样,所以因为与天相似,就叫作“天”。另外,因为是通过天住而获得的,而且自身也依止天住,所以也叫“天”;因为能听闻,且没有命根的作用,所以叫耳界;因为能执行耳界的功能,所以也似耳界,故也叫耳界。以这天耳界。清净的:纯净无随烦恼的。超越人性的:超越人的范围而闻声,故超越人的肉耳界,超然而住。闻二种声:闻两种声音。哪两种?天声和人声,即天人和人的声音。以此可知部分范围。或远或近:无论远至他方轮围之声,或近至乃至依止自身而住之虫声,彼皆能闻。以此可知无余范围。巴利
So dibbāya sotadhātuyāti ettha dibbasadisattā dibbā. Devānañhi sucaritakammābhinibbattā pittasemharudhirādīhi apalibuddhā upakkilesavimuttatāya dūrepi ārammaṇasampaṭicchanasamatthā dibbā pasādasotadhātu hoti. Ayañcāpi imassa bhikkhuno vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattā ñāṇasotadhātu tādisāyevāti dibbasadisattā dibbā. Apica dibbavihāravasena paṭiladdhattā, attanā ca dibbavihārasannissitattāpi dibbā, savanaṭṭhena nijjīvaṭṭhena ca sotadhātu, sotadhātukiccakaraṇena ca sotadhātu viyātipi sotadhātu. Tāya dibbāya sotadhātuyā. Visuddhāyāti parisuddhāya nirupakkilesāya. Atikkantamānusikāyāti manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā saddasavanena mānusikaṃ maṃsasotadhātuṃ atikkantāya vītivattitvā ṭhitāya. Ubho sadde suṇātīti dve sadde suṇāti. Katame dve? Dibbe ca mānuse ca, devānañca manussānañca saddeti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena padesapariyādānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ye dūre santike cāti ye saddā dūre paracakkavāḷepi, ye ca santike antamaso sadehasannissitapāṇakasaddāpi, te suṇātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena nippadesapariyādānaṃ veditabbanti.
52. 他心智论释的注释巴利
52. Cetopariyañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
104 104. 在他心智的解释中,“他这样了知”这句话,现在要说明应当修习的方法。“此色由喜根等起”等,是初学禅修者应当实行的方式。怎样实行呢?想要生起这种智的禅修者,首先应当生起天眼智。因为这种智依靠天眼才能成就,天眼是它的准备工作。所以那位比丘应当增强光明,用天眼反复观察他人心脏色所依而存在的血色,然后反复寻求其心。当善的喜生起时,那血是红色的,像榕树果实的颜色;当不善的喜生起时,那血就浑浊;当忧生起时,那血是黑色的,像阎浮果实的颜色且浑浊。当善的舍生起时,那血是清净的,像芝麻油的颜色。当不善的舍生起时,那血也浑浊。因此,那位比丘反复观察他人心脏的血色后,反复寻求其心:“此色由喜根等起,此色由忧根等起,此色由舍根等起”,应当使他心智变得稳固。当它如此稳固时,便能渐次了知一切欲界等各类心,只是从心到心流转,不需要再观察心脏色。这在注疏中也说过:巴利
104. Cetopariyañāṇaniddese so evaṃ pajānātīti idāni vattabbaṃ vidhānaṃ upadisati. Idaṃ rūpaṃ somanassindriyasamuṭṭhitantiādi ādikammikena jhāyinā paṭipajjitabbaṃ vidhānaṃ. Kathaṃ? Etañhi ñāṇaṃ uppādetukāmena jhāyinā paṭhamaṃ tāva dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Etañhi dibbacakkhuvasena ijjhati, taṃ etassa parikammaṃ. Tasmā tena bhikkhunā ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbena cakkhunā parassa hadayarūpaṃ nissāya vattamānassa lohitassa vaṇṇaṃ passitvā passitvā cittaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ. Tañhi lohitaṃ kusalasomanasse vattamāne rattaṃ hoti nigrodhapakkavaṇṇaṃ, akusalasomanasse vattamāne tadeva luḷitaṃ hoti, domanasse vattamāne kāḷakaṃ hoti jambupakkavaṇṇaṃ luḷitaṃ. Kusalūpekkhāya vattamānāya pasannaṃ hoti tilatelavaṇṇaṃ. Akusalūpekkhāya vattamānāya tadeva luḷitaṃ hoti. Tasmā tena ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ somanassindriyasamuṭṭhitaṃ, idaṃ rūpaṃ domanassindriyasamuṭṭhitaṃ, idaṃ rūpaṃ upekkhindriyasamuṭṭhita’’nti parassa hadayalohitavaṇṇaṃ passitvā passitvā cittaṃ pariyesantena cetopariyañāṇaṃ thāmagataṃ kātabbaṃ. Evaṃ thāmagate hi tasmiṃ anukkamena sabbampi kāmāvacarādibhedaṃ cittaṃ pajānāti cittā cittameva saṅkamanto vinā hadayarūpadassanena. Vuttampi cetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
想了解无色界众生心的人,能看见谁的心脏色法?又能观察到谁的根变化呢?谁的也看不到。这是有神通者的能力范围,也就是说,无论把心投向哪里,他都能了知那十六种心。不过,这段话是针对还没有作决意的人说的。巴利
‘‘Āruppe parassa cittaṃ jānitukāmo kassa hadayarūpaṃ passati, kassindriyavikāraṃ oloketīti? Na kassaci. Iddhimato visayo esa, yadidaṃ yattha katthaci cittaṃ āvajjanto soḷasappabhedaṃ cittaṃ jānāti. Akatābhinivesassa pana vasena ayaṃ kathā’’ti (visuddhi. 2.401).
“其他众生”是指除了自己以外的其余众生。“其他个人”也是同样的意思,只是根据所化导的对象和说法方式的不同,而在言辞上作了区分。“以心遍知他人之心”:就是用自己的心去辨别他们的心,然后按有贪等不同状态来了知。“有贪或”等句中的“或”字是集合的意思。其中,八种与贪相应的心叫作有贪心,其余四地所摄的善心和无记心叫作离贪心。两种与忧相应的心、两种与疑和掉举相应的心,这四种心不包括在这两类里。不过有些长老也用“离贪”这个词把它们包括进去。两种与忧相应的心叫作有嗔心,一切四地的善心和无记心叫作离嗔心。其余十种不善心不包括在这两类里。不过有些长老也用“离嗔”这个词把它们包括进去。在“有痴”和“离痴”中,只以痴为唯一根源的疑相应和掉举相应这两种心才是有痴。但因为痴存在于一切不善心中,所以十二种不善心也应该知道是有痴。其余的善心和无记心是离痴。与昏沉睡眠相应的心是收缩的,与掉举相应的心是散乱的。色界和无色界的心是广大的,其余的是不广大的。一切三地的心是有上的,出世间心是无上的。达到近行定和达到安止定的是得定的,这两种都没达到的是不得定的。达到分断、镇伏断、正断、止息断、出离解脱的是解脱的,没有达到这五种解脱的应知是未解脱的。这样,获得他心智的比丘能了知十六种分类的心。然而凡夫不知道圣者的道心和果心,圣者中下位的也不知道上位者的道心和果心,但上位者能知道下位者的心。巴利
Parasattānanti attānaṃ ṭhapetvā sesasattānaṃ. Parapuggalānanti idampi iminā ekatthameva, veneyyavasena pana desanāvilāsena ca byañjanena nānattaṃ kataṃ. Cetasā ceto paricca pajānātīti attano cittena tesaṃ cittaṃ paricchinditvā sarāgādivasena nānappakārato jānāti. Sarāgaṃ vātiādīsu vā-saddo samuccayattho. Tattha aṭṭhavidhaṃ lobhasahagatacittaṃ sarāgaṃ cittaṃ nāma, avasesaṃ catubhūmakakusalābyākatacittaṃ vītarāgaṃ nāma. Dve domanassacittāni, dve vicikicchāuddhaccacittānīti imāni pana cattāri cittāni imasmiṃ duke saṅgahaṃ na gacchanti. Keci pana therā tānipi vītarāgapadena saṅgaṇhanti. Duvidhaṃ pana domanassasahagataṃ cittaṃ sadosaṃ cittaṃ nāma, sabbampi catubhūmakaṃ kusalābyākataṃ vītadosaṃ nāma. Sesāni dasa akusalacittāni imasmiṃ duke saṅgahaṃ na gacchanti. Keci pana therā tānipi vītadosapadena saṅgaṇhanti. Samohaṃ vītamohanti ettha pana mohekahetukavasena vicikicchāuddhaccasahagatadvayameva samohaṃ. Mohassa pana sabbākusalesu sambhavato dvādasavidhampi akusalaṃ cittaṃ ‘‘samoha’’nti veditabbaṃ. Avasesaṃ kusalābyākataṃ vītamohaṃ. Thinamiddhānugataṃ pana saṃkhittaṃ, uddhaccānugataṃ vikkhittaṃ. Rūpāvacarārūpāvacaraṃ mahaggataṃ, avasesaṃ amahaggataṃ. Sabbampi tebhūmakaṃ sauttaraṃ, lokuttaraṃ anuttaraṃ. Upacārappattaṃ appanāppattañca samāhitaṃ, tadubhayamasampattaṃ asamāhitaṃ. Tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttippattaṃ vimuttaṃ, pañcavidhampi etaṃ vimuttimappattaṃ avimuttanti veditabbaṃ. Iti cetopariyañāṇalābhī bhikkhu soḷasappabhedampi cittaṃ pajānāti. Puthujjanā pana ariyānaṃ maggaphalacittaṃ na jānanti, ariyāpi ca heṭṭhimā heṭṭhimā uparimānaṃ uparimānaṃ maggaphalacittaṃ na jānanti, uparimā uparimā pana heṭṭhimānaṃ heṭṭhimānaṃ cittaṃ jānantīti.
53. 宿命随念智论的解释巴利
53. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
105 在《宿命随念智论释》中,“他这样了知”等语句,是为了说明:对于已经在四神足中修习了心、想要生起宿命随念智的人,应当怎样生起这种智的方法。因为,当他依次观察缘起时,会看到由识、名色、六处、触、受所构成的现在果的概要;接着看到这果的因缘,也就是过去世中由业与烦恼所构成的因的概要;再看到那因的因缘,也就是更前一世的果的概要;又看到那果的因缘,也就是第三世中的因的概要。就这样,通过观察缘起,他看到了生生世世的相续。可见,对缘起作意对宿命随念智有很大的帮助。其中,“此有故彼有,此生故彼生”这句话,是缘起论释的纲要性表述。有人可能会问:既然用其中一句就已经说明了这个意思,为什么还要分两句来说呢?回答是:因为它们在含义上有所不同。怎么理解呢?“此有故”的意思是:当这个因缘存在的时候。这是对所有因缘通用的表述。“彼有”的意思是:这个因缘所生的法便存在。这是对所有缘所生法通用的表述。用这整句话,就遮破了无因论。因为,凡是依靠因缘而存在的法,并不是在没有因缘的情况下存在,所以它们不能被称为无因。“此生故”的意思是:这个因缘的生起,就是因缘生起的因。这是说明一切因缘都具有生起性的表述。“彼生”的意思是:这个因缘所生的法生起。这是说明一切缘所生法都是由此而生的表述。用这整句话,就遮破了常见与无因论。因为,凡是有生起的法,都是无常的。因此,即使承认有因,这些法也是以无常为因,而不是以世间所认为的恒常的自在天、自性、人等等为因。巴利
105. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaniddese evaṃ pajānātītiādi catūsu iddhipādesu paribhāvitacittassa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ uppādetukāmassa taduppādanavidhānadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Kamato hi paṭiccasamuppādaṃ passitvā viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanāsaṅkhātaṃ paccuppannaṃ phalasaṅkhepaṃ passati, tassa paccayaṃ purimabhave kammakilesasaṅkhātaṃ hetusaṅkhepaṃ passati, tassa paccayaṃ purimabhaveyeva phalasaṅkhepaṃ passati, tassa paccayaṃ tatiyabhave hetusaṅkhepaṃ passati. Evaṃ paṭiccasamuppādadassanena jātiparamparaṃ passati. Evaṃ bahūpakāro pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇassa paṭiccasamuppādamanasikāro . Tattha ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti idaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaniddesassa uddesavacanaṃ. Evaṃ tesaṃ aññataravacaneneva atthe siddhe dvidhā vacanaṃ kasmāti ce? Atthanānattasabbhāvato. Kathaṃ? Imasmiṃ satīti imasmiṃ paccaye vijjamāne. Idaṃ sabbapaccayānaṃ sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Idaṃ hotīti idaṃ paccayuppannaṃ bhavati. Idaṃ sabbapaccayuppannānaṃ sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Iminā sakalena vacanena ahetukavādo paṭisiddho hoti. Ye hi dhammā paccayasambhavā honti, na paccayābhāvā, te ahetukā nāma na hontīti. Imassuppādāti imassa paccayassa uppādahetu. Idaṃ sabbapaccayānaṃ uppādavantatādīpanavacanaṃ. Idaṃ uppajjatīti idaṃ paccayuppannaṃ uppajjati. Idaṃ sabbapaccayuppannānaṃ tato uppajjamānatādīpanavacanaṃ. Iminā sakalena vacanena sassatāhetukavādo paṭisiddho hoti. Ye hi uppādavanto dhammā, te aniccā. Tasmā satipi sahetukatte aniccahetukā ete dhammā na loke niccasammatapakatipurisādihetukāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“此即是”这一说法,是为了指出接下来要说明的内容。在“无明缘行”这句话里,果所依靠的那个条件,就是“缘”。“缘”的意思是不离开它、不排除它。“来”的意思是生起并且持续运作。另外,起资助作用的含义就是“缘”的含义。无明既是那个东西,又是缘,所以叫“无明缘”。因此应当这样理解:以无明为缘,诸行就生起。同样,“生起”这个词也应当与后面其余的词这样搭配理解。在忧等当中,悲恸叫“忧”,哭泣叫“悲”,令人痛苦叫“苦”,或者从生起和持续的角度说,它像被挖伤一样,所以也叫“苦”;内心郁闷的状态叫“忧”;极度疲惫叫“过劳”。“生起”就是产生。“如是”是指出前面所说的道理。以此表明,这只是由无明等这些原因造成的,而不是由自在天创造等原因造成的。“此”是指如前所说的。“纯整的”是指不混杂的,或者说是完整的。“苦蕴”是指痛苦的集合,不是指有情,也不是指快乐、清净等。“集”就是产生。“有”就是存在。巴利
Yadidanti niddisitabbatthasandassanaṃ. Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāti ettha yaṃ paṭicca phalameti, so paccayo. Paṭiccāti na vinā, apaccakkhitvāti attho. Etīti uppajjati ceva pavattati cāti attho. Apica upakārakaṭṭho paccayaṭṭho, avijjā ca sā paccayo cāti avijjāpaccayo. Tasmā avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantīti yojanā. Evaṃ sambhavanti-saddassa sesapadehipi yojanā kātabbā. Sokādīsu ca socanaṃ soko. Paridevanaṃ paridevo. Dukkhatīti dukkhaṃ. Uppādaṭṭhitivasena vā dvedhā khanatītipi dukkhaṃ. Dummanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Bhuso āyāso upāyāso. Sambhavantīti nibbattanti. Evanti niddiṭṭhanayanidassanaṃ. Tena avijjādīheva kāraṇehi, na issaranimmānādīhīti dasseti. Etassāti yathāvuttassa. Kevalassāti asammissassa, sakalassa vā. Dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkhasamūhassa, na sattassa na sukhasubhādīnaṃ. Samudayoti nibbatti. Hotīti sambhavati.
在这里,什么是无明?就是对苦的无知,对苦集的无知,对苦灭的无知,对通往苦灭之道的无知;对前际的无知,对后际的无知,对前后际的无知;对以特定条件为基础、依缘而生的诸法无知。什么是行?福行、非福行、不动行,身行、语行、心行。八种欲界善思和五种色界善思是福行;十二种不善思是非福行;四种无色界善思是不动行。身思是身行,语思是语行,意思就是心行。巴利
Tattha katamā avijjā? Dukkhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya aññāṇaṃ, pubbante aññāṇaṃ, aparante aññāṇaṃ, pubbantāparante aññāṇaṃ, idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu aññāṇaṃ. Katame saṅkhārā? Puññābhisaṅkhāro, apuññābhisaṅkhāro, āneñjābhisaṅkhāro, kāyasaṅkhāro, vacīsaṅkhāro, cittasaṅkhāro. Aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalacetanā pañca rūpāvacarakusalacetanā puññābhisaṅkhāro, dvādasa akusalacetanā apuññābhisaṅkhāro, catasso arūpāvacarakusalacetanā āneñjābhisaṅkhāro. Kāyasañcetanā kāyasaṅkhāro, vacīsañcetanā vacīsaṅkhāro, manosañcetanā cittasaṅkhāro.
这里可能会有人问:那要怎么知道“这些行是以无明为缘”呢?因为无明存在,它们才存在。也就是说,如果有人对苦等还没有断除称为无明的无知,那么他首先因为对苦以及对前际等的无知,把轮回的苦当成快乐来执取,于是就去造作作为其因的三种行。因为对集谛的无知,他把伴随渴爱的、本是苦因的行,当成乐因来造作。因为对灭谛和道谛的无知,他把并非真正苦灭的各种趣处当成苦灭,又把并非真正灭苦之道的祭祀、苦行等当成灭苦之道,为了追求灭苦,就通过祭祀、苦行等方式去造作三种行。巴利
Tattha siyā – kathaṃ panetaṃ jānitabbaṃ ‘‘ime saṅkhārā avijjāpaccayā hontī’’ti? Avijjābhāve bhāvato. Yassa hi dukkhādīsu avijjāsaṅkhātaṃ aññāṇaṃ appahīnaṃ hoti. So dukkhe tāva pubbantādīsu ca aññāṇena saṃsāradukkhaṃ sukhasaññāya gahetvā tasseva hetubhūte tividhepi saṅkhāre ārabhati. Samudaye aññāṇena dukkhahetubhūtepi taṇhāparikkhāre saṅkhāre sukhahetuto maññamāno ārabhati. Nirodhe pana magge ca aññāṇena dukkhassa anirodhabhūtepi gativisese dukkhanirodhasaññī hutvā nirodhassa ca amaggabhūtesupi yaññāmaratapādīsu nirodhamaggasaññī hutvā dukkhanirodhaṃ patthayamāno yaññāmaratapādimukhena tividhepi saṅkhāre ārabhati.
而且,由于他还没有断除对四圣谛的无明,尤其是对那名为福果的苦——它混杂着生、老、病、死等无数过患——不能如实地了知它是苦,为了证达它,便造作由身、语、意行所区分的福行,就像贪求天女的人纵身跳下悬崖一样。即使是被世人认作快乐的福果,到了最终会引发大热恼的变易之苦,以及它那少得可怜的乐味,他也看不见,仍然以它为缘,造作前面所说的那种福行,就像飞蛾扑向灯火,又像贪著蜜味的人去舔涂了蜜的刀刃。对于受用欲乐等会带来果报的事,他看不见其中的过患,因为把它想成快乐,又被烦恼所压倒,便造作由三门生起的非福行,就像愚痴的小孩玩粪便,又像想死的人吞毒药。对于无色界的果报,他也不能如实了知行本身即是变易之苦,由于常见等颠倒见,便造作属于心行的不动行,就像迷路的人朝着鬼城的方向走。如此,正因为行只有在无明存在时才存在,无明不存在时就不会有,所以应当了知:这些行是以无明为缘的。巴利
Apica so tāya catūsu saccesu appahīnāvijjatāya visesato jātijarārogamaraṇādianekādīnavavokiṇṇampi puññaphalasaṅkhātaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhato ajānanto tassa adhigamāya kāyavacīcittasaṅkhārabhedaṃ puññābhisaṅkhāraṃ ārabhati devaccharakāmako viya marupapātaṃ. Sukhasammatassāpi ca tassa puññaphalassa ante mahāpariḷāhajanikaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhataṃ appassādatañca apassantopi tappaccayaṃ vuttappakārameva puññābhisaṅkhāraṃ ārabhati salabho viya dīpasikhābhinipātaṃ, madhubindugiddho viya ca madhulittasatthadhārālehanaṃ. Kāmūpasevanādīsu ca savipākesu ādīnavaṃ apassanto sukhasaññāya ceva kilesābhibhūtatāya ca dvārattayappavattampi apuññābhisaṅkhāraṃ ārabhati bālo viya gūthakīḷanaṃ, maritukāmo viya ca visakhādanaṃ. Āruppavipākesu cāpi saṅkhāravipariṇāmadukkhataṃ anavabujjhamāno sassatādivipallāsena cittasaṅkhārabhūtaṃ āneñjābhisaṅkhāraṃ ārabhati disāmūḷho viya pisācanagarābhimukhamaggagamanaṃ. Evaṃ yasmā avijjābhāvatova saṅkhārabhāvo, na abhāvato, tasmā jānitabbametaṃ ‘‘ime saṅkhārā avijjāpaccayā hontī’’ti.
这里有人提出:我们先接受“无明是诸行的缘”这个说法。那么,只是无明这一个因素作为诸行的缘,还是另外还有其他缘呢?如果只有这一个,就会犯“单一因”的错误;如果还有其他缘,那么“以无明为缘而有诸行”这种只举一个因的说明就不成立了。并非不成立。为什么呢?因为——巴利
Etthāha – gaṇhāma tāva etaṃ ‘‘avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo’’ti. Kiṃ panāyamekāva avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo, udāhu aññepi paccayā santīti? Kiṃ panettha yadi tāva ekāva, ekakāraṇavādo āpajjati. Atha aññepi santi, ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’ti ekakāraṇaniddeso nupapajjatīti? Na nupapajjati. Kasmā? Yasmā –
在这里,一个并不是作为一,也不是作为多;多也不是作为一个。
果是存在的,而阐明一因一果也确实有其意义。巴利
‘‘Ekaṃ na ekato idha, nānekamanekatopi no ekaṃ; Phalamatthi atthi pana eka-hetuphaladīpane attho’’.
世尊有时因为某一项是主要的,有时因为某一项是明显的,有时因为某一项是不共的,同时也随顺说法的方式和所教化众生的根机,只开示一个因和一个果。因此,在这里,虽然还有其他能作为行的因的法,比如依处、所缘、俱生法等,但依据“随观乐味的人,渴爱就增长”以及“由无明集起,便有漏集起”这些经文,无明也是渴爱等其他行因的因,所以是主要的;又依据“诸比丘,无知而陷于无明的人,也会造作福行”等经文,它是明显的;还因为是不共的,所以应当知道,无明是以作为行的因这一身份被开示出来的。也正是通过这一番维护一因一果的解说,应当知道在一切处开示一因一果都是有意义的。巴利
Bhagavā hi katthaci padhānattā katthaci pākaṭattā katthaci asādhāraṇattā desanāvilāsassa ca veneyyānañca anurūpato ekameva hetuñca phalañca dīpeti. Tasmā ayamidha avijjā vijjamānesupi aññesu vatthārammaṇasahajātadhammādīsu saṅkhārakāraṇesu ‘‘assādānupassino taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.52) ca, ‘‘avijjāsamudayā āsavasamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.104) ca vacanato aññesampi taṇhādīnaṃ saṅkhārahetūnaṃ hetūti padhānattā, ‘‘avidvā, bhikkhave, avijjāgato puññābhisaṅkhārampi abhisaṅkharotī’’ti pākaṭattā, asādhāraṇattā ca saṅkhārānaṃ hetubhāvena dīpitāti veditabbā. Eteneva ca ekekahetuphaladīpanaparihāravacanena sabbattha ekekahetuphaladīpane payojanaṃ veditabbanti.
对此,有人提出:即使这样,无明的果报完全不可爱、本身是有过失的,它怎么能成为福行、不动行、造作行的缘呢?就像从苦楝的种子长不出甘蔗一样。怎么会说不通呢?因为在世间——巴利
Etthāha – evaṃ santepi ekantāniṭṭhaphalāya sāvajjāya avijjāya kathaṃ puññāneñjābhisaṅkhārapaccayattaṃ yujjati? Na hi nimbabījato ucchu uppajjatīti. Kathaṃ na yujjissati? Lokasmiñhi –
相违的与不相违的,还有相似的和不相似的,如是;
诸法的缘已经成立,而它们并非只是果报。巴利
‘‘Viruddho cāviruddho ca, sadisāsadiso tathā; Dhammānaṃ paccayo siddho, vipākā eva te ca na’’.
因此应当知道:这无明,从果报的角度看,它结出的果完全是不愉快的;从它自身的性质看,虽然它是有过失的,却仍然能作为这一切福行等的缘——它按照各自相应的位置、作用和自性,以相违或不相违的缘,以及相似或不相似的缘,而成为这些行的缘。巴利
Iti ayaṃ avijjā vipākavasena ekantāniṭṭhaphalā, sabhāvavasena ca sāvajjāpi samānā sabbesampi etesaṃ puññābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ yathānurūpaṃ ṭhānakiccasabhāvaviruddhāviruddhapaccayavasena sadisāsadisapaccayavasena ca paccayo hotīti veditabbā.
在死亡与再生之中,在轮回之中,也在诸行的相状之中;
如果有人对缘生的诸法感到迷惑。
因为他造作出这三种行,
无明是这三种行的缘,此即由此而来。
就像天生眼盲的人,身边没有向导一样;
有时沿着正道走,有时也走上歧路。
愚人在轮回里不断流转,同样没有引导者;
有时候造作福业,有时候也造作非福业。
当他了知法、并现观诸谛之时,
那时,随着无明平息,他将以寂静之心而行。巴利
‘‘Cutūpapāte saṃsāre, saṅkhārānañca lakkhaṇe; Yo paṭiccasamuppanna-dhammesu ca vimuyhati. ‘‘Abhisaṅkharoti so ete, saṅkhāre tividhe yato; Avijjā paccayo tesaṃ, tividhānaṃ ayaṃ tato. ‘‘Yathāpi nāma jaccandho, naro apariṇāyako; Ekadā yāti maggena, ummaggenāpi ekadā. ‘‘Saṃsāre saṃsaraṃ bālo, tathā apariṇāyako; Karoti ekadā puññaṃ, apuññamapi ekadā. ‘‘Yadā ca ñatvā so dhammaṃ, saccāni abhisamessati; Tadā avijjūpasamā, upasanto carissatī’’ti.
“行缘识”指的是六识身:眼识、耳识、鼻识、舌识、身识、意识。其中,眼识分为善果报和不善果报两种;耳识、鼻识、舌识、身识也同样各分两种。意识则包括两种果报意界、三种无因意识界、八种有因果报心、五种色界心以及四种无色界心,共二十二种。这样,世间所有的果报识合计有三十二种。巴利
Saṅkhārapaccayāviññāṇanti cha viññāṇakāyā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ sotaviññāṇaṃ ghānaviññāṇaṃ jivhāviññāṇaṃ kāyaviññāṇaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ. Tattha cakkhuviññāṇaṃ kusalavipākaṃ akusalavipākanti duvidhaṃ. Tathā sotaghānajivhākāyaviññāṇāni. Manoviññāṇaṃ dve vipākamanodhātuyo, tisso ahetukamanoviññāṇadhātuyo, aṭṭha sahetukavipākacittāni, pañca rūpāvacarāni, cattāri arūpāvacarānīti bāvīsatividhaṃ. Iti sabbāni bāttiṃsa lokiyavipākaviññāṇāni.
在这里或许会有人问:怎么才能知道“这种识是以行为缘的呢”?因为如果没有已经积累的业,就不会有果报。这个识本身就是果报,而果报在没有已积累的业时是不会生起的。如果它会生起,那么一切众生的所有果报都应该生起,但实际上并不会生起,所以应当知道“这个识是以行为缘的”。这全部的识,从运作方式来看,可以分为转起和结生两种。其中,两种五识、两种意界,以及悦俱无因意识界,这十三种识只在五蕴有的转起时运作。其余的十九种识,则随其相应,在三有中既在转起时运作,也在结生时运作。巴利
Tattha siyā – kathaṃ panetaṃ jānitabbaṃ ‘‘idaṃ vuttappakāraṃ viññāṇaṃ saṅkhārapaccayā hotī’’ti? Upacitakammābhāve vipākābhāvato. Vipākañhetaṃ, vipākañca na upacitakammābhāve uppajjati. Yadi uppajjeyya, sabbesaṃ sabbavipākāni uppajjeyyuṃ, na ca uppajjantīti jānitabbametaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā idaṃ viññāṇaṃ hotī’’ti. Sabbameva hi idaṃ pavattipaṭisandhivasena dvedhā pavattati. Tattha dve pañcaviññāṇāni dve manodhātuyo somanassasahagatāhetukamanoviññāṇadhātūti imāni terasa pañcavokārabhave pavattiyaṃyeva pavattanti, sesāni ekūnavīsati tīsu bhavesu yathānurūpaṃ pavattiyampi paṭisandhiyampi pavattanti.
得到缘之后,这纯粹只是法,它便走向另一种存在。
它既不是从那里转移过来的,也不是离开那里的因缘而发生的。巴利
‘‘Laddhappaccayamiti dhammamattametaṃ bhavantaramupeti; Nāssa tato saṅkanti, na tato hetuṃ vinā hoti’’.
就这样,这个依靠条件而生的、纯粹只是色法与无色法的现象,在生起时被称为“前往另一有”,它不是众生,也不是命者。而且,它既不是从过去有转移到这里来,也不是没有原因就从那里在这里出现。在这里,前一个因为命终而称为“死”,后一个因为连接上另一有等而称为“结生”。巴利
Iti hetaṃ laddhappaccayaṃ rūpārūpadhammamattaṃ uppajjamānaṃ bhavantaramupetīti vuccati, na satto, na jīvo. Tassa ca nāpi atītabhavato idha saṅkanti atthi, nāpi tato hetuṃ vinā idha pātubhāvo. Ettha ca purimaṃ cavanato cuti, pacchimaṃ bhavantarādipaṭisandhānato paṭisandhīti vuccati.
这里有人问:如果并没有转移,而是这样生起的话,那么在这个人身中存在的诸蕴已经灭尽,作为果之缘的业又没有去到那里,那这个果岂不是成了别人的果,或者从别处来的果?而且如果没有受用者,这个果又该属于谁?所以这种安立并不好。对此,这样说:巴利
Etthāha – nanu evaṃ asaṅkantipātubhāve sati ye imasmiṃ manussattabhāve khandhā, tesaṃ niruddhattā, phalappaccayassa ca kammassa tattha agamanato, aññassa aññato ca taṃ phalaṃ siyā . Upabhuñjake ca asati kassa taṃ phalaṃ siyā. Tasmā na sundaramidaṃ vidhānanti. Tatridaṃ vuccati –
在相续中,这个果不属于别人,也不是从别人那里来的;
种子的造作,正是成就这个道理的根据。
正是因为果的生起,受用者这个假名才得以成立。
如同树因结果实而被世俗公认。巴利
‘‘Santāne yaṃ phalaṃ etaṃ, nāññassa na ca aññato; Bījānaṃ abhisaṅkhāro, etassatthassa sādhako. ‘‘Phalassuppattiyā eva, siddhā bhuñjakasammuti; Phaluppādena rukkhassa, yathā phalati sammutī’’ti.
如果有人这样说:就算这样,这些行不论存在还是不存在,都能成为果的缘。如果存在,那么就在它们生起的那个刹那,就应当有果报;如果不存在,那么在生起之前和之后,它们就应该一直都能带来果。对这样的人,应当这样回答他:巴利
Yopi vadeyya ‘‘evaṃ santepi ete saṅkhārā vijjamānā vā phalassa paccayā siyuṃ avijjamānā vā. Yadi ca vijjamānā, pavattikkhaṇeyeva nesaṃ vipākena bhavitabbaṃ. Athāpi avijjamānā, pavattito pubbe pacchā ca niccaṃ phalāvahā siyu’’nti. So evaṃ vattabbo –
这些诸行由已作的业为缘,而非恒常带来果报;
在这里,应当以担保等为例来理解。巴利
‘‘Katattā paccayā ete, na ca niccaṃ phalāvahā; Pāṭibhogādikaṃ tattha, veditabbaṃ nidassana’’nti.
“识缘名色”在这里是指:受、想、行这三蕴是“名”;四大种以及四大种所造色是“色”。
对于没有性根的胎生众生和卵生众生,在结生的那一刹那,有处十法聚和身十法聚,也就是二十种色法,再加上三种无色蕴,这二十三种法就应当理解为“识缘名色”。
对于有性根的众生,再加上性十法聚,就成了三十三种。对于化生的众生,比如梵身天等,在结生的那一刹那,有眼十法聚、耳十法聚、处十法聚和命根九法聚,共三十九种色法,再加上三种无色蕴,这四十二种法就是“识缘名色”。
而在欲界中,其余化生众生或湿生众生,如果诸根具足,在结生的那一刹那,有眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、处、性七种十法聚,也就是七十种色法,再加上三种无色蕴,这七十三种法就是“识缘名色”。这是最广的情况。
从最略的情况来说,则要随着各种十法聚的缺失,按各自的情形依次减少,结生时剩下的色法和无色蕴的组合,也应理解为“识缘名色”。
至于无色界众生,就只有三种无色蕴;无想众生则仅就色法而言,只有命根九法聚。以上就是结生时的判定方式。巴利
Viññāṇapaccayānāmarūpanti idha vedanā saññā saṅkhārakkhandhā nāmaṃ, cattāri ca mahābhūtāni catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpaṃ rūpaṃ. Abhāvakagabbhaseyyakānaṃ aṇḍajānañca paṭisandhikkhaṇe vatthudasakaṃ kāyadasakanti vīsati rūpāni, tayo ca arūpino khandhāti ete tevīsati dhammā viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpanti veditabbā. Sabhāvakānaṃ bhāvadasakaṃ pakkhipitvā tettiṃsa, opapātikasattesu brahmakāyikādīnaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe cakkhusotavatthudasakāni jīvitindriyanavakañcāti ekūnacattālīsa rūpāni, tayo ca arūpino khandhāti ete dvācattālīsa dhammā viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ. Kāmabhave pana sesaopapātikānaṃ saṃsedajānaṃ vā sabhāvakaparipuṇṇāyatanānaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyavatthubhāvadasakānīti sattati rūpāni, tayo ca arūpino khandhāti ete tesattati dhammā viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ. Esa ukkaṃso. Avakaṃsena pana taṃtaṃdasakavikalānaṃ tassa tassa vasena hāpetvā hāpetvā paṭisandhiyaṃ viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpasaṅkhā veditabbā. Arūpīnaṃ pana tayova arūpino khandhā, asaññānaṃ rūpato jīvitindriyanavakamevāti. Esa tāva paṭisandhiyaṃ nayo.
在这里,也许有人会问:那么,怎么才能知道“结生名色是以识为缘”呢?可以从经典和道理两方面来知道。因为在经典中,通过“随于心转之法”等这样的方式,已经从很多方面成立受等诸法以识为缘。而从道理方面来说,则是:巴利
Tattha siyā – kathaṃ panetaṃ jānitabbaṃ ‘‘paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ viññāṇapaccayā hotī’’ti? Suttato yuttito ca. Sutte hi ‘‘cittānuparivattino dhammā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. dukamātikā 62) nayena bahudhā vedanādīnaṃ viññāṇapaccayatā siddhā. Yuttito pana –
因为在这里,正是以由心所生、当下可见的色,才得以成立。
即使对于那未见的色,识也是它的缘。巴利
Cittajena hi rūpena, idha diṭṭhena sijjhati; Adiṭṭhassāpi rūpassa, viññāṇaṃ paccayo iti.
以名色为缘而有六处,这里“名”就是前面已经说过的。而在这里,“色”则明确限定为十一种:四大种、六种所依处以及命根。六处就是:眼处、耳处、鼻处、舌处、身处、意处。巴利
Nāmarūpapaccayāsaḷāyatananti nāmaṃ vuttameva. Idha pana rūpaṃ niyamato cattāri bhūtāni cha vatthūni jīvitindriyanti ekādasavidhaṃ. Saḷāyatanaṃ – cakkhāyatanaṃ, sotāyatanaṃ, ghānāyatanaṃ, jivhāyatanaṃ, kāyāyatanaṃ, manāyatanaṃ.
这里可能会有人问:那要怎么知道“名色是六处的缘”呢?因为名色存在,六处才存在。确实,有什么样的名和色,就有什么样的处;不是别的样子。巴利
Tattha siyā – kathaṃ panetaṃ jānitabbaṃ ‘‘nāmarūpaṃ saḷāyatanassa paccayo’’ti? Nāmarūpabhāve bhāvato. Tassa tassa hi nāmassa rūpassa ca bhāve taṃ taṃ āyatanaṃ hoti, na aññathāti.
以六处为缘而有触——巴利
Saḷāyatanapaccayā phassoti –
简略来说,触只有六种,就是眼触等等。
就像识一样,详细展开时,它们有三十二种。巴利
‘‘Chaḷeva phassā saṅkhepā, cakkhusamphassaādayo; Viññāṇamiva bāttiṃsa, vitthārena bhavanti te’’.
以触为缘而有受——巴利
Phassapaccayā vedanāti –
从门的角度来说,受被说为眼触所生受等诸受;
这些受按类别分,只有六种;而在这里,则有三十二种受。巴利
‘‘Dvārato vedanā vuttā, cakkhusamphassajādikā; Chaḷeva tā pabhedena, idha bāttiṃsa vedanā’’.
以受为缘,生起渴爱——巴利
Vedanāpaccayā taṇhāti –
按照色渴爱等的类别,这里说明了六种渴爱。
在那里,每一种都被认为有三种生起方式。
受苦的人渴望快乐,快乐的人还想要更多。
不过,舍因为寂静,就被说成是乐。
因此,此三受皆以渴爱为缘;
以受为缘而有渴爱,这是大仙所说的。巴利
‘‘Rūpataṇhādibhedena, cha taṇhā idha dīpitā; Ekekā tividhā tattha, pavattākārato matā. ‘‘Dukkhī sukhaṃ patthayati, sukhī bhiyyopi icchati; Upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā. ‘‘Taṇhāya paccayā tasmā, honti tissopi vedanā; Vedanāpaccayā taṇhā, iti vuttā mahesinā’’.
以渴爱为缘而有取,也就是四种取:欲取、见取、戒禁取、我语取。以取为缘而有有,这里指的是业有;而生有则是根据文句的引述来说的。以有为缘而有生,意思是:以业有为缘,结生诸蕴显现出来。巴利
Taṇhāpaccayā upādānanti cattāri upādānāni – kāmupādānaṃ, diṭṭhupādānaṃ, sīlabbatupādānaṃ, attavādupādānaṃ. Upādānapaccayā bhavoti idha kammabhavo adhippeto. Upapattibhavo pana paduddhāravasena vutto. Bhavapaccayā jātīti kammabhavapaccayā paṭisandhikhandhānaṃ pātubhāvo.
这里或许有人会问:怎么知道“有是生的缘”呢?因为即使外在的条件都一样,还是能看到众生有低劣、殊胜等差别。虽然外在的能生者、父母、精血、食物等条件都相同,但众生之中,即使是双胞胎,也能看出低劣、殊胜等差别。而这种差别并不是没有原因的,因为并非任何时候、所有人都没有差别;也不是由业有之外的别的原因造成的,因为那些由业有所生的众生,在其内在相续中并没有别的原因。所以,差别是以业有为因。业确实是众生低劣、殊胜等差别之因。因此世尊说:“业区分众生,即此低劣、殊胜等差别。”巴利
Tattha siyā – kathaṃ panetaṃ jānitabbaṃ ‘‘bhavo jātiyā paccayo’’ti ce? Bāhirapaccayasamattepi hīnapaṇītādivisesadassanato. Bāhirānañhi janakajananisukkasoṇitāhārādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ samattepi sattānaṃ yamakānampi sataṃ hīnappaṇītatādiviseso dissati. So ca na ahetuko sabbadā ca sabbesañca abhāvato, na kammabhavato aññahetuko tadabhinibbattakasattānaṃ ajjhattasantāne aññassa kāraṇassa abhāvatoti kammabhavahetukoyeva. Kammañhi sattānaṃ hīnappaṇītatādivisesassa hetu. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘kammaṃ satte vibhajati, yadidaṃ hīnappaṇītatāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.289).
在“以生为缘而有老死”等句中,因为如果没有生,就不会有所谓的老死,也不会有愁等法;而当生存在时,就会有老死,并且对于被老死所摄的苦法所触的愚者,不论是与老死相关联,还是被种种苦法所触却不与老死直接相关联,都会有愁等法生起。因此应当知道,这个生就是老死以及愁等法的缘。巴利
Jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇantiādīsu yasmā asati jātiyā jarāmaraṇaṃ nāma sokādayo vā dhammā na honti, jātiyā pana sati jarāmaraṇañceva jarāmaraṇasaṅkhātadukkhadhammaphuṭṭhassa ca bālassa jarāmaraṇābhisambandhā vā tena tena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa anabhisambandhā vā sokādayo ca dhammā honti, tasmā ayaṃ jāti jarāmaraṇassa ceva sokādīnañca paccayo hotīti veditabbā.
在“他以如此修习之心”等语句中,“为了宿住随念智”这句话说的是:为了证得、达到这个智。“种种”是指多种多样、各式各样,或者说以种种方式呈现,这就是“种种”的意思。“宿住”是指从紧挨着过去的那个生命开始,在各地曾经住过的相续。“随念”是指依照蕴的次第,或者依照死亡与结生的次第,一路追溯、一路回忆。能随念宿住的有六种人:外道、普通声闻、大声闻、上首弟子、独觉佛和诸佛。其中,外道只能随念四十劫,不能再多。为什么?因为他们的智慧太弱。他们无法分辨名与色,所以智慧微弱。普通声闻因为智慧强,能随念一百劫、一千劫。八十位大声闻能随念十万劫。两位上首弟子能随念一个阿僧祇劫再加十万劫。独觉佛能随念两个阿僧祇劫再加十万劫。这就是他们各自愿力所达到的极限。而诸佛则没有时间上的限制。另外,外道只能依照蕴的次第来随念,他们没办法抛开次第、直接以死亡与结生的方式来随念。就像盲人不放开拐杖而行走一样,他们也必须抓着蕴的次第才能随念。普通声闻既能依照蕴的次第随念,也能以死亡与结生的次第来跨越追溯,八十位大声闻也是如此。但两位上首弟子不需要依照蕴的次第。他们看到一个人的死亡,就看到他的结生;再看到另一个人的死亡,就看到他的结生——就这样以死亡与结生的次第一步步往前追溯,独觉佛也是这样。而诸佛既不需要依照蕴的次第,也不需要以死亡与结生的次第来跨越追溯。因为他们在无数千万劫中,无论想看到下面还是上面的任何一个地方,那个地方都会清清楚楚地显现。所以他们能把无数千万劫收摄起来,想去哪里就到哪里,像狮子跳跃一样直接抵达。他们这样行进时,智不会在中间那些生与生之间卡住,而是想取哪个地方就能取到哪个地方。巴利
So tathābhāvitena cittenātiādīsu pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāyāti etassa ñāṇassa adhigamāya, pattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Anekavihitanti anekavidhaṃ nānappakāraṃ, anekehi vā pakārehi pavattitaṃ, saṃvaṇṇitanti attho. Pubbenivāsanti samanantarātītaṃ bhavaṃ ādiṃ katvā tattha tattha nivutthasantānaṃ. Anussaratīti khandhapaṭipāṭivasena cutipaṭisandhivasena vā anugantvā anugantvā sarati. Imañhi pubbenivāsaṃ cha janā anussaranti titthiyā pakatisāvakā mahāsāvakā aggasāvakā paccekabuddhā buddhāti. Tattha titthiyā cattālīsaṃyeva kappe anussaranti , na tato paraṃ. Kasmā? Dubbalapaññattā. Tesañhi nāmarūpaparicchedavirahitattā dubbalā paññā hoti. Pakatisāvakā kappasatampi kappasahassampi anussarantiyeva balavapaññattā. Asīti mahāsāvakā satasahassakappe anussaranti. Dve aggasāvakā ekamasaṅkheyyaṃ kappasatasahassañca. Paccekabuddhā dve asaṅkheyyāni satasahassañca. Ettako hi tesaṃ abhinīhāro. Buddhānaṃ pana paricchedo nāma natthi. Titthiyā ca khandhapaṭipāṭimeva saranti, paṭipāṭiṃ muñcitvā cutipaṭisandhivasena sarituṃ na sakkonti. Yathā andhā yaṭṭhiṃ amuñcitvāva gacchanti, evaṃ te khandhapaṭipāṭiṃ amuñcitvāva saranti. Pakatisāvakā khandhapaṭipāṭiyāpi anussaranti, cutipaṭisandhivasenāpi saṅkamanti, tathā asīti mahāsāvakā. Dvinnaṃ pana aggasāvakānaṃ khandhapaṭipāṭikiccaṃ natthi. Ekassa attabhāvassa cutiṃ disvā paṭisandhiṃ passanti, puna aparassa cutiṃ disvā paṭisandhinti evaṃ cutipaṭisandhivaseneva saṅkamantā gacchanti, tathā paccekabuddhā. Buddhānaṃ pana neva khandhapaṭipāṭikiccaṃ, na cutipaṭisandhivasena saṅkamanakiccaṃ atthi. Tesañhi anekāsu kappakoṭīsu heṭṭhā vā upari vā yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ icchanti, taṃ taṃ pākaṭameva hoti. Tasmā anekāpi kappakoṭiyo saṅkhipitvā yaṃ yaṃ icchanti, tattha tattheva okkamantā sīhokkantavasena gacchanti. Evaṃ gacchantānañca nesaṃ ñāṇaṃ antarantarāsu jātīsu asajjamānaṃ icchiticchitaṭṭhānameva gaṇhāti.
在这六种能回忆过去世的人当中,外道回忆过去世时,显现出来的样子就像萤火虫的光;普通声闻弟子像灯火的光;大声闻弟子像火炬的光;上首弟子像晨星的光;独觉佛像月亮的光;而诸佛回忆过去世时,显现出来的样子就像秋天被上千道光芒装饰的太阳。外道回忆过去世,就像盲人摸着拐杖的末端走路;普通声闻弟子像走在独木桥上;大声闻弟子像走在临时绑成的腿桥上;上首弟子像走在车辆搭成的桥上;独觉佛像走在人行小路上;诸佛则像走在宽阔的大车道上。不过在这一段里,要说的重点是声闻弟子的宿住随念。巴利
Imesu pana chasu pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantesu titthiyānaṃ pubbenivāsadassanaṃ khajjopanakappabhāsadisaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti, pakatisāvakānaṃ dīpappabhāsadisaṃ, mahāsāvakānaṃ ukkāpabhāsadisaṃ, aggasāvakānaṃ osadhitārakāpabhāsadisaṃ, paccekabuddhānaṃ candappabhāsadisaṃ. Buddhānaṃ rasmisahassapaṭimaṇḍitasaradasūriyamaṇḍalasadisaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Titthiyānaṃ pubbenivāsānussaraṇaṃ andhānaṃ yaṭṭhikoṭigamanaṃ viya hoti. Pakatisāvakānaṃ daṇḍakasetugamanaṃ viya, mahāsāvakānaṃ jaṅghasetugamanaṃ viya, aggasāvakānaṃ sakaṭasetugamanaṃ viya, paccekabuddhānaṃ jaṅghamaggagamanaṃ viya, buddhānaṃ mahāsakaṭamaggagamanaṃ viya hoti. Imasmiṃ pana adhikāre sāvakānaṃ pubbenivāsānussaraṇaṃ adhippetaṃ.
所以,想要这样随念的初学者比丘,在午后托钵回来、吃完饭之后,独自到僻静处坐好,依次进入四种禅那,从作为神通基础的禅那出定后,按照前面说的方法观察缘起,然后应当作意最后一次坐下的情景。接着再作意:铺设座位、进入住处、收拾衣钵、吃饭的时候、从村里回来的时候、在村里托钵的时候、进入村里乞食的时候、离开寺院的时候、礼敬塔和菩提树的时候、洗钵的时候、接钵的时候,从接钵一直到洗脸之间所做的事,清晨所做的事,中夜所做的事,初夜所做的事。就这样按逆序作意一整个日夜所做的事。这些事对平常的心来说也是清楚的,而对遍作定心来说就更加清楚了。如果其中有什么不清楚,就再次进入基础禅那,出定后再作意。这样一来,就会像点亮的灯一样清楚。以同样的逆序方式,第二天、第三天、第四天、第五天,乃至十天、半个月、一个月、一年中所做的事,也都要这样作意。用同样的方法,从十年、二十年,一直作意到此生中自己的结生。作意时,应当把心转向过去世死亡刹那生起的名色。有智慧的比丘确实能在第一次就突破结生,取死亡刹那的名色为所缘。然而,因为过去世的名色已经彻底灭尽,而这里生起的是新的名色,所以那个地方幽暗闭塞,像一片漆黑,愚钝的人很难看清。即使这样,也不该放弃说“我没办法突破结生,取死亡刹那的名色为所缘”。而应当一次又一次地进入那个基础禅那,每次出定后都再作意那个地方。巴利
Tasmā evaṃ anussaritukāmena ādikammikena bhikkhunā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantena rahogatena paṭisallīnena paṭipāṭiyā cattāri jhānāni samāpajjitvā abhiññāpādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya vuttanayena paṭiccasamuppādaṃ paccavekkhitvā sabbapacchimā nisajjā āvajjitabbā. Tato āsanapaññāpanaṃ senāsanappavesanaṃ pattacīvarapaṭisāmanaṃ bhojanakālo gāmato āgamanakālo gāme piṇḍāya caritakālo gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhakālo vihārato nikkhamanakālo cetiyabodhivandanakālo pattadhovanakālo pattapaṭiggahaṇakālo pattapaṭiggahaṇato yāva mukhadhovanā katakiccaṃ paccūsakāle katakiccaṃ, majjhimayāme paṭhamayāme katakiccanti evaṃ paṭilomakkamena sakalaṃ rattindivaṃ katakiccaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ. Ettakaṃ pana pakaticittassapi pākaṭaṃ hoti, parikammasamādhicittassa pana atipākaṭameva. Sace panettha kiñci na pākaṭaṃ hoti, puna pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya āvajjitabbaṃ. Ettakena dīpe jalite viya pākaṭaṃ hoti . Evaṃ paṭilomakkameneva dutiyadivasepi tatiyacatutthapañcamadivasesupi dasāhepi addhamāsepi māsepi saṃvaccharepi katakiccaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ. Eteneva upāyena dasa vassāni vīsati vassānīti yāva imasmiṃ bhave attano paṭisandhi, tāva āvajjantena purimabhave cutikkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāmarūpaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ. Pahoti hi paṇḍito bhikkhu paṭhamavāreneva paṭisandhiṃ ugghāṭetvā cutikkhaṇe nāmarūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ kātuṃ. Yasmā pana purimabhave nāmarūpaṃ asesaṃ niruddhaṃ, idha aññaṃ uppannaṃ, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ āhundarikaṃ andhatamamiva hoti sududdasaṃ duppaññena. Tenāpi ‘‘na sakkomahaṃ paṭisandhiṃ ugghāṭetvā cutikkhaṇe nāmarūpārammaṇaṃ kātu’’nti dhuranikkhepo na kātabbo. Tadeva pana pādakajjhānaṃ punappunaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya vuṭṭhāya taṃ ṭhānaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ.
就像有人为了做尖顶屋的栋梁而砍一棵大树,只砍掉枝叶,斧刃就坏了;他虽然砍不倒大树,却不放弃,而是去铁匠铺让人把斧头磨锋利,再回来砍;斧刃又坏了,就再磨一次,照样再砍。他这样砍的时候,已经砍断的部分不必再砍,只砍还没断的部分,不久就能把大树砍倒。同样地,从基础禅那出定后,不再去作意之前已经作意过的内容,而是只作意结生,这样不久就能突破结生,取死亡刹那的名色为所缘。在这里,从最后一次坐下直到以结生为所缘而生起的智慧,还不叫宿住智,而是叫遍作定智。有人称它为“过去分智”,但过去分智属于色界,所以那种说法并不合理。然而,当那位比丘超越了结生,取死亡刹那现行的名色为所缘,生起意门转向心,并按照前面所说的方法生起安止心时,与那个心相应的智慧,才叫宿住随念智。他依靠与这个智相应的念,随念过去世。巴利
Evaṃ karonto hi seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso kūṭāgārakaṇṇikatthāya mahārukkhaṃ chindanto sākhāpalāsacchedanamatteneva pharasudhārāya vipannāya mahārukkhaṃ chindituṃ asakkontopi dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvāva kammārasālaṃ gantvā tikhiṇaṃ pharasuṃ kārāpetvā puna āgantvā chindeyya, puna vipannāya ca punapi tatheva kāretvā chindeyya, so evaṃ chindanto chinnassa chinnassa puna chettabbābhāvato achinnassa ca chedanato nacirasseva mahārukkhaṃ pāteyya, evameva pādakajjhānā vuṭṭhāya pubbe āvajjitaṃ anāvajjitvā paṭisandhimeva āvajjanto taṃ nacirasseva paṭisandhiṃ ugghāṭetvā cutikkhaṇe nāmarūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ kareyyāti. Tattha pacchimanisajjato pabhuti yāva paṭisandhito ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ nāma na hoti, taṃ pana parikammasamādhiñāṇaṃ nāma hoti. ‘‘Atītaṃsañāṇa’’nti petaṃ eke vadanti . Taṃ atītaṃsañāṇassa rūpāvacarattā rūpāvacaraṃ sandhāya vacanaṃ na yujjati. Yadā panassa bhikkhuno paṭisandhiṃ atikkamma cutikkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāmarūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjitvā pubbe vuttanayena appanācittaṃ uppajjati, tadāssa tena cittena sampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ nāma. Tena ñāṇena sampayuttāya satiyā pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati.
在这里,“就像这样”这个虚词是用来显示已经开始说明的种类。正因为如此,为了显示这个已经开始的宿住(宿命通)有哪些不同种类,才说了“一生”等话。其中,“一生”就是指从一个结生开始、到一个死亡结束、包含在一期生命里的五蕴相续。对“二生”等等,也应这样理解。至于“许多坏劫”等说法:正在衰败的劫叫坏劫,因为那时候所有众生都聚集到梵天界;正在增长的劫叫成劫,因为那时候众生从梵天界转出。其中,说到坏劫就已经包含了坏住劫,因为坏住劫以坏劫为根本;说到成劫也就包含了成住劫。这样一来,就含摄了《增支部》所说的四种不可计数:“比丘们,劫有这四种不可计数。哪四种?比丘们,当劫正在毁灭时,这难以计算;比丘们,当劫停留在毁灭状态时,这难以计算;比丘们,当劫正在生成时,这难以计算;比丘们,当劫停留在生成状态时,这难以计算。”巴利
Tattha seyyathidanti āraddhappakāradassanatthe nipāto. Teneva yvāyaṃ pubbenivāso āraddho, tassa pakārappabhedaṃ dassento ekampi jātintiādimāha. Tattha ekampi jātinti ekampi paṭisandhimūlaṃ cutipariyosānaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannaṃ khandhasantānaṃ. Esa nayo dvepi jātiyotiādīsu. Anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappetiādīsu pana parihāyamāno kappo saṃvaṭṭakappo tadā sabbesaṃ brahmaloke sannipatanato. Vaḍḍhamāno kappo vivaṭṭakappo tadā brahmalokato sattānaṃ vivaṭṭanato. Tattha saṃvaṭṭena saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī gahito hoti taṃmūlakattā. Vivaṭṭena ca vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Evañhi sati ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, kappassa asaṅkhyeyyāni. Katamāni cattāri? Yadā, bhikkhave, kappo saṃvaṭṭati, taṃ na sukaraṃ saṅkhātuṃ. Yadā, bhikkhave, kappo saṃvaṭṭo tiṭṭhati…pe… yadā, bhikkhave, kappo vivaṭṭati…pe… yadā, bhikkhave, kappo vivaṭṭo tiṭṭhati, taṃ na sukaraṃ saṅkhātu’’nti (a. ni. 4.156) vuttāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni pariggahitāni honti.
在这里,毁灭有三种:火毁灭、水毁灭、风毁灭。毁灭的界限也有三种:光音天、遍净天、广果天。当劫被火毁灭时,从光音天往下都被火烧尽。当劫被水毁灭时,从遍净天往下都被水消融。当劫被风毁灭时,从广果天往下都被风摧毁。不过,从广大的范围来说,任何时候都只是一个佛刹被毁灭。佛刹有三种:诞生刹、教令刹、境界刹。其中,诞生刹的范围是一万个轮围世界,如来入胎等时候,这个范围会震动。教令刹的范围是百千俱胝个轮围世界,宝经护、蕴护、幢顶护、阿吒那胝护、孔雀护这些护经的威力就在这个范围内起作用。境界刹则是无限无量的,就是“只要如来愿意”所说的那种范围。在那里,如来想知道什么,就能知道什么。这样,在这三种佛刹中,被毁灭的是教令刹;当它被毁灭时,诞生刹也就跟着毁灭了。而且毁灭时是整体一起毁灭,重新形成时也是整体一起形成。巴利
Tattha tayo saṃvaṭṭā – tejosaṃvaṭṭo, āposaṃvaṭṭo, vāyosaṃvaṭṭoti. Tisso saṃvaṭṭasīmā – ābhassarā, subhakiṇhā, vehapphalāti. Yadā kappo tejena saṃvaṭṭati, ābhassarato heṭṭhā agginā ḍayhati. Yadā āpena saṃvaṭṭati, subhakiṇhato heṭṭhā udakena vilīyati. Yadā vāyunā saṃvaṭṭati, vehapphalato heṭṭhā vātena viddhaṃsīyati. Vitthārato pana sadāpi ekaṃ buddhakkhettaṃ vinassati. Buddhakkhettaṃ nāma tividhaṃ hoti – jātikkhettaṃ, āṇākkhettaṃ, visayakkhettañca. Tattha jātikkhettaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷapariyantaṃ hoti, yaṃ tathāgatassa paṭisandhigahaṇādīsu kampati. Āṇākkhettaṃ koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷapariyantaṃ, yattha ratanaparittaṃ, khandhaparittaṃ, dhajaggaparittaṃ, āṭānāṭiyaparittaṃ , moraparittanti imesaṃ parittānaṃ ānubhāvo vattati. Visayakkhettaṃ anantamaparimāṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘yāvatā vā pana ākaṅkheyyā’’ti (a. ni. 3.81) vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ yaṃ tathāgato ākaṅkhati, taṃ taṃ jānāti. Evametesu tīsu buddhakkhettesu ekaṃ āṇākkhettaṃ vinassati, tasmiṃ pana vinassante jātikkhettaṃ vinaṭṭhameva hoti, vinassantañca ekatova vinassati, saṇṭhahantañca ekatova saṇṭhahati.
这个世界的毁灭和重新形成,应该这样来理解:当劫被火毁灭的时候,一开始会生起一场劫灭大云,在百千俱胝轮围世界里降下一场大雨。人们很高兴,把所有的种子都拿出来播种。可是当庄稼刚长到只够牛啃一啃的时候,就发出如驴鸣般的雷声,却连一滴雨也不下,从那时起,雨就彻底断了。靠雨水活着的众生,逐渐投生到梵天界;靠花果活着的天神也一样。这样经过漫长的岁月,各处的水渐渐枯竭。然后鱼和龟之类也陆续死去,投生到梵天界;地狱里的众生也是这样。对此有人说:“地狱众生要等到第七个太阳出现时才会毁灭。”可是没有禅那就不能投生梵天界,而这些众生当中,有些正被饥荒折磨,有些根本没有能力证得禅那,他们怎么能投生到那里去呢?是靠着在天界获得的禅那。因为那时候,名叫“世间群集”的欲界天神们,会披散着头发,满脸泪水,用手擦着眼泪,穿着红色衣服,打扮得极其怪异可怕,在人间到处走动,这样宣告:“诸位贤者啊,从今天起十万年之后,劫就要来了,这个世界将会毁灭,大海也会干涸,这大地和须弥山王都会烧毁、消失,世界的毁灭会一直蔓延到梵天界。诸位贤者,请修习慈心!请修习悲心!请修习喜心!请修习舍心!要侍奉母亲,侍奉父亲,恭敬家中的长辈。”听了他们的话,大多数人和地居天神都生起了警醒之心,彼此心怀柔软,修习慈心等善法,投生到天界。在那里,吃了天界的殊胜食物后,修习风遍的准备工作,获得了禅那。而其他人则是靠着顺后受业投生到天界——因为在轮回中流转的众生,没有谁是完全没有顺后受业的。他们在那里也同样获得禅那。就这样,一切众生都是靠着在天界获得的禅那,投生到梵天界。巴利
Tassevaṃ vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ – yasmiṃ samaye kappo agginā nassati, āditova kappavināsakamahāmegho vuṭṭhahitvā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷe ekaṃ mahāvassaṃ vassati. Manussā tuṭṭhā sabbabījāni nīharitvā vapanti. Sassesu pana gokhāyitakamattesu jātesu gadrabharavaṃ ravanto ekabindumattampi na vassati, tadā pacchinnaṃ pacchinnameva vassaṃ hoti. Vassūpajīvino sattā kamena brahmaloke nibbattanti, pupphaphalūpajīviniyo ca devatā. Evaṃ dīghe addhāne vītivatte tattha tattha udakaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchati. Athānukkamena macchakacchapāpi kālaṃ katvā brahmaloke nibbattanti, nerayikasattāpi. Tattha ‘‘nerayikā sattamasūriyapātubhāve vinassantī’’ti eke. Jhānaṃ vinā natthi brahmaloke nibbatti, etesañca keci dubbhikkhapīḷitā, keci abhabbā jhānādhigamāya, te kathaṃ tattha nibbattantīti? Devaloke paṭiladdhajjhānavasena. Tadā hi ‘‘vassasatasahassassa accayena kappavuṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti lokabyūhā nāma kāmāvacaradevā muttasirā vikiṇṇakesā rudamukhā assūni hatthehi puñchamānā rattavatthanivatthā ativiya virūpavesadhārino hutvā manussapathe vicarantā evaṃ ārocenti – ‘‘mārisā, mārisā, ito vassasatasahassassa accayena kappavuṭṭhānaṃ bhavissati, ayaṃ loko vinassissati, mahāsamuddopi ussussissati, ayañca mahāpathavī sineru ca pabbatarājā uddayhissanti vinassissanti, yāva brahmalokā lokavināso bhavissati. Mettaṃ, mārisā, bhāvetha. Karuṇaṃ… muditaṃ… upekkhaṃ, mārisā, bhāvetha. Mātaraṃ upaṭṭhahatha, pitaraṃ upaṭṭhahatha, kule jeṭṭhāpacāyino hothā’’ti. Tesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā yebhuyyena manussā ca bhummā devā ca saṃvegajātā aññamaññaṃ muducittā hutvā mettādīni puññāni karitvā devaloke nibbattanti. Tattha dibbasudhābhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā jhānaṃ paṭilabhanti. Tadaññe pana aparapariyavedanīyena kammena devaloke nibbattanti. Aparapariyavedanīyakammarahito hi saṃsāre saṃsaranto nāma satto natthi. Tepi tattha tatheva jhānaṃ paṭilabhanti. Evaṃ devaloke paṭiladdhajjhānavasena sabbepi brahmaloke nibbattantīti.
雨停之后,又过了很长很长的时间,第二个太阳出现了。它一出现,黑夜和白天的分界就完全看不出来了。一个太阳升起,另一个太阳落下,整个世界被不间断的太阳炙烤着。平常的太阳有日天子,劫灭时的太阳则没有。平常太阳运行的时候,天空中还有云和烟飘浮;劫灭太阳运行的时候,天空没有烟云,清净得像镜面一样。除了五大河以外,其余小河等的水都干涸了。巴利
Vassūpacchedato pana uddhaṃ dīghassa addhuno accayena dutiyo sūriyo pātubhavati, tasmiṃ pātubhūte neva rattiparicchedo, na divāparicchedo paññāyati. Eko sūriyo udeti, eko atthaṃ gacchati, avicchinnasūriyasantāpova loko hoti. Yathā ca pakatisūriye sūriyadevaputto hoti, evaṃ kappavināsakasūriye natthi. Tattha pakatisūriye vattamāne ākāse valāhakāpi dhūmasikhāpi caranti. Kappavināsakasūriye vattamāne vigatadhūmavalāhakaṃ ādāsamaṇḍalaṃ viya nimmalaṃ nabhaṃ hoti. Ṭhapetvā pañca mahānadiyo sesakunnadīādīsu udakaṃ sussati.
此后又经过漫长的岁月,第三个太阳出现了。由于它的出现,连大河也干涸了。巴利
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena tatiyo sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā mahānadiyopi sussanti.
又过了很久很久,第四个太阳出现了。因为它一出现,雪山中那些大河源头的七个大湖全都干涸了,也就是:狮子崖池、鹅崖池、耳环池、车匠池、无热恼池、六牙池、拘那罗池。巴利
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena catuttho sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā himavati mahānadīnaṃ pabhavā – ‘‘sīhapapātano, haṃsapātano, kaṇṇamuṇḍako, rathakāradaho, anotattadaho, chaddantadaho, kuṇāladaho’’ti ime satta mahāsarā sussanti.
从那以后,又过了很长很长的时间,第五个太阳出现了。由于它出现,大海里的水就一点点消失,最后连一个指节那么深的水都留不住。巴利
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena pañcamo sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā anupubbena mahāsamudde aṅgulipabbatemanamattampi udakaṃ na saṇṭhāti.
从那以后,又过了很长很长的时间,第六个太阳出现了。由于它出现,整个轮围世界变成了一团浓烟,所有湿润都被烟吸干了。就像这一个轮围世界一样,百千俱胝个轮围世界也都是如此。巴利
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena chaṭṭho sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā sakalacakkavāḷaṃ ekadhūmaṃ hoti pariyādinnasinehaṃ dhūmena. Yathā cidaṃ, evaṃ koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷānipi.
从那以后,又过了很长的时间,第七个太阳出现了。因为它一出现,整个轮围世界连同百千俱胝个轮围世界一起,变成了一片火海。那些高百由旬等大小不一的须弥山峰也都崩裂毁坏,在空中就消失不见了。那火焰升腾起来,烧到了四大王天。在那里把金宫殿、宝宫殿、摩尼宫殿都烧毁之后,又烧到了三十三天。就用同样的方式,一路烧到初禅地。在那里把三个梵天界也烧毁后,一直烧到放光天才停下来。只要还有哪怕极微细的一点行法存在,这火就不会熄灭。直到一切行法彻底灭尽,它才像烧酥油的火焰一样,连灰烬都不剩下,完全熄灭。下方的虚空和上方的虚空连成一片,变成了一片巨大的黑暗。巴利
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena sattamo sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā sakalacakkavāḷaṃ ekajālaṃ hoti saddhiṃ koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷehi. Yojanasatikādibhedāni sinerukūṭānipi palujjitvā ākāseyeva antaradhāyanti. Sā aggijālā uṭṭhahitvā cātumahārājike gaṇhāti. Tattha kanakavimānaratanavimānamaṇivimānāni jhāpetvā tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ gaṇhāti. Eteneva upāyena yāva paṭhamajjhānabhūmiṃ gaṇhāti. Tattha tayopi. Brahmaloke jhāpetvā ābhassare āhacca tiṭṭhati. Sā yāva aṇumattampi saṅkhāragataṃ atthi, tāva na nibbāyati. Sabbasaṅkhāraparikkhayā pana sappitelajhāpanaggisikhā viya chārikampi anavasesetvā nibbāyati. Heṭṭhāākāsena saha upariākāso eko hoti mahandhakāro.
后来,过了很长很长时间,一大片雨云升起来,起初下的雨非常细密。渐渐地,雨越下越大,雨柱粗得像莲茎、杵棒、棕榈树干,灌满了百千俱胝个轮围世界里所有被烧过的地方,然后才消失。风从下方和横向吹起来,把水聚拢、压实,变得坚实,圆圆的,像莲叶上的水珠。那么大的水堆怎么能被压实呢?因为风给它留出了空隙。风在那里到处给水留出空隙。水就这样被风聚拢、压实、浓缩,渐渐减少,不断往下退。水每退下一层,原来梵天界的位置就出现了梵天界,上方四欲界天所在的位置就出现了天界。当水退到先前大地所在的位置时,猛烈的风就刮起来了。那些风像把紧闭风箱里的空气堵住一样,把水堵住,让它无法流动而停在那里。甜水渐渐减少时,上面就生出了一层地味。那地味色泽圆满,香气和味道也都圆满,就像不加水的米粥表面结的那层皮。那时候,在光音梵天界最早投生的众生,因为寿命尽了或者福报尽了,从那里死去,投生到这里。他们自身发光,能在空中飞行。他们按照《起世经》里说的那样,尝了那地味,被贪爱压倒,就开始用手捏成团来吃。巴利
Atha dīghassa addhuno accayena mahāmegho uṭṭhahitvā paṭhamaṃ sukhumaṃ sukhumaṃ vassati. Anupubbena kumudanāḷayaṭṭhimusalatālakkhandhādippamāṇāhi dhārāhi vassanto koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu sabbaṃ daḍḍhaṭṭhānaṃ pūretvā antaradhāyati. Taṃ udakaṃ heṭṭhā ca tiriyañca vāto samuṭṭhahitvā ghanaṃ karoti parivaṭumaṃ paduminipatte udakabindusadisaṃ. Kathaṃ tāva mahantaṃ udakarāsiṃ ghanaṃ karotīti ce? Vivarasampadānato. Taṃ hissa tahiṃ tahiṃ vivaraṃ deti. Taṃ evaṃ vātena sampiṇḍiyamānaṃ ghanaṃ kariyamānaṃ parikkhayamānaṃ anupubbena heṭṭhā otarati. Otiṇṇe otiṇṇe udake brahmalokaṭṭhāne brahmalokā, upari catukāmāvacaradevalokaṭṭhāne ca devalokā pātubhavanti. Purimapathaviṭṭhānaṃ otiṇṇe pana balavavātā uppajjanti. Te taṃ pihitadvāre dhamakaraṇe ṭhitaudakamiva nirussāsaṃ katvā rumbhanti. Madhurodakaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchamānaṃ upari rasapathaviṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Sā vaṇṇasampannā ceva hoti gandharasasampannā ca nirudakapāyāsassa upari paṭalaṃ viya. Tadā ca ābhassarabrahmaloke paṭhamatarābhinibbattā sattā āyukkhayā vā puññakkhayā vā tato cavitvā idhūpapajjanti. Te honti sayaṃpabhā antalikkhacarā. Te aggaññasutte (dī. ni. 3.120) vuttanayena taṃ rasapathaviṃ sāyitvā taṇhābhibhūtā āluppakārakaṃ paribhuñjituṃ upakkamanti.
那时,他们自身的光明消失了,黑暗出现。他们看到黑暗,就害怕起来。这时,一轮直径整整五十由旬的日轮出现,为他们驱除恐惧,让他们生起勇气。他们看到它之后,说“我们获得了光明”,高兴欢喜地说:它为我们这些害怕的人驱除了恐惧,让我们生起勇气,所以应该叫“日”。于是就给日轮取名为“日”。后来,日轮白天照亮之后落下了,他们又害怕起来,心想:我们得到的光明也没了。他们接着想:要是我们能再得到另一种光明,那就好了。仿佛知道他们的心意一样,一轮直径四十九由旬的月轮出现了。他们看到它之后,更加高兴欢喜,说:它像是知道我们的愿望才升起来的,所以应该叫“月”。于是就给月轮取名为“月”。巴利
Atha tesaṃ sayaṃpabhā antaradhāyati, andhakāro hoti. Te andhakāraṃ disvā bhāyanti. Tato nesaṃ bhayaṃ nāsetvā sūrabhāvaṃ janayantaṃ paripuṇṇapaññāsayojanaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ pātubhavati. Te taṃ disvā ‘‘ālokaṃ paṭilabhimhā’’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā ‘‘amhākaṃ bhītānaṃ bhayaṃ nāsetvā sūrabhāvaṃ janayanto uṭṭhito, tasmā sūriyo hotū’’ti sūriyotvevassa nāmaṃ karonti. Atha sūriye divasaṃ ālokaṃ katvā atthaṅgate ‘‘yampi ālokaṃ labhimha, sopi no naṭṭho’’ti puna bhītā honti, tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘‘sādhu vatassa sace aññaṃ ālokaṃ labheyyāmā’’ti. Tesaṃ cittaṃ ñatvā viya ekūnapaññāsayojanaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ pātubhavati. Te taṃ disvā bhiyyosomattāya haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā ‘‘amhākaṃ chandaṃ ñatvā viya uṭṭhito, tasmā cando hotū’’ti candotvevassa nāmaṃ karonti.
日月出现之后,星星和种种星宿也随之出现。从那时起,昼夜、月份、半月、季节和年岁便逐渐可以分辨了。而须弥山、轮围山和雪山,正是在日月出现的那一天——也就是弗伽那月的满月日——同时出现的,没有先后之别。那是怎样出现的呢?就像煮黍米粥的时候,气泡一下子全都冒出来,有的地方高高鼓起,有的地方低低陷下,有的地方平平整整;同样地,高高鼓起的地方就成了山,低低陷下的地方就成了大海,平平整整的地方就成了洲。巴利
Evaṃ candimasūriyesu pātubhūtesu nakkhattāni tārakarūpāni pātubhavanti. Tato pabhuti rattindivā paññāyanti anukkamena ca māsaddhamāsautusaṃvaccharā. Candimasūriyānaṃ pana pātubhūtadivaseyeva sinerucakkavāḷahimavantapabbatā pātubhavanti . Te ca kho apubbaṃ acarimaṃ phagguṇapuṇṇamadivaseyeva pātubhavanti. Kathaṃ? Yathā nāma kaṅgubhatte paccamāne ekappahāreneva pubbuḷakā uṭṭhahanti, eke padesā thūpathūpā honti, eke ninnaninnā eke samasamā, evamevaṃ thūpathūpaṭṭhāne pabbatā honti ninnaninnaṭṭhāne samuddā samasamaṭṭhāne dīpāti.
那时,那些众生在吃地味的过程中,渐渐有些变得容貌端丽,有些变得容貌丑陋。容貌端丽的人就轻视容貌丑陋的人。由于他们心生骄慢,那地味便消失了,地饼随之出现。接着,以同样的方式,地饼也消失了,藤蔓随之出现。又以同样的方式,藤蔓也消失了,自然稻随之出现——没有糠、没有秕壳,纯净芬芳,结出的米粒饱满。此后,他们的器皿自然出现。他们把稻米放进器皿,再放到石板上,火焰自己升起,把饭煮熟。那饭食就像素馨花一样。不需要汤汁或配菜,他们想吃什么味道,那饭食就自然是什么味道。他们吃这种粗劣的食物之后,从此就有了大小便。为了排泄,排泄孔道自然裂开。男人的男性特征、女人的女性特征也随之显现。于是,女人对男人、男人对女人长时间地互相凝视。由于长时间互相凝视,欲热恼便生起。接着他们就行淫。因为行这种非法之事,他们被有智慧的人呵责、困扰,为了掩盖这种非法之事,便建造了房屋。他们住在房屋里,渐渐效仿某个懈怠的众生,开始囤积粮食。从此以后,糠和秕壳便包裹住米粒,收割过的地方也不再重新生长。他们聚在一起悲叹说:“诸位啊,恶法确实已在众生中出现了!我们从前可是意所成的啊!”这应当按《阿甘尼亚经》(长部3.128)所说的方式详细展开。此后,他们便立下了界限。巴利
Atha tesaṃ sattānaṃ rasapathaviṃ paribhuñjantānaṃ kamena ekacce vaṇṇavanto, ekacce dubbaṇṇā honti. Tattha vaṇṇavanto dubbaṇṇe atimaññanti. Tesaṃ atimānapaccayā sā rasapathavī antaradhāyati, bhūmipappaṭako pātubhavati. Atha tesaṃ teneva nayena sopi antaradhāyati, padālatā pātubhavati. Teneva nayena sāpi antaradhāyati, akaṭṭhapāko sāli pātubhavati akaṇo athuso suddho sugandhā taṇḍulapphalo. Tato nesaṃ bhājanāni uppajjanti. Te sāliṃ bhājane ṭhapetvā pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapenti. Sayameva jālāsikhā uṭṭhahitvā taṃ pacati. So hoti odano sumanajātipupphasadiso. Na tassa sūpena vā byañjanena vā karaṇīyaṃ atthi, yaṃ yaṃ rasaṃ bhuñjitukāmā honti, taṃ taṃ rasova hoti. Tesaṃ taṃ oḷārikaṃ āhāraṃ āharayataṃ tato pabhuti muttakarīsaṃ sañjāyati. Atha nesaṃ tassa nikkhamanatthāya vaṇamukhāni pabhijjanti . Purisassa purisabhāvo, itthiyā itthibhāvo pātubhavati. Tatra sudaṃ itthī purisaṃ, puriso ca itthiṃ ativelaṃ upanijjhāyati. Tesaṃ ativelaṃ upanijjhāyanapaccayā kāmapariḷāho uppajjati. Tato methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanti. Te asaddhammapaṭisevanapaccayā viññūhi garahiyamānā viheṭhiyamānā tassa asaddhammassa paṭicchādanahetu agārāni karonti. Te agāraṃ ajjhāvasamānā anukkamena aññatarassa alasajātikassa sattassa diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjantā sannidhiṃ karonti. Tato pabhuti kaṇopi thusopi taṇḍulaṃ pariyonandhati, lāyitaṭṭhānampi na paṭivirūhati. Te sannipatitvā anutthunanti ‘‘pāpakā vata bho dhammā sattesu pātubhūtā, mayañhi pubbe manomayā ahumhā’’ti aggaññasutte (dī. ni. 3.128) vuttanayena vitthāretabbaṃ. Tato mariyādaṃ ṭhapenti.
那时,有一个众生拿走了别人分得的东西,属于不与取。大家两次呵责他,到第三次就用手、土块和棍棒打他。这样,不与取、呵责、妄语、拿棍棒打人这些事出现之后,他们聚在一起商量:“不如我们共同推选一个众生,让他来如法地呵责该呵责的人,谴责该谴责的人,驱逐该驱逐的人。我们大家就各自分出一份稻米给他。”就在众生们这样作出决定的时候,在这个劫中,这位世尊当时还是菩萨,在那些众生当中相貌最端正、最悦目,最有威势,具足智慧,有能力施行惩治和摄护。他们便走到他跟前,请求他,并共同推选了他。他因为“被大众所推选”,所以称为“大选出”;因为“是田地的统领”,所以称为“刹帝利”;因为“如法、公平地使他人欢喜”,所以称为“王”。他以这三个名字为人所知。世间凡是希奇殊胜的地位,菩萨都是最初的那个人。就这样,以菩萨为开端,刹帝利阶层建立起来之后,婆罗门等种姓也渐渐形成了。其中,从毁灭劫的大雨云生起,直到火焰熄灭,这是一阿僧祇,称为“坏”。从毁灭劫的火焰熄灭,直到充满万亿轮围山的成就大雨云出现,这是第二阿僧祇,称为“坏住”。从成就大雨云出现,直到日月出现,这是第三阿僧祇,称为“成”。从日月出现,直到再次生起毁灭劫的大雨云,这是第四阿僧祇,称为“成住”。这四个阿僧祇合为一个大劫。这样,应当知道以火毁灭和安住的情形。巴利
Atha aññataro satto aññassa bhāgaṃ adinnaṃ ādiyati. Taṃ dvikkhattuṃ paribhāsitvā tatiyavāre pāṇileḍḍudaṇḍehi paharanti. Te evaṃ adinnādānagarahamusāvādadaṇḍādānesu uppannesu sannipatitvā cintayanti ‘‘yaṃnūna mayaṃ ekaṃ sattaṃ sammanneyyāma, yo no sammā khīyitabbaṃ khīyeyya, garahitabbaṃ garaheyya, pabbājetabbaṃ pabbājeyya. Mayaṃ panassa sālīnaṃ bhāgaṃ anupadassāmā’’ti. Evaṃ katasanniṭṭhānesu pana sattesu imasmiṃ tāva kappe ayameva bhagavā bodhisattabhūto tena samayena tesu sattesu abhirūpataro ca dassanīyataro ca mahesakkhataro ca buddhisampanno paṭibalo niggahapaggahaṃ kātuṃ. Te taṃ upasaṅkamitvā yācitvā sammanniṃsu. So ‘‘tena mahājanena sammatoti mahāsammato, khettānaṃ adhipatīti khattiyo, dhammena samena pare rañjetīti rājā’’ti tīhi nāmehi paññāyittha. Yañhi loke acchariyaṭṭhānaṃ, bodhisattova tattha ādipurisoti. Evaṃ bodhisattaṃ ādiṃ katvā khattiyamaṇḍale saṇṭhite anupubbena brāhmaṇādayopi vaṇṇā saṇṭhahiṃsu. Tattha kappavināsakamahāmeghato yāva jālūpacchedo, idamekamasaṅkheyyaṃ saṃvaṭṭoti vuccati. Kappavināsakajālūpacchedato yāva koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaparipūrako sampattimahāmegho, idaṃ dutiyamasaṅkheyyaṃ saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyīti vuccati. Sampattimahāmeghato yāva candimasūriyapātubhāvo, idaṃ tatiyamasaṅkheyyaṃ vivaṭṭoti vuccati. Candimasūriyapātubhāvato yāva puna kappavināsakamahāmegho, idaṃ catutthamasaṅkheyyaṃ vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīti vuccati. Imāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni eko mahākappo hoti. Evaṃ tāva agginā vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
当劫被水毁灭的时候,一开始会生起毁灭劫的大雨云,这应该按照前面所说的方式详细说明。但这里有一个不同之处:就像那边出现第二个太阳一样,这里生起的是毁灭劫的碱水大雨云。它一开始细细密密地下着雨,然后渐渐变成倾盆大雨,灌满万亿个轮围世界。凡是碰到碱水的地方,大地、山岳等等全都消融。水被风从四面八方持住。水从地面一直淹到第二禅天,在那里把三个梵天界都消融掉,碰到遍净天就停住了。只要还有哪怕极微细的行法存在,水就不会退去。巴利
Yasmiṃ pana samaye kappo udakena nassati, āditova kappavināsakamahāmegho uṭṭhahitvāti pubbe vuttanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yathā tattha dutiyo sūriyo, evamidha kappavināsako khārūdakamahāmegho uṭṭhāti. So ādito sukhumaṃ sukhumaṃ vassanto anukkamena mahādhārāhi koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷānaṃ pūrento vassati. Khārūdakena phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhā pathavīpabbatādayo vilīyanti. Udakaṃ samantato vātehi dhārīyati. Pathavito yāva dutiyajjhānabhūmiṃ udakaṃ gaṇhāti, tattha tayopi brahmaloke vilīyāpetvā subhakiṇhe āhacca tiṭṭhati. Taṃ yāva aṇumattampi saṅkhāragataṃ atthi, tāva na vūpasammati.
然而,当水所及的一切行法被制伏之后,就会迅速止息、消失。下方虚空和上方虚空合成一片大黑暗,这一切和前面所说的一样。只是这里是以光音梵天为起点,世界才显现出来。众生从遍净梵天命终后,投生到光音梵天等处。其中,从坏劫的大雨云开始,直到坏劫的碱水断绝,这是一个阿僧祇劫;从水断绝到成就大雨云,这是第二个阿僧祇劫;从成就大雨云……乃至……这四个阿僧祇劫合为一个大劫。应当这样理解由水而坏灭和由水而成立的过程。巴利
Udakānugataṃ pana sabbasaṅkhāragataṃ abhibhavitvā sahasā vūpasammati, antaradhānaṃ gacchati. Heṭṭhāākāsena saha upariākāso eko hoti mahandhakāroti sabbaṃ vuttasadisaṃ. Kevalaṃ panidha ābhassarabrahmalokaṃ ādiṃ katvā loko pātubhavati. Subhakiṇhato ca cavitvā ābhassaraṭṭhānādīsu sattā nibbattanti. Tattha kappavināsakamahāmeghato yāva kappavināsakakhārūdakūpacchedo, idamekaṃ asaṅkheyyaṃ. Udakūpacchedato yāva sampattimahāmegho, idaṃ dutiyamasaṅkheyyaṃ. Sampattimahāmeghato…pe… imāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni eko mahākappo hoti. Evaṃ udakena vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
不过,当劫被风毁坏的时候,最初生起坏劫的大云,应当依照前面所说的方式详细说明。这里的差别是:就像在那里生起第二个太阳一样,在这里则是为了坏劫而生起风。它首先扬起粗尘,接着扬起细尘、细沙、粗沙、砾石、石块等,乃至扬起像尖顶屋那么大的岩石,以及站在崎岖不平地方的大树。这些东西从地面升上虚空后就不再落下来,就在那里碎成粉末,归于消失。然后,风从下方大地渐次生起,把大地翻转过来,根朝上抛向空中。一百由旬大小的地块,乃至两百由旬、三百由旬、四百由旬、五百由旬大小的地块,也都碎裂开来,被风的猛力抛向空中,就在空中碎成粉末,归于消失。风还把轮围山和须弥山也举起来抛向空中。它们互相撞击,碎成粉末而毁灭。用同样的方式,风摧毁了地上的天宫和空中的天宫,摧毁了六欲天界,摧毁了百千俱胝的轮围山。在那里,轮围山与轮围山、雪山与雪山、须弥山与须弥山互相碰撞,碎成粉末而毁灭。风从地面一直波及到第三禅天,在那里摧毁了三个梵天界之后,碰到广果天就停住了。这样,风摧毁了一切行法之后,自己也毁灭了。下方虚空和上方虚空合为一体,成为一片大黑暗,这跟前面所说完全一样。但在这里,世界是以遍净天梵天界为开端而显现的。众生从广果天死去后,投生在遍净天等处。其中,从坏劫大云到坏劫之风停止,这是一个阿僧祇劫。从风停止到成就大云,这是第二个阿僧祇劫……乃至……这四个阿僧祇劫构成一个大劫。应当这样理解由风毁坏和由风成立的过程。巴利
Yasmiṃ pana samaye kappo vātena vinassati, āditova kappavināsakamahāmegho vuṭṭhahitvāti pubbe vuttanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yathā tattha dutiyasūriyo, evamidha kappavināsanatthaṃ vāto samuṭṭhāti. So paṭhamaṃ thūlarajaṃ uṭṭhāpeti, tato saṇharajaṃ sukhumavālikaṃ thūlavālikaṃ sakkharapāsāṇādayoti yāva kūṭāgāramatte pāsāṇe visamaṭṭhāne ṭhitamahārukkhe ca uṭṭhāpeti. Te pathavito nabhamuggatā na puna patanti, tattheva cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā abhāvaṃ gacchanti. Athānukkamena heṭṭhāmahāpathaviyā vāto samuṭṭhahitvā pathaviṃ parivattetvā uddhaṃ mūlaṃ katvā ākāse khipati. Yojanasatappamāṇā pathavippadesā dviyojanatiyojanacatuyojanapañcayojanasatappamāṇāpi bhijjitvā vātavegukkhittā ākāseyeva cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā abhāvaṃ gacchanti. Cakkavāḷapabbatampi sinerupabbatampi vāto ukkhipitvā ākāse khipati. Te aññamaññaṃ abhihantvā cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā vinassanti. Eteneva upāyena bhūmaṭṭhakavimānāni ca ākāsaṭṭhakavimānāni ca vināsento cha kāmāvacaradevaloke vināsetvā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷāni vināseti. Tattha cakkavāḷā cakkavāḷehi, himavantā himavantehi, sinerū sinerūhi aññamaññaṃ samāgantvā cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā vinassanti. Pathavito yāva tatiyajjhānabhūmiṃ vāto gaṇhāti, tattha tayo brahmaloke vināsetvā vehapphale āhacca tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ sabbasaṅkhāragataṃ vināsetvā sayampi vinassati. Heṭṭhāākāsena saha upariākāso eko hoti mahandhakāroti sabbaṃ vuttasadisaṃ. Idha pana subhakiṇhabrahmalokaṃ ādiṃ katvā loko pātubhavati. Vehapphalato ca cavitvā subhakiṇhaṭṭhānādīsu sattā nibbattanti. Tattha kappavināsakamahāmeghato yāva kappavināsakavātūpacchedo, idamekaṃ asaṅkheyyaṃ. Vātūpacchedato yāva sampattimahāmegho, idaṃ dutiyamasaṅkheyyaṃ…pe… imāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni eko mahākappo hoti. Evaṃ vātena vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
世界为什么会这样毁灭?原因是不善根。当不善根增长时,世界就会这样毁灭。其中,贪增长得更厉害时,世界被火毁灭;嗔增长得更厉害时,世界被水毁灭。不过也有人说:“嗔增长得更厉害时被火毁灭,贪增长得更厉害时被水毁灭。”痴增长得更厉害时,世界被风毁灭。虽然世界是这样毁灭的,但并不是连续不断地被火毁灭,而是第七次被火毁灭,第八次时被水毁灭;接着又第七次被火毁灭,第八次时又被水毁灭。像这样,每到第八次就被水毁灭,在经历了七次水毁灭之后,又再第七次被火毁灭。到这时,已经过去了六十三劫。在这期间,风阻止了已经轮到的水灾坏劫而获得机会,便摧破寿命长达六十四劫的遍净天,毁灭了世界。巴利
Kiṃ kāraṇā evaṃ loko vinassati? Akusalamūlakāraṇā. Akusalamūlesu hi ussannesu evaṃ loko vinassati. So ca kho rāge ussannatare agginā vinassati, dose ussannatare udakena vinassati. Keci pana ‘‘dose ussannatare agginā, rāge udakenā’’ti vadanti. Mohe ussannatare vātena vinassati. Evaṃ vinassantopi ca nirantarameva satta vāre agginā nassati, aṭṭhame vāre udakena. Puna satta vāre agginā, aṭṭhame vāre udakenāti evaṃ aṭṭhame aṭṭhame vāre vinassanto sattakkhattuṃ udakena vinassitvā puna satta vāre agginā nassati. Ettāvatā tesaṭṭhi kappā atītā honti. Etthantare udakena nassanavāraṃ sampattampi paṭibāhitvā laddhokāso vāto paripuṇṇacatusaṭṭhikappāyuke subhakiṇhe viddhaṃsento lokaṃ vināseti.
能回忆宿世的比丘,也能回忆劫数。他在这些劫中,能回忆许多坏劫、许多成劫、许多坏成劫。说到“坏劫、成劫”,是取劫的一半来说的;说到“坏成劫”,是取整个劫来说的。那他是怎么回忆的呢?是以“我曾生在那边”这种方式来回忆的。其中,“我曾生在那边”的意思是:在那个坏劫里,我曾存在于那样的有、那样的胎、那样的趣、那样的识住、那样的众生居、那样的众生聚之中。“名叫某某”,就是帝须或富楼须这类名字;“姓某某”,就是迦旃延或迦叶这类姓。这是就他回忆过去生中自己的姓名来说的。如果他想回忆那时的容貌好坏、生活粗劣或精致、苦乐多少、寿命长短,他也能回忆。所以说“容貌如此……乃至寿命如此”。其中,“容貌如此”,就是白皙或黝黑。“饮食如此”,就是吃米饭肉食,或者吃现成的果子。“感受如此苦乐”,就是以种种方式感受身体的、心理的、有染着的、无染着的等各类苦乐。“寿命如此”,就是寿命只有百岁,或者长达八百四十万劫。巴利
Pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantopi ca kappānussaraṇako bhikkhu etesu kappesu anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe anussarati. Saṃvaṭṭakappe vivaṭṭakappeti ca kappassa aḍḍhaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappeti sakalakappaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ anussaratīti ce? Amutrāsintiādinā nayena. Tattha amutrāsinti amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappe ahaṃ amumhi bhave vā yoniyā vā gatiyā vā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā vā sattāvāse vā sattanikāye vā āsiṃ. Evaṃnāmoti tisso vā phusso vā. Evaṃgottoti kaccāno vā kassapo vā. Idamassa atītabhave attano nāmagottānussaraṇavasena vuttaṃ. Sace pana tasmiṃ kāle attano vaṇṇasampattiṃ vā lūkhapaṇītajīvikabhāvaṃ vā sukhadukkhabahulataṃ vā appāyukadīghāyukabhāvaṃ vā anussaritukāmo hoti, tampi anussaratiyeva. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃvaṇṇo…pe… evamāyupariyanto’’ti. Tattha evaṃvaṇṇoti odāto vā sāmo vā. Evamāhāroti sālimaṃsodanāhāro vā pavattaphalabhojano vā. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti anekappakārena kāyikacetasikānaṃ sāmisanirāmisādippabhedānaṃ vā sukhadukkhānaṃ paṭisaṃvedī. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ vassasataparimāṇāyupariyanto vā caturāsītikappasatasahassāyupariyanto vā.
我从那里死后,又投生到了别处:我从那个存在、胎、趣、识住、众生居、众生聚中死后,又投生到了名为某某的存在、胎、趣、识住、众生居、众生聚中。我也在那里有过:然后,我又在那个存在、胎、趣、识住、众生居、众生聚中出现了。名为某某等等,按照前面所说的方式理解。
另外,因为“我在那里有过”这句,是逐步向上回忆、直到随心所欲的范围的忆念;“从那里死后”则是返回时的观察。因此,“投生在这里”是就今生投生处的紧邻前一个投生处,而说“投生在别处”。应当知道,这是针对紧邻今生投生处之前的那一个投生处而说的。
“我也在那里有过”等等,则是为了显示他在那紧邻的投生处回忆姓名、族姓等。“我从那里死后,投生在这里”:我从那紧邻的前一个投生处死后,在这里投生到了名为某某的刹帝利家族或婆罗门家族。“如是”就是如此。“具有相貌,具有标识”:以姓名、族姓为标识,以肤色等为相貌。因为众生凭姓名、族姓被指称为帝须、富楼须、迦叶;凭肤色等则被区分为黝黑、白皙等。所以,姓名、族姓是标识,其余的是相貌。巴利
Sotato cuto amutra udapādinti so ahaṃ tato bhavato yonito gatito viññāṇaṭṭhitito sattāvāsato sattanikāyato vā cuto puna amukasmiṃ nāma bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā udapādiṃ. Tatrāpāsinti atha tatrāpi bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā puna ahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmotiādi vuttanayameva. Apica yasmā amutrāsinti idaṃ anupubbena ārohantassa yāvaticchakaṃ (visuddhi. 2.410) anussaraṇaṃ, so tato cutoti paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇaṃ, tasmā idhūpapannoti imissā idhūpapattiyā anantaramevassa upapattiṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya amutra udapādinti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tatrāpāsinti evamādi panassa tatra imissā upapattiyā anantare upapattiṭṭhāne nāmagottādīnaṃ anussaraṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. So tato cuto idhūpapannoti svāhaṃ tato anantarūpapattiṭṭhānato cuto idha amukasmiṃ nāma khattiyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā nibbattoti. Itīti evaṃ. Sākāraṃ sauddesanti nāmagottavasena sauddesaṃ, vaṇṇādivasena sākāraṃ. Nāmagottena hi satto tisso phusso kassapoti uddisīyati, vaṇṇādīhi sāmo odātoti nānattato paññāyati. Tasmā nāmagottaṃ uddeso, itare ākārāti.
54. 天眼智解说的注释巴利
54. Dibbacakkhuñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
106 106. 在天眼智的解说中,“作意光明想”是指:无论白天还是夜晚,对太阳光、月光、宝珠光等光明,都作意“这是光明”。这样作意时,因为光明想持续在心中生起,所以称为“作意光明想”。“确立昼想”是指:这样作意光明想之后,安立“这是白天”的想。“于夜间亦如白天”是指:就像白天看见光明那样,夜晚也这样作意。“于白天亦如夜间”是指:就像夜晚看见光明那样,白天也这样作意。“以如是开放之心”是指以这样没有遮蔽的心。“无缠缚”是指四面八方都没有被缠缚。“修习具光辉之心”是指增长具有光辉的心。这里说的是以光明为所缘的天眼遍作心。或者这是指以光明遍为所缘的第四禅。当他这样修习时,心就变得光明,远离黑暗的障碍。因此,想要生起天眼的初学善男子,应当依照这部经,把以遍为所缘的神通基础禅那,从各方面修到堪能引导的程度;然后在火遍、白遍、光明遍这三种遍中,取其中一种作为近行,在近行禅那的范围内修习、扩展并安住,但不应在这里生起安止——这就是意趣所在。因为如果生起安止,就成了以基础禅那为依止,而不是以遍作为所依。然而在这三种遍中,光明遍最为殊胜;随顺它,另外两种遍也被提到。所以,应以光明遍或其余任何一种为所缘,生起四禅,然后再停留在近行的阶段增长遍。在逐渐增长的地方,就在其中看见色相。然而,看见色相时,如果以那个遍作心不散发光明,遍作的时机就过去了,光明便消失;光明消失时,色相也看不见了。这时,他应一再进入基础禅那本身,从那里出来后遍放光明。这样次第推进,光明就变得有力。他心里限定“这里要有光明”,光明就停留在那里。即使整天坐着观看,也能看见色相。在这里,当那位比丘的肉眼所不能到达的、在腹腔内的、依于心脏的、在地面下方的、隔着墙壁山岳城墙的、在他方轮围界的色,以智眼出现在面前,就像肉眼看见一样,那时天眼就已经生起。在这里,只有那个能见色的,才是天眼,而不是之前那些心。巴利
106. Dibbacakkhuñāṇaniddese ālokasaññaṃ manasi karotīti divā vā rattiṃ vā sūriyajoticandamaṇiālokaṃ ālokoti manasi karoti. Evaṃ manasikaronto ca ālokoti saññaṃ manasi pavattanato ‘‘ālokasaññaṃ manasi karotī’’ti vuccati. Divāsaññaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti evaṃ ālokasaññaṃ manasikaritvā divāti saññaṃ ṭhapeti. Yathādivā tathā rattinti yathā divā āloko diṭṭho, tatheva rattimpi manasi karoti. Yathā rattiṃ tathā divāti yathā rattiṃ āloko diṭṭho, tatheva divāpi manasi karoti. Iti vivaṭena cetasāti evaṃ apihitena cittena. Apariyonaddhenāti samantato anaddhena. Sappabhāsaṃ cittaṃ bhāvetīti saobhāsaṃ cittaṃ vaḍḍheti. Etena dibbacakkhussa parikammālokārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ kathitaṃ. Ālokakasiṇārammaṇaṃ catutthajjhānameva vā sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tassevaṃ bhāvayato obhāsajātaṃ cittaṃ hoti vigatandhakārāvaraṇaṃ. Tena hi dibbacakkhuṃ uppādetukāmena ādikammikena kulaputtena imissāyeva pāḷiyā anusārena kasiṇārammaṇaṃ abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ sabbākārena abhinīhārakkhamaṃ katvā ‘‘tejokasiṇaṃ odātakasiṇaṃ ālokakasiṇa’’nti imesu tīsu kasiṇesu aññataraṃ āsannaṃ kātabbaṃ, upacārajjhānagocaraṃ katvā vaḍḍhetvā ṭhapetabbaṃ, na tattha appanā uppādetabbāti adhippāyo. Sace hi uppādeti, pādakajjhānanissayaṃ hoti, na parikammanissayaṃ. Imesu ca pana tīsu ālokakasiṇaṃyeva seṭṭhataraṃ, tadanulomena pana itaraṃ kasiṇadvayampi vuttaṃ. Tasmā ālokakasiṇaṃ itaresaṃ vā aññataraṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cattāri jhānāni uppādetvā puna upacārabhūmiyaṃyeva ṭhatvā kasiṇaṃ vaḍḍhetabbaṃ. Vaḍḍhitavaḍḍhitaṭṭhānassa antoyeva rūpagataṃ passitabbaṃ. Rūpagataṃ passato panassa tena byāpārena parikammacittena ālokapharaṇaṃ akubbato parikammassa vāro atikkamati, tato āloko antaradhāyati, tasmiṃ antarahite rūpagatampi na dissati. Athānena punappunaṃ pādakajjhānameva pavisitvā tato vuṭṭhāya āloko pharitabbo. Evaṃ anukkamena āloko thāmagato hotīti. ‘‘Ettha āloko hotū’’ti yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ paricchindati, tattha āloko tiṭṭhatiyeva. Divasampi nisīditvā passato rūpadassanaṃ hoti. Tattha yadā tassa bhikkhuno maṃsacakkhussa anāpāthagataṃ antokucchigataṃ hadayavatthunissitaṃ heṭṭhāpathavītalanissitaṃ tirokuṭṭapabbatapākāragataṃ paracakkavāḷagatanti idaṃ rūpaṃ ñāṇacakkhussa āpāthaṃ āgacchati, maṃsacakkhunā dissamānaṃ viya hoti, tadā dibbacakkhu uppannaṃ hoti. Tadeva cettha rūpadassanasamatthaṃ, na pubbabhāgacittāni.
这里,天眼的生起过程是这样的:以刚才所说的那种色作为所缘,在意门转向心生起并灭去之后,再以同一个色作为所缘,生起四个或五个速行心。这一点应当按前面所说的方式来了知。这个智既称为“了知有情死生的智”,也称为“天眼智”。不过,对凡夫来说,它会成为障碍。因为他一旦决意“无论哪里都要有光”,即使穿透大地、海洋和山岳,也会变成一片光明。这时,如果他看到夜叉、罗刹等恐怖的形象,就会生起恐惧。由于恐惧,他的心变得散乱,从而退失禅那。因此,在观察色法时,必须保持警觉,不能疏忽大意。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ dibbacakkhuno uppattikkamo – vuttappakārametaṃ rūpamārammaṇaṃ katvā manodvārāvajjane uppajjitvā niruddhe tadeva rūpamārammaṇaṃ katvā cattāri pañca vā javanāni uppajjantīti pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idaṃ pana ñāṇaṃ ‘‘sattānaṃ cutūpapāte ñāṇa’’ntipi ‘‘dibbacakkhuñāṇa’’ntipi vuccati. Taṃ panetaṃ puthujjanassa paripantho hoti. So hi ‘‘yattha yattha āloko hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāti, taṃ taṃ pathavīsamuddapabbate vinivijjhitvāpi ekālokaṃ hoti. Athassa tattha bhayānakāni yakkharakkhasādirūpāni passato bhayaṃ uppajjati. Tena cittavikkhepaṃ patvā jhānavibbhantako hoti. Tasmā rūpadassane appamattena bhavitabbaṃ.
为了知众生死亡与再生的智慧,就是为了知道众生的死和生的智慧。依靠那种智慧,能知道众生的死和生,这就是天眼智的用意。所谓“以天眼”,意思和前面说的一样。“清净”是指:因为看见死与生能成为见解清净的原因,所以是清净的。如果一个人只看见死、看不见生,就会执著断见;如果只看见生、看不见死,就会执著“有新众生出现”的见解。但如果两者都看见,因为这样能超越这两种错误见解,所以这种看见就成为他见解清净的原因。佛弟子们正是两者都看见的,因此说“由于看见死与生,成为见解清净的原因,所以是清净”。“超越人界”是指:超越了常人的活动范围,因为能看见色法,所以是超越人界;或者说,因为超越了人间的肉眼,所以是超越人界。也就是以那清净、超越人界的天眼。巴利
Sattānaṃ cutūpapātañāṇāyāti sattānaṃ cutiyā ca upapāte ca ñāṇāya. Yena ñāṇena sattānaṃ cuti ca upapāto ca ñāyati, tadatthaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dibbena cakkhunāti vuttatthameva. Visuddhenāti cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttā visuddhaṃ. Yo hi cutimattameva passati, na upapātaṃ, so ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo upapātameva passati, na cutiṃ, so navasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo pana tadubhayaṃ passati, so yasmā duvidhampi taṃ diṭṭhigatamativattati, tasmāssa taṃ dassanaṃ diṭṭhivisuddhihetu hoti. Ubhayañcetaṃ buddhaputtā passanti . Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttā visuddha’’nti. Manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā rūpadassanena atikkantamānusakaṃ, mānusakaṃ vā maṃsacakkhuṃ atikkantattā atikkantamānusakaṃ. Tena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena.
以肉眼看见众生那样,用天眼观察众生。在这里,“正在死去、正在投生”是指在死亡那一刹那或投生那一刹那,是无法用天眼看到的;但那些临近死亡、现在就要命终的众生,就是“正在死去”;那些已经取得结生、刚刚投生的众生,就是“正在投生”。他示现自己能看见这样正在死去和正在投生的众生。“卑下”是指因为与痴的等流果相应,在种姓、家族、财富等方面被人轻视、鄙视、看不起、瞧不上。“高贵”是指因为与无痴的等流果相应,与前者相反。“美貌”是指因为与无嗔的等流果相应,具有可爱、可意、悦目的容貌。“丑陋”是指因为与嗔的等流果相应,具有不可爱、不可意、不悦目的容貌,也有相貌不佳、形态丑陋的意思。“善趣”是指投生到善趣,或者因为与无贪的等流果相应,成为富有、拥有大财富者。“恶趣”是指投生到恶趣,或者因为与贪的等流果相应,成为贫穷、缺少饮食者。“随业而趣”是指随着各自所积累的业,投生到相应的去处。在这里,前面“正在死去”等语句说明了天眼的作用,而这一句则说明了随业趣智的作用。巴利
Satte passatīti manussānaṃ maṃsacakkhunā viya satte oloketi. Cavamāne upapajjamāneti ettha cutikkhaṇe upapattikkhaṇe vā dibbacakkhunā daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā, ye pana āsannacutikā idāni cavissanti. Te cavamānā. Ye ca gahitapaṭisandhikā sampatinibbattā vā, te upapajjamānāti adhippetā. Te evarūpe cavamāne ca upapajjamāne ca passatīti dasseti. Hīneti mohanissandayuttattā hīnānaṃ jātikulabhogādīnaṃ vasena hīḷite ohīḷite oññāte avaññāte. Paṇīteti amohanissandayuttattā tabbiparīte. Suvaṇṇeti adosanissandayuttattā iṭṭhakantamanāpavaṇṇayutte. Dubbaṇṇeti dosanissandayuttattā aniṭṭhākantāmanāpavaṇṇayutte, anabhirūpe virūpetipi attho. Sugateti sugatigate, alobhanissandayuttattā vā aḍḍhe mahaddhane. Duggateti duggatigate, lobhanissandayuttattā vā dalidde appannapāne. Yathākammūpageti yaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ upacitaṃ, tena tena upagate. Tattha purimehi ‘‘cavamāne’’tiādīhi dibbacakkhukiccaṃ vuttaṃ, iminā pana padena yathākammūpagañāṇakiccaṃ.
这个智的生起过程是这样的:在这里,一位比丘朝着下方的地狱方向扩展光明,看见地狱的众生正在承受巨大的痛苦,这种看见只是天眼的作用。他这样思惟:“这些众生到底造了什么业,才承受这样的痛苦?”接着,以“他们造了这样的业”为所缘的智就生起了。同样地,他朝着上方的天界方向扩展光明,看见欢喜园、杂林园、丛苇园等处的众生正在享受广大的福报,这种看见也只是天眼的作用。他这样思惟:“这些众生到底造了什么业,才享受到这样的福报?”接着,以“他们造了这样的业”为所缘的智就生起了。这就叫做随业趣智。这个智没有单独的遍作。就像这个智一样,未来分智也是如此。因为这两种智都是以天眼为基础的,和天眼一起成就。巴利
Tassa ca ñāṇassa ayamuppattikkamo – idha bhikkhu heṭṭhānirayābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nerayike satte passati mahādukkhamanubhavamāne, taṃ dassanaṃ dibbacakkhukiccameva. So evaṃ manasi karoti ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ katvā ime sattā etaṃ dukkhamanubhavantī’’ti. Athassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma katvā’’ti taṃkammārammaṇaṃ ñāṇamuppajjati. Tathā uparidevalokābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nandanavanamissakavanaphārusakavanādīsu satte passati mahāsampattiṃ anubhavamāne, tampi dassanaṃ dibbacakkhukiccameva. So evaṃ manasi karoti ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ katvā ime sattā etaṃ sampattiṃ anubhavantī’’ti. Athassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma katvā’’ti taṃkammārammaṇaṃ ñāṇamuppajjati. Idaṃ yathākammūpagañāṇaṃ nāma. Imassa visuṃ parikammaṃ nāma natthi. Yathā cimassa, evaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇassāpi. Dibbacakkhupādakāneva hi imāni dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhanti.
在“这些尊者们”这类话里,“这些”是指示天眼所见的那些人。“确实”是表示随顺语气的虚词。“尊者们”就是诸位尊者。“恶行”是指坏的行为,或者因为被烦恼腐蚀而称为恶行;以身造作的恶行,或者从身生起的恶行,就叫身恶行。其余两种(语恶行、意恶行)也是同样的道理。“具足”就是具备。“毁谤圣者”是指对佛、独觉佛、声闻圣者,甚至对最低的在家入流者,心怀恶意,用究竟事或贬损功德的方式加以毁谤、辱骂、呵责。其中,说“这些人没有沙门法,他们不是沙门”,这是用究竟事来毁谤;说“这些人没有禅那、没有解脱、没有道、没有果”等等,这是用贬损功德来毁谤,应当这样理解。不管他是知道而毁谤,还是不知道而毁谤,两种情况下都构成毁谤圣者。这是很重的业,类似无间业,会障碍生天、障碍证道,但还是可以补救的。所以,如果有人毁谤了圣者,他应当前去,如果对方比自己年长,就蹲坐着说:“尊者,我之前对您说了如此这般的话,请您原谅我。”如果对方比自己年轻,就顶礼之后蹲坐合掌说:“尊者,我对您说了如此这般的话,请您原谅。”如果对方已经去了别的地方,就应当亲自去,或者派同住比丘等人去请求原谅。如果既不能亲自去也不能派人去,就到那座寺院里居住的比丘们那里,如果他们比自己年轻,就蹲坐;如果比自己年长,就按上面说的对年长者的方式做,然后说:“尊者,我对某位尊者说了如此这般的话,请那位尊者原谅我。”即使当面没有得到原谅,也应当这样做。如果是独行的比丘,既不知道对方住的地方,也不知道对方去了哪里,就到一位有智慧的比丘那里说:“尊者,我对某位尊者说了如此这般的话,我回想起来心生懊悔,我该怎么办?”他会说:“你不要担心,那位长老已经原谅你了,请放下心来。”他也应当朝着圣者所去的方向合掌说:“请原谅。”如果那位圣者已经般涅槃了,就应前往他般涅槃的地方,乃至走到坟场,请求原谅。这样做了之后,既不障碍生天,也不障碍证道,就恢复正常了。巴利
Ime vata bhontotiādīsu imeti dibbacakkhunā diṭṭhānaṃ nidassanavacanaṃ. Vatāti anulomavacanatthe nipāto. Bhontoti bhavanto. Duṭṭhu caritaṃ, duṭṭhaṃ vā caritaṃ kilesapūtikattāti duccaritaṃ, kāyena duccaritaṃ, kāyato vā uppannaṃ duccaritanti kāyaduccaritaṃ. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Samannāgatāti samaṅgībhūtā. Ariyānaṃ upavādakāti buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakānaṃ ariyānaṃ antamaso gihisotāpannānampi anatthakāmā hutvā antimavatthunā vā guṇaparidhaṃsanena vā upavādakā, akkosakā garahakāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ‘‘natthi imesaṃ samaṇadhammo, assamaṇā ete’’ti vadanto antimavatthunā upavadati, ‘‘natthi imesaṃ jhānaṃ vā vimokkho vā maggo vā phalaṃ vā’’tiādīni vadanto guṇaparidhaṃsanena upavadatīti veditabbo. So ca jānaṃ vā upavadeyya ajānaṃ vā, ubhayathāpi ariyūpavādova hoti. Bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ ānantariyasadisaṃ saggāvaraṇaṃ maggāvaraṇañca, satekicchaṃ pana hoti. Tasmā yo ariyaṃ upavadati, tena gantvā sace attanā vuḍḍhataro hoti, ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā ‘‘ahaṃ āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, taṃ me khamāhī’’ti khamāpetabbo. Sace navakataro hoti, vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, tumhe idañcidañca avacaṃ, taṃ me khamathā’’ti khamāpetabbo. Sace disāpakkanto hoti, sayaṃ vā gantvā saddhivihārikādike vā pesetvā khamāpetabbo. Sace nāpi gantuṃ na pesetuṃ sakkā hoti, ye tasmiṃ vihāre bhikkhū vasanti, tesaṃ santikaṃ gantvā sace navakatarā honti, ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā, sace vuḍḍhatarā, vuḍḍhe vuttanayeneva paṭipajjitvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, asukaṃ nāma āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, khamatu me so āyasmā’’ti vatvā khamāpetabbo. Sammukhā akkhamantepi etadeva kātabbaṃ. Sace ekacārikabhikkhu hoti, neva tassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ, na gataṭṭhānaṃ paññāyati, ekassa paṇḍitassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, asukaṃ nāma āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, taṃ me anussarato vippaṭisāro hoti, kiṃ karomī’’ti vattabbaṃ. So vakkhati ‘‘tumhe mā cintayittha, thero tumhākaṃ khamati, cittaṃ vūpasamethā’’ti. Tenāpi ariyassa gatadisābhimukhena añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘khamathā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Yadi so parinibbuto hoti, parinibbutamañcaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā yāva sivathikaṃ gantvāpi khamāpetabbaṃ. Evaṃ kate neva saggāvaraṇaṃ, na maggāvaraṇaṃ hoti, pākatikameva hotīti.
“邪见”就是颠倒的见解。“以邪见执受业”是指由于邪见而执受的各种各样的业,也包括那些在邪见为根源的身业等当中教唆他人造业的人。在这里应当知道,虽然“语恶行”这一项已经涵盖了诽谤圣者,“意恶行”这一项也已经涵盖了邪见,但还是要再次说出这两者,是为了显示它们罪过极大。因为诽谤圣者的罪过极大,性质类似无间业。经中也这样说过:“舍利弗,譬如一位戒具足、定具足、慧具足的比丘,能在现法当中证得究竟智。舍利弗,我说,这样的成就者如果不舍弃那语、不舍弃那心、不舍弃那见,就会像被搬来的东西一样,被直接投进地狱。”(《中部》1.149)而比邪见罪过更大的法,确实没有别的。正如所说:“诸比丘,我看不到还有别的哪一种法,能像邪见这样罪过极大。诸比丘,邪见是诸罪过中最重的。”(《增支部》1.310)巴利
Micchādiṭṭhikāti viparītadassanā. Micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānāti micchādiṭṭhivasena samādinnanānāvidhakammā, ye ca micchādiṭṭhimūlakesu kāyakammādīsu aññepi samādapenti. Ettha ca vacīduccaritaggahaṇeneva ariyūpavāde, manoduccaritaggahaṇena ca micchādiṭṭhiyā saṅgahitāyapi imesaṃ dvinnaṃ puna vacanaṃ mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthanti veditabbaṃ. Mahāsāvajjo hi ariyūpavādo ānantariyasadisattā. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṃ ārādheyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ sāriputta vadāmi taṃ vācaṃ appahāya taṃ cittaṃ appahāya taṃ diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṃ nikkhitto, evaṃ niraye’’ti (ma. ni. 1.149). Micchādiṭṭhito ca mahāsāvajjataraṃ nāma aññaṃ natthi. Yathāha – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ, yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, micchādiṭṭhi, micchādiṭṭhiparamāni, bhikkhave, vajjānī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310).
“身坏”是指舍弃了执取的五蕴。“死后”是指在紧接着那一期生命之后,执取再生五蕴的时候。或者,“身坏”是指命根断绝,“死后”是指从死亡心之后。“恶处”等等,全都是地狱的同义词。地狱之所以叫“无幸处”,是因为它远离了被视为福德的、能导向天界和解脱的吉祥,或者说那里没有快乐的到来。因为它是痛苦的趣处和归宿,所以叫“恶趣”;又因为嗔恚多,是由丑恶的业所生的趣处,所以也叫“恶趣”。造恶业的人在那里无力地坠落,所以叫“堕落”;或者在那里身体肢节毁坏而坠落,所以也叫“堕落”。那里完全没有可以称为快乐享受的吉祥,所以叫“地狱”。巴利
Kāyassabhedāti upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā. Paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattikkhandhaggahaṇe. Atha vā kāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassupacchedā. Paraṃ maraṇāti cuticittato uddhaṃ. Apāyanti evamādi sabbaṃ nirayavevacanameva. Nirayo hi saggamokkhahetubhūtā puññasammatā ayā apetattā, sukhānaṃ vā āyassa abhāvā apāyo. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggati, dosabahulatāya vā duṭṭhena kammunā nibbattā gati duggati. Vivasā nipatanti tattha dukkaṭakārinoti vinipāto, vinassantā vā ettha patanti sambhijjamānaṅgapaccaṅgātipi vinipāto. Natthi ettha assādasaññito ayoti nirayo.
或者,用“恶处”这个词来指畜生道。畜生道确实是恶处,因为它远离了善趣;但它不是恶趣,因为那里也有大威力的龙王等众生出生。用“恶趣”这个词来指阴灵界。阴灵界既是恶处也是恶趣,因为它远离了善趣,又是痛苦的归宿;但它不是堕落处,因为它不像阿修罗那样有坠落。用“堕落”这个词来指阿修罗众。因为按照前面所说的含义,它既是恶处也是恶趣,而且从一切善处堕落,所以称为堕落。用“地狱”这个词来指无间地狱等各种地狱。“已生”:已经到达,于彼处再生,这是其含义。当按与上述相反的方式理解白品/善分。巴利
Atha vā apāyaggahaṇena tiracchānayoniṃ dīpeti. Tiracchānayoni hi apāyo sugatito apetattā, na duggati mahesakkhānaṃ nāgarājādīnaṃ sambhavato. Duggatiggahaṇena pettivisayaṃ. So hi apāyo ceva duggati ca sugatito apetattā dukkhassa ca gatibhūtattā, na tu vinipāto asurasadisaṃ avinipatitattā. Vinipātaggahaṇena asurakāyaṃ. So hi yathāvuttena atthena apāyo ceva duggati ca sabbasamussayehi ca vinipatitattā vinipātoti vuccati. Nirayaggahaṇena avīciādimanekappakāraṃ nirayamevāti. Upapannāti upagatā, tattha abhinibbattāti adhippāyo. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
这里有一个差别:用“善趣”这个词,也把人趣包括进去了;而用“天界”这个词,则只指天趣。其中,美好的去处就是善趣;因为对色等境界极为殊胜,所以叫天界。这一切都因为具有坏灭、崩解的意义,所以叫世间——这就是词义的解释。因此,“以天眼……”等全部是总结语。这样,“以天眼而见”就是这里的大意。巴利
Ayaṃ pana viseso – tattha sugatiggahaṇena manussagatipi saṅgayhati, saggaggahaṇena devagatiyeva. Tattha sundarā gatīti sugati. Rūpādīhi visayehi suṭṭhu aggoti saggo. So sabbopi lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti ayaṃ vacanattho. Iti ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā’’tiādi sabbaṃ nigamanavacanaṃ. Evaṃ dibbena cakkhunā passatīti ayamettha saṅkhepatthoti.
五种智的杂项巴利
Pañcañāṇapakiṇṇakaṃ
在这五种智当中,神变智依小、大、过去、未来、现在、内、外这些所缘,在七种所缘上生起。天耳界清净智依小、现在、内、外这些所缘,在四种所缘上生起。他心智依小、大、无量、道、过去、未来、现在、外这些所缘,在八种所缘上生起。宿住随念智巴利
Imesu pañcasu ñāṇesu iddhividhañāṇaṃ parittamahaggataatītānāgatapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhārammaṇavasena sattasu ārammaṇesu pavattati. Sotadhātuvisuddhiñāṇaṃ parittapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhārammaṇavasena catūsu ārammaṇesu pavattati. Cetopariyañāṇaṃ parittamahaggataappamāṇamaggaatītānāgatapaccuppannabahiddhārammaṇavasena aṭṭhasu ārammaṇesu pavattati. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ
宿住随念智是依小、大、无量、道、过去、内、外、不可说这八种所缘而运作的。天眼智是依小、现在、内、外这四种所缘而运作的。随业趣智是依小、大、过去、内、外这五种所缘而运作的。未来分智是依小、大、无量、道、未来、内、外、不可说这八种所缘而运作的。巴利
Parittamahaggataappamāṇamaggaatītaajjhattabahiddhānavattabbārammaṇavasena aṭṭhasu ārammaṇesu pavattati. Dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ parittapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhārammaṇavasena catūsu ārammaṇesu pavattati. Yathākammūpagañāṇaṃ parittamahaggataatītaajjhattabahiddhārammaṇavasena pañcasu ārammaṇesu pavattati. Anāgataṃsañāṇaṃ parittamahaggataappamāṇamaggaanāgataajjhattabahiddhānavattabbārammaṇavasena aṭṭhasu ārammaṇesu pavattatīti.
55. 漏尽智解说的注释巴利
55. Āsavakkhayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
107 在漏尽智解说的部分,未知当知根等已经解释过了。问“它到多少处”是为了确定每一根的生起处所。“到一处”的意思是在一个处所生起。因为生起的处所就安立在这里,所以称为“处”。“六处”是指六种道与果的刹那。为了显示未知当知根等三根中每一根都更为突出,所以说“信根以胜解为伴随”等。就像在“信根的作用是胜解”等当中,胜解等是依信根等的功能来说的;同样地,这里说“以胜解为伴随”,意思是信根以胜解的作用作为它的伴随。其余各根也是同样的道理。另外,“伴随”这个词在这里是语法性别发生了变化。“慧根”其实就是未知当知根,只是为了显示它了知的体性才单独拿出来说。因为在阿毗达摩中,也是为了显示慧在功能上的差别,将同一个慧在道刹那和果刹那中分成了八种。“以润泽为伴随”:就像沐浴粉和水一样,以滋润的作用成为心与心所的伴随。这只是就与喜相应的道来说的。在与舍相应的道中,则应当以舍根代替喜根的位置,可以理解为“不过分地长养相应法的伴随”。“以转起相续增上为伴随”:所谓“转起相续”就是正在转起的相续,也就是现行的相续。“增上”就是增上性,即转起相续的增上。由于它是现在命根之上方转起的缘,以前后相续的方式成为未知当知根在转起相续中的增上性伴随。巴利
107. Āsavakkhayañāṇaniddese anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīni vuttatthāni. Kati ṭhānāni gacchatīti ekekassa uppattiṭṭhānaniyamanatthaṃ pucchā. Ekaṃ ṭhānaṃ gacchatīti ekasmiṃ ṭhāne uppajjatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Uppattiokāsaṭṭhānañhi tiṭṭhati etthāti ṭhānanti vuccati. Cha ṭhānānīti cha maggaphalakkhaṇe. Indriyānaṃ anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīsu tīsu ekekameva adhikaṃ hotīti dassanatthaṃ saddhindriyaṃ adhimokkhaparivāraṃ hotītiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā ‘‘saddhindriyassa adhimokkhaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.12) adhimokkhādayo saddhindriyādīnaṃ kiccavasena vuttā, evamidhāpi ‘‘adhimokkhaparivāraṃ hotī’’ti saddhindriyaṃ adhimokkhatthena parivāraṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Parivāranti ca liṅgavipallāso kato. Paññindriyanti anaññātaññassāmītindriyameva pajānanasabhāvadassanatthaṃ visuṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Abhidhammepi (vibha. 219) hi paññāya kiccavisesadassanatthaṃ maggakkhaṇe ca phalakkhaṇe ca ekāva paññā aṭṭhadhā vibhattā. Abhisandanaparivāranti nhāniyacuṇṇānaṃ udakaṃ viya cittacetasikānaṃ sinehanakiccena parivāraṃ hoti. Idaṃ somanassasampayuttamaggavaseneva vuttaṃ. Upekkhāsampayuttamagge pana somanassindriyaṭṭhāne upekkhindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃ pana sampayuttānaṃ nātiupabrūhanaparivāranti gahetabbaṃ. Pavattasantatādhipateyyaparivāranti pavattā santati pavattasantati, vattamānasantānanti attho. Adhipatibhāvo ādhipateyyaṃ, pavattasantatiyā ādhipateyyaṃ pavattasantatādhipateyyaṃ. Vattamānajīvitindriyassa uparipavattiyā ca paccayattā pubbāparavasena pavattasantatiyā adhipatibhāvena anaññātaññassāmītindriyassa parivāraṃ hoti.
“在预流道刹那生起的诸法”等语,是为了说明一切与道相应的法的功德。其中,“在道刹那生起”是指只由道所等起的,不是别的。然而,由于由道等起的色法得不到善等名称,所以把它排除,而说“除了心等起色”。所有这些法,因为具有舍弃污秽、动摇等意义,所以是善。以它们为所缘而转起时,这些法没有漏,所以是无漏。它们斩断轮回之根,以涅槃为所缘,从轮回中出离,所以是导出。由于远离了称为善与不善的积聚,以称为离积的涅槃为所缘而转起,所以是趣向离积;或者因为它们摧毁、破坏现行的相续而前进,也是趣向离积。由于它们不属于世间,超脱了世间,所以是出世间。这些法以涅槃为所缘,所以是涅槃所缘。巴利
Sotāpattimaggakkhaṇejātā dhammātiādi sabbesaṃ maggasampayuttakānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha maggakkhaṇe jātāti maggasamuṭṭhitā eva, na aññe. Yasmā pana maggasamuṭṭhitampi rūpaṃ kusalādināmaṃ na labhati, tasmā taṃ apanento ṭhapetvā cittasamuṭṭhānaṃ rūpanti āha. Sabbeva hi te dhammā kucchitānaṃ salanādīhi atthehi kusalā. Te ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānā natthi etesaṃ āsavāti anāsavā. Vaṭṭamūlaṃ chindantā nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vaṭṭato niyyantīti niyyānikā. Kusalākusalasaṅkhātā cayā apetattā apacayasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattanato apacayaṃ gacchantīti apacayagāmino, pavattaṃ apacinantā viddhaṃsentā gacchantītipi apacayagāmino. Loke apariyāpannabhāvena lokato uttarā uttiṇṇāti lokuttarā. Nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ etesanti nibbānārammaṇā.
“这些八根”等话,是为了说明前面已说过的眷属状态、与它俱行的状态,以及开头所说的那些形态。其中,“八根”是按前面所说的方式,连同慧根一起成为八根。“俱生眷属”是指在八根中,每一根都与其余七根同时生起,成为它的俱生眷属。同样,这一根对其他根、其他根对这一根,就这样成为相互眷属。同样,它们也是相互依止眷属和相应眷属。“俱行”是指与那未知当知根一起达到同生等状态。“俱生”是指与它一起生起。“相杂”是指与它混合。“相应”是指与它同样依俱生等方式和合。“彼等”是指那八根法。“其”是指未知当知根。“行相”是指眷属分部。巴利
Imāni aṭṭhindriyānītiādi pubbe vuttaparivārabhāvassa ca tena sahagatādibhāvassa ca ādivuttaākārānañca dīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha aṭṭhindriyānīti pubbe vuttanayena paññindriyena saha aṭṭha. Sahajātaparivārāti aṭṭhasu ekekena saha itare itare satta sahajātā hutvā tassa sahajātaparivārā honti. Tatheva aññaṃ aññassa aññaṃ aññassāti evaṃ aññamaññaparivārā honti. Tatheva aññamaññaṃ nissayaparivārā sampayuttaparivārā ca honti. Sahagatāti tena anaññātaññassāmītindriyena saha ekuppādādibhāvaṃ gatā. Sahajātāti teneva saha jātā. Saṃsaṭṭhāti teneva saha missitā. Sampayuttāti teneva samaṃ ekuppādādipakārehi yuttā. Tevāti te eva aṭṭha indriyadhammā. Tassāti anaññātaññassāmītindriyassa. Ākārāti parivārakoṭṭhāsā.
在果位刹那生起的诸法,全部都是无记的;因为色法也是无记的,所以说它们与心等起色一起被提及。只有道是善的、能导向出离的、能朝向消尽的,因此在果位刹那不说它们是“善”、“能导向出离”和“朝向消尽”。“如是”等语是总结上述内容的结语。其中,“八重八”:在八种道与果中,每一者各有八根,因此成为八组根,总共六十四种。至于“漏”等,只是前面已解释过的意思。这里应当知道,并非只针对阿拉汉道所断的漏而说;对于其余三道所断的漏,也是借用“漏尽”这一共通名称而说的。因为有些论师认为,只有阿拉汉道智才无余断尽一切漏,所以称之为“尽智”。也正因为如此,唯有阿拉汉才被称为“诸漏尽者”。巴利
Phalakkhaṇe jātā dhammā sabbeva abyākatā hontīti rūpassapi abyākatattā cittasamuṭṭhānarūpena saha vuttā. Maggasseva kusalattā niyyānikattā apacayagāmittā ca phalakkhaṇe ‘‘kusalā’’ti ca ‘‘niyyānikā’’ti ca ‘‘apacayagāmino’’ti ca na vuttaṃ. Itītiādi vuttappakāranigamanaṃ. Tattha aṭṭhaṭṭhakānīti aṭṭhasu maggaphalesu ekekassa aṭṭhakassa vasena aṭṭha indriyaaṭṭhakāni. Catusaṭṭhi hontīti catusaṭṭhi ākārā honti. Āsavātiādi heṭṭhā vuttatthameva . Idha arahattamaggavajjheyeva āsave avatvā sesamaggattayavajjhānampi vacanaṃ āsavakkhayavacanasāmaññamattena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Arahattamaggañāṇameva hi keci āsave asesetvā āsavānaṃ khepanato ‘‘khaye ñāṇa’’nti vuccati. Tasmāyeva ca arahāyeva khīṇāsavoti vuccatīti.
56-63. 对谛智四重双解说的注释巴利
56-63. Saccañāṇacatukkadvayaniddesavaṇṇanā
108-9 在解说“谛智四重二种”时,“苦的压迫义”等说法,意思和前面讲过的一样。具足道者的智——“于苦中智”等,就像紧接着的四重那样,是依“一现观”来说的。因为谛智有两种:世间智和出世间智。世间智又分两种:随觉智和观察智。随觉智对初学者来说,是通过听闻等途径在灭和道上生起的,在苦和集上则是以它们为所缘而生起。观察智是已通达真理的人,以四谛为所缘而生起的。出世间智是通达智,以灭为所缘,从作用上通达四谛。正如经中所说:“比丘们,凡是见到苦的人,也见到苦的集,见到苦的灭,见到通往苦灭的道。”一切应当说的都已说明。这里也是从这个角度来说的。这样说,是为了表明即便是出世间智,也能获得“于苦中智”等名称。但在这里,真正指的是世间智。正因如此,才问“什么是于苦中智”等等。巴利
108-9. Saccañāṇacatukkadvayaniddese dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭhotiādīni vuttatthāneva. Maggasamaṅgissa ñāṇaṃ dukkhepetaṃ ñāṇantiādi anantaracatukke viya ekābhisamayavasena vuttaṃ. Duvidhañhi saccañāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ lokuttarañca. Lokikaṃ duvidhaṃ anubodhañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇañca. Anubodhañāṇaṃ ādikammikassa anussavādivasena nirodhe magge ca pavattati, dukkhe samudaye ca ārammaṇakaraṇavasena. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paṭividdhasaccassa catūsupi saccesu ārammaṇakaraṇavasena. Lokuttaraṃ paṭivedhañāṇaṃ nirodhamārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccato cattāri saccāni paṭivijjhati. Yathāha – ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, dukkhaṃ passati, dukkhasamudayampi so passati, dukkhanirodhampi passati, dukkhanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadampi passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1100) sabbaṃ vattabbaṃ. Idhāpi iminā vārena idameva vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana lokuttarampi ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādīni nāmāni labhatīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Idha pana lokikañāṇameva adhippetaṃ. Tasmāyeva ca tattha katamaṃ dukkhe ñāṇantiādimāha.
在这里,“缘于苦”是指以苦谛为所缘,把它当作心的对象。“慧”等词中:因为能让人把各种事物的含义看清楚,这种作用叫“慧”;又因为能通过无常等方式来了知诸法,所以也叫“慧”。这是从它自身性质上立的名称。“了知”就是了知的方式。“择”是因为它拣择无常等。“广择”是加上前缀后词形扩展了,意思是以种种方式拣择。因为拣择四谛之法,所以叫“法择”。“善察”是依照无常等相正确地把握。同一个东西,随着前缀不同,又说成“近察”“对察”,意思是对无常等法作更强、更细的观察。“贤明”是贤者的状态。“善巧”是善巧的状态。“微妙”是精细微妙的状态。“广显”是通过让无常等道理显现出来而得名。“思”是以思惟无常等而得名;或者说,它生起后能让人思惟无常等,所以也叫“思”。“伺”是仔细观察无常等。“地”就是大地。这里也是取柔软和宽广的意思,说它像大地一样,所以叫“地”。或者,慧本身就乐于安住在真实义中,所以叫“地”。“害慧”:就像雷电劈开山岩一样,它能摧毁烦恼,所以叫“害慧”;或者,以快速执取和保持的意思,叫“害慧”。它生起时,能引导人走向自利之行,并如实通达相应诸法,所以叫“引导者”。以无常等方式种种地观察诸法,所以叫“观”。以正确的方式了知无常等,所以叫“正知者”,其状态就是“正知”。就像鞭子能把偏离正道的马引回正道,同样,它能刺穿在邪道上奔驰的虚伪之心,把它引回正道,所以叫“鞭子”。巴利
Tattha dukkhaṃ ārabbhāti dukkhasaccaṃ ālambitvā, ārammaṇaṃ katvāti attho. Paññātiādīsu tassa tassa atthassa pākaṭakaraṇasaṅkhātena paññāpanaṭṭhena paññā, tena tena vā aniccādinā pakārena dhamme jānātītipi paññā. Idamassā sabhāvapadaṃ. Pajānanākāro pajānanā. Aniccādīni vicinātīti vicayo. Pavicayoti upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ, pakārena vicayoti attho. Catusaccadhammaṃ vicinātīti dhammavicayo. Aniccādīnaṃ sammā lakkhaṇavasena sallakkhaṇā. Sā eva upasagganānattena upalakkhaṇāpaccupalakkhaṇāti vuttā. Bhusaṃ lakkhaṇā te te aniccādidhamme paṭicca upalakkhaṇāti attho. Paṇḍitabhāvo paṇḍiccaṃ. Kusalabhāvo kosallaṃ. Nipuṇabhāvo nepuññaṃ. Aniccādīnaṃ vibhāvanavasena vebhabyā. Aniccādīnaṃ cintanakavasena cintā, yassa uppajjati, taṃ aniccādīni cintāpetītipi cintā. Aniccādīni upaparikkhatīti upaparikkhā. Bhūrīti pathavī. Ayampi saṇhaṭṭhena vitthataṭṭhena ca bhūrī viyāti bhūrī. Atha vā paññāyeva bhūte atthe ramatīti bhūrīti vuccati. Asani viya siluccaye kilese medhati hiṃsatīti medhā, khippaṃ gahaṇadhāraṇaṭṭhena vā medhā. Yassa uppajjati, taṃ attahitapaṭipattiyaṃ sampayuttadhamme ca yāthāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhe parinetīti pariṇāyikā. Dhamme aniccādivasena vividhā passatīti vipassanā. Sammā pakārehi aniccādīni jānātīti sampajāno, tassa bhāvo sampajaññaṃ. Uppathapaṭipanne sindhave vīthiāropanatthaṃ patodo viya uppathe dhāvanakaṃ kūṭacittaṃ vīthiāropanatthaṃ vijjhatīti patodo viya patodo.
在“见”这个特征上起主宰作用,所以叫根;以慧为本质的根,就是慧根。这话是什么意思呢?并不是像“男人的根叫男根”那样说慧之根叫慧根,而是说慧本身就是根,所以叫慧根。因为不被无明所动摇,所以叫慧力。因为能斩断烦恼,所以慧本身就是刀,叫慧刀。因为极其高耸,所以慧本身就是宫殿,叫慧宫殿。因为能照亮,所以慧本身就是光,叫慧光。因为能照耀,所以慧本身就是明,叫慧明。因为能发光,所以慧本身就是灯,叫慧灯。因为一个有慧的人结跏趺坐时,一万个世界就成了一片光、一片明、一片灯。就是针对这个才这样说。不过在这三个词里,哪怕只用一个,这个意思也能成立。而世尊顺应众生的根性,说了这些经:“比丘们,有四种光。哪四种?月光、日光、火光、慧光。比丘们,这就是四种光。比丘们,在这四种光中,慧光是最上的。”同样还有“比丘们,有四种明……比丘们,有四种灯”。这里是长老按照与此相应的方式作的解说。因为一个道理用多种方式来分析,就能分析得很清楚;而且不同的人理解的方式也不一样。再者,从能带来喜悦、能给予喜乐、能令人欢喜、值得尊重、难以出现、无可比拟、为最上士所受用这些意义上说,慧本身就是宝,叫慧宝。巴利
Dassanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ karotīti indriyaṃ, paññāsaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Nayidaṃ ‘‘purisassa indriyaṃ purisindriya’’ntiādi viya paññāya indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Atha kho paññā eva indriyaṃ paññindriyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Avijjāya na kampatīti paññābalaṃ. Kilesacchedanaṭṭhena paññāva satthaṃ paññāsatthaṃ. Accuggataṭṭhena paññāva pāsādo paññāpāsādo. Ālokanaṭṭhena paññāva āloko paññāāloko. Obhāsanaṭṭhena paññāva obhāso paññāobhāso. Pajjotanaṭṭhena paññāva pajjoto paññāpajjoto. Paññavato hi ekapallaṅkena nisinnassa dasasahassilokadhātu ekālokā ekobhāsā ekapajjotā hoti. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Imesu pana tīsu padesu ekapadenāpi etasmiṃ atthe siddhe yāni panetāni bhagavatā ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, ālokā. Katame cattāro? Candāloko, sūriyāloko, aggāloko, paññāloko. Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro ālokā. Etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, imesaṃ catunnaṃ ālokānaṃ yadidaṃ paññāloko’’. Tathā ‘‘cattārome , bhikkhave, obhāsā. Cattārome, bhikkhave, pajjotā’’ti (a. ni. 4.144-145) sattānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena suttāni desitāni. Tadanurūpeneva idhāpi therena desanā katā. Attho hi anekehi ākārehi vibhajjamāno suvibhatto hoti, aññathā ca añño bujjhati, aññathā aññoti. Ratikaraṇaṭṭhena pana ratidāyakaṭṭhena ratijanakaṭṭhena cittīkataṭṭhena dullabhapātubhāvaṭṭhena atulaṭṭhena anomasattaparibhogaṭṭhena ca paññāva ratanaṃ paññāratanaṃ.
不痴:众生不会因为那样而迷惑,或者自己面对所缘境时不迷惑,所以叫不痴。法择这个词的含义前面已经讲过了。那为什么这里又要再说一遍呢?是为了说明不痴是痴的对立面。因此这里这样来说明:这个不痴,并不只是与痴不同的另一种法,而是作为痴的对治、被称为法择的不痴,才是这里所指的意思。正见:就是如实、能导向解脱的善巧之见。至于“这里什么是苦集智?这里什么是苦灭智?这里什么是导向苦灭之道的智?”这些问话,只是简略地说。巴利
Na tena sattā muyhanti, sayaṃ vā ārammaṇe na muyhatīti amoho. Dhammavicayapadaṃ vuttatthameva. Kasmā panetaṃ puna vuttanti? Amohassa mohapaṭipakkhabhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Tenetaṃ dīpeti ‘‘yvāyaṃ amoho, so na kevalaṃ mohato añño dhammo, mohassa pana paṭipakkho dhammavicayasaṅkhāto amoho nāma idha adhippeto’’ti. Sammādiṭṭhīti yāthāvaniyyānikakusaladiṭṭhi . ‘‘Tattha katamaṃ dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṃ, tattha katamaṃ dukkhanirodhe ñāṇaṃ, tattha katamaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ñāṇa’’nti pucchāvacanāni saṅkhepavasena vuttānīti.
纯粹无碍解智解说的注释巴利
64-67. Suddhikapaṭisambhidāñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
110 在“纯粹无碍解智”的解说中,因为诸智本身没有像前面那样再分出类别,所以没有先展示分类,就直接说“于诸义之智,是义无碍解”等等。虽然慧本身没有分类,但因为是按照自己所证悟的四圣谛法这一点来区分,所以在义有种种差别时,就说“于种种义有智,即义无碍解之智”等等。其中,“种种”是指义等有多种。“确定”是指对义等作出决断。“善察”是指对义等正确观察。“近察”是指对义等深入观察。“分别”是指对义等的种种区分。“令显明”是指通过令义等清楚显现而使它生起。“照耀”是指照亮义等。“光耀”是指以种种方式照亮义等。“明晰”是指令义等光明澄澈。这里以“种种”作为根本词,是从共通的角度来说的。可以这样连接理解:“确定”是就入流者来说的;“善察、近察”是就一来者来说的;“分别、令显明”是就不来者来说的;“照耀、光耀、明晰”则是就阿拉汉来说的。巴利
110. Suddhikapaṭisambhidāñāṇaniddese imesaṃ ñāṇānaṃ pabhedābhāvatoyeva heṭṭhā viya pabhedaṃ adassetvāyeva atthesu ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidātiādi vuttaṃ. Paññāpabhedābhāvepi attanā paṭividdhacatusaccadhammamattavasena nānattasabbhāvato atthanānatte paññā atthapaṭisambhide ñāṇantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nānatteti atthādīnaṃ anekabhāve. Vavatthāneti atthādīnaṃ nicchayane. Sallakkhaṇeti atthādīnaṃ sammādassane. Upalakkhaṇeti atthādīnaṃ bhusaṃdassane. Pabhedeti atthādīnaṃ nānābhede. Pabhāvaneti atthādīnaṃ pākaṭīkaraṇena uppādane. Jotaneti atthādīnaṃ dīpane. Virocaneti atthādīnaṃ vividhā dīpane. Pakāsaneti atthādīnaṃ pabhāsane . ‘‘Nānatte’’ti mūlapadaṃ katvā sabbasādhāraṇavasena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vavatthāne’’ti sotāpannassa vasena, ‘‘sallakkhaṇe upalakkhaṇe’’ti sakadāgāmissa vasena, ‘‘pabhede pabhāvane’’ti anāgāmissa vasena, ‘‘jotane virocane pakāsane’’ti arahato vasena vuttanti evampettha yojanā kātabbāti.
《辨析道》义注巴利
Paṭisambhidāmagga-aṭṭhakathā
68. 根上下智论的解释巴利
68. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
111 在“根上下智”的解说中,说到“如来的”这一词时,虽然在总说里并没有以“如来”这个名称直接出现,但因为《无碍解道·论母》中说“有六种智不与声闻弟子共通”,所以实际上就已经说到了“如来的”。因此,在广释中,便采用了在总说里从义理上已经成立的“如来”一词。
“见诸众生”:众生对色等对象怀有欲贪,因此成为执著者、粘著者;如来以根上下智之眼看见这些众生、观察这些众生。
“少尘垢”:在慧眼方面,这些人的贪等尘垢很少,所以叫少尘垢;或者说,这些人的贪等尘垢很少,所以叫少尘垢。他看见那些少尘垢者。
“多尘垢”:在慧眼方面,这些人的贪等尘垢很多,所以叫多尘垢;或者说,这些人的贪等尘垢很多,所以叫多尘垢。
“利根、钝根”:这些人的信等根很锐利,所以叫利根;那些人的信等根很柔弱,所以叫钝根。
“善行相、恶行相”:这些人的信等行相美好,所以叫善行相;那些人的信等行相卑劣、应受诃责,所以叫恶行相。
“易教化、难教化”:有些人能观察所讲的道理,容易使他们理解,所以叫易教化;与此相反的人,叫难教化。
“有些见来世与过患之怖畏”:也有些众生把来世以及贪等过患看作可怕的事。不过,在解释这一句时,因为并没有单独提到来世,所以应当理解为:这些人惯于深切地把五蕴等世间以及贪等过患看作可怕的事,因此叫“见来世与过患之怖畏者”。他们是那样的见来世与过患之怖畏者——应当这样理解其含义。
“有些不见来世与过患之怖畏”:与此相反的人。
“世间”:以坏灭、毁灭为义。
“过患”:以应受诃责为义。
到这里,总说的解说就完成了。巴利
111. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaniddese tathāgatassāti vacane uddese sarūpato avijjamānepi ‘‘cha ñāṇāni asādhāraṇāni sāvakehī’’ti (paṭi. ma. mātikā 1.73) vuttattā ‘‘tathāgatassā’’ti vuttameva hoti. Tasmā uddese atthato siddhassa tathāgatavacanassa niddese gahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Satte passatīti rūpādīsu chandarāgena sattatāya laggatāya sattā, te satte indriyaparopariyattañāṇena cakkhunā passati oloketi. Apparajakkheti paññāmaye akkhimhi appaṃ rāgādirajo etesanti apparajakkhā, appaṃ rāgādirajo etesanti vā apparajakkhā. Te apparajakkhe. Mahārajakkheti paññāmaye akkhimhi mahantaṃ rāgādirajo etesanti mahārajakkhā, mahantaṃ rāgādirajo etesanti vā mahārajakkhā. Tikkhindriye mudindriyeti tikkhāni saddhādīni indriyāni etesanti tikkhindriyā, mudūni saddhādīni indriyāni etesanti mudindriyā. Svākāre dvākāreti sundarā saddhādayo ākārā koṭṭhāsā etesanti svākārā, kucchitā garahitā saddhādayo ākārā koṭṭhāsā etesanti dvākārā. Suviññāpaye duviññāpayeti ye kathitaṃ kāraṇaṃ sallakkhenti sukhena sakkā honti viññāpetuṃ, te suviññāpayā, tabbiparītā duviññāpayā. Appekacceparalokavajjabhayadassāvinoti api eke paralokañceva rāgādivajjañca bhayato passante, imassa pana padassa niddese paralokasseva na vuttattā khandhādiloke ca rāgādivajje ca paraṃ bāḷhaṃ bhayaṃ passanasīlāti paralokavajjabhayadassāvino. Te paralokavajjabhayadassāvineti evamattho gahetabbo. Appekacce na paralokavajjabhayadassāvinoti tabbiparīte. Lokoti ca lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena. Vajjanti ca vajjanīyaṭṭhena. Ettāvatā uddesassa niddeso kato hoti.
接着,为了对详释再做一层复注,说了“少尘垢、多尘垢”等话。其中,对三宝确立的信叫做“信”,他有这个信,所以叫“有信者”。这位具足信的人,因为不信的尘垢以及以不信为根源的其他不善尘垢很少,所以是“少尘垢者”。他没有这个信,所以是“无信者”。他因为上述那类尘垢很多,所以是“多尘垢者”。已发起精进之心,所以叫“勤精进者”。他因为懈怠的尘垢以及以懈怠为根源的其他不善尘垢很少,所以是“少尘垢者”。由于精进低劣,以卑劣的方式消沉,所以叫“懈怠者”,懈怠者就是懒散的人。他因为上述那类尘垢很多,所以是“多尘垢者”。念贴近所缘而安住,他有这样的念,所以叫“念现前者”。他因为忘念的尘垢以及以忘念为根源的其他不善尘垢很少,所以是“少尘垢者”。念已忘失、丢失,所以叫“忘念者”。他因为上述那类尘垢很多,所以是“多尘垢者”。通过安止定或近行定,在心所缘上平等地、正确地安住,所以叫“得定者”,也可以说是有定心的人。他因为掉举的尘垢以及以掉举为根源的其他不善尘垢很少,所以是“少尘垢者”。没有得定,就是“未定者”。他因为上述那类尘垢很多,所以是“多尘垢者”。他有能趣向生灭的智慧,所以叫“有慧者”。他因为愚痴的尘垢以及以愚痴为根源的其他不善尘垢很少,所以是“少尘垢者”。因为被愚痴所迷,智慧低劣,所以叫“劣慧者”。他因为上述那类尘垢很多,所以是“多尘垢者”。有信的人根器锐利:因为信大量生起且强而有力,所以是有信者,就凭这信根而成为“利根者”。无信的人根器迟钝:因为不信大量生起,所以是无信者,只有间或生起的微弱信根,所以是“钝根者”。其余各项也依此类推。有信的人是“善行相者”:就凭那信而具有善好的行相。无信的人是“恶行相者”:就凭那不信而具有丑恶的行相。其余各项也依此类推。“易教化者”:能够轻易地被教导明白。“难教化者”:很难被教导明白。在“见来世与过患之怖畏”这一句中,因为只有具足智慧的人,信等才极为清净,所以具足极清净的信等、与信等相应的人,或者具足极清净的信等、由信等为因而生的智慧,就成为见来世与过患之怖畏者。正因如此,信等这四法也被说为“见来世与过患之怖畏者”。巴利
Puna niddesassa paṭiniddesaṃ karonto apparajakkhe mahārajakkhetiādimāha. Tattha tīsu ratanesu okappanasaṅkhātā saddhā assa atthīti saddho. So saddhāsampanno puggalo assaddhiyarajassa ceva assaddhiyamūlakassa sesākusalarajassa ca appakattā apparajakkho. Natthi etassa saddhāti assaddho. So vuttappakārassa rajassa mahantattā mahārajakkho. Āraddhaṃ vīriyamanenāti āraddhavīriyo. So kosajjarajassa ceva kosajjamūlakassa sesākusalarajassa ca appakattā apparajakkho. Hīnavīriyattā kucchitena ākārena sīdatīti kusīdo, kusīdo eva kusīto. So vuttappakārassa rajassa mahantattā mahārajakkho. Ārammaṇaṃ upecca ṭhitā sati assāti upaṭṭhitassati. So muṭṭhassaccarajassa ceva muṭṭhassaccamūlakassa sesākusalarajassa ca appakattā apparajakkho. Muṭṭhā naṭṭhā sati assāti muṭṭhassati. So vuttappakārassa rajassa mahantattā mahārajakkho. Appanāsamādhinā upacārasamādhinā vā ārammaṇe samaṃ, sammā vā āhito ṭhitoti samāhito, samāhitacittoti vā samāhito. So uddhaccarajassa ceva uddhaccamūlakassa sesākusalarajassa ca appakattā apparajakkho. Na samāhito asamāhito. So vuttappakārassa rajassa mahantattā mahārajakkho. Udayatthagāminī paññā assa atthīti paññavā. So moharajassa ceva mohamūlakassa sesākusalarajassa ca appakattā apparajakkho. Mohamūḷhattā duṭṭhā paññā assāti duppañño. So vuttappakārassa rajassa mahantattā mahārajakkho. Saddho puggalo tikkhindriyoti bahulaṃ uppajjamānāya balavatiyā saddhāya saddho, teneva saddhindriyena tikkhindriyo. Assaddho puggalo mudindriyoti bahulaṃ uppajjamānena assaddhiyena assaddho, antarantarā uppajjamānena dubbalena saddhindriyena mudindriyo. Esa nayo sesesupi. Saddho puggalo svākāroti tāya eva saddhāya sobhanākāro. Assaddho puggalo dvākāroti teneva assaddhiyena virūpākāro. Esa nayo sesesupi. Suviññāpayoti sukhena viññāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyo. Duviññāpayoti dukkhena viññāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyo. Paralokavajjabhayadassāvīti ettha yasmā paññāsampannasseva saddhādīni suparisuddhāni honti, tasmā suparisuddhasaddhādisampanno taṃsampayuttāya, suparisuddhasaddhādisampannopi vā tappaccayāya paññāya paralokavajjabhayadassāvī hoti. Tasmā eva hi saddhādayopi cattāro ‘‘paralokavajjabhayadassāvī’’ti vuttā.
112 现在,为了说明“见过患、对他世有怖畏”这句话里所说的“世间”和“过患”,所以开始说“世间”等词。这里,诸蕴以坏灭、变坏之义,称为世间,这就是“蕴世间”。其余两种世间也应当按同样的方式理解。“恶趣有世间”就是恶趣世间。因为它的果报不可意,得到那种丑劣的东西,所以叫“恶趣”;因为是存在的状态,所以叫“有”;恶趣本身就是有,叫“恶趣有”;恶趣有本身就是世间,所以叫“恶趣有世间”。“恶趣因世间”指的是能投生到恶趣的业。因为果从它而生,所以叫“因”;恶趣的因就是“恶趣因”;恶趣因本身就是世间,所以叫“恶趣因世间”。“善趣有世间”就是善趣世间。因为它的果报可意,得到那种美好的东西,所以叫“善趣”;因为是存在的状态,所以叫“有”;善趣本身就是有,叫“善趣有”;善趣有本身就是世间,所以叫“善趣有世间”。“善趣因世间”指的是能投生到善趣的业。因为果从它而生,所以叫“因”;善趣的因就是“善趣因”;善趣因本身就是世间,所以叫“善趣因世间”。“一世间”等后面的内容,和前面所说的意思完全相同。巴利
112. Idāni ‘‘paralokavajjabhayadassāvī’’ti ettha vuttaṃ lokañca vajjañca dassetuṃ lokotiādimāha. Ettha khandhā eva lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti khandhaloko. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Vipattibhavalokoti apāyaloko. So hi aniṭṭhaphalattā virūpo lābhoti vipatti, bhavatīti bhavo, vipatti eva bhavo vipattibhavo, vipattibhavo eva loko vipattibhavaloko. Vipattisambhavalokoti apāyūpagaṃ kammaṃ. Tañhi sambhavati etasmā phalanti sambhavo, vipattiyā sambhavo vipattisambhavo, vipattisambhavo eva loko vipattisambhavaloko. Sampattibhavalokoti sugatiloko. So hi iṭṭhaphalattā sundaro lābhoti sampatti, bhavatīti bhavo, sampatti eva bhavo sampattibhavo, sampattibhavo eva loko sampattibhavaloko. Sampattisambhavalokoti sugatūpagaṃ kammaṃ. Tañhi sambhavati etasmā phalanti sambhavo, sampattiyā sambhavo sampattisambhavo, sampattisambhavo eva loko sampattisambhavaloko. Eko lokotiādīni heṭṭhā vuttatthāneva.
“Vajja”(过患)这个词用的是中性词,因为这里没有明确指出具体指什么。“烦恼”指的是贪等。“恶行”指的是杀生等。“造作”指的是福行等。“趣有业”是指以自己的果报成熟方式而趣向“有”的业;在诸造作中,说的也只是能产生果报的那些业。“如是”是对所说种类的指示。“于此世间及于此过患”是指在所说的世间和过患中。“强烈的怖畏想”是指强有力的怖畏想。“强烈”一词解释的是“强”这个字的意思,“怖畏想”解释的是“怖畏”这个词;世间和过患这两者,因为是怖畏的所依,本身也具有怖畏性,所以是怖畏;对怖畏的认知就是想,即怖畏想。“现起”是指依于、缘于各种对象而安住。就像举刀要杀的凶手一样:正如面对举起刀要砍来的敌人时,强烈的怖畏想会现起;同样地,对世间和过患,强烈的怖畏想也会现起。“以这五十种行相”:在“少尘”等五法类的十类五法中,每一类各有五种行相,合计为五十种行相。“这些五根”是指信根等五根。“知”:如来以智慧了知。“见”:就像用天眼亲自看到一样。“遍知”:以一切行相的究竟界限而了知。“通达”:不是只通达一部分,而是以无余见的智慧彻底穿透。巴利
Vajjanti napuṃsakavacanaṃ asukoti aniddiṭṭhattā kataṃ. Kilesāti rāgādayo. Duccaritāti pāṇātipātādayo. Abhisaṅkhārāti puññābhisaṅkhārādayo. Bhavagāmikammāti attano vipākadānavasena bhavaṃ gacchantīti bhavagāmino, abhisaṅkhāresupi vipākajanakāneva kammāni vuttāni. Itīti vuttappakāranidassanaṃ. Imasmiñca loke imasmiñca vajjeti vuttappakāre loke ca vajje ca. Tibbā bhayasaññāti balavatī bhayasaññā. Tibbāti parasaddassa attho vutto, bhayasaññāti bhayasaddassa, lokavajjadvayampi hi bhayavatthuttā sayañca sabhayattā bhayaṃ, bhayamiti saññā bhayasaññā. Paccupaṭṭhitā hotīti taṃ taṃ paṭicca upecca ṭhitā hoti. Seyyathāpi ukkhittāsike vadhaketi yathā nāma paharituṃ uccāritakhagge paccāmitte tibbā bhayasaññā paccupaṭṭhitā hoti, evameva loke ca vajje ca tibbā bhayasaññā paccupaṭṭhitā hoti. Imehi paññāsāya ākārehīti apparajakkhapañcakādīsu dasasu pañcakesu ekekasmiṃ pañcannaṃ pañcannaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena paññāsāya ākārehi. Imāni pañcindriyānīti saddhindriyādīni pañcindriyāni . Jānātīti tathāgato paññāya pajānāti. Passatīti dibbacakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ viya karoti. Aññātīti sabbākāramariyādāhi jānāti. Paṭivijjhatīti ekadesaṃ asesetvā niravasesadassanavasena paññāya padāletīti.
69. 《性行与随眠智的解说》注释巴利
69. Āsayānusayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
113 113. 在“性行随眠智的解说”这一节里,“如来”等语是分成五个方面安立的解说。其中,“性行”和“随眠”的意思前面已经说过。“行”是指过去所造的善业和不善业。“意趣”是指现在心对善或不善的投入倾向。“堪能者与不堪能者”,就是有条件和没有条件的人。能生于圣者之种姓的人,也就是能生起圣道的人,叫做“堪能者”。这里用的是现在时,表示接近现在。或者说,将来会生起圣道的人,叫做“堪能者”,意思是他们有承载法的资格。那些具足亲依止条件、适合证悟圣道的人,就是“堪能者”。与此相反的,就是“不堪能者”。巴利
113. Āsayānusayañāṇaniddese idha tathāgatotiādi pañcadhā ṭhapito niddeso. Tattha āsayānusayā vuttatthā eva. Caritanti pubbe kataṃ kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ. Adhimuttinti sampati kusale akusale vā cittavosaggo. Bhabbābhabbeti bhabbe ca abhabbe ca. Ariyāya jātiyā sambhavanti jāyantīti bhabbā. Vattamānasamīpe vattamānavacanaṃ. Bhavissanti jāyissantīti vā bhabbā, bhājanabhūtāti attho. Ye ariyamaggapaṭivedhassa anucchavikā upanissayasampannā, te bhabbā. Vuttapaṭipakkhā abhabbā.
“什么是众生的性行”等句,是对这一解说的进一步解释。其中,“常”就是恒常。“世间”指“我”。他们认为,只有身体会坏灭,而“我”在今生和来世都是同一个。因为他们觉得这个“我”能自己观照,所以就把它称为“世间”。“无常”就是不恒常。他们认为“我”会随着身体一起坏灭。“有边”:他们在狭小的遍处生起禅那后,把以那个狭小遍处为所缘的心看作有边际,认为那就是“我”。“无边”:他们在无量的遍处生起禅那后,把以那个无量遍处为所缘的心看作没有边际,认为那就是“我”。“命就是那个身体”:命和身体是同一个东西。“命”指“我”,这里因为语法性别错乱而用了中性词。“身体”指以聚集为义的五蕴。“命是另一个,身体是另一个”:命是一回事,五蕴是另一回事。“如来死后存在”:他们主张诸蕴就在今生灭去,而众生在死后仍然存在,不会消失。这里所说的“如来”,有人说是众生的代称。也有人说是“应供”。这些人是因为看到“死后不存在”这一方的过失,才执取这种见解。“如来死后不存在”:他们主张诸蕴就在今生灭去,如来在死后也不存在,被彻底断灭、消失。这些人是因为看到“存在”这一方的过失,才执取这种见解。“也存在也不存在”:这些人是因为看到执取任何一方都有过失,所以执取两方。“既非存在也非不存在”:这些人是因为看到执取两方会犯下两方的过失,所以执取“也存在也不存在,既非存在也非不存在”这种像鳗鱼一样摇摆不定的立场。巴利
Katamo sattānaṃ āsayotiādi niddesassa paṭiniddeso. Tattha sassatoti nicco. Lokoti attā. Idha sarīraṃyeva nassati, attā pana idha parattha ca soyevāti maññanti. So hi sayaṃyeva āloketīti katvā ‘‘loko’’ti maññanti. Asassatoti anicco. Attā sarīreneva saha nassatīti maññanti. Antavāti paritte kasiṇe jhānaṃ uppādetvā taṃparittakasiṇārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ sapariyanto attāti maññanti. Anantavāti na antavā appamāṇe kasiṇe jhānaṃ uppādetvā taṃappamāṇakasiṇārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ apariyanto attāti maññanti. Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti jīvo ca sarīrañca taṃyeva. Jīvoti attā, liṅgavipallāsena napuṃsakavacanaṃ kataṃ. Sarīranti rāsaṭṭhena khandhapañcakaṃ. Aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīranti añño jīvo aññaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ. Hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti khandhā idheva vinassanti, satto maraṇato paraṃ hoti vijjati na nassati. ‘‘Tathāgato’’ti cettha sattādhivacananti vadanti. Keci pana ‘‘tathāgatoti arahā’’ti vadanti. Ime ‘‘na hotī’’ti pakkhe dosaṃ disvā evaṃ gaṇhanti. Na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti khandhāpi idheva nassanti, tathāgato ca maraṇato paraṃ na hoti ucchijjati vinassati. Ime ‘‘hotī’’ti pakkhe dosaṃ disvā evaṃ gaṇhanti. Hoti ca na ca hotīti ime ekekapakkhapariggahe dosaṃ disvā ubhayapakkhaṃ gaṇhanti. Neva hoti na na hotīti ime ubhayapakkhapariggahe ubhayadosāpattiṃ disvā ‘‘hotīti ca na hoti, neva hotīti ca na hotī’’ti amarāvikkhepapakkhaṃ gaṇhanti.
这里按照注疏的方式来说:通过“世间是常”等十种方式,只是说明了见的分类。其中,把五蕴执取为“世间”之后,认为“这个世间是常、恒久、永远存在”,这种以执取方式生起的见,就是常见。认为这个世间“会断灭、会消失”,这种以断灭执取方式生起的见,就是断见。证得小遍处的人,在像簸箕大小或碗盘大小的遍处入定后,把定中生起的色法和非色法执取为“世间”,又以遍处的边缘界限执取为“有边”,这种“世间有边”的执取方式所生起的见,就是有边见。这个见既可以是常见,也可以是断见。证得广大遍处的人,在那个遍处入定后,把定中生起的色法和非色法执取为“世间”,又因为遍处没有边际而执取为“无边”,这种“世间无边”的执取方式所生起的见,就是无边见。这个见也既可以是常见,也可以是断见。“命就是身体”:因为把会坏灭的身体本身就执取为“命”,所以认为身体断灭时命也断灭,这种以断灭执取方式生起的见,就是断见。第二种情况,“命是一回事,身体是另一回事”:因为执取身体之外另有命,所以认为即使身体断灭了命也不会断灭,这种以常见执取方式生起的见,就是常见。在“如来死后存在”等说法中,认为“有情就是如来,他死后还存在”,这是第一种常见。认为“死后不存在”,这是第二种断见。认为“死后既存在又不存在”,这是第三种一分常见。认为“死后既非存在也非不存在”,这是第四种不死矫乱见。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha aṭṭhakathānayo – ‘‘sassato lokoti vā’’tiādīhi dasahākārehi diṭṭhipabhedova vutto. Tattha sassato lokoti ca khandhapañcakaṃ lokoti gahetvā ‘‘ayaṃ loko nicco dhuvo sabbakāliko’’ti gaṇhantassa sassatanti gahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Asassatoti tameva lokaṃ ‘‘ucchijjati vinassatī’’ti gaṇhantassa ucchedaggahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Antavāti parittakasiṇalābhino suppamatte vā sarāvamatte vā kasiṇe samāpannassa antosamāpattiyaṃ pavattitarūpārūpadhamme ‘‘loko’’ti ca kasiṇaparicchedantena ‘‘antavā’’ti ca gaṇhantassa ‘‘antavā loko’’ti gahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Sā sassatadiṭṭhipi hoti ucchedadiṭṭhipi. Vipulakasiṇalābhino pana tasmiṃ kasiṇe samāpannassa antosamāpattiyaṃ pavattitarūpārūpadhamme ‘‘loko’’ti ca kasiṇaparicchedantena ‘‘na antavā’’ti ca gaṇhantassa ‘‘anantavā loko’’ti gahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Sā sassatadiṭṭhipi hoti ucchedadiṭṭhipi. Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti bhedanadhammassa sarīrasseva ‘‘jīva’’nti gahitattā ‘‘sarīre ucchijjamāne jīvampi ucchijjatī’’ti ucchedaggahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Dutiyapade sarīrato aññassa jīvassa gahitattā ‘‘sarīre ucchijjamānepi jīvaṃ na ucchijjatī’’ti sassataggahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Hoti tathāgatotiādīsu ‘‘satto tathāgato nāma, so paraṃ maraṇā hotī’’ti gaṇhato paṭhamā sassatadiṭṭhi. ‘‘Na hotī’’ti gaṇhato dutiyā ucchedadiṭṭhi. ‘‘Hoti ca na ca hotī’’ti gaṇhato tatiyā ekaccasassatadiṭṭhi. ‘‘Neva hoti na na hotī’’ti gaṇhato catutthā amarāvikkhepadiṭṭhīti.
所谓“如是”,是指明前面所说的那类见的依止处。或者说,众生要么依止有见,要么依止非有见。“有”是指常见,依常见而生起的见就是有见,也就是说,把见执为“有”。“非有”是指断灭,依断灭见而生起的见就是非有见,也就是说,把见执为“非有”。前面所说的十种见,归结起来就只有有见和非有见这两种。在这两种见中,众生对每一种都依止、依附、黏着。巴利
Itīti vuttappakāradiṭṭhinissayanidassanaṃ. Bhavadiṭṭhisannissitā vā sattā honti vibhavadiṭṭhisannissitā vāti bhavo vuccati sassato, sassatavasena uppajjamānadiṭṭhi bhavadiṭṭhi, bhavoti diṭṭhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vibhavo vuccati ucchedo , ucchedavasena uppajjamānadiṭṭhi vibhavadiṭṭhi, vibhavoti diṭṭhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttappakārā dasavidhā diṭṭhi bhavadiṭṭhi ca vibhavadiṭṭhi cāti dvidhāva hoti. Tāsu dvīsu ekekaṃ sannissitā apassitā allīnā sattā honti.
这里“或者不走近这两种极端”中的“或者”,就像“或者从火、或者从水、或者因离间”等句子里的“或者”一样,是表示集合、并列的意思。整句的意思是:不走近、不依附、舍弃前面所说的以常见和断见为内容的两种极端。“随顺忍”这个词,则是表示抉择、简择的意思。
“此缘性、缘生法”中:这些老死等的条件,就是“此缘”;这些条件本身,就是“此缘性”;或者说,这些条件的集合,就是“此缘性”。至于这个词的具体语法特征,应当从语法书里去探讨。“依那些条件而共同正确地生起”,就是“缘生的”。因此,是在这“此缘性”中,以及在这些“缘生的法”中。
“随顺”,是指随顺出世间法,所以叫随顺。“忍”是指智慧,因为智慧能够堪忍,所以叫忍。“已获得”,是说已经被众生所证得。
在对“此缘性”的忍中,因为看到缘生诸法依赖于条件的和合而存在,通过观察条件不灭尽,就能看到果也不灭尽,所以不会落入断灭论。在对“缘生诸法”的忍中,因为在条件的和合下,能看到新的缘生法不断生起,所以不会落入常见论。就这样,不走近这两种极端,通过观见缘起和缘生法,既不落入断灭,也不落入常见,这种持续生起的正确观见,就应当理解为“随顺忍”。这样说的,正是与那两种见解相对立的“正见”。
“如实知”或者说“如实的智慧”,是指按照真实的样子、按照事物本来的性质去了知。这里现起的智慧,也就根据它的对象而称为“如实知”。不过,这里所指的是以行舍为终点的观智。而在前面,则把怖畏现起智称为“如实知见”。“如实知”或者说“智慧”,是被众生所获得的,应当这样连接理解。巴利
Ete vā pana ubho ante anupagammāti ettha ‘‘aggito vā udakato vā mithubhedā vā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.152) viya vā-saddo samuccayattho. Ete vuttappakāre sassatucchedavasena dve pakkhe ca na upagantvā anallīyitvā pahāyāti attho. ‘‘Anulomikā vā khantī’’ti vikappatthova. Idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesūti imesaṃ jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayā idappaccayā, idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā, idappaccayānaṃ vā samūho idappaccayatā. Lakkhaṇaṃ panettha saddasatthato pariyesitabbaṃ. Te te paccaye paṭicca saha sammā ca uppannā paṭiccasamuppannā. Tassā idappaccayatāya ca tesu paṭiccasamuppannesu ca dhammesu. Anulomikāti lokuttaradhammānaṃ anulomato anulomikā. Khantīti ñāṇaṃ. Ñāṇañhi khamanato khanti. Paṭiladdhā hotīti sattehi adhigatā hoti. Idappaccayatāya khantiyā ucchedattānupagamo hoti paccayuppannadhammānaṃ paccayasāmaggiyaṃ āyattavuttittā paccayānuparamadassanena phalānuparamadassanato. Paṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu khantiyā sassatattānupagamo hoti paccayasāmaggiyaṃ navanavānaṃ paccayuppannadhammānaṃ uppādadassanato. Evamete ubho ante anupagamma paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannadhammadassanena na ucchedo na sassatoti pavattaṃ sammādassanaṃ ‘‘anulomikā khantī’’ti veditabbaṃ. Evañhi tadubhayadiṭṭhipaṭipakkhabhūtā sammādiṭṭhi vuttā hoti. Yathābhūtaṃ vā ñāṇanti yathābhūtaṃ yathāsabhāvaṃ neyyaṃ. Tattha pavattañāṇampi visayavohārena ‘‘yathābhūtañāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana saṅkhārupekkhāpariyantaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ idhādhippetaṃ. Heṭṭhā pana ‘‘yathābhūtañāṇadassana’’nti bhayatūpaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ vā ñāṇaṃ sattehi paṭiladdhaṃ hotīti sambandho.
现在,先用“世间是常”等邪见所熏染的众生心相续,以及“不走近此两端”等正见所熏染的众生心相续作了开示之后,接着用“即使是正在习欲的人”等说法,来显示被其余不善法和其余善法所熏染的众生心相续。在这里,应该这样连接理解文句:即使是正在习欲的人,如来也了知他。“正在习”是指以反复的日常行为而正在从事。“欲重者”:因为过去反复修习,所以烦恼欲极其强烈、深重。“欲性行者”:同样地,欲已经深深留在他的习性和心相续中,成为他的本性。“欲决意者”:仅仅因为这种心相续的惯性,就对欲乐产生决定的倾向和执著。其余各项也按同样的方式理解。“离欲”等词的含义已如前说。应当知道:以“欲”等三者,就已经含摄了其余的不善法;以“离欲”等三者,就已经含摄了其余的善法。至于“这是众生的性行”等三种说法,都只是在指说这个心的相续而已。巴利
Idāni ‘‘sassato loko’’tiādīhi micchādiṭṭhiparibhāvitaṃ ‘‘ete vā panā’’tiādīhi sammādiṭṭhiparibhāvitaṃ sattasantānaṃ dassetvā ‘‘kāmaṃ sevantaññevā’’tiādīhi sesākusalehi sesakusalehi ca paribhāvitaṃ sattasantānaṃ dasseti. Tattha kāmaṃ sevantaṃyeva puggalaṃ tathāgato jānātīti yojanā kātabbā. Sevantanti ca abhiṇhasamudācāravasena sevamānaṃ. Pubbe āsevitavasena kilesakāmo garu assāti kāmagaruko. Tatheva kāmo āsaye santāne assāti kāmāsayo. Santānavaseneva kāme adhimutto laggoti kāmādhimutto. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Nekkhammādīni vuttatthāneva. Kāmādīhi ca tīhi sesākusalā, nekkhammādīhi tīhi sesakusalā gahitāva hontīti veditabbā. ‘‘Ayaṃ sattānaṃ āsayo’’ti tidhā vuttaṃ santānameva dasseti.
这里,注疏传统是这样说的:“或者依止于有见”,也就是依止于常见。在这里,常见被称为“有见”,断灭见则被称为“非有见”。因为一切见解都被常见和断灭见所涵盖,所以所有这些执持恶见的众生,都只是依止于这两种见解。经中也这样说:“迦旃延,这个世间大多数都依止于两边:存在和非存在。”这里,“存在”就是常见,“非存在”就是断灭见。以上是依止轮回的凡夫众生的倾向。接下来,为了显示依止还灭的清净众生的倾向,说了“或者不走近这两端”等话。其中,“或者这些”就是指这些人。“两端”就是指被称为常见和断灭见的两种极端。“不走近”就是不靠近、不执取。“对于此缘性和缘生之法”就是对于此缘性以及缘生之法。“随顺的忍”就是观智。“如实知”就是道智。这里说的是:在缘起和缘生之法上,不走近常见和断灭见这两端而获得的观智,以及在此基础上进一步生起的道智,这就是众生的倾向。这是依止轮回者和依止还灭者、一切众生的倾向,是他们的安住之处。这是诸师共同的注疏。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha aṭṭhakathānayo – ‘‘iti bhavadiṭṭhisannissitā vā’’ti evaṃ sassatadiṭṭhiṃ vā sannissitā. Sassatadiṭṭhi hi ettha bhavadiṭṭhīti vuttā, ucchedadiṭṭhi ca vibhavadiṭṭhīti. Sabbadiṭṭhīnañhi sassatucchedadiṭṭhīhi saṅgahitattā sabbepime diṭṭhigatikā sattā imāva dve diṭṭhiyo sannissitā honti. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘dvayanissito khvāyaṃ, kaccāna, loko yebhuyyena atthitañceva natthitañcā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.15). Ettha hi atthitāti sassataṃ. Natthitāti ucchedo. Ayaṃ tāva vaṭṭanissitānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ sattānaṃ āsayo. Idāni vivaṭṭanissitānaṃ suddhasattānaṃ āsayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ete vā pana ubho ante anupagammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘ete vā panā’’ti eteyeva. ‘‘Ubho ante’’ti sassatucchedasaṅkhāte dve ante. ‘‘Anupagammā’’ti na allīyitvā. ‘‘Idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesū’’ti idappaccayatāya ceva paṭiccasamuppannadhammesu ca. ‘‘Anulomikā khantī’’ti vipassanāñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇa’’nti maggañāṇaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā paṭiccasamuppāde ceva paṭiccasamuppannadhammesu ca ete ubho sassatucchedaante anupagantvā vipassanā paṭiladdhā, yañca tato uttari maggañāṇaṃ, ayaṃ sattānaṃ āsayo. Ayaṃ vaṭṭanissitānañca vivaṭṭanissitānañca sabbesampi sattānaṃ āsayo idaṃ vasanaṭṭhānanti. Ayaṃ ācariyānaṃ samānaṭṭhakathā.
持异论者质问说:“所谓‘道’,是摧毁住处而前进的,你怎么反倒说‘道’就是住处呢?”对这样的人,应当反问他:“你是能诵出圣住经典的人,还是不是?”如果他说“我不是”,就该对他说:“因为你不能诵,所以你才不懂。”如果他说“我是能诵的”,就该对他说:“那就请把经典举出来。”如果他举得出来,那很好。如果他举不出来,就该自己举出来:“比丘们,有这十种圣住,那些圣者们过去、现在、未来都住在这里。”(《增支部》10.19)因为这部经典正好说明了道具有“住”的性质,所以说这个说法是非常善巧的。而世尊在了解众生的这种倾向时,即使在那些恶见以及观智、道智都不现行的刹那,他也照样能了知。也正是因为这个缘故,才说“即使正在习欲的人,他也确切了知”等等。巴利
Vitaṇḍavādī panāha ‘‘maggo nāma vāsaṃ viddhaṃsento gacchati, tvaṃ maggo vāsoti vadesī’’ti? So vattabbo ‘‘tvaṃ ariyavāsabhāṇako hosi na hosī’’ti? Sace ‘‘na homī’’ti vadati, ‘‘tvaṃ abhāṇakatāya na jānāsī’’ti vattabbo. Sace ‘‘bhāṇakosmī’’ti vadati, ‘‘suttaṃ āharā’’ti vattabbo. Sace āharati, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce āharati, sayaṃ āharitabbaṃ ‘‘dasayime, bhikkhave, ariyāvāsā, yadariyā āvasiṃsu vā āvasanti vā āvasissanti vā’’ti (a. ni. 10.19). Etañhi suttaṃ maggassa vāsabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Tasmā sukathitamevetanti. Imaṃ pana bhagavā sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānanto imesañca diṭṭhigatānaṃ imesañca vipassanāñāṇamaggañāṇānaṃ appavattikkhaṇepi jānāti eva. Tasmāyeva ca ‘‘kāmaṃ sevantaṃyeva jānātī’’tiādi vuttanti.
在解释随眠的章节里,问到“随眠”是根据什么含义而称为随眠?是根据“潜伏”的含义。那么,这个所谓的“潜伏”又是什么意思呢?就是“没有被断除的状态”。因为这些烦恼以没有被断除的状态,潜伏在每一个有情的心相续中,所以称为随眠。因此就叫做“随眠”。“潜伏”的意思是,遇到合适的条件就会生起。这时也许有人会想:所谓“潜伏”就是指“没有被断除的形态”,如果又说它会生起,那就说不通了,所以随眠是不会生起的。对此的回答是:并不是指“没有被断除的形态”本身,而是说,以“没有被断除”这层含义,称那股强有力的烦恼为随眠。这种烦恼与心相应,有所缘对象,从有因有缘的意义上说是有原因的,其性质完全是不善的。它可以是过去的,也可以是未来的,还可以是现在的,所以说它会“生起”是合理的。这里的依据是:首先,就在《无碍解道》的现观论部分,先问“是否舍断现在的烦恼”,由于随眠具有现在性,所以回答说“舍断强有力的随眠”。在《法集论》解释痴的章节中说:“无明随眠、无明缠缚、无明枢纽、愚痴、不善根,在那个时候,这个就是痴。”(《法集论》390)这是说痴与不善心一同生起。在《论事》中,所有“随眠是无记的、随眠是无因的、随眠是与心不相应的”这些论点,全都被否定了。在《随眠双论》七个大品中的“生起品”里说:“当一个人的欲贪随眠生起时,他的嗔恚随眠也生起吗?”等等。因此,前面所说“潜伏的意思是,遇到合适的条件就会生起”,以这些经典为证,应当知道是合理的。而所说“与心相应、有所缘对象”等等,也是说得非常好的。因为应当得出结论:所谓随眠,就是真实存在的、与心相应的不善法。巴利
Anusayaniddese anusayāti kenaṭṭhena anusayā? Anusayanaṭṭhena. Ko esa anusayanaṭṭho nāmāti? Appahīnaṭṭho. Ete hi appahīnaṭṭhena tassa tassa santāne anusenti nāma. Tasmā ‘‘anusayā’’ti vuccanti. Anusentīti anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjantīti attho. Athāpi siyā – anusayanaṭṭho nāma appahīnākāro, so ca uppajjatīti vattuṃ na yujjati, tasmā na anusayā uppajjantīti. Tatridaṃ paṭivacanaṃ – na appahīnākāro, anusayoti pana appahīnaṭṭhena thāmagatakileso vuccati. So cittasampayutto sārammaṇo sappaccayaṭṭhena sahetuko ekantākusalo atītopi hoti anāgatopi paccuppannopi, tasmā uppajjatīti vattuṃ yujjatīti. Tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ – idheva tāva abhisamayakathāya (paṭi. ma. 3.21) ‘‘paccuppanne kilese pajahatī’’ti pucchaṃ katvā anusayānaṃ paccuppannabhāvassa atthitāya ‘‘thāmagato anusayaṃ pajahatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ mohassa padabhājane ‘‘avijjānusayo avijjāpariyuṭṭhānaṃ avijjālaṅgī moho akusalamūlaṃ, ayaṃ tasmiṃ samaye moho hotī’’ti (dha. sa. 390) akusalacittena saddhiṃ mohassa uppannabhāvo vutto . Kathāvatthusmiṃ ‘‘anusayā abyākatā anusayā ahetukā anusayā cittavippayuttā’’ti sabbe vādā paṭisedhitā. Anusayayamake sattannaṃ mahāvārānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ uppajjanavāre ‘‘yassa kāmarāgānusayo uppajjati, tassa paṭighānusayo uppajjatī’’tiādi (yama. 2.anusayayamaka.300) vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘anusentīti anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjantī’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ iminā tantippamāṇena yuttanti veditabbaṃ. Yampi ‘‘cittasampayutto sārammaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tampi suvuttameva. Anusayo hi nāmesa parinipphanno cittasampayutto akusaladhammoti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
在“欲贪随眠”等说法里,欲贪本身因为还没有被断除,所以成为随眠,因此叫欲贪随眠。其余几个词也按同样的道理理解。这里说的欲贪随眠,是指在与贪相应的心中生起的贪,它要么以俱生的方式生起,要么以可爱事物为所缘而生起;对于其余欲界的法,则只是以它们为所缘而生起。嗔恚随眠,是指在与忧相应的心中生起的嗔,它要么以俱生的方式生起,要么以不可爱事物为所缘而生起;对于其余欲界的法,则只是以它们为所缘而生起。慢随眠,是指在与贪相应、但与邪见不相应的心中生起的慢,它要么以俱生的方式生起,要么以所缘的方式生起;以苦受为所缘的其余欲界法,以及色界、无色界的法,则只是以它们为所缘而生起。见随眠,存在于四种与邪见相应的心中。疑随眠,存在于与疑相应的心中。无明随眠,存在于十二种不善心中,要么以俱生的方式生起,要么以所缘的方式生起。见、疑、无明这三种,对于其余三界的法,也只是以它们为所缘而生起。有贪随眠虽然也存在于四种与邪见不相应的心中,但这里没有按俱生的方式来说它,而是说它以所缘的方式,在色界、无色界的法中生起的贪。巴利
Kāmarāgānusayotiādīsu kāmarāgo ca so appahīnaṭṭhena anusayo cāti kāmarāgānusayo. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Kāmarāgānusayo cettha lobhasahagatacittesu sahajātavasena ārammaṇavasena ca manāpesu avasesakāmāvacaradhammesu ārammaṇavaseneva uppajjamāno lobho. Paṭighānusayo ca domanassasahagatacittesu sahajātavasena ārammaṇavasena ca amanāpesu avasesakāmāvacaradhammesu ārammaṇavaseneva uppajjamāno doso. Mānānusayo diṭṭhigatavippayuttalobhasahagatacittesu sahajātavasena ārammaṇavasena ca dukkhavedanāvajjesu avasesakāmāvacaradhammesu rūpārūpāvacaradhammesu ca ārammaṇavaseneva uppajjamāno māno. Diṭṭhānusayo catūsu diṭṭhigatasampayuttesu. Vicikicchānusayo vicikicchāsahagate. Avijjānusayo dvādasasu akusalacittesu sahajātavasena ārammaṇavasena ca. Tayopi avasesatebhūmakadhammesu ārammaṇavaseneva uppajjamānā diṭṭhivicikicchāmohā. Bhavarāgānusayo catūsu diṭṭhigatavippayuttesu uppajjamānopi sahajātavasena na vutto, ārammaṇavaseneva pana rūpārūpāvacaradhammesu uppajjamāno lobho vutto.
114 114. 现在,为了指出前面所说的那些随眠潜藏的地方,说了“于世间,凡是可爱之物”等话。其中,“于世间,凡是可爱之物”是指:在这个世间,凡是属于可爱一类的、本性就是可爱的。“愉悦之物”是指:属于愉悦一类的、以乐味为立足点、是可意所缘的。在这里,众生的欲贪随眠潜藏着——意思是,在这个可意所缘上,众生的欲贪随眠以未被断除的方式潜藏着。这里说的“可爱之物、愉悦之物”,特指欲界的法。就像一个人沉入水中,下面、上面、周围全都是水一样,同样地,众生对可意所缘生起贪爱,是他们习以为常、反复串习的。对不可意所缘生起嗔恚,也是这样。所以“即于这两种法”,就是说,即于这两种可意和不可意的所缘法。“为无明所追随”是指:与欲贪和嗔恚相应,以取所缘的方式,被无明所追随、跟随。也可以这样断句。“与彼同住”是指:与那无明同时生起、合为一体,所以站在同一处。“慢、邪见与疑”是指:九种慢、六十二种邪见、依八事而起的疑——与彼同住的慢、与彼同住的邪见、与彼同住的疑,这样搭配理解。“应当见”是指应当观察、应当了知。把三种合在一起说,所以用了复数。不过要知道,在这里,有贪随眠其实已经被欲贪随眠包含在内了。巴利
114. Idāni yathāvuttānaṃ anusayānaṃ anusayanaṭṭhānaṃ dassento yaṃ loketiādimāha. Tattha yaṃ loke piyarūpanti yaṃ imasmiṃ loke piyajātikaṃ piyasabhāvaṃ. Sātarūpanti sātajātikaṃ assādapadaṭṭhānaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ. Ettha sattānaṃ kāmarāgānusayo anusetīti etasmiṃ iṭṭhārammaṇe sattānaṃ appahīnaṭṭhena kāmarāgānusayo anuseti. ‘‘Piyarūpaṃ sātarūpa’’nti ca idha kāmāvacaradhammoyeva adhippeto. Yathā nāma udake nimuggassa heṭṭhā ca upari ca samantā ca udakameva hoti, evameva iṭṭhārammaṇe rāguppatti nāma sattānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇā. Tathā aniṭṭhārammaṇe paṭighuppatti. Iti imesu dvīsu dhammesūti evaṃ imesu dvīsu iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇadhammesu. Avijjānupatitāti kāmarāgapaṭighasampayuttā hutvā ārammaṇakaraṇavasena avijjā anupatitā anugatā. Vicchedaṃ katvāpi pāṭho. Tadekaṭṭhoti tāya avijjāya sahajekaṭṭhavasena ekato ṭhito. Māno ca diṭṭhi ca vicikicchā cāti navavidhamāno, dvāsaṭṭhividhā diṭṭhi, aṭṭhavatthukā vicikicchā, tadekaṭṭho māno ca tadekaṭṭhā diṭṭhi ca tadekaṭṭhā vicikicchā cāti yojanā. Daṭṭhabbāti passitabbā avagantabbā. Tayo ekato katvā bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ. Bhavarāgānusayo panettha kāmarāgānusayeneva saṅgahitoti veditabbo.
在解释“行”的时候,十三种思是福行,十二种是非福行,四种是不动行。其中,属于欲界的是小地;其余的是大地。或者,在这三种行当中,任何一种只带来小果报的,就是小地;带来大果报的,就是大地。应当这样理解。巴利
Caritaniddese terasa cetanā puññābhisaṅkhāro. Dvādasa apuññābhisaṅkhāro. Catasso āneñjābhisaṅkhāro. Tattha kāmāvacaro parittabhūmako. Itaro mahābhūmako. Tīsupi vā etesu yo koci appavipāko parittabhūmako, mahāvipāko mahābhūmakoti veditabbo.
115 在“意乐”的解说中,“santi”就是存在。“hīnādhimuttikā”指志向低劣的人。“paṇītādhimuttikā”指志向高尚的人。“sevanti”指依靠、依附。“bhajanti”指亲近。“payirupāsanti”指一再地亲近。如果亲教师和依止师不持戒,而弟子和同住比丘持戒,那些持戒的人也不会去亲近自己的亲教师和依止师,只会去亲近跟自己同类、相称的比丘。即使亲教师和依止师是相称的比丘,而其他人不相称,那些人也不会去亲近亲教师和依止师,只会去亲近跟自己同类、志向低劣的人。然而,为了说明这种亲近不只现在如此,过去和未来也是如此,所以说了“atītampi addhānanti”等。其中,“atītampi addhānanti”指在过去时,或以绝对相关义用业格表达。其余内容义理浅显。然而,破戒者亲近破戒者,具戒者亲近具戒者,劣慧者亲近劣慧者,有慧者亲近有慧者,是谁在规定这事?是意乐界在规定。巴利
115. Adhimuttiniddese santīti saṃvijjanti. Hīnādhimuttikāti lāmakajjhāsayā. Paṇītādhimuttikāti kalyāṇajjhāsayā. Sevantīti nissayanti allīyanti. Bhajantīti upasaṅkamanti. Payirupāsantīti punappunaṃ upasaṅkamanti. Sace hi ācariyupajjhāyā na sīlavanto honti, antevāsikasaddhivihārikā sīlavanto, te attano ācariyupajjhāyepi na upasaṅkamanti, attano sadise sāruppe bhikkhūyeva upasaṅkamanti. Sacepi ācariyupajjhāyā sāruppā bhikkhū, itare asāruppā, tepi na ācariyupajjhāye upasaṅkamanti, attano sadise hīnādhimuttikeyeva upasaṅkamanti. Evaṃ upasaṅkamanaṃ pana na kevalaṃ etarahiyeva, atītānāgatepīti dassetuṃ atītampi addhānantiādimāha. Tattha atītampi addhānanti atītasmiṃ kāle, accantasaṃyogatthe vā upayogavacanaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Idaṃ pana dussīlānaṃ dussīlasevanameva, sīlavantānaṃ sīlavantasevanameva, duppaññānaṃ duppaññasevanameva, paññavantānaṃ paññavantasevanameva ko niyametīti? Ajjhāsayadhātu niyametīti.
在解说“能”与“不能”时,本来应先说应舍弃的,后说应采取的,但按照开示的顺序,却先说了“不能者”。而在开示的偈颂中,因为并列复合词里重音词和弱音词要放在前面的规则,“能”这个词被放在了前面。“以业障”指五种无间业。“具足”指拥有。“以烦恼障”指决定性的邪见。这两种障因为能障碍生天之道,所以叫障。比丘污行等业也都被归在业障里。“以异熟障”指无因结生。然而,因为二因者也无法证得圣道,所以二因的结生也应被视为异熟障。“无信”指对佛等没有信心。“无欲”指没有行善的意愿。郁单越的人就属于这类无善欲者。“无慧”指有分慧羸弱的人。即使一个人的有分慧圆满,只要他的有分不能作为生起出世间智的基础,他仍被称为无慧者。“不能趣入于善法中之正性决定”意思是:不能趣入名为“于善法中之正性”的圣道所摄的决定。圣道就是正确的自性,所以叫正性;正是它,因为能赋予无间之果,或因为自身不可动摇,所以叫决定;不能趣入、进入它,就是不能趣入决定。“不以业障”等语,应依前文所说反过来理解。巴利
Bhabbābhabbaniddese chaḍḍetabbe paṭhamaṃ niddisitvā gahetabbe pacchā niddisituṃ uddesassa uppaṭipāṭiyā paṭhamaṃ abhabbā niddiṭṭhā. Uddese pana dvandasamāse accitassa ca mandakkharassa ca padassa pubbanipātalakkhaṇavasena bhabbasaddo pubbaṃ payutto. Kammāvaraṇenāti pañcavidhena ānantariyakammena. Samannāgatāti samaṅgībhūtā. Kilesāvaraṇenāti niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā. Imāni dve saggamaggānaṃ āvaraṇato āvaraṇāni. Bhikkhunīdūsakādīni kammānipi kammāvaraṇeneva saṅgahitāni. Vipākāvaraṇenāti ahetukapaṭisandhiyā. Yasmā pana duhetukānampi ariyamaggapaṭivedho natthi, tasmā duhetukā paṭisandhipi vipākāvaraṇamevāti veditabbā, assaddhāti buddhādīsu saddhārahitā. Acchandikāti kattukamyatākusalacchandarahitā. Uttarakurukā manussā acchandikaṭṭhānaṃ paviṭṭhā. Duppaññāti bhavaṅgapaññāya parihīnā. Bhavaṅgapaññāya pana paripuṇṇāyapi yassa bhavaṅgaṃ lokuttarassa pādakaṃ na hoti, sopi duppaññoyeva nāma. Abhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattanti kusalesu dhammesu sammattaniyāmasaṅkhātaṃ ariyamaggaṃ okkamituṃ abhabbā. Ariyamaggo hi sammā sabhāvoti sammattaṃ, soyeva anantaraphaladāne, sayameva vā acalabhāvato niyāmo, taṃ okkamituṃ pavisituṃ abhabbā. Na kammāvaraṇenātiādīni vuttavipariyāyeneva veditabbānīti.
双神变智解说的注释巴利
70. Yamakapāṭihīrañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
116 在「双神变智」的解说中,「于弟子们是不共的」这句话:在解说其他不共智的地方,因为没有用到「其他」这个词的场合,所以没有说;而在这里,因为没有「其他」一词,所以就说了——应当这样理解。这里说的「上半身」,是指从肚脐往上的身体部分。「火堆生起」:以火遍为所缘,进入基础禅那,出定后作意「让火焰从上半身升起」,做完预备工作后,紧接着以神变智决意「让火焰从上半身升起」,就在决意的同时,火焰从上半身升起。这里因为「堆聚」的含义,所以称为「堆」。「下半身」,是指从肚脐往下的身体部分。「水流生起」:以水遍为所缘,进入基础禅那,出定后作意「让水流从下半身升起」,做完预备工作后,紧接着以神变智决意「让水流从下半身升起」,就在决意的同时,水流从下半身升起。这两种情况都是按不间断的方式来说「生起」的。在作意和决意之间,会生起两个有分心。正因为如此,火堆和水流才成双成对地出现,中间看不出间隔。而其他人施展神变时,则没有这种有分心的间隔。「东方身」,指面朝的方向。「西方身」,指背朝的方向。「右眼与左眼」等,只是连读的复合词写法,没有别的意思。读作「从右鼻孔与左鼻孔」的版本更好。也有略读的版本。所谓「肩峰」:这里因为向上耸起如同山峰,所以叫「峰」,肩本身就是峰,所以叫「肩峰」。「一一指」,就是一根根手指。「指间」,就是手指之间的缝隙。「一一毛处生起火堆,一一毛处生起水流」:这两处都用重复的说法,是因为涵盖了一切毛发,说明从每一根毛发都成双成对地生起火堆和水流。「一一毛孔生起火堆,一一毛孔生起水流」,这里也是同样的道理。有些抄本中写作「一一毛处生起火堆,一一毛孔生起水流;一一毛孔生起火堆,一一毛处生起水流」,这样也说得通。不过,为了显示神变的极其微细,还是前一种读法更优美。巴利
116. Yamakapāṭihīrañāṇaniddese asādhāraṇaṃ sāvakehīti sesāsādhāraṇañāṇaniddese aññavacanehi okāsābhāvato na vuttaṃ, idha pana aññavacanābhāvato vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Uparimakāyatoti nābhiyā uddhaṃ sarīrato. Aggikkhandho pavattatīti tejokasiṇārammaṇaṃ pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘uparimakāyato aggijālā vuṭṭhātū’’ti āvajjitvā parikammaṃ katvā anantaraṃ abhiññāñāṇena ‘‘uparimakāyato aggijālā vuṭṭhātū’’ti adhiṭṭhite saha adhiṭṭhānā uparimakāyato aggijālā vuṭṭhāti. Sā hi idha rāsaṭṭhena khandhoti vuttā. Heṭṭhimakāyatoti nābhito heṭṭhā sarīrato. Udakadhārā pavattatīti āpokasiṇārammaṇaṃ pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘heṭṭhimakāyato udakadhārā vuṭṭhātū’’ti āvajjitvā parikammaṃ katvā anantaraṃ abhiññāñāṇena ‘‘heṭṭhimakāyato udakadhārā vuṭṭhātū’’ti adhiṭṭhite saha adhiṭṭhānā heṭṭhimakāyato udakadhārā vuṭṭhāti. Ubhayatthāpi abbocchedavasena pavattatīti vuttaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānassa āvajjanassa ca antare dve bhavaṅgacittāni vattanti. Tasmāyeva yugalā hutvā aggikkhandhaudakadhārā pavattanti, antaraṃ na paññāyati. Aññesaṃ pana bhavaṅgaparicchedo natthi . Puratthimakāyatoti abhimukhapassato. Pacchimakāyatoti piṭṭhipassato. Dakkhiṇaakkhito vāmaakkhitotiādi samāsapāṭhoyeva, na añño. Dakkhiṇanāsikāsotato vāmanāsikāsotatoti pāṭho sundaro. Rassaṃ katvāpi paṭhanti. Aṃsakūṭatoti ettha abbhuggataṭṭhena kūṭo viyāti kūṭo, aṃsoyeva kūṭo aṃsakūṭo. Aṅgulaṅgulehīti aṅgulīhi aṅgulīhi. Aṅgulantarikāhīti aṅgulīnaṃ antarikāhi. Ekekalomato aggikkhandho pavattati, ekekalomato udakadhārā pavattatīti ubhayatthāpi āmeḍitavacanena sabbalomānaṃ pariyādinnattā ekekalomatova aggikkhandhaudakadhārā yugalā yugalā hutvā pavattantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Lomakūpato lomakūpato aggikkhandho pavattati, lomakūpato lomakūpato udakadhārā pavattatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Kesuci potthakesu ‘‘ekekalomato aggikkhandho pavattati. Lomakūpato lomakūpato udakadhārā pavattati, lomakūpato lomakūpato aggikkhandho pavattati, ekekalomato udakadhārā pavattatī’’ti likhitaṃ. Tampi yujjatiyeva. Pāṭihīrassa atisukhumattadīpanato pana purimapāṭhoyeva sundarataro.
现在说“六种颜色”,这跟前面有什么关联?前面用“上半身”等说法提到了身体的许多部分。所以,这里是靠身体部分的关联、语句的关联,以及双神变的增上作用,来说明:作为身体部分的六种颜色的光束,成双成对地生起。按属格的关系,必须补上“光束”这个词,句子才完整。所谓“青色”,是指亚麻花那种颜色的光束。“黄色”,是指迦尼迦罗花那种颜色的光束。“红色”,是指胭脂虫那种颜色的光束。“白色”,是指晨星那种颜色的光束。“赤色”,是指淡红色那种颜色的光束。“光辉色”,是指本性发光的光辉色光束。在提到的五种颜色里,虽然没有单独列出光辉色,但凡是那些明亮闪耀的光芒,就都属于光辉色。当如来显现双神变时,单凭双神变智的力量,从须发和眼睛的青色部位就射出青色光束。因为这些光束,天空就好像撒了安阇那粉,好像盖上了亚麻花和青莲花瓣,好像飘动着琉璃宝扇,好像铺开了青黑色的布。从皮肤和眼睛的黄色部位射出黄色光束,因为这些光束,各方就好像倾注着金液,好像铺开了金箔,好像被郁金花粉和迦尼迦罗花撒满,光明照耀。从肌肉、血液和眼睛的红色部位射出红色光束,因为这些光束,各方就好像染上了朱砂粉,好像倾注着熟紫胶汁,好像被红毯围住,好像被胜素馨、巴利跋陀迦、频头吉祥花撒满,光明照耀。从骨头、牙齿和眼睛的白色部位射出白色光束,因为这些光束,各方就好像被银瓶倾注的乳流撒满,好像铺开了银绢天幕,好像飘动着银扇,好像被白茉莉、白莲、白睡莲、素馨、茉莉等花覆盖,光明照耀。从手掌、脚掌等淡红色部位射出赤色光束,因为这些光束,各方就好像被珊瑚网围住,好像被红拘勿头花撒满,光明照耀。从白毫等处光辉部位射出光辉色光束,因为这些光束,各方就好像充满了晨星之聚,好像充满了闪电之网等,光明照耀。巴利
Idāni channaṃ vaṇṇānanti ko sambandho? Heṭṭhā ‘‘uparimakāyato’’tiādīhi anekehi sarīrāvayavā vuttā. Tena sarīrāvayavasambandho pavattatīti vacanasambandhena ca yamakapāṭihīrādhikārena ca channaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ sarīrāvayavabhūtānaṃ rasmiyo yamakā hutvā pavattantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sāmivacanasambandhena ca avassaṃ ‘‘rasmiyo’’ti pāṭhaseso icchitabboyeva. Nīlānanti umāpupphavaṇṇānaṃ. Pītakānanti kaṇikārapupphavaṇṇānaṃ. Lohitakānanti indagopakavaṇṇānaṃ. Odātānanti osadhitārakavaṇṇānaṃ. Mañjiṭṭhānanti mandarattavaṇṇānaṃ. Pabhassarānanti pabhāsanapakatikānaṃ pabhassaravaṇṇānaṃ. Pabhassaravaṇṇe visuṃ avijjamānepi vuttesu pañcasu vaṇṇesu ye ye pabhā samujjalā, te te pabhassarā. Tathā hi tathāgatassa yamakapāṭihīraṃ karontassa yamakapāṭihīrañāṇabaleneva kesamassūnañceva akkhīnañca nīlaṭṭhānehi nīlarasmiyo nikkhamanti, yāsaṃ vasena gaganatalaṃ añjanacuṇṇasamokiṇṇaṃ viya umāpupphanīluppaladalasañchannaṃ viya vītipatantamaṇitālavaṇṭaṃ viya pasāritamecakapaṭaṃ viya ca hoti. Chavito ceva akkhīnañca pītakaṭṭhānehi pītarasmiyo nikkhamanti, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā suvaṇṇarasanisiñcamānā viya suvaṇṇapaṭapasāritā viya kuṅkumacuṇṇakaṇikārapupphasamparikiṇṇā viya ca virocanti. Maṃsalohitehi ceva akkhīnañca rattaṭṭhānehi lohitarasmiyo nikkhamanti, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā cinapiṭṭhacuṇṇarañjitā viya supakkalākhārasanisiñcamānā viya rattakambalaparikkhittā viya jayasumanapālibhaddakabandhujīvakakusumasamparikiṇṇā viya ca virocanti. Aṭṭhīhi ceva dantehi ca akkhīnañca setaṭṭhānehi odātarasmiyo nikkhamanti, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā rajatakuṭehi āsiñcamānakhīradhārāsamparikiṇṇā viya pasāritarajatapaṭṭavitānā viya vītipatantarajatatālavaṇṭā viya kundakumudasinduvārasumanamallikādikusumasañchannā viya ca virocanti. Hatthatalapādatalādīhi mandarattaṭṭhānehi mañjiṭṭharasmiyo nikkhamanti, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā pavāḷajālaparikkhittā viya rattakuravakakusumasamokiṇṇā viya ca virocanti. Uṇṇānakhādīhi pabhassaraṭṭhānehi pabhassararasmiyo nikkhamanti, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā osadhitārakapuñjapuṇṇā viya vijjupaṭalādiparipuṇṇā viya ca virocanti.
“世尊经行”等这句话,是为了说明“世尊和化现出来的那些形象做出各种不同的威仪,这正是双神变”才说的。因为那些化现出来的形象,它们的威仪也是成对出现的。既然化现出来的形象有很多,为什么还用单数说“化现者”呢?这是为了表明:即使有很多化现出来的形象,其中每一个也各有不同的威仪。如果用复数来说,就会让人觉得所有化现出来的形象同一时间只有一种威仪;而用单数来说,就能知道在众多化现形象中,每一个都各有不同的威仪。所以才用单数来说。周利槃陀伽长老尚且能化现出一千个各具不同威仪的比丘,世尊在双神变中化现出许多化现形象,那还用说吗?除了周利槃陀伽长老以外,其他弟子没办法只用一个作意就化现出具有不同威仪、不同形象的化现物。因为如果不特别指定,化现出来的形象就会和施展神通的人一模一样。无论是站立、坐下,还是说话、沉默等等,施展神通的人做什么,它们就跟着做什么。若要让他们做出不一样的动作、不同的行为,就必须分别作意、决意:“这些要这样,那些要做这个那个”,这样才能成功。但如来只要一个作意和决意,就能化现出种种不同的形象。化现火堆和水流,以及化现不同颜色时,也应当这样理解。这里,“世尊经行”是指在虚空中或地面上经行。“化现者”是指以神通力化现出来的佛陀形象。“站立”等等,也是在虚空中或地面上。“作”就是造作。在“世尊站立”等文句里,也是同样的道理。巴利
Bhagavā caṅkamatītiādi ‘‘bhagavato ca nimmitānañca nānāiriyāpathakaraṇaṃ yamakapāṭihīreneva hotī’’ti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tesañhi nimmitānaṃ iriyāpathā yugalāva hutvā vattanti. Yadi nimmitā bahukā honti, ‘‘nimmito’’tiādi kasmā ekavacanaṃ katanti ce? Nimmitesupi ekekassa nānāiriyāpathabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Bahuvacanena hi vutte sabbepi nimmitā sakiṃ ekekairiyāpathikā viya honti. Ekavacanena pana vutte nimmitesu ekeko nānāiriyāpathikoti ñāyati. Tasmā ekavacananiddeso kato. Cūḷapanthakattheropi tāva nānāiriyāpathikabhikkhūnaṃ sahassaṃ māpesi, kiṃ pana bhagavā yamakapāṭihīre bahū nimmite na karissati. Cūḷapanthakattheraṃ muñcitvā aññesaṃ sāvakānaṃ ekāvajjanena nānāiriyapathikānaṃ nānārūpānañca nimmānaṃ na ijjhati. Aniyametvā hi nimmitā iddhimatā sadisāva honti. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu vā bhāsitatuṇhībhāvādīsu vā yaṃ yaṃ iddhimā karoti, taṃ tadeva karonti, visadisakaraṇaṃ nānākiriyākaraṇañca ‘‘ettakā īdisā hontu, ettakā imaṃ nāma karontū’’ti visuṃ visuṃ āvajjitvā adhiṭṭhānena ijjhati. Tathāgatassa pana ekāvajjanādhiṭṭhāneneva nānappakāranimmānaṃ ijjhati. Evameva aggikkhandhaudakadhārānimmāne ca nānāvaṇṇanimmāne ca veditabbaṃ. Tattha bhagavā caṅkamatīti ākāse vā pathaviyaṃ vā caṅkamati. Nimmitoti iddhiyā māpitabuddharūpaṃ. Tiṭṭhati vātiādīnipi ākāse vā pathaviyaṃ vā. Kappetīti karoti. Bhagavā tiṭṭhatītiādīsupi eseva nayoti.
大悲智解说的注释巴利
71. Mahākaruṇāñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
117 在“大悲智解说”这一节里,“以种种行相”指的是现在要说的八十九种行相。“看见者”,就是用智眼和佛眼在观察的诸佛。“进入”,就是趣入、进去。“燃烧”,是就苦相来说,因为被逼恼、被烧灼,所以叫燃烧。由于经上说“凡是无常的,就是苦”,一切有为法都因苦相而受逼恼,而苦又是悲悯的根本,所以应当知道,这里先就苦相说“燃烧”。至于被贪等烧燃,下文还会说到。或者也可以说,“燃烧”就是被贪等烧燃,而下文“没有别人能熄灭它”则是就期待之义而再次说的,应当知道。“世间共住”,五蕴以坏灭、崩坏之义为世间,以渴爱、邪见之义为众生的共住,即众生住于其中,所以叫共住;世间本身就是共住,所以叫世间共住。依于苦的蕴相续而施设有情,由于一切有情言说皆得成立,又因与世间共住相应,所以有情众聚也是世间共住。而那也只是与蕴俱有的。“热心”,就是在种种事务中恒常勤作,已作加行,已发精勤,对于恒常所作之事具有精勤,意思是极为努力。“或者”,与勤触相应,所以叫热心。“前行”,就像山间河流一样,以不停留的行走,为了死亡而开始前往。“行于邪道”,就是行于卑劣的邪道。下文又以“堕入歧途”等种种词句加以区别而说。巴利
117. Mahākaruṇāñāṇaniddese bahukehi ākārehīti idāni vuccamānehi ekūnanavutiyā pakārehi. Passantānanti ñāṇacakkhunā ca buddhacakkhunā ca olokentānaṃ. Okkamatīti otarati pavisati. Ādittoti dukkhalakkhaṇavasena pīḷāyogato santāpanaṭṭhena ādīpito. ‘‘Yadaniccaṃ, taṃ dukkha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) vuttattā sabbasaṅkhatassa ceva dukkhalakkhaṇavasena pīḷitattā dukkhassa ca karuṇāya mūlabhūtattā paṭhamaṃ dukkhalakkhaṇavasena ‘‘āditto’’ti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Rāgādīhi ādittataṃ pana upari vakkhati. Atha vā ādittoti rāgādīhiyeva āditto. Upari pana ‘‘tassa natthañño koci nibbāpetā’’ti atthāpekkhanavasena puna vuttanti veditabbaṃ . Lokasannivāsoti pañcakkhandhā lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko, taṇhādiṭṭhivasena sannivasanti ettha sattāti sannivāso, lokova sannivāso lokasannivāso. Dukkhitaṃ khandhasantānaṃ upādāya sattavohārasabbhāvato lokasannivāsayogato sattasamūhopi lokasannivāso. Sopi ca sahakhandhakoyeva. Uyyuttoti anekesu kiccesu niccabyāpāratāya katayogo kataussāho, satatakiccesu saussukkoti attho. Ghaṭṭanayuttoti vā uyyutto. Payātoti pabbateyyā nadī viya anavaṭṭhitagamanena maraṇāya yātuṃ āraddho. Kummaggappaṭipannoti kucchitaṃ micchāmaggaṃ paṭipanno. Upari pana ‘‘vipathapakkhando’’ti nānāpadehi visesetvā vuttaṃ.
被带近,就是被老衰带向死亡、被拖向死亡。因为老被称为寿命的减损。不坚固,就是不坚实,不能始终保持一样。正因为不坚固,所以才会被带近——这句话是在说明前一句的原因。通过这一点,说明了有原因的老苦。智者看到这种老苦,即使自己还没有遭受老的衰败,也会出家。无庇护,就是缺少能够保护和守护的力量,意思是没有守护者。无皈依处,就是缺少能够投靠、前往并给予安慰的力量,或者说是没有同伴。正因为无皈依处,所以才无庇护——这句话是在说明前一句的原因。通过这一点,说明了有原因的爱别离苦。智者看到这种爱别离苦,即使自己还没有遭受亲属的衰败,也会出家。无所有,就是没有属于自己的财物。舍弃一切而离去——应当清楚地认识到,所谓自己的财物,就是世间人必须舍弃一切而离去。正因为必须舍弃一切而离去,所以才说无所有——这句话是在说明前一句的原因。通过这一点,说明了有原因的死苦。智者看到这种死苦,即使自己还没有遭受财富的衰败,也会出家。别处说众生以业为所有,而这里以及《赖吒和罗经》中又说世间无所有,这怎么协调呢?这是着眼于必须舍弃而离去这一点,才说无所有;但业并不是可以舍弃离去的。因此说以业为所有。而且就在《赖吒和罗经》里也这样说:你将随自己的业而去。不圆满,就是欠缺圆满。不满足,就是即使一再希求也不觉得够。这是说明不圆满的原因。渴爱之奴,是因为完全处在渴爱的控制下,成了渴爱的奴仆。这是说明不满足的原因。通过这些,借着渴爱之病的说法,指出了有原因的病苦。智者看到这种病苦,即使自己还没有遭受病的衰败,也会出家。无可依怙,是说连子女等也提供不了保护,所以没有庇护、没有守护,或者说不可能获得安稳。无依止,就是没有资格去依附、去依靠,而且对已经依附的人来说,它也不起依止的作用。无避难所,就是对依靠它的人,不能成为恐惧中的依归,不能消除恐惧。成为无避难所,是指在它生起之前,本身就根本没有这样的可依者;意思是在它生起的那一刹那,就已经是无避难所了。巴利
Upanīyatīti jarāvasena maraṇāya upanīyati harīyati. Jarā hi ‘‘āyuno saṃhānī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.2) vuttā. Addhuvoti na thiro, sadā tatheva na hoti. Yasmā addhuvo, tasmā upanīyatīti purimassa kāraṇavacanametaṃ. Etena sakāraṇaṃ jarādukkhaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ jarādukkhaṃ disvā jarāpārijuññarahitāpi viññū pabbajanti. Atāṇoti tāyituṃ rakkhituṃ samatthena rahito, anārakkhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Anabhissaroti abhisaritvā abhigantvā byāharaṇena assāsetuṃ samatthena rahito, asahāyoti vā attho. Yasmā anabhissaro, tasmā atāṇoti purimassa kāraṇavacanametaṃ. Etena sakāraṇaṃ piyavippayogadukkhaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ piyavippayogadukkhaṃ disvā ñātipārijuññarahitāpi viññū pabbajanti. Assakoti sakabhaṇḍarahito. Sabbaṃ pahāya gamanīyanti sakabhaṇḍanti sallakkhitaṃ sabbaṃ pahāya lokena gantabbaṃ. Yasmā sabbaṃ pahāya gamanīyaṃ, tasmā assakoti purimassa kāraṇavacanametaṃ. Etena sakāraṇaṃ maraṇadukkhaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ disvā bhogapārijuññarahitāpi viññū pabbajanti. Aññattha ‘‘kammassakā māṇavasattā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.289) vuttaṃ, idha ca raṭṭhapālasutte ca ‘‘assako loko’’ti (ma. ni. 2.305) vuttaṃ, taṃ kathaṃ yujjatīti ce? Pahāya gamanīyaṃ sandhāya ‘‘assako’’ti vuttaṃ, kammaṃ pana na pahāya gamanīyaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘kammassakā’’ti vuttaṃ. Raṭṭhapālasutteyeva ca evametaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tvaṃ pana yathākammaṃ gamissasī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.306). Ūnoti pāripūrirahito. Atittoti bhiyyo bhiyyo patthanāyapi na suhito . Idaṃ ūnabhāvassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Taṇhādāsoti taṇhāya vase vattanato taṇhāya dāsabhūto. Idaṃ atittabhāvassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Etena icchārogāpadesena sakāraṇaṃ byādhidukkhaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ byādhidukkhaṃ disvā byādhipārijuññarahitāpi viññū pabbajanti. Atāyanoti puttādīhipi tāyanassa abhāvato atāyano anārakkho, alabbhaneyyakhemo vā. Aleṇoti allīyituṃ nissituṃ anaraho allīnānampi ca leṇakiccākārako. Asaraṇoti nissitānaṃ na bhayasārako na bhayavināsako. Asaraṇībhūtoti pure uppattiyā attano abhāveneva asaraṇo, uppattisamakālameva asaraṇībhūtoti attho.
所谓“掉举”,是因为掉举会在一切不善法中生起,而且众生相续中不善法频繁出现,所以具足不善的世间就被这种掉举搅动了。“未止息”,是因为与具有“未止息”特征的掉举相应,所以没有止息,就像受惊的鹿一样。在“世间被带近”等四处,以及“世间掉举”这一处,这五处里的“世间”是指五蕴世间,其余地方则指“世间共住”。两种说法都只是指世间。“有刺”,是因为与被称为“刺”的贪等烦恼共住——这些刺会逼迫人、从内部刺痛人,又难以拔除,所以叫刺。“被刺伤”,是说鹿等动物有时会被别的众生刺伤,但这个世间却永远是被自己刺伤。“被种种刺”,就是被所说的七种刺——贪刺、嗔刺、痴刺、慢刺、恶见刺、烦恼刺、恶行刺——所伤。“它的”,指那个世间共住。“拔除诸刺”,就是从众生相续中拔除那些刺的人。“除了我”,就是把我排除在外。即使世尊的弟子们拔除诸刺,也是靠世尊的教导才拔除的,所以说真正拔除诸刺的就是世尊。“被无明黑暗遮蔽”,是说无明会遮住对事物真实状态的看见,使人像瞎了一样,所以叫无明黑暗;它又阻碍人通达真实状态,因此成为障碍,所以说被无明黑暗遮蔽。“被投进烦恼笼中”,是说烦恼会阻止人走向善法,所以叫笼,也就是烦恼笼;这个世间被投进、抛进由无明产生的烦恼笼中。“示现光明”,是指习惯于示现智慧之光,或者说是示现智慧之光的意思。“进入无明”,就是已经进入、陷入无明之中。这不只是被无明遮蔽而已,而是像走进密林一样,已经钻进了无明壳的内部——这是和前面不同的地方。“如卵一般”等说法也都是区别之辞。“如卵一般”,就是在卵中出生、形成。正如有些在卵中出生的众生被称为“如卵一般”,这个世间因为在无明卵壳中出生,所以也叫“如卵一般”。“被包裹”,就是被那无明卵壳从四周缠住、系住、裹住。巴利
Uddhatoti sabbākusalesu uddhaccassa uppajjanato sattasantāne ca akusaluppattibāhullato akusalasamaṅgīloko tena uddhaccena uddhato. Avūpasantoti avūpasamanalakkhaṇassa uddhaccasseva yogena avūpasanto bhantamigapaṭibhāgo. ‘‘Upanīyati loko’’tiādīsu catūsu ca ‘‘uddhato loko’’ti ca pañcasu ṭhānesu lokoti āgataṃ, sesesu lokasannivāsoti. Ubhayathāpi lokoyeva. Sasalloti pīḷājanakatāya antotudanatāya dunnīharaṇīyatāya ca sallāti saṅkhaṃ gatehi rāgādīhi sallehi sahavattanako. Viddhoti migādayo kadāci parehi viddhā honti, ayaṃ pana loko niccaṃ attanāva viddho. Puthusallehīti ‘‘satta sallāni – rāgasallaṃ, dosasallaṃ, mohasallaṃ, mānasallaṃ, diṭṭhisallaṃ, kilesasallaṃ, duccaritasalla’’nti (mahāni. 174) vuttehi sattahi sallehi. Tassāti tassa lokasannivāsassa. Sallānaṃ uddhatāti tesaṃ sallānaṃ sattasantānato uddharitā puggalo. Aññatra mayāti maṃ ṭhapetvā. Yepi bhagavato sāvakā sallāni uddharanti, tesaṃ bhagavato vacaneneva uddharaṇato bhagavāva uddharati nāma. Avijjandhakārāvaraṇoti avijjā eva sabhāvadassanacchādanena andhaṃ viya karotīti avijjandhakāro, sova sabhāvāvagamananivāraṇena āvaraṇaṃ etassāti avijjandhakārāvaraṇo. Kilesapañjarapakkhittoti kilesā eva kusalagamanasannirujjhanaṭṭhena pañjaroti kilesapañjaro, avijjāpabhave kilesapañjare pakkhitto pātito. Ālokaṃ dassetāti paññālokaṃ dassanasīlo, paññālokassa dassetāti vā attho. Avijjāgatoti avijjaṃ gato paviṭṭho. Na kevalaṃ avijjāya āvaraṇamattameva, atha kho gahanagato viya avijjākosassa anto paviṭṭhoti purimato viseso. Aṇḍabhūtotiādayo ca visesāyeva. Aṇḍabhūtoti aṇḍe bhūto nibbatto. Yathā hi aṇḍe nibbattā ekacce sattā ‘‘aṇḍabhūtā’’ti vuccanti, evamayaṃ loko avijjaṇḍakose nibbattattā ‘‘aṇḍabhūto’’ti vuccati. Pariyonaddhoti tena avijjaṇḍakosena samantato onaddho baddho veṭhito.
像乱线团一样:就像线被弄乱那样。好比织工一段没放好的、被老鼠咬断的线,到处缠成一团,分不清哪是头、哪是尾,要把头对头、尾对尾理清楚,很难。同样,众生在缘起上出了差错,迷乱、纠结,没办法把缘起理顺。不过,线团如果靠个人的努力,还是有可能理清的;但除了两位菩萨,其他任何众生单靠自己的力量,都没有能力把缘起理顺。又好比乱线被浇上酸浆、用梭子拍打之后,到处结成团、打成结;同样,这个世间在诸缘上出了差错,没法把缘起理顺,就依六十二种恶见而变成线团一样、打成结一样。凡是执持恶见的人,全都无法把缘起理顺。像结扣一样:就像结成扣那样。结扣指的是织工用的浆线。也有人说:kula是一种小鸟,它的巢叫kulāvaka。这两种情况都跟前面一样理解:乱得难以头对头、尾对尾地接起来。像蒙草和苇草一样:就像蒙草、像苇草那样,变得跟蒙草、苇草一样。好比那些草被反复捶打,做成绳子,旧了以后掉在某个地方,拿起来想分清“这是头,这是尾”,要把头对头、尾对尾理清楚,很难。那蒙草和苇草,如果靠个人的努力,也还是有可能理清的;但除了两位菩萨,其他任何众生单靠自己的力量,都没有能力把缘起理顺。这样,这个世间没法把缘起理顺,依六十二种恶见而变成打结一样,不能超越恶趣、苦趣、堕落和轮回。巴利
Tantākulakajātoti tantaṃ viya ākulabhūto. Yathā nāma dunnikkhittaṃ mūsikacchinnaṃ pesakārānaṃ tantaṃ tahiṃ tahiṃ ākulaṃ hoti, idaṃ aggaṃ idaṃ mūlanti aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaraṃ hoti, evameva sattā paccayākāre khalitā ākulā byākulā honti, na sakkonti paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ. Tattha tantaṃ paccattapurisakāre ṭhatvā sakkāpi bhaveyya ujuṃ kātuṃ, ṭhapetvā pana dve bodhisatte añño satto attano dhammatāya paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Yathā pana ākulaṃ tantaṃ kañjikaṃ datvā kocchena pahaṭaṃ tattha tattha kulakajātaṃ hoti gaṇṭhibaddhaṃ, evamayaṃ loko paccayesu pakkhalitvā paccaye ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkonto dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatavasena kulakajāto hoti gaṇṭhibaddho. Ye hi keci diṭṭhiyo nissitā, sabbe te paccayaṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ na sakkontiyeva. Kulāgaṇṭhikajātoti kulāgaṇṭhikaṃ viya bhūto. Kulāgaṇṭhikaṃ vuccati pesakārakañjikasuttaṃ. ‘‘Kulā nāma sakuṇikā, tassā kulāvako’’tipi eke. Yathā tadubhayampi ākulaṃ aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaranti purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Muñjapabbajabhūtoti muñjatiṇaṃ viya pabbajatiṇaṃ viya ca bhūto muñjatiṇapabbajatiṇasadiso jāto. Yathā tāni tiṇāni koṭṭetvā koṭṭetvā katarajju jiṇṇakāle katthaci patitaṃ gahetvā tesaṃ tiṇānaṃ ‘‘idaṃ aggaṃ idaṃ mūla’’nti aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaraṃ, tampi paccattapurisakāre ṭhatvā sakkā bhaveyya ujuṃ kātuṃ, ṭhapetvā pana dve bodhisatte añño satto attano dhammatāya paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Evamayaṃ loko paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkonto dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatavasena gaṇṭhijāto hutvā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ saṃsāraṃ nātivattati.
在这里,“恶趣”指地狱、畜生道、饿鬼界、阿修罗众。因为它们全都没有所谓“增长”的资具,所以被称为“恶趣”。同样,因为它们是苦的去处,所以叫“苦趣”。因为是从安乐聚集之处坠落,所以叫“堕落”。而另一个——巴利
Tattha apāyoti nirayo tiracchānayoni pettivisayo asurakāyo. Sabbepi hi te vaḍḍhisaṅkhātassa āyassa abhāvato ‘‘apāyo’’ti vuccanti. Tathā dukkhassa gatibhāvato duggati. Sukhasamussayato vinipatitattā vinipāto. Itaro pana –
诸蕴、界、处的次第相续,
它不间断地持续流转,这就叫作轮回。巴利
‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccati’’.
这一切,他也全都无法超越、无法越过。于是,从死到结生,从结生到死,就这样一次又一次地抓取着死与结生,在三有、四生、五趣、七识住、九有情居中,就像大海里被风抛掷的船,又像套着轭的牛,只是不停地打转。
“被无明毒垢所涂染”:无明本身因为能产生不善、毁坏善的生活,所以叫“无明毒”;又因为它能染污心相续,所以叫“毒垢”。被这种由随眠、缠缚、恶行所构成的东西深深涂染、遍染,就叫“被无明毒垢所涂染”。
“成为烦恼淤泥”:以无明等为根本的种种烦恼,因为具有让人沉陷下去的意思,所以叫“泥泞”“淤泥”,这就是“烦恼淤泥”;一个人具有这些烦恼淤泥,就叫“烦恼淤泥者”。
“被贪嗔痴之结所结缚”:贪、嗔、痴,也就是贪欲、嗔恚、无明,它们对色等所缘,以或下或上的方式反复生起。因为具有缠缚的意思,就像竹林等枝条交织成网被称为“结”一样,它们也被称为“结”。被那贪嗔痴之结所结缚,就像竹子等被竹结等缠住一样,意思是说,这个世间被那种结所缠绕、捆缚、纠结在一起。
“能解结者”:是指能够把这已经纠缠而立住的三界世间之结解开、断除、击碎的人。巴利
Taṃ sabbampi nātivattati nātikkamati. Atha kho cutito paṭisandhiṃ, paṭisandhito cutinti evaṃ punappunaṃ cutipaṭisandhiyo gaṇhamāno tīsu bhavesu catūsu yonīsu pañcasu gatīsu sattasu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu navasu sattāvāsesu mahāsamudde vātukkhittanāvā viya yantagoṇo viya ca paribbhamatiyeva. Avijjāvisadosasallittoti avijjāyeva akusaluppādanena kusalajīvitanāsanato visanti avijjāvisaṃ, tadeva santānadūsanato avijjāvisadoso, tena anusayapariyuṭṭhānaduccaritabhūtena bhusaṃ litto makkhitoti avijjāvisadosasallitto. Kilesakalalībhūtoti avijjādimūlakā kilesā eva osīdanaṭṭhena kalalaṃ kaddamoti kilesakalalaṃ, tadassa atthīti kilesakalalī, evaṃbhūto. Rāgadosamohajaṭājaṭitoti lobhapaṭighāvijjāsaṅkhātā rāgadosamohā eva rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu heṭṭhupariyavasena punappunaṃ uppajjanato saṃsibbanaṭṭhena veḷugumbādīnaṃ sākhājālasaṅkhātā jaṭā viyāti jaṭā, tāya rāgadosamohajaṭāya jaṭito. Yathā nāma veḷujaṭādīhi veḷuādayo, evaṃ tāya jaṭāya ayaṃ loko jaṭito vinaddho saṃsibbitoti attho. Jaṭaṃ vijaṭetāti imaṃ evaṃ tedhātukaṃ lokaṃ jaṭetvā ṭhitaṃ jaṭaṃ vijaṭetā saṃchinditā sampadālayitā.
被贪爱之紧合所阻:贪爱因为不间断地持续运转,所以有紧合在一起的意思,因此称为“紧合”,也就是贪爱之紧合;被那贪爱之紧合所阻、进入、纳入其中,所以叫被贪爱之紧合所阻。被贪爱之网所覆:贪爱按照前面所说的方式,因为具有缠缚的意思而称为“网”,也就是贪爱之网;被那贪爱之网覆盖、从四周遮蔽、缠绕,所以叫被贪爱之网所覆。被贪爱之流所漂:贪爱因为在轮回中具有拉扯的意思而称为“流”,也就是贪爱之流;被那贪爱之流冲走、拉扯,所以叫被贪爱之流所漂。被贪爱之结所缚:贪爱因为把世间结缚、捆绑在轮转之中,所以称为“结”,也就是贪爱之结;被那贪爱之结所结缚、捆绑,所以叫被贪爱之结所缚。被贪爱之随眠所随逐:贪爱因为具有潜伏随逐的意思而称为“随眠”,也就是贪爱之随眠;被那贪爱之随眠所追随、跟随,并变得势力强固,所以叫被贪爱之随眠所随逐。被贪爱之热恼所烧恼:贪爱在现起的时候和产生果报的时候,都能让世间热恼,所以称为“热恼”;被那贪爱之热恼所烧恼、被弄得热恼,所以叫被贪爱之热恼所烧恼。被贪爱之灼热所遍烧:贪爱势力强大,在现起的时候和产生果报的时候,因为从四周焚烧,所以称为“大灼热”,也就是贪爱之灼热;被那贪爱之灼热所遍烧、从四周焚烧,所以叫被贪爱之灼热所遍烧。邪见之紧合等,也应当依照同样的方式类推。巴利
Taṇhāsaṅghāṭapaṭimukkoti taṇhā eva abbocchinnaṃ pavattito saṅghaṭitaṭṭhena saṅghāṭoti taṇhāsaṅghāṭo, tasmiṃ taṇhāsaṅghāṭe paṭimukko anupaviṭṭho antogatoti taṇhāsaṅghāṭapaṭimukko. Taṇhājālena otthaṭoti taṇhā eva pubbe vuttanayena saṃsibbanaṭṭhena jālanti taṇhājālaṃ, tena taṇhājālena otthaṭo samantato chādito paliveṭhito. Taṇhāsotena vuyhatīti taṇhā eva saṃsāre ākaḍḍhanaṭṭhena sototi taṇhāsoto, tena taṇhāsotena vuyhati ākaḍḍhīyati. Taṇhāsaññojanena saññuttoti taṇhā eva lokaṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ saṃyojanato bandhanato saṃyojananti taṇhāsaṃyojanaṃ, tena taṇhāsaṃyojanena saññutto baddho. Taṇhānusayena anusaṭoti taṇhā eva anusayanaṭṭhena anusayoti taṇhānusayo, tena taṇhānusayena anusaṭo anugato thāmagato. Taṇhāsantāpena santappatīti taṇhā eva pavattikāle phalakāle ca lokaṃ santāpetīti santāpo, tena taṇhāsantāpena santappati santāpīyati. Taṇhāpariḷāhena pariḍayhatīti taṇhā eva balavabhūtā pavattikāle phalakāle ca samantato dahanaṭṭhena mahāpariḷāhoti taṇhāpariḷāho, tena taṇhāpariḷāhena pariḍayhati samantato ḍahīyati. Diṭṭhisaṅghāṭādayo imināva nayena yojetabbā.
“随入”就是已经进入。“随逐”就是被追着跑。“被征服”就是被压迫。“被击打”就是迎面遭到猛烈打击、当面被重击。“住立于苦”就是凭着把乐当成苦的颠倒想,住立在苦的五取蕴当中,深深执取、牢牢附着。巴利
Anugatoti anupaviṭṭho. Anusaṭoti anudhāvito. Abhibhūtoti pīḷito. Abbhāhatoti abhiāhato abhimukhaṃ bhusaṃ pahato. Dukkhe patiṭṭhitoti dukkhe khandhapañcake sukhavipallāsena patiṭṭhito abhiniviṭṭho.
被贪爱绊住,就是被贪爱所绊倒。眼睛被贪爱这条绳子缠住,绊在色尘这头象桩上;耳等诸根也被贪爱这条绳子缠住,绊在声尘等象桩上。具足彼等者,世间也同样叫做被绊住。被衰老的围墙围住,就是被那无法逾越、像围墙一样的衰老包围着。被死神的套索围住,就是被那难以挣脱、像套索一样的死亡绑住。被大结缚绑住,是因为这些结缚又坚固又难断,所以被强大的结缚捆绑着。以贪结缚,是说贪本身就能绑住人,让人无法从轮回中脱,这就是贪结缚。以此贪结缚。其余亦同此法。以烦恼结缚,就是被前面所说的其余烦恼所结缚。以恶行结缚,就是被三种恶行所结缚。然而善行是解脱束缚的因,也是解脱束缚本身,因此不应取它作为束缚。巴利
Taṇhāya uḍḍitoti taṇhāya ullaṅghito. Cakkhu hi taṇhārajjunā āvunitvā rūpanāgadante uḍḍitaṃ, sotādīni taṇhārajjunā āvunitvā saddādināgadantesu uḍḍitāni. Taṃsamaṅgīlokopi uḍḍitoyeva nāma. Jarāpākāraparikkhittoti anatikkamanīyaṭṭhena pākārabhūtāya jarāya parivārito. Maccupāsena parikkhittoti dummocanīyaṭṭhena pāsabhūtena maraṇena baddho. Mahābandhanabaddhoti daḷhattā ducchedattā ca mahantehi bandhanehi baddho. Rāgabandhanenāti rāgo eva bandhati saṃsārato calituṃ na detīti rāgabandhanaṃ. Tena rāgabandhanena. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Kilesabandhanenāti vuttāvasesena kilesabandhanena. Duccaritabandhanenāti tividhena. Sucaritaṃ pana bandhanamokkhassa hetubhūtaṃ bandhanamokkhabhūtañca atthi. Tasmā taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.
能解缚者:就是能解开他的束缚的人。也有写成“从束缚中解救人”的读法,意思是从束缚中把那个人解救出来。已入大困境者:因为善行运转受到压迫,而进入了被称为大困境的、由贪嗔痴慢见等烦恼和恶行构成的密林。能指示空间者:指能指示世间与出世间的定与慧的空间。被大障碍所障:被巨大的阻挡所遮蔽,或者被浓重的黏着所污染。所谓障碍,就是贪等七种。也有人说:“贪爱和恶见是障碍。”能断除障碍者:就是能斩断那障碍的人。于大悬崖:于五趣的悬崖中,或于生老死的悬崖中。从悬崖拔出者:能从彼悬崖中救拔出来的人。能度旷野者:能令人渡过那旷野的人。已入大轮回者:已进入无间相续的蕴续之中。能解脱轮回者:能从轮回中解脱出来的人。也有写成“能解脱轮回”的读法。于大险难:于轮回的险难中。因为轮回本身就是难行之道,所以称为险难。不断回转者:就是强烈地回转而行。于大泥沼:于巨大的欲泥中。因为欲有沉没之义,所以称为泥沼。陷入泥沼者:就是执著的人。也有写成“陷入大泥沼的泥沼”的读法。巴利
Bandhanaṃmocetāti tassa bandhanaṃ mocetā. Bandhanā mocetātipi pāṭho, bandhanato taṃ mocetāti attho. Mahāsambādhappaṭipannoti kusalasañcārapīḷanena mahāsambādhasaṅkhātaṃ rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhikilesaduccaritagahanaṃ paṭipanno. Okāsaṃ dassetāti lokiyalokuttarasamādhipaññāokāsaṃ dassetā. Mahāpalibodhena palibuddhoti mahānivāraṇena nivuto. Mahālepena vā litto. Palibodhoti ca rāgādisattavidho eva. ‘‘Taṇhādiṭṭhipalibodho’’ti eke. Palibodhaṃ chetāti taṃ palibodhaṃ chinditā. Mahāpapāteti pañcagatipapāte, jātijarāmaraṇapapāte vā. Taṃ sabbampi duruttaraṇaṭṭhena papāto. Papātā uddhatāti tamhā papātato uddharitā. Mahākantārappaṭipannoti jātijarābyādhimaraṇasokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsakantāraṃ paṭipanno. Sabbampi taṃ duratikkamanaṭṭhena kantāro, taṃ kantāraṃ tāretā. Kantārā tāretāti vā pāṭho. Mahāsaṃsārappaṭipannoti abbocchinnaṃ khandhasantānaṃ paṭipanno. Saṃsārā mocetāti saṃsārato mocetā. Saṃsāraṃ mocetāti vā pāṭho. Mahāviduggeti saṃsāravidugge. Saṃsāroyeva hi duggamanaṭṭhena viduggo. Samparivattatīti bhusaṃ nivattitvā carati. Mahāpalipeti mahante kāmakaddame. Kāmo hi osīdanaṭṭhena palipo. Palipannoti laggo. Mahāpalipapalipannotipi pāṭho.
被彻底击垮的人,就是被一切灾祸彻底击垮。被贪火所烧:贪等烦恼本身就是火,因为它们有燃烧的作用,所以叫火,他就是被这贪火所烧。其余几句也照这样理解。被抬走的人:就是被抓住后带走,意思是出生时被抓住,然后被带向衰老等灾祸。这里面的 ka 这个音节,要理解为表达悲悯。恒常被杀害、没有保护:就是连一点点保护都没有,时时刻刻都在被逼迫。拿着刑杖的人:就是从国王等人那里领受了惩罚命令的人。做那种事的人:就是盗贼。被种种过失的束缚所缚者:就是被贪等过失的束缚所缚。现前于屠杀场者:已来到死刑执行之处站立的人。有人能解缚。有人能解缚,这也是一个读法。无依:没有依怙、没有主宰的人,或者自己不是依怙、不是主宰,故称无依,也就是没有救护的意思。达到极度悲惨者:由于无力抵挡衰老等,达到了极度悲惨的状态。被保护者:就是被守护。被保护者,这也是一个较好的读法。被苦所撞击者:被生苦等无量诸苦所撞击、所极度伤害、所极度动摇。长时受逼恼者:正被诸苦在漫长时间里逼恼、折磨。执著者:就是被贪欲所执著,或者被贪欲的身结所结缚。常渴者:想喝、想吃,这就是渴爱,那渴爱本身就是渴,他因渴爱而时时刻刻都在渴。巴利
Abbhāhatoti sabbopaddavehi abbhāhato. Rāgaggināti rāgādayoyeva anudahanaṭṭhena aggi, tena rāgagginā. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Unnītakoti uggahetvā nīto, jātiyā uggahetvā jarādiupaddavāya nītoti attho. Ka-kāro panettha anukampāya daṭṭhabbo. Haññati niccamatāṇoti parittāyakena rahito satataṃ pīḷīyati. Pattadaṇḍoti rājādīhi laddhaāṇo. Takkaroti coro. Vajjabandhanabaddhoti rāgādivajjabandhanehi baddho. Āghātanapaccupaṭṭhitoti maraṇadhammagaṇṭhikaṭṭhānaṃ upecca ṭhito. Koci bandhanā mocetā. Koci bandhanaṃ mocetātipi pāṭho. Anāthoti natthi etassa nātho issaro, sayaṃ vā na nātho na issaroti anātho, asaraṇoti vā attho. Paramakāpaññappattoti jarādipaṭibāhane appahutāya atīva kapaṇabhāvaṃ patto. Tāyetāti rakkhitā. Tāyitāti vā pāṭho sundaro . Dukkhābhitunnoti jātidukkhādīhi anekehi dukkhehi abhitunno atibyādhito atikampito ca. Cirarattaṃ pīḷitoti dukkheheva dīghamaddhānaṃ pīḷito ghaṭṭito. Gadhitoti gedhena giddho, abhijjhākāyaganthena vā ganthito. Niccaṃ pipāsitoti pātuṃ bhuñjituṃ icchā pipāsā, sā taṇhā eva, taṇhāpipāsāya nirantaraṃ pipāsito.
盲人:因为缺少了以“能看”为含义而被称为“眼”的慧,所以是盲人。慧确实能看见诸法的真实本质。没有眼:不过,那种盲并不是后来才产生的,而是本来就无眼,这样说是在特别指出那种盲的性质。坏目者:因为慧缺少了以“引导”为含义而被称为“目”的意义,所以是坏目之人。之所以称为“目”,是因为它能引导这个身体,显示平坦与不平坦之处。以慧,能引导人趋向善趣或恶趣。为了显示他因为坏目而没有引导者,所以说“无向导”,意思就是没有目。也就是说,他也没有别的引导者。堕入邪道者:邪道就是颠倒、不正之道;踏上、进入、走上那条邪道的人,就是“堕入邪道者”,意思是行于被称为邪道的邪见。在正道上失途者:指在那条正确的、笔直的道路——也就是中道上失败、偏离了的人。能引入圣道者:指能引导人进入、使人踏上那圣洁的八支道的人。堕入大瀑流者:那些存在于轮回中、能使人沉没下陷的,称为瀑流;比通常所说的瀑流更大,就是大瀑流。它分为四种:欲瀑流、有瀑流、见瀑流、无明瀑流。堕入、进入那大瀑流的人,就是“堕入大瀑流者”;或者说,他是堕入被称为轮回的大瀑流。巴利
Andhoti dassanaṭṭhena cakkhūti saṅkhaṃ gatāya paññāya abhāvato kāṇo. Paññā hi dhammasabhāvaṃ passati. Acakkhukoti taṃ pana andhattaṃ na pacchā sambhūtaṃ, pakatiyā eva avijjamānacakkhukoti tameva andhattaṃ viseseti. Hatanettoti nayanaṭṭhena nettanti saṅkhaṃ gatāya paññāya abhāvatoyeva vinaṭṭhanettako. Samavisamaṃ dassentaṃ attabhāvaṃ netīti nettanti hi vuttaṃ. Paññāya sugatiñca agatiñca nayati. Hatanettattāyevassa netuabhāvaṃ dassento apariṇāyakoti āha, avijjamānanettakoti attho. Aññopissa netā na vijjatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vipathapakkhandoti viparīto, visamo vā patho vipatho, taṃ vipathaṃ pakkhando paviṭṭho paṭipannoti vipathapakkhando, micchāpathasaṅkhātaṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ paṭipannoti attho. Añjasāparaddhoti añjase ujumaggasmiṃ majjhimapaṭipadāya aparaddho viraddho. Ariyapathaṃ ānetāti ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ upanetā paṭipādayitā. Mahoghapakkhandoti yassa saṃvijjanti, taṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ ohananti osīdāpentīti oghā, pakatioghato mahantā oghāti mahoghā. Te kāmogho bhavogho diṭṭhogho avijjoghoti catuppabhedā. Te mahoghe pakkhando paviṭṭhoti mahoghapakkhando, saṃsārasaṅkhātaṃ mahoghaṃ vā pakkhandoti.
118 现在讲“一增”的排列方式。其中,“两种恶见”是指常见和断见。在这里,见本身就是恶见,就像“粪趣、尿趣”这类说法一样。或者,因为并没有一个实在的“可去之处”,见只是已到达的状态而已,所以叫恶见;又因为这种见解包含在六十二种邪见之中,也叫恶见。其实,六十二种和六十三种邪见归结起来也只有常见和断见这两种。因此,为了简要地把一切邪见都涵盖进去,才说“两种恶见”。“所缠”是指已达到缠缚的状态、已现前的状态,意思是说不给善行留出生起的空间,夺取了善行。世尊确实这样说过:“比丘们,被两种恶见所缠缚的天与人,有的停滞不前,有的跑过了头;而有眼的人则能看见……”等等。巴利
118. Idāni ekuttarikanayo. Tattha dvīhi diṭṭhigatehīti sassatucchedadiṭṭhīhi. Tattha diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigataṃ ‘‘gūthagataṃ muttagata’’ntiādīni (a. ni. 9.11) viya. Gantabbābhāvato vā diṭṭhiyā gatamattamevetanti diṭṭhigataṃ, diṭṭhīsu gataṃ idaṃ dassanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiantogadhattātipi diṭṭhigataṃ. Dvāsaṭṭhitesaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyopi hi sassatadiṭṭhi ucchedadiṭṭhīti dveva diṭṭhiyo honti. Tasmā saṅkhepena sabbā diṭṭhiyo anto karonto ‘‘dvīhi diṭṭhigatehī’’ti vuttaṃ . Pariyuṭṭhitoti pariyuṭṭhānaṃ patto samudācāraṃ patto, uppajjituṃ appadānena kusalacārassa gahaṇaṃ pattoti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘dvīhi, bhikkhave, diṭṭhigatehi pariyuṭṭhitā devamanussā olīyanti eke, atidhāvanti eke, cakkhumanto ca passantī’’tiādi (itivu. 49).
“三种恶行”是指三种身恶行、四种语恶行、三种意恶行。“邪行”就是颠倒而行,意思是错误地行持。“被轭所连结”:这些轭把众生连结在轮回里,所以叫轭;或者,从“连结”这个意思来说,就叫作轭,也就是被那些轭所连结、所系缚。“被四轭连结”,就是欲轭、有轭、见轭、无明轭这四种轭,像车轭套在牛身上一样,把众生连结在轮回之中。对五种欲乐的贪染,是欲轭。对色界、无色界存在的欲贪,对禅那的喜爱,以及与常见俱生、以生存状态为缘的贪求,称为有轭。六十二种邪见,是见轭。对八种事的无知,是无明轭。这四种法,力量强大时就叫暴流,力量弱小时就叫轭。巴利
Tīhi duccaritehīti tividhakāyaduccaritena catubbidhavacīduccaritena tividhamanoduccaritena. Vippaṭipannoti virūpaṃ paṭipanno, micchāpaṭipannoti attho. Yogehi yuttoti vaṭṭasmiṃ yojentīti yogā, ītiatthena vā yogā, tehi yogehi yutto samappito. Catuyogayojitoti kāmayogo, bhavayogo, diṭṭhiyogo, avijjāyogoti imehi catūhi yogehi sakaṭasmiṃ yogo viya vaṭṭasmiṃ yojito. Pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmayogo. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo, jhānanikanti ca, sassatadiṭṭhisahajāto rāgo bhavavasena patthanā bhavayogo. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo diṭṭhiyogo. Aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu aññāṇaṃ avijjāyogo. Te eva cattāro balavabhūtā oghā, dubbalabhūtā yogā.
“以四种缚”:一个人身上存在这四种缚,它们就通过死亡与结生,把他捆绑、系缚在轮回里,所以叫“缚”。这四种是:贪欲身缚、嗔恨身缚、戒禁取身缚、此实执取身缚。“贪欲”:因为靠它去贪求,或者它本身就是贪求,或者它只是贪求的状态,所以叫贪欲,其实就是贪。“身缚”:它捆绑名身,通过死亡与结生把有情束缚在轮回里,所以叫身缚。“嗔恨”:因为心被它损害而败坏,或者它破坏戒律、行为、色身、成就、利益和安乐等,所以叫嗔恨。“戒禁取身缚”:在此之外,沙门、婆罗门认为“戒清净、禁清净、戒禁清净”,这种执取就是戒禁取身缚。“此实执取”:使否定了遍知者所说的,依然以“世间是常,唯有这是真实,其他皆是虚妄”等方式坚固执着,所以称为此实执取。被这四种缚所缚,就是被捆绑的意思。巴利
Catūhi ganthehīti yassa saṃvijjanti, taṃ cutipaṭisandhivasena vaṭṭasmiṃ ganthenti ghaṭentīti ganthā. Te abhijjhā kāyagantho, byāpādo kāyagantho, sīlabbataparāmāso kāyagantho, idaṃsaccābhiniveso kāyaganthoti catuppabhedā. Abhijjhāyanti etāya, sayaṃ vā abhijjhāyati, abhijjhāyanamattameva vā esāti abhijjhā, lobhoyeva. Nāmakāyaṃ gantheti cutipaṭisandhivasena vaṭṭasmiṃ ghaṭetīti kāyagantho. Byāpajjati tena cittaṃ pūtibhāvaṃ gacchati, byāpādayati vā vinayācārarūpasampattihitasukhādīnīti byāpādo. Ito bahiddhā samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sīlena suddhi vatena suddhi sīlavatena suddhīti parāmasanaṃ sīlabbataparāmāso. Sabbaññubhāsitampi paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘sassato loko , idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’ntiādinā ākārena abhinivisatīti idaṃsaccābhiniveso. Tehi catūhi ganthehi ganthito, baddhoti attho.
以四种取:因为强烈地抓取、牢牢地执著,所以叫“取”。取有四种:欲取、见取、戒禁取、我语取。
执取作为事相的欲,就是欲取;或者说,它既是欲又是取,所以叫欲取。
它既是见又是取,所以叫见取;执取邪见,也叫见取。因为在“我及世间是常”这类说法中,后起的邪见执取先前的邪见。
执取戒禁,就是戒禁取;或者说,它既是戒禁又是取,所以叫戒禁取。像执取牛戒、牛行等,认为这样就能清净,这种固执本身就是取。
依它而说,所以叫“语”;依它而取,所以叫“取”。说什么、取什么呢?取“我”。执取关于我的言论,就是我语取;或者说,“我语”本身就是取——以它来执取我,所以叫我语取。
除了这两种见之外,其余一切见都属于见取。
被这四种取所取,就是被强烈地执著。或者读作“取著”,意思是世间依靠各种取,对种种所缘强烈地执著。巴利
Catūhi upādānehīti bhusaṃ ādiyanti daḷhaggāhaṃ gaṇhantīti upādānā. Te kāmupādānaṃ diṭṭhupādānaṃ sīlabbatupādānaṃ attavādupādānanti catuppabhedā. Vatthusaṅkhātaṃ kāmaṃ upādiyatīti kāmupādānaṃ, kāmo ca so upādānañcātipi kāmupādānaṃ. Diṭṭhi ca sā upādānañcāti diṭṭhupādānaṃ, diṭṭhiṃ upādiyatītipi diṭṭhupādānaṃ. ‘‘Sassato attā ca loko cā’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.147) hi purimadiṭṭhiṃ uttaradiṭṭhi upādiyati. Sīlabbataṃ upādiyatīti sīlabbatupādānaṃ, sīlabbatañca taṃ upādānañcātipi sīlabbatupādānaṃ. Gosīlagovatādīni hi evaṃ visuddhīti abhinivesato sayameva upādānāni. Vadanti etenāti vādo, upādiyanti etenāti upādānaṃ. Kiṃ vadanti, upādiyanti vā? Attānaṃ. Attano vādupādānaṃ attavādupādānaṃ, attavādamattameva vā attāti upādiyanti etenāti attavādupādānaṃ. Ṭhapetvā imā dve diṭṭhiyo sabbāpi diṭṭhī diṭṭhupādānaṃ. Tehi catūhi upādānehi. Upādīyatīti bhusaṃ gaṇhīyati. Upādiyatīti vā pāṭho, loko upādānehi taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ bhusaṃ gaṇhātīti attho.
已登上五趣:由善业和不善业所牵引而被导向、被引生,所以叫“趣”,也就是与投生处同在的五蕴。地狱、畜生道、饿鬼界、人、天,这五种趣,因为舍弃了前一种存在状态而强力地登上了新的趣。“以五种欲功德”:就是色、声、香、味、触这五种事欲。“染著”:因为不如理作意而生起贪染,于是被这些所染著,意思是变成极度贪染。“以五盖”:因为覆盖心、笼罩心,所以叫“盖”,就是欲贪、嗔恚、昏沉睡眠、掉举悔恨、疑这五种盖。“被覆盖”:就是从上方被遮住了。巴利
Pañcagatisamāruḷhoti sukatadukkaṭakāraṇehi gammati upasaṅkamīyatīti gati, sahokāsakā khandhā. Nirayo tiracchānayoni pettivisayo manussā devāti imā pañca gatiyo vokkamanabhāvena bhusaṃ āruḷho. Pañcahi kāmaguṇehīti rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbasaṅkhātehi pañcahi vatthukāmakoṭṭhāsehi. Rajjatīti ayonisomanasikāraṃ paṭicca rāguppādanena tehi rañjīyati, sāratto karīyatīti attho. Pañcahi nīvaraṇehīti cittaṃ nīvaranti pariyonandhantīti nīvaraṇā. Kāmacchandabyāpādathinamiddhauddhaccakukkuccavicikicchāsaṅkhātehi pañcahi nīvaraṇehi. Otthaṭoti uparito pihito.
以六种争论根源,也就是六种争论的根本。正如经文所说——巴利
Chahi vivādamūlehīti chahi vivādassa mūlehi. Yathāha –
比丘们,有六种争论的根源。哪六种呢?比丘们,在这里,有一位比丘容易发怒、心怀怨恨。比丘们,当一位比丘容易发怒、心怀怨恨时,他对大师不恭敬、不尊重地生活,对法、对僧团、对学处也不圆满奉行。比丘们,当一位比丘对大师不恭敬、不尊重地生活,对法、对僧团、对学处不圆满奉行时,他就在僧团中制造争论。这种争论会带给许多人损害,带给许多人痛苦,带给许多人无益、伤害和苦,对天和人都是如此。比丘们,如果你们在自己内部或外部观察到这样的争论根源,比丘们,你们就应当努力断除那邪恶的争论根源。比丘们,如果你们在自己内部或外部没有观察到这样的争论根源,比丘们,你们就应当为了那邪恶的争论根源在未来不再涌出而修行。这样,那邪恶的争论根源就被断除了;这样,那邪恶的争论根源在未来就不再涌出。巴利
‘‘Chayimāni, bhikkhave, vivādamūlāni. Katamāni cha? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī. So sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi, saṅghepi, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satthari agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi, saṅghepi, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī, so saṅghe vivādaṃ janeti. Yo hoti vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya bahuno janassa anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṃ. Evarūpaṃ ce tumhe, bhikkhave, vivādamūlaṃ ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā samanupasseyyātha, tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānāya vāyameyyātha. Evarūpaṃ ce tumhe, bhikkhave, vivādamūlaṃ ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā na samanupasseyyātha. Tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṃ anavassavāya paṭipajjeyyātha. Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānaṃ hoti. Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṃ anavassavo hoti.
再者,比丘们,有的比丘爱贬损别人、爱争强好胜;嫉妒别人、吝啬小气;狡诈虚伪;欲望邪恶、持有邪见;执着自己的见解、死死抓住不放、很难放弃。比丘们,如果一位比丘执着自己的见解、死死抓住不放、很难放弃,那么他对大师……(中略)……未来无有增长。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu makkhī hoti paḷāsī. Issukī hoti maccharī. Saṭho hoti māyāvī. Pāpiccho hoti micchādiṭṭhi. Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī, so sattharipi…pe… āyatiṃ anavassavo hotī’’ti (pari. 272; a. ni. 6.36).
在这里,“忿恨者”是指具有发怒特征的人,也就是具足了忿怒。“怀怨者”是指具有不肯舍弃仇恨特征的人,也就是具足了怀怨。“对天与人不利、痛苦”:两位比丘的争论,怎么会导致对天与人不利、痛苦呢?就像《憍赏弥犍度》(《大品》451等)里说的那样,当两位比丘陷入争论时,在那个精舍里,他们的弟子们会争论;接受他们教导的比丘尼僧团会争论;接着,他们的护持者们也会争论。那时,人们的守护神分成两派:支持法说者的守护神站在法说者一边,支持非法说者的守护神站在非法说者一边。然后,这些守护神的朋友——地居天也分裂了。这样一层一层传下去,一直到梵天世界,除了圣弟子以外,所有的天与人都分成两派。可是,非法说者往往比法说者更多。于是,多数人执取什么,他们就把那一切都当成真实的,舍弃了法,多数人执取的其实是非法。他们以非法为先导而生活,死后投生到恶趣。这样,两位比丘的争论就成了对天与人不利、痛苦。“于内”:是指在你们自己内部的团体中。“于外”:是指在别人的团体中。“覆藏者”:是指具有抹杀他人功德特征的人,也就是具足了覆藏。“强执者”:是指具有对立执取特征的人,也就是具足了强执。“嫉妒者”:是指具有嫉妒他人获得恭敬等特征的人,也就是具足了嫉妒。“悭吝者”:是指具足住处悭吝等五种悭吝。“狡诈者”:是指欺骗者。“虚伪者”:是指掩盖已作恶行的人。“恶欲者”:是指戒行败坏、却想得到不实称赞的人。“邪见者”:是指持无有论、无因论、无作论的人。“执自见者”:是指执取自己的见解。“坚执不舍者”:是指牢牢执取。“难以舍弃者”:是指无法让人放下所执取的东西。不过在《小诵分别》中说:“这里,哪六种争论根源?忿怒、覆藏、嫉妒、狡诈、恶欲、执自见,这些就是六种争论根源。”(《分别论》944)这是就主要方面说,每一种法各自成为一項。巴利
Tattha kodhanoti kujjhanalakkhaṇena kodhena samannāgato. Upanāhīti veraappaṭinissajjanalakkhaṇena upanāhena samannāgato. Ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānanti dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vivādo kathaṃ devamanussānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattatīti? Kosambakakkhandhake (mahāva. 451 ādayo) viya dvīsu bhikkhūsu vivādaṃ āpannesu tasmiṃ vihāre tesaṃ antevāsikā vivadanti, tesaṃ ovādaṃ gaṇhanto bhikkhunisaṅgho vivadati, tato tesaṃ upaṭṭhākāpi vivadanti. Atha manussānaṃ ārakkhadevatā dve koṭṭhāsā honti. Dhammavādīnaṃ ārakkhadevatā dhammavādiniyo honti adhammavādīnaṃ adhammavādiniyo. Tato ārakkhadevatānaṃ mittā bhummaṭṭhadevatā bhijjanti. Evaṃ paramparāya yāva brahmalokā ṭhapetvā ariyasāvake sabbe devamanussā dve koṭṭhāsā honti. Dhammavādīhi pana adhammavādinova bahutarā honti. Tato yaṃ bahukehi gahitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ saccanti dhammaṃ vissajjetvā bahutarāva adhammaṃ gaṇhanti. Te adhammaṃ purakkhatvā viharantā apāyesu nibbattanti. Evaṃ dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vivādo devamanussānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti. Ajjhattaṃ vāti tumhākaṃ abbhantaraparisāya vā. Bahiddhā vāti paresaṃ parisāya vā. Makkhīti paresaṃ guṇamakkhaṇalakkhaṇena makkhena samannāgato. Paḷāsīti yugaggāhalakkhaṇena paḷāsena samannāgato. Issukīti paresaṃ sakkārādiissāyanalakkhaṇāya issāya samannāgato. Maccharīti āvāsamacchariyādīhi pañcahi macchariyehi samannāgato. Saṭhoti kerāṭiko. Māyāvīti katapāpapaṭicchādako. Pāpicchoti asantasambhāvanicchako dussīlo. Micchādiṭṭhīti natthikavādī ahetukavādī akiriyavādī. Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsīti sayaṃ diṭṭhimeva parāmasati. Ādhānaggāhīti daḷhaggāhī. Duppaṭinissaggīti na sakkā hoti gahitaṃ vissajjāpetuṃ. Khuddakavatthuvibhaṅge pana ‘‘tattha katamāni cha vivādamūlāni? Kodho makkho issā sāṭheyyaṃ pāpicchatā sandiṭṭhiparāmāsitā, imāni cha vivādamūlānī’’ti (vibha. 944) padhānavasena ekekoyeva dhammo vutto.
“六爱身”是指《分别论》(Vibh. 944)里所说的六种渴爱:色爱、声爱、香爱、味爱、触爱、法爱。其中,每一种渴爱都因为所缘众多,而且在同一个所缘上也会反复生起,所以每一种渴爱本身就有很多种。因此,依据“集合”这个含义,配上“身”这个词,就说为“爱身”。虽然叫作“爱身”,但它的本体就是渴爱。“染著”是指自己对着所缘生起染著,变得深深贪著。巴利
Chahi taṇhākāyehīti ‘‘rūpataṇhā, saddataṇhā, gandhataṇhā, rasataṇhā, phoṭṭhabbataṇhā, dhammataṇhā’’ti (vibha. 944) vuttāhi chahi taṇhāhi. Tattha yasmā ekekāyeva taṇhā anekavisayattā ekekasmimpi visaye punappunaṃ uppattito anekā honti, tasmā samūhaṭṭhena kāyasaddena yojetvā taṇhākāyāti vuttaṃ. Taṇhākāyāti vuttepi taṇhā eva. Rajjatīti sayaṃ ārammaṇe rajjati, sāratto hoti.
“六见处”指的是《一切漏经》里所说的内容。经中这样说:巴利
Chahi diṭṭhigatehīti sabbāsavasutte vuttehi. Vuttañhi tattha –
当他这样不恰当地作意时,六种见中的某一种见就会生起。他生起“我有我”的见,并把它执为真实、坚固;或者生起“我没有我”的见,并把它执为真实、坚固;或者生起“我以自己认知我”的见,并把它执为真实、坚固;或者生起“我以自己认知无我”的见,并把它执为真实、坚固;或者生起“我以无我认知我”的见,并把它执为真实、坚固。又或者,他生起这样的见:这个能说、能觉知,在各处领受善业恶业果报的我,是常的、坚固的、永恒的、不变异的法,它会像永恒之物一样,永远这样存在下去。巴利
‘‘Tassa evaṃ ayoniso manasikaroto channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjati. ‘Atthi me attā’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati, ‘natthi me attā’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati, ‘attanāva attānaṃ sañjānāmī’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati, ‘attanāva anattānaṃ sañjānāmī’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati, ‘anattanāva attānaṃ sañjānāmī’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati. Atha vā panassa evaṃ diṭṭhi hoti ‘yo me ayaṃ attā vado vedeyyo tatra tatra kalyāṇapāpakānaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, so ca kho pana me ayaṃ attā nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo sassatisamaṃ tatheva ṭhassatī’’’ti (ma. ni. 1.19).
在这里,“有我”这种常见,是在一切时候都执取自己的存在。所谓“真实、坚固”,就是从真实和坚固两方面,认定“这是真实的”,以非常牢固的方式执取。“没有我”这种断灭见,是因为它执取存在的众生在这里那里归于断灭。或者也可以说:前面的见执取过去、现在、未来三时都存在,所以是常见;只执取现在存在,就是断灭见;执取过去和未来都不存在,就像持“祭祀的供品落尽”这类见解的人一样,是断灭见;只执取过去不存在,就像无因生论者一样,是常见。
“我以我认知我”:把以想蕴为首的诸蕴执为“我”,再用想去认知其余诸蕴,就成了“我以这个我认知这个我”。
“我以我认知无我”:把想蕴执为“我”,把其余四蕴执为“无我”,再用想去认知它们,就成了这样。
“我以无我认知我”:把想蕴执为“无我”,把其余四蕴执为“我”,再用想去认知它们,就成了这样。
这些全都属于常见和断灭见。而“能说”“能觉”等说法,只是对常见的执取方式。其中,“能说”就是说者,指造作语业的人。“能觉”就是觉知者,意思是知道、体验。觉知什么呢?在这里那里体验善业和恶业的果报。“在这里那里”,是指在各种投生处、趣处、住处、族群中,或者在各种所缘对象上。“常”,是指没有生起和坏灭。“恒”,是指坚固、坚实。“永恒”,是指一切时候都存在。“不变异之法”,是指不放弃自己本来的性质,不像变色龙那样变成种种不同的样子。“如常住之物一般”,月亮、太阳、大海、大地、山岳在世间说法中被称为常住。“与常住之物相同”,就是和那些常住之物一样。执取“只要那些常住之物还持续存在,它也就照样一直存在下去”,就有了这样的见。巴利
Tattha atthi me attāti sassatadiṭṭhi sabbakālesu attano atthitaṃ gaṇhāti. Saccato thetatoti bhūtato ca thirato ca, ‘‘idaṃ sacca’’nti suṭṭhu daḷhabhāvenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Natthi me attāti ucchedadiṭṭhi sato sattassa tattha tattha vibhavaggahaṇato. Atha vā purimāpi tīsu kālesu atthīti gahaṇato sassatadiṭṭhi, paccuppannameva atthīti gaṇhantī ucchedadiṭṭhi, pacchimāpi atītānāgatesu natthīti gahaṇato ‘‘bhassantā āhutiyo’’ti gahitadiṭṭhigatikānaṃ viya ucchedadiṭṭhi. Atīte eva natthīti gaṇhantī adhiccasamuppannakassa viya sassatadiṭṭhi. Attanāva attānaṃ sañjānāmīti saññākkhandhasīsena khandhe attāti gahetvā saññāya avasesakkhandhe sañjānato iminā attanā imaṃ attānaṃ sañjānāmīti hoti. Attanāva anattānanti saññākkhandhaṃyeva attāti gahetvā, itare cattāropi anattāti gahetvā saññāya te sañjānato evaṃ hoti. Anattanāva attānanti saññākkhandhaṃ anattāti gahetvā, itare cattāropi attāti gahetvā saññāya te sañjānato evaṃ hoti. Sabbāpi sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyova. Vado vedeyyotiādayo pana sassatadiṭṭhiyā eva abhinivesākārā. Tattha vadatīti vado, vacīkammassa kārakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vedayatīti vedeyyo, jānāti anubhavati cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ vedetīti? Tatra tatra kalyāṇapāpakānaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti . Tatra tatrāti tesu tesu yonigatiṭhitinivāsanikāyesu ārammaṇesu vā. Niccoti uppādavayarahito. Dhuvoti thiro sārabhūto. Sassatoti sabbakāliko. Avipariṇāmadhammoti attano pakatibhāvaṃ avijahanadhammo, kakaṇṭako viya nānappakārataṃ nāpajjati. Sassatisamanti candasūriyasamuddamahāpathavīpabbatā lokavohārena sassatiyoti vuccanti. Sassatīhi samaṃ sassatisamaṃ. Yāva sassatiyo tiṭṭhanti, tāva tatheva ṭhassatīti gaṇhato evaṃ diṭṭhi hoti.
不过在《小事分别》里,则进一步区分并宣说了六种见:那个我在各处长期承受善业与恶业的果报;并非那个我生起后过去曾不存在,也不是那个我生起后未来将不存在,而是恒常、稳固、常住、不变易的。对于他,会生起认为它真实、坚固的见。巴利
Khuddakavatthuvibhaṅge pana ‘‘tatra tatra dīgharattaṃ kalyāṇapāpakānaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ paccanubhoti, na so jāto nāhosi, na so jāto na bhavissati, nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammoti vā panassa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjatī’’ti (vibha. 948) cha diṭṭhī evaṃ visesetvā vuttā.
这里,所谓“那个我并非生起,也不曾存在”,意思是:那个我,因为不具有生起的性质,所以叫做“不生”,也就是说它始终存在。正因如此,它在过去不说“曾存在”,在未来不说“将存在”。因为,已经生起的,才说它“曾存在”;将要生起的,才说它“将存在”。另一种解释是:所谓“那个我并非生起,也不曾存在”,是说由于那个我始终存在,所以它在过去也绝不曾存在,在未来也绝不会存在。随眠的含义已如前所说。巴利
Tattha na so jāto nāhosīti so attā ajātidhammato na jāto nāma, sadā vijjamānoyevāti attho. Teneva atīte nāhosi, anāgate na bhavissati. Yo hi jāto, so ahosi. Yo ca jāyissati, so bhavissatīti vuccati. Atha vā na so jāto nāhosīti so sadā vijjamānattā atītepi na jātu na ahosi, anāgatepi na jātu na bhavissati. Anusayā vuttatthā.
“七结”是指《七集》里所说的那些。那里确实是这样说的:巴利
Sattahi saññojanehīti sattakanipāte vuttehi. Vuttañhi tattha –
比丘们,有这七种结。哪七种呢?随顺结、嗔恨结、见结、疑结、慢结、有贪结、无明结。比丘们,这就是七种结。巴利
‘‘Sattimāni, bhikkhave, saṃyojanāni. Katamāni satta? Anunayasaṃyojanaṃ, paṭighasaṃyojanaṃ, diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ, vicikicchāsaṃyojanaṃ, mānasaṃyojanaṃ, bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ, avijjāsaṃyojanaṃ. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, satta saṃyojanānī’’ti (a. ni. 7.8).
在这其中,随顺结就是欲贪结。所有这些都以束缚的含义而称为结。巴利
Tattha anunayasaṃyojananti kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ. Sabbānevetāni bandhanaṭṭhena saṃyojanāni.
以七种慢来说,就是《小事的分别》里所讲的那些。因为在其中确实这样说:巴利
Sattahi mānehīti khuddakavatthuvibhaṅge vuttehi. Vuttañhi tattha –
慢、过慢、慢过慢、卑慢、增上慢、我慢、邪慢。巴利
‘‘Māno , atimāno, mānātimāno, omāno, adhimāno, asmimāno, micchāmāno’’ti (vibha. 950).
这里,“慢”是指不针对具体某人、不以“我更高”等方式来比较,而是单纯依出身等事本身生起的高举。 “过慢”是指依出身等,生起“没有和我相等的人”这种越过比较的高举。 “慢过慢”是指生起这样的慢:“这人以前和我相等,现在我更胜,这人更低劣。” “卑慢”是指依出身等把自己看得低下而现起的慢,也就是“我是低劣的”这种慢。 “增上慢”是指对尚未证得的四圣谛法,自认为已经证得而起的慢。不过,这种增上慢只发生在这样的凡夫身上:他戒律清净,对修行法门毫不放逸,已经辨明确定名色,通过把握因缘而超越了疑惑,把无常、苦、无我三相套用于诸行,正在观照诸行,已经开始了观修;不会发生在其他人身上。 “我慢”是指在色等诸蕴中执取“我是”的慢,也就是说,以“我是色”等方式生起的慢。 “邪慢”是指以恶业、邪命等事为依托而生起的慢。巴利
Tattha mānoti seyyādivasena puggalaṃ anāmasitvā jātiādīsu vatthuvaseneva unnati. Atimānoti jātiādīhi ‘‘mayā sadiso natthī’’ti atikkamitvā unnati. Mānātimānoti ‘‘ayaṃ pubbe mayā sadiso, idāni ahaṃ seṭṭho, ayaṃ hīnataro’’ti uppannamāno. Omānoti jātiādīhi attānaṃ heṭṭhā katvā pavattamāno, hīnohamasmīti mānoyeva. Adhimānoti anadhigateyeva catusaccadhamme adhigatoti māno. Ayaṃ pana adhimāno parisuddhasīlassa kammaṭṭhāne appamattassa nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā paccayapariggahena vitiṇṇakaṅkhassa tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā saṅkhāre sammasantassa āraddhavipassakassa puthujjanassa uppajjati, na aññesaṃ. Asmimānoti rūpādīsu khandhesu asmīti māno, ‘‘ahaṃ rūpa’’ntiādivasena uppannamānoti vuttaṃ hoti. Micchāmānoti pāpakena kammāyatanādinā uppannamāno.
世间法已经解释过了。“流转”的意思是:以这些世间法为因,在得利等四种情况下随顺贪著,在失利等四种情况下违逆抗拒而剧烈摇摆,舍弃平常状态,这就是它的含义。邪性等也已经解释过了。“出离”是指已经离去、已经投身进去,也就是被压倒的意思。巴利
Lokadhammā vuttatthā. Samparivattatīti lokadhammehi hetubhūtehi lābhādīsu catūsu anurodhavasena, alābhādīsu catūsu paṭivirodhavasena bhusaṃ nivattati, pakatibhāvaṃ jahātīti attho. Micchattāpi vuttatthā. Niyyātoti gato pakkhando, abhibhūtoti attho.
“以八种人的过失”这句话,在《八集》里是连同譬喻一起说的,在《小事分别》里则没有譬喻。因为那里是这样说的:巴利
Aṭṭhahi purisadosehīti aṭṭhakanipāte upamāhi saha, khuddakavatthuvibhaṅge upamaṃ vinā vuttehi. Vuttañhi tattha –
哪八种人的过失呢?在这里,比丘们因为某位比丘犯了戒而举发他。那位比丘被比丘们以犯戒为由举发时,只用“我不记得了,我不记得了”这样的话,以失念来推脱。这是第一种人的过失。巴利
‘‘Katame aṭṭha purisadosā? Idha bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno ‘na sarāmi na sarāmī’ti assatiyāva nibbeṭheti. Ayaṃ paṭhamo purisadoso.
再者,比丘们因为某位比丘犯了戒而举发他。那位比丘被比丘们以犯戒为由举发时,却反过来顶撞举发者说:“你这个愚痴、不明事理的人说的话有什么用?你居然也觉得自己有资格来说我?”这是第二种人的过失。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno codakaṃyeva paṭippharati ‘kiṃ nu kho tuyhaṃ bālassa abyattassa bhaṇitena, tvampi nāma maṃ bhaṇitabbaṃ maññasī’ti? Ayaṃ dutiyo purisadoso.
再者,比丘们因为某位比丘犯了戒而举发他的罪。这位比丘被众比丘以犯戒为由举发时,反过来把罪推回给举发者说:“你也犯了某某戒,你应该先忏悔。”这是第三种人的过失。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno codakaṃyeva paccāropeti ‘tvampi khosi itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno, tvaṃ tāva paṭhamaṃ paṭikarohī’ti. Ayaṃ tatiyo purisadoso.
还有另一种情况:比丘们因为某位比丘犯了戒而举发他。这位比丘被比丘们以犯戒为由举发时,就用别的事情来搪塞,把话题扯到外面去,还表现出愤怒、瞋恨和不满。这是第四种人的过失。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno aññenaññaṃ paṭicarati, bahiddhā kathaṃ apanāmeti, kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti. Ayaṃ catuttho purisadoso.
再者,比丘们因为某位比丘犯了戒而举发他。那位比丘在被比丘们以犯戒为由举发时,在僧团中间挥舞手臂说话。这是第五种人的过失。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno saṅghamajjhe bāhāvikkhepakaṃ bhaṇati. Ayaṃ pañcamo purisadoso.
再者,比丘们因为某位比丘犯了戒而举发他。那位比丘被比丘们举发犯戒时,既不理会僧团,也不理会举发者,带着自己的罪过就随意离开了。这是第六种人的过失。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno anādiyitvā saṅghaṃ anādiyitvā codakaṃ sāpattikova yena kāmaṃ pakkamati. Ayaṃ chaṭṭho purisadoso.
再者,比丘们以犯戒事举发某位比丘。那位比丘被比丘们以犯戒事举发时,说“我既非已犯戒者,亦非未犯戒者”,然后默然不语,让僧团感到困扰。这是第七种人的过失。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno ‘nevāhaṃ āpannomhi, na panāhaṃ anāpannomhī’ti so tuṇhībhūto saṅghaṃ viheseti. Ayaṃ sattamo purisadoso.
再者,比丘们以犯戒为由举发另一位比丘。那位比丘被比丘们以犯戒为由举发时,这样说:“诸位尊者何必对我逼得这么紧?我现在就舍弃学处,还俗回去。”他舍弃学处、还俗之后,又这样说:“现在诸位尊者该满意了吧。”这是第八种人的过失。以上就是八种人的过失。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno evamāha – ‘kiṃ nu kho tumhe āyasmanto atibāḷhaṃ mayi byāvaṭā? Idānāhaṃ sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattissāmī’ti. So sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattitvā evamāha ‘idāni kho tumhe āyasmanto attamanā hothā’ti. Ayaṃ aṭṭhamo purisadoso. Ime aṭṭha purisadosā’’ti (vibha. 957; a. ni. 8.14).
这里,“人的过失”是指人的缺点,而这些缺点会染污人的心相续,所以叫过失。“我不记得,我不记得”是说“我想不起、也辨认不出我做过这件事”,用这样失念的方式推脱、逃避。“反过来顶撞举发者”是指站到对立面去冲撞,以对抗的姿态僵持着。“你算什么呢”是在说:像你这样愚痴、不聪明的人,说的话算什么?你既不知道事实,也不知道犯戒,更不知道举发这件事。这是在压制对方:你什么都不懂,居然还觉得自己该说什么。“反过来举发”是说“你也犯了……”这样说着,反过来把罪推给对方。“你应当先处理”是说:你应当发露该忏悔的罪,应当从出罪的做法中出来,从那里清净、站稳之后,再去举发别人。“用别的来搪塞”是指用一个理由或说法,去掩盖另一个理由或说法。被人说“你犯戒了”,他就说:“谁犯了?犯了什么?在哪里犯的?怎么犯的?你们在说谁?你们在说什么?”被问“你有没有看见这样的事”,他就把耳朵凑过去说“我听不见”。“把话题引到外面去”是指:被问“你是不是犯了某某戒”,他就说“我去过华氏城”,再被说“我不是问你有没有去华氏城”,他就说“那我去过王舍城”。“你去王舍城也好,去婆罗门家也好,你是不是犯了戒?”他就说“我在那里得到了猪肉”等等,这样把话题扯到外面去。“愤怒”是指发怒的状态,“嗔”是指怀恶意的状态。这两者都只是“怒”的别名。“不满”是指不满足的样子,这是“忧恼”的别名。“表现出来”是指显示、表明。“挥着手臂说话”是指挥动、甩着手臂,说出不知羞耻的话。“不理会”是指不以重视之心接受,轻视、不尊重,意思是不恭敬。“恼害”是指折磨、逼迫。“太过”是指太强烈、太过分。“为我忙成这样”是指为我操心、为我张罗。“还俗回到低劣处”是指为了低劣的在家人身份而回头,也就是成为在家人。“你们该满意了吧”是说你们该心满意足了,他的意思是:“你们得到了该从我这里得到的,住到了该由我住的地方,我让你们过得安稳了。”“败坏”是指变坏。巴利
Tattha purisadosāti purisānaṃ dosā, te pana purisasantānaṃ dūsentīti dosā. Na sarāmi na sarāmīti ‘‘mayā etassa kammassa kataṭṭhānaṃ nassarāmi na sallakkhemī’’ti evaṃ assatibhāvena nibbeṭheti moceti. Codakaṃyeva paṭippharatīti paṭiviruddho hutvā pharati, paṭiāṇibhāvena tiṭṭhati. Kiṃ nu kho tuyhanti tuyhaṃ bālassa abyattassa bhaṇitena nāma kiṃ, yo tvaṃ neva vatthuṃ, na āpattiṃ, na codanaṃ jānāsīti dīpeti. Tvampi nāma evaṃ kiñci ajānanto bhaṇitabbaṃ maññasīti ajjhottharati. Paccāropetīti ‘‘tvampi khosī’’tiādīni vadanto patiāropeti. Paṭikarohīti desanāgāminiṃ desehi, vuṭṭhānagāminito vuṭṭhāhi, tato suddhante patiṭṭhito aññaṃ codessasīti dīpeti. Aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratīti aññena kāraṇena, vacanena vā aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ, vacanaṃ vā paṭicchādeti. ‘‘Āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti vutto ‘‘ko āpanno, kiṃ āpanno, kismiṃ āpanno, kathaṃ āpanno, kaṃ bhaṇatha, kiṃ bhaṇathā’’ti bhaṇati. ‘‘Evarūpaṃ kiñci tayā diṭṭha’’nti vutte ‘‘na suṇāmī’’ti sotaṃ upaneti. Bahiddhā kathaṃ apanāmetīti ‘‘itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti puṭṭho ‘‘pāṭaliputtaṃ gatomhī’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘na tava pāṭaliputtagamanaṃ pucchāmā’’ti vutte tato rājagahaṃ gatomhīti. ‘‘Rājagahaṃ vā yāhi brāhmaṇagehaṃ vā, āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti. ‘‘Tattha me sūkaramaṃsaṃ laddha’’ntiādīni vadanto kathaṃ bahiddhā vikkhipati. Kopanti kupitabhāvaṃ, dosanti duṭṭhabhāvaṃ. Ubhayampetaṃ kodhasseva nāmaṃ. Appaccayanti asantuṭṭhākāraṃ, domanassassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Pātukarotīti dasseti pakāseti. Bāhāvikkhepakaṃ bhaṇatīti bāhaṃ vikkhipitvā vikkhipitvā alajjivacanaṃ vadati. Anādiyitvāti cittīkārena aggahetvā avajānitvā, anādaro hutvāti attho. Vihesetīti viheṭheti bādhati. Atibāḷhanti atidaḷhaṃ atippamāṇaṃ. Mayi byāvaṭāti mayi byāpāraṃ āpannā. Hīnāyāvattitvāti hīnassa gihibhāvassa atthāya āvattitvā, gihī hutvāti attho. Attamanā hothāti tuṭṭhacittā hotha, ‘‘mayā labhitabbaṃ labhatha, mayā vasitabbaṭṭhāne vasatha, phāsuvihāro vo mayā kato’’ti adhippāyena vadati. Dussatīti duṭṭho hoti.
所谓九种愤恨事,是就有情众生中生起愤恨的行为来说的。正如经中所说:巴利
Navahi āghātavatthūhīti sattesu uppattivaseneva kathitāni. Yathāha –
比丘们,有九种结怨的根据。是哪九种呢?有人这样结怨:“他曾经做过对我不利的事。”有人这样结怨:“他正在做对我不利的事。”有人这样结怨:“他将来会做对我不利的事。”有人这样结怨:“他曾经对我所喜爱、中意的人做过不利的事,正在做不利的事,将来会做不利的事。”有人这样结怨:“他曾经对我所厌恶、不中意的人做过有利的事,正在做有利的事,将来会做有利的事。”比丘们,这就是九种结怨的根据。巴利
‘‘Navayimāni, bhikkhave, āghātavatthūni. Katamāni nava? ‘Anatthaṃ me acarī’ti āghātaṃ bandhati, ‘anatthaṃ me caratī’ti āghātaṃ bandhati, ‘anatthaṃ me carissatī’ti āghātaṃ bandhati, ‘piyassa me manāpassa anatthaṃ acari, anatthaṃ carati, anatthaṃ carissatī’ti āghātaṃ bandhati, ‘appiyassa me amanāpassa atthaṃ acari, atthaṃ carati, atthaṃ carissatī’ti āghātaṃ bandhati. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, nava āghātavatthūnī’’ti (a. ni. 9.29).
这里,“愤恨事”就是愤恨的起因。这里的“愤恨”指的是愤怒,而它本身就是愤怒一再产生的基础,所以叫愤恨事。“结愤恨”就是系结愤怒、制造愤怒、生起愤怒。在解释中,还说到另外九种愤恨事:“他没有为我做过有利的事,现在不做,将来也不会做”;“他对我所喜爱、中意的人,没有做过有利的事,现在不做,将来也不会做”;“他对我所憎恶、不中意的人,没有做过不利的事,现在不做,将来也不会做。”(大义释85;分别论960;法集论1066)这些也同样被前面那九种愤恨事所涵盖。“被愤恨”就是被触恼、被激怒。巴利
Tattha āghātavatthūnīti āghātakāraṇāni. Āghātanti cettha kopo, soyeva uparūpari kopassa vatthuttā āghātavatthu. Āghātaṃ bandhatīti kopaṃ bandhati karoti uppādeti. ‘‘Atthaṃ me nācari, na carati, na carissati. Piyassa me manāpassa atthaṃ nācari, na carati, na carissati. Appiyassa me amanāpassa anatthaṃ nācari, na carati, na carissatī’’ti (mahāni. 85; vibha. 960; dha. sa. 1066) niddese vuttāni aparānipi nava āghātavatthūni imeheva navahi saṅgahitāni. Āghātitoti ghaṭṭito.
“以九种慢”是指哪九种慢?对胜过自己的人,生起“我胜过他”的慢;对胜过自己的人,生起“我跟他差不多”的慢;对胜过自己的人,生起“我比他差”的慢。对跟自己差不多的人,生起“我胜过他”的慢;对跟自己差不多的人,生起“我跟他差不多”的慢;对跟自己差不多的人,生起“我比他差”的慢。对不如自己的人,生起“我胜过他”的慢;对不如自己的人,生起“我跟他差不多”的慢;对不如自己的人,生起“我比他差”的慢。这就是九种慢。(分别论962)巴利
Navavidhamānehīti katame navavidhamānā? Seyyassa seyyohamasmīti māno, seyyassa sadisohamasmīti māno, seyyassa hīnohamasmīti māno. Sadisassa seyyohamasmīti māno, sadisassa sadisohamasmīti māno, sadisassa hīnohamasmīti māno. Hīnassa seyyohamasmīti māno, hīnassa sadisohamasmīti māno, hīnassa hīnohamasmīti māno. Ime navavidhamānā (vibha. 962).
在这里,“我比别人强”这种慢心,会生起在国王和出家人身上。国王会想:“论国土、财富或车乘,有谁比得上我?”由此生起这种慢心;出家人也会想:“论戒律、头陀支等,有谁比得上我?”由此生起这种慢心。巴利
Ettha pana seyyassa seyyohamasmīti māno rājūnañceva pabbajitānañca uppajjati. Rājā hi ‘‘raṭṭhena vā dhanena vā vāhanehi vā ko mayā sadiso atthī’’ti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti, pabbajitopi ‘‘sīladhutaṅgādīhi ko mayā sadiso atthī’’ti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti.
认为“我和优越者一样”的这种慢,同样也生起于这些人当中。因为国王会想:“论国土、财富或车乘,我和别的国王有什么差别?”从而生起这种慢;出家人也会想:“论戒律、头陀支等,我和别的比丘有什么差别?”从而生起这种慢。巴利
Seyyassa sadisohamasmīti mānopi etesaṃyeva uppajjati. Rājā hi ‘‘raṭṭhena vā dhanena vā vāhanehi vā aññarājūhi saddhiṃ mayhaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇa’’nti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti, pabbajitopi ‘‘sīladhutaṅgādīhi aññena bhikkhunā mayhaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇa’’nti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti.
认为自己比别人差的这种慢,也是在这些人身上生起的。比如有个国王,他的国土、财富、车乘等都不太圆满,他就会想:我不过是顶着国王这个名号,享受一点称呼上的舒服罢了,我算什么国王呢?这样生起慢心。出家人也一样,如果得到的利养和恭敬很少,他就会想:我只是被人叫做说法者、多闻者、大长老而已,我算什么说法者,我算什么多闻者,我算什么大长老,我根本没有利养和恭敬。这样生起慢心。巴利
Seyyassa hīnohamasmīti mānopi etesaṃyeva uppajjati. Yassa hi rañño raṭṭhaṃ vā dhanaṃ vā vāhanādīni vā nātisampannāni honti, so ‘‘mayhaṃ rājāti vohārasukhamattakameva, kiṃ rājā nāma aha’’nti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti, pabbajitopi appalābhasakkāro ‘‘ahaṃ dhammakathiko bahussuto mahātheroti kathāmattameva, kiṃ dhammakathiko nāmāhaṃ, kiṃ bahussuto nāmāhaṃ, kiṃ mahāthero nāmāhaṃ, yassa me lābhasakkāro natthī’’ti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti.
和与自己同等的人相比,心里想“我胜过他”这类慢等烦恼,会在大臣之类的人身上生起。大臣或地方官会这样想:“论财富、车乘、坐骑这些,还有哪个王家的人能跟我比?”或者想:“我跟别人有什么差别?”或者想:“我不过空有个大臣的名头,连吃穿都顾不上,我算什么大臣?”就这样生起慢心。巴利
Sadisassaseyyohamasmīti mānādayo amaccādīnaṃ uppajjanti. Amacco vā hi raṭṭhiyo vā ‘‘bhogayānavāhanādīhi ko mayā sadiso añño rājapuriso atthī’’ti vā, ‘‘mayhaṃ aññehi saddhiṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇa’’nti vā, ‘‘amaccoti nāmameva mayhaṃ, ghāsacchādanamattampi me natthi, kiṃ amacco nāmāha’’nti vā etaṃ mānaṃ karoti.
对于比自己低劣的人,会生起“我比他强”这类慢心,这些慢心在奴仆等人当中生起。奴仆会这样想:“无论从母方还是父方算,有哪个别的奴仆能和我相比?别人是因为活不下去、为了填饱肚子才成了奴仆,而我可是世代相传下来的,所以我更胜一筹。”或者想:“凭世代相传、父母双方都是清净奴仆的身份,我和某某奴仆之间有什么差别?”或者想:“我是为了糊口才当了奴仆,但论父母那边,我根本没有当奴仆的份,我算什么奴仆?”他就这样生起慢心。奴仆如此,普库萨、旃陀罗等人也同样会生起这种慢心。在这里,对于比自己低劣的人,生起“我比他强”的慢心,这是如实的慢;另外两种是不如实的慢。同样地,对于和自己同等的人,生起“我和他一样”的慢心,以及对于比自己低劣的人,生起“我比他差”的慢心,这是如实的慢,另外两种是不如实的慢。其中,如实的慢要被阿罗汉道断除,不如实的慢要被入流道断除。巴利
Hīnassaseyyohamasmīti mānādayo dāsādīnaṃ uppajjanti. Dāso hi ‘‘mātito vā pitito vā ko mayā sadiso añño dāso nāma atthi, aññe jīvituṃ asakkontā kucchihetu dāsā nāma jātā, ahaṃ pana paveṇiāgatattā seyyo’’ti vā, ‘‘paveṇiāgatabhāvena ubhatosuddhikadāsattena asukadāsena nāma saddhiṃ mayhaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇa’’nti vā, ‘‘kucchivasenāhaṃ dāsabyaṃ upagato, mātāpitukoṭiyā pana me dāsaṭṭhānaṃ natthi, kiṃ dāso nāma aha’’nti vā etaṃ mānaṃ karoti. Yathā ca dāso, evaṃ pukkusacaṇḍālādayopi etaṃ mānaṃ karontiyeva. Ettha ca seyyassa seyyohamasmīti uppannamānova yāthāvamāno, itare dve ayāthāvamānā. Tathā sadisassa sadisohamasmīti hīnassa hīnohamasmīti uppannamānova yāthāvamāno, itare dve ayāthāvamānā. Tattha yāthāvamānā arahattamaggavajjhā, ayāthāvamānā sotāpattimaggavajjhāti.
以渴爱为根本的那些法,前面已经说过了。说到“染着”:并不是只靠贪才染着,而是因为以渴爱为根本的追求等也会生起,所以是以渴爱为根本的一切不善法而染着,意思就是与之结合、被它绑住。巴利
Taṇhāmūlakā vuttāyeva. Rajjatīti na kevalaṃ rāgeneva rajjati, atha kho taṇhāmūlakānaṃ pariyesanādīnampi sambhavato taṇhāmūlakehi sabbehi akusaladhammehi rajjati, yujjati bajjhatīti adhippāyo.
“以十种烦恼事”:十种烦恼事是哪些?贪、嗔、痴、慢、见、疑、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧,这就是十种烦恼事。巴利
Dasahikilesavatthūhīti katamāni dasa kilesavatthūni? Lobho, doso, moho, māno, diṭṭhi, vicikicchā, thinaṃ, uddhaccaṃ, ahirikaṃ, anottappanti imāni dasa kilesavatthūni (vibha. 966).
在这里,烦恼本身就是“烦恼事”;或者说,因为那些未断尽烦恼的众生住在这些烦恼中,立足于贪等烦恼,所以这些烦恼是他们的“事”。这些烦恼既是众生所依止之处,又是众生的“事”,所以叫“烦恼事”。而且,在这里,即使是依无间缘等条件生起的烦恼,也的确叫作“安住”,因此“烦恼的住处”也叫“烦恼事”。贪:众生通过它贪求,或它自身贪求,或纯粹就是贪求这种行为,所以叫贪。嗔:众生通过它嗔恨,或它自身嗔恨,或纯粹就是嗔恨这种行为,所以叫嗔。痴:众生通过它愚痴,或它自身愚痴,或纯粹就是愚痴这种行为,所以叫痴。慢:自以为了不起,所以叫慢。见等项的含义前面已经说过。不知羞耻,所以叫无惭;无惭的状态就是无惭。无所畏惧,所以叫无愧;无愧的状态就是无愧。其中,无惭的特相是不厌恶身恶行等,无愧的特相是不畏惧这些恶行。因为它们染污,所以受到折磨、受到逼恼。巴利
Tattha kilesā eva kilesavatthūni, vasanti vā ettha akhīṇāsavā sattā lobhādīsu patiṭṭhitattāti vatthūni, kilesā ca te tappatiṭṭhānaṃ sattānaṃ vatthūni cāti kilesavatthūni. Yasmā cettha anantarapaccayādibhāvena uppajjamānāpi kilesā vasanti eva nāma, tasmā kilesānaṃ vatthūnītipi kilesavatthūni. Lubbhanti tena, sayaṃ vā lubbhati, lubbhanamattameva vā tanti lobho. Dussanti tena, sayaṃ vā dussati, dussanamattameva vā tanti doso. Muyhanti tena, sayaṃ vā muyhati, muyhanamattameva vā tanti moho. Maññatīti māno. Diṭṭhiādayo vuttatthāva . Na hirīyatīti ahiriko, tassa bhāvo ahirikaṃ. Na ottappatīti anottappī, tassa bhāvo anottappaṃ. Tesu ahirikaṃ kāyaduccaritādīhi ajigucchanalakkhaṇaṃ, anottappaṃ teheva asārajjanalakkhaṇaṃ, kilissatīti upatāpīyati vibādhīyati.
“以十种愤恨事”:就是前面所说的九种,再加上《法集论》里说的“或者在不该生起愤恨的地方也生起愤恨”,这样合起来就是十种。因为,对于“他对我做了没好处的事”等等,如果不加分别,那么即使是对树桩、荆棘这类东西,也会在不该生起愤恨的地方生起愤恨。巴利
Dasahi āghātavatthūhīti pubbe vuttehi navahi ca ‘‘aṭṭhāne vā panāghāto jāyatī’’ti (dha. sa. 1066) vuttena cāti dasahi. Anatthaṃ me acarītiādīnipi hi avikappetvā khāṇukaṇṭakādimhipi aṭṭhāne āghāto uppajjati.
“以十不善业道”:什么是十不善业道?杀生、不与取、欲邪行、妄语、离间语、粗恶语、绮语、贪欲、嗔恚、邪见。这些就是十不善业道。其中,它们既是不善业,又是通往恶趣之道,所以叫“不善业道”。“具足者”:就是具备了这些法。巴利
Dasahi akusalakammapathehīti katame dasa akusalakammapathā (dī. ni. 3.360)? Pāṇātipāto, adinnādānaṃ, kāmesumicchācāro, musāvādo, pisuṇā vācā, pharusā vācā, samphappalāpo, abhijjhā, byāpādo, micchādiṭṭhi. Ime dasa akusalakammapathā. Tattha akusalakammāni ca tāni pathā ca duggatiyāti akusalakammapathā. Samannāgatoti samaṅgībhūto.
以十种结来说,是哪十种结呢?欲贪结、嗔恚结、慢结、见结、疑结、戒禁取结、有贪结、嫉妒结、悭吝结、无明结。这些就是十种结。邪性之义,前面已经说过了。巴利
Dasahi saññojanehīti katamāni dasa saṃyojanāni (dha. sa. 1118)? Kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ, paṭighasaṃyojanaṃ, mānasaṃyojanaṃ, diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ, vicikicchāsaṃyojanaṃ, sīlabbataparāmāsasaṃyojanaṃ, bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ, issāsaṃyojanaṃ, macchariyasaṃyojanaṃ, avijjāsaṃyojanaṃ, imāni dasa saṃyojanāni. Micchattā vuttāyeva.
什么是依十事而起的邪见?就是认为:没有布施,没有供养,没有献供,没有善行恶行诸业的果报、异熟;没有此世,没有他世;没有母亲,没有父亲;没有化生的众生;世间没有正行道、正行道的沙门婆罗门,他们自证知此世与他世并加以宣说。这就是十事邪见。巴利
Dasavatthukāya micchādiṭṭhiyāti katamā dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhi (vibha. 971)? Natthi dinnaṃ, natthi yiṭṭhaṃ, natthi hutaṃ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko, natthi ayaṃ loko, natthi paro loko, natthi mātā, natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṃ parañca lokaṃ sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedenti. Ayaṃ dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhi.
在这里,“以十事为内容”是指:这十种事就是它的内容,所以叫“以十事为内容”。他知道有布施这回事,知道可以给任何人任何东西;但他认为布施没有果报、没有异熟。他知道有供养这回事,所谓供养就是盛大的祭祀,知道可以进行那样的祭祀;但他认为供养没有果报、没有异熟。他知道有献供这回事,献供就是招待宾客、祭祖等吉祥仪式,知道可以做这些事;但他认为这些没有果报、没有异熟。关于“善行与恶行”:这里,十善业道叫善行,十不善业道叫恶行。他知道这些业是存在的;但他认为没有果报、没有异熟。他认为没有此世,也就是站在他世的角度,认为此世不存在。他认为没有他世,也就是站在此世的角度,认为他世不存在。他认为没有母亲、没有父亲,也就是他知道母亲和父亲是存在的;但他认为对他们所做的恭敬等行为,没有任何果报、没有异熟。他认为没有化生有情,也就是认为没有死后转生、从此处死去投生彼处的有情。他认为世间没有正行、正修的沙门婆罗门,也就是认为世间没有随顺正道而行、如法修行的持法沙门和婆罗门。他认为没有能以自己的殊胜智慧了知此世和他世并加以宣说的人,也就是认为没有这样的全知佛陀。巴利
Tattha dasavatthukāti dasa vatthūni etissāti dasavatthukā. Natthi dinnanti dinnaṃ nāma atthi, sakkā kassaci kiñci dātunti jānāti. Dinnassa pana phalaṃ vipāko natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi yiṭṭhanti yiṭṭhaṃ vuccati mahāyāgo, taṃ yajituṃ sakkāti jānāti. Yiṭṭhassa pana phalaṃ vipāko natthīti gaṇhāti. Hutanti āhunapāhunamaṅgalakiriyā, taṃ kātuṃ sakkāti jānāti. Tassa pana phalaṃ vipāko natthīti gaṇhāti. Sukatadukkaṭānanti ettha dasa kusalakammapathā sukatakammāni nāma, dasa akusalakammapathā dukkaṭakammāni nāma. Tesaṃ atthibhāvaṃ jānāti. Phalaṃ vipāko pana natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi ayaṃ lokoti paraloke ṭhito imaṃ lokaṃ natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi paro lokoti idhaloke ṭhito paralokaṃ natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi mātā natthi pitāti mātāpitūnaṃ atthibhāvaṃ jānāti. Tesu katappaccayena koci phalaṃ vipāko natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi sattā opapātikāti cavanakaupapajjanakasattā natthīti gaṇhāti. Sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannāti anulomapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannā dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇā lokasmiṃ natthīti gaṇhāti. Ye imañca lokaṃ…pe… pavedentīti imañca parañca lokaṃ attanāva abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena ñatvā pavedanasamattho sabbaññū buddho natthīti gaṇhāti.
对于“边执见”:像“世间是常”这类说法,它逐一抓取每一个极端、每一部分,所以叫边执见。或者,对极端的执取就是边执,这个见具有那种边执,所以叫边执见。以那种边执见。而这个见,已经说过了。巴利
Antaggāhikāya diṭṭhiyāti ‘‘sassato loko’’tiādikaṃ ekekaṃ antaṃ bhāgaṃ gaṇhātīti antaggāhikā. Atha vā antassa gāho antaggāho, antaggāho assā atthīti antaggāhikā. Tāya antaggāhikāya. Sā pana vuttāyeva.
“以一百零八种渴爱戏论”:一百零八,就是一百再加八。所谓戏论,是让众生在轮回里长久拖延、滞留不去的東西;渴爱本身就是戏论,所以叫渴爱戏论。因为渴爱随着所缘对象的不同而不同,又因为一再反复生起,种类极多,所以用复数来表达,称为种种渴爱戏论,而一百种就是渴爱戏论的百数。本来应当说“以渴爱戏论百”,但出于语词倒置,才用复数表述成“以诸渴爱戏论百”。这里应当理解为:就是那被称为一百零八的渴爱戏论之百。要知道,这是把尾数八略去不算,只取整百之数。不过在《小事分别》里,它们是以“渴爱所行处”这个名称出现的。正如所说——巴利
Aṭṭhasatataṇhāpapañcasatehīti aṭṭhuttaraṃ sataṃ aṭṭhasataṃ. Saṃsāre papañceti ciraṃ vasāpetīti papañco, taṇhā eva papañco taṇhāpapañco, ārammaṇabhedena punappunaṃ uppattivasena ca taṇhānaṃ bahukattā bahuvacanaṃ katvā taṇhāpapañcānaṃ sataṃ taṇhāpapañcasataṃ. Tena ‘‘taṇhāpapañcasatenā’’ti vattabbe vacanavipallāsavasena ‘‘taṇhāpapañcasatehī’’ti bahuvacananiddeso kato. Aṭṭhasatanti saṅkhātena taṇhāpapañcasatenāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Aṭṭha abbohārikāni katvā satameva gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Khuddakavatthuvibhaṅge pana taṇhāvicaritānīti āgataṃ. Yathāha –
依靠内在的渴爱所行处有十八种,依靠外在的渴爱所行处有十八种,把这些合在一起、归纳起来,就成了三十六种渴爱所行处。同样,过去的三十六种渴爱所行处、未来的三十六种渴爱所行处、现在的三十六种渴爱所行处,把这些合在一起、归纳起来,就成为一百零八种渴爱所行处。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni ajjhattikassa upādāya, aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni bāhirassa upādāya, tadekajjhaṃ abhisaññuhitvā abhisaṅkhipitvā chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni honti. Iti atītāni chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni, anāgatāni chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni, paccuppannāni chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni tadekajjhaṃ abhisaññuhitvā abhisaṅkhipitvā aṭṭhataṇhāvicaritasataṃ hotī’’ti (vibha. 842).
这里说的“渴爱的戏论”,就是指渴爱的种种活动。意思是渴爱的现起、渴爱的运作。“缘于内”是指缘于内在的五蕴。这里的属格形式其实是表达受格的意义。至于详细内容,应当按照《分别论》在解释这一点时所说的方法来理解。另外还有一种方式:仅仅以色为所缘,就有欲爱、有爱、无有爱这三种渴爱;同样,以声等为所缘,在六种所缘中就有十八种渴爱。以内在为所缘有十八种,以外在为所缘有十八种,加起来就是三十六种。这三十六种再分为以过去为所缘的三十六种、以未来为所缘的三十六种、以现在为所缘的三十六种,就成了一百零八种渴爱的活动。称为“戏论”,是因为它在所缘上、在轮回中不断被虚妄分别所扩散,长久地执著滞留。巴利
Taṇhāpapañcāyeva panettha taṇhāvicaritānīti vuttā. Taṇhāsamudācārā taṇhāpavattiyoti attho. Ajjhattikassa upādāyāti ajjhattikaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya. Idañhi upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Vitthāro panassa tassa niddese (vibha. 973) vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana aparo nayo – rūpārammaṇāyeva kāmataṇhā, bhavataṇhā, vibhavataṇhāti tisso taṇhā honti, tathā saddādiārammaṇāti chasu ārammaṇesu aṭṭhārasa taṇhā honti, ajjhattārammaṇā aṭṭhārasa, bahiddhārammaṇā aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa honti. Tā eva atītārammaṇā chattiṃsa, anāgatārammaṇā chattiṃsa, paccuppannārammaṇā chattiṃsāti aṭṭhataṇhāvicaritasataṃ hoti. Papañcitoti ārammaṇe, saṃsāre vā papañcito ciravāsito.
“六十二见”是指:“世尊在《梵网经》的解说中讲到的六十二见是哪些?四种常住论、四种部分常住论、四种有边无边论、四种诡辩论、两种无因生论、十六种有想论、八种无想论、八种非想非非想论、七种断灭论、五种现法涅槃论——这些就是世尊在《梵网经》的解说中讲到的六十二见。”这里面的详细内容,应当依照《梵网经》里所讲的方式来理解。巴利
Dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhigatehīti ‘‘katamāni dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni brahmajāle veyyākaraṇe vuttāni bhagavatā? Cattāro sassatavādā, cattāro ekaccasassatavādā, cattāro antānantikā , cattāro amarāvikkhepikā, dve adhiccasamuppannikā, soḷasa saññīvādā, aṭṭha asaññīvādā, aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā, satta ucchedavādā, pañca diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti imāni dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni brahmajāle veyyākaraṇe vuttāni bhagavatā’’ti (vibha. 977). Vitthāro panettha brahmajālasutte vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
我已经渡过去了:我已经越过四种瀑流,或者越过了轮回的大海。已解脱:已经从贪等束缚中解脱出来。已调伏:已经没有贪著享用,也没有躁动不安。已寂静:已经清凉下来。已安稳:因为见到涅槃而获得了安心。已般涅槃:通过烦恼的般涅槃而般涅槃。我有能力:我是堪能的。“确实”这个词是表示确定意义的语气词。而“令他人也般涅槃”这里,“他人也”这个词也应当和“令度脱”等其余说法配合起来理解。巴利
Ahañcamhi tiṇṇoti ahañca caturoghaṃ, saṃsārasamuddaṃ vā tiṇṇo amhi bhavāmi. Muttoti rāgādibandhanehi mutto. Dantoti nibbisevano nipparipphando. Santoti sītībhūto. Assatthoti nibbānadassane laddhassāso. Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto. Pahomīti samatthomhi. Khoiti ekaṃsatthe nipāto. Pare ca parinibbāpetunti ettha pare ca-saddo ‘‘pare ca tāretu’’ntiādīhipi yojetabboti.
一切知智论释的注释巴利
72-73. Sabbaññutaññāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
119 在《一切知智论释》里,先问“什么是如来的一切知智”,接着因为无碍智与它归趣相同,就一并说明了无碍智。实际上,从法义上说,并没有一个独立于一切知智之外的无碍智;这本来就是同一个智,只是因为显现的方式不同,才说成两种,就像把信根和信力分开来说一样。正因为这个一切知智本身没有任何障碍——没有任何法或任何人能障碍它,而且一切法都要靠它的转向才能被了知,所以它被称为无碍智。别人即使转向,也还是不知道。也有人这样说:“就像意识能缘取一切所缘一样,这个智能了知一切,所以叫一切知智。而这个智在一切境界中都没有滞碍,就像帝释天的金刚杵一样,所以叫无碍智。遮除‘依次遍知一切’的说法,就是一切知智;遮除‘一时顿知一切’的说法,就是无碍智。世尊因为证得一切知智,所以被称为一切知者,但不是依次而知的那种;因为证得无碍智,也被称为一切知者,但不是一时顿知的那种。”巴利
119. Sabbaññutaññāṇaniddese katamaṃ tathāgatassa sabbaññutaññāṇanti pucchitvā tena samagatikattā teneva saha anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ. Na hi anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ dhammato visuṃ atthi, ekameva hetaṃ ñāṇaṃ ākārabhedato dvedhā vuccati saddhindriyasaddhābalādīni viya. Sabbaññutaññāṇameva hi natthi etassa āvaraṇanti, kenaci dhammena, puggalena vā āvaraṇaṃ kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya anāvaraṇanti vuccati āvajjanapaṭibaddhattā sabbadhammānaṃ. Aññe pana āvajjitvāpi na jānanti. Keci panāhu ‘‘manoviññāṇaṃ viya sabbārammaṇikattā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ . Taṃyeva ñāṇaṃ indavajiraṃ viya visayesu appaṭihatattā anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ. Anupubbasabbaññutāpaṭikkhepo sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, sakiṃsabbaññutāpaṭikkhepo anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ, bhagavā sabbaññutaññāṇapaṭilābhenapi sabbaññūti vuccati, na ca anupubbasabbaññū. Anāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhenapi sabbaññūti vuccati, na ca sakiṃsabbaññū’’ti.
了知一切有为与无为、无余:这里的“一切”,是从种类上把一切法完全含摄、彻底穷尽。“无余”,是对每一个法,从它的一切行相完全含摄、彻底穷尽。“有为、无为”,是显示两种分类。有为是一种分类,无为是一种分类。由诸缘和合而造作成的,就是有为,即五蕴。同样地,不是由诸缘和合造作成的,就是无为,即涅槃。对有为法,以无常、苦、无我等行相无余地了知;对无为法,以空、无相、无愿等行相无余地了知。对于这有为法和无为法,再没有剩下什么,所以叫“无余”,也就是有为法和无为法。施设虽然有很多种分别,但因为不是由缘造作成的,所以归入无为这一类。一切知智也确实以多种分别了知一切施设。或者,“一切”是总括一切法,“无余”是无遗漏地总括。在这里没有障碍,意思是:在这无余的有为无为法中,因为一切知智无所执著,所以没有障碍;因此,这个一切知智本身就叫作无碍智——这就是它的含义。巴利
Sabbaṃ saṅkhatamasaṅkhataṃ anavasesaṃ jānātīti ettha sabbanti jātivasena sabbadhammānaṃ nissesapariyādānaṃ. Anavasesanti ekekasseva dhammassa sabbākāravasena nissesapariyādānaṃ. Saṅkhatamasaṅkhatanti dvidhā pabhedadassanaṃ. Saṅkhatañhi eko pabhedo, asaṅkhataṃ eko pabhedo. Paccayehi saṅgamma katanti saṅkhataṃ. Khandhapañcakaṃ. Tathā na saṅkhatanti asaṅkhataṃ. Nibbānaṃ. Saṅkhataṃ aniccadukkhānattādīhi ākārehi anavasesaṃ jānāti, asaṅkhataṃ suññatānimittaappaṇihitādīhi ākārehi anavasesaṃ jānāti. Natthi etassa saṅkhatassa asaṅkhatassa ca avasesoti anavasesaṃ. Saṅkhataṃ asaṅkhatañca. Anekabhedāpi paññatti paccayehi akatattā asaṅkhatapakkhaṃ bhajati. Sabbaññutaññāṇañhi sabbāpi paññattiyo anekabhedato jānāti. Atha vā sabbanti sabbadhammaggahaṇaṃ. Anavasesanti nippadesaggahaṇaṃ. Tattha āvaraṇaṃ natthīti tattha tasmiṃ anavasese saṅkhatāsaṅkhate nissaṅgattā sabbaññutaññāṇassa āvaraṇaṃ natthīti tadeva sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ nāmāti attho.
120 现在,为了从多种所缘的差别来显示,而说“过去”等。其中,“过去、未来、现在”是从时间的差别来显示;“眼与色”等是从依处和所缘的差别来显示。如此,“那一切”就是对那些眼与色的无余遍摄穷尽。其余各项也应这样理解。“凡”是无余遍摄穷尽。“无常义”等是从共相的差别来显示。“无常义”就是无常的行相。这是依格的用法,此类情况都依此理解。“色”等是从蕴的差别来显示。至于“眼……乃至老死”,应当依照前面所说的简略理路来配合理解。在“以神通……”等处,就是指前面所说的那些智。“神通义”指以自证知为体性,此类情况也是如此。“诸蕴的蕴义”等,也应依照前面所说的方式来理解。在“善法”等处,是依善等三法的分类来区分。在“欲界法”等处,是依欲界等四种地的分类来区分。这两处都以复数形式“了知一切”来读诵为好;但因为落入单数的音读,所以经本中写成了单数。在“苦”等处,是十四种佛智的所缘差别。有人问:已经说了“根上下智”等四种智,为什么不说一切知智呢?回答:因为正在说的就是一切知智。从所缘差别来说,当说一切知智时,那(四种)智就不必再说,而一切知智确实就是一切知智的所缘。巴利
120. Idāni anekavisayabhedato dassetuṃ atītantiādimāha. Tattha atītaṃ anāgataṃ paccuppannanti kālabhedato dassitaṃ, cakkhu ceva rūpā cātiādi vatthārammaṇabhedato. Evaṃ taṃ sabbanti tesaṃ cakkhurūpānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Evaṃ sesesu. Yāvatāti anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Aniccaṭṭhantiādi sāmaññalakkhaṇabhedato dassitaṃ. Aniccaṭṭhanti ca aniccākāraṃ. Paccattatthe vā upayogavacanaṃ. Esa nayo edisesu. Rūpassātiādi khandhabhedato dassitaṃ. Cakkhussa…pe… jarāmaraṇassāti heṭṭhā vuttapeyyālanayena yojetabbaṃ. Abhiññāyātiādīsu heṭṭhā vuttañāṇāneva. Abhiññaṭṭhanti abhijānanasabhāvaṃ. Esa nayo edisesu. Khandhānaṃ khandhaṭṭhantiādi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Kusale dhammetiādi kusalattikavasena bhedo. Kāmāvacare dhammetiādi catubhūmakavasena. Ubhayatthāpi ‘‘sabbe jānātī’’ti bahuvacanapāṭho sundaro. Ekavacanasote patitattā pana potthakesu ekavacanena likhitaṃ. Dukkhassātiādi cuddasannaṃ buddhañāṇānaṃ visayabhedo. Indriyaparopariyatte ñāṇantiādīni cattāri ñāṇāni vatvā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ kasmā na vuttanti ce? Vuccamānassa sabbaññutaññāṇattā. Visayabhedato hi sabbaññutaññāṇe vuccamāne taṃ ñāṇaṃ na vattabbaṃ hoti, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana sabbaññutaññāṇassa visayo hotiyeva.
再者,为了按照《黑园经》(《增支部》4集24经)等经中所说的方式,显示一切知智的领域,而说了“凡含天……”等话。其中,“含天”就是与诸天一起。“含魔”就是与魔一起。“含梵的世间”就是与梵天一起的世间。“含沙门婆罗门”就是与沙门、婆罗门一起。“含天人的众生”就是与天和人一起的众生。因为被出生的缘故,所以叫“众生”,这是有情世间的另一种说法。在这里应当这样理解:用“含天”这个词,摄取了五类欲界天;用“含魔”这个词,摄取了第六类欲界天;用“含梵”这个词,摄取了梵身天等诸梵天;用“含沙门婆罗门”这个词,摄取了与教法为敌、对抗教法的沙门婆罗门,也摄取了止息恶行、排除恶行的沙门婆罗门;用“众生”这个词,摄取了有情世间;用“含天人”这个词,摄取了世俗共称的天和其余的人。如此,这里前三个词摄取了器世间,后两个词从众生的角度摄取了有情世间。巴利
Puna kāḷakārāmasuttantādīsu (a. ni. 4.24) vuttanayena sabbaññutaññāṇabhūmiṃ dassento yāvatā sadevakassa lokassātiādimāha. Tattha saha devehi sadevakassa. Saha mārena samārakassa. Saha brahmunā sabrahmakassa lokassa. Saha samaṇabrāhmaṇehi sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā. Saha devamanussehi sadevamanussāya pajāya. Pajātattā pajāti sattalokassa pariyāyavacanametaṃ. Tattha sadevakavacanena pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ, samārakavacanena chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ, sabrahmakavacanena brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇaṃ, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇivacanena sāsanassa paccatthikapaccāmittasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇaṃ samitapāpabāhitapāpasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇañca, pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇaṃ, sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevasesamanussaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Evamettha tīhi padehi okāsaloko, dvīhi pajāvasena sattaloko gahitoti veditabbo.
另一种理解方式是:用“含天”一语,涵盖了无色界;用“含魔”一语,涵盖了六欲天界;用“含梵”一语,涵盖了色界梵天界;用“含沙门婆罗门等”一语,则是按四众弟子来说的,或者是指与世俗共称的天众一起的人界,以及其余的有情世间。巴利
Aparo nayo – sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaraloko gahito, samārakaggahaṇena chakāmāvacaradevaloko, sabrahmakaggahaṇena rūpāvacarabrahmaloko, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇādiggahaṇena catuparisavasena, sammutidevehi vā saha manussaloko, avasesasattaloko vā.
另外,这里通过“连同诸天”这一说法,从最高范围的限定,成立了对一切世间所见等事的了知。此后,有些人可能会想:“魔罗有大神通力,是六欲天的自在主宰,能随意掌控,难道他也了知魔罗的所见等事吗?”为了消除他们的疑惑,就说“连同魔罗”。又有些人可能会想:“梵天有大神通力,用一根手指就能让光明遍照一千个轮围世界,用两根手指……乃至用十根手指就能让光明遍照一万个轮围世界,而且还领受着无上的禅那等至之乐,难道他也了知梵天的所见等事吗?”为了消除他们的疑惑,就说“连同梵天”。接着,有些人可能会想:“许许多多沙门婆罗门都是教法的敌人,难道他也了知他们的所见等事吗?”为了消除他们的疑惑,就说“连同沙门婆罗门众”。这样先阐明了了对最高层次者的所见等事的了知,然后以世俗共称的天众和其余人类为所依,从最高范围的限定,阐明对其余有情世间所见等事的了知。这就是此处的文义连接次第。不过古代论师们说:“‘连同诸天’,是指与诸天一起的其余世间;‘连同魔罗’,是指与魔罗一起的其余世间;‘连同梵天’,是指与诸梵天一起的其余世间。”这样,以三种方式把一切往趣三有的有情都包含在内,然后又以两种方式,用“连同沙门婆罗门众、连同诸天与人类”来收尽。如此,通过这五个词,以各自的方式,就把三界全都收尽了。巴利
Apicettha sadevakavacanena ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato sabbassapi lokassa diṭṭhādijānanabhāvaṃ sādheti. Tato yesaṃ siyā ‘‘māro mahānubhāvo chakāmāvacarissaro vasavattī, kiṃ tassāpi diṭṭhādiṃ jānātī’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto ‘‘samārakassā’’ti āha. Yesaṃ pana siyā ‘‘brahmā mahānubhāvo ekaṅguliyā ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷasahasse ālokaṃ pharati, dvīhi…pe… dasahi aṅgulīhi dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu ālokaṃ pharati, anuttarañca jhānasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, kiṃ tassāpi diṭṭhādiṃ jānātī’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto ‘‘sabrahmakassā’’ti āha. Tato yesaṃ siyā ‘‘puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇā sāsanassa paccatthikā, kiṃ tesampi diṭṭhādiṃ jānātī’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto ‘‘sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāyā’’ti āha. Evaṃ ukkaṭṭhānaṃ diṭṭhādijānanabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā atha sammutideve avasesamanusse ca upādāya ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sesasattalokassa diṭṭhādijānanabhāvaṃ pakāseti. Ayamettha anusandhikkamo. Porāṇā panāhu – sadevakassāti devatāhi saddhiṃ avasesalokassa . Samārakassāti mārena saddhiṃ avasesalokassa. Sabrahmakassāti brahmehi saddhiṃ avasesalokassa. Evaṃ sabbepi tibhavūpage satte tīhākārehi tīsu padesu pakkhipitvā puna dvīhākārehi pariyādātuṃ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāyāti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pañcahi padehi tena tena ākārena tedhātukameva pariyādinnaṃ hotīti.
“所见”指色处。“所闻”指声处。“所觉”指因为要接触才能执取,所以是香处、味处、触处。“所识”指以苦、乐等为所缘的法所缘。“所得”指不论经过寻求还是没有经过寻求而得到的。“所寻”指对已得到或还没得到的进行寻求。“以意随行”指以心去追随。
“他全都了知”这句话要表达的是:在无量的世间界中,对这个有天神存在的世间,当“蓝色、黄色”等色所缘出现在眼门时,某个众生在那一刹那看到某种色所缘之后,生起了欢喜、不欢喜或平静的心态——这一切,如来的全知智都了知。同样地,在无量的世间界中,对这个有天神存在的世间,当“大鼓声、腰鼓声”等声所缘出现在耳门时;当“根香、皮香”等香所缘出现在鼻门时;当“根味、茎味”等味所缘出现在舌门时;当地界、火界、风界所摄的“硬、软”等触所缘出现在身门时,某个众生在那一刹那接触到某种触所缘之后,生起了欢喜、不欢喜或平静的心态——这一切,如来的全知智都了知。同样地,在无量的世间界中,对这个有天神存在的世间,当苦、乐等种种法所缘出现在意门时,某个众生在那一刹那识知某种法所缘之后,生起了欢喜、不欢喜或平静的心态——这一切,如来的全知智都了知。
不过对一般大众来说,有寻求了却得不到的,有寻求了而得到的,有不寻求也得不到的,也有不寻求就得到的。但对如来的全知智来说,根本不存在所谓得不到的东西。巴利
Diṭṭhanti rūpāyatanaṃ. Sutanti saddāyatanaṃ. Mutanti patvā gahetabbato gandhāyatanaṃ, rasāyatanaṃ, phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ. Viññātanti sukhadukkhādidhammārammaṇaṃ. Pattanti pariyesitvā vā apariyesitvā vā pattaṃ. Pariyesitanti pattaṃ vā appattaṃ vā pariyesitaṃ. Anuvicaritaṃ manasāti cittena anusañcaritaṃ. Sabbaṃ jānātīti iminā etaṃ dasseti – yaṃ aparimānāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa ‘‘nīlaṃ pīta’’ntiādi (dha. sa. 619) rūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma rūpārammaṇaṃ disvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jātoti taṃ sabbaṃ tathāgatassa sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ jānāti. Tathā yaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa ‘‘bherisaddo, mudiṅgasaddo’’tiādi saddārammaṇaṃ sotadvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘mūlagandho tacagandho’’tiādi (dha. sa. 624-627) gandhārammaṇaṃ ghānadvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘mūlaraso, khandharaso’’tiādi (dha. sa. 628-631) rasārammaṇaṃ jivhādvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘kakkhaḷaṃ, muduka’’ntiādi (dha. sa. 647-650) pathavīdhātutejodhātuvāyodhātubhedaṃ phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ kāyadvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ phusitvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jātoti taṃ sabbaṃ tathāgatassa sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ jānāti. Tathā yaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa sukhadukkhādibhedaṃ dhammārammaṇaṃ manodvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma dhammārammaṇaṃ vijānitvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jātoti taṃ sabbaṃ tathāgatassa sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ jānāti. Imassa pana mahājanassa pariyesitvā appattampi atthi, pariyesitvā pattampi atthi. Apariyesitvā appattampi atthi, apariyesitvā pattampi atthi. Sabbaṃ tathāgatassa sabbaññutaññāṇena appattaṃ nāma natthīti.
121 121. 接着,又以另一种方式,为了成立一切知智的体性,说了“于彼无有……”这首偈颂。其中,“于彼无有未见”——对于那位如来,在此三界世间中,或者在此现在时中,以慧眼来看,所谓“未见”的任何东西,哪怕极微小的,也不存在,也找不到。“有”是现在时的动词,以此显示一切现在时的法都是已知的。不过,这里插入“d”这个字母,只是为了让偈颂读起来顺畅。又说“复次,无所未识知”:这里的“复次”是引述用的不变词。“无所未识知”指过去时中所谓“未识知”的任何法类,后面省略了“不存在”一词。如果把“有”当作不变词来理解,那么即使不补省略的词也说得通。以此显示一切过去时的法都是已知的。“不应被了知”指未来时中所谓“不应被了知”的法类将不存在,或者说根本没有。以此显示一切未来时的法都是已知的。或者,这里的“a-”只是表示否定而已。“一切应知之物,彼悉已证知”:这里,凡是属于三世或超越时间的、应被了知的任何法类存在,如来都以超胜的一切知智全部证知了、了知了、通达了。这里,“有”这个词因为涵盖了三世以及超越时间的法,所以应当看作不变词。“如来以彼为遍眼”:因为从时间上和空间上都毫无遗漏,所以他的智眼遍及一切、从一切方面生起,因此称为“遍眼”。以所说的这个理由,如来就是“遍眼”,就是“一切知者”。通过这首偈颂以人为中心的教导,一切知智得到了成立。巴利
121. Puna aparena pariyāyena sabbaññutaññāṇabhāvasādhanatthaṃ na tassāti gāthamāha. Tattha na tassa addiṭṭhamidhatthi kiñcīti tassa tathāgatassa idha imasmiṃ tedhātuke loke, imasmiṃ paccuppannakāle vā paññācakkhunā addiṭṭhaṃ nāma kiñci appamattakampi na atthi na saṃvijjati. Atthīti idaṃ vattamānakālikaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ. Iminā paccuppannakālikassa sabbadhammassa ñātabhāvaṃ dasseti. Gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ panettha da-kāro saṃyutto. Atho aviññātanti ettha athoiti vacanopādāne nipāto. Aviññātanti atītakālikaṃ aviññātaṃ nāma kiñci dhammajātaṃ. Nāhosīti pāṭhaseso. Abyayabhūtassa atthisaddassa gahaṇe pāṭhasesaṃ vināpi yujjatiyeva. Iminā atītakālikassa sabbadhammassa ñātabhāvaṃ dasseti . Ajānitabbanti anāgatakālikaṃ ajānitabbaṃ nāma dhammajātaṃ na bhavissati, natthi vā. Iminā anāgatakālikassa sabbadhammassa ñātabhāvaṃ dasseti. Jānanakiriyāvisesanamattameva vā ettha a-kāro. Sabbaṃ abhiññāsi yadatthi neyyanti ettha yaṃ tekālikaṃ vā kālavimuttaṃ vā neyyaṃ jānitabbaṃ kiñci dhammajātaṃ atthi, taṃ sabbaṃ tathāgato abhiññāsi adhikena sabbaññutaññāṇena jāni paṭivijjhi. Ettha atthisaddena tekālikassa kālavimuttassa ca gahaṇā atthi-saddo abyayabhūtoyeva daṭṭhabbo. Tathāgato tena samantacakkhūti kālavasena okāsavasena ca nippadesattā samantā sabbato pavattaṃ ñāṇacakkhu assāti samantacakkhu. Tena yathāvuttena kāraṇena tathāgato samantacakkhu, sabbaññūti vuttaṃ hoti. Imissā gāthāya puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ sādhitaṃ.
接着,为了依据诸佛智的所缘范围来显示一切知智,便说了“遍眼是以什么含义称为遍眼”等话。其中,在偈颂里所说的“遍眼”这个词,它的意思是:所谓遍眼,是以什么含义称为遍眼?而它的含义,正如“所有苦的苦义……”等经文所说的那样。因为一切知智就是遍眼。正如所说:“遍眼称为一切知智”(《小部·陀多迦青年问义释》32)。讲了一切知智的含义,也就等于讲了遍眼的含义。“唯是佛陀的诸智”就是佛智。因为苦智等智,也只有在佛陀世尊那里才会以完整的方式生起,在其他圣者那里则只是以一部分的方式生起。而说“与声闻共通”,是针对有一部分也存在的道理而说的。“一切以智而知”:一切由智所了知。“没有未被了知的苦义”,这是用排除的方式来说明前面已经说过的含义。“一切已见”:不只是以智了知而已,而是像用眼睛看见那样见到了。“一切已明”:不只是看见而已,而是变得清楚明白。“一切已证”:不只是明白而已,而是以在那里获得智的方式亲自体验到。“一切已触”:不只是亲自体验到而已,而是再三随自己的意愿以接触的方式触及。或者也可以说:以自性相而知,以共相而见,以味而明,以现起而证,以近依而触。又或者:以智生起而知,以眼生起而见,以慧生起而明,以明生起而证,以光明生起而触。还应依照“所有苦的苦义,一切已见,没有未见的苦义”这样的方式,以及“连同天界在内的世间……以意随寻的一切,都已了知,没有未了知的”这样的方式来了知广说。先前说过的偈颂,作为总结又再说了一遍。因为做了这个总结,也就等于做了智的总结。巴利
Puna buddhañāṇānaṃ visayavasena sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ dassetukāmo samantacakkhūti kenaṭṭhena samantacakkhūtiādimāha. Tattha gāthāya samantacakkhūti vuttapade yaṃ taṃ samantacakkhu, taṃ kenaṭṭhena samantacakkhūti attho. Attho panassa yāvatādukkhassa dukkhaṭṭhotiādīhi vuttoyeva hoti. Sabbaññutaññāṇañhi samantacakkhu. Yathāha – ‘‘samantacakkhu vuccati sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. dhotakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 32). Tasmiṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṭṭhe vutte samantacakkhuṭṭho vuttoyeva hotīti. Buddhasseva ñāṇānīti buddhañāṇāni. Dukkhe ñāṇādīnipi hi sabbākārena buddhasseva bhagavato pavattanti, itaresaṃ pana ekadesamatteneva pavattanti. Sāvakasādhāraṇānīti pana ekadesenāpi atthitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sabbo ñātoti sabbo ñāṇena ñāto. Aññāto dukkhaṭṭho natthīti vuttameva atthaṃ paṭisedhena vibhāveti. Sabbo diṭṭhoti na kevalaṃ ñātamattoyeva, atha kho cakkhunā diṭṭho viya kato. Sabbo viditoti na kevalaṃ diṭṭhamattoyeva, atha kho pākaṭo. Sabbo sacchikatoti na kevalaṃ viditoyeva, atha kho tattha ñāṇapaṭilābhavasena paccakkhīkato. Sabbo phassitoti na kevalaṃ sacchikatoyeva, atha kho punappunaṃ yathāruci samudācāravasena phuṭṭhoti. Atha vā ñāto sabhāvalakkhaṇavasena. Diṭṭho sāmaññalakkhaṇavasena. Vidito rasavasena. Sacchikato paccupaṭṭhānavasena . Phassito padaṭṭhānavasena. Atha vā ñāto ñāṇuppādavasena. Diṭṭho cakkhuppādavasena. Vidito paññuppādavasena. Sacchikato vijjuppādavasena. Phassito ālokuppādavasena. ‘‘Yāvatā dukkhassa dukkhaṭṭho, sabbo diṭṭho, adiṭṭho dukkhaṭṭho natthī’’tiādinā nayena ca ‘‘yāvatā sadevakassa lokassa…pe… anuvicaritaṃ manasā, sabbaṃ ñātaṃ, aññātaṃ natthī’’tiādinā nayena ca vitthāro veditabbo. Paṭhamaṃ vuttagāthā nigamanavasena puna vuttā. Taṃnigamaneyeva hi kate ñāṇanigamanampi katameva hotīti.